Skip to main content

Full text of "Bulletin of the United States Fish Commission"

See other formats 


% =! 


■ I?  VNa®*’ 

Q X^OSV'^1 

H11WS  S3  I avaan“LI  BRAR  I ES_SMITHS0NIAN~INSTITUTI0N”N0linillSN|JNVIN0SHllWSZS3iavai 

O 


. _ £ Vaa^  I ^ S — E m 

ONIAN  INSTITUTION  NOIlfUllSNI  NVIN0SH1IKIS  S3  I H V a 8 11  LIBRARIES  SMITHSONIAN  “INSTITUTE 

rS*  . ' CO  “ — ____ . ^ CO  2 „ ,•  , CO  *™’ 


Z 

o 

CO 
2 

ccy  r-  - ^ X t " =<£  ,— 

2^  S ^ 5 S ^ 5 

CO  *•-  Z , , 00  X CO  V 2 ^ 

HiiiAis  saiavaan  libraries  Smithsonian  institution  NouniiiSNi  nvinoshiiws  saiavasi 

co  2 ^ 2 CO  :z  co 

SX  w ^ _ .«  w ^ /jSDx  » .^kL  ^ 


:ia  — 

| ® 

ONIAN'jNSTITUTION  NOIlfUllSNI  “WlNOSHlIWS^S  3 I ava  a n^LI  B RAR  I ES^SMITHSOmAN^INSTITUTl 
z r-  * z m 2 


m x^osv^x  ^ x^vasv^  m :-W  £!  xjvasv^  m 

<n  £ co  ' • £ tn  — £ co 

hums  SBiavaan  libraries  Smithsonian  institution  NoiiniiiSNi  nvinoshiiims  S3iavaar 

m 5 ■»  <o  „ 2 c co  2 co 

< ^ S < U S 2 


T.  I >#PgP  | 1 (If  |f  § JH  s 

vv/  >’  5 ’'^jr  > s >-•  s >• 

X CO  ■ x CO  **  Z CO  z 

)N!AN  INSTITUTION  NOIlfUUSNI_  NVIN0SH1IINS  S3iavaai1  LIBRARIES  SMITHSONIAN  INSTITUTE 

y>  CO  Z \ *0  -y  CO  " 

w co  V * w /f^L SX  w w 


0 r o ■' -W  “ X^VA^X  - UJ  ••  5 

mws  S3 lavaan^LiBRARi Es^sMiTHsoNiAN^iNSTiTUTioN^NouniiisNi^NviNOSHiiws ZS3 i ava ai 

1 5 . . .-ro  1 E ^ 


W s | m 

_ CO  £ — ^ - 

)NIAN  INSTITUTION  NOIlfUllSNI  NVINOSHlItMS  S3  I BVd  a IT  LI  B R AR  1 ES  SMITHSON!AN~INSTITUTIO 

(S)  "Z.  C/5  2!  . C/5 


g ,<  x^so^x  5 . < 

§ t t " UW*7  r- 

I 5 | | \ I i 

uiw.sws3 1 avaa  n_  L|  B RAr  i es  smithsonian^institution"  NouniusNr^NviNosHiwscns3 1 ava  ai 

CO  z ^ ^ CO  -»  CO  — . CO 

LU  /^vaSOnTTN.  UJ  ><<vaSOa7^s.  SjJ  ^yTTcvTT^ 


)NIAN  INSTITUTION  NOIlfUllSNI  NVIN0SH1IINS  S3iavaaiT  LIBRARIES  SMITHSONIAN  INSTITUTIO 

» 2.  r~  2!  i—  2 r- 


lii 

oc  ~ 

< If  l w,. 

o ■ •'  ^ o x^gfe^x  "‘  o 

{R  I ES^SMITHSONIAN^lNSTITUTION^NOlinillSNl^NVINOSHlllAIS^SH  IHVaail  t-IBRARI  ES  ^SMITHSONU 
Z [I!  ^ _vsc  / 5 —*  Xiviso  J\  O 


o 

H ./  *;/’  >Xk/ 
y t 33 

^X  w m «g  ^ ^ m __ 

1IISNI_NVIN0SH1IWS^S3  I H VH  9 ! 1 ~L  1 B RAR  1 Es“sM!THSON!AN”iNSTITUT!ONw  NOSinillSNI^NVINOSHill 


< 
z 

» t -waww-  s -ram  1 | | ~"Y  | = WBn# 

\ r | ESt/,SMITHSONiANJNST!TUTION£/5NO!inillSNI_NV!NOSHi!WS^S3  i U VH  8 ll_  Ll  B RAR  1 ES^SMITHSONL 
2 . w “ X^5n  W 1 /^m^\  “ 

| 


I <«ea 

-•  03  5 ■ 5 m 

lllSNl“lNVIN0SHHWS:2S3iavaan'JLIBRARIESZSMITHS0NIAN“IlNSTiTUTI0N  NOIlfUllSNI  NVIN0SH1II 
Z r*  2 ~ ^ * 


^irf^0A  03 

33 
> 

33 

\R  IESt/ISMITHSONIAN"’!NSTlTUT!ON1/>NO!inillSNl“NVINOSHl!lAlS  SBlMVaan  LI 

c/3  ^ ^ z * <5  ^.5  ^ iP  < 

s s - Xfs^ox  — Mow,.  ^ 


■^iKo 

m 

B RAR  I ES  SMITHSON: 
c/> 

S / 

— ) 


L—  \ j- 

lUSNlf  NVINOSHlIWS^Sg  ! HVHS  lift!  B RAR  1 ES^SMITHSONIAN  ^INSTITUTION  ^NOIinillSNI_NVINOSHl 
w %k  ^ X5i§££\  w XH5q>  “ ^ ^ W 


_ O “ 

6*R  I ES^SMITHSOMSAN  INSTITUTION  NOIlfUllSNI  NVIN0SH1IWS  S3  1 HVa  a H^LI  B RAR  I ES  ^SMITHSON 

I , 2 ro  jSfc  ° 


tr  ./,«/  XW 

PI  ? 

^ f—  30  P 'TV, 

c^  m ^£2$^  «g  m ^ “ X^g^x  m 

So  ^ —*sS^  2^  CO  ®==s 

! HIS NrNVINOSHlI IASS  "S3  I H VH  a II ”l  I B RAR  1 ES  SMITHS0NIAN”lNST!TUT10N,  NOIlfUllSNI  NVIN0SH1 

rn  •?>  W sy  ....  W ^ 


in 

S 


I 

vm  t 

5 X25L2SX  | '*#?  S ^ w 

AR  I ES^SMITHSONIAN^ INSTITUTION  NOlinillSNI^NVINOSHlIWS^Sa  lavas 

3 (|F^|  5 ^ 

Ak3§)  £K  'Wj&,  5 02 


x . '/Tl 
<^3  X 
z 
> 

!2  Ll  BRAR  I ES^SMITHSON 

Oh 


O ~ X4£?lllS^X  q >\  " X^OlllS^X  O 

UlSNI^NVINOSHimS^Sa  I ava  a n^LI  B RAR  I ES^SMITHSONIAN^INSTITUTION^NOlinillSNI^NVINOSHI 

^ " 4k  V i /#^\  » I 2 

s g m 39 > iral  = ' 


•**•**»  Of  Fishes, 

••  Wrtlensl  Museum 


BULLETIN 


OF  THE 

UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 

VOL.  XXI, 

FOR 

1901. 


GEORGE  M.  BOWERS,  Commissioner. 


WASHINGTON: 

GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE, 


C O N T E NTS. 


Page. 

Biological  Notes  No.  2 27-33 

Calkins,  Gary  N.  Marine  Protozoa  from  Woods  Hole 413-468 

Coker,  Robert  E.  Notes  on  a species  of  Barnacle  (Dichelaspis)  parasitic  on  the  Gills  of 

Edible  Crabs 399-412 

Goldsborough,  Edmund  Lee,  and  Evermann,  Barton  Warren.  A Report  on  Fishes 
collected  in  Mexico  and  Central  America,  with  Notes  and  Descriptions  of  Five  New 

Species , 137-159 

Eigenmann,  Carl  H.  Description  of  a New  Oceanic  Fish  found  off  Southern  New  England.  35-36 

The  Egg  and  Development  of  the  Conger  Eel 37—44 

Investigation  into  the  History  of  the  Young  Squeteague 45-51 

and  Kennedy,  C.  H.  The  Leptocephalus  of  the  American  Eel  and  other  Amer- 
ican Leptocephali 81-92 

Evermann,  Barton  Warren.  List  of  Species  of  Fishes  known  to  occur  in  the  Great  Lakes 

or  their  Connecting  Waters 95-96 

and  Goldsborough,  E.  L.  A Report  on  Fishes  collected  in  Mexico  and  Cen- 
tral America,  with  Notes  arid  Descriptions  of  Five  New  Species 137-159 

Green,  Erik  H. , and  Tower,  Ralph  W.  The  Organic  Constituents  of  the  Scales  of  Fish  . . . 97-102 

Herrick,  Francis  H.  The  Reproductive  Period  in  the  Lobster 161-166 

Kennedy,  C.  H.,  and  Eigenmann,  Carl  H.  The  Leptocephalus  of  the  American  Eel  and 

other  American  Leptocephali 81-92 

Moser,  Jefferson  F.  Alaska  Salmon  Investigations  in  1900  and  1901 173-398 

Parker,  G.  H.  The  Reactions  of  Copepods  to  Various  Stimuli,  and  the  Bearing  of  this  on 

Daily  Depth  Migrations : 103-123 

Pieters,  A.  J.  The  Plants  of  Western  Lake  Erie,  with  Observations  on  their  Distribution  . 57-79 

Smith,  Hugh  M.  Description  of  a New  Species  of  Blenny  from  Japan 93-94 

Notes  on  Five  Food-fishes  of  Lake  Buhi,  Luzon,  Philippine  Islands 167-171 

The  French  Sardine  Industry 1-26 

Thompson,  Millett  T.  A New  Isopod  Parasitic  on  the  Hermit  Crab 53-56 

Tower,  Ralph  W.  The  Gas  in  the  Swim-bladder  of  Fishes 125-130 

Biliary  Calculi  in  the  Squeteague 131-135 

and  Green,  Erik  H.  The  Organic  Constituents  of  the  Scales  of  Fish 97-102 


in 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Facing 

page. 

Plate  1.  Sardine  Boats  sailing  to  the  Fishing-grounds.  A Sardine  Fisherman’s  House 1 

2.  Fleet  of  Sardine  Boats  Fishing  off  Concarneau.  Sardine  Boat  Fishing 4 

3.  Sardine  Boats  at  the  Wharf  discharging  their  Catch G 

4.  A Part  of  the  Sardine  Fleet  at  the  Dock  in  Concarneau 10 

5.  Sardine  Boats  on  the  Shore,  Concarneau.  A Glimpse  of  the  Water  Front,  Concarneau 1G 

G.  Yard  of  a Cannery;  Women  Cutters  awaiting  the  arrival  of  Sardines.  Frying  Sardines  in  Oil 20 

7.  The  Drying  Yard  of  a Cannery.  Women  with  Sardines  on  Grills 22 

8.  Yard  of  a Large  Cannery,  showing  Sardines  drying  on  Grills 2G 

9.  A New  Isopod  Parasitic  on  the  Hermit  Crab.  (Figs.  1-8) 5G 

10.  A New  Isopod  Parasitic  on  the  Hermit  Crab.  (Figs.  1-10) 5G 

11.  (1)  View  in  East  Harbor  Swamp.  (2)  Sand  Beach  Vegetation.  (3)  Lichen-grown  Rocks  near  Gibraltar 

Island.  (4)  Rocky  Shore  of  South  Bass  Island.  (5)  Shore  of  Squaw  Harbor,  showing  Nuphar  in  the 
Foreground.  (6)  Sandy  Beach  at  Cedar  Point,  Ohio 57 

12.  (1)  Waves  washing  the  Shore.  (2)  Nelumbium  luteum,  a few  acres  growing  at  East  Harbor,  Ohio GG 

13.  (1)  Bidens  beckii,  cross  section  of  a portion  of  a stem.  (2)  Potamogeton  lonchites,  cross  section  of  a 

portion  of  the  stem.  (3)  Potamogeton  zosteraefolius,  cross  section  of  central  cylinder.  (4)  Potamo- 
geton zosteraefolius,  cross  section  of  a stem.  (5)  Ceratophyllum  demersum,  cross  section  of  the  central 
cylinder.  (6)  Ceratophyllum  demersum,  cross  section  of  a stem 72 

14.  (1)  Sparganium  eurycarpum.  (2)  Scirpus  lacustris.  (3)  Potamogeton  heterophyllus.  (4)  Juncustorreyi.  80 

15.  (1)  Sagittaria  rigida.  (2)  Winter  Buds,  etc 80 

16.  (1)  Scirpus  pungens.  (2)  Chara  fragilis  forma  brevibracteata 80 

17.  (1)  Chara  contraria  forma  subinermis.  (2)  Chara  contraria.  (3)  Chara  liydropitys.  (4)  Typha  latifolia. 

(5)  Nuphar  advena 80 

18.  (1)  Nitella  subglomerata.  (2)  Naias  fiexilis.  (3)  Nitella  subglomerata 80 

19.  (1)  Chara  gymnopus  michauxii.  (2)  Nitella  polyglochin 80 

20.  Chara  coronata 80 

21.  Biliary  Calculi  from  Squeteague 131 

22.  Cakes  of  dried  “Sinarapan”  (Mistichthys  luzonensis) 167 

Plate  I.  Humpback  Salmon  ascending  Low  Falls 175 

II.  Native  Village  and  Ukala  Racks,  Naknek  River 17G 

III.  Native  Barabara  and  Storehouse  near  Naknek  River.  Bidarka  and  Kayak  on  Beach,  Ugashik  River. 

Ukala  Racks,  Naknek  River 178 

IV.  Salmon  Trap,  Nushagak  River f 182 

V.  Salmon  Trap  on  Nushagak  Bay 182 

VI.  Salmon  Trap  on  Nushagak  Bay 182 

VII.  Salmon  Trap  near  Graveyard  Point,  Kvichak  Bay 182 

VIII.  Salmon  Trap,  Ugashik  River 182 

IX.  Native  Method  of  setting  Gill  Nets,  Nushagak  Bay 182 

X.  Chart  of  Nushagak  Bay 196 

XL  Running  Sketch  of  Wood  River  and  Lake 200 

XII.  Cannery  of  Arctic  Packing  Company,  Nushagak  Bay 202 

XIII.  Cannery  of  Bristol  Bay  Canning  Company,  Nushagak  Bay 202 

XIV.  Cannery  of  Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Company,  Nushagak  Bay 202 

XV.  Salting  Station  of  C.  E.  Whitney  & Co.,  Nushagak  Bay.  Arctic  Packing  Company,  Naknek  River 202 

XVI.  Salting  Station  of  C.  E.  Whitney  & Co.  Loading  barkentine  Willie  R.  Hume,  Nushagak  Bay 206 

XVII.  Canning  Plant  of  Point  Roberts  Packing  Company,  Kvichak  Bay 208 

jCVIII.  Canning  Plant  of  Arctic  Packing  Company,  Naknek  River.  Canning  Plant  of  Point  Roberts  Packing 

Company,  Kvichak  Bay 214 

XIX.  Chignik  Lagoon 218 

XX.  Head  of  North  Olga  Stream,  Alitak,  Kadiak  Island.  Zapor  in  Stream  entering  Litnik  Bay,  Afognak 

Island 230 

XXL  Chart  of  Afognak  Bay,  Alaska 240 

XXII.  Cascades  in  Litnik  Stream 244 

XXIII.  Chilkoot  Stream,  showing  Native  Fishing  Platforms  in  Current 252 

XXIV.  Chilkoot  Stream  showing  Native  Fish  Runs  and  Traps  in  Current 258 


V 


VT 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Facing 

page. 


Plate  XXV.  Native  Village  near  Cannery  of  Icy  Strait  Packing  Company 262 

XXVI.  Salmon  Bay  Stream,  Prince  of  Wales  Island.  Tebenkof  Stream 268 

XXVII.  Kutlakoo  Stream,  Kuiu  Island 271 

XXVIII.  Behm  Canal,  Naha  Stream,  and  Lake  System 292 

XXIX.  Lake  and  Stream  at  the  Head  of  McHenry  Inlet 304 

XXX.  Mouth  of  Karluk  River.  Callbreath’s  Hatchery,  Etolin  Island 330 

XXXI.  Sketch  Plan  of  Salmon  Hatching  Plant,  Shasta  Creek,  Kadiak  Island 332 

XXXII.  Karluk  Hatchery,  showing  Corrals.  Ripening  Pond 330 

XXXIII.  Transferring  Stock-fish  to  Corrals  at  Karluk  Hatchery.  M ethod  of  drawing  off  Fry  from  Nursery  Ponds. . . 840 

XXXIV.  Sketch  Plan  of  Red  Salmon  Hatchery  at  Shasta  Creek,  Kadiak  Island 348 

XXXV.  Cheniga  Stream,  Prince  William  Sound 352 

XXXVI.  Sketch  of  Tamgas  Lake  and  Stream  System 358 

XXXVII.  Sketch  of  George  Inlet,  Lakes,  and  Stream,  Revillagigedo  Island 360 

XXXVIII.  Kah-Shakes  Lagoon,  Revillagigedo  Channel.  Checats  Stream,  Behm  Canal 302 

XXXIX.  Cannery  of  Alaska  Packers’  Association,  Point  Highfield.  Kunk  Lake,  Southeast  Alaska 364 

XL.  Racks  used  to  Barricade  Kushneahin  Stream.  Cannery  of  Alaska  Packers’  Association  at  Loring 366 

XLI.  Sketch  of  Kushneahin  Lake  and  Stream 368 

XLII.  Sketch  of  Sitkoh  Bay,  Stream,  and  Lake 378 

XLIII.  Sketch  of  the  Alsek  River  Delta 382 

XLIV.  Hubbard  Glacier,  Yakutat  Bay  and  Vicinity.  Fourth  Lake,  Jackpot  System,  Prince  William  Sound 392 

Plate  A.  Alitak  Bay,  Snug  Harbor,  and  Lazy  Bay 224 


TEXT  CUTS. 


Page. 


The  Sardine  or  Pilchard  (Clupea  pilchardus) 2 

The  Sea  Herring  (Clupea  harengus) 3 

Washing  Sardines  on  the  Beach 12 

A Sardine  Fisherman  bringing  Fish  ashore  in  Baskets.  13 

Beheading  and  Eviscerating  Sardines 18 

Psenes  edwardsii 35 

Embrvological  figures 40 

Embryological  figures 41 

Embryological  figures 42 

Embryological  figures 43 

Embryological  figures 44 

Figures  of  the  Young  Squeteague 48 

Figures  of  the  Young  Squeteague 49 

Figures  of  the  Young  Squeteague 50 

Soil-sampler 58 

The  Grapple 58 

Potamogeton  lonchites  (2  figures' 69 

Potamogeton  lonchites 70 

Bidens  beckii  (2  figures) 71 

Naias  flexilis  (2  figures) 72 

Leptocephalus  grassii 84 

diptychus 85 

rex 86 

amphioxus 87 

caudomaculatus 87 

latus 88 

gillii 88 

strommani 89 

morrisii, 90 

mucronatus 91 

discus 91 

humili.s 92 

gilberti 92 

Eulophias  tanneri 93 

Conorhynchos  nelson  i 140 

Notropis  santamarire 147 

lerm* 147 

Aplodinotus  grunniens 154 

Petenia  splendida 155 

Cichlasoma  teapte 156 

Heros  urophthalmus 158 

Batrachoides  goldmani 159 


Page. 


Lobster  Eggs 162 

Lobster  Eggs 163 

Mistic-hthys  luzonensis 168 

Gobius  sternbergi 170 

Columbia  River  Salmon  Boats  and  Flat  Bottom  Salmon 

Skiff 181 

Eskimo  Women  cleaning  Salmon 186 

Fish  Trap  in  Wood  River 200 

Mouth  of  Naknek  River,  Bristol  Bay 209 

Entrance  to  Egegak  River,  Bristol  Bay 213 

Lower  Ugashik  River,  Bristol  Bay 215 

Olga  Bay  and  Narrows 222 

Cape  Alitak  223 

Floating  Trap  on  North  Shore  of  Cannery  Cove,  Olga 

Bay . 225 

Olga  Bay  and  Vicinity 227 

North  Olga  Stream  and  Lake , 228 

South  Olga  Stream  and  Lakes 230 

Horse  Marine  Lagoon 232 

Exits  of  Ayakulik  River 234 

Hog  Island 242 

Cannery  Building  near  Dot  Island 242 

Chilkoot  Lake  and  Stream 257 

Cascade  Stream  east  side  of  Wrangell  Narrows 265 

Stream  and  Leads,  Salmon  Bay,  Prince  of  Wales  Island . 266 

Lake  and  Stream  at  Head  of  Red  Bay 268 

Lake  and  Stream,  Shipley  Bay 270 

Humpback  Stream,  Shipley  Bay 271 

Kutlakoo  Lake  and  Stream,  Kuiu  Island 273 

East  and  West  Streams,  North  Bay  of  Pillars 275 

Aleck  Lake  and  Stream,  Tebenkof  Bay 278 

Salmon  Trap  on  Zimovia  Strait 281 

Thoms  Stream  and  Lake,  Wrangell  Island 282 

Meyers  Stream,  Cleveland  Peninsula 284 

Lake  and  Stream,  Kina  Bay,  Prince  of  Wales  Island..  287 
Lake  and  Stream,  Ward  Cove,  Revillagigedo  Island  ..  289 

Ruins  of  Troughs  and  Baskets,  Callbreath’s  Hatchery.  302 

Trap,  Pen,  and  Barrier,  Callbreath’s  Hatchery 303 

Perspective  Sketch  of  Richardson  Filter 337 

Plan  of  Richardson  Filter  Troughs 338 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Company’s  Hatchery,  Hetta 
Lake 354 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS 


VII 


Page. 


Sketch  of  Hetta  Hatchery,  Prince  of  Wales  Island 355 

Hetta  Lake  and  Stream 356 

Peter  Johnson  Stream  and  Lake 357 

Kah-Shakes  Lake  and  Stream 362 

Checats  Lake  and  Stream 363 

Kunk  Lake  and  Stream 366 

Salmon  Bay,  Lake,  and  Stream 367 

Sar-Kar  Lake  and  Stream 370 

Kook  Lake  and  Stream 372 

Stream,  Lake,  and  Feeder,  Pablof  Harbor..  373 

BartlettBay,  Lake,  and  Stream 375 

Dundas  Bay,  Cannery,  and  Stream 377 

Hanus  Bay,  Lake,  and  Stream 378 

Gut  Bay,  Lake,  and  Stream 380 

Rubber  Boot  and  Cheniga  Lakes 392 

Jackpot  Lake  and  Stream  System 391 

Miners  Stream  and  Lakes 395 

Billy’s  Hole  and  Outlet 396 

Dichelaspis  mulleri  (2  figures)  401 

(4  figures)  404 

(2  figures)  405 

(2  figures)  407 

(1  figure)  109 

(2  figures)  410 

(1  figure)  411 

Amoeba  guttula 417 

sp '. 417 

Trichosphaerium  sieboldi 417 

Gromia  lagenoides 418 

Actinophrys  sol 419 

Heterophrys  myriapoda 420 

Mastigamoeba  simplex 423 

Codonoeca  gracilis 423 

Monas  sp 424 

Monosiga  ovata 424 

fusiformis 424 

Condonosiga  botrytis 424 

Bodo  globosus 425 

caudatus 425 

Oxyrrhis  marina 425 

Astasia  contorta 426 

Anisonema  vitrea 426 

Exuvisella  lima 428 

marina 428 

Gymnodinium  gracile,  var.  sphserica 429 

Glenodinium  compressa 429 


Page. 


Peridiniumdigitale 430 

divergens 430 

Ceratium  tripos 431 

fusus 432 

Amphidinium  operculatum 432 

Lacrymaria  lagenula 434 

eoronata 434 

Trachelocerca  phoenicopterus 435 

Mesodinium  cinctum 436 

Loxophyllum  setigerum,  ,var.  armatum 437 

Lionotus  fasciola 439 

Nassula  microstoma 440 

Chilodon  cucullulus 441 

Hysteria  lanceolata 441 

Frontonia  leucas 442 

Colpidium  colpoda 442 

Uronema  marina 442 

Pleuronema.  chrysalis 444 

setigera 445 

Lembus  infusionum 446 

pusillus 447 

Anoplophrya  branchiarum 447 

Oondylostoma  patens 449 

Strombidium  caudatum 450 

Tintinnopsis  beroidea 451 

davidofii 451 

Peritromus  emmte 452 

Epiclintes  radiosa 453 

Amphisia  kessleri 454 

Euplotes  charon 455 

harpa 456 

Hiophrys  appendiculatus 456 

Uronvchia  setigera 457 

Aspidisca  hexeris. 458 

polystyla 459 

Lichnophora  macfarlandi 459 

Vorticella  patellina 460 

marina  460 

Zoothamnium  elegans 460 

Cothurnia  crystallina 461 

imberbis 462 

nodosa 462 

Podophrya  gracilis 464 

Ephclota  eoronata 464 

Acineta  divisa 465 

tuberosa 465 

Trichophrya  salparum 466 


i 


. 


- 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1 901 . (To  face  page  1 .)  PLATE  1. 


SARDINE  BOATS  SAILING  TO  THE  FISHING-GROUNDS. 


A SARDINE  FISHERMAN’S  HOUSE, 


THE  FRENCH  SARDINE  INDUSTRY. 


By  HUGH  M.  SMITH. 


GENERAL  IMPORTANCE  OF  THE  INDUSTRY. 

Few  if  any  foreign  fishery  industries  are  of  greater  interest  or  importance  to 
Americans  than  the  sardine  industry  of  France.  The  wholesome,  palatable,  and 
convenient  canned  sardine  is  consumed  in  nearly  every  community,  and  the  annual 
importations  of  French  sardines  into  the  United  States  are  worth  about  $1,000,000, 
a sum  exceeded  by  the  value  of  but  few  imported  fishery  food  products.  This  is 
perhaps  sufficient  reason  for  the  presentation  of  this  report;  but  another  consideration 
is  the  advantages  that  may  accrue  to  the  fishermen  and  fish-canuers  in  the  United 
States  from  a knowledg-e  of  the  methods  pursued  in  the  sardine  fishery  ancl  canning 
industry  of  France. 

The  sardine  is  the  leading  fishery  product  taken  in  the  waters  of  France,  From 
official  statistics1  it  appears  that  in  1898  the  sardine  fishery  gave  employment  to 
31,871  fishermen;  the  number  of  boats  used  was  8,164,  with  a tonnage  of  32  863 
and  valued  at  5,934,633  francs;  the  apparatus  employed  was  worth  7,030,945  francs; 
the  quantity  of  sardines  taken  was  53,924,275  kilograms  (or  118,633,400  pounds;,  and 
the  selling  price  of  the  fish  was  9,204,988  francs  (or  about  $1,840,997). 

The  information  on  which  this  paper  is  based  was  obtained  by  the  writer  during 
a visit  to  Brittany  in  September  and  October,  1900,  and  represents  the  conditions 
especially  prevailing  at  and  in  the  vicinity  of  Concarneau,  where  most  of  the  time  was 
spent.  The  fishing  and  canning  methods  of  the  various  centers  are  so  much  alike 
in  all  essential  respects  that  the  descriptions  here  given  are  applicable  in  a general 
way  to  the  entire  coast. 

THE  SARDINE. 

There  has  been  and  still  is  considerable  uncertainty  among  the  fishing  interests 
in  America  and  Europe  regarding  the  specific  relations  of  the  sardine  of  the  Bay  of 
Biscay  and  the  Mediterranean  Sea.  Some  persons  have  believed  that  the  sardine 
canned  in  France  is  a distinct  species,  while  others  have  held  that  the  French  sardine, 
like  the  sardine  of  New  England,  is  simply  the  young-  of  some  herring-like  fish.  The 
term  sardine  is  a general  one,  applied  to  various  clupeoid  fishes,  mostly  of  small  size, 
in  different  parts  of  the  world,  and  can  not  be  restricted  to  any  particular  fish.  Thus, 
there  are  the  Spanish  sardine  of  the  West  Indies  and  Florida;  the  California  sardine, 
found  along  the  entire  west  coast  of  the  United  States;  the  Chile  sardine;  the  oil 
sardine  of  India;  and  the  sardines  of  Japan  and  New  Zealand.  But  the  sardine  par 
excellence  is  the  French  sardine,  called  also  celeren,  celan,  yoyan,  galice,  and  cradeau 


1 Statistiques  des  Pecbes  Mari  times,  Annee  1898.  Paris.  Impriroerie  Nationale,  1900. 

F.  C.  B.  1901—1 


1 


2 


BULLETIN  OE  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


on  various  parts  of  the  French  coast.  The  name  sardine  has  reference  to  the  island 
of  Sardinia,  in  the  Mediterranean,  about  whose  shores  the  fish  is  abundant. 

As  early  as  1553,  Pierre  Belon,  a French  naturalist,  asserted  that  the  sardine  is 
the  young  of  the  pilchard;  and  at  present  this  is  the  view  of  nearly  all  authorities. 
The  pilchard,  as  is  well  known,  is  one  of  the  most  important  fishes  of  the  southern  coast 
of  England,  being  especially  abundant  in  Cornwall.  Young  pilchards  or  “sardines” 
are  found  on  the  Cornish  coast,  but  are  apparently  not  so  numerous  as  in  France  and 
are  in  little  demand,  as  canning  is  very  limited  in  extent;  on  the  other  hand  large 
sardines  or  pilchards  are  caught  on  the  French  coast,  but  are  much  less  abundant  and 
less  important  than  the  small  fish. 

In  allusion  to  the  small  sardine  being  caught  almost  wholly  by  means  of  bait 
consisting  of  fish  roe  {rogue),  the  French  call  it  sardine  de  'rogue,  in  contradistinction 
to  the  large  fish  which  is  taken  without  bait  by  means  of  drift  nets,  and  hence  called 
sardine  de  derive.  Modern  French  writers  on  the  sardine  fishery  seem  averse  to 
acknowledging  the  specific  identity  of  the  sardine  and  the  pilchard;  some  even  fail 
to  explain  or  suggest  the  relation  between  the  large  and  small  fishes  of  the  west  coast 


of  France,  but  Messrs.  Fabre-Domergue  and  Bietrix,  of  the  French  department  of 
fisheries,  in  a paper1  on  the  reproduction  of  the  oceanic  sardine,  state  that  they  con- 
sider the  sardine  de  derive  as  the  adult  individual  of  the  species,  which  toward  spring- 
lays  pelagic  eggs  in  local  waters;  the  sardine  de  rogue , on  the  contrary,  is  the  young- 
form,  whose  age,  according  to  their  reasonably  exact  computations,  does  not  exceed 
two  years. 

This  fish  has  been  referred  to  by  most  American  and  European  systematic 
writers  under  the  name  Glupea  pilchardus  Linmeus.  Cuvier,  in  1829,  described  the 
small  fish  under  the  name  C lupea  sardina , which  designation  is  still  retained  by  some 
writers.  In  1803  Lacepede  separated  the  pilchard  with  several  other  species  from  the 
genus  Glupea,  because  of  supposed  peculiarities  of  dentition,  and  referred  it  to  a new 
genus,  Glupanodon , which  has  been  revived  in  a recent  American  work2  and  made 
to  include  the  West  India  sardine,  C.  pseitdohispanieits  (Poey),  and  the  California  sar- 
dine, C.  eceruleus  (Girard).  Modern  European  writers  on  the  pilchard  (Cunningham, 
McIntosh,  and  others)  apparently  have  seen  no  necessity  for  taking  it  out  of  the 
genus  Clupea . 


1 Proceedings  of  the  International  Congress  of  Maritime  Fisheries,  Sables-d’Olonne,  1896. 

2 The  Fishes  of  North  and  Middle  America,  by  Jordan  & Evermann.  Part  1,  1896. 


THE  FRENCH  SARDINE  INDUSTRY. 


3 


The  pilchard  is  a well-marked  species,  easily  distinguished  by  prominent  radiating 
lines  on  the  operculum  and  by  large  scales,  as  well  as  by  other  features.  In  general 
shape  it  resembles  the  sea  herring  ( Clupea  harengus  Linnaeus),  but  is  less  elongated 
and  compressed.  The  greatest  depth  of  the  body  is  about  one-fourth  the  length,  and 
the  length  of  the  head  is  somewhat  greater  than  the  depth  of  the  body.  The  lower 
jaw  projects  slightly;  the  upper  jaw  extends  to  a point  opposite  the  front  third  of  the 
eye.  No  teeth  are  found  on  the  vomer,  palate,  or  tongue,  and  on  the  jaws  the  teeth 
are  either  small  or  absent.  The  dorsal  fin  contains  17  or  18  rays,  and  begins  nearer 
to  the  end  of  snout  than  to  the  base  of  tail.  The  anal  tin  has  19  to  21  rays.  The 
ventral  fins  begin  under  the  middle  of  the  dorsal  base.  There  are  about  30  scales  in 
a longitudinal  series  between  the  gill-opening  and  the  end  of  the  body.  The  back  of 
the  fish  is  a deep  olive  green,  the  sides  are  silvery,  and  the  belly  is  white.  In  the 
full-grown  fish  there  is  a small  dark  spot  in  the  scapulary  region.  The  normal 
length  attained  by  the  pilchard  is  8 or  9 inches;  the  length  of  the  largest  recorded 
specimen  was  11  inches  (taken  in  Cornwall). 


The  sardine  of  the  French  coast  is  a handsome  little  fish,  whose  beauty  is  not 
entirely  lost  in  canning.  In  the  water  the  back  is  of  a greenish  color,  but  out  of  the 
water  the  upper  parts  are  rich  dark-bluish,  contrasting  strongly  with  the  silvery  and 
white  colors  of  the  sides  and  abdomen.  The  scales  are  very  easily  detached,  but  their 
loss  does  not  detract  seriously  from  the  appearance  of  the  fish,  either  when  fresh  or 
canned,  as  the  skin  is  rather  thick  and  has  a brilliant  uniform  silvery  color.  There  are 
no  evident  spots  on  the  sides  in  life,  but  after  the  scales  are  detached  a few  dark  lateral 
spots  may  be  seen.  The  back  and  belly  are  well  rounded,  being  less  compressed  than 
in  the  young  sea  herring. 

Several  American  fishes  resemble  the  pilchard,  among  them  the  sea  herring  and 
the  California  sardine.  The  former,  which  is  extensively  canned  on  the  coast  of 
Maine,  may  be  distinguished  from  the  pilchard  by  its  more  elongate  form,  by  the 
more  posterior  origin  of  the  dorsal  fin,  by  the  smaller  and  more  numerous  scales,  by 
the  presence  of  teeth  on  the  vomer,  by  the  much  projecting  lower  jaw,  by  the  smooth 
operculum,  and  by  the  much  compressed  abdomen.  The  California  sardine  is  dis- 
tinguished from  the  pilchard  in  having  a more  elongate  form,  fewer  dorsal  rays,  a 
somewhat  longer  maxillary,  and  a series  of  dark  spots  along  the  side. 


4 


BULLETIN"  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The  flesh  is  dark-colored,  rich,  and  oily.  The  fresh  sardine,  when  broiled  or 
grilled,  has  a delicate  flavor  and  is  very  palatable.  It  is  improved  by  the  slight 
salting  that  it  usually  receives  when  intended  for  immediate  consumption.  The 
California  sardine  resembles  the  French  Ash  in  character  of  flesh  and  is  a more 
perfect  substitute  for  it  than  any  other  American  species. 

The  range  of  the  sardine  or  pilchard  extends  from  Sweden  to  the  Madeira  Islands. 
The  southern  coast  of  England,  the  Atlantic  coast  of  France,  and  the  Mediterranean 
Sea  are  the  chief  centers  of  abundance. 

On  the  coast  of  Brittany  the  sardine  de  rogue  is  found  for  about  nine  months  of 
the  year,  being  absent  from  the  inshore  waters  most  of  the  winter.  When  the  fishing 
season  opens,  the  fish  are  reported  first  about  February  at  Arcaebon  and  other 
southern  points  on  the  west  coast,  and  gradually  reach  the  districts  toward  the  north. 
During  the  winter,  however,  the  large  fish — some  a foot  in  length — are  observed  at 
various  places  on  the  coast. 

The  immature  sardines  frequent  the  coast  waters  throughout  the  summer  and 
remain  in  Brittany  until  late  fall.  Some  years,  if  the  season  is  mild,  they  are  caught 
until  the  first  or  second  week  in  December;  but  a storm  coming  any  time  in  Novem- 
ber is  likely  to  drive  the  fish  away  and  terminate  fishing  for  the  season.  In  1900 
sardine -fishing  at  Concarneau  was  ended  November  5 — the  same  date  as  in  1899 — by 
a southwest  storm,  which  swept  away  all  the  sardines  in  the  bay. 

The  spawning  time  on  the  coasts  of  England  and  France  is  .from  June  to  October. 
Spawning  takes  place  at  a considerable  distance  from  the  land,  and  ripe  or  spawning 
fish  are  seldom  caught,  as  fishing  is  done  mostly  in  the  inshore  waters.  The  small 
fish  used  for  canning  purposes  on  the  French  coast  are  never  found  with  ripe  eggs  or 
milt,  and  are  now  known  to  be  immature  fish  hatched  in  the  summer  and  fall  of  the 
previous  year.  The  eggs  are  buoyant,  and  the  average  number  extruded  is  reported 
as  60,000.  In  the  Mediterranean  the  sardine  apparently  belongs  to  a different  race, 
which  is  smaller  than  the  oceanic  form  and  reaches  maturity  when  under  T inches 
in  length. 

When  sardines  first  arrive  they  are  poor  and  unsuitable  for  canning;  but  as  the 
season  advances  they  improve  in  quality,  and  are  fatter  in  September  than  in  June 
and  in  December  than  in  September.  Their  food  consists  mainly  of  copepods  and 
other  small  Crustacea.  Small  fish  eggs  are  also  a favorite  food.  The  fondness  of 
the  sardine  for  such  eggs  plays  an  important  part  in  the  fishery. 

The  sardines  go  in  schools  and  swim  at  or  near  the  surface.  As  many  as  100,000 
fish  have  been  taken  in  one  net  from  one  school,  but  the  usual  size  of  the  schools  is 
small.  They  are  preyed  on  by  cetaceans  and  by  many  fish — on  the  French  coast  the 
mackerel,  the  haddock,  and  the  dolphin  being  especially  destructive. 

Dike  other  free-swimming  oceanic  fish,  the  sardine  varies  in  abundance  from 
year  to  year;  but  there  is  no  evidence  that  the  extensive  fishing  is  effecting  any 
permanent  reduction  of  the  supply.  During  the  years  1887  to  1890  there  was  an 
alarming  scarcity  of  sardines  on  the  French  coast,  and  the  outlook  for  the  industry 
was  serious,  but  after  four  years  the  fish  returned  in  their  former  numbers.  The 
history  of  the  sardine  fishery  shows  what  extensive  operations  may  be  supported 
annually  when  the  natural  conditions  permit  the  fish  to  spawn  unmolested,  the 
spawning-grounds  in  this  case  being  many  miles  offshore. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  4.) 


Plate  2 


FLEET  OF  SARDINE  BOATS  FISHING  OFF  CONCARNEAU. 


SARDINE  BOAT  FISHING. 


THE  FRENCH  SARDINE  INDUSTRY. 


THE  SARDINE  FISHERY. 

The  sardine  fishery  of  France  dates  back  many  years,  and  even  in  the  early  part 
of  the  eighteenth  century  it  was  an  important  industry,  but  it  has  become  much 
more  extensive  since  the  introduction  of  canning.  The  building  of  railroads  has  also 
benefited  the  fishery  by  providing  means  of  shipping  to  inland  points  that  part  of  the 
catch  which  can  not  be  disposed  of  locally.  In  all  of  the  centers  of  the  west  coast 
essentially  the  same  methods  of  fishing  are  followed,  with  slight  local  variations.  The 
methods  have  an  important  bearing  on  the  quality  of  the  canned  sardines,  and  will 
therefore  be  noticed  with  some  detail. 

The  province  of  Brittany  supports  by  far  the  most  extensive  fisheries  and  is  the 
center  of  the  canning  industry.  Here  in  1898  were  21,684  sardine  fishermen,  with 
4,611  boats,  valued  at  3,759,403  francs,  and  apparatus  worth  3,307,643  francs;  and 
here  were  caught  49,478,365  kilograms  of  sardines,  selling  at  7,572,347  francs.  The 
leading  center  in  1898  was  Douarnenez,  which  was  credited  with  4,200  fishermen,  710 
boats,  and  over  18,000,000  kilograms  of  sardines,  valued  at  2,442,000  francs.  Next- 
in  importance  was  Concarneau,  with  2,695  fishermen,  490  boats,  and  9,163,000 
kilograms  of  sardines,  worth  1,719,890  francs.  Other  important  places  in  Brittany 
are  Audierne,  Quimper,  Port  Louis,  Etel,  Quiberon,  La  Turballe,  and  Le  Croisic. 
Outside  of  Brittany  the  fishery  is  most  extensive  at  Sables-d’Ol on ne,  St.  Gilles-sur- 
Vie,  and  Arcachon. 

On  the  Mediterranean  coast  of  France  sardines  are  caught  at  numerous  places 
and  by  many  fishermen,  but  only  in  relatively  small  quantities.  The  fisheries  here 
in  1898  gave  employment  to  7,794  men,  using  2,861  boats,  valued  at  1,607,930  francs, 
and  nets  valued  at  3,386,742  francs;  the  catch  was  2,129,519  kilograms  of  sardines, 
valued  at  987,738  francs. 

BOATS. 

All  of  the  boats  engaged  in  the  sardine  fishery  are  registered,  and  have  their 
numbers  in  large  white  figures  on  both  sides  of  the  bow,  preceded  by  a letter  or 
letters  indicating  the  town  to  which  they  belong  (thus,  CC  for  Concarneau).  Each 
boat  is  taxed  about  4 francs  yearly  by  the  department  of  marine  and  2 francs  by  the 
department  of  customs.  Formerly  the  boats  were  smaller,  flatter,  slower,  and  less 
seaworthy.  The  larger  boats,  such  as  are  used  at  Sables-d’Olonne,  require  rowboats 
for  operating  the  nets. 

Boats  are  built  locally,  and  cost  1,200  francs  when  of  oak  and  1,000  francs  when  of 
Norway  pine.  They  do  not  vary  much  in  size  in  the  different  sections.  In  Concar- 
neau and  other  parts  of  Finistei’e  the  average  dimensions  are  as  follows:  Length  of 
keel,  25  feet;  length  over  all,  35  feet;  beam,  9 or  10  feet;  depth  amidships,  6 feet; 
depth  aft,  10  feet;  length  of  foremast,  33  feet;  length  of  mainmast,  36  or  37  feet. 

The  stern  is  pointed,  the  prow  is  sharp  and  straight,  and  the  sides  flare  consider- 
ably, so  that  there  is  great  carrying  capacity.  There  is  a broad  floor  about  2 feet  below 
the  rail,  and  on  this  platform  most  of  the  work  is  done  and  most  of  the  fish  carried; 
but  when  there  is  a large  catch,  some  of  the  fish  are  put  below  to  avoid  crushing. 

There  are  two  long  masts,  the  foremast  raking  aft,  while  the  mainmast  is  nearly 
vertical.  The  masts  may  be  lowered  if  desired.  The  raising  and  lowering  of  the 
foremast  are  facilitated  by  a rope  running  from  its  base  through  a pulley  at  the  head 
of  the  mainmast.  Each  mast  carries  a large,  square,  lugger  sail,  and  sometimes  a 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


6 

topsail  and  a jibsail  are  employed.  The  sails  are  either  linen  or  cotton,  the  latter 
being  used  in  summer  fishing.  Linen  sails  are  tanned  brown  with  catechu  and  cotton 
sails  are  colored  with  ocher. 

The  oars  are  large  and  heavy,  33  feet  long,  with  a very  small,  narrow  blade,  and  a 
square  butt  about  b inches  in  diameter.  Owing  to  the  great  length  of  the  oar,  the  butt 
is  large  and  heavy  in  order  to  balance  the  oar  when  in  use,  and  stones  are  sometimes 
piled  on  it  in  rowing.  There  are  four  oars  to  a boat,  each  used  by  one  man. 

NETS. 

In  parts  of  Brittany  nets  were  formerly  used  to  surround  the  schools,  and  then 
stones  were  thrown  in  to  frighten  the  fish  into  the  meshes.  In  this  way  large  catches 
were  often  made  and  the  market  was  glutted;  but  the  method  came  into  disrepute  and 
is  no  longer  followed.  Fishing  is  now  carried  on  exclusively  with  gill  nets  made 
of  very  tine  cotton  twine.  Some  of  the  nets  come  from  Germany,  and  some  are  made 
locally,  at  Nantes  and  Douarnenez.  Those  from  Germany  are  cheaper.  The  nets  are 
uniformly  45  yards  long  and  500  meshes  deep.  A change  in  depth  has  taken  place 
within  a comparatively  few  years;  formerly  they  were  only  200  to  300  meshes  deep. 
The  mesh  is  necessarily  very  small,  as  it  is  intended  to  gill  the  tinv  sardines.  Its  size 
is  determined  or  designated  by  stretching  the  meshes  and  measuring  the  distance 
apart  of  the  first  and  last  knots  of  a series  of  five — equivalent  to  two  meshes. 

The  nets  vary  in  fineness  to  suit  the  different  runs  of  sardines,  and  are  of  about 
three  standard  sizes.  The  largest  mesh,  designated  66  mm.  (as  measured  according 
to  foregoing  rule),  is  equal,  in  America,  to  0.66  inch,  bar  measure,  while  the  smallest 
size,  40  mm.,  equals  0.40  inch,  bar  measure.  The  intermediate  size  is  52  mm. 

The  complement  of  each  boat  is  10  nets,  representing  three  sizes  of  mesh,  adapted 
for  small,  medium,  and  large  fish.  When  actively  used  the  nets  last  only  three  or 
four  months,  but  with  proper  care  they  often  last  six  months,  or  even  an  entire  sea- 
son. When  rigged  for  use  they  are  worth  about  100  francs  apiece. 

The  nets  are  dyed  a bright  greenish  blue,  and  when  suspended  from  the  masts  to 
dry  add  to  the  picturesqueness  of  the  fishing  boats  and  the  wharf  scenes.  The  dyeing 
is  for  the  twofold  purpose  of  preserving  the  nets  and  rendering  them  less  conspic- 
uous when  in  the  water.  The  practice  of  dyeing  the  nets  blue  has  been  in  vogue  only 
a short  time  and  appears  to  have  begun  shortly  after  the  introduction  of  cotton  nets. 
Formerly,  when  linen  twine  was  employed,  the  nets  were  stained  brown  by  tannin. 
The  dye  substance  is  an  aniline,  in  the  form  of  a powder,  and  50  grams  are  used 
on  one  net.  This  quantity,  with  a little  alum,  is  dissolved  in  enough  hot  water  to 
thoroughly  wet  a net.  The  nets  are  soaked  in  the  solution  and  spread  out  to  dry 
before  use.  Fishermen  are  often  seen  with  their  hands  and  wrists  stained  a uniform 
blue  from  handling  wet  nets.  The  blue  dye  is  reported  to  be  better  than  tannin  for 
cotton  nets  and  to  render  nets  less  conspicuous.  The  dyeing  is  repeated  from  time 
to  time  as  the  color  becomes  soaked  out. 

The  nets  are  kept  in  position  in  the  water  by  numerous  cork  floats  and  a few 
sinkers.  The  corks  are  4 inches  in  diameter  and  half  an  inch  thick,  and  about  400 
are  used  with  each  net.  For  about  feet  below  the  cork  line  the  net  consists  of 
coarser  twine  of  large  mesh,  to  give  strength,  as,  owing  to  the  method  of  fishing,  this 
part  of  the  net  is  subjected  to  great  strain.  The  lower  edge  of  the  net  for  a depth 
of  3 or  4 inches  is  also  of  coarse  twine,  to  support  the  stone  sinkers,  two  or  three 
sinkers  about  the  size  of  a man’s  fist  being  attached  to  each  net. 


SARDINE  BOATS  AT  THE  WHARF  DISCHARGING  THEIR  CATCH. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  6.) 


PLATE  3, 


THE  FRENCH  SARDINE  INDUSTRY. 


7 


BAIT. 

In  the  fishery  for  sardines  for  canning,  bait  is  almost  as  important  as  the  boats 
and  nets.  In  no  other  net  fishery  in  the  world  is  bait  so  extensively  employed  and 
so  essential  to  the  success  of  the  industry.  The  scarcity  of  bait  is  always  a serious 
matter  in  fishing  districts,  curtailing  the  catch,  reducing  the  income  of  the  fishermen, 
and  often  producing  distress  among  the  fish  erf  oik.  It  is  therefore  remarkable  that 
for  this  indispensable  article  the  French  should  be  absolutely  dependent  on  other 
countries  and  that  the  success  of  the  fishery  for  sardines  should  be  intimately  related 
to  the  fisheries  for  other  species  in  distant  lands. 

In  the  early  days  of  the  sardine  fishery,  especially  prior  to  the  establishment  of 
canning,  small  shrimp-like  animals,  about  half  an  inch  in  length,  were  much  used  as 
bait.  These  are  one  of  the  natural  foods  of  the  sardine  and  are  considered  the  best 
bait,  but  can  not  be  procured  in  sufficient  quantities  to  meet  the  demand  and  are  now 
rarely  used.  The  gathering  of  this  kind  of  bait  was  an  occupation  of  the  women, 
who  sought  the  schools  in  the  bays  and  coves,  catching  them  in  large  canvas  bag-nets. 
They  frequently  made  their  best  catches  in  water  up  to  their  necks,  when  the  weather 
was  bad  and  the  water  along  the  shores  was  thick.  The  Crustacea  were  heavily  salted 
in  barrels  and  retained  until  required.  The  taking  of  these  little  creatures  appears 
to  have  been  prohibited  many  years  ago,  because  of  the  supposed  destruction  of  fish 
eggs  at  the  time  of  catching  the  shrimps.  Although  the  interdiction  is  now  removed, 
little  effort  is  made  to  secure  this  form  of  bait. 

The  bait  now  in  general  use  is  the  salted  eggs  of  the  cod  ( Gatins  callarias ),  though 
the  eggs  of  hake,  haddock,  pollock,  cusk,  herring,  mackerel,  and  many  other  fishes 
are  also  employed.  Cod  eggs  are  not  known  to  possess  any  properties  which  make 
them  superior  to  the  eggs  of  several  other  species,  but  owe  their  prominence  to  the 
abundance  of  cod  in  regions  on  which  the  sardine  fishermen  depend  for  their  bait 
supply. 

Well-prepared  roe  has  a not  unpleasant  fishy  odor;  but  the  odor  is  not  a matter 
of  any  special  importance,  and  the  production  of  any  peculiar  odor  is  neither  sought 
nor  realized.  When  the  roe  becomes  old  it  acquires  a rank  smell.  The  sardines  are 
attracted  by  the  sight  of  the  bait  rather  than  by  the  smell,  although  it  is  possible  that 
the  strong  odor  of  the  old  roe  used  in  the  early  fishing,  when  the  fish  are  more 
scattered,  may  serve  to  attract  the  fish.  The  color  of  salted  roe  is  a delicate  salmon. 
The  ovarian  membrane  is  normally  transparent  or  light;  when  brown  or  dark,  it  is 
an  indication  of  age  or  of  fresh  water  (usually  rain)  having  fallen  in  the  barrel. 

The  annual  consumption  of  roe  in  France  at  present  is  40,000  to  45,000  barrels, 
for  which  the  fishermen  pay  about  1300,000.  It  is  reported  that  in  favorable  seasons 
as  many  as  25,000  barrels  of  roe  have  been  expended  in  Concarneau  alone. 

For  at  least  two  centuries  cod  roe  has  been  imported  from  Norway,  which  country 
has  always  furnished  the  greater  part  of  the  sardine  bait.  Other  countries  which 
have  contributed  supplies  are  Holland,  Newfoundland,  and  the  United  States.  From 
time  to  time  the  French  Government  has  encouraged  its  own  cod  fishermen  (at  St. 
Pierre  and  Miquelon;  on  the  Grand  Banks;  in  the  waters  of  Iceland,  and  in  the  North 
Sea)  to  preserve  the  roes  of  cod  and  other  fish,  and  in  1816  offered  a bounty  of  $4  a 
barrel  for  roe  made  from  fish  caught  by  them;  but  this  and  other  inducements  have 
had  little  effect  on  the  supply  from  native  sources. 


8 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The  price  ot’  roe  has  varied  greatly  from  year  to  year.  In  the  early  part  of  the 
eighteenth  century,  bait  was  bought  for  50  cents  to  $1  a barrel,  and  throughout  that 
century  prices  were  comparatively  low.  In  the  second  decade  of  the  last  century 
prices  reached  their  highest  point;  they  were  apparently  never  less  than  $32,  and 
ranged  from  that  to  $60  per  barrel.  By  1822  the  price  had  fallen  as  low  as  $5  or  $6, 
and  since  then  has  seldom  been  as  high  as  $25  or  $26,  averaging  $12  or  $15. 

The  average  price  for  Norwegian  roe  recently  has  been  about  35  francs  ($7)  per 
barrel.  In  1900,  owing  to  the  failure  of  the  Norwegian  cod  fishery  and  the  resulting 
scarcity  of  roe,  the  price  for  Norwegian  bait  rose  to  120  francs  ($21)  per  barrel,  or 
about  7i  cents  per  pound.  The  price  of  American  and  Newfoundland  roe  is  but  little 
more  than  half  that  of  the  Norwegian.  In  1900  the  best  American  roe  was  selling  at 
$8.60  a barrel  and  in  the  previous  year  at  only  $1.60. 

Mackerel  roe,  which  ranks  next  to  cod  in  quantity  used,  brings  uniformly  10  to 
50  per  cent  more  than  the  latter. 

The  sardine  fishermen  also  use  peanut  meal  or  flour  to  mix  with  the  roe,  it  being 
much  cheaper.  It  comes  in  bags  holding  75  kilograms,  and  costs  15  francs  a bag. 
Floating  lightly  and  being  quite  conspicuous,  it  attracts  the  attention  of  the  sardines, 
which  readily  devour  it.  When  they  gorge  themselves,  however,  the  mass  swells  so 
as  to  burst  their  intestines.  The  relative  quantities  of  meal  and  roe  used  depend  on 
the  scarcity  of  roe  and  the  personal  preference  of  the  fishermen.  The  two  articles 
are  often  mixed  in  about  equal  proportions,  but  rather  more  roe  than  meal  is  usually 
employed.  In  the  case  of  a certain  sardine  boat  in  Concarneau,  whose  operations 
are  elsewhere  referred  to,  the  bait  consumption  one  season  was  7,500  kilograms  of 
roe  and  6,000  kilograms  of  meal. 

The  following  description  1 of  the  methods  of  preparing  roe  for  sardine  bait  was 
issued  by  the  French  Government  in  1817  for  the  information  of  the  native  fisher- 
men, and  applies  well  to  the  present  time: 

The  ovary  of  the  cod  or  of  the  other  fishes  of  the  same  family  that  are  fished  for  on  the  same 
bottoms  incloses  the  eggs  in  a double  sac,  which  is  ordinarily  thrown  into  the  sea  with  the  refuse.  To 
convert  these  eggs  into  rogue,  several  methods  can  be  pointed  out. 

The  first  consists  in  separating  the  ovary  from  the  body  without  tearing  the  covering,  and  placing 
it,  with  the  inclosed  eggs,  on  a plank  pierced  with  holes  or  in  an  inclined  position,  or  on  a .small- 
meshed  net,  in  order  that  the  drying  may  ensue  equally  at  all  points.  When  this  covering  is  dry, 
several  ovaries  are  brought  together  and  placed  in  a barrel,  the  bottom  of  which  is  spread  with  salt; 
and,  without  pressing  them  too  much,  the  ovaries  are  piled  one  above  the  other,  separated  by  light 
layers  of  salt,  until  the  barrel  is  entirely  full.  Then  it  is  closed  sufficiently  tight  to  prevent  the  air 
from  penetrating  into  it;  otherwise  there  will  ensue  a fermentation  injurious  to  the  quality  of  the  rogue. 

Another  manner  of  preparation  is  to  put  the  eggs  into  barrels  without  drying  them.  The  layers 
of  salt  and  of  rogue  are  put  in  alternately,  as  in  the  preceding  case;,  but  as  the  barrel  becomes  full  the 
quantity  of  salt  should  be  increased.  Four  days  suffice  for  the  rogue  to  sink;  the  barrel  is  filled  to  the 
top  again,  and  this  is  continued  until  the  vessel  is  ready  to  be  closed.  To  provide  for  the  escape  of  the 
brine  the  precaution  is  taken  to  pierce  several  holes  in  the  lower  end  of  the  barrel:  by  this  means  the 
brine  escapes  and  the  rogue  forms  a mass,  which  keeps  in  good  condition  up  to  the  month  of  June, 
when  the  fishermen  carry  it  to  Bergen.  There  the  salting  is  finished  by  adding  a quantity  of  salt 
equal  to  the  first;  the  rogue  is  put  into  new  barrels,  which  are  also  pierced,  and  these  can  immediately 
be  delivered  to  the  merchants,  who  ship  them  to  France.  It  is  said  that  formerly  the  Hollanders 

1 Instruction  sur  la  Maniere  de  preparer  les  Rogues  de  Morue  et  de  Maquereau  employees  comme  Amorces  dans  la 
Peche  de  la  Sardine. 


THE  FRENCH  SARDINE  INDUSTRY. 


9 


bought  in  Norway  a certain  number  of  barrels  of  this  rogue,  to  which  they  gave  this  last  treatment, 
and  that  they  sold  it  afterwards  to  advantage  in  barrels  of  oak  wood  under  the  name  of  rogue  of 
Holland  fish.  In  Norway  use  is  not  made  of  Portuguese  or  Spanish  salt,  but  of  French  salt;  that  of 
Croisic  or  of  lie  de  Re  seems  to  possess  the  desirable  qualities. 

The  preparation  of  the  rogue,  according  to  the  two  processes  which  have  just  been  mentioned,  is 
susceptible  of  improvement.  It  has  been  improved  in  Norway,  especially  since  the  very  much  higher 
price  obtained  in  the  markets  of  France  has  stimulated  the  activity  of  fishermen;  for  it  must  not  be 
supposed,  because  the  importation  of  rogue  into  Brittany  has  diminished,  that  less  rogue  is  manufac- 
tured at  Loffoden.  It  has  simply  found  another  market  in  Biscaye  and  in  Galicia;  but  its  importation 
into  Brittany  would  very  soon  be  resumed  if  French  trade  were  not  promptly  supplying  our  wants  in 
this  direction. 

The  proportion  of  salt  to  rogue  is  as  one.  to  four,  25  kilograms  of  salt  sufficing  for  100  kilograms 
of  rogue. 

The  method  of  improving  this  substance  consists  particularly  in  ridding  it  of  all  fatty  and  muci- 
laginous parts  and  in  rejecting  the  envelope  of  the  eggs,  over  the  length  of  which  are  spread  a number 
of  blood  vessels,  which  render  it  all  the  more  susceptible  of  fermentation,  since  salt  has  little  effect  on 
them.  It  is  important  to  preserve  the  eggs  from  contact  with  the  air,  which  gives  them  a yellowish-red 
tint,  especially  if  the  temperature  is  high.  Fine  salt  is  more  suitable  than  coarse  salt,  and  marine  salt 
should  be  preferred  to  mineral  salt.  Cod  eggs  derived  from  summer  fishing  require  more  salt  than 
those  from  the  winter  fishing,  decomposition  being  less  active  in  winter  than  in  summer.  It  is  nec- 
essary to  exclude  from  salting  all  rogue  of  fish  too  ripe;  the  rogue  has  not  the  necessary  consistency 
when  the  eggs  are  about  to  be  extruded.  It  is  what  the  Norwegians  call  blode  rami,  soft  rogue. 

The  barrel  should  be  hermetically  closed  except  a hole  in  each  end,  one  to  give  passage  to  the 
brine,  the  other  to  let  the  gas  freely  escape.  There  should  be  no  space  between  the  upper  end  of 
the  barrel  and  the  rogue,  which  can  easily  occur  if  the  barrel  is  closed  only  several  days  after  it  is 
filled.  As  much  as  the  arrangement  of  the  building  permits,  the  barrels  should  be  sheltered  from 
dampness. 

By  taking  these  precautions  one  is  sure  to  prepare  rogue  superior  to  that  which  the  Norwegians 
put  on  the  market,  especially  if  the  quantity  of  salt  employed  has  been  calculated,  according  to  its  more 
or  less  penetrating  qualities,  as  new  salt  or  old  salt. 

In  the  respective  interests  of  the  cod  and  sardine  fishermen,  it  would  perhaps  be  well  to  make 
use  only  of  barrels  of  a uniform  gage;  but  this  is  a matter  which  could  be  settled  later. 

Finally,  the  French  fishermen  ought  to  prepare  the  rogue  with  all  possible  care.  It  is  the  best 
means  of  assuring  sale,  of  obtaining  preference  in  the  markets  of  Brittany,  and  of  having  no  longer  to 
fear  there  foreign  competition. 

In  the  ports  in  which  mackerel  fishing  is  conducted  the  rogue  of  this  fish  can  be  prepared  in  the 
same  manner  as  that  of  the  cod,  and  is  in  fact  so  prepared  in  some  of  them.  In  applying  to  the  prep- 
aration of  the  eggs  of  the  mackerel  the  simple  and  easy  methods  indicated  for  the  eggs  of  the  cod,  both 
will  be  improved  in  the  same  degree;  they  can  very  soon  supply  the  place  of  each  other  and  maintain 
the  equilibrium  between  the  needs  and  resources  of  each  year.  The  union  of  their  respective  products 
will  then  free  the  sardine  fishery  from  the  tribute  which  it  has  paid  to  foreigners,  a tribute  which  they 
themselves  are  no  doubt  astonished  at  receiving  for  so  long  a time. 

In  an  article  on  “The  Sardine  Industry  in  Vendee”1  Dr.  Marcel  Baudouin  has 
the  following  references  to  bait: 

The  rogue  or  r6sure  is  that  which  serves  as  bait  for  taking  the  sardine  on  the  coast  of  the  ocean, 
while  in  the  Mediterranean  no  use  is  made  of  it.  The  rogues  are  called  natural  or  artificial.  The 
natural  rogue,  the  most  prized,  is  of  a very  high  price. 

Since  it  is  necessary  to  employ  large  quantities,  it  can  easily  be  conceived  that  an  attempt  would 
be  made  to  substitute  other  substances;  whence  the  invention  of  artificial  rogues,  which  are  manufac- 
tured especially  in  Brittany.  In  Vendee  these  artificial  rogues  are  little  employed.  Some  fishermen 
sometimes  prefer  to  them  bait  yet  more  simple  and  common,  bran  incompletely  sifted,  the  product  of 
the  flour  mill,  of  which  the  cost  price  is  almost  nothing  (it  has  been  employed  at  Saint-Gilles  recently), 


1 Revue  des  Sciences  Naturelles  de  l’Ouest,  1893. 


10 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


or  else  a sort  of  special  bait  called  gueldre,  a mixture  of  the  fry  of  fish  and  little  crustaceans,  especially 
prawn  and  shrimps,  broken  and  pounded.  Forbidden  in  1726  by  a declaration  of  the  king,  the  use  of 
gueldre  was  allowed  in  1853,  then  forbidden  a second  time.  Now  it  is  employed  again,  not  only  at 
Croisic,  and  at  Turballe,  but  in  Vendee— at  Noirmoutiers,  for  example — where  it  has  procured  good 
fishing.  There,  as  well  as  elsewhere,  it.  is  said  to  spoil  the  fish  by  facilitating  decomposition.  The 
manufacturers  reluctantly  buy  sardines  caught,  with  this  bait. 

A number  of  artificial  rogues  have  been  tried  in  Vendee.  We  will  point  out  from  memory  the 
principal  ones  which,  successively,  have  been  used  in  commerce:  (1)  The  artificial  rogue  called  “de 
Douarnenez,”  prepared  by  Messrs.  Morvan  and  Delasalle.  (2)  The  same  rogue,  modified  by  Mr. 
Morvan  in  1876,  which  contains  pickled  meal  and  a small  quantity  of  natural  Norwegian  rogue;  this 
is  the  “farinaceous  mixture  of  Morvan”;  it.  is  no  longer  manufactured;  in  1877  a barrel  of  130  kilo- 
grams of  this  rogue  was  worth  25  francs,  while  a barrel  of  good  natural  rogue  was  worth  40  francs  at. 
least.  (3)  The  “ heterogeneous  rogue”  of  Mr.  Ispa  (of  Douarnenez)  is  composed  of  cakes  formed  of 
oleaginous  grains  (sesame,  arachide)  diluted  with  water  and  a quarter  of  Norwegian  rogue.  (4)  Caillo, 
senior,  about  1818,  made  a trial  of  artificial  rogue,  composed  of  boned  sardines,  pounded  and  reduced 
to  a paste;  he  used  the  flesh  of  all  fish  except  of  those  called  fat  fish.  (5)  Caillo,  junior,  reports  that  a 
long  time  ago  a pharmacist,  of  Leon  d’ Angers  prepared  and  sold  as  rogue  grains  of  linseed  or  rape  seed. 

While  these  artificial  rogues  may  still  be  occasionally  used  in  Vendee,  recourse  is  usually  had  to 
the  two  natural  and  well-known  rogues.  At  the  Sables,  on  the  Isle  of  Yeu,  among  others,  the  rogue 
of  Norway  or  of  Bergen  is  employed  (rogue  made  with  the  eggs  of  salted  cod,  stockfish)  to  cause  the 
fish  to  come  to  the  surface  of  the  sea  at.  the  beginning  of  the  fishing.  The  rogue  made  with  the  eggs  of 
the  mackerel  serves  to  keep  the  fish  on  the  water.  This  last  costs  70  francs  a barrel  of  130  kilograms; 
the  Bergen  rogue,  very  much  in  use  on  the  Vendeen  coast,  is  not  worth  more  than  55  to  60  francs. 

FISHING  SEASON,  GROUNDS,  AND  METHODS. 

Sardines  are  caught  in  greater  or  less  numbers  throughout  the  year.  On  the 
west  coast,  however,  the  fishing  season  opens  in  February  and  continues  to  Novem- 
ber, rarely  extending  into  December.  In  Brittany  the  fishing  begins  rather  later  and 
continues  longer  than  at  points  farther  south  on  the  Bay  of  Biscay.  Fishing  in  the 
canning  district  is  continued  as  late  as  practicable,  usually  as  long  as  the  fish  remain 
in  abundance,  as  their  condition  at  that  time  is  good.  In  the  Mediterranean  sardines 
are  caught  during  every  month  of  the  year. 

The  sardine  fishery  is  emphatically  a shore  fishery,  and  most  of  it  is  done  within 
a very  short  distance  of  the  home  ports.  This  permits  the  use  of  smaller  and  less 
expensive  boats  than  would  otherwise  be  required,  and  insures  the  landing  of  the  fish 
a short  time  after  capture. 

The  early  fishing  for  the  sardine  de  derive  is  mostly  within  1 or  2 miles  of  the 
shore  and  rarely  beyond  5 or  6 miles.  In  the  summer  and  fall  fishing  with  bait,  the 
boats  may  go  10  miles  to  sea,  but  the  largest  part  of  the  catch  is  taken  within  3 or  1 
miles  of  shore,  and  a very  considerable  proportion  close  inshore  in  the  bays. 

The  fishing  in  the  early  part  of  the  season — that  is,  in  March,  April,  and  May — 
is  done  mostly  with  old  nets  and  is  conducted  only  at  night.  About  20  nets  are  used 
by  each  boat.  These  are  tied  together  and  submerged  about  1 yard,  the  corks  being 
attached  in  bunches  of  four  or  five  at  intervals  of  2 yards.  While  the  boats  are  lying 
near  by  under  a small  aft  sail  and  the  men  sleeping,  the  nets  are  allowed  to  drift.  No 
bait  is  used.  The  fish  thus  caught  are  not  fat  and  not  used  for  canning,  but  are  salted 
or  sold  for  immediate  consumption. 

The  regular  fishing  is  carried  on  only  by  day.  The  boats  start  for  the  fishing- 
grounds  early  in  the  morning  (2  to  1 o’clock),  so  as  to  be  there  when  day  breaks; 


PART  OF  THE  SARDINE  FLEET  A^  THE  DOCK  IN  CONCARNEAU. 


Plate  4. 


THE  FRENCH  SARDINE  INDUSTRY. 


11 


they  may  also  have  to  leave  earlier  if  the  tide  would  otherwise  beach  them.  The 
best  fishing  is  in  the  early  morning,  and  the  boats  are  often  back  to  port  by  9 or  10 
o’clock  with  full  fares. 

When  waiting  on  the  fishing-grounds  (at  night,  early  in  the  morning,  or  at  any 
other  time)  the  fishermen  place  one  of  the  long  oars  obliquely  upward  and  backward 
from  the  bottom  of  the  boat  to  the  rear  mast  (where  it  is  fastened),  and  over  this  they 
spread  a sail.  Under  this  shelter  they  sleep  or  rest. 

When  a boat  arrives  on  the  fishing-grounds  the  rear  mast  is  taken  down  and  the 
boat  is  headed  toward  the  wind.  If  fish  are  present  a net  is  shot  and  slowly  towed 
by  means  of  a short  line  attached  to  the  cork  line  and  fastened  in  the  stern  of  the 
boat.  When  there  is  no  wind,  or  when  the  wind  is  from  an  unfavorable  quarter 
with  reference  to  the  water  currents,  the  sails  are  lowered  and  the  crew  row  the 
boat.  In  the  sardine  fishery  at  Sables  d’Olonne,  where  large  boats  are  used,  the  nets 
are  not  towed  therefrom,  but  are  pulled  by  means  of  rowboats. 

Bait  is  always  used  in  the  day  fishing,  being  necessary  in  order  to  attract  the 
fish  to  the  vicinity  of  the  boats  and  into  the  nets.  The  casting  of  the  bait,  on  the 
proper  use  of  which  a great  deal  of  the  success  of  fishing  depends,  is  always  done  by 
the  master  or  “patron,”  who  stands  in  the  stern  of  the  boat  on  a little  platform  and 
uses  the  flour  and  roe  as  required.  When  the  fish  have  come  toward  the  surface 
and  are  on  one  side  or  the  other  of  the  net  his  object  is  to  cast  the  bait  in  such  a way 
that  they  will  rush  against  the  net  and  become  gilled. 

Considerable  skill  and  experience  are  of  course  necessary  in  managing  the  net 
and  in  having  it  hang  properly  in  the  water  and  not  become  folded  or  wavy  owing  to 
currents  or  tide.  Unless  the  net  is  straight  or  gently  curved,  the  fish  will  see  and 
avoid  it.  When  a net  contains  fish  and  is  ready  for  hauling,  it  is  taken  in  the  boat 
and  the  fish  are  removed  from  the  meshes  by  gently  shaking  the  net  or  by  hand. 
The  fish  are  put  in  a compartment  in  the  bottom  of  the  boat.  When  large  catches 
are  made  other  receptacles  are  provided. 

In  summer  fishing,  when  sardines  are  abundant,  the  fishermen  often  let  one  net 
go  adrift  when  it  is  full  of  fish,  trusting  to  pick  it  up  later,  and  put  out  another  net. 
Indeed,  a boat  may  have  fish  in  three  nets  at  one  time,  though  this  is  rarely  the  case. 

The  sardines  are  often  found  in  a more  or  less  compact  body,  and  the  boats  will 
be  concentrated  in  a comparatively  small  area,  at  times  so  close  together  that  the 
operation  of  the  nets  would  seem  almost  impossible  and  the  chance  of  catching  fish 
very  improbable.  The  entire  fleet  of  a given  port — consisting  of  several  hundred 
boats — may  be  at  work  on  one  school  and  fishing  literally  en  masse  instead  of  indi- 
vidually. This  is  shown  in  a measure  in  the  upper  figure  of  plate  2. 

No  ice  or  other  preservative  is  used  on  the  fish,  which  are  landed  a short  time 
after  gilling.  The  fish  reach  port  in  good  condition,  and  are  often  at  the  canneries 
within  one  or  two  hours  after  capture.  Should  the  failure  or  unfavorable  direction 
of  the  wind  threaten  to  delay  the  arrival  of  the  boats,  and  hence  impair  the  quality  of 
the  fish,  the  crews  row  leisurely  back  to  port. 

Soon  after  reaching  port  the  nets  are  spread  for  drying,  being  hauled  to  the  top 
of  the  masts  and  suspended  between  them  for  this  purpose.  When  all  the  fleet  has 
arrived  and  the  nets  are  spread,  the  view  of  the  maze  of  blue  nets,  sails,  and  masts  is 
most  interesting  and  unique. 


12 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


WHARF  SCENES. 

When  the  fishing  floats  begin  to  arrive,  the  wharves,  which  have  practically  been 
deserted,  assume  a very  busy  and  animated  appearance,  and  as  the  arrivals  increase 
in  number  the  bustle  among  the  different  classes  of  people  becomes  intense,  although 
good  nature  and  good  order  prevail.  The  foreign  visitor  here  witnesses  some 
exceedingly  interesting  and  picturesque  fishing  scenes — thousands  of  fishermen  in 
their  coarse  blouses  and  flat  cloth  caps,  with  trousers  rolled  up  and  their  feet  bare 
or  in  the  huge  wooden  shoes  of  the  country,  unloading  their  fish  and  carrying  them 


to  the  canneries;  hundreds  of  women  and  girls  in  short  dark  skirts,  white  caps  and 
collars,  and  wooden  shoes,  negotiating  for  sardines,  receiving  the  fish  from  the  fish- 
ermen, and  dispatching  them  to  the  canneries;  sardine  boats,  either  rowed  or  sailed, 
entering  the  harbor  in  groups  or.  singty  and  coming  up  to  the  already  congested 
docks;  fish  wagons  going  to  and  from  the  factories,  and  a mixed  crowd  of  merchants, 
sight-seers,  artists,  and  idlers.  The  commingled  noise  of  waves,  boats,  wagons,  and 
tongues  is  underlain  by  the  incessant  rattle  of  wooden  shoes  on  the  stony  pavements. 

At  Concarneau  and  other  places  the  sardine  canners  have  on  the  water  front 


Washing  Sardines  on  the  Beach. 


THE  FRENCH  SARDINE  INDUSTRY. 


13 


A Sardine  Fisherman  bringing  Fish  ashore  in  Baskets. 

basket  having  200  iish  (plus  5 per  cent  for  possible  imperfect  fish).  When  the  tide 
is  low  some  men  remain  in  the  boats  and  count  the  fish  into  baskets,  while  others 
haul  the  baskets  to  the  wharf  by  ropes  and  cany  them  to  the  shore.  The  baskets 
could  hold  three  to  five  times  as  many  sardines  as  are  put  in  them,  but  it  is  the  desire 
not  to  crowd  the  fish.  If  sardines  of  different  sizes  have  been  caught,  it  is  necessary 
to  sort  them  into  separate  baskets;  as  a matter  of  fact,  however,  the  nets  do  the 
sorting,  as  each  kind  of  mesh  takes  fish  of  a rather  uniform  size. 

Before  the  sardines  pass  into  the  hands  of  the  canner,  the  fishermen  take  baskets 


small  one-room  wooden  houses  which  serve  as  their  headquarters  for  the  purchase  of 
fish.  To  some  of  these  cabins  a telephone  wire  runs  from  the  factory,  so  that  instruc- 
tions as  to  prices  and  information  regarding  the  quantity  of  fish  landed  may  be 
mutually  communicated. 

The  cannery  managers,  having  determined  on  the  approximate  prices  they  will 
pay  for  the  different  sizes  of  fish,  send  their  purchasing  women  to  the  wharf  as  the 
boats  come  in  and  the  bargains  are  then  made.  Sometimes  the  fishermen  hold  out 
for  better  prices  and  animated  discussions  ensue. 

On  arriving  at  the  wharves  the  fishermen  at  once  begin  to  discharge  their  catch. 
The  fish  are  counted  by  hand  into  wicker  baskets  with  round  bottoms  and  sides,  each 


14 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


of  fish  and  move  them  rapidly  up  and  down  in  the  water  in  order  to  remove  the  dirt 
and  loose  scales  from  the  fish  and  make  them  look  bright.  Many  scales  come  off, 
and  the  shores  of  the  harbor  are  lined  with  them  after  a day’s  fishing.  The  water 
about  the  shores  is  usually  quite  foul,  and  the  rinsing  of  the  fish  therein  seems  very 
objectionable. 

The  fish  are  then  taken  by  the  fisherman  to  the  agent  of  the  cannery  to  which 
the  cargo  has  previously  been  sold,  and  the  contents  of  each  basket  are  poured  into  a 
fiat  box  or  basket.  If  a cannery  is  conveniently  located  the  fishermen  may  carry  the 
fish  directly  thereto;  but  as  a rule  the  fish  are  taken  to  the  factory  in  wagons,  the 
trays  being  carefully  packed  so  that  no  pressure  comes  on  the  fish.  From  the  time 
the  sardines  are  first  caught  everything  that  will  bruise,  mash,  or  otherwise  impair 
the  soundness  of  the  fish  is  carefully  avoided.  The  method  of  discharging  the  catch 
in  small  lots  insures  the  arrival  of  the  fish  at  the  cannery  in  similar  quantities  and 
obviates  the  formation  of  large  piles  in  the  cutting  room,  as  the  cutters  are  in  ample 
numbers  promptly  to  dispose  of  the  fish  as  brought  in. 

v PRICES  RECEIVED  FOR  SARDINES,  ETC. 

The  prices  received  by  the  fishermen  are  regulated  by  the  factory  operators, 
and  depend  on  the  supply,  the  size  and  quality  of  the  fish,  the  weather,  and  other 
considerations.  The  fish  of  each  boat  are  virtually  sold  at  auction,  only  there  is  as  a 
rule  no  counter  bidding,  the  prices  offered  by  one  or  two  factories  being  adopted  by 
the  others  and  accepted  by  the  fishermen.  If  a fisherman  is  not  satisfied  with  the 
price  offered  by  one  factory,  he  is  at  liberty  to  seek  a higher  price  elsewhere.  Some 
boats  always  sell  their  catch  to  the  same  factory,  and  all  of  them,  to  a greater  or  less 
extent,  deal  with  particular  factories. 

The  maximum  price  which  factory  operators  can  profitably  pay  for  sardines  is 
25  francs  ($5)  per  1,000  fish.  The  dealers  in  fresh  sardines  can  pay  as  much  as  35 
francs  per  1,000.  At  times  the  demand  for  sardines  to  be  sold  fresh  (cm  vert)  tends 
to  keep  up  the  prices;  but  this  use  is  limited  and  does  not  interfere  greatly  with  the 
cannery  demands. 

The  following  are  the  average  prices  for  sardines  at  Concarneau  in  1900,  and 
about  the  same  prices  prevailed  in  other  parts  of  the  coast: 


Size  of  nets  in  which  caught. 

Price  per 

1,000  Ash. 

Francs. 

17  to  18 

7 to  9 

21  to  5 

Women  represent  the  factories  as  purchasing  agents.  They  are  given  consider- 
able discretion  by  their  employers  and  are  very  sharp  in  making  bargains.  The 
price  agreed  on  is  for  the  entire  cargo.  Payments  are  not  made  in  money,  but  in 
tokens  or  tickets  which  are  redeemed  weekly.  As  the  fishermen  deliver  their  fish, 
two  baskets  full  at  a time,  to  the  agents  of  the  canneries,  they  receive  a metal  tag'  or 
token  with  the  name  of  the  buyer  on  it.  When  all  the  fish  are  landed  the  metal 


THE  FRENCH  SARDINE  INDUSTRY. 


15 


pieces  are  counted  and  surrendered  and  a claim  check  is  issued  in  their  place.  At 
the  end  of  each  week  the  master  or  the  owner  of  the  boat  (often  the  same  person) 
goes  to  the  factory,  receives  the  money  due,  and  apportions  the  earnings  of  the  crew. 

The  boat,  nets,  equipment,  and  bait  usually  belong  to  a non-fisherman  (who  may 
own  a number  of  boats).  The  men  of  the  crew  furnish  their  own  food,  fuel,  and 
clothing.  The  owner  is  entitled  to  half  of  the  sales  of  fish,  and  the  remainder  goes 
to  the  crew  in  the  following  proportions:  There  being  fi  men  in  the  crew,  4 of  them 
get  equal  parts,  the  captain  or  patron  receives  the  share  of  one  man  plus  10  per  cent, 
and  the  cook  half  a share.  Dividing  the  proceeds  into  22  parts,  the  owner  is  entitled 
to  11  parts,  4 members  of  the  crew  to  8 parts,  the  master  to  2 parts,  and  the  cook  to 
1 part;  the  share  of  the  master  being  increased  by  10  per  cent  of  2 parts  and  that  of 
each  member  of  the  crew  diminished  by  2^  per  cent. 

At  the  end  of  the  season  the  boat  owners  usually  give  to  each  master  a quarter  of 
a share  (“quart  cle  lot”)  as  a bonus,  if  the  crew  have  been  selected  and  engaged  for 
the  next  year’s  fishing.  In  this  way  it  is  possible  for  the  owners  and  the  masters 
to  select  the  best  men.  During  the  winter,  say  in  January,  the  crew  will  report, 
and  each  man  will  receive,  as  a kind  of  bonus,  about  5 francs  and  perhaps  a loan  of 
money.  Advances  are  repaid  in  fish  or  cash  after  the  season  opens. 

From  the  time  the  men  begin  to  fish  until  the  close  of  the  season,  they  pay  to 
the  government  1.10  francs  per  month,  in  consideration  of  which  they  are  pensioned 
on  attaining  the  age  of  50,  provided  they  have  served  300  months  on  sea  duty  (either 
in  fishing  or  in  any  other  maritime  occupation).  They  also  pay  1.50  francs  per 
month  as  premium  on  an  insurance  fund  which  the  government  allows  for  injury  due 
to  the  vicissitudes  of  sea  life.  In  case  of  death,  the  family  of  the  fisherman  receives 
an  annual  pension  depending  on  the  size  of  family  and  on  the  age  and  length  of  sea 
service  of  the  deceased,  the  minimum  sum  being  300  francs;  naval  service  increases 
the  pension. 

DETAILED  FISHING  RECORDS. 

The  average  stock  per  boat  in  a given  season  varies  greatly  on  different  parts  of 
the  French  coast,  depending  on  various  local  causes  besides  the  abundance  of  fish, 
such  as  weather,  bait  supply,  local  demand,  shipping  facilities,  energy  with  which 
fishing  is  prosecuted,  and  other  evident  factors.  The  boats  fishing  out  of  Brittany  ports 
have  a larger  average  yield  than  those  of  other  ports  of  the  west  coast;  and  those  in 
the  Mediterranean  have  by  far  the  smallest  stocks.  Thus,  in  1898,  the  average  catch 
per  boat  was  about  10,700  kilograms  of  sardines  in  Brittany,  3,300  kilograms  in  the 
southern  part  of  the  Bay  of  Biscay,  and  only  745  kilograms  in  the  Mediterranean. 

Considering  the  record  for  1899  of  a certain  boat  in  Concarneau  which  fished 
regularly,  it  appears  that  the  aggregate  stock  was  4,400  francs,  of  which  the  crew  of 
5 men  and  a boy  received  2,200  francs  in  the  proportions  elsewhere  mentioned.  The 
owner  of  the  boat  had  the  following  expenses  to  meet  out  of  his  half  of  the  proceeds: 
Twenty-five  barrels  of  bait,  at  35  francs;  2 new  nets,  at  100  francs;  40  bags  of  peanut 
flour,  at  15  francs;  and  miscellaneous  items,  bringing  the  total  to  1,725  francs,  leaving 
a net  profit  of  475  francs. 

Some  idea  of  the  energy  with  which  the  sardine  fishery  is  pursued  at  times  may 
be  gained  from  the  following  outline  of  one  day’s  fishing  operations  at  15  centers  on 
the  coast  of  Brittany.  The  data  are  compiled  from  a local  newspaper  (La  Depeche 


16 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


de  Lorient),  and  relate  to  September  17,  1900,  for  .some  of  the  places  and  September 
18  for  others.  The  number  of  boats  fishing  was  about  1,500,  the  approximate  total 
catch  was  at  least  17,000,000  sardines,  having  a value  of  200,000  francs,  or  $10,000. 

Audierne,  September  18:  Number  of  boats  going  out,  200;  average  number  of  fish  per  boat,  6,000  to 
8,000;  average  price. per  thousand,  13  francs;  size  of  sardines,  12  to  14  to  the  quarter  can  (quart) . 
Concarneau,  September  17:  Number  of  boats  going  out,  500;  average  number  of  fish  per  boat,  2,000; 
sold  fresh  ( au  vert),  30,000;  sold  for  frying  (future),  970,000;  average  price  per  thousand,  18 
francs;  highest  price,  24  francs;  lowest  price,  2.50  francs. 

Croisic,  September  18:  Number  of  boats  going  out,  2,  which  have  caught  6,000  to  7,000  sardines; 

highest  price  per  thousand,  28  francs;  lowest  price,  26  francs. 

Douarnenez,  September  18:  Number  of  boats  going  out,  some  hundreds;  average  number  of  fish  per 
boat,  45,000;  average  price,  14  francs;  size  of  sardines,  8 to  17  to  the  “quart,” 

Etel,  September  17:  Boats  not  going  out  because  of  bad  weather.  Sept.  18:  No  fishing.  The  boats 
going  out  late  have  been  unable  to  fish  on  account  of  a calm  and  have  not  returned  at  evening. 
Gavres,  September  17:  Number  of  boats  going  out,  86;  average  number  of  fish  per  boat,  9,000;  numoer 
of  fish  to  the  “quart,”  10  to  12;  average  price  per  thousand,  4.50  francs;  highest  price,  7 francs; 
lowest  price,  3 francs.  Some  boats  have  an  average  of  18,000  to  20,000  fish. 

Guilvinec,  September  17:  Number  of  boats  going  out,  20;  average  catch  per  boat,  15,000  to  20,000; 
number  of  fish  to  the  “quart,”  14  to  16;  average  price  per  thousand,  4 francs;  highest  price,  5 
francs;  lowest  price,  3 francs.  Some  boats  have  an  average  of  25,000  fish. 
lie  Tudy,  September  17:  Number  of  boats  going  out,  35;  average  number  of  fish  per  boat,  15,000; 
number  of  fish  for  frying,  535,000;  highest  price  per  thousand,  7 francs;  lowest  price,  2 francs. 
Some  boats  have  an  average  of  20,000  fish. 

Lannion,  September  18:  Number  of  boats  going  out,  67;  average  number  of  fish  per  boat,  1,100;  average 
price  per  thousand,  9 francs;  highest  price,  10  francs;  lowest  price,  8 francs.  Some  boats  have 
an  average  of  5,000  fish. 

Loctudy,  September  18:  Number  of  boats  going  out,  35;  average  number  of  fish  per  boat,  15,000; 
average  price,  6 francs. 

Palais,  September  17:  Number  of  boats  going  our,  75;  average  catch  per  boat,  3,000;  sold  fresh,  50,000; 
sold  for  frying,  165,000;  average  price  j>er  thousand,  15  francs;  highest  price,  16  francs.  Some 
boats  have  an  average  of  6,000  fish. 

Penrnarch,  September  18:  Number  of  boats  going  out,  45;  average  catch  per  boat,  10,000;  average  price, 
4.50  francs;  size  of  sardines,  12  to  18  to  the  “quart,” 

Port  Louis,  September  18:  Number  of  boats  going  out,  55;  average  number  of  fish  per  boat,  6,000  small; 
10  boats  with  4,000  large;  average  price,  small,  5 francs;  large,  18  to  22  francs;  sizes  of  fish,  7 to  8 
and  16  to  20  to  the  “quart.” 

Saint  Guenole,  September  17:  Number  of  boats  going  out,  100;  average  catch  per  boat,  15,000;  number 
of  fish  sold  for  frying,  15,000;  average  price  at  midday,  4 francs;  highest  price,  6 francs;  lowest 
price,  2.50  francs.  Some  ooats  have  an  average  of  20,000  to  25,000  fish. 

Sauzon,  September  17:  Number  of  boats  going  out,  84;  average  catch  per  boat,  10,000;  number  of  fish 
to  the  “quart,”  7 or  8;  average  price  per  thousand,  15  francs;  highest,  16  francs;  lowest,  14 
francs.  Some  boats  have  an  average  of  13,000. 

The  following  similar  record  is  for  several  of  the  foregoing  places  and  some 
additional  ones  on  September  22  and  23,  1900: 

Croisic,  September  23:  Number  of  boats  going  out,  30;  average  catch  per  boat,  2,000;  average  price  per 
thousand,  24  francs;  highest  price,  28  francs;  lowest  price,  20  francs.  Some  boats  have  an 
average  of  5,000  fish. 

17 Herbaudiere,  September  22:  Number  of  boats  going  out,  25;  average  catch  per  boat,  some  hundreds; 
number  of  fish  sold  fresh,  30,000;  uniform  price  per  thousand,  12  francs.  Some  boats  have  an 
average  of  6,000  to  7,000  fish. 

Lannion,  September  22:  Number  of  boats  going  out,  65;  average  number  of  fish  per  boat,  1,300;  average 
price  per  thousand,  9 francs;  highest  price,  10  francs;  lowest  price,  8 francs.  Some  boats  have 
an  average  of  6,500  fish. 

La  Turballe,  September  22:  Number  of  boats  going  out,  60;  average  catch  per  boat,  3,000;  number  of 
fish  to  the  “quart,”  9 to  10;  sold  fresh,  120,000;  sold  for  frying,  80,000;  average  price  per 
thousand,  18  francs;  highest  price,  23  francs;  lowest  price,  15  francs.  Some  boats  have  an 
average  of  4,000  and  5,000. 

Lcs  Sables,  September  22:  Number  of  boats  going  out,  150;  average  catch  per  boat,  6,000;  number  of 
fish  to  the  “quart,”  14  to  16;  average  price  per  thousand,  4 francs;  highest  price,  6 francs; 
lowest  price,  2.50  francs.  Some  boats  have  an  average  of  17,000  fish. 

Lomener,  September  22:— Number  of  boats  going  out,  40;  average  catch  per  boat,  7,000;  number  of  fish 
to  the  “quart,”  15  to  20;  uniform  price  per  thousand,  4 francs.  Some  boats  have  an  average  of 
10,000  sardines. 

Port  Louis,  September  23:  Number  of  boats  going  out,  86;  average  catch  per  boat,  8,000;  number  of  fish 
to  the  “quart,”  10  to  12;  average  price  per  thousand,  3 francs. 


Bull,  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901 . (To  face  page  16.) 


SARDINE  BOATS  ON  THE  SHORE,  CONCARNEAU 


| 


THE  FRENCH  SARDINE  INDUSTRY. 


17 


THE  CANNING  INDUSTRY. 

THE  FACTORIES. 

The  construction  of  tne  first  sardine-canning  establishments  dates  from  about 
1845,  since  which  time  the  growth  of  the  business  has  been  almost  uninterrupted. 
The  factories  gave  to  the  sardine  fishery  a great  impetus,  and  to-day  are  the  chief 
supporters  of  the  very  extensive  fishing  operations  in  the  Bay  of  Biscay. 

The  factories  are  generally  large  stone  structures  surrounded  by  a stone  wall 
and  inclosing  a courtyard.  They  cost  from  30,000  to  75,000  francs  or  more  to  build 
and  equip.  Their  capacity  varies  greatly.  Some  are  able  to  utilize  upward  of  a 
quarter  of  a million  fish  daily.  The  _y earhy  output  of  individual  establishments  is 
from  300,000  to  4,000,000  or  5,000,000  boxes.  They  pay  no  special  license  tax, 
but  have  the  same  taxes  as  other  manufacturing  establishments,  based  on  number  of 
employees  and  size  of  plant.  The  output  is  not  taxed. 

In  no  lino  of  the  business  is  there  any  standard  to  be  followed,  except  what  the 
trade  demands  and  the  interests  of  the  canners  dictate.  There  is  no  government  or 
other  official  inspection  of  the  canned  products. 

The  sardine  canners,  not  unnaturally,  are  averse  to  naving  strangers  enter  their 
works  and  are  circumspect  in  granting  permission  to  do  so.  Almost  every  canner 
has  some  slight  peculiarity  in  method  of  preparation  which  he  thinks  advantageous 
and  worth  being  kept  to  himself.  As  the  factories  are  surrounded  usually  by  high 
stone  walls,  and  entrance  is  oidy  through  a guarded  gate,  a stranger  might  remain  in 
some  of  the  fishing  villages  for  a long  time  without  being  able,  from  personal  inspec- 
tion, to  learn  anything  about  the  canning  methods. 

No  complete  statistics  for  the  -canning  industry  are  available,  but  it  may  be 
stated  that  over  100  factories  are  operated,  and  not  less  than  15,000  persons,  mostly 
women  and  girls,  are  employed  therein.  Concarneau  and  Douarnenez  have  more 
factories  than  any  other  localities,  the  number  operated  in  1900  being  29  and  25, 
respectively.  A large  number  of  the  canning  establishments  are  owned  or  leased  by 
companies  having  headquarters  at  Bordeaux  and  Nantes. 

CANNING  PROCESSES  AND  MATERIALS. 

When  the  fish  are  taken  to  the  factory  they  are  spread  on  large  tables  and  sprin- 
kled with  a little  salt.  The  women  who  remove  the  heads  and  viscera  either  stand  or 
sit,  and  perform  their  work  with  great  rapidity.  They  hold  the  fish  in  the  left  hand 
and  with  the  right  hand  press  the  knife  into  the  back  and  side  of  the  head  of  the  fish, 
using  the.  right  thumb  for  a counter  pressure.  The  head  is  pulled  or  torn  off,  rather 
than  cut,  and  the  esophagus,  stomach,  and  most  of  the  intestines  go  with  it.  The 
body  drops  into  one  basket,  the  refuse  parts  into  another.  The  refuse  is  disposed  of 
to  farmers  for  fertilizing  their  fields. 

Immediately  after  evisceration  the  fish  are  sorted  by  size  into  large  tubs  (half 
oil  barrels  holding  250  liters)  containing  a brine  strong  enough  to  float  a potato. 
Here  they  are  left  for  half  an  hour  to  an  hour,  depending  on  their  size,  quality,  and 
the  condition  of  the  weather.  They  are  then  placed  in  small  wicker  baskets  and  taken 
to  the  yard,  where  they  are  washed  in  either  fresh  or  salt  water  (salt  preferred)  while 
in  the  baskets,  each  basket  being  put  through  two  waters.  This  washing,  which  takes 
but  a few  seconds,  removes  from  the  fish  any  undissolved  salt,  loose  scales,  and  dirt. 

F.  C.  B.  1901—2 


18  BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 

Drying,  which  is  the  next  step,  is  preferably  done  in  the  open  air,  and  a large 
part  of  the  product  is  so  treated.  For  open-air  drying  the  fish  are  arranged  by 
hand,  one  by  one,  in  wire  baskets  or  trays  holding  about  150  fish  of  medium  size, 
placed  on  wooden  frames  or  flakes.  The  baskets  are  16  or  IS  inches  long,  9 inches 
wide,  and  61  inches  deep;  are  made  of  coarse  wire  with  a polygonal  mesh  two-thirds 
or  three-fourths  inch  in  diameter,  and  have  a long  bridle-like  wire  handle  on  each 
side  by  which  they  are  suspended  on  the  flakes,  each  bridle  having  at  its  middle  a 
loop  or  ring  which  interlocks  with  its  fellow.  The  distinctive  feature  of  this  wire 
tray  is  its  division  into  about  7 crosswise  compartments,  V-shaped  in  section,  the 
spaces  being  pointed  at  the  bottom  and  open  above.  The  divisions  are  of  coarse 
wire,  and  one  side  of  the  V forms  a wider  angle  with  the  basket  bottom  than  the 


Beheading  and  Eviscerating  Sardines. 

other.  Against  the  more  oblique  sides  the  sardines  are  placed  in  regular  rows,  with 
their  tails  upward,  so  as  to  promote  the  escape  of  water  from  the  abdominal  cavity. 
By  means  of  the  loop  in  the  handle  some  of  the  baskets  are  hung  on  the  frames,  some- 
what above  the  head;  others  are  rested  on  lower  frames.  Wooden  baskets  or  trays 
are  used  in  some  places. 

The  sardines  remain  out  for  a variable  time,  depending  on  their  size,  the  state  of 
the  atmosphere,  etc.  The  usual  time  in  favorable  weather  is  one  hour. 

In  damp,  foggy,  or  rainy  weather  (especially  in  autumn),  the  sardines  must  be 
dried  indoors  by  artificial  heat,  and  drying  ensues  much  sooner  than  in  the  open  air. 
Some  factories,  not  being  provided  with  driers,  are  unable  to  operate  in  such  weather. 
In  most  of  the  factories — especially  those  more  recently  constructed — artificial  heat 
is  supplied  in  a special  drying  chamber  by  means  of  steam  pipes;  but  in  some  of  the 


THE  FRENCH  SARDINE  INDUSTRY. 


19 


older  canneries  the  wire  baskets  are  suspended  from  a wire  lattice  under  which  are 
small  charcoal  furnaces. 

From  the  drying  flakes  the  fish  are  taken  in  the  same  wire  baskets  to  the  cooking 
room  and  immersed  in  boiling  oil,  in  open  vats  of  various  sizes  and  construction. 
As  the  fish  are  quite  dry,  much  of  the  oil  is  taken  up  in  cooking  and  has  to  be 
replaced  from  time  to  time  by  fresh  oil.  The  immersion  in  oil  usually  lasts  about 
two  minutes,  but  depends  on  the  size  of  the  fish  and  is  best  gaged  by  experience. 
When  the  caudal  fin  will  break  easily,  the  fish  are  said  to  be  cooked  enough.  The 
baskets  are  then  removed  to  a table  or  platform  with  an  inclined  metal  top,  where  the 
surplus  oil  is  allowed  to  drain  from  the  fish.  After  a few  minutes  the  baskets  are 
taken  to  the  packing  room,  where  they  are  hung  on  wooden  frames  over  metal-top 
tables  for  further  draining  and  cooling.  The  oil  which  drips  oft'  here  is  in  some 
places  used  in  soap-making. 

The  sardine  manufacturers  employ  two  kinds  of  oil  in  their  canning  operations — 
oiive  oil  and  araehide  or  peanut  oil;  and  small  quantities  of  sesame  oil  have  at  times 
been  used.  While  it  is  reported  that  the  manufacturers  knowingly  handle  only  the 
oils  named,  it  is  understood  that  cottonseed  oil,  being  tasteless  and  cheap,  is  used  by 
the  French  oil-dealers  for  adulterating  both  olive  and  peanut  oil.  Information  on 
this  subject  is  naturally  difficult  to  obtain;  but  the  testimony  of  several  oil-manu- 
facturers and  dealers  clearly  indicates  the  existence  of  the  practice.  It  is  interesting 
to  note,  in  this  connection,  that  during  the  fiscal  year  1899  the  United  States  exported 
to  France  nearly  17,000,000  gallons  of  cotton-seed  oil,  having  a value  of  $4,000,000. 

French  olive  oil  is  used  with  the  best  quality  of  canned  sardines.  Fish  packed 
in  it  will  remain  in  good  condition  ten  years  or  longer,  and  are  reported  to  be 
better  the  second  year  after  packing  than  earlier.  The  cost  of  olive  oil  to  the  canners 
is  from  175  to  300  francs  ($35  to  $60)  per  100  kilograms. 

Araehide  oil  is  extensively  employed.  It  is  made  in  Bordeaux,  Fecamp,  and 
Marseilles  from  peanuts  imported  from  India,  Senegal  and  other  parts  of  Africa, 
and  other  countries.  It  comes  in  three  grades  and  costs  65  to  95  francs  per  100 
kilograms,  the  best  quality  being  worth  less  than  one-third  that  of  the  best  olive  oil. 
The  mass  remaining  after  the  expression  of  the  oil  from  the  peanuts  is  made  into 
cakes  and  used  as  food  for  cattle.  The  cakes  are  ground  into  flour  and  employed  as 
bait  in  the  sardine  fishery. 

Peanut  oil  is  largely  used  to  meet  the  American  demand  for  a low-priced  sardine. 
Most  of  the  cheaper  French  sardines  exported  to  America  are  packed  in  peanut  oil, 
which  is  practically  tasteless. 

A canner  may  fry  his  sardines  in  peanut  oil  and  fill  the  cans  with  olive  oil,  or  vice 
versa;  or  one  oil,  with  or  without  the  admixture  of  cotton-seed  oil,  may  be  used 
throughout  the  process. 

The  following  account  of  the  utilization  of  peanuts  in  France  is  quoted  from  the 
Philadelphia  Manufacturer: 

Americans  have  come  to  look  upon  the  peanut  chiefly  as  an  article  of  food,  associating  it  with 
circuses  and  country  fairs.  Its  employment  for  food  purposes  is,  however,  one  of  the  least  important 
of  its  uses.  Although  Europeans  seldom  eat  the  nuts,  Marseilles  is  the  peanut  center  of  the  world.  In 
1899  that  city  imported  61,241  tons  of  unshelled  and  9,579  tons  of  shelled  peanuts,  and  that  was  not 
an  unusual  year.  Bordeaux  also  uses  large  quantities  every  year,  but  the  first-named  city  stands  in 
Europe  at  the  head  of  the  production  of  vegetable  oils  from  oleaginous  seeds.  The  chief  sources  of 


20 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


the  city’s  peanut  supply  are  Bombay,  Mozambique,  and  Senegal,  although  large  quantities  are  received 
from  other  places. 

In  the  Marseilles  crushing  mills  for  handling  the  peanuts,  the  shells  are  broken  by  means  of 
toothed  rollers  and  the  kernels  separated  by  a.system  of  winnowing  machines,  such  as  are  used  in  flour 
mills.  The  inside  red  skin  is  then  removed  by  revolving  sieves  and  air  blasts,  and  the  kernels  are 
ground,  after  which  they  are  ready  to  be  pressed.  The  pressing  takes  place  in  the  same  manner  in 
which  other  oleaginous  seeds  are  pressed,  the  meal  being  enveloped  in  strong  fibrous  mats  and 
subjected  to  hydraulic  pressure.  The  resulting  cake  is  then  reground,  the  oil  remaining  in  the  meal 
secured  as  in  the  first  instance.  The  oil  is  graded  according  to  first,  second,  or  third  extraction.  This 
oil,  after  being  clarified  by  filtration  and  the  admixture  of  fuller’s  earth,  is  put  on  the  market  and 
used  as  an  illuminant,  and  more  extensively  as  an  adulterant  in  olive  oil,  in  which  latter  field  its 
chief  competitor  is  cottonseed  oil. 

The  cake  left  is  sometimes  chemically  treated  to  secure  the  oil  that  may  have  escaped  the  presses, 
but  whether  thus  treated  or  not,  it  is  valuable  as  a food  for  cattle.  The  husks  are  sometimes  used  for 
fuel,  and  they  have  some  value  as  fodder,  although  goats  are  about  the  only  animals  that  will  eat  them 
when  not  mixed  with  the  peanut  cake. 

Sesame  oil  comes  from  Egypt,  and  costs  about  80  francs  per  100  kilograms. 

There  are  various  other  ingredients  with  which  or  in  which  the  sardines  are 
packed  to  give  them  flavor  or  piquancy.  Some  of  the  very  best  goods  are  prepared 
with  melted  butter  of  good  quality  instead  of  oil;  these  are  mostly  for  special  French 
trade.  Tomato  sauce,  pickles,  and  truffles  are  also  used.  With  all  of  these  the 
sardines  are  packed  precisely  as  when  oil  is  employed  and  in  cans  of  the  same  sizes. 
Only  relatively  small  quantities  of  such  goods  are  prepared. 

When  the  fish  reach  the  packing  room,  the  women  who  had  been  cutting  will 
probably  have  finished  that  task  and  are  seated  at  a table  ready  to  take  up  the 
packing  of  the  sardines  in  tin  boxes;  they  carefully  place  the  fish  in  the  cans,  and 
then  pass  them  along  to  another  set  of  women  who  fill  the  boxes  with  oil  from  a faucet 
or  with  other  materials  used  with  the  sardines — tomato  sauce,  mustard,  truffles,  etc. 

In  some  countries  (United  States)  the  trade  demands  that  the  blue  back  of  the 
sardines  be  uppermost  when  the  box  is  opened;  while  for  other  countries  (France, 
Belgium)  the  white  belly  should  be  uppermost.  The  position  of  the  fish  when  the  top 
of  the  can  is  removed  by  the  consumer  is  reversed  in  packing,  as  what  is  the  bottom 
of  the  can  from  the  packers’  standpoint  is  in  reality  the  top. 

With  most  of  the  oil  sardines  a small  quantity  of  spices  is  used  in  order  to 
impart  a flavor.  The  usual  ingredients  for  each  can  are  1 or  2 cloves,  quarter  or 
half  of  a laurel  leaf,  and  a small  piece  of  thyme;  these  are  put  in  the  can  before  the 
fish,  so  that  they  will  be  on  top  when  the  can  is  opened.  The  fresh  leaves  of  tarragon 
{estragon)  are  sometimes  used. 

Sardines  are  packed  in  tin  boxes  of  a large  varietj^  of  sizes  and  shapes,  some  of 
which  are  well  known  to  the  American  public,  while  others  do  not  enter  into  the 
general  trade  here.  Among  the  kinds  which  have  received  special  designations  are 
the  “quart  bas,”  “quart  haut,’'  “ demi,”  “huitieme,”  and  “triple.”  The  “quart” 
can  is  the  standard.  It  ordinarily  contains  12  to  1-f  fish,  but  sometimes  as  many  as 
20  and  sometimes  only  6 or  8.  The  “demi”  is  twice  as  large  as  the  “quart,”  and 
the  “huitieme”  is  only  half  as  large;  while  the  “triple”  contains  12  times  as  much 
as  the  “quart.”  Lozenge-shaped  and  boat-shaped  cans  (which  are  protected  by 
patent)  are  also  employed  by  a few  companies;  and  some  factories  put  up  fish  in 
glass  vessels.  The  standard  wooden  cases  in  which  the  cans  are  packed  and  sent  to 
market  contain  100  “quarts,”  200  “ huitiemes,”  50  “ demis,”  etc. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  20.) 


Plate  6 


YARD  OF  A CANNERY.  WOMEN  CUTTERS  AWAITING  THE  ARRIVAL  OF  SARDINES. 


FRYING  SARDINES  IN  OIL, 


THE  FRENCH  SARDINE  INDUSTRY. 


21 


At  one  factory  the  writer  observed  that  the  fish  in  course  of  canning  were  for 
the  most  part  mutilated,  soft,  and  uneven,  and  were  being  put  up  in  peanut  oil,  and 
learned  that  these  sardines  were  destined  for  the  American  market. 

Sealing  the  bottoms  on  the  cans  —the  next  step  in  the  preserving  process — is  one 
of  the  few  things  done  by  men.  Soldering  appliances  of  various  types  are  used  in 
the  different  factories.  The  most  convenient,  time-saving,  and  modern  soldering  iron 
would  appear  to  be  that  which  is  kept  constantly  heated  by  gas.  The  handle  of  the 
iron  is  pierced  by  two  pipes,  one  conveying  gas  and  the  other  air  for  admixture 
with  the  gas;  and  the  gas  is  ignited  in  the  head  of  the  iron  in  such  a way  as  to  keep 
the  soldering  edge  continually  at  a white  heat.  The  free  movement  of  the  iron  is 
effected  by  rubber  tubes  connecting  it  with  the  main  supply  pipes  extending  length- 
wise under  the  table  at  which  the  solderer  works.  While  being  closed  the  can  is 
held  in  a frame  on  a small  turn-table  moved  by  the  foot  of  the  solderer.  The  cover 
is  applied  so  as  to  force  out  the  air,  and  at  the  same  time  a good  deal  of  oil  escapes. 
The  soldering  begins  in  this  oil,  at  the  middle  of  one  end  of  the  can,  and  is  continued 
around  by  the  revolution  of  the  turn-table  rather  than  by  the  movement  of  the  iron. 

From  the  soldering  table  the  cans  are  taken  to  another  room  in  which  they  are 
placed  in  large  square  iron  vessels,  open  at  the  top  and  holding  several  thousand 
“ quart  ” cans.  The  vessels  are  then  immersed  in  boiling  water  for  two  hours.  This 
accomplishes  a fourfold  purpose:  (1)  The  cooking  of  the  fish  is  completed;  (2)  the 
bones  are  softened;  (3)  the  bacteria  in  the  oil  and  fish  are  killed,  which  would 
otherwise  produce  putrefaction  ; (4)  the  presence  of  leaks  in  the  cans  is  disclosed. 

After  cooling,  the  cans  are  placed  in  dry  sawdust  and  stirred  from  time  to  time; 
this  absorbs  the  oil  and  moisture  on  the  surface  and  renders  the  cans  clean  and 
ready  for  packing. 

There  is  a comparatively  small  proportion  of  the  fish  prepared  as  “ boneless 
sardines,”  which  are  rendered  “boneless”  by  bending  the  caudal  peduncle  until  the 
backbone  breaks,  and  then  drawing  out  the  vertebral  column  with  special  tweezers 
or  pincers.  Fish  intended  for  this  purpose  require  more  prolonged  drying  (2  to  3 
hours),  so  that  the  muscular  tissue  may  separate  more  completely  from  the  vertebrae. 
Only  fish  60  mm.  long  or  over  are  made  “boneless,”  and  of  even  the  larger  fish 
only  a small  quantity  is  so  treated.  The  best  sardines  are  not  so  prepared,  as  they 
are  fresher  when  they  reach  the  cooking  room,  having  required  only  one-half  or 
one-third  the  time  for  preparation  up  to  that  stage.  The  “boneless”  fish,  while 
undergoing  the  additional  drying,  are  deteriorating.  The  removal  of  the  backbone 
adds  about  6 per  cent  to  the  value  of  the  fish,  although  the  women  who  prepare 
them  receive  no  additional  wages. 

Tin  plate  for  sardine  cans  is  manufactured  at  Nantes  and  other  places  in  France. 
In  Concarneau,  Nantes,  Hennebont,  and  elsewhere  cans  are  made  for  the  canneries 
at  special  establishments  and  are  sent  to  the  factories  in  the  same  boxes  in  which 
they  are  subsequently  shipped  when  filled.  At  Hennebont  there  is  a plant  for  the 
decoration  of  tin  plate. 

Most  of  the  canning  factories  receive  their  cans  ready-made,  but  some  simply 
have  the  separate  parts  cut,  and  during  winter  give  employment  to  the  can-makers. 
Nearly  all  of  the  sardine  cans  are  now  provided  with  keys,  which  are  placed  on 
the  cans  as  the  sardines  are  boxed  for  market.  The  sardines  of  the  best  quality 


22 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


have  keys  for  use  on  the  side  or  edge  of  the  can,  rather  than  on  the  top,  which 
remove  a thin  strip  of  tin. 

Labeling  of  French  sardines  is  an  important  branch  of  the  canning  business,  and 
although  the  use  of  labels  is  not  required  by  French  law,  labeling  is  almost  invariably 
practiced.  The  most  popular  and  generally  employed  label  is  that  which  is  stamped 
on  the  tin.  Very  few  paper  labels  are  used,  and  these  are  chiefly  for  special  French 
trade.  Some  of  the  best  grades  of  sardines  are  labeled  with  brass  labels  of  oval  or 
oblong  shape,  attached  to  the  side  of  the  cans  by  solder. 

CANNERY  EMPLOYEES  AND  THEIR  WAGES. 

The  canning  of  sardines  gives  employment  to  many  thousand  persons,  at  what 
are  considered  good  wages,  and  in  some  of  the  fishing  towns  gives  work  to  practically 
all  able-bodied  persons  who  are  not  engaged  in  fishing.  In  Concarneau,  a town  of 
10,000  people,  fully  3,000  men,  women,  and  children  are  directly  connected  with  the 
sardine-canning  business,  besides  the  fishermen.  The  average  number  of  employees 
at  the  factories  in  Brittany  is  over  100,  and  at  the  largest  cannery  in  Concarneau 
about  335  persons  are  employed.  Living  in  the  fishing  towns  is  very  cheap.  The 
principal  diet  is  fish  and  bread,  and  meat  is  eaten  usually  but  once  a week. 

Most  of  the  work  in  connection  with  the  canning  of  sardines  is  done  by  women 
and  girls,  a few  men  being  employed  for  special  duties  for  which  women  are  not 
adapted  (can-making,  soldering,  boxing,  etc.),  together  with  a small  number  of  boys 
who  are  apprentices. 

Among  women  and  girls  in  the  Brittany  factories  uniform  wages  prevail.  The 
rate  in  1900  was  l£  francs  for  each  1,000  fish,  the  aggregate  being  divided  equally 
among  employees.  A good  week’s  income  for  cutters  and  packers  is  30  francs  ($6). 

The  solderers,  who  seal  on  the  tops  of  the  cans,  receive  1.50  francs  for  100  cans. 
In  winter  many  men  devote  their  time  to  can-making  and  are  paid  3 francs  per  100 
cans.  Other  employees  about  the  factories  are  paid  by  the  month  and  receive  an 
average  of  70  francs.  A good  solderer  can  seal  1,100  to  1,300  cans  daily,  and  some 
men  do  considerably  more.  Boxes  that  are  badly  soldered  are  returned,  and,  with 
their  contents,  charged  to  the  solderer,  who  is  not  allowed  to  sell  them.  M.  Deyrolle- 
Guillou,  of  Concarneau,  communicates  the  following  interesting  note  on  the  work  of 
apprentice  solderers : 

I have  heard  of  a solderer  who  could  seal  up  1,800  “quart”  cans  of  sardines  in  a day,  but  an 
ordinarily  good  worker  does  about  1,300.  It  is  very  easy  work  to  learn.  I have  recently  spoken  with 
a cannery  director,  who  told  me  that  he  had  six  young  apprentices  of  last  year,  one  of  whom  can  now 
(1900)  solder  1,200  boxes  in  a day,  two  can  do  1,100,  two  can  do  1,000,  and  one  can  do  900.  These 
are  only  15  to  17  years  old,  and  must  be  apprentices  three  years  and  get  only  half  pay  during  that 
time,  that  is  to  say  about  75  centimes  for  100  “quarts”  soldered  up. 

PRICES  OF  SARDINES. 

In  1900  the  sardine  packers  received  an  average  of  50  francs  per  100  “ quart”  cans 
for  fish  of  good  quality  in  “olive”  oil;  in  1899  the  average  price  for  the  same  goods 
was  13  francs  per  case.  Some  “quarts”  in  oil,  however,  bring  as  much  as  100  francs 
per  100  cans,  and  retail  in  Paris  at  2 francs  per  can.  These  are  the  fish  with  which 
special  care  is  taken;  they  are  brought  to  the  factories  early  in  the  morning  and  are 
canned  with  the  minimal  amount  of  softening  and  deterioration.  Fish  intended 
for  the  average  American  trade  are  quoted  at  about  35  francs  per  case  of  100  cans. 


THE  DRYING  YARD  OF  A CANNERY.  WOMEN  WITH  SARDINES  ON  GRILLS, 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901  (To  face  page  22.1 


Plate  7, 


THE  FRENCH  SARDINE  INDUSTRY. 


23 


During  the  first  week  of  July,  1900,  the  wholesale  prices  of  French  sardines  in 
New  York  were  $10.50  to  $14  per  case  for  choice  “quarter”  oils,  $6.75  to  $11  for 
ordinary  “quarter”  oils,  and  $16  to  $23  for  boneless  “ halves.”  During  the  last  week 
in  December,  1900,  the  quotations  were  $8.50  to  $12  for  choice  “quarter”  oils,  $7.25 
to  $11  for  ordinary  “quarter”  oils,  $14  to  $17  for  choice  “halves,”  and  $16  to  $23 
for  boneless  “halves.” 

COMPARISON  OF  FRENCH  AND  AMERICAN  SARDINES. 

Observation  has  shown  that  French  sardines,  when  of  the  best  quality,  have  a 
'’avor  and  richness  which  make  them  preferable  to  any  sardine  prepared  on  the 
Atlantic  coast  of  the  United  States  from  the  young  of  the  sea  herring;  French  sar- 
dines of  average  grade,  even  when  canned  in  peanut  and  cotton-seed  oil,  are  much 
superior  in  palatability  to  the  great  bulk  of  the  American  output;  while  the  cheaper 
grades  of  French  sardines — which  unfortunately  find  a ready  market  in  the  United 
States — are  certainly  not  preferable  to  much  of  the  native  pack. 

The  conditions  which  underlie  the  general  superiority  of  the  French  canned  sar- 
dines, and  the  steps  which  may  be  adopted  in  America  for  narrowing  the  gap  which 
now  separates  the  product  of  the  two  countries,  appear  to  the  writer  to  be  chiefly  as 
follows: 

(1)  The  methods  adopted  in  the  French  sardine  fishery  result  in  the  landing  of 
the  fish  in  excellent  condition.  This  is  the  main  object  and  is  never  lost  sight  of. 
The  fish  are  caught  singly  in  a delicate  mesh,  removed  by  hand,  carefully  kept  on 
board  the  boats  so  as  to  avoid  crowding  and  mashing,  counted  by  hand  into  small 
baskets,  taken  to  the  factories  within  a few  hours  after  being  caught,  and  promptly 
put  through  the  preserving  processes,  so  that  ordinarily  the  deterioration  which 
ensues  is  not  worthy  of  mention.  The  sardine  fishery  on  the  coast  of  Maine  is  a 
weir  fishery  and  the  unit  of  measure  is  not  the  individual  fish,  as  in  France,  but  the 
hogshead.  A large  number  of  fish — sometimes  a vast  school—  may  be  in  a weir  at 
one  time,  and  are  often  held  in  the  weir  for  many  hours,  sometimes  for  several  days, 
during  which  they  are  without  food,  are  incessantly  harassed  by  their  fellows  and  by 
other  fish,  and  necessarily  undergo  deterioration;  they  are  then  taken  from  the  trap 
with  large  dip  nets  and  transferred  to  the  collecting  boat,  where  they  are  piled  deep 
in  bins  or  in  the  hold,  and  are  often  many  hours  in  reaching  the  cannery.  There  the 
unloading  results  in  further  mashing,  crushing,  and  bruising,  so  that  by  the  time  the 
sardines  reach  the  cooking  room  they  have  lost  so  much  of  their  flavor  and  firmness 
that  no  amount  of  subsequent  care  and  no  kind  of  oil  or  spice  can  replace  or  restore 
their  quality.  Although  fish  are  liable  to  more  rapid  decomposition  after  capture 
than  any  other  class  of  food  animals,  there  are  no  products  with  which  greater 
liberties  are  taken,  and  none  in  which  the  lack  of  care  results  so  disastrously;  this  is 
especially  true  of  the  American  sardine,  and,  in  the  writer’s  opinion,  is  largely 
responsible  for  the  unsatisfactory  quality  of  the  canned  fish. 

(2)  In  France  the  sardines  caught  in  the  early  part  of  the  season  are  not  canned, 
because  they  are  not  in  the  best  condition.  It  is  only  after  the  fish  have  become  fat 
that  they  are  considered  suitable  for  canning.  The  fattening  depends  on  an  abun- 
dance of  proper  food,  and  along  with  it  is  an  improvement  in  the  flavor  and  general 
quality  of  the  flesh.  In  the  case  of  our  sardines,  fishing  for  the  canneries  is  carried 
on  from  April  to  December,  without  reference  to  the  fatness  of  the  fish. 


24 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


While  the  young  sea  herring-  is  an  excellent  fish,  it  may  be  admitted  that  even 
when  at  its  best  its  meat  is  inferior  to  that  of  the  fat  young  pilchard  in  richness. 
The  latter  has  a peculiar  flavor  which,  to  a considerable  degree,  is  preserved  in 
canning,  and  which  probably  can  not  be  successfully  imitated  in  the  sea  herring. 
However,  the  difference  in  flavor  between  the  French  and  the  American  sardines,  on 
which  many  persons  lay  much  stress,  appears  to  the  writer  to  be  of  only  secondary 
importance.  The  taste  for  French  sardines  has  been  acquired  and  perpetuated  in  the 
United  States  because  of  the  long-continued  unsatisfactory  quality  of  American 
sardines.  The  herring  is  naturally  no  less  wholesome  than  the  pilchard;  if  it  is 
caught  for  canning  only  when  in  prime  condition,  and  if,  in  the  form  of  canned 
sardines,  it  is  placed  on  the  markets  with  the  minimum  amount  of  deterioration  and 
with  such  adjuvants  in  the  way  of  oil,  spices,  etc.,  as  may  be  suitable,  it  should  and 
will  receive  ample  recognition  at  home,  and  meet  with  a constantly  increasing  demand, 
at' prices  that  now  are  hardly  dreamed  of. 

The  history  of  a few  canneries  on  our  east  coast  during  recent  years  has  shown 
that  a very  marked  improvement  in  the  quality  of  American  sardines  is  entirely  practi- 
cable and,  furthermore,  is  highly  appreciated  by  consumers,  as  evidenced  by  the  much 
higher  prices  they  are  willing  to  pay  and  the  steady  demand  beyond  the  capacity  of 
the  factories.  With  regard  to  the  sardines  of  the  Pacific  coast  of  the  United  States, 
there  is  no  reason  why  they  should  not,  when  properly  canned,  prove  equal  to  the 
French  fish  in  every  respect.  The  high  reputation  which  has  been  acquired  by  the 
comparatively  small  quantities  packed  in  California  during  the  past  five  or  six  years, 
and  the  excellent  prices  which  they  have  commanded,  argue  well  for  the  success  of 
an  extensive  business. 

AMERICAN  BAIT  FOR  THE  FRENCH  SARDINE  FISHERIES. 

The  matter  of  supplying  bait  for  the  extensive  sardine  fisheries  of  the  French 
coast  has  received  some  little  attention  in  a few  New  England  towns  during  the  last 
few  years,  resulting  in  a small  increase  in  the  trade;  but  the  consumption  of  bait  is 
so  large,  the  demand  is  so  great,  and  the  prices  are  so  remunerative,  that  the  American 
trade  should  be  very  much  extended,  especially  as  the  bait  material  is  now  a waste 
product  and  ma}7  readily  be  prepared  at  a trifling  cost. 

Upward  of  ten  years  ago  the  United  States  Commission  of  Fish  and  Fisheries 
brought  this  subject  to  the  attention  of  the  New  England  fishermen,  but  with  no 
noteworthy  results.  Now,  owing  to  a shortage  of  the  cod  catch  in  the  country  which 
furnishes  the  principal  part  of  the  bait  supply,  the  opportunity  is  unusually  favorable 
for  our  fishermen  to  enter  the  market  and  establish  a permanent  trade.  Having 
recently  visited  the  sardine  district  of  France  for  the  purpose  of  investigating  the 
industry  and  having  given  special  attention  to  the  requirements  of  the  sardine  fisher- 
men in  the  matter  of  bait,  the  writer  here  presents  the  results  of  his  inquiries  and 
observations  with  a view  to  show  the  benefits  that  will  arise  from  the  utilization  of 
an  article  that  is  now  generally  thrown  away. 

The  preparation  of  sardine  bait  from  cod  eggs  is  entirely  feasible  in  all  the  coast 
States  from  New  Jersey  northward,  and  if  proper  precautions  are  observed  the  business 
should  result  in  a very  substantial  increase  in  the  incomes  of  many  of  our  cod  fisher- 
men. There  would  seem  to  be  a similar  opportunity  for  fishermen  in  other  fisheries 
and  in  other  parts  of  the  country.  The  eggs  of  the  cod  are  an  artificial  food  of  the 


THE  FRENCH  SARDINE  INDUSTRY. 


25 


sardine,  and  are  not  known  to  possess  any  properties,  especially  when  salted,  which 
make  them  an  indispensable  bait.  So  far  as  known,  all  fish  eggs  not  over  one-sixteenth 
of  an  inch  in  diameter  are  suitable  for  bait.  Among  the  gadoid  fishes,  the  haddock, 
the  hake,  the  pollock,  and  the  cusk  should  yield  eggs  not  inferior  to  those  of  the  cod. 
Reference  has  already  been  made  to  the  value  of  mackerel  eggs  as  bait.  Many  other 
common  species  inhabiting  our  salt  or  fresh  waters  might  be  mentioned. 

Norwegian  roe  has  for  many  years  practically  monopolized  the  trade,  and  is  still 
the  leading  bait  as  regards  quality,  quantity  used,  and  price.  American  roe,  as  such, 
is  just  as  good  and  just  as  satisfactory  to  the  sardine  fishermen  as  the  Norwegian, 
but,  owing  to  certain  differences — amounting  to  positive  defects-  in  the  methods  of 
packing,  it  is  far  less  acceptable  than  the  Norwegian,  and  will  inevitably  bring  much 
less  money  per  barrel  until  other  methods  are  observed.  The  roe  brought  in  by  the 
French  fishermen  of  Newfoundland  is  inferior  to  the  American. 

A description  of  the  manner  of  preparing  cod  roe,  as  practiced  in  Norway  years 
ago,  and  of  the  improvements  therein  suggested  by  the  French  Government,  has 
already  been  given.  The  features  which  give  to  the  Norwegian  roe  the  superiority 
which  it  has  continued  to  maintain,  and  the  points  to  which  Americans  must  give 
careful  consideration  if  they  would  hope  to  receive  a fair  share  of  the  trade,  appear 
to  the  writer  to  be  as  follows,  after  a critical  comparison  of  the  product  of  the  two 
countries  as  seen  in  France: 

(1)  The  Norwegian  roe  is  closely  packed  in  the  barrels,  and  when  the  barrels  are  opened  the 
sardine  fishermen  find  them  practically  full.  The  roe  is  evidently  salted  on  shore  and  then  repacked 
and  pressed  in  the  barrels  with  some  force;  and  after  standing  and  settling  the  barrels  are  apparently 
filled  again  before  being  finally  closed.  Barrels  of  American  roe,  on  the  other  hand,  although  the 
same  size  as  the  others,  invariably  contain  less  bait,  owing  to  shrinkage  incident  to  salting,  to  failure 
of  the  packers  to  properly  fill  them  in  the  first  place,  or  to  both  these  causes  combined.  The  roe  is 
taken  from  the  barrels  and  carried  to  the  fishing-grounds  in  buckets.  A barrel  of  Norwegian  roe  will 
fill  eight  buckets,  while  often  a barrel  of  American  roe  will  fill  only  five  or  six  buckets.  Barrels  of 
Newfoundland  roe,  while  larger  than  the  Norwegian,  often  contain  20  to  25  pounds  less  of  roe. 

(2)  Norwegian  roe  is  packed  dry,  and  remains  dry  unless  it  becomes  very  old.  The  barrels  con- 
tain no  undissolved  salt  and  no  free  brine.  The  brine  which  may  form  after  the  closing  of  the  barrels 
escapes  through  holes,  about  one-fourth  inch  in  diameter,  bored  in  the  sides  of  the  barrel.  Barrels  of 
American  roe  are  either  dry  or  may  contain  more  or  less  brine;  they  are  also  liable  to  have  consider- 
able undissolved  salt  in  the  bottom  or  mixed  with  the  roe.  The  barrels  should  contain  nothing  but 
dry  roe,  as  the  French  fishermen  are  too  economical  and  too  keen  to  knowingly  expend  their  hard- 
earned  money  for  salt  and  water  as  bait  for  sardines.  Small  shipments  of  roe  from  America  ten  or 
more  years  ago  were  very  unsatisfactory  and  gave  rise  to  a well-founded  prejudice  which  still  prevails 
to  a considerable  extent.  Barrels  were  occasionally  found  that  contained  very  little  roe  and  were  filled 
chiefly  with  salt.  “Salt  is  not  good  for  sardine  bait,”  was  the  remark  of  a dealer  at  Concarneau.  The 
quality  of  American  roe  in  the  foregoing  respect  is  now  better,  although,  in  the  opinion  of  the  fishermen, 
there  is  still  much  room  for  improvement. 

. (3)  The  Norwegians  observe  several  grades  of  roe,  depending  on  the  ripeness  of  the  eggs,  and 
pack  them  in  separate  barrels,  which  bring  different  prices.  The  ripeness  of  the  roe  determines  its 
quality  as  bait,  because  of  the  plus  or  minus  of  ovarian  capsule  or  membrane,  which  is  thinner  and 
relatively  less  in  quantity  when  the  eggs  are  riper.  With  the  American  roe  no  distinction  of  this  kind 
is  made,  but  eggs  of  all  degrees  of  ripeness  are  mixed.  Large  pieces  of  thick  ovarian  membrane  are 
often  found  in  the  roe  from  the  United  States. 

(4)  The  ovaries  are  salted  more  or  less  entire  in  Norway,  and  when  a barrel  is  opened  the 
individual  organs  may  be  removed  one  by  one.  As  the  roe  needed  for  fishing  is  transferred  from  the 
barrels  to  the  buckets  by  hand,  the  existence  of  the  whole  roe  facilitates  the  work  and  is  appreciated 
by  the  men.  American  roe  is  largely  a concrete  mass  of  wet  eggs  with  strings  of  membranes  running 
through  it. 


26 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The  foregoing  considerations  lead  to  the  presentation  of  the  following  suggestions 
and  information  for  persons  who  may  he  in  position  to  undertake  the  preparation  of 
bait  for  use  in  the  sardine  fishery: 

(«)  Ovaries  in  which  the  eggs  are  sufficiently  developed  to  be  separable  are  suitable  for  bait. 
They  should  be  removed  and  salted  as  soon  as  possible  after  the  fish  are  caught.  In  the  offshore 
vessel  fisheries  the  roes  may  be  salted  loosely  in  barrels  or  vats,  and  repacked  in  suitable  barrels  after 
the  vessels  return  to  port.  In  the  shore  fisheries  the  salting  may  be  deferred  until  the  boats  land  their 
catch.  When  practicable,  the  ovaries  should  be  removed  entire  and  salted  between  layers  of  dry, 
rather  fine,  salt.  The  salting  should  be  thorough,  so  that  no  salt  need  be  put  in  the  barrels  in  which 
the  roe  is  shipped. 

(b)  The  repacking  of  the  roe  is  to  be  commended  and  will  amply  repay  the  extra  labor  involved. 
The  barrels  should  be  of  uniform  size,  neat,  and  well  made.  While  the  size  of  the  barrels  is  not  a 
matter  of  much  importance,  the  sardine  fishermen  have  become  accustomed  to  a barrel  holding  about 
140  to  144  kilograms  (308  to  316  pounds)  of  roe,  and  their  preference  should  be  borne  in  mind. 
Barrels  should  have  not  less  than  300  pounds  of  roe,  net,  and  should  have  no  unoccupied  space.  The 
pressing  of  the  roe,  in  order  to  completely  fill  the  barrel,  is  desirable.  Escape  should  be  provided  for 
the  brine  that  may  run  from  the  eggs,  by  boring  several  small  holes  near  the  ends  of  the  barrel. 

(c)  The  grading  of  the  eggs  is  recommended.  Eggs  of  different  degrees  of  ripeness  and  from 
different  species  should  not  be  mixed  in  the  same  barrel.  The  amount  of  ovarian  membrane  should 
be  reduced  to  a minimum;  after  salting,  this  can  be  stripped  off  more  easily  than  when  the  eggs  were 
fresh.  Loose  eggs,  resulting  from  ovaries  ruptured  while  fresh  or  in  process  of  salting,  should  he 
packed  in  separate  barrels. 

( d ) The  barrels  should  be  marked  with  the  name  of  the  packer,  together  with  the  kind  and  grade 
of  the  roe.  The  eggs  of  all  the  members  of  the  cod  family  may  properly  he  labeled  “cod.”  The  net 
weight  of  the  roe  (in  kilograms)  might  also  be  put  on  each  barrel.  Backers  desirous  of  establishing 
and  increasing  their  trade  will  of  course  see  that  no  discrepancy  exists  between  the  contents  of  the 
barrels  and  the  marks  on  the  outside. 

(e)  American  bait  now  goes  by  steamer  to  Havre  and  thence  by  rail  to  the  fishing  towns.  The 
freight  on  a barrel  of  roe  from  Havre  to  Concarneau  is  6 francs.  Roe  might  be  sent  directly  to  the 
fishing  towns,  or  to  some  center  on  the  west  coast,  from  which  it  might  be  distributed  at  less  cost  than 
from  Havre.  The  present  duty  on  roe  is  about  1 franc  per  barrel  of  144  kilograms.  Bait-dealers  or 
agents  may  be  found  in  all  the  leading  fishing  towns.  It  is  reported  that  they  make  a net  profit  of  20 
per  cent  on  the  roe  handled. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1 901 . (To  face  page  26  ) 


Plate  8. 


Contributions  from  the  Biological  Laboratory  of  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission, 
Woods  Hole,  Massachusetts. 


BIOLOGICAL  NOILS. 


No.  2.  Issued  August,  1901. 

NOTES  ON  THE  MIGRATION,  SPAWNING,  ABUNDANCE,  ETC.,  OF  CERTAIN 

FISHES  IN  1900. 

By  George  IT.  Sherwood  and  Vinal  N.  Edwards. 

Observations  on  the  habits,  abundance,  spawning,  migrations,  and  on  the 
influence  of  physical  changes  on  these  phenomena,  are  here  presented  for  a number 
of  fishes  of  the  Woods  Hole  region  during  the  season  of  1900: 

Tarpon  atlanticus,  Tarpon. 

Mr.  H.  M.  Knowles,  of  Wakefield,  It.  I.,  is  authority  for  the  statement  that  a tarpon  5 feet 
long,  and  so  slender  that  it  weighed  only  30  pounds,  was  caught  in  a fish  trap  near  Dutch  Island 
Harbor,  Narragansett  Bay.  Another  weighing  80  pounds  was  taken  at  Marthas  Vineyard,  and  a 
smaller  one  in  the  Fish  Commission  trap  at  Woods  Hole.  The  northern  limit  of  range  of  this  species 
is  southern  New  England,  but  it  probably  does  not  breed  north  of  Cuba. 

Brevoortia  tyrannus,  Menhaden. 

Although  the  menhaden  season  of  1900  was  regarded  as  the  most  successful  in  three  years,  the  fish 
were  exceedingly  scarce  in  this  vicinity,  particularly  during  the  last  of  August,  at  which  time  it  was 
impossible  to  procure  any,  either  in  Boston  or  Newport;  and  on  this  account  a contemplated  trip  to 
the  tile-fish  grounds  had  to  be  postponed.  In  Buzzards  Bay,  however,  where  all  net  fishing  is 
prohibited  by  law,  large  schools  were  present  all  summer. 

Hippocampus  hudsonius,  Sea-horse. 

In  August  a fine  specimen  of  Hippocampus  was  dredged  by  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission  steamer 
Fish  ITawk,  outside  of  Devils  Bridge,  Gay  Head.  It  was  taken  to  the  laboratory  and  lived  for  several 
days  in  the  aquarium.  This  is  the  only  one  caught  for  several  years. 

Scomber  scombrus,  Mackerel. 

Notwithstanding  the  catch  of  mackerel  along  the  Atlantic  coast  was  phenomenal,  very  few  were 
taken  in  inshore  waters.  Even  the  traps  far  from  the  shore  off  Seaconnet  and  Newport  took  scarcely 
any.  The  failure  of  the  mackerel  to  enter  Buzzards  Bay  and  Vineyard  Sound  is  to  be  attributed  in  all 
probability  to  the  remarkable  scarcity  of  small  fish  of  all  kinds.  Indeed,  seining  has  never  resulted  in 
the  capture  of  fewer  small  and  young  fish  than  in  1900. 

The  first  mackerel  reached  Chatham  April  29,  and  on  the  following  day  were  taken  at  Cuttyhunk 
and  Menemsha.  The  temperature  of  the  water  at  Woods  Hole  at  this  time  was  46°  F.,  although 
50°  F.  is  apparently  more  favorable  for  them.  The  presence  of  so  many  spawning  fish  near  the  coast 
in  1900  led  one  to  expect  that  young  mackerel  would  be  numerous,  but  this  was  not  the  case.  On 
July  9 a few  young  mackerel  2.5  to  3 inches  in  length  were  seen  in  a trap  at  Woods  Hole,  but  in 
a few  days  they  disappeared  and  no  more  were  recorded  in  the  vicinity  until  late  in  the  fall,  and  even 
then  only  in  small  numbers. 

As  throwing  some  light  on  the  question  of  the  equatorial  migration  of  the  mackerel,  it  is  of 
interest  that  in  1898  they  appeared  at  Seaconnet,  R.  I.,  Chatham,  Mass.,  and  Yarmouth,  Nova  Scotia, 
on  the  same  day,  May  3. 


27 


28 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Sarda  sarda,  Bonito. 

Seventy-five  bonito  from  a trap  at  Cedar  Tree  Neck  on  June  18,  1900,  were  reported  to  be  the 
first  arrivals  of  the  season,  and  throughout  the  summer  on  almost  every  clear  day  the  schools  were 
breaking  at  the  surface  from  Gay  Head  to  Woods  Hole.  On  account  of  the  peculiar  flavor  of  its  flesh 
the  bonito  has  not  found  a ready  market,  but  it  is  growing  in  favor.  In  1900  there  was  a considerable 
demand  for  it,  and  it  brought  even  better  prices  than  the  squeteague.  The  indications  are  that  the 
bonito  may  largely  supplant  the  latter  as  an  article  of  food. 

Scomberomorus  maculatus,  Spanish  Mackerel. 

This  delicious  food-fish,  once  quite  abundant  in  Buzzards  Bay,  is  now  very  scarce.  One  was 
taken  in  the  Fish  Commission  trap  in  1898,  and  three  were  caught  at  different  times  during  the  summer 
of  1900  in  the  trap  in  Vineyard  Sound.  These  were  all  small  fish,  weighing  1.5  to  2 pounds. 

Trichiurus  lepturus,  Cutlas-fish. 

A specimen  3 feet  8 inches  in  length  was  caught  in  a trap  off  Newport.  Several  smaller  specimens, 
which  were  also  caught  in  Narragansett  Bay,  were  sent  to  the  Rhode  Island  Fish  Commission.  In 
October  one  was  taken  in  a trap  at  Menemsha. 

Pomatomus  saltatrix,  Blue-fish. 

In  a note  on  the  abundance  of  the  squeteague  reference  is  made  to  the  gradual  decrease  in  the 
numbers  of  blue-fish  which  enter  the  waters  of  Buzzards  Bay  and  Vineyard  Sound.  Simultaneously 
with  this  change  there  has  occurred  another,  equally  difficult  to  explain,  in  the  time  of  their  arrival. 
Some  twenty  years  ago  the  fish  were  sure  to  be  taken  i n t he  traps  the  first  or  second  week  in  May,  while 
recently  they  may  be  as  late  as  the  middle  of  June.  The  presence  of  large  schools  of  blue-fish  off 
Nantucket  and  No  Mans  Land  all  summer  makes  it  evident  that  they  have  not  completely  deserted 
our  coast;  but  just  why  so  few  come  inshore  and  why  they  are  so  much  later  in  their  arrival  is  not 
apparent.  In  spite  of  the  scarcity  of  mature  fish  the  young  have  been  very  abundant  everywhere, 
and  particularly  at  Katama  Bay,  where  undoubtedly  they  have  destroyed  many  of  the  rare  bright- 
colored  southern  forms  referred  to  in  Biological  Notes  No.  1.  The  rate  of  growth  of  the  young,  as 
found  in  Katama  Bay  in  1900,  is  as  follows:  July  27th,  3 inches;  August  8th,  3 to  5 inches;  August  29th, 
5 to  7 inches;  September  24th,  7 to  9 inches;  October  3d,  8 to  11  inches. 

Centropristes  striatus,  Sea  Bass. 

It  is  to  be  regretted  that,  this  gamy  fish  is  decreasing  so  rapidly  in  numbers.  In  a short  time  it 
will  probably  become  a rare  species  in  this  locality.  Hand-lining,  even  on  the  spawning-grounds  off 
Hyannis,  was  remarkably  poor  this  season,  and  the  abundance  of  the  young  does  not  give  promise  for 
the  coming  year.  As  a rule  the  first  adults  appear  in  their  seasonal  migration  during  the  first 
or  second  week  in  May,  when  the  water  has  reached  a temperature  of  48°  to  50°  F.  However,  in 
spite  of  the  cold  of  1900,  they  appeared  at  Cuttyhunk  and  Menemsha  Bight  on  April  28 — with  one 
exception  the  earliest  arrival  recorded  in  twenty-five  years.  Formerly  the  young  were  abundant 
everywhere,  but  at  present  they  are  restricted  to  a few  localities — Katama  Bay,  Quisset  Harbor,  and 
Wareham  River.  The  first  fry  were  seined  July  31  and  measured  three-fourths  of  an  inch  in  length. 
On  the  20th  of  October  young  fish  2 to  3 inches  long  were  very  plentiful  in  Katama  Bay. 

liobotes  surinamensis,  Flasher,  Triple-tail. 

The  Rhode  Island  Fish  Commission  has  in  its  possession  a specimen  of  Lobotes  weighing  6 
pounds  and  measuring  22  inches  in  length,  caught  on  September  10  in  a trap  off  Prudence  Island, 
Narragansett  Bay.  This  inhabitant  of  all  tropical  seas  is  a very  rare  visitor  in  the  waters  of  southern 
New  England.  Not  more  than  six  specimens  have  been  recorded  from  this  vicinity  in  the  last 
twenty  years. 

Stenotomus  chrysops,  Soup. 

The  catch  of  scup  this  year  has  been  good,  but  not  extraordinary.  The  first  arrivals  were  taken 
off  Newport  April  21,  at  Cuttyhunk  April  26,  and  five  days  later  at  Woods  Hole.  This  was  an  average 
arrival,  although  the  water  was  2°  to  3°  F.  below  the  average.  The  adult  fish  usually  leave  in  October, 
while  the  young  may  remain  a month  or  more  longer.  Hundreds  of  the  latter  are  killed  every  year 
by  the  sudden  changes  of  temperature. 

The  growth  of  fry  as  observed  at  Woods  Hole  is  as  follows:  July  3d,  0.5  to  1.5  inches;  August 
2d,  1.5  to  2 inches;  September  6th,  2 to  3 inches;  September  29th,  3 to  4 inches;  November  1st,  4 inches. 


BIOLOGICAL  NOTES. 


29 


Roccus  lineatus,  Striped  Bass. 

Three  specimens  of  striped  bass  were  caught  in  the  Fish  Commission  trap  on  July  21, 1900.  The 
largest  weighed  20  pounds.  Several  others  were  taken  by  the  summer  sportsmen  with  hook  and  line, 
and  at  Cuttyhunk  they  were  reported  as  large  and  more  plentiful  than  usual. 

Cynoscion  regalis,  Squeteague. 

The  first  squeteague  of  the  season  were  taken  at  Cuttyhunk  on  May  5,  1900,  and  nine  days  later 
they  reached  Woods  Hole.  The  water  temperature  at  this  time  was  50°  F.  Compared  with  previous 
years,  the  arrival  was  a little  later  than  usual;  but  since  the  temperature  of  the  water  during  the  spring 
was  below  the  average,  this  was  to  be  expected.  As  a rule,  the  first  run  of  squeteague,  like  that  of 
other  migratory  species,  is  composed  of  large  adult  fish,  while  the  yearlings  appear  about  two  weeks 
later.  During  the  spring  of  1900,  however,  the  reverse  was  true,  small  fish,  weighing  from  2 to  3 
pounds,  coming  first.  Toward  the  last  of  May,  during  the  run  of  large  fish,  one  was  caught  at 
Cuttyhunk  which  weighed  14  pounds.  The  abundance  of  the  squeteague  was  remarkable.  In  the 
Menemsha  traps  alone  10,000  were  taken  in  a single  day  (July  31);  and,  in  fact,  they  were  so  plenty 
throughout  the  season  that  they  ruined  their  own  market  and  did  not  bring  enough  to  pay  the 
shipping  bills.  Many  of  the  Vineyard  fishermen  retained  the  fish  in  the  pockets,  waiting  for  better 
prices,  but  a heavy  northeast  storm  tore  up  the  nets  in  the  fall,  and  most  of  the  summer’s  catch 
was  lost. 

Observations  on  the  first  appearance  of  the  fry,  their  growth,  and  their  abundance  have  been 
continued.  The  results  are  given  in  the  following  table,  although  much  more  complete  data  have 
been  collected  by  Professor  Eigenmann.  The  rate  of  growth  corresponded  with  that  of  the  blue-fish: 


Date. 

Locality. 

Length. 

Julv  25 

Wareham  River 

Inches. 

1. 25  to  2. 25 

Very  scarce. 

Aug.  2 

do 

2 

3 

Do. 

Aug.  5 

Red  Bridge,  Providence  River  

1.25 

2.25 

Abundant. 

Aug.  22 

Wareham  River  (farther  up) 

3.75 

5 

Very  scarce. 

Oct.  5 

Acushnet  River 

6 

7.25 

Do. 

When,  a few  years  ago,  a bill  to  prohibit  all  net  fishing  in  Buzzards  Bay  was  presented  to  the 
Massachusetts  legislature,  one  of  the  strongest  arguments  of  its  supporters  was  that  the  bay  was  the 
natural  spawning-ground  of  the  food-fishes,  and  therefore  their  decrease  was  attributed  to  excessive 
trap  fishing.  A careful  study  of  the  records  of  the  movements  of  the  squeteague  for  the  last  thirty 
years  has  revealed  some  striking  facts  which  have  an  important  bearing  on  this  question.  Notwith- 
standing protective  legislation,  it  is  very  evident  that  breeding  squeteague  have  ceased  to  enter 
Buzzards  Bay  in  any  considerable  numbers;  for  while  twenty  years  ago  the  young  could  be  seined 
almost  anywhere  in  the  vicinity  of  Woods  Hole  (at  Great  Harbor,  Hadley  Harbor,  Nobska  Beach,  and 
Quisset),  there  are  now  only  two  localities  in  Buzzards  Bay  and  Vineyard  Sound  where  they  are 
found — at  Ware  ham,  near  the  head  of  the  bay,  and  in  Acushnet,  River,  on  the  New  Bedford  side. 
Even  in  these  places  their  numbers  are  greatly  reduced. 

The  former  abundance  of  the  young  was  due  in  all  probability  to  the  fact  that  the  adults  spawned 
in  the  open  bay  or  outside  waters,  and  since  the  buoyant  eggs  were  subject  to  the  influence  of  winds 
and  currents,  they  were  carried  hither  and  thither  until  finally  lodged  in  the  protected  harbors  and 
inlets.  Such  conditions  would  tend  to  distribute  the  eggs  more  or  less  uniformly  along  the  shores  of 
the  bay,  and  the  fry  would  not  be  restricted  to  the  present  areas.  On  the  other  hand,  with  the 
remarkable  increase  of  the  adults,  if  they  still  continued  to  spawn  in  the  same  places,  there  would 
have  been  a correspondingly  large  increase  of  the  young. 

It  may  be  argued  that  the  spawn  is  deposited  in  the  same  places  as  formerly,  but  that  the  eggs 
merely  drift  into  the  estuaries — Wareham  River  and  Acushnet  River.  But  this  does  not  seem  at 
all  probable,  since  the  outward  current  in  these  rivers  is  stronger  and  longer  continued  than  the 
inward.  A more  plausible  explanation  is  that  the  few  adults  entering  these  rivers  find  conditions 
favorable,  and  therefore  spawn,  while  the  great  majority  of  the  fish  seek  other  localities.  The  Rhode 
Island  fishermen  who  control  the  sea  traps  off  Seaconnet  and  Newport  say  that  whereas  years  ago 
they  used  to  catch  plenty  of  squeteague  at  the  mouth  of  the  bay,  very  few  are  ever  seen  there  now. 
They  believe  that  the  fish  no  longer  run  in  offshore  waters,  but  enter  the  bays  and  inlets.  Substantiating 


30 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


this  is  the  extraordinary  abundance  of  the  fry  during  the  past  few  years  in  Narragansett  Bay,  particu- 
larly in  its  upper  part,  near  Red  Bridge  and  India  Point.  Even  here  great  numbers  of  them  were  killed 
in  1900  by Peridinium.  For  two  weeks  or  more  in  September  this  small  protozoan  infested  the  waters 
of  the  upper  bay  in  such  numbers  that  the  water  was  almost  a blood-red  color,  and  as  a result  young 
squeteague,  together  with  fish  of  several  other  species,  were  piled  in  windrows  on  the  shore.  There  is 
but  one  conclusion  to  be  drawn  from  the  foregoing  facts — the  squeteague  has  changed  its  spawning- 
grounds  within  a few  years,  and,  judging  from  the  abundance  of  the  young,  Narragansett  Bay  is  the 
more  favorable  locality  at  the  present  time. 

The  study  of  the  yearly  records  has  also  shown  that  a definite  relation  exists  between  the 
abundance  of  squeteague  and  blue-fish.  Twenty  years  ago  100  squeteague  were  considered  a remarkable 
catch,  but  now  it  is  not  uncommon  to  take  4,000  at  a single  draft  of  a trap.  On  the  other  hand, 
twenty  years  ago  blue-fish  were  so  plentiful  that  barrels  of  them  were  shipped  daily,  while  in  1900  not 
over  50  were  recorded  from  the  bay  or  sound.  There  can  be  but  little  doubt  that  the  marvelous  increase 
of  the  squeteague  has  been  made  possible  by  the  disappearance  of  one  of  its  most  dangerous  enemies — 
the  savage  blue-fish. 

Tautogolabrus  adspersus,  Gunner. 

Barrels  of  cunners  were  killed  by  the  extreme  cold  of  February,  1901,  and  were  seen  floating  on 
the  surface  with  the  tautog. 

Tautoga  onitis,  Tautog. 

Fewer  tautog  were  caught  in  the  vicinity  of  Woods  Hole  than  last  year.  In  fact,  many  liook- 
and-line  fishermen  were  compelled  to  seek  other  employment,  but  just  the  reverse  obtained  in  Narra- 
gansett Bay.  According  to  the  report  of  the  Rhode  Island  Fish  Commission  for  1900,  the  tautog  in 
Narragansett  Bay  were  very  abundant  and  of  large  size,  some  weighing  13  pounds.  Capt.  Isaac  L. 
Church,  of  Tiverton,  R.  I.,  who  has  followed  tautog  fishing  for  many  years,  says  that  they  are  as 
abundant  now  as  they  ever  were.  Young  tautog  were  numerous  along  all  shores  during  the  summer, 
but  more  particularly  at  Katama  Bay,  where  they  actually  occurred  in  shoals.  For  several  days  in 
February,  1901,  tautog  were  found  floating  on  the  surface,  evidently  killed  by  the  anchor  ice,  which 
formed  nearly  all  the  month.  The  outlook  for  next  season’s  fishing  is  less  promising  than  ever. 

Lagocephalus  lsevigatus,  Smooth  Puffer. 

During  1900  several  specimens  of  this  occasional  visitor  were  taken  in  the  vicinity  of  Woods  Hole. 
In  the  fall  two  adults  were  caught  in  a trap  at  Cedar  Tree  Neck.  The  Rhode  Island  Fish  Commission 
reports  three  specimens  from  Narragansett  Bay;  the  largest,  taken  October  4 at  Tiverton,  R.  I.,  weighed 
10  pounds;  the  other  two  were  caught  the  week  before  at  the  mouth  of  the  bay.  The  smooth  puffers 
are  common  in  the  South,  but  very  rare  north  of  Cape  Hatteras.  Their  average  length  is  2 feet.  The 
young  from  2.5  to  4 inches  long  were  found  by  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission  in  the  waters  of  Porto  Rico. 

Pollachius  virens,  Pollock. 

During  the  spring  of  1900  the  young  appeared  as  usual  with  the  small  cod.  Years  ago  the  adults 
were  plenty  in  the  sound,  but  now  only  a few  stragglers  are  seen. 

Microgadus  tomcod,  Tomcod. 

The  tomcod  during  the  winter  of  1900-1901  were  entirely  free  from  parasites  (Lernxonema  radiata) . 
Some  seasons  nearly  all  the  fish  are  infected. 

Gadus  callarias,  Cod. 

The  number  of  cod  taken  in  Vineyard  Sound  during  the  fall  of  1900  was  unprecedented.  Off 
Bowbell  Ledge  the  fishermen  gave  up  fishing  for  tautog  and  made  cod  fishing  their  business.  The  cod 
were  all  plump  and  in  good  condition,  weighing  from  4 to  20  pounds.  In  Great  Harbor,  where  the 
cod  seldom  enter,  they  were  so  plenty  that  10  specimens  were  taken  in  the  fyke  nets  in  October,  15 
were  taken  in  November,  and  45  in  December.  With  one  exception  these  were  good  marketable  fish, 
weighing  from  4 to  16  pounds,  and  were  quite  different  from  the  thin,  flabby  specimens  occasionally 
taken  here.  Five  were  spawners. 

That  the  cod  have  not  decreased  off  Nantucket  is  evidenced  by  the  remarkable  catch  made  by  the 
Grampus  in  this  locality  during  November  and  December,  1900.  More  than  3,000  brood  cod  were 
brought  back  to  the  station  for  the  hatching  season.  The  cod  were  equally  abundant  around  No  Man’s 


BIOLOGICAL  NOTES. 


31 


Land,  but  the  fisheries  were  a failure  because  of  the  scarcity  of  bait.  Herring  were  not  running  and 
quahogs  could  not  be  obtained  in  sufficient  numbers. 

On  January  30,  1901,  500  to  600  cod,  of  which  48  had  been  stripped  and  the  remainder  were  barren 
fish,  were  left  in  the  cars  to  be  tagged.  On  the  following  day  there  was  a fall  of  snow  and  the  temper- 
ature of  the  water  began  to  fall  from  31°  F.  and  for  the  greater  part  of  February  remained  at  28°  F. 
Ice  was  formed  in  the  harbor  and  all  the  cod  died.  This  would  go  to  show  that  the  cod  adapt  them- 
selves to  abrupt  changes  in  temperature  by  migrating  to  deeper  water. 

Rhinonemus  cimbrius,  Four-bearded  Rockling. 

Young  rockling  were  taken  in  the  surface  towings  at  the  Fish  Commission  wharf  from  June  27  to 
July  6,  1900.  They  formed  in  schools  in  the  eddies  around  the  wall  and  were  mixed  with  young 
sticklebacks  ( Gasterosteus  bispinosus).  Their  length  was  0.5  to  1.375  inches.  The  rockling  is  found  in 
all  North  Atlantic  waters,  and  although  it  is  said  to  be  abundant  in  Massachusetts  Bay,  only  two 
specimens  have  been  reported  from  Woods  Hole.  One  measuring  10  inches  in  length  was  speared  in 
the  Eel  Pond  January  5,  1889;  the  second  was  caught  in  Little  Harbor  also  in  the  winter,  but  there  is 
no  record  of  the  exact  date.  The  young  have  never  before  been  taken  here. 

Hippoglossus  hippoglossus,  Halibut. 

On  April  16,  1900,  there  was  brought  into  Newport  a halibut  weighing  100  pounds,  which  with 
others  was  caught  off  Block  Island  by  cod-fishermen.  Halibut  were  formerly  abundant  in  this  locality 
and  in  Vineyard  Sound,  but  none  have  been  taken  for  several  years.  This  catch  leads  one  to  hope 
that  this  valuable  food-fish  may  return  to  its  old  grounds. 

Pseudopleuronectes  americanus,  Flat-fish. 

An  illustration  of  the  effect  of  a sudden  fall  of  temperature  on  the  behavior  of  fish  was  given  in 
February  and  March,  1900.  The  flat-fish  had  been  plentiful  both  at.  Great  Harbor  and  Waquoit  Bay 
throughout  February  up  to  the  23d,  when  they  entirely  disappeared,  and  none  were  taken  again  until 
March  6.  The  records  show  that  after  the  23d  the  temperature  of  the  water  dropped  from  35°  F.  to 
29°  F.,  and  that  on  March  6 it  rose  again  to  32°  F. 

The  normal  breeding  season  of  flat-fish  is  from  February  to  May,  and  it  is  very  unusual  to  find 
them  with  mature  sexual  products  before  January;  but  in  1900  seven  specimens  of  the  hatch  of  1898, 
caught  in  Eel  Pond  on  November  20,  had  ripe  milt.  Again,  on  November  27,  three  out  of  four  flat- 
fish caught  in  a fyke  net  set  in  Great  Harbor  were  ripe  milters,  and  on  the  following  day,  at  the  same 
place,  two  females  were  taken,  swollen  with  eggs,  and  in  such  condition  that  had  they  been  taken  in 
February  they  probably  would  have  spawned  within  two  days.  Never  before  have  flat-fish  with  ripe 
sperm  been  taken  so  early,  and  it  is  possible  that  the  unusually  warm  water  of  October  and  November, 
1900,  may  have  caused  this  premature  development  of  eggs  and  milt.  The  last  flat-fish  with  ripe  eggs 
for  the  season  of  1899-1900  was  taken  April  25.  Although  it  is  generally  believed  that  flat-fish  extrude 
their  eggs  only  at  night,  on  March  14,1901,  a large  fish,  which  had  been  in  the  fish-boxes  at  the 
hatchery  a day  or  two,  spawned  in  the  middle  of  the  afternoon. 

In  regard  to  the  “black-bellied”  fish,  the  report  of  the  Rhode  Island  Fish  Commission  for  1900 
states:  “ It  is  an  extremely  interesting  fact  that  the  dark-bellied  variety,  which  gradually  came  into 
notice  several  years  ago  and  attained  the  maximum  of  its  abundance  in  1898,  is  on  the  decline.  Last 
season,  according  to  a trustworthy  estimate,  only  about  4 per  cent  were  colored  on  the  under  surface, 
while  three  years  ago  at  least  33  per  cent  were  so  colored.”  Among  300  flat-fish  from  Waquoit  Bay 
this  season  (1900-1901)  there  was  not  a single  specimen  of  the  black-bellied  variety,  although  last 
year  Ur.  Bumpus  reported  several.  This  variation  seems  to  have  completely  disappeared. 

A young  flat-fish,  1.5  inches  long,  was  seined  at  Katama  Bay  August  15,  1900;  the  posterior  two- 
thirds  of  its  upper  surface  was  devoid  of  pigment,  and  a distinct  line  separated  the  two  areas.  The 
scales  were  different  in  structure  from  the  normal,  and  the  presence  of  a deep  notch  on  the  dorsal  side 
of  the  tail  suggested  that  the  lack  of  pigment  may  have  been  produced  through  injury  or  disease, 
although  the  surface  was  apparently  free  from  any  lesion.  This  is  the  first  time  that  this  variation 
has  been  observed,  although  Mr.  Edwards  has  seined  in  the  vicinity  of  Woods  Hole  for  thirty  years. 
Lophius  piscatorius,  Goose-fish. 

During  the  fall  of  1900,  goose-fish  were  very  abundant  in  Great  Harbor,  and  late  in  the  fall 
several  large  ones  were  washed  ashore.  This  is  of  considerable  interest,  because  the  fish  is  not  often 
seen  near  Woods  Hole,  although  numerous  at  Menemsha  and  Cuttyhunk,  where  the  shores  are 
frequently  lined  with  their  bleached  skeletons. 


32 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


ADDITIONS  TO  THE  FISH  FAUNA  IN  1900. 

By  Hugh  M.  Smith. 

The  already  surprisingly  large  fish  fauna  of  the  Woods  Hole  region  was 
augmented  by  four  southern  species  during  the  fall  of  1900.  These  bring  the 
total  number  of  species  known  from  the  vicinity  to  213.  Following  are  the  species 
new  to  the  region: 

Exocoetus  rondeletii  (Cuvier  & Valenciennes).  Flying-fish. 

This  common  species  of  the  West  Indies  and  the  Mediterranean  has  been  recorded  from  United 
States  waters  only  in  Florida.  A specimen  7.25  inches  long  was  caught  in  a trap  at  Menemsha  Bight, 
October  13. 

Ocyurus  chrysurus  (Bloch).  Yellow-tail. 

The  normal  range  of  this  species  is  southern  Florida  to  South  America.  It  is  an  abundant  food- 
fish  at  Key  West.  On  October  4,  an  example  5.5  inches  long  was  seined  in  Katama  Bay. 

Scarus  croicensis  (Bloch).  Parrot-fisli. 

This  is  a common  West  Indian  species,  the  northern  limit  of  whose  known  range  heretofore  has 
been  Key  West.  Two  specimens  3 inches  long  were  taken  in  Katama  Bay,  October  20,  the  water 
temperature  being  57°  F. 

Sparisoma  flavescens  (Bloch  & Schneider).  Mad  Parrot-fisli. 

This,  the  commonest  species  of  the  genus,  is  abundant  at  Key  West  and  throughout  the  West 
Indies.  It  was  not  known  north  of  Florida  until  a specimen  6 inches  long  was  found  at  Woods  Hole 
on  November  13;  it  had  been  benumbed  by  the  cold  and  was  picked  up  on  the  shore  of  Buzzards  Bay. 


NOTES  ON  THE  SUBTROPICAL  FISHES  OBSERVED  IN  1900. 

By  Hugh  M.  Smith. 

The  season  as  a whole  was  unfavorable,  and  compared  with  1899  there  was  a 
scarcity  of  tropical  species.  No  gulf  weed  was  seen  in  any  of  the  inshore  waters,  and 
there  was  little  wind  from  the  direction  of  the  Gulf  Stream.  Nevertheless,  some  rare 
fishes  were  found,  and  a number  of  species  which  until  1899  had  been  considered  very 
uncommon  were  taken  in  abundance.  Most  of  the  collecting  was  done  in  Katama 
Kay,  which  the  previous  season’s  experience  had  shown  to  be  the  most  favorable 
locality  in  the  vicinity  of  Woods  Hole,  and  only  in  this  body  of  water  were  any  of 
the  typical  southern  fishes  found.  Large  blue-fish  and  flounders  were  abundant  at 
the  inlet  of  the  bay  through  the  summer,  and  may  have  picked  up  many  of  the  small 
gaily-colored  stragglers  from  the  south. 

Clupanodon  pseudohispanicus  (Poey).  Spanish  Sardine. 

There  was  a sudden  fall  of  temperature  on  November  16,  and  a number  of  these  fish,  5 to  6 inches 
long,  were  picked  up  on  the  shore  in  a benumbed  condition;  these  were  the  first  specimens  observed 
in  four  or  five  years. 

Holocentrus  sp.  Squirrel-fish. 

One  very  small  specimen,  apparently  representing  the  same  species  as  the  one  taken  in  1899,  was 
obtained  August  28. 

Epinephelus  niveatus  (Cuvier  & Valenciennes).  Snowy  Grouper. 

Thirty-five  small  specimens  were  seined  in  Katama  Bay  on  nine  occasions  between  August  15  and 
October  26.  The  largest  number  taken  during  one  day  was  12,  on  September  8. 

Epinephelus  morio  (Cuvier  & Valenciennes).  Red  Grouper. 

A small  specimen,  similar  in  size  and  appearance  to  those  obtained  in  the  same  locality  in  1899, 
was  taken  September  26. 


BIOLOGICAL  NOTES. 


83 


Mycteroperca  bonaci  (Poey).  Marbled  Rock-fish. 

One  specimen,  3 inches  long,  was  taken  August  15. 

Mycteroperca  venenosa  (Linnaeus).  Yellow-finned  Grouper. 

Eight  small  specimens  were  secured  on  four  different  days  (August  8 and  28,  September  8, 
and  October  20). 

Pseudopriacanthus  altus  Gill.  Short  Big-eye. 

Comparatively  rare,  only  9 being  observed  between  August  15  and  September  8,  whereas  in  the 
previous  year  over  100  were  taken. 

Neomaenis  griseus  (Linnaeus).  Gray  Snapper. 

Five  specimens,  the  largest  1.875  inches  long,  were  seined  in  Katama  Bay  on  August  29.  The 
general  color  is  pale,  with  6 or  8 narrow,  dark,  longitudinal  stripes;  spinous  dorsal  tin  dark,  with  a 
sharply  defined  blackish  bar  involving  the  distal  part  of  the  fin,  the  extreme  edge  being  white.  Only 
two  specimens,  taken  in  September,  1897,  were  previously  obtained  in  this  region.  The  species  appears 
to  range  normally  as  far  north  as  Chesapeake  Bay. 

Neomaenis  apodus  (Walbaum).  Schoolmaster. 

There  has  been  only  one  previous  record  of  the  occurrence  of  this  snapper  north  of  Florida — 
namely,  September  20,  1888,  when  an  example  5.5  inches  long  was  taken  at  Woods  Hole.  On  August 
29  and  September  11,  1900,  two  specimens,  1 inch  and  1.5  inches  long,  respectively,  were  caught  in 
Katama  Bay.  The  general  color  of  the  body  is  pale  yellow,  with  6 to  8 dark  crossbands;  a dark  line 
extends  from  snout  through  eye  to  upper  end  of  gill  opening;  several  narrow  dark  lines  run  on  head 
posterior  to  eye;  anal  fin  red.  , 

Neomaenis  blackfordi  (Goode  & Bean) . Red  Snapper. 

Nine  specimens,  the  largest  under  2 inches  long,  were  seined  September  7,  September  11,  and 
October  20.  Their  colors  in  life  were  as  follows:  General  color,  red  like  the  adult  fish;  body  marked 
by  about  7 double  dark  crossbands;  in  the  crossband  nearest  the  junction  of  the  two  parts  of  the  dorsal 
fin  is  a large  jet-black  blotch  extending  from  the  fin  to  below  the  lateral  line;  spinous  dorsal  dusky; 
soft  dorsal  with  a dusky  median  zone  and  a dark  edge;  caudal  pale,  with  a dark  narrow  border.  The 
only  other  red  snapper  recorded  for  this  region  is  a specimen  'weighing  8.5  pounds,  taken  in 
October,  1890. 

Neomaenis  analis  (Cuvier  & Valenciennes).  Mutton-fish. 

Twenty  specimens  of  this  snapper  were  taken,  between  August  28  and  October  12,  the  largest 
being  2 inches  long.  These  resemble  the  young  red  snapper  in  being  banded  and  having  a black 
lateral  spot;  the  bands,  however,  are  rather  broader  and  more  sharply  defined,  and  the  spot  is  smaller, 
less  distinct,  and  does  not  extend  to  the  median  line  of  the  back.  This  species  was  regarded  as  very 
rare  until  1899,  when  more  than  20  small  examples  were  observed. 

Chaetodon  ocellatus  Bloch.  Butterfly-fish. 

This  species,  formerly  a rare  straggler,  must  now  be  regarded  as  common,  in  the  light  of  the 
experience  of  the  past  few  years.  In  1900  123  specimens  were  taken;  the  fish  being  found  in  Katama 
Bay  on  13  different  occasions  between  August  15  and  October  26;  26  were  seined  on  September  8,  and 
21  on  October  3. 

Chaetodon  bricei  Smith.  Butterfly -fish. 

About  35  were  observed  on  ten  different  days,  in  company  with  the  preceding  species. 

Teuthis  coeruleus  (Bloch  & Schneider).  Blue  Tang. 

Teuthis  hepatus  Linnaeus.  Tang. 

Teuthis  bahianus  (Castlenau).  Tang. 

A few  specimens  of  each  of  these  species  were  taken  in  August,  September,  and  October.  They 
were  last  observed  on  October  3,  when  one  of  each  was  secured. 

Lactophrys  tricornis  (Linnaeus).  Cow-fish. 

Two  specimens  only  0. 25  of  an  inch  long  were  taken  October  4. 

Scorpaena  plumieri  Bloch.  Scorpion-fish. 

Two  small  specimens  were  obtained  October  20  and  26. 


F.  C.  B,  1901—3 


Contributions  from  the  Biological  Laboratory  of  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission, 
Woods  Hole,  Massachusetts. 


DESCRIPTION  OF  A NEW  OCEANIC  FISH  FOUND  OFF  SOUTHERN  NEW 

ENGLAND. 


By  CARL  H.  EIGBNMANN, 
Professor  of  Zoology , University  of  Indiana. 


Psenes  edwardsii,  sp.  now 

Head  3;  depth  2;  I),  xii-i,  30;  A.  in,  28;  V.  i,  5;  lateral  line  about  140.  Depth 
of  head  over  middle  of  eye  little  less  than  its  length;  eye  1 in  snout,  3.6  in  head,  1.4 
in  interorbital;  width  of  body  at  axils  2.5  in  length  of  head;  maxillary  reaching  front 
of  eye;  no  adipose  lid;  top  of  head  fatty,  with  few  pores;  pectoral  broadly  rounded, 


Psenes  edwardsii. 

1.5  in  head;  ventral  shorter  than  head  by  half  diameter  of  eye;  highest  dorsal  spine 
2 in  head;  highest  dorsal  ray  1.T5  in  head.  Translucent;  back  thickly  covered  with 
pigment  cells;  these  extend  below  the  lateral  line,  and  along  base  of  anal;  abdominal 
region  entirely  free  from  pigment;  spinous  dorsal,  ventrals,  and  caudal  dark;  other 
tins  dusky;  a dark  band  on  the  soft  dorsal  and  anal  just  beyond  the  scaly  base. 


36 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Type  (No.  4974:5,  U.S.N.M.),  a single  specimen,  90  mm.  long,  taken  about  July  28, 
1900,  by  the  schooner  Grampus,  from  under  a medusa,  30  miles  south  of  Newport, 
Rhode  Island.  This  species  is  evidently  closely  related  to  Psenes  pellucidus,  from 
Avhich  it  differs  in  the  longer  snout,  smaller  eye,  fewer  fin  rays,  rounded  fins,  etc. 

I take  great  pleasure  in  associating  with  this  species  the  name  of  Mr.  Vinal  N. 
Edwards,  who  has  been  connected  with  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission  as  collector  since 
its  establishment  thirty  years  ago,  and  who  assisted  Prof.  S.  F.  Baird  as  collector 
before  the  establishment  of  the  Commission. 

The  genus  Psenes  is  distinguished  by  Goode  & Bean  (Oceanic  Ichthyology,  p.  219) 
from  Nomeus  and  other  genera  of  the  Nomeidce  by  “Pectorals  long,  surpassing  ven- 
trals  * * but  in  their  description  and  figure  of  Psenes  pelUtcidus  the  ventrals 

are  given  as  5 mm.  longer  than  the  pectorals.  The  first  dorsal  of  Psenes  is  said  to 
possess  6 to  10  spines,  while  Psenes  pellucidus  is  figured  as  possessing  12  spines.  In 
the  description  of  the  family  of  Nomeidce  the  palate  is  said  to  possess  teeth,  while  in 
their  description  of  the  genus  Psenes  teeth  are  described  for  the  jaws  only.  These 
mistakes  are  repeated  by  Jordan  & Evermann  in  The  Fishes  of  North  and  Middle 
America  (pp.  948-950).  In  their  synopsis  of  the  families  of  the  Scombroidei , Jordan 
& Evermann  (p.  863)  distinguish  the  Norneidm  from  the  Stromateidce  by  the  absence 
in  the  latter  of  tooth-like  processes  in  the  oesophagus.  The  specimen  of  Psenes 
under  consideration  has  an  enlarged  oesophagus  with  denticles  like  those  found  in  the 
Stromateidce.  As  far  as  I am  able  to  make  out  in  small  specimens  of  Nomms  the 
oesophagus  is  similarly  modified.  The  Nomeidce  are  readily  distinguished  from 
the  Stromateidce  by  their  large  number  of  vertebrae. 


Contributions  from  the  Biological  Laboratory  of  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission, 
Woods  Hole,  Massachusetts. 


THE  EGG  AND  DEVELOPMENT  OE  THE  CONGER  EEL. 


By  CARL  H.  EIGENMANN, 

Prof essor  of  Zoology , University  of  Indiana. 


On  July  31,  1900,  at  10  o’clock  a.  in.,  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission  schooner 
Grampus,  while  on  the  tile-fish  grounds  about  30  miles  south  of  South  Shoal,  secured 
some  pelagic  fish  eggs.  These  egg's  were  collected  by  Dr.  Porter  E.  Sargent. 
Among  them  were  many  which  he  supposed  to  be  the  eggs  of  the  tile-fish,  which 
they  resembled  in  many  respects.1  They  were  brought  to  the  Woods  Hole  labora- 
tory on  August  1.  It  was  soon  seen  that  they  were  the  eggs  of  some  eel,  and  since 
no  eel  eggs  had  been  observed  in  American  waters,  in  fact,  none  outside  a limited 
region  in  the  Mediterranean,  it  seemed  doubly  desirable  to  follow  their  development. 

When  the  eggs  were  secured,  the  gastrula  was  said  to  cover  about  half  of  the 
yolk.  On  August  1 the  tail  was  well  developed.  During  the  night  between  August 
2 and  3 many  of  them  hatched.  The  last  one  died  in  the  night  between  August  13 
and  11.  The  eggs  were  divided  into  two  lots  on  August  1.  Some  were  left  in  running 
sea  water,  others  placed  in  a shallow  dish  of  standing  water.  Since,  on  August  2, 
many  of  those  in  the  running  water  had  died  while  none  of  those  in  standing  water 
perished,  they  were  all  placed  in  standing  water,  which  was  occasionally  changed. 

Before  describing  these  eggs  more  in  detail,  a brief  review  of  the  eel-development 
question  may  be  given.  The  ancient  history  is  given  fully  by  Jacoby.2  The  modern 
history  begins  with  the  discovery  of  Raffaele,3  who  in  1888  described  five  species  of 
pelagic  fish  eggs  secured  during  August,  September,  October,  and  November,  which, 
on  account  of  the  character  of  the  larva?  they  produced,  he  referred  to  species  of  eels. 
This  is  the  first  description  of  the  developing  eggs  of  any  eel-like  fishes.  The  common 
characters  of  the  eggs  described  by  Raffaele  are:  (1)  Their  large  size;  (2)  the  large 
peri  vitelline  space;  (3)  the  delicate  membrane  lacking  pore  canals  and  usually  with 
iridescent  reflections;  (1)  the  vesicular  yolk.  They  differed  from  each  other  in  size 
and  in  the  possession  or  absence  of  an  oil -sphere. 

The  eggs  and  larva?  derived  from  the  eggs  secured  by  Raffaele.  were  characterized 
as  follows:  No.  6 had  a large  peri  vitelline  space,  diameter  of  the  eggs  2 to  2.5  mm., 
diameter  of  thevitellus  1.20  to  1.50  mrn.,1  to  3 oil-spheres  of  0.30  to.  0.35  mm.  The 
larva  developing  from  this  possessed  72  (or  73)  abdominal  segments.  No.  7 had  a 

'Ripe  eggs  taken  from  a tile-fish  and  preserved  in  formalin  measure  as  follows:  The  yellow  oil-sphere  0.2  mm.,  the 
yolk  1.09  mm.,  from  membrane  to  membrane  1.25  mm.  The  eggs  are  much  smaller  than  those  of  the  eel  here  described. 

2 Report  U.  S.  Risk  Commission,  1879. 

3Le  Uova  Galleggianti  e le  Larve  dei  Teleostei  nel  Golfo  di  Napoli.  Mittheilungen  aus  der  Zool.  Station  zu  Neapel, 
8,  pp.  1-84,  tav.  1-5. 


37 


88 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


diameter  of  3 mm.,  6 to  12  oil-spheres  which  occupied  the  posterior  (ventro-anterior 
in  the  figure)  part  of  the  vitellus  when  the  embryo  developed;  59  (60?)  abdominal 
segments  were  developed.  No.  8 had  a diameter  of  2 mm.  and  about  30  oil-spheres; 
the  larva  had  72  (73?)  abdominal  segments.  No.  9 had  a diameter  of  2 mm.,  the  yolk 
attached  to  the  membrane  by  filaments;  when  the  young  developed,  the  oil-sphere 
occupied  an  anterior  position  and  had  the  form  of  a club;  66  (67?)  abdominal 
segments;  larva  much  smaller  than  that  of  No.  6.  No.  10  had  a diameter  of-  2.7 
mm.,  was  without  oil-sphere,  and  yielded  a larva  with  44  (45?)  abdominal  segments. 

All  of  these  were  taken  between  August  and  November,  being  more  abundant  in 
September  and  October.  The  earlier  stages  had  a well-formed  blastodermic  callote. 
The  yolk  becomes  well  constricted  after  the  blastodermic  rim  has  passed  the  equator. 
The  larvae  had  a number  of  characters  in  common,  viz,  an  enormous  fourth  ventricle, 
a large  oesophageal  pouch,  an  elongate  body  with  numerous  abdominal  segments,  the 
position  of  the  anus  about  halfway  to  the  margin  of  the  ventral  fin  fold,  very  large 
and  striking  teeth,  and  a series  of  pigment  spots  along  the  lower  parts  of  the  sides. 

When  the  larva  is  five  or  six  days  old  it  is  slender  and  elongated,  with  a greatly 
compressed  body,  very  transparent,  and  with  little  pigment.  The  vitellus  is  very 
elongated  and  diminishes  from  in  front  backwards.  The  intestine  ends  in  the  ventral 
fin  fold  a short  distance  from  the  body  in  a small  accumulation  of  cells.  The  noto- 
chord is  formed  of  a single  series  of  segments.  The  mouth  opens  during  the  second 
day  after  hatching.  The  teeth  develop  rapidly.  Three  pairs  are  developed  in  the 
upper  jaw.  This  dentition  is  absolutely  exceptional  among  fishes.  Contemporane- 
ously  with  the  development  of  the  mouth  the  choroidal  pigment  and  five  or  six  black 
pigmented  spots  form  along  the  body.  No  noteworthy  changes  take  place  between  the 
fourth  and  fifth  days  after  hatching.  Beyond  this  time  Raffaele  was  unable  to  rear  the 
eggs.  He  supposed  these  eggs  to  be  those  of  eels,  without  more  closely  identifying 
them.  Grassi,  in  his  epoch-making  researches  in  eel  development,1  identified  Raffaele’s 
egg  No.  10,  without  oil-spheres  and  with  a diameter  of  2.7  mm.,  as  that  of  the  com- 
mon European  eel,  Anguilla  vulgaris.  While  unable  to  keep  eggs  like  those  described 
by  Raffaele — which  he  secured  at  Naples — alive  for  many  days,  he  showed  that  the 
newly  hatched  larvae  described  by  Raffaele  have  essentially  the  character  of  Legyto- 
cephali.  He  states  that  females  of  eels  can  only  mature  in  very  profound  depths,  i.  e., 
at  least  a depth  of  500  meters.  The  male  can  mature  in  shallow  water: 

Fertilization  takes  place  at  great  depths;  the  eggs  float  in  the  water;  nevertheless  they  remain  at 
a great  depth  in  the  sea,  and  only  exceptionally,  for  unknown  reasons,  some  of  them  mount  to  the  sur- 
face. From  the  egg  issue  rapidly  a prse-larva,  which  becomes  a larva  {Leptocephalus)  with  the  anus  and 
urinary  opening  near  the  tip  of  the  tail.  The  larva  then  becomes  a hemi-larva,  the  two  apertures 
just  named  moving  their  position  toward  the  anterior  part  of  the  body,  which  becomes  thickened  and 
nearly  round.  By  further  change  the  hemi-larva  assumes  the  definitive  or  adult  form.  The  larva,  as 
well  as  the  hemi-larva,  shows  a length  of  body  much  greater  than  that  exhibited  by  the  young  Murse- 
noid  of  adult  form  into  which  they  are  transformed.  By  keeping  specimens  in  an  aquarium  I was  able 
to  establish  a diminution  of  more  than  4 cm.  during  the  metamorphosis.  With  regard  to  the  greatest 

1Grassi,  B.  The  Reproduction  and  Metamorphosis  of  the  Common  Eel  (Anguilla  vulgaris),  Q.  J.  M.  S.,  vol.  39,  page  371. 

Grassi,  B., and  Calandruccio,  S. 

a.  Ulteriori  ricerche  sulle  raetamorfosi  dei  Murenoidi.  Rend.  Acc.  Lincei,  vr,  p.  43. 

b.  Descrizione  d’  un  Leptocephalus  brevirostris  in  via  di  trasformarsi  in  Anguilla  vulgaris.  L.  C.  pp.  239,  240  (Trans- 

lation in  Nature,  LVi,p.85). 

c.  Reproduzione  e metamorfosi  della  Anguille.  Giorn.  Ital.  Pesca  e Acqui.,  1887,  Nos.  7,  8.  (Abstract  in  Monit.  Zool. 

Ital.,  vin,  pp.  233  and  234.) 


THE  EGG  AND  DEVELOPMENT  OF  THE  CONGER  EEL. 


3V) 


length  which  the  larva  can  attain  in  a given  species,  and  the  amount  of  diminution  which  accompanies 
metamorphosis,  there  are  great  individual  variations. 

Grassi  assumes  that  three  vertebrae  develop  to  correspond  to  the  first  four  proto- 
vertebrae  and  one  for  each  following  protovertebra.  He  “ascertained  in  an  absolute 
manner  that  during  the  metamorphosis  of  the  Muraenoids  the  number  neither  of  the 
myomeres,  nor  of  the  vertebral  arches,  nor  of  the  spinal  ganglia,  is  subjected  to  any 
change.”  He  referred  the  following  Leptocephali  to  their  respective  species: 

Leptocephalus  brevirostris Anguilla  vulgaris. 

Leptocephalus  stenops  (in  part),  morrisii,  punctatus Conger  vulgaris. 

Leptocephalus  haeckeli,  yarreli,  bibroni,  gegenbauri,  koilikeri,  stenops  (in  pariJ.Congromurtena  mystax. 

Leptocephalus  ttenia,  inomatus,  diaphanus Congromuraena  balearica. 

Leptocephalus  kefersteini Numerous  species  of  Ophichthys. 

Leptocephalus  longirostris  and  Hyoprorus  messanensi.s Nettastoma  melanuruni. 

Leptocephalus  oxyrhynchus Saurenchelys  cancrivora. 

The  eggs  described  by  Raffaele  have  all  the  characteristics  of  pelagic  eggs,  and  the 
one  to  be  described  here,  which  is  very  closely  related  to  No.  6 of  Raffaele,  is 
certainly  a typical  pelagic  egg.  Grassi  also  secured  the  eggs  of  eels  on  the  surface  at 
Naples.  Why,  under  the  circumstances,  he  concludes  that  “they  remain  at  great 
depths  in  the  sea,  and  only  exceptionally,  for  unknown  reasons,  some  of  them  mount 
to  the  surface  ” is  not  apparent.  Being  lighter  than  sea  water,  having  oil-spheres,  and 
being  in  all  respects  typical  pelagic  eggs  found  on  the  surface,  we  must  conclude 
that  “if  fertilization  takes  place  at  great  depths”  it  must  be  “only  exceptionally, 
for  unknown  reasons,”  that  they  remain  at  the  great  depths.  The  fact  that  Raffaele 
never  secured  eggs  younger  than  when  the  gastrula  was  well  formed  would  favor  the 
supposition  that  they  were  fertilized  at  a great  depth  and  rose  slowly  in  the  water. 

Cunningham’s  interesting  observations  on  the  conger  eel,  if  they  are  generally 
true  for  eels,  would  account  for  the  fact  that  ripe  females  are  rarely  taken,  and  those 
of  Schmidtlein  and  Hermes  point  against  the  supposition  of  Grassi  that  the  females  of 
eels  in  general  ripen  only  at  depths  of  at  least  500  meters. 

Schmidtlein 1 2 and  Hermes 8 both  noted  that  female  conger  eels  sometimes  died  in 
confinement,  the  result  of  excessive  development  of  ovaries  which  were  not  emptied. 

In  1888  Cunningham3  wrote: 

No  one  has  yet,  I believe,  seen  the  fertilized  egg  of  either  the  eel  or  the  conger,  although  the 
ovaries  and  testes  have  been  recognized  and  described. 

He  had  not  at  that  time  found  a male  conger.  In  a later  paper4  he  gives  a 
general  resume  of  the  work  done  on  the  conger.  He  himself  found  a perfectly  ripe 
male  45  cm.  long  on  December  13.  Its  eyes  were  strikingly  prominent  and  its  mouth 
short  and  broad.  On  December  lb,  among  9 congers  caught,  one  48  cm.  and  one 

1 Schmidtlein,  R. 

Beobachtungen  fiber  Trachtigkeits-  und  Eiablage-Perioden  verschiedner  Seethiere.  Mitth.  aus  der  zool.  Station  su 
Neapel.  I,  p.  135,  1879.  (Young  conger  eels  scarcely  3 cm.  long  are  captured  in  the  middle  of  April.) 

Beobachtungen  fiber  die  Lebensweise  einiger  Seethiere  innerhalb  der  Aquarien  der  zoologischen  Station.  Mitth.  aus 
der  zool.  Station  zu  Neapel.  I,  p.  492.  (Ripe  female  conger  eels  sometimes  come  to  the  surface  and  die  from  the 
presence  of  excessive  numbers  of  ripe  eggs,  which  for  unknown  reasons  are  not  expelled.) 

2 Hermes,  Otto. 

Zoologischer  Anzeiger,  vol.  iv,  1881. 

The  Propagation  of  the  Eel.  Rept.  United  States  Fish  Commission,  1879,  pp.  457-463,  1882.  Translated  from  circula- 
No.  6,  November  25,  1880,  of  the  Deutscher  Fischerei-Verein. 

The  Migration  of  Eels.  Rept.  United  States  Fish  Commission,  1884,  p.  1123,  1888. 

3The  Breeding  of  the  Conger.  Journ.  M.  B.  A.,  old  series,  No.  2,  p.  245,  1888. 

,On  the  Reproduction  and  Development  of  the  Conger.  Journ.  M.  B.  A.,  new  series,  n,  p.  16, 1891. 


40 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


66  cm.  were  males.  The  sexes  can  be  detected  by  the  following  constant  secondary 
sexual  characters:  The  head  in  the  female  from  above  appears  triangular,  in  the  male 
the  snout  is  distinctly  blunter.  In  the 
female  the  snout  is  rounded  in  transec- 
tion, in  the  male  the  surfaces  of  the 
snout  are  flat. 1 During  December,  Jan- 
uary, and  February  Cunningham  col- 
lected 8 male  congers.  The  largest 
female  conger  ceased  to  feed  in  March. 

On  July  24  a few  eggs  were  obtained  by 
squeezing.  These  contained  no  oil- 
spheres  and  sank  in  water  with  a density 
of  1.027.  The  diameter  of  one  after  the 
formation  of  the  perivitelline  space  was 
1.6  mm.  This  female  died  on  Septem- 
ber 10.  Her  ovaries  weighed  7 pounds 
5 ounces.  The  “ovaries  increase  very 
much  in  size  and  weight  during  the  fast- 
ing period  at  the  expense  of  the  rest  of 
the  body,  while  in  the  total  weight  of 
the  fish  a great  reduction  takes  place. 

Each  conger  eel  breeds  only  once  in  a 
lifetime.”  He  calculated  the  eggs  in  another  female  to  be  7,925,280.  Out  of  a total 
number  of  34  congers  11  were  males  and  23  were  females.  That  no  ripe  congers  are 
caught  is  because  they  do  not  feed  for  weeks  before  becoming  ripe. 


Fig.  1. — Outline  of  embryo,  showing  position  in  membrane  and 
shape  of  the  yolk.  August  1. 


Fig.  2. — Outline  of  enlarged  part  of  the 
yolk  and  yolk-sac  of  an  embryo  of 
the  same  age  as  fig.  1 , from  below. 


Fig.  3. — Embryo  freed  from  its  membrane,  showing  beginning 
of  the  constriction  of  yolk  at  its  anterior  end.  August  1. 


The  eggs  secured  by  Dr.  Sargent  measure  2.4  to  2.75  mm.  from  membrane  to 
membrane.2  The  yolk,  as  in  the  eggs  described  by  Raflaele,  is  made  up  of  trans- 


1 In  Nineteenth  Report  of  the  Commission  of  Fisheries  of  New  York,  page  280,  Bean  describes  5 male  eels.  It  is  very 
probable  from  Grassi’s  observations  that  these  were  the  males  of  the  common  eel  in  their  nuptial  dress. 

2 Among  other  eggs  collected  by  Dr.  Sargent  and  preserved  in  formalin  were  six  with  many  of  the  characters  of  eel 
eggs.  They  were  large,  with  a very  large  perivitelline  space,  the  yolk  in  spheres  and  with  one  large  and  a number  of 
smaller  oil-spheres.  These  eggs  were  notably  larger  than  those  brought  home  alive.  They  measure  3 mm.  from  membrane 
to  membrane;  the  yolk  measures  1.75  mm,  or  a little  more.  It  is  possible  that  these  are  identical  with  those  to  be  described. 
The  germ  lies  at  one  side  of  the  egg,  the  oil-sphere  at  the  other. 


THE  EGG  AND  DEVELOPMENT  OF  THE  CONGER  EEL. 


41 


parent  spheres  not  unlike  those  of  the  eggs  of  certain  clupeoids.  There  are  present, 
from  one  to  six  light-yellow  oil-spheres  of  variable  size.  If  more  than  one  are  present, 
then  one  is  always  much  larger  than  any  of  the  others.  The  yolk  measures  1.75  to  2 
mm.  Some  of  the  young  were  found  to  be  hatched  on  the  morning  of  August  3. 


d' 


Fig.  4. — Embryo  freed  from  its  membrane,  showing  continued  constriction  of  anterior  end 
of  yolk  and  general  diminution  of  the  enlarged  anterior  portion  of  yolk  with  the  corre- 
sponding increase  of  caudal  portion  of  yolk.  August  2,  7.30  a.  m. 


Since  many  of  these  developed  gaping  jaws  and  some  others,  which  did  not  hatch  till 
several  days  later,  developed  normally,  it  is  possible  that  the  early  hatching  was 
not  normal,  Raft'aele’s  eggs  hatched  in  five  or  six  days.  He  was  able  to  keep  them 
four  or  five  days  after  hatching.  For  some  time  after  hatching  the  larvae  floated 
with  their  heads  upward — the  probable 
result  of  the  location  of  the  oil-spheres. 

On  August  6 they  had  assumed  a normal 
horizontal  position  and  the  characteristic 
eel-like  progression,  but  the  pectorals 
were  not  yet  used  in  swimming.  Later 
they  were  seen  eeling  their  way  through 
the  water,  not  infrequently  nosing  about 
the  bottom  and  voraciously  seizing  any- 
thing that  came  in  their  wa}f. 

The  characteristic  feature  of  the 
eggs  at  the  time  I began  to  observe  them. 

August  1,  was  the  shape  of  the  yolk. 

The  bulk  of  this  occupied  the  usual  posi- 
tion, but  a narrow  stalk  extended  back 
below  the  alimentary  canal.  The  oil- 
sphere  or  spheres  occupied  the  extreme 
anterior  part  of  the  yolk  1 (figs.  1 and  2). 

The  further  history  of  the  yolk  in  this 
species  is  unique  among  fishes  and  not 
sufficiently  emphasized  by  Raffaele.  In 

fig.  3 it  is  seen  that  the  yolk  is  no  longer  rounded  anteriorly,  but  that  it  ends  j n a 
marked  protuberance  and  that  the  oil-sphere  lies  in  this.  The  general  mass  of  the 
yolk  still  retains  the  original  shape  and  distribution.  The  anterior  protuberance 
now  becomes  longer  and  at  the  same  time  narrower,  so  that  the  oil-sphere  loses  its 
rotundity  and  becomes  elongate  (fig.  4).  At  the  same  time  the  general  mass  of  the 


Fig.  5. — An  embryo,  of  the  same  stage  as  Fig.  4,  in  its  mem- 
brane, from  below. 


1 All  drawings  were  made  from  living  specimens,  or  such  as  had  just  been  killed  by  formalin, 
alimentary  canal;  fv,  fourth  ventricle;  ylk,  yolk;  l,  liver;  h,  heart;  o,  oil-spheres. 


In  the  drawings,  al, 


42 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


yolk  diminishes  rapidly  in  the  yolk-sac,  while  in  the  elongated  pouch  along  the 
ventral  side  of  the  alimentary  canal  no  diminution  is  evident.  On  the  contrary,  there 
is  an  apparent  increase;  the  entire  yolk-sac  becomes  notably  longer  with  the  increase 
in  the  length  of  the  body.  Very  soon  (figs.  6 and  7)  the  oil-spheres,  much  elon- 
gated, with  a small  surrounding- 
mass,  are  all  that  remains  as  a 
spindle-shaped  figure  (fig.  6)  in 
the  yolk-sac. 

The  yolk-sac  does  not  at  once 
lose  its  shape  and  bulk,  but  serves 
as  an  unusually  large  pericardial 
chamber  which  is  equaled  only  in 
the  practically  yolkless  Cymato - 
gaster.  On  August  5 the  yolk 
along  the  alimentary  canal  had 
suffered  little  diminution,  and  its 
outlines  were  quite  regular  (figs. 

8 and  9).  On  August  6 this  part 
of  the  yolk  had  become  constricted 
in  places,  the  outlines  being  less 
regular  (fig.  10).  The  yolk  had 
become  yellowish  in  color  and 
more  fluid  than  vesicular.  On  the  following  day  the  constriction  had  deepened,  and 
on  August  11  the  remains  of  the  yolk  were  located  in  a series  of  minute  globule 
more  or  less  widely  separated  from  each  other.  Long  before  this  condition  wa.- 
reached,  about  August  8,  the  larvae  were  taking  food. 

The  number  of  segments  developed  in  front  of  the  anus  differs  slightly,  ranging 
from  65  to  71.  The  number  beyond  this  point  could  not  be  determined  exactly.  The 


Fig.  6. — Head  and  anterior  part  of  body,  showing  the  continued  reduc- 
tion of  the  yolk  and  the  very  large  fourth  ventricle.  August  3. 
Fig.  7. — Outline  of  a larva  somewhat  older  than  that  of  fig.  6. 


notochord  consists  in  its  anterior  fourth  of  single  segments  (fig.  11).  In  its  middle; 
region  the  segments  do  not  extend  through  its  entire  thickness,  but  in  the  tail  it  is 
again  formed  of  single  segments.  The  lines  separating  these  are  so  much  more 
conspicuous  than  the  lines  separating  successive  myotonies  that  it  is  impossible  to 


THE  EGG  AND  DEVELOPMENT  OF  THE  CONGER  EEL. 


43 


make  out  the  latter  in  the  thin  transparent  tail  of  living  specimens.  The  segments 
represented  in  the  last  half  of  the  tail  in  hg.  10  are  therefore  not  at  all  reliable. 

Color  is  late  in  making  its  appearance.  It  is  first  evident  at  the  end  of  the  tail. 
At  6 p.  m.  on  August  5 some  of  .the  larvae  had  the  following  six  spots  above  the 
alimentary  canal  and  along  lower  margin  of  the  myotonies  of  the  tail:  (1)  About 


middle  of  yolk;  (2)  halfway  between  this  and  end  of  yolk;  (3)  at  end  of  yolk;  (4)  in 
front  of  anus;  (5)  some  distance  behind  anus;  (fi)  about  the  tip  of  the  tail.  The 
location  of  the  spots  coincides  roughly  with  the  moniliform  enlargements  of  the 
abdominal  yolk.  Other  spots  are  added  between  these  already  formed.  The  rela- 
tive and  actual  size  of  the  spots  differ  greatly,  but  the  number  is  the  same  in  differ- 
ent specimens  of  the  same  age.  In  the  oldest  larvae  the  spots  represented  in  fig.  14 
were  developed.  Aside  from  those  along  the  lower  part 
of  the  sides  there  were  a few  cells  on  the  upper  jaw,  and 
the  scattered  cells  seen  near  the  tip  of  the  lower  jaw  as 
early  as  August  7 (fig.  12)  have  developed  into  a well- 
marked  spot.  The  character  of  the  pigment  about  the 
tail  is  also  noteworthy.  In  the  last  stage  figured  the 
processes  of  the  cells  show  a tendency  to  lie  parallel  to 
the  embryonic  fin  rays.  Pigment  is  formed  in  the  eve 
with  its  earliest  appearance  on  the  body.  No  color, 
aside  from  the  black  pigment  spots  and  the  yellowish 
yolk,  is  seen  anywhere  about  the  larva  during  the  time 
the  larva:  were  under  observation. 

The  fin  fold  is  well  developed,  reaching  from  the 
nape  around  the  tail  to  the  yolk-sac.  It  is  much  wider  along  the  back  and  in  the 
region  of  the  vent  than  about  the  tip  of  the  tail  or  the  ventral  line  of  anterior 
abdomen.  No  rays  had  appeared  in  the  oldest  larva*  observed  except  about  the  tail, 
where  there  appears  a distinct  radiation. 
tv 


Fig.  11. — Head  of  larva  of  the  same  age 
as  that  of  fig.  10,  the  mouth  normal. 


The  enormous  development  of  the  posterior  half  of  the  fourth  ventricle  is  similar 
to  the  condition  figured  by  Raffaele.  In  all  but  the  last  stage  figured  this  part  of  the 
fourth  ventricle  is  a large  thin-roofed  vesicle,  separated  from  the  fin  fold  in  the  earlier 


44 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


stages  by  a distinct  notch  (figs.  6,  7,  8,  9,  10,  11).  The  auditory  capsules  are  con- 
spicuous, and,  viewed  from  above,  are  seen  to  protrude  from  sides  of  head  (fig.  13). 

The  alimentary  canal  is  marked  (1)  by  large  fang-like  teeth,  (2)  the  early  vesic- 
ular development  of  the  liver,  (3)  the  position  of  the  anus  near  the  body  and  remote 
from  the  margin  of  the  ventral  fin  fold.  As  soon  as  the  mouth  is  open,  about  the 


fourth  or  fifth  day  from  the  beginning  of 
development,  the  margins  of  the  jaws  are 
seen  to  be  marked  by  small  protuberances. 

These  are  the  swellings  within  which  the 
teeth  are  developing.  In  the  upper  jaw 
four  pairs  of  teeth  are  developed,  graded 
from  in  front  back,  the  anterior  ones  being 
comparatively  enormous  fangs.  In  the 
lower  jaw  four  pairs  are  also  developed. 

These  are  more  uniform  in  size,  but  with  the  second  one  larger  than  the  rest.  In 
the  oldest  individual  there  were  five  pairs  of  teeth  in  the  lower  jaw.  I am  unable 
to  say  whether  this  was  a normal  condition.  The  teeth  of  the  upper  jaw  close  over 
those  of  the  lower  jaw. 


Fig.  13. — The  head  of  a larva  of  August  7,  from  above. 


Fig.  14. — A larva  of  August  4.  The  fin  fold  of  this  larva  is  probably  represented  as  too  low. 


The  oesophageal  pouch  of  Raffaele  has  been  mentioned.  Even  before  hatching, 
it  is  a conspicuous  pouch  behind  the  heart.  Later,  when  the  anterior  yolk  has  been 
largely  consumed  and  is  separated  from  the  posterior  yolk  by  a constriction,  the 
vesicular  structure  becomes  converted  into  a 
lobulated  organ  about  this  constriction. 

The  evidence  that  the  eggs  here  described 
are  those  of  Leptocqplialus  conger  is  circum- 
stantial rather  than  positive.  There  are  two 
eels  found  in  this  region — the  conger  and  the 
common  eel.  The  common  eel  egg  has  been 
identified  as  one  without  an  oil-sphere.  This 
would  leave  the  conger  as  the  only  possible 
parent  of  the  present  species.  The  conger 
was  abundantly  taken  on  the  trawl  at  the 

" Fig.  15. — Dentition  of  a larva  of  August  14. 

bottom  over  which  these  eggs  were  secured. 

•On  the  other  hand,  the  ripe  conger  egg  has  not  been  described,  in  spite  of  the  fact 
that  Hermes  and  Schmidtlein  have  both  seen  it.  The  egg  of  the  conger  described 
by  Cunningham  was  obviously  not  ripe.  The  present  eggs  may  provisionally  be 
identified  as  those  of  the  conger. 


Contributions  from  the  Biological  Laboratory  of  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission, 
Woods  Hole,  Massachusetts. 


INVESTIGATIONS  INTO  THE  HISTORY  OF  THE  YOUNG  SQUETEAGUE. 


By  CABL  H.  EIGENMANN, 
Professor  of  Zoology , University  of  Indiana. 


In  July,  1900,  I was  instructed  by  the  U.  S.  Commission  of  Fish  and  Fisheries 
to  make  certain  studies  of  the  squeteague,  in  accordance  with  the  following: 

The  Commission  desires  that  you  take  up  the  study  of  the  young  squeteague  ( Cynoscion  regalis) 
which  is  found  schooling  in  Buzzards  Bay,  Narragansett  Bay,  and  other  waters  of  southern  New 
England.  As  the  squeteague  is  one  of  the  most  important  food-fishes  of  this  region,  a more  thorough 
knowledge  of  the  young  is  very  much  needed.  The  following  topics  are  suggested  for  your  consider- 
ation: Habits;  physical  and  biological  surroundings;  food;  enemies;  diseases;  sexual  conditions;  rate 
of  growth;  changes  in  appearance  incident  to  growth;  length  of  sojourn  in  local  waters;  movements 
preceding  and  attending  departure;  route  of  migration,  etc. 

1 herewith  present  my  report  on  the  work  done  during  July,  August,  and 
September  of  1900.  I take  pleasure  in  acknowledging  my  indebtedness  to  the 
director  of  the  Woods  Hole  laboratory,  Dr.  H.  C.  Buinpus.  Mr.  Vinal  N.  Edwards, 
the  collector  of  the  station,  has  in  most  cases  selected  the  site  for  making  examina- 
tions, and,  owing  to  his  long  experience,  his  advice  has  always  been  of  great  value. 
I am  indebted  to  him  for  his  ever-ready  assistance. 

I have  not  been  able  to  approach  a solution  on  the  following  topics: 

(1)  The  diseases  of  the  young  squeteague,  if  it  has  any,  are  not  known.  The 
Peridinium  which  is  destructive  to  the  adult  is  probably  also  destructive  to  the  young. 
The  appearance  of  the  Peridinium  is  periodic,  with  long  intervals  between.  After  the 
young  leave  the  shallow  water  they  are  probably  subject  to  the  same  enemies  that 
the  young  of  all  fish  are  subject  to,  viz,  adult  squeteague  and  blue-fish. 

(2)  The  line  of  migration  has  not  been  even  remotely  established. 

DISTRIBUTION  OF  YOUNG  SQUETEAGUE. 

During  the  early  period  covered  by  this  report,  the  latter  half  of  July  and 
August,  1900,  the  only  location  where  young  squeteague  were  found  in  Buzzards  Bay 
was  in  the  extreme  upper  parts,  near  Wareham.  Mi-.  Edwards  states  that  this  is  the 
only  place  where  he  has  secured  them  during  corresponding  periods  in  previous 
years.  In  the  region  mentioned  they  were  found  in  loose  schools,1  with  occasionally 
stray  individuals.  Only  occasionally  a single  individual  was  found  in  a haul  of  the 

1 The  following  record  of  catches  near  Wareham  may  be  of  interest  as  bearing  on  the  matter  of  schooling: 

July  25.  First  haul,  about  100:  second  haul,  about  25,  made  alongside  the  first. 

Aug.  2.  First  haul,  7;  succeeding  hauls,  none. 

Aug.  9.  First  haul,  1;  second  haul,  6;  third  haul,  none;  made  side  by  side. 

Aug.  22.  Three  specimens  in  one  haul,  none  in  six  other  hauls. 


45 


46 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


.seine.  Usually,  if  any  were  caught  at  all,  there  were  several  or  many  individuals, 
the  maximum  being  about  100.  They  were  much  more  abundant  at  Wareham  in 
the  earlier  part  of  the  season  than  at  the  latter  part,  in  the  proportion  of  about  40 
to  1.  The^  were  also  found  at  Fields  Point,  Indian  Point,  and  in  Seekonk  River  at 
Providence.  No  further  collections  were  made  in  Narragansett  Bay.  The  young 
appear  at  the  lower  end  of  Buzzards  Bay  during  September  and  October. 

On  September  9,  1893,  several  young  squeteague,  from  80  to  LOO  mm.  long,  were 
taken  in  Hadley  Harbor  and  are  preserved  in  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission  Museum 
at  Woods  Hole.  On  September  7,  1900,  a single  young  specimen  was  taken  in  the 
Fish  Commission  trap  on  the  Vineyard-side  of  Nonamesset,  near  the  gut  separating 
Nonamesset  from  Naushon.  Mr.  Edwards  states  that  occasionally  they  are  found 
in  Quissett  Harbor  during  the  latter  part  of  the  summer,  but  none  was  found  at 
Quissett  Harbor,  Hadley  Harbor,  or  at  the  Breakwater  during  1900.*  The  line  and 
rate  of  migration  could  not  be  determined  from  the  few  data  secured.  The  one 
specimen  caught  in  the  trap  was  just  large  enough  to  be  held  by  the  meshes.  Any 
smaller  ones  that  may  have  gotten  in  are  not  available  for  record. 

GENERAL  HABITS. 

Over  20  young  were  put  into  an  aquarium,  where  they  could  be  watched  without 
disturbing  them.  They  were  entirely  pelagic,  never  being  found  either  at  the  bottom 
or  at  the  top  of  the  water.  They  kept  together  in  a loose  school,  but  without  any 
definite  coordination  of  the  individuals  of  the  school,  either  when  they  were  undis- 
turbed or  when  disturbed. 

PHYSICAL  AND  BIOLOGICAL  SURROUNDINGS  OF  YOUNG  SQUETEAGUE. 

The  examination  was  limited  to  drawing  a 150-foot  seine,  which  enabled  me  to 
determine  their  distribution  in  a limited  area  about  the  shore.  They  were  found 
here  during  July  and  August  in  water  with  a low  specific  gravity.  They  were  most 
abundant  in  floating  weeds  and  other  places  where  shrimp  were  abundant.  They 
were  found  most  plentifully  when  it  was  scarcely  possible  to  draw  in  the  net  on 
account  of  the  masses  of  floating  weeds.  Their  associates  were  almost  invariably 
young  eels,  silversides,  puffers,  sea-robins,  tautog,  dinners,  minnows,  hog-chokers, 
scup,  and  king-fish,  and  occasionally  toad-fish,  bill-fish,  various  flounders,  alewives, 
menhaden,  sea  bass,  and  young  dog-fish.  A direct  connection  of  only  two  of  these 
with  the  squeteague  was  established,  i.  e.,  the  silversides  and  alewives,  which  serve 
the  squeteague  as  food. 

FOOD. 

The  food  of  the  young  squeteague  consists  exclusively  of  shrimp  and  young  fish. 
In  young  individuals,  43  mm.  long,  the  contents  of  the  stomach  made  about  4 per  cent 
of  the  total  weight.  The  proportion  of  the  shrimp  and  fish  making  up  the  food  may 
be  gathered  from  the  following — it  should  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  stomach  is 
usually  full: 

Of  14  specimens,  with  an  average  length  of  60  mm.,  9 contained  shrimp  only,  5 
contained  shrimp  and  young  fish.  One  specimen,  55  mm.  long,  contained  a silver- 
sides  28  mm.  long.  In  another,  the  fish  in  the  stomach  was  a clupeoid,  probabty  an 
alewife.  The  other  fish  found  in  the  stomach  defied  identification. 


* Young  squeteague  were  abundant  at  New  Bedford  on  October  o,  1900. 


INVESTIGATIONS  INTO  THE  HISTORY  OF  THE  YOUNG  SQUETEAGUE. 


47 


Of  7 specimens,  with  an  average  length  of  89.5  mm.,  4 contained  shrimp,  2 con- 
tained debris  of  fish,  and  1 was  empty. 

Of  3 specimens,  with  an  average  length  of  117  mm.,  all  contained  shrimp  and 
hsh,  the  latter  in  excess  of  the  former. 

The  details  of  the  food  of  6 small  specimens  from  Providence  may  be  given  here: 


No.  of 
speci- 
men. 

Length 
of  speci- 
men. 

Stomach  contents. 

1 

mm. 

33 

Fragments  of  8 small  shrimp. 

2 

33 

Fragments  of  11  shrimp  (heads  with  eye-stalks  forming  the  basis  of  the 

3 

45 

count);  3 silversides,  longest  11  mm. 
13  shrimp,  3 silversides. 

4 

61 

7 shrimp,  1 fish. 

5 

47 

4 shrimp. 

6 

45 

10  shrimp. 

Observations  on  those  in  the  tank  showed  that  they  would  readily  take  chopped 
fish  dropping  through  the  water,  but  not  after  it  had  reached  the  bottom.  They  are 
exclusively  pelagic,  and  in  nature  confine  themselves  entirely  to  living  or  moving 
food.  Even  such  unsatisfactory  creatures  as  sticklebacks  were  taken  by  those  in 
confinement. 

RATE  OF  GROWTH. 

The  rate  of  growth  during  the  period  of  observation  is  practically  uniform,  the 
young  doubling  their  length  in  about  thirty  days.  The  details  may  be  gathered  from 
the  accompanying  table  which  gives  the  rate  of  growth  of  this  species  and  also  of 
some  of  the  constant  associates  in  the  same  water: 


Date. 

Sque- 

teague. 

King-fish. 

Swell-fish. 

Scup. 

Bill-fish. 

Sea  bass. 

July  12 
July  25 
Aug.  2 
Aug.  9 
Aug.  22 
Sept.  7 

mm. 

mm. 
a 32. 6 
68.2 
79 
107 
123 

mm. 

mm. 

mm. . 

mm. 

59.5 

79.5 

89.5 
117 

c 200 

29 

35.6 

45 

58 

123 

155 

b 25 

63 

67 

d 76 

Sept.  20 
Oct.  5 

e92. 5 
/180 

- 

a 1899.  Based  on  11  specimens  ranging  from  28  to  30  mm. 

6 July  24,  1899.  Based  on  9 specimens  ranging  from  23  to  26  mm. 

cOne  specimen,  probably  much  above  the  average;  6 in  collection  at  Woods  Hole, 
taken  in  Hadley  Harbor  Sept.  9,  1893,  range  from  80  to  100  mm.,  and  average 
91  mm.  in  length. 

d Based  on  3 specimens  ranging  from  73  to  82  mm. 

e Based  on  4 specimens  from  Seekonk  River,  70, 85,  95,  and  120  mm.  long,  respectively. 

/On  October  5 Mr.  Edwards  found  young  squeteague  6 to  8 inches  long  quite 
abundant  in  New  Bedford  River.  Many  were  caught  off  the  wharf  with  hook 
and  line  by  fishing  on  the  bottom.  No  definite  measurements  were  recorded. 


At  the  rate  of  growth  indicated  here,  the  size  of  many  adults  (400  mm.)  sent  to 
the  market  would  be  reached  in  about  seven  months,  but  the  rate  of  growth  in  length 
very  probably  decreases  with  age.  Nevertheless,  it  seems  very  probable  that  the 
fish  reaches  marketable  size  in  about  a year  from  birth. 

The  specimens  collected  in  Narragansett  Bay  were  much  smaller  than  those  of 
Buzzards  Bay  of  the  same  date;  41.9  mm.  in  Narragansett  Bay  on  August  3 and  4;  79.5 
in  Buzzards  Bay  on  August  2.  If  the  rate  of  growth  is  uniform,  the  Narragansett 
specimens  are  eighteen  days  younger  than  the  Buzzards  Bay  specimens. 


48 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


CHANGES  AVITH  AGE. 

The  young  of  the  fish  differs  so  strikingly  from  the  adult  that  it  would  readily 
be  referred  to  another  species  or  genus.  The  more  striking  changes  with  age  occur 
in  the  relation  of  depth  to  length,  in  the  relative  size  of  the  eye.  in  the  color,  and  in 
the  shape  of  the  caudal  fin.  The  smallest  secured  came  from  the  head  of  Narragansett 
Bay ; it  is  25  mm.  long  to  the  base  of  the  caudal.  The  greatest  depth  is  beloAV  the 


Fig.  1. — Smallest  specimen,  32  mm.  long,  Indian  Point,  July  5,  1900,  showing  color  pattern  in  deeper  layer  of  skin. 

Fig.  2. — Specimen  41  mm.  long,  Indian  Point,  July  5,  1900,  showing  color  pattern.  Color  entirely  in  deeper  layer  of  skin. 
Fig.  3. — Specimen  70  mm.  long,  Indian  Point,  July  5, 1900,  showing  addition  of  color  cells  between  those  grouped  into  bars- 


Fig.  1. — The  left  side  of  a specimen  95  mm.  long,  Wareham,  August  9,  showing  indistinct  bars  and  oblique  streaks. 

Fig.  2. — The  right  side  of  the  same  specimen  with  the  outer  skin  removed  and  showing  the  bars  made  less  distinct  than 
in  younger  specimens  by  the  appearance  of  numerous  color  cells  between  them.  No  evidence  of  oblique  streaking, 
which  is  entirely  due  to  color  cells  in  the  outer  layer  of  the  skin.  The  blood  vessels  are  surrounded  by  pigment  cells 
and  show  as  black  lines. 

first  dorsal  spiue  and  measures  8 mm.  The  average  depth  in  10  individuals  from 
the  same  place,  with  an  average  length  of  29.2  mm.,  is  8.7  mm.,  or  29.4  per  cent  of 
the  length.  The  average  width  is  4 mm.,  or  13.7  per  cent. 

In  7 specimens  from  the  same  place,  taken  at  the  same  time,  ranging  from  46  to 
60  mm.,  and  with  an  average  length  of  50.6  mm.,  the  depth  averages  13.14  mm., 
or  25.96  per  cent;  the  width  5.71  mm.,  or  11.08  per  cent.  In  3 specimens  from 


INVESTIGATIONS  INTO  THE  HISTORY  OF  THE  YOUNG  SQUETEAGUE.  49 


Wareham,  taken  August  22,  averaging  97  nun.,  the  depth  averages  26  mm.,  or 
26.8  per  cent.  The  average  width  is  13  mm.,  or  13.41  per  cent. 

In  1 specimen,  170  mm.  to  base  of  caudal,  the  depth  is  40  mm. 

In  2 adult  specimens,  420  (415  and  425)  mm.  long  to  the  base  of  the  caudal,  the 
depth  measures  86.5  mm.,  or  20.59  per  cent.  The  width  at  the  axils  averages  67  mm., 
or  15.95  per  cent. 

In  2 specimens,  50.6  mm.  long  to  base  of  caudal,  the  depth  is  113  mm. 

The  fish  when  adult  are  much  more  cylindrical  than  the  young,  which  are  com- 
pressed and  elevated.  In  the  adult  the  head  is  nearly  conical,  but  little  deeper  than 


Figs.  1 and  2. — The  left  and  right  sides  respectively  of  a specimen  120  mm.  long  taken  at  Wareham,  August  22.  Fig.  1 rep- 
resents the  general  color  which  is  largely  due  to  the  color  cells  in  the  outer  layer  of  the  skin.  The  streaking  which 
is  conspicuous  in  the  adult  is  here  still  obscured  by  the  general  distribution  of  pigment  in  the  deeper  layer  shown  in 
fig.  2,  which  represents  the  coloration  of  the  right  side  after  the  removal  of  the  outer  skin. 

high;  in  the  young  it  is  much  deeper  than  high.  The  eye  changes  its  relative  propor- 
tions to  the  size  of  the  head,  as  in  other  fishes.  This  is  due  to  the  fact  that  while  the  eve 
grows  throughout  life  it  does  not  grow  in  the  same  proportion  as  the  rest  of  the  fish. 


Length  of  fish. 

Length 
of  eye. 

26  mm.  to  base  of  caudal 

44  mm 

108  mm 

170  mm 

415  mm 

560  mm 

mm. 

2.5 

4.5 
8 

11.5 

20 

22 

F.  C.  B.  1901—4 


50 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


A very  marked  change  takes  place  in  the  shape  of  the  caudal.  In  the  adult  the 
margin  of  the  caudal  is  distinctly  concave  or  lunate.  In  all  stages  of  the  young,  on 
the  other  hand,  the  caudal  rays  between  which  the  lateral  line  extends  are  the  longer, 
the  caudal  being  obtusely  pointed,  with  9 rays  in  the  upper  and  8 in  the  lower  lobe. 
The  upper  lobe  of  the  caudal  is  slightly  lunate,  while  the  rays  of  the  lower  lobe  are 
graduated,  and  this  lobe  is  rounded. 

Very  marked  changes  take  place  in  the  color  with  age.  The  changes  occur 
largely  in  the  sides  of  the  body.  The  color  pattern  of  the  head  changes  little  with 
age.  There  is  here  chiefly  an  addition  of  color  cells  to  those  already  present  in  the 


Figs.  1 and  2. — The  left  and  right  sides,  respectively,  of  a specimen  200  mm.  long  taken  September  7,  1900,  in  the  Commis- 
sion’s net  in  Vineyard  Sound.  The  left  side  shows  the  characteristic  markings  of  the  adult  which  are  due  entirely 
to  the  color  in  the  outer  layer  of  the  skin.  The  nearly  uniform  distribution  of  color  in  the  deeper  layer  of  the  skin 
seen  after  removal  of  the  outer  skin  is  represented  in  Fig.  2.  This  deeper  layer  of  color  no  longer  enters  into  the  general 
coloration  owing  to  the  formation  of  connective  tissue  between  it  and  the  outer  layer. 

smallest  specimens.  In  the  smallest  specimen  there  is  a series  of  four  pigmented 
bands,  extending  across  the  back.  The  first  at  the  spinous  dorsal,  the  second  at  the 
beginning  of  the  soft  dorsal,  the  third  some  distance  in  front  of  the  end  of  the  soft 
dorsal,  and  the  last  across  the  caudal  peduncle.  All  of  these  extend  but  little  beyond 
the  lateral  line.  Their  margins  correspond  roughly  with  the  margins  of  myotonies. 
At  the  dorsal  angle  of  the  myotonies  the  bands  are  usually  bent,  but  without  regu- 
larity. In  the  specimen  under  discussion,  those  on  the  left  side  are  shifted  backward, 
at  this  point,  of  those  on  the  right  side;  two  are  continued  straight  down,  one  is 
shoved  forward  and  the  other  backward.  The  region  between  the  bands  is  not  free 


INVESTIGATIONS  INTO  THE  HISTORY  OF  THE  YOUNG  SqUETEAGUE. 


51 


from  pigment,  but  the  cells  are  here  smaller  and  contracted.  A line  of  cells  extends 
along  the  base  of  the  anal  and  to  the  tail.  The  spinous  dorsal  is  largely  black;  the 
soft  dorsal  and  caudal  have  pigment  cells  along  the  membrane.  All  the  chromato- 
phores  at  this  stage  are  in  the  deeper  layers  of  the  dermis  below  the  scales. 

With  an  increase  of  a few  millimeters  in  length  additional  bands  are  interpolated 
between  those  mentioned,  first  one  between  the  two  under  the  soft  dorsal,  then 
one  below  the  end  of  the  soft  dorsal,  and  lastly  one  between  the  two  dorsals.  All  of 
these  are  formed  by  the  time  the  fish  has  reached  a length  of  44  mm.  to  the  base 
of  the  caudal.  Eventually  the  deeper  layer  becomes  deeply  pigmented  through  the 
appearance  of  eh romatophores  in  the  spaces  between  the  bands.  Numerous  small 
chromatophores  have  also  appeared  in  the  superficial  layer  of  the  dermis,  especially 
along  the  edge  of  the  scales,  so  as  to  give  a distinct  black  margin.  With  growth  the 
chromatophores  at  the  margin  of  the  scales  and  those  in  the  superficial  layers  of  the 
dermis,  as  well  as  those  on  the  fins,  become  very  numerous.  In  specimens  75  mm. 
long  to  the  base  of  caudal  the  bars  are  still  faintly  visible  but  the  whole  fish  has 
taken  on  a dusky  color  on  the  sides,  back,  and  fins,  with  a distinct  black  border  to 
the  dorsal  and  caudal. 

In  a specimen  110  mm.  long  the  black  margins  of  the  fins  are  less  conspicuous, 
the  black  edge  of  the  scales  has  become  obscure  on  account  of  the  great  multiplication 
of  superficial  pigment  cells.  The  bars  of  the  young  stage  are  entirely  obliterated  and 
the  superficial  pigment  shows  the  characteristic  oblique  streaking  of  the  adult,  but 
much  less  conspicuously  than  in  the  adult. 

At  this  stage  the  color  is  due  to  the  now  uniform  pigmentation  of  the  deeper 
layers  of  the  dermis  blending  with  the  streaked  pigmentation  of  the  superficial  part 
of  the  dermis.  With  age  the  connective  tissue  between  these  two  layers  of  pigment 
becomes  so  thick  as  to  entirely  eliminate  the  deeper  pigment  as  a factor  in  the 
formation  of  the  color  pattern.  The  surface  pigment,  which  is  from  the  first  laid 
down  in  streaks,  alone  gives  value  to  the  pattern  in  the  adult. 

The  obvious  differences  of  the  sexes  appear  so  late  that  I can  only  report  on  the 
sex  relations  that  no  sex  differences  are  apparent  at  a length  of  about  100  mm. 


Contributions  from  the  Biological  Laboratory  of  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission, 
Woods  Hole,  Massachusetts. 


A NEW  ISOPOD  PARASITIC  ON  THE  HERMIT  CRAB. 


By  MILLETT  T.  THOMPSON. 


While  at  Woods  Hole,  in  the  summer  of  1897,  studying  the  small  hermit  crab 
(Pagurus  loru/icarpus  Say),  1 found  parasitic  upon  this  crustacean  a hitherto  unde- 
scribed Bopyrid,  allied  to  Phryxus  resupinatus  Muller,  and  apparently  representing 
a new  genus.  About  1.5  per  cent  of  the  crabs  at  Great  Harbor  were  thus  infested 
(1898),  and  from  8 to  1 per  cent  of  those  at  Hadley  Harbor.  A single  specimen  was 
taken  at  Edgartown  in  1898,  and  another  at  Warwick,  Ehode  Island,  in  1900.  In  the 
channels  where  there  is  a swift  current  the  percentage  of  infested  crabs  is  low,  due 
probably  to  the  more  effectual  dispersal  of  the  free-swimming  larva?. 

The  female  parasite  occurs  on  the  abdomen  of  the  hermit,  to  which  it  is  attached, 
back  downward,  by  its  mandibles  and  legs.  The  male  is  found  on  the  posterior  part  of 
the  marsupium  of  the  female,  usually  lying  to  the  right  (apparent  left)  of  the  median 
line,  the  head  directed  anteriorly.  The  presence  of  the  parasite  does  not  effect  any 
alteration  in  the  case  of  the  secondary  sexual  characters  of  its  host.  On  the  average 
the  infested  crabs  seem  quite  as  resistant  to  adverse  conditions  as  the  uninfested  ones. 

Stegophryxus  hyptius,  genus  et  species  nov. 

Adult  Female  (Plates  9 and  10). 

Broad  in  proportion  to  length,  marsupium  very  large,  abdomen  about  half  the  length  of  thorax, 
distinct  from  it,  6-joinl;ed,  with  five  pair  of  triramous  pleopoda  and  a pair  of  oval  uropoda.  Length, 
about  9.1  ram.  Color,  yellowish-white,  opaque.  Ovaries,  when  full  of  ripe  eggs,  orange-yellow. 

Head  (pi.  9,  figs.  5 and  6),  from  the  dorsal  side  appears  as  an  oblong  elevation  ending  anteriorly 
ilia  blunt  lobe,  which  represents  the  median  portion  of  the  much-reduced  front  (Fr).  As  the  lateral 
portions  of  the  front  are  almost  wholly  obsolete,  appearing  only  as  two  inconspicuous  lobes,  the 
greater  part  of  the  antennules,  antennae,  and  tip  of  rostrum,  is  visible  dorsally.  The  antennules  are 
3-jointed  and  consist  of  a large  globose  basal  joint,  surmounted  by  a small  cylindrical  second  and  a 
minute  third  joint;  outer  joints  bristle-tipped.  Each  antenna  (A2)  arises  along  the  side  of  rostrum  as 
a columnar  ridge,  whose  distal  end  is  visible  dorsally  (fig.  7,  A2).  From  this  ridge  a 4-jointed 
flagellum  arises,  its  proximal  joint  stout,  the  three  distal  joints  slender;  all  the  joints  bristle-tipped. 
Ventral  surface  of  head  broader  than  dorsal  surface  and  sharply  elevated  at  posterior  border,  giving  a 
strong  antero-dorsal  slope  so  that  the  erect  hypopharynx  points  almost  anteriorly.  At  sides  of  pos- 
terior border  three  curved  processes  arise  (fig.  7,  Pro),  and  in  the  midline  are  two  thin  foliaceous  plates 
(fig.  7,  Fp).  Rostrum  conical.  Mandibles  (Mncl)  slender,  with  expanded  tips,  the  edges  of  which  are 
incurved  so  that,  pressed  together,  they  form  a sucking-tube.  Near  the  bases  of  mandibles  appear  the 
oval  maxilluke  {Mxx).  Hypopharynx  (fig.  7)  erect,  highly  keeled,  and  plays  no  part  in  formation  of 
rostrum.  Maxillipeds  (fig.  5)  large;  each  consists  of  a foliaceous  anterior  and  a somewhat  thicker 
posterior  blade;  during  life  these  organs  keep  up  a rapid  fanning  motion.  There  is  no  trace  of  a palpus. 

The  thorax  (pi.  9)  is  concealed  ventrally  by  an  enormous  marsupium,  built  up  of  five  pairs  of 

53 


54 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


thin  brood-plates,  each  strengthened  by  a median  chitinous  rod.  The  posterior  or  fifth  pair  (fig.  4, 
Bpb)  lie  externally  to  the  others  and  form  the  major  part  of  marsupium;  they  are  attached  along  the 
border  of  fifth  and  sixth  thoracic  segments.  The  posterior  angle  of  each  forms  a shallow  pouch  (fig. 
4,  Po).  Nearly  concealed  by  these  plates,  and  almost  closing  the  marsupium  anteriorly,  are  the  third 
and  fourth  pairs  of  plates,  similar  to  each  other  in  shape  (fig.  2,  Bps)  and  having  an  oval  ventral  and 
a rounded  dorsal  portion  (fig.  3,  Dbp3  and  Dbp 4).  This  dorsal  part  conceals  the  legs  of  the  parasite. 
The  second  pair  of  plates  are  oblong  and  are  hidden  under  the  others  (fig.  2,  Bp 2).  The  first  pair 
consists  of  a rather  oval  anterior  and  a triangular  posterior  blade.  The  latter  (fig.  2,  Phpx)  is  strength- 
ened along  its  outer  (longest)  border  and  across  its  base  by  a chitinous  rod.  The  anterior  blades 
(fig.  2,  Abpj),  in  company  with  the  dorsal  portions  of  the  third  pair  of  plates,  form  the  funnel-like 
anterior  end  of  the  marsupium. 

The  details  of  the  thoracic  segments  are  shown  in  fig.  3.  The  first  five  are  crowded  together, 
their  fleshy  lateral  portions  strongly  bent  toward  the  head.  The  lateral  parts  of  first  four  segments 
end  in  a small  roughened  boss  or  cushion,  on  which  the  roughened  third  joint  of  the  pereiopod 
impinges.  This  cushion  ( C'u ) may  represent  a modified  epimeron.  Internally  to  this  cushion  is  a flat 
shield-shaped  area  which  comes  in  contact  with  the  abdomen  of  the  host  (fig.  6,  Sh).  The  lateral 
portions  of  fifth  segment  end  in  a sharp  crest,  and  there  is  no  “shield.”  The  sixth  segment  is  very 
long;  it  narrows  posteriorly,  has  a fleshy  median  keel  and  only  slightly  developed  lateral  portions. 
The  seventh  segment  is  short,  fleshy,  about  as  wide  as  sixth  and  similar  to  it  except  that  it  is  not 
keeled.  Ventral  surface  of  thoracic  segment  fleshy,  posterior  borders  of  sixth  and  seventh  modified 
into  complex  elevated  keels  (fig.  8).  ( In  the  plate  it  will  he  noted  that  the  first  serrated  keel  belongs 

to  segment  6,  the  second  to  segment  7,  the  third  ( X ) to  the  first  abdominal  segment.)  Pereiopoda  of 
the  sixth  and  seventh  segments  are  alike  and  quite  simple  in  construction  (pi.  10,  fig.  7);  those  of 
the  other  five  segments  are  modified,  the  last  three  joints  being  twisted  to  one  side  (pi.  10,  fig.  6). 
Extensor  muscles  enormously  developed. 

The  abdomen  (pi.  9)  consists  of  six  fleshy  segments,  five  of  which  bear  a pair  of  pleopoda:  Each 

pleopod  has  three  oval  blades  arising  from  a short  common  hase.  Two  of  these  are  subequal  and 
extend  in  a lateral  direction;  the  third  is  smaller  and  points  ventrally.  Tins  ventral  ramus  is  broadly 
expanded  in  the  pleopoda  of  the  first  abdominal  segment,  especially  on  the  right  side  (fig.  4,  Vplx ) . 
The  first  segment  has  ventral  keels,  similar  to  those  on  the  last  thoracic  segments.  Between  the  oval 
uropoda  of  the  sixth  segment  ( Ur)  is  a minute  conical  prominence. 

Description  of  Adult  Male.  (Plate  10. ) 

Three  and  two-thirds  longer  than  broad.  Abdomen  unsegmented,  about  a third  of  entire  length. 
Color  dull  yellowish.  Around  the  heart  in  the  abdomen  is  an  orange-colored  area  and  a narrow  streak 
of  same  color  runs  forward  along  the  mid-dorsal  line.  Sometimes  splashes  of  black  occur  on  the  sides 
of  the  head  and  thorax.  Length  about  3 mm. 

Head  (pi.  10,  figs.  1 and  2)  oval,  elevated  in  center,  the  margin  entire  and  not  inflexed.  Eyes 
minute  (fig.  1,  E).  On  the  under  side  is  a shallow  central  depression,  in  front  of  which  arise  the 
short  3-jointed  antennuhe  (Aj).  From  the  depression  the  8-jointed  antennae  (A2)  and  the  conical 
rostrum  take  their  origin.  First  joint  of  antennae  elbowed,  the  others  cylindrical,  the  distal  ones 
bristle-tipped.  Sixth,  seventh,  and  eighth  joints  very  small,  together  scarcely  equaling  the  fifth  in 
length.  Rostrum  prominent,  built  up  dorsally  by  the  lahrum  ( La)  and  ventrally  by  the  hypopharynx. 
Apex  of  latter  conceals  tips  of  mandibles  and  median  part  of  labrum.  Mandibles  ( Mnd ) slender 
with  thick  bases  and  sharp  chitinous  tips.  I have  not  found  maxillulae.  Between  the  maxillae,  and 
extending  forward  from  a transverse  ridge,  are  the  3-jointed  (?)  maxillipeds  ( Mxp ).  The  thorax 
consists  of  seven  fleshy  segments.  It  narrows  slightly  posteriorly  and  is  moderately  convex.  Sides 
subparallel,  somewhat  deflexed,  epimera  not  distinct.  First  segment  notched  for  reception  of  head. 
Seven  pairs  of  pereiopoda,  whose  structure  and  musculature  can  be  understood  by  reference  to  the 
plate  (pi.  10,  fig.  8).  Abdomen  ovoid  or  sometimes  pear-shaped,  shows  no  signs  of  segmentation,  and 
has  no  traces  of  appendages. 

Description  of  Immature  Forms. 

I.  The  development  of  the  youngest  female  specimen  taken  (pi.  10,  figs.  9 and  10)  was  a little 
more  advanced  than  the  stage  which  Giard  has  called  the  “phryxoid”  stage.  It  may  he  termed  the 
metaphryxoid  stage.  More  slender  than  adult;  nearly  three  times  longer  than  broad.  Lateral 
portions  of  the  thorax  distinct  from  and  scarcely  wider  than  median  part.  Marsupium  present  but 


A NEW  ISOPOD  PARASITIC  ON  THE  HERMIT  CRAB. 


rudimentary.  Abdomen  as  long  as  thorax.  Length,  5 mm.  Head  short.  Front  ( Fr ) prominent, 
transverse,  with  a straight,  entire,  uninflexed  margin,  which  conceals  the  month  parts,  antennules, 
and  the  basal  joints  of  antennae.  Mouth  parts  much  like  those  of  adult,  but  the  hypopharynx  is  flatter 
and  less  erect  and  the  mandibles  are  stout  and  have  sharp  tips  ( Mud ).  Indexed  border  of  labrurn 
narrow,  maxillipeds  small  and  not  inflated  at  base.  They  consist  of  an  oblong-oval  posterior  and  a 
smaller  rounded  anterior  blade.  No  palpus.  The  rostrum  points  anteriorly,  rather  than,  as  in  the 
adult,  dorso-anteriorly.  Thorax  narrow  and  not  quite  as  long  as  abdomen.  Segments  subequal, 
fleshy,  with  the  median  and  lateral  parts  of  nearly  same  width  (fig.  9).  Sixth  and  seventh  segments 
narrower  than  the  rest,  distinct  from  them,  and  have  only  rudiments  of  ventral  keels.  Epimera  (?) 
of  thorax  distinct  ( Ep ),  no  “cushions”  or  “shields.”  Pereiopoda  like  those  of  adult.  Brood-plates 
small  and  flat;  those  of  third  and  fourth  pairs  are  without  dorsal  portion,  those  of  fifth  pair  lack 
pouches  at  posterior  angles.  The  abdomen  is  like  that  of  adult  in  form,  except  that  the  ventral  rami  of 
first  pair  of  pleopoda  are  not  expanded  ( V pl^). 

II.  Three  cryptoniscid-stage  larvae,  probably  males,  were  taken  from  the  female  just  described. 
One  was  in  the  marsupium;  the  others  were  clinging  to  the  appendages  (pi.  10,  figs.  3,  4,  and  5). 
Abdomen  proportionally  longer  than  in  adult  and  consisting  of  0 segments.  Pleopoda  and  uropoda 
present.  Epimera  distinct.  Color  white  with  black  blotches.  Length  about  0.7  mm.  Margin  of 
head  narrow,  indexed  at  sides  and  in  front.  Rostrum  prominent,  Antennules  complex  in  structure 
and  provided  with  long  bristles  (fig.  4,  A.i\).  Antennae  8-jointed  and  very  long  and  slender.  Thorax 
of  7 smooth  segments,  with  distinct  strongly  deflexed  epimera  (Ep);  7 pairs  of  pereiopoda  similar  in 
form  to  those  of  adult,  but  more  delicate  and  slender.  The  abdomen  consists  of  6 segments,  is  highly 
convex,  the  first  5 segments  having  deflexed  epimera.  Five  pairs  of  flat  biramous  pleopoda  (fig.  5), 
the  blades  standing  with  their  faces  at  right  angles  to  the  long  axis  of  body.  Uropoda  (fig.  3,  Ur) 
biramous,  consisting  of  a cylindrical  protopodite,  a cylindrical  exopodite,  and  a shorter  cylindrical 
endopodite.  Each  endopodite  and  exopodite  bears  one  long  bristle  and  a tuft  of  short  hairs. 

III  (not  figured).  Several  females,  of  a stage  considerably  more  advanced  than  the  one  described 
above,  were  taken.  In  all  cases  they  had  a male  of  about  2 mm.  in  length,  of  adult  form,  clinging 
to  them.  Length  varying  from  6 mm.  to  7 mm.  Appearance  much  like  fig.  9 of  plate  10,  but  the 
whole  thorax  is  wider.  Lateral  parts  slightly  broader  than  median  portion.  The  head  is  adult  in 
length,  but  the  front  is  still  rather  wide,  very  fleshy,  and  trilobed,  the  lateral  lobes  being  larger  than 
the  median.  Tip  of  rostrum  and  distal  portions  of  an  ten  nuke  and  antennae  visible  dorsally;  otherwise 
the  head  and  mouth  parts  are  adult  in  structure.  Thorax  narrow  and  as  long  as  abdomen.  Dorsal 
segments  fleshy,  though  less  so  than  in  preceding  stage,  and  the  first  five  segments  have  begun  to 
crowd  anteriorly.  Sixth  segment  fleshy,  not  keeled,  scarcely  longer  than  fifth  or  seventh.  Ventrally 
the  transverse  keels  on  sixth  and  seventh  segments  are  rudimentary,  but  more  developed  than  in 
metaphryxoid  stage;  marsupium  larger,  though  the  brood-plates  are  still  quite  rudimentary.  Brood- 
plates  of  third  and  fourth  pair  have  developed  the  dorsal  portion;  first  pair  nearly  adult  in  shape,  and 
the  funnel  under  the  head  has  begun  to  form.  Tips  of  first  brood -plates  and  maxillipeds  are  visible 
from  dorsal  side,  much  as  in  adult.  The  pereiopoda  are  adult  in  form,  and  “cushions”  and  “shields” 
are  present.  Abdomen  like  that  of  the  metaphryxoid  stage. 

IV  (not  figured).  One  specimen  of  a female  nearly  mature  was  taken.  In  this  the  abdomen  was 
nearly  as  long  as  the  thorax,  sixth  thoracic  segment  not  yet  of  adult  proportions.  Length,  10  mm. 

As  mentioned  above,  the  nearest  relative  of  this  species  is  Bopyrus  ( Phryxus ) resupinatus  Muller, 
described  in  1870  from  a small  hermit-crab  at  Desterro,  South  America.  This  parasite  was  attached, 
in  its  early  larval  stage  at  least,  at  the  roots  of  Sncculina purpurea,  or  less  frequently  Peltogaster  sociulis, 
both  of  which  Cirri peds  were  extremely  common  on  the  hermit-crab  mentioned,  the  name  of  which  is 
not  given.  This  is  strikingly  unlike  the  condition  in  regard  to'  Stegophryxus  hyptius,  for  I have  never 
taken  the  latter  in  association  with  any  other  parasite.  I have  examined  several  thousand  specimens 
of  Pagurus  longicarpus  from  the  vicinity  of  Woods  Hole,  but  have  never  found  any  external  parasite 
other  than  the  Bopyrid.  The  proportions  and  structure  of  body  of  the  Desterro  species  are  also  different 
from  those  of  Hyptius , as  far  as  can  be  judged  from  the  very  imperfect  knowledge  of  the  anatomy  of 
resupinatus  at  our  disposal.  Hence  I consider  the  two  forms  to  be  distinct,  though  the  likeness  of  the 
Woods  Hole  form  to  Muller’s  species  suggested  the  name  hyptius  (vTCvio<;=resupinalus) . 

As  will  be  noted,  the  male  is  similar  to  the  male  of  Athelges  (Hesse),  Pleurocrypta  (Hesse), and 
Phryxus  (Riithke) , and  on  this  basis  apparently  some  authors  have  grouped  the  species  of  these  three 
genera  under  Phryxus.  Phryxus  thus  defined  will  of  course  admit  hyptius  and  resupinatus,  but  when  we 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


56 


consider  how  little  is  really  known  about  these  genera,  and  how  dissimilar  the  females  are,  it  seems 
better  to  retain  them  as  distinct  genera  until  detailed  knowledge  of  the  anatomy  of  the  various  species 
furnishes  the  basis  for  more  accurate  classification.  Sars  in  his  “Account  of  the  Crustacea  of  Norway” 
lias  thus  regarded  them. 

Hyptius  is  more  closely  allied  to  the  members  of  Alhelges  than  to  those  of  either  of  the  other  genera, 
but  its  female  presents  characters,  especially  in  the  uropoda  and  pleopoda,  which  seem  to  prohibit  its 
reference  to  that  genus  as  defined  at  present.  As  writers  on  this  family  prefer  to  institute  tentative  or 
even  undefined  genera  for  new  species  where  there  is  doubt  as  to  their  exact  position,  I suggest  that 
resupincitus  and  hyptius  be  placed  in  the  following  tentative  genus,  having  tire  characters  given  below 
as  its  probable  limits. 

STEGOPHRYXUS,  nov.  gen. 

Male,  abdomen  ovoid,  without  appendages  or  traces  of  segmentation.  An  term  ul;e  3-jointed, 
antennae  8-jointed.  Female,  abdomen  distinct  from  thorax,  6-jointed,  with  five  pairs  of  triramous 
pleopoda  and  a pair  of  oval  uropoda.  Legs  modified  for  clasping  dorsal  ward.  First  five  segments 
of  thorax  crowded  anteriorly.  Nearly  symmetrical. 

dr sy slv  =to  roof  or  cover  (in  allusion  to  marsupium  covering  the  parasite  when  on  host). 

BIBLIOGRAPHY. 


1.  Bate.  Spence  & Westwood.  History  of  British  Sessile-eyed  Crustacea,  vol.  n,  pp.  232-250,  1868. 

2.  Giard.  “ Sur  la  Phylogenie  des  Bopyriens.”  Compt.  Rendus,  tome  104,  1887. 

3.  Hesse.  Annales  Science  Naturelles,  ser.  4,  xv,  pp.  112-115,  1861;  s6r.  5,  hi,  pp.  226-242,  1865. 

4.  Muller.  Jenaische  Zeitschrift,  vi,  pp.  57-60,  1870. 

5.  Saks.  Account  of  Crustacea  of  Norway,  n,  pts.  3-8.  1897. 

DESCRIPTION  OF  PLATES. 

Plate  9. 

Fig.  1.  Herm  it  crab  with  parasite  attached.  Natural  size. 

2.  Anterior  portion  of  adult  female,  ventral,  somewhat  diagrammatic.  On  the  right  side,  all  the  brood-plates  except  the 

first,  and  on  the  left  the  fourth  (Bpt)  and  fifth  have  been  cut  away.  The  third  (Bps)  is  reflexed  to  show  the 
second  ( Bp.,).)  Abpu  Pbpl  = the  anterior  and  posterior  blades  of  first  brood  plates.  Pif,  Pr.,  = pereiopoda  of 
first  and  second  parrs,  respectively.  Dbp3  = dorsal  portion  of  the  third  brood  plate. 

3.  Adult  female  with  marsupium  distended  with,  eggs.  Dorsal.  x8.  Bpi  = funnel  formed  by  first  brood-plates.  Dbp.t, 

Dbpx  = dorsal  portions  of  third  and  fourth  plates,  respectively.  Bp-,  = the  distended  fifth  brood-plate  with  the 
pouch  (Po)  at  its  posterior  angle.  Prit  Pr 0,  and  Pr 7 = Pereiopoda  of  fifth,  sixth,  and  seventh  segments,  respect- 
ively. 4?,,  Rami  of  first  pleopod.  Ur  = Uropoda. 

4.  (The  dotted  outline  shows  the  position  occupied  by  the  male.)  Adult  femalcwitb  empty  marsupium.  Ventral.  x7. 

Bp,,  Bp..,  Bpi  = brood  plates  of  first,  third,  and  fifth  pairs,  respectively.  Po  = pouch  at  angle  of  fifth  pair. 
Vplx  = enlarged  ventral  ramus  of  the  first  pleopod.  Vpl,  = ventral  ramus  of  second  pleopod. 

5.  Left  imaxilliped  of  adult  female.  Ventral  (outer)  surface.  <15.  Ab  = anterior  blade.  P b = posterior  blade.  X = 

point  of  attachment'.  (Two  of  the  processes  at  the  side  of  the  head  are  shown.) 

Ci.  Head  of  the  adult  female.  Dorsal.  17.  Fr  = median  part  of  front.  Mnd  = mandibles.  La  = dorsal  part  of  labrum. 
Mxp  = maxillipeds.  Dbp3  = dorsal  part  of  third  brood  plate.  T.,  = antenna.  C'tt  = “cushion.”  &h  = “shield.” 
E = eye 

7.  Head  of  adult,  female.  Antcro-ventral.  Free-hand.  (The  posterior  brood  plates  are  removed,  and  the  first  pair  with 
the  maxillipeds  are  reflexed  to  show  the  ventral  surface  of  the  head,  etc.  The  base  of  the  right  maxilliped  is 
cut  away  to  show  the  processes  at  border  of  head  (Pro).)  Ax  = antennula.  A.,  = ridge  which  forms  the  basal 
joint  of  the  antenna.  La  — indexed  margins  of  labrum.  Mxx  - maxillula.  Mx»  = maxilla.  Mxp  = maxilliped. 
Pp  = leaf-like  platen  at  median  posterior  border  of  head. 

•S.  Abdomen  and  posterior  part  of  thorax  of  the  same.  Ventral.  < 8.  (All  the  brood  plates  except  the  pouch-like  posterior 
angle  (Po)  of  the  fifth  plate  have  been  removed.)  A'=keel  of  the  first  abdominal  segment  (see  page  54). 
If.  PI,  = pleopoda  of  first  and  third  segments,  respectively. 

Plate  10. 

lug.  1.  Adult  male.  Dorsal,  x 18.  A.,  = Antenna.  E = eye.  Int  = intestine.  Lit  = heart. 

2.  The  same.  Under  surface  of  head,  x 33.  The  right  pereiopod  has  been  removed;  x marks  its  position.  At  =anten- 

nules.  Xa  = the  inflexed  border  of  labrum.  Mnd  = basal  portions  of  the  mandibles,  the  median  and  apical 
parts  being  concealed  by  the  labrum  and  liypopharynx.  iix.,  = maxilla.  Mxp  = maxillipeds. 

3.  Cryptoniscicl  from  young  female.  Lateral,  x 87  (?)'.  Ax  = antennula.  A.,  = antenna.  Ep  — epimeron  of  first 

thoracic  segment.  Ur  = uropod.  PI  - pleopoda. 

4.  The  same.  Under  surface  of  head,  x 165  (?).  At  = Antennula.  R = rostrum. 

5.  The  same.  Pleopod.  of  tided  abdominal  segment.  105  ( ? ) . Ex  = outer  ramus.  En  = inner  ramus. 

Ci.  Adult  female.  Musculature  (diagrammatic)  of  one  of  the  first  four  thoracic  pereiopoda.  Lateral,  x 30.  (From  speci- 
mens cleared  in  cedar  oil  and  from  reconstructions.)  Cu  ="  cushion.”  Sh  = “ shield.”  Bp  = base  of  brood 

plate  (mostly  cut  away).  Ex=  extensors. 

7.  Adult  female.  Musculature  (diagrammatic)  of  pereiopod  of  sixth  or  seventh  segment.  To  show  approach  to  the  simpler 
nude  pereiopod.  Lateral,  x 30.  Ex.  = extensors. 

s.  Adult,  nude.  M usculature  of  .pereiopod..  -Lateral.  x60.  Ep  = border  of  segment.  Fl  = flexors.  Ex  = extensors. 

9.  Larval  female  (metaphryxoid  stage).  Dorsal,  x 18.  (Only  the  thorax  and  part  of  the  abdomen  are  shown;  most  of 

the  pereiopoda  are  bent  ventrally  and  are  hidden  by  what  may  be  the  epimera  (Ep).)  Fr  = front.  A«  = anten- 
nae E=o yes.  Pr7  = pereiopod  of  seventh  pair.  PI,  — pleopod  of  second  pair. 

10.  The  same.  Ventral,  x 10.  .(Showing  the  positions  in  which  the  three  males  (?)  were  found)*  <f  = position  of  the 

one  which  was  in  the  marsupium.  Mnd  = mandibles.  A,  = antennula.  JSp(,  Bpt,  Bp&  = brood  plates  of  first, 
fourth,  and.  fifth  pairs.  Pr6  — pereiopod  of  fifth  pair.  Vpf  = ventral  ramus  ot  first  pleopod.  Ur  = uropoda. 


Bu II.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  56. ' 


Plate  9. 


M.  T.  Thompson  del. 


Bull  U.  $.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  56.) 


Plate  10. 


.)/.  T.  Thompson  del. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1 901 . (To  face  page  57.) 


Plate  1 1 


1 VIEW  IN  EAST  HARBOR  SWAMP.  2 SAND  BEACH  VEGETATION. 


CONTRIBUTIONS  TO  THE  BIOLOGY  OF  THE  GREAT  LAKES. 


THE  PLANTS  OF  WESTERN  LAKE  ERIE,  WITH  OBSERVATIONS  ON  THEIR 

DISTRIBUTION. 


By  A.  J.  PIETERS, 

Assistant  Botanist,  Department  of  Agriculture. 


INTRODUCTORY. 

In  the  spring  of  1893  the  writer  accompanied  a party  sent  out  by  the  Michigan 
Fish  Commission,  under  the  direction  of  Prof.  Jacob  Reighard,  to  study  the  biology 
of  the  Great  Lakes.  The  lake  chosen  for  the  study  that  year  was  St.  Clair.  This 
small  lake  presents  in  many  respects  ideal  conditions  for  the  study  of  lacustrine 
plant  life.  The  extensive  swamps  and  the  gradually  sloping  mud  bottom  of  its 
northwest  side,  which  is  also  protected  from  the  most  violent  winds,  and  therefore 
seldom  experiences  a heavy  surf,  provide  an  environment  admirably  suited  to  the 
growth  of  a variety  of  plants.  The  results  of  that  year’s  work  were  published  as 
the  “Plants  of  Lake  St.  Clair,”1  and  is  believed  to  be  the  first  study  of  the  kind 
undertaken  in  American  lakes.  It  was  therefore  a pleasure  to  continue  this  line  of 
work  in  Lake  Erie.  The  United  States  Fish  Commission,  having  entered  upon  a 
systematic  investigation  of  the  biology  of  the  Great  Lakes,  placed  the  work  under 
the  direction  of  Professor  Reighard,  and  the  place  chosen  was  Put-in  Bay,  Ohio.  A 
United  States  fish-hatchery  is  located  there,  and  the  buildings  and  boats  were  placed 
at  the  disposal  of  the  party. 

The  present  paper  covers  the  work  on  the  Phanerogams,  Characete,  and  Desmidese. 
The  work  on  the  algue,  except  Desmids,  was  in  charge  of  Dr.  Julia  Snow,  of  Michigan 
University.  The  field  work  was  done  during  the  summer  of  1898. 

APPARATUS  USED. 

Much  of  the  work  was  done  from  a row  boat  in  Put-in  Bay  and  in  the  swamps  on 
the  mainland,  but  the  deeper  parts  of  the  lake  were  examined  by  means  of  an  ocean 
dredge  let  out  from  the  steamer  Shearwater , while  going  at  a low  rate  of  speed. 

The  plankton  and  tow  nets  used  in  collecting  the  microscopic  organisms  have 
been  described  by  Reighard.2  For  collecting  the  larger  plants  growing  in  water 
more  than  a foot  or  two  deep  a grapple  was  used  (fig.  B,  page  58).  This  was  made 
by  passing  four  or  five  bent  steel  wires  through  a piece  of  1.5- inch  pipe  and  bending 
back  the  free  ends  to  make  hooks.  The  pipe  was  filled  with  lead  to  make  it  heavier 

1 Bulletin  of  the  Michigan  Fish  Commission  No.  2,  1894. 

s Reighard,  .1.  E.  A biological  examination  of  Lake  St.  Clair.  Bull.  Michigan  Fish  Commission,  No.  4,  1894. 

57 


58 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


and  a rope  fastened  through  the  loops  of  the  wires.  For  taking  soil  samples  an 
instrument  was  made  after  drawings  in  Delbecque,  “ Les  Lacs  Francais”  (fig.  A). 
This  gave  satisfaction  in  soft  bottom,  but  when  the  clay  was  stiff,  or  mixed  with 
coarse  sand  or  gravel,  the  point  was  unable  to  penetrate.  These  samples  were  sent 
to  the  Division  of  Soils,  United  States  Department  of  Agriculture,  for  analysis. 

DEPENDENCE  OF  FISHES  UPON  PLANT  LIFE. 

It  is  needless  to  go  into  the  statistics  of  the  value  of  the  fish  industry.  The 
fresh-water  fisheries  alone  amount  to  more  than  $4,000,000  annually,  not  to  mention 
the  capital  invested  in  trout,  bass,  and  other  game  fish.  The  importance  of  the 
subject  from  an  economic  point  of  view  fully  warrants  an  exhaustive  study  of  tin 


A.  Soil  sampler,  after  B.  The  grapple. 

Delbecque. 


conditions  of  fish  life  and  a thorough  understanding  of  their  food  supply.  As  has 
been  pointed  out  by  both  Reighard ' and  Ward,2  a complete  knowledge  of  the  life  of 
a fish  can  only  be  obtained  by  a study  of  the  entire  chain  of  biological  relations 
existing  in  lakes  and  streams.  In  this  chain  plant  life  constitutes  an  important  link. 
Plants  stand  between  animal  life  and  the  inorganic  substances  it  is  unable  to  use. 
All  aquatic  animal  life  is  ultimately  dependent  upon  plants,  which  transform  carbon, 
nitrogen,  and  other  inorganic  substances  into  organic  compounds  fitted  for  animal 
use.  Directly  or  indirectly,  then,  plant  life  is  necessary  to  the  support  of  the  fishes 


1 Loe.  cit. 


2 Ward,  H.  B.  A Biological  Examination  of  Lake  Michigan.  Bull.  Michigan  Fish  Commission  No.  6, 1896. 


PLANTS  OF  WESTERN  LAKE  ERIE. 


59 


in  our  lakes  and  streams.  The  vigorous  growth  and  reproduction  of  plants  furnishes 
a large  food  supply  for  the  smaller  animals,  which  in  their  turn  can  reproduce  more 
abundantly  and  provide  a greater  amount  of  food  for  the  fish. 

Barring  enemies  ancl  artificial  hindrances  to  increase,  such  as  overfishing,  fish 
will  multiply  up  to  the  limit  of  the  food  supply,  hut  can  never  overstep  that  limit. 
If  the  food  supply  can  be  increased,  an  increase  in  the  number  of  fish  will  naturally 
follow. 

PROBLEMS  OF  AQUATIC  PLANT  LIFE. 

To  understand  the  factors  controlling  the  primary  source  of  food  in  th*e  Great 
Lakes,  we  must  study  the  plant  life  from  every  standpoint;  we  must  learn  the  life 
history  of  each  species,  its  physiology,  distribution,  and  methods  of  reproduction. 
The  important  problems  are,  of  course,  physiological:  The  relations  between  the 

plant  and  the  medium  in  which  it  lives;  what  it  takes  from  the  water  and  what  it 
returns  to  it;  the  character  of  the  bottom  most  favorable  to  certain  species;  the 
methods  of  passing  the  winter  and  of  reproduction;  the  relations  between  the  larger 
plants  and  the  microscopic  plant  and  animal  forms  that  live  on  and  among  them,  and 
the  physical  conditions  of  the  lake — all  these  must  be  studied  and,  in  great  part, 
understood  before  we  can  determine  what  plants  should  be  placed  in  a given  lake 
and  how  we  can  best  introduce  them. 

These  are  some  of  the  problems  that  most  plainly  present  themselves  and  to 
which  a study  of  the  species  found,  together  with  their  distribution,  may  be  regarded 
as  preliminary.  This  “taking  an  inventory,”  as  Zacharias  aptly  expresses  it,  is 
useful,  but  not  final.  We  desire  to  know  with  what  forms  we  have  to  deal,  but  the 
addition  of  a few  more  names  to  our  list  must  not  be  thought  of  equal  importance 
with  a study  of  the  life  histories  of  these  species.^ 

MACROSCOPIC  AND  MICROSCOPIC  PLANT  LIFE. 

The  plant  life  of  the  Great  Lakes  may  be  roughly  grouped  into  macroscopic  and 
microscopic.  It  is  exclusively  the  latter  that  enters  into  the  plankton.  These 
unicellular  plants  are  the  primary  source  of  the  food  supply,  their  great  reproductive 
power  supplying  a constant  source  of  food  for  the  plankton  animals,  which,  in  turn, 
feed  the  larger  forms. 

Although  the  higher  plants  are  not  known  to  enter  to  any  large  extent  into  the 
diet  of  mature  food-fishes,  yet  their  importance  in  the  economy  of  aquatic  life  must- 
be  great  because  of  the  myriads  of  minute  animal  and  plant  forms  that  find  shelter 
and  subsistence  among  them.  These  forms— the  insect  larvae,  mollusca,  Crustacea, 
rotifera,  and  others — are  important  as  fish  foods,  and  their  absence  must  adversely 
affect  the  distribution  of  fish.  The  importance  of  shore  and  bottom  vegetation  was 
recognized  by  Ward  (loc.  cit. ),  who,  in  his  report  on  the  biology  of  the  Traverse  Bay 
region,  makes  constant  reference  to  the  scarcity  of  certain  animal  forms  as  due  to  the 
lack  of  plant  life.  The  relative  scarcity  of  hydra,  worms,  certain  forms  of  rotifera. 
insect  larvae,  and  mollusca  he  attributes  to  the  lack  of  bottom  and  shore  vegetation, 
and  says:  “The  barrenness  of  the  littoral  zone  eliminates  from  the  question  of  the 
food  supply  of  this  region  one  element  which  in  Lake  St.  Clair  was  of  extreme 
importance.”  This  is  recognized  by  Reighard  (loc,.  cit.),  who  makes  frequent  refer- 
ence to  the  abundance  of  certain  animal  forms  in  Lake  St.  Clair  and  connects  it 
with  the  richness  of  the  bottom  flora. 


60 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


TOPOGRAPHY. 

The  conditions  in  that  portion  of  Lake  Erie  around  Put-in  Bay  and  Sandusky 
differ  from  those  at  St.  Clair  and  at  Traverse  Bay.  While  the  bottom  and  shore 
formations  are  not  as  abundant  as  in  Lake  St.  Clair  they  are  very  much  more 
abundant  than  at  Charlevoix.  The  region  about  Put-in  Bay  and  Sandusky  is  of 
limestone  formation,  Put-in  Bay,  or  South  Bass  Island,  East  and  West  Harbor, 
belonging  to  the  waterlime  group,  while  about  the  mouth  of  the  Portage  River  there 
is  an  outcrop  of  Salina  shale.  The  channels  between  the  islands  have  been  scooped 
out  of  the  limestone  rock  by  glacial  action,  and  the  bottom  is  either  of  this  rock  or 
is  covered  with  drift  clay.1  Much  of  the  coast  on  the  mainland  is  rocky  and  pre- 
cipitous, but  a great  part  of  it  is  sandy  beach  (pi.  11,  fig  6),  especially  at  East  and 
West  Harbors  and  at  Port  Clinton,  while  at  Catawba  Island  and  at  Marblehead  light 
the  limestone  rock  juts  out  into  the  lake,  breaking  the  continuity  of  the  sand  beach. 
The  islands,  of  which  there  are  on  the  American  side  six  larger  and  as  many  smaller, 
usually  present  rocky  shore  lines  to  the  waves  (pi.  11,  fig.  -1),  but  there  is  one  sand 
beach  on  South  Bass  Island  and  portions  of  the  bay  are  less  rocky  than  the  west 
shore.  The  water  is  generally  of  considerable  depth  close  to  the  rocks,  and  the 
bottom  is  covered  with  stone  and  gravel  overlying  a blue  clay  that  comes  to  the 
surface  in  the  deeper  parts.  In  Put-in  Bay  the  bottom  is  generally  muddy  close  up 
to  the  shore,  and  in  the  western  end,  at  Squaw  Harbor,  and  also  near  the  United 
States  fish-hatchery,  the  bottom  slopes  gently,  thus  furnishing  the  conditions  favor- 
able to  the  growth  of  water  plants.  These  parts  of  the  harbor  are,  too,  the  most 
protected  from  the  violence  of  the  waves. 

At  four  points  on  the  mainland  between  Sandusky  and  Port  Clinton  there  are 
extensive  swamps,  about  upper  Sandusky  Bay,  at  East  and  at  West  Harbors,  and 
along  the  Portage  River  at  Port  Clinton.  These  swamps  are  characterized  by  a great 
extent  of  low-lying  muddy  bottom,  covered  with  varying  depths  of  water  and  sloping 
back  to  low  wet  ground  (pi.  11,  fig.  1).  They  are  intersected  by  many  channels, 
some  opening  out  to  the  lake  or  river,  while  others  lose  themselves  in  the  body  of  the 
marsh.  Pools  of  greater  or  less  extent  frequently  occur.  At  Port  Clinton  and  at 
Sandusky  the  swamps  border  the  rivers  and  extend  for  miles  up  the  stream,  while  at 
East  and  West  Harbors  they  open  directly  into  the  lake  by  narrow  channels,  which 
are  protected  from  wave  action  by  sandbars. 

DISTRIBUTION  OF  AQUATICS. 

Phanerogamic  water  plants  form  a class  distinguished  from  land  plants  by  many 
differences  of  structure  and  form  due  to  their  peculiar  habitat.  The  variety  of  form 
and  the  high  development  of  land  plants  is  wanting  in  aquatics,  because  a few  types 
and  relatively  simple  structure  suffice  to  meet  the  nearly  uniform  conditions  of  their 
existence.  Their  distribution  is  almost  world-wide,  many  of  the  species  being  found 
throughout  the  temperate  zone  and  some  even  from  the  Arctic  Ocean  to  the  Equator. 
They  grow  in  streams,  pools,  and  lakes,  in  flowing  and  in  still  water;  some  species 
even  flourish  in  stagnant  water;  and,  together  with  marsh  plants,  they  form  the  bulk 
of  the  vegetable  matter  m lakes  and  streams. 


1 Ohio  Geological  Survey,  vol.  n. 


PLANTS  OF  WESTERN  LAKE  ERIE. 


61 


PLANT  GROUPS. 

The  plants  of  this  region  may  he  roughly  divided  into  swamp  plants  and  water 
plants,  the  latter  being  such  as  are  wholly  submersed  or  have  only  their  reproductive 
and  small  portions  of  their  vegetative  parts  above  water,  or  which  float  wholly  or  in 
part  on  the  surface.  The  regions  occupied  by  these  forms  can  not  be  sharply 
delimited,  because  true  water  plants  grow  between  the  swamp  plants  throughout  the 
greater  part  of  the  marsh.  To  these  two  groups  must  be  added  a few  shore  plants 
that  affect,  though  perhaps  to  an  insignificant  degree,  the  vegetable  matter  in  the 
lake.  The  shore  line  in  this  region  is  either  sand  or  limestone,  and  the  characteristic 
plants  are  such  as  are  commonly  found  in  similar  locations.  Euphorbia  p>olygoni- 
folia , Triodia  purpurea , El/yrrms  canadensis , Cenchrus  tribuloides , Salix  longifoUa 
and  8.  cordata , Cakile  esculenta , and  Polanisia  gra/veolens  grow  on  the  sandy  beach 
(pi.  11,  fig.  2).  This  vegetation  has,  however,  no  influence  on  the  biology  of  the  lake 
other  than  an  occasional  accidental  one,  such  as  the  washing  into  the  lake,  by  a storm, 
of  parts  of  these  plants.  The  same  is  true  of  the  rock  plants,  although  being  almost 
constantly  subject  to  wave  action  they  are  more  frequently  washed  into  the  lake. 
Along  a great  deal  of  the  shore  of  South  Bass  Island,  as  well  as  on  the  other  islands  of 
the  group,  the  broken  limestone  rock  is  washed  by  the  waves,  and  in  the  crevices  of 
this  rock  a multitude  of  plants  find  a footing.  The  principal  species  in  bloom  during 
J idy  and  August  were  Campanula  rotundifolia , Steironema  ciliata , Aster  ericoides 
and  A.  pobyphyllus , Carex  eburnea , and  Lobelia  kal/mii.  The  rocks  were  nearly 
covered  with  lichens  and  a reddish  alga.  The  unicellular  algae,  which  flourish  in  the 
many  small  pools  among  the  rocks,  are  constantly  washed  out  by  the  waves  (pi.  12, 
fig.  1). 

DESCRIPTION  OF  PRINCIPAL  PLANT  REGIONS. 

Plants  in  Put-in  Bay. — The  plants  in  this  bay  were  studied  more  thoroughly 
than  elsewhere,  owing  to  accessibility.  Careful  dredgings  were  made  throughout 
the  western  part  of  the  bay,  including  Squaw  Harbor  and  the  vicinity  of  the  hatchery. 
Squaw  Harbor  is  a shallow  body  of  water  averaging  about  1 feet  in  depth  and  not 
exceeding  7 feet  in  the  deepest  part,  with  a rocky  border  which  prevents  a swamp  for- 
mation of  any  extent  (pi.  11,  fig.  5).  The  mud  bottom  slopes  gradually  and  is  covered 
with  a dense  mass  of  vegetation.  From  the  entrance  of  Squaw  Harbor  to  the  end  of 
Gibraltar  Island  the  water  becomes  gradually  deeper,  but  does  not  exceed  a depth  of 
15  feet,  and  reaches  that  depth  only  near  the  end  of  Gibraltar  Island.  The  bottom 
changes  as  gradually  from  mud  to  clay,  with  some  sand  and  gravel  along  the  shore. 

A bar  separates  Squaw  Harbor  from  Hatchery  Bay,1  which  is  also  shallow, 
nowhere  over  11  feet  deep  and  averaging  perhaps  5 feet.  The  bottom  of  this  bay 
varies  much,  being  stony  in  some  places  and  muddy  in  others.  The  water  is  turbid, 
and  it  is  usually  impossible  to  see  plants  more  than  2 or  3 feet  below  the  surface. 

Plants  in  'Squaw  Harbor . — Squaw  Harbor  is  bordered  by  a narrow  strip  of 
rush  like  plants.  These  plants  are  limited  abruptly  on  the  land  side  by  the  rocks 
and  on  the  other  side  by  a depth  of  from  2 to  2.5  feet  of  water.  Toward  the  east 
Sagittaria  rigida  forms  a prominent  group,  extending  about  30  feet  from  the  shore 
and  finding  its  limit  of  depth  in  about  2.5  feet  of  water.  Looking  over  the  plants 

1 For  convenience  I have  applied  this  name  to  that  part  of  Put-in  Bay  lying  between  Gibraltar  Bar  and  the  United 
States  fish-hatchery.  It  opens  by  a ship  channel  directly  into  the  lake. 


62 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


from  the  water  side,  a gradual  but  striking  change  in  the  character  of  the  leaves  is 
evident.  In  the  deeper  water  the  petioles  are  rigid,  sharply  triangular,  and  tipped 
with  a narrow  blade  sometimes  scarcely  distinguishable  from  the  petiole.  Nearer  the 
land  the  blades  are  broader  and  the  petioles  shorter,  and  in  the  mud  along  the  shore 
plants  grow  with  broadly  lance-shaped  blades  on  petioles  8 to  10  inches  long  (pi.  15, 
fig.  1).  Not  infrequently  blades  are  found  with  one  or  both  sides  lobed.  This  species 
also  occurs  on  the  other  shore  with  Sciipus  lacustris,  but  is  not  as  abundant  as  on  the 
east  side.  Wherever  Sagittaria  rigida  and  Scirpus  lacustris  occur  together  the  former 
always  occupies  the  deeper  water.  Near  the  shore  Typha  latifolia , Carex pseudo- 
cyperus  var.  comosa , and  species  of  Scirpus  form  a background  for  the  Sagittaria. 

Scirpus  lacustris  is  scattered  along  the  cast  shore,  but  is  not  as  abundant  as  on 
the  other  side,  a few  hundred  feet  away,  where  Scirpus  pungens  is  the  prevailing 
species.  There  are  relatively  few  macroscopic  forms  in  the  water  among  the  plants 
of  Sagittaria  and  Scirpus , although  various  species  of  algae  are  attached  to  the 
Sagittaria  petioles.  Ceratoph yllum  occurs,  but  not  as  abundantly  as  in  the  water 
between  the  two  shore  regions.  Along  the  south  shore  there  is  a thick  growth  of 
Dianthera  americana , and  the  shallow  water  of  the  harbor  is  tilled  with  submersed 
forms,  of  which  Vallisneria  spiralis,  MyriophyUum  spicatum,  Nairn  jlexilis , Cerato- 
phyllum  demersum,  and  the  various  species  of  Potamogeton  are  the  principal  ones. 
These  all  grow  together  freely,  the  Naias  in  company  with  Ohara,  mostly  Ohara 
fragilis , covering  the  bottom  as  clover  covers  a field,  while  the  other  species  nearly 
all  rise  to  the  surface.  In  the  early  part  of  the  season  few  or  no  plants  can  be  seen, 
but  after  the  middle  of  August  the  surface  of  the  water  is  covered  with  their  floating 
branches.  A patch  of  Nuphar  advenct  and  one  of  Nelumbium  luteum , the  latter  but 
recently  established,  occupy  part  of  the  head  of  the  harbor.  Characece  are  scarce  in 
this  harbor,  excepting  some  Ohara  fragilis  in  the  deeper  parts  and  a few  smaller 
species  on  the  edges  of  a little  clay  bank  near  the  south  end.  Here  were  found,  in 
water  from  2 to  10  inches  deep,  a number  of  species,  some  in  vigorous  condition, 
other’s  barely  holding  their  own.  Here  I also  found  Zannichellia  palustris. 

The  growth  of  Sagittaria  rigida  along  the  east  side  of  Squaw  Harbor  is  doubtless 
due  to  the  protection  from  wave  action  afforded  by  Gibraltar  Island  and  Bar  in  the 
mouth  of  the  main  harbor.  The  west  side  is  more  exposed  to  waves  than  the  east 
side,  and  while  Sagittaria  is  not  a plant  that  endures  heavy  wave  action,  Scirpus 
pungens  grows  equally  well  on  a muddy  fiat  or  on  a surf-beaten  bar.  In  this  place 
it  runs  out  along  the  point  toward  Gibraltar  Island  as  far  as  it  can  find  footing 
among  the  rocks  where  the  water  is  not  too  deep.  The  thick  growth  of  filamentous 
algie  on  the  petioles  of  Sagittaria  'rigida  and  over  the  stones  along  the  east  shore 
must  also  be  attributed,  at  least  partly,  to  protection  from  wave  action.  (Edogonium 
and  Spirogyra  grow  luxuriantly  attached  to  Sagittaria  petioles  just  beneath  the 
surface  of  the  water,  and  these  masses  swarm  with  minute  forms  of  animal  and  plant 
life.  Pithophora  sp.  covers  the  stems  and  petioles  in  shallow  water  as  well  as  the 
mud  and  damp  stones  along  the  shore.  The  coarse  filaments  of  this  alga  form  a 
network  whose  meshes  are  filled  with  Crustacea,  insect  larvae,  and  unicellular  algae. 

Plants  near  Gibraltar  Island. — The  same  species  that  flourish  in  Squaw  Harbor 
extend  out  into  the  main  bay  to  a depth  of  10  feet  or  a little  more.  Everywhere 
from  Gibraltar  Island  to  the  shore  of  South  Bass  Island  the  bottom  of  the  bay  is 
covered,  generally  thickly,  with  plants  of  which  Naias  jlexilis  and  var.  robusta , 


PLANTS  OF  WESTERN  LAKE  ERIE. 


63 


VaUisneria  spiralis  and  Heteranthera  graminea  are  most  abundant,  but  Ceratophyllum 
demersum,  Mgr  lop  hyllum  spicatum,  Potamogeton  zoster  afolius , I*.  perfohatus , /*. 
perfoliatus  richardsonii , /■*.  pectinatus,  and  El-odea  canadensis  are  also  plentiful.  In 
some  spots  an  abundance  of  Chara  contraria  was  found  with  a trace  of  C.  coronata 
and  Tolypella  intertexta , but  there  are  few  Characece  in  Put-in  Bay.  In  the  deeper 
parts  of  Lake  St.  Clair  Tolypella  intertexta  covers  the  bottom  with  a luxuriant  growth, 
but  in  Put-in  Bay  this  species  is  scarce  and  the  plants  are.  small. 

The  sandbar  running  from  Gibraltar  Island  to  South  Bass  Island  separates  to 
some  extent  this  part  of  the  bay  from  the  part  about  the  fish-hatchery.  The  bar  is 
usually  covered  with  water  from  1 to  d feet  in  depth,  but  at  times  a great  part  of  it 
is  above  water.  On  the  east  side  of  the  bar  the  slope  is  steep,  while  on  the  other 
side  the  bar  slopes  gradually  into  Hatchery  Bay.  In  the  deeper  water  just  east  of 
the  bar  the  vegetation  is  most  luxuriant,  great  quantities  of  Nonas  and  of  VaUisneria , 
with  other  species,  being  brought  up  at  every  cast  of  the  grapple.  The  bar  is  covered 
with  a layer  of  cobblestones  and  pebbles,  overlying  the  blue  clay  which  covers  the 
bottom  throughout  this  part  of  Lake  Erie.  Of  all  the  plants  found  on  the  east  side 
of  the  bar,  but  one  grows  on  it;  this  is  VaUisneria , which  in  many  places  forms  dense 
patches.  Besides  the  VaUisneria  the  principal  plant  on  the  bar  is  Potamogeton 
heterophyllous,  and  this  I did  not  find  elsewhere  in  the  bay  except  in  one  wave-washed 
place  on  the  south  shore.  This  species  flourishes  all  along  the  bar,  but  especially 
toward  the  Gibraltar  end,  where  it  is  accompanied  by  a few  plants  of  Potamogeton 
filiformis  and  a dwarf  form  of  JVaias  jlexilis  with  close,  compact  habit  and  strong  root 
system  (pi  18,  fig.  2).  These  plants  root  in  the  clay  between  the  stones  and  flourish 
wherever  the  stones  and  pebbles  are  not  too  thick. 

Plants  in  Hatchery  Bay  and  in  the  open  lake. — In  Hatchery  Bay  the  narrow- 
leaved Potamogetons , such  as  P.  pusillus , P.  zoster osfolvus,  and  P.  peetinatus , with 
TIeteranthera  graminea  and  JVaias  Jlexilis,  are  especially  abundant,  and  in  quiet  places 
on  muddy  bottom  Ceratophyllum  demersum,  Myriophyllum  spicatum,  and  Elodea 
canadensis  are  common.  A few  species  of  Characece  also  occur  in  this  part  of  the 
bay,  but  nowhere  in  great  abundance.  Beyond  a depth  of  10.5  feet  no  plants  were 
found,  except  one  small  plant  of  VaUisneria  in  the  channel  at  a depth  of  13.5  feet. 
A depth  of  10.5  feet  corresponds  roughly  with  a 'line  drawn  from  the  northern 
extremity  of  South  Bass  Island  to  Gibraltar  Island.  Beyond  this  is  the  lake,  and 
although  the  bottom  is  free  from  stones  and  of  a soft  clay,  not  a plant  was  found 
growing  in  it.  This  was  the  case  wherever  the  lake  itself  was  examined.  Dredging 
trips  were  made  to  various  points  and  the  bottom  carefully  dragged,  but  without 
finding  as  much  as  a Chara , except  that  on  one  occasion  a small  amount  of  Lyngbya 
wollei  was  brought  up.  This  alga  grows  much  more  abundantly  later  in  the  season, 
often  choking  up  the  fishermen’s  nets  with  its  coarse  filaments.  Close  along  the 
shore  the  stones  are  covered  with  Cladophora  glomerata,  to  which  many  diatoms  are 
attached,  and  among  which  many  minute  forms  find  a home. 

East  Harbor. — At  East  Harbor  there  is  a wide  stretch  of  swamp  intersected  by 
channels  which  open  into  the  lake  by  one  deep  and  narrow  channel  protected  from 
severe  wave  action  by  a sandbar.  The  bed  of  the  channel  is  entirely  free  from  plants, 
but  along  each  side  is  a border  of  VaUisneria  and  Potamogeton,  the  side  toward  the 
water  being  sharply  defined  by  the  current.  On  the  west  side  there  is  a small  bank 
of  VaUisneria  with  some,  Potamogetons  in  the  shallower  water,  while  beyond  these  are 


64 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Scirpus  pu/ngms  and  S.  lacustris , growing  in  wide  stretches  over  the  low  sandbar 
and  in  the  shallow  lagoon  behind  the  bar.  The  old  rootstocks  of  these  species  of 
Scirpus  can  be  seen  everywhere  in  6 to  9 inches  of  water,  forming  a network  over 
the  sand.  In  the  lagoon,  with  Scirpus  pungens , grows  JVaias  flexilis  robusta.  long 
and  slender,  while  in  the  shallow  water  on  the  exposed  bar  the  dwarf  form  of  JV. 
flexilis , previously  found  in  similar  places  in  Put-in  Bay,  is  not  uncommon. 

On  the  east  side  of  the  channel  the  number  and  kinds  of  plants  is  greater,  in  spite 
of  the  fact  that  the  prevailing  winds  drive  the  waves  against  the  shore.  The  probable 
reason  is  that  these  waves  have  washed  a great  deal  of  mud  to  that  side,  making  more 
favorable  soil  for  the  growth  of  the  plants.  Vallisneria  occupies  the  deeper  parts  on 
the  east  side  of  the  channel  as  well  as  on  the  west,  growing  in  6 to  7 feet  of  water, 
but  is  present  also  among  the  other  species  in  shallower  places.  Toward  the  land  from 
the  Vallisneria  are  the  Potamogetons , P.  zostercefolius , P.  pectinatus,  P.  lonchites , 
and  P.  perfoliatus  richardsonii,  with  Heteranthera  graminea  occupying  the  ground 
in  3 to  5 feet  of  water  and  occasionally  in  the  shallower  places.  In  1 to  2.5  feet 
of  water,  among  the  Scirpus  lacustris  and  S.  pungens , Myriophyllum , JVaias,  and 
Elodea  are  the  principal  species,  but,  as  already  remarked,  the  forms  common  in 
deeper  water  also  frequently  occupy  this  ground.  In  some  places  along  this  shore 
the  Scirpus  is  mixed  with  Zizania  aquatica , and  on  the  sandy  bank  Scirpus  pungens 
shares  the  ground  with  Equisetum  robustum. 

The  sandbar  which  protects  the  channel  entrance  is  large  and  is  covered  with 
water  varying  in  depth  from  6 inches  to  2 or  3 feet.  Scirpus  pungens  grows  in 
many  places  on  the  most  exposed  situations  in  water  up  to  a foot  deep.  Beyond  the 
Scirpus , in  places  exposed  to  the  heaviest  surf  during  storms  and  where  the  water  is 
6 to  12  inches  deep,  I found  scattered  tufts  of  Potamogeton  heterophyll/as.  The  form 
is  the  same  as  that  growing  abundantly  on  the  bar  at  Gibraltar  Island,  where  it  was 
found  in  fruit,  but  no  fruiting  specimens  were  found  at  East  Harbor.  In  neither 
case  did  it  have  floating  leaves,  the  plants  growing  in  tufts  with  many  branches 
coming  out  from  near  the  base  of  the  stem.  This  is  the  form  which  Dr.  Morong 
named  var.  longipedunculatus. 

Character  of  the  vegetation  up  the  channel. — A short  distance  from  the  entrance 
the  channel  divides,  one  branch  going  east,  the  other  west;  the  latter  again  divides, 
one  branch  turning  southwest,  the  other  continuing  in  a westerly  direction.  With 
slight  exceptions  a description  of  the  vegetation  along  the  eastern  branch  will  apply 
to  this  entire  swamp  region. 

Just  where  the  channel  turns  toward  the  east  is  a sandy  beach  covered  with  2 
feet  or  less  of  water,  and  here  grow  two  forms  of  JVaias , JV.  flxxilis  robusta  and  the 
dwarf  form  of  JV.  flexilis , besides  several  species  of  Characece , which  are  more 
abundant  here  than  elsewhere  in  the  swamp.  In  an  area  not  over  200  feet  long  by  10 
wide  I found  four  species  of  JVitella  and  four  of  Ohara,  all  of  low,  compact  habit, 
though  in  other  locations  plants  of  some  of  the  same  species  grow  long  and  of  open 
habit.  JVitella  subglomerata  and  JVitella  polyglochin  grow  in  clusters  a few  inches 
across  and  as  many  high,  while  JV.  temdssima  and  JV.  batrachosperma  grow  in  about  1 
foot  of  water  with  their  branches  spread  out  flat  on  the  sand.  Cliara  frag ilis  grows 

with  close,  compact  habit;  Ohara  contraria  and  its  variety  subinermis  are  here  low, 
delicate  plants,  growing  in  the  shallower  places;  Ohara  coronata  has  a habit  different 
from  that  of  the  same  species  in  the  deep,  quiet  pools,  being  stocky,  with  short 


PLANTS  OF  WESTERN  LAKE  ERIE. 


65 


internodes  and  very  compact.  Ohara  sejuncta  is  the  largest  species  here,  and  is 
notable  for  its  long  runners. 

Here  Vaucheria  tuberosa , a plant  usually  found  in  deeper  water,  grows  on  the 
sand  in  thick,  compact  tufts,  and  looks  almost  black  at  the  bottom  of  2 feet  of  water. 
No  Phanerogams,  save  a few  plants  of  Naim,  grow  in  this  bed  of  Characece , but 
nearer  the  channel,  in  deeper  water,  is  a bank  of  Vallisnerm  and  Potamogeton.  The 
current  is  slower  here,  and  in  many  places  the  channel  is  entirely  tilled  with  vegetation 
consisting  mostly  of  Vallisneria , Ileteranthera  graminea , Potamogeton  pectvnatus,  P. 
loncMtes , P.  hccens,  close  along  shore  where  the  water  is  quiet,  and  P.  per foliatus 
with  some  Nv/plidr  and  Nelumbium  in  about  3 feet  of  water.  Nearer  shore  the  entire 
channel  is  lined  with  Sagittaria  rigida , which  nearly  everywhere  occupies  the  deepest 
water  within  the  zone  of  submersed  forms.  In  quiet  places  there  are  beds  of  Elodea 
with  Myriophyllwm , CeratoplvylPum , and  TJtricidaria  vulgaris , while  Naias  flexilis 
and  Nitella  polyglochin , which  here  grow  long  and  slender,  with  open  spreading- 
habit,  are  scattered  everywhere  between  the  stems  of  the  larger  plants  in  1 to  2 feet 
of  water.  From  the  Sagittaria  rigida  zone,  toward  the  land  side, we  come  in  succession 
to  Scirpus  fl/wviatilis,  with  a little  S.  pungens  and  S.  lacustris , Sparganium  eury- 
carpum , Typha  latifolia , and  Sagittaria  latifolia.  Dianthera  americmia  begins  in 
about  18  inches  of  water  and  continues  to  the  muddy  shore,  mixing,  in  6 to  10  inches, 
with  Scirpus  atrovirens,  Acorus  calamus , Polygonum  muhlenbergii , and  Asclepias 
incarnata , while  on  the  muddy  shore  it  accompanies  Phalaris  arundinacea , Galuma - 
grostis  canadensis , and  Convolvulus  septum.  Everywhere  on  the  water,  between  the 
larger  plants,  are  Lenina  minor  and  Lemna  polyrhiza. 

A species  of  Sagittaria  not  in  fruit,  but  probably  S.  latifolia , is  mixed  with  the 
more  landward  specimens  of  Sagittaria  rigida  and  continues  toward  the  shore,  its 
leaves  becoming  constantly  broader  as  it  approaches  shallower  water.  On  the  wet 
bank  groups  of  Hibiscus  moscheutos  make  the  swamp  gay  with  their  flowers. 

The  swamp  on  the  south  side  of  the  channel. — On  the  south  side  of  the  channel 
the  swamp  covers  many  acres  and  is  overgrown  with  rush-like  plants.  The  species 
are  always  somewhat  mixed,  but  in  each  association  some  one  tall  species  is  clearly 
predominant.  Sometimes  the  boundaries  are  sharply  limited  and  this  in  spite  of  the 
fact  that  no  differences  in  soil  or  in  depth  of  water  can  be  detected.  Sagittaria  ' 
rigida,  which  is  nearest  the  open  channel,  gradually  gives  place  to  S.  latifolia , which 
is  mixed  with  a little  Zizania  aguatica  and  Sparganium.  Following  this  is  a broad 
zone  of  Scirpus  lacustris  of  nearly  pure  growth,  then  Scirpus  fuviatilis  mixed  with 
a little  S.  lacustris , which  soon  increases  to  a second  broad  belt  mixed  this  time  with 
some  Sparganium. 

Throughout  all  these  associations  both  Sagittaria  rigida  and  S.  latifolia  occur, 
the  latter  being  common.  The  water  is  about  the  same  depth  throughout  this  region, 
varying  from  1 to  1.5  feet,  and  the  bottom  is  a soft  mud.  The  second  zone  of  Scir- 
pus lacustris  encircles  and  sharply  limits  a large  bed  of  Sparganimn  eurycarpum. 
The  water  here  is  a little  deeper,  being  nowhere  less  than  1.5  feet,  and  the  bottom 
seems  softer,  no  other  differences  being  noted.  The  Sparganvum  is  sparingly  mixed 
with  Pontederia  cordata , Sagittaria  rigida , S.  latifolia , and  a few  plants  of  Scirpus 
lacustris  and  some  Wetumbium.  Beyond  the  border  of  Scirpus  lacustris , which 
encircles  this  bed  of  Sparganium , is  a bed  of  Typha  latifolia  in  the  same  depth 
of  water  as  the  Scirpus.  Naias  flexilis  grows  among  the  taller  plants,  and  other 

F.  C.  B.  1901—5 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


(36 

low-growing  aquatics  are  not  uncommon.  In  shallower  water  Dianthera  grows 
abundantly,  and  Slum  cicutcefolium  occurs  in  6 inches  of  water  with  Asclepias 
incarnata.  Beyond  the  Typha  is  a vast  stretch  of  Phraymites  communis  occupying 
shallow  water  or  exposed  muddy  places. 

Such  is  the  nature  of  the  swamp  and  the  arrangement  of  the  species.  A few 
may  he  called  dominant  species.  These  grow. in  groups  from  which  the  other  domi- 
nant species  are  nearly  or  quite  excluded,  but  the  spaces  between  the  larger  plants 
are  occupied  by  many  small  forms  which  occur  throughout  the  swamp. 

Plants  (/rowing  about  the  head  of  the  channel. — At  the  head  of  this  branch  of  the 
channel  is  a quiet  pool  some  3 to  5 feet  deep,  where  such  forms  as  Utricularia  vulga- 
ris, Myriophyllum , Ranuncidus  divaricatus , Bidem  becMi , and  Ceratopliyllum  find  a 
congenial  home  and  fill  the  water.  Ilet&pcmthera  graminea  and  Potamogetons  also  find 
favorable  conditions  here;  P.  natcms,  P.  pectmatus,  P.  pusillus,  P.  zoster  of olius,. 
P.  robbinsii , P.  lucens , and  P.  amplifolius  grow  together  in  the  clear,  quiet  water. 
Nuphar  advena  and  Nyniphim  tuberosa  grow  in  places  not  occupied  by  Utricularia 
and  Ceratophyllum , while  the  bottom  is  overgrown  with  Elodea , Ohara  coronata , and 
C.  gy  mnophila  var.  michauxii.  The  average  depth  of  water  is  3 feet,  with  a soft  mud 
bottom.  On  all  sides  this  pond  is  surrounded  by  Zizania  aguatica,  which  grows  on  a 
similar  bottom  and  in  the  same  depth  of  water  as  the  Scirpus  and  Typha  found  down 
the  channel. 

Growth  of  Nelumbium  luteum. — The  conditions  along  other  channels  are  very 
similar  to  those  just  described,  except  that  along  the  west  channel  Nelumbium  luteum 
flourishes.  The  immense  yellow  flowers  rising  just  above  the  great  dark-green 
standing  leaves  and  the  water  covered  with  huge  floating  pads  make  this  the  most 
striking  formation  of  the  swamp  (pi.  12,  fig.  2).  The  Nelumbium  grows  in  from  2 to  4 
feet  of  water,  or  stray  plants  may  be  found  in  less  than  2 feet.  Many  of  the  floating 
leaves  were  20  to  24  inches  across  and  the  standing  ones  not  much  smaller.  At 
Upper  Sandusky  Ba}r  I found  a floating  leaf  26  inches  in  diameter  and  another  with 
a petiole  more  than  5 feet  in  length.  Both  at  Sandusky  Bay  and  along  the  Portage 
River  the  acreage  of  Nelumbium  was  greater  than  at  East  Harbor,  but  nowhere  did 
the  plants  present  a more  vigorous  growth  or  so  magnificent  an  appearance. 

Portage  River  swamps. — The  Portage  River  swamps  differ  somewhat  from  those 
just  described,  but  not  sufficiently  to  require  a detailed  description.  A much  greater 
area  is  covered,  and  the  swamp  extends  for  miles  up  the  river;  but  in  general  the 
distribution  of  plants  is  the  same — Ileteranthera , Vallisneria , and  Potamogetons  along 
the  stream,  followed  by  Sagittaria  rigida  and  the  other  marsh  plants.  The  vast 
swamp  is  dotted  here  and  there  with  pools  in  which.  Utricularia  and  similar  plants 
flourish.  Here  also  I found  Naias  gracillima  and  Typha  angustifolia , the  latter 
growing  in  a brownish  clay  differing  from  that  common  along  this  stream.  In  many 
places  the  bed  of  the  river  was  entirely  devoid  of  plants,  although  there  was  no  per- 
ceptible current.  On  the  muddy  shore  in  a quiet  place  the  bottom  was  covered  with 
a thick  growth  of  Ohara  sejuncta , accompanied  by  Nitella  subglomerata , and  in  some 
pools  Nitella  tenuissima  and  N.  polyglochin  grew  in  3 feet  of  water. 

Swamps  about  Sandusky  Bay. — At  the  head  of  Sandusky  Bay  the  swamps  are 
also  very  extensive,  the  general  features  being  about  the  same  as  of  those  along 
the  Portage  River.  Much  of  the  water  is  from  3 to  6 feet  deep  and  supports  only 


WAVES  WASHING  THE  SHORE.  2.  NELUMBIUM  LUTEUM,  A FEW  ACRES  GROWING  AT  EAST  HARBOR,  OHIO. 


Bull.  U.  S F.  C.  1901,  (To  face  page  66  ) 


Plate  12. 


PLANTS  OF  WESTERN  LAKE  ERIE. 


67 


a moderate  growth  of  Vallisneria  and  Idotamog  etov , mostly  1*.  perfoltaMus  and  I*, 
jjectinatus.  The  water  is  very  muddy,  and  this  may  account  for  the  scarcity  of 
vegetation;  for  near  the  shore,  where  the  water  is  clear,  plants  are  more  abundant, 
such  bottom  forms  as  Ohara , Nitella , and  Naias,  as  well  as  Potamogetons , being 
present.1  In  the  clear  water  also  were  floating  great  masses  of  a species  of  Mesocarpus 
swarming  with  Crustacea  and  other  minute  forms  of  animal  life,  while  in  some  quiet 
places  Ilydrodictyon  was  found.  Lower  Sandusky  Bay  averages  10  to  12  feet  deep, 
and  no  plants  were  found  except  scattered  clumps  of  Potamogeton  pectinahus  and 
P.  perfoliatus.  The  parts  of  the  bay  above  and  east  of  the  city  were  but  hastily 
examined.  For  the  most  part  there  is  a scanty  growth  of  Potamogeton  lonchites, 
P.  perfoliatm , P.  peetinatm , P.  prwlongns , and  P.  zizii.  In  some  places  the  water 
is  clear,  and  one  sees  on  the  bottom,  at  a depth  of  5 to  8 feet,  Potamogeton  ampli- 
folius  and  P.  lucens  and  the  straight,  slender  shoots  of  P.  roUbinsii,  as  well  as  most 
of  the  other  species  native  to  these  waters.  Here  Eleocharis  palustris  vigens  grows 
just  beyond  Scirpus pungens,  its  stem  below  the  water  line  covered  with  colonies  of 
Pividaria. 

ESTABLISHING  ZONES. 

It  is  clear  that  such  a grouping  of  plants  into  zones  as  was  established  by 
Magnin2  for  the  lakes  of  the  Jura  and  by  myself  for  Lake  St.  Clair  is  impossible 
for  any  region  examined  in  1898.  Only  two  groups  are  possible — one  including  all 
submersed  forms  and  those  with  floating  leaves,  the  other  all  the  remaining  species 
with  emersed  leaves  and  growing  with  roots  and  parts  of  the  stem  in  water.  All 
the  species  of  the  three  submersed  and  floating  zones  arc  either  mixed  together  in  a 
narrow  border  along  the  channels  or  cover  the  entire  bottom  of  shallow  harbors. 
Among  the  swamp  plants  it  is  sometimes  possible  to  draw  a more  or  less  definite  line 
between  the  landward  forms  and  those  growing  in  deeper  water,  but  even  this  is  so 
often  vague  and  unsatisfactory  that  I do  not  consider  it  of  any  real  value.  The 
species  intermingle  so  much  on  common  ground  that  an  attempt  to  separate  them 
would  only  result  in  confusion. 

INFLUENCE  OF  VARIATION  OF  DEPTH  OF  WATER  ON  PLANTS. 

The  influence  of  changes  in  the  depth  of  water  on  the  distribution  of  aquatics  is 
important,  but  unfortunately  we  have  little  data  on  this  subject.  Through  the  kind- 
ness of  Col.  James  Smith,  of  the  engineer’s  office  in  Cleveland,  Ohio,  I secured  a 
table  showing  the  depths  of  water  at  Cleveland  from  1859  to  June,  1898.  From  the 
table  it  appears  that  since  the  records  began  the  greatest  difference  in  water  level  has 
been  2.86  feet  between  high  water  in  1859  and  low  water  in  1895.  In  L859  the  water 
was  nearly  1.5  feet  higher  than  it  was  during  the  summer  of  1898.  This  must  have 
made  a great  increase  in  the  extent  of  the  swamp,  especially  of  those  portions  in 
which  the  submersed  forms  could  flourish.  In  1895,  however,  the  water  suddenly 
fell  from  0.4  foot  below  mean  in  1894  to  1.39  feet  below  in  1895,  causing  a decrease 
in  the  submerged  area  and  the  destruction  of  a great  deal  of  submersed  vegetation. 
In  the  following  year  the  water  rose  0.64  foot  and  has  continued  to  rise  slowly 

!This  may  also  be  connected  with  the  character  of  the  bottom.  In  the  first  locality  the  bottom  contains  a much 
larger  percentage  of  clay  than  in  the  second. 

-Magnin,  M.  Ant.  Recherches  sur  la  Vegetation  des  Lacs  du  Jura.  Revue  Gen. de  Bot.,  t.  V (1893), p. 303. 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


68 

since  that  time.  Absence  of  data  concerning  the  aquatic  plants  growing  during  those 
years  makes  it  impossible  to  sajr  what  effect  this  change  of  level  has  had,  but  it  is 
certain  that  data  collected  in  any  one  year  can  not  be  depended  upon  to  give  the 
normal  depth  at  which  certain  plants  flourish.  Most  species  of  aquatics  being 
perennial,  they  may  start  during  periods  of  low  water  in  places  that  will  be  too  deep 
for  them  during  high  water,  but  where  they  can  struggle  along  for  a season  or  two 
before  perishing. 

ECOLOGICAL  GROUPS. 

Many  attempts  have  been  made  in  recent  years  to  arrange  all  plants  into  groups 
according  to  the  conditions  under  which  they  flourish  and  the  manner  in  which  they 
adapt  themselves  to  their  environment.  'Warming,  Drude,  and  others  have  adopted 
certain  groupings,  but  as  yet,  save  on  the  main  divisions,  there  is  no  agreement  among 
plant  geographers.  All  classifications,  however,  include  the  hydrophites,  or  water 
plants,  as  one  of  the  main  divisions,  and  split  this  up  into  a number  of  smaller  groups, 
each  group  including  all  those  plants  having  more  or  less  similar  life  habits,  although 
perhaps  belonging  to  widely  separated  families.  Ecological  groups,  indeed,  are  not 
in  the  least  based  on  taxonomic  characters.  Among  the  free-swimming,  submersed 
forms  are  such  widely  different  species  as  Utricularia  vulgaris , Lenina  trimica,  and 
species  of  Mesocarpus , Spirogyra , and  Lyngbya , besides  many  others,  both  macro- 
scopic and  microscopic.  The  attached,  low-growing,  submersed  forms  include  the 
JSTaiadacece  and  Characeoe , while  species  of  Potamogeton  and  JV-ymphcea  belong  to  the 
group  with  floating  leaves.  It  would  be  possible  to  make  a large  number  of  groups, 
attempting  to  express  in  this  manner  all  the  ways  in  which  water  plants  are  influenced 
by  currents,  depth,  light,  and  the  other  factors  bearing  upon  an  aquatic  habitat,  and 
in  so  far  as  such  groups  represent  biological  facts  they  have  a value.  It  is  doubtful, 
however,  whether  any  but  the  broader  divisions  are  sufficiently  stable  to  be  of  use, 
the  great  adaptability,  within  certain  limits,  of  the  aquatic  organism  rendering  the 
boundaries  of  the  smaller  groups  too  indistinct  to  be  readily  recognized.  This  is 
illustrated  in  Vallisneria  spiralis , the  long  ribbon-like  leaves  of  which  are  thought 
by  some  to  be  especially  well  fitted  for  floating  downstream  in  a rapid  current,  but 
it  grows  equally  well  in  almost  stagnant  water.  Potamogeton  heterophylhis,  when 
growing  in  quiet  pools,  produces  floating  leaves,  but  when  on  a surf-beaten  bar  it 
branches  freely  from  the  base  and  the  floating  leaves  are  absent.  I shall  therefore 
divide  the  water  plants  of  our  region  into  only  five  groups,  as  follows: 

1.  Free-swimming,  microscopic  forms  in  the  open  lake:  The  Plankton. 

2.  All  other  unattached  species,  macroscopic  and  microscopic:  Utricularia  vulgaris,  Lcmme , Cerato- 

phyllum  demersum,  and  many  algte  growing  in  quiet  places. 

3.  Attached  submersed  plants:  Naias,  Cliara,  Cladophora,  Vallisneria , Potamogetons. 

4.  Attached  plants  with  floating  leaves:  Nymphoeaceee,  Potamogetons. 

5.  Swamp  plants. 

The  Plankton  includes,  of  course,  both  animal  and  vegetable  forms,  among  the 
latter  being  species  of  Merisrnojjedia , Pediastrum , Sphazrozyga,  Clathrocystis , and 
many  diatoms.  Species  of  Desrnidem  sometimes  occur,  but  probably  by  accident. 
The  species  of  the  plant  Plankton  being  mostly  without  voluntary  motion,  are  subject 
to  all  the  currents  and  movements  of  the  water. 

In  the  second  group  are  many  widely  distant  forms,  all  growing  in  quiet  pools 
and  sheltered  places.  Among  the  higher  plants  Utricularia  vulgaris , Ceratophyttum 


PLANTS  OF  WESTERN  LAKE  ERIE. 


69 


demerswn , Lemna  trisulca , L.  minor , L.  polyrhiza , and  Wdlffia  Columbiana  are  free- 
swimming  forms,  either  submersed  or  floating.  With  them  are  associated  masses 
of  ALesocarpus , Spirogyra , Ilydrodictyon , and  frequently  quantities  of  Osdllarid , 
Lyngbya , and  other  related  forms. 

Microscopic  algge,  especially  Desmidece  and  Diatomaceai , occur  in  great  numbers 
upon  the  larger  plants  in  quiet  water.  They  are  especially  numerous  in  the  silt  and 
dirt  that  collect  upon  narrow-leaved  plants,  as  Utricularia  vulgaris  and  Bidens  beckii, 
but  they  are  infrequent  on  Oeratophyllum , even  when  this  grows  near  plants  of 
Utricularia  well  supplied  with  microscopic  life. 

The  plants  of  the  third  group  occupy  by  far  the  largest  place  in  aquatic 
vegetation.  Though  not  always  as  conspicuous 
as  the  plants  with  floating  leaves,  they  cover  a 
much  greater  area  and  make  up  the  mass  of 
the  vegetation.  The  Characeos  combine  with 
Naias  and  Elodea  to  cover  the  bottom  in  water 
up  to  10  or  12  feet  in  depth.  Ileteranthera 
graminea , Vallisneria  spiralis , Bidens  bechii , 
species  of  Myriophyllum , Ranunculus , and  Potamogeton  grow  to  near  the  surface 
of  the  water,  and  in  favorable  locations  make  a dense  growth.  Bidens  bechii  also 
has  aerial  leaves.  In  this  group  must  be  included  the  attached  submersed  algae, 
as  Chcetophora , Clddophora , species  of 
CEdogonvum  and  the  like. 

The  Potamogetons  and  Nymjdnm- 
cece  of  the  fourth  group  are  nearly  all 
vigorous  plants  and  form  the  most  con- 
spicuous feature  of  aquatic  vegetation. 

In  our  waters  the  plants  of  this  group 
are  Nymplum  tuberosci , Nupliar  advma, 

NelvmMwnluteum , Polygonum  muhlen- 
bergii , and  several  species  of  Potamo- 
geton. Nelumhium  lutewm  has  both 
floating  and  emersed  leaves.  The  root- 
stocks of  the  Nyrn phcmcece  are  thick 
and  stout,  while  those  of  the  Potamo- 
getons are  slender.  The  floating  leaves 
are  always  thick  and  leathery. 

To  the  swamp-plant  group  belong 
all  of  the  species  rooting  in  the  mud 
and  not  truly  aquatic,  including  such 
forms  as  Sagittaria , Typha,  Spargan- 
iwn,  Alisma , Acorns , Dianthera , many 
Gyperacece , and  some  grasses.  These 
all  root  in  the  mud  in  shallow  water 
and  have  nearly  their  entire  vegetative  system  exposed  to  the  air.  They  are 
generally  characterized  by  slender  stems  and  long,  narrow  leaves.  In  Sagittaria , 
Sparganiurn , and  Typha  the  lower  portion  of  the  stem  is  usually  thick  and  spongy; 


Fig.  D. — Potamogeton  lonchites,  section  through  a bundle. 


Fig.  C. — Potamogeton  lonchites,  section  through  a 
portion  of  submersed  leaf. 


70 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


the  stems  are  in  all  cases  well  supplied  with  air  spaces.  Rootstocks  are  common 
and  the  plants  generally  spread  locally  by  this  means. 

ADAPTATION  OF  WATER  PLANTS  TO  THEIR  ENVIRONMENT. 

It  is  not  the  purpose  of  the  writer  to  enter  into  the  details  of  the  structure  of 
water  plants,  but  a few  general  remarks  indicating  the  relation  between  the  structure 
of  leaf  and  stem  and  the  medium  in  which  these  plants  grow  will  not  be  out  of  place. 

Aquatic  plants  show  in  form  and  structure  special  adaptations  to  their  environ- 
ment. Their  development  is  affected  by  dim  light,  the  motion  of  the  water,  absence 
of  transpiration,  difficulty  in  obtaining  oxygen,  and  the  necessity  of  taking  the  min- 
eral substances  needed  through  the  entire  plant  system  instead  of  by  means  of  roots. 


Even  in  clear  water  there  is  some  loss  of  light  by  filtration  and  by  reflexion,  and 
in  the  muddy  water  common  in  the  Put-in  Bair  region  this  loss  must  be  considerable. 
Other  things  being  equal,  plants  would  lie  limited  in  their  growth  by  the  depth  of  the 
water.  That  the  plants  within  our  region  do  not  occupy  all  the  places  where  depth  of 
water  would  allow  will  be  shown  later  on  to  be  perhaps  due  to  the  character  of  the 
bottom.  To  make  the  most  of  the  dim  light  that  reaches  them  at  the  bottom  of 
several  feet  of  water,  such  plants  as  Earns  and  the  Characea ? have  numerous  narrow 
leaves,  always  ascending  and  of  the  same  structure  on  both  sides  (fig.  H).  The  stem 
also  is  green  and  assists  in  the  work  of  assimilation.  A narrow  or  finely  divided  leaf 
is  common  among  water  plants.  In  TJtrimlaria , Ceratophyllum , Bidens  beckii , and 
Ranunculus  the  leaf  is  split  into  many  narrow  divisions;  in  Elodea , JVaias,  and  in 


PLANTS  OF  WESTERN  LAKE  ERIE. 


71 


Fig.  F . — Bidens  beckii,  section  through  portion  of 
aerial  leaf. 


Steffi 


the  tine-leafed  Potamogetons  the  leaves  are  linear  or  narrowly  lanceolate,  sometimes 
almost  capillary,  while  Vallisneria  has  long  ribbon-like  leaves  that  frequently  attain 
a length  of  6 feet.  The  broad  submersed  leaves 
of  such  species  as  Potamogeton  perfoliatus , P. 
amplifolius , P.  Zonchites , and  P.  lucens  are  very 
thin  and  consist  in  great  part  of  but  three  cell 
layers,  an  upper  and  lower  epidermis  and  a 
median  layer,  all  of  the  cells  having  essentially 
the  same  character. 

This  broad,  thin  leaf  is  an  ideal  one  for 
making  the  most  of  the  dim  light,  but  it  is  not 
so  well  adapted  to  withstanding  the  motion  of 
the  water.  To  offset  this,  these  broad  leaves 
have  ribs  that  are  wanting  in  other  submersed 
leaves,  and  in  these  ribs  bast  fibers  are  found 

which,  according  to  Schenck,1  are  absent  in  all  other  submersed  leaves.  In  Eaias 
flex'di*  the  leaf  is  but  two  cell  layers  in  thickness  except  at  the  midrib,  and  in 
Elodea  an  upper  and  a lower  epidermis  alone  make  up  the  thickness  of  the  leaf. 

A palisade  parenchyma,  so  universal 
in  the  leaves  of  land  plants,  is  entirely  t ppor  surface, 

wanting  in  submersed  leaves,  the  chlo- 
rophyll being  arranged  in  the  epidermal 
cells  and  on  the  tangential  as  well  as  the 
radial  walls  (see  figs.  F and  G,  portions 
of  aerial  and  submersed  leaves  of  Bidens 
beckii).  The  absence  of  stomata  from 
most  submersed  leaves  and  the  thinness 
of  the  epidermal  cell  walls  are  to  be 
expected  in  a medium  where  adaptations 
for  controlling  transpiration  arc  unnec- 
essary. 

The  stem  of  the  submersed  aquatic 
with  its  central  cylinder  and  reduced 
mechanical  elements  is  well  adapted  to 
the  movements  of  the  medium,  while 
the  numerous  and  often  large  cavities 
supply  an  abundance  of  air  to  all  parts 
of  the  plant.  The  reduction  of  the  vas- 
cular bundles  is  one  of  the  most  striking 
features.  In  some  aquatics,  as  Edicts, 
no  vascular  bundles  remain,  their  place 
being  taken  by  a central  canal  (fig.  Iv). 

This  canal  is  also  present  in  the  Potamo- 
getons and  in  some  dicotyledons,  as  Ceratopliyllum  (pi.  13,  fig.  5),  and  represents  the 
wood  portion  of  the  bundle,  an  occasional  ring  or  spiral  indicating  the  former 

1 Schenck,  H.  Vergleichende  Anatomic  cler  Submersen  Gewachse.  Bibliotheca  botanica,  Heft  1, 67  pp.,1886. 


Lower  surface. 

Fig.  G. — Bidens  beckii,  submersed  leaf. 


72 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


presence  of  vessels.  In  Bidens  beckii  the  dicotyledonous  type  of  bundle  is  found,  but 
the  bundles  are  small  and  far  apart.  Between  the  bundles  and  the  epidermis  there 
are  numerous  cavities  separated  from  each  other  by  layers  of  tissue  one  cell  in  thick- 
ness (pi.  13,  tig.  1).  In  Oeratophyllum  the  dicotyledonous  type  of  stem  lias  been 
obliterated  and  the  entire  stem  is  composed  of  parenchymatous  cells,  those  of  the 


central  cylinder  being  only  slightly  differentiated.  The  stem  is  strengthened  by 
collenchymatous  thickening  of  the  angles  of  the  cell  walls  (pi.  13,  fig’.  6). 

The  Potamogetom  having  the  monocotyledonous  type  of  bundle  differ  from 
Bidems  beckii  in  the  central  cylinder,  but  outside  of  this  central  cylinder  the  two 
forms  have  a similar  structure.  A sheath  of  thick- walled  cells  surrounds  the  central 
cylinder,  and  such  cells  are  also  frequently  clustered  about  the  inner  side  of  each 
bundle.  In  some  flat-stemmed  Potavioqe- 
tons , as  P.  zoster ecefolius,  groups  of  thick- 
walled  cells  are  placed  at  irregular  inter 
vals  just  beneath  the  epidermis  (pi.  13, 
tig.  -1). 

The  structure  of  the  floating  leaf  shows 
many  striking  differences  from  the  sub- 
mersed leaf,  due  to  the  difference  in  envi- 
ronment. The  cells  of  the  upper  epidermis 
of  the  floating  leaf  are  smaller  than  in  the 
submersed  leaf,  with  thicker  outer  walls, 
and  frequently  of  more  irregular  outline. 

Stomata  are  confined  to  the  upper  epider 
mis.  Below  the  epidermis  are  one  or  two 
layers  of  palisade  tissue  with  the  chlorophyll 
arranged  on  the  radial  walls.  Between  the 
palisade  tissue  and  the  lower  epidermis  there 
are  large  cavities  separated  by  partitions 
one  cell-layer  thick  (figs.  C,  E). 

The  lower  epidermis  is  composed  of 
larger,  thinner-walled  cells  than  the  upper  epidermis,  and  is  devoid  of  stomata. 
Floating  leaves  are  of  firmer  texture  than  submersed  ones  and  have  some  protection 
against  injury  by  water.  This  protection  in  most  aquatics  is  a waxy  covering 
(Schenck),  but  in  Nelumbium  luteum  it  consists  of  countless  papillae,  each  arising  from 
an  epidermal  cell.  A layer  of  air  is  always  held  by  these  projections,  so  that  water 
falling’  on  the  leaf  stands  in  great  drops,  as  if  on  an  oiled  surface,  until  it  can  run  off. 

Nelumbiuvn  luteum  has  both  floating  and  emersed  leaves.  There  is  no  essential 


L/rTW 


Fig.  K. — Naias  flexilis,  cross  section  of  central  cylinder. 


(Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C,  1 901 . (To  face  page  72.) 


Plate  13. 


3.  POTAMOGETON  ZOSTER/EFO  LI  US,  CROSS  SECTION  OF 
CENTRAL  CYLINDER. 


5.  CERATOPHYLLUM  DEMERSUM,  CROSS  SECTION 
OF  THE  CENTRAL  CYLINOER 


6.  CERATOPHYLLUM  DEMERSUM,  CROSS  SECTION  OF  A STEM. 


PLANTS  OF  WESTERN  LAKE  ERIE. 


73 


difference  in  the  structure  of  these  two,  except  that  the  emersed  leaf  is  much  better 
provided  with  ribs,  which,  besides  being  more  numerous,  are  stronger  than  those  in 
the  floating  leaf. 

ROOTS  AND  RHIZOMES. 

Some  aquatic  phanerogams  have  so  completely  adapted  themselves  to  a watery 
medium  that  they  have  dispensed  with  roots  except  in  the  germinating  seedling,  and 
in  Ceratophylluin  even  these  are  almost  wholly  suppressed.  With  the  exception  of 
Utricularia , Ceratophyllum, , and  Wolffia , all  phanerogams  in  our  waters  produce  some 
roots.  In  Lemnacece  these  are  slender  organs  serving  to  keep  the  plant  in  position 
on  the  surface.  The  rooting  aquatics,  as  the  Potamogetons  and  Myriophylhum , are 
provided  with  roots  that,  according  to  Schenck,1  have  no  purpose  save  to  anchor  the 
plant.  Hochreutiner 2 has  endeavored  to  show  that  the  roots  of  Potamogeton  have 
another  function.  In  experiments  tried  by  him  at  Geneva,  it  appeared  that  eosine 
solution  was  absorbed  by  the  roots  and  passed  up  the  stem  much  more  readily  than 
it  passed  through  the  leaves.  If  this  function  of  the  roots  of  aquatics  can  be  proven, 
it  will  help  to  explain  some  observations  referred  to  under  the  discussion  of  the  soil 
samples.3 

ROOTSTOCKS. 

Most  aquatics  and  swamp  plants  have  rhizomes  or  running  rootstocks  by  which 
the  species  often  spreads  over  considerable  areas.  On  Gibraltar  Bar  the  runners  of 
Potamogeton  heterophyllus  ramify  in  all  directions,  and  specimens  of  Potamogeton 
lonohites  were  collected  at  Sandusky  showing  extensive  runners  bearing  buds  at  their 
ends.  Heteranihera  graminea  has  long  black  rootstocks.  The  thick  rootstocks  of  the 
Nymphcmceaz  buried  in  the  mud  give  rise  year  after  year  to  leaves  and  flowers  and 
produce  an  abundance  of  strong  fibrous  roots.  Sparganiurn  eurycarpum , Sagittaria 
latifolia , Typha  latifolia,  Juncus  torreyi , Scirpus  pungens , and  S.  lacustris , among 
swamp  plants,  were  specially  examined  for  root  systems.  All  are  well  supplied  with 
running  rootstocks,  those  of  the  species  of  Typha  and  Soirpus  being  particularly 
strong  and  widely  spreading.  Probably  many  square  feet  in  an  association  of  Soirpus 
and  Typha  are  occupied  by  the  plants  of  one  system,  each  plant  connected  with  all 
others  of  its  species  by  the  thick  rhizomes.  (See  pi.  14,  figs.  1—4;  pi.  16,  fig.  1;  pi. 
17,  figs.  4,  5.  Typha , Nupha/r , Potamogeton , Juncus , Soirpus, Sparganiurn.) 

REPRODUCTION,  PROPAGATION,  AND  WINTERING. 

In  most  aquatics  the  reproductive  organs  show  the  influence  of  the  medium  less 
than  any  other  part  of  the  plant.  Such  typical  aquatics  as  TJtricularia  produce 
showy  flowers  and  the  seeds  ripen  above  water.  Most  aquatics,  however,  ripen  their 

1 ScKenck,  H.  Die  Biologie  tier  Wasscrgewiichse,  Bonn,  1886. 

2 Hochreutiner,  Georges.  Etudes  sur  les  phanerogames  aquatiques  du  Rhone  et.  du  port  Geneve.  (Revue  gen.  de  Bot., 
t.  vin,  p.  158.) 

3 Since  writing  the  above,  Mr.  R.  H.  Pond,  while  a special  assistant  to  the  United  States  Fish  Commission,  has 
investigated  the  relation  of  water  plants  to  the  solid  substratum.  A summary  of  results  has  been  published  in  Science, 
vol.  xni,  No.  320,  February  15,  1901,  and  is  in  part  as  follows: 

"1.  Plants  rooted  in  soil  exceed  in  vegetation  and  dry  weight  plants  rooted  in  sand  or  merely  suspended. 

“2.  Plants  rooted  in  sand  or  merely  suspended  contain  starch,  calcium,  and  magnesium  in  excess,  while  they  are 
lacking  in  nitrogen,  potash,  and  phosphoric  acid. 

“3.  Lithium  nitrate  is  absorbed  by  the  roots  and  conducted  to  the  upper  portions  of  the  plant,  where  it  may  be 
detected  with  the  spectroscope.” 

These  results  confirm  the  work  of  Hochreutiner  and  justify  the  views  expressed  on  page  70  as  to  the  importance  of 
the  soil  for  the  growth  of  aquatics. 


74 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


seeds  below  the  surface,  although  the  flowers  are  borne  on  emersed  peduncles  and 
have  no  adaptation  for  water  fertilization.  In  the  well-known  case  of  Vallisneria 
spiralis  the  water  assists  in  fertilization.  The  male  flowers  are  borne  on  scapes  at 
the  base  of  the  plant.  When  the  inclosing  spathe  ruptures,  the  flowers  rise  to  the 
surface  and  float  about  until  they  come  in  contact  with  the  stigma  of  the  female 
flower,  to  which  some  of  the  pollen  adheres.  After  fertilization,  the  female  flower 
is  drawn  below  the  surface,  where  the  seeds  ripen. 

Our  knowledge  of  the  germination  of  the  seeds  of  aquatic  plants  is  still  very 
fragmentary.  The  seedlings  of  rootless  aquatics  show  the  greatest  departure  from 
land  forms.  In  Ceratophyllum  a short  radicle  is  developed,  but  it  never  grows  out 
into  a primary  root,  nor  are  other  roots  formed.  In  the  Potamogetons  and  other 
rooting  species  the  special  adaptations  for  an  aquatic  existence  in  the  seedling  are 
not  so  marked.  A primary  root  is  developed,  which  later  perishes  and  gives  place 
to  adventive  roots. 

Kolpin  Ravn  1 has  studied  the  power  of  seeds  of  aquatic  and  marsh  plants  to  float 
and  he  finds  that  most  seeds  are  heavier  than  water  and  thus  can  not  float  unless 
adhering  in  masses;  or  they  may  not  be  easily  wet,  when  they  will  float  in  spite  of 
their  weight.  Some  float  but  a few  days  and  their  distribution  is  local.  Many  seeds, 
however,  are  doubtless  carried  by  currents  and  water  fowl,  although  the  seeds  of 
true  aquatics  are  not  well  adapted  to  spread  by  animal  agency,  and  it  is  probable  that 
waves,  floods,  and  water  currents  are  more  important  in  this  respect  than  animals. 

The  active  vegetative  propagation  and  the  perennial  character  of  water  plants 
have  tended  to  reduce  the  importance  of  seed  production.  Many  aquatics  produce 
seed  much  less  freely  than  land  plants  and  in  some  seed  production  occurs  but  seldom 
or  has  never  been  recorded.  Ceratophyllum , Elodea , and  Lernnaceoe  may  grow  for 
years  in  one  locality  and  never  produce  seed.  Potamogetonrobbinsii  is  not  known  to 
seed.  I n the  Put-in  Bay  region  I was  unable  to  find  Potamogeton  amplifolius in  fruit, 
and  fruits  were  scarce  on  P.  zoster cefolius,  P.  pusillus , and  P.  freisii.  The  last  three 
propagate  by  winter  buds,  and  are  perhaps  losing  the  power  to  produce  seed. 

BUDS  AND  OFFSETS. 

Besides  rhizomes  water  plants  propagate  vegetatively  by  simple  offsets  and  pass 
the  winter  by  various  means.  Almost  any  fragment  of  a plant  of  Elodea  when  .in 
water  may  continue  to  grow  and  produce  a new  plant.  The  same  is  true  of  Cerato- 
phyllum , Utricularia , many  Potamogetons , Myriophyllums , etc. 

Some  species  pass  the  winter  unchanged  at  the  bottom  of  the  water.  Of  these 
are  Zannichellia palustris,  Ceratophyllum , Vallisneria , and  some  species  of  Potamo- 
geton. Among  Potamogetons , P.  pectinatus  is  remarkable  for  wintering  by  means 
of  tubers  produced  at  the  ends  of  special  roots.  Vallisneria  also  produces  a pseudo 
tuber,  which  is  really  a bud  at  the  end  of  a rootstock.  This  tuber  is  eagerly  sought 
after  by  water  fowl.  A third  method  of  wintering  is  by  means  of  hibernacula. 
TJtricularia  is  the  best  example  of  this.  Toward  the  fall  the  tips  of  the  branches, 
instead  of  elongating,  cease  growth,  and  the  leaves  are  crowded  into  large,  compact 
buds.  When  the  plant  dies  on  the  advent  of  cold  weather,  these  buds  sink  to  ne 
bottom,  where  they  remain  until  spring.  The  winter  buds  of  certain  Potamogetons 


Kolpin  Ravn,  F.  Om  Flydoevnen  hos  Froeneaf  vore  Vand  og  Supplanter.  Bot.  lidsskrilt.  vol.  19,  pp.  143-177.  '76  tig 


PLANTS  OF  WESTERN  LAKE  ERIE. 


75 


are  of  this  nature,  and  Myr iop hyll/um  also  passes  the  winter  in  this  way.  Winter 
buds  were  common  on  three  species  of  narrow-leaved  Potmnogetons , P.  zoster wfolius, 
P.  pusillus , and  P.  freisii  (pi.  15,  tig.  2).  Potamogeton  lonchites  sometimes  propa- 
gates by  means  of  short  branches,  which  produce  buds  at  their  ends.  Roots  and 
leaves  grow  out  from  these  buds,  and  the  result  is  a small  plant,  ready  to  root  and 
grow  whenever  it  is  detached  from  the  parent  plant. 

ANALYSIS  OP  SOIL  SAMPLES. 

The  samples  of  soil  collected  at  Put-in  Bay,  East  Harbor,  and  Sandusky  Bay 
were  analyzed  by  the  Division  of  Soils,  U.  S.  Department  of  Agriculture.  The 
results  of  the  analyses  are  given  in  Table  I.  The  number  of  samples  is  not  sufficient 
to  make  general  deductions  possible,  and  therefore  I shall  merely  indicate  the 
direction  in  which  the  results  seem  to  point,  leaving  it  to  future  work  to  establish 
the  relation,  if  any  exists,  between  the  texture  of  the  soil  and  the  plants  growing 
upon  it. 

By  reference  to  Table  I,  it  will  be  seen  that,  as  a rule,  the  soils  on  which  plants 
occurred  in  abundance  were  composed  largely  of  fine  sand  and  very  line  sand,  and 
contained  relatively  little  silt,  fine  silt,  and  clay,  while  the  soils  on  which  few  or  no 
plants  occurred,  although  the  depth  of  water  and  other  physical  conditions  were 
favorable,  were  composed  largely  of  silt,  tine  silt,  and  clay,  and  were  poor  in  fine 
sand  and  very  tine  sand.  The  other  items  are  of  no  practical  importance,  the  amounts 
of  gravel,  coarse  sand,  and  medium  sand  being  very  small,  while  the  amount  of 
organic  matter  is  not  at  all  regular,  being  relatively  large  in  all  samples  from  places 
where  no  plants  grew  and  irregular  in  the  other  samples.  Of  all  the  samples  taken, 
six  must  be  excluded  from  the  comparisons  on  account  of  other  factors  coming 
prominently  into  play.  Sample  1,  from  Gibraltar  Bar,  is  not  comparable  with  the 
others,  both  on  account  of  its  mixed  character  and  the  exposed  position  of  the  bar, 
and  the  three  samples  from  the  open  lake,  Nos.  3,  4,  and  7,  were  taken  at  a depth  of 
33  to  36  feet,  and  hence  can  not  be  compared  with  samples  taken  at  depths  not 
exceeding  7 feet.  The  two  samples,  11  and  12,  collected  on  the  lake  shore,' were  taken 
to  determine  the  cause  of  the  presence  or  absence  of  Scirpus.  All  the  other  samples, 
ten  in  number,  were  taken  from  places  where  the  depth  of  water  ranged  from  6 inches 
to  7 feet,  and  where  all  the  other  physical  conditions  were  nearly  similar.  1 have, 
therefore,  divided  these  ten  samples  into  two  sets,  six  in  one  and  four  in  the  other, 
and  have  added  together  for  each  sample  the  percentages  of  fine  sand  and  very  tine 
sand  to  make  the  first  column  of  Table  II,  and  the  percentages  of  silt,  fine  silt,  and 
clay  to  make  the  second  column.  The  six  samples  of  the  first  set  represent  localities 
well  stocked  with  plants,  while  the  four  samples  of  the  second  set  were  taken  from 
bottoms  either  bare  or  on  which  but  a few  plants  were  growing. 

The  agricultural  value  of  soils  is  largely  determined  by  their  power  to  retain 
water — sandy,  dry  soils  being  good  for  early  truck  crops,  but  almost  useless  for  the 
heavier  late  crops,  as  wheat  or  corn;  while  soils  containing  much  clay  retain  water 
better  and  are  consequently  later  and  colder  but  more  valuable  for  wheat  and  grass 
crops.  As  shown  in  pi.  2,  Bulletin  No.  5,  Division  of  Agricultural  Soils,  a typical 
truck  land  contains  79.69  per  cent  of  medium,  fine,  and  very  fine  sand  and  14.36  per 
cent  of  silt,  fine  silt,  and  clay.  It  is  somewhat  similar,  therefore,  to  the  sample  of 


76 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


the  first  group  on  which  the  heaviest  growth  was  found  (No.  2),  the  greatest  difference 
being  in  the  fact  that  in  truck  lands  the  percentage  of  medium  sand  is  large  while  in 
our  sample  it  is  insignificant.  The  samples  on  which  practically  no  plants  were  found 
are  more  uniform  in  texture  than  those  of  the  first  group  and  very  much  resemble 
the  typical  wheat  lands,  as  given  in  plate  3,  Bulletin  5,  in  which  the  percentage  of 
fine  sand  and  very  fine  sand  is  36.90  and  that  of  silt,  fine  silt,  and  clay  55.91. 

The  water  in  sandy  soils  is  undoubtedly  better  aerated  than  that  in  clay  soils, 
though  both  are  under  water,  because  in  the  former  case  the  water  passes  through 
the  soil  more  rapidly  than  it  does  in  the  latter,  and  it  would  seem  that  even  the  roots 
of  aquatics  are  unable  to  thrive  in  a soil  so  poor  in  oxygen  as  the  saturated  heavy  clays. 

It  will  be  necessary  in  future  work  to  take  many  samples  of  the  bottom  under 
all  conditions  of  vegetation  and  to  take  the  temperatures  not  alone  of  the  water  but 
of  the  soil  in  which  the  plants  are  growing.  A large  series  of  such  samples  would 
make  possible  general  conclusions  that  might  be  of  practical  value. 

Table  I. — Mechanical  analyses  of  soil  samples  taken  from  bottom  of  Put-in  Bay  and  vicinity. 


Division  No. 

Locality. 

j Collection  No. 

Vegetation. 

Moisture  in  air- 
dry  sample. 

Organic  matter. 

i 

'Z  s 
> 0 

o 

Coarse  sand  | 
(1-0.5  mm.). 

Medium  sand  ; 
(0.5-0.25  mm.). 

lO 

CM 

o 

•a  a 
S0 

p 

E 

Very  fine  sand 
(0.1-0.05  mm.). 

Silt  (0.05-0.01 
mm.). 

Fine  silt  (0.01- 
0.005  mm.). 

Clay  (0.005-0.0001 
mm.). 

P.  ct. 

P.  ct. 

P.  ct. 

P.  ct. 

P.ct. 

P.ct. 

P.ct. 

P.ct. 

P.  ct. 

P.ct. 

3852 

Near  West  Harbor 

11 

Scirpus  pun- 
gens. 

0. 14 

0.88 

0.20 

0.  22 

0.  78 

83. 70 

12.80 

0.  35 

0.07 

0. 65 

3853 

do  

12 

do 

0.21 

1.99 

1.40 

1.59 

3.82 

67.11 

23. 82 

0. 38 

0.12 

0.  75 

3847 

0.  88 

3.  68 

0.  00 

0.  00 

0.  38 

74  15 

18.65 

1.04 

0.  31 
0.67 

1.86 
2.  55 

3858 

Edge  of  water  near  swamp . . 

17 

Fair 

0.40 

1.15 

0.00 

0.  02 

0.09 

11.42 

82.  50 

1.72 

3857 

Upper  Sandusky  Bav 

16 

2 

Very  good 

0.  74 

2.  02 

0.  00 

0.  05 

0. 12 

20.  66 

5.  64 

1 . 52 

5.85 

3844 

Southeast  of  Gibraltar  Bar. . 

Excellent 

0.26 

4.  52 

0.  67 

1.64 

6.  36 

38.  45 

35. 90 

3.36 

2.35 

8.10 

3851 

Portage  River 

10 

Good 

2.54 

7.  07 

0.  00 

0.00 

0.  68 

4.70 

62. 00 

9.51 

2.92 

12. 55 

3848 

East  Harbor 

6 

do  ... 

2.  80 

7.  79 

0.  00 

0.  48 

21.58 
12. 15 

7.53 

4.  68 

17.13 

3843 

On  Gibraltar  Bar 

1 

Scant 

1.56 

6.26 

7.73 

7.13 

14.20 

8.59 

16.58 

6.  09 

21.  60 

3850 

Portage  River,  broad  part. . . 

9 

Nothing 

3.13 

8.49 

0.00 

0.  00 

Trace. 

1.86 

27. 46 

24.  37 

7.63 

27.  39 

3854 

Upper  Sandusky  Bay 

13 

do 

2.47 

7.  76 

0.  35 

0. 00 

0. 12 

2. 13 

35.  73 

16.85 

6.  68 

28. 11 

3855 

1 ,000  feet  from  swamp  

14 

Very  scant  . . . 

2.34 

6. 45 

0.  00 

0. 29 

Trace. 

2.40 

29.  60 

21.75 

7.95 

28.  23 

3856 

Near  Winona  Point  Club- 
house, Sandusky  Bay. 

15 

do 

3.  62 

7. 23 

0.00 

0.00 

Trace. 

1.10 

30.  43 

19.  76 

7.  99 

28.  46 

3845 

Near  fish  hatchery  in  open 
lake. 

3 

Nothing 

2. 88 

5.  76 

0.19 

0.48 

1.35 

19. 15 

15.  78 

19.  54 

7.62 

29. 00 

3846 

In  open  lake 

4 

do 

2. 26 

5. 65 

0.  05 

0. 17 

0.37 

1.65 

20.  61 

29.  21 

9.  20 

32. 50 

3849 

East  point  of  Middle  Bass 
Island,  open  lake. 

7 

do 

1.63 

7.  46 

0.21 

0.41 

0. 86 

2.  77 

16.77 

26.  06 

9.33 

36.10 

Table  II. — Comparison  of  samples  collected  at  Put-in  Bay  and  vicinity,  with  typical  truck  and.  wheat  soils. 


Division  No. 

Collec- 
tion No. 

Depth 
in  feet. 

Condition  of 
vegetation. 

Per  cent 
of  medium 
sand,  fine 
sand,  and 
very  fine 
sand. 

Per  cent  of  silt, 
fine  silt,  and 
clay. 

3847  

5 

1 to  2 

Good 

93. 18 

3.  21] 

3858  

17 

. 5 to  1 

Fair 

94.01 

4.94 

3857  

T6 

3.5 

Very  good 

84.  34 

12.  99 

■Set  I 

3844  

2 

7 

Excellent 

80.  71 

13.81 

3851  

10 

3 

Good 

67.38 

25. 08 

3848  

6 

3 to  4 

do 

60.  71 

29.  34 

79.  69 

14.37 

3850  

9 

6 

Nothing 

29.39 

59.  39 

3854  

13 

6 

do  r. 

37.98 

51.64 

► Set  II 

3855  

14 

Very  scanty  ...... 

32 

57.93 

3856  

15 

6 

do 

31.  53 

56. 21 

Wheat  soil.  Plate  3,  Bull.  5,  Division  of  Agricultura 

Soils 

38.  07 

55.91 

PLANTS  OF  WESTERN  LAKE  ERIE. 


77 


Alphabetical  list  of  plants  occurring  in  Lake  Erie  and  in  swamps  h„  the  vicinity  of  Put-in  Bay,  Sandusky, 

East  Harbor,  and  Portage  Hirer,  Ohio.1 

PHANEROGAMS.2 


Acorns  calamus  L.  East  Harbor. 

* Alisrna  plantugo  L.  Portage  River. 

Apocynum  cannabinunt  L.  With  Scirpus  pungens 

in  shallow  water,  West  Harbor. 
Asclepiasincarnatu  L.  Everywhere  in  very  shallow 
water  or  on  exposed  muddy  banks. 

Bidens  beckii  Torr.  Pond  in  East  Harbor  and  in 
Squaw  Plarbor. 

Boltonia  asteroides  L’Her.  With  Scirpus  pungens 
in  shallow  water  near  West  Harbor. 

* Brasenia  schrcberi  J . F.  Gmel.  Cedar  Point. 

* Carex  aijuatilis  Wahl.  Cedar  Point,  Sandusky. 
Carex  pseudo-cyperus  var.  comosa  Boott.  Squaw 

Harbor.  Seen  only  in  one  place. 

Carex  stricta  Lam.  Pond  on  South  Bass  Island 
near  hatchery. 

* Carex  torta  Boott.  Cedar  Point,  Sandusky. 
Ceratophyllum  deinersum  L.  Everywhere. 

Cyperus  erythrorhizgs  Muhl.  Muddy  shores,  Upper 

Sandusky. 

Cyperus  strigosus  L.  Upper  Sandusky  Bay. 
Deyeuxia.  canadensis  Munro.  Muddy  banks,  East 
Plarbor. 

Dianlhera  americana  L.  Squaw  Harbor,  Put-in 
Bay,  and  East  Harbor. 

* Eleocharis  acicularis  R.  Br.  Cedar  Point. 
Eleocharis  intermedia  Schultes.  Cedar  Point. 
Elodea  canadensis  Michx.  Common. 

Eupatorium  perfoliatum  L.  With  Scirpus  pungens 

in  shallow  water,  Squaw  Harbor. 

* Fimbristylis  autumnalis  R.  S.  Cedar  Point, 
Heteranthera  graminea  Vahl.  Everywhere.  One 

of  the  most  common  submersed  aquatics. 
Found  on  mud  flat  at  Portage  River. 
Hibiscus  moscheutos  L.  East  Harbor  on  muddy 
banks. 

Ily.santhus  riparia  Rafin.  Upper  Sandusky  Bay. 

* Juncus  balticus  Willd.  Cedar  Point.,  Sandusky. 

* Juncus  brachycephalus  (Engelm. ) Buch.  West 

Plarbor. 

Juncus  torreyi  Coville.  Squaw  Harbor  in  shallow 
water  and  on  mud  1 tanks. 

Leerzia  oryzoides  Sw.  With  Scirpus  pungens,  West 
Harbor. 

Lenina  minor  L.  In  ponds  on  South  Bass  Island 
and  at  East  Harbor. 

Lemna  polyrhiza  L.  Common. 

Lemna  trisulca  L.  Pond  on  South  Bass  Island. 
Lippia  lanceolate  Michx.  Upper  Sandusky  Bay. 
Mentha  canadensis  L.  Muddy  banks,  Upper  San- 
dusky Bay. 

Myriophyllum  spicatum  L.  Everywhere  in  quiet 
water,  2 to  4 feet  deep. 

Naias  flexilis  Rost.  & Schmidt.  Common. 
iVaias  flexilis  robusta  Morong.  More  common  than 
the  species. 

Naias  gracillima . Morong.  Pond  in  Portage  River 
swamp  near  Port  Clinton. 

Nasturtium  palustre  D.  C.  Muddy  banks,  Upper 
Sandusky  Bay. 


Nelurnbium  luteum  Willd.  Abundant  at  East  Har- 
bor, Portage  River,  and  head  of  Sandusky 
Bay.  Introduced  into  Squaw  Harbor  and 
near  fish-hatchery. 

Nuphar  advena  Ait.  Common. 

Nymphxa  tuberosa  Paine.  East  Harbor  in  3 or  4 
feet  of  water. 

Phalaris  aruridinaceci  L.  East  Harbor,  on  mud 
banks. 

Phragrnites  communis  Trin.  East  Harbor.  Forms 
extensive  associations. 

Physostegia  virginiana  Benth.  Muddy  bank,  in 
Upper  Sandusky  Bay. 

Polygonum  muhlenbergii  S.  Wats.  East  Harbor 
and  Sandusky  Bay. 

Polygonum  acre  PI.  B.  & Iv.  Muddy  shores,  Upper 
Sandusky  Bay. 

Populus  monilifera  Ait,  Beach  at  East  Plarbor. 

Potamogeton  amplifolius  Tuckerman.  Near  fish- 
hatchery  and  in  Sandusky  Bay:  Not  found 

with  floating  leaves. 

Potamogeton  foliosus  Raf.  Put-in  Bay. 

Potamogeton  freisvi  Ruprecht.  Put-in  Bay.  Not 
abundant. 

Potamogeton  heterophyllus  Schreb.  Gibraltar  Bar, 
East  Harbor,  and  Sandusky  Bay.  Floating 
leaves  on  specimens  from  Sandusky  Bay. 

* Potamogeton  hill'd  Morong.  East  Harbor. 

* Potamogeton  interruptus  Kitaibel.  Sandusky  Bay. 

Potamogeton  lonchites  Tuckerman.  Put-in  Bay, 

East  Harbor,  Sandusky  Bay.  One  of  the 
commonest  species. 

Potamogeton  lucens  L.  East  Harbor  and  Sandusky 
Bay. 

Potamogeton  jiliformis  Pers.  Gibraltar  Bar. 

Potamogeton  natans  L.  Put-in  Bay,  East  Plarbor. 

Potamogeton pectinatus  L.  Everywhere.  Extremely 
variable  in  size  and  habit. 

Potamogeton  perfoliatus  L.  Everywhere. 

Potamogeton  perfoliatus  richardsonii  A.  Bennett, 
Put-in  Bay. 

Potamogeton pruiongus  Wmf.  Portage  River. 

Potamogeton  pusillus  L.  Put-in  Bay,  East  Plarbor. 

Potamogeton  robbinsii  Oakes.  East  Harbor,  San- 
dusky Bay. 

Potamogeton  zizii  Roth.  Sandusky  Bay. 

Potamogeton  zoster nfolius  Schum.  Everywhere. 

Ranunculus  divaricatus  Schrank.  Sandusky  Bay. 

Ilumex  verticillatus  L.  Pool  on  South  Bass  Island. 

Sagitlaria  arifolia  Nutt,  Muddy  shore,  Fpper  San- 
dusky Bay. 

Sagittaria  graminea  Michx.  Muddy  shore,  Upper 
Sandusky  Bay. 

Sagittaria  latifolia  Wild.  Squaw  Plarbor,  East 
Harbor. 

Sagittaria  rigida  Pursh.  Everywhere. 

Salix  longifolia  Muhl.  East  Harbor.  Frequently 
in  several  inches  of  water  on  the  beach. 

[ Salix  nigra  Marsh.  East  Harbor,  on  sand  liar  in 
4 to  10  inches  of  water. 


1 Species  marked  with  an  asterisk  were  found  in  the  herbarium  of  E.  L.  Moseiy,  of  Sandusky,  Ohio,  and  were  not 

observed  by  me.  w 

2 Nomenclature  generally  according  to  Index  Kewensis. 


78 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Alphabetical  list  of  plants  occwring  in  Lake  Erie  and  in  swamps  in  the  vicinity  of  Put-in  Bay,  Sandusky, 
East  Harbor,  and  Portage  River,  Ohio — Continued. 

PH  AN  EROG  AMS — Con  ti  nued . 


Sali.r  wardii  Muhl.  East  Harbor.  Sometimes  in 
shallow  water. 

Scirpus  atrovirens  Muhl.  Muddy  banks,  East  Har- 
bor. 

Scirpus  pungens  Vahl.  Everywhere. 

Scirpus  eriopliorum  Michx.  Shallow  water,  Upper 
Sandusky  Bay. 

* Scirpus  erect  us  Poir.  East  Harbor. 

Scirpus fluviatilis  A.  Gray.  Everywhere. 

Scirpus  lacustris  L.  Everywhere. 

Scirpus  sylvaticus  L.  Shore  of  pool  on  South  Bass 
Island. 

* Scirpus  torreyi  Olney.  East  Harbor. 

Scutellaria  galericulata  L.  East  Harbor  swamps. 

Sium  cicutxfoliurn  Gmel.  East  Harbor  swamps. 

charI 

Ohara  contraria  A.  Br. , forma  gymnoliles  (No.  2). 
Abundant  in  Hatchery  Bay,  the  common 
species. 

< 'hara  contraria  A.  Br.,  forma paragymnophylla  (No. 
17).  This  was  identified  with  a doubt  by 
Dr.  Norstedt.  The  form  is  rare  in  Put-in 
Bay,  growing  in  only  one  spot  near  Gi- 
braltar Island,  in  7.5  feet  of  water.  It  is  so 
peculiar  that  a brief  description  will  be 
given.  Fruiting  plants  5 to  10  cm.  high; 
mostly  with  incomplete  cortication,  one 
plant  of  the  collection  being  fully  corticated, 
some  not  corticated  at  all,  others  with  one 
or  two,  joints  of  the  leaves  corticated;  in 
these  cases  the  second  and  third  leaf  joints 
are  corticated  with  eight  cells.  Stipular 
whorl  inconspicuous  but  double.  Stipules 
short,  less  than  one-half  to  one-third  length 
of  carpogone.  End  segment  of  leaf  either 
obtuse  and  1-celled  or  acute  and  2-celled. 

Char  a contraria  A.  Br.,  forma  (28).  On  sandy 
beach  at  East  Harbor,  Ohio.  (PI.  17,  fig.  2. ) 

Chara  contraria  A.  Br.  (29) . A low-growing  deli- 
cate form  found  with  28,  but  having  longer 
stipules  and  dwarfer  habit. 

Chara  contraria,  A.  Br.  forma  subinermis  (30). 
Found  with  28  and  29.  Very  dwarf  habit; 
leaves  much  longer  than  the  internodes  and 
cortication  imperfect;  identified  by  Dr.  Nor- 
stedt. No.  66,  identified  bj'  Dr.  Allen  as 
belonging  to  this  species  and  form,  was  col- 
lected on  a clay  bank  in  Squaw  Harbor; 
water  6 to  12  inches  deep.  (PI.  17,  fig.  1.) 

Chara  contraria  A.  Br.  (62).  Very  small  speci- 
mens with  extremely  long  leaves;  collected 
in  Lake  Erie  a mile  outside  of  Sandusky 
^ Bay  and  in  6 to  8 feet  of  water. 

Chara  contraria  A.  Br.  (68,  69,  70).  In  Put-in  Bay. 

Chara  contraria,  A.  Br.  forma  elongatci,  macroptila, 
macrotiles,  gymnotiles  (72).  Put-in  Bay. 

Chara  coronata  Ziz.  forma  microptila,  incrustata 
(23) . Dr.  Allen  says  this  is  a very  unusual 
form  with  very  short  bracts.  (PI.  20,  fig.  5. ) 

Chara  coronata  Ziz.  (41,42).  East  Swamp  and  East 
Harbor.  (PI.  20,  figs.  1,  2. ) 


Sparganium  eurycarpurn  Engelm.  Everywhere. 

Spartina  cynosuroides  Willd.  Upper  Sandusky  Bay. 

Stachys  aspera  Michx.  Borders  of  pool  on  South 
Bass  Island. 

Typha  angustifolia  L.  Rare,  along  Portage  River 
and  Upper  Sandusky  Bay. 

Typha  latifolia  L.  Everywhere. 

* Utricularia  gibba  L.  Cedar  Point,  Sandusky  Bay. 

Utricular  ia  vulgaris  I East  1 larbor,  Portage  River. 

Vallisneria  spiralis  L.  Everywhere. 

Wolffia  columhiana  Karst.  Abundant  in  pool  on 
South  Bass  Island. 

Zannichellia  paluslris  L.  Squaw  Harbor. 

Zizania  aquatica  L.  East  Harbor,  Portage  River, 
Upper  Sandusky  Bay. 

OEM.  i 

Chara  coronata  Ziz.,  forma  meiocarpa,  meioptila 
(32).  On  sandy  beach,  East  Harbor.  (PI. 
20,  fig.  4. ) 

Chara  coronata  Ziz.,  forma  incrustata,  (74).  Clay 
bank  in  shallow  water,  Squaw  Harbor. 
(PI.  20,  fig.  3.) 

Chara  sejuncta  A.  Br.  (31).  On  Sandy  beach,  East 
Harbor. 

Chara  gymnopus  var.  michauxii  A.  Br.  (53).  On 
mud  bottom  in  shallow  water,  Portage 
River.  ( PI.  19,  fig.  1. ) 

Chara  fragilis  Desv. , forma  brevibracleata  ( 33 ) . East 
Harbor,  Ohio.  (PI.  16,  fig.  2.) 

Chara  fragilis  Desv.,  forma  subinermis  (36).  Put-ir 
Bay. 

Chara  liydropitys  Beichenbach,  forma  compacta 
(65).  On  clay  bank  in  very  shallow  water, 
Squaw  Harbor.  ( PI.  17,  fig.  3. ) 

Char  a aspera  (Dethard)  Willd.  (67).  On  clay  bank 
in  very  shallow  water,  Squaw  Harbor.  This 
species  was  not  found  in  fruit. 

Chara  intermedia,  A.  Br.  (71  probably)  (73).  Both 
in  Put-in  Bay. 

Nitella  subglomerata  A.  Br.  On  sandy  beach  at 
East  Harbor  (75).  (PI.  18,  fig.  3. ) In  mud 
with  Chara  gymnopus  michauxii,  Portage 
River.  (55).  (PI.  18,  fig.  1. ) 

Nitella  polyglochin  A.  Br.  (26).  With  other  Char- 
aceas  on  sandy  beach  at  East  Harbor.'  ( 55 ) . 
(PI.  19,  fig.  2. ) 

Nitella  batrachasperma  (Reichenbach)  A.  Br.  (27). 
On  sandy  beach  East  Harbor  and  on  mud 
bottom  in  Portage  River. 

Nitella  tenuissima  Desv.  (272-).  Two  specimens  of 
27  were  sent  to  Dr.  Allen,  and  they  were 
thought  to  belong  to  the  same  species.  It 
appears,  however,  that  one  was  A.  batrachas- 
perma and  the  other,  which  Dr.  Allen  num- 
bered 271,  was  N.  tenuissima.  The  one  sent 
to  Dr.  Nordstedt  as  27  was  N.  tenuissima. 

Nitella  gracilis  Ag.  vel  sp.  affinis  (64) . Upper  San- 
dusky Bay,  in  quiet  water.  Immature. 

Tolypella  intertexta,  Allen  (No.  1).  Occurs,  in 
Hatchery  Bav,  but  the  plants  are  nowhere 
thrifty.  ‘ July. 


!The  Characete  were  kindly  determined  by  Dr.  T.  F.  Allan  and  Dr.  Otto  Nordstedt. 


PLANTS  OF  WESTERN  LAKE  ERIE. 


79 


Alphabetical,  list  of  plants  occurring  in  Lake  Erie  arid  in  swamps  in  the  vicinity  of  Put-in  Bay,  Sandusky, 
East  Harbor,  and  Portage  River , Ohio — Continued. 

DESMIDE/E. 


Closterium  ehrenbergii  Menegh . In  tow,  Put-in  Ray. 

Closterium  Icibleinii  Kuetz.  In  washings  from 
Bidens  beckii  and  Utricularia  vulgaris. 

Closterium  parvulum  Naeg.  In  washings  from 
Bidens  beckii  and  Utricularia,  vulgaris. 

Closterium  veirus  Kuetz.  In  tow,  Put-in  Bay;  in 
Utricularia  washings  and  in  pool  on  Starve 
Island. 

Closlerium  diuntv  Ehrenb.  In  washings  from  fta- 
gittaria  rigida,  Squaw  Harbor. 

Cosmarium angular e Johnson.  In  Utricularia  wash- 
ings. Mr.  Johnson  described  this  species 
from  material  collected  by  myself  at  Lake 
St.  Clair  in  1893.  It  will  probably  be  found 
at  other  points  along  the  lakes. 

Cosmarium  botrytis  Menegh.  In  tow,  Put-in  Bay, 
and  nearly  all  plant  washings. 

Cosmarium  brebissonii  Menegh.  Starve  Island. 

Cosmarium  depressum  Lund.  Put-in  Bay. 

Cosmarium  grahalum  Breb.  In  Utricularia  wash- 
ings. 

Cosmarium  Ixve  Rabenh.  In  washings  from  Eny- 
conema,  and  Sagittaria. 

Cosmarium  margaritiferum  Menegh.  In  Utricularia 
washings. 

Cosmarium  rneneghinii  Breb.  In  Utricularia  wash- 
ings. 

Cosmarium  moniliforrne  Ralfs.  In  Bidens  beckii 
washings. 

Cosmarium  nitidulum  De  Not.  In  washings  from 
Enyconema  and  Sagittaria. 

Cosmarium  ornatum  Ralfs.  In  Bidens  beckii  wash- 
ings. 

Cosmarium.  portianum  Archer.  In  Utricularia 
washings, 

Cosmarium  punctula turn  Breb.  In  tow  and  in  wash- 
ings from  various  plants. 

Cosmarium  reniforme  Archer.  In  tow  and  in  wash- 
ings from  various  plants. 


Cosmariumrenifotine  var.  compressum  Nordst.  Put- 
in Bay. 

Desmidium  swurtzii  Breb.  Put-in  Bay. 

Disphinctium  connalum  (Breb.)  De  Barv.  Put-in 
Bay. 

Euastrurn  degam  Kuetz.  In  Bidens  beckii  wash- 
ings. 

Euastrurn  binale  Ralfs.  In  washings  from  Bidens 
beckii,  and  Utricularia  vulgaris. 

Euastrurn  eleguns  var?  In  Utricularia  washings. 

Gonatozygon  khiuhani  ( Archer)  Rabenh.  In  Bidens 
beckii,  washings. 

Gonatozygon  ralfsii  De Bary . In  Bidens  beckii  wash- 
ings. 

Ilycdolheccidissiliens  Breb.  In  Utricularia  washings. 

Hyalotheca  mucosa  Ehrenb.  In  Bidens  beckii  wash- 
ings- 

PleuroUeniopsis  ralfsii.  (Breb.)  Lund.  In  Utricu- 
laria  washings. 

Pleurotscnium  trabecula  (Ehrenb.)  Naeg.  In  Utri- 
cularia washings. 

Staurastrum  avicula  Breb.  In  Utricularia  washings. 

Staurastrum  brebissoni  Archer.  In  Utricularia  wash- 
ings. 

Staurastrum  crenulatum  (Naeg. ) Delponte.  In  Utri- 
cularia washings. 

Staurastrum,  dejectum  Breb.  In  towr,  Put-in  Bay. 

Staurastrum  dilatatum  Ehrenb.  In  Utricularia~w ash- 
ings. 

Staurastrum  fur  rig eruin  Breb.  In  Utricidaria  wash- 
ings. 

Staurastrum  punctulatum  Breb.  In  tow,  Put-in 
Bay. 

Staurastrum  striolatum  Archer.  In  Sagittaria  wash- 
ings. 

Staurastrum  tetracerum  (Kuetz.)  Ralfs.  In  Bidens 
beckii  washings. 

Xanthidium  antilopxum  Kut.z.  In  Utricularia  wash- 
ings. 


Bull.  U.  S,  F.  C.  1 901 . (To  face  page  80.) 


1.  SPARGAN  I U M EURYCARPUM,  ROOTSTOCK. 


Plate  14. 


2.  SCIRPUS  LACUSTR IS,  ROOTSTOCK. 


3.  POTAMOGETON  H ETERO PH  Y LLUS. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1 901 . (To  face  page  80.) 


Plate  1 5. 


1.  SAG  ITT  ARIA  RIGIDA. 

The  leaf  in  the  center  is  from  deep  water;  that  at  the  right  from  shallow  water  near  the  shore. 


2.  WINTER  BUDS:  POTAMOGETON  ZOSTER/EFOLI  US  AT  THE  LEFT;  P.  PUSILLUS,  UPPER  RIGHT; 

P.  FREISII,  LOWER  RIGHT, 


Bull,  U.  S.  F.  c.  1 901 . (To  face  page  80.) 


Plate  1 6 


SCIRPUS  PUNGENS,  ROOTSTOCK,  2 ■ CHAR4  FRAG  I LI  S FORMA  B R EV  I B R ACTEATA. 


Plate  1 7. 


3.  CHARA  HYDROPITYS. 


,u' J.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  80.) 


4,  TYPHA  LATI  FOLIA.  ROOTSTOCKS. 


1.  CHARA  CONTRARIA  FORMA  SUBINERMIS. 


2.  CHARA  CONTRARIA. 


5.  NUPHAR  ADVENA,  ROOTSTOCK. 


Plate  18. 


2.  N A I AS  FLEX  I LIS. 

Dwarf  compact  form  growing  on  surf-beaten  shore. 


3.  NITELLA  SU  BGLOM  ERATA.  SANDY  BEACH. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  80.) 


Plate  19 


i1 


CO 

cc 


D 

cc 

e5 


£ 

0 

1 
CO 


x 

D 

< 

X 

o 


co 

D 

Q_ 

o 

z 


< 

cc 

< 

X 

u 


NITELLA  POLY  G LOCH  I N . 


Plate  20. 


3j II.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  80.) 


2.  CHARA  CORONATA,  TYPICAL  FORM. 


V"-' 


3.  CHARA  CORONATA, 

From  shallow  water  in  Squaw  Harbor. 


4.  CHARA  CORONATA 

In  shallow  water  on  sandy  beach. 


5.  CHARA  CORONATA. 


An  anomalous  form  from  Put-in  Bay  growing  at 
the  bottom  of  7 feet  of  water. 


Plate  20. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  80.) 


Qy 


1.  CHARA  CORONATA. 

On  mud  bottom  in  shallow  water. 


V 


, 41  \ ,»j ' p* 

.■i  ' 


2.  CHARA  CORONATA,  TYPICAL  FORM. 


3.  CHARA  CORONATA 
From  shallow  water  in  Squaw  Harbor. 


4.  CHARA  CORONATA 
In  shallow  water  on  sandy  beach. 


An  anomalous  form  from  Put-in  Bay  growing  at 
the  bottom  of  7 feet  of  water. 


THE  LEPTOCEPHALUS  OF  THE  AMERICAN  EEL  AND  OTHER  AMERICAN 

LEPTOCEPHALI. 


By  CARL  H.  EIGENMANN  and  CLARENCE  HAMILTON  KENNEDY. 


It  is  an  anachronism  to  describe  “species”  of  Leptocephali , since  Gill,  Delage, 
Gilbert,  and  Grassi  have  definitely  traced  various  “species”  to  their  adult  forms. 
Nevertheless  this  is  what  we  have  done.  Our  excuse  is  that  with  but  two  exceptions 
we  have  not  been  able  to  connect  any  of  the  forms  examined  with  their  adult  stage. 
It  may  take  many  years  to  complete  the  series  demonstrating  the  life  history  to  which 
each  of  the  species  described  belongs,  and  in  the  meanwhile  it  will  be  advantageous 
to  have  definite  forms  placed  on  record  for  the  benefit  of  all  who  may  secure  Lepto- 
cephali and  may  not  be  within  reach  of  the  specimens  examined. 

In  preparing  this  account  we  have  found  Stromman’s  “ Leptocephalids  in  the 
University  Museum  at  Upsala”  of  great  value.  It  is  unfortunate  that  Stromman 
neglected  to  count  the  segments,  since  Grassi  has  demonstrated  that  this  is  one  of 
the  characters  in  which  a Leptocephalus  agrees  with  its  adult  form. 

Several  of  the  species  to  be  described  here  are  of  great  interest.  One  of  these 
is  the  Leptocephalus  of  the  American  eel,  Anguilla  chrysypa.  We  have  taken  pleasure 
in  associating  the  name  of  Grassi  with  this  species  in  recognition  of  his  identification 
of  Leptocephalus  hreviceps  with  the  European  eel.  Incidental  to  the  identification  of 
the  Leptocephalus  of  the  American  eel,  we  have  found  that  the  American  eel  has  but 
105' to  110  segments,  several  less  than  the  European  eel  possesses.  Another  interest- 
ing species  is  Leptocephalus  diptychus,  in  which  the  color  of  each  side  is  asymmet- 
rically arranged  as  to  the  distance  between  successive  spots,  but  the  blending  of  the 
color  of  the  two  sides  of  the  transparent  creature  gives  the  effect  of  symmetrically 
arranged  markings. 

Most  of  the  species  described  here  are  new  and  belong  unquestionably  to  different 
adult  forms.  Concerning  others  we  are  not  at  all  certain  whether  the  species  belong 
to  different  adult  eels  or  are  different  stages  of  the  same  eel.  Thus  we  are  not  certain 
whether  L.  amphioxus  and  L.  rex  are  different  stages  of  the  same  form  or  not.  The 
same  is  true  of  L.  gillii  and  Z.  latus. 

The  name  Leptocephalus  was  originally  proposed  in  1777  for  Z.  morris ii , the  larva 
of  the  conger  eel.  Since  this  name  is  older  than  any  other  that  has  been  applied  to 
the  adult  conger,  it  has  recently  been  appropriated  by  Jordan  & Evermann  (Fishes 
of  North  and  Middle  America,  p.  353)  for  the  conger  eel.  This  leaves  us  without  a 
distinct  appellation  for  larval  eels  of  the  Leptocephalus  type.  It  might  be  advantageous 
to  use  the  second  name  proposed  for  a larval  eel,  if  the  possibility  of  losing  it  as  soon 

F.  C.  B.  1901— 6 81 


82 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


as  the  adult  form  was  determined  did  not  stare  ns  in  the  face.  We  have,  therefore, 
retained  the  name  LeptocepliaVus  for  the  larva?. 

The  specimens  forming  the  basis  for  this  paper  belong  to  the  U.  S.  National 
Museum.  We  wish  to  express  our  thanks  to  the  authorities  for  the  privilege  of 
examining  them.  Most  of  them  were  collected  by  the  Fish  Commission  steamer 
Albatross  at  the  following  stations: 


Date. 

Station 

No. 

Lat.  N. 

Long.  W. 

Approximate  location. 

1883. 
Nov.  5 

2103 

O I II 

38  47  20 

O ! U 

72  37  00 

100  miles  SE.  Atlantic  City,  N.  J. 

1885. 
Aug.  29 

2566 

37  23  00 

68  08  00 

250  miles  SE.  Nantucket. 

Sept.  3 

2575 

41  07  00 

65  26  30 

160  miles  S.  Cape  Sable,  Nova  Scotia. 

Sept.  20 

2588 

39  02  00 

72  36  00 

95  miles  E.  by  S.  Long  Branch,  N.  J. 

Oct.  17 

2596 

35  08  30 

75  10  00 

20  miles  SE.  Cape  Hatteras. 

Oct.  18 

2597 

34  57  00 

75  43  30 

20  miles  S.  Cape  Hatteras. 

Oct.  18 

2600 

34  39  30 

75  35  30 

40  miles  S.  Cape  Hatteras. 

Oct.  19 

2611 

34  15  00 

76  11  30 

55  miles  SSE.  Cape  Lookout. 

Other  localities  will  be  given  with  different  specimens. 

Grassi  has  demonstrated  that  the  Leptocephali  possess  as  many  segments  as  the 
adult  and  we  have  found  that  the  number  of  segments  in  the  different  specimens  of 
a given  Leptocephalus  varies  but  little.  The  following  table  of  the  LeptocepKali, 
arranged  according  to  the  number  of  segments,  may  therefore  assist  in  referring 
these  species  to  their  other  larval  phases  and  adult  forms.  It  ivill  also  serve  as  a 
Ivey  to  the  species  described  and  permit  other  species  that  may  be  discovered  to  be 
r eadi  ly  i nte updated : 


Protovertebrae. 

Species. 

Length. 

Abdom- 

inal. 

Caudal. 

Total. 

mm. 

Leptocephalus  grassii 

1 47 

i 49 

65 

68 

40 

40 

105 

108 

Leptocephalus  diptychus r 

/ 38 

l 51 

76 

73 

38 

43 

114 

116 

Leptocephalus  rex 

f 87 

\ 100 

59 

60 

119 

123 

Leptocephalus  amphioxus 

65 

102 

20 

122 

1 42 

71 

57 

128 

Leptocephalus  caudomaculatus 

54 

1 57 

70 

71 

72 

58 

128 

127 

1 59 

58 

130 

Leptocephalus  latus 

70 

98 

35 

133 

Leptocephalus  gillii 

50 

96 

41 

137 

Leptocephalus  strommani 

61 

70 

71 

141 

Leptocephalus  morrisii 

I 74 

1 86* 

54 

69 

88 

73 

142 

142 

1 75 

65 

79 

144 

Leptocephalus  mucronatu  - 

{ 80 

66 

80 

146 

1 82 

67 

80 

147 

Leptocephalus  discus 

1 69 

1 71 

72 

75 

83 

84 

155 

159 

1 75 

68 

91 

159 

Leptocephalus  humilis 

76 

| 78 

69 

71 

93 

90 

162 

161 

1 85 

68 

89 

187 

Leptocephalus  gilberti 

73 

100 

80 

180 

*The  larger  specimen  is  tire  younger. 


THE  LEPTOCEPHALUS  OF  THE  AMERICAN  EEL. 


83 


Several  characters  used  in  the  following  key  have  proved  of  but  transient  value. 
The  approximation  or  separation  of  the  nares  we  have  found  in  one  case  to  depend 
on  the  age  of  the  specimen.  The  presence  or  absence  of  the  pectorals  we  have  also 
found  to  depend  at  times  on  the  age  of  the  specimen.  Whether  these  two  characters 
are  ever  of  permanent  value  we  are  unable  to  say. 


Key  to  the  species  of  Leptocephali  described  in  the  present  paper . 


a.  A series  of  three  or  four  large  conspicuous  black  spots  on  each  side.  Segments  114  to  116.  Other  charac- 
ters differing  greatly  with  age diplychus 

act.  Sides  without  large  conspicuous  black  spots. 

6.  Pectorals  none;  nostrils  remote. 

c.  Head  depressed  between  the  eyes;  96  abdominal,  40  caudal  segments giltii 

cc.  Head  swollen  between  the  eyes;  a series  of  black  dots  along  back  and  belly. 

d.  Anus  near  middle  of  length;  eye  large,  1.6  in  snout;  gradually  tapering  from  snout  to  anus, 

thence  decreasing  gradually  to  the  tail;  no  pigment  about 

head,  except  in  gular  region;  segments  70  + 71 strommani 


dd.  Anus  much  nearer  tip  of  caudal  than  snout;  eye  small,  2.5  in  snout;  rapidly  widening  from  nape 

to  about  the  twenty-fifth  segment,  then  of  nearly  uni- 
form width  to  anus  at  ninety-eighth  segment,  thence 
tapering  to  tip  of  tail;  pigment  dots  on  top  of  head;  seg- 
ments 98  + 35 .lotus 

bb.  Pectoral  fins  present. 

e.  Caudal  suddenly  contracted;  head  conical;  eye  small,  2.66  in  snout;  nostrils  remote;  seg- 
ments 66  + 80  mucronat.us 

ee.  Caudal  not  contracted,  the  vertical  fins  continuous  with  it. 

/.  Nostrils  remote. 

g.  Snout  obtuse,  lower  jaw  the  shorter. 

li.  No  color  along  the  middle  of  the  sides.  Segments  about  60  + 60  rex 

hh.  A series  of  spots  along  the  middle  of  the  side;  another  along  the  ventral  margin; 

segments  54  + 88  (see  also  n) morrisii 

gg.  Snout  pointed,  jaws  equal. 

i.  Body  short,  elliptical;  no  pigment;  tongue  free  in  front;  segments  68  + 40  grassii 

ii.  Body  elongate,  band-shaped. 

j.  Eye  1.5  in  snout;  nostrils  above  the  level  of  the  middle  of  the  eye;  a series 
of  rounded  spots  along  the  middle  of  the  sides,  one  to 

each  2 to  3 segments;  segments  72  + 83 discus 

jj.  Eye  1.5  in  snout;  nostrils  on  level  with  middle  of  eye;  tongue  not  free  in 
front;  a series  of  elongate  spots  along  the  middle  of  the 

sides,  one  to  each  segment;  segments  about  160 humilis 

ff.  Nostrils  approximated;  body  elongate,  nearly  band-shaped;  a series  of  spots  below  the  mid- 
dle of  the  sides. 

k.  Vent  near  the  posterior  end  of  the  body;  color  along  sides  consisting 

of  a series  of  round  chromatophores  on  the  somites amphioxus 

kk.  Vent  near  the  middle  of  the  body. 

1.  A series  of  spots  in  the  tail  just  beneath  the  notochord;  segments 

127  to  130 caudomaculatus 

. K.  No  spots  in  the  tail. 

vi.  A series  of  chromatophores  along  the  base  of  the  dorsal  rays; 

segments  about  159  to  162 humilis 

mm.  No  chromatophores  along  the  base  of  the  dorsal  rays. 

n.  Segments  142 morrisii 

nn.  Segments  180 gilberti 

All  drawings  illustrating  this  paper  were  prepared  by  Mr.  Clarence  Hamilton 
Kennedy. 


84 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


DESCRIPTIONS  OF  SPECIES. 

Leptocephalus  grassii,  sp.  nov.  = Anguilla  chrysypa.  Figs.  1,  la,  16. 

One  specimen  47  mm.  long,  Albatross  station  2103.  One  49  mm.  long,  Albatross,  lat.  38°  25' 
N.,  72°  40/  W. 

This  species  is  distinguished  by  its  broad,  well-developed  vertical  fins,  deep  and  robust  body,  and 
absence  of  all  pigment.  Body  lanceolate,  sharp  at  both  ends,  deepest  at  the  middle;  its  depth  5.66 
in  the  length;  dorsal  beginning  about  8 segments  in  front  of  anus,  its  rays  becoming  gradually  longer 
to  the  caudal,  whose  rays  are  about  1 m.  long;  anal  similar  to  the  dorsal;  pectoral  well  developed; 
head  sharply  conical,  upper  and  lower  profile  equally  slanting;  eye  large,  1.33  in  snout,  4 in  head;  no 
pigment  cells;  segments  65  + 40  and  68  + 40. 

This  species  very  closely  resembles  Leptocephalus  breviceps,  which  Grassi  has  shown  to  be  the 
young  of  the  European  eel.  The  segments  of  the  European  eel  are  given  as  116.  The  vertebrae  of 
seven  young  eels  taken  at  Woods  Hole  during  the  summer  of  1900  range  from  106  to  110,  as  follows: 
35+71,  35  + 72,  36  + 71,  36  + 71,  36  + 73,  36  + 74,  42  + 65.  This  number  agrees  with  the  number  of 
segments  in  L.  grassii. 


1. 


The  close  similarity  of  this  species  to  Leptocephalus  breviceps,  the  absence  of  color,  the  structure  of 
the  caudal,  and  the  difference  of  this  species  from  breviceps  in  just  that  character,  viz,  number  of 
vertebrae,  in  which  the  American  eel  differs  from  the  European  eel,  make  it  quite  certain  that  the 
present  species  is  the  larva  of  the  American  eel. 

We  take  pleasure  in  associating  the  name  of  Professor  Grassi  with  the  larva  of  the  American  eel. 

Leptocephalus  diptychus  E.  & Iv.  Figs.  2,  2a,  2b,  2c,  2d,  2e. 

Leptocephalus  diptychus,  Eigenmann  & Kennedy,  Science,  xii,  p.  401.  1900. 

Type,  one  specimen  38  mm.  long,  Albatross  station  2566;  surface,  evening.  Cotype,  one  specimen 
51  mm.  long,  Albatross,  New  Providence;  surface,  electric  light. 

This  species  differs  from  all  other  species  of  Leptocephalus  in  the  presence  of  eight  large  chromato- 
phores,  one  in  the  alimentary  canal  a short  distance  in  front  of  the  anus,  and  seven  along  the  middle 
line  of  the  body,  three  of  which  are  on  the  left  side  and  four  are  on  the  right.  Those  of  opposite  sides 
alternate  with  each  other,  so  that  they  appear  in  the  translucent  fish  as  a series  of  seven  spots  placed 
at  more  or  less  regular  intervals  along  the  side.  Each  one  of  the  spots  of  the  side  consists  of  a large 


THE  LEPTOCEPHALUS  OF  THE  AMERICAN  EEL. 


85 


chromatophore  extending  over  three  to  four  somites.  At  the  margin  of  these  larger  chromatophores 
there  are  rarely  minute  chromatophores. 

The  two  specimens  differ  from  each  other  very  greatly  in  the  shape  of  the  head,  the  nostrils,  the 
development  of  the  pectoral,  and  the  shape  of  the  body.  The  fact  that  the  large  one  has  lost  its  teeth 
and  its  head  has  assumed  a distinct  eel  shape,  together  witli  the  similarity  of  the  structure  of  the 
caudal,  the  unique  coloration,  and  the  similarity  in  the  number  of  myotonies,  make  it  very  probable 
that  the  two  specimens  are  different  stages  of  the  same  species. 


Leptocephalus  diptychus,  small  specimen. 


Leptocephalus  diptychus. 

The  two  specimens  differ  as  follows: 

a.  Body  more  elongate;  pectorals  a mere  ridge;  nostrils  remote  from  each  other  for  a distance  nearly  equal  to 
the  diameter  of  the  eye;  leptocephalous  teeth  wanting;  lower  jaw  projecting,  its  tip  rounded  and  enter- 
ingthe  profile;  no  pigment  spots  about  the  head;  depth  8.6;  head  distinctly  more  than  half  the  depth  of 


the  body,  nearly  11  in  the  length;  eye  7 in  head,  1.5  in  snout;  segments  73  + 43 type 

aa.  Body  elliptical;  pectorals  well  developed;  nostrils  not  yet  separated;  leptocephalous  teeth;  jawsnearly  equal; 
a pigment  spot  near  the  end  of  the  lower  jaw,  another  within  the  anterior  nares,  two  succeeding  each 
■ other  between  the  lower  margin  of  the  pupil  and  the  lower  margin  of  the  auditory  capsule;  depth  6; 

head  less  than  half  greatest  depth;  eye  5 in  head;  segments  76  + 38 cotype 


86 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Details  of  the  distribution  of  spots  on  the  two  sides  of  L.  diptychus. 


Younger  specimen. 

Older  specimen. 

No.  of  seg- 
ments between 
centers  of  suc- 
cessive spots. 

Serial  number  of  proto- 
vertebrae  over  which 
a spot  extends. 
(R=right  side;  L=lel't.) 

No.  of  seg- 
ments between 
centers  of  suc- 
cessive spots. 

Serial  number  of  -proto- 
vertebrae  over  which 
a spot  extends. 
(R=right  side;  L=left.) 

12 

f 15,16,17  R 

| 27, 28, 29  R 

12 

f 12, 13, 14  R. 

13 

12 

1 24,  25,  26  L. 

11 

j 40,41,42  L 

} 51,52,53  R 

12 

| 36, 37, 38  R. 
| 48, 49, 50  L. 

11 

1U-. 

14 

1 62, 68, 64, 65  L 

13 

| 58, 59, 60  R. 

| 76, 77,  78  R 

17 

J 71,72,73  L. 

15 

{ 91, 92, 98  L 

1 87,  88, 89, 90  R. 

Leptocephalus  rex,  sp.  nov.  Figs.  3,  3a,  3/). 

One  specimen,  87  mm.  long,  Albatross,  San  Salvador,  1886.  One  105  mm.  long,  Albatross,  New 
Providence.  The  first  specimen  may  represent  a later  phase  of  the  species'  called  amphioxus, 

The  head  has  taken  on  its  adult  form,  the  snout  is  rounded,  the  lower  jaw  is  shorter  than  the 
upper,  and  the  larval  teeth  have  dropped  out.  The  body  is  not  as  compressed  as  in  true  larval  forms. 


The  tail  is  long  and  pointed.  The  greatest  depth  is  11.5  in  the  length.  The  head  is  nearly  13  in  the 
length.  The  dorsal  begins  a few  segments  in  front  of  anus.  The  caudal  is  rounded,  continuous 
with  the  high  dorsal  and  anal.  A series  of  color  cells  along  base  of  anal  and  caudal  rays;  a few 
cells  in  deeper  parts  of  tip  of  tail;  no  color  elsewhere  about  body  or  head;  segments  59  + 60. 

The  second  specimen  differs  from  the  one  above  described  in  having  a series  of  spots  along  the 
base  of  the  dorsal  as  well  as  the  anal,  and  in  having  123  segments.  The  difference  in  color  may  be 
due  to  difference  in  age.  This  specimen  is  much  shriveled  by  alcohol. 

Leptocephalus  amphioxus,  sp.  nov.  Figs.  4,  4a,  4b. 

Type,  one  specimen,  65  mm.  long,  Albatross,  lat.  38°  25'  N.,  long.  72°  40'  W. 

This  species  is  evidently  very  closely  related  to  Leptocephalus  immaculatus  Stromman , from  which 
it  differs  in  the  more  pointed  snout  and  tail  and  the  presence  of  a series  of  chromatophores  along  the 
middle  of  the  side.  Body  tapering  nearly  equally  from  both  ends  to  the  middle;  depth  about  9.5  in 
the  length;  head  depressed  in  front  of  the  ejms,  snout  pointed,  jaws  equal;  eye  1.66  in  snout,  4.4  in 
head;  nostrils  near  together;  head  14.5  in  the  length;  pectorals  well  developed;  alimentary  canal 
extending  to  near  the  tip  of  the  tail;  caudal  well  developed,  not  separated  from  the  dorsal  and  anal: 


THE  LEPTOCEPHALUS  OF  THE  AMERICAN  EEL. 


87 


head  without  pigment,  an  irregular  series  of  small  round  chromatophores  on  the  somites  near  the 
middle  of  the  body;  a series  of  chromatophores  at  the  base  of  the  vertical  fins,  a series  of  chromato- 
phores  above  the  alimentary  canal.  Segments  102  + 20. 


Leptocephalus  caudomaculatus,  sp.  nov.  Figs.  5,  5a,  5 h. 

Four  specimens  42,  54,  57,  and  59  mm.  long.  Albatross  station  2597. 

This  species  resembles  L.  humilis  in  most  characters.  It  is  most  readily  distinguished  from  that 
species  by  the  absence  of  chromatophores  along  all  but  two  or  three  of  the  dorsal  rays.  The  rayed 
dorsal  begins  about  the  fourth  segment  in  front  of  the  anus.  Greatest  height  13  in  the  length.  The 
body  is  nearly  of  uniform  height  from  the  head  to  beyond  the  alimentary  canal.  Head  about  1.25  in 
the  greatest  height;  eye  2 in  snout,  5.5  in  head;  snout  pointed;  profile  straight  or  slightly  depressed  over 
eyes;  pectorals  well  developed;  nostrils  close  together,  anterior  about  half  way  between  eye  and  tip 
of  snout;  one  or  two  chromatophores  at  the  margin  of  the  upper  jaw;  no  other  chromatophores  about 


Leptocephalus  caudomaculatus. 


the  head;  a series  of  9 pigment  spots  above  the  alimentary  canal;  no  pigment  spots  at  base  of  anal  or 
dorsal;  a few  chromatophores  at  base  of  tail;  a spot  at  the  upper  surface  of  the  spinal  cord  at  its  end;  a 
series  of  about  four  spots  in  the  tail  just  beneath  the  notochord;  the  myocomma  with  1 to  3 insignificant 
chromatophores  below  the  median  line;  myotonies  70-72+56-58. 

Leptocephalus  latus,  sp.  nov.  Figs.  6,  6«,  6 b. 

Type,  one  specimen  70  mm.  long.  Albatross  station  2611;  surface. 

This  species  is  evidently  very  closely  related  to  L.  fulginosus  Stromman.  It  differs  from  the  latter 
principally  in  the  size  of  the  eye  and  in  pigmentation.  Since  his  specimen  was  larger  (78  mm.),  the 
difference  in  the  size  of  the  eye  is  not  attributable  to  age.  Body  very  thin  and  elevated,  rather  sud- 
denly widened  at  the  nape  and  reaching  its  maximum  height  near  the  middle  of  the  body,  where  it 
remains  the  same  to  near  the  anus,  the  tail  broadly  rounded;  greatest  height  7.4;  head  small,  about  17 


88 


BULLETIN  »!  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


in  the  length;  lower  jaw  distinctly  shorter,  leptocephalous  dentition  persisting;  eye  small,  2.5  in  snout, 
7 in  head;  nostrils  remote;  pectorals  not  developed;  a few  scattered  pigment  cells  in  the  opercular 
region,  a few  cells  on  top  of  the  head,  a series  of  pigment  cells  along  the  base  of  the  dorsal,  anal,  and 
ventral  line,  those  along  the  liases  of  the  fins  forming  a nearly  complete  line,  those  along  the  lower 
surface  of  the  abdomen  more  widely  separated;  segments  98-|-35. 


Leptoeephalus  latus. 


Leptocephalus  g-illii,  sp.  nov.  Figs.  7,  7a,  7b. 

Type,  one  specimen  50  mm.  long.  Albatross,  lat.  38°  25'  north,  long.  72°  40'  west. 

This  species  differ  from  L.  latus  in  the  shape  of  the  head  and  body.  The  specimen  is,  however, 
somewhat  shriveled,  and  the  differences  may  be  due  to  age  and  to  preservation. 

The  body  tapers  gradually  to  the  middle  of  the  body;  the  tail  is  rather  pointed;  greatest  height 
7.5  in  the  length;  eye  13.5  in  the  length;  profile  depressed  between  nostrils;  jaws  equal;  distance 


THE  LEPTOCEPHALUS  OF  THE  AMERICAN  EEL. 


89 


between  nostrils  about  equal  to  pupil;  eye  5.33  in  head;  pectorals  none;  a group  of  pigment  cells  on 
top  of  head  and  a similar  group  below  gill  opening,  an  irregular  row  of  spots  along  ventral  side  of 
abdomen,  a more  regular  row  of  smaller  spots  along  base  of  dorsal  and  anal  fins.  Segments  96  + 41. 

We  take  pleasure  in  associating  with  this  species  the  name  of  Dr.  Theo.  Gill,  the  first  to  express 
the  conviction  (Proceedings  Philadelphia  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences,  1864)  that  a Leptocephalus  is 
the  larva  of  an  eel. 

Leptocephalus  strommani,  sp.  nov.  Figs.  8,  8a,  8 b. 

Type,  one  specimen  61  mm.  long.  Albatross  station  2596. 

This  species  is  evidently  closely  related  to  L.  latus.  It  differs  from  that  species  chiefly  in  the  posi- 
tion of  the  anus  and  the  folding  of  the  posterior  section  of  the  alimentary  canal.  The  body  is  not 
so  deep  nor  so  suddenly  expanded  behind  the  nape,  tapering  instead  rather  evenly  in  front  and  behind. 
Its  greatest  depth  is  near  the  anus  and  is  7.5  in  the  length,  and  the  tail  is  rounded,  without  a distinct 
caudal,  but  with  the  middle  rays  longer  than  in  L.  latus.  The  head  is  about  15.5  in  length.  The  lower 
jaw  is  distinctly  shorter  than  the  upper,  the  profile  rounded;  eye  medium,  about  5.5  in  head,  1.6  in 
snout;  nostrils  remote  by  a distance  about  equal  to  the  diameter  of  the  eye;  pectorals  not  developed; 


a group  of  pigment  cells  in  the  gular  region;  no  other  pigment  cells  about  the  head;  a series  of  pigment 
cells  around  the  edge  of  the  body,  those  in  the  abdominal  region  above  the  alimentary  canal,  except 
along  its  anterior  third,  where  they  are  along  the  ventral  surface;  no  color  on  body.  Segments  70  + 71. 

We  take  pleasure  in  dedicating  this  species  to  the  author  of  “ Leptocephalids  in  the  University 
Zoological  Museum  at  Upsala,”  Dr.  Strdmman. 


Leptocephalus  morrisii  Scopoli  = Leptocephalus  conger.  Figs.  9,  9a,  95;  10,  10a,  105. 

One  specimen  86  mm.  long.  Albatross  station  2588.  ,0 

Body  gradually  tapering  from  the  head  to  behind  the  anus,  where  the  depth  is  10.33  in  the 
length;  fins  very  low;  rayed  dorsal  beginning  four  segments  in  front  of  the  anus;  tail  pointed;  head 
pointed;  jaws  equal;  profile  nearly  straight;  eye  1.6  in  snout,  about  5 in  head;  nostrils  approximated; 
pectoral  well  developed;  three  or  four  pigment  cells  over  the  eye;  two  chromatophores  below  the 
pectoral;  a series  of  eight  pigment  spots  above  the  alimentary  canal;  a pigment  spot  beneath  the 
alimentary  canal  opposite  the  second  one  above;  a row  of  pigment  cells  along  the  base  of  the  anal, 
beginning  about  two  segments  behind  anus  and  extending  to  caudal;  several  chromatophores  at  base 
of  caudal  and  two  at  base  of  dorsal  near  tail;  none  at  base  of  any  other  dorsal  rays  or  along  the  back; 
sides  with  a series  of  linear  spots  on  the  myocomma  beneath  median  line;  segments  69  + 73. 


90 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


A specimen  74  mm.  long  from  New  Providence  ( Albatross , surface),  which  has  undergone  a 
partial  metamorphosis,  seems  to  be  referable  to  this  species.  The  leptocephalous  teeth  have  been  lost, 
the  snout  has  become  rounded,  and  the  alimentary  canal  shorter.  Body  long  and  band-shaped,  taper- 
ing gradually  from  head  to  midway  between  caudal  and  anus;  depth  about  11  in  length;  head  small, 
about  16  in  length  of  body;  snout  rounded;  lower  jaw  shorter  than  upper;  mouth  extending  beyond 
eye;  pectorals  well  developed;  eye  1.5  in  snout,  about  5 in  head;  dorsal  beginning  in  posterior  fourth 
of  alimentary  canal,  increasing  in  height  to  caudal;  anal  similar  to  dorsal;  one  or  two  chromatophores 
below  pectoral;  a series  of  six  spots  along  alimentary  canal,  a few  cells  scattered  between  them;  a series 
of  spots  along  base  of  anal  and  caudal;  a few  spots  on  caudal  and  a few  along  the  bases  of  last  dorsal 


rays;  sides  with  an  irregular  series  of  spots  on  the  myocomma,  each  spot,  composed  of  from  one  to  three 
chromatophores,  which  are  expanded  on  surface  over  the  myocomma  rather  than  in  them,  as  in 
the  younger  specimens;  two  minute  chromatophores  on  one  side  of  head. 

Leptocephalus  mucronatus,  sp.  nov.  Figs.  11,  I la,  115. 

Specimen  No.  1,  75  mm.  long;  No.  2,  80  mm.  long;  No.  3,  82  mm.  long.  Albatross  station  2575, 
lat..  38°  25/  north,  long.  72°  40'  west. 

This  species  differs  from  all  others  in  our  collections,  or  in  descriptions  accessible  to  us,  in  its 
suddenly  contracted  or  mucronate  tail,  the  fin  folds  being  imperfectly  continued  around  it,  and  by  the 
greater  pigmentation.  The  specimens  appear  to  have  reached  the  point  of  metamorphosis,  the  head 
being  well  round  and  conical,  but  the  leptocephalous  dentition  .persists.  Elongate  band-shaped,  the 
body  tapering  gradually  to  about  midway  between  anus  and  tip  of  caudal;  depth,  11.5;  head,  14.33; 
eye  small,  2.66  in  snout,  9 to  base  of  pectoral;  nostrils  remote  from  each  other  by  a distance  equal  to 
diameter  of  eye;  pectorals  well  developed;  gill  slit  nearly  vertical;  somites  66-f-80;  tongue  not  free 
in  front. 


THE  LEPTOCEPHALUS  OP  THE  AMERICAN  EEL. 


91 


Coloration  all  formed  by  minute  chromatophores,  a spot  near  ends  of  jaws,  a spot  behind  eye, 
another  above  it  at  nape,  a series  of  lines  of  irregular  length  and  irregularly  placed  at  bend  of  the 
myocomma  along  middle  of  sides,  a few  spots  near  upper  bend  of  the  myocommas;  a similar  series  of 
spots  along  lower  bend  of  myocommas  of  the  tail,  a series  of  spots  along  dorsal,  a series  of  spots  along 
anal,  a series  of  double  spots  above  and  below  the  alimentary  canal. 

Leptocephalus  discus,  sp.  nov.  Figs.  12,  12a,  12 b. 

Two  specimens,  71  and  69  mm.  long.  Albatross,  San  Salvador. 

This  specimen  differs  from  all  others  in  the  collection  except  L.  amphioxus  in  possessing  along 
the  middle  of  the  side  a series  of  circular  chromatophores  placed  on  every  second  to  fourth  somite. 

Body  of  nearly  uniform  width,  tapering  for  a short  distance  in  front  and  behind;  depth  about 
10  in  the  length;  head  15.5  in  the  length;  head  short  and  conical,  the  upper  and  lower  profiles  with 
similar  slopes;  pectorals  well  developed;  dorsal  beginning  about  the  twentieth  segment;  caudal 


11a 


Leptocephalus  mucronatus. 


pointed,  rays  little  developed;  tail  lanceolate;  no  pigment  about  head,  except  a series  of  three  or  four 
chromatophores  on  each  side  of  throat;  a few  chromatophores  above  alimentary  canal  near  its  posterior 
end,  another  series  on  sides  near  base  of  anal;  pigment  between  anal  rays  in  its  posterior  half;  a few 
pigment  cells  about  base  of  caudal  and  two  or  three  at  base  of  some  of  posterior  dorsal  rays;  middle 
of  sides  with  a series  of  round  chromatophores  more  numerous  toward  caudal;  two  or  three  chromato- 
phores above  or  below  this  series  on  tip  of  tail. 


92 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Leptocephalus  humilis  Stromman.  Figs.  13,  13a,  136. 

Two  specimens  75  and  76  mm.  long.  New  Providence.  One  85  mm.  long.  Albatross  station 
2600.  One  78  mm.  long.  Alhcdross  station  2596. 

This  species  agrees  closely  in  most  respects  with  Stromman’ s description.  It  differs  in  having 
a series  of  spots  above  the  alimentary  canal.  There  is  a series  of  three  or  four  chromatophores  along 
the  edge  of  the  upper  jaw  half  way  between  its  tip  and  the  eye;  a chromatophore  near  the  base  of  the 
pectorals;  mid-dorsal  line  in  front  of  the  dorsal  fin  with  a series  of  widely  separated  chromatophores; 
dorsal,  caudal  and  anal  with  a series  of  chromatophores;  a few  chromatophores  on  the  caudal  rays;  a 
series  of  spots  above  the  spinal  cord  at  its  posterior  part,  these  sometimes  aggregated  into  two  spots; 
myocommas  below  the  median  line,  each  with  a series  of  from  one  to  four  chromatophores  except 
near  the  head.  The  body  is  long  and  slender,  tapering  from  the  very  slender  head  to  behind  the 
alimentary  canal;  tail  pointed;  segments  71  + 90;  68  89;  68  + 91;  69  + 93. 


13 


Leptocephalus  humilis. 


Leptocephalus  gilberti,  sp.  nov.  Fig.  14,  14a,  146. 

Type,  one  specimen  73  mm.  long.  Albatross  station  2597. 

This  species  resembles  Leptocephalus  humilis,  morrisii,  and  caudomaculatus  in  shape  of  the  head, 
the  nostrils,  the  shape  of  tail.  It  differs  in  number  of  segments,  distribution  of  spots  along  alimentary 
canal,  and  length  of  rayed  dorsal.  Body  tapering  equally  to  both  ends  from  middle;  depth  about  12 
times  in  length;  head  about  half  the  greatest  depth;  snout  pointed;  upper  and  lower  profiles  nearly 
equally  slanting;  dorsal  beginning  on  seventh  segment  behind  pectoral;  a chromatophore  on  margin 
of  upper  jaw;  no  other  pigment  about  head;  a chromatophore  below  pectoral,  a series  of  chromato- 
phores along  upper  margin  of  alimentary  canal,  congregated  in  places  to  form  more  or  less  distinct 
spots;  a few  chromatophores  along  ventral  margin  of  alimentary  canal;  base  of  anal  with  a series  of 
chromatophores  to  near  caudal;  a few  chromatophores  at  base  of  caudal;  none  at  base  of  the  dorsal;  a 
few  chromatophores  on  tip  of  tail;  the  usual  series  of  linear  spots  on  myocomma  beneath  lateral  line; 
segments  100  + 80, 

We  take  pleasure  in  dedicating  this  species  to  Dr.  Charles  H.  Gilbert,  in  recognition  of  his 
demonstration  of  the  metamorphosis  of  the  Leptocephalus  of  Albula  vulpes  into  its  adult  form. 


DESCRIPTION  OF  A NEW  SPECIES  OF  BLENNY  FROM  JAPAN. 


By  HUGH  M.  SMITH. 


Among  the  miscellaneous  zoological  collections  made  by  the  Fish  Commission 
steamer  Albatross  on  the  coast  of  Japan  in  1900  is  a small  blennioid  fish  belonging  to 
a species  not  heretofore  met  with  by  ichthyologists  and  representing  a new  genus. 
The  specimen  was  dredged  at  a depth  of  67  fathoms,  at  the  head  of  the  Suruga  Gulf, 
island  of  Nipon. 

ETJLOPHIAS,  new  genus  of  Blenniidse. 

Generic  diagnosis:  Body  very  elongate;  dorsal  fin  low,  extending  entire  length 
of  body  and  consisting  of  numerous  rigid  spines  succeeded  by  a few  simple  rays; 
anal  tin  long  and  low,  composed  of  one  spine  and  numerous  simple  soft  rays;  caudal 
fin  small  but  distinct,  blended  with  the  dorsal  and  anal;  pectoral  fins  short  and 
pointed;  ventral  fins  absent;  scales  absent;  no  lateral  line;  gill  membranes  broadly 
united,  free  from  the  isthmus;  nostrils  tubular;  ventral  opening  in  advance  of  middle 
of  body. 

Eulojphias,  from  t v,  well;  Ao^zag-,  one  having  a bristly  back;  in  allusion  to  the 
very  long  spinous  dorsal  fin. 


Eulophias  tanneri  H.  M.  Smith,  new  genus  and  species.  (Enlarged  about  2^  times.) 

This  genus  falls  within  the  limits  of  the  heterogeneous  family  Blenniidoe , but 
must  there  be  placed  in  a separate  subfamily  (Ealophiasince)  based  on  the  very 
elongate  form,  the  shape  and  size  of  the  pectoral  fins,  and  the  few  soft  rays  in  the 
dorsal  fin,  combined  with  the  presence  of  a pre-anal  spine  and  the  absence  of  a 
lateral  line. 

This  genus  seems  to  be  nearly  related  to  no  other  genus.  From  Gebedichthys 
(represented  by  a single  species  from  the  Pacific  coast  of  the  United  States),  which 
it  appears  most  closely  to  resemble,  it  differs  in  being  much  more  elongated,  with 
lower  fins,  more  numerous  dorsal  soft  rays,  more  anterior  origin  of  the  dorsal  and 
anal  fins,  absence  of  lateral  line,  absence  of  a prominent  longitudinal  cephalic  crest, 
etc.  From  Neozoarces , the  type  of  which  is  from  Okhotsk  Sea,  this  genus  may  be 
distinguished  by  its  more  slender  form,  the  presence  of  a caudal  fin,  the  absence  of  a 
tentacle  above  the  nostril,  etc. 


94 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Eulophias  tanneri,  new  species. 

Body  elongate,  eel-like,  cylindrical  anteriorly,  compressed  posteriorly;  tapering  gently  back- 
ward and  terminating  in  a blunt  point;  greatest  depth  about  0.05  total  body  length.  Head  rather 
long,  conical,  not  larger  than  body,  its  length  0.12  body  length,  terminating  posteriorly  in  a rounded 
flap.  Eye  large,  directed  slightly  upward,  rather  less  than  0.33  length  of  head;  interorbital  space  con- 
tracted, not  wider  than  pupil.  Snout  short,  rounded,  0.5  length  of  eye.  Mouth  rather  large,  terminal 
slightly  oblique,  jaws  equal,  maxillary  extending  to  vertical  of  anterior  edge  of  pupil;  nostrils  tubular, 
midway  from  eye  to  end  ox  snout;  gill  membranes  broadly  united,  not  attached  to  isthmus.  Anal 
orifice  0.4  distance  from  snout  to  end  of  body.  Dorsal  fin  low,  continuous,  beginning  slightly  in 
advance  of  posterior  edge  of  opercle  and  extending  to  caudal  fin,  gradually  increasing  in  height  from 
before  backward;  composed  of  121  stiff  spines  and  13  simple  soft  rays;  anal  fin  long  and  low,  begin- 
ning under  thirty-sixth  dorsal  spine  and  extending  to  caudal;  consists  of  1 spine  and  about  75  simple 
rays,  the  length  of  the  spine  being  about  twice  that  of  the  adjoining  rays;  caudal  fin  blended  with 
dorsal  and  anal,  composed  of  7 simple  rays;  pectoral  fins  short,  pointed,  and  narrow,  less  than  half 
length  of  head.  Length  of  specimen,  45  mm. 

Colors:  Underparts  whitish;  a series  of  brownish  elongated  blotches,  about  20  in  number,  extends 
along  side  from  head  to  tail;  above  these  a series  of  smaller  blotches  of  same  color,  about  twice  as 
numerous;  a dark-brown  stripe,  less  than  width  of  eye,  extending  behind  eye;  a blackish  blotch  on 
cheek  beneath  eye,  extending  anteriorly  and  posteriorly  on  the  branch iostegal  membrane;  gill  mem- 
brane with  dark-brown  area;  fins  unmarked. 

Type  (No.  49798,  U.  S.  National  Museum)  collected  by  Albatross,  in  about  67  fathoms,  at  station 
3715,  in  Suruga  Gulf,  Japan,  May  11,  1900. 

This  interesting  species  is  named  for  Commander  Z.  L.  Tanner,  U.  8.  N.,  com- 
mander of  the  Fish  Commission  steamers  Albatross  and  Fish  Hawk  from  1879  to 
1894,  the  foremost  exponent  of  the  methods  of  modern  deep-sea  exploration,  whose 
intelligent  and  zealous  investigations  have  led  to  most  valuable  contributions  to 
oceanic  biology  and  physics. 

U.  8.  Fish  Commission,  Washington , D.  C. 


LIST  OF  SPECIES  OF  FISHES  KNOWN  TO  OCCUR  IN  THE  GREAT  LAKES  OR 

THEIR  CONNECTING  WATERS. 


By  BARTON  WARREN  EVERMANN,  Ichthyologist , U.  S.  Fish  Commission 


la  the  following  list  are  given  the  fishes  known  to  occur  in  the  Great  Lakes  or 
then  connecting  waters.  This  includes  not  only  the  streams  and  smaller  lakes 
directly  tributary  to  the  Great  Lakes  but  also  the  upper  St.  Lawrence  River  and  the 
waters  tributary  to  it.  The  species  not  known  to  occur  elsewhere  than  in  the  hydro- 
graphic  basin  of  the  Great  Lakes  are  indicated  by  a star. 

The  fish  fauna  of  the  Great  Lakes  is  not  particularly  rich  as  to  species,  the 
number  being  scarcely  greater  than  that  known  from  the  Wabash  Basin.  Of  this 
list  of  152  species  and  subspecies,  only  27  are  peculiar  to  the  Great  Lakes  Basin. 


1.  Petromyzon  marinus  unicolor  (De  Kay). 

Lamprey  eel. 

2.  * Ichthyomyzon  concolor  (Kirtland).  Silver 

lamprey. 

3.  Lampetra  wilderi  (Ctage).  Brook  lamprey. 

4.  Polyodon  spathula  (Walba'um).  Paddle-fish. 

Only  one  specimen  recorded  from  Great 
Lakes  Basin;  that  from  Lake  Erie. 

5.  Acipenser  rubicundus  Le  S.  Lake  sturgeon. 

6.  Lepisosteus  osseus  (L.) . Long-nosed  gar. 

7.  Lepisosteus  platostomus  Rafinesque.  Short- 

nosed gar. 

8.  Amia  calva  Linnaeus.  Dog-fish  or  bowfin. 

9.  Ietalurus  punctatus  (Rafinesque).  Channel 

cat-fish. 

10.  Ameiurus  lacustris  (Walbaum).  Great  Lakes 

cat-fish. 

1 1.  Ameiurus  natalis(Le  Sueur).  Yellow  cat-fish. 

12.  Ameiurus  vulgaris  (Thompson).  Bullhead. 

13.  Ameiurus  nebulosus  (Le  Sueur).  Common 

bullhead. 

14.  Ameiurus  melas  (Rafinesque) . Small  black 

bullhead. 

15.  Noturus  flavus  Rafinesque.  Stone  cat. 

16.  Schilbeodes  gyrinus  ( Mitchill ) . 

17.  Schilbeodes  exilis  (Nelson). 

18.  Schilbeodes  miurus  (Jordan). 

19.  *Carpiodes  thompsoni  Agassiz.  Lake  carp 

sucker. 

20.  Catostomus  catostomus  (Forster).  Long-nosed 

sucker. 

21.  Catostomus  commersonii  (Lacepede).  Com- 

mon sucker. 

22.  Catostomus  nigricans  Le  S.  Black  sucker? 

23.  Erimyzon  sucetta  oblongus  (Mitchill).  Chub 

sucker. 

24.  Minytremamelanops  (Raf. ).  Striped  sucker. 

25.  Moxostoma  anisurum  (Rafinesque).  White- 

nosed  sucker. 

26.  Moxostoma  aureolum  (Le  Sueur).  Common 

red  horse. 


27.  Moxostoma  breviceps  (Cope).  Short-headed 

red  horse. 

28.  Campostoma anomalum  ( Raf. ) . Stone-roller. 

29.  Chrosomus  erythrogaster  Rafinesque.  Red- 

bellied  dace. 

30.  Pimephalespromelas  Raf.  Fat-head  minnow. 

31.  Pimephales  notatus  (Rafinesque).  Blunt- 

nosed  minnow. 

32.  Semotilus  corporalis  (Mitchill.)  Fall-fish. 

33.  Semotilus  atromaculatus  (Mitchill).  Creek 

chub. 

34.  Leuciscus  elongatus  (Kirtland).  Red-sided 

minnow. 

35.  Leuciscus  neogseus  (Cope). 

36.  Leuciscus  margarita  (Cope) . 

37.  Opsopoeodus  emiliae  Hay. 

38.  Opsopoeodus  megalops  (Forbes). 

39.  Abramis  crysoleucas  (Mitchill).  Roach. 

40.  Hybognathus  nuchale  Agassiz. 

41.  -Cliola  vigilax  (Baird  & Girard) 

42.  Notropis  anogenus  Forbes. 

43.  Notropis  cayuga  Meek.  Cayuga  minnow. 

44.  Notropis  heterodon  (Cope). 

45.  * Notropis  fretensis  (Cope). 

46.  Notropis  blennius  (Girard).  Straw-colored 

minnow. 

47.  * Notropis  volucellus  (Cope). 

48.  Notropis hudsonius  (DeWitt  Clinton).  Shiner. 

49.  *Notropis  hudsonius  selene  (Jordan).  Lake 

Superior  shiner. 

50.  Notropis  whipplii  (Girard).  Satin-fin  min- 

now. 

51.  Notropis  cornutus  (Mitchill).  Red-fin. 

52.  * Notropis  cornutus  frontalis  (Agassiz). 

53.  * Notropis  cornutus  cyaneus  (Cope). 

54.  Notropis  atherinoides  Rafinesque. 

55.  Notropis  arge  (Cope). 

56.  Notropis  rubrifrons  (Cope). 

57.  Notropis  umbrati! is  (Girard). 

58.  Noti'opis  umbratilis  cyanocephalus  (Cope- 

land). 


95 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


96 

59.  Ericymba  buccata  (Cope). 

60.  Rhinichthys  cataracts®  (Cuvier  & Valen- 

ciennes). Long-nosed  dace. 

61.  Rhinichthys  atronasus  (Mitchill).  Black- 

nosed dace. 

62.  Rhinichthys  atronasus  lunatus  (Cope). 

63.  Hybopsis  dissimilis  (Kirtland). 

64.  Hybopsis  storerianus  (Kirtland). 

65.  Hybopsis  kentuckiensis  (Raf. ).  River  chub. 

66.  Couesius  plumbeus  (Agassiz). 

67.  Couesius  dissimilis  (Girard). 

68.  Exoglossum  maxillingua  (Le  Sueur).  Cut- 

lip  minnow. 

69.  Anguilla  chrysypa  Rafinesque.  Common  eel. 

70.  Hiodon  alosoides  ( Rafinesque) . Mooneye. 

71.  Hiodon  tergisus  Le  Sueur.  Toothed  herring. 

72.  Dorosoma  cepedianum  (Le  Sueur).  Hickory 

shad.  Probably  introduced  through  canals 
from  Mississippi  basin,  and  possibly  also 
through  the  Erie  Canal. 

73.  Pomolobus  chrysochloris  Rafinesque.  Prob- 

ably mot  native,  but  introduced  from  the 
Mississippi  basin  by  means  of  canals. 

74.  Pomolobus  pseud oharengus  (Wilson). 

75.  Coregonus  quadrilateralis  Richardson.  Round 

white-fish. 

76.  Coregonus  clupeiformis  ( Mitchill ) . Com- 

mon white-fish. 

77.  Coregonus  labradoricus  Richardson.  Labra- 

dor white-fish. 

78.  * Argyrosomus  osmeriformis  (H.  M.  Smith). 

Smelt  of  New  York  lakes. 

79.  Argyrosomus  artedi  (Le  Sueur).  Lake  her- 

ring. 

80.  Argyrosomus  artedi  sisco  Jordan.  Cisco  of 

Lake  Tippecanoe.  Only  in  certain  small 
lakes  in  Wisconsin  connected  with  Lake 
Michigan  and  certain  small  lakes  in  north- 
ern Indiana  in  the  Wabash  basin. 

81.  * Argyrosomus  hoyi  Gill.  Hoy’s  white-fish. 

82.  * Argyrosomus  prognathus  (H.  M.  Smith). 

Long-jaw  white-fish. 

83.  * Argyrosomus  nigripinnis  Gill.  Blaekfin 

white-fish. 

84.  *Argyrosomus  tullibee  (Richardson).  Tulli- 

bee  white-fish. 

85.  * Argyrosomus  tullibee  bisselli  Bollman. 

86.  Cristivomer  namaycush  (Walbaum).  Lake 

trout. 

87.  ^Cristivomer  namaycush  sisco  wet  (Agassiz), 

Sisco  wet. 

88.  Salmo  salar  Linnaeus.  Atlantic  salmon. 

89.  Salmo  salar  ouananiche  McCarthy.  Guana- 

niche. 

bO.  Salvelinusfontinalis  (Mitchill).  Brooktrout. 

91.  *Th  ymallus  tricolor  Cope.  Michigan  grayling. 

92.  Umbra  limi  (Kirtland).  Mud  minnow. 

93.  Lucius  vermiculatus  (Le  Sueur).  Grass  pike. 

94.  Lucius  reticulatus  (Le  Sueur) . Pickerel. 

95.  Lucius  lucius  (Linnaeus).  Great  pike. 

96.  Lucius  masquinongy  (Mitchill).  Muskal- 

lunge. 

97.  Fundulus  diaphanus  (Le  Sueur).  Grayback 

minnow. 

98.  Fundulus  diaphanus  menona  (Jordan  & Cope- 

land). 

99.  Fundulus  dispar  (Agassiz). 

100.  Fundulus  notatus  (Raf.).  Top  minnow. 

101.  Eucalia  inconstaiis  (Kirtland) . Brook  stick- 

leback. 


102.  '"Eucalia  inconstans  cayuga  Jordan. 

103.  *Eucalia  inconstans  pygmsea  (Agassiz). 

104.  Pygosteus  pungitius  (Linnaeus).  Nine-spine 

stickleback. 

105.  Gasterosteus  bispinosus  (Walbaum).  Com- 

mon stickleback. 

106.  Percopsis  guttatus  Agassiz.  Trout  perch. 

107.  Aphredoderus  sayanus  (Gilliams).  Pirate 

perch. 

108.  Labidesthes  sicculus  (Cope).  Skipjack. 

109.  Pomoxis  annularis  Rafinesque.  Crappie. 

110.  Pomoxis  sparoides  (Lacepede).  Calico  bass. 

111.  Ambloplites  rupestris  (Raf. ).  Rock  bass. 

112.  Chsenobryttus  gulosus  (Cuv.  & Val.).  War- 

mouth. 

113.  Apomotis  cyanellus  (Rafinesque).  Blue- 

spotted  sun-fish. 

114.  Lepomismegalotis  (Rafinesque).  Long-eared 

sun-fish. 

115.  Lepomis  pallidus  (Mitchill).  Bluegill. 

116.  Eupomotis  euryorus  (McKay).  Red-eared 

sun-fish. 

117.  Eupomotis  gibbosus  (L. ).  Pumpkin-seed. 

118.  Micropterus  salmoides  (Lac4pede).  Large- 

mouthed black  bass. 

119.  Micropterus  dolomieu  Lac4pede.  Small- 

mouthed  black  bass. 

120.  Stizostedion  vitreum  (Mitchill).  Wall-eyed 

pike. 

121.  Stizostedion  canadense  (Smith).  Sauger. 

122.  Stizostedion  canadense  griseum  (De  Kay) . 

123.  Perea  flavescens  (Mitchill).  Yellow  perch. 

124.  Percina  caprodes  (Rafinesque).  Log  perch. 

125.  Percina  caprodes  zebra  (Agassiz). 

126.  Hadropterus  aspro  (Cope  & Jordan).  Black- 

sided darter. 

127.  Cottogaster  copelandi  (Jordan).  Copeland’s 

darter. 

128.  ^Cottogaster  cheneyi  Evermann  & Kendall. 

Cheney’s  darter. 

129.  Cottogaster  shumardi  (Girard) . Darter. 

130.  Diplesion  blennioides  (Rafinesque) . Green- 

sided darter. 

131.  Boleosoma  nigrum  (Rafinesque).  Johnny 

darter. 

132.  Boleosoma  nigrum  olmstedi  (Storer).  Darter. 

133.  Ammocrypta  pellucida  (Baird).  Sand  darter. 

134.  *Etbeostoma  boreale  (Jordan).  Northern 

darter. 

135.  Etlieostoma  coeruleum  Storer.  Rainbow 

darter. 

136.  Etlieostoma  (label  lare  Raf.  Fan-tailed  darter. 

137.  Etlieostoma fiabellare  lineolatum  (Agassiz). 

138.  Boleichthys  fusiformis  (Girard). 

139.  Microperca  punctulata  Putnam.  Least  darter. 

140.  Roccus  chrysops  (Raf. ).  White  lake  bass. 

141.  Aplodinotus  grunniens  Rafinesque.  Fresh- 

water drum. 

142.  Cottus  ictalops  (Rafinesque).  Blob. 

143.  *Cottus  ricei  Nelson.  Rice’s  blob. 
144^*Cottus  pollicaris  (Jordan  & Gilbert). 

145.  *Cottus  spilotus  (Cope) . 

146.  '^U  ran  idea  franklini  (Agassiz). 

147.  *Uranidea  kumlienii  Hoy. 

148.  Uranidea  gracilis  (Heckel). 

149.  *Uranidea  formosa  (Girard). 

150.  *Uranidea  hovi  Putnam. 

151.  *Triglopsis  thompsoni  Girard.  Fresh-water 

sculpin. 

152.  Lota  maculosa  (Le  Sueur).  Ling. 


Contributions  from  the  Biological  Laboratory  of  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission, 
Woods  Hole,  Massachusetts. 


THE  ORGANIC  CONSTITUENTS  OF  THE  SCALES  OF  FISH. 


By  E.  H.  GREEN  and  R.  W.  TOWER. 


Morner 1 has  shown  that  the  scales  of  many  species  of  fish  contain,  in  addition 
to  mineral  matter  and  collogen,  a peculiar  albuminoid.  To  this  albuminoid  he  gave 
the  name  ichthylepidin.  Previous  observers  had  overlooked  this  substance  and  had 
considered  that  the  organic  matter  in  tish  scales  consisted  wholly  of  collogen.  The 
present  study  was  undertaken  to  determine  how  widely  ichthylepidin  is  distributed 
in  the  scales  of  the  common  American  fishes. 

Morner  prepared  his  ichthylepidin  in  the  following  way:  The  clean  scales  were 
digested  at  room  temperature  with  a large  excess  of  0.5  per  cent  hydrochloric  acid, 
0.05  per  cent  caustic  potash,  and  0.01  per  cent  acetic  acid.  Each  digestion  extended 
over  several  days.  This  treatment  removed  soluble  proteids,  most  of  the  guanin, 
the  chrondroitin-sulphuric  acid,  and  the  inorganic  matter.  The  residual  scales  were 
then  digested  with  0.1  per  cent  hydrochloric  acid  at  10°  C.  The  residue  thus  freed 
from  collogen  was  washed  with  alcohol  and  ether,  and  dried.  The  substance  so 
obtained  (pure  ichthylepidin)  was  insoluble  in  boiling  water,  in  cold  dilute  acids,  and 
in  alkalies;  but  it  was  soluble  in  hot  solutions  both  of  dilute  acids  and  alkalies,  and 
in  the  cold  concentrated  solutions  of  the  same.  It  gave  a strong  Millon’s  reaction 
and  contained  much  loosely  combined  sulphur  (as  shown  by  the  blackening  of  the 
substance  when  boiled  with  an  alkaline  solution  of  lead  acetate).  By  the  two  latter 
reactions  the  presence  of  ichthylepidin  may,  according  to  Morner,  be  determined  in 
i fish  scales.2 

Morner  examined  the  scales  of  12  species  of  fish,  all  of  which  showed  the  presence 
of  ichthylepidin;  in  the  ganoid  scales  of  the  American  gar-pike  ( Lepisosteus  osseus), 
however,  he  found  no  trace  of  it. 

In  the  course  of  our  work  we  have  studied  10  species  of  American  fish  repre- 
senting 25  families.  In  every  case  the  scales  were  taken  from  fresh,  healthy  fish,  and, 

!Zeit.  f.  phys.  Chemie,  1898,  vol.  24,  p.  125. 

-Morner,  op.  cit. , p.  136:  “Wenn  man  untersuchen  will,  ob  die  Sehuppen  einer  Fisehart  ichthylepidinhaltig  sind 
Oder  nicht,  geniigt  es,  sie  nach  vorgangiger  Bntkalkung  durch  Kochen,  theils  mit  Millonschen  Reagens,  theils  mit 
alkalischer  Bleilosung  zu  priifen;  wenn  dabei  tief  dunkelrothe  Farbung,  resp.  Schwarzfarbung  ausbleibt,  ist  die 
' Gegenwart  des  ichthylepidins  ausgeschlossen.” 


F.  C.  B.  1901—7 


97 


98 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


after  being  carefully  freed  from  adhering  tissue,  were  thoroughly  scrubbed  with 
water  and  washed  by  decantation  until  the  water  remained  perfectly  clear.  The  clean 
scales  were  then  twice  extracted  with  a large  excess  of  0.5  per  cent  hydrochloric 
acid  (real  HC1),  each  extraction  lasting  12  hours.  The  scales  were  then  washed  with 
water  until  free  from  chlorides  and  finally  tested  for  ichthylepidin  as  mentioned  above. 
In  some  cases,  where  the  scales  could  not  be  removed  mechanically,  the  integument  was 
dissolved  by  dilute  (5  per  cent)  sodium  hydroxide,  and  the  scales  so  separated  were 
then  treated  as  above  described.  Morner  found  ichthylepidin  to  be  unchanged  after 
several  days’  exposure  to  5 per  cent  sodium  hydroxide.  We  confirmed  this  fact  by 
ti’eating  some  menhaden  scales  with  the  alkali  for  three  days,  after  which  the  presence 
of  ichthylepidin  was  detected  as  readily  as  before.  It  was  found  necessary  to  treat  the 
integument  of  all  the  elasmobranehs,  the  sun-fish  (Mold  mold),  the  puffer  {Spheroides 
maculatus) , and  the  remora  ( Echeneis  ncm crates)  with  5 per  cent  alkali. 

The  scales  of  the  following  fish  gave  positive  reactions  for  ichthylepidin  when 
treated  as  described  above: 


1.  Winter  flounder  (. Pseudopleuronecles  amer- 

ica.nus). 

2.  Alewife  (Pomolobus  pseudoharengus). 

3.  Blue-fish  (Pomatomus  saltatrix). 

4.  Hickory  shad  [Pomolobus  mediocris) . 

5.  Chogset  ( Tautogolabrus  adspersus) . 

6.  Butter-fish  (Rhombus  triacanthus). 

7.  Tarpon  ( Tarpon  atlanticus) . 

8.  Mackerel  scad  (Dccapterus  macarellus). 

9.  Sea  robin  (Prionotus  carolinus) . 

L0.  Salmon  ( Salmo  salar). 

11.  Cod  (Gadus  callarias). 

12.  Haddock  (Melanogrammus  seglifinus) . 

13.  Crevalle  ( Caranx  crysos ). 

14.  Summer  flounder  ( Paralichthys  denlatus). 

15.  Menhaden  (Brevoortia  tyr annus). 

16.  Tile-fisli  ( Lopholatilus  cliarnicleonticeps ) . 


17.  Squeteague  ( Cy noscion  regalis). 

18.  Bonito  (Sarda  sarda) . 

19.  Soup  (Stenoiomus  chrysops). 

20.  Hake  ( Phycis  chuss). 

21.  Sea  bass  (Centropristes  striatus). 

22.  Silverside  (Menidia  notata) . 

23.  Striped  minnow  ( Fundulus  majalis) . 

24.  Tautog  (Tauloga  onitis). 

25.  Mummichog  (Fundulus  heteroclitus) . 

26.  Remora  (Echeneis  naucrates). 

27.  Rudder-fish  ( Palinurichthys  perciformis) . 

28.  Common  shad  (Alosa  sapidissima). 

29.  Sturgeon  (Acipenser  sturio). 

30.  Perch  ( Morone  americanus) . 

31.  Jumping  mullet  (Mugil  ccphalus). 

32.  King-fish  (Menticirrhus  saxatilis) . 

33.  Broad  minnow  (Cyprinodon  variegatus). 


In  all  the  above  cases  the  reactions  given  by  Millon’s  reagent  were  very  marked, 
the  red  coloration  being  brilliant.  The  darkening  caused  by  warming  with  the  lead- 
alkali  solution  was  very  variable  in  intensity.  This  reaction  was  strong  in  Nos.  3, 
11,  20,  21,  22,  and  29  of  the  above  list,  very  faint  in  Nos.  1,  11,  15,  27,  and  28,  and 
in  the  other  cases  ranged  between  the  two  extremes. 

It  is  interesting  to  note  that  the  ganoid  scales  of  the  sturgeon  ( Acipenser  sturio ) 
gave  strong  reactions  with  both  Millon’s  reagent  and  with  the  lead-alkali  solution, 
although  Morner,  as  above  noted,  found  the  ganoid  scales  of  the  gar-pike  ( Lepisosteus 
osseus)  to  give  negative  results  with  these  reagents.  In  our  experiments  the  scales 
were  taken  from  the  median  portion  of  the  “lateral  line.”  They  were  extracted  with 
5 per  cent  HC1  for  5 days,  washed  free  from  acid,  and  extracted  with  0.05  per  cent 
caustic  potash  in  excess  and  again  washed.  After  reextraction  with  0.5  per  cent 
HC1  for  2 days,  the  scales  were  given  a final  washing  and  submitted  to  the  tests  for 
ichthylepidin. 

In  the  remora  (No.  26)  both  the  scales  and  “sucking  disk”  were  examined.  The 
scales  were  obtained  by  digesting  the  integument  with  5 per  cent  caustic  soda  for  36 
hours  (in  the  cold).  The  scales  so  removed  were  variable  in  size  and  shape;  they 
were  cycloidal,  usually  long  and  narrow,  and  were  mostly  pointed  at  one  end  and 


ORGANIC  CONSTITUENTS  OF  THE  SCALES  OF  FISH. 


99 


rounded  at  the  other.  Intermixed  were  other  more  circular  scales  somewhat  smaller 
and  not  pointed.  They  gave,  after  decalcitication,  positive  reactions  for  ichthylepidin. 
The  “sucking  disk”  of  the  remora,  when  removed  and  treated  in  the  same  way  as  the 
integument,  also  gave  strong  positive  reactions  for  ichthylepidin.  This  fact  indicates 
that  the  substance  may  be  present  not  only  in  scales,  but  also  in  highly  specialized 
modifications  of  the  fins. 

All  the  elasmobranch  fishes  examined  gave  negative  results  for  ichthylepidin,  as 
did  also  two  teleosts,  the  sun-fish  and  puffer.  The  species  investigated,  with  detailed 
analyses,  are  here  given: 


34.  Dog-fish  (Mwtelus  canis). 

35.  Sand  shark  {Carcharias  littoralis) . 

36.  Dusky  shark  ( Carcharhinus  obscurus). 


37.  Bonnet  skate  {Raia  erinacea). 

38.  Sun-fish  ( Mold  mold ). 

39.  Puffer  (Spheroides  maculatus) . 


The  scales  of  the  above-named  species  were  isolated  by  means  of  caustic  potash  and 
then  decalcified  and  tested.  In  no  case  was  there  any  indication  of  loosely  combined 
sulphur.  Millon’s  reagent,  though  it  gave  a slight  reaction  in  most  experiments,  did 
not  }Tield  the  characteristic  rich  ruby-red  color  given  by  the  scales  cited  in  the  first 
list.  The  test  indicates  that  these  scales  have  an  organic  basis  quite  different  from 
the  others,  as  the  following  analyses  will  show: 

Dog-fish  (Mustelus  canis). — Portions  of  the  integument  of  several  specimens 
recently  killed  were  freed  from  extraneous  matter,  so  far  as  possible,  then  washed 
thoroughly  and  placed  in  5 per  cent  caustic  soda.  After  three  days  the  connective 
tissue  had  dissolved  and  the  minute  scales  were  washed  carefully  by  decantation. 
They  were  now  extracted  with  0.5  per  cent  HC1  for  several  days,  the  acid  being 
frequently  renewed.  The  washed,  decalcified  scales  were  now  tested,  as  usual,  with 
Millon’s  reagent  and  lead-alkali.  With  the  former  there  was  a faint  pink  coloration; 
with  the  latter  there  was  no  blackening.  About  a gram  of  the  decalcified  scales  was 
now  boiled  in  a liter  of  water  for  some  time,  the  water  being  renewed  as  it  evaporated. 
After  a few  hours  the  liquid  became  yellowish,  and  gelatin  was  detected  in  solution 
by  the  usual  tests;  after  boiling  for  30  hours  the  scales  had  almost  completely  gone 
into  solution,  a very  minute  quantit}^  only  remaining  undissolved.  The  solution  had 
the  characteristics  of  a solution  of  gelatin,  although  it  did  not  gelatinize,  even  after 
concentration.  This  was  doubtless  due  to  the  long-continued  boiling,  which,  as  is 
well  known,  converts  gelatin  into  its  ungelatinizable  form,  B-glutin.  The  dog-fish 
scales  thus  seem  to  have  only  collogen  as  their  organic  basis,  and  to  be  quite  free  from 
ichthylepidin. 

Sand  shark  ( Carcharias  littoralis). — The  scales  were  isolated  and  treated  as 
described  above,  except  that  the  alkali  extraction  lasted  five  days.  They  behaved  in 
every  way  like  those  of  the  dog-fish,  and  like  them  are  free  from  ichthylepidin  and 
have  collogen  as  their  organic  basis. 

Dusky  shark  ( Carcharhinus  obscurus). — The  isolated  scales  reacted  in  every  way 
like  those  of  the  dog-fish  and  sand  shark. 

Bonnet  skate  {Raia  erinacea). — The  skin  with  scales,  or  rather  spines,  attached 
was  removed  from  the  caudal  and  posterior  portions  of  the  pectoral  fins  and  treated 
with  5 per  cent  alkali  (NaOH)  as  before.  The  star-shaped  spines  thus  isolated  were 
washed  thoroughly,  extracted  several  days  with  0.5  per  cent  HC1  which  was  fre- 
quently changed.  The  residue  was  washed  until  the  filtrate  was  free  from  chlorides. 
The  scales  gave  no  blackening  with  lead-alkali  and  only  a faint  pink  color  with 


100 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Millon’s  reagent.  When  boiled  with  water  for  30  hours  the  scales  were  almost  com- 
pletely dissolved,  and  after  36  hours  the  undissolved  residue  was  so  small  as  to  be 
negligible.  The  solution  gave  all  the  tests  for  gelatin.  It  gave  also  a strong  biuret 
test,  but  not  Adamkiewcz’s  test.  Nitric  acid  gave  no  yellow  color  or  precipitate,  but 
subsequent  addition  of  ammonia  caused  a yellow  coloration.  The  solution  responded 
to  the  alkaloidal  reagents,  and  gave  Allen  and  Tankard’s1  test  for  gelatin.  No 
ichthylepidin  is  present.  The  organic  matter  of  skate  spines  thus  appears  to  be 
identical  with  that  of  the  scales  of  the  other  elasmobranch  fishes. 

Sun-fish  (Mola  mold). — The  integument  was  freed  as  far  as  possible  from  the 
subdermal  collogenous  tissue  and  treated  with  caustic  soda,  as  before.  The  scales  so 
isolated  were  washed  thoroughly  and  extracted  with  HC1  as  usual.  They  gave  a 
strong  Millon’s  test,  but  no  lead-alkali  reaction.  The  decalcified  and  extracted  scales 
were  soluble  in  5 per  cent  NaOH  in  2d  hours  (differing  from  ichthylepidin,  which 
remains  unchanged  for  5 days).2  The  decalcified  scales  were  slowly  but  almost  com- 
pletely soluble  in  boiling  water,  and  after  3 days  only  a trace  remained  undissolved. 
The  solution  was  concentrated  but  did  not  gelatinize,  although  it  gave  all  the  reactions 
of  gelatin.  The  scales  of  Mold  are  thus  analogous  in  composition  to  those  of  the 
elasmobranchs  above  noted,  and  are  quite  different  from  those  of  the  higher  fish  with 
which  it  is  classified.  It  is  interesting  to  note  in  this  connection  the  studies  of  Milne 
Edwards3  and  of  Parker4  on  the  vascular  system  of  this  species.  Milne  Edwards 
observed  that  in  this  fish  “the  coronary  arteries  are  supplied  not  only  from  the 
fourth  gill -arch  as  in  other  teleosts,  but  also  from  the  third,  fifth,  and  sixth  arches,  as 
in  elasmobranchs.”  Parker  has  confirmed  this,  and  has  shown  also  that  the  sun-fish 
has  two  coronary  arteries,  as  is  general  in  elasmobranchs.  To  quote  Parker:5 

This  confirmation  of  Milne  Edwards’s  description  shows  that  a really  remarkable  condition 
exists  in  the  coronary  arteries  of  the  sun-fish.  The  presence  of  dorsal  as  well  as  of  ventral  coronaries, 
and  the  origin  of  the  latter  from  more  than  one  pair  of  visceral  arches,  are  features  so  universally 
characteristic  of  elasmobranchs  and  so  generally  absent  from  teleosts  that,  while  the  sun-fish  has  most 
of  the  characteristic  structural  features  of  the  latter,  the  arteries  of  its  heart  ally  it  unquestionably 
with  the  elasniobranchs. 

This  is  interesting,  as  the  composition  of  the  scales  (exoskeleton)  is  also  analogous 
to  that  of  elasmobranch  scales,  and  the  morphological  structure  of  the  scale  is  also 
very  similar.6 

Puffer  ( Spheroides  maculatus). — The  skin  of  a puffer  was  removed,  freed  from 
adhering  tissue,  and  treated  with  5 per  cent  caustic  soda.  After  2 days  the  residue 
of  star-shaped  spines  was  washed  thoroughly  and  decalcified  with  5 per  cent  HC1  as 
above.  The  extracted  scales  gave  no  blackening  with  lead-alkali;  Millon’s  test  was 
distinct.  The  decalcified  scales  were  treated  with  boiling  water  to  determine  if  the 
basis  was  all  collogen  or  if  ichthylepidin  was  present.  After  boiling  30  hours  there 
was  a small  residue;  whether  this  was  ichthylepidin  or  not  we  were  unable  to  decide. 
The  solution  gave  all  the  reactions  for  gelatin. 

1 Allen,  Commercial  Organic  Analysis  (189S),  vol.  4,  p.  469. 

2Morner,  op.  cit.,  p.  131. 

3 Milne  Edwards  (1858),  Lemons  sur  la  physiologic  et  1'anatomie  comparfie  de  l’homme  et  des  animaux.  Tome  3,  p.  341- 

4 Parker.  Note  on  the  blood  vessels  of  the  heart  in  the  sun-fish.  Anatomischer  Anzeiger,  vol.  17,  No.  16-17. 

5 Parker,  op.  cit.,  p.  315. 

6Cf.  Turner,  Natural  History  Review  (1862),  p.  185. 


ORGANIC  CONSTITUENTS  OF  THE  SCALES  OF  FISH. 


101 


SUMMARY. 


The  above  experiments  show  that  in  the  scales  of  the  teleosts  ichthylepidin  is 
widely  distributed;  in  the  scales  of  elasmobranchs  and  of  Mola  viola  and  Spheroides 
maculatus  it  is  absent.  The  species  cited  by  Morner  in  his  paper  as  having  ichthy- 
lepidin in  their  scales  are  here  given: 


1.  Abramis  brama. 

2.  A spins  rapax. 

3.  Carassius  vulgaris. 

4.  Clupea  harengus. 


5.  Coregonus  lavaretus. 

6.  Esox  Indus. 

7.  Leudscus  idus. 

8.  Leudscus  rutilus. 


9.  Lucioperca  sandra. 

10.  Perea  fluviatilis. 

11.  Salmo  salar. 

12.  Sebastes  marinus. 


In  the  ganoid  scales  of  the  gar-pike  (Lepisosteus  osseus)  lie  found  no  ichthylepidin. 
Our  experiments,  however,  show  that  it  is  detected  by  Morner’s  reactions  in  the 
scales  of  the  sturgeon  (Acipenser  sturio). 

The  scales  of  the  sun-fish  have  the  same  general  chemical  composition  as  those 
of  the  elasmobranchs,  and  quite  different  from  the  scales  of  other  higher  fishes. 


PROPORTION  OF  COLLOGEN  AND  ICHTHYLEPIDIN. 

Morner  found  the  relative  amounts  of  collogen  and  ichthylepidin  in  the  organic 
matter  of  the  scales  of  four  species  of  fish  to  be,  approximately,  1 parts  of  the  former 
to  1 part  of  the  latter.  The  determinations  were  made  indirectly  by  estimation  of 
the  total  sulphur.  In  two  cases  we  have  found  the  relative  amounts  directly  by 
separation  of  the  ichthylepidin  and  weighing  it,  the  collogen  being  calculated  from 
the  difference.  The  process  was  carried  out  as  follows:  The  scales  were  removed, 
cleaned,  and  decalcified  until  no  more  mineral  matter  was  removed  by  the  0.5  per  cent 
HC1  used.  The  residual  scales  were  washed  free  from  chlorides  with  water,  then 
with  alcohol  and  ether,  and  dried  to  constant  weight  at  105  1 C.  The  dry  organic 
matter  so  obtained  was  weighed,  and  digested  with  a large  excess  of  0.1  per  cent  HC1 
at  40  to  45°  C.  for  12  days.  Thymol  was  used  to  prevent,  putrefaction.  The  residual 
ichthylepidin  was  filtered  off,  washed  thoroughly  with  water,  alcohol,  and  ether,  and 
dried  at  105°  C.  The  loss  in  weight  which  the  organic  matter  had  suffered  was  taken 
as  collogen. 

17.7950  grams  of  dry  organic  matter  from  menhaden  scales  left  a residue  of 
4.2255  grams  (ichthylepidin)  when  treated  as  described  above. 

8.1550  grams  of  dry  organic  matter  from  shad  scales  left  a.  residue  of  1.9570  grams. 


Menhaden. 

Sliad. 

Per  cent. 
23.74 
76.26 

Per  cent. 

24. 00 

76. 00 

The  two  species  thus  have  nearly  the  same  relative  organic  composition,  and  the 
numbers  found  are  in  close  agreement  with  Morner’s  estimations.  It  seems  that  the 
ratio  between  the  amounts  of  the  two  albuminoids  is  nearly  constant  in  various  fish 
whose  scales  contain  ichthylepidin. 

It  may  be  remarked  that  a great  difference  exists  (apparently)  in  the  collogen  of 
scales  containing  no  ichthylepidin  and  those  containing  the  latter  substance.  In  the 
latter  case  the  collogen  is  very  loosely  combined  (also  noticed  by  Morner),  a large 


102 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


proportion  of  it  being  removed  by  boiling  for  2 hours  and  also  by  digestion  at  40°  C. 
for  a day  with  0.1  per  cent  HC1.  In  the  former  case,  however,  the  collogen  is  very 
firmly  combined  and  is  dissolved  only  by  long-continued  boiling  (30  to  40  hours),  and 
is  much  less  affected  by  dilute  acid  digestion.  Whether  this  is  due  to  an  essential 
difference  in  the  nature  of  the  collogen  itself  or  to  a difference  in  the  chemical  com- 
bination of  it  with  other  constituents  of  the  scale  is  a subject  now  under  investigation. 

UTILIZATION  OF  THE  COLLOGEN. 

Some  experiments  relating  to  the  use  of  the  large  amount  of  collogen  present  in 
fish  scales  were  made  tentatively.  Menhaden  scales  were  used,  as  these  fish  are  now 
utilized  in  immense  quantities  in  fertilizer  works,  and  the  removal  and  use  of  their 
scales,  if  possible,  could  be  made  at  least  expense.  The  scales  can  be  readily  removed 
from  menhaden — more  readily,  indeed,  than  in  the  case  of  most  fish. 

Analyses  were  made  to  determine  the  amount  of  the  collogen  in  the  scales,  both 
when  dried  at  150°  C.  to  constant  weight  and  when  only  air-  dried.  Also  the  scales  from 
an  average-sized  specimen  were  removed  and  weighed  to  get  data  for  determining 
the  amount  of  gelatin  which  large  quantities  of  moist  fish  would  yield. 

The  scales  from  one  menhaden  (one-half  hour  after  removal  from  the  water  and 
weighing  155  grams)  were  removed,  washed,  and  thoroughly  scrubbed  to  remove 
adhering  tissue  and  then  dried  in  the  air  at  20°  C. 

The  scales,  air-dried,  weighed  6.9565  grams;  dried  to  constant  weight  at  105°  C. 
they  weighed  5.5215  grams.  The  moisture  in  the  air-dried  scales  then  is  20.58  per 
cent,  and  the  fish  thus  yielded  1.26  per  cent  scales,  air-dried,  or  1.004  per  cent  scales 
dried  at  105°  C. ; that  is,  an  average  moist  menhaden  yields  1 per  cent  of  its  weight 
in  anhydrous  scales.  One  ton  of  fish  would  yield  20  pounds  of  dry  scales. 

The  scales  from  several  specimens  were  removed,  cleaned,  and  dried  in  the  air, 
and  then  to  constant  weight  at  105°  C. ; 3.8180  grams  of  these  scales  were  ignited  and 
gave  1.5679  grams  of  ash,  or  41.07  per  cent  ash.  The  organic  matter  by  difference 
was  58.93  per  cent.  As  shown  above,  the  dry  organic  matter  of  menhaden  scales 
contained  23.74  per  cent  of  ichthylepidin  and  76.26  per  cent  of  collogen.  Hence 
the  following  protocol: 


Scales. 

Air-dried. 

Dried  at  105°  C. 

P.ct. 
20.  58 

P.ct. 
00. 00 

32.  61 

41.07 

Organic  matter 

(Ichthylepidin,  11.11. 
46.  801 

(Ichthylepidin,  13.99. 

58. 93  ■> 

(Collogen,  44.94. 

(Collogen,  36.69. 

1.26  scales. 

1. 00  scales. 

Thus  a ton  of  menhaden  should  yield  nearly  10£  pounds  of  pure  scale-gelatin  (16 
per  cent  moisture,  as  in  the  usual  commercial  article).  As  Morner  has  shown  this 
gelatin  to  be  remarkably  pure,  containing  only  about  0.1  per  cent  ash,  it  should 
command,  when  properly  prepared,  a high  commercial  value. 

Brown  University,  Providence , Rhode  Island. 


Contributions  from  the  Biological  Laboratory  of  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission, 
Woods  Hole,  Massachusetts. 


THE  REACTIONS  OF  COPEPODS  TO  VARIOUS  STIMULI  AND  THE  BEARING 
OP  THIS  ON  DAILY  DEPTH-MIGRATIONS. 


By  G.  H.  PARKER, 

Assistant  Professor  of  Zoology , Harvard  University. 


INTRODUCTION. 

Although  the  marine  copepods  are  almost  microscopic  crustaceans,  they  are  so 
numerous  and  so  widely  distributed  that  they  form  one  of  the  most  important  con- 
stituents in  the  surface  life  of  the  ocean.  As  a food  for  fishes,  especially  the  newly 
hatched  fry,  they  have  been  justly  regarded  by  fish-culturists  as  almost  indispensable, 
and  their  remarkable  daily  migrations  have  been  a matter  of  growing  interest  and 
speculation  for  the  naturalist. 

From  the  standpoint  of  oceanic  food  supply,  the  copepods  form  an  important 
link  between  the  microscopic  plants  and  the  larger  animals.  In  the  ocean,  as  on  the 
land,  animals  feed  either  directly  on  plants  or  on  other  animals  that  in  turn  feed  on 
plants,  and,  though  this  regression  may  sometimes  go  back  several  steps,  all  animals 
are  ultimately  dependent  on  vegetable  life  for  their  food.  Since  plants  are  the  only 
forms  that  have  the  capacity  of  elaborating  food  from  strictly  inorganic  materials,  they 
are  in  reality  toe  only  independent  organisms.  The  vegetation  of  the  ocean,  except 
on  the  very  shore,  differs  from  that  of  the  land  chiefly  in  being  composed  almost 
entirely  of  plants  of  microscopic  size.  A vegetation  of  this  kind  can  not  give  sup- 
port to  large  herbivorous  animals  such  as  find  easy  nourishment  in  the  luxuriant 
plant  growth  of  the  land,  but  it  affords  an  abundant  supply  of  food  for  small  animals 
like  the  copepods.  Many  copepods  feed  almost  exclusively  on  the  minute  plants  of 
the  sea,  and  then  fall  a prey  to  small  fishes, which  in  turn  are  eaten  by  larger  ones.  Thus 
the  copepods  form  a link  in  the  chain  of  food  supply  that  reaches  from  the  independ- 
ent microscopic  plants  to  the  largest  marine  animals.  Their  place  in  this  chain  is 
admirably  illustrated  by  Peck  (1S96,  p.  353)  in  his  account  of  the  food  of  the  squeteague. 
In  the  stomach  of  a large  squeteague  Peck  found  an  adult  herring  in  which  were  two 
young  scup  besides  many  small  crustaceans.  The  stomach  of  the  scup  contained 
copepods,  and  the  alimentary  canals  of  these  showed  remains  of  microscopic  plants 
(diatoms).  Thus  plant  substance  served  as  food  for  copepods,  copepods  for  scup, 
scup  for  herring,  and  herring  for  squeteague.  This  sequence  makes  evident  the 
importance  of  copepods  as  collectors  of  vegetable  food  which  after  assimilation  serves 
as  nourishment  for  the  larger  fishes. 


103 


104 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Although  many  copepods  have  been  obtained  from  great  depths  in  the  ocean, 
they  are,  for  the  most  part,  surface  or  pelagic  animals.  This  even  applies  to  shallow 
waters.  Thus,  in  Buzzards  Bay,  which  is  probably  nowhere  over  20  fathoms  deep, 
the  copepods,  according  to  Peck  (1896,  pp.  356-368),  are  about  twice  as  abundant 
in  the  more  superficial  waters  as  in  the  middle  depths  or  near  the  bottom.  Those  near 
the  top  show  a remarkable  daily  rhythm  in  their  movements.  During  the  night  they 
swarm  in  great  numbers  on  the  immediate  surface,  but  from  sunrise  to  sunset  they 
desert  the  surface  almost  completely.  This  change  makes  itself  felt  in  their  availa- 
bility as  a food  supply,  for  Peck  (1894,  p.  117)  has  observed  that  menhaden  taken  in 
the  daytime  contain  fewer  copepods  than  those  caught  at  night.  Thus  the  question  of 
what  determines  the  daily  migrations  of  copepods  is  a problem  not  only  of  general 
interest  to  the  naturalist,  but  also  of  practical  importance  to  the  fish-culturist. 

According  to  Giesbrecht  (1892),  Weismann  (1877)  was  the  first  to  suggest  a solu- 
tion for  this  problem.  He  believed  that  light  determined  the  upward  and  downward 
migration  of  pelagic  animals  and  that  most  animals,  being  adapted  to  light  of  medium 
intensity,  retreated  from  the  surface  when  the  light  increased  and  moved  upward 
when  it  diminished.  An  explanation  essentially  like  this  was  accepted  by  F uchs  (1882). 
Chun  (1887)  opposed  this  view  and  maintained  that  temperature  changes  were  probably 
the  means  of  inducing  daily  as  well  as  yearly  migrations.  The  first  to  approach  the 
question  from  an  experimental  standpoint  were  Groom  and  Loeb  (1891),  who  studied 
the  reactions  to  light  of  the  free-swimming  young  of  barnacles  (Balanus  perforates). 
Their  experiments  showed  that  the  animals  were  not  constant  in  their  reactions. 
When  placed  in  a glass  vessel  in  bright  daylight  they  eventually  deserted  the  side  of 
the  vessel  next  the  window  and  swam  away  from  the  light,  i.  e.,  became  negatively 
phototropic;  when,  however,  they  were  placed  in  dim  light  they  sooner  or  later 
reversed  and  swam  toward  the  light,  i.  e.,  became  positively  phototropic.  Since  the 
barnacle  larvae  in  the  aquarium,  where  the  only  changes  were  in  the  intensity  of 
illumination,  went  down  by  day  and  came  up  by  night  as  they  did  in  the  open  sea, 
Groom  and  Loeb  believed  that  this  reaction  in  nature  was  conti'olled  by  light  in  essen- 
tially the  same  way  as  it  could  be  controlled  in  the  laboratory.  Thus,  while  they  did 
not  deny  that  temperature  changes  might  have  some  influence  on  the  movements  of 
the  animals,  they  concluded  that  light,  not  heat,  was  the  chief  factor  in  controlling 
the  daily  migrations.  In  copepods  studied  by  Groom  and  Loeb  (1891,  p.  176)  no 
change  in  reactions  to  light  such  as  that  observed  in  the  barnacle  larva1,  could  be 
discovered.  Subsequently,  however,  Loeb  (1893,  p.  96)  studied  at  Woods  Hole  certain 
copepods,  most  of  which  were  probably  of  the  species  Temora  low gicornis / these 
could  be  made  negatively  phototropic  by  increasing  the  temperature  of  the  water  or 
by  decreasing  its  density,  and  positively  phototropic  by  decreasing  the  temperature 
or  increasing  the  density.  Although  Loeb  does  not  state  that  these  factors  play  any 
important  part  in  daily  migrations,  he  does  call  attention  (Loeb,  1893,  p.  105)  to  gravity 
as  an  effective  element  in  this  respect.  Animals  that  respond  negatively  to  the  force 
of  gravity,  i.  e.,  are  negatively  geotropic,  would,  so  far  as  this  factor  alone  is  con- 
cerned, continually  move  toward  the  surface.  Thus  one  of  the  migratory  movements 
might  be  accounted  for. 

From  the  preceding  survey  it  is  evident  that  the  daily  migration  of  pelagic 
animals  is  not  the  result  of  as  simple  a combination  of  circumstances  as  was  at  first 
supposed,  and,  further,  that  what  may  be  effective  in  bringing  about  migration  in 


DAILY  MIGRATIONS  OF  COPEPODS. 


105 


one  species  may  not  in  another.  So  far  as  the  very  few  copepods  that  have  been 
studied  are  concerned,  the  chief  factor  seems  to  be  light,  though  reaction  to  gravity 
has  not  been  shown  to  be  without  influence,  and  heat  and  density  of  the  sea  water 
may  play  subordinate  parts. 

In  attempting  to  ascertain  the  factors  that  determine  the  migration  of  copepods, 
1 have  carried  out  a series  of  experiments  on  one  of  the  commonest  summer  species 
from  the  region  about  Woods  Hole,  Mass.,  namely,  Labidocera  cestiva  Wheeler  (1900, 
p.  178,  tig.  16).  This  is  an  inconspicuous  copepod  of  usual  proportions  and  about  2 
millimeters  in  length,  i.  e.,  a dozen  of  them  placed  end  to  end  would  measure  very 
nearly  an  inch.  The  males  differ  from  the  females  in  three  conspicuous  features: 
First,  the  dorsal  eye  lenses  in  the  male  are  larger  than  those  in  the  female;  secondly, 
the  right  anterior  antenna  of  the  male  is  partly  modified  to  form  a grasping  organ, 
while  the  antenna?  of  the  female  are  unmodified  and  symmetrical ; and,  thirdly,  the  first 
abdominal  segment  in  the  male  is  simple,  and  not  swollen  and  covered  with  hairs,  as  in 
the  female.  This  species  was  found  to  predominate  in  the  tow  taken  during  the  whole 
of  August,  1901.  and  served  in  every  way  as  satisfactory  material  for  experimentation. 

My  work  was  carried  on  in  the  laboratory  of  the  United  States  Fish  Commission 
at  W oods  Hole,  and  1 take  pleasure  in  expressing  my  indebtedness  to  Dr.  H.  M.  Smith, 
director  of  the  laboratory,  as  well  as  to  the  station  corps,  for  many  courtesies  shown  me. 


MOVEMENTS. 

At  the  outset  I put  several  hundred  Labidocera?  in  a large,  cylindrical,  glass  aqua- 
rium nearly  filled  with  sea  water  and  placed  on  a table  near  a window.  In  a short 
time  the  Labidocera;  had  distributed  themselves  in  a very  characteristic  way.  One 
set  formed  a densely  packed  row  at  the  top  of  the  water  on  the  side  of  the  aquarium 
next  the  window;  the  other  was  formed  of  individuals  rather  uniformly  scattered 
through  the  whole  aquarium.  The  following  enumerations  will  suffice  to  show  the 
composition  of  these  two  sets:  Of  25  individuals  taken  from  the  row  next  the  light,  11 
were  females  and  11  males;  of  25  caught  swimming  at  large,  23  were  males  and  2 
were  females.  The  almost  complete  absence  of  females  from  the  latter  set  makes  it 
obvious  that  in  experimenting  on  this  species  the  material  should  not  be  considered 
as  homogeneous,  but  males  and  females  should  be  dealt  with  separately. 

The  movements  of  the  Labidocera?  are  in  part  due  to  the  animal’s  activities  and 
in  part  to  its  weight.  If  a number  of  females  are  isolated  in  a small  aquarium  and 
watched,  they  will  be  seen  sporting  about  close  to  the  upper  surface  of  the  water. 
From  time  to  time  one  or  other  will  sink  through  the  water  for  a distance  of  an  inch 
or  more,  and  then  with  a few  sudden  leaps  will  regain  its  former  place.  The  sinking 
is  apparently  due  entirely  to  the  animal’s  weight,  for  it  is  unaccompanied,  so  far  as 
can  be  seen,  by  the  movement  of  any  locomotor  organs.  The  upward  leaps  are  due 
to  vigorous  muscular  action. 

The  sinking  of  the  animal  through  the  sea  water  implies  that  its  specific  gravity 
is  greater  than  that  of  the  water,  and  such,  in  fact,  is  the  case.  The  specific  gravity 
of  the  sea  water  in  which  this  species  was  ordinarily  taken  proved  on  determination 
to  be  1.025,  and  that  of  a solution  of  common  salt,  which  just  kept  slightly  etherized 
individuals  from  sinking,  was  found  to  be  1.109;  the  specific  gravity  of  Labidocera?, 

in  reference  to  sea  water,  is,  therefore,  ^ or  1.082  — . In  consequence  of  this  the 


106 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


animals  sink  in  sea  water,  and  sink  at  a considerable  rate.  The  time  taken  by  each 
of  10  etherized  individuals  to  fall  through  20  centimeters  of  sea  water  varied  from 
35.2  seconds  to  17.2  seconds,  and  averaged  40.7  seconds.  The  rate  of  fall  over 
different  parts  of  the  course  seems  to  have  been  rather  uniform,  for  in  a second  series 
of  observations  the  first  10  centimeters  were  passed  over  in  an  average  of  21.68 
seconds,  and  the  second  10  in  18.58  seconds,  giving  a general  average  for  the  whole 
20  centimeters  of  40.26  seconds.  From  this  and  the  preceding  observations  it  is  fair 
to  assume  that  the  animals  fall  through  the  water  at  the  average  rate  of  about  half  a 
centimeter  a second.  They  would  thus  drop  a fathom  in  about  six  minutes. 

The  positions  that  the  animals  assume  in  falling  through  the  water  are  different 
in  different  cases.  When  they  are  killed  suddenly  by  adding  a small  amount  of  alco- 
hol, formaldehyde,  or  corrosive  sublimate  to  the  water,  and  are  then  transferred  to 
ordinary  sea  water,  they  descend  head  downward.  When,  however,  they  are  placed  in 
water  containing  a small  amount  of  ether  and  are  thus  made  motionless  without  being 
killed,  they  fall  through  ordinary  sea  water  with  the  head  uppermost.  This,  too,  is 
the  position  assumed  by  the  living  animals  when  descending.  The  difference  in  the 
mode  of  descent  of  the  dead  and  of  the  etherized  animals  is  due  to  the  disposition  of 
the  appendages.  Strong  killing  reagents,  such  as  alcohol,  formaldehyde,  etc.,  act  so 
vigorously  on  the  animals  that  they  die  with  all  their  muscles  contracted.  Since  the 
flexors  are  stronger  than  the  extensors,  the  appendages,  and  particularly  the  anterior 
antenna?,  are  folded  alongside  the  body  in  death  and  the  animal  moves  head  first 
through  the  water,  probably  because  of  the  greater  specific  gravity  of  the  head.  In 
the  etherized  and  the  normal  animals,  on  the  other  hand,  the  anterior  antennas  are 
kept  spread  and  the  resistance  that  they  meet  in  their  passage  through  the  water 
retards  the  falling  of  the  head  so  that  the  animal  descends  with  the  head  uppermost. 
This  is  of  no  small  importance  to  a living  Labidocera,  for,  being  thus  oriented  in  its 
fall,  its  first  efforts  at  locomotion  must  be  effective  in  carrying  it  toward  the  surface. 
Thus,  irrespective  of  other  functions  that  have  been  ascribed  to  the  anterior  antennae, 
the}7  undoubtedly  serve  as  organs  for  the  orientation  of  the  body.  It  is  not  without 
interest  to  recall  that  the  function  of  orientation  in  the  higher  crustaceans  is  also 
dependent,  in  part  at  least,  on  the  anterior  antennae,  although  in  these  forms  this 
function  is  connected  with  a special  sense  organ,  the  statocyst,  whereas  in  the  Labi- 
docerae  the  antennae  as  a whole  probably  act  in  a purely  mechanical  way. 

What  has  been  said  about  the  movements  of  female  Labidocerae  applies  also 
to  the  males,  except  that  in  their  locomotion  this  sex  often  does  what  the  other  rarely 
attempts,  namely,  swims  downward.  Thus  the  males  gain  a much  moi’e  general 
distribution  than  the  females. 

In  both  males  and  females  the  kinds  of  locomotion,  except  for  direction,  are  much 
the  same.  Both  sexes  at  times  exhibit  a uniform  continuous  movement,  as  though 
the  animals  were  creeping  rapidly  through  the  water;  at  other  times,  and  this  is  the 
more  usual,  they  pass  through  the  water  by  relatively  enormous  leaps,  carried  out  at 
such  high  velocities  that  it  is  sometimes  impossible  to  follow  the  animal  with  the  eye. 
Although  intermediate  forms  of  locomotion  occur,  such  as  a succession  of  short  leaps, 
the  majority  of  movements  belong  to  one  or  other  of  the  two  kinds  just  described. 

The  leaping  movements  of  the  copepods  have  been  usually  ascribed  to  the  vigor- 
ous action  of  the  anterior  antennae.  Recently  MacBride  (1899,  p.  505)  has  called  this 
opinion  in  question  and  has  maintained,  on  the  grounds  of  observations  on  the  slower 
leaping  movements,  that  the  leap  is  effected  entirely  by  the  simultaneous  action  of 


DAILY  MIGRATIONS  OF  COPEPODS. 


107 


the  thoracic  feet,  and  that  during  this  operation  the  antennae  are  held  as  rigid  as 
possible  at  right  angles  to  the  chief  axis  of  the  body.  As  MacBride  remarks,  the 
extended  leaps  are  carried  out  with  such  quickness  that  the  parts  taken  by  different 
appendages  can  not  be  directly  observed,  and  his  conclusion,  therefore,  is  based  on 
inference,  not  on  direct  observation.  But  direct  observation  is  not  the  only  means  of 
ascertaining  how  the  leap  is  accomplished.  It  is  an  easy  matter  to  render  copepods 
quiescent  by  putting  them  for  a few  moments  in  sea  water  containing  a very  little 
ether.  Such  animals  recover  on  being  placed  in  ordinary  sea  water  and  act  in  all 
respects  normally.  With  a sharp-pointed  knife  it  is  possible  to  cut  off  the  anterior 
antenna?  and  expanded  tail  ends  of  etherized  Labidocera?,  though  the  other  parts  are 
too  closely  attached  to  the  body  to  admit  of  easy  removal.  Animals  from  which  both 
anterior  antennae  and  the  tail  have  been  removed  have  been  kept  a day  or  more  after 
recovery  from  ether  and  their  movements  observed.  They  swim  with  great  agility 
and  seem  quite  as  vigorous  as  normal  specimens,  but  they  seldom  live  beyond  IS  hours 
after  the  operation.  In  their  locomotion  they  show  only  one  type  of  movement,  the 
uniform  rapid  creeping.  This  is  modified  now  and  then  by  becoming  somewhat 
uneven,  but  in  no  instance  have  1 observed  a Labidocera  without  anterior  antenna? 
and  tail  take  even  a short  leap. 

Since  in  these  specimens  the  thoracic  legs  are  sill  intact  and  yet  no  leaps  are  made, 
I feel  certain  that  these  appendages  are  not  used  in  the  way  that  MacBride  supposed. 
A Labidocera  from  which  the  anterior  antennae  have  been  removed  makes  leaps  that 
differ  from  the  normal  ones  only  in  being  somewhat  shorter.  If,  now,  the  tail  of 
such  an  animal  is  removed,  the  animal  ceases  to  leap.  Thus  the  tail  is  unquestionably 
connected  with  this  method  of  locomotion.  A Labidocera  from  which  the  tail  has 
been  removed  can  likewise  leap,  though  in  this  case,  also,  the  leaps  are  shorter 
than  the  normal  ones.  When,  however,  the  anterior  antennae  are  also  removed  the 
leaping  ceases.  Thus  the  anterior  antennae,  contrary  to  MacBride’s  opinion,  are,  in 
Labidocera  mtiva  at  least,  connected  with  leaping.  In  this  species,  then,  the  leap  is 
performed  almost  exclusively  by  the  combined  action  of  the  anterior  antennae  and 
the  tail;  and  the  thoracic  and  other  appendages,  though  they  may  aid  it,  are  not 
capable  in  themselves  of  carrying  it  out.  Since  the  anterior  antenna?  and  the  tail 
are  not  in  action  when  the  animal  is  creeping  rapidly  through  the  water,  this  motion 
must  be  ascribed  to  the  action  of  other  parts,  probably  the  thoracic  appendages. 

From  the  preceding  account  it  might  be  inferred  that  the  female  Labidocera' 
retain  their  positions  at  the  surface  of  the  water  and  the  males  keep  from  accumu- 
lating on  the  bottom  by  incessant  muscular  activit\T,  whereby  they  lift  themselves 
against  gravity;  but,  though  this  is  in  large  part  true,  it  is  not  entirely  so,  for  it  is  a 
most  usual  occurrence  to  find  both  males  and  females  attaching  themselves  to  fixed 
objects,  such  as  the  sides  of  a glass  aquarium.  This  they  can  do  even  when  the  glass 
is  so  tilted  that  they  are  well  on  the  under  side  of  it.  If  such  a suspended  animal  be 
approached  by  a sucking  tube  the  current  of  water  that  can  thus  be  produced  may 
be  made  to  swing  the  animal  back  and  forth  on  its  support,  and  it  can  then  be  seen 
that  the  only  parts  in  contact  with  the  glass  are  the  anterior  antenna?.  Not  only  is 
this  so,  but  a careful  adjustment  of  the  strength  of  the  current  will  often  partially 
loosen  the  animal,  so  that  for  a while  it  hangs  in  the  water  with  an  attachment  to  the 
glass  by  only  the  tip  of  one  anterior  antenna.  It  is  really  remarkable  with  what 
success  an  animal  thus  almost  completely  loosened  from  the  glass  will  still  retain  its 
hold.  That  the  other  appendages  are  not  concerned  in  thus  anchoring  the  animal  is 


108 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


made  clear  in  two  ways:  First,  when  the  animal  hangs  from  the  under  side  of  a piece 
of  glass  the  main  axis  of  the  body  is  nearly  vertical,  and  thus  the,  other  appendages 
are  not  in  a position  to  touch  the  glass;  and  secondly,  when  animals  anchor  themselves 
to  vertical  surfaces  of  glass  they  do  so  quite  as  frequently  by  the  dorsal  surface  of 
the  body  as  by  the  ventral,  and,  since  their  appendages  other  than  the  anterior 
an  ten  use  are  on  the  ventral  side,  it  follows  that  when  they  rest  with  the  dorsal  surface 
to  the  glass  the  only  appendages  that  can  touch  the  glass  are  the  anterior  antennae. 
How  the  antennas  adhere  to  the  glass  is  not  certainly  known,  but  it  is  quite  probable 
that  the  attachment  is  accomplished  by  means  of  the  numerous  hairs  that  cover  these 
organs  and  that  are  especially  abundant  at  the  tip.  (Wheeler,  1900,  p.  179,  fig.  16c.) 

Not  only  can  Labidocerae  anchor  themselves  by  their  antennae  to  fixed  objects  in 
the  water,  but  they  can  likewise  hold  to  the  surface  of  the  water.  A jar  of  water 
containing  many  Labidocerae  can  he  so  placed  that  the  animals  may  be  seen  hanging 
from  the  surface  of  the  water  exactly  as  they  would  hang  from  the  under  surface  of 
a piece  of  glass.  To  the  surface  of  the  water  as  to  the  glass  the  animals  are  attached 
by  their  anterior  antennae.  Slight  waves  are  sufficient  to  dislodge  them,  but  in  quiet 
water  great  numbers  hang  in  this  way  for  considerable  periods. 

The  mechanism  of  attachment  in  this  as  in  the  former  case  has  not  been  definitely 
ascertained,  though  it  is  very  likely,  as  Scourfield  (1900,  p.  307)  has  suggested,  that 
the  hairs  of  the  anterior  antennae  pierce  the  surface  film  of  the  water  and  produce 
capillary  depressions  by  which  the  weight  of  the  body  may  be  supported. 

Thus,  Labidocerae,  whose  weight  ordinarily  causes  them  to  sink  in  sea  water, 
overcome  this  tendency  by  gliding  movements  involving’  the  action  of  their  more 
centrally  placed  appendages,  by  leaps  accomplished  through  the  combined  action  of 
tail  and  anterior  an  ten  me,  and  by  attaching  themselves  through  the  anterior  antennae 
to  fixed  objects  in  the  water  or  to  the  surface  film.  In  these  operations  the  anterior 
antennae  perform  at  least  three  functions:  They  orient  the  animal  mechanically  as  it 
falls  through  the  water,  they  are  organs  of  positive  locomotion  in  connection  with 
the  leaping  habit,  and,  finally,  they  are  organs  of  attachment  while  the  animal  rests. 

REACTIONS  TO  GRAVITY  (GEOTROPISM). 

As  already  pointed  out,  most  female  and  many  male  Labidocerae  frequent  the  top 
of  the  water  in  any  large  aquarium  much  as  the3r  do  the  top  of  the  sea,  and,  as  we 
have  seen,  they  are  continually  falling  from  this  situation  because  of  the  influence  of 
gravity  and  as  continually  exerting  themselves  to  regain  it.  Do  the  Labidocerae 
move  toward  the  surface  because  it  is  nearer  the  source  of  light,  i.  e.,  are  they  posi- 
tively phototropic,  or  do  they  move  in  that  direction  because  it  is  away  from  the 
earth’s  center  of  gravity,  i.  e.,  are  they  negatively  geotropic? 

To  test  this  question  a large  glass  tube  about  8 centimeters  in  diameter  and 
some  60  long,  with  one  end  open  and  the  other  closed,  was  set  up  vertically  and 
nearly  filled  with  sea  water.  On  the  side  of  the  tube,  and  beginning  at  the  bottom, 
five  intervals  of  10  centimeters  each  were  laid  off  and  marked,  and  the  water  in  the 
tube  was  made  to  stand  at  the  50-centimeter  mark.  The  apparatus  was  so  arranged 
that  the  tube  could  be  inclosed  in  a light-proof  jacket  without  disturbing  the  con- 
tents by  jarring,  etc. 

The  first  experiment  consisted  in  putting  five  female  Labidocerae  in  the  tube  and 
recording  their  distribution  under  the  influence  of  diffuse  daylight.  The  sections  in 


DAILY  MIGRATIONS  OF  COPEPODS. 


109 


the  tube  were  numbered  from  the  bottom  up,  I to  V,  and  the  records  were  taken  at 
the  ends  of  five-minute  intervals  till  ten  records  were  obtained.  The  results  are 
indicated  in  Table  1,  where  it  appears  that  in  eight  records  out  of  ten  all  five  animals 
were  in  the  uppermost  section,  and  that  in  two  records  one  animal  in  each  case  had 
descended  to  the  fourth  section: 

Table  1. 


Five-minute 

intervals. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

Totals. 

V 

5 

5 

4 

5 

5 

4 

5 

5 

5 

5 

48 

° QJ 

IV 

0 

0 

1 

0 

0 

1 

0 

0 

0 

0 

2 

d 3 
o 

III 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

-d 

O rj 
<V  +2 

II 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

I 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

To  ascertain  how  much  influence  light  had  in  bringing  about  this  condition,  the 
tube  with  its  contents  was  now  placed  in  perfect  darkness  and  exposed  for  a moment 
to  light  every  five  minutes  to  record  the  distribution  of  the  Labidocene.  Table  9 
shows  the  results  of  this  experiment. 

Table  2. 


Here  in  seven  records  out  of  ten  all  five  animals  were  in  the  uppermost  section; 
in  the  remaining  three  records  four  animals  were  in  the  fourth  section.  Thus  the 
record  in  Table  2,  though  not  quite  so  nearly  uniform  as  in  Table  1,  differs  so  little 
from  the  latter  that  the  conclusion  that  female  Labidocene  stay  at  the  top  of  the 
water  because  of  some  other  stimulus  than  light  is  entirely  justifiable. 

Although,  next  to  light,  gravity  is  the  most  probable  factor  in  determining  the 
distribution  of  female  Labidocerse,  it  might  be  assumed  from  anything  that  has  thus 
far  been  shown  that  these  animals  seek  the  surface  because  of  the  greater  abundance 
of  oxygen  there.  To  test  this  assumption  a large  glass  tube,  such  as  that  described 
on  page  108,  was  filled  with  sea  water  and  inverted  in  an  aquarium  in  such  a way  that 
no  air  entered  it.  Five  female  Labidocerse  were  introduced  at  the  lower  open  end; 
they  swam  rapidly  to  the  upper  end,  where  they  were,  of  course,  at  the  top  of  the 
water,  but  without  being  in  contact  with  the  air.  Here  they  remained  till  their 
deaths  stopped  the  experiment.  The  first  one  died  68  hours  after  introduction;  the 
last  one  85  hours.  As  the  animals  remained  persistently  at  the  upper  closed  end  of 
the  tube,  it  is  evident  that  the  atmosphere  is  not  a factor  in  determining  this  feature 
of  their  distribution.  If,  then,  neither  light  nor  atmosphere  is  essential  in  keeping 
female  Labidocerse  at  the  surface  of  the  water,  the  only  other  probable  factor  is 
gravity,  and,  as  these  animals  persistently  work  against  gravity  in  keeping  near  the 
surface,  their  geotropism  is  negative. 


110 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


With  the  male  Labidocerse  the  case  is  quite  different.  First  of  all,  they  can  be 
divided  into  two  classes — those  that  are  found  at  the  surface  with  the  females  and 
those  that  are  scattered  through  the  water.  Individuals  from  both  these  classes  were 
subjected  to  experiments  such  as  have  been  already  described  for  the  females.  Table 
3 shows  the  distribution  at  five-minute  intervals  of  five  males  taken  from  the  class  of 
scattered  individuals  and  open  to  the  action  of  both  light  and  gravity,  as  in  the  first 
experiment  with  the  females  (Table  1). 

Table  3. 


Five-minute 

intervals. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

Totals. 

V 

2 

1 

1 

0 

1 

1 

i 

1 

0 

0 

8 

o ai 
□0,0 

IV 

1 

1 

2 

2 

0 

1 

0 

1 

1 

1 

10 

G 3 
O 

III 

0 

1 

0 

2 

2 

1 

2 

0 

1 

1 

10 

II 

2 

2 

1 

0 

i 

0 

0 

2 

2 

1 

11 

I 

0 

0 

1 

1 

1 

2 

2 

i 

1 

2 

11 

The  distribution  as  shown  in  this  table  indicates  almost  complete  indifference,  as 
might  have  been  expected  from  the  previous  distribution  of  these  animals  in  the  water. 

Table  1 shows  the  results  from  the  same  five  males  when  the  tube  was  placed  in  the 
dark,  as  in  the  second  experiment  with  the  females  (Table  2). 


Table  -1. 


Five-minute 

intervals. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

. 

7 

8 

9 

10 

Totals. 

V 

o 

i 

1 

2 

i 

1 

i 

1 

2 

1 

11 

O 6 

IV 

2 

1 

1 

0 

2 

1 

i 

2 

0 

1 

11 

G 3 

o-G-j 

III 

l 

2 

1 

1 

0 

1 

2 

0 

1 

0 

9 

f*  0) 
O ri 

II 

1 

0 

1 

9 

1 

0 

1 

1 

1 

1 

9 

zn 

I 

l 

i 

1 

0 

1 

2 

0 

1 

1 

9 

10 

The  results  shown  in  this  table  are  so  nearly  like  those  in  Table  3 that  it  is  safe 
to  assume  that  light  plays  no  important  part  in  the  distribution  of  this  class  of  males. 

The  second  class  of  males,  those  found  at  the  surface  with  the  females,  might 
naturally  be  expected  to  show  the  same  reactions  to  light,  gravity,  etc.,  that  the  females 
do.  This,  however,  is  far  from  the  case.  Table  5 gives  the  distribution  of  five  males 
taken  from  among  the  females  at  the  top  of  the  water,  and  placed  by  themselves  in  a 
glass  exposed  to  diffuse  daylight,  as  in  the  first  experiment  with  the  females. 

Table  5. 


Five-minute 

intervals. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

Totals. 

V 

1 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

1 

1 

2 

1 

9 

° 

IV 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

0 

1 

1 

i 

2 

u 

Js 

III 

0 

0 

2 

1 

2 

2 

1 

0 

1 

0 

9 

O r- 
(L>  T". 
Z/j 

II 

I 

1 

1 

2 

1 

1 

1 

2 

0 

2 

0 

2 

0 

0 

2 

0 

3 

1 

0 

0 

2 

11 

10 

DAILY  MIGRATIONS  OF  COPEPODS. 


Ill 


It  is  evident  from  this  table  that  the  separation  of  the  males  from  the  females 
totally  changes  the  plan  of  distribution  of  the  males.  They  become  scattered  more 
or  less  uniformly,  as  in  the  case  of  the  first  class  of  males.  They  likewise  are  undis- 
turbed in  their  new  distribution  by  the  absence  of  light,  as  is  shown  in  Table  6,  in 
which  the  distribution  of  the  same  five  males  used  for  Table  5 is  recorded,  but  with 
the  difference  that  the  tube  was  kept  in  total  darkness  except  for  the  brief  periods  of 
observation. 

Table  6. 


Five-minute 

intervals. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

Totals. 

v 

0 

i 

1 

2 

1 

1 

0 

i 

i 

1 

9 

° oi 

IV 

1 

0 

1 

1 

1 

1 

9 

i 

i 

2 

11 

O 4-  • 

4-S  <D 
O c* 

III 

II 

I 

1 

2 

1 

2 

0 

2 

1 

1 

1 

0 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

0 

l 

1 

l 

0 

1 

2 

0 

1 

0 

1 

1 

10 

9 

11 

The  essential  agreement  of  Table  5 with  Table  3 and  of  Table  6 with  Table  1 
shows  that  all  males  react  or  fail  to  react  to  light,  gravity,  etc.,  in  much  the  same  way, 
and  that  it  is  the  responses  to  the  females  rather  than  to  other  factors  that  divide  the 
males  into  two  classes.  So  far  as  their  reactions  to  light,  gravity,  etc.,  are  concerned, 
all  males  form  in  reality  only  a single  class. 

It  must  be  evident  from  the  preceding  experiments  that  light  is  a very  subor- 
dinate factor  in  determining  the  distribution  of  the  males,  if,  in  truth,  it  is  to  be 
reckoned  with  at  all,  and  it  might  further  be  supposed,  since  the  males  when  left  to 
themselves  do  not  collect  either  at  the  top  or  at  the  bottom  of  the  aquarium,  that 
they  therefore  are  also  uninfluenced  by  gravity,  i.  e.,  that  they  are  not  geotropic. 
This  conclusion,  however,  would  be  erroneous,  in  my  opinion,  for  the  bodies  of  the 
males  are  quite  as  heavy  as  those  of  the  females,  and  are  continually  falling  toward 
the  bottom.  If  the  males  did  not  react  against  this,  i.  e.,  were  slightly  negatively 
geotropic,  they  would  eventually  all  reach  the  bottom,  a form  of  distribution  which 
we  know  does  not  occur.  1 therefore  believe  that  the  males  also  are  negatively 
geotropic,  but  only  sufficiently  so  to  keep  them  from  collecting  at  the  bottom  and 
not  enough  to  cause  them  to  collect  at  the  top,  as  the  females  do. 

Two  conclusions  may  now  be  regarded  as  well  established:  first,  that  the  female 
Labidocerse  are  strongly  negatively  geotropic,  and,  secondly,  that  the  males  are 
slightly  so.  The  first  of  these  makes  clear  why  under  natural  conditions  the  females 
come  to  the  surface  of  the  sea  and  stay  there;  neither  helps  us  to  understand  why 
the  males  congregate  with  the  females  or  why  the  latter  at  stated  intervals  desert 
the  surface  of  the  sea. 

Loeb  (1893)  long  ago  pointed  out  that  by  appropriate  stimulation  the  sense  of 
an  animal’s  response  might  be  inverted;  thus  an  organism  positively  phototropic 
under  ordinary  conditions  might  by  a slight  change  in  its  environment  become 
negatively  phototropic.  It  is  therefore  necessary,  in  attempting  a further  insight 
into  the  daily  migrations  of  the  copepods,  to  ascertain  whether  there  are  not  means 
at  hand  for  converting  the  negative  geotropism  of  the  females  into  a positive  geo- 
tropism,  thus  establishing  a sequence  of  events  that  might  offer  an  explanation  of 
daily  migration.  Heretofore  some  of  the  most  successful  means  in  accomplishing 
such  inversions  have  been  mechanical  stimulation,  as  agitation  of  the  water  in  which 
the  animals  are,  and  changes  in  the  density  and  in  the  temperature  of  the  sea  water. 


112 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Both  the  male  and  the  female  Labidocerse,  after  the  rough  handling  incident  on 
being  squirted  several  times  from  a pipette  into  a vessel  of  sea  water,  still  showed 
unchanged  their  characteristic  geotropic  responses;  and  even  after  they  had  been 
violently  shaken  in  a test  tube  partly  filled  with  sea  water  no  alteration  in  their 
geotropism  was  observed.  Mechanical  stimulation,  therefore,  seemed  insufficient  to 
change  their  reactions  to  gravity.  This  accords  with  what  was  observed  on  the 
surface  of  the  sea,  for  at  night  Labidocerse  were  often  as  abundantly  obtained  when 
the  sea  was  rough  as  when  it  was  smooth. 

Changes  in  density  were  next  tried.  Sea  water  of  a specific  gravity  1.025  was 
filtered,  concentrated  by  boiling,  cooled,  and  aerated,  and  then  diluted  with  distilled 
water  till  the  requisite  densities  were  obtained.  Females  introduced  into  waters  of 
specific  gravities  1.050  and  1.035  retained  their  negative  geotropism  and  showed  no 
differences  from  normal  animals  except  that  they  moved  more  frequently  by  leaps. 
Males  when  placed  in  similar  concentrations  frequented  the  upper  portion  of  the 
vessel  more  generally,  i.  e.,  had  their  negative  geotropism  somewhat  increased,  and 
leaped  more  frequently.  Concentrated  sea  water  then  induced  leaping  movements  in 
both  sexes,  increased  slightly  the  negative  geotropism  of  the  males,  without,  however, 
making  any  noticeable  change  in  the  geotropism  of  the  females. 

In  sea  water  of  less  density  than  the  normal,  the  reactions  of  the  males  and  the 
females,  unless  otherwise  stated,  were  similar,  and  the  following  records  apply  to 
both  sexes.  In  sea  water  diluted  from  1.025  to  1.020  the  animals  darted  about  when 
first  introduced  and  then  gradually  became  distributed  as  was  usual,  the  females  near 
the  top  and  the  males  scattered.  In  water  of  the  specific  gravity  1.015  the  animals 
introduced  darted  about  vigorously,  after  which  some  went  to  the  bottom,  50  centi- 
meters distant,  and  some  remained  above.  In  water  of  a specific  gravity  1.010  all 
animals  exhibited  darting  movements  and  went  to  the  bottom  in  irregular  spirals. 
They  were  left  in  the  mixture,  and  all  died  in  the  interval  between  a half  hour  and 
an  hour  after  introduction.  In  water  of  a specific  gravity  1.005  all  fell  rapidly, 
each  making  one  or  two  leaps  and  reaching  the  bottom  apparently  dead.  In  pure 
Water  the  animals  made  one  or  two  leaps,  and  were  dead  before  they  reached  the 
bottom.  The  effect  of  diluting  the  sea  water  did  not  seem  in  any  case  to  change 
geotropic  responses.  Slight  dilution  stimulated  the  Labidocerse  to  leaping,  and 
greater  dilutions,  after  stimulating  them  to  a few  leaps,  rendered  their  movements 
incoordinate,  so  that  they  fell  to  the  bottom  without  showing  responses  which  at  any 
time  could  have  been  interpreted  as  a change  in  the  sense  of  their  geotropism. 

When  ordinary  sea  water  was  covered  by  an  inch  or  so  of  sea  water  diluted  to  a 
specific  gravity  1.015  and  Labidocerse  were  liberated  at  the  surface,  they  almost 
always  sank  with  a few  violent  leaps  till  they  entered  the  ordinary  sea  water, 
whereupon  they  became  normally  distributed,  in  that  most  of  the  males  dispersed 
and  the  females  congregated  near  the  upper  surface,  not  of  the  water  as  a whole,  but 
of  the  normal  sea  water. 

This  experiment  indicates  that  under  natural  conditions  even  excessive  rain  is 
not  likely  to  change  essentially  the  distribution  of  Labidocerse,  for  they  would  at 
most  be  driven  only  a few  inches  from  the  surface.  Dropping  fresh  water  into  a 
tube  of  sea  water  containing  female  Labidocerse,  so  that  in  the  course  of  about  an 
hour  the  level  of  the  tube  rose  a centimeter,  could  not  be  said  to  have  driven  the 
animals  from  the  surface,  though  they  occupied  a somewhat  deeper  position  at  the 


DAILY  MIGRATIONS  OF  COPEPODS. 


113 


end  of  the  experiment  than  at  the  beginning.  The  exposure  of  a similar  tube  to  an 
actual  shower  of  rain  on  a very  dull  day  was  followed  by  no  observable  change  in  the 
distribution  of  the  animals.  Rain,  therefore,  with  the  slight  accompanying  change 
in  the  density  of  the  surface  waters,  plays  no  part  worthy  of  consideration  in  the 
distribution  of  Labidocerse. 

Temperature  changes  were  next  tried.  In  testing  the  effects  of  these  changes, 
animals  were  used  that  had  been  kept  several  days  in  a large  glass  aquarium,  whose 
temperature  was  uniformly  23°  C.  Five  male  Labidocerse  were  transferred  from 
the  general  aquarium  to  the  large  glass  tube  described  on  page  108,  now  filled  with 
sea  water  at  23°  C.  to  the  50-centimeter  mark.  The  animals  were  soon  scattered 
through  the  water,  as  characteristic  of  males.  They  were  now  carefully  taken  out, 
and  the  water  changed  for  some  at  15°  C.  On  reintroducing  the  males,  they  again 
gradually  scattered  through  the  water.  The  same  was  true  for  watei  at  10°  C.,  as 
well  as  for  that  at  30°  and  35°.  These  temperature  changes,  therefore,  did  not 
alter  the  distribution  of  male  Labidocerse. 

Five  females  were  then  subjected  to  a series  of  corresponding  experiments.  At 
23°  C.  the  females  remained  near  the  top,  and  the  same  was  true  at  15°  and  10°  C. 
At  30°  C.  and  at  35°  G.  all  the  animals  swam  rapidly  downward  to  the  bottom.  To 
ascertain  whether  this  reaction  was  in  any  way  connected  with  a possible  change  of 
the  animals  in  reference  to  light,  the  experiments  were  repeated  in  the  dark.  Five 
females  were  introduced  into  the  tube  containing  water  at  30°  C.  and  the  tube 
placed  in  a light-proof  chamber.  After  10  minutes  the  tube  was  inspected,  and 
all  five  animals  were  found  at  its  bottom.  There  thus  seems  to  be  no  question  but 
that  an  increase  of  temperature  over  the  normal  converts  the  geotropism  of  female 
Labidocerse  from  negative  to  positive. 

Something  of  the  nature  of  this  change  may  be  inferred  from  the  following 
experiments.  Five  negatively  geotropic  females  were  introduced  into  a large  vessel 
filled  with  sea  water  at  30°  C.  They  immediately  became  positively  geotropic  and 
swam  to  the  bottom.  After  having  remained  there  some  minutes  they  were  trans- 
ferred by  a pipette  to  the  bottom  of  a second  vessel  filled  with  sea  water  at  21°  C. 
They  immediately  became  negatively  geotropic  and  swam  to  the  top.  The  change 
from  one  condition  to  the  other,  as  these  experiments  showed,  takes  place  almost 
instantly,  and  the  condition  lasts  only  as  long  as  the  appropriate  stimulus  is  present. 
This  may  be  illustrated  by  another  experiment.  The  lower  half  of  a large  glass  tube 
was  filled  with  sea  water  at  21°  C.,  the  upper  half  with  sea  water  at  30  C.  The  warmer 
water  was  poured  into  the  tube  so  as  to  mingle  as  little  as  possible  with  the  cooler 
water.  A female  Labidocera  was  now  introduced  at  the  top  to  ascertain  whether  she 
woidd  swim  to  a point  deeper  than  the  separation  between  the  waters  of  different 
temperatures.  She  swam  rapidly  downward,  but  stopped  almost  exactly  at  the  plane 
of  separation  for  the  two  temperatures.  A second  tube  was  prepared  containing 
sea  water  at  21°  C.  in  the  lowest  third,  at  23°  C.  in  the  middle  third,  and  at  35°  C.  in 
the  uppermost  third.  In  this  tube  a thermometer  was  hung  by  a thread  and  a female 
Labidocera  introduced  at  the  top.  She  swam  down  almost  at  once  to  a point  near  the 
middle,  which,  the  thermometer  having  been  adjusted,  was  found  to  have  a temper- 
ature of  23°  C. ; she  then  rose  somewhat,  and  live  minutes  after  introduction  was  in 
water  of  26°  C.  Ten  minutes  later  she  had  risen  somewhat  farther,  but  was  still 
in  water  registering  26°  C.  After  half  an  hour,  when  the  water  in  the  top  of  the 

F.  C.  B.  1901—8 


114 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


tube  was  at  26.5°  C.,  she  was  still  some  inches  from  that  level  and  in  water  at  26°  C. 
It  would  therefore  seem  that  26°  C.  is  the  temperature  limit  above  which  this  femaie 
Labidocera  became  positively  geotropic. 

That  there  should  be  no  question  about  the  difference  between  the  males  and  the 
females  in  their  capacity  to  be  transformed  geotropically,  the  following  experiment 
was  tried.  Ten  animals  taken  at  random  from  the  top  of  the  general  aquarium  were 
suddenly  introduced  with  as  little  water  as  possible  into  a tube  tilled  with  sea  water 
at  30°  C.  They  quickly  separated  into  two  sets,  one  going  to  the  bottom,  the  other 
remaining  near  the  top.  The  six  that  remained  near  the  top  were  picked  out  and 
all  proved  males;  the  four  that  swam  to  the  bottom  were  then  recovered  and  found 
to  be  females.  These  observations  show  that  the  temperature  of  the  water  has  no 
obvious  effect  on  the  slight  geotropism  of  the  males.  The  geotropism  of  the  female 
is  negative  in  cold  water  and  positive  in  warm,  and  for  normal  animals  the  critical 
temperature  seems  to  be  about  26°  C. 

It  thus  appears  that  of  the  three  means  Suggested  whereby  the  sense  of  the 
geotropism  of  Labidocera?  might  be  changed,  only  one,  namely,  temperature,  has 
proved  really  effective.  The  critical  point  in  the  temperature  change  is,  however, 
so  high,  compared  with  any  temperature  range  the  animal  is  likely  to  meet  with 
naturally,  that  the  assumption  that  the  daily  migrations  of  the  females  depend  on 
geotropism  changed  from  negative  to  positive  and  back  again  by  temperature  dif- 
ferences is  wholly  unwarranted.  So  far  as  one  can  see,  the  only  part  played  by 
geotropism  in  the  daily  migrations  affects  the  females;  they  rise  to  the  surface  and 
stay  there  because  of  their  strong  negative  geotropism. 

REACTIONS  TO  LIGHT  (PHOTOTROPISM). 

Light,  like  gravity,  influences  bodies  of  water,  as  a rule,  from  one  side  only,  and, 
since  it  increases  and  decreases  during  the  day,  it  has  naturally  been  regarded  as  a potent 
factor  in  determining  the  daily  migrations  of  pelagic  animals.  That  it  plays  a part 
in  the  distribution  ot  copepods  can  be  seen  from  the  fact  that  in  an  aquarium  standing 
near  a window  many  Labidocera?  congregate  near  the  surface  of  the  water  on  the 
side  next  the  window;  i.  e.,  they  are  positively  phototropic. 

If  a considerable  number  of  male  Labidocera?  are  placed  in  a large  glass  jar  filled 
with  sea  water  and  illuminated  from  one  side,  they  will  soon  be  found  scattered  through 
the  water.  A close  inspection,  however,  will  show  that  rather  more  are  in  the  half 
of  the  jar  away  from  the  light  than  in  the  half  toward  it.  To  determine  with  greater 
accuracy  what  this  difference  amounted  to,  a nearly  cubical  glass  jar  tilled  with  sea 
water  was  so  arranged  that  a temporary  glass  partition  could  be  slipped  into  it 
vertically,  thus  dividing  its  contents  into  a front  and  a back  half.  One  meter  in  front 
of  the  jar  was  placed  an  incandescent  electric  lamp  of  about  14-candle  power.  The 
light  from  this  fell  perpendicularly  on  the  front  face  of  the  jar  and  the  partition  was 
so  placed  that  of  the  two  chambers  formed  by  it  one  was  toward  the  lamp,  the  other 
away  from  the  lamp.  The  partition  having  been  withdrawn,  ten  male  Labidocera? 
were  liberated  in  the.  middle  of  the  jar  and  after  ten  minutes  exposure  to  the  light  the 
partition  was  inserted  and  the  numbers  in  the  chamber  toward  the  light  and  in  that 
away  from  it  were  counted.  The  experiment  was  then  repeated,  the  Labidocera?  being 
each  time  liberated  at  the  center  of  the  jar  and  allowed  ten  minutes  in  which  to 
become  distributed.  Table  7 gives  the  result  of  ten  such  trials. 


DAILY  MIGRATIONS  OF  CO  PE  PODS. 


115 


Table  7. 


Number  of  experiment. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

0 

10 

Totals. 

Number  of  animals  in  chamber  to- 

ward  light 

5 

4 

4 

6 

4 

3 

6 

4 

5 

5 

46 

Number  of  animals  in  chamber  away 

from  light 

5 

6 

6 

4 

6 

7 

4 

6 

5 

5 

54 

These  results  support  in  the  main  the  opinion  formed  from  the  more  cursory 
inspection  of  the  jar.  As  a whole  the  assemblage  of  males  shows  slightly  negative 
phototropism.  These  experiments  do  not,  however,  preclude  the  possibility  that 
some  individuals  are  slightly  positive  and  some  indifferent;  they  merely  show  that 
more  individuals  are  slightly  negative  than  otherwise.  When  a single  male  is  put  in 
a large  open  glass  jar,  the  animal  can  usually  be  driven  about  from  one  side  to  the 
other  by  holding  an  electric  light  (14-candle  power)  close  to  the  jar.  The  reaction  is 
never  very  quickly  performed  and  sometimes  fails  entirely,  but  usually  after  a few 
minutes  the  animal  swims  from  the  illuminated  side  to  the  opposite  one  and  stays 
there  persistently.  Although  it  is  generally  not  difficult  to  drive  a male  Labidocera 
by  light  back  and  forth  horizontally  through  a jar,  I found  it  almost  impossible  to 
drive  them  up  or  down  through  a thickness  of  water  equal  to  that  through  which 
they"  would  move  horizontally.  Sometimes  this  seemed  to  succeed,  but  generally  not, 
and  I was  finally  forced  to  conclude  that,  slight  as  the  geotropisnr  of  the  males  was,  it 
was  more  effective  than  their  phototropism. 

Female  Labidocerte  collect  on  the  light  side  of  a jar  with  great  precision.  Since 
they  are  also  negatively  geotropic  they  keep  close  to  the  top  of  the  water.  When  ten 
females  were  exposed  to  light  in  the  square  glass  jar  with  the  partition  as  described 
for  the  males  (p.  114),  all  were  found  in  all  ten  trials  in  the  chamber  next  the  light. 
Their  positive  phototropism  is  thus  clearly  indicated. 

Further  evidence  of  this  peculiarity  was  observed  in  several  ways.  The  large 
upright  glass  tube  marked  off  at  10-centimeter  intervals  (p.  108)  was  tilled  with  sea 
water  to  the  50-centimeter  level  and  five  females  were  placed  in  it.  The  whole  was 
exposed  to  diffuse  daylight  in  a room,  and  the  Labidocerte  soon  congregated  at  the 
top  of  the  water  on  the  side  of  the  glass  nearest  the  window.  An  opaque  cover  was 
now  slipped  over  the  top  of  the  tube  and  down  to  the  40-centimeter  mark.  In  a few 
moments  all  five  animals  had  dropped  to  this  level,  and  remained  here  as  long  as  the 
cover  was  kept  in  this  position.  This  result  was  essentially  the  same  as  that  observed 
by  Loeb  (1893,  p.  160)  for  Temora  longicornis , except  that  in  Loeb’s  experiments  the 
copepods  were  checked  in  their  upward  movements  by  the  opaque  cover  instead  of 
being  driven  downward  by  it.  In  either  case  it  shows  that  the  animal’s  positive 
response  to  light  is  stronger  than  its  negative  response  to  gravity.  By  lowering 
such  an  opaque  hood  over  the  tube  the  Labidocerte  were  driven  to  the  bottom  of  the 
tube,  where  they  remained  as  though  imprisoned.  They  retained  this  position  as 
long  as  a small  amount  of  light  was  allowed  to  enter  at  the  bottom,  but  the  moment 
this  was  cut  off  they  presumably  began  to  rise,  for  on  removing  the  hood  ten  minutes 
later  they  were  all  found  at  the  top  of  the  water.  Thus  their  negative  geotropism 
is  at  once  made  effective  by  complete  darkness. 


116 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The  rates  at  which  some  of  these  reactions  were  carried  out  are  not  without 
interest.  In  one  set  of  experiments  the  females  were  made  to  descend  15  centi- 
meters from  the  surface  by  means  of  the  opaque  hood.  From  the  time  the  hood  was 
put  on,  which  presumably  marked  the  beginning  of  the  descent,  till  the  arrival  of 
the  animals  below,  was  exactly  30  seconds.  This  indicated  a descent  at  the  rate 
of  half  a centimeter  per  second,  which  has  already  been  shown  to  be  the  rate  of 
passive  falling.  So  far  as  one  could  judge  from  the  first  sight  of  the  animals  as  they 
emerged  below  the  level  of  the  hood,  they  did  descend  by  falling  and  not  by  any 
form  of  positive  locomotion.  It  would,  therefore,  seem  that  diffuse  daylight  from 
below  acts  on  female  Labidocerse  rather  as  an  inhibiter  of  their  negative  geotropic 
reactions  than  as  a positive  phototropic  influence.  On  the  removal  of  the  hood  the 
females  returned  to  their  original  position,  but  required  14  minutes  to  perform  this 
migration.  They  thus  descended  three  times  as  rapidly  as  they  ascended — i.  e.,  if 
they  can  descend  a fathom  in  about  6 minutes  they  could  probably  not  make  that 
ascent  in  less  than  18  minutes. 

In  another  experiment  five  female  Labidocerse  were  put  in  a glass  tube,  of  large 
caliber  and  about  50  centimeters  long,  and  hung  vertically  in  a dark  chamber.  When 
an  incandescent  electric  lamp  (14-candle  power)  was  brought  near  the  side  of  the 
tube,  the  five  animals  crowded  close  to  it.  When  the  lamp  was  held  at  the  top  they 
all  ascended  to  the  top,  and  they  could  easily  be  induced  to  descend  through  50  centi- 
meters of  water  by  holding  the  lamp  under  the  bottom  of  the  tube.  Their  descent 
was  accomplished  chiefly  by  passive  falling,  with  the  anterior  end  uppermost,  though 
now  and  then  they  swam  downward,  an  unusual  action  for  a female.  In  this  experi- 
ment, as  in  former  ones,  the  responses  of  the  females  to  gravity  were  always  subor- 
dinate to  those  to  light — i.  e.,  geotropism  was  less  pronounced  than  phototropism. 

A curious  relation  between  these  two  sets  of  reactions  was  seen  in  the  following 
experiment.  The  large  tube,  graduated  to  10-centimeter  intervals,  was  filled  with 
sea  water  to  the  50-centimeter  mark;  into  it  were  put  five  females  and  the  apparatus 
was  covered  with  an  opaque  hood  from  the  top  to  within  5 centimeters  of  the  bottom. 
In  this  lowest  section  of  5 centimeters  all  the  females  congregated.  The  hood  was 
now  taken  off  in  sections,  beginning  at  the  top.  First,  the  top  with  5 centimeters  of 
the  side  covering  was  removed,  leaving  the  tube  covered  for  a distance  of  40  centi- 
meters, beginning  at  5 centimeters  from  the  bottom.  On  thus  illuminating  the 
interior  of  the  tube  from  above,  it  might  have  been  expected  that  the  five  females 
would  have  risen  through  the  dark  section  to  the  now  light  top;  they,  however, 
remained  at  the  bottom.  The  uppermost  10  centimeters  of  the  side  covering  were 
next  removed,  leaving  30  centimeters  still  covered,  but  without  effect  on  the  animals. 
The  next  lower  10  centimeters  were  now  taken  off:',  leaving  20  centimeters  covered, 
whereupon  four  of  the  Labidocerte  immediately  swam  upward  through  the  dark 
section  to  the  light  at  the  top.  On  removing  the  next  10  centimeters  of  the  side 
covering  the  fifth  animal  ascended.  Thus  it  appears  that  a dark  region  between  a 
light  top  and  light  bottom  may  prevent  female  Labidocerge  from  ascending,  an  opera- 
tion, however,  that  they  may  perform  before  all  the  dark  section  has  disappeared. 

The  experiments  on  light  thus  far  described  make  it  clear  that  the  phototropism 
of  the  male  Labidocerge  is  at  most  slightly  negative,  that  of  the  females  strongly 
positive.  So  far  as  these  facts  are  concerned  they  seem  to  have  little  bearing  on  daily 
migrations,  for  the  slight  negative  phototropism  of  the  males  is  not  sufficient  to  over- 


DAILY  MIGRATIONS  OF  COPEPODS. 


117 


come  their  negative  geotropism  and  the  positive  phototropism  of  the  females  might 
be  expected  to  bring  them  to  the  surface  of  the  sea  in  the  day  instead  of  in  the  night, 
as  is  their  habit. 

The  positive  phototropism  of  the  females  is,  however,  so  strong  that  the  question 
arises  here,  as  it  did  in  connection  with  geotropism,  Are  there  not  perhaps  natural 
means  of  inverting  this?  Certainly  the  conditions  in  the  laboratory  did  not  reproduce 
those  in  the  outer  sea  water,  for  in  a large  jar  kept  on  the  laboratory  table  the  female 
Labidocerje  kept  persistently  near  the  top  of  the  water  day  and  night,  although  in 
another  large  jar  floated  in  the  outer  basin  of  the  Fish  Commission  dock,  and  thus 
freely  exposed  to  the  elements,  the  females  made  regular  migrations,  being  close  to 
the  surface  in  the  night  and  at  the  bottom  in  the  day. 

Experiments  were  now  undertaken  to  ascertain  whether  the  sense  of  the  photo- 
tropism of  the  females  or  possibly  even  of  the  males  could  be  changed.  Loeb  (1893, 
p.  96)  found  that  for  the  copepod  Temora  longicornis  an  increase  of  temperature 
changed  positively  phototropic  individuals  into  negatively  phototropic  ones  and  inten- 
sified  the  negativity  of  negative  specimens,  and  that  a decrease  of  temperature  changed 
negative  into  positive  individuals  and  increased  the  positivity  of  positive  ones. 
Holmes  (1901)  found  that  in  certain  amphipods  an  increase  of  temperature  certainly 
hastened  and  perhaps  induced  the  positive  condition.  Yerkes  (1900,  p.  117)  was  unable 
to  change  the  sense  of  the  light  reactions  of  Daphnia  and  of  Cypris  by  temperature 
differences.  All  efforts  to  change  the  phototropism  of  Labidocerse  by  changing  the 
temperature  of  the  sea  water  were  without  avail.  Both  males  and  females  taken  from 
water  at  23°  C.  and  placed  in  waters  at  10°,  15°,  30°,  and  35°  C.  remained,  so  far  as 
their  phototropism  was  concerned,  unchanged. 

Density  differences  were  next  tried.  Loeb  (1893, .p.  97)  had  shown  that  in  Temora 
dilution  of  the  sea  water  made  positive  individuals  negative,  concentration  the  reverse, 
but  in  Labidocera,  animals  taken  from  sea  water  of  a specific  gravity  1.025  and  placed 
in  waters  of  1.050, 1.035, 1.020, 1.015,  1.010,  1.005,  and  1.000  specific  gravity  showed 
no  phototropic  changes. 

Loeb  (1893,  p.  96)  noticed  that  when  Temora  was  first  caught,  it  was  often  posi- 
tively phototropic,  though  under  ordi  nary  circumstances  it  was  negatively  so.  Shaki ng 
made  the  animals  temporarily  positive,  and  probably  explains  the  peculiarity  just 
mentioned.  Towle  (1900),  by. a most  painstaking  series  of  experiments,  showed  that 
Cypridopsis  was  usually  negatively  phototropic,  but  that  contact  with  a pipette  and 
other  slight  mechanical  stimulations  were  sufficient  to  make  it  temporarily  positive. 
Conditions  parallel  with  those  in  Temora  and  in  Cypridopsis  were  often  found  in 
Labidocera.  Females  are  ordinarily  positively  phototropic,  but  after  having  been 
several  times  vigorously  ejected  from  a pipette  into  sea  water,  the  majority  of  them 
become  temporarily  negative. 

The  following  laboratory  record  will  show  clearly  the  nature  of  this  change. 

Aug.  20  (1901),  7.35  p.  m.  Five  positively  phototropic  females  were  ejected,  each  one  three  times, 
from  a pipette  into  sea  water.  Two  remained  positive  and  three  became  negative,  swimming  to  the 
side  of  the  glass  vessel  away  from  the  light. 

7.45  p.  m.  One  of  the  three  negative  individuals  became  positive  and  swam  with  some  irregularity 
to  the  two  positive  individuals  on  the  light  side  of  the  vessel. 

7.58  p.  m.  The  second  negative  individual  became  positive. 

9.20  p.  m.  The  third  and  last  negative  one  became  positive. 


118 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Since  females  can  be  rendered  negatively  phototropic  for  a period  of  almost 
two  hours  byT  handling  them  with  a pipette,  it  might  be  inferred  that  this  is  due  to 
simple  mechanical  stimulation.  That  such  is  not  exactly  the  truth  is  seen  in  the 
fact  that  female  Labidocerse  agitated  in  the  water  do  not  become  negative  even  when 
this  process  is  several  times  vigorously  repeated,  although  these  same  animals  easily 
change  on  being  handled  with  a pipette.  Apparently,  then,  it  is  a very  special  form 
of  mechanical  stimulus  that  is  necessary  to  call  forth  this  reversal. 

Pipette  experiments  with  five  males,  which  in  the  beginning  were  almost  indif- 
ferent or  only  slightly  negative  to  light,  resulted  in  making  all  distinctly  negative,  a 
condition  which  lasted  at  most  an  hour  and  a quarter. 

Although  certain  forms  of  tactual  stimulation  are  a means  of  making  both  males 
and  females  move  away  from  a source  of  light,  even,  as  1 found  by  experiments,  down- 
ward through  the  water,  they  can  not  for  a moment  be  regarded  as  the  efficient  cause 
in  the  downward  movements  of  the  Labidocerse  each  morning,  for  the  animals  are  quite 
as  much  open  to  agitation  at  other  times  of  day  as  in  the  early  morning. 

Notwithstanding  that  this  change  has  probably  no  connection  with  the  daily 
migrations,  it  may  have,  a very  important  connection  with  the  pairing  habits  of  the 
animals.  As  is  well  known,  the  right  antenna  of  the  male  is  modified  to  form  a 
grasping  organ,  and  by  means  of  this  the  male  seizes  the  female  in  pairing  and  holds 
her  till  he  has  deposited  a spermatophore  on  the  posterior  part  of  her  body.  I have 
observed  pairing  among  Labidocerse  a number  of  times,  and  it  has  alwaj's  taken 
place  between  individuals  at  the  top  of  the  water.  After  the  male  has  seized  the 
female,  the  pair  plunge  about  in  a most  violent  manner,  and  it  has  occurred  to  me 
that  the  mechanical  stimulation  thus  produced  might  be  sufficient  to  render  both 
negatively  phototropic,  so  that  after  release  they  would  move  downward  to  the  water 
where  fewer  individuals  were.  This  operation,  if  it  really  takes  place,  would  have 
the  effect  at  least  of  removing  from  the  pairing  individuals  any  two  that  had  recently 
been  in  union.  After  this  idea  occurred  to  me,  I observed  only  one  pair  in  copula- 
lation.  These  were  removed  from  the  general  aquarium  to  determine  whether  after 
separation  their  light  reactions  had  changed.  After  separation,  however,  both  male 
and  female  exhibited  their  usual  phototropic  responses,  no  change  having  taken  place, 
but  on  examining  the  female  no  spermatophore  was  found  on  her,  and  possibly  the 
operation  was  incomplete  in  respect  to  light  as  it  was  in  sexual  matters. 

Attempts  were  next  made  to  ascertain  whether  the  continuance  of  light  action 
or  a difference  in  its  intensity  could  induce  changes  in  the  Labidocerse.  Groom  and 
Lovb  (1891)  observed  that  the  free-swimming  larvae  of  a barnacle  were  positively 
phototropic  in  the  morning,  but  that  before  noon  and  without  other  changes  than 
continued  light  action  they  became  negative.  These  in  the  course  of  the  night  all 
became  again  positive.  Thus  the  continued  action  of  bright  light  gradually  made 
the  larvse  negative,  of  dim  light  positive. 

To  ascertain  the  effect  of  this  form  of  continuous  light  action  on  Labidocerse,  I 
put  five  males  in  one  large  jar  of  sea  water  and  an  equal  number  of  females  in  another. 
These  were  exposed  to  diffuse  daylight  in  the  laboratory,  as  in  Groom  and  Loeb’s 
experiment,  the  jars  having  been  set  up  August  12.  On  August  20  one  male  died, 
the  other  four  succumbed  between  August  2d  and  26.  One  female  died  August  2d, 


DAILY  MIGRATION'S  OF  COPEPODS. 


119 


and  the  experiment  was  discontinued  August  26.  During  all  this  period  the  males 
and  females  retained  their  characteristic  distribution,  and  nothing  whatever  suggestive 
of  daily  migrations  was  observed.  Thus  the  changes  noticed  by  Groom  and  Loeb  in 
barnacle  larvae  failed  entirely  to  appear  in  Labidocene. 

Lights  of  different  intensities  were  next  tried.  When  an  electric  incandescent 
lamp  of  about  14-candle  power  was  held  at  10  centimeters  from  a glass  vessel  con- 
taining female  Labidoeerse,  the  animals  came  to  the  side  next  the  light;  they  like- 
wise went  to  the  top  or  to  the  bottom  of  the  vessel,  depending  upon  whether  the 
light  was  held  above  or  below  it.  These  same  reactions  obtained  when  a concentrated 
solution  of  alum  was  used  as  a means  of  excluding  heat  rays.  The  reactions  are 
therefore  due  to  light. 

When,  in  place  of  a 14-candle  lamp,  one  of  about  100-candle  power  was  used, 
the  results  were  very  different.  The  Labidoeerae,  on  first  being  approached  by  the 
intense  light,  made  one  or  two  leaps  and  then  swam  directly  away  from  the  light.  If 
the  lamp  was  placed  above  them  they  moved  to  the  bottom  of  the  aquarium  (about  30 
centimeters);  if,  now,  the  light  was  quickly  brought  under  the  vessel,  the  animals 
rose.  This  latter  response  was  doubtless  coupled  with  their  negative  geotropism. 
Thus  it  is  obvious  that  female  Labidoeerae  are  positively  phototropic  to  light  of  low 
intensity,  and  negatively  so  to  light  of  high  intensity.* 

The  phototropism  of  the  males  was  not  noticeably  different  in  the  intense  light 
from  what  it  was  in  the  dim  light.  Under  both  conditions  the}7  were,  as  a rule, 
slightly  negative. 

These  observations  make  clear  why  the  female  Labidoeerae  are  not  at  the  surface 
of  the  sea  in  the  daytime.  They  are  negatively  phototropic  to  its  bright  light,  and 
therefore  pass  downward  to  the  deeper  water,  where,  from  absorption  by  the  upper 
layers,  the  light  has  decreased  in  intensity. 

To  demonstrate  the  validity  of  this  conclusion,  a jar  of  female  Labidoeerae  was 
covered  with  a glass  dish  containing  4 inches  of  a saturated  alum  solution  to  absorb 
heat  rays  and  then  exposed  to  direct  sunlight  about  noon.  Immediately  on  being7 
put  in  the  sunlight  the  animals  retreated  from  the  source  of  light  and  went  to  the 
bottom  of  the  jar.  In  this  respect  they  were  like  Simoc&phalus  sinia  as  observed  by 
Radi  (1901,  p.  83).  On  excluding  sunlight  from  the  jar  the  Labidoeerae  again  rose, 
and  they  could  be  thus  driven  up  and  down  at  will. 

The  migrations  thus  produced  undoubtedly  imitated  in  miniature  the  natural 
daily  migrations  of  female  Labidoeerae  in  the  sea.  These  animals  migrate  into  deeper 
waters  on  the  coming  of  daylight  because  of  their  negative  phototropism  to  strong 
light.  They  return  to  the  surface  on  the  approach  of  night  because  of  their  positive 
phototropism  for  weak  light  and  their  negative  geotropism,  a combination  which 
Loeb  (1890,  p.  42)  has  already  shown  in  the  larvae  of  the  brown-tail  moth.  In  this 
way  the  migrations  of  the  females  are  accomplished,  and  the  only  reason  why  these 
animals  do  not  carry  out  similar  daily  movements  in  the  laboratory  is  because  of  the 
absence  of  one  factor,  intense  light. 

♦ Conditions  of  this  kind,  so  far  as  reactions  to  light  intensities  are  concerned,  were  apparently  first  noticed  by 
Famintzin  (1867)  in  the  protozoans  C'hlamidomonas  and  Euglcna , and  have  since  been  observed  in  the  following  animals: 
Hydra  (Wilson,  1891),  Polygordius  larva!  (Loeb,  1893),  Daphnia  (Lubbock,  1884),  and  Lima x (Frandsen,  1901). 


120 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Although  this  explanation  makes  clear  the  movements  of  the  females,  it  in 
no  wise  applies  to  the  males,  for,  as  we  have  seen,  they  are  almost  indifferent  to  the 
effects  of  light  and  gravity.  The  occasion  of  their  migrations  must  be  sought  for  in 
other  factors. 

REACTIONS  TO  SUBSTANCES  IN  THE  WATER  (CHEMOTROPISM). 

The  Labidocerge  that  collect  at  the  surface  of  the  water  on  the  light  side  of  an 
aquarium  have  already  been  shown  to  be  some  males  and  some  females.  A hundred 
or  more  of  these  were  placed  in  an  aquarium  tilled  with  sea  water  and  in  a short 
time  the  majority  of  the  newcomers  were  found  at  the  top  of  the  water  near  the 
light;  others,  however,  were  scattered  throughout  the  whole  body  of  water.  These 
scattered  individuals  were  then  picked  out,  and,  as  might  have  been  expected,  were 
found  to  be  almost  exclusively  males.  An  hour  or  so  after  this  the  aquarium  was 
again  examined  and  was  apparently  as  full  of  scattered  males  as  before.  These,  like 
their  predecessors,  were  removed.  After  a time,  however,  they  seemed  to  reappear, 
although  in  diminishing  numbers.  The  process  of  picking  out  was  continued  until 
few  or  no  scattered  individuals  could  be  found.  An  examination  of  the  assemblage 
at  the  top  now  showed  it  to  be  made  up  almost  exclusively  of  females,  the  males 
having  escaped  for  the  most  part  to  the  lower  water,  where  they  were  picked  out. 
Under  ordinary  conditions,  then,  males  are  continually  escaping  from  the  assemblage 
of  males  and  females  at  the  surface  and  swimming  oil'  to  become  scattered  individuals 
in  deeper  water. 

The  males  not  only  are  continually  leaving  such  an  assemblage;  they  are  also 
continually  entering  it.  At  the  bottom  of  a glass  aquarium  containing  only  female 
Labidocerse  ten  males  were  liberated.  They  swam  about  as  scattered  individuals  for 
some  time,  but  after  half  an  hour  only  six  could  be  seen;  four,  as  a close  inspection 
showed,  had  joined  the  assemblage  of  females  at  the  top.  The  females  must,  there- 
fore, be  admitted  to  have  some  power  of  attracting  the  males. 

It  occurred  to  me  that  the  possible  phosphorescence  of  the  female  might,  at  least 
at  night,  be  a means  of  attracting  the  males.  Among  the  abundant  phosphorescent 
organisms  in  the  summer  waters  at  Woods  Hole  small  luminous  points  had  often 
been  shown  me  as  phosphorescent  copepods.  By  taking  at  random  test  tubefuls  of  sea 
water  at  night  a single  such  phosphorescent  point  could  be  isolated.  Such  samples 
of  sea  water  contained  sometimes  one,  sometimes  more  copepods,  but  they  were  so 
frequently  without  copepods  at  all  that  I was  forced  to  decide  that  the  luminous 
points  were  something  other  than  these  animals.  Moreover,  when  a single  male  or 
female  Labidocera  was  put  in  a test  tube  containing  sea  water  which  on  previous 
agitation  showed  no  phosphorescence,  and  the  whole  vigorously  shaken,  not  the  least 
phosphorescence  was  ever  observed.  Labidocera  eestiva  is,  in  my  opinion,  not  phos- 
phorescent, and  therefore  this  factor  can  have  no  part  in  causing  the  males  to  be 
attracted  hy  the  females. 

Since  phosphorescence  seems  to  play  no  part,  and  since  the  higher  sense  organs 
of  the  Labidocerge,  the  eyes,  etc.,  are  so  very  rudimentary,  some  form  of  scent  would 
seem  the  most  natural  way  by  which  the  males  might  be  led  to  the  females.  This 
would  probably  depend  upon  some  substance  given  out  by  the  females  to  which  the 
males  would  react.  That  there  probably  is  such  a substance  is  seen  from  the  following 


DAILY  MIGRATIONS  OF  COPEPODS. 


121 


experiments.  A piece  of  glass  tube  about  2 centimeters  long  was  filled  with  sea 
water,  its  ends  were  plugged  with  wet  cotton,  and  it  was  wrapped  in  a little  more 
than  one  fold  of  white  filter  paper.  A thread  was  tied  around  the  tube,  thus  holding 
the  filter  paper  in  place,  and  the  apparatus  prepared  in  this  way  was  lowered  into  the 
surface  water  of  a small  aquarium  containing  five  male  Labidocerse.  These  swam 
freely  to  and  fro,  and  now  and  then  collided  with  the  tube.  They  were  watched 
accurately  for  thiily  minutes,  and  the  number  and  character  of  the  collisions  noted. 
In  all,  ten  collisions  occurred,  after  each  of  which  the  animal  usually  deserted  the  tube 
at  once.  Those  animals  that  just  missed  the  tube  in  passing  went  on  by  it  without 
special  reaction.  The  tube  was  now  withdrawn  from  the  aquarium  and  five  females 
were  introduced  into  it.  Because  of  the  filter  paper  and  the  plugs  of  cotton  these 
were  not  visible  from  the  outside.  The  tube  was  again  placed  in  the  aquarium,  and 
after  five  minutes  the  actions  of  the  males  were  again  observed  for  thirty  minutes. 
Under  these  conditions  the  males  collided  sixteen  times  with  the  tube  instead  of  ten. 
Moreover  they  seldom  passed  near  the  tube  without  some  characteristic  reaction. 
Usually  they  made  one  or  two  quick  circles  as  they  swam  by,  or  even  a somersault- 
like  motion;  these  were  observed  fifteen  times  when  the  females  were  in  the  tube, 
never  when  they  were  not. 

The  experiment  was  now  varied  b}r  dropping  the  small  piece  of  tube  to  the 
bottom  of  the  aquarium  and  recording  the  reactions  of  the  males  as  before.  During 
the  half  hour  in  which  no  females  were  in  the  tube,  males  collided  with  it  thirteen 
times,  but  showed  no  inclination  to  play  about  it.  After  the  introduction  of  the 
females  eighteen  collisions  were  observed  and  eight  playing  movements  as  males 
swam  by.  I am,  therefore,  thoroughly  convinced  that  males  respond  to  females  even 
when  they  can  not  see  them  or  come  in  contact  with  them.  As  the  females  are  not 
known  to  have  any  power  of  producing  sound,  they  probably  give  rise  to  some  sub- 
stance that  serves  as  a scent  for  the  males;  in  other  words,  the  males  are  probably 
positively  chemotropic  toward  the  females. 

Admitting  this  last  conclusion,  we  have  now  all  the  facts  needed  for  a satisfactory 
explanation  of  the  daily  migrations  of  Labidocene.  The  females  come  to  the  surface 
as  daylight  vanishes  because  they  are  positively  phototropic  to  weak  light  and  because 
they  are  negatively  geotropic.  They  descend  from  the  surface  into  deeper  water  at 
the  appearance  of  daylight  because  they  are  so  strongly  negatively  phototropic  to 
bright  light  that  they  overcome  their  negative  geotropism.  The  males  follow  the 
females  because  they  are  probably  positively  chemotropic  toward  them. 

THEORIES  OF  DAILY  MIGRATIONS  OF  PELAGIC  ANIMALS. 

It  is  now  comparatively  simple  to  discuss  the  more  important  theories  advanced 
to  explain  the  daily  migrations  of  pelagic  animals.  Chun’s  (1887)  hypothesis  that  the 
migration  depended  primarily  on  temperature  changes  is  absolutely  without  support 
from  what  has  been  learned  about  the  daily  movements  of  labidocera  cestiva.  Weis- 
mann’s  (1877)  opinion  that  light  governs  the  migration  is  very  close  to  the  truth, 
though  it  requires  modification  in  the  direction  pointed  out  by  Loeb  (1891,  p.  67), 
who,  after  having  shown  the  general  importance  of  light  in  the  daily  migrations  of 
pelagic  animals,  expresses  his  belief  “that  light  is  not  the  only  physical  influence 


122 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


that  determines  the  depth-migrations  of  sea  animals.”  This  has  been  abundantly 
demonstrated  in  Labidocera,  where  geotropism  and  chemotropism  play  parts  as  well  | 
as  phototropism,  and  probably  much  the  same  complexity  obtains  in  many  other 
organisms  whose  depth-migrations,  though  made  simultaneously,  may  be  really  the 
results  of  quite  different  causes. 

CONCLUSIONS. 

1.  Labidocera  cestiva  has  a specific  gravity  in  reference  to  pure  water  of  1.109, 
to  sea  water  1.082—. 

2.  It  falls  through  sea  water  at  the  average  rate  of  about  half  a centimeter  a 
second  (a  fathom  in  six  minutes).  It  swims  upward  at  about  one-third  this  rate. 

3.  In  its  fall  it  is  oriented  by  the  spread  antennas,  which  keep  the  head  upper- 
most. 

4.  Its  locomotor  movements  are  either  rapid  uniform  runs,  or  leaps,  or  rarely 
some  intermediate  form  of  movement. 

5.  The  runs  are  accomplished  by  the  appendages  between  the  anterior  antennas 
and  the  tail. 

6.  The  leaps  can  be  carried  out  by  the  anterior  antennae,  by  the  tail,  or  by  these 
combined,  but  not  I iy  the  other  appendages  except  in  con  junction  with  either  anterior 
antennae,  or  tail,  or  with  both. 

7.  Labidocera  cestiva  may  attach  itself  to  fixed  objects  in  the  water  by  the  ante- 
rior antennae.  It  may  also  hang  from  the  surface  of  the  water  by  these  organs. 

8.  The  anterior  antennae  perform  at  least  three  functions — mechanical  orientation 
of  the  animal  in  falling,  positive  locomotion  in  leaping,  and  attachment  to  fixed 
objects  or  to  the  water  film. 

9.  Males  and  females  react  in  characteristically  different  ways  to  light, 
gravity,  etc. 

10.  Females  have  a strong  negative  geotropism.  Males  have  a weak  negative 
geotropism. 

11.  The  geotropism  of  Labidocera  is  not  changed  by  shaking  it  in  water  or  by 
other  forms  of  mechanical  stimulation.  Increasing  the  density  of  the  sea  water  from 
1.025  to  1.035  and  1.050  increases  slightly  the  negative  geotropism  of  the  males,  but 
does  not  influence  the  females.  Decreasing  the  density  of  the  sea  water  from  1.025 
to  1.020,  1.015,  1.010,  1.005,  and  1.000  does  not  influence  geotropism.  Temperature 
changes  between  10°  and  35°  C.  have  no  influence  on  the  geotropism  of  the  males. 
The  geotropism  of  the  females  is  negative  in  cold  water  and  positive  in  warm,  the 
critical  temperature  being  about  26°  C. 

12.  Females  have  a strong  positive  phototropism  for  light  of  a low  intensity. 
Males  have  a weak  negative  phototropism.  The  positive  phototropism  of  the  females 
is  stronger  than  their  negative  geotropism.  The  phototropism  of  both  sexes  is 
unaltered  by  temperature  changes  between  10°  and  35°  C.  It  is  also  unaltered  when 
the  density  of  the  sea  water  is  varied  from  1.050  to  1.000.  Certain  forms  of  mechanical 
stimulation  (handling  with  a pipette,  but  not  agitation  in  water)  make  females  tempo- 
rarily negatively  phototropic  and  increase  the  natural  negativity  of  males.  Females 
are  negative  to  light  of  high  intensity  (100-candle  power  incandescent  light  at  10 
centimeters  distance,  and  direct  sunlight).  Males  are  apparently  indifferent  to 
changes  in  light  intensity. 


DAILY  MIGRATIONS  OF  COPEPODS. 


123 


13.  Males  are  positive  toward  females  and  probably  chemotropically  positive. 

14.  Ldbidocera  cestiva  frequents  the  surface  of  the  sea  from  sunset  to  sunrise. 

From  sunrise  to  sunset  it  is  presumably  in  deeper  waters.  Its  migrations  are 
explained  as  follows:  Females  rise  to  the  surface  with  the  setting  of  the  sun,  because 

they  are  positively  phototropic  to  faint  light  and  negatively  geotropic;  they  descend 
into  deep  water  with  the  rising  of  the  sun,  because  they  are  negatively  phototropic 
to  strong  light  (their  negative  geotropism  being  overcome  by  their  negative  photo- 
tropism);  the  males  follow  the  females  in  migration,  because  they  are  probably 
positively  chemotropic  toward  the  females. 

Cambridge,  Mass.,  December  31,  1901. 


PAPERS  QUOTED. 

Chun,  C.  1887.  Die  pelagische  Thierwelt  in  grosseren  Meerestiefen  und  ihre  Beziehungen  zu  der 
Oberflachenfauna.  Bibliotheca  Zoologica.  Bd.  i,  pp.  1-66,  Taf.  i-v. 

Famintzin,  A.  1867.  Die  Wirkung  des  Lichtes  auf  Algen  und  einige  andere  ihnen  nahe  verwandte 
Organismen.  Jahrbiicher  fur  wissenschafttiche  Botanik.  Bd.  vi,  pp.  1-44. 

Frandsen,  P.  1901.  Studies  in  the  reactions  of  Limax  maximus  to  directive  stimuli.  Proceedings 
American  Acad.  Arts  and  Sciences.  Vol.  xxxvii,  pp.  185-227. 

Fuchs,  T.  1882.  Was  haben  wir  unter  der  “ Tiefseefauna  ” zu  verstehen  und  durch  welches  physika- 
lische  Moment  wird  das  Auftreten  derselben  bedingt?  Verhandlungen  k.  k.  geologischen 
Reichsanstalt.  Jahrgang  1882,  pp.  55-68. 

Holmes,  S.  J.  1901.  Phototaxis  in  the  Amphipoda.  American  Journ.  of  Physiology.  Vol.  v,  pp. 
211-234. 

Giesbrecht,  W.  1892.  Systematik  und  Faunistik  der, pelagischen  Copepoden  des  Golfesvon  Neapel. 

Fauna  und  Flora  des  Golfes  von  Neapel.  xix  Monographie.  831  pp.  54  Taf. 

Groom,  T.  T. , und  Loeb,  J.  1891.  Der  Heliotropismus  der  Nauplien  von  Balanus  perforatus  und  die 
periodischen  Tiefenwanderungen  pelagischer  Tiere.  Biologisches  Centralblatt.  Bd.  x,  pp, 
160-177. 

Loeb,  J.  1890.  Der  Heliotropismus  der  Thiere  und  seine  Uebereinstimmung  mit  dem  Heliotropis- 
mus  der  Pflanzen.  Wurzburg.  118  pp. 

. 1893.  IJeber  kiinstliche  Umwandlung  positiv  heliotropischer  Thiere  in  negativ  helios- 

tropische  und  umgekehrt.  Archiv  fur  gesammte  Physiologie.  Bd.  54,  pp.  81-107. 

■.  1894.  On  the  influence  of  light  on  the  periodical  depth  migration  of  pelagic  animals. 

Bulletin  U.  S.  Fish  Commission  for  1893,  pp.  65-68. 

Lubbock,  J.  1884.  On  the  sense  of  color  among  some  of  the  lower  animals.  Part  ii.  Journal  of 
the  Linnean  Society.  Zoology.  Yol.  xvm,  pp.  205-214. 

MacBride,  W.  E.  1899.  The  movement  of  copepods.  Quart.  Journ.  Microscop.  Science.  Vol.  xlii, 
pp.  505-507. 

Peck,  J.  I.  1894.  On  the  food  of  the  menhaden.  Bulletin  U.  S.  Fish  Commission  for  1893,  pp. 
113-126,  pis.  1-8. 

. 1896.  The  sources  of  marine  food.  Bulletin  U.  S.  Fish  Commission  for  1895,  pp.  351-368, 

pis.  68-71. 

Radl,  E.  1901.  Ueber  den  Phototropismus  einiger  Arthropoden.  Biologisches  Centralblatt.  Bd. 
xxi,  pp.  75-86. 

Scourfield,  D.  J.  1900.  Note  on  Scapholeberis  mucronata  and  the  surface-film  of  water.  Journ. 
Quekett  Microsc.  Club.  Vol.  vn,  pp.  309-312. 

Towle;  E.  W.  1900.  A study  in  the  heliotropism  of  Cypridopsis.  American  Journ.  of  Physiology. 
Vol.  m,  pp.  345-365. 

Weismann,  A.  1877.  Das  Thierleben  im  Bodensee.  (Not  accessible  to  me. ) 

Wheeler,  W.M.  1900.  The  free-swimming  copepods  of  the  Woods  Hole  region.  Bulletin  IT.  S. 
Fish  Commission  for  1899,  pp.  157-192. 

Wilson,  E.  B.  1891.  The  heliotropism  of  Hydra.  American  Naturalist.  Vol.  xxv,  pp.  413-433. 
Yerkes,  R.  M.  1900.  Reactions  of  Entomostraca  to  stimulation  by  light.  II.  Reactions  of  Daphnia 
and  Cypris.  American  Journ.  of  Physiology.  Vol.  iv,  pp.  405-422. 


Contributions  from  the  Biological  Laboratory  of  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission, 
Woods  Hole,  Massachusetts. 


THE  GAS  IN  THE  SWIM-BLADDER  OF  FISHES. 


By  R.  W.  TOWER, 

Associate  Professor  of  Chemical  Physiology,  Brown  University. 


The  function  of  the  swim-bladder  of  fishes  has  attracted  the  attention  of  scien- 
tists for  many  centuries.  The  role  that  this  structure  plays  in  the  life  of  the  animal 
has  been  interpreted  in  almost  as  many  ways  as  there  have  been  investigators,  and 
even  now  there  is  apparently  much  doubt  as  to  the  true  functions  of  the  swirn- 
bladder.  Consequently  any  additional  data  concerning  this  organ  is  of  immediate 
scientific  value. 

Aristotle,  writing  about  the  noises  made  by  fishes,  states  that  “ some  produce  it 
by  rubbing  the  gill  arches  * * * ; others  by  means  of  the  air-bladder.  Each  of 

these  fishes  contains  air,  by  rubbing  and  moving  of  which  the  sound  is  produced.” 
The  bladder  was  thus  considered  a sound-producing  organ,  and  it  is  probable  that  he 
arrived  at  this  result  by  his  own  investigations. 

Borelli*  (1680)  attributed  to  the  air-bladder  an  hydrostatic  function  which 
enabled  the  fish  to  rise  and  fall  in  the  water  by  simply  distending  or  compressing  the 
air-bladder.  This  hypothesis,  which  gives  to  the  fish  a volitional  control  over  the 
air-bladder — it  being  able  to  compress  or  distend  the  bladder  at  pleasure — has  pre- 
vailed, to  a greater  or  less  degree,  from  the  time  of  Borelli  to  the  present.  To  my 
knowledge,  however,  there  are  no  investigations  which  warrant  such  a theory,  while, 
on  the  other  hand,  there  are  many  facts,  as  shown  by  Moreau’s  experiment,  which 
directly  contradict  this  belief.  Delaroche  f (1807-1809)  decidedly  opposed  the  ideas 
of  Borelli,  and  yet  advanced  an  hypothesis  similar  to  it  in  many  respects.  Like 
Borelli,  he  said  that  the  fish  could  compress  or  dilate  the  bladder  by  means  of  certain 
muscles,  but  this  was  to  enable  the  fish  to  keep  the  same  specific  gravity  as  the  sur- 
rounding medium  and  thus  be  able  to  remain  at  an}7  desired  depth  (and  not  to  rise 
and  sink).  This  was  also  disproved  later  by  Moreau.  Delaroche  proved  that  there 
existed  a constant  exchange  between  the  air  in  the  air-bladder  and  the  air  in  the 
blood,  although  he  did  not  consider  the  swim-bladder  an  organ  of  respiration. 


♦Borelli,  De  Motu  Animalium,  1680. 
f Delaroche,  F.,  Annales  da  Mus.  d’Hist.  Nat.,  tome  xiv. 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


126 


Biot  * * * § (1807),  Provencal  and  Humboldt  f (1809),  and  others  made  chemical 
analyses  of  the  gas  in  the  swim -bladder  and  found  1 to  5 per  cent  of  C02,  1 to  87 
per  cent  of  O.,,  and  the  remainder  nitrogen.  The  most  remarkable  fact  discovered 
about  this  mixture  was  that  it  frequently  consisted  almost  entirely  of  oxygen,  the 
per  cent  of  oxygen  increasing  with  the  depth  of  water  inhabited  by  the  fish.  The 
reasons  for  this  phenomenon  have  never  been  satisfactorily  explained. 

In  1820  Weber  I described  a series  of  paired  ossicles  which  he  erroneously 
called  stapes,  malleus  and  incus,  and  which  connected  the  air-bladder  in  certain  fishes 
with  a part  of  the  ear — the  atrium  sinus  imparis.  Weber  considered  the  swim- 
bladder  to  be  an  organ  by  which  sounds  striking  the  body  from  the  outside  are 
intensified,  and  these  sounds  are  then  transmitted  to  the  ear  by  means  of  the  ossicles. 
The  entire  apparatus  would  thus  function  as  an  organ  of  hearing.  Weber’s  views 
remained  practically  uncontested  for  half  a century,  but  recently  much  has  been 
written  both  for  and  against  this  theory.  Whatever  the  vixtues  of  the  case  may  be, 
there  is  certainly  an  inviting  field  for  further  physiological  investigations  regarding 
this  subject,  and  more  especially  on  the  phenomena  of  hearing  in  fishes. 

Twenty  years  later  Joh.  Miiller  § described,  in  certain  Siluroid  fishes,  a mechanism, 
the  so-called  “elastic  spring”  apparatus,  attached  to  the  anterior  portion  of  the  air- 
bladder,  which  served  to  aid  the  fish  in  rising  and  sinking  in  the  water  according  as 
the  muscles  of  this  apparatus  were  relaxed  or  contracted  to  a greater  or  smaller 
degree.  This  interpretation  of  the  function  of  the  “elastic  spring”  mechanism  was 
shown  by  Sorensen  ||  to  be  untenable.  Muller  also  stated  that  in  some  fish,  at  least, 
there  was  an  exchange  of  gas  between  blood  and  air-bladder — the  latter  having  a 
respiratory  function  -and  regarded  the  gas  in  the  air-bladder  as  the  result  of  active 
secretion.  In  Malapteritrus  he  stated  that  it  is  a sound-producing  organ. 

Hasse,  1 in  1873,  published  the  results  of  his  investigations  on  the  function  of  the 
ossicles  of  Weber,  stating  that  their  action  was  that  of  a manometer,  acquainting  the 
animal  with  the  degree  of  pressure  that  is  exerted  by  the  gases  in  the  air-bladder 
against  its  walls.  This  pressure  necessarily  varies  with  the  different  depths  of  water 
which  the  fish  occupies.  Hasse  did  not  agree  with  Weber  that  the  ear  is  affected  by 
the  movements  of  these  ossicles. 

One  year  later  Dufosse  **  described  in  some  fishes  an  air-bladder  provided  with 
extrinsic  muscles  by  whose  vibrations  sound  was  produced,  the  sound  being  intensified 
by  the  air-bladder,  which  acted  as  a resonator.  He  also  believed  that  certain  species 
produced  a noise  by  forcing  the  gas  from  the  air-bladder  through  a pneumatic  duct. 

At  about  the  same  time  Moreau  ff  published  his  classical  work  on  the  functions 
of  the  air-bladder.  He  proved  by  ingenious  experiments  that  many  of  the  prevailing 
ideas  about  the  action  of  the  air-bladder  were  erroneous,  and  that  this  organ  serves 
to  equilibrate  the  body  of  the  fish  with  the  water  at  anv  level.  This  is  not  accom- 
plished quickly,  but  only  after  sufficient  time  for  the  air  in  the  bladder  to  become 

*Biot,  M&moires  de  Phys.  et  de  Chimie  de  la  Soc.  d’Areueil,  tome  i. 

f Provencal  et  Humboldt,  M6moires  de  Phys.  et  de  Chimie  de  la  Soc.  d’Arcueil,  tome  n. 

JE.  H.  Weber,  De  Aure  et  Auditi  Animalium  Aquatilium. 

§ Joh.  Muller,  Archiv  f.  Anat.  u.  Physiologie,  1842,  pp.  307  et  seq. 

| Wm.  Sorensen,  Journ.  of  Anatomy  and  Physiology,  vol.  29,  1894-95. 

1)  Discussion  of  Hasse’s  theory  by  Sorensen,  op.  cit.,  p.  534. 

**  Dufoss6,  Annales  d.  Sci.  Nat.,5cser.,  tomes  19  and  20,  1874. 
i f Moreau,  MOmoires  de  Physiologie,  vol.  15,  p.  494  et  seq. 


THE  GAS  IN  THE  SWIM-BLADDER  OF  FISHES. 


127 


adjusted  to  the  increase  or  decrease  in  external  pressure  that  has  taken  place.  The 
fish,  therefore,  makes  no  use  of  any  muscles  in  regulating  the  volume  of  its  air- 
bladder.  The  animal  can  accommodate  itself  only  gradually  to  considerable  changes 
in  depth  of  water,  but  can  live  equally  comfortably  at  varying  depths,  provided  that 
the  change  has  been  gradual  enough.  Moreau’s  experiments  also  convinced  him  that 
the  gas  is  actually  secreted  into  the  air-bladder,  and  that  there  is  a constant  exchange 
of  gas  between  it  and  the  blood.  In  these  investigations  he  has  also  noticed  that 
section  of  the  sympathetic  nerve  fibers  supplying  the  walls  of  the  air-bladder  hastens 
the  secreting  of  the  gas  into  the  empty  bladder.  Since  then  Bohr  * * * § has  shown  that 
section  of  the  vagus  nerve  causes  the  secretion  to  cease.  Moreau  noticed  in  one  fish 
( Trigla ) having  an  air-bladder  supplied  with  muscles  that  the  latter  served  to  make 
the  air-bladder  produce  sound. 

Again,  in  1885,  the  Weberian  mechanism  was  brought  to  our  attention  with  a 
new  function  attributed  to  it  by  Sagemehl,f  who  stated  that  this  mechanism  exists 
not  for  any  auditory  purposes  nor  to  tell  the  animal  at  what  level  of  the  water  it  is 
swimming,  but  to  indicate  to  the  fish  the  variations  in  the  atmospheric  pressure. 
Sorensen  tersely  contrasts  the  views  of  Hasse  and  Sagemehl  Ivy  saying  that  “ Hasse 
considers  the  air-bladder  with  the  Weberian  mechanism  as  a manometer;  Sagemehl 
regards  it  as  a barometer.”  The  theory  of  Sagemehl  has,  naturally  enough,  met 
with  little  favor.  Sorensen  J (1895)  held  that  there  is  but  little  evidence  for  attribut- 
ing to  the  air-bladder  the  function  of  a lung.  It  is  to  be  remembered,  however, 
that,  according  to  Sorensen’s  criterion,  no  matter  what  exchange  of  gases  takes  place 
between  blood  and  air-bladder,  it  can  not  be  considered  an  organ  of  respiration 
“unless  its  air  is  renewed  by  mechanical  respiration.” 

Sorensen  also  refutes,  from  anatomical  and  experimental  grounds,  the  many 
objections  to  Weber’s  theory  of  the  function  of  the  ossicles.  He  would  thus  attribute 
to  the  air-bladder  the  function  of  hearing;  indeed,  in  certain  species,  the  only  reason 
for  the  survival  of  the  air-bladder  is  that  “the  organ  is  still  of  acoustic  importance; 
that  it  acts  as  a resonator.”  This  idea,  Sorensen  states,  is  borne  out  by  the  anatomical 
structure  found  in  Misgurnus  and  Clarices,  which  resembles  the  celebrated  “Colladon 
resonator.”  This  author  attributes  to  the  air-bladder,  with  its  “elastic  spring”  and 
various  muscular  mechanisms,  the  production  of  sound  as  its  chief  function. 

From  the  foregoing  brief  historical  summary  of  the  function  or  the  swim-blad- 
der it  is  readily  seen  that  these  investigators  have  not  thrown  an}7  direct  light  on  the 
function  of  the  gas  itself  which  is  contained  in  the  bladder.  It  would,  indeed,  seem 
strange  and  contrary  to  general  biological  laws  for  certain  gases  to  exist  in  the 
bladder  and  not  be  of  any  use.  Why,  indeed,  should  we  find  a high  per  cent  of 
oxygen  in  the  bladders  of  fish  taken  from  55  to  70  fathoms  of  water,  especially  as 
the  gas  is  actively  secreted  § by  the,  fish?  Such  a specialized  expenditure  of  energy 
would  certainly  not  be  accounted  for  on  the  basis  of  acoustic  and  phonation  functions, 
as  the  normal  gas  composition  of  the  surrounding  medium  would  answer  all  these 
requirements.  In  the  voyage  of  II.  M.  S.  Challenger  ||  it  was  found  that  “in  the 

* Journal  of  Physiology,  vol.  15,  p.  494  et  seq. 

t Journal  of  Anat.  and  Physiology,  vol.  29,  pp.  544  et  seq.:  “ Theory  of  Sagemehl,”  by  Sorensen. 

I Journal  of  Anat.  and  Physiology,  vol.  29,  pp.  109,  205,  390,  and  518. 

§ J.  S.  Haldane,  Science  Progress,  vol.  7,  1898. 

||  Challenger  Reports,  vol.  I,  pt.  1,  p.  226. 


128 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


deep-sea  waters  the  volumes  of  oxygen  were,  in  general,  less  than  those  calculated 
from  the  nitrogen-volumes  on  the  hypothesis  of  surface  absorption  of  air  at  the 
temperature  corresponding  to  the  nitrogen  found.  In  waters  from  great  depths  the 
actual  volume  of  oxygen  was  often  very  small.”  “It  is  worth  noting,  however,  that 
very  small  quantities  of  oxygen  present  themselves  occasionally  at  moderate  depths.” 
Two  examples  are  here  given: 


Cubic  centime- 
ters per  liter. 

02  calcu- 
lated. 

Depth 

(fat.h- 

Per  cent 
of  02  in 
dissolved 
gas. 

n2. 

02. 

oms). 

15. 08 

0.6 

8.21 

2,875 

4.33 

13.74 

1.65 

7.15 

300 

10. 72 

The  Challenger  expedition  did  not  find  any  deep-sea  waters  that  were  entirely 
free  from  absorbed  oxygen.  In  the  surface-waters  the  amount  of  oxygen  absorbed 
from  air  at  a given  temperature  is  the  product  of  its  coefficient  of  absorption  into  its 
partial  pressure  in  the  undissolved  residue.  Hence,  in  surface  water,  at  given  tem- 
perature and  760  mm.  pressure,  there  would  be  the  following  result: 


Tempera- 
ture C. 

Dissolved  N2  and  02  in 
c.  c. 

Per  cent  of 
02  in 
dissolved 
gas. 

N2. 

02. 

0° 

15.60 

8. 18 

34.40 

35° 

8.36 

4. 17 

33. 31 

In  the  first  table  we  find  the  per  cent  of  oxygen  in  the  dissolved  gases  to  be  4.33 
per  cent  and  10.72  per  cent  respectively,  which,  compared  with  the  02  per  cent  in 
surface  waters  in  the  second  table,  shows  an  enormous  deficit.  As  to  the  free  C03  in 
the  sea,  I quote  again  from  the  Challenger  report:  “From  all  the  evidence  afforded 
by  the  Challenger  research  we  see  that  free  carbonic  acid  in  sea  waters  is  the  excep- 
tion.” It  would  thus  seem  that  there  is  every  condition  offered  for  the  elimination 
of  CO.,  from  living  organism,  as  by  the  gills  of  fishes,  and  the  immediate  absorption 
of  this  waste  product  by  the  surrounding  water.  It  is  at  least  a strange  coincidence 
that  with  the  gradual  diminution  of  oxygen  in  the  water,  according  to  the  depth,  we 
find  an  increase  in  percentage  of  oxygen  contained  in  the  bladder.  Biot  cites  Trygla 
lyra  from  500  fathoms  containing  87  percent  oxygen;  Sparus  argenteus  from  65 
fathoms  contained  50  per  cent  oxygen;  Spar  us  dentex  from  20  fathoms  contained  40 
per  cent  oxygen.  My  own  observations  on  Lopholatilus  taken  from  55  fathoms 
showed  66.5  per  cent  oxygen,  and  from  70  fathoms  showed  69  per  cent  of  oxygen. 
May  not  this  process  be  one  directly  to  supply  the  animal  with  more  oxygen  under 
these  conditions,  where  the  oxygen  dissolved  in  the  water  is  so  deficient?  Such  an 
explanation  is  tenable,  inasmuch  as  Hiifner,  Bohr,  Moreau,  and  Haldane  have  shown 
by  experiment  that  the  gas  is  the  result  of  an  active  secretion  in  which  almost  pure 
oxygen  may  be  given  to  the  bladder. 

It  occurred  to  me,  if  this  process  existed  for  the  purpose  of  supplying  oxygen 
to  the  animal,  that  changes  in  the  proportion  of  the  constituent  gases  would  be  found 
when  the  animal  was  partially  or  completely  asphyxiated,  and  that  these  changes 


THE  GAS  IH  THE  SWIM-BLADDER  OF  FISHES. 


129 


would  be  fairly  constant  in  all  fish  subjected  to  the  same  conditions.  The  abundance 
of  squeteag'ue  supplied  by  the  Fish  Commission  Laboratory  at  Woods  Hole  furnished 
the  opportunity  for  a large  number  of  analyses  under  different  conditions.  Few 
analyses  had  been  completed,  however,  before  it  was  evident  that  the  per  cent  of 
oxygen  in  the  air-bladder  was  no  indication  of  the  processes  taking  place  there.  In 
the  accompanying  table  the  squeteague  numbered  1 to  9 were  allowed  to  become 
asphyxiated  by  dying  in  the  open  air  on  the  wharf.  The  animals  were  very  active 
before  they  were  taken  from  the  live-car.  In  each  case  the  gas  was  analyzed  at  a 
fixed  time  after  asphyxiation.  The  bladder  was  rapidly  removed  from  the  dead 
animal,  and  a silk  ligature  was  tied  a short  distance  from  the  small  end.  The  end  of 
the  bladder  was  then  amputated,  and  the  3-way  stopper  of  the  Bunte  apparatus  was 
inserted  into  the  lumen  and  fastened  by  another  ligature.  The  entire  Bunte  apparatus 
being  filled  with  water,  the  first  ligature  was  carefully  cut,  and  the  bottom  stopper  of 
the  apparatus  being  opened,  the  gas  from  the  bladder  replaced  the  water  in  the 
instrument.  The  stoppers  were  now  closed  and  the  gas  analyzed  by  the  ordinary 
methods.  In  No.  I there  was  found  17.51  per  cent  of  oxygen,  while  in  No.  6 there 
was  only  6.5  per  cent;  yet  the  animals  were  under  practically  the  same  conditions. 
The  amount  of  C03,  considered  independently  of  the  oxygen,  also  shows  no  particular 
characteristic,  but  when  compared  with  the  oxygen  it  is  seen  to  vary  somewhat  pro- 


portionately with  the  oxygen ; so  that,  in  the  two  above  cases,  the  quotient  of 


ca 

02 


became  respectively  0.215  and  0.26.  It  is  evident,  therefore,  that  in  all  nine  cases 
the  proportion  of  CO?  to  02  is  nearly  constant,  and  thus  asphyxia  has  produced  a like 
effect  on  the  gases  in  the  bladder. 

This  fact  naturally  suggested  analyses  of  gas  taken  from  normal  live  animals. 
The  first  series  were  upon  animals  taken  from  the  live-car  and,  as  far  as  could  be 
judged,  in  normal  condition.  The  animals  were  taken  from  the  water  and  the  gas 
collected  as  rapidly  as  possible.  The  result  of  the  analyses  of  this  gas  is  given  in  the 
table,  Nos.  11  to  20.  Here  again  there  is  a marked  difference  in  absolute  amounts  of 
0.,  in  bladder,  and  also  in  absolute  quantities  of  CO., . The  extreme  differences 

are  shown  by  comparing  Nos.  11  and  20.  The  q ! coefficient,  however,  shows  a close 

agreement  throughout  the  seven  specimens  subjected  to  the  same  conditions.  Even 
in  these  experiments  the  chances  for  partial  asphyxiation  were  not  entirely  eliminated, 
for  this  would  begin  during  the  time  that  the  gas  was  being  collected.  Another 
set  of  experiments  was  made  on  squeteague  in  which  the  gas  was  collected  while  the 
gills  of  the  animals  were  irrigated  with  salt  water,  thus  giving  no  possible  chance 
for  asphyxiation;  the  results  are  given  in  Nos.  21  to  23  of  the  table.  In  this 
experiment,  as  in  the  two  previous  ones,  there  are  differences  in  absolute  amounts  of 

CO 

02  and  CO,  in  the  different  specimens,  but  the  q 2 quotients  are  very  nearly  the  same. 


Another  series  of  experiments  is  recorded  in  Nos.  10  to  13.  These  squeteague 
represented  different  stages  of  asphyxiation.  None  were  dead,  but  none  were  very 

active.  The  result  of  the  analysis  showed  a ^ ( 1 quotient,  which  is  especially  inter- 


esting, for  it  varied  with  the  condition  of  the  animal. 

F.  C.  B.  1901—9 


In  No.  10  the 


CO 

03 


' quotient 


130 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


was  0.122,  which  corresponds  with  the  series  beginning  with  No.  Id,  and  this  animal 

CO, 

was  the  most  active.  In  No.  12  the  q ! quotient  was  0.191,  which  corresponds  to 
the  first  series,  and  of  the  three  this  animal  was  the  nearest  dead. 

The  table  records  the  result  of  the  various  analyses  as  they  were  made  in  1900. 
In  the  summer  of  1901,  at  n ly  request,  both  Mr.  E.  H.  Green  and  Mr.  A.  K.  Krause, 
independently  of  each  other,  made  analyses  of  the  gas  taken  from  animals  subjected 

CO 

to  the  same  conditions  as  described  above.  In  both  cases  the  -q-^  quotients  fell  in 
their  respective  places  in  the  series. 

If  we  now  compare  the  q-'  quotients  in  Nos.  1 to  9 as  representing  asphyxiated 


animals,  and  the  quotient  in  Nos.  21  to  23  as  representing  animals  in  their  normal 
condition,  it  will  be  seen  that  there  is  a great  difference  between  them.  These  results 
indicate  that  there  is  an  active  respiratory  process  taking  place  in  the  bladder  during 
asphyxiation. 


No. 

Per  cent 

Or. 

Per  cent 
CO.,. 

co2 

On  ' 

Remarks. 

No. 

Per  cent 
On. 

Per  cent 
CO... 

C03 
02  ■ 

Remarks. 

1 

14.45 

3.99 

0. 275 

14 

19.  00 

2. 30 

0. 121 

2 

3 

4 

5 

15. 85 
15.80 
17. 51 
15. 91 

4.47 
4. 70 
4.30 
4.20 

.282 

.297 

.245 

.264 

Gas  taken  after  the 
animals  bad  been  as- 
phyxiated by  dying 

15 

16 

17 

18 

13.30 
10.08 
8. 34 
10 

1.28 

1.26 

.93 

.82 

.096 

.125 

.115 

.082 

Gas  removed  while  ani- 
mals were  alive,  im- 
mediately after  being 
taken  frcim  car. 

6 

6 50 

1.  60 

. 261 

on  the  wharf. 

19 

8.60 

.62 

.072 

7 

15. 64 

4.54 

.290 

20 

5. 55 

.70 

.126 

8 

12. 20 

3 

.247 

9 

9.  70 

2. 90 

.298 

21 

11.86 

.75 

.063 

IGas  taken  while  gills 

10 

18.  80 

2. 30 

. 122 

IGas  removed  when 

22 

12. 12 

.75 

. 061 

> were  irrigated  with 

11 

16  90 

2.50 

.147 

1 animals  were  almost 

23 

8.  77 

.92 

.104 

1 salt  water. 

12 

12.  00 

2.  30 

.191 

I dead  in  a crowded 

13 

17.  80 

2.80 

.157 

I car. 

24 

11.40 

1 

.087 

Spinal  cord  cut  and  gas 

removed. 

i 


SUMMARY. 


1.  The  evidence  for  exchange  of  gases  between  blood  and  air-bladder  must  be 
sought  not  in  the  absolute  amount  of  02  or  C02  in  the  bladder,  but  in  the  proportion 
of  these  two  gases. 


2.  The 


C02 

02 


quotient  of  the  gas  in  the  swim-bladder  of  normal  animals  is  small, 


ranging  from  0.06  to  0.10. 

3.  The  yp1  quotient  increases  as  the  animal  is  asphyxiated,  and  reaches  0.24 
to  0.29  when  killed  b}r  this  means. 

4.  The  fact  that  different  per  cents  of  02  are  found  in  different  squeteague  under 
the  same  conditions  strengthens  the  view  that  the  gas  is  a secretion;  for  how  could 
we  have  19  per  cent  in  No.  14  and  5.55  per  cent  in  No.  20  under  a process  of  diffusion  ? 

5.  Fish  (Lopholatilus  chamcdeonticeps ) from  55  fathoms  of  water  have  66.5  per 
cent  of  O,  and  only  a trace  of  CO.„  and  from  70  fathoms  of  water  have  69  per  cent 

CO, 

of  02  and  a trace  of  CO.,.  The  deeper  the  water  the  smaller  the  -77^  quotient.  This 
goes  on  until  pure  oxygen  alone  is  present  in  the  air-bladder. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901. 


Plate  XXI 


BILIARY  CALCULI  FROM  SQUETEAGUE. 

The  stones  in  each  group  are  from  one  fish.  A centimeter  scale  is  introduced  to  show  their  size. 


Contributions  from  the  Biological  Laboratory  of  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission 
Woods  Hole,  Massachusetts. 


BILIARY  CALCULI  IN  THE  SQUETEAGUE. 


By  R.  W.  TOWER, 

Associate  Professor  of  Chemical  Physiology , Brown  University . 


Pathological  changes  in  marine  animals  seldom  attract  our  attention,  and  it  is 
indeed  surprising  that  abnormal  conditions  are  not  more  frequently  found.  The 
explanation  of  this  must  be  either  that  these  animals  are  remarkably  free  from  disease 
or  that  the  diseased  individuals  are  quickly  eliminated  by  the  untoward  conditions. 

In  1901,  while  at  the  Fish  Commission  laboratory  at  Woods  Hole,  my  attention 
was  called  to  the  presence  of  gallstones  in  the  squeteague  ( Cyn oscion  regalis)  by  Mr. 
A.  K.  Krause,  who  had  occasion  to  collect  the  bile  from  some  three  hundred  specimens 
of  this  species  during  the  summer.  Of  this  number  only  four  showed  any  lesions  of 
the  liver  or  bile  passages.  In  one,  the  liver  was  apparently  cirrhotic;  from  the  other 
three,  gallstones  were  collected  and  preserved  for  the  following  investigations. 

The  calculi  in  the  first  squeteague  completely  filled  the  gall  bladder  and  the  gall 
duct,  in  which  no  bile  was  found.  These  calculi  (shown  in  the  first  or  upper  group) 
numbered  16  in  all,  weighed  2.165  grams,  and  were  of  all  sizes  from  a big  bean  to  a 
BB  shot.  The  largest  dried  over  sulphuric  acid  weighed  0.6725  grams;  was  1.5 
centimeters  long,  0.5  centimeter  thick,  and  0.75  centimeter  wide.  All  of  these  calculi 
were  more  or  less  nodulated,  as  can  be  readily  seen  from  plate  xxi.  When  bisected 
in  a longitudinal  plane  they  are  found  to  consist  of  concentric  layers  arranged  around 
one  or  more  nuclei,  which  were  very  small  and  consisted  chiefly  of  cholesterin.  It 
being  impossible  to  pulverize  the  air-dried  stones, they  were  minced  as  fine  as  possible 
and  boiled  with  water. 

The  aqueous  extract  («)  contained  only  a trace  of  either  organic  or  inorganic 
matter  (see  p.  134).  The  solid  residue  (/>)  was  extracted  with  hot  alcohol.  The  alcohol 
( c ) was  decanted  and  evaporated,  giving  a mere  trace  of  bile  pigments,  with  a little 
cholesterin.  The  solid  residue  (d)  was  next  digested  with  ether  until  there  was  no 
further  extraction.  The  ether  solution  (e)  on  evaporation  yielded  fat  and  cholesterin. 
The  latter  crystallized  in  characteristic  plates  which  were  easily  identified  under  the 
microscope.  Dissolved  in  chloroform  these  crystals  gave  the  characteristic  choles- 
terin reaction  after  the  addition  of  sulphuric  acid.  The  solid  residue  (f)  was  now 
extracted  with  dilute  hydrochloric  acid  (1:3)  for  12  hours.  Effervescence  of  CO,, 
indicated  the  presence  of  carbonates,  but  in  small  amounts.  The  acid  solution  (g)  was 
decanted,  evaporated  to  dryness,  and  ignited.  The  ash  dissolved  readily  in  dilute 
hydrochloric  acid  and  on  analysis  showed  the  presence  of  calcium,  magnesium,  iron, 


131 


132 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


phosphoric  acid  and  sulphuric  acid.  The  solid  residue  (h)  from  the  HC1  extract  was 
washed  with  water  and  extracted  several  times  with  hot  chloroform,  which  took  out 
small  quantities  of  bilirubin  at  each  extraction  ( i ).  This  method  evidently  did  not 
remove  all  the  pigment,  so  the  solid  residue  (j)  was  extracted  with  hot  alcohol 
containing  a little  HC1.  This  removed  a pigment  in  considerable  quantities  (k) 
which  gave  the  qualitative  tests  for  bilirubin.  The  solid  residue  (?)  was  digested  in 
ether  for  12  hours,  but  nothing  was  extracted  (m).  The  residue  (n)  gave  strong- 
reactions  with  M i 1 Loti’s  reagent  and  with  the  xanthoproteic  test.  It  was  divided  into 
two  proportions.  One  portion  (o)  was  oxidized  with  KNO.,  and  Na3C03  and  tested 
for  phosphoric  and  sulphuric  acids.  Both  were  positive.  A control  test  with  the 
reagents  alone  gave  no  reaction.  The  other  portion  (p)  was  boiled  with  dilute  hydro- 
chloric acid  for  two  hours.  The  resulting  solution  was  examined  for  reducing  sugars, 
but  with  negative  results.  It  would  seem,  then,  from  the  above  that  the  proteid 
substance  was  of  the  nature  of  a nucleo-albumin  and  not  a mucin.  (See  Table  I.) 

The  small  amount  of  calculi  in  the  first  or  upper  group  (plate  xxi)  not  used  in 
the  preceding  analysis  was  estimated  quantitatively  for  the  principal  constituents, 
with  the  following  results: 

Calculi  dried  to  constant  weight  over  H2S04. 

Per  cent. 

Cholesterin  and  fat 2. 85 

Mineral 3. 65 

Bilirubin 16. 14 

N ucl  eo-albumin 65. 59 

Water 

Soluble  in  water 


Total  ash  of  calculi 


The  fat  was  in  excess  of  the  cholesterin,  although  a quantitative  separation  was 
not  made. 

The  calculi  in  the  second  group  (plate  xxi)  were  from  another  squeteague  (a 
male).  They  differed  from  the  first  lot  in  being  smoother  and  less  nodulated.  When 
bisected  longitudinally  they  exhibited  the  same  concentric  structure  as  the  others. 
These  stones  were  found  not  only  in  the  gall  bladder  and  gall  ducts,  but  also  in  the 
intestines,  and,  strangely  enough,  were  embedded  in  the  tissues  between  the  liver  and 
intestines.  No  lesions  or  scars  appeared  either  in  the  bile  ducts  or  in  the  intestines, 
vet  these  stones  must  have  broken  through  the  walls  of  these  passages  at  some  earlier 
time.  The  gall  bladder  and  duct  contained  a small  quantity  of  bile. 

There  were  in  all  eleven  stones,  weighing  1.865  grams.  The  largest  dried  over 
sulphuric  acid  weighed  0. 615  grams,  was  1.7  cm.  long,  0.8  cm.  wide,  and  0.7  cm.  thick. 
The  qualitative  analysis  agreed  with  the  preceding  and  was  carried  out  in  the  following 
way:  The  dried  substance,  finely  minced,  was  extracted  with  ether  until  nothing  more 
was  dissolved.  The  ether  extract  (1)  on  evaporation  contained  cholesterin  and  a 
small  amount  of  fat  (see  p.  135).  The  residue  (2)  was  digested  with  dilute  (2  per  cent) 
hydrochloric  acid  for  12  hours,  giving  a slight  effervescence  of  C02.  The  extract 
(3)  on  evaporation  showed  but  little  residue  and  was  united  with  (5)  for  further 
analysis.  The  residue  (1)  was  now  extracted  four  hours  with  warm  dilute  HC1, 
which  removed  most  of  the  mineral  matter.  The  extract  (5)  was  analyzed  directly 
for  inorganic  substances.  This  gave  relatively  large  quantities  of  phosphoric  acid, 


Trace. 
99. 75 
4.32 


BILIARY  CALCULI  IN'  THE  SQUETEAGUE. 


133 


calcium,  and  magnesium,  smaller  quantities  of  sulphuric  acid,  and  a slight  amount  of 
iron.  The  residue  (6)  was  extracted  with  hot  chloroform,  and  the  extract  (7)  upon 
evaporation  gave  but  little  bilirubin.  The  residue  (8)  was  boiled  with  alcohol.  The 
alcohol  extract  (9)  when  evaporated  gave  a small  amount  of  bilirubin.  Thinking  that 
there  might  be  yet.  a bilirubinate  which  had  not  been  decomposed  by  the  dilute  HC1, 
the  residue  (10)  was  extracted  with  hot  dilute  I TCI  alcohol  for  three  hours.  The 
acid-alcohol  extract  (11)  upon  evaporation  yielded  a considerable  quantity  of  pigment 
which  had  the  properties  of  bilirubin.  A portion  of  the  residue  (12)  gave  strong- 
reactions  with  Mil  Ion’s  reagent  and  by  the  xanthoproteic  test.  The  remainder  was 
divided  into  two  portions.  The  smaller  (11)  was  fused  with  KN ()3  and  HNaC03  in 
order  to  determine  the  presence  of  P and  S in  the  organic  molecule.  The  product 
dissolved  in  hot  dilute  nitric  acid  gave  good  reactions  for  phosphoric  and  sulphuric 
acids.  The  larger  portion  (13)  was  washed,  dried  to  constant  weight  at  105°C.,  and 
the  per  cent  of  N estimated  by  the  Dumas  method.  An  accident  at  the  close  of  the 
determination  prevented  an  accurate  estimation.  There  was  at  this  time  13+  per 
cent  N.  The  estimation,  being  of  necessity  low,  can  not  be  taken  as  an  absolute 
indication  of  the  nature  of  the  substance,  yet  it  would  seem  to  suggest  a nucleo- 
albumin  rather  than  a mucin.  (See  Table  II.) 

The  quantitative  analysis  of  these  calculi  dried  to  constant  weight  at  100°  C. 
yielded: 

Per  cent. 

Cholesterin  (and  fat) 0.47 

Bilirubin 22.39 

Nucleo-albumin 70.69 

Mineral ,.  5.10 

68.65 

The  difference  in  per  cent  of  fat  and  cholesterin  in  the  two  analyses  is  certainly 
striking.  The  amount  of  cholesterin  in  the  two  cases  varied  but  little  as  far  as  could 
be  determined  by  qualitative  reactions,  but  the  fat  in  the  latter  case  was  evidently 
very  much  less. 

The  gallstones  in  the  third  or  lower  group,  taken  from  the  third  squeteague 
(a  female),  were  much  smaller  than  the  preceding.  The  largest,  dried  over  sulphuric 
acid,  weighed  0. 1 1 gram  and  the  entire  2d  weighed  only  0.935  gram.  The  appearance, 
except  size,  did  not  differ  from  No.  2.  The  calculi  were  also  found  in  the  gall  bladder, 
gall  duct,  intestines,  and  embedded  in  the  tissues  surrounding  the  intestines  and 
liver.  The  gall  bladder  contained  a quantity  of  bile.  The  qualitative  analysis  did 
not  differ  from  the  two  preceding,  and  a quantitative  determination  was  not  made. 

The  three  fish  from  which  the  above  calculi  were  taken  were  apparently  in 
normal  condition  as  far  as  could  be  determined  when  taken  from  the  water.  The 
livers  were  perfectly  normal  in  appearance.  It  is  a difficult  matter  to  collect  the 
urine  from  these  animals,  as  it  is  generally  eliminated  as  soon  as  they  are  taken  from 
the  water;  but  the  small  quantity  of  urine  that  was  collected  showed  the  presence  of 
no  bile  pigments.  Observations  of  this  character  would  certainly  be  of  interest  in 
the  light  of  comparative  physiology. 

Perhaps  the  most  interesting  feature  in  the  analyses  described  above  is  the  high 
per  cent  of  nucleo-albumin,  differing  in  this  respect  from  the  gallstones  reported 
from  other  animals.  Further  observations  on  the  formation  of  these  calculi  might 
prove  to  be  of  value  in  explaining  the  causes  of  such  deposits. 


134 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Table  I. 


The  finely  minced  calculi  boiled 
with  water  and  filtered. 


Water  extract  (a).  Traces  of  or- 
ganic matter. 


Residue  (b)  extracted  with  hot 
alcohol. 


Alcohol  extract  (c).  Traces  of 
cholesterin  and  pigment. 


Residue  (cl)  extracted  with  ether. 


Ether 
and  fat. 


extract  (e).  Cholesterin 


Acid  solution  ( g ).  Evaporated, 
ignited.  Ash  contained  Ca,  Mg,  Pe, 
H3P04,  H0SO4,  Iv,  and  Na. 


Residue  (/)  extracted  with  dilute 
HC1  (1:3).  Effervescence  of  C02. 


Residue  ( h ) extracted  with  hot 
chloroform. 


Chloroform  extract  ( i ). 
amount  of  bilirubin. 


Small 


Residue  ( j ) extracted  with  hot 
alcohol  containing  dilute  HC1. 


Acid-alcohol  extract  (fc).  Bili- 
rubin. 


Residue  ( l ) extracted  with  ether, 
12  hours. 


Ether  extract  (to)  evaporated.  No 
residue. 


Residue  (n)  divided  into  two 
parts. 


Part  (0)  boiled  2 hours  with  dilute 
HC1.  No  reducing  substance.  No 
mucin. 


Part  (p)  oxidized  with  KNO;l  and 
Na«C03.  Dissolved.  Tests  for  H3PO4 
and  HoS04.  Nucleo-albumin. 


BILIARY  CALCULI  IN  THE  SQUETEAGUE. 


135 


Table  II. 


Dried  substance,  finely  minced, 
extracted  with  ether. 


Ether  extract  (1 ) . Cholesterin  and 
fat. 


Residue  (2)  extracted  with  dilute 
HC1  (2  per  cent)  for  12  hours.  Effer- 
vescence of  C02. 


Residue  (4)  extracted  4 hours  with 
warm  dilute  HC1. 


HC1  extract  (5)  contained  Mg,  Ca, 
Fe,  K,  Na,  H3P04,  and  H»S04. 


Residue  (fi 

) extracted  with  hot 

chloroform. 

Chloroform  extract  (7). 
amount  of  bili-rubin. 


Small 


Residue  (8)  boiled  with  alcohol. 


Alcohol  extract  (9).  Small  amount 
of  bili-rubin. 


Residue  (10)  extracted  with  dilute 
HC1  alcohol. 


Acid  alcohol  extract  (11).  Bili- 
rubin . 


Residue  (12)  divided  into  two 
parts. 

Smaller  part  (14)  oxidized  with 
KNO;j  + HNaCCtj  gave  1 1 (P04  and 
H;jS04. 

Larger  part  (13)  washed,  dried  to 
constant  weight  at  100°  C.,  gave  13+ 
per  cent  N. 

A REPORT  ON  FISHES  COLLECTED  IN  MEXICO  ANT)  CENTRAL  AMERICA, 
WITH  NOTES  AND  DESCRIPTIONS  OF  FIVE  NEW  SPECIES. 


By  BARTON  WARRBN  EVERMANN  and  EDMUND  DEE  GOBDSBOROUGH. 


During  the  past  ten  years  Messrs.  E.  W.  Nelson  and  E.  A.  Goldman,  of  the 
Division  of  Biological  Survey,  Department  of  Agriculture,  have  spent  much  time 
in  Mexico  and  Central  America  making  collections  of  mammals  and  Girds.  Inci- 
dental to  their  regular  work  these  gentlemen  have  been  able,  from  time  to  time,  to 
make  several  small  collections  of  fishes,  which  have  been  referred  to  the  Commission 
of  Fish  and  Fisheries  for  identification.  Certain  of  these  collections*  have  already 
been  reported  upon. 

In  April  and  May,  1900,  Mr.  Nelson  and  Mr.  Goldman  made  a considerable 
collection  in  the  State  of  Tabasco  at  Montecristo  and  Teapa.  The  specimens  from 
Montecristo  came  from  the  Rio  Usumaeinta,  and  those  from  Teapa  from  the  Rio 
Teapa.  A few  specimens  were  obtained  at  Frontera,  on  the  Gulf  of  Campeche,  at 
the  mouth  of  the  Rio  Grijalva. 

Montecristo  is  situated  on  the  Rio  Usumaeinta  some  125  miles  from  the  sea. 
This  is  the  largest  river  in  Mexico,  it  being  about  300  yards  from  bank  to  bank  at 
Montecristo.  The  fishes  obtained  at  this  place  were  secured  by  means  of  a seine 
hauled  in  a shallow  cove  behind  a sand  bar.  The  seine  was  hauled  at  night,  and 
several  species  obtained.  The  fishermen  say  that  in  the  daytime  the  fish  remain  in 
the  deeper  water  of  the  river,  coming  out  into  shallow  water  only  during  the  night. 
The  collection  from  this  place  contains  21  specimens,  representing  10  species,  the 
most  interesting  of  which  are  2 specimens  of  a new  species  of  bagre  or  cat-fish 
belonging  to  a genus  ( Conorkynchos ) not  previously  known  to  be  represented  in 
waters  north  of  Brazil,  and  a specimen  of  the  fresh-water  drum  {Ajplodinotus  grun- 
niens). 

Teapa  is  at  the  base  of  the  mountains  on  the  Rio  Teapa,  a tributary  of  the  Rio 
Tapijulapa,  about  125  miles  inland.  Eight  specimens  of  fishes  were  obtained  here, 
representing  6 species,  among  them  a new  species  of  CichJasouia. 

I'n  February  and  March,  1901,  another  interesting  collection  was  made  by  Messrs. 
Nelson  and  Goldman  in  Yucatan,  chiefly  at  Chiehen  Itza,  Progreso,  Puerto  M fir  el  os, 
Mujeres  Island,  and  Cozumel  Island. 

Chiehen  Itza  is  an  interesting  hacienda  in  the  interior  of  Yucatan,  about  110 
miles  from  the  sea.  In  this  region,  as  well  as  elsewhere  over  the  greater  part  of 
Yucatan  and  northern  Campeche,  there  are  no  streams  or  surface  water  of  any  kind, 

* Notes  on  Fishes  collected  by  E.  W.  Nelson  on  the  Tres  Marias  Islands,  and  in  Sinaloa  and  Jalisco,  Mexico,  by  Barton 
Warren  Evermann.  <Proc.  Wash.  Biol.  Soc.,  xii,  pp.  1-3,  1898  (January  27). 

Notes  on  a collection  of  Fishes  from  Mexico,  with  description  of  a new  species  of  Platypoecilus,  by  Barton  A.  Bean. 
<Proe.  U.  S.  N.  M.,  XXI,  1898,  539-542. 


137 


138 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


except  occasional  natural  surface  tanks  in  which  some  water  is  found.  The  entire 
country  is,  however,  underlaid  by  water  approximately  at  sea  level.  At  various 
places  over  the  country  are  natural  wells,  called  “cenotes.”  These  are  natural 
excavations  in  the  limestone  rock,  usually  with  more  or  less  water  at  the  bottom. 
The  distance  from  the  surface  of  the  country  down  to  that  of  the  water  in  the  cenotes 
seems  to  vary  with  the  elevation  of  the  country  above  sea  level.  Near  the  seashore, 
where  the  elevation  of  the  country  is  but  a few  feet  above  the  sea,  the  water  in  the 
cenotes  will  be  only  a few  feet  beneath  the  land  surface.  The  elevation  of  the  coun- 
try increases  toward  the  interior  and  the  depth  at  which  the  water  stands  in  the 
cenotes  becomes  correspondingly  greater.  These  wells  are  usually  approximately 
circular  and  vary  from  a few  feet  to  50  to  75  yards  in  diameter.  The  walls  are  more 
or  less  perpendicular,  and  it  is  difficult  to  reach  the  water;  however,  it  is  usually 
possible  to  find  irregularities  or  steps  in  the  wall,  on  at  least  one  side,  by  means  of 
which  the  water  may  be  reached.  Frequently  the  wells  are  wholly  inaccessible. 
Sometimes  the  well  is  in  a sink  or  cave. 

In  some  wells  the  water  is  quite  shallow,  while  in  others  it  is  of  unknown  depth. 
The  water  usually  appears  green,  as  in  all  limestone  regions,  but  in  some  shallow 
wells  it  seems  to  be  somewhat  muddy.  There  is  usually  a thin  coating  of  fine  dust  on 
the  surface  of  the  water  which  becomes  readily  noticeable  on  throwing  any  object  into 
it.  The  water  is  said  to  be  pure  and  sweet,  but  strongly  charged  with  lime.  There 
is  a belief  prevalent  among  the  natives  that  these  wells  are  connected.  However 
this  may  be,  the  presence  of  fish  in  them  is  a most  interesting  fact  for  which  it  is 
not  easy  to  account.  How  old  the  cenotes  are  can,  of  course,  be  known  only  approxi- 
mately, but  they  have  certainly  been  in  existence  a long  time. 

The  well  at  Chichen  Itza  from  which  fishes  were  obtained  is  nearly  circular, 
probably  60  yards  across,  and  very  deep,  the  water  surface  being  about  90  feet  below 
the  land  surface.  Mr.  Goldman  states  that  he  has  seen  fishes  in  several  different 
wells  on  the  east  coast  near  Puerto  Morelos,  and  that  the  natives  say  there  are  fish 
in  all  the  larger  ones.  The  only  species  thus  far  obtained  from  these  wells  is  ITeros 
urophthcdmus , 7 specimens  of  which  were  obtained  by  Mr.  Nelson  from  the  Chichen 
Itza  cenote.  Mr.  Goldman  thinks  the  fish  he  saw  were  of  this  species.  Mr.  Nelson 
heard  that  cat-fish  occur  in  a well  at  Chichen  Itza,  but  did  not  see  any  specimens. 

According  to  the  natives  the  fish  in  these  cenotes  disappear  at  intervals  and  return 
again.  At  certain  times  they  can  neither  be  seen  nor  caught;  at  other  times  they  may 
not  only  be  caught,  but  are  seen  swimming  about  at  the  surface. 

At  the  time  of  Mr.  Nelson’s  visit,  which  was  during  the  second  week  in  I ebruary, 
none  could  be  caught,  and  the  natives  said  they  were  away.  The  seven  specimens 
obtained  had  been  secured  previously,  perhaps  a year  or  two  before,  and  kept  in  a 
large  masonry  water-tank  which  was  supplied  with  water  by  a wind  pump.  They 
had  been  caught  by  means  of  hook  and  line  baited  with  pieces  of  meat.  They  had 
apparently  bred  in  the  tank,  as  many  very  young  ones  were  seen  swimming  about. 

Another  lot  of  fishes,  chiefly  salt-water  species,  was  obtained  at  Progreso,  which 
is  on  the  north  coast  of  Yucatan,  only  a few  miles  from  Merida,  the  principal  town. 
Some  were  obtained  from  fishermen,  while  others,  chiefly  Cy prinodonts,  were  seined 
in  a small  lagoon;  others  were  gotten  at  Puerto  Morelos,  situated  on  the  east  coast  of 
Yucatan.  Some  five  or  six  species  were  obtained  here  from  the  sea,  and  a lot  of  the 
smaller  species  from  a small  lagoon. 


FISHES  FROM  MEXICO  AND  CENTRAL  AMERICA. 


139 


Mujeres  Island,  about  3 miles  off  the  east  coast  of  Yucatan  and  about  40  miles 
north  of  Cozumel  Island,  is  about  6 miles  long-  and  one-fourth  to  H miles  wide.  It 
is  separated  from  the  mainland  by  shallow  water,  and  is  headquarters  for  the  fisher- 
men of  this  coast.  The  fishes  obtained  here  came  from  a small  salt-water  lagoon. 

At  Cozumel  Island,  some  8 to  10  miles  off  the  east  coast  of  Yucatan  and  about 
40  miles  south  of  Mujeres  Island,  only  a few  salt-water  fishes  were  obtained. 

Various  other  small  collections  from  Mexico  have  come  into  our  hands  from  time 
to  time,  which  we  have  studied  in  connection  with  the  preparation  of  this  paper. 
There  is,  first,  a collection  of  50  specimens  representing  5 species  obtained  b}r  Mr. 
Nelson  in  July  and  August,  1899,  from  the  Rio  Piedras  Verdes  and  Lake  Santa  Maria, 
in  Chihuahua,  and  5 specimens  representing  4 species  collected  at  the  same  time  in  the 
Rio  Piedras  Verdes  by  Prof.  C.  H.  Tyler  Townsend  and  Mr.  C.  M.  Barber,  of  Mesilla 
Park,  N.  Mex.  We  have  also  2 species  of  Ghirostoma  obtained  in  the  market  at 
Guadalajara  in  1899,  3 species  gotten  in  Lake  Lerma  at  Lerma,  State  of  Mexico,  in 
1901,  and  one  species  bought  in  the  market  at  Yau tepee.  State  of  Morelos,  in  1901, 
all  from  Dr.  J.  N.  Rose.  Then  there  are  a few  specimens  representing  4 species 
which  we  have  received  through  the  kindness  of  Mr.  Charles  C.  Deam,  of  Bluffton, 
Ind.,  who  collected  them  in  December,  1898,  at  Salina  Cruz,  Gulf  of  Tehuantepec; 
and  lastly,  2 specimens  of  the  very  interesting  species  Anableps  dovii , obtained  by 
Mr.  Nelson  in  April,  1896,  from  the  Tehuantepec  River  at  Tehuantepec  City. 

All  of  these  collections  are  reported  upon  in  the  present  paper. 

The  nomenclature  and  sequence  of  species  in  the  following  annotated  list  is  that 
of  Jordan  & Evermann’s  Fishes  of  North  and  Middle  America:* 

1.  Rhinobatus  lentig-inosus  Garman.  Guitarro. 

One  specimen,  18.5  inches  iong,  from  Progreso,  Yucatan,  February  28,  1901.  This  is  the  most 
southern  record  for  the  species. 

2.  Lepisosteus  tropicus  (Gill).  Tropical  Gar  Pike. 

One  specimen,  20  inches  long,  from  Montecristo.  Head  3.5;  depth  9;  eye  10.5;  snout  1.75;  lower 
jaw  2;  interorbital  4;  D.  5;  A.  7;  Y.  6;  P.  12;  scales  53,  17  rows  from  base  of  ventral  upward  and 
forward  to  and  including  median  dorsal  row.  Body  rather  short  and  stout;  snout  short  and  broad,  its 
length  less  than  half  that  of  head;  upper  jaw  the  longer;  teeth  sharp,  those  of  upper  jaw  in  2 lateral 
rows;  enlarged  teeth  of  lower  jaw  in  one  row;  eye  small;  fins  moderate,  origin  of  dorsal  slightly  behind 
that  of  anal;  first  dorsal  ray  about  1.5  in  snout,  with  numerous  small,  sharp,  supporting  spines  in  2 
rows  on  each  side;  similar  supporting  spines  on  all  the  fins;  anal  high,  its  longest  ray  1.3  in  snout. 
Color  in  alcohol,  leaden  silvery  or  plumbeous  above,  white  on  belly;  no  spots  on  body  except  a large 
one  at  base  of  caudal  fin  and  2 or  3 smaller  indistinct  ones  in  front  of  it;  rays  of  dorsal,  caudal,  and 
anal  dusky,  the  membranes  pale;  pectorals  and  ventrals  pale. 

3.  Felichthys  marinus  (Mitchill).  Gaff-topsail;  Sea  Cat-fish. 

Two  specimens,  10  and  12.75  inches  long,  from  Progreso.  Head  3.5  and  3.86;  depth  4;  eye  5; 
snout425;  interorbital  1.5;  D.  i,  7;  A.  ii,  20or  21.  The  head  is  larger  and  the  anal  has  2 or  3 fewer  rays 
than  those  heretofore  recorded. 

4.  Galeichthys  felis  (Linnaeus).  Sea  Cal-fisli. 

Two  specimens,  9.5  and  10  inches  long,  from  Progreso.  Head  3.5;  depth  5.5;  eye  6;  snout  3; 
interorbital  2.25;  D.  i,  7;  A.  13  or  14;  maxillary  barbels  reaching  base  of  pectoral. 

*The  Fishes  of  North  and  Middle  America:  A Descriptive  Catalogue  of  the  Species  of  Fish-iike  Vertebrates  found  in 
the  Waters  of  North  America,  north  of  the  Isthmus  of  Panama,  by  David  Starr  Jordan  and  Barton  Warren  Evermann; 
issued  as  Bulletin  No.  47,  U.S.N.M.,  4 vols.,  pp.  i-xxiv-|-1-1240,  1896;  i-xxx+1241-2183,  1898;  i-xxiv+2183a-3136  1898;  and 
l-ci +3137-3313,  plates  i-cccxcii,  1900. 


140 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


5.  Conorhynchos  nelsoni,  new  species.  Bay  re. 


Type,  No.  50001,  U.S.N.M.,  a male,  16  inches  long,  collected  May  8,  1900,  by  E.  W.  Nelson  and 


E.  A.  Goldman,  in  the  Rio  Usumacinta,  Montecristo,  Yucatan.  Cotype,  No.  2382,  U.  S.  F.  C.  reserve 
series,  a male  13.5  inches  long,  collected  at  same  time  and  place. 

Head  3.2;  depth  5;  eye  8;  snout  2.1;  interorbital  3;  D.  i,  6;  A.  17;  gillrakers  10  + 4,  short  and 
weak,  longest  scarcely  greater  than  diameter  of  pupil;  gill-arches  very  convex.  Body  nearly  terete, 
gradually  tapering  and  becoming  somewhat  compressed  posteriorly;  width  above  pectorals  not  quite 
equal  to  depth;  head  conic,  about  as  wide  as  deep  at  any  point,  a granular  saddle  over  occipital  region 
extending  anteriorly  to  posterior  portion  of  eye;  a small  granular  saddle  at  base  of  dorsal  in  front, 
posterior  edge  concave;  fontanelle  long  and  narrow,  beginning  air  eye’s  diameter  in  front  of  eye  and 
extending  an  equal  distance  behind  eye,  a narrow  transverse  bridge  equal  to  diameter  of  pupil 
just  back  of  posterior  border  of  eye;  snout  very  long,  pointed;  mouth  small,  nearly  circular,  upper  jaw 
the  longer;  barbels  all  very  short;  maxillary  barbel  not  nearly  reaching  eye,  its  length  about  2 in 
snout;  other  barbels  shorter;  no  teeth  on  vomer  and  palatines;  teeth  on  upper  jaw  confluent  in  one 
broad  patch,  concave  posteriorly;  teeth  of  lower  jaw  very  weak;  buccal  cavity  very  large;  roof  of 
mouth  dome-shaped;  eye  high,  its  lower  edge  on  a line  with  upper  part  of  gill-opening,  its  distance 
from  end  of  snout  equal  to  distance  from  center  of  pupil  to  gill-opening;  origin  of  dorsal  midway 


Fig.  1. — Conorhynchos  nelsoni,  new  species.  The  smaller  figure  is  nearly  natural  size,  the  other  one-third  natural  size. 

between  tip  of  snout  and  posterior  base  of  anal;  dorsal  spine  of  moderate  strength,  2.16  in  head, 
slightly  granulated  along  its  lower  front  for  half  its  length,  upper  posterior  third  roughly  serrated ; the 
first,  soft  dorsal  ray  about  as  high  as  body;  distance  between  dorsal  and  adipose  fins  1.4  in  head;  adipose 
fin  large,  its  height  2.25  in  that  of  dorsal  fin,  its  base  equal  to  that  of  soft  portion  of  dorsal;  caudal 
deeply  forked,  the  upper  lobe  the  longer,  equal  to  snout  and  eye;  ventral  rays  shorter  than  pectoral 
rays;  pectoral  fin  moderate,  its  longest  ray  more  than  half  head,  its  spine  stouter  than  dorsal,  2.5  in 
head,  its  posterior  edge  very  strongly  serrate;  anal  large,  its  longest  ray  2.75  in  head. 

General  color  in  alcohol,  light,  brown  above  lateral  line,  with  bluish  reflections;  silvery  below, 
becoming  pale  on  belly;  dorsal  pale  dusky,  spine  darker  in  front;  adipose  fin  color  of  its  dorsal  region; 
caudal  pale  with  some  indications  of  yellow  at  its  base  and  sides,  inner  edge  of  lobes  tipped  with 
black;  anal  pale;  ventrals  pale,  slightly  dusky  inside;  pectoral  pale,  dusky  on  inner  side. 

When  the  type  specimen  was  obtained  by  Mr.  Nelson  there  were  found  in  its  mouth  39  well- 
developed  eggs.  The  cotype,  also  a male,  contained  one  egg  in  its  mouth. 

This  habit  of  certain  cat-fishes  of  carrying  their  eggs  in  the  mouth  is  a curious  and  very  interesting 
one,  a habit  about  which  more  or  less  has  been  known  for  many  years. 

The  first  and  most  complete  account  of  this  habit  of  cat-fishes  carrying  their  eggs  in  their  mouths 
is  that  by  Dr.  Jeffries  Wyman,  which  he  communicated  to  the  Boston  Society  of  Natural  History  at  its 


FISHES  FROM  MEXICO  AND  CENTRAL  AMERICA. 


141 


meeting  of  September  15,  1857.  In  1859,  in  a paper  entitled  “On  some  unusual  modes  of  gestation,”* 
Dr.  Wyman  published  a full  account  of  his  observations  as  follows: 

“Among  the  Siluroid  fishes  of  Guiana  there  are  several  species  which,  at  certain  seasons  of  the 
year,  have  their  mouths  and  branchial  cavities  tilled  either  with  eggs  or  young,  and,  as  is  believed,  for  the 
purpose  of  incubation.  My  attention  was  first  called  to  this  singular  habit  by  the  late  Dr.  Francis  W. 
Cragin,  formerly  United  States  consul  at  Paramaribo,  Surinam.  In  a letter  dated  August,  1854,  he  says: 

“ ‘The  eggs  you  will  receive  are  from  another  fish.  The  different  fishermen  have  repeatedly 
assured  me  that  these  eggs  in  their  nearly  mature  state  are  carried  in  the  mouths  of  the  parent  till 
:i  the  young  are  relieved  by  the  bursting  of  the  sac.  Do  you  either  know  or  believe  this  to  be  so,  and,  if 
possible,  where  are  the  eggs  conceived  and  how  do  they  get  into  the  mouth?’ 

“In  the  month  of  April,  1857,  on  visiting  the  market  of  Paramaribo,  I found  that  this  statement, 
which  at  first  seemed  to  be  very  improbable,  was  correct  as  to  the  existence  of  eggs  in  the  mouths  of 
several  species  of  fish.  In  a tray  of  fish  which  a negro  woman  offered  for  sale,  I found  the  mouths  of 
several  filled  with  either  eggs  or  young,  and  subsequently  an  abundance  of  opportunities  occurred  for 
repeating  the  observation.  The  kinds  most  commonly  known  to  the  colonists,  especially  to  the 
negroes,  ar ejara-bakka,  njinge-njinge,  koepra,  makrede,  and  one  or  two  others,  all  belonging  either  to 
the  genus  Bagrus  or  one  nearly  allied  to  it.  The  first  two  are  quite  common  in  the  market  and  I have 
seen  many  specimens  of  them;  for  the  last  two  I have  the  authority  of  negro  fishermen  but  have  never 
seen  them  myself.  The  eggs  in  my  collection  are  of  three  different  sizes,  indicating  so  many  species, 
one  of  the  three  having  been  brought  to  me  without  the  fish  from  which  they  were  taken. 

“The  eggs  become  quite  large  before  they  leave  the  ovaries,  and  are  arranged  in  three  zones  corre- 
sponding to  three  successive  broods,  and  probably  to  be  discharged  in  three  successive  years;  the 
mature  eggs  of  a jara-bakka  18  inches  long  measure  three-fourths  of  an  inch  in  diameter;  those  of  the 
second  zone,  one-fourth;  and  those  of  the  third  are  very  minute,  about  one-sixteenth  of  an  inch. 

“A  careful  examination  of  eight  specimens  of  njinge-njinge  about  9 inches  long  gave  the  following 
i results. 


“ The  eggs  in  all  instances  were  carried  in  the  mouths  of  the  males.  This  protection,  or  gestation 
of  the  eggs  by  the  males,  corresponds  with  what  has  been  long  noticed  with  regard  to  other  fishes,  as, 
for  example,  Syngnathus,  where  the  marsupial  pouch  for  the  eggs  or  young  is  found  in  the  males  only, 
and  Gasterosteus,  where  the  male  constructs  the  nest  and  protects  the  eggs  during  incubation  from  the 
voracity  of  the  females. 

“ In  some  individuals  the  eggs  had  been  recently  laid,  in  others  they  were  hatched  and  the  foetus 
had  grown  at  the  expense  of  some  other  food  than  that  derived  from  the  yolk,  as  this  last  was  not 
proportionally  diminished  in  size,  and  the  foetus  weighed  more  than  the  undeveloped  egg.  The  num- 
ber of  eggs  contained  in  the  mouth  was  between  twenty  and  thirty.  The  mouth  and  branchial  cavity 
were  very  much  distended,  rounding  out  and  distorting  the  whole  hyoid  and  branchiostegal  region. 
Some  of  the  eggs  even  partially  protruded  from  the  mouth.  The  ova  were  not  bruised  or  torn  as  if 
they  had  been  bitten  or  forcibly  held  by  the  teeth.  In  many  instances  the  foetuses  were  still  alive, 
though  the  parent  had  been  dead  for  many  hours. 

“ No  young  or  eggs  were  found  in  the  stomach,  although  the  mouth  was  crammed  to  its  fullest 
capacity. 

“The  above  observations  apply  to  njinge-njinge.  With  regard  to  jarra-bakka,  I had  but  few 
opportunities  for  dissection,  but  in  several  instances  the  same  conditions  of  the  eggs  were  noticed  as 
stated  above;  and  in  one  instance,  besides  some  nearly  mature  foetuses  contained  in  the  mouth,  two  or 
three  were  squeezed  apparently  from  the  stomach,  but  not  bearing  any  marks  of  violence  or  of  the 
action  of  the  gastric  fluid.  It  is  probable  that  these  found  their  way  into  that  last  cavity  after  death, 
in  consequence  of  the  relaxation  of  the  sphincter  which  separates  the  cavities  of  the  mouth  and  the 
stomach.  These  facts  lead  to  the  conclusion  that  this  is  a mouth  gestation,  as  the  eggs  are  found  there 
in  all  stages  of  development,  and  even  for  some  time  after  they  are  hatched. 

' “The  question  will  be  very  naturally  asked,  how  under  such  circumstances  these  fishes  are  able 
to  secure  and  swallow  their  food.  I have  made  no  observations  bearing  upon  such  a question.  Unless 
the  food  consists  of  very  minute  particles  it  would  seem  necessary  that  during  the  time  of  feeding  the 
eggs  should  be  disgorged.  If  this  supposition  be  correct,  it  would  give  a very  probable  explanation  of 
the  only  fact  which  might  be  considered  at  variance  with  the  conclusion  stated  above,  viz,  that  we 

*Am.  Jour.  Science  and  Arts,  second  series,  xxvil,  May,  1859,  5-13.  This  paper  was  communicated  to  the  Boston 
Society  of  Natural  History  September  15,  1857. 


142 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


have  in  these  fishes  a mouth  gestation.  In  the  mass  of  eggs  with  which  the  mouth  is  filled  I have 
occasionally  found  the  eggs,  rarely  more  than  one  or  two,  of  another  species.  The  only  way  in  which 
their  presence  may  be  accounted  for,  it  seems  to  me,  is  by  the  supposition  that  while  feeding  the  eggs 
are  disgorged,  and  as  these  fishes  are  gregarious  in  their  habits,  when  the  ova  are  recovered  the  stray 
egg  of  another  species  may  be  introduced  into  the  mouth  among  those  which  naturally  belong  there.” 

One  of  the  earliest  accounts  of  this  curious  habit  which  we  have  seen  is  that  by  Dr.  Gunther*  in 
which  he  says,  referring  to  specimens  of  Arbus  fissus  from  Cayenne  received  from  Prof.  R.  Owen: 

“These  specimens  having  had  the  cavity  of  the  mouth  and  of  the  gills  extended  in  an  extraordi- 
nary manner,  I was  induced  to  examine  the  cause  of  it,  when,  to  my  great  surprise,  I found  them  filled 
with  about  twenty  eggs,  rather  larger  than  an  ordinary  pea,  perfectly  uninjured,  and  with  the  embryos 
in  a forward  state  of  development.  The  specimens  are  males,  from  6 to  7 inches  long,  and  in  each  the 
stomach  was  almost  empty. 

“Although  the  eggs  might  have  been  put  into  the  mouth  of  the  fish  by  their  captor,  this  does  not 
appear  probable.  On  the  other  hand,  it  is  a well-known  fact  that  the  American  Siluroids  take  care  of 
their  progeny  in  various  ways;  and  I have  no  doubt  that  in  this  species  and  in  its  allies  the  males  carry 
the  eggs  in  their  mouths,  depositing  them  in  places  of  safety,  and  removing  them  when  they  fear  the 
approach  of  danger  or  disturbance.” 

The  following  extract  is  from  an  interesting  article  “On  the  air-breathing  fish  of  Ceylon”  by 
Rev.  Principal  Boake,  published  in  the  Journal  of  the  Ceylon  Branch  of  the  Royal  Asiatic  Society 
for  1865-66  (1866)  pages  128-142,  the  extract  occupying  pages  138-142: 

“ Having  occasion  to  visit  Caltura  periodically,  I was  told  on  one  of  my  visits  of  a fish  which  is 
caught  at  certain  seasons  in  very  large  quantities,  and  which  has  the  singular  habit,  when  held  up  by 
the  tail,  of  emitting  from  the  mouth  a quantity  of  eggs.  So  great  is  the  number  thus  emitted  that 
when  many  fish  are  captured  the  eggs  are  eagerly  collected  from  the  bottoms  of  the  boats  and  carried 
away  to  be  fried,  and  are  greatly  relished  by  the  villagers  when  so  prepared,  while  the  fish  themselves, 
being  too  numerous  to  be  consumed  in  their  fresh  state,  are  salted  and  dried,  and  often  form  an 
ingredient  in  the  curries  which  appear  at  our  tables. 

“The  description  which  I received  of  the  manner  in  which  the  eggs  are  procured  seemed  to  point 
to  the  conclusion,  universally  believed  by  the  natives,  that  the  regular  mode  of  bringing  forth  their 
young  is,  in  the  case  of  these  fish,  through  the  mouth;  a fact  which  seemed  to  me  to  be  so  singular 
that  I determined  to  stay  a day  or  two  longer  at  Caltura  when  I next  visited  it,  for  the  purpose  ol 
investigating  the  circumstances  which  seemed  to  indicate  so  singular  a conclusion. 

“The  result  of  my  investigation  was,  as  might  have  been  expected,  that  I ascertained  that  the 
circumstances  had  not  been  fully  or  accurately  observed,  and  consequently  that  the  conclusion  to  which 
they  pointed  was  erroneous;  but  I,  at  the  same  time,  satisfied  myself  of  a fact  in  the  natural  history  of 
those  fish,  which  will  perhaps  be  regarded  as  but  little  less  extraordinary  than  their  novel  mode  of 
parturition  would  have  been,  if  it  had  been  established  as  true,  and  which,  as  Ceylon  has  acquired 
some  notoriety  for  marvelous  stories  respecting  its  zoology,  I should  feel  some  hesitation  in  stating, 
were  it  not  that,  in  addition  to  the  abundance  of  unexceptionable  testimony,  I was  able  to  procure 
specimens  illustrating  the  whole  extraordinary  process. 

“These  fish  produce  their  eggs  in  the  first  instance  very  much  in  the  same  manner  as  other 
inhabitants  of  the  waters  do,  with  this  exception,  that  the  eggs  seem  to  come  to  maturity  in  batches 
of  ten  or  twelve.  Bottle  No.  1 will  illustrate  this.  It  contains  the  roe  of  one  out  of  a large  number  of 
fish  that  I examined.  You  will  perceive  that,  besides  eight  or  ten  large  eggs,  there  is  a whitish  mass, 
which,  on  being  closely  examined,  will  be  found  to  consist  of  other  eggs  of  very  minute  size;  the  differ- 
ence in  size  between  those  which  are  ready  for  emission  and  the  others  which  are  immature  being 
very  remarkable.  The  strange  fact,  however,  is  that  the  large  eggs  on  being  emitted  are  immediately 
taken  up,  either  by  the  fish  that  has  laid  them  or  by  another  of  the  same  species,  and,  not  swallowed, 
but  kept  in  the  mouth  until  they  are  hatched  and  the  fry  are  able  to  take  care  of  themselves,  a period 
of  some  weeks,  during  which  it  is  impossible  that  the  fish,  which  is  swimming  about  with  so  extraor- 
dinary a mouthful,  can  swallow  any  food  except  such  small  nutritious  particles  as  may  be  floating 
about  in  the  water.  When  these  fish  first  make  their  appearance  at  Caltura,  in  the  beginning  of  the 


* Catalogue  of  the  Fishes  in  the  British  Museum,  by  Albert  Gunther,  v,  1864,  p.  173. 


FISHES  FROM  MEXICO  AND  CENTRAL  AMERICA. 


143 


season,  they  are  said  to  be  so  fat  that  the  curry  made  with  them  resembles  that  made  with  pork;  but 
after  swimming  about  for  a few  days,  with  their  mouths  full  of  eggs,  they  become  dry  and  insipid.  In 
bottle  No.  2 you  will  see  thirteen  eggs,  which  I shook  out  with  my  own  hands  from  the  mouth  of  a fish 
8 or  9 inches  long,  each  egg  being  about  the  size  of  a small  grape.  Preserved  in  that  manner,  viz, 
in  glycerin,  the  eggs  retain  their  natural  color  and  transparency,  whereas  in  spirit  they  soon  become 
opaque.  In  the  same  bottle  are  some  other  eggs  which  were  obtained  by  pressure,  and  which  present 
the  same  remarkable  difference  in  size  as  those  in  No.  1.  You  will  perceive  that  these  latter  are  per- 
fectly transparent,  the  smaller  ones  being  scarcely  visible,  whereas  those  which  were  shaken  out  of  the 
mouth  of  the  fish  contain  a perfectly  formed  embryo  and  have  a system  of  blood  vessels  spreading 
over  their  surface  on  one  side.  In  bottle  No.  3 you  will  see  one  of  the  eggs  in  a more  advanced  stage 
of  development.  Both  the  head  and  tail  of  the  embryo  have  escaped  from  the  egg,  which,  very  little 
diminished  in  size,  remains  appended  to  the  middle  of  the  fish,  giving  it  a very  distorted  appearance. 

1 ■ This  adherence  of  the  egg  to  the  young  fish  after  it  has  been  hatched  is  not  peculiar  to  this 
species.  The  same  thing  occurs  in  the  case  of  the  salmon  fry,  which  are  being  produced,  under  the 
auspices  of  Mr.  Buekland  and  other  eminent  pisciculturists,  in  such  quantities  as  to  give  us  some  grounds 
for  hoping  that  that  delicious  fish  may  become  again  so  common  in  the  rivers  of  England  that  it  shall 
no  longer  be  a luxury  accessible  only  to  the  wealthy,  and  that  farm  laborers  may  again,  as  is  said 
to  have  been  formerly  the  case  in  the  neighborhood  of  Newcastle,  find  it  necessary  to  stipulate  in 
their  engagements  with  their  employers  that  they  shall  not  be  fed  on  salmon  on  more  than  two  days 
in  the  week. 

“This  is  the  only  specimen  I was  able  to  procure  in  that  stage  of  development,  the  time  not 
having  then  arrived  for  the  general  hatching  of  the  eggs;  but  an  intelligent  friend,  who  is  at  Caltura  at 
present,  has  promised  to  procure  me  other  specimens,  which  will,  I trust,  enable  me  to  ascertain  a 
fact  which  I am  inclined  to  believe,  although  I am  not  as  yet  prepared  to  assert  it  positively,  namely, 
that  the  egg  so  appended  is,  in  fact,  the  stomach  of  the  animal  in  the  state  of  enormous  distention, 
and  that,  as  its  contents  are  absorbed  while  the  other  parts  of  the  fish  grow  in  size,  it  gradually 
assumes  a more  natural  proportion  to  the  rest  of  the  body.  To  this  conclusion  I am  led  by  observing 
the  system  of  blood  vessels,  which  is  perceptible  on  the  side  of  the  egg  opposite  the  embryo,  and  which 
certainly  looks  as  if  it  was  intended  to  form  part  of  the  organization  of  the  future  fish.  I have  since 
ascertained,  by  the  aid  of  William  Ondaatje,  esq.,  assistant  colonial  surgeon,  that  the  fish  which  carry 
the  eggs,  and  subsequently  the  young  fry,  for  so  long  a time  in  their  mouths,  are  all  males. 

“The  name  by  which  these  fish  are  known  to  the  natives  is  Anguluwa.  They  are  regarded  by 
them  as  all  belonging  to  the  same  species,  nor  would  an  unscientific  observer  be  likely  to  discover  any 
specific  difference  between  any  of  the  specimens  that  I have  seen;  but  having  sent  several  specimens 
to  F.  Layard,  esq.,  I received  a letter  from  him  in  August  last,  in  which  he  informed  me  that  he  had 
submitted  the  specimens  which  I sent  him  to  Dr.  Gunther,  of  the  British  Museum,  who  had  ascertained 
that  they  belong  to  two  distinct  species,  both  new,  of  the  genus  Arius.  Mr.  Layard  further  tells  me 
that  the  carrying  of  the  ova  in  the  mouth  is  not  so  novel  a phenomenon  as  I supposed  it  to  be,  Dr. 
Gunther  having  described  that  peculiarity  in  the  propagation  of  the  genus  Arius  several  years  ago, 
from  South  American  species.” 

It  appears  that  the  Rev.  Bancroft  Boake  sent  some  of  his  specimens  to  the  botanist,  Dr.  Greville, 
who  in  turn  transmitted  them  to  William  Turner,  who  published  the  following  account*  concerning 
them: 

“The  various  plans  resorted  to  by  fish  of  depositing  their  ova,  and  protecting  them  during  the 
period  of  incubation,  have  not  infrequently  attracted  the  attention  of  naturalists.  One  of  the  most 
curious  and  interesting  observations  made  on  this  subject  was  brought  before  the  Boston  Society  of 
Natural  History  about  nine  years  ago,  by  Dr.  Jeffries  Wyman.  He  states!  that  when  walking  through 
the  market  of  Paramaribo,  in  Dutch  Guyana,  he  found  the  mouths  of  several  species  of  Siluroid  fish 
belonging  to  the  genus  Bagrus,  or  to  one  closely  allied,  distended  with  ova,  sometimes  between  twenty 
and  thirty  in  number.  The  eggs  were  in  various  stages  of  development,  some  recently  deposited, 

*On  a remarkable  mode  of  gestation  in  an  undescribed  species  of  Arius  (A.  boakcii) , by  William  Turner,  M.  B. 
(Lond.),  F.R.  S.E.,  senior  demonstrator  of  anatomy,  University  of  Edinburgh.  <Journ.  Anat.  and  Phys.,  vol.  I,  1867, 
pp.  78-82.  Beau  before  the  British  Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science,  August  23,  1866. 

f Proceeding-'  of  Boston  Society  of  Natural  History,  Sept.  15,  1857,  and  American  Journal  of  Science,  vol.  lxxvi,  1859. 


144 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


others  with  the  embryo  very  considerably  advanced.  The  eggs  were  always  in  the  mouths  of  males, 
and  were  not  bruised,  and  none  was  found  in  the  stomach.  In  the  fifth  volume  of  his  Catalogue  of 
Fishes  in  the  British  Museum*  Dr.  Gunther  relates  that,  whilst  examining  some  specimens  of  Arius 
fissus  from  Cayenne,  presented  to  the  Museum  by  Professor  Owen,  he  was  surprised  to  find  their 
mouths  and  gill  chambers  distended  with  about  twenty  eggs  rather  larger  than  an  ordinary  pea.  The 
eggs  were  perfectly  uninjured,  and  the  embryos  in  a forward  state  of  development.  These  specimens 
were  also  males. 

“Again,  Professor  Agassiz,  writing  from  the  river  Amazon,  September  22,  J865,f  states  that  he  had 
observed  a species  of  Geophagus,  G.  pedroinus,  a fish  belonging  to  the  family  Chromidse,  in  which  the 
mouth  and  a pocket-like  pouch,  formed  by  the  superior  pharyngians,  contained  a number  of  ova.  How 
the  eggs  get  into  the  mouth  he  is  quite  ignorant,  but  there  they  remain  until  the  young  are  in  a fit  state 
to  take  care  of  themselves.  In  all  the  above  cases  the  fish  are  denizens  of  the  South  American  Continent, 
and,  except  the  sjiecies  described  by  Agassiz,  belong  to  the  Siluroid  family. 

“The  observations  to  which  I shall  now  direct  attention  prove  that  this  remarkable  egg-carrying 
habit  is  not  confined  to  certain  species  of  fish  dwelling  in  the  New  World,  but  is  shared  by  some  of  the 
fish  of  the  Old  World  also.  In  the  month  of  April  of  the  present  year  I received  for  examination,  from 
the  eminent  botanist,  the  late  Dr.  Greville,  some  specimens  of  Siluroid  fish,  which  had  been  sent  him 
by  the  Rev.  Bancroft  Boake,  of  Ceylon.  The  specimens  were  accompanied  by  a copy  of  the  literary 
supplement  to  the  Ceylon  Examiner,  to  which  Mr.  Boake  had  communicated  ‘An  account  (dated  April 
20,  1865)  of  some  peculiarities  in  the  habits  of  certain  species  of  fish  that  are  found  in  the  waters  of 
Ceylon.’  The  most  interesting  portion  of  this  narrative  consists  of  an  account  of  the  habit  of  a fish 
caught  at  Caltura,  in  that  island.  When  held  up  by  the  tail  it  emits  from  the  mouth  a quantity  of 
eggs,  which,  when  many  fish  are  captured,  are  fried  and  used  for  food  by  the  natives.  The  fishermen 
suppose  that  the  regular  mode  of  bringing  forth  the  young  is  through  the  mouth,  but  Mr.  Boake 
satisfied  himself  that  the  fish  produce  their  eggs  in  the  ordinary  way,  and  that  after  being  deposited 
they  are  immediately  taken  into  the  mouth,  either  by  the  fish  that  has  laid  them  or  by  another  of  the 
same  species,  where  they  are  kept  until  they  are  hatched. 

‘ ‘ The  specimens  given  to  me  were  two  males  and  one  female.  The  female  had  no  ova  in  her 
mouth;  but  from  the  appearance  of  the  abdomen  it  was  evident  that  the  ovaries  were  distended;  and 
on  opening  into  the  cavity  I found  a large  sac-like  ovary  on  each  side  of  the  middle  line.  Each  ovary 
measured  21  inches  in  length  and  extended  forward  almost  as  far  as  the  pectoral  fin,  where  it  formed  a 
rounded  free  end,  whilst  posteriorly  it  was  somewhat  constricted,  and  opened  by  an  orifice  common  to 
it  and  its  fellow  immediately  behind  the  anus.  The  ovisac  contained  a very  large  number  of  eggs  in 
various  stages  of  growth.  Some  were  like  minute  granules,  others,  and  these  were  very  numerous, 
like  medium-sized  shot,  whilst  a third  set  equaled  in  size  grapes  or  small  cherries  and  very  materially 
exceeded  therefore  the  size  usually  attained  by  the  eggs  of  osseous  fish.  These  last,  only  six  in  number 
in  each  ovary,  had  evidently  almost  reached  the  full  period  of  intraovarian  growth.  Each  ovum 
was  attached  to  the  inner  wall  of  the  ovisac  by  an  independent  pedicle,  the  atrophy  of  which  would 
necessarily  precede  the  discharge  of  the  egg. 

“The  mouth  and  branchial  chamber  of  one  of  the  male  fish  were  distended  with  10  ova  as  large 
as  those  found  in  the  ovarium,  which  were  so  closely  packed  together  that  water,  or  minute  particles 
of  food,  could  only  pass  backward  to  the  gills  or  the  oesophagus  by  filtering  through  the  narrow 
interspaces  between  the  eggs.  In  each  ovum  the  development  of  the  embryo  had  advanced  so  far 
that  the  eyes,  chorda  dorsalis,  and  cerebro-spinal  nervous  axis  could  without  difficulty  be  distinguished, 
and  from  the  ventral  surface  of  the  embryo  numerous  vessels  were  seen  ramifying  over  the  surface  of 
the  yelk.  The  embryos  measured  from  one-half  to  seven-tenths  of  an  inch  in  length.  Only  1 of  the  10 
eggs  had  sustained  any  injury,  its  investing  membrane  being  ruptured,  so  that  a portion  of  its  contents 
had  escaped.  It  is  interesting  to  note  that  the  palatine  teeth  of  the  fish  are  granular,  so  that  their 
form  is  well  adapted  for  permitting  the  retention  of  the  ova  in  the  mouth  with  a minimum  of  injury. 

“Mr.  Boake’s  observations  show  that  the  eggs  are  not  placed  in  the  mouths  of  the  fish  by  the 
natives  for  purposes  of  deception,  but  that  the  instinct  of  the  animal  prompts  it  to  take  them  into  that 
cavity;  and  it  is,  as  these  specimens  show,  by  the  male,  and  not  by  the  female,  that  this  act  is  performed. 
In  this  respect  this  Cingalese  fish  agrees  with  those  already  described  by  Drs.  Wyman  and  Gunther. 


* London,  1864. 


f Quarterly  Journal  of  Science,  p.  302,  April,  1866. 


FISHES  FROM  MEXICO  AND  CENTRAL  AMERICA. 


145 


“Opinions  may  differ  as  to  the  reason  of  this  remarkable  habit.  It  may  be  supposed  that  the 
male  uses  the  eggs  for  food,  or  that  he  takes  them  into  his  mouth  for  temporary  protection,  discharging 
them  again  when  the  danger  no  longer  exists,  or  that  their  presence  in  that  cavity  is  connected  with  the 
process  of  incubation.  The  last  of  these  suppositions  seems  to  me  most  probable,  for  the  habit  of 
distending  the  mouth  with  eggs  appears  to  be  so  common  in  this  species  of  fish  that  it  is  a matter  of 
ordinary  observation  amongst  the  natives.  The  eggs  are  not  torn  or  bruised,  as  they  would  have  been  if 
subjected  to  the  process  of  mastication,  the  stomach  does  not  contain  any  fragments,  and  in  each  ovum 
is  situated  an  embryo  in  a more  or  less  advanced  stage  of  development.  Again,  naturalists  are 
acquainted  with  other  fish  which  play  a part  in  the  incubation  of  their  ova;  the  male  pipe-fish,  the 
male  Hippocampus,  and  the  Aspredo  Ixvis,  described  by  Wyman,  possess  special  arrangements  for 
receiving  and  carrying  about  the  eggs  until  they  are  hatched.  A close  relation  apparent!  y exists 
between  the  number  of  eggs  which  come  to  maturity  at  a given  time  and  the  number  which  the  male 
can  carry  in  his  mouth.  In  the  female  I examined,  12  eggs  are  evidently  reaching  their  full  growth, 
whilst  the  male  has  10  in  his  mouth;  and  from  another  specimen  examined  by  Mr.  Boake  as  many  as 
13  were  shaken  out.  This  is  a smaller  number  than  was  observed  by  Drs.  Wyman  and  Gunther  in 
their  Siluroids,  but  the  eggs  are  in  this  species  of  much  larger  size.  As  the  distended  condition  of  the 
mouth  would  necessarily  materially  interfere  with  the  reception  of  food  by  the  male  fish,  it  may  be  a 
question  if  he  does  not  eject  them  during  feeding,  or  perhaps  during  the  time  he  plays  the  part  of  a dry 
nurse  the  quantity  of  food  he  takes  may  be  almost  nil.” 

It  also  appears  that  the  Rev.  Mr.  Boake  sent  some  of  his  specimens  to  F.  Layard,  esq.,  by  whom 
they  were  submitted  to  Dr.  Gunther,  who  wrote  concerning  them:* 

“A  small  collection  of  fresh -water  fishes,  made  by  the  Rev.  Bancroft  Boake  in  Ceylon,  and  kindly 
submitted  to  my  examination  by  F.  Layard,  esq.,  contained  two  Siluroid  fishes  of  the  genus  Arius, 
which  are  of  great  interest,  inasmuch  as  they  prove  that  the  peculiar  habit  which  I have  described  in 
an  American  species,  A.  fissus  (Fish,  v,  p.  173),  viz,  the  mode  in  which  the  parent  fish  takes  care  of 
its  progeny,  is  not  confined  to  South  American  species,  but  exists  also  in  the  East  Indian  ones.  The 
mature  ova  are  of  the  same  large  size  in  all  these  fish,  and  in  all  it  is  the  male  which  carries  them  in 
the  spacious  cavity  of  its  mouth.  According  to  Mr.  Boake,  who  has  published  an  account  of  the  habits 
of  these  fish,  they  are  called  Angaluwa.” 

In  Dr.  Day’s  volume  on  the  fishes  of  British  India,)'  we  find  the  following  paragraph  concerning 
this  curious  habit: 

“The  breeding  of  these  fishes  is  peculiar  and  deserves  attention.  The  eggs  of  Arius  are  large, 
averaging  about  0.5  to  0.6  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  and  I have  found  many  males  of  the  genus,  and  also 
of  Osteogeniosus,  with  from  15  to  20  eggs  in  their  mouths.  Some  of  these  eggs  were  in  an  early  stage  of 
development,  others  nearly  ready  to  be  hatched;  while  in  the  mouth  of  one  specimen  was  a hatched 
fry  having  the  yolk  bag  still  adherent.  The  eggs  filled  the  cavity  of  the  mouth  and  extended  far  back 
to  the  branchiae. 

“ In  the  female  organs  of  generation  the  eggs  seemed  to  come  to  maturity  in  batches  of  perhaps  50 
at  a time.  On  examining  the  conformation  of  the  ventral  fins,  those  of  the  females  appeared  to  be 
larger  than  those  of  the  males;  the  rays  were  thickened  by  a deposit  of  fat,  whilst  the  innermost  one 
had  a large  pad  attached  to  its  posterior  edge.  These  fins  can  be  expanded  into  a cup-like  surface,  the 
use  of  which  may  be  to  receive  the  eggs  as  extruded,  which  may  be  vivified  there  by  the  male. 

“Whether  the  male  carries  about  these  eggs  in  his  mouth  until  hatched  or  only  removes  them  when 
danger  is  imminent  from  some  spot  where  he  is  guarding  them  is  questionable,  but  in  none  of  the 
specimens  which  I examined  did  I find  a trace  of  food  in  the  intestines  of  the  males  which  had  been 
engaged  in  this  interesting  occupation. 

‘ ‘ This  has  been  observed  likewise  elsewhere  by  Mr.  Boake  in  Ceylon,  and  Dr.  Hensel  has  recorded 
the  same  of  a Brazil  species,  A.  commersonii;  Dr.  Gunther,  of  Arius  fissus  from  Cayenne;  and  the  same 
facts  have  been  remarked  in  other  Siluroid  fishes.” 

As  already  stated,  when  Mr.  Nelson  examined  the  specimen  which  we  have  taken  as  the  type  of 
the  species,  he  found  39  eggs  in  its  mouth,  many  of  which  readily  rolled  out  when  he  held  the  fish  up 
by  the  tail.  Unfortunately  some  of  these  eggs  were  lost  and  only  four  of  them  came  into  our  possession. 


* Description  of  a new  Siluroid  fish  from  Ceylon.  <Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  xvm,  third  series,  1866,  pp.  473  and  474. 
t Fauna  of  British  India,  Fishes,  vol.  I,  1889,  pp,  169-170. 

F.  C.  B.  1901—10 


146 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The  other  specimen,  which  we  have  taken  as  the  cotype,  contained  but  one  egg  in  its  mouth 
when  it  came  into  our  possession,  and  Mr.  Nelson  does  not  recall  that  any  were  lost  from  this  fish. 
He  saw  8 or  10  other  examples  of  this  cat-fish,  but  did  not  observe  eggs  in  the  mouth  of  any  but  the 
type  specimen.  According  to  his  recollection,  the  eggs  were  quite  uniform  in  size.  The  four  which 
came  into  our  possession  measure,  respectively, , -J-f  by  f§,  If  by  fj,  ff  by  ff,  and  by  of  an  inch. 

The  eggs  are  well  developed,  the  embryo  in  each  showing  very  distinctly.  It  lies  wrapped 
around  one  side  of  the  yolk  sac,  the  head  in  every  case  being  free.  The  maxillary  barbel  is  well 
developed  and  very  long,  its  length  nearly  equaling  that  of  the  head. 

We  have  not  been  able  to  examine  critically  the  single  egg  in  the  mouth  of  our  second  specimen, 
as  it  can  not  be  removed  without  mutilating  it  or  the  fish  owing,  to  the  small  size  of  the  oral  opening. 
Evidently  this  particular  fish  has  not  yet  acquired  what  the  Rev.  Mr.  Boake  calls  “the  singular  habit, 
when  held  up  by  the  tail,  of  emitting  from  its  mouth  a quantity  of  eggs.” 

It  will  be  noticed  that  the  number  of  eggs  (39)  found  by  Mr.  Nelson  in  the  mouth  of  our  type 
specimen  is  much  greater  than  hitherto  reported  by  any  observer. 

The  suggestion  by  Dr.  Wyman  that  the  eggs  are  removed  from  the  mouth  when  the  cat-fish 
desires  to  feed  is  quite  plausible,  nay,  imperative,  if  the  fish  ever  feeds  during  the  progress  of  the  oral 
gestation.  But  it  seems  to  us  much  more  probable  that  the  fish  does  not  feed  at  all  during  the  period 
of  oral  gestation,  and  begins  to  take  food  only  when  the  young  have  developed  sufficiently  to  leave  the 
mouth.  This  is  evidenced  by  the  greatly  constricted  condition  of  the  oesophagus,  and  comports  more 
nearly  with  the  habit  of  many  other  species  of  fishes  during  the  spawning  season. 

Mr.  Nelson  informs  us  that  these  cat-fish  are  eaten  by  the  natives,  and  that  he  himself  regards 
them  as  the  best  fresh-water  food-fish  in  Mexico. 

It  is  proper  in  this  connection  to  call  attention  to  the  method  of  reproduction  in  the  sea  cat-fish 
(Galeichthys  felis) . From  information  obtained  in  1896  by  Evermann  and  Bean,  while  studying  the 
fishes  of  Indian  River,  Florida,  they  were  convinced  that  this  species  is  ovoviviparous.  According  to 
the  testimony  of  competent  observers  among  the  Indian  River  fishermen  and  dealers,  the  adult  females 
of  this  cat-fish  are  found  filled  with  well-developed  young  in  March,  “each  rolled  up  in  a ball  and  the 
balls  connected  in  a long  string.”  While  the  technical  description  is  a trifle  faulty,  the  evidence  points 
very  strongly  toward  the  ovo viviparity  of  the  sea  cat-fish. 

6.  Hhamdia  wagneri  (Gunther). 

The  collection  contains  one  specimen  11.5  inches  long,  from  Teapa,  and  two  others,  11.5  and  14.25 
inches  long,  respectively,  from  Frontera.  Head  4 to  4.5;  depth  5 to  5.5;  D.  i.  6,  A.  10;  eye  7.5  to  8 
in  head,  3 in  snout,  high  in  head;  snout  2.5;  interorbital  2.5;  barbels  6;  mouth  moderate,  jaws 
equal;  teeth  in  broad,  cardiform  bands  on  each  jaw;  maxillary  barbel  reaching  adipose  fin,  but  probably 
variable;  mandibulary  barbel  to  beyond  base  of  pectoral,  nearly  twice  as  long  as  inner;  head  broad  and 
flat,  slightly  longer  than  wide,  covered  with  soft  smooth  skin;  fontanelle  in  adult  not  continued  behind 
eye;  occipital  process  narrow,  reaching  about  half  way  to  dorsal  spine;  gillrakers  3 + 7 or  8;  adipose  fin 
2.66  to  3 in  body,  reaching  slightly  farther  than  anal;  caudal  deeply  divided,  its  lower  lobe  broad  and 
rounded,  upper  smaller  and  pointed;  body  tapering  backward  from  head,  much  compressed  behind. 
General  color,  brown,  lighter  below,  many  dark  dots  over  body;  a dark  lateral  band;  base  of  dorsal  pale. 

7.  Pantosteus  plebeius  (Baird  & Girard). 

One  specimen  of  this  sucker,  5.75  inches  long,  was  obtained  by  Mr.  Nelson  from  the  Rio  Piedras 
Verdes,  near  Colonia  Garcia,  Chihuahua,  and  another  4.5  inches  long  by  Messrs.  Townsend  and  Barber 
from  the  Rio  Casas  Grandes  near  Old  Casas  Grandes,  Chihuahua. 

8.  Campostoma  ornatum  Girard. 

One  specimen,  5.25  inches  long,  from  near  summit  of  the  Sierra  Madre  Mountains  in  Chihuahua, 
near  Colonia  Garcia. 

9.  Leuciscus  nigrescens  (Girard). 

One  specimen  5 inches  long  from  Rio  Casas  Grandes,  one  5.25  inches  long  from  near  the  summit 
of  the  Sierra  Madre  Mountains  in  Chihuahua,  near  Colonia  Garcia,  and  one  5.75  inches  long  from  Lake 
Santa  Maria. 


FISHES  FROM  MEXICO  AND  CENTRAL  AMERICA. 


147 


10.  Notropis  santamari®,  new  species. 

Type,  No.  50002,  U.  S.  N.  M.,  a specimen  1.56  inches  long,  collected  in  September,  1899,  by  Mr. 

E.  W.  Nelson,  from  a small  pool  near  Lake  Santa  Maria,  Chihuahua,  Mexico.  Cotype,  No.  964,  U.  S. 

F.  C.  reserve  series,  from  same  place. 

Head  4;  depth  2.65;  eye  3.6;  snout  4;  maxillary  6;  interorbital 6;  scales  9-38-2,  13  pores;  D.  8;  A.  9. 
Body  short,  deep,  and  compressed;  head  short;  snout  short,  obtuse;  mouth  rather  small,  oblique;  jaws 
subequal,  the  lower  slightly  included;  maxillary  scarcely  reaching  eye;  caudal  peduncle  moderate, 
its  least  depth  2.7  in  head;  scales  large,  loose,  and  closely  imbricated,  exposed  portion  of  anterior  ones 
deeper  than  long,  15  scales  before  origin  of  dorsal;  lateral  line  greatly  decurved  and  incomplete,  only 
11  to  13  pores;  fins  all  small;  origin  of  dorsal  over  base  of  ventrals,  the  longest  dorsal  ray  about  1.4  in 
head;  anal  rather  larger  than  dorsal;  pectoral  short,  pointed,  1.25  in  head,  not  reaching  base  of  ventrals; 
ventrals  barely  reaching  origin  of  anal;  teeth  apparently  4-4,  slightly  hooked. 

Color  in  alcohol,  olivaceous,  paler  below;  back  and  upper  part  of  side  with  numerous  small  dark 
specks,  the  edges  of  the  scales  dark;  an  obscure  dark  lateral  band  plainest  on  caudal  peduncle;  median 
line  of  back  dark;  top  of  head  dark;  snout  somewhat  dusky;  dorsal  and  caudal  dusky,  other  fins  pale. 

This  species  seems  related  to  N.  frigidus,  from  which  it  differs  in  the  larger  scales  and  the  incom- 
plete lateral  line. 


11.  Notropis  term®,  new  species. 

Type,  No.  50003,  U.  S.  N.  M.,  a specimen,  2.5  inches  long,  collected  August  9,  1901,  by  Dr.  J.  N. 
Rose,  in  Lake  Lerma,  near  the  town  of  Lerma,  State  of  Mexico,  Mexico;  cotypes,  32  specimens,  No. 
50004,  U.  S.  N.  M. ; 10  specimens,  No.  977,  U.  S.  F.  C.  reserve,  and  10  specimens,  No.  6762,  Stanford 
University  Museum — all  from  the  type  locality  and  collected  under  the  same  circumstances. 

Head  3.7;  depth  3.7;  eye  5;  snout  3.9;  maxillary  3.3;  mandible  3;  interorbital  3;  preorbital  6;  D.  9; 
A.  8;  scales  7-47-5,  23  scales  before  the  dorsal;  teeth  4-4.  Body  stout,  deep,  not  greatly  compressed, 
the  back  gently  elevated,  the  anterior  profile  regularly  curved  from  snout  to  origin  of  dorsal ; head  rather 
heavy;  snout  short  and  rather  blunt;  mouth  small,  oblique,  the  lower  jaw  included,  the  maxillary 
scarcely  reaching  eye;  teeth  small,  hooked,  somewhat  crenate,  the  grinding  surface  not  well  developed; 


148 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


caudal  peduncle  rather  slender,  not  especially  deep,  the  least  depth  being  2.5  in  head;  eye  small; 
scales  moderate,  not  closely  imbricated,  those  before  dorsal  somewhat  reduced  in  size;  lateral  line  little 
decurved,  not  wholly  complete,  an  occasional  scale  without  any  pore;  tins  all  small;  origin  of  dorsal 
much  nearer  base  of  caudal  than  eye,  and  behind  insertion  of  ventrals,  its  rays  about  half  length  of 
head;  anal  short;  pectoral  very  short,  not  nearly  reaching  ventrals,  its  length  equal  to  height  of  dorsal 
fin;  ventrals  very  short,  not  nearly  reaching  vent;  caudal  not  deeply  forked,  the  lobes  about  1.5  in  head. 

Color  in  alcohol,  grayish-olivaceous  on  back  and  upper  part  of  side,  the  scales  profusely  covered 
with  small  dark  punctulations;  under  parts  paler;  a broad  dark  median  line  from  occiput  to  origin  of 
dorsal,  just  in  front  of  which  it  ends  in  a black  blotch;  a broad  dark  plumbeous  band  from  humeral 
region  along  side  to  base  of  caudal  fin,  this  band  anteriorly  somewhat  above  the  axis  of  the  body  but 
following  the  axis  posteriorly;  dorsal,  caudal,  and  pectoral  fins  dusky,  the  ventrals  and  anal  pale. 

This  species  seems  most  closely  related  to  Notropis  aztecus  Woolman,  from  which  it  differs  chiefly 
in  the  more  slender  caudal  peduncle,  the  larger  eye,  less  rounded  snout,  and  the  coloration. 

The  numerous  cotypes  show  no  appreciable  differences. 

The  presence  of  fully  developed  eggs  in  one  of  the  cotypes  indicates  that  the  spawning  time  of 
this  species  in  Lake  Lerma  is  in  the  late  summer. 

12.  Notropis  frig-idus  (Girard). 

A single  specimen,  2 inches  long,  from  a pool  near  Lake  Santa  Maria,  Chihuahua,  seems  to  be  this 
species,  though  too  badly  mutilated  to  enable  us  to  identify  it  with  certainty.  The  character  of  the 
teeth  can  not  be  made  out  and  the  scales  are  rubbed  off  so  that  they  can  not  be  accurately  counted. 

Head  4;  depth  4.25;  eye  3.5;  snout  4;  D.  7;  A.  9;  scales  5-35-6,  15  before  the  dorsal.  Body 
slender,  compressed;  head  small;  mouth  small,  oblique,  the  lower  jaw  slightly  included;  scales  thin, 
deciduous;  fins  small;  origin  of  dorsal  slightly  behind  base  of  ventrals.  Color,  pale  yellowish  or 
straw-color,  a few  dark  punctulations  along  median  line  of  back. 

13.  Agosia  chrysogaster  Girard. 

One  specimen,  3.25  inches  long,  of  this  interesting  little  minnow  is  in  the  collection  made  by 
Messrs.  Townsend  and  Barber  near  the  summit  of  the  Sierra  Madre,  Chihuahua. 

14.  Symbranchus  marmoratus  Bloch. 

One  specimen,  12  inches  long,  from  Cozumel  Island,  and  two  smaller  ones,  each  10.5  inches  long, 
from  Mujeres  Island.  Those  from  Mujeres  Island  were  obtained  by  Mr.  Goldman  from  the  soft,  slimy 
mud  of  a swampy,  fresh-water  pond  about  2 miles  from  the  southern  end  ot  the  island.  “This  pond,” 
Mr.  Goldman  says,  “is  4 or  5 acres  in  extent  and  occupies  a depression  about  a quarter  of  a mile 
from  the  open  sea  and  only  about  250  yards  from  the  head  of  a salt-water  lagoon,  from  which  it  is 
completely  cut  off,  however,  by  a ridge  30  or  40  feet  in  height.  The  water  in  the  pond  is  so  shallow 
that  it  is  everywhere  filled  with  tall,  growing,  aquatic  vegetation.  There  is  a ranch  close  by,  and  to 
obtain  water  the  people  have  dug  holes  at  one  end  of  the  pond  and  walled  them  up  with  rocks  to 
prevent  their  immediately  refilling  with  soft  mud.  As  it  is,  they  gradually  fill  and  have  to  be 
periodically  cleaned.  The  only  times  the  people  ever  see  these  eels  are  when  these  holes  are  cleaned. 
I happened  to  be  there  one  day  hunting  birds  and  getting  fish  from  the  salt-water  lagoon,  and  the 
people  told  me  about  the  eels.  After  some  difficulty  l managed  to  persuade  two  men  to  undertake  the 
job  of  cleaning  the  holes  at  once.  They  were  hard  to  persuade,  for  they  claimed  they  were  apt  to  get 
fever  from  working  in  and  overturning  the  mud.  Many  bushels  of  it  were  taken  out  and  the  eels 
found  in  cavities  between  the  rocks.  The  people  believe  that  the  eels  serve  to  purify  the  water.  They 
assured  me  that  no  other  fresh- water  pond  existed  on  the  island.” 

Body  very  slender  and  eel-shaped,  compressed  posteriorly,  the  deepest  part  through  base  of  head; 
head  conic;  tail  very  short,  less  than  one-fourth  total  length;  eye  small,  close  to  the  end  of  snout; 
mouth  horizontal,  large;  distance  from  tip  of  snout  to  angle  of  mouth  contained  three  times  in  distance 
from  tip  of  snout  to  posterior  gill-opening;  lijrs  thin  but  long  and  overhanging;  snout  rounded,  very 
short,  equal  to  interorbital  space;  teeth  small,  those  on  jaws  in  a single  row,  except  in  the  front  of  upper 
jaw  where  the  rows  from  the  sides  join,  forming  a small  patch;  teeth  on  the  palatines  larger,  conic,  and 
in  a patch  anteriorly  where  the  two  rows  join,  a single  row  being  on  each  side;  gill-opening  narrow, 
the  width  of  the  opening  equaling  distance  between  eyes;  distance  from  vent  to  tip  of  tail  4.1  times  in 
entire  length;  no  fins  except  dorsal  and  anal,  the  latter  extending  from  vent,  the  former  beginning 
slightly  in  advance  of  this,  both  meeting  at  end  of  the  narrowly  pointed  tail.  Color  in  alcohol,  dark 
olivaceous  or  brown,  mottled  with  darker  brown;  under  part  of  head  and  neck  lighter. 


FISHES  FROM  MEXICO  AND  CENTRAL  AMERICA. 


149 


15.  Dorosoma  cepedianum  exile  (Jordan  & Gilbert).  Southern  Hickory  Shad. 

One  specimen JL2. 5 inches  long,  from  Montecristo.  Head  4.66,  1.5  in  last  ray  of  dorsal;  depth  2.75; 
eye  4.33;  snout  5;  maxillary  4;  mandible  3;  interorbital  3.5;  1).  13;  A.  31;  scales  about  75,-30;  scutes 
20  + 9.  Body  deep,  compressed,  the  back  elevated;  dorsal  median,  slightly  behind  ventrals;  caudal 
widely  forked,  the  lobes  equal.  General  color  in  alcohol,  silvery,  bluish  above.  This  subspecies 
differs  chiefly  from  the  typical  cepedianum  in  the  considerably  smaller  scales. 

16.  Sardinella  humeralis  (Cuvier  & Valenciennes).  Sardina  Escamuda. 

Head  3.8;  depth  3.25;  eye  3;  snout  3.5;  I).  16;  A 18;  scales  40;  scutes  about  27.  Our  specimens 
differ  from  current  descriptions  of  this  species  in  having  an  adipose  eyelid;  in  the  smaller  eye,  which 
is  very  slightly  longer  than  snout;  and  in  their  greater  depth.  We  can  not,  however,  regard  them 
as  being  any  other  species.  Our  two  specimens,  each  7.12  inches  long,  were  taken  from  the  crop  of  a 
brown  pelican,  at  Puerto  Morelos,  April  1,  1901.  Both  are  females,  and  their  spawning  time  is  in  the 
spring,  as  evidenced  by  the  mature  eggs  in  each. 

17.  Fundulus  grandis  Baird  & Girard. 

Fifteen  specimens,  5.2  to  6.8  inches  long,  from  Progreso.  Head  3;  depth  4 to  4.3;  eye  5.75  to  6; 
snout  3.3  to  3.7;  mandible  2.4  to  2.5;  interorbital  3;  preorbital  9 to  10;  D.  10  or  11;  A.  9 or  10; 
scales  40  to  46,-14  or  15  The  scales  appear  considerably  smaller  than  in  F.  lieteroditus,  the  eye 
smaller,  and  the  dorsal  is  more  posterior. 

18.  Girardinichthys  innominatus  Bleeker. 

Thirty-three  specimens  varying  in  length  from  0.75  to  1 75  inches,  all  from  Lake  Lerma.  Head, 
3.7;  depth  3.5;  eye  3.5;  snout  4.5;  interorbital  2.5;  I).  23;  A.  26;  scales  44,-16. 

Body  short,  oblong,  compressed;  head  compressed,  thick,  very  steep;  snout  blunt;  mandible 
directed  vertically  upward ; premaxillaries  greatly  protractile;  small  cardiform  or  subconical  teeth  in 
each  jaw  in  a single  series,  followed  by  a few  small  hooked  teeth;  month  Very  small,  nearly  vertical; 
profile  concave  from  orbit  to  nape,  then  slightly  convex  to  dorsal  fin;  caudal  slightly  rounded;  base 
of  anal  rather  steep. 

General  color  in  alcohol,  dusky  gray,  darker  above,  with  many  punctulations;  a narrow  dorsal 
band  of  dark  from  nape  to  dorsal  fin;  a dark,  almost  black,  blotch  on  side  above  space  between 
ventrals  and  vent,  larger  than  eye;  some  specimens  with  many  faint  vertical  broken  dark  bars  on  side 
of  body,  these  usually  obscure  in  the  larger  specimens. 

This  species  is  ovoviviparous.  In  several  examples  dissected,  eggs  were  found  in  the  ovary,  each 
egg  being  surrounded  by  membranous  tissue,  which  is  attached  to  the  sides  of  the  ovary.  Some  of 
these  young  were  very  well  developed;  others  are  in  a very  immature  state;  while  in  others  the  eggs 
are  very  small.  In  one  specimen  were  found  4 fully  developed  young  showing  the  scales  and  fully 
developed  tins,  and  in  all  respects  resembling  the  parent,  which  was  1.2  inches  long,  while  the  young 
were  nine-twentieths  of  an  inch  in  length.  In  another  specimen,  1.6  inches  long,  24  young,  two- 
tenths  of  an  inch  long,  were  found.  These  were  immature,  no  scales  being  visible. 

These  specimens  differ  somewhat  from  current  descriptions  in  several  important  particulars,  viz, 
the  dorsal  and  anal  rays  are  more  numerous,  the  eye  is  larger,  and  the  color  is  different,  no  mention 
being  made  by  previous  writers  of  the  black  blotch  on  the  side.  This  spot  is  present  in  all  our 
examples 

So  far  as  we  have  been  able  to  learn  attention  has  not  previously  been  called  to  the  viviparity  of 
this  little  fish.  Indeed,  in  Jordan  and  Evermann’s  Fishes  of  North  and  Middle  America  it  is  expressly 
stated  to  be  oviparous.  This  opinion  was  probably  simply  an  inference  from  the  apparent  fact  that 
the  anal  fin  of  the  male  is  not  modified  into  an  intromittent  organ.  No  such  modification  is  found 
in  any  of  our  29  specimens,  but  we  have  not  determined  certainly  that  they  are  all  females. 

These  fish,  as  well  as  those  of  all  the  other  species  obtained  by  Dr.  Rose  in  Lake  Lerma,  are  in 
many  cases  infested  with  some  species  of  abdominal  parasite — a tapeworm  of  some  kind. 

19.  Cyprinodon  eximius  Girard. 

The  collection  contains  44  specimens,  all  females,  of  this  interesting  little  fish,  obtained  by  Mr. 
Nelson  fiom  a pool  near  Lake  Santa  Maria,  Chihuahua.  They  range  in  length  from  1 to  1.5  inches. 

Head  3 2;  depth  2.5  to  3.2;  eye  3.8;  snout  3.8;  interorbital  2.5  to  3;  I).  9 or  10,  length  of  longest 
ray  about  2 in  head,  the  anterior  quite  spine-like;  A.  8 to  10,  longest  ray  1.8  in  head.  Body  oblong, 
deepest  in  front  of  dorsal  tin,  compressed  posteriorly;  anterior  profile  evenly  arched  from  base  of 
dorsa1  fin  to  tip  of  snout;  head  large,  deep,  slightly  compressed;  eye  high,  distance  from  posterior  edge 


150 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


of  opercle  to  eye  equaling  distance  from  tip  of  snout  to  posterior  edge  of  pupil;  upper  jaw  protractile; 
lower  jaw  prominent,  very  oblique,  including  upper  jaw;  a row  of  small  villiform  teeth  on  each  jaw; 
dorsal  outline  dropping  downward  and  backward  along  base  of  fin,  thence  backward  and  but  slightly 
downward  to  base  of  caudal;  caudal  truncate;  lower  profile  similar  to  dorsal,  though  not  so  greatly 
arched.  Color  in  alcohol,  dusky  grayish,  the  central  portion  of  each  scale  in  some  cases  being  dark 
olivaceous,  making  bands  on  each  row  of  scales  on  side  of  body;  belly  and  neck  silvery  white;  8 or  9 
bands  of  dark  about  as  wide  as  pupil,  but  irregular  in  width,  on  side  of  body;  fins  all  dusky  pale. 

20.  Belonesox  belizanus  Kner. 

Three  specimens,  4.2  to  5 inches  long,  from  Progreso,  Yucatan.  Head  3 (2.75  to  3);  depth  about 
6;  eye  6 (5.5  to  6);  snout  2.25;  mandible  1.8  to  2;  interorbital  3.8;  scales  55  or  60,-16  or  17,  about  6 
rows  on  cheek;  D.  8,  the  longest  ray  3 in  head;  A.  10,  the  longest  ray  2.8;  ventrals  3.8;  pectoral  2.8. 
Body  very  oblong,  compressed  posteriorly;  head  and  anterior  portion  of  body  flat;  head  long,  very 
flat  above,  the  snout  wedge-shaped;  eye  high;  distance  from  tip  of  snout  to  anterior  edge  of  eye 
equaling  distance  from  center  of  pupil  to  posterior  edge  of  opercle;  upper  surface  of  premaxillary  plate 
not  quite  as  long  as  postorbital  part  of  head;  upper  jaw  protractile,  the  premaxillaries  forming  together 
an  elongate  triangular  plate,  the  bones  separated  by  membrane;  lower  jaw  long,  projecting  slightly 
beyond  upper;  mandibles  formed  similarly  to  premaxillaries;  jaws  arched,  each  with  a broad  band  of 
cardiform  teeth;  dorsal  placed  far  posteriorly;  caudal  rounded;  anal  in  advance  of  dorsal,  modified  in 
the  male  into  a long,  slender  intromittent  organ.  General  color  in  alcohol,  dark  olivaceous,  darker 
above;  side  with  longitudinal  series  of  dark  spots,  the  spots  on  the  posterior  central  portion  of  each 
scale;  a dark  spot,  slightly  larger  than  pupil,  just  above  the  central  base  of  caudal;  caudal  dusky 
pale  with  numerous  dark  punctulations;  other  fins  dusky  pale. 

21.  Anableps  dovii  Gill.  “ Quatro  Ojos  ” ; Four-eyed  Fish. 

We  have  examined  2 specimens  of  this  interesting  fish,  7 and  8 inches  long,  respectively,  collected 
by  Mr.  Nelson  in  the  Tehuantepec  River  at  Tehuantepec  City.  Head  4;  depth  6.25;  eye  4.5;  snout 
3.75;  interorbital  4;  width  of  mouth  2.5;  dorsal  8;  anal  8;  scales,  67,-15;  pectoral  1.5;  ventral  2.3; 
anal  2.4;  dorsal  2.4;  middle  caudal  rays  1.4.  Body  long,  much  depressed  on  anterior  half,  posterior 
half  somewhat  compressed;  head  broad,  very  greatly  depressed;  mouth  small,  the  maxillary  and 
mandible  short,  the  cleft  not  nearly  reaching  anterior  border  of  eye;  eye  large,  set  very  high,  fully 
one-half  being  above  the  level  of  the  low  interorbital  space;  fins  all  small;  dorsal  posterior,  its  origin 
over  tip  of  anal;  caudal  rather  long,  rounded;  ventrals  short,  wide  apart,  not  reaching  vent;  pectorals 
short,  reaching  only  halfway  to  base  of  ventrals;  scales  small,  smooth,  and  moderately  firm. 

Color  in  alcohol,  brownish  olive  on  back  and  upper  part  of  side,  pale  below;  median  line  of  back 
with  an  obscure  blackish  band;  a distinct  black  band  from  eye  along  middle  of  side  to  base  of  caudal 
peduncle,  its  lower  boundary  very  distinct,  in  contrast  with  the  paler  color  of  lower  side;  a similar  but 
paler  dark  line  from  above  base  of  ventral  to  base  of  caudal,  the  pale  yellowish  line  between  these  two 
scarcely  equal  to  diameter  of  eye  in  width;  in  some  cases  this  second  dark  line  begins  under  tip  of 
pectoral;  dorsal  and  caudal  dusky,  other  fins  pale;  tip  of  upper  jaw  dark;  peritoneum  black. 

The  unique  structure  of  the  eye  of  this  curious  fish  merits  a fuller  description.  Mr.  M.  C.  Marsh, 
pathologist  of  the  Commission,  has  made  careful  dissections  of  the  eye  of  this  species  and  kindly 
furnishes  us  the  following  notes: 

The  eye  is  crossed  by  a bar,  like  the  diameter  of  a circle,  and  parallel  with  the  length  of  the  body. 
This  bar  is  darker  than  the  other  external  portions  of  the  eyeball  and  has  its  edges  darker  still.  Divid- 
ing the  external  aspect  of  the  eye  equally,  it  has  its  lower  edge  on  the  same  level  as  the  back  of  the 
fish,  which  is  flat  and  straight  from  snout  to  dorsal,  or  nearly  the  whole  length  of  the  fish;  so  that  when 
the  body  of  the  fish  is  just  submerged  the  level  of  the  water  reaches  to  this  bar,  and  the  lower  half  of 
the  eye  is  in  water,  the  upper  half  in  the  air.  Upon  dissecting  the  eyeball  from  the  orbit,  it  appears 
nearly  round.  A membranous  sheath  covers  the  external  part  and  invests  most  of  the  ball.  It  may 
be  peeled  off,  when  the  dark  bar  on  the  external  portion  of  the  eye  is  seen  to  be  upon  this  membrane, 
which  may  correspond  to  the  conjunctiva.  The  back  portion  of  eyeball  being  cut  off,  one  lens  is  found. 
The  lining  of  the  ball  consists,  in  front,  of  one  black  layer,  evidently  choroid.  Behipd,  there  is  a retinal 
layer.  The  choroid  layer  turns  up  anteriorly,  making  a free  edge  comparable  to  an  iris.  The  free  edge 
is  chiefly  evident  in  the  lower  part  of  the  eye.  A large  pupil  is  left,  but  is  divided  by  two  flaps,  con- 
tinuations of  the  choroid  coat,  projecting  from  either  side  and  overlapping.  There  are  properly  then 
two  pupils,  an  upper  and  lower,  separated  by  a band  consisting  of  the  two  flaps,  which  may  probably, 


FISHES  FROM  MEXICO  AND  CENTRAL  AMERICA. 


151 


by  moving  upward  and  downward,  increase  or  diminish  the  size  of  either  pupil;  an  upward  motion 
of  the  flaps  increasing  the  lower  pupil  at  the  expense  of  the  other,  and  vice  versa.  (Marsh). 

This  division  of  the  pupil  into  two  parts  permits  the  fish,  when  swimming  at  the  surface  of  the 
water,  as  is  its  usual  custom,  to  see  in  the  air  with  the  upper  portion  and  in  the  water  with  the  lower. 
It  is  thus  able  to  see  not  only  such  insects  as  are  upon  the  surface  of  the  water  or  flying  in  the  air 
above,  but  also  any  that  may  be  swimming  beneath  the  surface. 

According  to  Mr.  Nelson  the  individuals  of  this  species  swim  always  at  the  surface  and  in  little 
schools  arranged  in  platoons  or  abreast.  They  always  swim  headed  upstream  against  the  current, 
and  feed  upon  floating  matter  which  the  current  brings  them.  A platoon  may  be  seen  in  regular 
formation  breasting  the  current,  either  making  slight  headway  upstream  or  merely  maintaining  their 
station,  and  on  the  qui  vive  for  any  suitable  food  the  current  may  bring.  Now  and  then  one  may  be 
seen  to  dart  forward,  seize  a floating  food  particle,  and  then  resume  its  place  in  the  platoon.  And 
thus  they  may  be  observed  feeding  for  long  periods.  They  are  almost  invariably  found  in  running 
water  well  out  in  the  stream,  or  at  least  where  the  current  is  strongest  and  where  floating  matter  is  most 
abundant,  for  it  is  upon  floating  matter  that  they  seem  chiefly  to  depend.  They  are  not  known  to 
jump  out  of  the  water  to  catch  insects  flying  in  the  air  or  resting  upon  vegetation  above  the  water 
surface,  nor  do  they  Seem  to  feed  to  any  extent  upon  small  crustaceans  or  other  portions  of  the 
plankton  beneath  the  surface. 

When  alarmed — and  they  are  wary  and  very  easily  frightened — the)'  escape  by  skipping  or  jumping 
over  the  water,  2 or  3 feet  at  a skip.  They  rise  entirely  out  of  the  water,  and  at  a considerable  angle, 
the  head  pointing  upward.  In  descending  the  tail  strikes  the  water  first  and,  apparently  by  a sculling 
motion,  new  impetus  is  acquired  for  another  leap.  This  skipping  may  continue  until  the  school  is 
widely  scattered.  When  a school  has  become  scattered,  and  after  the  cause  of  their  fright  has 
disappeared,  the  individuals  soon  rejoin  each  other.  First  two  will  join  each  other  and  one  by  one 
the  others  will  join  them  until  the  whole  school  is  together  again.  Rarely  do  they  attempt  to  dive  or 
get  beneath  the  surface;  when  they  do  they  have  great  difficulty  in  keeping  under  and  soon  come  to 
the  surface  again. 

The  air-bladder  in  an  example  8 inches  long  was  three-fourths  of  an  inch  long  and  nearly  one- 
fourth  inch  in  diameter.  It  was  attached  by  a slender  thread  or  duct  three-fourths  inch  long  to  the 
under  side  of  the  stomach  at  the  anterior  end.  The  air-bladder  lies  immediately  ventral  to  the  stomach, 
its  anterior  end  lying  against  and  dorsal  of  the  liver,  in  the  tissues  of  which  the  duct  is  immersed. 

No  opening  from  the  duct  into  the  stomach  could  be  found  in  the  specimen  dissected,  though 
more  careful  dissection  of  a well-preserved  or  fresh  specimen  would  probably  reveal  one. 

The  specimens  obtained  by  Mr.  Nelson  were  secured  by  means  of  a cast  net  in  the  Tehuantepec 
River  at  Tehuantepec  City,  which  is  situated  about  50  miles  from  the  sea  at  an  altitude  of  200  feet. 
The  fish  are  so  wild  that  it  is  very  difficult  to  catch  them.  They  jump  over  a seine  readily  and  will 
not  ordinarily  take  a hook.  The  cast  net  seems  the  most  effective  means  for  their  capture. 

This  fish  is  viviparous,  as  is  well  known.  The  female  (7  inches  long)  examined  by  us  was  collected 
in  April,  and  contains  nine  young,  each  about  1.5  inches  long.  In  each  of  these  the  yolk  sac  is  quite 
large  but  flabby,  as  a result  of  the  absorption  of  a considerable  portion  of  its  contents.  In  these  little 
young  the  septum  in  the  eye  is  quite  evident  and  the  color  pattern  of  the  adult  is  well  shown.  After 
the  young  are  born  Mr.  Nelson  observed  that  they  remain  for  a time  in  quiet,  protected  water,  not 
venturing  into  the  strong  currents  until  of  considerable  size. 

Further  down  the  Tehuantepec  River  near  the  coast  the  individuals  of  this  fish  are  said  to  be  larger 
than  at  Tehuantepec  City.  These  fish  are  eaten  by  the  natives,  but  are  not  often  seen  in  market,  on 
account  of  the  difficulty  in  their  capture. 

22.  Poecilia  butleri  Jordan. 

Three  specimens,  1.37  to  1.67  inches  long,  obtained  by  Mr.  Deam  from  a salt-water  pool  near  the 
seashore  at  Salina  Cruz,  Gulf  of  Tehuantepec. 

23.  Mollienisia  latipinna  Le  Sueur. 

Nine  males  and  7 females  from  Progreso,  all  excellent  specimens,  in  fine  condition.  The  males 
range  in  length  from  3.75  to  4.63  inches,  and  the  females  from  2.25  to  4 inches.  Two  females  from 
Montecristo,  2.25  and  2.75  inches  long;  and  one  female  from  Mujeres  Island,  2 inches  long. 

24.  Tylosurus  notatus  (Poey).  Needle-fish;  Long-jaws. 

One  specimen,  13  inches  long,  from  Progreso.  Snout  broken;  measurements  not  accurate.  D.  i, 
13;  scales  85  before  dorsal,  about  45  from  front  of  dorsal  to  caudal. 


I 


152  BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 

25.  Tylosurus  timucu  (Walbaum).  Peixe  Agulha;  Timucu. 

One  specimen,  20  inches  long,  from  Teapa.  Head  2.8;  depth  11;  eye  3 in  postorbital  part  of 
head;  A.  15;  I).  16;  about  135  scales  before  dorsal. 

26.  Hemiramphus  brasiliensis  (Linnaeus).  Balao;  Escribano. 

One  specimen,  12  inches  long,  from  Puerto  Morelos.  The  following  measurements  are  from  end 
of  upper  jaw:  Head  4.2;  depth  5.75;  eye  3.75;  snout  3;  interorbital  3.75;  I).  14;  A.  10;  scales  54;  pecto- 
ral 1.4  in  head;  ventrals  3. 

27.  Chirostoma  humboldtianum  (Cuvier  & Valenciennes).  Pescado  Blanco  de  Clmlso. 

Five  specimens,  each  about  5 inches  long,  from  La  Laguna,  Jalisco,  in  the  Sierra  de  Guanacatlan. 
Head  3;  depth 4.75;  eye  4.6;  snout  3;  maxillary  3;  mandible  2.5;  interobital  4;  scales  53,-15;  D.  iv-13; 
A.  19;  longest  dorsal  ray  2 in  head;  longest  anal  ray  2.2;  pectoral  1.6;  ventral  2.6;  depth  of  caudal 
peduncle  3.3.  Body  slender,  compressed;  eye  large,  nearer  tip  of  snout  than  posterior  edge  of  opercle 
by  a distance  almost  as  great  as  diameter  of  orbit;  interobital  space  flat,  as  is  almost  entire  top  of  head; 
lower  jaw  projecting  slightly,  including  the  upper  when  closed;  cleft  of  mouth  horizontal,  the  edge  of 
lower  lip  being  on  aline  with  center  of  pupil;  lips  thickened  posteriorly,  lower  folding  over  upper  at 
their  union;  maxillary  nearly  vertical,  its  distal  end  in  advance  of  a vertical  from  anterior  edge  of  orbit 
a distance  equal  to  two-thirds  diameter  of  pupil;  minute  teeth  in  small  bands  on  jaws,  none  on  vomer 
or  palatines;  gillrakers  about  23,  very  slender,  length  of  longest  about  equal  to  diameter  of  pupil;  first 
two  spines  of  dorsal  about  equal,  the  other  two  shorter;  first  few  rays  of  soft  dorsal  highest,  others 
gradually  shortening;  when  the  fin  is  elevated  its  edge  is  straight;  caudal  forked;  anal  similar  to  soft 
dorsal,  except  that  its  edge  is  slightly  concave;  ventrals  reaching  vent. 

Color  in  alcohol,  brownish-olive,  darker  above;  a distinct  dark  lateral  band,  in  which  are  small 
darker  spots  extending  from  upper  part  of  base  of  pectoral  to  middle  of  base  of  caudal,  becoming 
darker  posteriorly;  scales  on  upper  part  of  body  and  sides  edged  with  dark,  sometimes  with  small  dark 
dots;  fins  all  dusky;  dorsal,  caudal,  and  pectoral  with  some  dark. 

28.  Chirostoma  promelas  Jordan  & Snyder. 

One  specimen,  8.5  inches  long,  from  the  Guadalajara  market,  caught  in  Laguna  de  Chapala,  from 
which  place  the  species  was  described.  Head  3.3;  depth  5;  eye  6;  snout  2.5;  maxillary  3;  mandible  2.25; 
interorbital  4.5;  scales  53,-15;  D.  iv-11;  longest  dorsal  ray  2.7  in  head;  A.  21;  longest  anal  ray  2.5; 
pectoral  2;  ventral  3.2:  depth  of  caudal  peduncle  3.8. 

29.  Chirostoma  lucius  Boulenger. 

Two  specimens,  8 inches  long,  from  the  Guadalajara  market,  caught  in  Laguna  de  Chapala,  which 
is  the  type  locality.  Head  3.3;  depth  5;  eye  5.75;  snout  2.6;  maxillary  3;  mandible  2.2;  interorbital 
4.2;  scales  58,-15;  D.  v or  vi-12;  longest  dorsal  ray  2.4  in  head;  A.  20;  longest  anal  ray  2.4;  pectoral 
1.7;  ventral  2.8;  depth  of  caudal  peduncle  3.3. 

30.  Chirostoma  bartoni  Jordan  & Evermann. 

Forty-five  specimens,  ranging  in  length  from  1.75  to  4.2  inches,  all  obtained  by  Dr.  J.  N.  Rose  in 
Lake  Lerma,  near  the  town  of  Lerma,  State  of  Mexico.  Until  now,  only  the  type  of  this  species  was 
known.  A female,  3 inches  long,  gives  the  following  measurements:  Head  4;  depth  5.5;  eye  4;  snout 
3.5;  maxillary  3.2;  mandible  2.3;  interorbital  space,  3.2;  D.  iv-i,  10;  A.  i,  13;  scales  41,-11 , about  20 
before  the  dorsal.  Body  slender,  moderately  compressed,  the  back  rounded;  mouth  small;  snout 
short;  lower  jaw  but  slightly  projecting.  Otherwise  as  in  the  type.  The  anal  fin  formula  varies  from 
i,  13  to  i,  15;  and  the  scales  from  40,-10  to  42,-12. 

31.  Eslopsarum  jordani  (Woolman). 

Among  the  specimens  brought  home  from  Mexico  by  Dr.  Rose  in  1901  is  a package  of  small  dried 
fish,  which  he  purchased  in  the  market  at  Yautepec,  State  of  Morelos.  These  specimens  range  in 
length  from  less  than  one  inch  to  2.25  inches.  They  are  thoroughly  desiccated  and  difficult  of  identi- 
fication, but  seem  to  be  the  present  species.  Dr.  Rose  informs  us  that  these  little  fish  are  sold  in 
dishes  containing  a dozen  or  more  and  are  eaten  on  toast  or  with  meat.  It  is  called  “ Charal  de  la 
Laguna”  and  is  much  relished. 

32.  Caranx  hippos  (Linnaeus).  Plorse  Cravalla. 

One  specimen,  13.5  inches  long,  from  Monteeristo.  Head  3;  depth  2.66;  eye  4.66;  snout  4; 
maxillary  2;  mandible  1.8;  interorbital  3.66;  preorbital  5.5;  D.  vi-i,  20;  A.  ii-i,  17;  scutes  on  lateral 
line  about  26. 


FISHES  FROM  MEXICO  AND  CENTRAL  AMERICA. 


153 


33.  Caranx  crysos  (Mitchill).  Hard-tail;  Runner. 

One  specimen,  9 inches  long,  from  Puerto  Morelos.  Head  3.5;  depth  3;  eye  3.5;  snout  3;  maxil- 
lary 2.5;  mandible  2.2;  interorbital  3.25;  preorbital  very  narrow,  about  16;  D.  viii-i,  24;  A.  ii-i,  19; 
pectoral  one-eighth  longer  than  head,  3 in  body;  longest  dorsal  ray  2 in  head;  about  48  scutes. 

34.  Trachinotus  giaucus  (Bloch).  Old-wife. 

One  specimen,  10  inches  long,  from  Puerto  Morelos.  Head  3.83;  depth  2;  eye  3.75;  snout  4.5; 
maxillary  2.66;  mandible  2.75;  interorbital  2.75;  preorbital  very  narrow;  D.  vi-r,  20;  A.  ii-i,  17; 
longest  dorsal  ray  1.5  in  body;  longest  anal  ray  2.33;  anterior  rays  of  dorsal  and  anal  greatly  produced, 
reaching  somewhat  beyond  middle  of  caudal. 

35.  Centropomus  mexicanus  Bocourt.  Mexican  Robalo. 

One  specimen,  12.5  inches  long,  from  Montecristo.  Head  3;  depth  3.66;  eye  5.75;  snout  3.5;  max- 
illary 2.66;  mandible  1.75;  interorbital  7;  preorbital  13.5;  scales  11-80-14;  D.  viii-i,  10;  A.  in,  6; 
longest  dorsal  spine  2 in  head,  1.5  in  depth  of  body ; longest  anal  spine  1.66  in  head,  1.25  in  depth  of  body ; 
pectoral  as  long  as  ventral,  1.66  in  head;  ventral  outline  nearly  straight;  suborbital  with  8 or  10  sharp 
retrorse  teeth;  preorbital  with  teeth  at  angle  strongly  serrated;  opercular  flap  large,  nearly  reaching 
front  of  dorsal.  General  color  in  alcohol,  dusky,  silvery  below,  darker  above;  lateral  line  in  a narrow 
black  band;  a dark  blotch  on  middle  of  opercle,  covering  nearly  half  of  it;  faint  indications  of  dark 
blotches  over  body  above  lateral  line;  dorsal  membranes  dark,  other  fins  pale,  except  third  anal  spine, 
which  is  dark  brown. 

This  fish  is  close  to  C.  parallelus,  but  differs  in  that  C.  mexicanus  has  more  teeth  on  the  suborbital, 
those  at  the  preopercle  being  fewer  at  the  angle,  larger  and  wider  apart;  those  on  the  suprascapular 
are  not  so  large,  but  there  are  6 or  7,  while  in  C.  parallelus  only  4 or  5 are  found;  scales  larger  in 
C.  mexicanus , 5 or  6 fewer  in  lateral  line,  and  1 or  2 fewer  between  the  lateral  line  and  second  dorsal. 

36.  Petrometopon  cruentatus  (Lacepede).  Coney;  Red  Hind. 

One  specimen,  6.75  inches  long,  from  Puerto  Morelos.  Head  2.8;  depth  3.2;  eye  5;  snout  4.6; 
maxillary  2;  mandible  1.75;  interorbital  6.75;  preorbital  10.5;  D.  ix,  14;  A.  in,  8;  pectoral  1.6;  ventrals 
2 ; scales  about  12-85-30.  Body  not  so  deep  as  in  specimens  heretofore  described,  nor  is  the  supplemental 
maxillary  so  evident. 

37.  Lutianus  griseus  (Linnseus).  Gray  Snapper. 

Five  specimens,  8.25  to  9.5  inches  long,  from  Mujeres  Island  and  one  specimen,  3.5  inches  long, 
from  Cozumel  Island.  Head  2.7;  depth  2.75  to  3;  eye  4.3  to  5;  snout  2.8  to  3;  maxillary  2.5  to  2.8; 
mandible  2 to  2.3;  interorbital  6 to  6.5;  preorbital  6 to  6.5;  D.  x,  13  or  14;  A.  in,  8;  scales  7-54-13,  7 
rows  on  cheek;  width  of  interorbital  and  preorbital  usually  equal;  the  fourth  dorsal  spine  the  longest, 
2.75  to  3 in  head;  second  and  third  anal  spines  about  equal,  the  second  the  stouter,  3.3  to  3.67  in  head; 
pectoral  1.5  to  2 in  head;  ventral  2 in  head. 

38.  Hsemulon  parra  (Desmarest). 

One  specimen,  5.5  inches  long,  from  Cozumel  Island. 

39.  Pomadasis  ramosus  (Poey). 

One  specimen,  8.75  inches  long,  probably  from  Montecristo.  Head  3.3;  depth  3.5;  eye  4.3; 
snout  3 ; maxillary  3.5  ; mandible  3.5  ; interorbital  4 ; preorbital  6 ; scales  6-55-12 ; D.  xm,  12  ; longest 
dorsal  spine  1.8  in  head;  A.  in,  7 ; longest  spine  1.5  in  head;  pectoral  and  ventral  each  1.5  in  head. 

40.  Orthopristis  chrysopterus  (Linmeus).  Pig-fish. 

Two  specimens,  9.75  and  10  inches  long,  from  Progreso.  Head  3 ; depth  2.8  ; eye  5.5  ; snout  2.25 ; 
maxillary  3.3 ; mandible  3 ; inter  orbital  4.67 ; preorbital  3.6 ; pectoral  1.5  in  head;  D.  xii,  16  or  17; 
A.  hi,  11  or  12  ; scales  10-65-17.  Longest  dorsal  spine  3 in  head ; second  anal  6 in  head  ; base  of  soft 
dorsal  1.5  in  spinous  dorsal ; highest  dorsal  spine  3 in  head  ; pectoral  not  reaching  past  tips  of  ventrals. 

41.  Xystaema  cinereum  (Walbaum).  Mojarra  Blanca. 

Two  specimens,  each  8.5  inches  long,  from  Mujeres  Island,  and  one  small  example  from  Cozumel 
Island.  Head  3.3;  depth  2.75;  eye  3.25;  snout  3.25;  maxillary  2.8;  mandible  2;  interorbital  3; 
scales  6-45-10;  D.  ix,  11;  A.  in,  6;  second  dorsal  spine  longest,  1.8  in  head;  second  anal  spine 
longest,  2.5  in  head;  ventral  short,  not  reaching  vent,  1.66  in  head;  pectoral  fin  slightly  longer  than 
head  ; caudal  deeply  forked,  lobes  longer  than  head,  scaled ; dorsal  and  anal  fins,  when  depressed, 
entirely  concealed  in  a scaly  sheath. 


154 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


42.  Gerres  mexicanus  Steindachner.  Mexican  Mojarra. 

The  collection  contains  four  specimens  of  this1  rare  species,  all  from  Teapa,  which  is  the  type 
locality.  They  range  in  length  from  5.75  to  10  inches.  Head  3.3;  depth  2.5;  eye  3 in  small  specimens, 
3.5  to  3.67  in  larger  ones;  snout  3.25  to  3.67;  scales  6-46  to  50-10  or  11;  D.  ix,  10  or  11;  A.  nr,  8 or  9. 
Body  compressed,  rhomboidal  in  form,  covered  with  large  smooth  scales;  back  much  elevated;  lateraj 
line  continuous,  concurrent  with  the  elevated  back,  beginning  on  a line  with  upper  margin  of  eye; 
head  flat,  a slight  depression  above  the  eye;  mouth  moderate,  upper  jaw  very  protractile;  maxillary 
extending  to  about  middle  of  eye,  its  length  about  2.5  in  head,  exposed  portion  oblong,  width  2 in 
length;  preorbital  and  preopercle  serrate;  premaxillary  groove  entirely  free  from  scales;  second  dorsal 
spine  strong  and  long,  head  contained  in  it  1.3  times;  second  anal  spine  stronger  but  shorter  than  second 
dorsal,  1.67  in  second  dorsal;  outer  edge  of  dorsal  fin  forming  a deep  reentrant  angle;  anal  same 
shape  as  dorsal  but  smaller;  pectoral  reaching  beyond  tips  of  ventrals  in  large  specimens,  not  so  far  in 
small  ones,  its  length  equaling  head. 

General  color,  bluish-silvery  above,  silvery  below;  very  distinct  dark  longitudinal  lines  along  the 
middle  of  each  row  of  scales;  dorsal,  caudal,  and  anal  fins  dusky;  the  margin  of  dorsal  black;  a dark 
supraorbital  spot;  pectoral  and  ventral  pale. 

43.  Menticirrhus  littoralis  (Holbrook).  Surf  Whiting. 

One  specimen,  11.75  inches  long,  from  Progreso.  Head  4.5;  depth  4.5;  eye  7.3;  snout  3.25;  inter- 
orbital  4.75;  D.  x-i,  24;  A.  i,  7;  scales  8-60-16.  This  fish  has  not  heretofore  been  recorded  south  of 
Texas.  It  is  worth  noting  that  the  more  southern  specimens  have  smaller  scales,  as  noted  in  another 
member  of  the  same  family,  Aplodinotus  grunniens,  found  at  Montecristo. 


44.  Aplodinotus  grunniens  Bafinesque.  Fresh-water  Drum;  Gaspergou. 

One  specimen,  13  inches  long,  from  the  Rio  Usumacinta  at  Montecristo.  Head  3.5;  depth  3.2; 
eye  4.67;  snout  4;  maxillary  2.75;  mandible  2.5;  interorbital  3.5;  preorbital  6.5;  scales  9-60-12,  counted 
from  vent  to  lateral  line,  and  from  first  dorsal  spine  to  and  including  lateral  line;  D.  x,  31;  A.  ii,  7; 
longest  dorsal  spine  2.16  in  head;  longest  anal  spine  1.67  in  head;  pectoral  1 in  head.  Body  oblong; 
back  much  elevated  and  compressed;  profile  long,  steep,  and  straight;  head  slightly  compressed;  mouth 
moderate,  subinferior,  low;  maxillary  reaching  middle  of  eye;  teeth  in  villiform  bands,  outer  scarcely 
enlarged;  lower  pharyngeals  completely  united;  gillrakers  short,  thickish,  6-j-14;  preopercle  serrated; 
snout  bluntish;  dorsal  spines  strong  and  high,  a scaly  sheath  at  base  of  spines,  the  two  dorsals 
connected;  caudal  doubly  truncate;  second  anal  spine  unusually  large  and  strong;  scales  rather  thin 
and  deep,  the  series  somewhat  oblique,  crowded  anteriorly. 


FISHES  EEOM  MEXICO  AND  CENTRAL  AMERICA. 


155 


Color  in  alcohol,  grayish-silvery,  dusky  above,  with  indications  of  two  or  three  darker  hands  over 
||  shoulder;  a dark  blotch  on  opercle;  dorsal  and  caudal  same  as  body,  the  upper  half  of  membrane 
j|  darker,  other  fins  pale.  This  fish  differs  from  more  northern  Specimens  in  the  long,  narrow,  falcate 
pectoral  fin. 

The  finding  of  this  species  so  far  south  is  a very  interesting  discovery.  Though  a fish  of  wide 
j distribution,  occurring  throughout  the  Great  Lakes  region  and  southward  in  the  larger  streams  of  the 
Mississippi  Valley  and  Texas,  it  has  not  hitherto  been  noted  from  any  point  south  of  Matamoras  near 
|j  the  mouth  of  the  Rio  Grande,  from  which  place  Girard,  in  1859,  described  it  as  a new  species  under 
jl  the  name  Amblodon  neglectus.  It  was  obtained  by  Drs.  Jordan  and  Gilbert  in  the  Red  River  at 
j|  Fulton,  Ark.,  and  the  Colorado  River  at  Austin,  and  the  senior  writer  of  this  paper  has  seen,  in 
the  Houston  market,  numerous  examples  from  near  the  mouth  of  the  Trinity  River,  Texas.  He  has 
| also  recorded  it  from  the  Neches  and  Angelina  rivers  in  eastern  Texas,  and  from  Lakes  Tasse  and 
{ Peigneur,  Louisiana.  The  Rio  Usumacinta  is  about  600  miles  south  and  300  miles  east  of  the  mouth  of 
the  Rio  Grande. 

45.  Petenia  splendida  Gunther. 

The  collections  contain  3 specimens  of  this  fish  from  Montecristo  and  1 from  Frontera.  Head  2.87; 
j depth  2.6;  eye  5.3;  snout  2.8;  interorbital  4;  maxillary  1.8;  mandible  1.5;  D.  xv,  13;  A.  v,  10;  scales 
j 6-38-12,  8 vei’tical  or  6 horizontal  rows  on  cheek;  longest  dorsal  spine  about  3 in  head;  longest  dorsal 
j ray  about  1.8;  last  anal  spine  2.75;  longest  anal  ray  nearly  2;  pectoral  1.5;  ventrals  1.6. 


Fig.  5. — Petenia  splendida  Gunther. 


Body  stout,  greatly  compressed;  dorsal  outline  strongly  arched;  snout  long  and  pointed;  eye  large, 
high  up;  mouth  large,  lower  jaw  projecting;  maxillary  long,  clavate,  reaching  much  beyond  eye; 
preorbital  very  narrow;  caudal  peduncle  much  compressed,  width  2.5  in  least  depth;  form  and  general 
appearance  very  much  resembling  the  crappie  ( Pomoxis  annularis );  dorsal  and  anal  fins  large,  tips  of 
the  rays  reaching  beyond  base  of  caudal;  ventrals  long  and  pointed,  their  tips  reaching  base  of  anal. 

Color,  silvery  on  side,  darker  above,  body  everywhere  with  numerous  small  black  specks,  these 
especially  plain  on  side  of  head  and  humeral  region,  the  dark  on  rest  of  body  taking  the  form  of  dark 
borders  on  the  scales;  middle  of  side,  especially  in  younger  individuals,  with  6 or  7 dark  vertical 
blotches  appearing  as  half  bars  extending  from  median  line  of  back  to  below  middle  of  side;  the  first 
of  these  rather  as  a dark  blotch  on  upper  part  of  opercle;  base  of  caudal  with  a large  round  black  spot, 
more  or  less  definitely  surrounded  by  a white  border,  the  white  in  most  specimens  as  a distinct  white 
border,  but  in  others  breaking  up  and  penetrating  the  black  spot;  dorsal,  anal,  and  caudal  with  numerous 
small  round  black  spots,  plainest  and  most  numerous  on  the  soft  dorsal,  and  arranged  more  or  less 
definitely  in  rows  extending  downward  and  backward;  pectoral  pale;  ventrals  somewhat  dusky. 

The  above  description  is  based  chiefly  upon  the  largest  specimen,  which  is  from  Montecristo. 


156 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


46.  Cichlasoma  teapae,  new  species. 

Type,  No.  50005,  U.S.N.M.,  a mature  male  9.5  inches  long,  collected  April  1, 1900,  by  E.  W.  Nelson 
and  E.  A.  Goldman,  in  the  Bio  Teapa,  at  Teapa,  Tabasco,  Mexico.  Cotype,  No.  976,  U.S.F.O.  reserve, 
a well  preserved  specimen,  8 inches  long,  collected  at  the  same  time  and  place. 

Head  3.75;  depth  2.6;  eye  5;  snout  2;  maxillary  4.5;  mandible  3.5;  interorbital  2.6;  preor- 
bital 3.2;  D.  xvn,  13;  longest  dorsal  spine  2.3  in  head,  ray  1.2;  A.  vi,  9,  longest  anal  spine  2.2,  ray 
1.25;  pectoral  1.5;  ventrals  1.2;  caudal  1.5;  scales  6-33-12,  5 rows  on  cheek.  Body  comparatively 
slender,  compressed;  caudal  peduncle  much  compressed,  its  least  width  3 in  its  least  depth;  head 
short,  compressed,  its  anterior  profile  ascending  very  abruptly  from  the  short,  blunt  snout;  a high 
nuchal  crest  or  hump,  highest  above  eyes,  the  anterior  profile  thus  made  concave  in  front  of  eyes; 
snout  short,  anterior  profile  ascending  abruptly;  mouth  small,  nearly  horizontal;  jaws  subequal,  or 
the  lower  slightly  included;  teeth  strong,  canine-like,  tips  brown;  eye  rather  small,  entirely  above  tip 
of  snout;  dorsal  fin  beginning  over  base  of  pectoral,  the  spines  rather  slender  and  weak;  soft  rays  of 
dorsal  long,  reaching  base  of  caudal;  anal  spines  stronger  than  those  of  dorsal,  the  rays  somewhat 
longer;  caudal  fin  truncate;  pectoral  rather  broad,  not  reaching  tips  of  ventrals;  ventrals  long  and 


Fig.  6. — Cichlasoma  teapse,  new  species. 


l'V< 


c , .. 


n i V*  I 


'i  i 


pointed,  extending  slightly  beyond  vent  in  type,  not  quite  reaching  it  in  cotype;  tips  of  dorsal  and 
anal  extending  slightly  beyond  base  of  caudal. 

Color  in  alcohol,  dusky  white,  paler  on  belly,  the  outer  half  of  exposed  portion  of  each  scale 
brownish  black,  the  distinction  between  this  and  the  pale  base  of  the  scale  being  very  marked;  traces 
of  four  or  five  dark  vertical  blotches  on  side  under  dorsal  fin  and  one  at  base  of  tail;  trace  of  black 
blotch  under  and  above  tip  of  pectoral;  entire  head  pale  brownish;  dorsal,  anal,  and  caudal  brownish, 
apparently  without  spots;  pectoral  and  ventrals  pale. 

This  species  is  related  to  C.  melcmurus,  but  differs  from  it  in  the  more  slender  body  and  very 
different  coloration.  It  also  resembles  IJeros  gibbiceps  Steindachner,  the  type  of  which  also  came 
from  Teapa,  in  the  strong  development  of  the  nuchal  crest.  From  that  species  it  differs  in  the  presence 
.of  a frenum  on  lower  jaw,  which  makes  it  a true  Cichlasoma,  and  in  the  different  coloration. 

47.  Cichlasoma  parma  (Gunther). 

One  specimen,  9 inches  long,  from  Frontera,  and  One  4.13..inches  long,  from  Montecristo.  Head 
3;  depth  2;  eye  4.75;  snout  2.17;  preorbital  3.75;  interorbital  2.6;  maxillary  3.5;  mandible  2.4;  D. 
xvn,  11;  A.  vi,  8;  scales  6-30-12,  6 rows  on  cheek;  longest  dorsal  spine  2,  ray  1.1;  longest  anal  spine  2, 

uS.l-> 


FISHES  FROM  MEXICO  AMD  CENTRAL  AMERICA. 


157 


ray  1.2;  pectoral  1.4;  ventral  1.1;  caudal  1.25.  Body  oblong-ovate,  much  compressed;  dorsal  profile 
strongly  and  regularly  arched,  slightly  concave  between  anterior  part  of  eyes;  snout  moderate;  mouth 
moderate,  jaws  subequal,  maxillary  not  nearly  reaching  ej^e;  teeth  in  front  of  jaws  strong,  canine-like, 
somewhat  recurved,  tips  brown;  caudal  peduncle  much  compressed,  least  width  2.5  in  least  depth; 
fins  large;  soft  lobes  of  dorsal  and  anal  reaching  past  middle  of  caudal;  pectoral  broad,  scarcely  reaching 
vent;  ventrals  pointed,  reaching  base  of  anal. 

Color,  pale  brownish,  side  with  several  more  or  less  indistinct  diffuse  black  blotches;  a more  or 
less  ocellate  black  spot  at  base  of  caudal;  pectoral  pale,  other  fins  dusky,  the  soft  dorsal,  anal  and 
caudal  with  numerous  obscure  small  black  spots. 

This  species  resembles  C.  melanurus,  but  seems  to  differ  in  the  somewhat  deeper  body,  longersnout, 
and  more  spotted  coloration  on  the  caudal  and  soft  dorsal  and  anal. 

48.  Cichlasoma  melanurus  (Gunther). 

Four  specimens,  each  about  8 inches  long,  3 from  Montecristo  and  1 from  Teapa.  Head  3;  depth 
2.2;  eye  4.5;  snout  2.4;  preorbital  3.5;  interorbital  2.75;  premaxillary  4;  mandible  2.75;  D.  xvii,  11; 
A.  vi,  8;  scales  6-33-12,  5 rows  on  cheek;  longest  dorsal  spine  about  2,  ray  1.17;  last  anal  spine  2.17, 
ray  1.2;  pectoral  1.4;  ventral  1,  caudal  1.  Body  rather  oblong,  compressed,  the  back  considerably 
elevated;  snout  short;  anterior  profile  more  or  less  concave,  depending  upon  the  development  of  the 
fatty  nuchal  hump;  eye  entirely  above  level  of  upper  lip;  mouth  small,  slightly  oblique,  jaws  subequal; 
anterior  teeth  in  jaws  moderate-sized  canines,  brown  at  tip. 

Color,  dirty  white,  marbled  and  blotched  with  darker,  the  dark  tending  to  gather  in  irregular 
vertical  bars;  a more  or  less  distinct  ocellated  black  spot  at  base  of  caudal,  this  sometimes  obscure; 
pectoral  pale,  other  fins  more  or  less  dusky ; soft  dorsal  and  anal  black  at  base,  the  outer  part  pale. 

This  species  resembles  C.  parma,  but  seems  to  differ  from  it  in  the  more  slender  body,  the  shorter 
snout,  the  more  abrupt  anterior  profile  and  in  the  coloration. 


c. 


49.  Heros  afiinis  Gunther. 

One  specimen,  3.4  inches  long,  from  Progreso. 

50.  Heros  cyanoguttatus  (Baird  & Girard). 

One  example,  8 inches  long,  from  Montecristo.  Head  3.2;  depth  2;  eye  4;  snout  2;  preorbital  3; 

interorbital  2.3;  maxillary  3.5;  mandible  2.75;  D.  xvi,  11;  A.  vi,  9;  scales  6-30-11,  Grows  on  cheek; 
longest  dorsal  spine  2.2,  ray  a little  longer  than  head;  last  anal  spine  2.25,  ray  1.2;  pectoral  1.2;  ventral 
1;  caudal  1.  Body  short  and  deep;  head  very  short,  anterior  profile  very  high,  gently  curved  from 
tip  of  snout  to  origin  of  dorsal;  eye  very  high;  mouth  low,  small,  nearly  horizontal;  teeth  rather  small, 
canine-like  in  front  of  jaws,  tijos  slightly  brown;  soft  dorsal  and  anal  extending  to  or  beyond  middle  of 
caudal.  Color  in  alcohol,  dirty  white,  blotched  and  spotted  with  black,  the  black  most  evident  below 
lateral  line;  outer  half  of  many  of  the  scales  black;  middle  of  side  with  numerous  small,  irregular 
wavy  lines  and  roundish  pale  spots,  these  probably  blue  in  life;  pectoral  pale;  the  other  fins  dusky  or 
even  black,  the  ventrals  and  anal  blackest. 

This  species  has  not  hitherto  been  reported  from  southern  Mexico. 

51.  Heros  urophthalmus  Gunther. 

Head  2.9;  depth  2;  eye  4.3  (4  to  4.5);  snout  2.6  (2.5  to  3) ; maxillary  2.67;  mandible  2.25;  inter- 
orbital  3;  preorbital  4;  D.  xvi,  10;  A.  vi,  7 (v  to  vii,  6 to  8);  scales  5-29-10,  5 rows  on  cheek;  longest 
dorsal  spine  2.25,  ray  1.25;  last  anal  spine  2.25,  ray  1.4;  caudal  1.4;  pectoral  1.25;  ventral  1.25.  Body 
short  and  robust,  compressed,  the  caudal  peduncle  deep  and  narrow;  back  considerably  elevated, 
anterior  profile  concave  between  the  eyes;  no  nuchal  crest  on  any  of  the  specimens  examined;  head 
large,  snout  rather  long;  mouth  rather  large,  somewhat  oblique;  maxillary  reaching  orbit;  jaws  equal; 
teeth  conic,  the  tips  brown;  scales  large,  smooth,  lateral  line  complete,  but  dropping  three  rows  under 
middle  of  soft  dorsal;  fins  all  well  developed;  pectoral  rather  long,  nearly  reaching  origin  of  anal; 
ventral  reaching  past  vent;  soft  portion  of  anal  and  dorsal  reaching  middle  of  caudal. 

Color,  dark  or  brownish,  with  7 broad  black  vertical  crossbars,  the  first  extending  from  in  front  of 
dorsal  fin  to  upper  end  of  gill-opening,  the  second  from  under  front  of  dorsal  to  base  of  pectoral,  the 
third  and  fourth  from  spinous  dorsal  to  belly  between  ventrals  and  anal,  the  fifth  from  front  of  soft 
dorsal  to  front  of  soft  anal,  the  sixth  across  base  of  caudal  peduncle,  the  seventh  across  middle  of 
caudal  peduncle;  a large  ocellated  black  spot  at  base  of  caudal  fin;  pectoral  pale,  all  other  fins  dark, 
sometimes  almost  black,  probably  bluish  in  life. 


158 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


This  species  is  well  represented  in  the  collection,  there  being  7 specimens  7 to  8 inches  long  from 
Mujeres,  Island,  7 specimens  8 to  9.5  inches  long  from  Montecristo,  7 specimens  6.75  to  8.25  inches  long 
from  Chichen  Itza,  and  3 specimens  3.5  to  4 inches  long  from  Progreso.  It  is  easy  to  distinguish  the' 
specimens  from  any  of  these  localities.  Those  from  the  salt  or  brackish  waters  at  Mujeres  Island  are 
shorter,  plumper,  and  decidedly  darker  than  those  from  either  of  the  other  localities;  the  black  bars 
are  very  distinct,  as  is  also  the  caudal  ocellus.  The  specimens  from  Montecristo  are  more  slender 
and  the  color  very  much  paler;  the  black  vertical  bars  are  in  each  case  quite  indistinct,  in  some 
instances  being  almost  or  quite  lost.  The  black  caudal  spot  is  less  black  and  the  white  border  more 
evident.  The  7 specimens  from  the  cenote  at  Chichen  Itza  are  intermediate  in  color  between  those 
from  the  two  other  places,  and  are  considerably  more  slender.  They  have  an  emaciated,  starved 
appearance,  which  is  doubtless  accounted  for  by  the  fact  that  they  had  been  caught  from  the  cenote 
and  kept  in  a trough  or  small  artificial  inclosure,  presumably  without  sufficient  food,  for  some  time 
previous  to  coming  into  Mr.  Nelson’s  possession. 


Fig.  7. — Iieros  urophthalmus  Gunther. 


Although  it  is  easy  to  pick  out  the  individual  fish  from  any  one  of  these  localities,  we  do  not  find 
any  structural  differences  of  value.  The  color  differences  are  due  simply  to  the  character  of  the  water 
in  which  they  were  found.  The  difference  in  form  is  simply  a question  of  food  supply.  Had  all 
received  the  same  food  or  in  the  same  amount,  these  differences  probably  would  not  have  appeared. 

52.  Spheroides  marmoratus  (Ranzani).  Swell-fish. 

One  specimen,  10.75  inches  long,  from  Cozumel  Island. 

53.  Spheroides  testudineus  (Linnaeus).  Swell-fish;  Puffer. 

One  specimen,  9 inches  long,  from  Mujeres  Island.  Head  3;  eye  8;  snout  2;  interorbital  2.5  in  head, 
1.3  in  snout;  D.  8;  A.  6.  No  cirri,  no  prickles,  but  many  pores  over  most  of  anterior  half  of  body. 

54.  Philypnus  dormitor  (Lacepede).  Guavina. 

Two  specimens,  6 and  10.5  inches  long,  from  Teapa.  Head  3.6;  depth  6.6;  eye  7.5;  snout  3.25; 
maxillary  2.33;  interorbital  4.87;  preorbital  7.5;  D.  vi,  10  or  11;  A.  i,  8;  scales  about  60,-22. 


FISHES  FROM  MEXICO  AND  CENTRAL  AMERICA. 


159 


55.  Dormitator  maeulatus  (Bloch).  Mapiro. 

Four  small  specimens,  1.7  to  2.3  inches  long,  collected  December  25,  1898,  by  Mr.  C.  0.  Deam 
from  a salt-water  pool  at  Salina  Cruz. 

56.  Batrachoides  goldmani,  new  species. 

Type,  No.  50006,  U.  S.  N.  M.,  a specimen  10.5  inches  long,  collected  May  7,  1900,  by  E.  W.  Nelson 
and  E.  A.  Goldman,  in  the  Rio  Usumacinta,  at  Montecristo,  Tabasco,  Mexico. 

Head  2.75;  depth  5;  eye  9;  snout  4.25;  D.  iii,  24;  A.  18.  Body  fusiform ; head  very  broad,  much 
depressed;  caudal  peduncle  slender,  much  compressed;  mouth  large,  lower  jaw  strongly  projecting; 
maxillary  reaching  far  beyond  eye;  teeth  small,  those  on  vomer  in  two  irregular  rows,  about  26  in 
number,  the  inner  the  larger;  palatine  teeth  about  15  on  each  side,  irregular  in  size  and  position;  teeth 
of  lower  jaw  in  2 large  patches  in  front,  the  outer  somewhat  enlarged;  eye  small;  dermal  fold  on  side  of 
occiput  obscure;  dermal  filaments  on  jaws  and  sides  of  head  rather  small;  operclewith  2 rather  strong 


divergent  spines,  but  covered  by  skin;  suboperele  with  2 similar  stronger  spines;  dorsal  spines  short 
and  blunt;  soft  dorsal  long,  about  half  length  of  body;  anal  base  2.5  in  length;  caudal  rounded; 
pectoral  moderate,  1.67  in  head;  ventrals  short,  2 in  pectoral. 

Color,  grayish,  with  4 irregular  dark  cross-blotches,  the  first  under  base  of  pectoral  and  involving 
the  3 free  spines;  the  second  under  first  one- third  of  dorsal  and  extending  upon  it;  the  third  under  last 
(^ie-third  of  dorsal  and  likewise  extending  upon  it;  the  fourth,  a dark  bar  at  base  of  caudal;  top  of  head 
and  back  olivaceous  or  dusky,  blotched  irregularly  with  dark;  under  parts  of  head  paler,  with  dusky 
and  violet  markings;  spinous  dorsal  dark;  soft  dorsal  violet  or  rusty  with  2 large  black  blotches  on  base; 
a smaller  one  between  them,  the  fin  crossed  by  irregular  short  dark  and  pale  lines;  anal  similar  to  soft 
dorsal;  caudal  dark,  irregularly  barred  at  the  base;  pectoral  dark  at  base,  the  rest  of  fin  with  irregular 
bars  of  white  an,d  brownish;  axil  pale;  ventrals  somewhat  dusky. 

This  species  differs  from  B.  surinamensis  in  several  important  particulars,  but  chiefly  in  the  smaller 
size  of  the  anal  and  dorsal  fins.  In  B.  surinamensis  the  anal  has  26  rays  and  its  base  is  nearly  half  the 
length  of  the  fish,  and  the  dorsal  has  29  rays,  the  base  being  more  than  half  length  of  body. 


Contributions  from  the  Biological  Laboratory  of  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission, 
Woods  Hole,  Massachusetts. 


THE  REPRODUCTIVE  PERIOD  IN  THE  LOBSTER 


By  FRANCIS  H.  HERRICK. 


Whenever  it  is  impracticable  to  determine  the  reproductive  periods  in  an  animal 
by  watching  its  behavior,  the  structure  of  the  ovary  will  usually  furnish  a clew.  This 
is  true  of  the  Crustacea,  and  probably  of  all  other  animals.  My  present  aim  is  not 
only  to  illustrate  this  fact,  but  to  settle  certain  questions  concerning  the  breeding 
habits  of  the  American  lobster  about  which  doubt  is  still  expressed.  To  state  the 
question  briefly:  How  often  does  the  adult  animal  lay  eggs? — Every  year,  once  in 
two  years,  or  at  longer  intervals,  for  these  diverse  answers  have  been  given  by 
various  writers. 

Over  ten  years  ago  1 found  that  a study  of  the  comparative  anatomy  of  the 
ovaries  taken  at  different  seasons  seemed  to  prove  the  impossibility  of  annual 
spawning,*  and  to  demonstrate  that  eggs  were  not  laid  of  tenor,  as  a rule,  than  every 
other  year.  This  was  further  illustrated  in  a fuller  work  published  in  1895.  f While 
confident  that  these  conclusions  were  reliable,  the  main  evidence  in  their  support  was 
indirect,  as  I took  pains  to  state  at  that  time.  It  is  now  possible  to  supplement 
these  earlier  observations  by  direct  experiments  upon  living  animals,  and  the  theory 
of  biennial  spawning  is  supported  by  a variety  of  testimony.  The  true  answer  to 
the  question,  How  often  does  the  mature  lobster  lay  her  eggs?  is,  therefore,  Once 
in  two  years,  as  a rule. 

We  will  now  consider  the  evidence  upon  which  this  conclusion  is  based.  Apart 
from  the  question  of  the  frequency  of  spawning,  the  following  facts  are  known:  (1) 
The  majority  of  the  egg -producers  for  any  given  year  lay  at  a definite  season — namely, 
in  summer.  The  breeding  or  egg-laying-  season  at  Woods  Hole,  Massachusetts, 
reaches  its  height  during  the  latter  part  of  July.  (2)  Following  ovulation  comes  a 
long  period  of  fosterage,  inaccurately  called  incubation,  which  lasts  from  ten  to  eleven 
months,  during  which  the  eggs  are  carried  under  the  “tail”  or  abdomen.  (3)  The 
hatching  of  this  generation  of  external  eggs  follows  in  Mav  or  June. 

To  revert  now  to  the  question  of  the  frequency  of  spawning.  Do  the  berried 
females  whose  young  hatch  in  May,  1902,  lay  again  in  July  of  that  year,  or  not 
until  July,  1903,  or  in  some  subsequent  year? 

In  1895  I recommended  that  the  direct  experiment  should  be  tried  of  keeping- 
female  lobsters  alive  from  the  period  of  the  hatching  of  their  last  broods  until  the 

* Notes  on  the  Habits  and  Larval  Stages  of  the  American  Lobster,  Johns  Hopkins  University  Bulletin,  No.  88,  May  1891. 
t The  American  Lobster;  A Study  of  its  Habits  and  Development.  U.  S.  Fish  Commission,  Washington,  1895. 

161 


F.  C.  B.  1901—11 


162 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


laying  of  the  next  generation  of  eggs,  which  upon  the  theory  of  biennial  spawning 
would  be  due  in  one  year.*  Through  the  courtesy  of  the  United  States  Fish  Com- 
mission this  experiment  was  made  in  1900-1901.  On  June  19,  1900,  Mr.  Vinal 
Edwards  placed  in  a floating  car  thirty-six  lobsters  from  which  the  old  external  eggs 
had  been  removed,  fed  them  regularly,  and  on  the  first  of  each  month  following 
caught  one  of  the  animals  and  preserved  its  ovaries.  When  the  last  survivor  was 
taken,  May  1,  1901,  just  ten  months  and  twelve  days  from  the  beginning  of  the 
experiment,  not  one  of  the  animals  had  laid  eggs.  Further,  an  examination  of 
the  ovaries  disclosed  no  evidence  of  absorption  of  the  ova  or  abnormal  retardation 
of  their  growth,  such  as  we  might  look  for  upon  the  theory  of  annual  spawning — 
nothing  in  fact  but  a slow,  regular  growth  of  the  organs. 


2.  3. 

Fig.  1. — Initial  stage  of  ovarian  egg  shortly  after  egg-laying  in  the  lobster.  Radius,  5.7 min.;  contents,  0.77 
c.  c.  Animal  taken  36  to  48  hours  after  egg-laying,  July  29. 

Fig.  2. — Ovarian  egg  in  intermediate  stage,  one  year  after  egg-laying.  Radius,  14.1  mm.;  contents,  11.71  c.  c.; 
average  of  ten  ova  from  animal  taken  June  19,  and  ten  ova.  taken  June  28. 

Fig.  3. — Ovarian  egg  in  final  stage,  when  ready  to  be  laid.  Radius,  32  mm.;  contents,  136.97  c.  c.;  average 
of  five  unextruded  ova  from  the  oviduct  of  a lobster  which  had  recently  laid  eggs,  August  17. 

The  testimony  which  is  plainly  borne  by  the  structure  of  the  ovaries  of  these 
animals  is  of  much  importance,  and  will  be  briefly  analyzed. 

In  a single  generation  of  ovarian  eggs  three  stages  are  entitled  to  special  con- 
sideration: (1)  The  initial  stage,  when  the  ova  of  the  preceding  generation  are  laid; 
(2)  the  intermediate  stage,  when  these  eggs  are  hatched;  and  (3)  the  final  stage,  when 
the  ovarian  eggs  have  reached  their  full  size  and  are  ready  to  be  expelled  from  the 
body.  (Figs.  1-3. )f  The  time  interval  between  stages  1 and  2 is  known  to  be 
approximately  one  year,  being  measured  by  the  development  of  the  external  eggs 

*Ibid,  p.  72. 

fAll  the  figures  in  this  paper  are  drawn  to  the  same  scale,  with  an  enlargement  of  40  diameters.  Unless  other- 
wise stated,  the  size  of  each  egg  figured  represents  an  average  of  ten  of  the  larger  peripheral  ova  from  the  ovary  of  the 
same  individual,  all  being  subjected  to  the  same  treatment.  The  eggs  were  rolled  under  slips  of  glass  and  then  outlined 
with  the  camera,  the  measurements  being  made  from  the  sketches  thus  obtained.  Several  measurements  of  each  egg 
were  required,  owing  to  the  distortion  which  arises  from  mutual  pressure  in  the  ovary. 


THE  REPRODUCTIVE  PERIOD  IN  THE  LOBSTER. 


163 


which  serve  as  a handy  and  convenient  chronometer.  The  ratio  of  growth  in  stages 
1 and  2 can  also  be  determined.  The  volume  of  the  laid  egg  in  the  final  stage  is  also 
known,  so  that  it  only  remains  to  ascertain  the  time  interval  between  stages  2 and  3. 


Pig.  4. — Series  to  illustrate  the  growth  of  the  ovarian  eggs  during  first  year  after  spawning,  (a)  Ovarian  egg 
in  initial  stage  as  shown  in  Fig.  1.  ( b ) Ovarian  egg  fifteen  days  after  egg-laying.  External  eggs  borne  on 
the  swimmerets,  in  “nauplius”  stage.  Radius,  8.6  mm.;  contents,  2.67  c.  c.,  August  6.  (c)  Ovarian  egg 

forty-two  days  after  egg  extrusion,  the  age  being  determined  by  state  of  development  of  attached  ova. 
R.  12;  contents,  7.22  c.  c.,  August  21.  ( d ) Ovarian  egg,  after  approximately  one  year  from  egg-laying,  average 
of  ten  ova  from  lobster  taken  June  19,  1900,  with  external  egg  ready  to  hatch.  R.  16.2;  contents,  17.77  c.  c. 


The  relative  volumes  of  the  ovarian  eggs  at  these  successive  periods  are  as  fol- 
lows: 0.77  c.  c.,  11.71  c.  c.,  136.07  c.  c.  Accordingly,  during  the  first,  period  of 
growth  the  ova  increase  in  volume  fifteen  times,  or  the  ratio  of  growth  may  be 
expressed  by  I : 15.  Upon  the  theory  of  biennial  spawning  we  should  expect  the 
ratio  of  growth  for  the  second  period  to  be  approximately  the  same.  The  values 


Fig.  5.— Series  illustrating  the  growth  of  the  ovarian  eggs  during  the  second  year  after  spawning,  (a)  Ova- 
rian egg  one  year  ten  months  after  egg-laying.  The  female  from  which  this  ovary  was  taken  was  kept 
in  a floating  car  from  June  19,  1900  (period  of  hatching),  until  May  1,  1901.  Radius  17.9;  contents,  23.97. 
( b ) Average  size  of  two  fresh  ova,  taken  August  19.  These  eggs  were  soon  to  be  laid  as  shown  by  their 
size,  color,  and  general  appearance  ot  ovary,  (c)  Unextruded  ovarian  eggs,  taken  about  three  days  after 
egg-laying.  The  external  eggs  were  in  segmentation.  Radius,  27.1;  contents,  83.19  c.  c. 


given  above,  for  which  only  a relative  degree  of  accuracy  can  be  maintained,  give 
this  ratio  as  1 : 12.  This  result  supports  the  conclusion  that  the  ovarian  ova  which  in 
spring  following  the  last  ovulation  attain  the  size  shown  in  tig.  2,  experience  a second 
period  of  rapid  growth  and  are  laid  during  the  following  summer.  This  is  rendered 


164 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


all  the  more  certain  from  the  characteristic  appearance  of  the  ovaries  of  certain 
lobsters  taken  in  summer  in  the  very  midst  of  the  spawning  season.  There  are 
certain  infallible  signs  which  prove  that  the  ovarian  eggs  are  due  in  the  current 
season,  the  most  conspicuous  of  which  is  the  color  change.  From  a light  pea-green 
the  ovary  becomes  a dark  olive  or  rather  a greenish-black  color,  which  is  often 
noticeable  at  the  very  beginning  of  the  period  of  rapid  growth,  or  at  least  when 
many  of  the  ova  are  scarcely  more  than  £ mm.  in  diameter  (see  fig.  5,  «),  and  not  due 
for  some  weeks.  Then  with  the  further  growth  of  the  ova  the  transparent  elastic 
wall  of  the  ovary  becomes  distended  and  assumes,  a beaded  appearance.  As  the 
period  of  ovulation  approaches,  the  ovarian  eggs  become  free,  and,  if  the  wall  is  cut, 
flow  out  in  a stream.  It  is  thus  evident  that  during  the  second  year  the  ovary  under- 
goes little  change  with  respect  to  the  size  of  the  ova  up  to  the  beginning  of  summer 
or  of  the  second  period  of  rapid  growth.  Further  direct  observations  upon  lobsters 
kept  alive  for  upwards  of  ten  months  after  the  hatching  of  a brood  demonstrate  that 
their  ovarian  eggs  attain  that  size  which  the  theory  of  biennial  spawning  demands. 

Accordingly,  a very  slight  change  from  the  condition  shown  in  stage  2 ushers  in 
a second  period  of  rapid  growth,  and  this  period,  beginning  usually  sometime  in  June 
or  early  July,  is  brought  to  a close  in  the  course  of  a few  weeks,  when  the  new  gen- 
eration of  eggs  is  extruded. 

The  rapidity  of  growth  of  the  ovarian  eggs  for  a period  of  six  weeks,  as  meas- 
ured from  the  initial  stage  bv  means  of  the  chronometer  provided  by  the  eggs 
attached  to  the  swimmerets,  is  illustrated  by  figures  4 and  5.  The  egg  more  than 
doubles  in  volume  during  the  first  fortnight,  while  in  seven  weeks  the  initial  volume 
has  been  increased  9.3  times. 

While  we  speak  of  “stages”  and  “periods  of  growth”  as  a matter  of  conven- 
ience, it  is  hardly,  necessary  to  bo  reminded  that  every  change  is  gradual,  and  that 
no  abrupt  transitions  are  known. 

The  theory  of  biennial  spawning  is  supported:  (1)  By  the  statistics  of  the 
fishery;  (2)  by  the  anatomy  of  the  ovary  of  the  adult  female  taken  at  different 
seasons;  (3)  by  the  ratio  of  growth  of  a given  generation  of  ovarian  ova  for  stated 
periods;  (4)  by  observation  on  animals  kept  alive  for  long  periods;  (5)  b}r  the  evi- 
dence of  the  rapid  growth  of  ovarian  eggs  of  spawners  for  any  given  year  during 
the  height  of  the  breeding  season. 

It  is  to  lie  expected  that  the  rule  to  which  the  majority  conforms  has  many 
exceptions  in  individual  cases,  for  variation  is  the  rule  of  life.  It  seems  quite  probable 
that  occasionally  a lobster  may  lay  eggs  in  two  consecutive -seasons,  and  that  in  other 
cases  the  normal  biennial. period  may  be  even  prolonged,  but  I have  nothing  to  offer 
under  this  head. 

I have  shown  in  an  earlier  work*  that  a considerable  number  of  spawners  laid 
their  eggs  out  of  season,  as  in  the  fall  and  winter  months.  How  can  we  account  for 
these  fall  and  winter  eggs?  An  experiment  tried  by  Mr.  Cunningham, f in  the 
summer  of  1897,  on  the  European  lobster,  suggests  an  answer  to  the  question.  At 

Falmouth,  England,  five  female  lobsters  bearing  external  eggs  about  ready  to  hatch 



* Ibid,  p.  44. 

f Contributions  to  the  knowledge  of  the  national  history  of  the  lobster  and  crab.  Journ.  Royal  Inst.  Cornwall,  No. 
xliv,  1897. 


THE  REPRODUCTIVE  PERIOD  IN  THE  LOBSTER. 


165 

were  placed  in  a floating  box  in  summer  time.  When  their  ova  had  all  hatched  out 
these  females  were  kept  confined  with  two  males  until  after  October  1-1,  when  one 
was  found  to  have  newly  spawned.  This  proves  that  it  is  possible  for  the  European 
lobster  to  spawn  in  two  successive  years,  but  it  does  not  prove  that  this  is  the  com- 
mon habit  of  the  species.  It  also  strongly  suggests  that  these  October  eggs  corre- 
spond to  the  “fall”  and  “winter”  eggs  occasionally  produced  in  the  American 
form.  By  accelerated  growth  of  the  ovary,  eggs  might  be  laid  in  fall  or  winter 
when  not  normally  due  until  the  summer  following.  Under  such  circumstances  the 
ovarian  eggs  would  come  to  maturity  in  fifteen  instead  of  twenty-three  months.  It 
would  be  interesting  to  know  when  these  fall  eggs  hatch.  As  already  suggested,  it  is 
possible  that  they  do  not  give  rise  to  the  regular  summer  broods.  In  the  American 
species  hatching  of  larva?  has  been  casually  detected  in  November  and  January. 

Professor  Prince,  who  rejects  the  idea  of  a biennial  spawning  period,  expresses 
surprise  that  the  notion  first  advanced  by  persons  wholly  untrained  and  unqualified 
to  form  a reliable  judgment  has  received  support  recently  from  men  of  scientific 
standing.  A statement  of  mine  is  given  a construction  which  might  seem  to  support 
the  idea  that  eggs  are  laid  in  consecutive  years.  Thus  he  says  that  I found  in  paper- 
shell  lobsters  in  July  that  just  after  the  brood  had  hatched  and  the  molting  was  over 
the  eggs  in  the  ovaries  were  no  less  than  half  the  size  of  mature  ova.  I speak  of  the 
diameter  of  these  ova  which,  if  by  size  is  implied  their  volume,  is  quite  a different 
matter.* 

Again,  it  is  said  that  I do  “ not  hesitate  to  affirm  concerning  this  supposed  bien- 
nial spawning  that  to  prove  it  requires  only  the  dissection  of  a female  ivith  eggs 
ready  to  hatch  in  June,  July,  or  August,  and  it  will  be  found  that  “the  ovarian 
eggs  have  had,  in  all  these  cases,  from  ten  months’  to  a year’s  growth” — the  very 
point,  in  fact,  being  assumed  which  requires  proof.”  It  would  be  a work  of  superero- 
gation to  go  over  in  detail  this  ground  again,  but  I can  reaffirm  the  statement  with 
added  emphasis.  That  the  majority  of  female  lobsters  which  spawn  in  summer  carry 
their  eggs  attached  to  the  swimmerets  until  these  same  eg'gs  hatch  ten  or  eleven  months 
later  is  a proved  and  settled  fact  admitting  of  no  doubt.  It  was  proved  at  Woods 
Hole,  and  the  same  experiment  was  conducted  on  a large  scale  by  Mr.  11.  P.  Green- 
leaf,  at  Southport,  Me.  f In  July  and  August,  1892,  he  placed  300  egg  lobsters 
in  a pound  at  that  place.  In  April,  1893,  he  seined  and  found  the  females  still  carry- 
ing their  eggs;  again,  he  seined  the  pound  in  June,  when  most  of  the  eg’gs  were 
hatched.  Moreover,  I have  determined  the  rate  of  growth  of  the  external  eggs  from 
actual  observation,  from  the  time  of  extrusion  to  hatching.  The  external  summer 
eggs  are  a pei’fect  chronometer  for  measuring  the  rate  of  growth  of  the  ovary  during 
the  first  period — that  is,  during  the  fall,  winter,  and  spring  following  any  given 
ovulation. 

“The  fact,”  says  Prince,  “that  the  lobster  spawns  annually  is  evidenced  by: 

(1)  The  fairly  uniform  proportion  of  ‘berried’  females  taken  season  after  season. 

(2)  The  occurrence  of  the  berried  conditions  in  all  sizes  of  females  from  7 inches  to  18 
inches.  It  might  be  expected  that  females  of  certain  specified  sizes  would  never  or 
rarely  be  found  with  eggs  were  biennial  spawning  a fact.  (3)  Exact  researches  upon 


*Ibid,  p.  152. 


•jTbid,  p.  58. 


166 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


allied  decapod  crustaceans  prove  the  greater  frequency  of  spawning.  (4)  The  rapid 
growth  of  ovarian  eggs  so  familiar  to  embryologists  is  unfavorable  to  the  biennial 
theory.” 

The  last  two  clauses  (3  and  1)  may  be  ruled  out  because  this  is  a matter  of  fact 
concerning  a specific  animal,  not  a question  of  analogy  with  what  may  or  may  not 
occur  with  other  species. 

The  first  clause  (1)  is  somewhat  obscure.  So  far  as  my  observations  at  Woods 
Hole  have  gone,  the  proportion  of  berried  to  adult  females  without  berries  is  fairly 
uniform— that  is,  about  one-half  the  adult  females  captured  in  winter  and  spring 
are  without  eggs.  Whether  this  is  what  Professor  Prince  means  or  not,  the  fact  is 
fatal  to  the  theory  of  annual  spawning.  For,  upon  this  hypothesis,  during  late 
winter  or  spring  every  female  of  breeding  age  should  carry  eggs,  excepting  here  and 
there  a solitary  individual  which  had  postponed  egg-laying  to  an  extraordinarily  late 
period,  or  which  had  met  with  an  accident  and  lost  her  cargo.  I have  never  found  a 
single  instance  of  egg-laying  in  spring.  On  the  other  hand,  the  records  of  the  catches 
made  under  my  directions  by  the  United  States  Fish  Commission  at  Woods  Hole 
confirm  the  statement  just  made  and  support  the  biennial  theory  of  spawning,  the 
proof  of  which  has  been  given.  Thus,  in  the  month  of  March,  1894,  71  female  lobsters 
10  inches  or  more  in  length  were  captured  in  Woods  Hole  Harbor.  Of  these,  only 
9 bore  external  eggs.  How  are  facts  of  which  this  is  a sample  to  be  explained  on 
the  theory  of  annual  spawning,  according  to  which  all  such  animals  should  have  borne 
eggs,  or,  at  least,  all  but  a very  few  which  may  not  have  reached  maturity?  The 
second  statement  -“the  occurrence  of  the  berried  conditions  in  all  sizes  of  females, 
from  7 inches  to  18  inches,”  has  no  bearing  on  the  question  of  frequency  of  spawning, 
since  there  is  no  fixed  limit  at  which  lobsters  mature.*  Again,  the  remark  “it  might 
be  expected  that  females  of  certain  specified  sizes  would  never  or  rarely  be  found 
with  eggs  were  biennial  spawning  a fact,”  is  open  to  the  same  objection.  New  female 
recruits,  of  all  sizes  from  8 inches  up,  come  to  their  first  spawning  period  every  year, 
and  would  do  so  whatever  the  length  of  the  reproductive  cycle. 

In  conclusion  I wish  to  quote  the  brief  summary  which  was  placed  under  the 
description  of  a drawing  of  the  ovary,  which  I believe  gives  a true  picture  of  the 
growth  of  the  ovarian  eggs:  “We  thus  see  that  a generation  of  ovarian  ova  grow 
very  rapidly  during  the  first  summer  following  the  last  ovulation.  They  then  enter 
upon  a period  of  quiescence,  growing  but  slowly,  like  the  external  embryos  during 
the  succeeding  winter.  At  the  beginning  of  the  third  summer  after  ovulation  this 
generation  of  eggs  is  ready  for  extrusion.  That  the  spawning  periods  are  thus  two 
years  apart  is  a valid  inference  drawn  from  the  study  of  the  anatomy  of  the  repro- 
ductive organs.”  f 


*Ibid,  p.  68. 


f Ibid,  p.  246. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  167.) 


Plate  22. 


CAKES  OF  DRIED  " S I N ARAPAN  ” (MISTICHTHYS  LUZONENSIS).  NATURAL  SIZE. 
Prepared  by  the  natives  of  Luzon. 


NOTES  ON  FIVE  FOOD-FISHES  OF  LAKE  BUHI,  LUZON,  PHILIPPINE 

ISLANDS. 


By  HUGH  M.  SMITH. 


As  a meager  contribution  to  the  ichthyology  of  the  Philippine  Islands,  the  fol- 
lowing notes  on  a few  specimens  of  fishes  recently  sent  to  the  United  States  Commission 
of  Fish  and  Fisheries  are  offered.  The  fish  were  collected  in  Lake  Buhi,  province  of 
Camarines  Sur,  Luzon,  in  July,  1901,  by  Dr.  F.  W.  Richardson,  contract  surgeon, 
U.  S.  Army,  and  forwarded  through  the  Surgeon-General’s  Office.  Dr.  George  A. 
Zeller,  acting  assistant  surgeon,  U.  S.  Army,  had  previously  sent  from  Lake  Buhi 
specimens  of  dried  fish-cakes  made  by  the  natives. 

Lake  Buhi  is  described  as  a beautiful  mountain  lake,  3 miles  wide  and  6 miles 
long,  and  500  to  1,000  feet  above  the  sea.  It  is  reputed  to  be  very  deep,  and  is  said 
to  have  been  formed  by  a volcanic  upheaval  before  the  Spanish  occupation,  when  one 
side  of  Mount  Iriga  was  blown  out,  and  hills  of  lava  were  scattered  for  miles  to  the 
southeast  of  the  mountain. 

All  of  the  species  hereafter  referred  to  are  used  for  food.  The  size  of  some  of 
them  indicates  that  nothing  is  too  small  or  insignificant  for  the  Filipinos  to  eat.  In 
Lake  Buhi  very  few  fish  are  caught  with  hook  and  line,  the  native  appliances  being 
a fine-meshed  net  used  as  a seine  and  a trap  made  of  bamboo. 

Mistichthys  luzonensis  II.  M.  Smith.  “ Smarapan.” 

In  an  article  {Science,  January  3,  1902)  entitled  “The  Smallest  Known  Vertebrate,”  the  writer 
gave  a preliminary  notice  and  brief  description  of  this  new  genus  and  species  of  goby  from  Lake  Buhi. 
The  genus  Mistichthys  {/ isidro s,  the  smallest;  lyObs,  fish)  may  be  diagnosed  as  follows: 

Body  elongate,  compressed.  Head  rather  large.  Dorsal  fins  widely  separated,  the  anterior  very 
low,  containing  3 weak  spines  joined  by  a membrane,  the  posterior  high,  with  8 or  9 branched  rays; 
anal  fin  similar  to  soft  dorsal;  pectorals  long  and  rounded;  ventrals  i,  5,  coalescent,  not  adnate  to 
abdomen;  caudal  well  developed,  bluntly  pointed.  A single  series  of  rather  long,  curved  conical  teeth 
in  each  jaw.  Scales  large,  ctenoid.  Gill  membranes  joined  to  isthmus.  A large  genital  papilla  in 
each  sex.  Coloration  plain.  Size  minute,  the  males  rather  smaller  than  females. 

Mistichthys  luzonensis  may  be  more  particularly  described  as  follows: 

Form  elongated,  compressed,  tapering  but  slightly  to  the  rather  wide  caudal  peduncle.  Depth  of 
body  equals  about  one-fourth  total  length,  the  female  being  slightly  deeper  than  the  male.  Head 
large,  its  length  contained  3.3  times  in  body;  mouth  large,  oblique,  the  maxillary  extending  to  a 
point  under  anterior  border  of  pupil;  lower  jaw  slightly  longer  than  upper,  the  chin  projecting;  teeth 
short  and  numerous,  arranged  in  a single  row  in  each  jaw;  eye  large,  3.3  in  head;  snout  blunt,  two- 
thirds  diameter  of  eye;  interorbital  space  about  one-half  eye;  branchial  membranes  not  united  and 
joined  to  the  isthmus.  The  dorsal  fins  are  separated  by  an  interval  rather  less  than  half  the  head;  the 
anterior  consists  of  3 weak  spine's  and  a rudiment  adnate  to  the  first  spine,  and  is  very  low,  its  height 
being  less  than  half  diameter  of  eye;  the  second  dorsal  contains  8 or  9 rays,  of  which  the  posterior 

167 


168 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


are  longest,  and  is  comparatively  high,  the  longest  rays  being  nearly  two-thirds  length  of  head 
and  5 times  length  of  dorsal  spines;  the  origin  of  anterior  dorsal  is  0.4  distance  from  end  of  snout  to 
base  of  caudal,  that  of  the  posterior  dorsal  is  0.4  distance  from  base  of  caudal  to  end  of  snout,  and  over 
origin  of  anal.  Anal  fin  large,  of  11  branched  rays  of  nearly  equal  length,  rather  less  than  height  of 
second  dorsal.  Pectorals  two-thirds  as  long  as  head,  rounded,  with  broad  base,  the  central  rays 
extending  as  far  as  vent;  rays  15.  Ventrals  i,  5,  short,  coalescent,  not  adnate  to  abdomen.  Caudal 
large,  central  rays  produced,  its  length  equal  to  five-sixths  of  head.  Genital  papilla  in  the  male 
slender,  tapering,  longer  than  first,  anal  ray  and  1.5  times  diameter  of  eye;  that  in  the  female  half  as 
long  and  twice  as  broad  as  in  the  male.  Scales  large,  strongly  ctenoid,  23  or  24  in  lengthwise  series 
and  6 in  transverse  series. 

Colors:  In  life,  apparently  almost  transparent;  muzzle  black;  a black  line  at  base  of  anal;  back 
and  head  sparsely  spotted  with  black;  a narrow  black  stripe  under  eye. 

Average  length  about  12.5  mm.,  the  males  somewhat  smaller  than  the  females. 

Types  (Nos.  50303  and  50304,  U.  S.  National  Museum),  collected  in  Lake  Buhi,  Luzon,  Philippine 
Islands,  July  5,  1901,  by  I>r.  F.  W.  Richardson. 


This  is  apparently  the  smallest  known  species  of  fish.  The  average  length  of  females  among  the 
specimens  at  hand  is  13.5  mm.,  the  minimum  under  12  mm.  The  average  length  of  males  is  12.5  mm., 
the  minimum  under  10  mm.,  and  the  maximum  13.5  mm.  The  average  length  of  50  specimens  taken 
at  random,  both  sexes  about  equally  represented,  was  12.9  mm. 

That  these  specimens  are  mature  is  shown  by  the  presence  of  ripe  ovarian  eggs  and  by  the  extru- 
sion of  perfect  eggs  when  the  fish  were  placed  in  the  preserving  fluid.  The  average  diameter  of  the 
extruded  eggs  is  0.5  mm. 

The  shape  of  the  genital  papillje  suggests  that  the  eggs  are  deposited  in  crevices  or  under  objects, 
and  there  fertilized. 

Prof.  H.  V.  Wilson,  of  the  University  of  North  Carolina,  has  examined  this  fish  with  reference  to 
its  eggs,  and  communicates  the  following  notes  thereon: 

“The  ripe  ovarian  egg  is  uniformly  filled  with  granular  yolk.  It  is  of  a rounded  shape,  frequently 
elliptical  in  outline.  It  lies  inside  a comparatively  thick  shell,  which  has  an  irregularly  polyhedral 
shape.  Oiie  facet  of  the  shell  is  convex  and  bears  a small,  rounded  depression,  from  which  radiate 


NOTES  ON  FIVE  FOOD-FISHES  OF  LAKE  BUHI. 


dichotomousl y branching  libers,  which  cover  all  facets  of  the  shell  except  the  one  opposite  the  depression. 
The  libers  adhere  closely  to  the  surface  of  the  shell  and  may  be  continuous  with  it.  Around  the 
margin  of  the  bare  surface  the  fibers  may  extend  beyond  the  egg,  lying  in  an  intricately  coiled  condition 
in  the  spaces  between  the  eggs.  The  fibers  are  probably  to  be  looked  on  as  ridges  of  the  eggshell 
which  become  free  with  continued  growth. 

“The  ripe  eggs  are  packed  together  closely  in  the  ovary,  adhering  by  their  flattened  surfaces. 
Between  and  beneath  them  numerous  small  ovarian  ova,  with  relatively  large  nucleus  and  nucleolus, 
are  present.  Such  small  ova  have  not  yet  developed  a shell.  I believe  the  ripe  eggs  are  arranged  in  a 
single  layer  around  the  axial  cavity  of  the  ovary,  with  the  convex  depression-bearing  surfaces  facing 
the  cavity.  The  fibers  or  filaments  suggest,  of  course,  that  the  egg  is  attached  to  something  during  its 
development. 

“In  the  discharged  eggs  examined  the  filaments  project  from  one  side  in  the  form  of  a tuft.  No 
signs  of  segmentation  could  be  made  out  in  surface  view  of  eggs  in  clove-oil,  and  yet  the  shape  of  the 
blastoderm  was  so  embryo-like  that  I thought  it  necessary  to  section  a mass  of  the  eggs  taken  directly 
from  the  fish.  The  sections  permit  the  blastoderm  to  be  seen  distinctly  as  well  as  the  yolk.  The 
blastoderm  is  much  thicker  on  one  surface  of  the  yolk  than  on  the  opposite  surface,  but  is  quite 
unsegmented.  I have  examined  a large  number  and  find  no  trace  of  segmentation. 

“The  highly  developed  egg-membrane,  with  its  filaments,  is  certainly  a very  unusual  feature.  I 
know  of  no  similar  case,  but  I have  not  at  hand  literature  which  would  enable  me  to  say  whether  or 
not  such  a membrane  has  been  described.  The  disk-like  area  from  which  the  filaments  radiate  is 
exceedingly  thin  in  the  center,  but  is  not  perforated.  I can  not  make  out  a micropyle.  The  appear- 
ance of  several  eggs  indicates  that  when  the  egg  is  laid  an  outer  membrane,  with  the  filaments;  is  split 
and  recurved,  leaving  the  egg  surrounded  by  a thin  membrane,  at  some  point  of  which  the  micropyle 
should  be. 

“There  is  certainly  nothing  in  the  appearance  of  the  eggs  (egg-membrane,  yolk,  blastoderm)  to 
suggest  that  they  develop  in  the  mother.  The  complicated  egg-membrane,  on  the  contrary,  strongly 
suggests  that  the  egg  develops  outside  the  mother,  attached  by  filaments  to  some  body.  All  this  is,  of 
course,  negative  evidence.” 

An  interesting  fact  regarding  this  species  is  that  it  is  a food-fish  of  considerable  importance.  In 
forwarding  samples  of  the  fish  as  dried  for  food,  Dr.  Zeller  wrote  as  follows: 

1 1 1 inclose  herewith  samples  of  a strange  article  of  diet  greatly  relished  by  the  Bicols,  among 
whom  I have  been  stationed  for  the  past  eighteen  months.  Rice  and  fish  are  the  staple  articles  of 
diet  for  most  Filipinos,  and  in  the  provinces  of  the  Camarines  there  i§  little  variation  from  these  two. 
Fishes  of  every  size  and  many  varieties  are  prepared  in  every  conceivable  form,  but  the  samples 
inclosed  are  unique  in  that  they  are  found  here  and  nowhere  else.  * * * Many  varieties  of  fish 
abound  in  the  lake,  but  by  far  the  most  numerous  are  these  minute  specimens.  They  are  called  in  the 
native  Bicol  tongue  ‘sinarapan,’  and  when  dried  in  the  sun  on  a leaf  are  called  ‘badi.’  They  are  caught 
by  a large  sheet  of  close  web,  which  is  dipped  under  wherever  a school  congregates.  They  are  put 
into  tightly  woven  baskets  from  which  the  water  soon  drains,  leaving  a compact  mass  of  fish.  They 
are  not  minnows  or  immature  fish.  They  are  adults  and  attain  no  greater  size.  The  natives  buy  them 
eagerly;  and  when  the  little  fleet  of  fishermen  return  from  their  morning’s  quest  and  place  their  bas- 
kets upon  the  ground  on  the  market  place,  thej^  are  instantly  surrounded  by  a crowd  of  waiting  children 
who,  armed  with  every  sort  of  dish,  are  anxious  to  take  home  the  family  meal.  They  bring  three  or 
four  potato  tubers,  a handful  or  two  of  rice,  or  a few  copper  pennies,  and  in  exchange  receive  about  a 
pint  of  fish.  In  the  kitchen  the  fish  are  made  up  with  peppers  or  other  spiced  herbs,  and  they  do  not 
taste  bad.  The  soldiers  have  become  quite  fond  of  this  food,  and  liberally  patronize  the  little  native 
restaurants  where  it  is  served.” 

Gobius  sternbergi,  new  species. 

Form  elongate,  rather  robust,  slightly  compressed,  the  depth  contained  4 times  in  length.  Head 
rather  large,  its  length  about  one-third  total  length  of  body;  mouth  rather  small,  terminal,  nearly 
horizontal,  the  maxillary  not  extending  to  vertical  from  anterior  edge  of  pupil;  snout  short  and  very 
blunt,  about  three-fourths  diameter  of  eye;  eye  large,  superior,  bulging,  less  than  4 in  head;  interorbital 
one-half  eye.  Teeth  in  upper  jaw  in  about  3 irregular  rows,  of  which  the  outer  row  contains  the  largest 
teeth;  teeth  in  lower  jaw  in  a band,  some  larger  than  others  and  canine-like.  Branchial  membranes 
broadly  united  to  the  isthmus.  D.  v,  8;  A.  8;  caudal  pointed;  ventrals  long,  extending  nearly  or 


170 


BULLETIN  OE  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


quite  to  vent;  pectorals  long,  the  central  rays  produced  and  extending  opposite  origin  of  second  dorsal. 
Scales  large,  those  on  sides,  abdomen,  and  most  of  back  finely  ctenoid,  those  on  anterior  part  of  back 
mostly  cycloid;  posterior  edge  of  scales  angular;  opercle,  preopercle,  and  top  of  head  as  far  forward 
as  interorbital  space  covered  with  large  cycloid  scales;  scales  in  lateral  series  25  or  26,  in  transverse 
series  8;  12  scales  before  anterior  dorsal. 

Colors:  Head,  sides,  and  back  dusky,  the  under  parts  white.  Sides  marked  by  about  a dozen  short, 
irregular,  vertical,  blackish  blotches,  a prominent  one  above  base  of  pectorals;  muzzle  dark;  a dark 
area  on  opercle;  anterior  dorsal  pale  at  base,  blackish  distall y;  second  dorsal  irregularly  marked  with 
dark  stripes;  anal  and  caudal  dusky;  pectorals  and  ventrals  plain. 

Types  (No.  50536,  U.  S.  National  Museum),  6 specimens  20  to  27  mm.  long,  collected  in  Lake 
Buhi,  Philippine  Islands,  by  Dr.  F.  W.  Richardson,  July  5,  1901. 

This  species  seems  to  agree  with  none  of  the  20  or  more  species  of  Gobius  already  described  from 
the  Philippine  Islands.  It  is  named  for  Dr.  George  M.  Sternberg,  Surgeon-General  of  the  United 
States  Army. 


Gobius  sternbergi,  new  species. 

Hemirhamphus  cotnog1,  new  species.  Half-beak;  “Cotnog." 

Body  rather  slender,  the  depth  contained  8 times  in  length  (from  end  of  upper  jaw  to  caudal  base) ; 
sides  somewhat  compressed,  vertical;  thickness  of  body  one-half  less  than  depth;  length  of  head  (with 
lower  jaw)  2.3  in  total  length  of  body;  length  of  lower  jaw  (beyond  extremity  of  upper  jaw)  rather 
greater  than  remainder  of  head  and  4.4  in  body;  premaxillaries  broader  than  long,  their  length  less 
than  eye;  eye  large,  1.6  in  postorbital  space;  top  of  head  Hat;  interorbital  1.2  width  of  eye.  Dorsal 
very  low,  the  longest  of  the  12  rays  not  exceeding  eye;  dorsal  origin  slightly  in  advance  of  anal;  anal 
very  short,  but  much  higher  than  dorsal;  13  anal  rays,  the  first  short,  the  next  4 long  and  broad,  the 
middle  rays  shorter  than  the  last,  the  free  margin  of  the  fin  incised  and  nearly  vertical ; caudal  rounded; 
ventrals  very  short,  less  than  eye,  much  nearer  to  base  of  caudal  than  to  axil  of  pectorals;  length  of 
pectorals  slightly  exceeding  depth  of  body.  Scales  65  in  lengthwise  series,  about  9 rows  between 
dorsal  and  anal. 

Colors  (in  formalin):  Greenish  above,  the  scales  with  dark  edges;  white  below;  a silvery  lateral 
stripe  increasing  in  width  from  before  backward;  dorsal  dusky,  other  fins  plain;  lower  jaw  black. 

Type  (No.  50537,  U.  S.  National  Museum),  a specimen  106  mm.  long,  collected  in  Lake  Buhi, 
July  5,  1901. 

The  writer  hesitates  to  add  another  species  of  half-beak  to  the  already  large  number  of  real  and 
nominal  forms  recorded  from  oriental  waters,  but  is  unable  to  make  other  disposition  of  the  specimen 
in  hand.  The  combination  of  reduced  number  of  dorsal  and  anal  rays,  small  scales,  and  rounded  tail 
with  the  modified  anal  rays  suffices  to  distinguish  it. 

This  fish  is  called  “cotnog”  in  the  Bicol  tongue,  and  is  said  to  attain  a weight  of  11  to  2 pounds 
in  Lake  Buhi. 

Anabas  scandens  (Ilaldorf).  Climbing  Perch;  “Allas”;  “ Poyo.” 

Two  young  examples,  4 and  4.5  cm.  long,  are  referable  to  this  species.  Head  2.5  in  length;  depth 
2.5  in  length;  D.  xix,  8 and  xvm,  9;  A.  x,  9 and  xi,  9;  scales  31.  Color  greenish,  lighter  below;  body 


NOTES  ON  FIVE  FOOD-FISHES  OF  LAKE  BUHI. 


171 


marked  by  about  12  narrow,  dark  vertical  stripes;  a blackish  spot  at  base  of  caudal  surrounded  by 
a lighter  area.  The  deriticulations  on  the  preorbital  are  concealed  by  a fold  of  skin,  and  the  spines 
on  the  opercle  are  less  numerous  and  less  strongly  developed  than  in  a specimen  of  similar  size  in  the 
U.  S.  National  Museum  from  Ceylon  and  than  in  examples  figured  by  Bleeker  and  Day,  but  in  other 
respects  these  specimens  conform  with  the  descriptions  of  - I.  scanclens. 

Dr.  Richardson  states  that  this  fish  is  known  as  “attas”  at  Buhi  and  as  “poyo”  in  other  Bicol 
towns.  It  is  reported  to  attain  a weight  of  1J  to  2 pounds.  If  this  is  correct,  the  Lake  Buhi  fish  is 
larger  than  the  specimens  recorded  from  any  other  waters. 

This  is  the  celebrated  climbing  perch  of  the  fresh  waters  of  India,  China,  and  the  East  Indies. 
By  means  of  a freely  movable  opercle,  it  is  enabled  to  ascend  trees  for  a distance  of  5 to  7 feet;  and  the 
possession  of  an  accessory  breathing  apparatus  makes  it  adapted  to  both  an  aquatic  and  a terrestrial 
existence.  The  fish  is  said  to  die  when  prevented  from  exercising  its  aerial  respiration. 

The  climbing  fish  is  highly  esteemed  for  food,  and  in  India  is  extensively  employed  for  stocking 
ponds. 

Ophiocephalus  striatus  Bloch.  “ Ovoon”;  “ Terehog” ; “ Tnlosog.” 

Two  young  specimens,  73  and  87  mm.  long,  respectively,  were  received.  Head  3 in  length;  depth 
6 in  length;  eye  7 in  head,  1.5  in  snout;  dorsal  44;  anal  26;  scales  53-15. 

According  to  Dr.  F.  W.  Richardson,  this  fish  in  Lake  Buhi  attains  a weight  of  5 pounds  and  is 
called  by  the  Bicols  “ovoon”  when  young,  and  “terehog”  or  “talosog”  when  grown.  It  is  an 
important  food-fish  of  the  lake,  probably  exceeded  in  importance  only  b}^  the  “sinarapan.” 

This  species  is  known  from  other  parts  of  the  Philippine  Islands,  and  is  widely  distributed  in  the 
fresh  waters  of  China,  Burma,  and  India.  According  to  Day  (Fishes  of  India),  it  attains  a length  of 
3 feet  or  more,  takes  a bait,  especially  a frog,  very  readily,  and  is  said  to  rise  to  a salmon  fly.  Day 
gives  the  following  general  information  about  the  Ophiocephaliclue,  or  serpent-headed  fishes: 

The  Ophioceplialidx,  having  hollow  cavities  in  their  heads  and  an  amphibious  mode  of  res  pi  ration, 
are  able  to  exist  for  lengthened  periods  out  of  their  native  element  and  can  travel  some  distance  over 
the  ground,  especially  when  moist.  They  possess  an  accessory  cavity  to  the  gills,  and  are  able  to 
respire  direct  from  the  atmosphere.  Jugglers  both  in  India  and  China  exhibit  these  fishes  walking 
on  the  land,  and  children  amuse  themselves  by  making  them  crawl  along.  “In  China  they  are  often 
carried  alive  in  pails  of  water  and  slices  are  cut  for  sale  as  wanted,  the  fish  selling  dear  whilst  it  retains 
life,  w'hile  what  remains  after  death  is  considered  as  of  little  value.”  Owing  to  the  breadth  of  their 
bodies,  they  are  able  to  progress  in  a serpentine  manner,  chiefly  by  means  of  their  pectoral  and  caudal 
fins,  first  one  of  the  former  being  advanced  and  then  its  fellowT.  They  are  exceedingly  difficult  to 
retain  in  aquaria,  unless  the  top  is  covered  over,  as  otherwise  they  manage  to  escape  and  proceed  on 
their  travels.  These  fishes  appear  to  be  .monogamous,  some  breeding  in  grassy  swamps  or  the  edges 
of  tanks;  some  in  wells  or  stone-margined  receptacles  for  water,  and  others  again  in  holes  in  the 
rivers’  banks.  When  very  young  the  fry  of  all  these  species  keep  with  and  are  defended  by  their 
parents,  but  as  soon  as  they  are  sufficiently  strong  to  capture  prey  for  themselves,  they  are  driven 
away  to  seek  their  own  subsistence;  those  which  are  too  obstinate  to  leave  being,  it  is  believed,  eaten 
by  their  progenitors.  The  varieties  which  live  in  tanks  and  swamps  delight  in  residing  at  their 
shallow  and  grassy  edges,  so  that  they  can  take  in  with  ease  their  modicum  of  air  for  the  purpose  of 
breathing,  or  capture  any  frog  that  may  incautiously  venture  too  close  to  their  lair.  These  fishes 
appear  to  be  well  adapted  for  pisciculture,  as  some  grow  to  a large  size,  whilst  all  are  good  eating. 
The  smallest,  0.  gachua,  attains  about  a foot  in  length  and  thrives  in  almost  any  situation.  They  are 
rather  voracious,  but  appear  to  consider  a frog,  mouse,  or  rat  as  luscious  a morsel  as  a fellow  fish. 
They  assist  in  keeping  water  pure  by  destroying  either  animal  or  vegetable  substances  which  may 
come  in  their  way. 


i 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900  AND  1901. 

BY 

JEFFERSON  K . MOSER, 

Commander , United  States  Navy. 


173 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  175.) 


F’late  !. 


HUMPBACK  SALMON  ASCENDING  LOW  FALLS,  LITNIK  STREAM,  AFOGNAK  ISLAND. 


SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  OF  THE  STEAMER  ALBATROSS  IN  THE 

SUMMER  OE  1900. 


By  JEFFERSON  F.  MOSER, 
Commander , United  Slates  Navy , Commanding. 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  main  features  of  the  work  of  the  Albatross  during  the  summer  of  1900  were 
a continuation  of  the  exploration  and  examination  of  the  stream  and  lake  systems  of 
Alaska,  their  general  features  and  characteristics  so  far  as  they  relate  to  salmon  and 
other  fishes,  spawning-grounds,  condition  and  nature  of  the  water,  character  of  shores 
and  vegetation,  the  species  of  salmon  entering  and  their  movements,  the  time  and 
duration  of  runs,  the  size  and  abundance  of  fish,  waste  species,  signs  and  causes  of 
depletion,  the  mortality  of  different  species  on  the  spawning-grounds,  natural  and 
artificial  obstructions  to  the  passage  of  fish,  fishing  methods  and  their  relation  to  the 
maintenance  of  supply,  and  data  relating  to  conditions  for  hatcheries.  At  the  can- 
neries statistics  were  obtained. of  the  streams  fished  by  them,  and  detailed  statistics 
relating  to  the  men,  vessels,  boats,  and  apparatus  employed  in  the  fisheries,  together 
with  the  catch  and  pack  of  the  various  species  forTho  years  1898,  1899,  and  1900. 
The  photographic  and  hydrographic  works,  so  far  as  they  relate  to  the  subject,  were 
also  continued. 

Except  in  the  interior  waters  of  southeastern  Alaska,  the  salmon  streams  lie  in 
unsurveyed  localities  usually  dangerous  to  approach  without  local  knowledge,  and, 
while  we  were  able  when  detained  in  port  to  add  something  to  the  hydrographic 
information  bv  surveys  and  sailing  directions,  yet  but  little  was  accomplished  in  a 
field  where  much  remains  to  be  done. 

Before  proceeding  with  my  report,  1 desire  to  express  my  appreciation  of  the 
work  performed  by  the  officers  of  the  Albatross  and  the  courtesies  extended  by  those 
interested  in  the  salmon  fisheries.  Lieut.  Hugh  Rodman,  U.  S.  N.,  besides  his 
duties  as  executive  and  navigating  officer,  was  indefatigable  in  conducting  the  stream 
and  lake  explorations  and  in  making  the  local  surveys.  Ensigns  A.  J.  Hepburn, 
U.  S.  N.,  and  Cyrus  R.  Miller,  U.  S.  N.,  assisted  in  the  field  work.  Ensign  Clarence 
S.  Kempff,  U.  S.  N. , besides  his  duties  in  charge  of  the  engineer’s  department,  made 
a number  of  the  stream  and  lake  examinations  and  assisted  on  the  surveys.  Mr. 
H.  C.  Fassett  assisted  me  generally  in  the  collection  of  data,  and  had  charge  of  all 
the  photography,  in  which  he  rendered  valuable  service.  All  performed  their  duties 
to  my  entire  satisfaction. 


175 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


176 


Mj  thanks  are  due  to  the  superintendents  of  all  the  canneries  we  visited  for  the 
courteous  manner  in  which  we  were  everywhere  received  and  for  the  assistance  they 
offered.  No  obstacles  were  placed  in  our  way,  and,  while  they  did  not  volunteer  to 
tell  us  all  they  knew  about  the  business,  they  cheerfully  answered  all  the  questions  of 
which  they  had  any  knowledge. 

As  this  report  will  be  an  addition  or  appendix  to  my  report  on  the  same  subject, 
published  under  the  title  The  Salmon  and  Salmon  Fisheries  of  Alaska,  1899,  it  is 
unnecessary  to  repeat  here  the  subjects  therein  treated,  and  which  remain  unchanged. 
Reference  is  therefore  made  to  that  report  for  the  introductory  remarks,  the  district 
divisions,  the  manner  of  conducting  our  investigations  and  the  difficulties  encountered, 
the  species  of  salmon  and  their  various  names,  the  relative  importance  of  the  species, 
the  salmon  runs,  spawning  habits  and  enemies;  the  history  of  the  canneries  and  the 
canning  industry;  salteries,  fishery  and  cannery  methods;  the  fisheries,  labor,  weight 
of  fish,  labels  and  brands,  market  prices,  cans  and  boxes,  the  depletion  of  streams, 
barricades,  and  salmon  laws;  relation  of  the  salmon  fisheries  to  the  Indian;  complete 
statistics,  and  descriptions  of  all  the  canneries  and  streams  visited  from  Dixon 
Entrance  to  Bering  Sea. 

The  first  day  of  the  fiscal  year  found  the  Albatross  at  Unalaska,  having  arrived 
there  June  29,  via  Japan  and  Kamchatka,  from  a cruise  of  scientific  investigation  in 
the  South  Pacific  Ocean. 

On  account  of  the  rush  to  the  gold  fields  at  Cape  Nome,  we  had  to  await  our  turn 
to  coal,  finishing  on  the  evening  of  July  3,  when  we  entered  Bering  Sea  once  more 
and  laid  the  course  for  Bristol  Bay. 

The  following  was  our  itinerary  during  the  investigation: 


Bering  Sea  district: 

Left  Unalaska  July  3. 

Bristol  Bay,  July  5-19. 

Unalaska,  July  21-24. 

Kadiak  and  Chignik  district: 

Chignik  Bay,  July  28-29.  , 

Alitak  Bay,  July  30-August  7. 

Karluk,  August  7-9. 

Uyak,  August  9-11. 

Afognak,  August  11-16. 

Southeast  Alaska  district: 

Sitka,  August  19-21. 

Killisnoo,  August  21-22. 

Pyramid  Harbor,  August  22-23. 

Chilkoot  Inlet,  August  23-25. 

Taku  Inlet,  August  25-26. 

Taku  Harbor,  August  26-27. 

Port  Snettisham,  August  27. 

South  Bay  of  Pillars,  August  28-September  2. 
Shipley  Bay,  September  2-4. 


Southeast  Alaska  district— Continued. 

Duncan  Canal,  September  5-8. 

Point  Hightield,  September  8-10. 

McHenry  Inlet,  September  10-12. 

Zimovia  Strait,  September  12-13. 

Union  Bay,  September  13-14. 

Ward  Cove,  September  14-15. 

Loring,  September  15-17. 

Yes  Bay,  September  17-21. 

Karta  Bay,  September  21-23. 

Loring,  September  23-24. 

Ketchikan,  September  24. 

Boca  de  Quadra,  September  24-25. 

Metlakahtla,  September  25-27. 

Comox,  British  Columbia,  October  2-3. 

Tacoma,  Washington,  October  4-17. 
Quartermaster  Harbor,  Washington,  October  17-21 
Comox,  British  Columbia,  October  24-26. 
Sausalito,  Cal.,  October  30. 


/ 


NATIVE  VILLAGE  AND  UKALA  RACKS,  ON  BLUFF  TO  WESTWARD  OF  ARCTIC  PACKING  COMPANY  (A,  P.  A.),  NAKNEK  RIVER. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  176.) 


Plate  II 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


177 


BRISTOL  BAY  DISTRICT. 

TOPOGRAPHIC  AND  GEOGRAPHIC  FEATURES. 

The  commercial  .salmon  fisheries  included  in  the  division  laid  out  in  my  pre- 
vious report  as  the  Bering  Sea  district  are  confined  entirely  to  Bristol  Bay,  and  if 
the  wide  limits  ascribed  by  some  to  this  bay  are  accepted,  the  canneries  and  fisheries 
are  all  in  the  northeast  section  or  on  the  rivers  that  empty  there.  One  authority 
states  that  “Bristol  Bay  maybe  said  to  include  all  that  part  of  Bering  Sea  lying 
east  of  a line  drawn  from  the  northwest  cape  of  Unimak  Island  to  the  Ivuskokwim 
River.”  In  my  opinion,  a better  western  boundary,  topographically,  would  be  a 
line  from  Port  Moller  to  Cape  Newenham. 

The  commercial  salmon  fisheries  of  this  district  are  on  the  Ugashik,  Egegak, 
Naknek,  Kvichak,  Nushagak,  and  Wood  rivers,  and  their  sea  approaches.  These 
rivers  are  all  large,  with  large  lake  sources,  and,  except  Wood  River,  drain  the 
western  slopes  of  the  mountain  range  that  traverses  the  Alaska  Peninsula  and 
extends  along  the  western  border  of  Cook  Inlet. 

This  mountain  range  lies  close  along  the  eastern  side  of  the  peninsula,  and  at 
intervals  it  rises  into  volcanic  peaks  of  considerable  height,  some  of  which,  by^  their 
smoky  wreaths,  still  indicate  activity.  The  greater  part  of  the  ridge  is  snow- 
covered,  and  its  northern  extension  forms  the  mountain  masses  which  extend  along 
the  western  side  of  Cook  Inlet,  where  the  volcanoes  Ilianma  (12,000  feet)  and 
Redoubt  (11,000  feet)  rise  conspicuously  above  the  lower  masses. 

This  ridge  is  not  altogether  continuous;  there  are  a few  breaks  which  admit  of 
portage,  and  as  the  end  of  the  peninsula  is  reached  there  are  a number  of  depressions. 
It  is  said  that  formerly  sea-otter  hunters  from  Bristol  Bay,  by  ascending  the  Kvichak 
River  to  Lake  Ilianma,  made  a portage  to  Kamyshak  Bay.  In  the  early  da}7s  the 
Russian  promyshleniks  found  their  way  from  Kadiak  Island  to  Bristol  Bay,  using  the 
pass  across  the  peninsula  from  Katmai  to  the  headwaters  of  the  Naknek. 

For  many  years  the  Russian  - American  Company  transported  their  merchandise 
across  from  Katmai,  thus  reaching  the  Bristol  Bay,  Nushagak,  Yukon,  and  St.  Michael 
regions.  At  Chignik  there  is  a well-known  portage,  and  beyond  to  the  westward 
there  are  several  which  are  still  used.  The  mountain  range  shows  two  distinct 
benches  of  upheaval,  and  the  theory  has  been  advanced  that  in  former  ages,  not  very 
remote  geologically,  these  depressions  were  submerged,  forming  waterways  into 
Bering  Sea,  and  the  present  ridge  was  then  broken  into  islands,  of  which  the  present 
Aleutian  chain  is  a continuation. 

As  the  divide  of  this  ridge  lies  close  to  the  eastern  shore,  the  watersheds  on  that 
side  are  short,  the  streams  are  numerous  and  small,  and  there  are  no  great  lakes  and 
rivers.  At  Chignik,  where  probably  the  largest  river  on  the  eastern  side  has  its 
outlet,  there  is  a depression  in  the  mountain  chain,  and  the  lakes  in  which  the  river 
has  its  source  lie  in  a plain  beyond,  to  the  westward  of  the  mountain  masses.  It  is 
here  that  the  portage  referred  to  exists.  It.  extends  from  the  Chignik  lakes  to  a 
stream  which  empties  into  Bering  Sea  near  Port  Hadden. 

On  the  western  slope  of  the  peninsula  there  is  a different  topographical  condition. 
The  shore  generally  is  low,  with  here  and  there  an  isolated  mountain  or  projecting 

F.  C.  B.  1901—12 


178 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


spur,  and  in  the  vicinity  of  the  larger  rivers,  where  the  peninsula  expands  to  a 
width  of  from  60  to  90  miles,  the  mountains  in  the  distance  are  visible  only  on  a clear 
day.  Along  this  shore  there  is  an  occasional  high  bluff  which  marks  the  sea  terminus 
of  a ridge  of  hills. 

From  the  western  shore  to  the  mountains  the  country  is  a gradually  ascending, 
rolling  plain,  hillocky  in  places,  dotted  with  lakes  fed  by  the  glaciers  and  melting 
snows  in  the  east,  with  much  marshy  tundra  cut  up  by  streams  and  mud  sloughs. 

It  is  on  this  western  watershed  of  the  Alaska  Peninsula  that  the  large  lakes, 
Ugashik,  Becharof,  llliak,  Naknek,  and,  on  the  northern  extension,  lliamna  and 
Clark,  are  situated.  These  form  the  sources  of  the  rivers  on  which  the  salmon 
fisheries  in  Bristol  Ba}7  are  located. 

Referring  to  the  topographical  features  of  the  Bering  Sea  district,  the  Russian 
missionary,  Veniaminof,  says: 

Slight  elevations  can  be  found  along  the  whole  extent  of  the  American  coast  of  Bering  Sea;  they 
are  in  nearly  all  cases  connected  with  the  mountains  in  the  interior.  If  the  observer  ascends  to  a 
height  the  country  appears  to  him  like  a heaving  ocean  suddenly  become  stationary,  with  its  waves 
transformed  into  sand  and  mud;  these  waves  are  now  covered  with  vegetation,  but  their  outlines  are 
still  very  striking.  In  the  midst  of  this  dry  sea  we  find  occasionally  high,  rocky  islands  entirely 
separate<  1 from  the  neighboring  hills. 

Of  the  interior  of  this  country  no  exact  information  is  at  hand,  and  it  still  awaits 
the  intelligent  explorer.  But  little  information  can  be  obtained  from  the  natives, 
and  not  much  more  from  the  prospector  who  occasionally  finds  his  wa}r  into  the 
interior,  or  the  worthless  squaw  man,  who  at  times  is  infused  with  sufficient  energy 
to  look  for  game. 

The  population  is  not  large  and  consists  of  Innuits  or  Eskimos,  who  live  in  small 
villages  located  on  high  ground,  on  hills  or  bluffs  bordering  a river  or  lake.  They 
subsist  by  hunting  and  fishing,  and,  when  located  near  a cannery,  earn  good  wages, 
if  they  desire  to  work.  Their  food  is  largely  salmon,  though  seal,  beluga,  and  walrus 
also  enter  their  diet  when  they  can  be  obtained,  and  occasionally  a deer  or  moose  is 
taken.  Their  food  is  all  preferred  “high” — not  high  in  the  sense  of  the  epicure,  but 
rotten;  rancid  oil  is  generally  cooked  with  it  or  used  for  sauce.  The  decaying  carcass 
of  a whale  cast  on  the  beach  attracts  the  natives  for  many  miles,  and  a grand  feast  is  held 
over  it;  rotten  salmon  heads  are  a bonne  bouche.  They  are  very  filthy  in  their  habits 
and  live  in  very  primitive  dwellings,  made  by  forming  a shallow  circular  excavation 
and  erecting  over  it  a framework  of  driftwood,  or  whale  ribs,  with  double  walls 
filled  with  earth  and  stones  and  covered  over  with  sod.  A small  aperture  is  left  in 
the  apex  for  the  escape  of  smoke,  though  many  of  their  dwellings  now  have  side 
openings  with  a small  window.  The  outside,  or  the  roof,  as  it  were  (for  all  above 
ground  is  rounded  in  shape),  is  a gathering  place  for  children  and  dogs,  and  is  sur- 
rounded by  mud  and  offal.  The  entrance  is  a low  square  hole,  to  enter  through 
which  one  must  stoop  very  low,  or  crawl,  and  then  pass  through  a gallery  or  tunnel 
into  the  inner  chamber,  which  is  irregular  in  shape  and  from  10  to  15  feet  in  diameter. 

In  the  center,  and  under  the  smoke  opening,  is  the  fireplace,  and  along  the  walls 
are  couches  of  skins  or  mats  slightly  elevated  above  the  floor;  frequently  there  are 
several  of  these  dwellings  connected  by  tunnels,  all  having  one  common  entrance. 
Storehouses  are  built  on  driftwood  posts  4 or  5 feet  from  the  ground;  in  these  the 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  1 78.)  PLATE  III. 


NATIVE  BARABARA  (SOD  HOUSE)  AND  STORE  HOUSE,  NEAR  NAKNEK  RIVER. 


BIDARKA  AND  KAYAK  ON  BEACH,  UGASHIK  RIVER. 


UKALA  RACKS  NEAR  CANNERY  OF  ARCTIC  PACKING  COMPANY  (A.  P.  A.),  NAKNEK  RIVER. 
On  the  left  is  a typical  diminutive  tent,  such  as  is  used  by  the  Bering  Sea  Eskimos  and  Aleuts. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


179 


winter  supply  of  ukala  is  kept,  inaccessible  to  dogs,  foxes,  and  wolves.  Salmon  are 
dried  in  large  numbers  to  make  ukala  for  the  winter  supply. 

In  the  interior,  where  it  is  obtainable,  timber  enters  largely  into  the  construction 
of  the  house.  Near  trading  posts  the  dress  is  a combination  of  native  and  European, 
though  many  still  wear  skin  coats  (parkas)  and  skin  trousers  and  boots.  They  travel 
by  land  with  dog  teams,  and  by  water  in  skin  boats  (kayaks  and  bidarkas). 

The  Bristol  Bay  salmon  rivers,  of  which  we  are  now  treating,  are  all  large  and 
How  great  volumes  of  water.  The  banks  are  frequently  low,  cut  by  numerous  mud 
sloughs,  in  places  flooded  at  very  high  water,  and  at  low  water  uncovering  a beach  of 
mud  on  which  a landing  can  not  always  be  made.  The  rolling  tundra  through  which 
these  rivers  flow  looks  like  a grass-covered  plain,  but  it  is  all  cut  up  into  hillocks  and 
hollows,  marshes  and  ponds,  making  it  generally  impassable,  except  during  the  winter. 
Throughout  this  section  travel,  except  by  boat,  must  be  confined  to  the  winter  months, 
when  everything  is  frozen  solid.  The  country  is  treeless.  A belt  of  timber  stretches 
from  the  northward  to  Lake  Becharof  and  then  makes  a wide  circuit  and  impinges  on 
the  Nushagak.  The  rivers  widen  considerably  at  the  mouth,  forming  broad,  shallow 
bays,  though  still  called  rivers  at  the  canneries.  As  there  is  a rise  and  fall  of  the  tide 
of  from  18  to  24  feet,  the  change  in  the  appearance  of  the  tidal  area  at  high  and  at 
low  water  is  striking,  for  at  high  water  the  lower  courses  are  filled  to  the  banks, 
forming  rivers  as  wide  or  wider  than  the  Mississippi,  while  at  low  water  they  are 
confined  to  narrow,  shallow  channels  running  between  uncovered  shoals  and  banks. 
This  subject  will  be  referred  to  later  under  the  heads  of  the  several  rivers. 

As  there  seems  to  be  some  confusion  in  the  geographical  division  of  some  of  the 
rivers  and  bays,  it  is  deemed  advisable  to  state  here  the  application  of  certain  names 
in  this  report. 

By  some  authorities  the  large  arm  of  Bristol  Bay,  which  receives  the  waters  of 
the  Nushagak  and  Wood  rivers,  is  called  the  Lower  Nushagak  River.  It  is  about  30 
miles  in  length,  13  miles  in  breadth  at  the  seaward  entrance,  and  4 miles  at  the  head, 
and  does  not  in  any  way  partake  of  the  nature  of  a river.  Therefore  this  body  of 
water,  opening  into  Bristol  Bay  between  Protection  Point  and  Etolin  Point  and 
extending  northward  to  the  junction  of  the  Nushagak  and  Wood  rivers,  will  be 
called  in  this  report  Nushagak  Bay,  and  the  two  rivers  named  will  be  regarded  as 
emptying  into  the  head  of  that  bay. 

The  next  great  arm  of  Bristol  Bay  to  the  eastward  of  Etolin  Point  and  extend- 
ing to  the  northeastward  will  be  called  Kvichak  Bay,  for  the  seaward  boundary  of 
which  will  be  taken  a line  from  the  southern  point  of  entrance  of  the  Egegak  River 
to  Etolin  Point,  and  for  the  northern  extreme  a point  above  Koggiung,  where  the 
Kvichak  River  is  confined  in  banks  within  the  usual  acceptation  of  that  term.  The 
Lockenuck,  Kvichak,  Naknek,  and  Egegak  rivers  will  be  considered  as  entering 
Kvichak  Bay. 

EARLY  RECORDS  OF  SALMON  FISHERIES  IN  BRISTOL  BAY. 

The  history  of  the  salmon  fisheries  of  Bristol  Bay  for  commercial  purposes  is 
given  under  the  several  cannery  headings.  The  earliest  record  in  the  history  is  the 
salting  of  salmon  on  the  Nushagak  by  the  schooner  Neptune  in  1883,  and  the  erection 
of  cannery  buildings  that  year  for  the  Arctic  Packing  Company,  which  made  a trial 


180 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


pack  of  400  cases  the  year  following  (1884).  It  is  noticed,  however,  that  Petroff,  in 
the  census  report  of  1880,  states: 

The  salmon  family,  the  great  feeder  of  all  the  Alaskan  people,  frequents  in  astonishing  numbers 
the  Nushagak  and  other  streams  emptying  into  Bristol  Bay.  The  facilities  for  building  traps  and 
weirs  are  also  extraordinary,  and  American  fishermen  have  for  some  years  been  engaged  here  every 
season  in  reaping  a rich  harvest  and  shipping  the  fish,  salted  in  barrels,  to  market.  Hundreds  of  barrels 
have  been  filled  with  a single  clean  up  of  a trap.  The  only  drawback  to  this  business  is  the  short 
period  over  which  the  run  extends,  necessitating  the  employment  of  a very  large  number  of  hands 
while  it  lasts.  * * * Exports  from  this  section  have  thus  far  been  limited  to  from  800  to  1,200 
barrels  of  salted  salmon  per  annum  from  the  Nushagak  River. 

It  is  probable  that  this  latter  reference  was  to  the  salting  done  by  traders  on  a 
limited  scale.  The  Alaska  Commercial  Company,  or  their  agents,  salted  salmon  at 
various  stations  prior  to  1880,  and,  as  they  had  an  important  station  at  Fort  Alex- 
ander, on  the  Nushagak,  it  is  probable  that  some  salting  was  done  there. 

FISHING  METHODS  AND  FISHERMEN. 

Two  methods  only  are  employed  in  taking  salmon  for  commercial  purposes  in 
th  is  district,  viz,  by  gill  nets  and  by  traps,  and  both  are  well  adapted  to  the  local 
conditions. 

The  strong  currents  and  comparatively  narrow  deep-water  channels,  together 
with  the  discolored  water,  permit  the  use  of  gill  nets  with  great  success.  The 
dimensions  of  the  nets  vary  according  to  the  depth  of  water  and  the  individual 
ideas  of  the  different  cannery  superintendents.  For  redfish  the  length  varies  from 
75  to  80  fathoms;  the  depth  from  20  to  26  meshes,  and  the  mesh  from  6-|  to  61  inches 
stretched.  For  king  salmon  the  length  is  from  120  to  125  fathoms,  the  depth  24 
meshes,  and  the  mesh  91  inches  stretched.  Floats  are  rigged  3 feet  apart  and  leads  21 
feet  apart.  The  average  value  is  about  65  cents  per  fathom,  depending  on  the  market 
and  the  quantity  purchased.  The  large  companies  use  a great  amount  of  web,  and 
have  special  arrangements  with  the  manufacturers.  By  watching  the  market  closely 
and  buying  when  the  price  is  low  they  have  a great  advantage  over  small  operators. 

The  gill-net  boats  used  on  the  Nushagak  and  the  Ugashik  are  regular  Columbia 
River  boats,  built  in  San  Francisco  at  an  average  price,  complete,  of  $200.  The 
usual  dimensions  are:  Length,  25  feet  1 inch;  beam,  7 feet  8 inches;  depth,  2 feet 
6 inches;  capacity,  300  cubic  feet.  They  have  a centerboard  and  spritsail,  and  will 
carry,  as  an  extreme,  1,400  redfish  The  boats  used  on  the  Kvichak,  Naknek,  and 
Egegak  are  flat-bottom  double-enders,  about  1 foot  longer  than  the  Columbia  River 
boats,  but  have  the  same  rig  and  the  same  capacity,  and  on  the  water  resemble  them 
very  closely.  Their  value  is  about  $100,  complete.  Two  men  form  a gill-net  crew — 
a netter  and  a boat-puller.  They  work  on  tides,  and  when  the  fish  are  plentiful  remain 
near  the  canneries,  but  when  the  run  is  slack  they  may  drift  15  or  20  miles  away. 

Traps,  used  extensively  in  the  Bristol  Bay  district,  are  a subject  for  criticism 
throughout  Alaska.  They  are  expensive  to  build  and  maintain,  but  have  many 
advantages  to  the  canner.  The  great  benefit  of  a trap  is  not  only  that  it  fishes  day 
and  night,  but,  if  the  run  is  heavy  for  a few  days  and  the  cannery  fully  supplied  by 
the  gill-netters,  the  fish  in  the  traps  can  be  held  for  a time  until  the  catch  of  the  gill- 
netters  is  slack.  These  advantages  have  frequently  led  the  trapmen  beyond  the  limits 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


181 


of'  the  law,  and  the  time  has  come  when  the  use  of  traps  must  be  regulated  and  the 
law  enforced,  or  else  they  must  be  abolished.  Having  in  mind  now  the  whole  of 
Alaska,  it  is  my  opinion  that  if  this  be  not  done  they  will  work  a great  injury  to  the 
fisheries. 


Columbia  River  salmon  boat. 


Columbia  River  salmon  boats  and  flat  bottom  salmon  skiff. 


Traps  catch  not  only  the  salmon  wanted,  but  all  other  species  of  salmon  and  other 
fish  not  wanted.  Practically  all  fish  taken  in  the  traps,  except  redfish,  are  waste, 
and  until  one  sees  the  tons  of  this  waste  product,  one  can  not  realize  the  magnitude 
of  this  giant  octopus  that  grasps  everything  in  its  tentacles. 

Fish  were  very  plentiful  this  year,  and  the  gill-netters  were  able  to  supply  most 
of  the  fish  used.  It  was  said  on  this  account  that  traps  took  more  fish  than  were 


182 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


wanted,  and  that  they  were  frequently  opened  to  let  the  impounded  fish  escape. 
This  statement  may  be  true,  but  there  never  was  a cat  that  held  a mouse  with  more 
tenacity  than  a eanneryman  holds  a salmon,  and  it  is  doubted  if  a salmon  of  choice 
species  is  ever  allowed  to  escape  as  long  as  it  is  lit  to  be  put  inside  a tin  can. 

1 have  said  here  that  practically  all  fish  taken  in  the  traps,  except  redlish,  are 
waste.  This  should  be  slightly  modified,  though  practically  it  is  true;  yet,  in  justice 
to  the  cannery-men,  it  may  be  said  that  the  records  of  the  past  few  years  show  that, 
besides  redfish,  on  the  average  less  than  8,000  cases  of  king  and  8,000  cases  of  all  other 
species  were  packed  per  year  in  the  whole  Bristol  Bay  district,  and  some  of  these  no 
doubt  were  taken  in  traps. 

There  is  a question  arising  in  my  mind  which  now  can  only  be  stated  and  left  for 
the  future  to  decide,  as  follows:  Traps  take  all  fish  of  all  sizes;  gill  nets  take  only  the 
large  fish;  will  gill-net  fishing  result  in  decreasing  the  size  of  the  fish? 

In  one  locality  trap  men  informed  me  that  trap  fish  are  more  expensive  than  gill- 
net  fish.  In  another  place  it  was  said  that  this  year  two  gill-net  boats  secured  more 
fish  than  one  trap,  but  when  asked  why  the  traps  were  maintained  the  reply  was 
that  the  fish  were  held  in  the  traps  until  wanted. 

One  eanneryman,  whose  resources  seemed  limited  and  who  did  not  feel  able  to 
maintain  traps,  frankly  said  that  traps  should  be  abolished;  but,  when  asked  if  he 
believed  that  traps  were  injurious  to  the  fisheries,  he  was  equally  frank  in  saying 
“ No.”  The  motive  is  evident. 

The  traps  used  are  of  the  general  type  illustrated  in  my  report  of  1897,  page  170. 
They  consist  of  the  usual  shore  and  channel  leads,  with  hearts  and  pots,  but  there  are 
all  kinds  of  variations  to  meet  local  conditions  or  the  fancy  of  the  “trap  boss.” 
Some  have  two  pots  and  some  have  additional  appendages  in  the  shape  of  corrals. 

Not  only  is  the  first  cost  of  a trap  in  this  country  large,  but  its  maintenance 
forms  a big  item  of  expense.  All  piling  must  be  imported,  and  the  strong  currents 
frequently  damage  both  piles  and  web.  The  piles  are  pulled  up  when  fishing  ceases 
on  account  of  the  ice,  and  are  redriven  in  the  spring  as  soon  as  the  ice  is  out  of  the 
river  and  before  the  fish  begin  to  run.  The  largest  trap  seen  in  the  Bristol  Bay  district 
had  about  2,700  feet  of  leads  laid  out  in  a rather  complex  wajq  with  two  pots,  75  feet 
by  75  feet,  and  a large  corral.  (See  sketch  on  page  200.) 

Seines  are  not  used  in  this  district,  largely  on  account  of  the  strong  current, 
although  this  could  be  overcome  if  there  were  good  seining  beaches.  There  are  a few 
bowldery  beaches,  but,  as  a rule,  the  banks  and  beaches  are  soft  mud,  so  that  at  low 
water  landing  at  many  points,  if  not  impracticable,  can  only  be  effected  with  great 
effort.  On  one  occasion,  in  landing  at  low  water  near  a cannery  on  the  Nushagak, 
we  became  mired  to  such  an  extent  that  it  was  only  by  clinging  to  a bidarka,  pushed 
out  to  us  by  the  natives,  that  we  were  extricated  and  hauled  ashore. 

The  fishermen  are  white,  usually  foreigners,  chiefly  Scandinavians,  with  some 
Italians.  They  contract  with  the  cannery  for  the  season,  and  receive  $50  per  man 
for  working  the  cannery  ship  from  the  home  port  to  the  cannery  and  back,  discharg- 
ing and  loading  the  vessel  at  the  cannery,  getting  the  nets  and  boats  ready,  and  doing 
other  beach  work  until  fishing  begins.  They  receive  full  and  excellent  board  and 
lodging  from  the  time  of  leaving  their  home  port  until  their  return.  The  wages  of 
trap  and  beach  men  are  $30  per  month  and  one-third  cent  per  case.  The  gill-netters 


SALMON  TRAP,  BELONGING  TO  ALASKA  PACKERS  ASSOCIATION,  NUSHAGAK  RIVER. 


Bull.  U,  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  182.) 


Plate  IV, 


SALMON  TRAP  BELONGING  TO  C.  E.  WHITNEY  & CO.,  NEAR  THEIR  SALTING  STATION  ON  NUSHAQAK  BAY. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  182.) 


Plate  V. 


SALMON  TRAP,  BELONGING  TO  ALASKA  PACKERS  ASSOCIATION,  ON  BEACH  NEAR  CANNERY  OF  ALASKA  PACKING  COMPANY  (A.  P.  A),  NUSHAGAK  BAY 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  182.) 


Plate  VI. 


NORTHERN  AND  INSHORE  POT  OF  SALMON  TRAP,  BELONGING  TO  ALASKA  PACKERS  ASSOCIATION,  NEAR  GRAVEYARD  POINT,  KVICHAK  BAY. 

View  from  beach  at  low  tide,  showing  tunnel  down;  steamer  Sayak  at  anchor  beyond. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  182.) 


Plate  VII. 


SALMON  TRAP,  BELONGING  TO  ALASKA  PACKERS  ASSOCIATION,  NEAR  CANNERY  OF  BRISTOL  PACKING  COMPANY,  UGASHIK  RIVER. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  182.) 


Plate  VIII. 


NATIVE  METHOD  OF  SETTING  GILL  NETS,  ON  BEACH  NEAR  PACIFIC  STEAM  WHALING  COMPANY'S  CANNERY,  NUSHAGAK  BAY. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  \To  face  page  182.) 


Plate  IX. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


183 


and  boat  pullers  receive  2 cents  for  each  redtish  and  10  cents  for  each  king  salmon 
per  boat  of  two  men,  the  fish  being  delivered  and  tallied  at  the  cannery  or  to  a tender 
of  the  cannery.  During  a good  season  they  average  as  high  as  $75  per  month.  If 
during  the  fishing  season  a man  is  taken  from  his  boat  to  do  other  work,  he  receives 
as  wages  an  amount  equal  to  the  average  share  of  that  day. 

When  the  run  is  heavy  and  more  fish  are  supplied  than  the  cannery  can  use,  the 
fishermen  may  be  limited  in  their  catch  to  1,000  a day,  but  not  under  that  amount. 
It  is  not  rare,  when  redtish  are  plentiful,  for  industrious  and  expert  netters,  by  work- 
ing early  and  late,  to  make  two  loads,  or  2,400  fish,  which  nets  $24  to  each  man  in  the 
boat.  This  season  it  was  noticed  at  three  places  that  limits  of  1,000,  1,100,  and  1,200 
redtish,  respectively,  were  placed  on  the  boats,  and  with  the  fh\st  limit  at  one  cannery 
it  was  necessary  to  take  some  men  out  of  the  boats  to  clean  fish,  the  Chinese  being- 
unable  to  keep  up  the  supply  for  the  machinery.  These  men,  therefore,  received 
$10  per  day  for  butchering. 

Unless  one  has  seen  the  bins  of  a large  cannery  in  running  order  words  can  not 
fully  convey  an  impression  of  the  masses  of  fish  used  in  a single  day.  A thousand 
salmon  seems  to  the  ordinary  observer  a large  number,  yet  a single  three-filler 
cannery  will  utilize  each  day  25,000,  and  this  district,  when  running  full,  will  pack 
each  day  250,000  in  its  thirteen  operating  canneries.  It  is  difficult  to  understand 
how  it  is  possible  to  maintain  the  supply,  although  the  run  is  immense. 

In  Nushagak  Bay,  off  Clark  Point,  on  two  occasions  the  fish  were  running  so 
heavily  that  they  were  caught  in  the  propeller  of  the  launch  of  the  Albatross , stopping 
the  engines. 

THE  RUNS  AND  CANNERY  WORK. 

'Die  season  in  Bristol  Bay  is  short.  Not  only  do  the  fish  run  a very  limited  time  but 
good  weather  lasts  but  a few  months,  although  the  conditions  are  far  more  agreeable 
during  the  summer  than  over  Bering  Sea  generally.  There  are  many  bright,  sunny 
days,  frequently  quite  warm,  fewer  gales  and  less ’fog-,  but  with  September  come  the 
gales  and  cold. 

The  cannery  ships  try  to  reach  their  destinations  as  soon  as  the  ice  will  permit 
them  to  enter  the  bays,  as  there  is  only  a short  time  after  their  arrival  to  make  the 
necessary  preparations  before  the  runs  begin.  They  expect  to  arrive  not  later  than 
the  middle  of  May,  and  to  do  this  they  must  enter  Bering  Sea  early,  often  encoun- 
tering much  ice  to  the  eastward,  though  the  rivers  may  be  mostly  clear.  Cannery 
steamers  (tenders)  sometimes  reach  their  destinations  in  April,  but  frequently  are 
obliged  to  lie  outside  or  to  haul  into  a mud  slough  at  high  water  and  lie  ashore  until 
the  rivers  have  discharged  the  floating  ice. 

Bristol  Bay  is  essentially  a redtish  district,  and  while  all  other  species  occur  they 
do  not  run  in  large  numbers.  They  will  be  referred  to  under  the  cannery  headings. 

When  the  vessels  arrive  in  May  there  are  no  salmon  in  the  streams,  even  for  the 
cannery  tables.  The  earliest  arrivals  are  king  salmon,  which  appear  from  June  6 to 
16,  depending  upon  the  river  conditions.  They  are  followed  a few  days  later  by  the 
redtish  which,  about  June  16  to  20,  run  in  sufficient  numbers  to  warrant  operating 
the  canneries  for  them.  The  king  salmon  run  scatteringly  throughout  the  season; 
but  even  on  the  Nushagak,  the  only  Bristol  Bay  locality  where  a regular  pack  of  this 


184 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


species  is  made,  they  cease  fishing  for  them  soon  after  the  redfish  commence  to  run, 
as  the  latter  is  the  more  profitable  fish.  King  salmon  are  nowhere  abundant  in  this 
district  and  the  few  taken  in  the  traps  and  redfish  nets  after  the  packing  of  the 
former  species  is  closed  are  used  on  the  cannery  tables,  or  their  bellies  are  salted  for 
personal  use. 

It  is  said  that  there  is  quite  a run  of  cohoes  after  the  canneries  have  “cleaned  up.” 
A few  are  taken  at  the  close  of  the  redfish  run,  and  it  is  probable  that  they  are 
present  in  numbers  until  cold  weather  sets  in. 

The  canneries  are  practically  in  full  operation  about  one  month,  as  the  redfish 
run  is  over  by  July  20  to  25,  and  during  this  time  they  present  a busy  scene;  every 
one  is  worked  to  his  full  capacity,  and  nothing  is  thought  of,  talked  of,  dreamed  of, 
but  fish.  The  hands  of  the  clock  are  moved  ahead  in  the  morning,  righted  at  noon, 
and  moved  back  in  the  evening  to  gain  time;  work  starts  by  3 in  the  morning,  and 
the  bathroom  is  frequently  not  cleaned  up,  if  it  is  cleaned  at  all,  until  10  and  11  at 
night.  The  employees  appear  weary;  the  Chinese,  never  very  robust-looking,  seem 
to  drag  along  as  though  they  would  drop  in  their  tracks.  The  tinned  fish,  after  cool- 
ing, are  stacked  in  great  warehouses,  for  there  is  no  time  to  lacquer,  label,  and  box, 
as  the  energy  of  the  whole  force  is  concentrated  in  putting  fish  into  tin  cans  and 
sealing  them.  The  leaky  cans  accumulate,  as  the  menders  can  not  keep  up  with  the 
work,  resulting  in  a large  percentage  of  do-overs.  At  last,  when  the  force  is  about 
exhausted,  a respite  comes;  the  run  slacks  and  there  is  a sigh  of  relief  by  all  except 
the  superintendent,  who  swears  that  he  has  not  packed  enough,  though  every  can 
may  be  filled.  The  relief  is  only  temporary,  however;  the  lacquering,  labeling,  test- 
ing, and  boxing  must  now  be  done,  and  there  is  a rush  for  the  final  clean  up,  all 
being  eager  to  take  their  departure.  While  the  Chinese  are  engaged  in  lacquering, 
etc.,  the  fishermen  and  the  beach  gangs  are  pulling  up  the  traps,  drying  and  storing 
the  nets,  hauling  out  the  fishing  boats,  and  loading  the  transport  vessels.  When  the 
cargo  is  on  board,  lighters,  scows,  and  tenders  are  hauled  out  and  put  under  cover, 
the  doors  are  closed,  the  watchman  takes  charge,  and  the  ships  sail  away  with  the 
pack  and  the  human  freight. 

Cannery  men  expect  to  be  “cleaned  up”  in  this  district  by  the  middle  of  August. 

CANS  IN  BRISTOL  BAY. 

On  account  of  the  short  time  intervening  between  the  arrival  of  the  cannery  ship 
and  the  beginning  of  the  runs  it  is  impracticable  to  carry  the  tin  plate  and  make  all 
the  cans  by  hand  on  the  working  ground,  according  to  the  practice  in  the  other  dis- 
tricts. Until  recent  years  all  the  cans  were  transported.  At  the  present  time  30  to 
40  per  cent  are  made  at  the  canneries  and  the  rest  are  carried  from  the  home  port. 
It  was  noticed  that  some  of  these  were  rusty,  and  upon  inquiry  it  was  learned  that 
many  were  in  this  condition,  caused  probably  by  being  packed  in  boxes  made  of 
green  lumber. 

Can-making  machines  are  now  being  installed,  and  the  latest  pattern  seems  to  work 
well,  so  that  the  day  is  not  far  distant  when  the  cans  will  be  made  from  day  to  day  as 
they  are  wanted.  This  will  effect  considerable  saving  in  labor,  in  storage  room,  and 
injury  in  handling.  Besides,  the  machine-made  can  is  better  than  the  one  made  by 
hand.  It  has  fewer  defects,  fewer  leaks,  and  consequently  there  are  fewer  do-overs. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


185 


CHINESE. 

An  account  of  the  Chinese  cannery  labor  in  the  other  Alaska  salmon  districts  is 
given  in  the  1897  report,  page  23,  and  it  does  not  differ  materially  here. 

The  arrangement  for  the  employment  of  Chinese  is  made  through  the  labor  agen- 
cies of  the  large  cities,  principally  in  San  Francisco.  They  work  under  a “boss”  of 
their  own,  who  guarantees  each  man  a certain  amount  for  the  season.  They  do  all  the 
work  in  connection  with  the  pack.  They  receive  the  uncleaned  fish  at  the  bins  and 
deliver  them  canned,  lacquered,  and  labeled,  in  cases,  at  the  other  end  of  the  cannery. 
The  packing  company  transports  the  Chinese  to  the  field  of  work  and  carries  them  to 
the  home  port  at  the  end  of  the  season ; it  provides  them  with  a bunk  house  and 
furnishes  fuel,  water,  and  salt.  The  “boss”  supplies  the  Chinese  “ chow,”  but  during 
the  height  of  the  season  they  also  receive  some  food  from  the  white  mess. 

The  Chinese  contract  this  year  (1900),  in  Bristol  Bay,  was  15  cents  per  case  for 
machine-filled  and  60  cents  per  case  for  hand-filled  pack.  A certain  number  of  cases 
are  guaranteed  in  the  contract,  which  must  be  paid  for  whether  packed  or  not,  and 
if  the  pack  runs  over  the  guaranty  the  extras  are  paid  for  at  the  same  rate.  On 
the  other  hand,  they  are  under  contract  to  pack  a certain  number  per  day  if  fhe  fish 
be  on  hand;  and  if  they  are  unable  to  do  so  the  superintendent  may  employ  extra 
hands  and  charge  them  against  the  Chinese  “boss.” 

These  hands  are  usually  very  satisfactory,  but  in  1900,  on  account  of  the  scarcity 
of  labor  all  over  our  country,  particularly  on  the  west  coast,  an  inferior  class  of 
Chinese  was  obtained  in  many  canneries,  and  there  was  great  complaint.  At  one 
three-filler  cannery  visited,  and  rated  at  2,100  cases  capacity  per  day,  1,900  cases 
was  the  largest  number  that  could  be  made,  and  this  number  only  by  the  greatest 
effort.  It  was  noticed  that  the  Chinese  appeared  weak,  and  many  seemed  ill;  in  fact, 
the  sick  list  was  large,  and  it  required  much  persuasion  to  turn  them  to  work  in 
the  morning.  The  Chinese  bosses  in  several  instances  could  not  till  the  quota  with 
their  own  kind  and  substituted  some  Japanese  coolies,  which  complicated  matters 
materially.  At  one  cannery,  usually  employing  300  Chinese,  there  were  250  of  that 
nationality  and  50  Japanese.  These  latter  were  not  only  lazy  and  worthless,  but 
were  constantly  raising  a disturbance.  Of  the  two  classes  the  Chinese  are  greatly 
preferred.  It  must  be  remembered,  however,  that  the  work  in  Bristol  Bay  is  very 
trying,  the  season  is  short,  the  working  hours  are  long,  and  the  laborer  is  on  a 
constant  rush  from  the  time  of  landing  until  the  pack  is  loaded. 

The  most  arduous  work  in  a cannery  falls  upon  the  butchers  and  fish-cleaners 
and  the  bathroom  men.  The  former  are  on  their  feet  during  the  long  hours  of  each 
day,  standing  in  slush  and  gurry,  and  suffer  much  with  swelled  feet  and  ankles,  while 
the  latter  are  on  the  constant  move  and  are  the  last  to  clean  up  at  night.  The  men 
that  work  at  the  lye  tanks,  with  the  hot  spluttering  lye  splashing  over  them,  have  no 
sinecure. 

NATIVE  LABOR. 

The  canneries  gladly  employ  every  native  who  is  willing  to  work;  nay,  more, 
they  seek  for  this  labor  in  the  villages  and  offer  every  inducement  for  them  to  work, 
and  would  employ  man}7  more  if  they  could  be  obtained  and  were  reliable.  This  is 
not  done  for  charity’s  sake — the  canneries  are  not  in  the  field  for  that  purpose,  though 


186 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  PISH  COMMISSION. 


they  are  far  from  being  uncharitable — but  because  the  labor  is  needed,  particularly 
when  the  rush  is  on,  and  for  which  profitable  provision  can  not  otherwise  be  made. 

When  the  cannery  ships  arrive  in  the  spring  the  native,  having  struggled  through 
a long,  severe  winter,  is  hungry  and  has  many  wants.  He  greets  the  cannery  ship 
with  childish  glee  and  wishes  work.  It  is  given  him,  his  hunger  is  appeased  from 
the  overflowing  cannery  table,  his  daily  wages  soon  supply  the  few  luxuries  he  desires, 
and  then  he  no  longer  cares  for  work.  Why  should  he  work?  Hunger  no  longer 
worries  him,  his  immediate  wants  are  satisfied,  and  he  has  no  others! 

The  condition  of  native  labor  is  the  same  here,  among  the  Eskimo,  as  it  is  in 
other  sections  of  Alaska,  to  which  feature  reference  was  made  in  the  former  report; 


Eskimo  women  cleaning  salmon. 


only  here  the  canneryman,  being  entirely  out  of  the  lines  of  communication  with  the 
labor  market,  seems  still  more  desirous  of  employing  natives  and  frequently  sends 
some  distance  to  their  villages  to  enlist  them  in  his  work.  Statistics  show  that  the 
largest  number  employed  in  any  one  cannery  is  from  25  to  30  for  a short  period. 
Some  days  there  may  be  40  and  the  next  only  10. 

It  is  true  that  the  canneries  can  not  give  them  constant  employment,  as  their 
intelligence  only  warrants  giving-  them  certain  work;  still  a good,  reliable  native  will 
have  work  the  greater  part  of  the  time,  and  can  earn  during  the  short  season  from 
$100  to  $125,  also  having  his  board  furnished  him  during  the  time  emplojmd. 

The  wages  paid  this  year  to  adult  males  was  $2  per  day;  reliable  men  received 
$2.25;  boys  from  12  to  14  years  of  age  received  $1  per  day,  and  children  were  seen 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


187 


piling  cans  who  were  not  more  than  6 years  of  age,  and  who  received  50  cents  a day. 
They  demand  and  receive  their  wages  daily. 

Formerly  the  wage  of  adult  males  was  $1.50  per  day,  but  in  the  early  part  of  this 
season  a “walking  delegate,”  in  the  shape  of  a “tyone”  (chief),  appeared  at  the  can- 
neries and  the  natives  struck  for  $2  and  promptly  got  it. 

Money  seems  to  have  no  value  to  the  native  except  to  satisfy  his  immediate  wants, 
and  the  traders  cater  to  their  taste  for  gewgaws  by  supplying  them  with  things  for 
which  they  have  no  use.  They  have  a fancy  for  cuckoo  clocks  and  watches,  though 
they  can  not  read  the  time;  cheap  jewelry  and  perfume;  and  a silk  dress  is  more  than 
tempting.  One  woman  was  noticed  wearing-  the  usual  skin  trousers  and  boots,  and 
over  all  a velvetine  dress,  well  tucked  up,  and  as  greasy  as  if  it  had  been  soaked  in  a 
pot  of  rancid  oil.  As  before  mentioned,  the  canneries  supply  board  to  all  the  natives 
employed;  the  food  is  abundant  to  the  point  of  wastefulness;  it  is  of  excellent  qual- 
ity, well  cooked,  in  large  variety,  and  given  with  a generous  hand;  none  need  go 
hungry;  even  the  hundreds  of  sled  dogs  from  the  villages  greet  the  cannery  ships, 
gather  around  the  canneries  during  the  season,  and  grow  fat,  sleek,  lazy,  and  good 
natured. 

Of  the  large  supplies  of  food  carried  up  in  the  spring  a considerable  quantity 
usually  remains  over  when  the  cannery  closes.  This  is  stored  at  some  of  the  can- 
neries and  the  watchman  is  instructed  to  distribute  food  in  case  of  distress. 

A large  amount  of  salmon  is  cured  by  the  natives  for  their  own  use  and  for  the 
dog  supply  during  the  winter.  These  fish  are  caught  with  the  greatest  ease.  A 
small  piece  of  condemned  gill  net  is  obtained  from  a cannery  and  is  stretched  between 
poles  planted  in  line  from  high  to  low  water  mark.  When  the  tide  falls  the  net  is 
frequently  so  full  of  fish  that  they  can  not  all  be  utilized.  Nets  were  noticed  in  which 
it  appeared  as  if  nearly  every  mesh  held  a fish,  and  others  were  seen  in  which  the 
meshed  fish  were  decaying,  the  natives  being  too  lazy  to  remove  them  "in  proper  time. 
(See  plate  ix.) 

There  can  be  no  doubt  that  the  canneries  have  benefited  the  native  by  adding  to 
his  physical  comfort.  The  fish  supply  for  his  use  has  not  been  reduced;  on  the  con- 
trary, the  cannery  has  placed  in  the  hands  of  the  native  a means  for  taking  fish  far 
superior  to  anything  he  ever  dreamed  of,  and  if  lie  is  willing  to  work  he  can  earn 
money  and  procure  civilized  comforts.  Whether  his  contact  with  the  fishermen  and 
Chinese  during  their  yearly  visits  adds  anything  to  his  moral  well-being  is  a question, 
but  he  suffers  no  more  here  than  natives  do  in  all  parts  of  the  world  when  they  come 
in  contact  with  our  civilization. 

At  Nushagak  a large  number  of  tyones  called  on  board  to  pay  their  respects  to 
the  commanding  officer.  In  answer  to  an  inquiry,  they  said  they  had  no  complaints 
to  make  and  they  were  satisfied  with  the  surrounding  conditions. 

CANNERY  WASTE. 

The  waste  in  the  Bristol  Bay  district  is  strikingly  large,  due,  in  the  first  place, 
to  the  greater  abundance  of  fish,  and,  secondly,  to  the  necessity  for  rushing  the  pack 
on  account  of  the  short  season.  To  the  novice  who  is  accustomed  to  see  fish  only  in 
a market,  where  salmon  are  sold  at  from  10  to  20  cents  per  pound,  this  waste  is  the 
first  thing  to  impress  him.  It  is  probably  within  the  limit  when  it  is  said  that  the 


188 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


waste  in  this  district  for  the  present  year  is  not  under  50,000  cases  of  redfish  alone. 
The  waste  here  referred  to  is  in  marketable  salmon,  and  does  not  include  other  fishes 
wasted  in  the  traps  or  nets.  It  runs  through  the  whole  process,  from  the  time  the 
fish  are  captured  until  the  last  tapping  test  is  made. 

The  largest  waste,  probably  comes  from  holding  the  fish  until  they  are  unfit  to 
pack  and  then  throwing  them  away.  This  may  occur  at  the  traps,  in  the  tenders,  or 
in  the  fish-bins.  Many  are  lost  in  passing  from  fishing  boat  to  receiving  scow;  others 
again  in  pewing  from  scow  to  fish-house.  In  this  district  only  three  cuts  are  made,  the 
end  pieces  being  thrown  away;  then  comes  the  waste  in  machines,  which,  including 
the  loss  of  the  tail  pieces,  is  32  per  cent  greater  than  with  a careful  hand-filled  pack. 

The  do-overs  should  also  be  considered  waste,  though  they  reach  consumers  in 
out-of-the-way  places.  A certain  percentage  is  unavoidable,  but  in  a well-conducted 
establishment  this  should  not  exceed  1£  per  cent.  In  this  district  it  is  over  4 per  cent. 

In  front  of  every  cannery  in  this  district,  and  along  the  beaches  for  several 
miles,  thousands  of  dead  fish  are  seen.  Usually  the  tide  serves  well  and  carries  other 
thousands  away,  but  sometimes  the  wind  is  unfavorable  and  win  rows  of  decaying 
fish,  a hundred  feet  in  width,  along  the  beach,  testify  to  the  enormous  waste  during 
a canning  season. 

There  is  another  source  of  waste  that  may  be  mentioned,  which  consists  of  the 
king  salmon,  the  finest  salmon  that  swims  the  Pacific  waters.  This  species  does  not 
run  abundantly  anywhere  in  Alaska.  An  average  of  less  than  8,000  cases  are  packed  in 
the  Bristol  Bay  district,  of  which  all  but  a few  hundred  are  packed  on  the  Nushagak. 
They  run,  however,  in  a scattering  way  in  all  the  rivers  where  packing  is  done. 
Very  few  are  canned  after  July  1,  for  the  entire  energy  is  then  bent  upon  the  redfish. 
As  a few  king  salmon  are  taken  every  day  during  the  season  in  the  traps  and  nets, 
the  bellies  of  those  not  used  on  the  cannery  table  are  cut  out  and  salted  for  private 
use,  and  the  remainder  of  the  fish  is  frequently  thrown  away.  Great,  beautiful  fishes, 
weighing  from  25  to  40  pounds,  from  which  the  bellies  had  been  removed,  were  seen 
at  several  places  lying  on  the  beach,  to  be  carried  away  by  the  tide  or  consumed  by 
the  birds. 

POUNDS  OF  LIVE  FISH  TO  THE  CASE. 

In  Southeast  Alaska  and  in  Prince  William  Sound,  where  redfish  are  not  plentiful 
all  parts  are  utilized  and  carefully  packed.  Upon  investigating  this  subject  in  1897 
(see  report,  p.  31),  it  was  concluded  that,  if  care  were  taken,  from  65  to  68  pounds 
of  live  fish  would  make  a liberal  case  of  48  1-pound  tins,  depending  somewhat  upon 
the  size  of  the  fish.  In  a certain  locality  this  year  conditions  made  it  possible  to 
make  a comparison  between  machine-filled  cans  and  a hand  pack,  and  it  may  lie  of 
interest  on  account  of  what  has  been  said  under  the  subject  of  waste. 

A small  cannery  that  made  a very  careful  hand  pack  this  season  by  using  the 
whole  fish  averaged  8.3  redfish  to  the  case.  Near  by  is  a larger  cannery  making  a 
machine  pack  and  using  fish  from  the  same  stream.  By  making  three  cuts  and  reject- 
ing the  tail  pieces  this  cannery  averaged  11  redfish  to  the  case.  Thirty-three  redfish 
taken  in  one  haul  of  the  ship’s  seine  averaged  8.25  pounds,  and  30  redfish  from  the 
cannery  bin  averaged  7.5  pounds,  giving  a mean  of  7.875.  Using  these  factors,  it  will 
be  seen  that  in  the  hand  pack  65.3  pounds  of  fish  were  used  to  the  case,  the  same 
amount  as  shown  in  my  previous  investigation,  while  in  the  machine  pack  86.6  pounds 


ALASKA  SALMON'  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


181) 


were  used,  an  increase  of  32.5  per  cent.  It  should  be  noted,  however,  that  in  the 
latter  the  tail  pieces  were  rejected,  but  were  packed  under  a separate  brand. 

Inquiry  made  of  cannerymen  in  the  Bristol  Bay  district  shows  that  it  was  gen- 
erally conceded  that  it  took  from  80  to  85  pounds  of  live  redfish  to  make  a case  in 
this  district.  It  is  my  own  opinion  that  if  the  waste  from  all  sources  be  considered, 
at  least  100  pounds  of  live  redfish  are  .used,  destroyed,  or  wasted  for  every  case 
of  this  species  of  salmon  packed  in  this  district. 


INFLUENCE  OF  WINDS  ON  MOVEMENTS  OF  FISH. 

So  far  as  observations  have  been  made  it  has  been  noticed  that  salmon  in  inland 
waters,  and  upon  approaching-  them,  swim  at  a depth  estimated  at  from  6 to  12  feet 
below  the  surface,  and  that  they  favor  a course  with  the  wind  in  approaching  fresh 
water.  At  Koggiung,  Naknek,  and  Egegak  the  southwest  winds  bring  an  abundance 
of  fish  during  the  run.  At  Ugashik  the  southwest  winds  are  best,  but  northwest 
winds  also  are  favorable,  while  on  the  Nushagak  it  is  claimed  that  south  and  south- 
east winds  give  the  best  results  in  the  fisheries.  Upon  examining  a chart  it  will  be 
noticed  that  these  directions  of  winds  are  over  the  sea  and  toward  the  several  locali- 
ties mentioned.  As  before  noted,  in  midsummer  the  weather  over  the  land  in  the 
Bristol  Bay  district  is  frequently  quite  warm  and  sunny,  often  too  warm  to  keep  the 
fish  in  good  condition  very  long.  It  is  claimed  that  cold  weather,  with  light  rain, 
gives  the  most  favorable  conditions  for  the  successful  operation  of  a cannery. 

SALTING. 


Every  cannery  in  Bristol  Bay,  or,  if  more  than  one  cannery  in  a locality  is 
operated  under  one  management,  then  every  group  of  canneries,  is  fitted  for  salting 
salmon.  When  the  fish  run  in  such  numbers  that  the  cannery  can  not  utilize  all,  the 
surplus  goes  to  the  salting  tanks.  Practically  all  the  fish  used  in  this  manner  are  red- 
fish, of  which  16,778  barrels  were  salted  in  1900  and  in  addition  558  barrels  of  king 
salmon. 

During  1900  there  was  but  one  saltery  operated  solely  as  such  in  this  district.  It 
is  situated  on  the  Nushagak  and  had  an  output  of  7,186  barrels  of  redfish  and  536 
barrels  of  king  salmon  for  the  season. 

It  is  claimed  that  if  salmon  are  dry-salted  in  kenches,  and  then  boxed  or  barreled, 
they  will  become  rusty,  though  this  method  ivas  practiced  in  several  instances  in 
Southeast  Alaska  this  year.  The  usual  method  in  Alaska  is  to  salt  the  fish  down  in 
wooden  tanks  or  vats,  and  leave  them  until  they  are  thoroughly  shrunk  and  the  water 
in  them  has  been  replaced  by  brine.  They  may  then  be  washed  out  at  any  time  and 
resalted  into  barrels. 

It  is  very  difficult  to  obtain  correct  salting  statistics,  but  the  following,  taken  from 
the  books  of  the  Merchants’  Exchange  at  San  Francisco,  may  at  least  show  the  varia- 
tions in  different  years. 

Total  pack  of  Alaska  salt  salmon. 


1889 

1890 

1891 

1892 

1893 

1894 


Barrels. 

...  6, 930 

1895 

...  13,417 

1896 

...  8, 913 

1897 

...  17,895 

1898 

...  21,290 

1899 

...  29,096 

1900 

Barrels. 
..  14,234 
..  7,700 
..  15,127 
..  18,718 
..  22,872 
..  17,687 


190 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Formerly  from  46  to  47  redfish  were  counted  as  making  a full  barrel  of  200 
pounds  of  the  salted  product  in  this  district.  Inquiry  at  different  places  this  season 
showed  that  the  number  ranged  from  48  to  52  redfish  to  the  barrel.  The  largest 
saltery  averages  50  redfish,  50  cohoes,  or  14  king  salmon  to  the  barrel. 

For  other  saltery  notes  reference  is  made  to  my  former  report,  page  21. 

CANNERIES  AND  CANNERY  METHODS. 

In  my  former  report  this  subject  was  fully  referred  to  and  described,  and  it  is 
not  my  intention  to  indulge  in  useless  repetition;  but  since  my  last  inspection  many 
other  canneries  have  been  visited  and  considerable  time  has  been  spent  in  observing 
the  processing  of  the  fish.  Some  new  “wrinkles”  have  been  noted  which,  though 
possibly  of  minor  importance,  may  be  of  interest. 

The  general  methods  are  quite  similar  in  all  canneries,  though  the  arrangement 
of  buildings  and  machinery,  the  amount  of  the  latter,  and  the  detailed  appliances 
differ  materially.  There  seems  to  be  no  standard;  a cannery  is  built  and  arranged 
according  to  the  individual  ideas  of  its  superintendent,  and  no  two  appear  to  be  alike, 
except  a few  built  by  one  company,  which  all  seem  badly  arranged.  It  is  rather 
surprising  that  some  model  cannery  is  not  constructed  as  an  object  lesson. 

It  is  not  ray  intention  to  lay  out  a plan  for  a cannery,  but  simply  to  make  a few 
suggestions  and  point  out  special  features  which  may  improve  them.  A cannery 
building  should  have  an  abundance  of  light,  be  thoroughly  ventilated,  well  drained, 
whitewashed  inside,  and  washed  down  with  a steam  hose  every  working  da}r.  A 
three-filler  cannery  should  have  a width  of  at  least  50  feet,  and  the  length  should 
correspond  to  the  machines  used  in  processing,  giving  ample  room,  so  that  the  cans 
may  go  uninterruptedly  throughout  the  whole  length  of  the  building.  If  the  ground 
will  not  admit  a building  long  enough  to  have  the  bathroom  on  the  extension,  the 
the  latter,  with  the  boilers,  may  be  located  in  an  ell.  From  the  door  where  the  fish 
are  received  to  the  bathroom,  except  the  mending  tables,  there  should  be  nothing 
but  the  machinery  and  appurtenances  for  processing  the  fish.  A second  floor  may 
be  necessary  over  the  filling  machines  for  the  storage  of  cans  and  for  the  purpose  of 
feeding  them  from  an  elevation,  but  it  were  better  to  feed  with  a traveler  and  leave 
the  roof  clear  for  skylights  and  ventilation.  If,  however,  a second  floor  is  insisted 
upon,  it  should  be  double-layed,  one  course  diagonal,  to  keep  out  infiltration  of  dust 
and  dirt  over  the  machines.  A separate  two-story  building,  parallel  with  the  cannery, 
and  joining  it  by  a platform  at  least  40  feet  wide,  should  be  erected  for  a warehouse, 
the  platform  to  be  used  for  a cooling  space. 

The  fish-house  should  be  over  the  water  at  all  stages  of  the  tide,  so  that  boats  and 
lighters  may  discharge  at  any  time,  and  the  muck  and  gurry  be  carried  away  by  the 
current.  The  other  buildings,  mess-houses,  bunk-houses,  etc.,  should  be  placed  con- 
veniently, having  due  regard  for  protection  from  fire. 

A very  convenient  rigging  for  transferring  fish  from  the  boats  to  the  fish-house 
was  noticed  at  a cannery  where  there  is  a large  rise  and  fall  of  tide,  uncovering  a 
Hat  in  front  of  the  building.  An  inclined  plane  led  from  the  side  of  the  fish-house  to 
below  the  low-water  mark,  and  a car  operated  by  cable  and  steam  traversed  the  plane. 
The  fishing  boats  hauled  on  either  side  at  all  stages  of  the  tide  and,  lying  at  the  same 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


191 


level,  tallied  the  catch  into  the  car,  which,  when  full,  was  run  to  the  tish-house  and 
unloaded  by  dumping. 

At  another  cannery,  where  fish  are  conveyed  to  the  cannery  by  steam  tenders,  an 
inclined  plane  was  used,  extending  to  deep  water,  having  the  end  V-shaped,  admitting 
the  cannery  steamer  into  the  V and  allowing  her  to  discharge  from  either  side.  In 
this  case  the  tilled  cars  were  run  over  an  elevation  into  the  bins  and  then  dumped. 

In  a locality  where  the  conditions"  did  not  permit  the  tish-house  to  be  located  over 
the  water  at  low  tide,  and  where  the  cannery  supply  of  running  water  was  large,  an 
immense  hopper  was  built  under  the  door,  with  an  inclined  trough,  through  which 
the  gurry  was  washed  by  a constant  stream. 

In  a few  canneries  it  was  noticed  that  each  fish-cleaning  table  had  a spray  of 
water  from  several  jets  playing  over  it,  thus  washing  off  the  blood  and  gurry.  This 
feature  might  be  more  extensively  copied,  as  it  promotes  cleanliness  in  a place  which 
is  never  too  clean  or  free  from  odor. 

At  several  canneries  a neat  and  satisfactory  contrivance  was  seen  in  operation 
for  transporting  fish  from  the  fish-house  to«the  cannery,  which  consisted  of  a shallow 
trough  having  for  its  bottom  an  endless  chain  of  buckets.  As  a neat  addition,  a 
spray,  formed  by  a perforated  pipe  about  8 feet  long  and  suspended  over  the  buckets, 
washed  the  fish  while  passing  under  it. 

A new  solderer  was  noticed,  having,  instead  of  the  endless  chain  to  give  motion 
to  the  cans,  a metal  spiral  running  the  length  of  the  machine  and  revolving  on  an 
axle  through  the  center.  Each  loop  grasped  a can  and  followed  it  to  the  end,  thus 
giving  the  cans  the  proper  motion  and  preventing  them  from  rolling  side  by  side  and 
lapping  the  solder  over  the  ends,  as  is  frequently  the  case  with  the  chain  machines. 

An  effective  contrivance  was  seen  by  which  the  can,  after  leaving  the  solderer, 
was  turned  upon  an  endless  belt  so  as  to  permit  the  solder  to  set  into  the  top,  and 
carried  upright  for  a distance  of  about  20  feet,  when  it  was  again  turned  on  its  side 
automatically  and  rolled  under  the  cooling  spray.  New  retorts  with  quick  closing- 
doors  were  also  seen. 

The  Alaska  Packers  Association  sent  several  fish-cleaning  machines  into  the  field 
for  trial,  but  none  was  seen  in  operation.  It  is  understood,  however,  that  one,  the 
invention  of  William  Munn,  the  superintendent  of  their  cannery  at  Alitak  Bay,  has 
been  perfected  after  several  trials,  and  is  said  to  work  so  satisfactorily  that  a number 
are  now  under  construction  for  the  season  of  1901.  If  a machine  for  fish-cleaning 
can  be  successfully  operated  it  will  be  a great  boon  to  the  canneries. 

Can-making  machines  are  now  being  extensively  introduced  by  the  Alaska 
Packers  Association,  and  the  season  of  1901  will  probably  see  all  their  canneries 
equipped  with  these  machines.  A set  consists  of  one  cutter,  which  cuts  the  sheet 
tin  into  exact  lengths  for  the  bodies;  one  body-maker,  which  forms  the  body,  makes 
the  seam,  and  solders  it;  one  topper  and  one  solderer,  both  of  which  are  of  the  same 
form  as  those  used  in  the  cannery.  In  the  can-making  department  there  are  also 
dies  operated  by  steam  for  cutting  tops  and  bottoms  and  an  extra  one  for  cutting- 
floats — the  small  piece  of  tin  used  inside  the  can  under  the  top  to  keep  the  vent  clear 
in  processing.  The  feed  for  the  plate  in  the  body-maker  seems  to  be  the  most  imper- 
fect part  of  the  machine,  causing  frequent  jams;  but  even  allowing  for  delays  due  to 
these  jams,  a set  will  turn  out  an  average  of  fifty  cans  a minute. 


192 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


BRANDING  SALMON. 

Attempts  have  been  made  at  different  points  on  the  Pacific  coast  to  mark  salmon, 
and  it  would  be  interesting  if  the  facts  in  all  cases  were  recorded  as  well  as  the  results. 
It  is  well  known  that  at  several  points  young  salmon  have  been  marked  by  cutting 
off  the  fleshy  (adipose)  fin;  but,  unfortunately,  this  seems  to  be  the  only  method 
offering  any  facility  for  marking  these  fishes,  and  if  all  localities  adopt  the  same 
system  but  little  benefit  will  be  derived. 

attention  has,  on  several  occasions,  been  invited  to  so-called  marked  fish  other 
than  those  from  which  the  fleshy  fin  had  been  removed,  and  it  may  be  of  some  inter- 
est to  give  a brief  description  of  them.  In  1897  it  was  called  to  a mark  on  the  gill 
cover  of  a redfish  at  Uyak.  The  mark  was  elliptical  in  shape,  with  three-fourths  inch 
and  one-half  inch  as  the  respective  major  and  minor  axes;  the  edge  appeared  milled, 
and  there  were  some  blurred  marks  around  the  inner  circle,  while  in  the  center  there 
was  a design  which  might  be  taken  for  a crown  surmounting  a sphere.  At  San 
Francisco,  in  the  office  of  the  Alaska  Packers  Association,  a similar  mark,  also  on 
the  gill  cover,  is  preserved  in  alcohol.  This  year,  on  the  Nushagak,  a mark  of  the 
same  kind,  though  less  distinct,  was  seen  on  the  gill  cover  of  a humpback.  My  first 
impression  was  that  these  marks  had  been  made  b}"  a coin,  but  this  would  be  imprac- 
ticable unless  made  on  an  adult  tish.  It  is  my  belief  now  that  the  mark  is  that  of 
some  parasite  which  had  become  firmly  attached  to  the  gill  cover  and  left  its  impres- 
sion. This  year  two  redfish  were  taken  on  the  Nushagak  that  had  the  dorsal-tin  rays 
entirely  removed  and  the  skin  was  apparently  joined  smoothly  over  the  back. 

One  fish  was  taken  in  the  same  locality  with  an  impression  resembling  an  M or  a 
W,  If  inches  square  on  its  side;  and  another  with  the  same  letter,  and  a scroll  drawn 
out  from  the  end.  At  Koggiung  two  fish  were  taken  with  the  M or  W marks,  and 
one  with  H W or  M II.  These  marks  were  midway  on  the  side  of  the  tish,  brown 
in  color,  and  apparently  the  scales  were  wanting  in  the  wake  of  the  lines,  which  had 
the  appearance  of  having  been  traced  with  an  iron.  It  is  doubtful  if  young  tish  can 
be  marked  in  this  manner,  and  the  suggestion  is  offered  that  it  is  possible  that  the 
marks  may  have  been  produced  by  the  fish  tying  on  a piece  of  webbing  in  the  bottom 
of  the  boat,  and  that  the  tish  piled  on  top  may,  under  proper  conditions,  have  fur- 
nished sufficient  pressure  to  form  the  marks. 

OTHER  SALMON  STREAMS  IN  BERING  SEA. 

The  question  is  frequently  asked  whether  there  are  any  streams  in  Bering  Sea, 
other  than  those  of  the  Bristol  Bay  region,  which  carry  salmon  that  may  be  utilized 
for  commercial  purposes.  To  this  no  definite  reply  can  be  made  for  the  reason  that 
other  factors  enter  into  the  proposition  besides  the  one  of  an  abundance  of  salmon. 
Accessibility  is  an  important  factor;  feasibility  in  making  a catch,  length  of  season, 
and  climatic  conditions  are  others.  It  is  customary,  before  building  a cannery  in  a 
new  locality,  to  thoroughly  prospect  it  first.  A saltery  is  often  maintained  for  sev- 
eral seasons  and  the  values  of  the  streams  ascertained.  It  is  known  that  salmon  of 
different  species  run  in  numbers  in  the  rivers  on  the  American  side,  as  far  north  as 
the  Noatak,  which  empties  into  Kotzebue  Sound,  and  it  is  probable  that  other  rivers 
emptying  into  the  Arctic  Ocean  also  carry  salmon. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


193 


The  Nushagak  is  the  northernmost  river  now  fished  for  commercial  purposes;  to 
the  westward  of  it  is  the  Togiak,  emptying  into  Kululak  Bay,  between  Cape  Con- 
stantine and  Cape  Newenham.  The  Alaska  Packers  Association  prospected  this 
river  by  maintaining  a saltery  near  its  mouth  for  two  years,  seasons  of  1895  and 
1896,  and  then  abandoned  it  as  unprofitable. 

The  next  large  river  to  the  northward  is  the  Kuskokwim,  which,  so  far  as  known, 
is  not  accessible  to  vessels.  The  tides  in  this  river  are  far  greater  than  on  the 
Nushagak,  and  the  entrance  is  choked  with  banks  and  shoals.  The  census  report  of 
1890  states,  page  101: 

But  a few  miles  to  the  northward  of  Quinhaghamiut  [which  is  55  miles  to  the  northward  of 
Goodnews  Bay,  according  to  the  same  report]  is  the  present  limit  of  navigation  for  seagoing  crafts,  at 
the  mouth  of  the  Kuskokwim,  and  even  that  point  is  reached  with  difficulty  and  at  considerable  risk, 
owing  to  shoals  of  unknown  extent  and  shifting  channels;  and  as  at  this  point  the  anchorage  is  entirely 
exposed  to  prevailing  winds  and  sea,  the  Kuskokwim  River  can  scarcely  be  considered  open  to  com- 
merce. At  present  but  one  vessel  a year  runs  in  when  the  indications  are  favorable  to  discharge  a 
cargo  of  goods  sent  up  for  the  Kuskokwim  trade  by  the  Alaska  Commercial  Company. 

The  census  report  of  1880,  in  relation  to  salmon  on  the  Kuskokwim,  states: 

Altogether  these  people  would  be  in  a sorry  plight  indeed  were  it  not  for  the  abundant  supply  of 
salmon  during  the  summer.  * * * They  all  Hock  together  on  the  banks  of  the  Kuskokwim  and 
fairly  line  the  river  with  fish  traps  and  drying  frames,  or  poles,  and  from  the  beginning  of  June  to  the 
month  of  August  the  traps  are  constantly  being  emptied  and  filled  again.  The  quantity  of  fish  secured 
during  the  season  is  very  great,  even  in  proportion  to  the  number  of  inhabitants,  but  when  we  con- 
sider the  wasteful  habit  of  drying  the  fish  until  only  a small  fraction  of  the  original  substance  remains 
it  can  not  astonish  us  to  hear  the  natives  compla'n  of  an  insufficient  supply.  Over  4,000  people  lay  in 
the  winter  supply  for  themselves  and  for  their  dogs  during  a few  months  of  summer,  but  it  is  safe  to 
state  that  with  a more  economical  mode  of  preserving  the  fish  four  times  the  number  could  live  in 
comfort  within  the  same  space. 

In  the  next  stretch  to  the  northward  there  are  doubtless  other  rivers  carrying- 
salmon,  but  of  these  there  seems  to  bo  no  information,  until  we  arrive  at  the  Yukon, 
and  here  no  exact  data  is  obtainable.  The  census  report  of  1880  states,  page  11: 

The  ice  came  down  the  Yukon  in  such  masses  and  in  such  profusion  that  it  grounded  in  the 
deltoid  mouth  in  the  month  of  July  so  as  to  form  a barrier  against  the  running  of  the  salmon. 

Again,  in  reference  to  the  Yukon,  page  73: 

We  know  that  the  run  of  the  various  species  of  salmon  is  very  large,  though  not  extended  over  a 
large  period,  and  also  that  a large  proportion  of  the  catch  is  preserved  by  the  wasteful  process  of  drying 
only.  * * * As  far  as  the  Eskimo  race  has  extended  its  settlements  on  the  banks  of  the  river,  to 

a distance  of  from  200  to  300  miles  from  the  sea,  the  fish-traps  already  described  lie  on  both  banks;  but 
as  the  mode  of  fishing  affects  only  such  fish  as  ascend  the  stream  along  the  banks  and  eddies,  the 
number  of  salmon  which  complete  their  journey  of  reproduction  without  meeting  any  obstacles  must 
exceed  by  far  the  number  secured  by  the  natives.  In  view  of  the  immense  width  and  depth  of  the 
river,  it  seems  very  doubtful  whether  any  of  this  immense  mass  of  fish  could  be  secured  by  fishermen, 
even  were  they  provided  with  all  the  appliances  now  in  use  on  the  Columbia  River,  in  Oregon,  and  the 
Sacramento,  in  California. 

This  great  river  we  know  is  not  accessible  to  any  seagoing  vessel,  as  none  but 
those  of  the  shallowest  draft  can  enter. 

In  reference  to  rivers  farther  north,  quoting  from  the  census  report  of  1880: 

Of  the  consumption  of  fish  along  the  Arctic  coast  of  Alaska  to  the  northward  of  Bering  Straits,  no 
reliable  data  are  accessible.  The  people  subsist  to  a greater  extent  upon  seals,  walrus,  and  the  meat  of 
whales.  The  run  of  salmon  in  the  few  larger  rivers  is  necessarily  short,  and  the  fish  are  much  smaller 
than  we  find  them  to  the  southward;  the  natives,  however,  manage  to  put  up  during  the  brief  summer 
a small  supply  of  dried  salmon  and  whitefish. 

F.  C.  B.  1901—13 


194 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


All  the  northern  rivers  probably  carry  large  numbers  of  salmon,  but,  owing  to 
their  inaccessibility  and  the  shortness  of  the  season,  it  is  doubtful  if  there  is  any 
locality  on  the  American  side  of  Bering  Sea,  except  the  Bristol  Bay  region,  where 
commercial  salmon  fishing  can  be  profitably  conducted  until  salmon  become  very 
scarce.  On  the  Asiatic  side,  so  far  as  my  inquiry  extends,  the  rivers  carry  the  same 
’ species  of  salmon  as  on  the  American  side,  and  the  fisheries  each  year  are  being 
extended.  Large  numbers  of  salmon  are  dry-salted  on  the  Amur  River  and  shipped 
to  Japan.  The  Russian  Seal-Skin  Company,  which  has  large  concessions  covering 
eastern  Siberia,  including  Kamchatka,  is  extending  its  fisheries  year  by  year.  On 
our  recent  visit  to  Kamchatka  information  was  obtained  at  Petropaulski,  from  their 
Russian  manager,  to  the  effect  that  they  have  been  exporting  salt  salmon  for  the  last 
three  or  four  years  and  have  now  25  fishing  stations,  9 in  the  Sea  of  Okhotsk,  9 in 
the  Bay  of  Avatcha,  4 on  the  approaches  to  that  bay,  and  3 on  the  outer  coast  in  the 
vicinity  of  Cape  Tschipunski.  The  company  employs,  distributed  amongst  these 
stations,  500  Japanese  fishermen,  who,  with  their  sampans,  nets,  etc.,  are  brought 
from  Hakodate  in  the  spring  and  returned  there  in  the  fall.  The  fish  are  dry-salted, 
packed  in  wooden  crates  of  about  L20  pounds  each,  and  find  a ready  market  in  Japan. 
In  1899  the  company  shipped  900,000  salmon.  It  was  the  intention  of  this  company 
to  erect  a cannery  in  Avatcha  Bav  during  the  year  1900,  for  operation  in  1901. 

It  was  stated  that  Kamchatka  River  carried  an  abundance  of  salmon  of  all  species; 
but  it  is  understood  that  the  locality  has  not  been  prospected  and  the  commercial 
value  is  therefore  unknown.  Probably  all  the  Kamchatka  rivers  carry  salmon. 

The  Albatross  arrived  in  Bristol  Bay  July  5,  making  an  anchorage  off  Cape  Grey, 
the  northern  entrance  point  to  Ugashik,  but,  being  unable  to  communicate  on  account 
of  unfavorable  weather,  we  proceeded  the  following  day  to  Nushagak  Bay,  making 
an  anchorage  off  Protection  Point.  Expecting  to  obtain  the  services  of  a pilot,  but 
no  one  appearing,  communication  was  opened  with  the  canneries,  some  25  miles  dis- 
tant. On  July  8,  Mr.  P.  H.  Johnson,  the  superintendent  of  all  the  Alaska  Packers 
Association  canneries  on  the  Nushagak,  came  on  board  and  kindly  piloted  the  vessel 
to  an  anchorage  in  3£  fathoms,  at  low  water,  off'  the  cannery  of  the  Alaska  Packing 
Company;  this  is  the  upper  cannery  on  the  western  shore,  immediately  below  the 
junction  of  the  Nushagak  and  Wood  rivers.  Here  it  was  learned  that  it  was  imprac- 
ticable to  carry  the  Albatross , on  account  of  her  draft,  to  the  canneries  on  the  Kvichak 
and  vicinity,  and,  as  a cannery  tender  was  about  to  leave  for  that  section,  the  com- 
manding officer  and  two  assistants  took  passage  on  her  and  left  that  day  for  Kvichak 
Bay.  In  no  other  way  could  this  investigation  have  been  carried  on  so  effectively 
and  in  so  short  a time,  and  my  thanks  are  due  to  Mr.  Johnson,  not  only  for  this 
courtesy,  but  for  others  extended  to  myself  and  the  officers  of  this  vessel. 

NAVIGATION  NOTES. 

Until  a proper  survey  of  the  Bristol  Bay  region  has  been  made,  it  must  be 
regarded  by  mariners  as  a dangerous  locality  to  navigate;  it  is  only  by  the  greatest 
vigilance  and  constant  use  of  the  lead  that  disaster  can  be  avoided  upon  approach- 
ing the  land.  This  is  especially  true  of  the  northern  arms  and  approaches,  which 
receive  the  waters  of  the  great  salmon  streams  on  which  all  the  Bering  Sea  canneries 
are  located.  These  rivers  are  the  Egashak,  Wood,  and  Nushagak,  emptying  into 
Nushagak  Bay;  the  Kvichak,  Lockenuck,  Naknek,  and  Egegak.  which  empty  into 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1000, 


195 


Kvichak  Bay;  arid  the  Ugashik  next  to  the  southward  of  the  Egegak.  These  rivers 
are  large,  and  discharge  a great  quantity  of  water  into  wide  indentations,  locally 
still  retainingthe  name  of  rivers,  which  open  on  the  arms  of  the  great  bay.  The  banks 
of  the  rivers  are  frequently  marshy,  generally  muddy,  and  the  discolored  water  is 
charged  with  a large  amount  of  sediment,  which,  when  deposited,  forms  the  dangers 
to  be  encountered. 

On  account  of  the  funnel-shaped  configuration,  the  tidal  currents  run  with  great 
force,  having  a velocity,  at  times,  of  at  least  6 knots,  and  a rise  and  fall  of  from  18 
to  21  feet;  vast  areas  of  shoals  are  uncovered  at  low  water,  leaving  only  pools  and 
shallows,  with  generally  narrow  channels  between.  Navigation  in  the  arms  and 
approaches  is  only  successfully  accomplished  at,  or  near,  high  water,  even  by  those 
thoroughly  acquainted  with  the  channels. 

From  a point  about  3 miles  to  the  westward  of  Cape  Grey,  the  Albatross  kept 
along  the  coast,  at  a distance  of  6 to  8 miles,  for  25  miles,  and  then  steered  a course 
to  clear  the  shoals  off  Cape  Constantine.  Acorn  Peak  was  made  and  mistaken  for 
Nichols.  Hills,  but  before  the  latter  were  well  made  out  we  were  inside  the  shoals,  as 
indicated  on  Coast  Survey  chart  No.  8800,  and  Cape  Constantine  was  in  sight  from 
aloft.  After  bringing  Nichols  Hills  on  a bearing  WNW.,  as  advised  in  the  sailing- 
directions,  the  course  was  laid  for  them  and  an  anchorage  made  in  8 fathoms  at  low 
water,  with  Point  Protection  bearing  SSW.,  distant  2y  miles.  This  anchorage, 
according  to  directions,  is  not  considered  a good  one,  and,  according  to  the  cannery 
people,  should  not  be  selected. 

It  is  regretted  that,  as  our  visit  to  the  Nushagak  was  for  only  a few  days  in 
connection  with  the  special  fishery  investigation,  exact  directions  can  not  be  given 
for  the  navigation  of  these  waters,  but,  from  inquiry  and  my  own  limited  experience, 
the  following  notes  may  be  of  service  to  others.  No  regular  survey  has  yet  been 
made  of  this  locality.  The  published  charts  are  not  based  upon  surveys,  but  are 
compilations  from  all  available  sources,  for  the  most  part  from  sketches,  and  at  best 
from  recon noissances,  so  that  they  should  by  no  means  be  strictly  followed.  The 
mariner  must  regard  these  charts  as  maps  and  a general  guide  only. 

“Nichols  Hills,”  as  indicated  on  Coast  Survey  chart  No.  8800,  and  on  others,  is 
very  misleading.  There  are  no  high  isolated  hills  in  the  vicinity.  A line  of  high 
bluffs  from  Egashak  River  border  this  shore  to  the  southward,  fringed  by  a narrow 
belt  of  marsh,  and  about  I miles  northwest  from  Protection  Point  these  bluffs  are 
broken  on  top  into  mounds  which  are  the  Nichols  Hills,  locally  known  as  The  Knolls. 
Under  average  conditions  they  do  not  afford  a leading  mark,  as  stated,  for  guidance 
from  seaward,  as  they  rise  but  little  above  the  bluff  line,  and  it  is  not  believed  they 
can  be  made  out  by  a stranger  in  time  to  avoid  the  dangers  oil'  Cape  Constantine. 

About  2 miles  northwest  from  Point  Protection  the  bluffs  referred  to  breakaway 
to  the  westward,  and  are  lost  on  approaching  the  beach  2 miles  south  from  the  same 
point.  Point  Protection  and  its  vicinity  for  several  miles  is  low  and  marshy,  with  an 
occasional  low  mound  and  hillock.  The  flagstaff  and  pilot  station  no  longer  exist. 
The  old  Eskimo  who  formerly  piloted  the  cannery  vessels  is  dead,  and  a hut  in 
ruins  and  a grave  are  all  that  is  left  to  mark  the  former  site.  There  are  no  inhabitants 
in  the  vicinity.  The  nearest  village  is  Ekuk,  15  miles  to  the  northward,  on  the 
eastern  side  of  the  bay. 


196 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The.  coast  between  Cape  Constantine  and  Point  Protection  is  generally  low. 
The  interior  is  rolling,  broken  into  high  mounds,  ponds,  and  marshes. 

Very  little  is  known  of  the  extent  of  shoal  water  off  Cape  Constantine.  It  is 
probable  that  the  bottom  is  much  broken  and  lumpy  off  the  whole  entrance  to  the 
bay.  The  Albatross , two  hours  before  low  water,  had  several  soundings  of  5 fathoms, 
well  outside  of  the  bajy  in  what  is  considered  to  be  the  best  water. 

On  May  20,  1898,  the  Alaska  Packers  Association  cannery  ship  Sterling , with 
the  spring  outfit  for  Ivoggiung  on  board,  was  lost  on  the  shoals  about  5 miles  to  the 
southward  of  Cape  Constantine.  At  the  point  where  the  vessel  struck,  Cape  Con- 
stantine and  Point  Protection  are  in  range. 

At  Point  Etolin  there  is  a line  of  low  bluffs,  which  at  three  points  shows  a bald 
yellowish  face,  the  highest  to  the  westward.  The  land  in  this  vicinity  is  generally 
low.  It.  is  said  the  shoal  off  Point  Etolin  does  not  extend  as  far  offshore  as  indicated 
on  Coast  Survey  chart  No.  8800.  The  cannery  tenders  in  running  from  the  Nushagak 
to  the  Kvichak  usually  round  Point  Etolin  by  the  lead,  keeping  in  3 or  1 fathoms  of 
water,  which  they  expect  to  find  about  1 miles  from  the  shore. 

It  is  my  opinion  that  a vessel  bound  for  the  Nushagak  should  make  Cape  Grey, 
the  northern  entrance  point  to  the  Ugashik,  which  is  high  and  easily  recognized, 
and  from  this  position  take  her  departure  and  shape  the  course  for  the  entrance, 
favoring  the  Etolin  side  in  preference  to  the  Cape  Constantine  side,  and  using  the 
lead  constantly  in  approaching  these  shoals.  A vessel  should  arrive  in  the  entrance 
of  the  hay  midway  between  Point  Protection  and  Point  Etolin,  and  from  this  posi- 
tion a course  northwest  for  a distance  of  5 miles  will  carry  outside  the  lower  bar, 
where  a stranger  must  anchor  and  communicate  for  a pilot.  Judgment  must  be  used 
in  making  allowance  for  tidal  currents,  and  it  is  needless  to  sa}^  that  the  right  arm 
of  the  navigator  in  this  region  is  the  lead. 

The  following  notes,  made  upon  leaving  the  Nushagak,  may  be  of  service.  A 
vessel  bound  out  should  leave  the  upper  anchorage  two  hours  before  high  water,  so 
as  to  have  the  best  water  on  the  bars.  The  Albatross  left  the  anchorage  at  the  upper 
cannery  at  high  water  and  followed  the  western  shore,  at  a distance  of  300  or  100 
yards,  to  the  lower  cannery  on  the  same  side  (Bristol  Bay  Canning  Company).  After 
rounding  the  point  below  this  cannery,  the  distance  from  shore  was  increased  to  avoid 
a spit  making  out  from  the  first  valley  beyond  the  point,  on  which  the  bark  Wildwood 
was  lost.  Having  passed  the  spit,  the  western  shore  was  kept  well  on  board,  making 
allowances  for  the  beach  that  uncovers  at  low  water.  A short  distance  above  Coffee 
Point  the  Albatross  laid  a course  SSE.  f E.  for  2.3  miles,  then  SE.  ^ E.  for  1.1  miles, 
which  carried  over  what  is  known  as  “The  Cross-over”  and  to  Clark  Point.  The 
eastern  shore  was  then  followed  at  a distance  of  one-quarter  to  one-half  mile,  and  on 
arriving  off  Ekuk  we  hauled  sharp  across  the  river  bar  on  a course  SW.  This  course 
was  kept  until  the  cannery  at  Clark  Point  came  on  with  the  second  depression  in  the 
distant  blue  ridge  to  the  northward,  and  the  right  tangent  of  the  ridge  on  the  south 
side  of  the  Egashak  River  came  on  with  the  left  tangent  of  the  first  high  mountain 
of  the  ridge  beyond  the  low  land.  The  course  was  then  changed  to  SE.  ^ S. , and 
after  running  about  3^  miles  the  outer  bar  was  crossed. 

The  Albatross  made  the  shoal  water  of  the  outer  bar  on  the  following  bearings: 
Clark  Point,  N.  by  W. ; Nichols  Hills,  S.  by  W. ; right  tangent  of  bluff  south  of  the 


Plate  X. 


, 


' 

' 


' 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


197 


Egashak  River,  W.  f N.  From  the  outer  bar  the  cannery  vessels  are  said  to  steer 
SE.  by  S.  to  sea.  The  Albatross , with  an  ebb  tide,  steered  SE.  until  clear  of  all 
shoals,  and  then  laid  her  sea  course.  On  a sketch  made  of  this  locality  by  the  Alba- 
tross in  1890,  a few  additions  have  been  noted  and  the  approximate  track  of  the 
Albatross  m July,  1900,  has  been  plotted,  all  of  which  may  be  of  service. 

The  following  observations  were  made,  using  an  artificial  horizon: 

Protection  Point. — Latitude,  58°  27'  north,  5 sets  circum-meridian  altitudes. 
Longitude,  158°  12'  19"  west,  mean  of  15  post-meridian  altitudes. 

Upper  cannery , Alaska  Packing  Company , 150  yards  southwest  of  cannery  build- 
ing.  — Latitude,  59°  00'  22"  north,  2 circum-meridian  and  1 meridian  altitude.  Long- 
itude, 158°  29'  22"  west,  mean  of  ante-meridian  and  post-meridian  sights.  Variation, 
by  compass  declinometer,  23°  20'  E. 

From  three  days’  observations,  near  neap  tides,  at  the  upper  cannery,  the 
approximate  establishment  is  0 h.  59  m. ; approximate  rise  and  fall,  21.55  feet.  But 
as  the  former  observations  of  the  Albatross  were  probably  for  a longer  series,  that 
data  has  been  retained  on  the  chart,  viz,  local  establishment,  approximate,  0 h.  53  m. ; 
rise  and  fall,  approximate,  21  feet. 

NUSIIAGAK  RIVER  (tAHLEKUK). 

This  river,  with  its  headwaters  and  tributaries,  is  not  well  known,  and  but 
little  definite  information  could  be  obtained  at  the  canneries,  where  it  is  locally 
referred  to  as  the  Main  River.  The  system  drains  the  hills  and  mountains  between 
lakes  Clark  and  Iliamna  on  the  east  and  the  Kuskokwim  on  the  west.  Above 
Kakwok,  about  50  miles  from  the  mouth,  it  receives  a tributary  from  the  westward 
which  is  the  outlet  of  Lake  Tikchik,  and  possibly  a chain  of  lakes  extending  toward 
the  Kuskokwim.  This  lake  is  by  some  referred  to  as  Lake  Nushagak,  but  the  main 
river  seems  to  extend  to  the  northeast,  where  it  has  many  tributaries  and  is  known 
as  the  Mulchutna.  According  to  the  census  report  of  1890,  page  92 — 

The  watershed  between  the  Nushagak  Valley  and  the  Iliamna  Basin  is  low  and  dotted  with  lakes 
and  ponds,  the  general  characteristics  of  these  slopes  being  the  same  near  the  divide.  * * * The 
whole  Nushagak,  or,  better,  Tahlekuk  River  Valley,  including  Tikchik  River  and  Lake,  is  .densely 
wooded  with  trees  not  more  than  a foot  in  diameter,  which,  however,  increase  in  size  as  the  upper 
courses  are  reached,  so  that  on  the  Mulchutna  and  the  Kokhtuli  (Forest)  rivers  exceptionally  large 
trees  may  be  found  in  numbers. 

The  river  on  its  lower  course  is  large,  and  flows  a great  quantity  of  water  into 
the  head  of  Nushagak  Bay,  where  it  forms  a junction  with  Wood  River. 

Fishing  on  the  Nushagak  is  carried  on  entirely  by  traps  and  gill  nets,  and,  for 
king  salmon,  commences  from  June  6 to  16,  depending  upon  the  season;  at  the  large 
canneries  fishing  for  this  species  is  finished  by  June  30.  They  run  scatteringly 
throughout  the  whole  season,  but  after  the  redfish  come  in  in  abundance,  the  king- 
salmon  gear  is  taken  in  and  those  found  in  the  traps  and  the  stray  ones  taken  in  nets 
are  used  fresh;  the  surplus  bellies  salted  are  for  private  use.  The  smaller  canneries, 
however,  pack  the  king  whenever  a sufficient  number  accumulate  to  make  a few  cases. 

The  redfish  run  in  sufficient  numbers  to  commence  packing  from  June  16  to  20, 
and  they  are  expected  to  run  until  July  20  to  25.  This  year  the  redfish  run  was  so 
large  that  the  gill-netters  were  limited.  It  is  said  that  they  supplied  nearly  all  the 
fish,  and  of  the  number  packed  only  20  per  cent  were  taken  from  traps. 


198 


BULLETIN  OF  THE . UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Occasionally  there  are  a large  number  of  dog  salmon,  and  in  the  early  part  of 
the  season,  before  the  redfish  run  strong  enough  to  keep  the  full  force  employed, 
some  ave  packed  under  pink-label  brands.  Scattering  dog  salmon  are  taken  through- 
out the  season.  There  is  a prejudice  against  these  fish,  caused,  it  is  believed,  by  the 
name.  The  sea  run,  in  my  opinion,  is  a very  good  fish,  and  many  are  consumed 
fresh  every  year,  but  not  under  that  name. 

At  intervals  of  several  years  there  is  a large  run  of  humpbacks,  but  so  little 
attention  is  paid  to  this  species  that  the  date  of  the  run  is  not  available,  but,  approxi- 
mately, from  the  middle  of  July  to  the  middle  of  August  covers  the  period. 

Cohoes  are  not  plentiful,  and  are  not  regularly  packed.  Occasionally  a bunch  is 
captured  large  enough  to  induce  the  canner  to  turn  the  machinery  on  a few  hundred 
cases.  They  usually  commence  to  run  early  in  August,  and  continue  after  the  can- 
nery is  closed,  probably  until  after  cold  weather  sets  in. 

There  are  no  steel  heads  and  no  sturgeon.  Trout  are  plentiful,  and  occasionally 
a shad  has  been  taken  so  it  is  said;  sole  and  smelt  also  are  taken. 

WOOD  RIVER  AND  ALEKNAGIK  LAKE. 

The  commanding  officer  examined  the  river  for  a distance  of  15  miles,  and  Lieu- 
tenant Rodman,  with  the  steam  launch,  made  a running  sketch  of  the  river  and  lake. 
It  is  from  Lieutenant  Rodman’s  notes  that  the  following  remarks  are  largely  written, 
and  reference  is  made  to  the  sketch  accompanying  the  report. 

W ood  River  empties  into  the  head  of  Nusnagak  Bay  at  its  junction  with  the 
Nushagak  River,  about  If  miles  above  the  cannery  of  the  Alaska  Packing  Company. 
The  mouth  is  much  obstructed  by  shoals  and  flats,  making  the  entrance  difficult  at 
low  water,  even  for  small  boats,  without,  local  knowledge.  Its  length  to  the  lake 
entrance  is  about  21  miles;  the  width  at  the  mouth  is  about  three-fourths  mile,  and 
thence  for  15  miles  it  varies  from  600  to  200  yards;  above,  it  narrows  very  much 
until,  arriving  at  the  lake  entrance,  it  has  a width  of  about  50  yards.  The  left  bank, 
fora  distance  of  about  16  miles  from  the  mouth,  is  a low  marshy  plain,  treeless  until 
the  upper  part  of  the  stretch  is  reached,  where  small  clumps  appear.  The  right  bank 
is  generally  low,  with  bluffs  bordering  the  stream  in  places,  or  separated  from  it 
by  a belt  of  marsh  land  from  one-fourth  to  one-half  mile  in  width.  The  bluffs  and 
the  high  rolling  land  back  from  the  river  are  wooded  with  spruce,  broken  here  and 
there  by  tundra  flats.  The  banks  on  the  upper  course  are  high  and  more  heavily 
wooded,  the  last  2 miles  lying  between  steep  banks  from  100  to  200  feet  high. 

There  are  three  low  islands  in  the  lower  part  of  the  river  and  one  in  the  upper 
part.  The  first  is  about  a mile  from  the  mouth  and  is  over  a mile  in  length;  the 
second  and  third  are  8£  and  9£  miles  respectively  from  the  mouth,  each  situated  in  a 
sharp  bend.  In  ascending,  these  islands  are  left  to  the  eastward.  The  fourth  is  very 
small,  about  20  miles  from  the  mouth,  and  should  be  left  to  the  westward. 

The  banks  and  bottom  are  of  mud  and  gravel.  In  the  upper  course  there  are  a 
number  of  sand  and  gravel  bars,  extending  entirely  across  the  channel,  but  it  is 
probable  that  2 feet  can  be  carried  across  them  at  any  time.  For  the  first  15  miles 
the  water  is  discolored  and  muddy,  but  above  this  it  is  usually  clear,  though  at  high- 
water  spring  tides  the  discoloration  continues  farther  up.  About  10  miles  from  the 
mouth  it  receives  as  a tributary  the  Maklau  River,  which  is  said  to  be  about  8 miles 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


199 


long.  From  3 to  feet  can  be  carried  up  the  river  at  low  water  for  a distance  of 
15  miles,  and  thence  to  the  lake  not  more  than  feet,  though  at  high  water  4 feet 
can  be  carried  this  distance.  Local  knowledge  is  required  in  its  navigation  at  all 
stages  of  the  tide,  to  avoid  the  numerous  shoals  and  bars.  The  channel  crosses  and 
recrosses  the  river,  and  while  the  best  water  can  usually  be  found  on  the  outer 
course  of  the  bends,  this  is  not  always  the  case. 

Fifteen  miles  from  the  mouth  there  is  a rise  of  tide,  on  the  springs,  of  about  12 
feet,  at  which  point  it  is  either  slack  or  ebb  current  for  about  nine- hours  on  each  full 
tide,  and  at  the  lake  entrance  it  rises  about  H feet,  but,  from  the  size  of  the  lake, 
there  can  be  no  material  change  in  its  water  level  due  to  tidal  influence. 

A current  of  about  3 knots  sets  out  of  the  lake  at  all  times  and  a continuous  set 
of  not  less  than  2 knots  down  the  upper  course.  The  flood  current  reaches  a point 
about  18  miles  from  the  mouth. 

The  head  of  the  river  flows  from  a shallow  basin,  about  a mile  in  diameter  and 
1 to  2 fathoms  deep,  with  a sandy  and  gravelly  bottom,  and  at  the  head  of  this  basin 
is  a passage,  several  hundred  yards  in  width,  marked  by  low  gravel  tongues  making 
out  from  either  side,  which  opens  upon  the  lake  proper. 

The  lake  is  about  24  miles  long,  the  general  direction  being  northwest  by  west, 
and  has  an  average  width  of  about  2 miles. 

Generally  speaking,  the  shores  are  mountainous,  the  estimated  heights  ranging 
from  500  to  2,500  feet,  those  on  the  north,  where  a long  flat-topped  ridge  parallels 
the  shore  for  a distance  of  at  least  10  miles,  being  the  highest.  The  southern  shore 
for  the  first  3 or  4 miles  is  low  and  rolling,  with  alternate  open  flats  and  woods  run- 
ning back  several  miles  to  the  mountains.  From  the  middle  of  the  southern  shore  a 
narrow  peninsula,  about  6 miles  long  and  500  feet  high,  with  a rise  of  700  to  800  feet 
at  each  end,  parallels  the  general  axis  of  the  lake  and  forms  a deep  narrow  bay  about 
three-quarters  of  a mile  wide.  The  country  generally  is  well  wooded,  though  the 
mountain  tops  are  bare. 

There  are  many  islands  in  the  lake  scattered  throughout  its  length,  mostly  along 
the  northern  shore  and  extending  to  within  6 miles  of  the  head.  The  large  ones  are 
well  wooded,  and,  along  the  northern  side,  blend  with  the  mainland,  making  them 
difficult  to  distinguish  when  seen  from  a point  along  the  middle  line  of  the  lake. 

Along  the  center  line  the  water  appears  deep;  soundings  were  obtained  in  from 
9 to  35  fathoms,  but  between  some  of  the  islands  gravel  bars  with  less  than  2 feet 
obstructed  the  passage. 

The  water  is  clear;  the  bottom,  when  visible,  is  gravelly  with  small  bowlders, 
but  clean  and  free  from  grass.  Gravel  banks  are  found  along  the  main  and  island 
shores,  even  bordering  the  rocky  outcrops. 

The  main  feeder  is  on  the  northern  shore  about  6 miles  from  the  head;  it  is 
about  50  yards  wide  at  the  mouth,  and  3 or  4 feet  deep,  and  flows  from  the  north- 
ward. It  is  said  this  stream  is  the  outlet  to  two  more  lakes.  At  the  head  of  the 
lake  entering  from  the  westward  is  a small  feeder  which  is  about  20  yards  wide  at 
the  mouth  and  3 feet  deep.  The  other  feeders  indicated  on  the  sketch  were  not 
visited  for  want  of  time;  they  were  simply  reported  to  exist,  and  are  said  to  be 
small.  Apparently  the  feeders  flow  through  valleys  of  gentle  declivity,  as  no  falls 
or  strong  rapids  were  noticed,  nor  were  any  cascades  seen  in  the  mountains. 


200 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


There  is  a village  on  a low  sandy  flat  at  the  head  of  Wood  River,  at  the  northern 
entrance  to  the  basin,  and  a second  village  at  the  mouth  of  the  main  feeder  on  the 
western  shore.  A large  amount  of  salmon  is  taken  and  cured  by  the  natives  near 
these  places  and  at  several  other  points  on  the  northern  shore. 

It  is  said  that  both  Doll}7  Varden  and  cutthroat  trout  are  taken  on  the  lake.  j 
Salmon  were  present  in  very  great  numbers  and  were  not  only  seen  jumping  from 
the  surface  of  the  lake,  but,  when  the  bottom  was  visible,  great  schools  could  be 
seen  both  near  and  away  from  the  streams.  Around  the  mouths  of  the  streams  they 
appeared  in  masses  and  a great  many  were  noticed  in  Wood  River  ascending  to  the 


o 

Fish  trap  in  Wood  River,  about  15  miles  above  mouth. 


spawning-ground.  In  and  around  the  feeders  they  had  turned  deep  red  in  color, 
and  it  was  particularly  noticed  that  they  seemed  free  from  signs  of  injury  or  disease, 
due,  doubtless,  to  the  scarcity  of  obstructions  in  the  river. 

Time  did  not  permit  specific  investigation  relating  to  hatcheries,  as  such  work 
would  probably  have  to  extend  over  quite  a period  in  order  to  report  with  any 
degree  of  intelligence,  but  the  general  situation  seems  to  be  favorable.  The  basin  at 
the  outlet  would  make  an  excellent  retain ing-pond  for  ripening  the  fish,  and,  with  pure 
water  near  by,  two  of  the  hatchery  problems  would  be  solved.  The  temperature 
would  probably  be  the  drawback,  and  some  method  would  have  to  be  adopted  for 
warming  the  hatching  water  during  the  fall  and  winter. 


ft 

WOl 


8:>  1 
U. 

Co  m 


-/Approved  * 

7^  77tA<2&r. 

Commander*,  O.  S Nowy,  Com’dL’a?. 


(To  face  page  200.) 


Plate  XI. 


& /N  <>»•»> 


o|mauntain$ 
estiovated,  in 


pprov/ed 


"'manden  v 


RUNIViNG  SKETCH  or 
WOOD  RIVER  AND  LAKE 
BRISTOL  BAY, 
Alaska. 

8«j  Lieul  ftocl rn. an.  U.S  N 

U.SF.C.S  ALBATROSS. 
Cai*A.Je^U  f Moser,  1).  S N,  C< 

Jaltj  , 19  0 0 


A Astronomical  S^o 
a\  Cann«i*«j 

LatltuAe  S3*  oo'  ZZ  N. 
LonyituAe  IS8°  2.9  £z"w. 
Oomfjajj  Variation  2.3*  to  £ 


S.  Na Cotnld’^. 


Alaska  Pack! 


_N  USHAQAK 
RIVER 


. 

■ 10  ft  TA8  J A 2 .3  ?,  Z v ' 


_ ■ fcsvc-terq  K. 


C jo  if  VV  ‘ | 

■Y'JiVvOv  • ^ 2 .U  'fS'Jbwo.rrj/rroD  J 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


201 


On  the  western  bank  of  Wood  River,  about  15  miles  from  its  mouth,  is  a trap 
and  a trap  house.  This  trap  is  the  largest  that  was  seen  in  the  Bristol  Bay  district 
and  is  rather  a complex  arrangement.  It  has  2,700  feet  of  leads,  with  two  hearts, 
75  by  75  feet,  and  a corral.  A description  of  it  is  rather  difficult,  and  reference  is 
therefore  made  to  the  sketch. 

NUSIIAGAK  CANNERIES. 

All  the  canneries  on  the  Nushagak  are  located  on  the  upper  end  of  the  bay,  two 
on  the  western  side,  and  four,  besides  a large  saltery,  on  the  eastern  side;  and,  if  one 
which  has  not  been  in  operation  since  1891  is  excepted,  all  are  within  6 miles  of  the 
mouth  of  the  river.  A brief  history  of  the  canneries  was  given  in  the  report  of  1897, 
page  173,  but,  as  the  district  had  not  then  been  visited,  the  data  was  incomplete.  In 
order  to  cover  the  whole  subject  in  this  report,  it  is  deemed  advisable  to  give  the 
history  anew,  even  at  the  expense  of  some  little  repetition. 

On  the  Nushagak  this  year  (1900)  there  were  live  operating  and  one  reserved  can- 
neries, and  one  salteiy,  as  follows:  Arctic  Packing  Company,  Nushagak  Canning 
Company  (reserved),  Bristol  Bay  Canning  Company,  and  the  Alaska  Packing  Com- 
pany, all  belonging  to  the  Alaska  Packers  Association;  the  Nushagak  Cannery  of  the 
Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Company,  and  the  Alaska  Fishermen’s  Packing  Company. 
The  saltery  is  known  as  the  C.  E.  Whitney  & Co,  station. 

Arctic  Packing  Company. — In  1883  the  schooner  Neptune  was  sent  by  Mr.  Rohllfs 
to  prospect  for  fish  on  the  Nushagak,  and  a large  number  of  redfish  salted.  The 
same  year  cannery  buildings  were  erected  for  the  above-named  company,  and  in  1881 
an  experimental  pack  of  100  cases  was  made.  This  is  the  first  cannery  that  operated 
in  Bering  Sea.  It  has  made  a pack  every  year  to  date,  excepting  1892,  when  it 
joined  the  pool  of  the  Alaska  Packing  Association  and  was  closed;  in  1893  it  became 
a member  of  the  Alaska  Packers  Association.  The  cannery  is  located  on  the  eastern 
shore  If  miles  above  Fort  Alexander,  at  a place  called  Kanulik,  and  known  as  the 
Mission.  The  Moravian  mission  and  the  village  are  situated  on  the  bluff  overlooking 
the  cannery.  The  Nushagak  post-office  is  also  located  at  this  point.  The  capacity 
of  the  cannery  was  increased  this  year  and  now  has  a daily  output  of  2,100  cases. 

Alaska  Packing  Company. — This  company  was  organized  at  Astoria,  and  in  the 
spring  of  1886  sent  a cannery  outfit  on  the  schooner  Sadie  P.  Caller  and  the  brig 
Courteney  Foard  to  the  Nushagak,  where  a cannery  was  built  at  the  head  of  the  bay 
on  the  western  side,  at  the  village  of  Kanakanek  (also  called  Chogiung)  about  1|  miles 
below  the  junction  of  the  Wood  and  Nushagak  rivers.  It  made  a pack  that  year  and 
every  year  since  to  date.  It  entered  the  pool  of  the  Alaska  Packing  Association  in 
1892,  and  became  a member  of  the  Alaska  Packers  Association  in  1893.  The  capacity 
was  increased  this  year,  and  it  now  has  a daily  output  of  2,100  cases. 

Bristol  Bay  Canning  Company  was  organized  in  San  Francisco  and  built  a can- 
nery in  1886  on  the  western  shore  of  Nushagak  Bay,  in  a bend  about  2 miles  below 
the  cannery  of  the  Alaska  Packing  Company.  It  made  a pack  that  year  and  every 
year  to  date.  In  1892  it  entered  the  pool  of  the  Alaska  Packing  Association,  and 
in  1893  became  a member  of  the  Alaska  Packers  Association.  The  capacity  was 
increased  in  1900,  and  it  now  has  a daity  output  of  2,100  cases. 

Nushagak  Canning  Company  built  a cannery  on  the  eastern  shore  of  Nushagak 


202 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Bay  in  1888,  at  a place  called  Stagarok  (also  known  as  Clai'k  Point),  5^  miles  below 
Fort  Alexander  and  3 miles  above  Ekuk.  It  was  operated  in  1888,  1889,  1890,  and 
1891,  but  has  not  since  been  used.  In  1892  it  joined  the  pool  of  the  Alaska  Packing 
Association,  and  became  a member  of  the  Alaska  Packers  Association  in  1893.  This 
cannery  is  held  in  reserve  and  at  present  is  used  as  a fishing  station. 

These  four  canneries  are  all  owned  and  (except  the  reserve  cannery)  operated  by 
the  Alaska  Packers  Association,  under  one  local  management.  There  is  a foreman 
at  each  cannery,  all  under  the  orders  of  one  superintendent,  Mr.  P.  H.  Johnson,  who 
resides,  during  the  packing  season,  at  the  cannery  of  the  Alaska  Packing  Company, 
where  he  is  in  communication  with  all  the  canneries.  The  greatest  distance  between 
any  two  in  operation  is  1 miles  in  a straight  line,  but  on  account  of  shoals  and  banks 
long  detours  are  necessary  in  going  from  one  to  another.  The  association  now 
contemplates  establishing  a telephone  service  to  connect  the  several  establishments. 

The  supplies  are  common  to  all  the  canneries  of  this  system  and  are  kept  at  the 
Alaska  Packing  Company’s  cannery,  where  there  are  large  storehouses  and  consider- 
able machinery  for  work  in  wood  and  metal.  The  fish  are  distributed  so  as  to  give 
each  one  a supply  in  order  to  keep  all  in  full  operation.  In  the  statistics  the  pack 
only  is  kept  separate.  Until  the  present  year  the  canneries  had  each  a two-filler 
outfit,  but  in  the  spring  of  1900  an  additional  filler  was  installed,  and  each  has  now  a 
daily  capacity  of  2,400  cases.  They  all  have  practically  the  same  machinery  for 
processing  the  fish,  which  consists  in  each  of  8 retorts,  3 fillers,  3 toppers,  2 solderers, 
and  1 cutter,  with  spare  ones  at  headquarters  to  supply  breaks.  There  are  no  fish- 
hoists  or  elevators;  fish  are  pewed  from  boats  and  lighters,  at  low  water,  to  platforms, 
and  thence  to  fish-house,  and,  after  cleaning,  are  conveyed  in  cars  to  the  cutters. 

About  33  per  cent  of  the  cans  are  made  at  the  canneries  and  the  rest  brought  from 
San  Francisco;  100-pound  domestic  tin  plate  is  used  for  tops  and  bodies.  A few 
can-making  machines  were  supplied  in  1900,  but  at  the  time  of  our  visit  had  not  been 
set  up.  It  is  hoped  eventually  to  make  all  cans  at  the  canneries.  All  transportation 
is  done  by  the  association’s  own  vessels,  or  by  chartered  vessels,  all  of  which  are  kept 
moored  during  the  season  in  the  channels  of  the  bay  near  the  canneries. 

The  Chinese  and  the  fishermen’s  contracts,  and  native  wages  for  this  district, 
have  been  given  on  preceding  pages. 

The  Alaska  Packers  Association  has  in  its  employ  a physician  and  surgeon,  who 
attends  to  the  employees  of  the  association.  His  otfice  and  dispensary  are  at  the 
cannery  of  the  Alaska  Packing  Company. 

In  1900  the  three  operating  canneries  of  the  Alaska  Packers  Association  employed 
215  white  fishermen,  66  white  cannery-hands,  450  Chinese,  and  75  natives.  They  used 
two  sets  of  gill  nets,  80  nets  in  each  set,  for  redfish,  each  net  75  fathoms  long,  24 
meshes  deep,  and  61-inch  stretched  mesh;  l\  sets  of  gill  nets,  80  nets  to  each  set, 
for  king  salmon,  each  net  125  fathoms  long,  24  meshes  deep,  and  OJ-inch  mesh;  value 
of  all  about  65  cents  per  fathom.  Besides  these  they  had  on  hand  a large  quantity  of 
web  and  material  for  making  nets. 

They  used  four  traps — one  at  Clark  Point,  and  one  on  the  right  bank  of  the  Nush- 
agak  above  the  junction,  each  having  a shore  lead  500  feet  long  and  an  outside  lead 
350  feet  long,  with  a square  pot  40  feet  by  40  feet;  one  trap,  immediately  below  the 
cannery  of  the  Alaska  Packing  Company,  on  Nushagak  Bay,  had  leads  50  feet  and 


CANNERY  OF  ARCTIC  PACKING  COMPANY  (A.  P.  A.),  NUSHAGAK  BAY. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  202.) 


Plate  XII. 


CANNERY  OF  BRISTOL  BAY  CANNING  COMPANY  (A.  P.  A.),  N US  H AG  AK  BAY. 
View  from  bluff  to  eastward. 


Plate  XIII. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  202.) 


CANNERY  OF  PACIFIC  STEAM  WHALING  COMPANY,  NUSHAGAK  BAY. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  202.) 


Plate  XIV, 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  202.) 


Plate  XV 


SALTING  STATION  OF  C-  E.  WHITNEY  & CO.,  NUSHAGAK  BAY. 
View  from  bank  to  northward. 


ARCTIC  PACKING  COMPANY  (A.  P.  A.),  NAKNEK  RIVER. 
View  of  wharf,  steamers,  fish  railroad,  etc. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


203 


300  feet,  pot  40  feet  by  40  feet;  and  the  large  trap  on  Wood  River  which  has  pre- 
viously been  described.  These  traps  must  cost  from  $1,200  to  $1,500  each,  except 
the  Wood  River  trap,  which  can  hardly  have  been  completed  under  $4,000. 

The  following  boats  were  used:  18  lighters,  value,  $600  each;  25  skiffs,  $30  each; 
80  Columbia  River  gill-net  boats,  $200  each,  and  2 pile-drivers,  $1,200  each. 

The  following  vessels  were  employed: 


Class  ana  name. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

Owned  or 
chartered. 

Steamer  Polar  Bear 

28 

5 

*12, 000 

Owned. 

Steamer  Queen 

18 

3 

10, 000 

Do. 

Launch  Amy  S 

5 

2 

4, 000 

Do. 

Launch  Tvone 

5 

2 

6,  000 

Do. 

Ship  Oriental 

1,550 

(') 

55, 000 

Chartered. 

Ship  Ectlip.se 

1,469 

(') 

35,  000 

Do. 

Ship  Tacoma 

1, 671 

(b 

60, 000 

Owned. 

1 Fishermen. 


The  following  was  the  output  in  1900: 


Alaska  Packing  Co. 

Arctic  Packing  Co. 

Bristol  Bay  Canning  Co. 

Species. 

No.  to 

No.  to 

No.  ti 

Cases. 

the 

Dates. 

Cases. 

the 

Dates. 

Cases. 

the 

Dates. 

case. 

case. 

case. 

King  salmon.. 

2, 543 

3 

Junel7-June  25 

3, 530 

3 

Junel5-June  25 

2, 256 

3 

June  17 -June  28 

Redfish  1 

56, 228 

13 

June25-July  24 

57, 230 

13 

June23-July  23 

57, 079 

13 

June  20- July  25 

Cohoes 

332 

13 

July  21-July  24 

1,254 

13 

July  22- July  23 

931 

13 

July  23-July  23 

Dog  salmon . . . 

1,694 

13 

Junel9-June  27 

1,921 

13 

June  19-Ju ne  27 

2,331 

13 

June23-June  27 

1 The  Alaska  Packing  Co.  also  put  up  1,420  barrels  and  698  half  barrels,  averaging  50  to  the  barrel. 


The  Nushagak  Cannery , of  the  Pacific  Steam  T X haling  Company,  is  located  on 
the  eastern  shore  of  Nushagak  Bay  at  Fort  Alexander,  which  is  also  known  as 
Nushagak  Village.  The  cannery  outfit  was  transported  by  vessels  of  the  company 
and  arrived  on  the  Nushagak  April  12,  1899.  The  erection  of  the  buildings  was  com- 
menced at  once  and  the  cannery  was  ready  for  work  June  8.  A pack  was  made  in 
1899  and  in  1900.  It  is  a modern  cannery,  well  built  and  equipped,  has  good  light, 
and  is  clean  and  airy.  The  capacity  is  1,600  cases  per  day.  The  cannery  machinery 
consists  of  4 large  retorts  (90  cases  each),  2 fillers,  2 solderers,  1 topper,  and  1 cutter. 
Fish  are  pewed  from  lighters  and  boats  to  the  fish-house,  and,  when  cleaned,  are 
carried  to  the  cannery  by  a conveyor  consisting  of  an  endless  chain  of  buckets 
passing  under  a shower.  Fifteen  per  cent  of  the  cans  used  this  year  were  made  at 
the  cannery,  the  remainder  being  transported.  One-hundred-pound  tin  plate  was  used 
for  tops  and  bodies,  20  per  cent  of  which  was  imported.  It  is  proposed  to  increase 
the  capacity  of  the  cannery  to  three  fillers  and  to  install  can-making  machinery. 

The  fishermen’s  and  the  Chinese’  contracts  and  natives’  ivages  were  the  same  as 
previously  noted.  In  1900  the  cannery  employed  56  white  fishermen,  10  white  can- 
nery-hands, 35  natives,  and  100  Chinese. 

The  cannery  used  for  redfish  two  sets  of  gill  nets  (25  to  a set),  each  net,  length 
75  fathoms,  depth  24  meshes,  6i-inch  mesh;  and  for  king  salmon  two  sets  of  nets 
(22  in  a set),  each  net,  length  125  fathoms,  depth  24  meshes,  91-inch  mesh;  value  of 
all,  65  cents  per  fathom. 


204 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The  following  boats  were  used:  Six  lighters,  value,  $300  each;  4 skiffs  worth 
$30  each,  and  25  Columbia  liiver  gill-net  boats  worth  $200  each. 

The  following  vessels  were  employed: 


Class  and  name. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

Owned  or 
chartered. 

15 

1.647 

9 

(') 

S4, 500 
60, 000 

Owned. 

Chartered. 

1 Fishermen. 


The  following  was  the  output  in  1900: 


Species. 

Cases. 

No.  to 
the 
case. 

Dates. 

King  salmon 

2,291 

3. 6 

June  12-July  22. 

Redfish 1 

39, 223 

13 

June  22-July  22. 

Dog  salmon 

1,873 

13 

June  20-July  1. 

1 Salted,  415  barrels  redfish,  48  to  the  barrel. 


The  Alaska  Fishermen's  Packing  Company,  of  Astoria,  built  a cannery  immedi- 
ately below  that  of  the  Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Company  in  the  spring  of  1899.  The 
canning  outfit  arrived  May  27,  and  the  plant  was  ready  for  operation  June  25.  They 
made  a pack  in  1899  and  in  1900.  The  cannery  has  a daily  capacity  of  1,600  cases,  and 
the  following  machinery  is  used  in  processing  the  fish:  Six  retorts  (capacity,  47  cases 
each),  2 fillers,  2 toppers,  1 wiper,  2 solderers,  and  1 cutter;  28  per  cent  of  the  cans 
were  made  at  the  cannery,  using  100-pound  domestic  tin  for  bodies  and  tops.  The  fish 
are  pewed  to  the  fish-house  and  the  cleaned  fish  then  transferred  by  cars  to  the  cutter. 

In  1900  the  cannery  employed  55  white  fishermen,  7 white  cannery -hands,  35 
natives,  and  93  Chinese. 

They  used  for  redfish  30  gill  nets,  each  70  fathoms  long,  30  meshes  deep,  64- inch 
mesh;  for  king  salmon,  25  gill  nets,  each  70  fathoms  long,  22  meshes  deep,  10-inch 
mesh;  all  valued  at  75  cents  per  fathom. 

The  following  boats  were  used:  Four  lighters,  value,  $700  each;  3 skiffs,  value, 
$30  each;  17  Columbia  River  gill-net  boats,  value,  $200  each. 

The  following  vessels  were  employed: 


Class  and  name. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

Owned  or 
chartered. 

34 

4 

$15, 000 
20, 000 

Bark  Harry  Morse 

1,241 

(b 

Chartered. 

1 Fishermen. 


The  output  of  the  cannery  for  the  year  1900  was  as  follows: 


Species. 

Cases. 

No.  to 
the 
case. 

Dates. 

1,990 
38, 100 

3 

12.5 

June  15-July  22. 
June  25-July  22. 

Redfish1 

1 Salted,  445  barrels  and  105  half-barrels  of  redfish,  48  to  the  barrel. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


205 


Saltery  of  G.  E.  Whitney  & Co. — This  saltery  was  built  and  operated  by  the 
Bristol  Bay  Canning  Company,  on  the  Egashak  (Snake)  River  in  1886;  three  years 
later  three  fishermen  acquired  each  a one-quarter  interest  and  moved  the  outfit  to 
the  mouth  of  the  Nushagak.  Upon  the  formation  of  the  Alaska  Packers  Association, 
Messrs.  C.  E.  Whitney  & Co.  purchased  the  one-quarter  interest  of  the  Bristol  Bay 
Canning  Company,  and  also  that  of  one  of  the  fishermen,  and  in  1895  purchased 
another  quarter.  In  1899  the  firm  became  the  owner  of  the  saltery  by  purchasing 
the  remaining  quarter.  The  saltery  was  moved  to  its  present  site  about  1892.  It  is 
the  largest  in  Alaska  and  is  located  on  the  eastern  shore  of  the  Nushagak  Bay,  41 
miles  above  Fort  Alexander,  at  a point  where  the  bluff  recedes  and  the  long,  broad 
low  point  commences  to  make  out  to  form  the  head  of  the  bay. 

The  following  are  the  statistics  for  1900:  62  whites  employed  as  fishermen,  trap- 
men,  saltery  hands,  etc.,  and  3 natives. 

Fishing  gear:  One  trap,  near  the  saltery,  having  leads  of  150  feet  and  50  feet, 
with  a pot  20  feet  by  20  feet;  14  gill  nets,  for  redfish,  each  85  fathoms  long,  23 
meshes  deep,  61-inch  mesh;  14  gill  nets,  for  king  salmon,  each  120  fathoms  long,  25 
meshes  deep,  91-inch  mesh. 

Boats,  lighters,  etc.:  3 lighters,  valued  at  $500  each;  5 skiffs,  value,  $30  each; 
14  Columbia  River  boats,  value,  $200  each. 

The  following  vessels  were  employed: 


Class  and  name. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

Owned  or 
chartered. 

Steamer  Usok 

2 

(i) 

*3. 000 
25, 000 

Owned. 

Barken  tine  Willie  R.  Hume 

589 

Chartered. 

1 Fishermen. 


The  pack  was  completed  very  early  on  account  of  the  large  run  of  fish,  and  on 
July  17  the  vessel  was  loaded  and  ready  for  sea. 

The  saltery  output  for  1900  consisted  of  536  barrels  of  king  salmon,  June  14  to 
July  11,  14  to  the  barrel;  7,186  barrels  of  redfish,  June  14  to  July  11,  50  to  the  barrel. 
The  following  is  the  output  of  the  saltery  from  1889  to  date: 


Year. 

No  of 
barrels. 

Y ear. 

No  of 
barrels. 

1880. . 

250 

400 

700 

1,000 

1,400 

050 

1895 

1,043 
1,74] 
2, 436 
4, 112 
6, 225 
7, 722 

1890  

1891  

1896 

1897... 

1892 

1898... 

1893 

1899 

1894 

1900. . . 

About  90  per  cent  of  the  pack  consists  of  redfish;  the  remaining  10  per  cent  is 
made  up  of  king  salmon  and  cohoes — very  few  of  the  latter. 

THE  KVICHAK. 

The  large  arm  at  the  head  of  Bristol  Bay,  extending  to  the  northeast  and  bounded 
on  the  south  by  a line  from  the  southern  entrance  point  of  Egegak  River  to  Etolin 
Point,  has  been  designated  in  a previous  paragraph  as  Kvichak  Bay.  The  upper 


206 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


part  of  the  bay  is  very  shoal,  and  as  the  current  is  strong  it  can  be  safely  navigated 
only  by  small  vessels  built  to  resist  the  shock  of  repeated  grounding.  It  is  said  that 
the  banks  from  the  Etolin  side  project  halfway  across  the  bay,  and,  with  those  from 
the  peninsula  side,  coniine  the  channel  to  a comparatively  narrow  limit.  A seagoing 
vessel,  however,  under  skillful  guidance  and  with  local  knowledge,  may  reach  a point 
a few  miles  below  the  mouth  of  the  Naknek  River,  which  is  about  30  miles  below  the 
head  of  the  bay;  but  some  cannerymen,  considering  the  risk  too  great  to  carry  their 
transport  vessels  even  to  the  mouth  of  the  Naknek,  leave  them  there  for  the  season. 

Above  the  mouth  of  the  Naknek  River  the  shoals  begin  to  extend  across  the 
channel,  and  as  a point  higher  up  i°  reached  the  whole  bay,  at  low  water,  is  filled 
with  uncovered  banks  having  shallow,  narrow  channels  winding  through  them. 

At  the  head  of  the  bay  is  the  mouth  of  the  Kvichak  River,  which  is  the  outlet  to 
the  great  lakes,  Iliamna  and  Clark,  lying  on  the  western  side  of  the  mountain  system 
bordering  Cook  Inlet.  Very  little  is  known  of  this  lake  region,  as  it  has  been  visited 
by  very  few  white  men. 

Mr.  A.  B.  Schanz,  the  census  enumerator  of  this  district  for  1890,  and  Mr.  John 
W.  Clark,  of  the  Alaska  Commercial  Company,  ascended  the  Nushagak  and,  taking  one 
of  the  tributaries,  made  a portage  to  the  Chultina,  which  was  followed  to  Lake  Clark. 
A description  of  the  source  of  the  Kvichak  is  given  in  the  Census  Report  of  1890, 
page  92.  From  it  the  following  quotation  is  made: 

We  discovered  Lake  Clark  on  the  morning  of  Sunday,  February  15,  1891.  It  is  a typical  Alaskan 
mountain  lake,  for  it  has  all  the  characteristics  in  a marked  degree.  It  is  very  long,  very  narrow,  very 
irregular,  and  very  deep,  and  is  surrounded  on  all  sides  by  high  mountains.  It  is  nearly  70  m les  long, 
is  at  the  widest  point  hardly  10  miles  wide,  and  is  crooked  and  very  full  of  bays  and  bights.  We  tried 
in  vain,  with  a sounding  line  over  100  fathoms  long,  to  find  its  bottom;  and  the  mountains  hemming 
it  in  tower  in  altitude  from  5,000  to  12,000  feet.  The  general  direction  of  the  lake  is  northeast  and 
southwest,  and  extends  from  the  base  of  the  Alaskan  range  bordering  Cook  Inlet  to  the  one  hundred 
and  fifty-fifth  meridian.  The  longitude  of  the  geographical  center  of  the  lake  is  about  160°  15 7 W. 
It  has  five  noteworthy  affluents,  and  its  outlet,  the  Noghelin  River,  was  found  to  be  an  important 
stream  of  great  volume,  open  throughout  the  winter  on  account  of  its  force,  and  running  generally 
almost  due  south.  The  Noghelin  supplies  the  great  Lake  Iliamna  with  its  vast  store  of  crystal  water, 
the  source  of  which  has  hitherto  been  absolutely  unknown  to  geographers. 

Lake  Iliamna  is  the  largest  lake  thus  far  discovered  in  Alaska.  Its  greatest  length  is  about  90  miles, 
and  its  greatest  width  about  40.  It  therefore  extends  over  one-half  the  width  of  the  peninsula,  and 
together  with  its  outlet,  the  Kvichak  River,  it  provides  a waterway  from  Bristol  Bay  to  within  20  miles 
of  Cook  Inlet,  and  an  easy  portage  over  a mountain  pass  completes  the  route. 

The  river  is  large  and  discharges  a great  quantity  of  water.  It  is  said  that  the 
influence  of  the  tide  is  felt  30  miles  from  the  mouth.  The  Kvichak  flows  into  the 
head  of  the  bay  on  the  western  side;  on  the  eastern  side  a smaller  river,  the  Locke- 
nuck,  having  a lake  source,  it  is  said,  discharges  its  water.  At  the  head  of  the  bay 
there  is  an  extreme  rise  and  fall  on  spring  tides  of  over  25  feet. 

The  Kvichak  is  purely  a redtish  region.  All  the  other  species  occur,  but  in  a 
scattering  way.  The  traps  take  a few  trout,  but  no  steelheads,  shad,  or  sturgeon. 
The  times  of  the  runs  are  about  the  same  as  those  given  for  the  Nushagak.  Inquiry 
was  made  regarding  a hatchery  site,  but  no  information  could  be  obtained  of  any 
location  in  the  vicinity  suitable  for  the  purpose. 

Koggiung,  the  location  of  the  cannery  of  the  Point  Roberts  Packing  Company, 
is  on  the  eastern  shore  at  the  upper  end  of  Kvichak  Bay,  about  6 miles  below  the 


SALTING  STATION  OF  C.  E WHITNEY  & CO.  LOADING  BARKENTINE  WILLIE  R.  HUME,  NUSHAGAK  BAY. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  20 6.) 


Plate  XVI 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


207 


mouth  of  the  river,  and,  according  to  the  chart  (which  is  only  a sketch),  is  in  latitude 
59°  01'  north;  longitude  156°  56'  west. 

Point  Roberts  Packing  Company. — The  Prosper  Fishing  and  Trading  Company 
established  a saltery  at  Koggiung  in  1894  and  salted  that  year  and  in  1895.  In  1896 
it  was  sold  to  the  Alaska  Packers  Association  under  the  name  of  the  Point  Roberts 
Packing  Company.  The  Alaska  Packers  Association  established  a saltery  at  Kog- 
giung in  1894,  near  that  of  the  Prosper  Fishing  and  Trading  Company,  and  after  the 
purchase  of  the  latter  in  1896  consolidated  the  two.  This  saltery  has  been  operated 
every  year  except  1899. 

In  1895,  under  the  same  name  (Point  Roberts  Packing  Company),  the  Alaska 
Packers  Association  built  a cannery  at  Koggiung,  utilizing  the  available  machinery 
from  the  cannery  of  the  Central  Alaska  Company  at  Thin  Point.  It  was  a two-filler 
cannery  of  1,500  cases  capacity  per  day.  It  made  the  first  pack  in  1896  and  a pack 
every  year  since  to  date.  In  1897  it  was  enlarged  to  three  fillers,  and  in  1898  a 
second  three-filler  cannery  was  built  close  to  and  connected  with  the  first,  so  that 
the  plant  now  practically  consists  of  a six-filler  cannery  and  a saltery. 

The  cannery  is  substantially  built,  light,  roomy,  airy,  and  clean.  It  is  well 
equipped,  and  has  a rated  capacity  of  4,800  cases  per  day.  It  has  18  retorts,  of  47  cases 
capacity  each;  4 boilers,  6 fillers,  6 toppers,  4 solderers,  2 cutters,  and  5 can-makers. 
Fish  are  transferred  from  boats  and  lighters  by  steam  hoists  to  the  fish -house,  and 
from  the  latter,  when  cleaned,  to  the  cannery  by  a conveyor  consisting  of  an  endless 
chain  of  buckets.  About  33  per  cent  of  the  cans  are  made  at  the  cannery  and  the 
remainder  brought  from  San  Francisco;  100-pound  tin  plate  is  used  for  bodies,  and 
90-pound  for  tops;  50  per  cent  of  the  plate  is  imported. 

The  fishermen’s  and  Chinese’  contracts,  and  native  wages,  are  the  same  as  previ- 
ous^ stated. 

The  Kolchak  Packing  Company. — Under  this  name  the  Alaska  Packers  Associa- 
tion built  a cannery  in  the  spring  of  1900,  on  the  eastern  shore  of  Kvichak  Bay, 
about  6 miles  below  the  cannery  of  the  Point  Roberts  Packing  Company,  and  on  the 
northern  point  of  entrance  to  Bear  Slough.  It  is  a three-filler  cannery  with  a daily 
capacity  of  2,400  cases,  and  has  substantial  warehouses  and  quarters.  It  is  well 
lighted,  roomy,  and  well  ventilated,  and  contains  the  latest  machinery  and  cannery 
improvements.  It  was  ready  and  commenced  packing  June  29. 

This  cannery  is  operated  under  one  management  with  the  Point  Roberts  Packing 
Company,  in  a manner  similar  to  those  of  the  association  on  the  Nushagak.  They 
are  under  the  superintendency  of  Mr.  H.  C.  Jansen,  who  has  his  headquarters  at  the 
former  cannery,  with  telephone  communication,  so  as  to  direct  the  affairs  of  all.  The 
cannery  machinery  of  the  Kvichak  Packing  Company  consists  of  9 retorts  of  47  cases 
capacity  each,  3 fillers,  3 toppers,  2 solderers,  and  1 cutter.  Can-makers  will  be 
installed  in  1901.  Fish  are  transferred  from  boats  by  steam  hoists  to  cars,  thence  to 
fish-house,  and,  when  cleaned,  by  conveyor  to  cannery. 

As  the  two  Alaska  Packers  Association  canneries  are  under  one  management 
the  supplies,  fish,  etc.,  are  common  to  all,  and  the  field  statistics  given,  except  the 
pack,  will  be  combined,  therefore,  for  the  two  canneries. 

The  cannery  transporting  vessels — those  that  bring  the  spring  outfits  to  Bering 
Sea  and  return  with  the  pack  in  the  fall — are  moored  in  the  channel  in  Nushagak 


208 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Bay  in  the  vicinity  of  Clark  Point.  The  transfer  is  made  to  and  from  the  canneries 
by  large,  specially  constructed  steamers,  drawing  from  10  to  12  feet  of  water,  heavily  , 
built  and  quite  flat  on  the  bottom,  so  that  when  they  ground  on  the  mud  banks  they 
may  stand  up  when  the  tide  leaves  them,  with  cargo  and  vessel  uninjured.  The 
largest,  built  this  year,  the  Kvichak , has  a capacity  of  32,000  cases,  and  the  second,  j 
the  President , can  carry  11,000  cases. 

In  1900  the  Point  Roberts  and  the  Kvichak  together  employed  154  white 
fishermen,  trapmen,  etc.,  38  white  cannery-hands,  33  natives,  and  447  Chinese  and 
Japanese.  The  Alaska  Packers  Association  has  a physician  in  its  employ  at 
Koggiung,  who  attends  the  employees  from  Koggiung  to  Ugashik.  There  were  on 
hand  100  gill  nets  for  redfish — length,  each,  75  fathoms;  depth,  20  meshes,  6|-inch 
mesh;  value,  65  cents  per  fathom.  One  trap,  located  on  the  eastern  shore  of  the 
bay,  about  12  miles  below  the  Point  Roberts  cannery,  had  an  inshore  lead  of  60 
feet,  an  offshore  lead  of  300  feet,  with  a 40-foot  by  40-foot  pot.  The  offshore  lead 
was  parallel  with  the  shore  and  not  more  than  100  feet  from  it;  value  about  $1,000. 

The.  following  vessels  were  emplojmd: 


Name  and  class. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

Owned  or 
chartered. 

Steamer  Kvichak  

610 

13 

$200, 000 

Owned. 

Steamer  Savak 

90 

4 

8, 000 

Do. 

Steamer  Lillian  

19 

3 

9, 000 

Do. 

Launch  Herbert 

5 

0 

4,000 

Do. 

Ship  St.  Nicholas 

1,687 

0) 

50, 000 

Chartered. 

Ship  Servia 

1,736 

9 

55, 000 

Do. 

Ship  Bohemia 

1 , 528 

’) 

55, 000 

Owned. 

Schooner  (3-mast)  Prosper 

229 

9 

15,000 

Do. 

1 Fishermen. 


The  boats  used  were:  7 lighters,  worth  $800  each;  6 trap-scows,  $100  each;  10 
skiffs,  $30  each;  50  flat-bottom  gill-net  boats,  $100  each;  2 pile-drivers,  $1,200  each. 
The  following  was  the  output  in  1900: 


Species. 

Cases. 

No. 
to  the 
case. 

Dates. 

Point  Roberts  Packing  Co.: 

Redfish  1 

99,  578 

12. 5 

June  23-July  25. 

King  salmon 

341 

3 

Do. 

Cohoes 

297 

10 

July  20-July  25. 

Humpbacks 

Kvichak  Packing  Co.: 

1,676 

19 

July  15-July  25. 

Redfish  . 

45, 200 

12.5 

J une  28-Aug.  1 . 

1 Salted:  92  barrels  and  115  half-barrels  of  redfish,  50  trap  fish,  or  40  gill-net  fish,  to  the  barrel. 

These  canneries  obtain  their  fish  by  gill  nets  and  traps.  During  the  1900  season 
but  one  trap  was  used — that  referred  to  on  a preceding  page.  In  1898  and  1899  an 
additional  trap  was  used  in  the  Kvichak  River,  about  15  miles  above  the  cannery. 
About  30  per  cent  of  the  catch  is  made  by  this  means.  Preparations  for  salting 
about  1,500  barrels  are  usually  made,  but  very  few  were  cured  in  this  way  during 
the  1900  season.  It  is  said  that,  in  salting,  trap  fish  run  about  50  to  the  barrel,  while 
gill-net  fish  run  about  42,  which  is  a marked  illustration  of  selection  by  gill  nets. 

May  20,  1898,  the  ship  Sterling , with  the  outfit  for  the  Koggiung  cannery,  was 
lost  on  the  shoals  off  Cape  Constantine.  No  lives  were  lost. 


View  from  sand  dune  to  southwest. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  208.) 


Plate  XVII. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


209 

Worth  Alaska  Salmon  Company. — This  compan}r,  organized  from  the  Sacramento 
River  Packers’  Association  and  incorporated  under  the  laws  of  California,  sent  a 
large  cannery  plant  to  Bristol  Bay  in  the  spring  of  1900  and  built  two  canneries  on 
the  left  bank  of  the  Kvichak  River,  near  the  mouth,  about  6 miles  above  Koggiung. 
The  plant  was  placed  in  two  canneries,  1,000  feet  apart,  for  the  purpose  of  obtaining 
tire  protection.  They  will  be  operated,  however,  under  one  management  during  the 
season  of  1901,  when  the  first  pack  is  expected.  Each  cannery  will  have  1 retorts, 
2 tillers,  2 toppers,  2 solderers,  1 cutter,  and  1 set  of  can -makers.  As  the,  cannery 
will  employ  50  hands  to  the  tiller,  a daily  capacity  is  expected  of  1,800  cases,  or  3,600 
cases  for  the  two  canneries;  a conservative  rating,  however,  would  be  3,200  cases. 

THE  NAKNEK  RIVER. 

The  next  large  salmon  river  is  the  Naknek,  which  enters  Kvichak  Bay,  on  the 
eastern  side,  about  25  miles  to  the  southward  of  Koggiung,  in  latitude  58'J  12'  north, 
longitude  157°  02'  west  (approximate).  The  river  has  its  source  in  a large  lake  of 
the  same  name  (at  one  time  also  known  as  Lake  Walker),  on  which  two  villages  are 


located.  The  river  is  large,  about  60  miles  in  length,  and  flows  a great  body  of  water 
in  a general  westerly  direction.  It  is  said  that  tide  water  extends  about  25  miles  from 
the  mouth,  at  which  point  the  river  is  about  one-half  mile  in  width,  and  that  at  the 
mouth  there  is  an  extreme  rise  and  fall  of  spring  tide  of  over  20  feet. 

Shoals  and  banks,  many  of  which  uncover  at  low  water,  fill  the  lower  course  of 
the  river  and  extend  3 or  1 miles  off  the  mouth,  then  trend  around  to  the  northward 
and  join  the  body  of  banks  that  fill  the  upper  end  of  Kvichak  Bay.  At  low  water 
the  channel  between  the  banks  and  the  flats  is  very  shallow;  cannery  steamers,  draw- 
ing but  7 feet  of  water,  await  half  tide  before  entering.  Navigation  is  done  on  the 
rising  tide  or  at  high  water. 

The  mouth  of  the  river  is  about  3 miles  wide  between  the  headlands,  which  consist 
of  bluffs  about  100  feet  high.  Within  the  entrance  the  banks  converge  quite  rapidly, 
and  about  -1  miles  from  the  mouth  the  river  is  about  three-fourths  of  a mile  wide 


F.  C.  B.  1901—11 


210 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


between  the  banks.  At  this  point  the  canneries  are  located,  that  of  the  Arctic  Pack- 
ing Company  on  the  left  bank,  and  nearly  opposite,  on  the  right  bank,  that  of  the 
Naknek  Packing  Company . Abreast  of  the  cannery  and  for  a long  distance  below 
the  river  bed  at  low  water  is  four-fifths  uncovered,  and  it  is  said  that  at  very  low 
water  it  may  be  forded  above  the  cannery;  nevertheless,  it  runs  a large  body  of 
water.  V eiw  little  is  known  of  the  interior.  During  early  Russian  times  this  lake 
and  river  formed  a connecting  link  of  the  trail  from  Kadiak  to  the  Nushagak,  by 
way  of  Katmai. 

The  Naknek  is  essentially  a redfish  river,  though  members  of  all  other  species  are 
present,  but  only  in  a scattering  way.  During  the  season  a few  king  salmon  and  cohoes 
are  taken.  Exceptionally,  there  is  a small  run  of  humpbacks,  but  practically  no  dog 
salmon.  There  are  a few  trout,  but  no  steelheads,  shad,  sturgeon,  halibut,  or  cod. 

The  redfish  commence  running  about  June  IT,  when  about  100  cases  may  be 
packed.  Eight  or  ten  days  later  they  are  running  strong.  July  16-20  they  begin 
to  slack,  and  by  July  25-28  the  run,  for  cannery  purposes,  is  finished.  In  the  spring 
very  large  schools  of  young  salmon,  about  4 inches  in  length,  are  seen  passing  out 
to  sea.  There  does  not  appear  to  be  any  site  for  a hatchery  in  the  vicinity. 

Fishing  is  carried  on  entirely  by  gill  nets  and  traps,  which  were  used  by  both 
companies  until  this  year,  when  the  Naknek  Packing  Company  abandoned  trap  fish- 
ing as  too  expensive  to  maintain. 

Arctic  Packing  Company.- — In  1890  this  company  built  and  operated  asaltery  on 
the  Naknek,  at  a point  indicated  in  the  preceding  paragraph.  This  saltery  was  sold 
to  the  Alaska  Packers  Association  in  1893.  In  1894  the  association  built  a cannery 
at  the  same  point,  utilizing  in  its  construction  the  available  machinery  of  the  cannery 
of  the  Thin  Point  Packing  Company,  at  Thin  Point,  and  made  the  first  pack  in  1895. 
A pack  has  been  made  every  year  since  to  date.  The  saltery  has  been  operated  every 
year  except  1897.  The  original  plant  was  a two-filler  cannery,  but  in  the  spring  of 
1900  an  additional  machine  was  installed,  and  it  now  has  a daily  capacity  of  2,400 
cases.  A pack  of  55,000  cases  is  expected  during  a good  average  season. 

The  canning  machinery  consists  of  3 fillers,  3 toppers,  2 solderers,  1 fish-cutter, 
and  9 retorts.  Fish  are  transferred  from  boat  to  fish-house  by  cable  cars  running  on 
an  inclined  plane  and  operated  by  steam.  Can-makers  have  been  installed,  and  when 
in  thorough  running  order  will  probably  make  most  of  the  cans  used,  though  this 
year  only  30  per  cent  were  made  on  the  ground,  the  remainder  being  brought  from 
San  Francisco.  One-hundred-pound  tin  plate  was  used  for  bodies,  and  90-pound 
plate  for  tops,  all  imported,  as  the  pack  of  this  cannery  was  for  export  trade. 

Transportation  is  by  the  company’s  vessels,  which  in  the  spring  approach  the 
mouth  of  the  river  as  closely  as  safety  permits,  and  after  discharging  are  moved  to 
Nushagak  Bay,  where  they  are  loaded  with  the  pack  at  the  end  of  the  season. 

Fishermen’s  and  Chinese’  contracts  and  native  wages  are  the  same  as  previously 
noted.  In  1900  the  cannery  employed  58  white  fishermen,  54  white  cannery-hands, 
trap  and  beach  men,  and  salters,  20  natives,  and  140  Chinese. 

The  following  boats  were  used:  Eight  lighters,  worth  $800  each;  10  skiffs,  $40 
each;  34  flat-bottom  gill-net  boats,  $100  each;  and  1 pile-driver,  $1,200.  The  gill-net 
boats  are  of  the  same  type  as  those  used  on  the  Kvichak,  and  described  on  page  180. 

There  were  in  use  for  redfish  29  gill  nets,  besides  47  spare  ones,  and  sufficient 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


211 


webbing  for  12  more.  The  nets  are  each  75  fathoms  long,  22  meshes  deep,  and  6^-inch 
mesh.  King-salmon  nets  are  not  used.  In  addition  three  traps  were  driven,  but  as 
the  netters  brought  in  an  abundance  of  fish  only  two  were  used.  One  was  located  on 
the  left  bank  of  the  river,  about  6 miles  above  the  cannery,  with  inshore  and  offshore 
leads  of  750  feet  and  1,900  feet,  respectively,  heart  80  feet  by  160  feet,  and  pot  40 
feet  by  40  feet.  Another,  at  the  northern  point  of  entrance  to  the  river,  had  leads 
of  750  feet  and  1,100  feet,  respectively,  pot  40  feet  by  40  feet,  but  no  heart;  and  the 
third,  of  the  same  dimensions,  which  was  not  used,  on  the  southern  shore  near  the 
entrance.  These  traps  are  driven  in  the  spring  and  pulled  up  when  fishing  ceases. 
They  are  valued  at  about  $1,200  each.  About  20  per  cent  of  the  fish  used  by  this 
cannery  are  taken  in  traps. 

The  following  vessels  were  employed,  all  owned  by  the  company: 


Class  and  name. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

238 

5 

4 

1,413 

1,134 

9 

2 

2 

(’) 

0 

$40, 000 
4,500 
3,  000 
50,  000 
20, 000 

Launch  Ralph  L 

Launch  Northern  Light 

Ship  Indiana 

1 Fishermen. 


The  following  was  the  output  in  1900: 


No.  to 

Species. 

Cases.  the 

case. 

Dates. 

King-  salmon 

69  6 

June  18-June  24. 

Redfish 1 

61,816  12.5 

Junel8-Ju!y  28. 

Humpbacks 

449  22 

On  July  25. 

1 Salted,  1,356  barrels  and  1,141  half-barrels  of  redfish;  52  to  the  barrel. 


Naknek  Packing  Company.  — In  1890  Air.  L.  A.  Pedersen  established  and 
operated  a small  saltery  on  the  right  bank  of  the  Naknek  about  3 miles  above  the 
mouth.  In  1894  a company  under  the  above  title,  incorporated  under  the  laws  of 
the  State  of  California,  absorbed  the  saltery  and  erected  a cannery  near  it.  The  first 
pack  was  made  in  1895,  and  a pack  has  been  made  every  year  to  date.  The  saltery 
has  also  been  operated  every  year,  and  in  1897  an  additional  one  was  built  and 
operated  on  the  shore  of  Kvichak  Bay,  about  2 miles  above  the  mouth  of  the  Naknek. 
The  latter  was  abandoned  in  1900.  During  the  present  season  (1900)  the  cannery 
plant  was  enlarged  by  the  addition  of  a small  cannery  building,  warehouse,  bunk 
houses,  etc.,  and  it  is  expected  to  have  three  fillers  ready  for  operation  in  1901  and 
the  cannery  equipped  for  a pack  of  at  least  40,000  cases. 

The  following  cannery  machinery  is  now  installed:  Eight  retorts,  2 fillers,  3 top- 
pers, 2 solderers,  and  L cutter.  Fish  are  pewed  from  boats  and  lighters  to  fish-house. 
Thirty-three  per  cent  of  the  cans  are  made  at  the  cannery;  the  rest  are  brought  from 
San  Francisco.  Can-makers  have  been  installed,  and  it  is  expected  to  make  a large 
proportion  of  tins  at  the  cannery  in  the  future.  One-hundred-pound  tin  plate  is 
used  for  bodies  and  95-pound  plate  for  tops,  50  per  cent  of  which  is  imported. 

The  transportation  was  by  a vessel  of  the  company,  which  was  kept  moored  in 
Kvichak  Ba}r  below  the  mouth  of  the  river. 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


01  2 

U JL  U 

The  fishermen’s  and  Chinese’  contracts  and  native  wages  were  the  same  as  given 
on  previous  pages  for  this  district. 

In  1900  the  company  employed  60  white  fishermen  and  beach-hands,  12  white 
cannery-hands,  11  natives,  and  131  Chinese.  Twenty-one  redfish  gill  nets  were  used, 
each  75  fathoms  long,  22  meshes  deep,  6i-inch  mesh;  value,  65  cents  per  fathom. 

They  have  7 lighters,  $600  each;  5 skill's,  $25  each;  and  28  flat-bottom  gill-net 
boats,  $100  each. 

The  vessels  employed  were:  Steamer  Fram , 12  tons;  crew,  3;  value,  $8,000; 
owned.  Barki?.  P.  Cheney , 1,200  tons;  crew,  fishermen;  value,  $20,000;  owned. 
The  following  was  the  1900  output: 


Species. 

Cases. 

No.  to 
the 
ease. 

Dates. 

31 

4.8 

Throughout  the  season. 

35, 675 
352 

12 

July  23-July  28. 

'There  were  salted  22  barrels  of  king  salmon  and  1,150  barrels  of  redfish,  the  latter 
running  47  to  the  barrel. 

THE  EGEGAK  RIVER. 


This  river  empties  into  the  outer  limits  of  Kvichak  Bay  about  31  miles  south  of 
the  Naknek,  and  has  Cape  Chichagof  for  its  northern  entrance  point.  It  is  a large 
river  about  2 miles  in  width  at  the  cannery,  and  is  the  outlet  to  Lake  Becharof.  It 
flows  in  a general  westerly  direction  for  about  50  miles.  Tide  water  is  said  to  extend 
about  25  miles  up  the  river;  very  little  is  known  of  the  locality. 

The  lower  part  of  the  river  is  a wide  bay,  contracted  at  the  mouth,  and,  like 
other  rivers  of  this  district,  at  low  water  a large  part  of  the  bed  is  exposed  in  shoals 
and  banks,  with  narrow  channels  winding  through  them.  At  the  entrance  shoal  water 
extends  several  miles  'offshore,  and  the  small  cannery  steamers  enter  only  from  half 
to  full  tide.  The  channel  into  this  river  is  wider  and  deeper  than  in  the  Naknek  and 
Kvichak,  and,  if  it  were  properly  buoyed,  vessels  of  moderate  draft  could  enter  at 
high  water;  there  is,  however,  no  swinging  room  inside.  The  cannery  transporting 
vessel,  a bark  of  554  tons,  is  carried  in  at  high  water  and  moored  head  and  stern 
alongside  of  the  low-water  bank. 

This  river  is  also  essentially  a redfish  stream,  though  all  other  species  are  found, 
but  they  are  scattered  throughout  the  season  and  are  few  in  number.  There  are  a 
few  trout,  but  no  steelheads,  shad,  sturgeon,  halibut,  or  cod.  The  time  of  run  of 
the  redfish  is  the  same  as  given  under  the  Naknek,  to  which  reference  is  made. 

Fgegak  Fishing  Station. — Under  this  name  the  Alaska  Packers  Association,  in 
1895,  established  and  operated  a saltery  on  the  right  bank  of  the  Egegak  about  5 
miles  from  the  entrance,  and  salted  every  year  until  1900,  when  the  apparatus  was 
moved  to  the  new  cannery  site,  though  the  buildings  were  left  standing. 

Egegak  Packing  Company.  — In  1899  the  Alaska  Packers  Association,  under  this 
title,  commenced  building  a cannery  on  the  left  bank  of  the  Egegak,  opposite  and  a 
little  above  the  salting  station,  utilizing  the  available  machinery  of  the  cannery 
of  the  Baranotf  Packing  Company,  of  Redfish  Bay,  Southeast  Alaska.  This  plant 
had  been  purchased  during  the  winter  of  1898  and  1899,  when  that  locality  was 
abandoned.  The  new  cannery  was  completed  in  1900,  and  the  first  pack  commenced 
July  1.  It  has  substantial  buildings,  and  is  clean  and  well  arranged.  The  cannery 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


213 


machinery  consists  of  5 retorts,  2 fillers,  2 toppers,  2 solderers,  and  1 cutter;  can- 
makers  will  be  installed.  This  year  all  cans  were  brought  from  San  Francisco,  100- 
pound  tin  plate  being-  used  for  bodies  and  95-pound  plate  for  tops;  all  domestic. 

Fish  are  pewed  from  boats  to  cars  which  are  hauled  by  cable,  operated  by  steam, 
over  an  inclined  plane  leading-  from  the  fish-house  to  the  water  at  all  stages  of  the  tide. 
After  cleaning,  the  fish  are  passed  directly  from  the  draining  table  to  the  cutter. 

The  saltery,  which  has  been  moved  to  the  cannery  site,  is  operated  in  conjunction 
with  the  cannery. 

The  fishermen’s  and  Chinese  contracts  and  native  wages  were  the  same  as  for 
other  canneries  of  this  district.  In  1900  this  cannery  employed  39  white  fishermen, 
16  white  cannery-hands,  10  natives,  and  80  Chinese. 

They  used  20  gill  nets,  each  with  a length  of  80  fathoms;  depth,  26  meshes, 
6|-inch  mesh;  value,  about  65  cents  per  fathom.  No  traps  were  driven,  but  they 


Freehand  sketch  of  entrance  to  F.gegak  River,  Bristol  Bay. 


were  prepared  to  drive  two  with  leads  of  200  and  250  feet  and  pots  10  feet  by  10 
feet,  valued  at  about  $1,000  each. 

They  used  5 lighters,  $200  each;  7 skiffs,  $30  each;  19  flat-bottom  gill-net  boats 
$100  each,  and  one  pile-driver,  $1,500. 

The  following  vessels  were  employed: 


Class  and  name. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

Owned  or 
chartered. 



Launch  Llewellyn 

5 

2 

fl.OUO 

Owned. 

Launch  Corinne 

5 

2 

2, 000 

Do. 

Bark  Charles  B.  Kenney 

1,014 

554 

(-) 

;io,  ooo 

Chartered. 

Bark  Will  W.  Case 

(2) 

18,000 

Owned. 

1 Employed  at  Naknek  also,  which  see.  - Fishermen. 


The  following  was  the  output  in  1900:  Redfish,  21,652  cases,  12.5  to  the  case, 
July  1 to  July  25.  Redfish,  salted,  582  barrels  and  1,513  half-barrels,  50  to  the  barrel. 


214 


' BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


THE  UGASHIK  RIVER. 

The  mouth  of  this  river  is  about  40  miles  below  the  Egegak,  and,  according’  to 
the  chart,  is  in  latitude  57°  38'  north,  longitude  157°  48'  west;  but  the  chart  is  appar- 
ently much  in  error.  The  river,  it  is  said,  has  its  source  in  a lake  system  of  consid- 
erable extent,  about  50  miles  in  the  interior  of  the  peninsula.  In  its  lower  course 
it  has  as  tributaries  King  Salmon  River,  which  enters  through  the  left  bank  from  the 
southeast  about  5 miles  from  the  pilot  station,  and  Dog  Salmon  River,  which  enters 
through  the  left  bank  about  15  miles  from  the  pilot  station.  These  are  large  streams, 
and  it  is  probable  there  are  others  higher  up. 

The  Ugashik  is  a large  river  and  discharges  a great  quantity  of  water  into  the 
wide  indentation  that  has  Cape  Grey  for  its  northern  point  and  Cape  Menchikolf 
for  its  southern.  Cape  Gre}r  is  a prominent  bluff  about  200  feet  high,  ranging 
several  miles  along  the  shore,  brownish  in  color,  with  a few  yellow  vertical  stripes. 
It  appears  to  be  the  terminal  point  of  a low  ridge,  which  itself  slopes  to  low  land 
on  each  side.  Cape  Menchikotf  is  also  a high  bluff  having  a wider  range  along  the 
shore  and  more  hilly  country  back  of  it. 

From  seaward  the  near  land  visible  between  the  capes,  including  the  river  valley, 
appears  to  be  all  low.  The  capes  can  be  approached  from  the  westward  to  within  a 
distance  of  about  2 miles.  The  distance  between  them  is  estimated  at  about  20  miles, 
though  the  chart  would  seem  to  indicate  the  distance  as  about  2 miles.  From  the 
capes  the  low  land  converges  to  the  eastward  to  a point  where  the  river  may  be 
said  to  enter.  Here  it  is  about  6 miles  across  between  high-water  banks,  and  has  on 
the  northern  side  a bluff,  10  to  12  miles  from  Cape  Grey,  known  as  Smoky  Point. 
This  is  recognized  as  the  northern  entrance  point  to  the  river. 

The  indentation  formed  by  the  two  capes,  the  converging  land,  and  the  lower 
courses  of  the  river  are  filled  with  shoals  and  banks.  There  is,  however,  a fair 
channel,  through  which,  it  is  said,  9 feet  may  be  carried  at  low-water  spring  tides. 
This  channel  is  buoyed  during  the  canning  season  by  the  Alaska  Packers  Association 
for  the  convenience  of  their  vessels,  but  no  regular  system  is  adopted  and  a stranger 
would  be  unable  to  follow  it  with  safety.  The  outer  buoy  is  on  the  bar,  which  is 
nearly  on  a line  between  Cape  Grey  and  Cape  Menchikotf,  9 miles  from  the  former. 
From  this  buoy  it  is  about  6 miles  to  Smoky  Point. 

About  6 miles  higher  up  the  river,  on  a bluff  on  the  right  bank,  is  a native  village 
which  is  called  the  “Pilot  Station,”  and  immediately  above  it,  on  a lower  bluff,  is 
the  cannery  of  the  Alaska  Packers  Association,  called  the  Ugashik  Fishing  Station. 
It  is  about  17  miles  from  Cape  Grey.  An  Eskimo  formerly  lived  in  the  village  who 
piloted  vessels  through  the  channel,  hence  the  name,  Pilot  Station.  The  river  is 
very  tortuous,  and  winds  and  recurves  to  such  an  extent  that  at  a point  about  20 
miles  by  river  from  the  Alaska  Packers  Association  cannery  the  distance  across 
country  is  about  7 miles. 

The  Ugashik,  like  the  rivers  previously  described  in  this  report,  is  essentially  a 
redfish  river,  and  some  years  these  salmon  run  in  very  large  numbers.  King  salmon 
occur  scatteringly  throughout  the  season,  and  at  times  dog  salmon  are  plentiful. 
There  are  practically  no  humpbacks,  but  it  is  said  there  is  a run  of  cohoes  after  the 
canneries  close.  There  is,  at  times,  an  abundance  of  trout,  flounders,  and  crabs,  but 


View  from  stream  to  northea 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1 901 . (To  face  page  214.1) 


Plate  XVIII 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


215 


no  halibut,  shad,  or  sturgeon.  The  runs  correspond  to  the  times  given  for  the 
Naknek  River. 

Johnson  Saltery. — Mr.  C.  A.  Johnson  salted  salmon  on  the  Ugashik  from  1889  to 
1898,  both  inclusive.  He  was  the  pioneer  in  this  business  on  the  river  and  built  and 
operated  a saltery  in  1889,  on  the  left  bank,  about  23  miles  above  Smoky  Point  and 


2 miles  below  the  trading  post  of  the  Alaska  Commercial  Company.  This  saltery 
was  merged  in  the  cannery  of  the  Bering  Sea  Packing  company.  In  1891  Mr. 
Johnson  established  and  operated  another  saltery  on  the  right  bank  of  the  river, 
about  1|  miles  above  the  pilot  station,  which  he  sold  in  1899  to  the  Alaska  Packers 
Association,  who  absorbed  it  in  their  cannery  plant. 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


216 

Bering  Sea  Packing  Company. — In  1890  this  company,  a branch  of  the  Alaska 
Improvement  Company,  though  a separate  corporation,  purchased  the  machinery  of 
the  Western  Alaska  Packing  Company  at  Ozernoy,  and  commenced  building  a can- 
nery on  the  left  bank  of  the  Ugashik,  near  the  first  Johnson  saltery.  In  transporting 
the  machinery  on  the  schooner  Premier , that  vessel  went  ashore  in  Stepovak  Bay  and 
the  machinery  did  not  all  reach  the  Ugashik  until  1891,  when  it  was  installed  and  a 
small  pack  made  that  year.  As  the  site  appeared  unsuitable,  the  cannery  remained 
closed  in  1892  and  1893,  and  in  1894  it  was  moved  to  a point  on  the  left  bank,  about 
15  miles  above  Smoky  Point,  where  it  was  operated  in  1894,  1895,  and  1896.  In 
1897  it  was  sold  to  the  Alaska  Packers  Association,  with  other  property  of  the 
Alaska  Improvement  Company,  and  the  machinery  and  equipment  were  utilized  in 
the  Alaska  Packers  Association  cannery.  Nothing  remains  but  the  dwelling  of  the 
superintendent,  now  used  as  a fishing  camp  by  the  Alaska  Packers  Association. 

Nelson  saltery. — In  1893  Mr.  Charles  Nelson  established  a saltery  on  the  left 
bank  of  the  Ugashik,  immediately  above  the  last  site  of  the  Bering  Sea  Packing 
Company.  After  operating  it  in  1893  and  1894  it  was  sold  to  the  Alaska  Packers 
Association  and  closed. 

Alaska  Packers  Association  Saltery. — In  1893  the  Alaska  Packers  Association 
built  a saltery  on  the  left  bank  of  the  Ugashik,  about  a mile  below  the  last  site  of  the 
Bering  Sea  Packing  Company.  It  was  operated  in  1893,  1894,  and  1895,  and  then 
merged  in  with  the  Alaska  Packers  Association  cannery,  built  the  latter  year  near 
the  pilot  station. 

Ugashik  Fishing  Station. — In  1895  the  Alaska  Packers  Association  built  a can- 
nery on  the  right  bank  of  the  Ugashik  immediately  above  the  pilot  station,  where 
the  river  is  about  3 miles  wide,  utilizing  in  its  construction  the  available  machinery 
of  the  Russian -American  Packing  Company’s  cannery  at  Afognak.  It  made  the  first 
pack  in  1896,  and  has  packed  every  year  since  to  date.  Originally  it  was  a two-filler 
cannery,  but  in  1900  another  filler  was  installed,  and  it  now  has  a capacity  of  2,400 
cases  per  day.  The  machinery  consists  of  7 retorts,  3 fillers,  3 toppers,  2 solderers, 
1 cutter,  1 spare  filler,  1 spare  topper,  and  2 sets  of  can-making  machines. 

Fish  are  pewed  from  boats  and  lighters  to  platforms  and  thence  to  fish-house,  and 
when  cleaned  are  transported  in  cars  to  the  cutter.  Seventy  per  cent  of  the  cans  are 
made  at  the  cannery  and  the  rest  transported  from  San  Francisco.  One  hundred 
pound  tin  plate  is  used  for  bodies  and  95-pound  tin  for  tops,  all  imported. 

Fishermen’s  and  Chinese’  contracts  and  native  wages  were  the  same  as  mentioned 
under  other  canneries. 

The  transporting  vessels  enter  the  river  at  high  water,  and  during  the  season 
are  moored  in  the  channel,  one  near  the  cannery  and  two  near  the  left  bank  about  5 
miles  above  the  cannery. 

In  1900  this  cannery  employed  64  white  fishermen  and  trapmen,  24  white  cannery 
and  saltery  hands,  20  natives,  and  140  Chinese. 

It  used  two  sets  of  gill  nets,  24  to  a set,  each  85  fathoms  long,  26  meshes  deep, 
6^-inch  mesh;  value,  about  65  cents  per  fathom.  There  were  3 traps;  one  about  a 
mile  above  the  cannery,  on  the  right  bank,  with  leads  each  500  feet  and  pot  40  by 
40  feet;  one  about  18  miles  above  the  cannery,  on  the  left  bank,  with  leads  each 
400  feet  and  pot  40  by  40  feet,  and  one  about  22  miles  above  the  cannery,  with  leads 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


217 


of  COO  feet  and  400  feet,  respectively,  and  pot  40  by  40  feet.  These  traps  are  valued  at 
about  $1,000  each.  It  is  stated  that  about  20  per  cent  of  the  fish  are  taken  in  traps. 

The  following  boats  were  used:  Nine  lighters,  valued  at  $800  each;  10  skiffs,  $25 
each;  30  Columbia  River  gill-net  boats,  $200  each;  1 pile-driver,  $1,500. 

The  following  vessels  were  used: 


Class  and  name. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

Owned  or 
chartered. 

Steamer  Thistle 

56 

5 

|25,  000 

Owned. 

5 

2 

2 

7,000 
2,  500 

1 )o. 

Launch  Cathie  K 

3 

Do. 

Bark  Nicolas  Thayer 

555 

(>) 

(■) 

15, 000 

Do. 

Bark  Coryphene  

733 

15,  000 

Chartered. 

Three-masted  schooner  Premier 

292 

(>) 

15,000 

Owned. 

1 Fishermen. 


The  following  was  the  output  in  1900:  King  salmon,  101  cases,  4 to  the  case, 
June  18  to  June  29;  redtish,  54,581  cases,  13  to  the  case,  June  21  to  July  29.  There 
were  salted  C03  barrels  and  606  half-barrels  of  redfish,  50  to  the  barrel,  and  10 
barrels  of  coho  bellies. 

Bristol  Packing  Company. — This  company,  organized  largely  by  the  stockhold- 
ers of  the  Naknek  Packing  Company,  sent  a cannery  outfit  to  the  Ugashik  early  in 
the  spring  of  1900  and  located  on  the  left  bank  of  that  river  about  25  miles  from 
Smoky  Point,  near  the  site  of  the  old  trading  post  of  the  Alaska  Commercial  Com- 
pany. The  cannery  was  ready  for  packing  July  9.  It  was  not  fully  equipped,  but 
had  at  the  time  of  our  visit  2 retorts,  1 fruit  topper,  1 solderer,  and  1 cutter.  The 
work  was  done  largely  by  hand,  but  it  was  estimated  that  500  cases  could  be  packed 
per  day.  All  the  cans  were  brought  from  San  Francisco;  they  were  made  of  100- 
pound  imported  tin  plate.  It  is  said  that  in  1901  the  cannery  will  be  equipped  with 
3 fillers  and  the  corresponding  machinery,  and  it  is  anticipated  that  a pack  of  40,000 
cases  will  be  made  during  the  season. 

The  transporting  vessel  ascended  the  river  to  a point  about  8 miles  below  the 
cannery,  where  she  was  moored  in  the  channel  for  the  season. 

In  1900  this  cannery  employed  27  white  fishermen  and  beachmen,  6 white 
cannery-hands,  10  natives,  and  48  Chinese. 

They  used  8 gill  nets,  each  75  fathoms  long,  23  meshes  deep,  6^-inch  mesh,  valued 
at  65  cents  per  fathom.  No  traps  were  used. 

The  following  vessels  owned  by  the  company  were  used:  Gasoline  launch  Amelia , 
5 tons;  crew,  2;  value,  $2,000;  bark  Agate,  595  tons;  crew,  fishermen;  value,  $10,000. 
The}T  have  1 lighter,  value,  $250;  1 skiff,  $25;  7 gill-net  boats,  $100  each. 

The  output  in  1900  was:  Redtish,  6,653  cases,  12  to  the  case,  July  9 to  July  29. 
Commenced  salting  July  2,  and  salted  1,150  barrels  of  redfish,  46  to  the  barrel. 

With  the  Ugashik  our  examination  of  the  Bristol  Bay  district  was  finished.  It 
is  a wonderful  salmon  country,  and  can  not  be  equaled.  The  redtish  still  run  in 
countless  numbers,  and,  as  the  rivers  can  not  be  barricaded  and  as  overfishing  has 
not  yet  produced  its  effect,  there  seems  to  be  no  depletion.  The  next  few  years, 
however,  will  see  many  new  canneries  established  by  the  capital  that  was  used  in 
the  canneries  on  the  failing  waters  of  the  northwest  coast  of  the  United  States. 
But  in  the  absence  of  proper  laws,  or  the  enforcement  of  such  poor  ones  as  now 
obtain,  these  streams,  too,  will  become  depleted  in  time. 


218 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


CHIGNIK  DISTRICT. 

This  district  was  visited  the  latter  part  of  July.  The  remarks  made  in  my 
former  report  (pp.  161-171)  on  this  locality  hold  good  at  the  present  day,  and  it 
appears  unnecessary  to  make  any  changes  or  modifications  after  this  second  visit 
and  examination.  There  have  been  no  additions  to  the  three  operating  canneries, 
which  have  packed  every  year  to  date. 

The  cannery  men  still  contend  that  there  is  no  diminution  in  the  numbers  of 
salmon  taken  from  the  river  and  lagoon,  yet  the  locality  no  doubt  is  badly  over- 
fished. The  lagoon  and  approaches  and  the  river  approaches  are  studded  with  traps, 
some  with  leads  3,500  feet  long,  and  sometimes  so  interlaced  that  at  a distance  the 
channel  appears  completely  blocked,  and  it  hardly  seems  possible  for  a fish  to  pass. 
Plate  ix  indicates  the  positions  of  these  traps  at  the  time  of  our  visit,  and  it  will  be 
seen  that  while  12  have  but  one  pot,  6 have  two.  As  the  latter  really  consist  of  2 
traps  joined  on  the  leads,  there  were  actually  21  traps,  or  one  more  than  during  the 
season  of  1897,  at  the  time  of  our  visit. 

My  opinion  of  traps  has  been  expressed  and  the  waste  from  them  referred  to, 
but  as  a further  illustration  of  this  trap  waste  a single  occurrence  related  to  me 
may  be  given:  A lighter  having  a capacity  of  15  tons,  and  having  nearly  that 
amount  of  fish  aboard,  was  towed  to  a cannery  where  the  species  desired  for  canning, 
amounting  to  about  6 tons,  were  removed;  the  rest,  consisting  of  cod,  tomcod, 
halibut,  flounders,  sculpins,  dog  salmon,  trout,  etc.,  were  waste.  In  the  spring  of 
the  year  immense  numbers  of  tomcod  are  taken.  It  is  said  that  as  much  as  15  tons 
of  this  species  have  been  thrown  out  of  a trap  in  one  day. 

Trap  men  claim  that  the  waste  species  are  released,  but  such  is  not  generally  the 
case.  If  the  trap  be  full  of  fish  not  wanted,  the  pot  may  be  lowered  and  the  fish 
released  alive,  because  that  is  the  simplest  method  for  emptying  the  pot,  but  usually 
all  are  dipped  out  together  and  the  sorting  is  done  afterwards. 

If  traps  be  prohibited — and  in  i ny  opinion  they  should  be — it  is  difficult  to  say 
what  the  fishing  results  will  be  at  Chignik.  At  present  traps,  gill  nets,  and  seines 
are  used,  and  the  catch  is  represented  in  the  following  proportions:  Traps,  70  to  75 
per  cent;  gill  nets,  20  to  25  per  cent;  and  seines,  about  5 per  cent.  It  is  believed 
that  an  honest  effort  has  been  made  with  gill  nets  and  seines,  but  the  results  have 
been  very  unsatisfactory.  For  gill-net  fishing  the  water  is  too  clear  and  the  channels  too 
shallow  and  narrow.  For  seining  there  are  no  beaches  and  the  bottom  is  unsuitable. 
However,  if  the  fish  are  there  the  cannerymen  will  devise  some  means  for  obtaining 
them.  A few  years  ago  purse  seines  were  tried  in  southeastern  Alaska  and  pronounced 
a failure;  now  they  are  very  generally  used  in  certain  localities,  and  with  such  success 
that  the  boast  is  made  that  they  need  no  longer  construct  barricades,  as  they  take 
with  purse  seines  all  the  fish  that  come  to  the  streams. 

The  times  of  the  runs  of  the  fish  are  given  in  my  former  report  (page  169),  to 
which  may  be  added  that  some  veai's  there  is  a small  run  of  humpbacks  and  usually 
a great  many  dog  salmon.  Steelheads  rarely  occur.  Dolly  Varden  trout  are 
numerous  and  arrive  a few  days  before  the  redfish,  remaining  until  late  in  the  fall. 

The  Chinese  contract  at  Chignik  varied  this  year  from  42  cents  to  42|  cents  per 
case,  on  guaranties  of  20,000  to  28,000  cases,  with  the  usual  conditions. 


1901.  (To  fnca  page  218.) 


Plate  XIX. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


219 


The  fishermen’s  contract  varied  in  the  different  canneries.  In  one,  all  fishermen 
and  trapmen  were  paid  $30  per  month,  with  full  board,  from  the  time  of  signing’  in 
San  Francisco  until  paid  off  on  return,  and  one-fourth  cent  per  case.  In  two  other 
canneries  the  same  contract  as  the  preceding  was  made  with  the  trapmen,  except  that 
their  pay  ceased  on  leaving  Chignik,  for  the  reason  that  they  were  not  obliged  to 
work  the  vessel.  In  these  two  canneries  the  gill-netters  were  differently  paid.  In 
one  they  received  $15  per  month,  without  board,  from  the  day  of  arrival  until  the 
day  of  departure,  3 cents  per  fish  to  be  divided  among  all  netters,  and  35  cents  per 
day  for  commutation  of  ration.  In  the  other  cannery  gill-netters  had  $20  per  month 
from  the  date  of  arrival  to  that  of  departure,  full  board,  and  3 cents  per  fish. 

We  spent  a Saturday  in  the  lagoon.  One  cannery  packed  a few  fish  in  the 
morning,  left  from  the  preceding  day,  and  was  then  closed.  The  turn  .els  of  the  traps  of 
this  cannery  were  all  up,  so  far  as  could  be  seen,  and  upon  inquiry  it  was  reported  that 
they  had  strict  orders  to  obey  the  weekly  close  season,  and  were  doing  so.  Several 
scow-loads  of  fish,  however,  were  noticed  during  the  afternoon  on  their  way  out,  and 
the  web  of  a number  of  traps  was  noticed  down. 

For  a history  of  the  canneries,  with  their  locations,  etc.,  see  my  former  report. 

The  Chignik  Bay  Company  has  a daily  capacity  of  1,600  cases,  and  operates  in 
its  cannery  7 retorts,  2 fillers,  2 toppers,  2 solderers,  and  1 cutter.  It  has  two  sets 
of  can-makers,  with  a capacity  of  70,000  cans  per  day,  and  all  the  tins  are  made  at  the 
cannery,  largely  of  imported  material,  using  100-pound  plate  for  the  bodies  and 
95-pound  plate  for  the  tops.  The  fish  are  pewed  from  boats  and  lighters  to  the  fish- 
house,  and  the  cleaned  fish  are  conveyed  by  car  to  the  cannery.  It  employed  in  1900 
63  white  fishermen,  13  white  beachmen,  3 white  coal-miners,  1 white  cannery-hands, 
2 natives,  and  90  Chinese.  They  used  1 gill  net,  but  have  10,  each  135  fathoms  long, 
30  meshes  deep,  6^-inch  mesh,  value  65  cents  per  fathom;  3 drag  seines,  but  have  1, 
from  75  to  180  fathoms  long,  3 to  3£  inch  mesh,  120  to  ISO  meshes  deep  at  bunt,  value 
$1.50  per  fathom;  6 traps  of  L pot  and  2 traps  of  2 pots,  shore  leads  varying  from 
150  to  3,500  feet,  average  1,000  feet;  channel  leads,  100  to  1,600  feet,  average  900  feet; 
hearts  75  feet  across,  and  pots  10  feet  by  10  feet,  average  value  $1,500  each.  The 
trap  web  is  all  tanned,  pots  51-thread,  wings  36-thread;  the  piles  are  10  feet  apart. 

The  following  boats  were  used:  Two  schooner-rigged  lighters,  capacity  11,000  fish, 
value  $1,500  each;  1 sloop-rigged  lighter,  capacity  1,000  fish,  value  $750;  12  trap 
scows,  capacity  1,800  to  3,500  fish,  average  value  $250;  3 flat-bottom  seine  boats,  $100 
each;  15  skiffs,  $25  each;  7 Columbia  River  boats,  $200  each;  8 flat-bottom  gill-net 
boats,  $100  each;  3 pile-drivers,  $750  each. 

The  following  vessels  owned  by  the  company  were  employed: 


Class  and  name. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

Steamer  Afognak 

37 

5 

$18, 000 

Steamer  Baby  Ruth 

10 

4 

5, 000 

Ship  George  Skolfield 

1,275 

(9 

20, 000 

1 Fishermen. 


The  following  was  the  ouput  in  1900:  Redfish,  10,331  cases,  10.5  to  the  case, 
June  10  to  August  12;  cohoes,  62  cases,  10  to  the  case,  August  3 to  August  12. 


220 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The  Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Company’s  cannery  at  Chignik,  located  in  Anchorage 
Bay,  operated  this  year  in  its  canning  plant  2 iron  retorts,  4 steam  boxes,  1 tiller,  1 
solderer,  and  1 cutter.  The  fish  are  pewed  from  lighters  to  the  fish -house,  and  after 
cleaning  carried  by  cars  to  the  cannery.  The  plant  has  a daily  capacity  of  950  cases, 
and  they  expect  to  pack  during  the  season  about  30,000  cases.  It  has  no  can-makers. 
The  cans  are  all  made  by  hand  at  the  cannery,  using  100-pound  tin  for  tops  and  bodies, 
of  which  about  13  per  cent  is  imported.  The  plant  will  probably  be  enlarged. 

In  1900  this  cannery  employed  60  white  fishermen  and  trapmen,  10  white  can- 
nery-hands, 4 natives,  and  60  Chinese.  They  used  10  gill  nets,  each  260  fathoms 
long,  30  meshes  deep,  6-inch  mesh,  valued  at  65  cents  per  fathom;  3 seines,  2 of  200 
fathoms  length  and  1 of  300  fathoms  length,  each  22  feet  deep,  3-inch  mesh,  valued 
at  $3.50  per  fathom;  4 traps  (2  single  pot,  2 double  pot),  average  shore  lead  800  feet, 
average  channel  lead  800  feet,  heart  80  feet  each  side,  and  pot  40  feet  by  40  feet, 
average  value  $1,500  each. 

The  boats  used  were:  Four  lighters,  $400  each;  2 sail  scows,  value  $200  and  $800; 
10  trap  scows,  $60  each;  10  skiffs,  $25  each;  3 seine  boats,  $75  each;  3 gill-net  skid's, 
$100  each,  and  3 pile-drivers,  $1,000  each. 

The  vessels  employed  were:  Steamer  C.  C.  Cherry,  37  tons,  crew  6,  value  $15,000, 
owned;  launch  Esquimaux , 5 tons,  crew  2,  value  $2,500,  owned. 

Transport  of  pack  and  spring  outfit  by  calling  vessels  of  company. 

The  following  was  the  output  in  1900:  Red  fish,  32,966  cases,  It. 4 to  the  case, 
June  9 to  August  6;  dog  salmon,  120  cases,  10  to  the  case,  July  20  to  July  28. 
Salted  69  barrels  of  humpback  bellies,  450  to  the  barrel. 

Hume  Bros.  <4?  ITume  cannery  at  Chignik,  located  at  Anchorage  Bay,  operated 
this  year  in  its  cannery  plant  4 retorts,  1 filler,  and  1 solderer.  The  fish  are  handled 
from  lighters  to  cannery  in  the  same  manner  as  noted  under  other  canneries.  The 
plant  has  a capacity  of  800  cases  per  day,  and  they  expect  to  make  a season  pack  of 
25,000  cases.  Cans  are  made  by  hand,  of  100-pound  tin  for  tops  and  bodies,  of  which 
50  per  cent  is  imported. 

In  1900  this  cannery  employed  52  white  fishermen,  10  white  cannery-hands,  6 
natives,  and  58  Chinese.  They  used  15  gill  nets,  each  150  fathoms  long,  26  meshes 
deep  for  lagoon  and  40  meshes  deep  for  outside  fishing,  6-inch  mesh,  value  65  cents 
per  fathom;  2 seines,  150  fathoms  long,  25  feet  deep  at  bunt,  3-inch  mesh,  value 
$1.50  per  fathom;  7 traps  (5  single,  2 double),  average  shore  and  channel  leads  800 
feet,  heart  80  feet  on  each  side,  pot  40  feet  by  40  feet,  average  value  $1,500. 

The  boats  used  were  13  lighters,  $140  each;  2 sail  scows,  $300  and  $600;  14  skiffs, 
$25  each;  2 seine  boats,  $70  each;  8 Columbia  River  boats,  $200  each;  10  gill-net 
skiffs,  $100  each;  2-pile  drivers,  $1,050  each. 

The  following  vessels  (owned  by  the  company)  were  employed: 


Class  and  name. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

5 

2 

S3, 200  | 

Launch  Ethel  and  Marian 

G 

3 

•2,  880 

Bark  Ferris  S.  Thompson 

480 

11 

12,000 

Schooner  Maid  of  Orleans 

171 

8 

8,000 

ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


22 1 


The  following  was  the  output  in  1900:  Redfish,  -23,003  cases,  11  to  the  case, 
June  6 to  August  19;  dog  salmon  and  humpbacks,  3,611  cases,  10  to  21  to  case,  July 
2 to  August  19. 

ALITAK  BAY,  KADIAK  ISLAND. 

On  Olga  Bay,  and  its  connecting  waters  with  Alitak  Bay,  locally  known  as 
the  “ South  End,”  there  are  one  operating  and  one  reserve  canneries  and  several 
excellent  salmon  streams.  As  the  locality  was  not  visited  in  1897,  and  as  the  whole 
region  is  unsurveyed,  the  Albatross  this  season,  whilst  engaged  in  the  salmon  inves- 
tigation, made  a sextant  reconnoissance  of  a portion  of  these  waters.  The  area  is 
so  large  that  the  live  days  allotted  to  the  work  were  not  sufficient  to  cover  more  than 
the  anchorages  and  the  passages  leading  to  them.  The  results,  however,  should  be 
of  great  service  to  vessels  navigating  these  waters.  In  the  following  notes  reference 
is  made  to  the  drawing  of  the  reconnoissance  accompanying  this  report. 

Alitak  Bay  is  a large  body  of  water  on  the  southwestern  side  of  Kadiak  Island, 
about  65  miles  by  sea  from  Karluk.  The  entrance,  from  Cape  Alitak  on  the  west  to 
Cape  Trinity  on  the  east,  is  about  8 miles  wide,  and  in  its  length  of  11  miles  the 
ba}r  narrows  to  5 miles  at  the  upper  end,  where  it  terminates  in  two  wide  arms,  each 
several  miles  in  length.  The  general  direction  of  the  bay  is  NNE.  and  SSW.  The 
western  side  has  several  indentations,  with  islands,  rocks,  and  foul  ground  for  a dis- 
tance of  2 miles  off  the  middle  section.  At  the  northern  end  of  this  section,  about  11 
miles  from  Cape  Alitak,  a passage  extends  westward  around  the  upper  islands  and 
opens  upon  a broad  sheet  of  water,  named  Moser  Bay,  which,  in  a distance  of  3 miles, 
turns  to  the  northward  the  same  distance,  where  a narrow  gut  leads  to  Olga  Bay. 

In  approaching  Alitak  Bay  from  the  northward  Low  Cape  is  first  made  about  9 
miles  from  the  western  point  of  entrance.  The  former  is  a low  bluff,  and  the  shore 
line,  which  is  low  with  high  mountains  in  the  background,  extends  to  the  latter  in  a 
deep  bend,  making  to  the  northward  and  eastward. 

Cape  Alitak  is  the  terminal  point  of  an  undulating  granite  ridge,  named  Tanner 
Head,  about  -1-  miles  in  length,  the  northern  end  bordering  on  Lazy  Bay.  This  ridge 
is  a peninsula,  with  the  highest  hills  (about  600  feet)  at  the  northern  and  middle 
parts,  from  which  there  is  a gradual  roll  and  descent  to  the  pitch  of  the  cape;  this, 
at  the  extreme  point,  is  low  and  rocky.  In  approaching  from  the  westward  it  is 
seen  as  a long  point  with  rolling  hills  and  knobs  gradually  shelving  to  the  sea. 

Five  miles  to  the  northward  from  Cape  Alitak  the  western  shore  makes  out  in  a 
high  head,  named  Drake  Head,  which  separates  Lazy  Bay  from  Kempff  Bay.  Sur- 
mounting the  head  are  two  conical  peaks,  Twin  Peaks,  about  1,200  fee*  high,  which, 
in  clear  weather,  can  be  seen  a long  distance  from  seaward.  They  are  easily  recog- 
nized, and  make  an  excellent  guide  to  the  entrance. 

South  of  Drake  Head  is  Lazy  Bay,  which  may  lie  recognized  from  its  position 
with  reference  to  the  Twin  Peaks  and  Egg  Island,  the  latter  a small  rocky  islet  lying 
just  north  of  the  entrance.  From  this  bay  a narrow  arm,  named  Rodman  Reach, 
projects  to  the  southwest  inside  of  Tanner  Head  to  Cape  Alitak,  where  it  forms  a 
basin  from  which  another  narrow  arm  extends  for  some  distance  to  the  northwest, 
being  separated  from  the  sea  by  but  a narrow  strip  of  land.  Lazy  Bay  affords  good 
anchorage  and  is  very  accessible. 


222 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Kempff  Bay,  northward  of  Drake  Head,  is  about  1 4 miles  long  by  0.4  mile  wide, 
and  is  apparently  clear  of  dangers.  For  want  of  time,  no  soundings  were  made,  but 
if  upon  examination  proper  depths  are  found,  it  should  make  an  excellent  harbor. 

From  Drake  Head  to  the  passage  leading  to  Moser  Bay  are  a number  of  islands, 
rocks,  and  ledges  making  off  from  the  western  shore.  Inside  of  these  is  Akhiok, 


a native  village,  which,  in  1890,  contained  over  100  inhabitants.  The  people  here 
suffered  severely  during  the  last  winter  (1899-1900),  many  dying  with  a disease  never 
properly  diagnosed,  but  which  was  probably  grip. 

The  peninsula  separating  the  North  Arm  of  Alitak  Bay  from  Moser  Bay  is  a high 
ridge  shelving  toward  the  southern  end,  and  has  been  used  by  the  cannnery  steamers 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


223 


as  a leading  mark.  High  Rock  is  a high,  detached  rock,  easily  recognized  on 
approaching  the  passage,  with  rocks  and  submerged  reefs,  covered  in  summer  by 
kelp,  extending  nearly  two-fifths  mile  off  the  southern  and  eastern  sides. 

The  eastern  shore  of  Alitak  Bay  consists  of  high,  bold  bluffs,  terminating  in  Cape 
Trinity,  which,  from  a distance,  appears  bold,  and  on  the  continuation  of  the  general 
line  of  the  bluffs.  This  shore  was  not  closely  examined,  and,  while  no  dangers  were 
seen,  it  should  be  approached  with  caution.  Near  the  middle  of  the  bay,  10  miles 
within  the  entrance  point,  is  an  extensive  ledge  named  Middle  Reef,  covered  at  high 
water,  but  baring  over  a considerable  area  at  low  water. 

In  the  extreme  western  end  of  Moser  Bay  is  Snug  Harbor,  and  2 miles  to  the 
northward  is  Chips  Cove,  both  affording  excellent  anchorage. 

The  peninsula  formed  by  Olga  and  Alitak  bays  and  the  connecting  waters  is 
treeless.  It  is  broken  up  by  mountain  masses  rising  to  a height  of  about  2,000  feet, 
rolling’  tundra,  marshes,  and  lakes. 

The  sextant  reconnoissance  extends  only  to  the  Narrows  connecting  Moser  Bay 
with  Olga  BajG  The  plan  of  the  latter  is  from  a running  sketch  made  in  the  steam 
launch,  checked  by  a few  cuts  made  upon  mountain  peaks. 

SAILING  DIRECTIONS. 

In  entering  Alitak  Bay,  after  making  the  Twin  Peaks,  shape  the  course  to  arrive 
off  the  entrance  with  Cape  Alitak  bearing  NW.  distant  2f  miles;  then  lay  a course 
N.  by  E.  f E.,  and  run  8.4  miles.  This  should  bring  a ledge,  that  is  said  to  cover 
only  at  high  water  spring  tides,  on  the  port  beam  distant  1 mile;  then  change  course 
to  N.  i W.  bringing  High  Rock  ahead,  and  run  3 miles,  when  the  passage  to  Moser 
Bay  should  be  wide  open.  Now  follow  the  chart,  keeping  in  mid-channel,  favoring 
the  northern  shore  for  the  deepest  water,  and,  when  well  inside,  keep  in  the  middle 
of  Moser  Bay;  if  bound  for  Snug  Harbor,  open  it  fair,  steer  for  the  center,  and 
anchor  with  the  lead.  Do  not  approach  the  head  too  closely,  as  the  flats  make  off 
some  distance  from  the  reserve  cannery  building.  If  bound  for  Chips  Cove,  keep  in 
mid-channel  and  anchor  by  the  lead.  The  only  danger  known  in  Moser  Bay  is  a shoal, 
or  reef,  lying  1 mile  to  the  eastward  of  Point  Fassett  and  one-fourth  mile  off'  shore, 
and  a spit  making  off  a short  distance  from  the  middle  point  of  the  southern  shore. 


Cape  Alitak,  bearing  SW.  \ W.,  mag.,  distant  4J  miles. 


The  bottom,  in  the  passage,  is  much  broken;  immediately  inside  3£  fathoms 
were  found  in  mid-channel  at  low  water.  It  should  be  remembered  that  the  work  of 
the  Albatross  was  only  a sextant  reconnoissance  and  not  a detailed  survey,  so  that 
every  precaution  should  be  observed  in  entering.  It  may  be  remarked  here  that  the 
dangers  are  usually  marked  by  kelp  in  summer,  but  this  is  not  always  the  case. 

Lazy  Bay. — The  Twin  Peaks  and  Egg  Island  are  the  guides  to  Lazy  Bay.  No 
hidden  dangers  were  found.  With  the  bay  wide  open  enter  in  mid-channel  on  a 
west  course,  and  anchor  at  discretion. 


224 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Time  did  not  permit  sounding  inside  of  Rodman  Reach,  but  from  all  appearances 
it  may  be  entered  far  enough  to  obtain  shelter  from  all  winds.  The  first  projecting 
point  has  a spit  extending  from  it. 

It  is  said  that  a 5-fathom  ridge,  or  bar,  extends  from  Cape  Alitak  to  Cape  Trinity, 
and  that  kelp  has  been  seen  in  places  on  it.  The  Albatross  on  entering  encountered 
the  shoal  soundings  at  this  point,  and  also  on  leaving,  as  shown  on  the  chart.  The 
shoals  off  the  southwest  end  of  Tugidak  Island  are  said  to  run  in  ridffes. 

The  Narrows. — About  1 mile  to  the  northward  of  Chips  Cove  is  the  southern 
entrance  to  the  Narrows  which  lead  to  Olga  Ba}r.  The}^  are  about  1 mile  in  length 
and  in  the  narrowest  part  about  300  feet  in  width.  The  channel  is  tortuous  with 
many  rocks,  some  of  which  uncover  at  low  water,  and  others  which  are  only  apparent 
by  the  heavy  swirls  over  them  when  the  current  is  running  full.  The  small  cannery 
steamers  use  the  Narrows,  but  local  knowledge  is  necessary  and  a large  vessel  should 
not  attempt  the  passage.  With  the  current  running  full  the  cannery  steamers  wait 
for  slack  water,  which  occurs  two  hours  after  high  and  low  water  at  Snug  Harbor. 
The  current  at  its  greatest  velocity  probably  reaches  8 knots.  It  is  said  that 
3i  fathoms  can  be  carried  through  the  channel  at  low  water,  but  this  statement  should 
be  received  with  caution. 

Observations  with  sextant  and  artificial  horizon  for  geographical  position  were 
obtained  at  the  northern  entrance  to  Snug  Harbor,  which  gave  latitude  56°  59'  26"  | 

north,  longitude  154°  12'  22"  west.  Variation  by  compass  declinometer  29°  17'  east. 
Establishment  from  8 successive  high  waters,  at  moon’s  age  from  five  to  nine  days: 
XIh  38m.  Mean  rise  and  fall  of  tide  during  same  period,  6.71  feet. 

Olga  Bay  is  an  irregular-shaped  body  of  water  lying  in  a general  east-and-west  • 
direction,  rather  crescentic  in  form,  with  the  cusps  to  the  southward;  it  is  from 
17  to  18  miles  in  length,  with  a width  of  from  one-half  mile  to  2 miles.  The  western 
end  is  the  largest  and  is  separated  from  the  sea  about  6 miles  to  the  northward  of 
Low  Cape  by  a strip  of  low  land  only  three-fourths  of  a mile  wide.  The  bay  has  the 
appearance  of  a lake,  and  having  such  a narrow  passage  to  the  sea  the  tidal  influence 
is  not  very  great,  the  rise  and  fall  varying  from  1 to  2 feet  at  the  cannery. 

OLGA  BAY  CANNERIES. 

The  only  operating  cannery  in  this  section  is  located  on  the  northern  shore  of 
Olga  Bay,  about  10  miles  from  the  northern  end  of  the  Narrows.  The  history  was 
given  from  incomplete  data  in  my  report  of  1897,  but  as  some  additional  information 
has  become  available,  it  is  rewritten  here. 

Arctic  Packing  Company. — In  1889  this  company  built  a cannery  in  the  south- 
western end  of  Olga  Bay,  at  the  mouth  of  a small  stream  on  the  eastern  shore  known 
as  the  South  Olga  Fishing  Station.  The  cannery  was  not  well  equipped,  and  the 
capacity  was  only  from  250  to  300  cases  per  day.  As  the  location  was  not  favorable 
it  was  moved  the  following  year  across  the  bay  to  a point  S miles  to  the  northward, 
on  the  right  bank  and  near  the  mouth  of  a small  stream  known  as  the  North  Olga 
Fishing  Station,  which  is  its  present  position.  The  change  of  location  was  very 
satisfactory,  and  the  cannery  was  much  improved  in  equipment,  buildings,  etc. 

In  1891,  under  an  agreement  with  the  Kodiak  Packing  Company,  in  the  same 
locality,  the  cannery  of  the  latter  was  closed  and  its  quota  of  fish  was  packed  in  the 
Arctic  cannery.  In  1892  it  was  in  the  pool  formed  by  the  Alaska  Packing  Association, 


Plate  A. 


Scale,  of  Mil g. 6 . 


C'ajje.  Hejahurn 


> 


U 


Middle  Reef 


Cov\6hvc\ions  lla.cK 
*Mqi\oIvI\\ 


d 14^  6 


3 \»olA 
cliff* 


Cajie  Trlixl*^ 


1 i .atv" 

SNUG  HAIiBOR 
LAZY  BAY 

IS3Li-A.TSm> 


From  a Sextant  Reconnaissance/ 
hy  *tkc  Officers  of  tke 
U.  S- Fisk  Com.  £>ti:  "ALBATROSS" 
i‘v  August  1900 
vnvcler  tke  direction,  of 

Comdr.  Jeff 'ii  F Moser  IJ.  S. N.  t CoituLg. 


tyO.OOO. 

So-undin^s  are  expressed  in  fathoms.  reduced  to  the 
mearx  of  all  low-waters  obaerv/ed. 

Aslr«.«!caiat-*^iL-*-  S6'  59'  *6' 

[Lo.v^.  1ST  lZ'  W w. 

Yari  o.t  Loiv  Z 9°  16‘  El’l^y,  by  Compass  Jbeclinometev. 


Trial**- til  aition.  Point  , 
Aitr«it«M*i.a.L  StibtUtb. 


' 

!/■ 


t h* oir  i*iA 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIG  ATIONS  IN  1900. 


225 


and  in  1893  it  entered  the  Alaska  Packers  Association.  It  has  been  operated  every 
year  since  its  construction,  and  now  has  a running-  capacity  of  1,000  cases  per  day. 

This  cannery,  also  known  as  the  “Olga  Bay”  and  the  “South  End,”  is  well 
arranged  and  more  than  usually  clean.  The  cannery  machinery  consists  of  5 retorts, 
1 filler,  1 topper,  1 solderer,  and  1 cutter,  with  1 filler  and  1 topper  in  reserve.  It 
has  a complete  can-making  outfit,  and  it  is  claimed  that  900  cases  of  cans  have  been 
made  in  one  day,  but  700  cases  would  be  a better  average.  The  plant  has  been  suc- 
cessfully operated  bv  running  all  the  machinery  together,  salting  the  cans  at  once  at 
the  can-makers,  and  conveying  them  to  the  filler.  In  this  way,  when  the  machinery 
runs  well,  700  cases  can  be  turned  out  daily.  The  successful  operation  of  this  plant 


Pot  - 

40  by  90  feet 


Lead. 


bOO  feet. 


Opening  - 30  feet. 

Corral  - 

40  by  bo  feet 


Win<2  - 
450  feet. 


Sketch  plan  of  floating  trap  set  out  on  north  shore  of  Cannery  Cove,  Olga  Bay, 
Alitak,  Kadiak  Island. 


is  due  to  the  superintendent,  Mr.  William  Munn,  who  is  an  expert 
machinist  and  has  invented  several  cannery  machines. 

As  there  is  very  little  rise  and  fall  of  tide,  the  fish-house  is 
on  the  end  of  a wharf,  alongside  which  there  are  always  2 fath- 
oms of  water.  Here  the  fish  are  pewed  directly  from  the  boats 
and  steamers  into  the  bins,  and  after  cleaning  are  slid  over  the 
draining  table  directly  to  the  cutter. 

Cannery  fillers  are  run  at  the  rate  of  55  to  60  per  minute  at 
this  cannery;  during  a heavy  run  they  are  speeded  to  70,  and  500 
cases  have  been  run  through  at  80  per  minute.  This  high  rate  requires  a thorough 
knowledge  of  the  machinery  and  delicate  adjustment,  and  it  is  doubted  if  the  cans  at 
a much  higher  rate  than  60  can  be  successfully  handled  at  the  filling  table  for  any 


great  length  of  time. 

The  tin  plate  used  was  100-pound  for  bodies  and  95-pound  for  tops,  all  imported. 
One  pound  of  solder  was  used  per  case  for  hand-made  cans  and  three-fourths  of  a 
pound  for  the  machine-made.  In  salting  the  cans  one-sixth  ounce  of  fine  granulated 
salt  was  used  per  can,  or  one-half  pound  per  case. 

Occasionally,  when  the  run  is  large,  a little  incidental  salting  is  done. 

The  Chinese  contract  was  the  same  as  at  Chignik.  The  fishermen  received  $50 
each  for  working  the  ship  to  and  from  the  cannery,  discharging  and  loading,  and  8 
mills  per  case  for  each  man,  with  full  board,  except  the  Italians,  who  messed  them- 
selves and  received  35  cents  each  per  day  for  rations. 

F.  0.  B.  1901—15 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


226 


Transportation  is  by  company’s  vessels,  which  are  moored  in  Chips  Cove. 

At  the  time  of  our  visit  the  superintendent  was  experimenting  with  a machine  of 
his  own  invention  for  cleaning  fish,  which,  it  is  learned,  has  since  proven  successful, 
and  a large  number  have  been  ordered  for  the  1901  season.  If  this  machine  is  placed 
in  successful  operation,  it  will  not  only  save  much  labor  but  will  afford  a great  relief 
in  the  fish-house,  which  is  usually  much  crowded  and  overworked  during  a heavy  run. 

In  1900  the  Arctic  cannery  employed  10  white  fishermen,  9 white  cannery-hands, 

10  natives,  arid  59  Chinese.  It  used  six  seines,  having  a total  length  of  1,200  fathoms, 
each  from  100  to  350  fathoms  long,  100  to  130  meshes  deep,  3-inch  mesh,  all  hung 
straight,  valued  at  $1.50  per  fathom.  It  had  also  3 bales  of  spare  web,  and  material 
on  hand  to  make  a 100-fathom  purse  seine  if  required. 

A floating  trap  had  also  been  constructed  by  the  Italian  fishermen.  It  was  first 
used  in  1899,  when  it  took  about  one-half  the  pack,  while  in  1900  it  only  took  about 
50,000  fish.  This  trap  was  located  about  one-half  mile  from  the  cannery  and  a short 
distance  east  from  the  mouth  of  the  home  stream.  It  had  a shore  lead  of  100  fathoms, 
a corral  10  feet  by  60  feet,  pot  10  feet  by  90  feet,  curved  wing  75  fathoms,  and  a 
30-foot  opening.  There  were  used  in  its  construction  300  keg  floats,  several  thousand 
cork  seine  floats,  50  anchors  from  200  to  100  pounds  each,  3-inch  cork  line,  3^-inch 
anchor  line.  If  to  2f  inch  pursing  line.  The  web  was  3-inch  mesh,  of  from  15  to  15  ! 

threads,  disposed  according  to  strain.  This  trap  was  valued  at  $2,500. 

The  following  boats  were  used:  Two  fish  lighters,  $250  each;  1 cargo  lighter, 
$500;  6 seine  boats,  $60  each;  2 fish  scows,  $100  each;  1 otter  boat,  $100;  18  dories, 
$30  each;  3 skiffs,  $15  each;  1 hand  pile-driver,  $100. 

The  following  vessels  (owned  by  the  cannery)  were  employed: 


Class  and  name. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

Steamer  Hattie  Gage 

42 

5 

$17. 000 

Launch  Aurora 

5 

2 

2, 500 

Bark  Electra . 

939 

(b 

15, 000 

1 Fishermen. 


The  salmon  pack  in  1900  consisted  of  32,312  cases  of  redfish,  13.5  to  the  case, 
packed  June  8 to  August  13.  No  other  fish  were  packed  and  none  salted. 

Kodiak  Packing  Company. — In  1889  a company,  organized  under  this  title,  sent 
a cannery  outfit  to  this  district  on  the  bark  Lizzie  Williams , which  was  wrecked 
in  April  on  Tugidak  Island  and  became  a total  loss.  The  superintendent  returned  at 
once  to  San  Francisco,  obtained  another  outfit,  and  erected  a cannery  at  the  head 
of  Snug  Harbor.  It  was  operated  in  1889  and  1890,  and  in  1891  its  quota  of  fish, 
under  previous  arrangement,  was  packed  in  the  cannery  of  the  Arctic  company. 
It  entered  the  pool  formed  by  the  Alaska  Packing  Association  in  1892,  and  in  1893 
became  a member  of  the  Alaska  Packers  Association.  Most  of  the  machinery  has 
been  removed,  but  the  buildings  are  substantial,  in  excellent  repair,  and  the  cannery 
could  be  placed  in  operating  condition  in  a short  time  by  installing  machinerv.  It 
may  be  said  to  be  in  reserve.  It  is  locally  known  as  the  “ Snug  Harbor”  or  “ Oliver 
Smith”  cannery,  and,  when  operated,  it  obtained  fish  from  the  same  streams  as 
those  now  fished  by  the  Arctic  Company. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


227 


OLGA  BAY  STREAMS. 

The  streams  fished  by  the  Arctic  Packing  Company  are  all  situated  on  Olga  Bay, 
except  one  on  the  outside  coast,  which,  however,  is  only  resorted  to  at  rare  inter- 
vals. There  are  three  streams  which  run  redfish:  The  North  Olga,  or  home  stream, 
where  the  cannery  is  now  located;  the  South  Olga  stream,  the  original  site  of  the 
cannery;  and  Silver  Salmon  Bay  stream,  in  the  extreme  western  end  of  the  bay. 
The  latter  runs  very  few  redfish  and  can  not  be  depended  upon,  but,  with  another 
smaller  stream  that  empties  into  a cove  west  of  the  northern  end  of  the  Narrows,  it 
has  a small  run  of  cohoes.  This  species  may  be  found  in  other  streams,  but  they  run 
after  the  cannery  closes.  Humpbacks  and  dog  salmon  are  found  in  all  the  streams, 
but,  as  the  cannery  only  seeks  redfish,  little  is  known  of  the  abundance  of  other 


Free-hand  sketch  of  Olga  Bay  and  vicinity,  Alitak,  Kadiak  Island,  showing  locations  of 
lakes  and  streams  and  the  species  of  salmon  found. 


species.  The  Horse  Marine  stream  formerly  carried  a few  redfish,  but  its  entrance 
has  become  grassy  and  they  have  ceased  entering.  The  redfish  school  around  the 
shores  of  the  bay,  usually  near  the  streams;  they  may  appear  in  one  place  in  large 
numbers  and  a few  hours  later  be  miles  away.  Their  movements  here  seem  to 
depend  upon  the  state  of  the  weather  and  the  direction  of  the  wind  and  sea. 

The  Olga  Bay  streams  were  examined  by  Mr.  Fassett,  and  from  his  notes  the 
following  account  is  condensed. 

North  Olga , or  Home  Stream , empties  into  the  bay  just  east  of  the  cannery. 
It  is  about  li  miles  in  length  and  flows  in  a general  south-southeasterly  direction 
from  the  lake  which  is  its  source.  The  stream  bed  winds  through  low  rolling  hills 


228 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


covered  with  a rank  growth  of  coarse  grass  and  shrubs.  In  places  it  broadens  out 
into  small  grassy  flats  with  low  banks  of  earth  and  stones;  again,  the  banks  are  high, 
steep,  and  grassy,  with  rocky  ledges  outcropping  in  places.  The  bed  is  chiefly  of 
shingle  and  gravel,  with  some  sand  in  the  wider  parts;  at  the  rapids  and  riffles  there 
are  bare  rocky  ledges,  small  bowlders,  and  heavy  stones.  There  are  no  falls  in  the 
stream,  but  several  short  rapids,  none  of  which,  however,  would  prevent  even  a 
humpback  salmon  from  easily  ascending.  The  fall  from  the  lake  to  high-water  mark 
of  the  bay  is  about  40  feet.  At  the  lake  the  outlet  is  about  18  feet  wide  with  an 
average  depth  of  l£  feet,  and  the  current  sluggish,  less  than  1 knot  per  hour. 


Free-hand  sketch  of  North  Olga  stream  and  lake,  Olga  Bay,  Alitak,  Kadiak  Island. 


About  half  a mile  from  the  lake  the  stream  receives  a small  tributary  known 
locally  as  Babbling  Brook,  which  drains  the  rolling  hills  to  the  eastward.  There  are 
also  several  tiny  rills  carrying  seepage  from  the  surrounding  hills  into  the  stream, 
but  their  total  volume  is  inconsiderable.  At  the  beach  the  discharge  of  the  stream 
is  about  12  feet  wide,  average  depth  2 feet,  and  current  about  1|  knots  per  hour.  A 
short  distance  from  the  beach  of  Olga  Bay  the  stream  widens  into  a small  lagoon- 
like  basin,  into  which  the  tide  water  backs  through  a narrow  channel.  Apparently 
this  channel  shifts  from  time  to  time  with  the  changing  of  the  shingle  after  heavy 
southerly  gales;  at  present  the  outlet  bends  sharply  to  the  eastward  and  runs  parallel 
to  the  beach,  separated  from  it  by  a ridge  of  shingle  a few  feet  wide,  and  100  yards 
distant  discharges  into  the  bay.  The  lagoon,  so  called,  is  about  160  yards  long  and 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


229 

half  as  wide;  the  land  about  it  is  low  and  fairly  flat,  and  covered  with  a dense  growth 
of  raspberry  bushes,  shrubs,  and  coarse  grass.  Tide  water  backs  into  the  lagoon. 

The  water  of  the  stream  is  slightly  discolored  by  the  vegetation,  and  does  not 
seem  to  be  very  pure.  But  few  dead  salmon  were  noticed  on  the  banks,  or  about  the 
lake  outlet;  nor  were  more  than  half  a dozen  redfish  seen  to  pass  into  the  lake  during 
a period  of  over  an  hour.  Young  salmon,  from  L-,j  to  3 and  4 inches  in  length,  were 
seen  in  numbers,  however,  in  the  upper  part  of  the  stream  close  to  the  lake,  and  a 
few  were  noticed  in  the  lower  part  of  the  stream  in  the  straight  runs,  hugging  close 
to  the  undercut  banks.  Many  flounders  and  sculpins  were  seen  in  the  lagoon,  and 
they,  with  the  Dolly  Vardens  and  cut-throats,  were  gorging  themselves  with  the  eggs 
of  the  humpbacks,  which  latter  were  spawning  at  the  time. 

Above  the  lagoon,  in  every  broad  pool  or  pond-like  widening,  mallard  ducks  with 
young  were  found  feeding,  but  upon  what  could  not  be  learned.  The  lake  could  not 
be  examined  for  lack  of  time  and  facilities.  The  sketch  of  the  lake  was  made  from 
the  vicinity  of  the  outlet,  and  can  be  regarded  merely  as  a crude  approximation. 

The  lake  is  said  to  be  about  3 miles  long,  east-northeast  and  west-southwest,  and 
is  about  lh  miles  across  from  the  outlet  to  the  Ayakulik  Portage.  It  appears,  and  is 
reported  to  be,  deep,  with  generally  bold  shores,  dropping  quickly  into  deep  water. 
The  beaches  near  the  outlet  are  very  narrow,  of  water-worn  bowlders  and  rubble, 
with  here  and  there  small  patches  of  sand  and  shingle.  On  the  north  the  hills  rise 
quickly  to  a considerable  height,  and  the  same  is  true  of  the  west  end;  an  interme- 
diate point  to  the  northeast  of  the  outlet,  which  juts  into  and  divides  the  lake  into 
two  main  bodies,  rises  to  the  southward  in  an  even  gentle  slope,  also  to  a good  height. 
Northwest  of  the  outlet  is  a low  valley  making  back  from  a small  inlet,  and  through 
it  a small  portage  leads  to  the  waters  of  a lake  draining  into  the  Ayakulik  River. 
The  shores  are  everywhere  covered  with  the  same  rank,  dense  growth  of  shrubs  and 
grasses,  and  on  the  hillsides  are  extensive  patches  of  scrub  alders  and  cottonwoods. 

Seepage  enters  the  lake  from  every  little  ravine  in  the  hills,  and  there  are 
reported  to  be  feeders,  as  indicated  on  the  sketch,  none  of  which,  however,  were 
examined.  The  large  stream  that  enters  the  head  of  the  eastern  arm  through  a 
broad  valley  was  carefully  examined  some  months  ago  for  a hatchery  site,  and  it  is 
reported  that  the  conditions  here  are  all  that  could  be  desired;  there  are  broad 
spawning-grounds,  excellent  natural  facilities  for  taking  ripe  fish  and  for  holding 
them  if  necessary,  ample  level  area  for  extensive  nursery  ponds  and  for  building 
purposes,  and  a splendid  supply  of  excellent  water  by  gravity;  the  chief  objections 
would  be  the  cost  of  transporting  material  and  supplies,  and  the  isolation. 

The  Babbling  Brook  was  also  examined  and  found  suitable  for  hatchery  pur- 
poses. Where  the  brook  joins  the  main  stream  there  is  a broad  widening  forming 
a good-sized  pond  in  which  retaining  and  ripening  corrals  could  readily  be  fenced 
off,  and  where  fry  could  be  looked  after  in  the  spring  until  large  and  strong  enough 
to  beset  free.  The  low  ground  in  this  little  pocket  in  the  hills  is  ample  for  building 
purposes,  and  the  buildings  would  be  well  protected  from  the  free  sweep  of  the 
winter  gales.  The  water  from  Babbling  Brook  is  very  clear  and  pure,  would  require 
but  little  filtering,  and  is  said  never  to  freeze.  There  is  the  added  advantage  of  its 
accessibility,  twenty  minutes  by  trail  taking  one  to  the  cannery.  The  waters  of  the 


230 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


brook  would  furnish  an  ample  supply  for  a plant  of  large  capacity;  any  other  water 
required  could  be  obtained  from  the  stream  or  from  the  lake  by  gravity;  the  bed  of 
the  brook  at  this  point  is  about  18  feet  below  the  normal  level  of  the  lake. 

South  Olga  Stream  is  the  outlet  of  the  lower  of  a chain  of  lakes  lying  in  a broad 
low  valley  eastward  of  the  southern  end  of  Olga  Bay.  It  Hows  for  about  three- 
fourths  of  a mile  in  a general  west  by  south  direction,  winding  through  a ravine  in 
the  tundra-covered  mesa  to  the  bay  shore,  then  turns  sharply  to  the  southward  par- 
allel to  the  beach,  back  of  a bare  narrow  shingle  barrier,  and  a quarter  of  a mile 
distant  enters  the  bay.  The  outlet  at  the  lake  is  about  30  feet  wide,  12  to  14  inches 


Free-hand  sketch  of  South  Olga  stream  and  lakes,  Olga  Bay,  Alitak,  Kadiak  Island. 


deep,  with  a current  of  less  than  a knot  an  hour.  The  bed  of  the  stream  is  broad, 
full  of  small  bowlders  and  rocky  outcrops  in  its  upper  third,  generally  of  gravel  and 
shingle,  and  quite  gradual  in  descent;  the  fall  between  lake  and  exit  being  not  more 
than  12  or  15  feet,  salmon  would  not  have  the  least  difficulty  in  ascending,  as  the  few 
rapids  in  the  upper  course  are  low  and  insignificant.  About  400  yards  before  it 
reaches  the  beach  the  stream  broadens  out  into  a lagoon  like  pond  100  yards  wide, 
with  a sluggish  current  and  marshy  banks.  This  is  a favorite  breeding-place  for 
mallard  and  teal  ducks.  At  one  time,  apparently,  the  exit  was  at  the  western  end 
of  the  lagoon,  but  the  shingle  bank,  thrown  up  by  some  heavy  westerly  gale,  has 


ZAPOR  IN  STREAM  ENTERING  LITNIK  BAY,  AFOGNAK  ISLAND 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  TN  1900. 


231 


driven  it  to  the  southward  as  described;  th<  present  fishing  station  is  located  on  the 
beach  at  the  exit.  Considerable  of  the  volume  of  the  stream  must  seep  out  through 
the  shingle,  for  at  its  visible  exit  it  has  shrunk  to  barely  10  feet  in  width,  10  or  12 
inches  in  depth,  with  a velocity  of  11  knots  an  hour.  In  the  lagoon  the  bottom  is  of 
sand  and  shingle.  The  banks  of  the  stream,  except  the  lagoon,  are  steep  inclines 
covered  with  a dense  growth  of  rank  grasses  and  moss.  Tide  water  rarely  backs  up 
into  the  lagoon;  during  heavy  westerly  storms  the  seas  break  over  the  shingle  barrier. 
The  water  is  rather  discolored,  this  being  particularly  noticeable  below  the  lagoon. 

Red  salmon  were  running  in  numbers  up  the  stream  at  the  time  of  our  visit, 
though  very  few  were  observed  entering  the  lake  during  the  short  time  spent  at  the 
outlet.  Large  schools  were  seen  in  the  lagoon,  and  it  is  possible  that  the  fish  school 
there  before  finally  ascending  to  the  lake.  No  dog  salmon  or  humpbacks  were 
noticed,  though  both  species  are  said  to  run  at  times.  The  course  of  the  stream  was 
followed  from  the  lake  outlet  to  the  exit,  except  a short  distance  above  the.  lagoon, 
and  it  is  not  believed  there  were  any  barricades  at  that  time;  no  signs  or  indications 
of  them  were  discovered,  and  no  well-worn  trails  were  seen  anywhere  beyond  the 
lagoon.  It  is  not  believed,  therefore,  that  salmon  have  this  season  been  taken  in  any 
other  than  the  salt  water  of  the  bay.  The  entrance  of  fish  could  be  stopped  in  a 
moment  by  merely  laying  a small  piece  of  web  across  the  beach  at  the  stream  exit, 
and  probably  this  has  been  done  when  fish  were  scarce.  Immense  numbers  were 
jumping  about  the  bay  in  all  directions  on  the  afternoon  of  August  2,  but  no  fishing 
was  going  on,  as  the  crew  stationed  there  had  already  taken  their  daily  quota. 

For  want  of  proper  facilities  the  lake  could  only  be  examined  from  a point  near 
the  outlet.  Its  axis  is  about  east  by  north  and  west  by  south  (magnetic),  a mile  in 
greatest  length,  by  three-fourths  of  a mile  average  width.  The  shores  are  grassy  on 
all  sides,  and  the  beaches  of  gravel,  sand,  and  shingle,  with  rocky  ledges  and  outcrops 
in  places,  shelve  gently  into  deeper  water.  The  lake  did  not  have  the  appearance  of 
more  than  moderate  depth.  The  other  lakes  shown  on  the  sketch  were  not  seen  bv  the 
party  at  this  time,  but  had  been  previously  sketched  from  the  mountains  northwest  of 
Snug  Harbor.  Very  few  dead  salmon  were  seen  along  the  banks  of  the  stream,  and 
none  on  the  beaches  of  the  lakes.  No  entering  streams  or  feeders  were  to  lie  seen. 

It  did  not  appear  that  the  locality  is  well  suited  for  hatchery  purposes;  the  lake 
water  is  far  from  pure  and  would  require  careful  filtering,  and  a supply,  as  far  as 
could  be  seen,  is  only  to  be  had  by  pumping. 

Horse  Marine  Lagoon , at  the  eastern  end  of  the  eastern  arm  of  Olga  Bay,  is  sepa- 
rated from  the  latter  by  a narrow  grass-covered  shingle  spit.  The  spit  extends  north 
from  the  southern  shore  of  the  bay,  leaving  a narrow  opening,  the  exit  of  the  lagoon, 
between  its  northern  end  and  the  opposite  shore.  The  lagoon  is  about  five-eighths 
mile  in  length,  east-northeast  and  west-southwest  (magnetic),  in  the  general  direction 
of  the  short  valley  into  which  it  makes;  the  width  is  about  one-third  its  length.  It 
is  shallow,  with  bottom  of  sand,  gravel,  shells,  and  shingle,  and  is  badly  choked  by 
a thick  matted  growth  of  coarse  eelgrass;  the  shores  are  indented  with  several  small 
sloughs  and  coves.  The  banks  were  everywhere  covered  (August  2)  with  a dense 
growth  of  coarse  grasses  and  rank  weeds,  wild  flowers,  and  berry  shrubs.  The  small 
tides  of  the  outer  bay  are  felt  to  the  head  of  the  lagoon,  but  to  no  great  extent;  very 


232 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATED  FISH  COMMISSION. 


little  of  the  lagoon  bares  at  ordinary  low  water.  The  water  is  brackish  and  slightly 
warmer  than  the  bay;  no  temperature  observations,  however,  were  made.  Many 
humpbacks  and  a few  dog  salmon  were  seen  schooling  just  inside  the  entrance,  while 
Dolly  Varden  trout  of  large  size,  starry  flounders,  and  sculpins  were  seen  in  great 
numbers.  A few  humpbacks  were  spawning  in  the  lower  part  of  the  lagoon  and  in 
the  slough  on  the  northern  side. 

A mile  from  the  northeastern -end  of  the  lagoon,  at  the  head  of  the  valley,  is  a 
deep  fresh-water  lake.  This  is  an  irregular  basin  about  1£  miles  in  greatest  length  by 
less  than  half  a mile  average  width,  the  major  axis  lying  northwest  by  north  and 
southeast  by  east  (magnetic).  It  is  surrounded  by  hills  on  all  sides  except  at  the 
valley  through  which  it  drains.  It  was  not  practicable  to  examine  the  lake  at  this 


time.  No  entering  streams  Avere  to  be  seen  from  the  outlet,  though  three  or  four 
valleys  in  the  distance  probably  carry  small  feeders,  where  there  are  doubtless  good 
spawning-beds.  It  is  not  doubted  that  there  is  a suitable  location  for  a hatchery 
somewhere  on  this  lake,  as  the  indications  point  to  a good  supply  of  water  by  gravity 
from  the  surrounding  hills.  The  lake  is  drained  by  a shallow  stream  which  follows 
a winding  course  for  II  miles  through  the  valley  and  enters  the  head  of  the  lagoon. 
The  floor  of  the  valley  is  undulating,  covered  ivith  grasses,  moss,  wild  flowers,  and 
scrub  in  its  greater  part,  Avith  some  fair-sized  alders,  willows,  and  spruce  trees  on 
the  northern  side.  The  stream  flows  Avith  a velocity  of  about  II  to  2 knots  an  hour 
above  the  rapids  near  the  lagoon,  where  it  is  about  30  feet  wide  by  8 inches  average 
depth.  Above' the  cascade,  in  the  upper  part,  the  stream  is  broad  Avith  line  gravel 


\ 


Free-hand  sketch  of  Horse  Marine  lagoon,  stream,  and  lake,  Olga  Bay. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


233 


bottom,  sluggish  current,  and  grasses  growing  in  the  water  along  the  shores.  Else- 
where the  bed  of  the  stream  is  rocky  with  some  gravel  and  shingle  in  places.  It  is 
full  of  low  riffles  and  a few  short  rapids,  besides  the  cascade  and  rapids  indicated  on 
the  sketch,  and  the  total  fall  from  lake  to  lagoon  is  about  45  feet. 

There  are  no  artificial  obstructions  in  the  stream,  which  was  followed  its  entire 
length,  and  no  natural  ones  to  prevent  the  ascent  of  the  more  vigorous  species  of 
salmon  or  trout.  Humpbacks  would  probably  find  difficulty  in  passing  the  cascade, 
and  a number  of  them  were  seen  in  the  pools  below  it.  Many  small  fry,  2 to  4 
inches  in  length,  probably  young  salmon,  were  seen  in  the  upper  reaches  of  the 
stream  above  the  cascade  and  in  the  lake  in  the  vicinity  of  the  outlet. 

The  Horse  Marine  stream  is  referred  to  in  Dr.  Bean’s  report  on  the  salmon  and 
salmon  rivers  of  Alaska,  page  183,  as  the  North  Fishing  Station,  and  the  same  name 
is  used  by  Captain  Larsen  on  his  sketch  map.  The  report  gives  a brief  description 
of  the  location  as  seen  on  September  9.  This  stream  was  formerly  good  for  several 
thousand  red  fish,  but  since  the  eelgrass  grew  up  and  filled  the  lagoon  this  species  has 
abandoned  it.  About  five  or  six  years  ago  1,500  red  fish  were  taken  from  the  Horse 
Marine,  but  during  the  last  three  years  not  a single  redfish  has  been  secured. 

In  Olga  Bay  the  redfish  run  early.  Fishing  commences  June  7 to  9,  though 
they  are  not  numerous  during  June;  still  the  cannery  expects  to  pack  5,000  cases  by 
July  4,  when  the  big  run  sets  in  and  continues  until  the  first  week  in  August.  They 
then  begin  to  slacken  and  by  the  end  of  the  month  are  not  numerous  enough  to  fish 
for.  During  this  season  (1900)  the  run  was  heavy  and  a much  larger  pack  could  have 
been  made  had  there  been  more  material  on  hand.  In  1896  the  run  of  redfish  was 
small,  but  there  were  a large  number  of  grilse,  and  it  is  said  they  were  all  males  with 
the  generative  organs  fully  developed.  One  hundred  and  ninety-five  cases  of  these 
were  packed;  the  flesh  was  very  red,  firm,  of  fine  flavor,  but  more  juicy  than  full- 
grown  salmon,  and  their  weight  averaged  about  1 pound  each.  It  is  estimated  that 
the  following  redfish  were  taken  from  Olga  Bay  during  the  last  three  years:  In  1898, 
430,000;  in  1899,  400,000,  and  in  1900,  420,000.  The  Arctic  cannery  utilized  all  these 
fish  except  in  1898,  when  the  two  canneries  at  Uyak  fished  here,  and  together  took 
about  50,000,  and  Karlulc  received  about  10,000;  and  in  1899  the  Uyak  canneries 
received  about  15,000.  No  stream  tallies  are  kept,  but  the  average  value  of  400,000 
redfish  for  the  section  is  probably  a fair  estimate,  of  which  100,000  are  taken  in  the 
vicinity  of  North  Olga  stream,  200,000  in  the  vicinity  of  the  South  Olga  stream,  and 
100,000  in  Silver  Salmon  Bay  and  scattering. 

The  cannery  also  receives  a few  fish  from  other  places.  In  1898,  60,000  redfish 
were  taken  at  Ayakulik,  and  35,000  were  received  from  Chignik.  In  1900  they 
received  25,000  from  Ayakulik  taken  by  Karluk  fishermen. 

Cohoes  do  not  seem  to  be  abundant;  they  first  appear  July  15  to  20,  and  straggle 
in  small  numbers  until  after  the  cannery  closes.  They  are  not  packed  at  this  cannery 
unless  the  redfish  run  is  very  slack,  and  then  only  to  make  up  the  guaranty. 

King  salmon  occur  as  occasional  stragglers  and  are  rare  visitors.  Humpbacks 
and  dog  salmon  are  waste  species  here,  and  are  used  only  by  the  natives  for  ukala. 
The  former  are  noticed  early  in  July  and  run  throughout  the  season;  the  latter  are 
seen  soon  after  the  redfish  appear,  and  straggle  throughout  the  season.  There  is 
no  run  of  steelheads;  a few  individuals  are  taken  at  times  and  used  by  the  cannery 


234 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


hands.  Dolly  Varden  trout  appear  a few  days  before  the  redfish  and  remain  through- 
out the  season.  Cut-throat  and  rainbow  trout  are  seen  in  the  streams,  but  none  have 
been  noticed  in  salt  water.  Cod  and  halibut  are  seen  in  small  numbers  around  the 
fisheries,  and  in  greater  numbers  around  the  canneries,  where  they  are  attracted  by 
the  offal.  Flounders  are  plentiful;  shad  have  never  been  seen  here. 


Sketch  showing  changes  in  exit  of  Ayakulik  River 
1897  to  1900. 


ide  of  Kadiak  Island,  and  empties  into  the 
s,  to  the  eastward  of  Ayakulik 
Islet.  It  is  small,  but  discharges 
a large  body  of  water.  Among 
cannerymen  it  is  known  as  Red 
River,  but  this  name  should  not 
be  confounded  with  the  Red  River 
which  lies  6 miles  to  the  north- 
ward according  to  Coast  Survey 
chart  No.  8500. 

The  locality  has  I >een  fished  by 
the  canneries  on  Kadiak  Island  for 
many  years,  but  it  has  not  been  a 
favorite  place,  as  the  seining  must 
be  done  on  the  open  coast  and  can 
only  be  carried  on  during  very 
favorable  conditions.  The  seines 
are  hauled  in  the  surf  and  the  fish 
thrown  out  on  the  sandy  beach, 
then  transported  in  carriers  to 
boats  in  the  river  and  carried  to 
the  waiting  steamers  outside. 
These  fish  are  covered  with  sand 
and  difficult  to  thoroughly  cleanse 
on  that  account. 

The  following  information 
relating  to  the  river  was  fur- 
nished by  the  superintendent  of 
the  Olga  Bay  cannery:  In  1897 
and  for  several  years  prior  to 
that  time  the  stream,  after  leav- 
ing the  ravine  in  the  bluffs, 


turned  sharply  to  the  southward 
and  skirted  the  line  of  bluffs  for  Id  miles,  behind  a broad  spit  of  sand  and  shingle, 
before  entering  the  sea.  In  1898  the  channel  broke  across  the  spit  about  halfway 
between  the  1897  exit  and  the  river  mouth  proper.  In  1899  it  ran  straight  out  over 
the  shingle  to  sea.  This  year  the  stream  bends  sharply  to  the  northward,  flowing 
along  the  base  of  the  bluffs,  and  discharges  about  one-half  mile  above  the  ravine 
behind  Ayakulik  Islet.  The  fresh-water  discharge  now  passes  to  the  northward 
toward  Seal  Cape,  and  the  salmon  have  been  schooling  in  great  numbers  this  year 
between  the  island  and  the  main  shore.  They  come  from  the  northward,  and  it  is 


Ayakulik  River  is  on  the  western  s 
sea  midway  between  Low  Cape  and  the  Seal  Rock; 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


235 


believed  that  the  increase  in  this  year’s  numbers  is  due  chiefly,  if  not  entirely,  to  the 
fact  that  Karluk  fish  making  the  coast  in  the  vicinity  of  Seal  Cape  feel  the  influence 
of  this  fresh  water,  and,  following  it  up,  soon  find  themselves  off  the  mouth  of  the 
Ayakulik,  schooling  in  the  open  water,  as  described.  As  the  stream  has  worked  to 
the  northward  the  catch  of  redfish  has  been  observed  to  increase. 

The  run  of  redfish  at  Ayakulik  this  season  has  been  very  large,  and  it  is  estimated 
that  the  total  catch  amounted  to  700,000  fish  from  the  beach  around  the  mouth  of 
the  stream.  In  the  early  part  of  August  the  humpbacks  came  in  myriads;  it  is  said 
that  a boat  could  hardly  pull  through  the  dense  masses  when  they  were  schooling, 
and  that  fishing  for  redfish  then  ceased.  The  weather  was  very  favorable  for 
conducting  the  fisheries  at  Ayakulik  this  year;  the  sea  was  exceptionally  smooth,  an 
excellent  condition  for  outside  beach  work. 

KARLUK. 

A full  account  of  the  canneries,  streams,  and  fisheries  is  given  in  my  former 
report,  pages  144  to  157,  to  which  reference  is  made,  and  only  changes  or  omissions, 
together  with  the  1900  statistics,  will  be  referred  to  in  this  article.  The  operating 
canneries  at  Karluk  are  the  Karluk  Packing  Company,  the  Hume- Aleutian  Packing 
Company,  and  the  Alaska  Improvement  Company;  those  of  the  Hume  Canning  and 
Trading  Company  and  the  Kodiak  Packing  Company  are  held  in  reserve.  These 
are  all  the  property  of  the  Alaska  Packers  Association,  and,  with  the  cannery  of  the 
association  at  Uganuk,  they  are  operated  under  one  superintendent,  with  headquar- 
ters at  Karluk  Spit;  there  is  a foreman  at  each  operating  plant.  Karluk  is  the  depot 
of  supplies  for  the  district,  and  affairs  are  conducted  in  much  the  same  manner  as 
noted  under  Nushagak  and  elsewhere,  where  several  canneries  under  one  organization 
are  located  in  close  proximity,  that  is,  the  stores  and  equipments  are  common  to  all 
and  the  fish  are  supplied  equally.  As  the  run  at  Uganuk  is  short,  usually  ending  by 
the  middle  of  July,  the  force  at  that  cannery  is  transferred  to  the  Karluk  canneries 
on  the  completion  of  the  pack.  In  1898  and  1899  the  three  canneries  mentioned 
as  the  operating  canneries  at  Karluk  were  used,  but  the  run  of  fish  was  so  slack 
during  those  years  that  in  1900  only  the  Karluk  Packing  Company  and  the  Alaska 
Improvement  Company  were  employed  in  packing. 

The  Hume-Aleutian  cannery  was  not  operated,  and  as  it  was  desired  to  increase 
the  capacity  of  the  Bering  Sea  canneries,  the  three  fillers  and  three  toppers  of  the 
former  were  removed  and  installed  in  the  latter  district.  They  expect  to  install  new 
machinery  in  the  Hume-Aleutian  cannery  in  1901.  The  reserve  canneries  are  in  the 
same  condition  as  mentioned  in  my  last  report,  though  that  of  the  Kodiak  Packing 
Company  can  hardly  be  said  to  be  in  reserve,  as  practically  all  the  machinery  has 
been  removed  and  the  buildings  used  as  warehouses,  workshops,  etc. 

There  has  been  no  increase  in  the  capacity  of  the  operating  canneries.  The 
cannery  machinery  in  each  consists  of  7 retorts,  3 fillers,  2 toppers,  2 solderers,  1 
cutter,  and  2 sets  of  canmakers.  Usually  2 fillers  only  are  used,  giving  these  can- 
neries a daily  capacity  of  1,600  cases,  though  by  using  a third  filler  the  capacity  might 
be  increased  to  2,100  cases;  but  that  could  hardly  be  kept  up  for  any  length  of  time, 
unless  an  additional  topper  is  used,  which  may  be  taken  from  the  can-making  depart- 
ment. A fair  capacity  for  these  canneries  as  now  installed  is  2,000  cases  per  day. 


236 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The  spee  of  the  fillers,  running  at  an  average  rate  and  in  such  a manner  that 
the  handlers  aro  not  crowded  beyond  their  capacity,  is  52  to  58  per  minute,  though  it  is 
claimed  the  ma.  ines,  when  well  adjusted,  will  run  at  a speed  of  80  to  90.  At  this  rate 
the  pack  can  not  be  handled  unless  the  filling  tables  are  very  differently  arranged. 

A good  average  for  the  can-makers  is  50  per  minute.  All  cans  are  made  at  the 
cannery,  of  100-pound  tin  for  bodies  and  95-pound  for  tops,  of  which  50  per  cent  is 
imported;  1 pound  of  solder  is  used  to  the  case. 

Transportation  is  by  the  vessels  of  the  company  and  chartered  vessels,  and  they 
usually  make  several  trips  during  a season.  If  idle  for  any  length  of  time,  they  are 
moored  at  Larsen  Cove,  a branch  of  Uyak  Bay. 

The  Chinese  contract  was  12^  cents  per  case  for  machine-filled  and  47i  cents  for 
hand-packed,  with  the  usual  conditions.  Fishermen’s  contract  was  $25  per  month 
from  the  time  fishing  commenced  until  it  ceased  and  18  cents  per  case,  divided  equally 
amongst  all;  $10  per  month  from  the  time  the  vessel  arrived  until  fishing  commenced 
and  from  the  time  fishing  ceased  until  the  day  of  departure;  full  board  from  the  time 
of  signing  until  paid  off',  except  the  Italian  crew,  who  boarded  themselves  and 
received  35  cents  per  day  commutation.  There  are  two  classes  of  fishermen;  one 
consists  of  Scandinavians,  who  operate  on  the  Spit,  and  the  other  of  Italians,  who 
operate  the  Tanglefoot  Bay  side. 

The  streams  and  vicinity,  together  with  the  species,  times  of  the  runs,  and  other 
matters  relating  to  Karluk,  were  fully  described  in  my  former  report.  It  need  only 
be  said  that  the  pack  made  here  is  essentially  of  redfish,  all  other  species  being  inci- 
dental. Occasionally,  after  long  intervals,  there  is  an  enormous  run  of  humpbacks. 
There  was  such  a run  in  1890,  and  this  season  they  were  again  very  plentiful  around 
the  whole  island.  During  our  visit  the  seines  were  choked  with  them,  and,  as  pre- 
viously mentioned,  at  Ayakulik  fishing  for  redfish  ceased  on  account  of  the  great 
number  of  humpbacks  present.  There  are  usually  a few  scattering  king  salmon 
around  Karluk  beach,  most  abundant  in  June,  when  a pack  of  from  500  to  1,000  cases 
is  sometimes  made.  A few  cohoes  and  dog  salmon  also  occur,  but  the  small  pack 
usually  made  of  the  former  comes  from  Sturgeon  River.  Steelheads  are  taken,  com- 
mencing early  in  August  and  increasing  during  the  latter  part  of  the  month,  but 
never  in  sufficient  numbers  to  utilize;  thirty  or  forty  may  lie  taken  one  day  and  the 
next  few  days  only  three  or  four,  or  possibly  none.  Cod  are  abundant.  Halibut 
are  not  plentiful,  and  neither  shad  nor  sturgeon  have  been  seen.  Usually  there  are 
many  trout,  but  this  year  they  were  very  scarce. 

The  Karluk  canneries  this  year  fished  the  Spit  and  adjacent  waters,  Ayakulik, 
Uganuk,  Little  River,  Eagle  Harbor,  and  Kiliuda  Bay,  though  the  yield  from  the  last 
two  places  was  not  over  9,000  fish.  There  seemed  to  be  no  contention  this  year  over 
the  fishing  rights  in  this  vicinity. 

The  fisheries  at  Karluk  during  the  seasons  of  1898  and  1899  were  considered  a 
failure,  as  only  about  65  per  cent  of  the  general  average  of  the  past  ten  years  was 
made.  The  canneries  at  Karluk,  Uganuk,  and  Uyak  combined  have,  for  the  ten 
years  ending  with  1897,  made  an  average  pack  of  over  200,000  cases  per  year,  and  at 
no  time  during  this  period  has  the  pack  fallen  as  low  as  for  the  years  of  1898  and 
1899.  Some  cannerymen  claim  that  these  slack  runs  are  only  temporary;  others 
believe  that  they  indicate  the  first  sign  of  decline,  and  that  while  some  years  there 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


237 


may  again  be  large  runs,  the  average  will  become  less.  In  1900,  however,  there  was 
a large  increase,  the  canneries  under  consideration  packing  about  220,000  cases.  It 
will  be  interesting  to  note  the  future  pack  of  this  locality,  as  the  hard  fishing  com- 
menced in  1888,  and  the  first  output  of  the  hatchery  was  made  in  1896. 

For  future  comparison  it  may  be  interesting  to  record  the  redfish  statistics  of  the 
Karluk  canneries  for  1900,  which  are  as  follows: 


Packed  at  the  two  Karluk  canneries '2,031,971 

Received  from  Ayaknlik  River - 242,500 

Received  from  Little  River 5,  800 

Received  from  Eagle  Harbor 1,000 

Received  from  Uganuk 24, 000 

— 273, 300 


1,758,671 

Sent  to  Uganuk  from  Karluk 9, 000 


Total  redfish  taken  at  or  near  Karluk  Spit 1, 767, 671 


Packed  at  the  Uganuk  Cannery 170,960 

Received  from  Ayaknlik  River 17,500 

Received  from  Little  River 17,300 

Received  from  Kiliuda  Bay 4,900 

Received  from  Eagle  Harbor 3,000 

Received  from  Karluk 9, 000 

— 51,700 


119,260 

Sent  to  Karluk 24, 000 


Redfish  taken  at  Uganuk 143, 260 


The  following  are  the  statistics  for  1900  of  the  Karluk  and  Uganuk  canneries 
combined.  There  were  employed  171  white  fishermen,  13  native  fishermen,  13  white 
cannery -hands,  8 natives,  and  263  Chinese. 

There  were  used  10  seines,  each  400  fathoms  long  and  185  meshes  deep;  6 seines, 
each  250  to  300  fathoms  long,  and  120  to  160  meshes  deep;  and  3 hatchery  seines, 
each  100  fathoms  long  and  80  meshes  deep,  all  3-inch  mesh  and  valued  at  $1.50  per 
fathom.  This,  however,  only  represents  a fraction  of  the  material  on  hand.  There 
is  a warehouse  filled  with  old  seines,  many  bales  of  all  kinds  of  webbing,  and  an 
abundance  of  floats,  sinkers,  cordage,  etc.  At  Uganuk  the  two  floating  traps  men- 
tioned in  my  former  report  were  used.  These  traps  fire  valued  at  $1,500  each. 

The  following  boats  were  used:  Nine  lighters,  $500  each;  3 launch  tenders,  $90 
each;  17  fish  scows,  $150  each;  20  seine  boats,  $150  each;  33  dories,  $25  each;  1 
hatchery  scow,  $150;  6 hatchery  transporting  cars,  $30  each. 

The  following  vessels  were  used: 


Class  and  name. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

Ownership. 

Steamer  Kadiak 

58 

9 

820, 000 

Owned. 

Steamer  Gertie  Story 

36 

7 

12, 000 

Do. 

Launch  Karluk 

8 

2 

10,000 

Do. 

Launch  Uganuk 

8 

2 

1(1, 000 

Do. 

Launch  Delphine 

5 

2 

2,  500 

Do. 

Launch  Ida 

5 

2 

2,  700 

Do. 

Ship  Santa  Clara 

1,453 

18 

40, 000 

Do. 

The  ship  Indiana  and  the  bark  Heroin , which  arc  accredited  to  the  Alaska  Pack- 
ers Association  cannery  at  Naknek,  were  also  employed  in  part  at  Karluk.  The 
bark  Merom  broke  from  her  moorings  off  Karluk  Spit  on  October  6,  1900,  during  a 
gale,  and  was  totally  wrecked  on  the  rocks,  losing  12,572  cases  of  salmon. 


238 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The  following  was  the  output  in  1900: 


Species. 

Cases. 

Num- 
ber to 
the  case 

Dates. 

Remarks. 

Karluk  Packing  Co.: 

King  salmon 

475 

4.9 

June  9-June  28. . . 

i 

Redlisli : 

77, 558 

13. 0 

June  9-Sept.  14... 

>None  salted. 

Cohoes  

1,382 

7.2 

Aug.  25-Sept.  14. .. 

1 

Alaska  Improvement  Co. : 

King  salmon 

012 

4.9 

June  5-June28... 

i 

Redfish 

09, 712 

13.9 

June  4-Sept. 21... 

\ I)o. 

Cohoes  

2,791 

8.0 

Aug.  25-Sept.  21 . . . 

1 

Uganuk: 

Redfish 

13,370 

12. 8 

June  9-JuIv  17... 

The  hatchery  operated  by  the  Alaska  Packers  Association  on  Karluk  Lagoon  was 
visited  by  Mr.  Fassett,  whose  report  will  be  found  on  pp.  331-348. 

UYAK. 

The  Uyak  Bay  canneries,  of  the  Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Company  and  Hume 
Bros.  & Hume,  were  fully  described  in  my  previous  report,  pages  158-159,  and  will 
only  be  referred  to  in  connection  with  the  statistics.  These  canneries  are  practically 
the  same  as  in  1897,  and  as  there  are  no  redfish  streams  in  Uyak  Bay  all  the  fish  are 
obtained  at  a distance.  The  principal  places  fished  are  Karluk,  The  Slide,  Water- 
falls, Avakulik.  Uganuk,  Little  River,  Eagle  Harbor,  Kuslmack,  Kukak,  and  Kiliuda 
Bay.  Formerly  the  Afognak  streams  at  Litnik,  Paramanof,  and  Malinof  were  also 
fished,  and  it  is  said  fish  are  still  obtained  at  these  places. 

The  Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Company  cannery  uses  steam  boxes  in  the  canning 
process  for  first  cooking,  and  for  second  cooking  2 iron  retorts;  it  has  1 filler  in  use, 
and  1 spare  one,  1 solderer,  and  1 cutter.  Topping  is  done  by  hand.  All  cans  are 
made  by  hand  at  the  cannery,  using  100-pound  imported  tin-plate  for  bodies  and  tops. 

Fish  are  pewed  from  boats  or  steamers  to  the  fish-house  on  the  end  of  the  wharf, 
and  when  cleaned  are  transported  fyv  handcarts  to  the  cutters.  The  cannery  has  a 
capacity  of  900  cases  per  day. 

The  Chinese  contract  was  the  same  as  that  of  the  Karluk  canneries.  The  fisher- 
men’s contract  was  $25  per  month  from  the  day  of  landing  to  the  day  of  departure, 
transportation  and  full  board  from  the  time  of  leaving  the  home'  port  until  the 
return  to  the  port  of  departure,  and  $15  per  thousand  fish. 

During  the  season  of  1900  the  cannery  employed  64  white  fishermen,  6 white 
cannery-hands,  4 natives,  and  56  Chinese;  they  also  purchased  fish  from  26  natives, 
who  were  paid  from  $30  to  $35  per  thousand. 

They  used  5 seines;  one  700  fathoms,  one  550  fathoms,  and  three  350  fathoms 
long;  21-inch  to  3-inch  mesh,  and  180  meshes  deep.  They  have  10  spare  seines;  aver- 
age value  of  all,  $1.50  per  fathom. 

There  are  5 lighters,  $450  each;  15  seine  boats,  $70  each;  3 sailboats,  $90  each; 
13  dories,  $30  each;  and  one  pile-driver,  $1,000. 

The  following  vessels  (owned  by  the  company)  were  employed:  Steamer  Sheli- 
kofi\  101  tons,  crew  10,  value  $36,000;  launch  Kenai , 5 tons,  crew  2,  value  $7,000. 
Transportation  of  spring  outfit  and  fall  pack  is  by  calling  vessels  of  company. 

The  following  was  the  output  in  1900:  Redfish,  29,384  cases,  13.7  to  the  case, 
May  28  to  August  25;  humpbacks,  1,025  cases,  21  to  the  case,  July  20  to  August  25. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


239 

Ilume  Bros,  cfc  Hume. — This  cannery  operates  4 retorts,  1 tiller,  1 solderer,  and 
1 cutter,  and  tops  by  hand.  All  cans  are  made  by  hand  at  Uyak  of  100-pound  imported 
tin  for  bodies  and  tops.  The  fish  are  handled  in  the  manner  noted  under  the  preced- 
ing cannery.  The  Chinese  contract  was  the  same  as  at  Karluk  and  the  fishermen’s 
contract  the  same  as  given  under  the  Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Company’s  cannery. 

The  following  are  the  statistics  for  the  Ilume  cannery,  season  of  1900:  Employed 
52  white  fishermen,  9 natives,  12  white  cannery-hands,  56  Chinese;  used  10  seines, 
from  150  to  350  fathoms  long,  160  meshes  deep,  3-inch  mesh,  valued  at  $1.50  per 
fathom;  1 lighters,  $400  each;  12  seine  boats,  $120  each;  1 Whitehall  boat,  $75;  20 
dories  and  skiffs,  $20  each;  1 pile-driver,  $1,000. 

The  following  vessels  (owned  by  the  cannery)  were  employed: 


Class  and  name. 

Tons.  Crew. 

Value. 

Steamer  Equator 

12  7 

$12, 000 

Steamer  Francis  < 'utting 

59  1 8 

10,000 

Launch  Herbert  Hume 

5 2 

3,  500 

Bark  Harvester 

710  12 

12,000 

The  following  was  the  output  in  1900:  Redfish,  27,636  cases,  13.5  to  the  case,  June 
5 to  September  20;  humpbacks,  2,064  cases,  21  to  the  case,  July  5 to  September  20. 
Scattering  cohoes  and  dog  salmon  were  packed  with  humpbacks  under  pink  brands. 
Salted  25  barrels  of  redfish. 

The  only  places  in  this  vicinity  that  might  offer  a hatchery  site  are  Little  River 
and  Uganuk. 

AFOGNAK. 

From  Uyak  the  Albatross  went  to  Afognak,  where  an  examination  was  made  of 
the  Fish  Commission  interests  in  that  locality.  During  the  four  clays  in  which  these 
investigations  were  being  conducted  a sextant  reconnaissance  was  made  of  Afognak 
(Litnik)  Bay  and  approaches.  As  the  locality  is  exceedingly  foul  and  had  never 
previously  been  surveyed,  the  chart  accompanying  this  report  will  no  doubt  be  use- 
ful to  the  Commission  and  to  the  mariner,  and  the  following  notes,  so  far  as  they 
relate  to  Afognak  Bay,  are  referred  to  it. 

In  leaving  the  anchorage  off  the  canneries  at  Uyak,  of  which  a survey  was  made 
by  this  vessel  in  1897  and  published  in  Coast  Survey  Bulletin  No.  38,  a course  was 
laid  out  of  Uyak  Bay  clearing  the  shores  and  headlands  of  Capes  Kiliugmuit,  Ugat, 
and  Uganuk  by  about  1 mile  and  entering  Karluk  Strait  in  mid-channel.  A course 
through  the  middle  of  Karluk  Strait  seems  perfectly  safe  and  clear,  and  on  this 
course  the  head  of  the  vessel  is  found  to  point  for  about  the  center  of  Whale  Island, 
possibly  a little  to  the  southward. 

The  Raspberry  Island  side  seems  to  be  the  boldest,  though  no  outlying  dangers 
were  seen  anywhere.  A short  distance  to  the  eastward  of  Dry  Island,  which  lies  off' 
the  entrance  to  an  indentation  on  the  southern  shore  midway  in  the  strait,  the  tides 
coming  through  Shelikoff  Strait  meet  the  tides  from  the  eastward  around  Whale 
Island.  Outside  and  between  the  two  small  islets  off  the  southeastern  end  of  Rasp- 
berry Island  is  a sunken  rock  known  as  Thomas  Rock.  A fair  berth  of  these  two 
islets  is  said  to  clear  the  rock. 


240 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


At  Whale  Island  Karluk  Strait  forms  two  passages.  The  one  to  the  southward, 
described  by  this  vessel  in  Coast  Survey  Bulletin  No.  38,  was  called  Whale  Passage, 
and  the  one  to  the  northward  is  Afognak  Strait.  The  latter  should  not  be  attempted 
by  a deep-draft  vessel  until  a satisfactory  survey  has  been  made,  as  there  are  indica- 
tions at  one  point  that  there  may  not  be  sufficient  depth  at  extreme  low  water  for 
vessels  of  moderate  draft,  nor  by  any  vessel  without  local  knowledge,  as  the  currents 
are  strong  and  the  passage  very  foul.  Time  did  not  permit  the  reconnaissance  made 
by  this  vessel  to  extend  through  Afognak  Strait.  Sufficient  only  was  done  to  appre- 
ciate the  strong  current  and  foul  conditions  of  the  shore. 

The  northern  shore  of  Afognak  Strait  is  foul  in  patches  for  nearly  one-third  of 
the  width.  On  the  southern  side,  at  a point  about  one-third  the  length  of  the  island 
from  the  western  end,  a bank  makes  off  from  Whale  Island  a considerable  distance, 
and  a reef,  uncovered  at  low  water,  lies  off  the  bight  near  the  eastern  end  of  the 
island,  but  the  latter  is  off  the  fairway.  OH'  Afognak  village  the  reef  extends  a full 
mile  to  the  eastward  and  from  one-fourth  to  one-half  mile  to  the  southward. 

The  largest  island  off  the  southeastern  end  of  Raspberry  Island  is  Dearborn 
Island,  the  point  of  which  seems  to  project  farther  into  the  strait.  Off  the  southern 
end  of  this  island  there  is  a bare  rock,  a I ways  above  water,  which  is  a leading  mark  to 
the  western  end  cf  Afognak  Strait.  The  Albatross  passed  this  rock,  leaving  it  to  the 
northward,  distant  250  yards,  and  then  brought  it  astern,  steering  for  the  saddle  in 
Hog  Island,  which  from  this  point  is  seen  about  one-third  the  length  of  that  island 
from  the  northern  end.  After  running  half  the  length  of  Whale  Island  and  well 
clear  of  the  bank  previously  referred  to  on  the  southern  side  of  the  channel,  the 
course  was  changed  to  head  for  the  southern  end  of  Hog  Island,  which  was  kept  until 
that  island  was  about  1 mile  distant,  when  the  course  was  gradually  changed  to  thg 
northward,  rounding  the  reef  off  Afognak  village  into  the  bay. 

Afognak  {Litnik)  Bag. — Litnik  is  a corruption  of  the  Russian  word  Elitnik, 
meaning  a place  where  tisli  are  dried  and  prepared  for  future  use,  and  is  the  name 
given  locally  and  used  throughout  the  Kadiak  district  to  the  body  of  water  known 
to  us  as  Afognak  Bay,  and  to  the  river  and  lake  at  its  head.  Locally,  the  name 
Afognak  Bay  is  applied  to  a small,  shallow,  foul  cove,  about  Id  miles  to  the  westward 
of  the  village,  on  the  northern  side  of  the  strait.  Afognak  is  retained,  however,  in 
this  report,  for  the  large  bay,  as  the  President’s  proclamation  and  the  Fish  Commission 
records  refer  to  it  by  that  name. 

Afognak  (Litnik)  Baj7  is  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  extreme  southern  point  of  the 
island  of  that  name.  The  approach  from  the  westward  (Shelikof  Strait)  is  through 
Karluk  Strait  and  Afognak  Strait  or  Whale  Passage;  from  Kadiak  (St.  Paul),  through 
Usinka  Narrows;  and  from  sea,  to  the  eastward,  through  the  broad  open  waters 
between  Pillar  Cape  and  Spruce  Island.  The  bay  proper  may  be  said  to  include  the 
waters  inclosed  by  a line  drawn  from  Afognak  village  and  the  outlying  reefs  to  Hog 
Island,  thence  by  Skipwith  Reefs  to  Lamb  Island  and  the  main  shore,  and  is,  approx- 
imately, 5 miles  long  by  2 miles  greatest  and  one-half  mile  least  width.  The  shores 
are  heavily  wooded,  with  high  mountains  lying  back,  from  which  ridges  and  hills 
project  toward  the  bay.  The  entrance  is  much  obstructed  by  islets  and  reefs,  and 
great  care  must  be  exercised  in  the  approaches,  but  the  bay  proper,  except  for  one 
reef,  is  apparently  clear  of  danger,  with  excellent  anchorage  at  the  head. 


Bull.  U.  S.  P.  C.  l$Ol.  fTo  face  page  240.) 


Plate  XXL 


AFOGNAK  -B  \ V 

( L I T NIK] 

AFOG N A K I S L A N D 

ALASKA 


From  a.  sextant  reconnaissance  by  the  officers  of  the 

U.S. Fish  Com’n  St r,  ALBATROSS, 

Commander  Jefferson  F Moser,  U.  S.N.,  Camctjr. 

Soundings  cere-  expressed  in  -fathoms, 
reduced  to  the.  mean,  of  ail  Low -waters  observed. 

(latitude  5B"0&!  24  i;  N. 
Astronomical  Station  < , . i w 

j Eo  ngi  taAe.  15 24 8 09  V/. 

Variation, Lj  majmetotneter  observations J 2-4°  36'  E . 

~Tri angulation  andTofiodraJzhy  by  Liout.  /-/ugh  Rodman,  (J.  $./V. 
Astronomic.  andJKcignetLc  Observations  hy  Rnsign  erfd  ffephum,  (J.  S.  //. 
Jfy  droqy-ap  Ay  by  Ensigyivs  C.  ft  Af  tiler  and  C.  S./dentpff  U.  S’.  At. 

m\>oV  s. 

tS  Se-xt2k.vv.-fc  fcr  i-Ci.wqvv'-tAluvv  @1  Astvovujtfu  cal  S’tcX't.lpn  . 


Comma.ivdir,  U S-Nav^  CoWT\\6.ucUn£, 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


241 


Afognak  village  is  located  at  the  extreme  southwestern  end  of  the  bay,  and  con- 
sists of  two  parts;  the  most  southerly  is  a settlement  with  a population  of  about  175 
whites  and  half-breeds,  and  to  the  northward  (separated  from  the  other  by  a high 
grassy  bluff  named  Graveyard  Point)  is  a native  village  of  less  than  100  inhabitants. 
Very  foul  ground,  marked  by  kelp  in  summer,  extends  one-half  mile  off  the  principal 
village,  increasing  to  1 mile  off  Graveyard  Point,  and  reaching  halfway  across  the 
passage  to  Hog  Island,  a small  wooded  island,  slightly  crescent-shaped,  with  the  cusps 
to  the  southwest.  It  is  about  half  a mile  long,  in  a general  east-and-west  direction, 
about  250  yards  in  width,  and,  when  seen  from  the  westward,  it  has  a dip  or  saddle 
in  the  northern  third.  From  high-water  mark  the  rocky  shelf  projects  in  reefs  a 
distance  of  200  yards  on  all  sides,  and  on  the  western  end  of  the  reef  extends  toward 
the  village  for  three-tenths  of  a mile.  These  reefs  are  all  marked  by  kelp  in  summer. 

Nearly  a mile  to  the  northeastward  of  Hog  Island  are  Skipwith  Reefs,  a line  of 
high  rocks  always  out  of  water,  which,  with  Lamb  Island,  a larger  wooded  island, 
form  the  eastern  side  of  the  bay.  Between  Hog  Island  and  Skipwith  Reefs  is  a 
wide,  clear  passage,  which  might  be  called  the  Eastern  Passage,  and  is  the  one  to  be 
preferred  1 >y  strangers  on  entering  or  leaving  the  bay. 

Danger  Reef  is  a large  reef,  bare  at  low  water,  with  deep  water  close  to  and  all 
around  it,  and  lies  NNE.  ^ E.,  1.2  miles  from  Graveyard  Point.  It  is  estimated  that 
it  covers  at  three-quarter  tide,  or  earlier.  It  is  a bad  reef  when  covered,  as  it  is  not 
marked  by  kelp  and  is  not  easily  seen. 

On  the  northern  side,  outside  of  the  point  marking  the  contraction  of  the  bay, 
are  three  small,  low,  wooded  islets  lying  close  to  the  shore.  The  western  one  is 
Dot  Island,  which,  when  seen  clear  of  the  adjoining  land,  has  a conical  appearance. 
West  of  this  islet,  on  the  opposite  shore,  is  a tine  cascade,  falling  to  the  beach,  from 
which  most  excellent  water  may  be  obtained.  At  the  head  of  the  bay,  in  the  north- 
western arm  leading  to  the  reservation  stream,  are  several  small  islands.  The  first 
one  is  Winter  Island,  beyond  which  vessels  should  not  go;  it  is  high,  rocky,  and 
heavily  wooded  with  spruce.  The  channel  to  the  northward  of  Winter  Island  is 
obstructed  by  rocky  ledges,  and  to  the  southward,  as  a point  higher  up  is  reached,  it 
grows  shallow  and  grassy.  The  latter  is  the  boat  channel  to  the  river  mouth. 

Several  cannery  steamers  from  Karluk  winter  in  this  arm.  They  anchor  to  the 
eastward  of  Winter  Island,  and  then  haul  the  sterns  of  the  vessels  close  up  to  the 
rocks  on  the  island  (which  are  bold),  where  they  are  clear  of  the  ice  forced  out  of  the 
river  in  the  spring. 

At  the  extreme  northern  end  a narrow  extension  of  the  bay,  about  a mile  long 
by  G cables  in  width  and  2 fathoms  deep,  is  known  locally  as  Back  Bay.  It  should 
afford  good  anchorage  for  a small  vessel.  At  its  head  are  two  humpback  streams. 

On  the  western  shore,  at  the  point  where  the  bay  turns  to  form  the  northwestern 
arm,  are  the  locations  of  the  canneries  of  the  Royal  Packing  Company  and  the 
Russian-American  Packing  Company. 

The  history  of  these  canneries  is  given  in  my  former  report,  pages  163  and  164, 
to  which  reference  is  made.  Nothing  is  left  of  the  cannery  of  the  Russian-American 
Packing  Company.  The  buildings  of  the  Royal,  in  which  are  stored  a number  of 
boats,  and  several  detached  houses  are  still  standing  and  in  fair  condition.  A watch- 
man is  kept  here  by  the  Alaska  Packers  Association  during  the  summer,  and  during 
the  winter  the  ship-keepers  of  the  cannery  steamers  care  for  the  property. 

F.  C.  B.  1901 — lfi 


242 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The  anchorage  in  the  upper  bay  off  the  cannery  building  is  in  7 to  8 fathoms,  mud 
bottom.  It  is  said  an  anchorage  may  be  made  in  summer  off  the  native  village  south 
of  Point  Lipsett  in  5 to  6 fathoms.  This  bight  is,  however,  open  to  the  eastward  and 
can  not  be  recommended. 

The  following  results  by  sextant  and  artificial  horizon  were  obtained  for  geo- 
graphical position  at  the  high  water,  grass-covered  rock  on  the  western  shore  of  the 
bay  one-tenth  mile  south  from  the  cannery  building:  Latitude,  58°  02'  24"  north; 
longitude,  152°  48'  09"  west;  variation  by  compass  declinometer  24°  36'  east. 

Establishment  from  seven  successive  high  waters,  at  moon’s  age  from  17  to  20 
days,  XIh  25m.  Mean  rise  and  fall  of  tide  during  same  period,  9.95  feet. 

Sailing  directions , Afognak  Bay. — There  are  two  passages  used  in  entering  this 
bay,  one  to  the  eastward  and  the  other  to  the  westward  of  Hog  Island.  In  coming 
through  Afognak  Strait  steer  for  Hog  Island,  and  when  three-fourths  mile  distant 


Hog  Island  bearing  SE.  by  E.  J E.,  mag.,  in  saddle  of  back  range,  clears  Danger  Reef. 


Cannery  building  bearing  WNW.  } W.,  mag.,  between  Dot  Island  and  adjoining  shore  to 
eastward,  leads  through  East  Passage  and  clears  Danger  Reef. 


haul  up  for  Lamb  Island  and  run  for  it  until  the  cannery  building  is  open  to  the 
eastward  of  Dot  Island;  then  change  course  for  Dot  Island,  and  when  well  clear  of 
Danger  Reef  keep  in  mid-channel  to  the  anchorage.  At  low  water  Village  Reefs 
may  be  rounded  by  the  kelp,  and  Danger  Reef  is  then  distinctly  visible.  The 
cannery  steamers  frequently  pass  between  Village  Reefs  and  Danger  Reef,  but  local 
knowledge  is  necessary  for  this  channel.  The  western  passage  should  be  used  with 
caution,  particularly  at  high  water,  as  a stranger  in  keeping  off  Village  Reefs  may 
get  on  the  foul  ground  on  the  Hog  Island  shore.  For  a stranger  the  eastern  passage 
is  recommended,  as  it  is  wide,  straight,  and  apparently  clear.  In  entering  by  this 
passage  keep  in  mid-channel  between  Hog  Island  and  the  southern  bare  rock  of 
Skipwith  Reefs,  and  steer  for  Dot  Island.  On  this  course  the  cannery  building  will 
be  seen  between  Dot  Island  and  the  adjoining  shore  to  the  eastward.  When  clear 
of  Danger  Reef  follow  the  directions  given  under  the  eastern  passage. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


243 


A line  between  Dot  Island  and  Hog  Island  clears  Danger  Reef  to  the  eastward 
one-fourth  mile.  On  this  line  Hog  Island  will  be  seen  filling  a wide  saddle  in  the 
distant  mountains,  and  Dot  Island  will  be  slightly  to  the  eastward  of  a V in  the  back 
range.  The  Albatross  entered  by  the  western  passage  and  left  by  the  eastern  one. 

AFOGNAK  SALMON  STREAMS. 

At  the  head  of  Back  Bay  are  two  small  streams,  which  at  the  time  of  our  visit 
were  literally  choked  with  humpbacks.  Cohoes  are  also  said  to  run  here,  and  several 
dead  king  salmon  were  seen.  A small  stream  to  the  eastward  of  Bare  Point  carries 
a large  number  of  humpbacks  and  is  said  to  have  a fair  run  of  cohoes.  Back  of  the 
village  of  Afognak  is  a shoal  lagoon,  or  lily  pond,  which  drains  through  a shifting 
channel  and  carries  a few  humpbacks  and  cohoes. 

The  reservation  stream,  previously  referred  to  as  emptying  into  the  head  of  the 
northwestern  arm  of  the  bay,  is  the  only  redfish  stream  in  this  vicinity.  A board  of 
experts  was  appointed  by  the  Commissioner  in  1889  to  examine  the  salmon  streams 
of  Alaska,  and  as  this  board  spent  the  summer  of  that  year  in  examining  Karluk, 
Alitak,  and  Afognak,  the  results  of  which,  so  far  as  they  relate  to  Afognak,  are 
given  on  pages  185-188  and  207-208  of  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission  Bulletin  for  1889, 
the  stream  and  lake  will  here  be  referred  to  in  only  a general  way,  though  both  were 
visited  on  several  occasions  by  this  party. 

This  year  the  redfish  and  humpbacks  were  very  abundant  in  the  reservation 
stream,  and  it  is  said  that  the  stream  can  furnish,  without  injury,  from  100,000  to 
150,000  redfish  a year,  but  of  this  there  is  no  data,  as  all  commercial  fishing  in  late 
years  has  been  done  surreptitiously.  The  runs  are  remarkably  early  in  this  stream, 
scattering  redfish  appearing  early  in  May  and  in  large  numbers  by  the  middle  of 
that  month;  by  dune  1 there  is  usually  a lull.  This  is  called  the  early  run.  The 
second  run  is  said  to  commence  with  the  spring  tides  in  June,  and  the  fish  are  then 
abundant  until  the  middle  of  July,  when  the  run  grows  slack,  and  by  the  last  of  the 
month  it  is  practically  over.  If  the  water  in  the  river  is  low  the  fish  school  around 
the  mouth  in  great  numbers,  but  upon  the  first  rise  they  rush  to  the  lake  in  a body. 
The  redfish,  upon  arriving,  school  around  the  upper  part  of  the  bay,  mostly  along 
the  western  shore,  where  there  are  several  excellent  seining  beaches. 

Cohoes  appear  in  small  numbers  the  last  week  in  July;  the  run  is  at  its  height 
the  last  of  August,  and  continues,  in  diminishing  numbers,  until  October.  Hump- 
backs appear  during  the  middle  of  July,  and  run  in  large  numbers  during  August, 
growing  less  the  latter  part  of  that  month  and  until  the  middle  of  September.  The 
last  fish  are,  however,  of  very  poor  quality.  Dog  salmon  are  not  very  numerous, 
and  seem  to  run  scattering^  with  all  other  species.  Straggling  king  salmon  are 
seen  at  irregular  intervals  throughout  the  season.  They  are  never  abundant  and  are 
only  recognized  as  occasional  visitors.  Steelheads  are  believed  to  winter  in  the  lakes, 
and  descend  to  the  sea  as  soon  as  the  stream  opens  in  the  spring.  They  appear  at  all 
times  during  the  season,  but  are  most  numerous  during  the  coho  run.  Dolly  Varden 
trout  appear  with  the  earliest  species  and  remain  throughout  the  season. 

The  estuary  and  river  to  the  falls,  and  the  tributaries  below,  were  crowded  with 
humpbacks  at  the  time  of  our  visit.  Great  numbers  were  noticed  trying  to  surmount 


244 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


the  falls,  and  many  were  seen  thrown  by  their  own  velocity  against  the  rocks  in  the 
rush  to  ascend.  It  is  probable  that  few  of  this  species  gain  the  lake,  and  that  most 
of  them  spawn  in  the  lower  course  of  the  river  and  in  the  tributaries  referred  to. 
On  my  visit  to  the  lake,  for  want  of  facilities  the  shores  could  not  be  examined 
except  in  the  vicinity  of  the  outlet  and  for  about  half  a mile  along  the  eastern  side. 
Dead  fish  were  not  very  abundant  along  the  lake  shores.  All  the  dead  redfish  seen 
were  opened,  and  it  was  found  that  50  per  cent  of  the  females  had  not  spawned  and 
30  per  cent  of  the  males  bad  milt.  A similar  condition  was  previously  noticed  and 
referred  to  in  my  former  report,  pages  12  and  13.  There  may  be  some  abnormal 
impediment  in  the  genital  pore,  but  it  is  more  probable  that  in  ascending  a difficult 
stream  the  exertion  is  so  great  that  the  fish  dies  of  exhaustion  before  it  is  fully  ripe. 

On  August  15  the  temperature  of  the  surface  water  of  the  lake  near  the  shore 
was  62°  F.,  at  4 feet  depth  58°  F.  and  59°  F.  The  stream  at  the  falls  was  65°  F. 

It  is  said  that  the  reservation  stream  has  been  fished  by  all  the  canneries  each 
year  until  1899,  when  only  two  corporations  out  of  the  three  operatingin  the  vicinity 
fished  here.  The  natives  report  that  this  year  (1900)  one  cannery  obtained  fish  both 
from  Malinof  and  from  the  Afognak  stream;  that  a small  schooner  in  charge  of  a 
member  of  the  Brotherhood  of  Afognak  Pioneers  fished  in  the  vicinity  of  the  Royal 
cannery,  entering  and  leaving  the  bay  undercover  of  darkness.  Several  members  of 
the  organization,  when  questioned  in  regard  to  it,  claimed  to  have  no  knowledge  of 
such  fishing.  It  is  believed,  however,  that  the  natives’  report  is  true. 

The  natives  fish  the  stream,  using,  so  it  is  said,  the  usual  hook  and  pole,  though 
at  the  summer  village  (Litnik),  on  the  left  bank  of  the  stream  near  the  mouth,  several 
nets  were  seen  which  were  also  probably  used. 

ZAPORS. 

From  the  earliest  Russian  times  the  natives  were  taught  to  barricade  the  streams 
by  zapors,  or  barricades  which  were  maintained  for  generations  in  the  principal 
rivers.  Upon  the  advent  of  the  cannery  man  this  method  of  holding  the  fish  was 
encouraged  and  aided  in  every  possible  way.  These  zapors,  as  originally  constructed, 
consisted  of  large  cribs  of  heavy  logs  weighted  with  stone,  placed  at  intervals  across 
the  river  to  form  piers,  at  a suitable  location.  Between  the  piers  other  logs  were 
secured,  forming  a line  of  support  for  the  rails,  or  saplings,  which  were  placed  side 
by  side,  in  the  direction  of  the  stream,  with  the  butts  upstream,  embedded  in  the 
gravel  or  river  bottom,  and  the  other  end  resting  on  the  timber  support.  The 
arrangement  of  these  rails  was  the  same  as  those  used  in  the  construction  of  the 
barricades  in  southeastern  Alaska,  and  described  in  my  former  report,  page  37.  This 
arrangement  permitted  the  water  to  pass  through  the  interstices  or  over  the  ends, 
and  prevented  any  fish  from  ascending.  At  a point  below  this  dam  a similar  one  was 
constructed,  but  near  the  center,  or  wherever  the  depth  was  most  suitable,  an  open- 
ing was  left  for  a sluice,  the  latter  arranged  to  permit  the  fish  to  pass  in,  but  not  out. 
The  fish  were  then  impounded  between  the  two  barricades  and  easily  captured. 

The  zapors  of  late  date,  however,  consist  of  only  one  barricade,  which  prevents 
the  fish  from  ascending.  The  one  until  lately  maintained  in  the  reservation  stream 
was  of  this  construction  and  was  located  a short  distance  above  tide  water,  below  the 
first  falls,  about  a mile  from  the  low-water  mouth  of  the  river  proper.  Three  cribs 


Many  humpbacks  in  pool.  Salmon  struggling  in  falls. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C 1901.  (To  face  page  244.) 


Plate  XXII. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


245 


formed  the  piers,  and  at  the  time  of  our  visit  the  northern  crib  had  been  removed  and 
was  lying  on  the  rocks  a short  distance  below.  This  zapor,  or  rather  a zapor,  has 
been  maintained  at  this  point  for  many  years.  It  was  carried  away  during  the  winter 
of  1895  and  1896  and  rebuilt  by  the  natives  as  soon  as  the  conditions  permitted.  In 
August,  1S99,  the  master  of  one  of  the  Alaska  Packers  Association  cannery  steamers, 
with  the  assistance  of  some  natives,  pulled  out  the  northern  crib.  As  this  made 
but  a small  opening  which  could  readily  be  closed,  a party  from  the  Albatross  dis- 
membered the  remaining  cribs,  piled  the  timber  and  rails  on  shore,  and  burnt  them. 
The  stream  is  now  (August,  1900)  clear  of  artificial  obstruction. 

INHABITANTS. 

The  inhabitants  of  Afognak  consist  of  Kadiak  Eskimos,  Russian  half-breeds,  and 
a few  white  hunters  and  fishermen.  As  much  complaint  has  been  made  in  this 
locality,  not  only  on  account  of  the  illegal  fishing  of  the  reservation  stream  by  the 
canneries,  but  by  the  inhabitants  in  relation  to  their  condition  and  surroundings  (see 
salmon  inspector’s  report,  1899,  pp.  38-48),  it  is  deemed  necessary,  in  order  that  the 
Commission  may  be  advised  of  the  facts,  to  state  the  situation  as  it  appears  to  me 
after  our  visit. 

When  Alaska  was  under  the  management  of  the  Russian  - American  Company 
the  time  arrived  when  they  had  in  their  employ  many  men  who  had  grown  old  in 
their  service  or  who  had  lost  their  health  and  could  not  very  well  be  discharged  and 
thrown  upon  their  own  resources.  Upon  representing  this  condition  to  the  Russian 
Government  an  order  was  issued,  in  1835,  directing  the  company  to  locate,  as  per- 
manent settlers,  such  of  the  employees  as  had  married  native  or  half-breed  women, 
and  who,  on  account  of  age  or  ill  health,  could  no  longer  serve  the  company.  The 
latter,  under  this  order,  was  obliged  to  select  suitable  land,  build  comfortable  dwell- 
ings, furnish  agricultural  implements,  seed,  cattle  and  fowls,  and  a year’s  provisions. 
The  settlers  were  exempt  from  taxation  and  military  duty,  and  the  Russians  were 
known  as  colonial  citizens  and  the  half-breeds  as  colonial  settlers.  The  eastern  side 
of  Cook  Inlet,  Afognak  Island,  and  Spruce  Island  were  selected  as  most  suitable  for 
settlement,  and  the  half-breeds  now  forming  the  larger  part  of  the  population  at 
Afognak  village  are  largely  descendants  from  these  colonial  citizens  and  settlers. 
The  early  name  of  the  village  was  liatkovsky.  The  half-breeds  have  always  lived 
on  a higher  plane  of  civilization  than  the  natives  and  are  more  industrious.  Among 
them  are  a number  of  skilled  craftsmen,  such  as  carpenters  and  boat- builders,  and  in 
the  latter  occupation  it  is  said  they  excel  the  whites  usually  employed  at  the  canneries. 

In  our  investigations  in  Alaska  we  have  come  in  contact  with  all  the  different 
phases  of  native  life,  from  the  Haida  of  the  south  to  the  Innuit  of  the  north,  from 
the  Athapascan  of  the  east  to  the  Aleut  of  the  west,  and  there  are  few  places  that 
can  equal  Afognak  in  natural  resources  for  native  life.  None  need  suffer  here,  and 
if  any  do  it  is  through  their  own  neglect.  Potatoes  and  the  hardier  vegetables  of 
all  kinds  grow  well  and  can  be  stored  for  winter  use;  hay  can  be  made  for  cattle; 
the  waters  teem  with  fish,  not  only  with  salmon  during  the  summer,  which  may  be 
cured  for  winter  use  in  practically  unlimited  quantities,  but  all  during  the  year  cod 
may  be  taken  in  numbers  on  the  adjacent  banks.  The  furs  are  not  all  gone  yet; 
bear,  fox,  and  mink  are  still  found  in  limited  numbers,  and  the  catch  of  sea  otter 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


246 

tliis  year  has  been  comparatively  large.  As  for  the  means  for  purchasing  other  pro- 
visions and  clothing,  it  is  here  in  the  hands  of  any  industrious  man  or  woman.  There 
is  a great  demand  for  dried  fish — ukala  in  all  the  mining  regions  of  the  north,  prin- 
cipally for  dog  food.  The  stores,  of  which  there  are  two  in  Afognak,  representing 
large  trading  companies,  pay  in  trade  (provisions  and  clothing)  2 cents  per  pound  for 
ukala,  and  will  purchase  all  brought  to  them.  For  the  use  of  the  natives  here  the 
supply  of  salmon  has  not  decreased,  and  there  should  not  be  the  slightest  difficulty 
in  easily  obtaining  in  a short  time  all  that  is  required  for  the  family  during  the  win- 
ter, and  afterwards  ukala  can  be  made  for  sale  or  trade.  We  were  not  at  Afognak 
during  the  redfish  run,  but  it  is  said  that  it  was  very  large;  the  humpbacks  were 
running  at  the  time  of  our  visit,  and  they  were  very  numerous.  It  was  not  necessary 
to  hook  them  out  of  the  stream;  when  wanted  for  examination  we  simply  kicked 
them  out  on  the  bank.  To  show  the  abundance  of  fish,  it  may  be  mentioned  that  the 
ship’s  dog  dragged  many  struggling  ones  out  of  the  water. 

The  women,  assisted  by  the  old  mer  and  children,  usually  prepare  the  ukala  and 
do  the  garden  work,  so  there  is  no  excuse  for  the  able  men  not  seeking  employ- 
ment in  other  fields;  but  the  latter  fancy  that  they  must  hunt,  and  imagine  that  they 
can  do  nothing  else,  or  rather,  that  it  is  degrading  to  work.  In  former  times  hunt- 
ing formed  the  chief  element  of  support,  and  while  the  fur-bearing  animals  have 
not  entirely  passed  away,  their  numbers  have  declined  to  such  an  extent  that  the 
income  derived  from  this  source  can  now  only  be  reckoned  as  incidental.  The  sea- 
otter  hunter  was  an  important  man  in  his  village;  extensive  preparations  were  made 
before  his  departure  and  he  was  feasted  upon  his  return.  He  was  looked  up  to  as  a 
leading  spirit  in  the  locality.  The  sea  otter  is  practically  passing  away,  but  the 
hunter  remains,  and  reports  are  made  that  he  is  starving.  Possibly  he  may  be  short 
of  food  at  times,  but  it  is  because  he  is  not  willing  to  exert  himself;  he  is  a sea-otter 
hunter  in  a sea  that  has  few  left,  and  he  claims  he  can  do  nothing  else. 

There  is  another  field  in  which  the  native  can  earn  sufficient  money  to  provide 
for  himself  and  family  not  only  the  necessities  of  life,  but  many  of  the  comforts  and 
a few  luxuries.  It  is  in  cannery  work.  Frequent  inquiry  has  been  made  at  the  can- 
neries, and  the  repty  has  always  been  to  the  effect  that  they  are  more  than  desirous 
to  employ  all  the  male  population  in  the  surrounding  district,  if  the}’  are  steady  and 
reliable,  and  to  give  such  labor  employment  throughout  the  season.  Quite  a number 
of  the  inhabitants  of  Afognak  are  so  employed,  several  holding  positions  where  skill 
is  required,  but  the  majority  are  shiftless,  stop  work  after  having  earned  a few  dol- 
lars, and  expend  it  in  spirits  if  they  can  get  it.  The  canneries,  however,  do  not  want 
a class  who  can  not  be  depended  upon  in  time  of  need. 

Unskilled  labor  at  the  canneries  commands  from  $1  to  $1.25  per  day  with  good 
board,  and,  as  the  season  in  this  district  is  long,  a reliable  hand  may  earn  from  $125 
to  $150  during  the  summer — more  than  sufficient  to  carry  him  through  the  winter 
very  comfortably  if  he  is  at  all  thrifty.  The  canneries  will  also  purchase  fish  from  the 
natives,  paying  from  $30  to  $35  per  thousand  for  redfish.  The  hatchery  at  Karluk 
is  partly  supplied  with  fish  taken  by  natives,  and  the  superintendent  states  that  two 
men  on  one  occasion,  in  one  day,  made $15  each;  this  was,  of  course,  very  exceptional. 
At  one  cannery  no  cash  is  paid  until  the  cannery  is  closed;  this  is  done  to  hold  the 
natives  and  prevent  them  from  leaving  as  soon  as  they  have  earned  a little  money. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


247 


The,  native  conditions  here  are  similar  to  those  of  all  other  localities  visited. 
The  native  is  naturally  indolent  and  improvident.  In  former  times  he  lived  in  his 
crude  way  by  hunting  and  fishing,  with  a feast  thrown  in  when  a dead  whale  drifted 
to  his  shores.  Civilization  has  brought  new  wants,  to  supply  which  he  is  unwilling 
to  exert  himself,  so  he  cries  starvation,  in  which  he  is  supported  and  badly  advised  by 
white  squawmen  who  settle  among  them  and  eke  out  an  easy,  shiftless  existence. 

Reports  are  frequently  circulated  by  people  who  do  not  understand  the  situation, 
or,  understanding  it,  willfully  misrepresent  it,  implying  that  the  canneries  are  a 
detriment  to  the  native  population;  that  they  are  taking  away  the  food  and  that 
starvation  must  follow.  From  my  experience  in  Alaska,  in  connection  with  the 
salmon  question,  it  may  be  said  that  up  to  the  present  time  1 have  found  no  truth  in 
these  reports.  The  canneries  have  not,  so  far,  in  any  locality  reduced  the  salmon  so  as 
to  affect  the  native’s  winter  supply;  instead  of  working  an  injury,  they  have  been,  and 
are,  a benefit  to  him.  They  bring  to  him  better  methods  for  obtaining  his  fish,  and, 
that  which  is  of  more  importance,  they  bring  money  to  all  who  are  willing  to  work. 
Were  the  canneries  to  close  to-day  the  native  would  be  the  principal  sufferer. 

Judging  from  the  appearance  of  the  village  at  Afognak,  and  comparing  it  with 
other  native  communities  in  Alaska,  there  seems  to  lie  little  cause  for  complaint. 
The  village  has  rather  a neat  and  thrifty  appearance,  the  log  and  frame  houses  have 
a substantial  air,  there  are  many  gardens  growing  potatoes  and  other  truck,  pigs  and 
poultry  seem  to  thrive,  and  several  families  have  one  or  two  cows.  The  children 
seen  in  the  village  appeared  bright,  clean,  strong,  and  always  well  clad. 

One  of  the  principal  half-breeds  said  that  while  there  was  no  large  amount  of 
money  in  circulation  and  few  were  prosperous,  still  none  were  destitute  nor  in  danger 
of  becoming  so.  It  may  be  remarked  here  that  many  of  the  natives  in  this  district, 
and  to  the  westward,  died  during  the  past  winter  with  a disease  believed  by  some  to 
be  grip.  It  is  said  that  at  Little  Afognak  nearly  all  succumbed. 

The  half-breeds  and  natives  of  Afognak,  according  to  their  own  custom,  have 
three  recognized  districts  for  hunting  and  fishing.  The  half-breeds  of  the  village  fish 
and  hunt  the  northwestern  section  of  the  island,  drained  by  the  streams  named  Malinof 
and  Paramanof;  the  natives  of  the  village  have  the  southern  end  of  the  island,  which 
includes  the  reservation  stream  and  extends  to  the  western  shore  of  Little  Afognak 
Bay;  the  inhabitants  of  the  latter  place  claim  the  island  to  the  eastward  of  their  settle- 
ment, and  Marmot  Island.  These  districts  are  again  subdivided  among  the.  different 
families  for  hunting  purposes,  while  the  streams  are  open  to  all  belonging  to  the  dis- 
trict. These  limits  are  accepted  by  all  the  inhabitants,  and  the  intrusion  of  any 
alien  is  considered  an  abuse  of  their  customs.  It  is  natural,  therefore,  that  they 
resent  the  fishing-  of  the  Afognak  streams  by  the  canneries,  nor  can  they  understand 
how  these  streams,  which  belong  to  them  by  tribal  rights,  can  be  closed  by  the  Gov- 
ernment. The  situation  here  is  the  same  as  it  is  in  southeastern  Alaska — the  native 
sees  the  value  of  the  fish  to  the  eannervman,  and  he  wants  the  streams,  not  for  his 
own  use  entirely,  but  to  sell  the  fish  to  the  canneries.  In  other  words,  be  wants  to 
own  the  streams  and  bar  out  the  canneries,  which  is  clearly  untenable.  To  the 
appeal  of  the  natives  has  been  added  that  of  the  white  men  of  the  district. 

The  village  of  Afognak  contains  a number  of  whites,  nearly  all  Scandinavians, 
married  to  half-breeds  or  natives  or  living  with  them,  nearly  all  working  in  canneries 


248 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNTTED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


during  the  summer  and  finding  life  rather  eas}r  during  the  winter.  These  people  l 
have  organized  themselves  into  an  association  under  the  name  of  the  Brotherhood  of 
Afognak  Pioneers  and  have  taken  upon  themselves  the  regulation  of  municipal  affairs. 

In  the  salmon  inspector’s  report  for  1899,  page  47,  there  is  an  appeal  addressed 
to  the  inspector  to  the  effect  that,  as  the  streams  of  Afognak  are  closed,  they  are 
“ unable  to  obtain  a living”  and  request  the  “permission  of  the  Treasury  Department 
to  fish  the  streams  of  Afognak  Islands.”  This  appeal  has  23  names,  the  nationality 
of  which  may  easily  be  recognized.  Inquiry  was  made  in  reference  to  the  signers, 
and  it  was  learned  that  they  all  belonged  to  the  brotherhood.  One  is  dead  ; 1 was 
injured  while  hunting,  but  does  some  work;  2 are  Russian  residents;  3 are  store- 
keepers and  well-to-do,  and  the  remaining  10  are  employed  in  the  canneries  and  fish- 
eries, some  in  leading  positions,  such  as  master  of  cannery  steamer,  foreman  of 
working  gang,  watchman,  etc.  Further  comment  is  unnecessary,  as  it  is  evident  the 
white  population  desire  to  have  the  exclusive  use  of  the  Afognak  streams,  so  they 
may  sell  fish  to  the  canneries. 

In  concluding  these  remarks  on  the  conditions  at  Afognak  as  they  appeared  tome, 
it  is  my  desire  to  say  that  my  sympathies  are  entirely  with  the  natives,  and  were  it 
possible  to  make  any  recommendations  for  their  benefit,  such  would  be  made;  it  can 
only  be  asked  that  whatever  legislation  is  effected  a fair  balance  may  be  cast  in  their 
favor.  We  should  not  ask  too  much  from  a people  who  have  for  centuries  lived  on 
the  resources  which  nature  alone  has  offered  and  who  now  emerge  upon  a destructive 
civilization  which  holds  them  probably  in  a worse  condition  than  in  former  times 
when  they  were  a more  primitive  people.  The  rich  furs  which  they  formerly  poured 
into  the.  laps  of  the  traders,  and  for  which  they  received  food  and  a few  necessities, 
are  gone,  and  the  fur-trader  is  also  going,  for  lie  can  no  longer  fill  his  coffers  with 
the  catch  of  the  grub-staked  hunter.  The  first  stage  of  the  native’s  life  here  is  over; 
he  is  now  upon  the  second,  marked  on  the  one  hand  by  the  influence  of  vicious  white 
men  and  on  the  other  by  the  kind  and  gentle  teachings  and  example  of  a people  who 
sacrifice  themselves  for  the  native  interests,  but  whom  they  usually  do  not  understand. 

If  he  survives  these  two  directly  opposite  influences,  he  may  become  a good  citizen. 

It  has  been  my  experience,  however,  that  in  all  parts  of  the  world  among  primitive 
people  the  second  stage  is  deadly,  and  that  what  might  be  called  a refined  civilization 
thrust  upon  a native  race  kills  as  many  as  the  more  vicious  condition. 

From  Afognak  the  Albatross  went  directly  to  Southeast  Alaska,  to  continue  the 
stream  and  lake  investigations  commenced  in  1897. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


249 


COOK  INLET. 

Alaska  Salmon  Association . — In  the  Cook  Inlet  district  but  one  new  cannery  has 
been  established;  it  is  that  of  the  Alaska  Salmon  Association,  which  was  incorporated 
in  San  Francisco.  This  company,  in  1899,  purchased  the  C.  D.  Ladd  saltery  on  the 
left  bank  and  at  the  mouth  of  the  Chuitna  River,  Cook  Inlet,  a good-sized  stream 
entering  the  northern  shore  of  the  inlet  about  6 miles  above  Tyonek.  In  the  spring 
of  1900  this  company  erected  a cannery  on  the  site  of  the  Ladd  saltery  and  made  a 
small  hand-pack.  The  cannery  machinery  consists  of  3 retorts,  1 solderer,  1 Columbia 
River  washer,  1 cutter,  and  the  necessary  equipment  for  making  cans  by  hand. 

The  capacity  of  the  cannery  is  500  cases  per  day,  but  next  year  (1901)  2 tillers 
and  a topper  will  be  installed,  which,  with  the  necessary  hands,  should  increase  it  to 
1,600  cases  per  day.  The  tin  plate  used  is  100-pound  domestic.  Fish  are  pewed  to 
the  tish  wharf  and  after  cleaning  are  conveyed  to  the  cannery. 

The  Chinese  contract  was  45  cents  per  case,  with  the  usual  conditions.  The 
fishermen  received  $25  per  month  from  the  time  engaged  at  San  Francisco  until  paid 
off,  and  one-half  cent  each  per  case.  The  sailors  were  paid  $40  per  month  when 
working  the  vessel  and  $50  per  month  when  fishing,  but  no  bonus.  Full  board  was 
furnished  for  all  except  the  Chinese. 

The  following  men  were  employed:  Thirty-nine  white  fishermen  and  trap  men, 
4 white  cannery  men,  12  white  beachmen,  and  51  Chinese.  The  cannery  used  4 traps; 
leads  100  fathoms,  wings  40  fathoms,  pots  40  feet  by  40  feet,  all  6 fathoms  deep; 
leads,  3£-inch  mesh,  48  thread;  wings  and  pots,  3-inch  mesh,  60  thread;  value,  $1,500 
each.  One  drag  seine  150  fathoms  long,  5 fathoms  deep,  3-inch  mesh,  value  $1.65 
per  fathom.  Sixty  gill  nets,  each  65  fathoms  long,  30  meshes  deep,  one-third  of 
them  9-inch  mesh,  one-third  64-inch  mesh,  and  one-third  5f-inch  mesh;  value,  65 
cents  per  fathom.  The  traps  were  located  early  in  the  season,  as  follows:  One  near 
Tyonek,  one  between  that  place  and  Chuitna,  one  at  the  mouth  of  the  home  river, 
and  one  about  3 miles  to  the  eastward.  Heavy  winds  and  strong  currents  demolished 
all  these  traps,  except  the  one  near  Tyonek,  before  fishing  began,  and  the  latter  was 
only  saved  by  hard  labor,  which  the  catch  did  not  justify.  About  10  per  cent  of  the 
catch  was  taken  in  traps,  the  remainder  in  gill  nets. 

The  boats  consisted  of  4 scows,  $250  each;  2 lighters,  $150  each;  1 lighter,  $50; 
20  gill-net  skiff's,  $40  each;  5 old  skiff's,  $30  each;  1 yawl.  $40;  1 pile-driver,  $1,150. 

The  vessels  employed  were:  Bark  Prussia , 1,131  tons,  crew  fishermen,  value 
$25,000,  chartered;  launch  King  Fisher , 7 tons,  crew  3,  value  $5,500,  owned. 

The  following  was  the  output  for  the  season: 


Species. 

Cases. 

No.  to 
the 
case. 

Dates. 

King  salmon: 

Red 

1 326 

2 92 2 
3,  640 

5 

12 

3.5 

3.5 

12 

June  10-July  2. 
Do. 

July  1-Aug.  9. 

White 

1 Flats.  2 Tails.  3 Salted  44  barrels  of  redfish  and  3 barrels  of  humpbacks. 


250 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Company's  cannery  at  Kenai , Cook  Inlet. — Reference  was 
made  to  this  cannery  in  my  former  report,  page  141.  The  buildings  were  erected  in 
1897  near  the  cannery  of  the  Northern  Packing  Company,  and  the  available  machinery 
from  the  cannery  at  Coquenhena,  in  the  Copper  River  delta,  was  installed  here  in  the 
spring  of  1898.  The  first  pack  was  made  that  year. 

The  following  cannery  machinery  is  used:  Two  retorts,  4 steam  boxes,  1 filler, 
1 solderer,  and  1 cutter;  topping  is  done  by  hand.  Fish  are  hoisted  in  buckets  by 
steam  to  the  fish-house,  and  when  cleaned  are  conveyed  by  carts  to  the  cannery. 

All  the  tins  are  made  at  the  cannery  by  hand;  100-pound  tin  plate  is  used  for  the 
bodies  and  tops;  46  per  cent  of  the  plate  is  imported. 

In  1900  the  following  hands  were  employed:  40  white  and  10  native  fishermen, 
6 white  cannery -hands,  6 natives,  and  60  Chinese. 

They  used  5 traps,  averaging  1,000  feet  length  of  lead,  240  feet  length  of  curved 
wing,  30  feet  by  30  feet  pot,  value  $500  each;  20  gill  nets  for  king  salmon,  each  60 
fathoms  long,  22  meshes  deep,  9±*inch  mesh,  value  65  cents  per  fathom,  and  20  gill 
nets  for  redlish,  each  60  fathoms  long,  30  meshes  deep,  6-inch  mesh,  value  65  cents 
per  fathom. 

The  following  boats  were  used:  Seven  lighters,  $350  each;  20  gill-net  boats,  $40 
each;  1 seine  boat,  $100;  3 skiffs,  $25  each;  2 pile-drivers,  $1,500  each. 

The  following  vessels  (owned)  were  employed:  Gasoline  Duxbury , 30  tons,  crew 
5,  value  $10,000;  steamer  Salmo,  28  tons,  crew  6,  value  $10,000.  Transportation  by 
calling  vessel  of  company. 

The  output  in  1900  was: 


Species. 

Cases. 

No.  to 
the  case. 

Dates. 

King  salmon 

2, 400 

2.7 

June  1-July  10 

Redfish 

20, 924 

13 

June-Aug.  10 

Cohoes  

1,765 

8.1 

July  1-Aug.  10 

The  Chinese  contract  was  42  cents  per  case.  Fishermen  received  transportation 
and  board  and  1 cent  each  per  case. 

Arctic  Fishing  Company. — The  cannery  of  this  company  at  Kussilof,  Cook 
Inlet,  was  fully  described,  together  with  the  surrounding  conditions,  in  my  former 
report,  pages  142-143,  and  the  statistics  for  1900  only  will  be  referred  to  here. 

This  company  employed  the  following  hands  in  1900:  Forty-five  white  fishermen, 
10  native  fishermen,  10  white  cannery-hands,  and  100  Chinese.  Eight  traps  were 
used,  with  leads  from  100  to  700  feet  long,  pots  30  feet  by  30  feet,  depth  at  pots  30  feet, 
average  value  $1,000;  30  king-salmon  gill  nets  each  60  fathoms  long,  22  meshes  deep, 
9£-inch  mesh;  30  redfish  gill  nets,  each  60  fathoms  long,  28  meshes  deep,  6£-inch  mesh, 
value  65  cents  per  fathom.  There  were  used  3 sail  lighters,  $450  each;  7 trap  scows, 
$50  each;  20  gill-net  boats,  $40  each;  2 Columbia  River  boats,  $200  each;  6 skiffs, 
$30  each;  2 pile-drivers,  $1,500  each. 

The  machinery  consisted  of  6 retorts,  2 tillers,  2 toppers,  1 solderer,  1 cutter, 
and  1 can-maker;  75  per  cent  of  the  tins  are  made  at  the  cannery  of  100-pound  tin 
plate,  60  per  cent  of  which  material  is  imported.  Fish  are  hoisted  in  tubs  to  the 
fish-house  by  steam  and,  when  cleaned,  are  conveyed  in  cars  to  the  cannery. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


251 


The  Chinese  contract  was  45  cents  per  case,  with  the  usual  conditions.  The 
fishermen  received  $50  for  the  run  and  1 cent  per  case,  with  full  board. 

The  following-  vessels  (owned)  were  employed: 


Class  and  name. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

Ship  Centennial  

1,138 

Fishermen. 

#30, 000 

Steamer  Jennie 

69 

G 

30,  001) 

Steamer  Reporter 

26 

3 

10,000 

Launch  Arthur 

5 

2 

1,800 

The  following-  was  the  output  in  1900p 


Species. 

Cases. 

No.  to 
the  case. 

Dates. 

King  salmon 

6,169 

3 

May  26-Aug.  10 

Redfish  

22, 185 

13 

May  28- Aug.  12 

Cohoes 

5,  427 

12 

July  15-Aug.  12 

PRINCE  WILLIAM  SOUND  AND  COPPER  RIVER. 

This  district,  with  the  canneries,  was  fully  described  in  my  former  report,  pages 
129-139.  Since  then  the  cannery  at  Coquenhena  has  made  one  more  pilgrimage. 
It  was  dismantled  in  1897,  and,  as  previously  noted,  the  available  machinery  was 
installed  in  the  Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Company’s  cannery  at  Kenai,  Cook  Inlet. 

The  Pacific  Packing  Company , at  Odiak,  for  the  season  of  1900  employed  1 doctor, 
60  white  fishermen,  10  white  cannery  and  beach  hands,  6 natives,  and  60  Chinese. 
It  had  1 drag  seine  250  fathoms  long,  120  meshes  deep,  2^-inch  mesh;  value,  $1.50  per 
fathom;  38  gill  nets,  each  350  fathoms  long,  30  meshes  deep,  6^-inch  mesh;  value,  65 
cents  per  fathom.  The  boats  were  2 lighters,  $400  each;  3 house  scows,  $400  each; 
33  Columbia  River  boats,  $200  each;  2 seine  boats,  $200  each;  6 skiffs,  $25  each. 

The  following  vessels  were  employed: 


Class  and  name. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

Owned  or 
chartered. 

Bark  Kate  Davenport 

1,175 

(') 

$10, 000 

Chartered. 

Steamer  Pacific 

31 

6 

15, 000 

Owned. 

Steamer  S.  B.  Matthews 

164 

G 

14,000 

Do. 

Steamer  Susanna 

18 

4 

8,000 

Do. 

1 Fishermen. 


The  following  was  the  output  of  canned  salmon  in  1900,  none  being  salted: 


Species. 

Cases. 

No.  to 
the  case. 

Date. 

King  salmon 

473 

4^ 

May  9-June  12 

Redfish 

35,049 

m 

May  9-Aug.  4 

Humpbacks 

3,888 

■m 

July  6-Aug.  2 

The  Chinese  contract  was  42  cents,  with  the  usual  conditions.  The  fishermen 
received  $60  for  the  run  and  4 cents  per  boat  of  two  men  for  redfish,  10  cents  for 
king,  and  $10  per  thousand  for  humpbacks,  with  full  board. 


252 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The  cannery  machinery  consists  of  8 retorts,  2 fillers,  2 toppers,  2 solderers,  and 
1 cutter.  The  tins  are  all  made  at  the  cannery,  by  hand,  of  100-pound  domestic  plate 
for  bodies  and  95-pound  tin  for  tops. 

The  fish  are  pewed  to  the  fish -house  and,  after  cleaning,  are  conveyed  by  cars  to 
the  cannery. 

The  Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Company , at  Orca,  employed,  in  1900,  60  white  fisher- 
men, 13  white  cannery-hands,  2 natives,  and  60  Chinese. 

They  used  2 drag  seines,  each  120  fathoms  long,  40  meshes  deep,  3-inch  mesh; 
value,  $1.50  per  fathom;  30  gill  nets,  400  fathoms  long,  28  meshes  deep,  6 to  6£  inches 
mesh.  The  boats  used  were  5 house  scows,  $400  each;  30  Columbia  River  boats,  $200 
each;  2 seine  boats,  $200  each;  8 skill's,  $25  each;  1 pile-driver,  $200. 

The  following  vessels  were  employed: 


Class  and  name. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

Owned  or 
chartered. 

Ship  America 

1,908 

(9 

S55, 000 

Chartered. 

Steamer  Thlinket 

90 

4 

10.  000 

Owned. 

Steamer  Wild  Cat 

104 

4 

10, 000 

Do. 

1 Fishermen. 


The  following  was  the  canned  output  in  1900,  none  being  salted: 


Species. 

Cases. 

No.  to 
the  case. 

Date. 

Kin?  salmon 

369 

4.2 

May  7-.Tune  7 

Redfish  

28, 501 

12 

May  7-July  22 

Humpbacks 

1,718 

28 

July  20-July  24 

The  Chinese  contract  was  42  cents  per  case,  with  the  usual  conditions.  The 
fishermen  received  $15  per  month  throughout  the  season,  full  board  and  transporta- 
tion, and  4 cents  per  boat  for  redrish,  10  cents  for  king  salmon,  and  $5  per  thousand 
for  humpbacks. 

The  cannery  machinery  consists  of  4 steam  boxes,  2 retorts,  1 filler,  1 solderer,  and 
1 cutter.  Fish  are  pewed  to  the  fish-house  and,  after  cleaning,  are  passed  directly 
to  the  cutter  from  the  draining  tubs.  They  use  100-pound  tin  plate  for  bodies  and 
tops,  all  imported.  All  the  tins  are  made  at  the  cannery. 

The  redfish  used  in  these  canneries  are  nearly  all  taken  from  the  Copper  River 
delta.  All  the  humpbacks  and  a few  redfish  come  from  the  Prince  William  Sound 
streams.  A description  of  the  locality,  time  of  runs,  and  other  information  is  given 
in  my  former  report. 


SHOWING  NATIVE  FISHING  PLATFORMS  IN  CURRENT. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  252.) 


Plate  XXIII 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


253 


SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA. 

Since  my  former  report  eight  new  canneries  have  been  built  in  this  district,  one 
of  which  made  its  first  pack  in  1899  and  the  remainder  during  the  present  season 
(1900).  During  the  same  period  one  has  been  dismantled,  that  of  the  Baranof 
Packing  Company  at  Reclfish  Bay,  which  was  sold  to  the  Alaska  Packers  Association 
and  moved  to  the  Egagak,  and  one  was  in  course  of  construction,  in  1900,  at  Bartlett 
Bay,  which  will  be  operated  in  1901.  The  season  of  1901  promises  to  see  many  new 
canneries  in  Alaska,  a number  of  which  will  locate  in  this  district. 

Western  Fisheries  Company.  — A company  under  this  title,  organized  at  Portland, 
Oreg. , built  a cannery  in  the  spring  of  1900  at  the  head  of  Dundas  Bay,  which  is  on 
the  northern  side  of  the  junction  of  Cross  Sound  and  Icy  Straits.  The  cannery  is  one 
of  the  smaller  ones  and  has  a capacity  of  300  cases  per  day,  made  largely  by  hand. 

In  1900  this  cannery  employed  9 white  fishermen,  26  native  fishermen,  5 white 
cannery-hands,  20  native  men,  6 native  women,  and  30  Chinese.  The  record  of  the 
native  men  includes  those  to  whom  gear  was  furnished  and  from  whom  the  catch 
was  purchased.  They  used  one  purse  seine  150  fathoms  long;  6 drag  seines — length, 
2 of  110  fathoms,  1 of  100  fathoms,  1 of  80  fathoms,  1 of  60  fathoms,  and  1 of  50 
fathoms — valued  at  $1.50  per  fathom;  -1  gill  nets  of  150  fathoms  each,  valued  at  65 
cents  per  fathom.  There  was  1 lighter,  $250;  5 seine  boats,  $75  each;  1 gill-net 
boats,  $50  each;  2 Columbia  River  boats,  $100  each;  1 dory,  $50;  1 skiff,  $50. 

The  transportation  was  by  regular  freight  steamers.  The  following  cannery 
steamers  were  used:  Steam  tug  Favorite , 7 tons,  crew  3,  value  $2,000,  chartered; 
steam  tug  Beaver , 19  tons,  crew  5,  value  $5,500,  owned. 

The  following  was  the  output  in  1900,  none  being  salted: 


Species. 

Cases. 

Number  to 
the  case. 

Date. 

Kins  salmon 

60 

4.5 

Sept.  1-Sept.  30 

Redfish 

r>,  i3o 

8 to  12 

June28-Aug.  25 

Cohoes 

977 

7.5 

July  30-Sept.  20 

Humpbacks 

1 , 866 

18  - 

July  10-Aug.  10 

Dog  salmon 

4,760 

6. 5 

.July  15-Sept.  20 

The  Chinese  contract  was  38  cents  for  1-pound  tails,  40  cents  for  half-pound 
fiats,  and  42  cents  for  1-pound  fiats,  with  the  usual  conditions.  The  white  fishermen 
received  $40  to  $60  per  month,  with  transportation  and  board.  Fish  were  purchased 
at  the  following  rates:  King  salmon,  10  cents;  cohoes,  6 cents;  redfish,  5 cents;  dog- 
salmon,  2 cents;  humpbacks,  1 cent. 

The  following  are  the  numbers  of  fish  taken  and  the  localities  where  found: 
275  king  salmon  off'  Hooniah;  66,901  redfish  in  Dundas  Bay,  Taylor  Bay,  Surge  Bay, 
Cape  Spencer,  Thakanis  Bay,  Soapstone  Point,  Excursion  Inlet,  and  Glacier  Bay; 
8,596  cohoes,  scattering  on  the  redfish  grounds;  35,383  humpbacks  at  Port  Althrop, 
Soapstone  Point,  and  Excursion  Inlet,  and  29,803  dog  salmon  in  Dundas  Bay. 

Pyramid  Harbor  Packing  Company. — This  cannery,  the  fisheries,  and  the  general 
locality  were  described  in  my  former  report,  pages  125  to  128,  so  that  only  the 
statistics  for  1900,  together  with  references  to  features  omitted  or  changes  made, 
will  be  given  here.  The  canning  machinery  consists  of  6 retorts,  2 fillers  and  1 


254 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


spare  one,  2 toppers,  2 solderers,  1 cutter,  and  1 can-making  set.  All  tins  are  made 
at  the  cannery  of  100-pound  tin  plate  for  bodies  and  95-pound  for  tops;  60  per  cent 
of  the  plate  is  imported.  It  has  a daily  capacity  of  1,600  cases,  but  this  amount  is 
rarely  attained.  The  pack  of  this  cannery  is  the  choicest  in  Alaska;  it  is  mostly  for 
export,  is  made  with  great  care,  and  has  only  about  ^ per  cent  of  do-overs.  It  is 
very  clean  and  free  from  the  unpleasant  odors  noticed  in  many  packing  houses. 

The  fish  are  pewed  from  boats  to  a car  operated  by  a cable  and  steam,  traveling 
on  an  inclined  plane  from  the  water’s  edge  to  the  fish-house,  and  the  cleaned  fish  are 
passed  from  the  draining  tubs  direct  to  the  cutter.  The  gurry  is  carried  with  a 
stream  of  water  in  a wide  trough  under  the  fish-house  into  the  bay.  The  Chinese 
contract  was  424  cents  for  machine-filled  cans,  with  the  usual  conditions.  The  boss 
received  $50  a month  and  his  lay,  and  the  tester  $250  for  the  season.  The  fishermen 
had  $50  for  the  run  and  4 cents  per  fish  for  each  boat  of  two  men  and  t'ldl  board. 
About  ten  natives  were  employed  as  boat-pullers,  who  shared  in  the  gill-net  catch. 
Klootchmen  employed  in  the  cannery  received  $1.25  per  day. 

The  cannery  purchased  fish  from  about  224  Chilkat  and  Chilkoot  Indians,  paying 
10  cents  for  redfish,  though  formerly  6 and  8 cents  were  paid.  The  Chilkats  deliv- 
ered at  the  cannery,  while  the  cannery  steamers  called  for  the  Chilkoot  fish. 

The  following  redfish  were  delivered  by  the  Chilkat  Indians:  In  1898,  11,156 
during  August;  in  1899,  from  July  19th  to  August  31st,  21,000;  in  1900,  from  July 
25th  to  September  1st,  47,967. 

By  the  Chilkoot  Indians:  In  1898,  July  12th  to  August  22d,  99,660;  in  1899,  from 
July  10th  to  August  13th,  148,896;  in  1900,  from  July  12th  to  August  22d,  169,107. 

The  cannery  obtains  its  fish  from  Chilkat  and  Chilkoot  inlets  and  rivers  and 
from  Taku  Inlet.  King  salmon  run  at  Taku  from  May  25  to  June  30;  at  Chilkat, 
from  June  10  to  July  10,  but  they  are  not  abundant.  A few  straggling  redfish 
appear  at  Chilkat  about  June  20,  but  the}7  are  not  found  in  large  numbers  until  the 
last  of  June  or  early  in  July.  They  are  plentiful  then  until  the  middle  of  August 
and  straggle  with  cohoes  until  the  last  of  September.  The  run  in  Chilkoot  begins 
earlier  and  closes  earlier  than  in  the  Chilkat.  (In  my  former  report  the  names 
became  transposed  and  this  was  wrongly  stated  on  page  128.)  A good  run  for  about 
forty- five  days  is  usually  looked  for.  The  redfish  are  called  sock-eye,  the  name 
used  for  this  species  in  Puget  Sound  and  on  the  Columbia;  and  it  was  noticed  that 
with  the  advent  of  canneries  backed  by  capital  from  that  district  the  name  sock-eye 
is  becoming  more  common  in  Alaska.  Cohoes  are  called  kluks,  which  is  the  Indian 
name  and  the  same  as  that  used  at  Killisnoo.  They  run  in  Chilkat  Inlet  from  about 
the  middle  of  August  to  early  in  October,  possibly  later,  and  are  quite  abundant 
in  September.  There  are  very  few  humpbacks  in  Chilkat,  but  it  is  said  that  they 
are  quite  abundant  in  Chilkoot.  Dog  salmon  straggle  through  the  season  and  some 
years  are  abundant  in  September. 

The  pack  of  this  cannery  is  in  redfish;  the  king  salmon  and  eohoesare  incidental 
and  the  humpbacks  and  dog  salmon  are  not  used.  The  first  steel  head  ever  seen  in 
this  locality  was  taken  this  year.  The  only  sturgeon  ever  seen  was  mentioned  in  my 
former  report.  No  shad  have  been  seen.  There  are  many  Dolly  Yarden  trout  and 
some  veiy  large  halibut.  The  cannery  uses  gill  nets  exclusively,  while  the  Indians 
fish  the  rivers  with  gall's  and  nets,  the  latter  about  60  fathoms  long. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


255 


The  following  are  the  .statistics  of  the  Pyramid  Harbor  cannery  for  1900: 

Hands  employed:  92  white  and  10  native  fishermen;  22-1  natives  from  whom 
fish  were  purchased;  12  white  cannery-hands,  16  Klootchmen,  and  86  Chinese. 

Fishing  gear:  56  gill  nets  for  redfish,  each  300  fathoms  long,  28  meshes  deep. 
6^-inch  mesh;  11  gill  nets  for  king  salmon,  each  180  fathoms  long,  30  meshes  deep. 
8^-inch  mesh. 

Boats,  lighters,  etc.:  Three  lighters,  $100  each;  56  Columbia  River  boats,  $200 
each;  3 skiffs,  $25  each,  and  1 pile-driver,  $1,000. 

The  following  vessels  (owned)  were  employed  in  1900:  Steamer  Elsie , 37  tons, 
crew  1,  value  $16,000;  ship  Two  Brothers , 1,263  tons,  crew  fishermen,  value  $35,000. 
The  following  was  the  1900  output: 


Species. 

( 'ases. 

No.  to 
the 
ease. 

Date. 

King  salmon: 

Red 

i 2, 255 

3. 5 

Mav  29-June  30. 

White 

-977 

3. 5 

1 >o. 

Redfish  

51.856 

11 

July  9-Sept.  1. 

Cohoes 

513 

7.5 

Aug.  20-Sept.  1. 

1 Flats.  5Talls. 


CHILKOOT  INLET. 

Chilkoot  Inlet  is  the  arm  at  the  head  of  Lynn  Canal  east  of  Chilkat  and  is  sepa- 
rated from  that  inlet  by  a long,  narrow  peninsula  terminating  in  Seduction  Point. 

Chilkoot  Packing  Company. — At  the  head  of  Chilkoot  Inlet  is  the  cannery  of 
the  Chilkoot  Packing  Company,  organized  at  Aberdeen,  Wash.,  with  a capital  of 
$20,000.  This  company  built  their  cannery  in  April,  1900,  at  the  head  of  the  inlet, 
on  the  northern  shore,  in  a small  bend  immediately  outside  of  the  line  where  the  river 
flats  impinge  upon  the  shore  line.  The  promoters  of  this  cannery  formerly  owned  a 
cannery  at  Grays  Harbor,  Washington. 

The  Chilkoot  cannery  in  1900  had  a daily  capacity  of  200  cases,  but  this  might  be 
doubled.  The  plant  consists  of  2 steam  boxes,  2 retorts,  1 soldering  machine,  and 
1 cutter.  It  is  one  of  the  smaller  canneries  and  makes  a hand  pack.  For  the  season 
of  1901  they  expect  to  have  fillers  and  toppers  in  operation. 

Nine  thousand  cases  of  cans  were  made  by  hand  at  the  cannery  and  the  rest  were 
purchased;  95-pound  tin  plate  was  used,  all  domestic.  Fish  are  pewed  from  boats 
to  fish-house  and  when  cleaned  are  carried  to  the  cannery  on  a conveyer  of  an  endless 
chain  of  buckets.  Transportation  is  by  regular  freight  steamers. 

The  Chinese  contract  was  42£  cents,  with  the  usual  conditions.  Fishermen 
received  $25  per  month  from  the  time  of  departure  from  Puget  Sound  to  date  of 
return,  with  full  board,  transportation,  and  5 cents  for  each  redfish  per  boat  of  two 
men.  The  cannery  paid  the  Indians  10  cents  for  redfish  taken  with  their  own  gear 
and  8 cents  for  redfish  taken  with  cannery  boats  and  gear. 

They  used  seines  and  gill  nets  and  fished  from  the  head  of  the  iidet  to  Haines 
Mission  for  redfish  and  in  Berners  Bay  for  cohoes  and  dog  salmon,  though  all  the 
species  occur  in  the  inlet;  scattering  king  salmon  sometimes  appear.  A few  redfish 
have  been  seen  as  early  as  June  15.  Trout  are  abundant  and  halibut  and  flounders 
are  not  uncommon.  The  Chilkoot  redfish  run  quite  large.  We  weighed  33  taken 


256 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


in  the  ship’s  seine,  and  they  averaged  8£  pounds;  30  from  the  cannery  bin  averaged 
7j  pounds.  The  following  record  of  steelheads  may  be  of  interest:  August  20, 

1 steelhead;  August  25,  3 steelheads,  length  28  inches,  weight  91  pounds;  August  26, 

2 steelheads,  length  28  and  32  inches,  weight  10  and  134  pounds;  August  29,  3 steel- 
heads. length  26,  28,  and  31  inches,  weight  94,  104,  and  134  pounds;  September  -1, 
•1  steelheads;  September  8,  2 steelheads. 

In  1900  the  cannery  employed  2d  white  and  8 native  fishermen  and  purchased 
from  16  natives;  9 white  cannery-hands,  IT  natives,  and  28  Chinese. 

It  used  1 purse  seine,  160  fathoms  by  20  fathoms,  3f-inch  mesh,  value  $1,400; 
16  gill  nets,  each  270  fathoms  long,  25  meshes  deep,  64-inch  mesh,  value  65  cents 
per  fathom;  2 Columbia  River  boats,  $90  each,  and  1 skiff,  $25. 

The  following  cannery  steamers  were  used:  Steamer  Estella , 20  tons,  crew  3, 
value  $3,500,  owned;  launch  ./.  R.  Robert *,  9 tons,  crew  2,  value  $3,000,  chartered. 
The  following  was  the  output  of  canned  salmon,  none  being  salted: 


[Half-pound  tins  are  packed  in  cases  of  48  tins,  but  are  reckoned  in  cases  of  48  pounds.] 


Species. 

Cases. 

No.  to 

the  | Date, 

case.  | 

[ '9,022 
- - 4, 098 

y 828 
f 1 574 

I :1 170 

1 158 

|-  8.  3 j j J u 1 1 e 30-Se j > t . 7 . 

8 jsept.  7-Sept.  In. 

8 Sept.  10-Sept.  25. 

1 One-pound  (alls.  2 One-pound  flats.  y One-half  pound  flats. 


CII  ILK  GOT  RIVER  AND  LAKE. 

The  northwestern  end  of  Chilkoot  Inlet  terminates  in  a narrowing,  V -shaped 
indentation,  which  receives  at  its  head  the  waters  of  Chilkoot  River.  The  indentation 
is  about  one-half  mile  wide  at  the  outer  end  by  three-fourths  mile  in  length,  and  at 
low  water  is  an  uncovered  flat,  with  a shallow  boat  channel  meandering  through  it, 
which  carries  the  river  discharge.  At  the  apex  of  the  V is  the  river  mouth,  which 
at  this  point  is  contracted  to  about  100  feet  by  a point  making  from  the  western  shore. 
Within  the  point  is  a tidal  basin  about  100  yards  wide  and  one-fourth  mile  long, 
which  extends  to  the  foot  of  the  rapids  at  the  head  of  tide  water.  From  here  the 
stream  first  curves  gently  to  the  northward  and  then  to  the  westward  until  it  reaches 
the  lake,  three-fourths  mile  distant,  having  an  average  width  of  about  125  feet.  With 
the  exception  of  a length  of  about  one-fourth  mile  from  the  lake,  where,  however, 
the  current  flows  with  considerable  velocity,  the  entire  river  from  tide  water  is  a 
rapid  of  gentle  fall.  At  the  middle  of  this  length,  on  the  western  shore,  is  a summer 
village  of  Chilkoot  Indians,  who  fish  the  stream  and,  it  is  said,  the  lake  also. 

The  bottom  of  the  stream  is  rocky  and  bowldery.  The  right  bank  is  steep  to  a 
narrow  grassy  shelf  which  merges  into  rolling,  densely  wooded  hills;  the  left  bank 
is  steep  and  wooded,  with  grassy  recesses,  and  rises  rapidly  to  the  precipitous  moun- 
tain masses.  The  rapids  are  all  staked  off,  each  stake  indicating  the  fishing-place 
allotted  to  an  Indian  family,  which  is  handed  down  from  one  generation  to  another 
and  jealously  guarded  against  intruders.  During  the  fishing  season  the  Indians  build 
platforms  over  or  secure  canoes  on  their  claims,  and  from  either  conduct  the  fishing, 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN.  1900. 


257 


by  means  of  a large  iron  barbless  hook  secured  to  the  end  of  a stout  pole.  The 
impaled  fish  is  thrown  into  a box  alongside  of  the  fishermen.  At  one  point  of  the 
rapids  runways  have  been  constructed  by  piling  rocks  in  parallel  lines  and  confining 
the  water  to  narrow  channels.  In  these  runways  fyke-net-shaped  traps  are  arranged 
to  be  raised  or  lowered  to  meet  the  level  of  different  stages  of  the  water.  It  is  said 
the}r  do  not  work  very  well,  but  to  my  eyes  it  looked  as  if  few  fish  could  pass  without 
being  trapped.  It  is  probable  that  short  nets  are  also  used  in  the  rapids. 


The  lake  has  an  extreme  length  of  2^  miles  in  a northwest  and  southeast  direc- 
tion, with  an  average  width  of  1 mile.  It  lies  in  a basin  nearly  surrounded  by  lofty, 
precipitous  mountains  reaching  an  altitude  of  1,000  to  5,000  feet,  and  is  largely  fed 
by  cascades  and  streamlets  from  the  melting  snows  and  glaciers.  There  is  one  feeder 
worthy  of  the  name  of  stream  which  enters  the  lake  at  the  extreme  northwestern 


F.  C.  Tt.  ] 901— 17 


258 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


end  through  a narrow  valley  leading  to  a glacier.  We  had  no  means  for  reaching 
this  stream,  but  at  a distance  it  appeared  as  if  there  were  considerable  areas  of  flat 
land  around  its  mouth.  The  banks  around  the  southern  end  of  the  lake,  and  on  either 
side  as  far  as  could  be  seen,  are  steep  and  rocky,  and  the  bottom  bowldery,  shelving 
rapidly  to  deepwater.  The  spawning-grounds  are  probabty around  the  feeder  at  the 
head  of  the  lake  where,  it  is  said,  the  bottom  is  sand  and  gravel.  The  water  is  quite 
cold  and  whitish,  like  all  glacial  waters. 

The  only  probable  site  for  a hatchery  is  near  the  large  feeder,  where  water  by 
gravity  and  ripe  fish  could  be  obtained.  The  water  would  probably  have  to  be 
filtered,  and  the  question  of  freezing  might  be  an  important  one,  and  can  only  be 
solved  by  a series  of  observations  over  an  extended  period. 

KILLISNOO. 

The  Alaska  Oil  and  Guano  Company1 s works  at  Ivillisnoo  were  again  visited. 
Tlrnyy  were  described  in  ray  former  report,  pages  121  to  125.  There  has  been  no 
change  in  the  plant  since  our  previous  visit.  The  large  trap  in  Hootznahoo  Inlet 
has  been  abandoned,  as  the  results  were  not  commensurate  with  the  expense  involved. 
The  herring  taken  in  this  locality  are  very  rich  in  oil,  and  when  salted  have  attracted 
the  attention  of  the  eastern  market.  A large  order  was  placed  with  this  company 
for  the  salt  product,  which,  however,  they  were  unable  to  fill.  Fishing  commenced 
this  year  on  May  26,  a date  much  earlier  than  heretofore. 

There  were  employed  20  white  and  10  native  fishermen;  for  factory  and  beach 
hands  27  whites,  38  natives,  and  13  Chinese.  Their  rate  of  pay  is  given  in  my  former 
report,  page  122.  The  company  used  two  purse  seines,  150  fathoms  by  15  fathoms, 
value  $ 1,200  each;  one  drag  seine,  250  fathoms  by  20  fathoms,  $2,000;  3 lighters, 
$800  each;  8 seine  boats,  $125  each;  6 strike  boats,  $75  each;  20  dories,  $25  each. 

The  following  vessels  were  employed  on  the  fisheries.  Their  crews  are  included 
in  the  numbers  given  under  the  hands  employed. 


Class  and  name. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

Chartered  or 
owned. 

Steamer  Dolphin 

60 

18 

$10, 000 

Chartered. 

Steamer  Favorite 

42 

16 

5, 000 

Owned. 

Launch  Louise 

5 

3 

3,000 

Do. 

The  following  was  the  output  in  1898,  1899,  and  1900: 

1898. — 45,240  barrels  of  herring,  making  165,500  gallons  of  oil  and  886  tons  of  guano;  from  June  27  to 
November  19. 

1898.  — Salted  1,800  half-barrels  of  herring  and  25  half-barrels  of  humpback  bellies. 

1899.  — 36,800  barrels  of  herring,  making  128,000  gallons  of  oil  and  714  tons  of  guano;  from  July  5 to 

November  5. 

1899.  — Salted  1,650  half-barrels  and  200  barrels  of  herring,  and  31  half-barrels,  of  humpback  bellies. 

1900. -60,300  barrels  of  herring,  making  172,000  gallons  of  oil  and  1,194  tons  of  guano;  from  May  26  to 

November  5. 

1900. — Salted  185  half-barrels  and  100  barrels  of  herring,  5 barrels  of  king  salmon,  8 half-barrels  and 
210  barrels  of  redfish,  and  523  half-barrels  of  humpback  bellies. 


CHILKOOT  STREAM,  SHOWING  NATIVE  FISH  RUNS  AND  TRAPS  IN  CURRENT. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  258.) 


Plate  XXIV. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


259 


TAKU  INLET. 

Taku  Packing  Company. — A company  under  this  title  was  organized  in  Astoria, 
Oreg. , by  some  of  the  stockholders  of  the  Alaska  Fishermen’s  Packing  Company, 
Nushagak,  with  a capital  of  $20,000,  and  in  the  spring  of  1900  a cannery  was  built 
on  Taku  Inlet.  The  construction  of  the  buildings  was  commenced  March  28,  and  the 
plant  was  ready  for  operation  on  May  17.  It  is  located  on  the  western  shore  of  Taku 
Inlet,  2i  miles  west  by  north  from  Jaw  Point,  on  the  northern  side  of  a small  bight 
(Sunny  Cove),  which  receives  the  waters  of  a small  stream. 

It  is  a small  cannery,  making  a hand  pack,  and  has  a daily  capacity  of  250  cases, 
with  expectations  of  making  from  15,000  to  18,000  cases  a year.  The  capacity  of 
the  cannery  will  be  increased  in  1901.  It  has  1 steam  box,  1 retort,  1 solderer,  and 
1 hand  cutter.  The  cans,  which  were  purchased  and  carried  to  Alaska,  were  made  of 
95-pound  tin  plate.  Transportation  is  by  regular  freight  steamers,  which  call  upon 
notification.  The  Chinese  contract  was  42  cents  for  tails  and  11  cents  for  flats,  with 
the  usual  conditions.  The  fishermen  were  transported  each  way,  had  full  board, 
received  $80  for  the  season,  and  5 cents  for  redtish  and  10  cents  for  king  salmon  per 
boat  of  two  men.  The  native  cannery-hands  were  paid  $2  per  day. 

This  year  the  fishing  was  confined  to  Taku  Inlet  and  most  of  the  fish  were 
obtained  near  the  mouth  of  the  river,  described  in  my  former  report,  page  126.  It 
is  expected,  however,  in  the  future  to  expand  the  fisheries  and  include  neighboring 
streams.  Fishing  in  the  inlet  is  difficult  on  account  of  ice  pouring  from  the  glaciers, 
and,  as  there  are  no  seining  beaches,  it  is  confined  to  gill  nets. 

According  to  the  cannery  data  king  salmon  begin  to  run  in  Taku  Inlet  May  8 
and  continue  to  June  26.  The  Pyramid  Harbor  cannery,  which  has  fished  here  for 
many  years,  gave  the  dates  of  the  king  salmon  runs  as  May  25  to  June  30.  It  is 
probable  that,  the  time  depends  upon  the  movements  of  the  ice,  and  the  earlier  date 
may  be  for  the  first  arrivals  whose  numbers  are  insufficient  for  a large  cannery.  Of 
the  early  run  15  per  cent  are  white-meated,  and  this  proportion  increases  until  the 
latter  part  of  the  run,  when  about  30  per  cent  are  found  in  this  condition.  One  king 
salmon  was  taken  weighing  61  pounds.  The  first  arrivals  of  the  redtish  were  noted 
on  June  20,  but  the}1-  did  not  come  in  sufficient  numbers  for  canning  until  July  1; 
they  then  continued  to  August  12. 

Cohoes  run  from  August  1 to  October  1,  and  dog  salmon  are  noticed  scattering 
throughout  the  season,  but  are  most  abundant  in  August.  Steel  heads  are  quite 
abundant  and  were  first  noticed  from  July  15  to  August  1.  At  the  time  of  our  visit, 
August  25  and  26,  they  formed  about  10  per  cent  of  the  catch.  Dolly  Varden  trout 
are  numerous,  and  there  are  a few  halibut,  but  no  shad  or  sturgeon. 

The  following  are  the  statistics: 

Hands  employed:  Thirty  white  and  11  native  fishermen,  7 white  and  2 native 
cannery-hands,  and  19  Chinese. 

Fishing  gear:  Fifteen  redfish  gill  nets,  each  150  fathoms  long,  35  meshes  deep, 
6^-inch  mesh;  and  22  king-salmon  gill  nets,  150  fathoms  long,  22  meshes  deep, 
91-i rich  mesh,  value  65  cents  per  fathom. 

Boats,  lighters,  etc. : 2 lighters,  $225  each;  1 fish  scow,  $150;  15  gill-net  boats,  $60 
each;  2 dories,  $25  each.  Launch  Faum , 5 tons,  crew  2,  valued  at  $1,000,  owned. 


260 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The  output  was  as  follows,  none  being  salted: 


Species. 

Cases. 

No.  to 
the  case. 

Date. 

King  salmon: 

Red 

13,150 

f 

Pink 

’454 

\ 2.8 

May  17-June  26 

White 

i?71 

1 

Redfish 

( >5,818 
\ - 830 

} 9 

July  5-Aug.  12 

Cohoes 

i 3, 227 

7 

Aug.  1-Sept.  15 

Dog  salmon 

i 2,  472 

6.5 

Aug.  15-Sept.  25 

i Tails.  2 Flats. 

PORT  SNETTISHAM. 


Taku  Fishing  Company. — This  company,  with  a capital  stock  of  $15,000,  said  to 
be  owned  in  San  Francisco,  but  with  home  address  at  Portland,  Oreg.,  commenced 
the  construction  of  a cannery  on  March  1, 1900,  and  had  the  plant  ready  for  operating 
-Tune  1.  It  is  located  on  the  southern  side  of  the  entrance  to  Port  Snettisham,  in  the 
first  bend  within  the  southern  entrance  point,  2 miles  east  of  Point  Styleman.  It  is 
a small  cannery,  making  a hand  pack,  with  a daily  capacity  of  300  cases,  and  an  outfit 
for  about  12,000  to  15,000  cases  per  season.  It  has  3 retorts,  1 solderer,  and  1 
hand  cutter.  All  cans  are  made  by  hand  at  the  cannery,  of  95-pound  domestic  tin. 

The  Chinese  contract  was  43  cents  for  hand-tilled  cans,  with  the  usual  conditions. 
The  locality  has  not  heretofore  been  considered  a favorable  location;  hence  no  fish- 
ermen’s contracts  could  be  made  and  they  were  paid  wages  throughout  the  season. 
The  white  fishermen  were  transported  and,  with  the  natives,  received  from  $40  to 
$65  per  month  and  board.  The  cannery  paid  7 cents  each  for  redfish  and  50  cents 
per  hundred  for  humpbacks.  King  salmon  were  obtained  from  Taku  Inlet  and  red- 
fish  from  Port  Snettisham.  Humpbacks  were  largely  from  Limestone  Inlet  and 
from  small  streams  near  the  cannery. 

Employees:  16  white  and  20  native  fishermen,!  white  cannery -hands,  25  Chinese. 

Fishing  gear:  Four  gill-nets  for  king  salmon,  each  150  fathoms  long,  20  meshes 
deep,  9i-inch  mesh;  14  gill-nets  for  redfish,  each  150  fathoms  long,  30  meshes  deep, 
61-inch  mesh — all  valued  at  65  cents  per  fathom.  The  cannery  had  1 purse  seine,  165 
fathoms  long,  300  meshes  deep,  31-inch  mesh,  value  $400,  and  3 drag  seines  averaging 
100  fathoms  long,  5 fathoms  deep,  and  31-inch  mesh,  value  $1.50  per  fathom. 

Boats,  etc.:  One  lighter,  $500;  3 seine  boats,  $50  each;  3 Columbia  River 
boats,  $150  each;  9 gill-net  boats,  $50  each.  The  following  launches  were  also 
used:  N.  cfe  &,  10  tons,  crew  2,  valued  at  $1,800,  owned;  Pescaderg , 4 tons,  crew 
1,  value  $600,  owned.  The  transportation  was  by  regular  freight  steamer 

The  following  was  the  output: 


Species. 

Cases. 

No.  to 
the  case. 

Date. 

King  salmon: 

Red 

454 

3 

June  1-June20 

\V  h i te 

97 

3 

Do. 

Redfish 

2,542 

9 

July  9-July  27 

Cohoes 

756 

7 

Sept.  1-Sept.  24 

Humpbacks 

3,  593 

21 

July  25-Aug.  16 

Dog  salmon 

2,016 

7 

July  9-Sept. 24 

ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


261 


WRANGELL  NARROWS. 

Icy  Strait  Packing  Company , Petersburg . — This  company,  incorporated  in  the 
State  of  Washington,  is  organized  from  the  stockholders  of  the  Quadra  Packing 
Company,  who,  to  expand  their  work  in  Alaska,  purchased  the  saltery  interests  in 
Bartlett  Bay,  near  Icy  Strait,  intending  to  build  a cannery  at  that  point  during  the 
season  of  1899.  Circumstances  arose  which  made  it  inexpedient  to  carry  out  the 
Bartlett  Bay  project  at  the  time,  and,  attention  having  been  directed  to  a site  in 
Wrangell  Narrows  for  a cannery,  fishery,  sawmill,  etc.,  work  was  commenced  on  this 
plant  in  the  summer  of  1899,  when  a small  sawmill  was  set  up,  a substantial  steamer 
wharf  built,  and  a warehouse,  store,  and  residence  completed.  It  is  located  inside 
of  the  northern  entrance  to  Wrangell  Narrows  on  the  southeastern  shore,  about 
a mile  above  Turn  Point  and  an  equal  distance  from  the  open  waters  of  Frederick 
Sound.  The  position  is  an  excellent  one,  as  it  is  convenient  to  several  very  good 
fisheries,  and  all  steamers  pass  close  to  the  wharf  on  their  regular  routes  to  and  from 
Alaska  ports.  A town  site  has  been  recorded,  a post-office  and  an  express  office 
established  under  the  name  of  Petersburg,  and  an  Indian  village  has  sprung  up  close 
by.  During  the  winter  of  1899-1900,  and  while  the  building  operations  were  in 
progress,  the  company  engaged  in  the  herring  and  halibut  fisheries.  Of  the  former, 
during  the  months  of  September  and  October,  1,500  barrels  were  salted,  mostly  taken 
from  Wrangell  Narrows.  The  halibut  were  shipped  on  ice  to  Puget  Sound.  As  this 
may  become  an  important  industry,  it  will  be  referred  to  under  another  heading. 

In  the  spring  of  1900  the  cannery  building,  warehouse,  bunk-house,  etc.,  were 
erected  and  the  canning  machinery  installed.  Situated  on  the  steamer  route,  the 
surroundings  have  been  made  attractive  by  gardens,  plank  walks,  bridges,  etc..,  and 
the  buildings  are  substantial,  well  arranged,  and  very  clean. 

Fish  are  pewed  from  boats  or  lighters  to  the  fish-house  on  the  end  of  the  wharf, 
which  is  well  arranged,  clean,  and  clear  of  bad  odors.  After  cleaning,  the  fish  are 
passed  directly  from  the  draining  tables  to  the  cutter.  As  the  pack  is  made  by  hand, 
the  severed  fish  are  carried  from  the  cutter  to  the  filling  tables,  which  are  arranged 
for  61  fillers.  Klootchmen  do  most  of  this  work  and  receive  6 cents  a case  for  filling. 
The  cans  then  go  to  the  washer,  after  which  the  floats  are  put  in  and  the  tops  put 
on  by  Chinese;  the}7  then  pass  to  the  crimpers,  and  in  succession  to  the  acid  bath, 
solderer,  etc. 

The  cannery  machinery  consists  of  5 steam  boxes,  3 retorts,  1 cutter,  1 washer, 
2 cappers,  2 crimpers,  and  1 solderer.  They  have  a good  supply  of  hand  tools, 
small  lathe,  drill  press,  etc.,  and  a well-equipped  cooperage  and  box  factory.  14,500 
cases  of  cans  were  purchased;  the  remainder  were  made  at  the  cannery.  The  tin 
was  100-pound  plate  for  the  tops  and  bodies,  both  domestic  and  imported,  but  the 
proportion  of  each  could  not  be  ascertained.  The  cannery  as  installed  at  present 
has  a daily  capacity  of  1,000  cases,  hand-filled.  Jt  is  probable  that  filling  machinery 
will  be  introduced,  though  it  is  believed  that  a hand-filled  pack  is  preferred. 

The  Chinese  contract  was  45  cents,  with  the  usual  conditions.  The  fishermen 
received  $35  per  month,  board  and  allowances,  which  brings  the  average  up  to  about 
$50  per  month.  Native  fishermen  receive  the  same  as  whites  if  they  complete  the 
season.  Fish  were  purchased  at  the  lowest  rates  for  which  they  could  be  obtained. 
The  native  work  this  season  was  very  satisfactory. 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


262 


The  fisheries  of  this  cannery  were  conducted  over  such  a wide  area  and  in  such 
an  irregular  way  that  no  accurate  stream  data  is  available.  The  crews  were  moved 
from  place  to  place,  as  seemed  to  offer  the  best  facilities  and  the  most  fish.  Points 
130  to  140  miles  distant  were  reached  for  fish  to  supply  the  cannery,  and  much 
enterprise  was  exhibited  on  this  work.  The  following  streams  were  fished,  and  the 
numbers  taken  by  this  cannery,  where  known,  are  given:  Taku  Inlet;  North  Stream, 
Stikine  Delta;  Blind  River,  Wrangell  Narrows;  North  End,  Wrangell  Narrows; 
head  of  Duncan  Canal;  Redtish  Bay,  34,000  redfish;  Freshwater  Bay,  25,000  redfish; 
Basket  Bay,  30,000  redfish;  Sitkoh  Bay,  30,000  redfish;  North  Bay  of  Pillars;  South 
Bay  of  Pillars,  6,500  redfish;  Tebenkof  Bay,  7,000  redfish;  Shipley  Bay;  Rocky 
Straits,  25,000  redfish;  Red  Bay,  30,000  redfish. 

In  addition  to  the  plant  at  Petersburg  this  company  operated  salteries  in  con- 
junction with  it  at  Taku  Inlet,  Shipley  Bay,  and  Bartlett  Bay,  and  also  on  the  hulk 
Blanche , and  as  the  men  and  material  are  interwoven  with  the  cannery  operations 
these  salteries  will  be  referred  to  and  the  statistics  given  as  a whole. 

Bartlett  Bay  saltery  is  located  on  the  abandoned  cannery  site  of  the  Bartlett  Ba}r 
Packing  Company,  once  the  property  of  the  Alaska  Packers  Association,  which,  as 
previously  noted,  was  the  location  first  selected  by  the  Ieyr  Strait  Packing  Company 
for  their  cannery.  During  the  season  of  1899  two  white  fishermen,  on  the  part  of 
the  new  company,  prospected  the  place  for  fish  and  salted  200  barrels  of  salmon, 
which  were  marketed  from  Petersburg. 

During  the  season  of  1900  regular  salting  operations  were  conducted  here  by  the 
Icy  Strait  Packing  Company,  and  at  the  same  time  buildings  were  erected  for  a 
cannery,  in  which  machinery  will  be  installed  in  the  spring  of  1901.  The  cannery 
will  be  operated  that  season. 

Shipley  Bay  saltery , which  was  formerly  operated  by  Walter  Ivosmikoff  and 
located  at  the  head  of  that  bay  (see  my  former  report,  p.  109),  was  acquired  by  the 
Icy  Strait  Packing  Company  and  operated  during  the  season  of  1900. 

Taka  Inlet  saltery  was  built  in  1897  by  the  present  Alaska  manager  of  the  Icy 
Strait  Packing  Company  on  Taku  Point,  near  the  head  of  the  inlet  of  that  name. 
In  1898  and  1899  it  was  operated  by  the  Quadra  Packing  Company,  and  in  1900  by  a 
large  force,  with  gear,  from  the  Petersburg  establishment. 

The  hulk  Blanche  was  used  by  the  Icy  Strait  Packing  Company  for  salting 
herring,  and  was  moved  in  the  narrows  from  point  to  point  as  occasion  required, 
though  generally  located  off  Blind  River.  The  company  fitted  out  to  salt  4,000 
barrels  by  the  end  of  the  year.  The  herring  come  to  Wrangell  Narrows  in  duly, 
and  are  found  in  that  vicinity  until  February. 

The  following  are  the  statistics  of  the  Icy  Strait  Packing  Company,  and  in  it 
are  included  the  men,  boats,  gear,  etc.,  employed  in  the  salteries  at  Bartlett  Bay, 
Shipley  Bay,  Taku  Inlet,  and  on  the  hulk  Blanche. 

Hands  employed:  34  white  and  24  native  fishermen;  10  white  and  42  native  can- 
nery-hands, and  50  Chinese. 

Fishing  gear:  Five  purse  seines,  each  120  fathoms  long,  10  fathoms  deep,  and 
3 inch  mesh;  value,  S3  per  fathom.  Five  drag  seines,  each  120  fathoms  long,  6 
fathoms  deep,  and  3-inch  mesh;  value,  $1.50  per  fathom.  Two  drag  seines  (for 
herring),  ISO  fathoms  long,  15  fathoms  deep,  and  2-inch  mesh;  value,  $3  per  fathom. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1 901 . (To  face  page  262. ) 


Plate  XXV. 


0 . 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


263 


Gill  nets:  King  salmon,  each  50  fathoms  long,  25  meshes  deep,  and  9-inch  mesh; 
redfish,  50  fathoms  long,  40  meshes  deep,  and  5£-inch  mesh;  cohoes,  75  fathoms 
long,  30  meshes  deep,  and  7-inch  mesh  (120  nets  in  all;  value,  65  cents  per  fathom). 

Boats,  lighters,  etc.:  1 cargo  lighter,  $850;  12  seine  boats,  $100  each;  12  gill-net 
boats,  $50  each;  12  seine-boat  tenders,  $35  each;  1 skiffs,  $20  each;  1 pile-driver,  $500. 
The  following  vessels  (owned)  were  employed: 


Class  and  name. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

Steamer  White  Wings 

34 

r, 

|V, 000 

Steamer  Annie  M.  Nixon 

IS 

G 

6,  000 

Steamer  (stern,  pad.)  Gypsy  Queen 

Hulk  Blanche • 

58 

107 



(’) 

6,000 
4,  500 

Scow  Elliott 

43 

(’) 

1,000 

1 Fishermen. 


The  output  of  the  cannery  consisted  of — 


Species. 

Cases. 

No.  to 
the  case. 

Date. 

f 1 8, 625 

] 15 

July  1-Aug.  20 

Sept.  10-Oet.  10 

July  20-Sept.  15 
Aug.  15-Oct.  30 

1 2 1,310 
| 1 500 

i 

1 7 

\ 2 1, 000 
1 10,000 

( 

20 

/ 1 4,'  800 

1 8.5 

( -'3,700 

f 

1 Tails.  2 Flats.  3Salted  100  barrels  cohoes,  running  27  to  the  barrel. 


The  Bartlett  Bay  sal  ter  y in  1899  salted  200  barrels  of  redfish.  In  1900  it  salted 
530  barrels  of  redfish,  15  to  the  barrel,  June  25  to  August  7;  120  barrels  of  cohoes, 
30  to  the  barrel,  August  20  to  September  30. 

The  Shipley  Bay  saltery  in  1900  salted  200  barrels  of  redfish,  50  to  the  barrel, 
June  27  to  August  11. 

The  Taku  Inlet  saltery  in  1898  salted  140  barrels  of  king  salmon  and  12  barrels 
of  white  king-salmon  bellies.  In  1899  it  salted  400  barrels  of  king  salmon,  12£  to  the 
barrel,  and  12  barrels  of  white  king-salmon  bellies,  May  10  to  June  25.  In  1900  it 
salted  400  barrels  of  king  salmon,  12£  to  the  barrel,  and  12  barrels  of  white  king- 
salmon  bellies,  May  7 to  June  25. 

On  the  hulk  Blanche  in  1899  there  were  salted  1,500  barrels  of  herring,  Septem- 
ber 15  to  October  31;  in  1900,  1,000  barrels  of  herring,  August  1 to  October  3. 

Pacific  Coast  and  Norway  Packing  Company , Wrangell  Narrows. — This  is  a 
company  chartered  in  Minnesota,  with  main  office  at  Minneapolis,  and  said  to  be 
incorporated  for  $1,000,000,  of  which,  however,  a very  small  portion  only  is  reported 
to  have  been  subscribed.  It  is  a new  organization,  and  this  year  was  prospecting  for 
a cannery  site  on  Wrangell  Narrows,  or  in  that  vicinity.  It  is  expected  to  build  a 
cannery  in  the  spring  of  1901  and  make  a pack  that  season,  but  none  of  the  details 
have  yet  been  considered.  This  season  a floating  saltery  outfit  was  operated  and 
salmon  and  herring  were  salted.  Later  the  halibut  industry  is  to  be  examined. 

The  following  are  the  statistics,  as  far  as  they  could  be  learned: 

Men  employed:  16  white  and  8 Japanese  fishermen  and  2 Japanese  cooks. 


264 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Outfit:  1 herring  seine,  130  fathoms  long,  40  feet  deep,  14-inch  mesh,  value  $800; 
1 herring  seine,  110  fathoms  long,  30  feet  deep,  14-inch  mesh,  value  $600;  2 gill  nets, 
75  fathoms  long,  30  meshes  deep,  7-inch  mesh,  value  65  cents  per  fathom;  2 seine 
boats,  $180  each;  2 dories,  $30  each;  3 skiffs,  $20  each. 

The  vessels  were  the  steamer  Neptune , 176  tons,  crew  10,  value  $10,000,  owned; 
house  scows  Ike,  value  $1,000,  owned;  Joe , value  $1,000,  owned. 

This  outfit  reached  Wrangell  Narrows  August  20,  and  has  been  operating  in  the 
vicinity  of  Blind  River.  To  September  5th,  250  barrels  of  herring  and  8 barrels  of 
cohoes  had  been  salted.  The  party  was  fitted  out  to  salt  3,000  barrels  of  herring. 
One  of  the  house  scows  is  fitted  up  as  a cooper  shop  and  the  other  as  a bunk-house. 

The  Royer  -Warnock  Packing  Company. — This  firm  hails  from  San  Francisco 
and  located  a cannery  in  southeastern  Alaska  in  the  spring  of  1900.  The  site  is  that 
of  the  Buck  saltery,  in  Beecher  Pass,  which  connects  Duncan  Canal  with  Wrangell 
Narrows.  The  cannery  is  on  the  northern  side  of  the  pass,  immediately  within  the 
southeastern  point  of  the  largest  and  easternmost  of  three  islands  which  lie  in  the  pass 
just  south  of  Hood  Point,  with  which  they  are  connected  at  low  water. 

The  cannery  is  a very  small  plant,  the  old  saltery  building  having  been  utilized  in 
the  so-called  main  building,  and  is  without  appliances  usually  found  in  a cannery 
of  simplest  form.  It  is  believed  that  under  present  conditions  an  output  of  25  cases 
a day  would  tax  the  efforts  of  the  cannery.  On  the  day  of  my  visit  900  fish  were 
received,  and  it  was  said  that  it  would  take  from  Thursday  morning  until  Sunday  to 
pack  them.  The  superintendent  stated  that  machinery  would  be  introduced  next 
year  (1901),  so  that  a season’s  pack  of  25,000  cases  could  be  made.  In  this  event  new 
buildings  will  have  to  be  erected,  as  the  present  ones  are  mere  shacks. 

The  pack  was  truly  made  by  hand.  The  fish  were  cut  in  sections  with  an 
ordinary  butcher’s  kidfe,  and  the  cans  filled,  capped,  crimped,  and  soldered  by  hand. 
All  cans  were  purchased;  weight  of  tin  plate  unknown.  There  were  no  fishermen; 
all  fish  were  purchased,  and  for  them  6 cents  to  8 cents  were  paid.  There  was  no 
Chinese  contract;  the  Mongolians  employed  were  paid  $35  per  month  and  received 
board  and  transportation. 

The  cannery  employed  2 white  men,  10  Japanese,  and  1 Chinese.  It  had  2 seines, 
each  100  fathoms  by  5 fathoms,  value,  $1.50  per  fathom;  1 gill  net,  100  fathoms  by 
30  meshes,  7-inch  mesh;  1 seine  boat,  $30;  1 scow,  $30;  1 dory,  $10;  and  1 naphtha 
launch,  the  Ro-Wa , of  4 tons,  crew  2;  valued  at  $800. 

Nineteen  barrels  of  redfish  were  salted.  The  pack  of  canned  salmon  for  the  season 
consisted  of: 


Species. 

Cases. 

No.  to 
the  case. 

Date. 

Redfish  

480 

12 

July  and  August. 

Cohoes 

1,060 

7. 5 

Do. 

Dog  salmon 

20 

7.8 

WRANGELL  NARROWS  STREAM. 

Emptying  into  Wrangell  Narrows  on  the  eastern  side,  opposite  Finger  Point  and 
one-half  mile  to  the  northward  of  the  astronomical  station,  Coast  Survey  chart  No. 
8180,  is  a large  stream  which  was  said  to  run  redfish.  This  stream  was  examined  by 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


265 


Ensign  Hepburn,  and  from  his  report  it  is  quite  probable  that  it  is  not  a redfish 
stream  and  that  but  few  salmon  can  surmount  the  obstacles.  The  stream  is  not  a 
lake  outlet,  but  drains  the  hills  about  10  miles  to  the  southeast  from  its  mouth. 
Throughout  its  entire  course,  and  to  within  one-half  mile  of  its  mouth,  it  follows  a 
line  of  hills  which  lie  to  the  northward.  The  opposite  side  is  comparatively  low. 
Three  hundred  yards  within  the  mouth,  at  a sharp  bend,  is  a fall  to  which  tide  water 


Scale  of  Miles 

Cascade  stream,  east  side  of  Wrangell  Narrows,  opposite  Finger  Point. 

extends.  At  low  water  the  fall  is  about  30  feet  high,  and  it  is  only  at  high-water 
spring  tides  that  fish  can  ascend.  Above  the  falls  the  width  is  15  feet,  depth  1$  feet, 
and  current  1^-  knots.  The  bottom  is  rocky  where  the  stream  narrows,  and  in  the 
wider  reaches  it  is  sandy  and  gravelly.  The  color  of  the  water  is  dark,  and  the 
temperature  (September  6)  2 miles  from  the  mouth  was  50°  F.  The  banks  are  heavily 
timbered,  and  there  is  a dense  undergrowth.  On  the  left  bank,  beyond  the  stream 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STaTES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


266 


lip*#  & 


belt,  the  country  seemed  open.  A number  of  dead  dog-  salmon  and  cohoes  were  seen 
below  the  falls,  and  a few  cohoes  were  noticed  jumping-  at  the  falls,  it  was  learned 
that  dog-  salmon  and  cohoes  are  the  only  ones  that  try  the  falls  at  all. 

SALMON  BAY  STREAM. 

This  stream  was  examined  by  Ensign  Kempff  and  Mr.  Fassett.  Salmon  Bay  is 
on  the  northeastern  end  of  Prince  of  Wales  Island,  about  7 miles  to  the  eastward  of 
Red  Bay,  at  the  junction  of  Clarence  and  Sumner  straits.  Salmon  Bay  is  a narrow 

inlet  curving  in  a southerly  direction,  about  one- 
half  mile  in  length,  and  at  the  head  has  a narrow 
rocky  passage  which,  after  a few  hundred  yards, 
widens,  forming  a tidal  basin  that  receives  the 
waters  of  a redfish  stream.  This  stream  was 
explored  for  a distance  of  miles  to  a moderate 
elevation,  and  as  the  lake  was  not  reached  the 
party  returned.  There  was  no  one  in  the 
vicinity  from  whom  any  information  could  be 
obtained.  It  was  afterwards  learned  that  the 
lake  is  some  distance  in  the  interior.  The  stream 
is  very  tortuous  and  Hows  through  a compara- 
tively level  country.  The  land  around  the  mouth 
of  the  stream  is  low  and  grassy,  tide  water 
extending  about  1^-  miles  within  the  mouth. 
The  bottom  is  rocky  and  bowlderv,  with  gravel 
patches  over  which  fish  were  seen  spawning.  The 
water  has  the  brownish  tinge  common  to  lake 
water  in  this  district,  and  1 mile  above  the  mouth 
had  a temperature  of  66°  F.,  3 miles  above  the 
same  point  58e  F. , September  7.  The  average 
width  is  about  40  feet;  depth,  1 foot;  current 
strong.  No  tributaries  were  noticed  in  the  dis- 
tance examined.  About  2 miles  from  the  mouth 
there  is  a fall  or  rapid,  in  steps  about  4 feet 
high,  which,  however,  does  not  prevent  the  fish 
from  ascending.  The  banks  are  wooded,  and 
several  open  spaces  were  noticed  back  of  the 
fringe  of  growth  bordering  the  stream. 

Just  beyond  the  head  of  tide  water  the  stream  during  the  fishing  season  may  lie 
barricaded.  On  each  bank  are  heavy  posts  and  on  line  a number  of  stakes  driven  in 
the  stream  lied,  with  bowlders  between.  It  is  not  known  exactly  what  this  may  be,  but 
from  the  old  web  found  on  the  banks  it  is  believed  that  a net  has  been  stretched  across 
the  stream,  supported  by  the  stakes,  with  the  foot  held  in  position  by  the  bowlders. 

At  two  points,  about  one-half  mile  within  the  mouth,  runways  or  leads  have  been 
constructed  by  piling  the  rocks  from  either  bank  in  V -shape,  leaving  the  apex  open. 
It  is  possible  that  these  runways  are  used  in  connection  with  the  fyke-shaped  traps 


UPPER  LEAD 

Stream  and  leads,  Salmon  Bay,  Prince  of 
Wales  Island. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


267 

used  by  the  natives.  On  the  left  bank,  at  the  outer  runway,  is  the  site  of  a saltery 
formerly  operated  here.  Humpbacks,  dog  salmon,  and  Dolly  Varden  trout  were  the 
only  fish  seen.  It  is  said  that  this  stream  has  been  much  abused  by  barricading,  and 
a few  years  ago  it  was  believed  that  it  was  practically  exhausted  for  commercial  pur- 
poses, but  redfish  are  still  taken  in  considerable  numbers.  The  stream  has  a probable 
value  of  20,000  redfish  and  3,000  cohoes.  The  only  stream  data  obtainable  are  the 
following: 


Year. 

Time  of  run. 

Species. 

Number 

taken. 

I89G 

July  1-30 

19,  725 

1896 

Aug.  1-31 

2,  682 

1897 

July  1-15 

15,  012 

1898 

June  28-July  20 

Redfish 

22,  000 

1899 

25,  401 

1900 

June  18-July  27 

Redfish 

33, 290 

Salmon  Bay  saltery. — On  the  southern  point  of  the  entrance  to  Salmon  Bay  is  a 
saltery  formerly  conducted  by  Mr.  Tom  McCauley.  Several  years  ago  the  salting 
tanks  were  moved  to  Whale  Passage,  and  the  saltery  is  now  used  as  a cooperage. 
The  buildings,  dwelling,  store,  etc.,  at  the  time  visited  were  in  good  repair;  a large 
number  of  barrels  were  stored  in  a warehouse,  and  quite  an  outfit  of  coopering  tools 
was  noticed,  but  everything  was  locked  and  no  one  in  sight.  The  fish  taken  from 
the  stream  are  sold  fresh  to  the  Wrangell  cannery  by  Mr.  McCauley,  who  claims  the 
fishing  right  here. 

RED  BAY  STREAM. 

Red  Bay  is  on  the  northern  side  of  Prince  of  Wales  Island  and  opens  on  Sum- 
ner Strait.  (See  Coast  Survey  chart  Nos.  8200  and  8168.)  The  southwest  extremity 
of  the  bay  narrows  to  a pocket,  which  is  an  uncovered  Hat  at  low  water,  and  receives 
at  the  southeastern  end  the  waters  of  a redfish  stream,  which  was  examined  by  Lieu- 
tenant Rodman  September  L It  is  about  l£  miles  in  length,  has  an  average  width 
of  30  feet  and  depth  of  12  inches,  with  two  rocky  pools  about  5 feet  in  depth  in  its 
length;  it  flows  in  a northwesterly  and  northerly  direction  from  the  lake  over  a 
gravelly  bottom  with  occasional  bowlders,  running  with  a slack  current,  and  has  no 
falls  or  heavy  rapids  in  its  course.  The  lake,  at  the  point  of  outlet,  flows  in  two 
streams,  forming  an  island  about  one-half  mile  in  diameter.  The  eastern  bank  of  the 
main  stream  is  generally  low  and  flat,  the  western  bank  steep,  and  both  timbered 
with  the  usual  growth  of  the  country.  Tide  water  extends  about  150  yards  within  the 
tree  line,  and  the  temperature  of  the  water  above  this  point  was  found  to  be  62°  F. 

The  lake,  which  lies  in  a general  north-and-south  direction,  is  about  2£  miles 
long  by  one-half  mile  wide;  it  is  elevated  about  10  feet  above  sea  level,  and  has  a 
temperature  of  61  F.  at  a depth  of  3 feet.  The  eastern  shore  is  generally  steep, 
having  near  the  head  of  the  lake  a gray  precipitous  cliff,  while  lying  off  the  lower 
end  is  a small  wooded  island.  The  western  shore  has  a more  gentle  slope,  and  all  the 
surroundings  are  heavily  wooded.  For  want  of  proper  facilities  the  lake  could  not 
be  examined,  but  at  the  head  it  appeared  as  though  it  received  two  feeders.  The 
shore  shelf,  as  far  as  could  be  seen,  was  gravelly. 


268 


BULLETIN  OE  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


About  200  yards  from  the  mouth  of  the  stream,  and  above  tide  water,  forked 
posts  were  found  planted  on  the  banks,  and  a large  number  of  slat  racks,  8 feet  by  4 
feet,  were  stacked  near  by.  As  the  current  is  very  gentle  it  is  probable  that  a heavy 
crossbeam  is  laid  across  the  crotches,  supported  by  stakes  in  the  stream,  and  that 
the  racks  are  then  laid  across  by  bedding  one  end  in  the  gravel,  bottom  upstream, 

and  inclining  the  other  end 
against  the  beam.  A line  of 
bowlders  across  the  stream  prob- 
ably served  to  ballast  the  lower 
ends  of  the  screens,  thus  effect- 
ively closing  it  to  fish  on  their 
way  to  the  spawning-grounds. 
Small  pieces  of  web  and  cordage 
were  also  seen  in  the  vicinity, 
which  may  have  been  used  in 
closing  the  stream. 

With  the  means  at  hand 
two  men  could  close  the  stream 
in  about  two  hours.  Naturally, 
it  is  free  from  obstruction.  A 
few  redfish,  many  humpbacks, 
and  a few  dog  salmon  were  seen 
in  the  stream,  confined  largely 
to  the  pools,  in  which  500  or 
600  were  noticed,  all  in  an 
advanced  stage  of  ripening. 
The  bed  of  the  stream  seemed 
to  offer  a good  spawning-bed. 
No  fish  were  seen  in  the  lake, 
but  here  and  in  the  stream  large 
numbers  of  small  fry,  1 inch  to 
3 inches  long,  were  noticed. 

It  is  said  that  this  stream 
has  been  much  abused  by  bar- 
ricading, and  it  is  difficult  to 
obtain  its  real  value  now,  as  the 
canneries  naturally  do  not  wish  to  give  their  stream  records  to  the  public,  and  they 
are  cautious  in  giving  figures. 

The  following  are  the  records  as  far  as  they  are  available: 


Year. 

Time  of  run. 

Species. 

Number. 

1896 

July  18-31 

Redfish 

16, 348 

1896 

Aug.  1-Sept.  1 

Cohoes 

4,  542 

1897  

July  7-29 

12, 001 

1898  . . _ 

July  10-Aug.  5 

24, 000 

1899  

1900  

11,243 

The  stream  has  a present  value  of  not  over  18,000  redfish  and  5,000  cohoes  for 
a single  season. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  268.) 


Plate  XXVI. 


SALMON  BAY  STREAM,  PRINCE  OF  WALES  ISLAND. 
Riffles  where  humpbacks  were  spawning,  about  2 miles  from  mouth. 


TEBENKOF  STREAM.  LOG  FORMING  FOUNDATION  OF  FISH  BARRIER. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


269 


The  stream  named  “Salmon  Creek”. on  Coast  Survey  chart  No.  8168  of  Red 
Bay  was  a mere  rill  at  the  time  of  our  visit,  and  those  named  creeks  Nos.  1,  2,  3, 
and  4 were  not  seen;  they  are  probably  small  waterways  during  heavy  rains.  The 
stream  named  “Little  Creek,”  to  the  westward  of  the  redfish  stream,  is  about  as 
large  as  the  latter  and  carries  many  humpbacks. 

At  the  point  marked  “Fishery  and  Indian  Village”  is  the  site  of  the  old  saltery, 
formerly  operated  by  Mr.  Tom  McCauley,  but  later  moved  to  Whale  Passage.  The 
saltery  building  is  in  bad  condition  and  the  wharf  has  disappeared,  except  the 
inshore  end.  There  are  two  houses  near  by,  but  no  one  was  seen  in  the  vicinity;  the 
place  looked  abandoned.  The  fish  were  formerly  used  in  the  saltery,  but  are  now 
sold  by  Mr.  McCauley  to  the  Wrangell  cannery. 

SHIPLEY  BAY  AND  STREAM. 

Shipley  Bay  is  on  the  western  side  of  Kosciusko  Island,  which  lies  close  to  and  on 
the  northwestern  side  of  Prince  of  Wales  Island,  from  which  it  is  separated  by  Klawak 
Passage.  It  is  a very  deep  indentation,  about  0 miles  long  and  1£  miles  wide,  but 
much  obstructed  b}r  reefs,  though  there  is  a good  channel  and  excellent  anchorage  at 
the  head  of  the  bay.  At  the  eastern  end,  toward  the  northern  side,  is  a saltery  for- 
merly owned  by  Mr.  Walter  Kosmikoff,  known  locally  as  “Russian  Walter,”  who 
salted  salmon  and  at  times  salmon  trout.  Fish  were  sold  fresh  when  the  opportunity 
offered,  but  as  it  was  out  of  the  track  of  the  cannery  steamers,  few  were  disposed  of 
in  that  way,  though  occasionally  a few  were  sent  to  Wrangell  on  the  monthly  mail 
boat  which  passes  here  on  its  run  between  Klawak  and  Wrangell. 

In  1S99  the  saltery  was  purchased  in  the  interest  of  the  Icy  Strait  Packing 
Company  and  was  operated,  as  noted,  under  that  company.  It  was  closed  at  the 
time  of  our  visit,  and  there  was  no  one  in  the  vicinity. 

At  the  extreme  head  of  the  bay  and  about  half  a mile  from  the  saltery  is  the 
mouth  of  a redfish  stream,  which  was  examined  by  Lieutenant  Rodman  and  Mr. 
Fassett,  September  3.  This  stream,  with  the  lake  system,  lies  in  a general  east-and- 
west  direction,  the  former  about  1|  miles  long,  20  to  25  feet  wide,  and  12  to  15 
inches  deep.  It  Hows  between  steep  timbered  mountains,  2,000  feet  high,  with  a 
strong  current,  over  a rocky  bed  which  has  occasional  gravel  spots.  There  are  many 
rapids  in  the  stream,  but  no  steep  falls  to  prevent  the  fish  from  ascending.  No 
stream  yet  visited  by  this  party  has  as  many  natural  obstructions  as  this  one.  It  is 
choked  from  the  lake  to  the  mouth  by  fallen  timbers  which  have  come  down  the 
steep  mountain  side,  and  at  two  points,  50  yards  and  150  yards  from  the  lake,  there 
have  been  heavy  slides  into  the  bed  of  the  stream,  the  water  disappearing  entirely 
under  the  detritus  at  each  point  and  reappearing  after  it  has  passed  the  obstruction. 
It  is  impossible  for  fish  to  overcome  these  obstacles,  but  it  is  probable  that  during 
heavy  rains,  which  are  frequent  in  this  district,  the  volume  of  water  is  so  great  that 
the  subsurface  drains  under  the  obstructions  can  not  carry  it  all  away,  and  there  is 
then  a flow  over  the  top.  Below  these  natural  obstructions,  where  the  stream  again 
appears,  the  pools  were  tilled  with  salmon  of  all  species,  and  some  trout,  most  of  the 
former  well  matured.  The  stream  water  had  the  usual  discoloration  and  a tempera- 
ture of  58.5°  F. 


270 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The  lake  is  about  If  miles  long,  has  an  extreme  width  of  one-half  mile,  and  an 
elevation  of  55  feet.  The  Avhole  head  of  the  outlet  is  filled  with  logs  and  dead 
trees-,  beyond  this  jam  the  shore  is  rocky  as  far  as  could  be  seen  from  the  outlet. 
As  there  were  no  facilities  for  examining  the  lake,  and  it  was  impracticable  to 
follow  the  shore,  the  party  ascended  a high  mountain  overlooking  the  lake  and  from 
this  position  made  the  sketch.  At  the  extreme  eastern  end  a second  small  lake  was 
seen,  connected  with  the  main  body  bjr  a fair-sized  stream.  Several  small  feeders 


were  also  seen,  but  none  of  any  consequence  except  the  lake  connection,  near  which 
some  sandbars  were  noticed.  The  temperature  of  the  lake  near  the  outlet,  at  a 
depth  of  3 feet,  was  found  to  be  59°  F. 

In  the  stream,  about  50  yards  above  tide  water,  which  extends  but  a very  short 
distance  from  the  mouth,  some  stakes  and  old  webbing  were  found,  and  immediately 
above  a tree  had  been  felled  across.  All  this  may  have  been  used  for  barricading 
the  stream,  but  whether  any  obstructions  have  been  used  recently  to  hold  the  fish  is 
unknown  to  this  party. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


271 


On  account  of  the  natural  obstructions  in  the  stream  the  locality  is  probably  not 
suitable  for  hatchery  purposes.  The  stream  data  is  very  meager,  but  the  following 
may  be  of  some  service,  though  it  should  be  remembered  that  except  for  1900  the 
fish  taken  for  the  saltery  are  not  included: 

In  1892  the  Baranoff  Packing  Company  took  6,762  redfish  from  July  9 to  20;  in 
1893,5,295  redfish  from  July  8 to  30.  In  1.898  the  Wrangell  cannery  took  5,000  red- 
fish  from  d ul}T  15  to  August  15. 

In  1900  the  Icy  Strait  Packing 
Company  took  12,000  redfish 
from  June  27  to  August  14. 

The  stream  lias  a pro! >able  value 
of  12,000  redfish. 

SHIPLEY  BAY  STREAM  No.  2. 

On  the  southern  side  of  the 
bay  a small  stream  discharges 
into  a cove  formed  by  a long 
peninsula  and  the  point  next 
eastward.  This  stream  was  ex- 
amined by  Ensign  Hepburn, 
and  found  to  carry  only  hump- 
backs and  dog  salmon,  though 
cohoes  may  also  run  later. 

The  stream  is  not  a lake 
outlet,  but  has  its  source  in 
the  mountains  about  6 miles  in 
a general  southerly  direction 
from  the  mouth.  At  a point  3 
miles  from  the  mouth,  where 
it  reaches  an  elevation  of  170 
feet,  it  is  quite  small  and  flows 
through  a gently  ascending  and 
rather  flat  country,  increas- 
ing in  size  toward  the  mouth 
by  conjunction  with  small 
branches.  Tide  water  extends 
three-eighths  of  a mile  up- 
stream; immediately  above  this 
point  the  width  is  about  16  feet, 
depth  9 inches,  with  a velocity  of  about  3 knots.  The  bed  is  generally  rocky,  and 
where  it  widens  it  is  sandy  and  gravelly.  From  a point  I mile  above  its  mouth  and 
for  a distance  of  about  three-fourths  of  a mile  it  runs  as  a continuous  rapid.  There 
are  two  cascades,  as  noted  in  the  sketch,  with  the  greatest  sheer  fall  of  3 feet.  The 
water  is  dark,  and  at  the  mouth  and  1 mile  above  had  a temperature  of  51°  F.  The 
banks  are  densely  wooded,  but  back  from  the  stream  belt  the  country  seemed  more 
open.  At  the  mouth  is  a gravel  bar,  and  within  the  banks  are  grassy.  There  are  no 


SHIPLEY  BAY  • 

Humpback  Stream,  Shipley  Bay,  Prince  of  Wales  Island. 


272 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


artificial  obstructions,  but  throughout  its  entire  length  there  is  much  fallen  timber, 
which  in  places  must  offer  much  difficulty  to  the  fish  in  ascending.  Humpbacks 
and  dog  salmon  were  seen  for  a distance  of  about  2{-  miles;  all  were  in  poor  condi- 
tion, and  the  lacerations  showed  the  difficulties  encountered  in  ascending.  Dead  dog 
salmon  were  numerous. 

BAY  OF  PILLARS  AND  STREAMS. 

This  bay  is  on  the  west  side  of  Kuiu  Island  and  opens  on  Chatham  Strait,  having 
Point  Sullivan  for  the  northern  entrance  point  and  Point  Ellis  marking  the  southern. 
It  is  a large  body  of  water,  much  obstructed  by  islands  and  reefs,  and  has  two  deep 
arms  similarly  obstructed;  the  one  on  the  north  will  be  referred  to  as  the  North  Bay 
of  Pillars,  and  the  other  as  the  South  Bay  of  Pillars. 

These  waters  have  been  surveyed  by  the  Coast,  and  Geodetic  Survey,  and  as 
that  office  has  probably  written  sailing  directions,  notes  for  entering  will  not  be  made 
here. 

On  the  southern  shore  of  the  South  Bay  of  Pillars,  about  4 miles  from  Point 
Ellis,  the  cannery  of  the  Astoria  and  Alaska  Packing  Company  was  located.  This 
cannery  was  burned  in  1892  (see  my  former  report,  p.  121),  but  the  site  and  remain- 
ing building  were  purchased  by  Mr.  Jack  Mantle,  who  lives  here  during  the  fishing 
season  and  operates  a saltery  in  each  of  the  Pillar  Bay  arms. 

The  principal  streams  in  this  vicinity  fished  for  commercial  purposes  are:  One 
at  the  head  of  the  South  Bay  of  Pillars,  which,  when  the  cannery  was  operated,  was 
known  as  the  Home  Stream  or  Point  Ellis  Stream  (the  Indian  name  for  it  is  Kutla- 
koo);  one  at  the  head  of  the  North  Bay  of  Pillars,  which  is  known  as  the  Pillar  Bay 
Stream;  and  one  in  the  large  bay  to  the  southward  (Tebenkof  Bay),  known  as  Kuiu 
Stream,  or  Alecks  Stream. 

POINT  ELLIS  STREAM,  OR  KUTLAKOO. 

Entering  the  South  Bay  of  Pillars  the  ship’s  course  is  close  along  the  southern 
shore,  quite  straight,  and  fairly  clear  for  a distance  of  5 miles,  when  the  bay  becomes 
choked  with  islands  and  reefs,  which  straggle  to  the  head.  In  the  southeastern  angle 
an  arm  extends  to  the  eastward  for  about  a mile,  and  receives  the  waters  of  a small 
humpback  stream.  On  the  northern  side  the  bay  terminates  in  the  Narrows  (Skookum 
Chuck),  which  extend  in  a northeastern  direction  about  three-fourths  of  a mile,  with 
a width  of  about  100  yards,  through  which  the  current  is  quite  violent  during  the 
strength  of  the  tide.  These  Narrows  connect  with  an  inner  bay  3 miles  long,  in  a 
northeast  and  southwest  direction,  by  three-fourths  of  a mile  wide,  which  at  the 
eastern  end  sends  an  arm  at  right  angles  to  the  southward  about  1 mile  long  by  one- 
fourth  of  a mile  wide,  receiving  at  the  western  terminus  the  waters  of  the  Point 
Ellis  or  Kutlakoo  stream.  This  stream,  examined  b}r  Lieutenant  Rodman  and  Mr. 
Fassett,  is  a lake  outlet,  and  from  the  grassy  flats  at  its  mouth  to  the  lake  is  about 
three-fourths  of  a mile  long,  with  an  average  width  of  18  feet  and  a depth  of  10 
inches.  It  has  a general  north-and-south  direction,  flowing  over  a gravelly  bottom 
between  moderately  steep  banks  heavily  wooded.  As  the  lake  is  not  more  than  15 
or  20  feet  above  tide  water  the  current  is  not  strong,  nor  are  there  any  falls  or 
strong  rapids.  Tide  water  extends  about  50  yards  within  the  mouth. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  TN  1900. 


273 


The  lake  is  slightly  crescentic  in  shape,  with  a general  northwesterly  and  south- 
easterly direction,  and  is  about  1 mile  long,  with  an  average  width  of  one-fourth  of  a 
mile.  The  shores  are  heavily  wooded  and  rise  rapidly  to  the  higher  mountains.  The 
water  appears  deep  and  clear,  with  a brownish  tinge,  and  as  far  as  could  be  examined 
the  bottom  is  gravelly  around  the  shore  shelf.  At  the  point  of  discharge  the  lake  is 
shallow,  with  a grassy  bottom.  There  are  several  feeders.  The  largest  enters  the 


Kutlakoo  Lake  and  Stream,  Kuiu  Island. 


head  of  the  lake  through  a narrow  valley  and  is  nearly  as  large  as  the  outlet;  it  forms 
the  main  spawning-ground  for  the  redfish.  A second  feeder,  said  to  be  on  the  eastern 
side,  was  not  noticed  by  the  party. 

The  temperature  of  the  stream  water  on  August  29  was  62 3 F.,  and  the  lake 
water,  at  a depth  of  2 feet,  one-fourth  of  a mile  from  the  outlet,  was  61°  F. 

In  1892  Mr.  J.  C.  Callbreath,  the  present  owner  of  the  hatchery  on  Etolin 


F.  C.  B.  1901—18 


274 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Island,  then  part  owner  and  manager  of  the  Point  Ellis  cannery,  operated  a small 
hatchery  on  the  left  bank  of  this  stream  (Kutlakoo),  about  200  yards  above  the 
mouth.  It  was  rather  primitive,  the  work  all  being  conducted  without  shelter.  The 
hatchery  water  was  conveyed  by  a box  flume  from  a point  on  the  stream  about  300 
yards  from  the  lake,  where  the  remnants  of  a barricade  built  to  hold  the  spawning 
fish  may  still  be  seen.  About  1,000,000  eggs  were  fertilized  and  placed  in  the 
baskets,  but  after  they  commenced  hatching  an  exceptionally  high  September  tide 
destined  the  plant,  and  it  was  never  rebuilt.  It  is  said  that  much  difficulty  was 
experienced  with  fungus.  At  the  old  hatchery  site  stakes  were  found  driven  in  the 
bed  of  the  stream,  between  which,  it  is  said,  a net  is  stretched  to  hold  the  fish.  A 
few  yards  above  this  point  are  the  remains  of  a picket  barricade. 

Immediately  below  the  point  of  discharge  from  the  lake  a beaver  dam  was  found, 
built  of  sticks,  brush,  and  moss,  which  held  the  waters  back  and  allowed  no  fish  to 
pass.  This  was  partly  cleaned  away  by  the  examining  party,  and,  as  the  water 
rushed  through,  the  stream  rose  very  materially,  and  large  numbers  of  salmon,  held 
in  the  pools  below,  ascended  rapidly. 

The  value  of  the  stream,  as  given  by  the  cannery  the  last  jrear  it  was  fished,  is 
35,000  redfish,  5,000  cohoes,  and  100,000  humpbacks.  The  owner  of  the  saltery 
states  that  the  number  for  redfish  is  too  large,  but  the  stream  will  yield  from  20,000 
to  22,000  redfish,  possibly  a few  more  by  hard  fishing.  The  first  run  of  redfish  in 
this  stream  usually  occurs  from  June  25  to  July  1,  and  the  second  run  from  July  10 
to  August  7.  The  length  of  the  season  varies  with  the  condition  of  the  weather;  if 
it  is  dry  there  will  not  be  sufficient  water  to  permit  the  fish  to  ascend,  and  they  are 
held  around  the  mouth  until  the  water  rises.  These  redfish  run  about  50  to  the 
barrel,  or  13  to  14  to  the  case.  The  cohoes  in  this  stream  are  very  large  and  run  24 
to  the  barrel.  They  appear  from  the  middle  to  the  latter  part  of  August;  from 
September  10  to  October  4 they  run  strong  and  continue  in  diminishing  numbers 
until  November.  The  humpbacks  run  from  the  15th  of  July  to  the  end  of  August, 
and  they  are  present  some  years  in  large  numbers  until  the  end  of  September,  but 
they  are  not  then  in  good  condition.  The  dog  salmon  run  with  the  humpbacks. 

It  is  said  that  a good  hatchery  site  might  be  located  near  the  large  feeder  at  the 
head  of  the  lake. 

Complete  stream  data  is  not  available,  but  the  following  may  be  of  interest: 

The  Baranoft'  Packing  Company  took  fish  from  the  stream  as  follows:  In  1892, 
8,942  redfish,  July  2 to  July  25,  and  2,143  cohoes,  August  18  to  September  8;  in  1893, 
2,605  redfish,  July  4 to  July  20;  in  1894,  8,740  redfish,  July  7 to  July  25;  in 
1895,  14,572  redfish,  July  4 to  August  10;  in  1896,  15,834  redfish,  July  12  to  August 
28;  in  1897,  11,709  redfish,  July  6 to  August  7. 

other  fisheries:  In  1898, 10,000  redfish;  1899,  unknown;  1900,  16,500  redfish. 

The  Point  Ellis  stream  (Kutlakoo)  is  the  only  salmon  stream  in  the  South  Bay 
of  Pillars  that  has  any  present  commercial  value.  At  the  old  cannery  site  there  is  a 
small  stream,  called  by  the  Indians  Quat-a-hein,  or  trout  stream,  on  account  of  the 
abundance  of  that  species,  and  around  its  mouth  some  years  several  thousand  cohoes 
may  be  obtained,  but  it  is  only  an  occasional  run. 


KUTLAKOO  STREAM,  KUIU  ISLAND. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  274.) 


Plate  XXVII. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


275 


NORTH  BAY  OF  PILLARS. 

The  North  Bay  of  Pillars,  like  the  South,  is  much  obstructed  by  islets  and  reefs, 
and  local  knowledge  is  necessary  for  safe  navigation.  The  head  of  the  bay,  however, 
is  clear,  and  is  If  miles  in  length  by  1 mile  in  width,  forming  a beautiful  harbor 
with  excellent  anchorage  in  moderate  depths.  At  the  extreme  northern  head  of  the 
bay  are  the  mouths  of  two  large  streams,  three-fourths  of  a mile  apart,  bordered  by 
extensive  tidal  flats.  Neither  of  these  streams  is  said  to  carry  redflsh,  but  all  other 
species  common  to  the  district  run  here. 


A N (r™,) 


West  Stream.  East  Stream. 

Sketches  of  East  and  West  streams,  North  Bay  of  Pillars. 


PILLAR  BAY  STREAM. 

This  is  the  western  stream  at  the  head  of  the  bay  and  is  the  most  important,  as  it 
carries  a great  number  of  cohoes  of  large  size.  It  was  examined  by  Ensign  Kempt!' 
August  29  a distance  of  4i  miles,  where  it  is  elevated  40  feet  above  the  sea. 

It  flows  in  a general  south-southeast  direction  between  steep  banks,  heavily 
wooded,  over  a gravelly  bed.  The  water  is  clear,  of  a brownish  tinge,  as  though 
flowing  from  a lake  (though  none  was  found),  and  at  each  mile  from  the  mouth  the 
temperature  was  51°  F.  Tide  water  extends  1 mile  from  the  mouth,  at  which  point 
the  stream  is  9 feet  wide,  12  inches  deep,  and  runs  a 3-knot  current,  in  the  length 
examined  two  tributaries  enter  from  the  eastward,  one  three-fourths  of  a mile,  the 
other  If  miles,  from  the  mouth.  The  stream  flows  around  several  islands  in  its 
course.  The  eastern  channel,  around  an  island  about  2 miles  from  the  mouth,  has  at 
the  lower  end  a rapid  about  30  yards  long,  and  at  the  other  end  of  this,  and  in  the 


276 


-BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


western  channel,  are  the  remains  of  barricades.  Trees  have  been  felled  across  these 
branches  and  were  still  in  position,  but  the  split  rails  were  washed  away.  A gravel 
ridge  was  noted  on  the  upstream  side,  where  the  rails  had  lodged  in  the  bed.  A large 
number  of  humpbacks  and  dog  salmon  were  seen  spawning  in  the  lower  courses, 
growing  less  in  number  as  the  higher  portion  of  the  stream  was  reached.  It  was  too 
early  for  cohoes. 

This  is  a very  large  stream,  flowing  considerable  water,  and  carries  a heavy  run 
of  all  species  of  salmon  common  to  the  district,  except  redlish,  of  which,  it  is  said, 
there  are  none  in  the  North  Bay  of  Pillars.  This  is  a noted  locality  for  cohoes. 
Fifty  thousand  to  60,000  of  this  species,  it  is  said,  may  be  taken  around  the  mouth 
and  the  head  of  the  bay,  as  well  as  about  100,000  humpbacks.  Dog  salmon  are  also 
abundant.  These  cohoes  are  large  and,  for  commercial  purposes,  run  from  Septem- 
ber ] to  October  7,  then  in  diminishing  numbers  until  November.  The  humpbacks 
run  from  the  middle  of  July  to  the  end  of  August  and  the  dog  salmon  throughout  the 
season,  but  mostly  during  the  humpback  run. 

There  are  no  stream  records  available.  Besides  those  salted,  cannery  steamers 
sometimes  fish  here  for  a few  days,  and  what  can  be  done  during  that  time  is  indi- 
cated by  the  following  record  from  the  books  of  the  Baranoff  Packing  Company: 
In  1892,  1,522  cohoes,  September  8 to  15;  in  1895,  2,836  cohoes,  September  20  to 
22;  in  1896,  3,607  cohoes,  September  15  to  19;  in  1897,  957  cohoes,  September  19. 

PILLAR  BAY  STREAM,  No.  2. 

This  stream,  next  east  of  the  Pillar  Bay  Stream  and  three-fourths  of  a mile  from 
it,  was  also  examined  by  Ensign  Kempff  for  a distance  of  8 miles  and  no  lake  found. 
From  the  most  distant  point  reached,  which  is  305  feet  above  sea  level,  the  stream 
flows  to  the  northwest  for  3 miles  and  then  turns  in  a general  southerhT  direction  for 
5 miles.  The  water  is  clear  and  clean  and  flows  over  a rocky  bottom,  interspersed 
with  patches  of  gravel  and  shoals,  over  which  fish  were  spawning.  There  are 
numerous  rapids,  and  at  a point  1 miles  from  the  mouth  there  is  a drop  of  30  feet 
in  the  main  fall,  besides  several  smaller  steps.  The  banks  are  heavily  wooded, 
precipitous,  and  broken  into  bluffs  in  the  vicinity  of  the  falls  and  at  a point  about  1 
mile  above  the  mouth.  Tide  water  extends  a mile  from  the  mouth,  where  the  stream 
is  30  feet  wide,  18  inches  deep,  and  runs  with  a strong  current.  The  temperature, 
taken  each  mile,  was  51°  F.  (August  30).  Five  small  tributaries  were  noticed  in  the 
distance — two  entering  from  the  west  and  three  from  the  east — and  were  examined. 
There  were  no  natural  or  artificial  obstructions  below  the  falls.  A large  number  of 
humpbacks  and  dog  salmon  were  seen  spawning  in  the  lower  courses  of  the  stream, 
diminishing  in  numbers  as  far  as  the  falls,  but  none  above  it. 

The  fishing  is  carried  on  around  the  head  of  the  bay.  The  values  given  under 
the  Pillar  Bay  Stream  include  the  one  just  described,  though  it  furnished  but  a small 
part  of  the  total. 

MANTLE  SALTERIES. 

There  are  two  salteries  operated  by  Mr.  Jack  Mantle;  one  on  the  eastern  bank 
of  the  arm  and  near  the  mouth  of  the  Point  Ellis  Stream,  where  there  are  10  tanks 
each  of  20  barrels  capacity,  and  one  on  the  western  shore  of  the  inner  North  Bay  of 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


277 


Pillars  opposite  the  mouth  of  the  Pillar  Bay  Stream,  where  6 tanks,  each  of  20  barrels 
capacity,  are  operated.  There  is  also  one  saltery  tank  at  the  old  cannery  site. 

He  used  1 drag  seine  120  fathoms  by  1 fathoms  by  3-inch  mesh,  valued  at  $200; 
1 scow  of  100  barrels  capacity,  value  $75;  1 35-foot  seine  boat,  value  $50,  and  1 
small  skill',  value  $25.  During  the  fishing  season  he  employed  6 men  (native)  for 
fishermen  and  1 klootchmen  for  butchers.  The  saltery  at  the  Point  Ellis  Stream  is 
operated  during  the  early  part  of  the  season  for  redfish,  and  when  the  cohoes  begin 
to  run  the  gear  is  transferred  to  the  Pillar  Bay  Stream  and  that  species  is  salted. 
Mantle  commenced  salting  here  in  1893,  and  has  averaged  about  350  barrels  each 
year  to  date. 

TEBENKOF  BAY. 

This  bay  is  on  Kuiu  Island,  next  south  of  the  Bay  of  Pillars,  and  opens  upon 
Chatham  Strait.  It  is  a large  sheet  of  water  and  is  said  to  have  deep  channels  and 
good  anchorages,  but  has  not  yet  been  surveyed.  Several  streams  carrying  various 
species  of  salmon  enter  the  bay,  but  only  one  that  has  a run  of  redfish  in  sufficient 
numbers  for  commercial  purposes.  This  one  is  known  as  Kuiu  Stream,  or  Alecks 
Stream.  This  stream  was  examined  by  Ensign  Kempt!  and  Mr.  Fassett  on  August 
31,  Avho  visited  it  with  a party  from  the  anchorage  in  Pillar  Bay.  It  is  located  on 
the  eastern  side  of  the  inner  bay,  about  the  middle  of  its  length,  and  is  hidden  in 
approaching  it  by  islands  lying  off  the  shore,  but  i<  maybe  recognized  by  a log  house 
situated  a short  distance  north  from  the  mouth. 

The  general  direction  of  the  stream  and  lake  system  is  north-northwest  and 
south-southeast.  The  former  is  about  2£  miles  in  length.  The  stream  Hows  over  a 
rocky  and  gravelly  bottom  between  moderately  steep,  well-timbered  banks,  and  at  a 
point  midway  on  its  course  is  50  feet  wide,  1 foot  deep,  and  has  a current  of  about 
1 knot  per  hour.  The  water,  though  clear,  has  a brownish  tinge  and  a temperature 
of  55°  to  56  E.  There  are  no  marked  rapids,  and  no  tributaries  were  noticed. 
Tide  water  extends  nearly  a mile  from  the  mouth,  around  which,  at  low  water,  exten- 
sive flats  are  uncovered.  The  stream  drains  two  lakes.  The  first,  a “mud”  lake,  is 
an  irregular  shaped  body  of  water  about  1 mile  long,  with  an  extreme  width  of  one- 
half  mile.  It  is  shallow,  with  a muddy  bottom,  and  has  three  very  small  and  shallow 
feeders  entering  from  the  westward,  none  of  which  appeared  to  be  used  as  spawning 
ground.  The  temperature  of  the  water  along  the  shores  of  this  lake  was  found  to 
be  63°  F.  This  increased  temperature  above  that  of  the  stream  is  due  probably  to 
the  shallow  depth  along  the  side  where  there  is  no  circulation.  At  the  upper  end 
of  the  lake  there  is  a narrow  extension,  about  250  yards  long,  connecting  with  the 
second  lake,  which  is  about  2 miles  in  length,  with  an  extreme  width  of  H miles,  and, 
from  appearances,  quite  deep.  The  banks  are  steep,  well  timbered,  and  rise  rapidly 
to  the  higher  slopes.  The  beaches  bordering  them  are  gravelly  with  shale.  The 
lake  is  at  an  elevation  of  about  50  feet  above  tide  water,  and  the  surface  temperature 
of  the  water  near  the  shore  was  61°  F.  At  the  head  it  receives  two  large  feeders, 
which  appear  to  flow  through  converging  valleys,  and  in  these  feeders  are  spawning 
beds  of  the  redfish. 

In  the  main  stream,  a short  distance  above  tide  water,  posts  were  found  which 
were  probably  used  to  support  a net  stretched  across  to  hold  the  fish,  a line  of  rocks 


278 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


indicating  the  foot  weights  that  had  held  the  net  close  to  the  bed.  Above  this  were 
the  remains  of  three  barricades,  within  a distance  of  100  yards  of  one  another,  con- 
sisting of  trees  felled  across  the  stream.  The  rails  had  been  carried  away,  probably 
by  freshets.  Pieces  of  wire  netting  were  found,  indicating  that  this  also  had  been 
used  in  its  construction.  A large  number  of  humpbacks  and  dog  salmon  were  seen 


over  the  gravel  beds  in  the  main  stream,  but  no  redtish,  this  species  probably  having 
all  ascended  to  the  feeders;  the  date  of  visit  was  too  early  for  cohoes.  Large  num- 
bers of  dead  fish  were  noticed. 

From  inquiry  and  observation  it  is  believed  that  a good  site  for  a hatchery  might 
be  obtained  on  the  banks  of  the  large  feeders  at  the  head  of  the  lake.  The  redtish 
running  in  this  stream  are  said  to  be  small,  averaging  about  65  per  barrel,  or  15  to  16 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


279 


to  the  case,  but  they  run  very  early;  in  fact,  the  dates  given  are  the  earliest  of  any 
stream  within  my  knowledge  in  southeastern  Alaska.  The  run  of  redfish  commences 
about  June  1 and  continues  until  the  middle  of  July.  The  cohoes  run  for  fishing 
purposes  from  September  1 until  the  early  part  of  October,  and  in  scattering  bunches 
until  November.  The  humpbacks  are  said  to  be  very  plentiful  and  are  exceptionally 
large  and  fine  fish.  They  usually  run  early,  the  time  being  from  July  1 to  August  1. 
The  only  record  available  is  a statement  that  the  Point  Ellis  cannery  in  one  season 
took  from  around  this  stream  38,000  redfish,  10,000  cohoes,  and  200,000  humpbacks. 
Mr.  Jack  Mantle,  who  has  fished  in  this  locality  for  many  years,  stated  that  he  had 
seen  a large  run  of  steelheads  in  the  stream  in  May. 

The  following  notes  from  the  records  of  the  Baranoff  Packing  Company,  giving 
their  catches  from  this  stream,  may  be  of  interest  as  indicating  the  catch  of  a cannery 
steamer  visiting  different  localities  for  fish:  5,990  redfish,  June  15  to  July  7,  1892; 
3,529  redfish,  June  19  to  July  27,  1893;  730  redfish,  July  19  to  July  21,  1895;  1,500 
redfish,  June  15  to  July  29,  1896;  4,304  redfish,  June  29  to  July  7,  1897. 


WRANGELL. 

Glacier  Packing  Company , Point  Highfield. — The  history  of  this  cannery  with 
the  streams  fished,  etc.,  was  given  in  my  former  report,  pages  103-108,  and  reference 
here  will  only  be  made  to  such  details  as  were  not  then  recorded. 

There  has  been  no  change  in  the  cannery,  but  the  company  expects  to  erect  new 
buildings  for  the  season  of  1901. 

In  canning,  the  following  machinery  is  operated:  Five  retorts,  2 fillers  and  1 
spare  one,  2 toppers,  1 solderer,  and  1 cutter. 

The  fish  are  hoisted  by  steam  in  buckets  to  the  wharf,  dumped  into  the  bins, 
and,  after  cleaning,  transferred  direct  from  the  draining  tubs  to  the  cutters.  The 
daily  capacity  is  1,600  cases.  There  are  no  can-makers.  All  tins  are  made  at  the 
cannery  by  hand,  except  about  1,200  cases  of  fiats,  using  100-pound  tin  plate  for 
bodies  and  95-pound  for  tops,  all  domestic. 

The  Chinese  contract  was  42£  cents,  with  the  usual  conditions.  The  fishermen 
contracted  for  $125  for  the  run,  10  cents  for  king  salmon,  and  5 cents  for  redfish  and 
cohoes,  per  boat  of  two  men,  and  full  board.  The  cannery  purchased  fish  and  paid 
7 cents  for  redfish  and  cohoes,  if  the  gear  (web  and  boats)  was  furnished,  or  8 cents  if 
it  was  not  furnished.  Humpbacks  were  purchased  at  $10  per  thousand.  The  cannery 
steamers  call  at  the  fisheries  for  all  fish.  Occasionally  a steelhead  is  taken;  there  are 
plenty  of  halibut  and  flounders,  but  no  shad  or  sturgeon  since  my  last  report. 

The  following  are  the  statistics  for  1900: 

Hands  employed:  24  white  fishermen,  besides  purchasing  from  fisheries  engaging 
150  native  fishermen,  7 white  and  4 native  cannery-hands,  and  86  Chinese. 

Fishing  gear:  Twelve  king  salmon  gill  nets,  each  250  fathoms  by  28  meshes  by 
8^-inch  mesh;  12  redfish  gill  nets,  each  250  fathoms  by  30  meshes  by  6|-inch  mesh, 
value  65  cents  per  fathom;  2 drag  seines,  120  fathoms  by  200  meshes  at  bunt  and 
100  meshes  at  wings  by  3-inch  mesh,  valued  at  $1.50  per  fathom;  5 purse  seines,  120 
fathoms  by  250  meshes  by  3-inch  mesh,  value  $2  per  fathom. 


280 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Boats,  lighters,  etc. : Two  lighters,  <$600  each;  7 seine  boats,  $60  each;  14  Columbia 
River  boats,  $200  each;  8 old  Columbia  River  boats,  $25  each;  5 skill's,  $25  each. 

The  following  vessels,  owned  b}r  the  company,  were  employed: 


Class  and  name. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

Ship  Llewellyn  .1.  Morse 

1,271 

0) 

135, 000 

Steamer  Ella  Rohlffs 

36 

5 

15, 000 

Steamer  Aleut 

19 

5 

10, 000 

1 Fishermen. 


The  following  was  the  output  in  1900: 


Species. 

Cases. 

Number 
to  the 
case. 

Dates. 

King  salmon 

1,837 

3.8 

May  15-July  1 

Redfish  

10,848 

10.1 

June  18-Aug.  10 

Cohoes 

9,401 

7.4 

July  10-Sept.  18 

Humpbacks 

36, 432 

15.8 

July  2-Aug.  22 

Thlinket  Packing  Company. — This  company  was  organized  at  Portland,  Oreg., 
and  incorporated  under  the  laws  of  that  State.  A sawmill  at  Point  Gerard,  on  the 
mainland  opposite  Point  Highfield  at  the  junction  of  the  Eastern  Passage  and  the 
southeast  stream  of  the  Stikine  Delta,  was  purchased,  and  in  the  spring  of  1899  a 
cannery  was  erected  and  a small  pack  was  made  that  year.  The  site  does  not  afford 
much  room  on  level  ground,  necessitating  considerable  crowding  in  the  building 
arrangements.  There  is  a substantial  wharf  with  the  fish-house  over  deep  water, 
where  the  current  carries  away  the  gurry  and  leaves  the  place  free  from  the  un- 
pleasant odors  so  frequently  noticed  around  plants  of  this  kind.  The  cannery  plant 
consists  of  2 steam  boxes,  2 retorts,  2 hand  cutters,  1 can-washer,  1 crimper,  and  1 
solderer.  The  pack  is  made  by  hand,  and  the  plant  has  a daily  capacity  of  800  cases. 
The  fish  are  pewed  from  boats  or  lighters  into  a chute,  adjustable  for  different  stages 
of  the  tide,  which  leads  to  a cage  car,  or  vertical  elevator,  operated  by  steam.  When 
this  car  is  filled  it  is  hoisted  and  its  contents  dumped  into  a second  car  which  runs 
to  the  fish-house.  All  the  cans,  except  a small  percentage  of  fiats,  are  made  by  hand 
at  the  cannery,  of  100-pound  domestic  tin  plate.  The  Chinese  contract  was  42  cents 
for  tails  made  at  the  cannery,  38  cents  for  tails  purchased,  and  42  cents  for  flats  pur- 
chased, with  the  usual  conditions.  The  fishermen’s  contract  was  transportation  and 
board,  bonis  of  $80  each  for  beach  work,  10  cents  for  king  salmon,  5 cents  for  red- 
fish  and  cohoes,  and  1 cent  for  humpbacks,  per  boat.  The  fishing  bosses  had  allow- 
ances which  brought  their  monthly  wages  to  $70  or  $75,  and  the  others  averaged  $50 
and  $55  per  month.  Indian  labor  was  used,  but  it  is  not  looked  upon  with  favor  on 
account  of  being  unreliable. 

Four  traps  were  built  this  year  at  an  expense  of  $5,500,  located  as  follows:  One 
in  Dry  Strait;  1 in  the  lower  part  of  the  southeast  stream  of  the  Stikine;  1 about  300 
yards  west  from  the  cannery,  and  1 in  Zimovia  Strait,  about  10  miles  below  Wrangell. 
The  first  three  were  complete  failures,  although  rebuilt  several  times;  the  fourth  was 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


281 


fairly  successful  and  about  paid  the  expenses  connected  with  all.  The  following  are 
its  dimensions:  Lead,  150  fathoms,  heart  double,  15  fathoms  across,  and  pot  3G  feet 
square,  in  70  feet  of  water  at  high  water.  A short  channel  lead,  or  wing,  extended 
from  the  corner  of  the  heart.  Webbing  all  tarred;  4- inch  mesh  for  the  leads,  3-inch 
mesh  for  the  rest. 


Sketch-plan  of  Thlinket  Packing  Co.’s  salmon  trap,  located  on  Zimovia  Strait. 


The  transportation  was  by  regular  steamer  lines  running  from  Puget  Sound  to 
Alaska. 

The  following  are  the  statistics  for  1900: 

Hands  employed:  35  white  and  30  native  fishermen,  9 white  and  7 native  cannery- 
hands,  49  Chinese. 

Fishing  gear:  In  addition  to  the  traps  referred  to,  13  king-salmon  gill  nets,  each 
200  fathoms  by  22  meshes,  97 -inch  mesh;  12  redtish  gill  nets,  each  200  fathoms  by 
24  meshes,  67-inch  mesh;  value,  65  cents  per  fathom;  4 drag  seines  100  fathoms  long 
by  178  meshes,  3-inch  mesh,  value  $1.50  per  fathom;  1 purse  seine  185  fathoms  by 
220  meshes,  3-inch  mesh,  value  $600;  1 purse  seine  100  fathoms  by  160  meshes, 
3-inch  mesh,  value  $400. 

Boats,  lighters,  etc.:  One  house  scow,  $400;  1 fish  scow,  $100;  10  Columbia 
River  boats,  $200  each;  6 gill-net  skiffs,  $60  each;  6 seine  boats,  $60  each;  2 white- 
halls,  $85  each;  3 skiffs,  $20  each. 

Cannery  tenders:  Launch  Perhaps , 6 tons;  crew,  2;  value,  $1,500;  owned. 
Steamer  Baranoff, , 10  tons;  crew,  5;  value,  $5,000;  chartered. 

The  following  was  the  output  in  1900: 


Species. 

Cases. 

Number 
to  the 
case. 

Dates. 

King  salmon: 

Red 

1 1, 375 
2 674 
f 1 505 
1 23,  460 
2 2,349 
215,540 
21,737 

} 3 
} 

7. 5 
18 

6.5 

Mar  14-June  28 
June  28-Aug.  16 

Aug.  2-Sept.  21 
July  12-Aug.  31 
Aug.  1-Sept.  15 

White 

Red fish  

Dog  salmon 

1 Flats.  2 Tails. 


The  streams  fished  by  this  cannery  aie  the  following:  Southeast  Pass  Stikine 
River,  Anan  Ba\r,  Seward  Passage,  Thoms  Place,  Kunk  Creek,  Rocky  Bay,  Steamer 
Bay,  Eagle  Creek,  Ratz  Harbor,  Red  Bay. 


282 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


THOMS  STREAM  (AW-AW),  ZIMOYIA  STRAIT. 

Near  the  southern  end  of  Zimovia  Strait,  on  the  eastern  side,  4 miles  northwest 
from  Found  Island,  is  a bight  with  several  islets  and  rocks  at  the  entrance.  At  the 
head  of  this  bight  is  a redtish  stream,  referred  to  in  my  former  report,  page  107,  as 
Old  Village,  but  better  known  as  Thoms  Stream,  fished  by  the  Wrangell  and  Gerard 
Point  canneries.  It  was  examined  September  13  by  Lieutenant  Rodman. 


Thoms  Stream  and  Lake,  Wrangell  Island. 


This  stream  and  lake  drain  a low,  flat  country,  lying  between  mountain  systems, 
reaching  an  elevation  on  the  east  of  2,000  to  2,500  feet,  and  on  the  west  500  to  1,000 
feet.  In  its  windings  the  stream  is  fully  6 miles  in  length  from  mouth  to  source, 
and,  in  a straight  line,  about  4£  miles  in  a general  WNW.  direction.  Tide  water 
extends  through  extensive  flats  around  its  mouth,  uncovered  at  low  water  and  about 
200  yards  within  the  tree  line,  where  it  is  55  feet  wide  and  from  12  to  18  inches 
deep.  The  banks  generally  are  low,  but  in  places  there  are  narrow  canyons  where 
they  rise  abruptly.  The  borders  are  wooded  with  the  usual  growth,  but  considerable 
areas  of  boggy,  moss-covered  flats  were  noticed.  The  bottom  is  gravelly,  with  patches 
of  rock  and  bowlders,  but  there  are  large  areas  well  adapted  for  spawning-beds; 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


283 


about  TV  miles  below  the  lake  the  stream  runs  over  a series  of  rapids;  the  highest 
fall  of  any  of  the  steps  is  not  over  2 feet.  There  are  no  falls  or  serious  obstacles  to 
impede  the  ascent  of  fish,  the  stream  is  usually  clear,  and  there  were  no  evidences  of 
barricades.  The  water  is  brownish  in  color,  with  a temperature  of  51°  F.  There 
are  a number  of  small  tributaries,  one  of  some  size  about  2|  miles  from  the  mouth; 
this  is  about  2 miles  long  and  has  its  source  in  the  mountains  to  the  eastward.  The 
altitude  of  the  main  stream  at  the  mouth  of  the  tributary  is  155  feet  and  of  the  lake 
295  feet.  The  latter  is  small,  pear-shaped,  and  about  1 mile  long,  with  a greatest 
width  of  not  much  more  than  one-fourth  mile.  The  lower  end  is  narrow,  apparently 
shallow,  and  has  many  pond  lilies.  The  shores  are  low  and,  though  wooded,  there 
is  considerable  open  country,  particularly  on  the  eastern  side,  where  there  are  large 
areas  of  grassy,  boggy  flats. 

At  the  lower  end  on  the  western  side  there  is  a feeder,  and  one  at  the  upper  end, 
in  which  the  sound  of  falls  was  heard.  It  is  possible  that  there  are  other  feeders  01- 
lake  connections,  as  the  volume  of  discharge  is  large.  From  the  surrounding  condi- 
tions it  is  believed  that  a good  hatchery  site  might  be  found  here. 

The  only  stream  records  available  are  the  following: 


Species. 

1897. 

1898. 

1900. 

No. 

Date. 

No. 

Date. 

No. 

Date. 

Redfish 

Cohoes 

17, 138 
1,992 
42, 109 

June  28-Aug.  6 . . . 

Aug.  16-31 

July  12- Aug.  18  ... 

10, 000 
5, 000 

June  28-Aug.  1 

Aug.  10-Sept.  1 

24, 061 
7, 651 
74,000 

June  26-Aug.  1. 
Aug.  5-Sept  12. 
Aug.  5-18. 

Under  average  conditions  the  stream  has  a value  of  about  20,000  redfish  and  5,000 
cohoes. 


MEYERS  STREAM,  CLEVELAND  PENINSULA. 


Lemesurier  Point,  the  northwestern  end  of  Cleveland  Peninsula,  forms,  with  a 
string  of  islands  to  the  westward  of  that  point,  a narrow  bay,  at  the  head  of  which 
is  the  mouth  of  a stream  fished  by  Mr.  Meyers.  This  stream  carries  a few  redfish, 
and  was  partially  examined  by  Lieutenant  Rodman  on  September  Id. 

The  stream  is  very  small,  and  when  examined  there  was  so  little  water  running 
in  it  that  at  low  water  humpbacks  could  not  enter.  At  the  mouth  it  was  about  8 
feet  wide,  with  an  inch  of  water  over  a riffle  for  a distance  of  150  yards.  A mile 
above  the  mouth  it  was  a mountain  brook,  flowing  between  rocks  and  bowlders,  with 
here  and  there  a shallow  pool.  Tide  water  extends  about  150  yards  upstream.  At  a 
distance  of  1 mile  the  elevation  is  70  feet,  and  the  temperature  of  water  was  51°  F. 
The  stream  bottom  is  rocky,  with  gravel  patches,  and  the  banks  are  well  wooded. 
Many  of  the  pools  were  tilled  with  spawning  humpbacks  in  an  advanced  stage  of  decay, 
and  many  dead  fish  were  seen  along  the  banks.  In  places  the  bottom  was  covered 
with  spawn. 

The  stream  is  said  to  have  a lake  source,  but  the  examination  was  not  continued 
to  the  lake.  Later  it  was  learned  that  the  stream  is  usually  very  low  and  that  fish 
can  not  ascend  until  after  the  fall  rains  raise  the  water. 


284 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Formerly  the  fish  from  Meyers  stream  were  sold  to  the  Loring  cannery.  None 
were  purchased  by  Loring  in  1900.  The  following  is  the  only  record  available: 


Species. 

189G. 

1897. 

1898. 

1899. 

No. 

Date. 

No. 

Date. 

No. 

Date. 

No. 

3, 211 
8,760 

Date. 

Redfish 

Cohoes 

Humpbacks  . . . 

4,651 

1,408 

July  16-Aug.  7 
Sept.  1-Sept.  14 

4,700 
2, 250 
9,  874 

July  20-Aug.  20 
Sept.  1-Sept,  20 
July  20-Aug.  26 

6,838 
256 
11, 499 

July  13-Aug.  30 
Aug.  20-Aug.  30 
July  20-Aug.  30 

Aug.  8-Sept.  8 
Aug.  8-Sept.  8 

It  is  probable  that  the  cohoes  were  obtained  from  the  large  stream  at  the  head  of 
Union  Bay,  which  is  said  to  carry  no  redtish,  but  some  cohoes  and  humpbacks. 

It  is  believed  that,  through  the  rapacity  and  greed  of  fishermen,  the  salmon  fish- 
eries of  the  northwestern  coast  of  the  United  States  are  rapidly  declining.  Other 

fields  are  now  being  sought  in  order  that  these  also 
may  pay  tribute,  and  soon  they  will  enter  the  exter- 
minating process. 

Great.  Northern.  Fish  Company. — This  is  one  of 
a number  of  small  canneries  and  salteries,  capital- 
ized from  the  Puget  Sound  and  Columbia  River 
districts,  which  sprang  into  existence  this  year  in 
southeastern  Alaska.  This  company,  not  incorpo- 
rated, hails  from  Seattle,  and  fitted  out  for  an  exten- 
sive salting  expedition  in  a rather  novel  way.  It 
was  arranged  to  follow  the  fish;  to  salt  from  a barge, 
from  shacks  on  shore,  from  salteries,  if  they7  could 
be  rented,  or  from  schooners;  to  occupy  a station 
where  fish  were  plentiful,  and  when  they  became 
slack  to  pack  up  and  locate  where  they  were  abun- 
dant; to  salt  everything  of  all  species,  from  the 
best  to  the  worst,  from  those  fresh  out  of  the  water 
to  others  not  so  fresh;  to  salt  direct  into  barrels  and 
boxes,  and  to  carry  the  product  to  Seattle  and  there 
resalt  and  assort.  The  first  grades  were  intended 
for  the  best  markets,  the  second  for  bars  and  free 
lunches,  and  the  third  for  districts  where  one  salt  fish  is  not  known  from  another. 
Old  saltery  men  shook  their  heads  and  said  salmon  could  not  be  salted  that  way.  It, 
was  tried,  however,  but  with  what  ultimate  success  could  not  be  learned.  It  was  said 
this  company  expected  to  salt  20,000  to  30,000  barrels  of  salmon  during  the  season. 

Union  Bay  was  one  station  selected  to  carry  on  this  work.  At  the  eastern  point 
of  entrance  to  this  bay  a long  tongue  of  land,  bordered  on  the  western  side  by  a few 
islands,  makes  to  the  southward,  forming  a narrow,  shallow  cove  about  a mile  in 
length.  Inside  the  entrance  point  a bight  makes  into  the  tongue  for  a distance  of 
about  200  yards,  and  at  the  head  is  a saltery  of  the  above  company.  At  the  time  of 
our  visit  the  place  was  closed  and  no  one  was  in  sight. 

The  outfit  here  consisted  of  a rough  board  building  20  by  40  feet,  evidently  the 
bunk  and  mess  house;  a rude  wharf  floored  over  with  saplings  cut  from  the  adjoining 
forests,  and  a raft  of  logs  lashed  together  and  floored  over  with  saplings.  There  was 
no  equipment  of  any  kind. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


285 


It  was  afterwards  learned  that  the  outfit  arrived  at  Union  Ray  May  27,  and  left 
with  all  the  gear  on  September  1 for  Karta  Bay,  one  white  crew  having  been  sent  there 
in  advance  August  1.  The  old  Baronovich  saltery,  at  the  latter  place,  was  rented  by 
the  month  and  operated  by  this  company. 

During  our  visit  at  Karta  Bay  they  were  salting  dog  salmon  for  the  Japanese 
market,  for  which  they  said  they  had  an  order  to  furnish  300,000.  These  salmon  were 
simply  gutted,  the  viscera  and  gills  removed,  and,  without  being  otherwise  cleaned, 
they  were  salted  in  benches,  and,  after  shrinking,  resalted  in  boxes  for  shipment. 

On  September  23  the  Baronovich  saltery  was  closed,  the  equipment,  pack,  and 
attendants  placed  on  barges  or  transferred  to  the  steamer  Dirigo , and  the  outfit 
transported  to  Cholmondley  Sound,  where  the  Miller  saltery  had  been  rented. 

The  following  outfit  was  used  by  the  Great  Northern  Fish  Company:  Launch 
Griffin,  crew  3,  value  $3,000,  chartered;  1 cargo  lighter,  $1,000;  1 scow.  $150;  2 
scows,  $60  each;  5 seine  boats,  $80  each;  3 skiffs,  $35  each;  3 purse  seines,  220 
fathoms  by  16  fathoms,  2i-inch  mesh,  value  $750  each;  3 drag  seines,  each  120  fathoms 
by  8 fathoms,  3-inch  mesh,  $1.75  per  fathom;  2 gill  nets,  each  50  fathoms  by  50 
meshes,  5£-inch  mesh,  65  cents  per  fathom. 

There  were  employed  30  white  salters  and  beach  men,  16  white  fishermen,  15 
white  and  1 Indian  casuals;  about  one-half  of  these  were  hired  in  Alaska.  From 
the  middle  of  September  the  white  men  began  to  leave  and  return  to  Puget  Sound, 
and  more  Indians  were  then  employed.  Steady  hands  received  in  pay  and  allowance  an 
amount  equal  to  about  $60  per  month,  whites  and  natives  alike,  but  the  casuals,  who 
are  sailboat  tramps,  were  paid  on  whatever  terms  could  be  arranged;  sometimes 
it  was  board  and  keep  until  the  arrival  of  the  Pardner , and  again  it  was  passage 
to  the  Sound  with  the  next  shipment.  The  boxes  used  for  shipping  dry-salted  dog 
salmon  to  the  Sound  held  from  750  to  800  pounds.  Those  used  to  ship  to  Japan 
held  400  pounds,  or  from  48  to  50  cured  fish. 

This  company  also  chartered  the  schooner  Volunteer , 12  tons,  and  sent  her  to 
Redfish  Bay  for  salting  purposes.  The  record  to  September  23  was  41,024  redfish 
salted.  Arrangements  were  also  made  to  take  the  output  of  the  Point  Barrie  saltery, 
formerly  operated  by  Cyrus  Orr,  but  now  by  a Russian  called  “Zip”  Moon,  and  300 
barrels  of  redfish  and  dog  salmon  were  expected  from  this  source.  The  company 
also  claimed  to  have  made  arrangements  at  Boca  de  Quadra  to  dry-salt  dog  salmon 
and  to  put  up  black-cod  as  Pacific-coast  mackerel,  but  inquiry  at  that  point  failed  to 
elicit  any  information  confirming  this.  There  are  probably  few  black-cod  in  those 
waters,  except  strays. 

It  was  also  proposed  to  carry  on  extensive  herring  salting  at  Point  Barrie  during 
the  fall  and  winter,  and  the  barkentine  Blakeley  was  said  to  be  en  route  (September 
23)  to  Karta  Bay,  to  be  sent  later  with  an  outfit  to  Port  Bucarelli  for  2,500  barrels 
of  salt  herring. 

It  has  since  been  learned  that  this  company  failed.  Diligent  inquiry  was  made 
as  to  the  results  of  its  operations,  and  the  following  is  the  approximate  output  for 
the  season:  5,000  barrels  salted  salmon  of  all  kinds,  principally  humpbacks;  30,000 
dog  salmon,  dry -salted,  for  the  Japanese  market. 


286 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


rice’s  saltery,  karta  bay. 

dice’s  saltery , Karta  Bay. — Owing  to  the  failure  of  the  salmon  run  in  Puget 
Sound,  Mr.  J.  E.  Rice,  of  Whatcom,  Wash.,  came  to  Karta  Bay,  August  20,  with  a 
small  outfit  and  commenced  salting  salmon  on  the  southeastern  shore  of  the  inner 
bight,  in  a shack  rented  from  the  Baronovich  family.  The  pack  consisted  largely 
of  dog  salmon,  dry-salted  and  shipped  in  boxes,  though  other  species  were  not 
neglected  and  were  salted  direct  in  barrels.  No  salting  tanks  were  used. 

The  equipment  consisted  of  2 seine  boats,  $50  each;  1 fish  scow,  rented  from  the 
Loring  cannery;  3 dories,  $30  each;  1 seine,  175  fathoms  by  6£  fathoms,  3-inch  mesh, 
valued  at  $1.50  per  fathom.  All  labor  was  hired  in  the  vicinity;  15  to  20  men  were 
employed  during  the  season,  and  were  paid  $3  per  day  without  board  or  lodging. 
Fish  were  also  purchased  from  the  Indians  at  the  following  rates:  Redfish  and  cohoes, 
10  cents  each;  humpbacks,  $6  per  thousand;  dog  salmon,  $15  per  thousand. 

The  following  was  the  output  for  the  season:  Seventy-five  barrels  redfish,  25 
half-barrels  redfish,  75  barrels  cohoes,  50  half-barrels  cohoes,  575  boxes  dry-salt  dog 
salmon,  averaging  55  fish  to  the  box,  or  31,625  cured  fish,  weighing  211,100  pounds. 

The  barrels  used  were  full  size,  machine-made,  with  galvanized  hoops,  and  cost, 
in  Puget  Sound,  $1.50  each.  In  salting  without  tanks  the  fresh  fish  are  salted  in  the 
barrels,  the  fish  forming  their  own  pickle;  after  four  or  five  days’  shrinking  the 
barrels  are  filled  with  fish  to  the  top  and  weighted,  and  after  complete  shrinkage  they 
are  resalted,  the  barrels  headed  and  placed  chime  up;  an  auger  hole  is  then  bored  in 
the  upper  chime  and  the  barrel  kept  filled  with  pickle. 

Mr.  Rice  prepares  his  dog  salmon  by  butchering  in  the  usual  manner,  except 
that  the  head  is  left  on.  After  thorough  cleansing  in  salt  water  they  are  salted 
down  with  coarse  salt,  flesh  up,  in  piles  called  “benches,”  about  4 feet  square  and 
4 feet  high.  In  from  four  to  six  days,  depending  upon  the  weather,  the  fish  having 
shrunk  sufficiently,  the  excess  of  salt  is  shaken  off,  the  inside  is  sprinkled  with  clean 
Liverpool  salt,  folded  back  in  the  shape  of  the  fish,  and  boxed;  a sprinkling  of  salt 
is  placed  on  the  outside  to  keep  the  fish  from  sticking  together.  It  is  said  that  fish 
prepared  in  this  manner  keep  a lung  period. 

Mr.  Rice  also  purchased  all  halibut  of  40  pounds  weight  and  over  at  a uniform 
rate  of  50  cents  each;  these  were  Hitched,  dry-salted  in  benches,  and  shipped  to  the 
Sound,  where  they  were  washed  and  smoked  for  market. 

KARTA  BAY  STREAM. 

This  stream,  described  on  pages  88  to  90  in  my  former  report,  has  been  very 
much  overfished  during  the  past  few  years;  it  is  said  there  were  as  many  as  30  seines 
at  work  in  the  vicinity  of  the  mouth  of  the  stream  during  the  height  of  the  last  run. 

The  following  contains  only  the  catch  of  three  canneries  for  1898,  1899,  and  1900; 
that  of  the  salteries  and  smaller  fisheries  is  unknown. 


Species. 

1898. 

1899. 

1900. 

No. 

Date. 

No. 

Date. 

No. 

Date. 

106, 876 
14, 855 
25, 680 

June  16-Aug.  11 
Aug.  25-Sept.  15 
Aug.  1-Aug.  11 

55, 730 
4, 000 
114,713 

June  18-Aug.  15 
Aug..  14-Sept.  12 
July  22-Aug.  14 

63, 305 
6, 224 
185, 676 

June  19-Aug.  20 
Aug.  30-Sept.  20 
July  18-Aug.  20 

Humpbacks 

ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


287 


These  numbers  are  probably  too  small  by  20  per  cent.  An  estimate  made  by 
a cannery  man,  who  has  a very  good  knowledge  of  this  stream,  gives  the  catch  of 
redfish  from  this  stream  in  1898,  120,000;  in  1899,  85,000;  in  1900,  100,000. 

KINA  STREAM,  KASAAN  BAY. 

Between  Coal  Bay  and  Twelvemile  Arm  there  is  a large  unnamed  bight,  which 
extends  nearly  2 miles  into  the  southern  shore,  and  which  receives  at  its  head  the 
waters  of  a small  stream  called  Kina,  referred  to  in  my  former  report,  page  90. 


This  stream  was  examined,  on  September  22,  by  Ensign  Miller  who  found  that 
it  had  its  source  in  a lake.  It  is  about  1^  miles  long,  with  a width  of  from  10  to  10 
feet,  and  depth  from  12  to  18  inches,  with  pools  1 feet  in  depth.  It  flows  through  a 
heavily  wooded,  rolling  country,  between  rocky  banks  from  20  to  50  feet  high,  and 
over  a bowldeiy  and  gravelly  bed  showing  here  and  there  exposed  ledges.  The 


288 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


water  has  the  usual  brownish  tinge  common  to  lake  water  in  this  district,  and  had  a 
temperature  of  53.5°  F. , while  the  small  tributaries  had  a temperature  of  49°  to  50°  F. 
There  are  no  falls,  but  in  the  lower  end,  where  the  stream  narrows,  there  is  a series 
of  rapids  which,  however,  do  not  prevent  fish  from  ascending.  Tide  water  extends 
about  100  yards  within  the  mouth,  and  a short  distance  beyond  is  a barricade  of  the 
usual  log  and  sapling  form,  having,  at  the  time  visited,  some  of  the  poles  missing. 
There  are  numerous  fallen  trees  across  the  stream.  The  upper  half  widens  toward 
the  lake  and  has  a sluggish  current.  The  lake  is  135  feet  above  sea  level  and 
consists  of  three  ponds,  connected  by  small  straits.  The  whole  system  is  about  1 
mile  in  length  with  a greatest  width  of  less  than  one-quarter  mile.  It  is  surrounded 
b}r  many  fiats  and  is  quite  shallow,  with  pond  lilies  and  grasses  growing  over  the 
bed.  The  temperature  of  the  lake  water  was  55°  F.  There  are  several  small  feeders 
entering  the  lake  and  stream,  as  indicated  on  the  sketch.  The  stream  and  lake  system 
lies  in  a general  north  and  south  direction. 

Numerous  humpbacks  and  dog  salmon  were  seen  around  the  mouth.  This  stream 
was  formerly  fished  by  Mr.  Myers,  who  sold  the  catch  to  Loring.  It  has  not  a large 
output,  as  the  following  records,  the  only  ones  available,  will  show: 


Species. 

1896. 

1897. 

1898. 

No. 

Dates. 

No. 

Dates. 

No. 

Dates. 

2,018 

July  29-Aug.  23 

1,500 
470 
15, 000 

July  19-Aug.  16 
Aug.  8-Sept.  4 
July  19-Aug.  16 

774 
2, 291 
5,  754 

July  29-Aug.  16 
Aug.  31-Sept.  5 
July  29-Aug.  16 

WARD  COVE,  TONGASS  NARROWS. 

About  5 miles  to  the  westward  of  Ketchikan  a small  bay  makes  in  on  the  northern 
shore  of  Tongass  Narrows,  known  as  Ward  Cove,  and  referred  to  in  my  previous 
report,  page  65.  A mining  boom  has  been  been  attempted  here,  and  on  the  western 
side  of  the  cove  a very  small  village  has  been  built,  consisting  of  a steamer  wharf, 
store,  a few  dwellings,  and  a post-office,  called  Revilla.  A sawmill  has  been  built  at 
the  head  of  the  bay  on  the  western  point  of  entrance  to  the  redfish  stream.  Opposite, 
on  the  eastern  head,  there  was  formerly  a saltery,  purchased  some  years  ago  by  the 
Alaska  Packers  Association  and  since  dismantled.  All  that  remains  now  is  the  shack 
of  an  old  Indian,  who  salts  a few  barrels  of  salmon  during  the  season. 

Ward  Cove  /Stream  empties  into  the  head  of  the  cove,  and  is  the  outlet  to  a chain 
of  lakes.  It  was  examined  by  Ensign  Hepburn  September  15.  It  flows  in  a fairly 
straight  course  in  a southerly  direction  over  rocky  bottom,  with  a rapid  current 
throughout  its  length,  between  high  bluff  banks  well  wooded.  Tide  water  extends  a 
short  distance  within  the  mouth.  The  stream  water  is  fairiy  clear,  and  had  a tem- 
perature of  56°  F.  It  is  about  three-fourths  of  a mile  long,  and  100  yards  below 
the  lake  has  a width  of  20  feet,  a depth  of  9 inches,  and  a 3-knot  current. 

The  first  lake  is  oblong,  one-half  mile  long  by  one-fourth  mile  wide,  and  is  ele- 
vated 70  feet  above  tide  water.  On  the  east  and  west  the  mountains  impinge  on  the 
lake.  On  the  southeastern  side  there  is  a narrow,  swampy  valley  which  has  several 
small  streams  draining  through  it.  Toward  the  north  the  country  is  generally  low, 
with  small  hills.  It  is  generally  well  timbered,  and  along  the  shore  in  many  places 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


289 


there  is  a dense  growth  of  grass  and  berry  bushes.  The  temperature  of  the  lake 
water  was  55°  F.  About  the  middle  of  the  northern  shore  there  is  a feeder,  which 
is  said  to  be  a lake  connection.  Near  the  entrance  point  it  has  a width  of  60  feet, 
depth  of  4 inches,  and  a 2-knot  current,  flowing  over  a coarse  gravel  bottom.  About 
1 mile  from  the  lake  and  just  beyond  a large  island  the  feeder  has  a fall  of  7 feet 
sheer,  and  one-half  mile  above  this  there  is  a heavy  cascade  extending  a length  of 


100  feet  and  having  sheer  falls  of  2 to  3 feet.  There  is  also  a cascade  in  the  branch 
that  flows  around  the  western  side  of  the  island,  but  the  branch  on  the  eastern  side 
is  clear.  The  temperature  of  the  water  in  the  feeder,  2 miles  from  the  lake,  was 
50°  F.  The  feeder  was  followed  for  a distance  of  2 A miles,  until  it  was  apparent 
that  no  fish  could  go  farther,  but  no  other  lake  was  seen,  though  it  is  reported  by 
the  natives  that  there  are  two  more  beyond.  No  fish  were  seen  above  the  falls. 


F.  C.  B.  1901—19 


290 


BULLETIN  OP1  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


A few  humpbacks  were  seen  spawning  along  the  shore  of  the  lake,  though  the 
principal  spawning-beds  are  in  the  first  half  mile  of  the  feeder,  where  humpbacks 
were  seen  in  great  numbers,  as  well  as  many  of  another  species,  probably  redfish.  A 
large  number  of  dead  fish  were  seen  along  the  borders  of  the  lake  and  feeder. 

Judging  from  the  surroundings,  a good  hatchery  site  might  be  located  near  the 
mouth  of  the  feeder.  In  the  main  stream  outlet  no  sign  of  artificial  barricades  was 
noted.  A number  of  fallen  trees  lie  in  the  stream,  but  form  no  serious  obstacle. 

The  following  is  the  only  record  available: 


Species. 

1897. 

1898. 

1899. 

1900. 

No. 

Date. 

No. 

Date. 

No. 

Date. 

No. 

Date. 

Redfish 

1,500 

600 

11,000 

July  24-Aug.  23 
July  24-Aug.  13 
do 

1,535 
743 
34, 935 

July  21-Aug.  25 
July  19-Aug.  25 
July  21-Aug.  30 

1,000 
1,000 
15, 000 

873 

1,179 

52,511 

July  13-Aug.  23 
July  13-Sept.  7 
Aug.  3-Sept.  7 

Humpbacks  . 

The  above  represents  the  catch  of  one  cannery  calling  occasionally  and  making  a 
seine  haul.  Several  other  canneries,  at  intervals,  also  fish  the  place. 

It  is  probable  that  the  stream  has  a value  of  5,000  redfish,  1,000  cohoes,  and 
50,000  humpbacks. 

KETCHIKAN. 

The  saltery  formerly  operated  here  l»y  Clark  and  Martin  has  been  closed  and 
the  property  absorbed  by  a local  company,  who  have  extended  the  wharf  for  the 
accommodation  of  steamers  and  made  additions  to  the  saltery  for  warehouse  purposes. 

Ketchikan  cannery  of  the  Fidalgo  Island  Canning  Company. — This  company 
engaged  in  packing  salmon  at  Anacortes,  Wash.,  and  built  a cannery  in  the  spring 
of  1900  on  the  northern  shore  of  Tongass  Narrows,  about  one-half  mile  east  from 
the  old  Clark  and  Martin  saltery  (see  former  report,  page  65).  The  buildings  are 
substantial,  well  located,  clean,  and  the  cannery  arranged  to  make  a hand  pack.  Fish 
are  conveyed  from  the  boats  by  an  endless-chain  conveyor,  adjustable  for  the  tides,  to 
the  fish-house  built  over  the  water;  the  cleaned  fish  are  conveyed  to  the  cutters  on 
push  carts.  The  tables  of  the  butchers  have  sprays  over  them. 

The  following  machinery  is  used  in  the  canning  process:  Four  steam  boxes,  3 
retorts,  1 washer,  1 topper,  2 crimpers,  2 solderers,  and  1 cutter,  all  adjustable  to 
the  different  sizes  packed.  The  filling  tables  accommodate  60  workers;  daily  capacity 
of  cannery,  1,200  cases.  The  cans  are  all  made  at  the  cannery  by  hand,  of  100-pound 
domestic  tin  plate.  It  is  probable  that  fillers  will  be  introduced  and  the  cannery 
enlarged  in  1901,  though  a hand  pack  is  preferred. 

The  Chinese  contract  was  45  cents  for  1-pound  tails  and  fiats,  and  43  cents  for 
one-half  pound  fiats  per  case  of  48  cans.  Filling  was  paid  for  separately  at  the  rate 
of  6 cents  per  case  of  48  tins.  Fishermen  received  $40  per  month,  and  collectively, 
$10  per  thousand  for  redfish  and  cohoes,  $2  per  thousand  for  humpbacks,  with  full 
board  and  transportation;  the  boss  fisherman  had  $75  per  month.  Fish  were  pur- 
chased from  Indians  and  others  at  the  following  rates:  Redfish  and  cohoes,  7 cents 
each;  dog  salmon,  $15  per  thousand;  humpbacks,  $7  per  thousand;  the  cannery  pro- 
viding boats  and  gear.  Transportation  is  by  regular  line  of  freight  steamers. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


291 


The  cannery  obtained  fish  from  Quadra,  George  Inlet,  Ward  Cove,  Carroll  Inlet, 
Thorne  Arm,  Kah-Shakes,  Duke  Island,  Smeaton  Bay,  Hassler  Harbor,  Point  Alava, 
Annette  Point,  Dalis  Head,  Bostwick  Inlet,  and  Fish  Creek. 

The  following  are  the  statistics  for  1900: 

Hands  employed:  34  white,  38  natives,  and  3 Japanese  fishermen;  6 white  and  50 
native  cannery-hands,  and  50  Chinese. 

Fishing  gear:  Eight  purse  seines,  each  175  fathoms  by  10  to  12  fathoms,  3-inch 
mesh,  $3  per  fathom;  2 drag  seines,  each  160  fathoms  by  6 fathoms,  3£-inch  mesh, 
$1.75  per  fathom. 

Boats,  lighters,  etc.:  Three  lighters,  $75  each;  2 lighters,  $225  each;  2 scows, 
$20  each;  12  seine,  boats,  $70  each;  8 dories  and  skiffs,  $30  each.  Steamer  Delta , 
59  tons,  crew  6,  value  $6,000,  chartered. 

No  salting  was  done  at  this  cannery.  The  following  was  the  pack  of  canned 
salmon  in  1900: 


Species. 

No.  of 
cases. 

No.  to 
the  ease. 

Date. 

Redfish 

I 1-437 
[ 2 1,573 

1 11.5 

July  10-Aug.31 

Cohoes 

| 3 4,  389 
I M70 

= 112 

1 10 

July  13-Sept.  8 

Humpbacks 

1 3 250 

i 8, 425 
\ = 6, 175 

1 19.3 

July  13-Sept.  8 

Do^  salmon 

1 3 5, 135 
>304 

8.5 

Aug..  24-Sept.  8 

1 1-pound  tails.  2 3-pound  flats.  3 One-half  pound  flats,  96  per  case. 


NAHA  STREAM  AND  LAKES. 

This  stream  was  referred  to  in  my  former  report,  pages  94-97,  and  described  as 
far  as  the  falls  in  the  stream  connecting  Hake  No.  1 and  Lake  No.  2.  On  September 
1,  Lieutenant  Rodman  and  Ensign  Kempff,  with  an  Indian  guide,  examined  lakes 
Nos.  2,  3,  and  4 as  far  as  any  fish  can  ascend,  and  from  their  report  the  following  is 
condensed,  reference  being  made  to  the  sketch  accompanying  this  report: 

Stream  connecting  Lakes  Nos.  1 and  2. — From  the  falls  above  Lake  No.  1 the 
stream  maintains  its  volume  and  flows  over  a rocky  and  gravelly  bottom;  it  rises 
gently  to  Lake  No.  2.  Just  below  this  lake  is  a series  of  small  cascades,  none  of 
which  is  over  2 feet  in  height  or  forms  any  obstruction  to  the  ascent  of  salmon. 
One  or  two  small  tributaries  enter  the  stream  on  the  northern  side,  but  they  are 
unimportant.  The  stream  throughout  its  length  was  full  of  humpbacks.  The  dis- 
tance between  Lakes  No.  1 and  No.  2 by  the  stream  bed  is  about  2^  miles,  but  by  trail 
along  the  northern  side  the  distance  from  the  falls  to  Lake  No.  2 is  materially  less. 

Lake  No.  %. — Altitude,  50  feet;  temperature  of  lake  and  stream,  55°  F.  This 
lake  is  gourd-shaped,  with  a rather  rounding  basin  about  half  a mile  in  diameter, 
making  its  length,  with  the  long  narrow  neck  on  entering,  about  three-fourths  of  a 
mile.  The  shores,  except  the  western  side,  are  rocky  and  gravelly,  and  the  lake 
generally  has  a very  clear  appearance.  But  few  pond  lilies  and  little  grass  were 
noticed  anywhere. 


292 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


On  the  western  side  there  is  a feeder  about  30  feet  wide  by  8 inches  deep,  which, 
according  to  the  guide  (who  owns  and  hunts  the  land  bordering  the  lake  system),  S 
is  the  outlet  to  a lake  hung  about  H miles  to  the  northward.  About  1 mile  from 
the  mouth  it  has  a high  fall,  which  prevents  fish  from  ascending  to  the  lake;  as  far 
as  the  fall,  however,  there  is  good  spawning-ground. 

Stream  connecting  Lakes  No.  3 and  No.  3. — ' This  stream  is  about  2 miles  long,  SO 
feet,  wide,  and  14  inches  deep,  with  a fall  of  103  feet  in  its  length.  It  was  only 
examined  at  the  lake  ends,  but  it  can  have  no  serious  obstructions,  as  redfish  enter 
Lake  No.  3.  The  mouth  of  the  stream,  and  for  one-fourth  mile  above,  was  full  of 
humpbacks,  but  they  do  not  enter  Lake  No.  3.  The  temperature  of  the  water  in  the 
stream  was  55°  F.  At  the  head  of  the  stream,  at  its  source  in  Lake  No.  3,  there  is  a 
small  island'  partly  in  the  lake,  around  which  the  waters  from  both  lake  and  stream 
flow. 

Lake  No.  3. — Altitude,  153  feet;  temperature  of  water,  56°  F.  The  length  of 
this  lake  is  about  2i  miles,  with  a width  ranging  from  one-fourth  to  one-half  mile. 
The  northern  shore  is  comparatively  straight,  very  steep,  and  rocky;  the  other  shores 
are  low  and  flat, with  open  glades,  permitting  easy  travel;  the  southern  side  is  marked 
by  several  deep  indentations.  At  the  extreme  eastern  head  is  a feeder  which  was 
not  examined. 

Stream  connecting  Lakes  Nos.  3 and  L — This  stream  enters  Lake  No.  3 at  the 
eastern  end,  near  its  head,  where  it  is  about  60  feet  wide,  8 inches  deep,  with  a tem- 
perature of  56°  F.  It  is  about  a mile  long  following  the  stream  bed,  though  the 
lakes  are  only  about  one-half  a mile  apart  in  a straight  line.  It  has  a fall  of  167  feet 
in  its  length,  part  of  which  is  over  sheer  falls,  making  it  impossible  for  salmon  of 
any  kind  to  enter  Lake  No.  4.  The  first  fall  is  about  one-fourth  mile  above  Lake 
No.  3,  beyond  which  no  fish  were  seen,  and  while  it  is  possible  that  it  can  be  passed, 
it  is  not  probable  that  they  can  pass  over  the  series  of  cascades  at  the  head  of  the 
stream  where  it  leaves  Lake  No.  4.  Here  the  fall  is  at  least  100  feet  in  one-fourth 
mile,  and  the  water  rushes  along  with  great  velocity,  without  any  eddies  or  resting- 
places.  Redfish  were  seen  as  far  as  the  first  fall. 

Lake  No.  4..— Altitude,  320  feet;  temperature  of  water,  56°  F.  The  length  of  this 
lake  is  about  3^  miles,  with  an  average  width  of  one-fourth  mile,  expanding  toward 
the  head.  The  banks  are  steep  and  the  shore  lines,  as  far  as  examined,  are  rocky. 

It  is  said  that  there  are  two  more  lakes  in  this  system  connected  with  Lake  No.  4,  but 
as  no  salmon  can  enter  the  latter,  it  was  not  deemed  necessary  for  our  purposes  to 
continue  the  examination  any  further.  In  Lake  No.  4 many  cutthroat  trout  were 
seen,  but  no  salmon  or  signs  of  them.  The  water  throughout  the  lake  system  was 
unusually  low.  In  Lake  No.  4,  judging  from  the  marks  along  the  shore,  it  appeared 
to  be  2^  feet  below  a mean  level.  There  were  no  barricades  in  any  of  the  streams. 
The  whole  system  has  all  the  natural  features  for  excellent  spawning-grounds;  the 
streams  are  clear,  free  from  obstruction,  there  is  much  sand  and  gravel,  little  or  no 
mud,  and  plenty  of  water,  with  moderate  current.  The  color  of  the  water  becomes 
lighter  as  the  upper  lakes  are  reached.  At  Lake  No.  1 it  is  tinged  a deep  brown,  and 
at  Lake  No.  4 it  is  much  lighter  in  color. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  fa 


Plate  XXVIII. 


= F C.  1901.  (To  face  page  292.) 


cz> 

BEHM  CANAL 

NAHA  STREAM 

^INTD 

LAKE  SYSTEM. 

Sk.et  ck 


t’y 

Llawf.  Hucjk  R,odLnvam  awi  1v«.s.C. ,U -S.N., 
Under  ^kt  direction  «rf 
Com iwo-wd-fli-  Jeff k F.  MoSCr,  U.S.N  , 
CoWM\\a.tv  cLi-113  vji.F  C.S.  AUsadross 


Scale  of  TuLlas. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


293 


The  head  of  Lake  No.  3 would  afford  an  excellent  site  for  a hatchery.  There  is  an 
abundance  of  water,  which  could  be  conveyed  by  gravity,  and  plenty  of  spawning- 
fish.  Another  site  could  probably  be  found  at  the  mouth  of  the  feeder  in  Lake  No.  2, 
but  it  is  probable  that  spawning  fish  might  not  be  so  easily  obtained. 

In  addition  to  the  record  of  the  stream  given  in  my  former  report,  page  96,  the 
following  may  be  added: 


Species. 

1898. 

1899. 

1900. 

No. 

Dates. 

No. 

Dates. 

No. 

Dates. 

18,377 
5,000 
150, 000 

July  ‘20-Aug.  2 
Aug.  15-Sept.  15 
July  15-Aug.  15 

13, 176 
1,000 
189, 650 

15, 224 
2, 000 
150,  000 

July  1-Sept.  21 
July  15-Sept.  1 
July  31-Sept.  1 

Humpbacks . . . 

LOKING. 

Alaska  Salmon.  Packing  and  Fur  Company. — The  cannery  of  this  company  was 
described  in  my  former' report,  pp.  92  to  9T,  but  additional  information  and  the  sta- 
tistics for  1900  will  be  given  here.  The  following  machinery  is  used  in  canning:  Six 
retorts,  2 tillers,  2 toppers,  2 solderers,  and  1 cutter.  The  daily  capacity  is  1,800 
cases.  There  are  no  can-makers;  all  tins  are  made  at  the  cannery  by  hand,  using 
100-pound  plate  for  bodies  and  95-pound  plate  for  tops,  of  which  16  per  cent  is 
imported.  There  is  an  inclined  railway  from  the  fish-house,  Y-shaped  at  the  tide- 
water end,  which  admits  a steamer  into  the  Y at  any  stage  of  the  tide.  Fish  are 
discharged  on  either  side  into  cars,  which  are  hauled  to  the  fish-house  by  cable 
operated  by  steam.  A new  cannery  is  to  take  the  place  of  the  old  one  for  the  season 
of  1901. 

The  Chinese  contract  was  T2£  cents,  with  the  usual  conditions;  fishermen  received 
$45  per  month  and  board,  from  the  time  of  signing  to  the  day  on  which  they  were 
paid  off.  In  purchasing  fish  the  following  prices  were  paid:  5^  to  7 cents  for  redfish, 
7 cents  for  cohoes,  and  $6  to  $7.50  per  thousand  for  humpbacks.  All  the  fishing 
gear  and  boats  were  supplied  by  the  cannery. 

The  following  are  the  statistics  for  1900: 

Hands  employed:  100  white  fishermen,  besides  150  natives  employed  at  fisheries 
from  whom  fish  were  purchased;  20  white  and  TO  native  cannery-hands;  120  Chiuese. 

Fishing  gear:  Twenty-four  purse  seines,  each  150  to  200  fathoms  by  7 to  12 
fathoms,  3-inch  mesh,  valued  at  $2.50  per  fathom;  16  drag  seines,  each  150  to  200 
fathoms  by  T to  6 fathoms,  3-inch  mesh,  valued  at  $1.50  per  fathom. 

Boats,  lighters,  etc-.:  Two  cargo  lighters,  $150  each;  T2  seine  boats,  $50  each;  20 
fish  lighters,  $75  each;  1 Whitehall,  $50;  12  skiffs,  $20  each. 

The  vessels  used  were  as  follows: 


Class  and  name. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

Remarks. 

Steamer  Arctic 

21 

5 

$4,000 

Owned. 

Steamer  Novelty 

33 

5 

12, 000 

Do. 

Ship  Sintram 

1,495 

(') 

60,000 

Chartered. 

1 Crew  fishermen. 


294 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The  following-  was  the  pack  in  1900: 


Species. 

Cases. 

No.  to 
the  case. 

Dates. 

Redfish 

16, 219 

12 

June  17-Aug.  29 

Cohoes 

3, 825 

9 

Aug.  29-Sept.  18 

Humpbacks 

47,114 

19 

July  17-Sept.  6 

YES  BAY. 

Boston  Fishing  and  Trading  Company. — In  ray  former  report,  pp.  97  to  100, 
this  cannery  is  described,  together  with  the  home  stream  and  lake  system,  which 
were  examined  at  that  time.  Reference  will  here  be  made  only  to  the  changes  and 
additional  data,  together  with  the  statistics  for  the  season. 

The  barricade  has  been  removed  from  the  stream  and  it  is  now  clear  of  this 
obstruction.  The  trap  formerly  referred  to  is  still  used  at  the  mouth  of  the  stream. 
It  has  a lead  from  the  eastern  shore  of  300  feet,  a channel  lead  of  100  feet,  and 
heart  100  feet;  on  the  side  are  two  pots,  one  30  feet  by  30  feet,  the  other  28  feet  by 
28  feet.  It  extends  a long  distance  across  the  banks  at  the  mouth  of  the  stream  and 
with  a short  net  extension  the  entire  stream  can  be  closed. 

Excepting  the  king  salmon,  all  the  species  of  salmon  are  represented  in  this 
stream;  steel  heads  are  rarely  taken,  shad  and  sturgeon  have  never  been  seen,  Dolly 
Varden  trout  are  abundant,  and  at  times  there  are  numbers  of  halibut  and  flounders. 
In  the  spring  tomcod  are  abundant. 

Practically  all  the  redfish  packed  at  this  cannery  come  from  the  home  stream. 
The  cohoes  come  from  the  home  stream,  Burroughs  Bay,  and  scattering;  humpbacks 
principally  from  the  home  stream  and  Short  Bay,  though  some  are  received  from 
the  Hot  Springs,  Gedney  Pass,  Spacious  Bay,  Stewart  River,  and  adjoining  inlets. 
Dog  salmon  are  taken  scatteringly  from  all  the  above  places,  and  the  king  salmon  all 
come  from  Burroughs  Bay.  This  cannery  has  not  fished  Checats  since  1897. 

The  following  is  the  record  of  the  home  stream  since  the  date  of  my  last  report: 


Species. 

1898. 

1899. 

1900. 

No. 

Dates. 

No. 

Dates. 

No. 

Dates. 

Redfish 

Cohoes 

Humpbacks 

44,271 
6,413 
45, 000 

July  12-Sept.  8 
Aug.  11-Aug.  29 
July  15-Aug.  30 

69, 000 
6,300 
75,  000 
500 

July  14-Sept.  13 
Aug.  7-Sept.  13 
July  12-Sept.  6 
July  14-Sept.  13 

80, 000 
7,700 
60,  000 
2, 250 

July  14-Sepl.  17 
Aug.  11-Sept.  17 
July  15-Sept.  14 
July  21-Sept.  17 

The  following  machinery  is  used  in  the  canning  process:  Four  iron  retorts,  1 
steam  box,  1 filler,  1 crimper,  1 solderer,  and  1 cutter.  The  tops  are  put  on  by  hand. 
All  tins  are  made  at  the  cannery  by  hand,  of  90-pound  domestic  plate.  Fish  are 
pewed  from  boats  and  lighters  to  the  fish-house,  and  after  cleaning  are  passed  directly 
from  the  draining  tubs  to  the  cutter.  The  daily  capacity  of  the  cannery  is  800  cases. 
The  Chinese  contract  was  38£  cents,  with  the  usual  conditions.  Fishermen  received 
$40  per  month,  from  time  of  arrival  to  day  of  departure,  with  full  board  and  trans- 
portation. The  klootchmen  (native  women)  were  paid  for  cannery  work  $1.25  per 
day,  and  the  bucks  from  $1.50  to  $2.50  per  day,  the  butchers  receiving  the  highest 
rates.  Fish  were  also  purchased  for  which  the  following  rates  were  paid:  Redfish 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


295 


5 cents  each,  cohoes  6 cents  each,  humpbacks  75  cents  per  hundred,  dog  salmon,  in 
good  condition,  cents  each.  The  cannery  finds  all  gear. 

The  following  are  the  statistics  for  1900: 

Hands  employed:  Fifteen  white  and  15  native  fishermen,  5 white  and  15  native 
cannery-hands,  61  Chinese. 

Fishing  gear:  One  trap,  previously  described,  value  $1,000;  1 purse  seine,  230 
fathoms  by  20  fathoms,  value  $2.50  per  fathom;  3 drag  seines,  175  fathoms,  150 
fathoms,  and  120  fathoms  long  by  10,  8,  and  6 fathoms  deep,  all  3-inch  mesh,  value 
$1.50  per  fathom;  2 gill  nets,  each  100  fathoms  by  32  meshes,  10^-inch  mesh;  2 gill 
nets,  each  100  fathoms  by  35  meshes,  6^-inch  mesh,  value  65  cents  per  fathom. 

Boats,  lighters,  etc.:  Five  lighters,  $50  each;  1 seine  boats,  $50  each;  6 skiffs, 
$25  each.  Steamer  Rosie , 8 tons,  crew  2,  value  $2,500,  owned.  Transportation  by 
regular  line  of  freight  steamers. 

The  following  was  the  pack  in  1900: 


Species. 

Cases. 

No.  to 
the  case 

Dates. 

King  salmon 

713 

2.5 

June  25-July  10 

Redfish 

9,825 

8.5 

July  13-Sept.  7 

Cohoes 

2, 306 

7.5 

Aug.  20-Sept.  27 

Humpbacks 

20, 051 

15 

July  18-Sept.  18 

Dog  salmon 

728 

6 

July  10-Sept.  27 

ROCA  I)E  QUADRA. 

These  waters  and  the  cannery  of  the  Quadra  Packing  Company  were  described 
in  my  former  report,  pages  62  to  61,  and  only  the  additional  information  which  lias 
been  obtained  will  be  referred  to  here. 

Salteries. — The  Clark  & Martin  saltery  at  the  mouth  of  Quadra  redfish  stream 
has  tumbled  down  through  decay  and  is  practically  abandoned.  Near  this  site  a 
saltery  was  operated  in  1899  by  Mr.  Hilton,  from  Bellingham  Bay,  who  dry-salted 
about  1,000  dog  salmon.  In  1900  the  saltery  was  operated  by  Mr.  Z.  Doty,  from 
Whatcom,  who  also  salted  a few  dog  salmon.  Neither  of  these  men  had  any  gear; 
they  simply  bought  the  “slop  overs,”  as  they  are  called,  dog  salmon  or  “chums,” 
from  the  cannery  seines. 

In  1899  a Mr.  D.  Blaauw,  from  Tacoma,  built  a saltery  on  Grouse  Island  and 
operated  it  the  same  way  as  mentioned  under  the  other  salteries.  He  dry-salted 
about  11,000  dog  salmon  (chums),  and  shipped  them  to  the  Sound.  In  1900  the 
saltery  was  closed. 

Quadra  Stream , described  in  my  former  report,  is  one  of  the  best  redfish  streams 
in  Southeast  Alaska,  and  is  noted  for  the  large  fish  which  it  carries.  It  has  attracted 
the  attention  of  the  canneries  operated  in  the  vicinity,  and  so  vigorous  is  the  fishing 
carried  on  that  it  is  believed  very  few  fish  ever  reach  the  spawning-grounds.  In 
1899  it  was  fished  by  the  Loring  cannery  with  8 purse  seines,  the  Quadra  cannery 
with  8 purse  seines,  and  Metlakahtla  cannery  with  2 purse  seines,  or  a total  of  18 
purse  seines.  In  1900  it  was  fished  by  the  Loring  cannery  with  8 purse  seines,  the 
Quadra  cannery  with  8 purse  seines,  the  Ketchikan  cannery  with  8 purse  seines,  the 
Metlakahtla  cannery  with  2 purse  seines,  a fishery  from  Port  Gravina  with  2 purse 
seines,  and  2 independent  gangs  with  1 purse  seine  each,  or  a total  of  30  purse  seines. 


296 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION 


When  it  is  considered  that  the  stream  is  only  about  50  or  60  feet  in  width  at  the 
mouth,  and  the  inlet,  Mink  Arm,  is  less  than  one-half  of  a mile  in  width,  it  majr  be  fan- 
cied that  a fish  has  very  little  chance  to  escape  the  30  purse  seines  that  are  constantly 
sweeping  these  waters,  which  are  deep  and  bold  and  permit  seining  into  the  mouth  of 
the  stream.  If  there  is  no  law  regulating  such  fishing,  there  is  one  permitting  the 
closing  of  such  streams,  and  unless  properly  regulated  this  stream  should  be  closed 
until  the  rapacity  and  greed  of  the  fishermen  have  subsided.  In  ray  former  report 
the  value  of  Quadra  Stream  was  given  as  50,000  redfish,  and  it  is  believed  that  this 
number  can  be  taken  under  average  conditions  with  safety  to  the  stream. 

So  far  as  data  have  been  obtained  from  the  different  canneries  fishing  this  stream, 
the  following  is  the  record,  which,  however,  does  not  include  the  catch  of  independ- 
ent fisheries  and  salteries: 


Year. 

Species. 

Number. 

Date. 

1895 

97. 000 

137. 000 

65. 000 
98, 138 

5, 664 

100.000 
166, 232 

4,522 

1896. .. 

do 

July  13-Aug.  31 

1897. . . 

do 

189.8 

do 

July  12-Aug.  29 
Aug.  18-Sept.  4 
July  15-Aug.  15 
July  16-Aug.  28 
Aug.  20-Aug.  28 
July  17-Aug.  10 
July  12-Aug.  31 
July  15-Aug.  12 

1899 

30i; 000 
174,  614 
223, 000 

1900 

Quadra  Packing  Company. — -The  cannery  of  this  company  was  described  in  my 
former  report.  From  it  has  sprung  the  Icy  Strait  Packing  Company,  the  salteries  at 
Taku,  Bartlett  Bay,  and  Shipley  Bay,  the  new  cannery  now  building  at  Bartlett  Bay, 
and  it  is  said  another  cannery  is  to  be  built  in  Sitkoh  Bay  next  spring  (1901). 

The  machinery  employed  in  the  canning  process  consists  of  4 steam  boxes, 
2 retorts,  1 capper,  2 crimpers,  1 washer,  and  1 cutter.  The  cans  are  tilled  by  hand, 
for  which  purpose  there  are  tilling  tallies  for  40  operators.  The  daily  capacity  is 
800  cases.  The  tins  are  all  made  at  the  cannery  byT  hand  of  100-pound  plate,  50  per 
cent  of  which  is  imported. 

The  Chinese  contract  was  45  cents  for  hand-filled  cans,  with  the  usual  conditions. 
The  fishermen  received  transportation,  board,  $35  per  month,  and,  collectively,  1 
cent  each  for  redfish  and  cohoes,  $2  per  thousand  for  humpbacks,  and  $4  per  thousand 
for  dog  salmon. 

Fish  were  purchased  at  the  following  rates:  Redfish  and  cohoes,  7 to  10  cents; 
humpbacks,  $10  to  $12  per  thousand;  dog  salmon,  $15  per  thousand.  The  higher 
price  was  paid  when  no  gear  was  furnished.  Native  tillers  received  7 cents  per  case. 
Transportation  was  by  regular  line  of  steamers. 

There  are  very  few  steelheads  in  these  waters;  only  two  were  brought  to  the 
cannery  this  season.  Neither  shad  nor  sturgeon  have  ever  been  taken;  a few  halibut 
are  found  around  the  cannery  during  the  packing  season. 

The  following  are  the  statistics  for  1900: 

Hands  employed:  24  white  and  40  native  fishermen,  5 white  and  25  native 
cannery-hands,  43  Chinese. 


ALASKA  SALMON'  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


297 


There  were  used  8 purse  seines,  average  180  fathoms  by  15  fathoms,  3-inch 
mesh,  valued  at  $3  per  fathom;  1 drag  seine,  115  fathoms  by  8 fathoms,  3-inch  mesh, 
valued  at  $2  per  fathom;  1 house  scow,  $75;  8 seine  boats,  $100  each;  9 skill's,  $30 
each.  Steam-tender  service  was  furnished  by  the  Icy  Strait  Packing  Company. 

The  following  was  the  pack  in  1900: 


Species. 

Cases. 

No.  to 
the  case. 

Dates. 

Redfish  

6,000 

10.7 

July  14-Aug.  25 

Cohoes 

600 

7.6 

Aug.  25-Sept.  20 

Humpbacks 

6,000 

20 

July  17-Aug.  31 

Dog  salmon 

1,000 

7 

Do. 

METLAKAIITLA. 

Metlakah tla  Industrial  Company. — There  has  been  but  little  change  in  this  cannery 
since  the  date  of  my  last  report,  in  which  the  conditions  were  described  on  pages 
66  and  67.  The  money  advanced  by  the  friends  of  Mr.  Duncan  for  the  construction 
of  the  cannery  has  been  paid  in  full  with  interest,  and  it  is  now  free  of  debt,  the 
profits  being  expended  for  the  welfare  of  the  community  and  for  the  improvement 
of  the  village. 

The  cannery  has  a good  location  on  a large  wharf,  which  permits  the  largest 
steamers  alongside  at  all  stages  of  the  tide.  It  is  well  lighted,  commodious,  and 
thoroughly  clean.  The  buildings  are  large  enough  for  a pack  of  40,000  cases,  and 
the  plant  has  a daily  capacity  of  700  cases.  All  the  work,  from  first  to  last,  is  done 
by  Indians — men,  women,  and  children.  No  whites  are  employed  in  the  cannery, 
fisheries,  or  steamers,  and,  as  Mr.  Duncan  wishes  to  give  employment  to  as  many 
natives  as  possible,  the  pack  is  made  entirely  by  hand. 

The  only  machinery  used  is  1 cutter,  1 crimper,  and  1 solderer.  On  the  wharf  is 
an  elevator  for  transferring  fish  from  the  boats  to  the  fish  house.  The  first  cooking  is 
done  in  boiling  water,  for  which  5 boxes  are  used,  and  for  the  second  cooking  there 
are  3 retorts.  All  the  tins  are  made  at  the  cannery,  of  100-pound  domestic  plate. 
All  the  packing  cases  are  made  in  the  community  sawmill.  The  lacquering  is  done 
by  Indian  girls,  who  roll  the  cans  by  hand  on  pads  covered  with  lacquer. 

The  children  receive  50  cents  to  $1  per  day,  and  adults  from  $1  to  $3  per  day. 

In  purchasing  fish  the  following  prices  are  paid:  Redfish,  7 cents;  cohoes,  8 
cents;  dog  salmon,  24  cents;  humpbacks,  1 cent. 

The  following  are  the  statistics  for  1900: 

Hands  employed:  24  native  fishermen,  besides  38  from  whom  fish  were  purchased; 
174  native  cannery-hands. 

Fishing  gear:  Eight  purse  seines,  average  158  fathoms  by  84  fathoms,  3-inch 
mesh;  4 drag  seines,  average  163  fathoms  by  6 fathoms,  3-inch  mesh;  5 gill  nets, 
average  172  fathoms  by  4 fathoms,  54-inch  mesh. 

Boats,  lighters,  etc. : Two  lighters,  $100  each;  7 seine  boats,  $50  each;  6 sailboats, 
$100  each;  10  dories,  $25  each. 

Transportation  by  regular  line  of  steamers. 

The  cannery  steamers  employed  were:  Herald , 17  tons,  crew  5,  value  $9,000, 
owned;  Marie  G.  Ilaaven , 12  tons,  crew  5,  value  $5,000,  owned. 


298 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The  following  was  the  pack  in  1900: 


Species. 

Cases. 

No.  to 
the  case. 

Dates. 

6,930 

610 

9,690 

330 

13.7 

7.9 

20 

June  20-Sept.  5 
July  27-Sept.  12 
July  18-Sept.  4 

Dog  sal  moo 

No  salting  has  ever  been  done  here.  The  streams  fished  for  the  cannery  are  the 
Home  Stream,  Tamgas,  Duke  Island,  Quadra,  Karta  Bay,  Kithraum,  Peter  Johnson, 
Nowiskay,  Old  Johnson,  Kegan,  and  Kagahine. 

KLAWAK. 

North  Pacific  Trading  and  Packing  Company. — This  cannery  and  its  surround- 
ings were  described  in  my  former  report,  pages  109  to  115,  and  only  such  additional 
information  as  seems  pertinent  to  bring  the  records  up  to  date  will  be  referred 
to  here. 

The  cannery,  together  with  all  the  buildings,  sawmill,  store,  etc.,  was  burnt  on 
September  IS,  1899.  In  the  spring  of  1900  the  same  company  built  a new  cannery 
about  a mile  south  from  the  old  site  and  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  arm,  where  it  is 
more  accessible  to  vessels.  It  is  considerably  larger  than  the  old  plant,  and  modern 
machinery  has  been  installed.  In  the  canning  process  the  following  machinery  is  used: 
Four  retorts,  1 filler,  1 topper,  1 solderer,  and  1 cutter.  This  should  give  the  cannery 
a daily  capacity  of  800  cases.  The  fish  are  butchered  on  a float  and  conveyed  to 
the  cutter  by  a conveyor  on  the  endless-chain  principle. 

The  Klawak  cannery,  representing  the  earliest  in  Alaska,  was,  from  1878  to 
1896,  operated  by  Indian  labor.  These  people  demanded  more  and  more  each  year 
until  the  expense  of  the  pack  became  greater  than  it  would  have  been  had  Chinese 
labor  been  employed.  The  result  was  that  the  cannery  slowly  introduced  the  latter. 
In  1896  there  were  employed  in  the  cannery  62  natives  and  2 Chinese,  and  in  1900 
13  natives  and  16  Chinese. 

The  following  are  the  statistics  for  1900: 

Hands  employed:  55  native  fishermen,  10  white  and  13  native  cannery-hands, 
and  16  Chinese. 

Fishing  gear:  Nine  purse  seines,  each  175  fathoms  by  210  meshes,  3-inch  mesh, 
valued  at  $300  each. 

Boats,  etc.:  One  scow,  $100;  11  seine  boats,  $80  each;  5 skiffs,  $25  each. 

Transportation  was  by  special  sail,  chartered. 

The  cannery  steamers  were  the  Klawack , 10  tons,  crew  1,  value  $5,000,  owned; 
Cora,  launch,  5 tons,  crew  2,  value  $1,500,  owned. 

The  following  was  the  pack  in  1900: 


Species. 

Cases. 

No.  to 
the  case. 

Dates. 

Redfish 

8, 228 

14.2 

June  17-Aug.  25 

cohoes 

3,973 

8 

July  21-Sept.  25 

Humpbacks 

15, 551 

17 

July  17-Aug.  27 

ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


299 


The  cannery  obtained  its  fish  principally  frorp  the  Home  Stream,  Sar-Kar, 
Warm  Chuck,  and  Hetta. 

In  order  to  continue  the  data  for  the  Klawak  Stream,  given  in  my  former 
report,  the  following  record  may  be  added: 


Species. 

1898. 

1899. 

1900. 

No. 

Dates. 

No. 

Dates. 

No. 

Dates. 

Redfish  

36, 881 

June20-Aug.  8 

75, 000 

Junel6-Aug.  20 

31,000 

Junel7-Aug.  24 

Cohoes 

11,661 

Sept,  7-Sept.  29 

5, 000 

Aug.  15-Sept.  18 

500 

Aug.  14-Sept.  24 

65, 000 

53, 000 

200, 000 

July  16-Aug.  27 

The  Albatross  did  not  visit  the  cannery  this  season,  and  the  above  information, 
together  with  the  following,  was  obtained  by  interviews  with  the  superintendent. 

Klawak  Hatchery. — This  hatchery,  described  in  former  report,  was  moved  in 
1898  from  the  head  of  the  main  stream  to  the  mouth  of  Three-mile  Stream,  a lake 
feeder  on  the  northern  side.  The  new  hatchery  house  is  60  feet  by  18  feet,  and 
contains  twelve  troughs,  16  feet  by  11  feet,  arranged  in  pairs,  with  a passage  around 
each  pair.  There  are  6 baskets  to  a trough,  each  basket  holding  50,000  eggs,  giving 
the  hatchery  a capacity  of  3,600,000  eggs.  The  hatchery  water  is  supplied  by  a 
flume  from  the  head  of  the  feeder.  About  50  yards  within  the  mouth  of  the  feeder 
a fence  with  a trap  holds  the  spawners,  from  which  they  are  seined  as  wanted. 

The  only  hatchery  data  available  is  the  following:  In  1898,  July  23  to  August  26, 
736  females  were  stripped,  obtaining  2,586,000  eggs,  2,150,000  of  which  were  hatched. 
This  would  give  3,513  eggs  to  the  fish  and  the  loss  about  17  per  cent. 

The  highest  and  lowest  monthly  temperatures  of  the  water  are  as  follows:  June, 
48°,  44°;  July,  48°,  46°;  August,  54°,  50°;  September,  52°,  44°;  October,  46°,  39°; 
November,  44°,  32°;  December,  40°,  35°.  At  a temperature  of  50°  F.  the  fish  are 
hatched  in  about  70  days;  the  longest  period  of  incubation  thus  far  has  been  120  days; 
eye-spots  appear  in  27  days,  and  the  egg-sac  is  absorbed  in  42  days. 

The  young  fish  are  siphoned  from  the  troughs  into  buckets  as  soon  as  hatched, 
and  planted  in  a shallow  part  of  the  lake.  It  is  said  here  that  the  young  fish  go  to 
sea  the  spring  of  the  second  year  after  the  parent  fish  has  entered  the  stream.  The 
milt  of  2.5  to  3 males  is  used  for  impregnating  the  eggs  of  every  full  female.  This 
year  (1900)  several  thousand  young  fish  were  marked  by  cutting  off  the  fleshy  fin. 

The  following  is  the  output  for  three  years:  2,586,000  eggs  and  2,150,000  fry 
in  1898;  3,600,000  eggs  and  3,000,000  fry  in  1899;  3,600,000  eggs,  about  1,000,000  fry 
in  1900  (nearly  all  eggs  were  lost  by  a hard  freeze). 

Information  was  received  that,  owing  to  the  very  severe  weather  in  Alaska  this 
year,  all  the  eggs  in  the  hatchery  were  frozen. 

HUNTER  RAY. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Company. — Time  did  not  permit  a visit  to  this  cannery 
during  the  season  of  1900.  The  cannery  and  the  district  were  visited  in  1897  and 
fully  described  in  my  former  report,  pages  68  to  73. 

The  following  statistics  and  additional  information  were  obtained  by  personal 
interviews  with  members  of  the  company  and  the  cannery  superintendent. 


300 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The  cannery  machinery  consists  of  2 steam  boxes,  5 retorts,  2 tillers,  2 solderers, 
and  1 cutter,  giving  it  a daily  capacity  of  1,600  cases.  Topping  is  done  by  hand. 
Fish  are  pewed  to  the  fish-house,  and  thence  passed  by  hand  direct  from  the  draining 
tubs  to  the  cutters.  There  are  no  can-makers;  all  tins  are  made  by  hand  at  the  can- 
nery, of  100-pound  plate,  66  per  cent  of  which  is  domestic. 

The  Chinese  contract  was  4-2£  cents  per  case.  The  white  fishermen  received 
transportation  and  board  and  were  paid  5 cents  for  redfish  and  the  same  for  cohoes. 
The  cannery  also  purchased  fish  and  paid  6 cents  for  redfish,  6 cents  for  cohoes,  and 
one-half  cent  for  humpbacks.  Native  wages  were  25  cents  per  hour  for  adult  males, 
and  $1  to  $1.50  per  day  for  klootchmen. 

The  following  are  the  statistics  for  1900: 

Hands  employed:  21  whites,  and  employed  and  purchased  fish  from  121  natives: 
10  white  cannery-hands  and  90  Chinese. 

Fishing  gear:  Twenty-two  seines,  square  hung,  for  drag  seines  or  pursing  by 
hand;  they  average  195  fathoms  by  5 fathoms,  3-inch  mesh;  value,  $1.50  per  fathom; 
2 lighters,  $100  each;  2 fish-scows,  $50  each;  22  seine  boats,  $50  each;  3 skiffs,  $25 
each,  and  1 pile-driver,  $800. 

The  following  steamers  were  owned  and  operated  by  the  cannery: 


Class  and  name. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

19 

5 

$12, 000 
25, 000 
3,000 

59 

9 

Gasoline  launch  Alphonse  XIII 

5 

2 

The  transportation  is  by  calling  vessels  of  the  Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co 
The  following  was  the  pack  in  1900: 


Species. 

No.  of 
cases. 

No.  to 
the 
case. 

Date. 

7,828 

4,070 

31,709 

12.8 

June  18-Aug.  10 
July  31-Sept.  10 
July  17-Aug.  28 

9 

18.6 

The  following  localities  are  fished  I >y  this  cannery:  Karta  Bay,  Hetta  Inlet, 
Nichols  Bay,  Hunter  Bay,  Moira  Sound,  Klakas  Inlet,  Nutqua  Inlet,  Sukkwan  Inlet, 
Hessa  Inlet,  Peter  Johnson  Stream,  Keke  Inlet,  Cholmondeley  Sound,  Skookum 
Chuck,  Klawak,  and  Copper  Mountain  Bay. 

The  Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Company,  in  connection  with  the  cannery,  operate 
a hatchery  which  is  situated  on  Hetta  Lake. 


HETTA  STREAM. 

This  stream  was  fully  described  in  my  former  report,  pages  73  to  75.  As  it  is 
one  of  the  large  redfish  streams  of  southeastern  Alaska,  and  as  many  wild  statements 
have  been  made  in  regard  to  the  catch  from  it,  the  following  data,  added  to  that 
previously  given,  makes  a complete  record  from  1886  to  1900,  both  years  inclusive. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


301 


It  may  be  added  that  this  record  is  the  entire  catch  from  Hetta  Stream  by  the 
canneries  at  Hunter  Bay  and  Klawak  and  the  saltery  at  Hetta,  but  does  not  include 
any  fish  taken  for  local  use  or  the  small  salteries,  if  any  were  taken  the  latter. 


Species. 

1898. 

1899. 

1900. 

No. 

Datei 

No. 

Date. 

No. 

Date. 

179, 109 
290 
25, 000 

jjune  10-Aug.  3 

July  25-Aug.  25 

250,834 
539 
229, 556 

jjune  15-Sept.  5 
June  27-Aug.  23 

138, 733 

Junel7-Aug,23 

Humpbacks 

58,216 

The  hard  fishing  of  this  stream  commenced  in  1896,  and  unless  it  has  received  an 
impulse  from  some  other  source,  as  from  Mr.  Callbreath’s  hatchery,  there  is  no  doubt 
that  the  locality  is  overfished. 

m’iienky  inlet. 

On  the  eastern  side  of  Etolin  Island  is  a large  bay  (represented  on  Coast  Survey 
chart  No.  8200  without  any  soundings),  having  numerous  islands  and  reefs,  and  a 
rather  uninviting  appearance;  it  is  known  as  McHenry  Inlet.  At  the  head  of  the 
inlet  are  two  bights  or  coves,  which  are  very  foul  and  at  low  water  expose  many 
ledges  and  extensive  fiats.  The  cove  at  the  east  receives  at  its  head  a small  stream, 
known  as  Falls  Creek,  and,  a little  to  the  southward,  a second  stream  called  Trout 
Creek.  The  head  of  the  western  cove  receives  the  waters  of  a small  stream  which  is 
a lake  outlet,  and  on  this  lake  is  the  hatchery  of  Mr.  John  C.  Callbreath. 

There  is  a deep-water  channel  through  McHenry  Inlet  which  leads  to  a beautiful, 
spacious,  landlocked  harbor,  near  the  head  of  the  inlet,  for  which  the  following 
directions  may  be  of  service: 

Directions  for  entering  McHenry  Inlet. — On  account  of  the  small  scale  of  the 
chart  No.  8200,  and  the  absence  of  names,  the  approach  is  rather  difficult  to  describe. 
At  the  entrance  to  the  inlet  (see  chart)  is  a string  of  islets  and  rocks  making  off  to 
the  northwestward  from  Avon  Island.  North  from  the  rock  named  Quartz  Rock  is  a 
large  wooded  island,  having  an  extensive  reef  projecting  to  the  westward.  North- 
ward from  this  is  a small  wooded  island,  having  a rock  off  its  southeastern  end,  and 
north  of  this  is  another  small  islet  having  a rock,  marked  on  the  chart,  off'  its  southern 
end;  the  latter  islet  is  the  guide  to  the  channel  and  will  here  be  called  Entrance  Islet. 
It  is  small,  rocky,  and  heavily  wooded;  the  central  trees  projecting  highest  give  it  a 
conical  appearance,  and,  as  it  is  quite  symmetrical,  it  presents  about  the  same  shape 
from  all  sides.  In  standing  for  McHenry  Inlet  bring  Entrance  Islet  to  bear  ENE., 
and  stand  for  it,  shaping  course  on  near  approach  to  pass  it  close  to,  about  75  yards, 
leaving  it  to  the  southward.  Nearly  ahead,  and  in  the  center  of  the  inlet,  will  now 
be  seen  Dot  Islet,  a low  rocky  islet  lying  close  to  the  water,  with  a few  low  trees  and 
bushes  growing  over  it,  and  south  of  it,  near  the  southern  shore,  will  be  seen  a bare 
rock.  The  channel  lies  between  Dot  Islet  and  the  rock.  After  passing  Entrance 
Islet,  the  course  should  bend  to  the  southward  so  that  in  heading  midway  between 
Dot  Islet  and  the  bare  rock,  Entrance  Islet  will  be  directly  astern.  * 

Having  passed  Dot  Islet,  keep  to  the  southward  of  mid-channel  for  1 mile,  then 
haul  to  mid-channel  and  anchor  about  a mile  below  the  head  of  the  inlet,  favoring 


302 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


the  eastern  shore.  Do  not  attempt  to  enter  the  big’ht  or  coves  at  the  head,  or  approach 
them  too  closely,  as  they  are  very  foul.  The  anchorage  is  in  20  fathoms,  soft  bottom, 
about  one-half  mile  below  the  point  of  the  tongue  separating  the  two  coves,  and 
toward  the  eastern  side. 

CALLBREATII  HATCHERY. 

Mr.  John  C.  Callbreath  has  been  a resident  of  Alaska  for  many  years;  ne  was 
the  manager  of  the  Point  Ellis  cannery  until  it  was  destroyed  by  fire  in  1892,  and  has 
lately  been  engaged  in  the  transportation  business  on  the  Stikine  River  and  in  trad- 
ing, making  his  home  at  Wrangell.  He  is  a representative  citizen,  enterprising,  and 
devoted  to  salmon  culture. 

In  1892,  in  connection  with  the  Point  Ellis  cannery,  he  started  the  hatchery 
referred  founder  that  stream  heading.  Having  seen  the  rise  of  the  salmon  industry, 


Ruins  of  trough  and  baskets,  Callbreath’s  old  hatchery. 

and  knowing,  as  all  must  Enow  who  are  familiar  with  the  question,  that  the  abusive 
and  excessive  fishing  and  total  disregard  of  the  law  by  the  fisheries  must  slowly  but 
surely  exterminate  the  salmon  for  commercial  purposes/  he  determined  to  take  a 
salmon  stream  that  under  normal  conditions  carried  a few  thousand  redfish,  and  by 
artificial  propagation  increase  the  production  to  hundreds  of  thousands.  He  hoped 
that,  if  successful,  a law  would  be  framed  making  all  the  increase  his  own  property. 

The  hatchery  is  a private  enterprise,  unconnected  with  any  cannery  or  fishery, 
and  based  upon  the  widely  prevailing  belief  that  the  salmon  return  to  the  parent 
stream  in  four  years  after  they  are  hatched.  As  this  time  has  passed,  however,  with- 
out any  apparent  return,  Mr.  Callbreath  has  extended  his  period  to  ten  years. 

In  establishing  the  hatchery  a stream  was  sought  satisfying  the  conditions 
imposed,  and  one  was  found  at  the  head  of  McHeniy  Inlet.  It  is  small,  about  one- 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


303 


half  mile  in  length,  and  Hows  over  a rocky  and  bowldery  bed  between  heavily  wooded 
shelving  banks.  At  its  head  is  a small  lake  42  feet  above  tide  water,  slightly 
L-shaped,  about  three-fourths  mile  long  by  one-fourth  wide,  and  bordered  by  low 
wooded  banks.  The  stream  was  never  known  to  supply  more  than  from  3,900  to 
5,000  redfish,  a number  too  small  to  attract  the  attention  of  the  commercial  fisheries. 
In  fact,  it  was  known  as  a “cultus  chuck”  or  worthless  stream. 

After  making  satisfactory  arrangements  with  the  Indians  claiming  the  stream,  a 
hatchery7’  was  built  in  1892  on  the  right  bank  about  200  yards  from  the  mouth,  and 
suitable  dams  were  thrown  across  the  stream  to  impound  the  fish.  The  hatchery 
water  was  taken  from  the  stream,  conveying  it  by7  a flume  from  a point  near  the 


Trap  pen  and  barrier  in  lower  course  of  stream,  Callbreath’s  Hatchery,  McHenry  Inlet. 

lake,  where  a dam  was  built.  After  operating  the  hatchery  during  the  latter  part  of 
the  season  in  1892  and  turning  out  about'600,000  fry,  it  was  seen  that  the  breeding 
fish  could  not  be  impounded  properly  in  the  stream,  many  dying,  probably"  from 
exhaustion  in  attempting  to  pass  the  barrier;  it  was  also  found  that  the  stream  water 
used  in  the  hatchery"  was  unsuitable,  not  only  on  account  of  the  wide  range  in  tem- 
perature, but  the  organic  matter  it  contained  smothered  the  eggs  and  caused  fungus. 
An  excellent  site  having  been  found  on  the  lake  in  the  vicinity  of  the  streams  form- 
ing the  natural  spawning-beds,  with  a spring  giving  an  abundant  supply  of  pure 
water  of  very7  equable  temperature,  the  hatchery  was  moved  in  the  spring  of  1 893  to 
its  present  site.  It  was  operated  that  year  and  every  year  until  1900,  when  the  pro- 


304 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


jector  decided  that  hiss  means  would  not  permit  him  to  continue  the  work  unless  some 
return  was  made. 

From  its  first  inception  it  was  determined  that,  in  order  to  obtain  the  best  results, 
only  the  most  desirable  species  should  be  admitted  to  the  lake,  and  that  all  enemies 
must  be  removed  and  excluded.  In  order  to  carry  this  into  effect  dams  were  built 
across  the  stream  with  racks  below  them,  as  shown  in  the  sketch,  at  a point  about  100 
yards  from  salt  water,  where  an  islet  divides  the  stream  into  two  parts.  The  dam  and 
fence  on  the  western  side  of  the  islet  allow  nothing  to  pass.  The  fence  on  the  eastern 
side  has  a trap  opening,  admitting  fish  to  the  foot  of  the  dam.  Here  the  redtish  and 
cohoes  are  lifted  bv  dip  nets  to  the  pool  above,  from  which  point  they  can  ascend 
quickly  to  the  lake.  Nothing  can  enter  the  lake  which  is  not  passed  over  the  dam  by 
hand.  The  humpbacks,  dog  salmon,  Dolly  Varden  trout,  and  all  enemies,  are  carefully 
excluded,  and  the  lake  is  therefore  free  of  undesirable  and  predatory  species.  The 
lake  has  been  carefully  fished,  and  all  enemies  to  the  fry,  sucn  as  cut-throats  and 
other  trout,  sticklebacks,  bullheads,  sculpins.  etc.,  have  been  removed,  so  that  it  is 
comparatively  clear  of  enemies. 

The  hatchery  is  located  on  the  northern  side  of  the  lake,  about  three-eighths 
mile  from  the  head  of  the  outlet,  and  midway  between  a series  of  11  springs  and 
feeders,  the  extreme  distance  being  less  than  one-fourth  mile  from  the  main  building. 
The  hatching-house  stands  on  the  border  of  the  lake,  partly  over  a small  feeder,  and 
back  of  it  is  a substantial  and  comfortable  log  dwelling,  20  feet  by  36  feet.  Strung 
along  the  lake  are  two  houses  for  the  hatchery  hands,  each  12  feet  by  16  feet,  a smoke- 
house for  smoking  the  stripped  fish,  and  a tool-house.  The  original  cost  of  the  plant, 
and  all  expenses  connected  with  it  to  date  (September,  1900),  amount  to  $16,000. 

The  hatchery  usually  opens  July  1,  when  preparations  are  begun  for  the  season; 
stripping  generally  commences  September  1;  the  place  is  closed  about  March  1. 

The  hatchery  building  is  75  feet  long,  east  and  west,  by  11  feet  in  width;  south 
wall  11  feet  high,  north  wall  6 feet  high;  shed  roof,  with  windows  on  the  south  side 
only;  on  the  east  end  is  an  open  shed  annex,  18  feet  by  11  feet. 

The  troughs  are  16  feet  by  134  inches  by  51. inches,  inside  measurement,  made  of 
planed  lumber,  11-inch  bottom,  11-inch  sides,  covered  with  asphalt  varnish.  In  the 
main  building  are  2 lines  of  troughs  arranged  in  pairs,  with  8 troughs  in  a line, 
making  a total  of  16,  arranged  with  a passage  around  the  lines  as  shown  in  the 
sketch.  Each  pair  of  troughs  has  a drop  of  1 inch  in  its  length,  with  a fall  of  4 
inches  to  the  next.  The  first  compartment  in  each  trough  is  8 inches  in  length,  and 
receives  and  aerates  the  water;  then  come  7 basket  divisions,  each  24  inches  long, 
separated  by  the  Williamson  system  of  division  plates,  2 inches  apart;  the  last  space 
is  4 inches.  The  annex  will  accommodate  4 troughs,  but  it  has  seldom  been  used. 

The  baskets  are  of  the  usual  wire  webbing,  five-eighths  inch  by  one-sixth  inch  for 
redfish  eggs,  and  five-eighths  inch  by  one-fifth  inch  for  cohoes,  and  are  231  inches  by 
121  inches  by  41  inches,  and  have  no  wooden  rims.  They  are  supported  an  inch  from 
the  bottom  of  the  trough  by  broad-headed  nails  and  tin  clips.  All  are  well  lacquered. 
A full  basket  contains  60,000  redfish  eggs,  or  30,000  to  35,000  coho  eggs.  The  capacity 
of  the  hatchery  is  therefore  6,720,000  redfish  eggs,  and  the  annex  1,680,000  of  the 
same  species,  but  it  is  doubted  if  the  latter  can  be  regarded  as  a reliable  factor  in 
estimating  the  capacity. 


Stretch-  plan  of  hstcher^  and  vicinity, 


© 

© 

.n  It. CIS. 

© 

Ccmpasa  6k.ctcW  of  Lake  and. 
Stream,  by  Eas  C 5 Kempff,  U.S  N 
Hatc.We.ry  details  by  H.C. 
Fassett,  U.  5>.  Fisk  Commission. 

September  igoo. 


ETOLIN  ISLAND 

Sketch  of 

LAKE  and  STREAM 

at  the  Head,  of 

Me  HENRY  INLET 

Showing  location 
of 

CaptainJCCall  breatK's 

SALMON  HATCHERY. 


Scale  1 Nautical  1 


■ 


. 

■ ' 


■ 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


305 


The  hatchery  water  is  recei ved  from  a pool  about  150  yards  north  of  the  hatchery, 
which  is  supplied  by  three  springs  (see  sketch  g)  in  the  immediate  vicinity,  augmented 
by  an  additional  spring,  which  is  connected  with  the  pool  by  a ditch.  From  the  pool 
the  water  is  conveyed  by  a covered  flume  to  the  west  end  of  the  hatchery  building 
and  is  then  distributed,  as  shown  in  plate  xxix.  The  flow  is  regulated  at  the  closed 
end  of  the  flume  in  the  pool  by  means  of  holes  in  the  bottom  plank,  in  which  plugs 
may  be  inserted,  increasing  or  decreasing  the  supply  as  may  be  necessary.  The  main 
flume,  midway  in  its  length,  is  joined  by  a flume  running  from  a reserve  pool  to  the 
eastward,  which  may  be  used  if  necessary.  The  water  is  very  clear  and  evidently 
quite  pure,  as  no  trouble  has  ever  been  experienced  from  fungoid  growth.  It  is  not 
filtered,  but  there  are  screens  in  the  upper  end  of  the  flume  to  strain  out  foreign 
particles  which  may  fall  into  the  pool.  The  water  is  very  equable  in  temperature 
and  is  said  never  to  freeze.  The  lowest  temperature  observed  in  midwinter  is 
recorded  as  38°  F.,  and  the  highest  in  midsummer  16°  F.  These  are  the  extremes, 
the  average  range  running  from  39°  to  15°  F.  During  moderate  winter  weather  the 
temperature  of  the  water  runs  from  40°  to  43°  F. — never  above  the  latter.  While 
the  temperature  of  the  water  is  frequently  taken  during  the  season,  there  is  no  daily 
record  from  which  curves  may  be  drawn.  The  following  may  be  noted  as  fair 
averages:  July  25,  1898,  45°  F. ; September  14,  1898,  43°  F.;  lowest  during  the 
winter  of  1898-99,  39°  F. ; April  15,  1899,  41°  F.  The  lake  water  ranges  from  the 
freezing  point  in  winter  to  60°  F.  in  midsummer.  It  is  claimed  that  the  present 
hatchery  supply  is  sufficient  for  15,000,000  eggs  and  that  there  are  additional  springs 
in  the  vicinity  which,  at  small  expense,  can  be  utilized.  In  the  hatchery  the  same 
water  is  used  through  four  troughs,  and  if  the  annex  is  used,  through  live.  It  then 
passes  by  a sluice  to  the  small  creek  under  the  hatchery. 

The  arrangements  seem  crude,  and  all  fittings  and  appliances  are  constructed  at 
the  least  expense,  yet  it  all  indicates  an  intelligent  endeavor  in  a direction  where 
there  was  but  little  previous  experience  in  the  work.  Judging  from  the  output, 
however,  the  hatchery  has  been  very  successful,  and  is  a striking  example  of  what 
may  be  done  in  this  line  of  work  if  undertaken  in  an  intelligent  manner.  Mr.  Call- 
breath  certainly  deserves  great  credit,  not  only  for  the  work  he  has  accomplished, 
but  for  the  proof  he  has  given  that  a hatchery  may  be  operated  successfully  for  very 
little  money. 

Feeders,  ripening  pools,  and  nurseries. — The  redfish  and  cohoes  after  entering 
the  lake  remain  in  its  waters  until  ripe,  a period  varying  from  two  to  six  weeks, 
sometimes  longer,  depending  upon  the  condition  of  the  fish  as  thej^  enter  from  the 
sea;  and  when  ripe  they  seek  the  feeders  to  spawn.  In  the  immediate  vicinity  of  the 
hatchery  there  are  six  feeders  and  springs  which  form  natural  spawning-beds  and 
are  arranged  for  taking  ripe  fish,  and  also  several  nursery  ponds.  The  mouths  of 
these  feeders  arc  fenced  and  have  trap  openings,  which  admit  the  fish,  but  do  not 
permit  them  to  leave. 

Feeders  a,  b,  and  Jc  are  tightly  fenced  to  prevent  adult  fish  from  entering,  as 
they  are  full  of  obstructions  on  which  the  fish  might  injure  themselves,  c , d,  e, 
and  f are  spring  pools,  which  have  been  cleared  and  improved,  opening  on  the 
lake.  The  pool  c is  separated  by  a dam  into  two  ponds,  the  inner  one  forming  an 
excellent  nursery,  d is  not  considered  very  good,  e is  the  best  pond,  and  secures 


F.  C.  B.  1901—20 


306  BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 

the  largest  number  of  breeders  except  j.  f is  a nursery  pond;  an  inclined  fence  of 
brush  surmounts  the  dam  and  partly  shades  the  pool,  which  is  believed  to  benefit  the 
fry.  g is  the  outlet  for  the  overflow  from  the  hatchery  reservoir  pool;  it  has  several 
small  pools,  formed  by  widen  ings  in  the  stream,  where  fry  were  one  year  planted  but  did 
not  do  very  well.  The  lower  of  these  pools,  shown  on  the  sketch,  was  also  used  as  a 
nursery,  I mtwas  unsatisfactory,  h is  the  overflow  from  the  auxiliary  pool  for  hatchery 
supply,  and  receives  the  hatching-house  waste;  at  times  a few  fish  are  permitted  to 
enter  and  are  spawned  as  needed  to  till  up  baskets,  j is  the  chief  feeder  entering  the 
lake,  and  is  about  100  yards  east  from  the  hatchery;  the  mouth  is  fenced  with  the  usual 
trap  opening,  and  from  this  point  for  about  70  feet  upstream  the  banks  are  Availed  up 
with  vertical  slabs.  At  j'  the  stream  has  been  dammed  to  make  an  upper  pool  in  which, 
and  in  the  upper  reaches,  fry  are  released.  The  ripe  fish  are  stripped  on  the  west 
bank  of  the  lower  reach. 

Spawning . — The  ripe  fish  enter  the  pens  through  the  traps  and  are  taken  by  dip 
nets;  they  average  about  7 pounds  in  weight.  Spawning  begins  about  September  l, 
and  continues  actively  for  about  six  weeks;  a few  ripe  fish  keep  running  until  late  in 
the  winter,  the  latest  arrivals  having  the  most  perfect  eggs. 

In  spawning  the  Avet  process  is  used;  a pan  is  half  filled  with  water,  into  which 
the  ova  are  stripped  and  the  milt  added;  these  are  mixed  with  the  fingers,  and  then 
set  aside  for  or.e  hour,  after  Avhich  the  eggs  are  thoroughly  washed,  transferred  to 
buckets,  and  carried  to  the  hatchery  where  they  are  placed  in  the  baskets. 

It  is  found  that  impregnation  will  take  place  up  to  3 minutes  after  the  ova  have 
been  ejected,  and  that  the  best  results  are  obtained  by  adding  the  milt  between  i and 
11  minutes  after  ejection. 

Size  of  eggs. — The  number  of  eggs  of  both  redfish  and  cohoes  has  been  frequently 
counted,  and  it  has  been  found  that  a full  healthy  female  of  each  species  contains 
3,500  eggs,  but  it  is  rare  that  the  full  number  is  obtained.  As  frequently  some  are 
left  in  the  fish,  and  others  are  not  in  good  condition,  the  count  is  made  on  3,000  eggs 
to  the  full  fish,  or  20  redfish,  or  10  to  12  cohoes,  to  the  basket,  the  eggs  of  the  latter 
being  about  twice  the  size  of  the  former.  When  a large  number  of  fish  mature  at 
the  same  time  it  is  frequently  found  that  some  eggs  have  been  voided,  and  in  such 
cases  it  Avill  take  two  and  sometimes  three  fish  to  make  one  “count”  fish. 

In  counting  the  eggs  a condensed-milk  can  is  used  as  a measure.  This  measure, 
by  repeated  counting,  has  been  found  to  contain  1,904  redfish  or  848  coho  eggs. 
A quantity  of  eggs  from  a healthy,  normal,  ripe  female  redfish  was  secured  and 
measured  Avith  the  following  results:  Forty  covered  2 square  inches  and  20  in  a line 
against  a straight  edge  occupied  a length  of  exactly  4£  inches,  giving  a single  egg  a 
diameter  of  0.225  inch.  It  has  been  observed  that  brilliantly  colored  or  unusually 
large  or  small  eggs  are  apt  to  prove  failures. 

Several  hundred  cohoes  are  usually  stripped  each  year  and  the  eggs  hatched. 
They  run  about  six  Aveeks  later  than  the  redfish. 

The  picking  of  eggs  is  done  Avith  ordinary  tin  forceps  and  is  commenced  six  to 
eight  Aveeks  after  the  eggs  are  placed  in  the  baskets.  It  is  claimed  that  the  per- 
centage of  bad  eggs  is  very  small,  and  that  very  little,  if  any,  fungus  appears.  The 
delicate  period  is  unknown  here.  It  is  probably  covered  during  the  time  the  eggs 
remain  undisturbed. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


307 


Period  of  incubation. — The  temperature  records  are  not  at  all  complete,  and  no 
attempt  has  been  made  to  determine  the  thermal  hatching  unit.  Generally  it  may 
be  said  that  with  a temperature  of  45°  F.,  the  average  highest,  to  39°,  the  average 
lowest,  the  eye-spots  appear  in  from  30  to  38  days.  A few  are  earlier,  and  a few  are 
45  days  before  they  are  well  eyed  out.  In  90  days  they  are  hatching  rapidly;  in  100 
days  two-thirds  are  hatched;  in  110  days  four-fifths  are  out,  and  the  remainder 
straggle  along  for  several  months.  As  the  hatchery  closes  March  1 the  unhatched 
eggs  are  buried  in  the  gravel,  simulating  the  natural  conditions.  The  cohoes  hatch 
about  10  days  earlier,  and  an  experiment  made  with  a basket  of  humpback  eggs 
showed  that  they  hatched  in  70  days  under  conditions  in  which  the  redhsh  hatched 
in  90  days. 

Eggs  which  hatch  out  well  in  advance  of  the  mass  (“prematures”)  and  those 
equally  late,  produce  usually  very  weak  fish  or  “freaks.”  It  has  been  the  experience 
here  that  it  is  useless  to  waste  time  on  these  fish,  as  they  invariably  die.  It  has  been 
found  that  the  fry  just  hatched  collect  in  the  lower  end  of  the  troughs,  and  to  prevent 
loss  they  are  removed  as  early  as  possible,  within  a day  or  two  after  hatching,  and 
placed  in  the  nursery,  the  upper  ponds  of  the  feeders,  and  sometimes  in  the  lake, 
where  the  bottom  is  grassy  or  covered  with  pond  lilies. 

The  yolk-sac  is  absorbed  in  from  forty-five  to  fifty  days,  but  shows  plainly  at 
sixty  days,  though  skinned  over  and  in  the  belly.  After  this  has  taken  place  they 
are  taken  from  the  nursery  and  some  are  placed  in  the  feeders  and  others  in  the  lake, 
where  the  natural  conditions  are  most  favorable  for  their  protection. 

The  loss  varies  from  8 to  12  per  cent,  depending  upon  the  season;  if  t here  is  an 
abundance  of  rain,  permitting  the  fish  to  ascend  without  injury,  the  eggs  are  found 
in  good  condition  and  the  loss  is  small.  During  a dry  season  the  fish  are  kept  from 
ascending  until  the  fall  rains,  and  as  they  partially  ripen  in  the  salt  or  brackish  water 
the  eggs  are  more  easily  injured.  Realizing  the  advantage  in  having  the  fish  arrive 
in  the  lake  in  a healthy,  vigorous  state,  considerable  work  has  been  done  at  the  out- 
let to  remove  obstructions  and  to  improve  the  natural  conditions. 

Barren  lakes. — Mr.  Callbreath  lays  considerable  stress  upon  the  use  of  what  he 
terms  barren  lakes  in  connection  with  hatchery  work.  These  lakes  have  in  their  sea 
connections  high  falls  or  cascades  preventing  the  passage  of  fish  from  the  sea  and 
usually  are  quite  clear  of  the  enemies  of  salmon  fry.  Mr.  Callbreath  has  planted 
redfish  fry  in  two  of  these  barren  lakes,  both  discharging  their  water  into  Burnett 
Inlet.  In  1894  and  1896,  1,000,000  redfish  fry  were  planted  each  year  in  Burnett 
Lake,  about  13  miles  from  the  hatchery,  and  in  1895,  2,000,000  redfish  fry  were 
planted  in  Francis  Lake,  about  11  miles  from  the  hatchery.  The  following  coho  fry 
have  been  planted  in  Falls  Creek,  previously  referred  to:  1893,  66,000;  1894,  50,000; 
1896,  135,000;  1899,  60,000.  The  rest  of  the  hatchery  output  has  been  planted  in 
the  home  lake  and  feeders.  The  fry  are  transported  as  soon  after  hatching  as  the 
weather  permits  and  before  the  egg  sac  is  absorbed,  as  they  then  require  fewer 
changes  of  water.  Coal-oil  cans  are  used  for  transportation  cans;  a screw-top 
mouthpiece,  11-inch  opening,  is  soldered  to  the  top  of  the  can  and  the  fry  are 
poured  in  through  a funnel  having  a large  opening.  A 5-gallon  can  will  hold  30,000 
redfish  fry,  or  about  15,000  coho  fry,  and  two  such  cans  placed  in  the  original  case 
make  a load  for  one  man  carried  on  the  back  with  pack  straps  and,  if  the  weather 
is  cold,  wrapped  in  blankets. 


308 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The  following  data,  representing  the  output  from  this  hatchery  from  July,  1892, 
to  September,  1900,  was  furnished  by  Mr.  Callbreath: 


Year. 

Redfish. 

Cohoes. 

Number  adults 
passed  over  dam. 

Total  num- 
ber of  fry 
hatched. 

Number  of  fry  planted 
and  locality. 

Number  adults 
passed  over  dam. 

Total  num- 
ber of  fry 
hatched. 

Number  of  fry  planted 
and  locality. 

Males. 

Females. 

Hatchery 

lake. 

Other 

lakes. 

Males. 

Females. 

Home 

lake. 

Falls 

Creek. 

1892.. . 

1893.. . 

1894.. . 

1895.. . 

1896.. . 

1897.. . 

1898.. . 

1899.. . 

1900.. . 

i 3, 000 
i 3, 010 
2,438 
2, 799 
1,617 
1,817 
1,189 
1,058 

(!) 

(2) 

2,016 
2,  497 
2,008 
1,572 
821 
1, 175 

600, 000 
1, 888, 000 

4. 928. 000 

4. 960. 000 

3. 880. 000 
2, 000, 000 

1.800.000 
1, 385, 000 

600, 000 
1, 888, 000 

3. 928. 000 
2,  960, 000 

2. 780. 000 
2, 000, 000 

1.800.000 
1, 385, 000 

31,000,000 
•1 2,  000, 000 
31,100,000 

il,151 

256 

134 

374 

590 

158 

991 

(2)  • 
230 
204 
338 
500 
142 
963 

416. 000 

363. 000 

515. 000 

510. 000 

526.000 

250. 000 
950,  000 

350. 000 

313. 000 

515. 000 

375. 000 

526. 000 

250. 000 

890. 000 

66, 000 

50. 000 

135, 000 

60. 000 

10, 918 

10,089  21,441,000 

17,341,000 

4, 100, 000 

2,503  2,377  | 3,530,000 

3,219,000 

311 , 000 

1,991 

1,863 

None  stripped;  fish  allowed  to 
seek  natural  spawning  beds. 

526  1 482  1 None  strij 

seek  nati 

peel ; fish  allowed  to 
iral  spawning  beds. 

i Both  sexes;  not  included  in  total.  2 Not  known.  3 To  Burnett  Lake.  * To  Francis  Lake. 


In  this  record  it  should  be  remembered  that,  the  number  of  fish  passed  over  the 
dam  is  not  the  number  stripped.  The  number  recovered  for  spawning  purposes  varies 
so  much  that  no  percentage  can  be  stated,  and  what  becomes  of  those  not  stripped  is 
a mystery  to  the  hatchery  people.  For  instance,  in  1899  there  were  passed  over  the 
dam  between  July  16th  and  October  26th  1,175  female  and  1,058  male  redfish, 
a total  of  2,233,  and  from  August  29th  to  November  14th  963  female  and  991  male 
cohoes,  making  a total  of  1,954;  of  this  number  1,367  redfish  and  1,231  cohoes  were 
recovered;  this  includes  not  only  all  spawned  fish,  but  all  found  dead  along  the 
shores  after  diligent  and  repeated  search. 

The  following  experience  at  the  hatchery  may  be  of  interest  and  worthy  of 
record:  On  September  23.  1898,  about  20  spawners  were  allowed  to  enter  one  of  the 
hatchery  ponds  and  spawn.  On  April  13,  1899,  nearly  seven  months  later,  these 
spawning-beds  were  turned  over  and  a number  of  young  fish  found  with  the  egg-sac 
not  yet  absorbed.  The  same  run  of  fish  stripped  and  hatched  in  the  troughs  had  the 
egg-sacs  absorbed  two  months  prior  to  that  time.  It  is  the  opinion  at  the  hatchery 
that  the  young  go  to  sea  in  from  10  to  15  months  after  they  are  hatched,  though 
some  remain  in  the  lake  until  they  are  from  20  to  24  months  old. 

Mr.  Callbreath  is  positive  that  his  fish  will  return,  but  he  now  believes  the  time 
has  not  yet  arrived  for  the  first  output  to  mature.  It  is  earnestly  hoped  he  may 
realize  all  he  anticipates,  for  the  zeal  and  enthusiasm  which  he  displays  should  meet 
with  ample  reward.  In  the  meantime  he  is  carrying  on  a very  interesting  experi- 
ment; if  his  fish  return  he  will  have  demonstrated  that  salmon  do  return  to  the  parent 
stream , he  will  have  thrown  much  light  on  the  age  of  fish,  and  he  will  have  proved 
that  a stream  running  a few  fish  can  be  made  to  yield  abnormally.  If  this  is  demon- 
strated a law  should  be  passed  permitting  the  leasing  of  small  streams  for  hatchery 
purposes  and  recognizing  ownership  in  fish  thus  hatched.  This  would  mean  a great 
deal  to  southeastern  Alaska,  as  it  would  draw  settlers  who  could  make  a very  good 
living  by  operating  a hatchery  and  cultivating  the  little  patches  of  land  that  are 
favorably  located. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


309 


HALIBUT  FISHERIES  OF  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA. 

Since  my  former  report  On  this  subject,  pages  45  to  48,  there  has  been  no  develop- 
ment of  any  halibut  banks  in  this  section,  but  the  spots  in  which  these  fish  occur  have 
been  utilized  by  small  boats  in  a manner  that  has  made  them  profitable. 

A few  years  prior  to  1899  the  fresh-halibut  fishery  was  conducted  by  a few  small 
schooners  and  sloops,  chiefly  from  Puget  Sound,  which  shipped  the  iced  product  by 
freight  steamers  to  the  Sound  market  from  Wrangell.  The  fishing,  however,  was 
desultory,  and  could  hardly  have  been  called  profitable  until  1899,  when  the  Icy  Strait 
Packing  Company  completed  their  wharf  at  Petersburg,  near  the  upper  end  of 
Wrangell  Narrows,  and  arranged  with  a steamship  company  to  make  regular  calls  for 
freight.  Under  this  arrangement  it  was  agreed  that  the  halibut  boats  of  Chatham 
Strait  and  Frederick  Sound  should  ship  from  the  new  station.  During  the  first 
winter,  from  October,  1899,  to  March,  1900,  about  20  small  schooners  and  sloops  of 
from  5 tons  to  20  tons  formed  the  fleet,  calling  regularly  at  Petersburg  with  fresh 
halibut  for  shipment.  The  fish  were  obtained  chiefly  in  Chatham  Strait  and  Fred- 
erick Sound.  Twelve  of  these  vessels  averaged  2 dories  and  5 men,  and  8 averaged 
1 dory  and  3 men,  making  a total  of  32  dories  and  84  men,  each  of  whom  may  be  said 
to  have  had  a personal  interest  in  a vessel.  From  October,  1899,  to  April,  1900,  the 
Icy  Strait  Packing  Company  also  engaged  in  the  halibut  fisheries,  employing  their 
cannery  steamers  for  this  purpose.  The  steamer  White  Wings , 34  tons,  valued  at 
$7,000,  besides  her  regular  winter  crew  of  4,  carried  8 deck-hands  and  fishermen, 
working  4 dories;  and  the  steamer  Annie  M.  Nixon , 18  tons,  valued  at  $6,000,  in 
addition  to  her  crew  of  4,  employed  6 fishermen,  working  3 dories.  The  fishermen 
received  board  and  20  cents  per  fish  of  more  than  15  pounds  weight.  The  fish  aver- 
aged 40  pounds,  dressed.  The  largest  weighed  250  pounds.  The  catch  for  the  season 
of  the  Icy  Strait  Packing  Company  amounted  to  700  boxes  of  fresh  halibut  iced, 
500  pounds  net  weight  per  box,  and  was  shipped  to  Seattle  and  sold  at  an  average 
price  of  3 cents  per  pound.  It  is  said  that  the  20  small  craft  engaged  in  the  fishery 
each  averaged  40  boxes  of  fresh  halibut  per  month,  making  200  tons  per  month. 

It  may  therefore  be  said  that  there  were  employed  on  these  halibut  fisheries 
from  October,  1899,  to  the  end  of  March,  1900,  two  small  steamers  and  20  small  sail 
vessels,  using  39  dories  and  employing  98  fishermen. 

The  ice  used  is  gathered  from  the  neighboring  glaciers,  and  if  ground  in  a mill 
made  for  the  purpose  is  in  the  best  form,  though  many  merely  break  it  into  tine 
lumps  with  a club. 

As  mentioned  in  my  former  report,  no  great  banks  where  halibut  occur  in  such 
numbers  that  a seagoing  vessel  may  make  a load  and  return  to  market  have  yet 
been  found  in  Alaska,  but  there  are  many  spots  on  which  halibut  may  be  found,  and 
fishing  from  small  vessels  convenient  to  a steamer  route,  as  outlined  above,  seems  to 
offer  the  best  means  for  conducting  these  fisheries  successfully. 

It  is  possible  that  these  fisheries  will  increase  in  importance  until  the  spots  are 
cleaned  off,  when  some  other  field  will  be  sought  until  the  grounds  recuperate.  At 
present  it  is  promising  enough  to  attract  the  attention  of  many  small  fishers  from 
the  Sound  country.  The  gear  used  consists  of  bottom  trawls  and  long  hand  lines;  it 
is  simple  and  inexpensive. 


310 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


GENERAL  CONDITIONS. 

THE  LAW. 

During  the  investigation  of  the  salmon  fisheries  in  Alaska  in  1897,  when  this  ves- 
sel visited  all  the  operating  canneries  and  fisheries  outside  of  Bering  Sea,  it  was  my 
opinion,  frequently  expressed,  that  as  a rule  the  streams  were  overfished  and  could 
not  continue  for  a long  period  to  withstand  the  enormous  draft  made  upon  them. 

These  fisheries  have  grown  to  such  an  extent  that  unless  one  has  been  in  constant 
touch  with  the  subject,  the  situation  can  not  be  fully  grasped.  In  1878,  when  the 
first  canneries  were  established,  the  total  Alaska  pack  was  8,159  cases;  seven  years 
later,  in  1885,  the  pack  was  83,415  cases;  only  four  years  afterwards,  in  1889,  the 
pack  had  grown  to  be  719,196  cases;  and  seven  years  from  that  date,  1896,  it  was 
966,707  cases;  followed  by  a slack  year,  1897,  which  yielded  909,078  cases.  The  past 
season,  however  (1900),  has  exceeded  even  the  canners’  expectations,  and  an  output  of 
1,548,139  cases  was  the  result.  Multiplying  this  number  by  85  may  give  approxi- 
mately the  number  of  pounds  of  live  salmon  taken  from  the  Alaska  streams  by  the 
canneries.  This  does  not  include  the  amount  taken  by  the  salteries,  or  by  the  whites 
and  natives  for  their  own  local  use.  It  may  be  imagined  how  prolific  these  rivers 
must  be  when,  under  any  condition,  they  can  furnish  this  mass  of  fish.  Every  means 
that  man  can  devise  is  used  for  their  capture  and  apparently  without  restriction. 

In  my  former  report,  pages  38-42,  the  subject  of  the  law  was  briefly  discussed, 
and,  with  the  experience  since  obtained,  there  seems  no  reason  for  changing  the 
recommendations  then  made,  but,  on  the  contrary,  they7  should  be  emphasized  and 
augmented.  My  opinion  of  traps  has  been  given  previously  and  need  not  be 
repeated  here,  except  to  say  that,  whatever  legislation  is  effected,  there  should  be  no 
exceptions  made. 

Duifing  the  past  three  years  so-called  purse  seines  have  grown  in  favor,  particu- 
larly in  southeastern  Alaska,  and  it  is  now  claimed  by  those  operating  them  that  it  is 
no  longer  necessary  to  resort  to  barricades,  as  the  purse  seines  take  all  the  fish  before 
they  can  enter  the  streams.  These  seines  are  simply  deep  drag  seines,  square  hung, 
which,  in  hauling,  are  pursed  by  gathering  in  the  foot  rope.  Around  the  larger  and 
more  prolific  streams  of  southeastern  Alaska,  such  as  Hetta,  Ivarta  Bay7,  and  Quadra, 
there  were  from  25  to  30  of  these  seines  in  operation  during  the  season  of  1900,  one 
seine  following  the  other  in  such  rapid  succession  that  few  fish  escaped  capture. 
Purse  seines,  or  seines  used  as  such,  should  be  abolished;  in  fact,  the  only7  fishing 
apparatus  allowed  should  be  gill  nets  and  drag  seines;  no  exceptions  should  be  made. 
The  use  of  these  appliances  should  be  regulated,  and  competent  inspectors  appointed 
to  enforce  the  law  and  the  regulations. 

In  the  small  streams  examined  this  year  those  away7  from  the  lines  of  travel 
were  all  found  to  have  evidences  of  barricading.  In  some,  where  the  current  is  not 
very?  strong,  stakes,  planted  on  the  banks  and  in  the  stream  bed  to  support  a net 
held  to  the  bottom  by  bowlders,  answered  the  fishermen’s  purpose,  while  in  other 
cases  the  regular  log  barricade,  referred  to  in  my  previous  report,  was  strongly  in 
evidence. 

Since  it  is  believed  that  the  Puget  Sound  and  Columbia  River  salmon  fisheries 
are  failing,  attention  has  been  drawn  to  Alaska.  Six  new  canneries  appeared  in 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


311 


II 


southeastern  Alaska  during  1900,  generally  small  in  their  appointments,  prepared  to 
make  a hand  pack  of  12,000  to  20,000  cases  for  the  season.  It  is  confidently  expected, 
if  the  labor  can  be  obtained,  that  from  15  to  20  additional  ones  will  be  located 
throughout  Alaska  in  1901,  and  all  of  the  older  canneries  expect  to  increase  their 
capacity.  It  is  hardly  necessary  for  me  to  say  that  the  fisheries  can  not  support  all 
these  canneries,  at  the  present  rate,  for  any  length  of  time;  they  will  surely  become 
exhausted  for  extensive  commercial  purposes. 

There  is  another  point  which  should  receive  the  attention  of  the  law,  and  that  is 
the  inspection  of  the  product  put  in  the  cans  and  of  the  labeling.  Compared  with 
the  large  amount  of  salmon  that  reaches  the  market,  the.  quantity  that  might  be  called 
unfit  bears  a very  small  proportion.  Yet  salmon  that  should  not  be  consumed  are 
packed  under  misleading  labels,  and  the  law  should  prohibit  it.  The  law  also  should 
require  the  canner  to  plainly  label  every  can  he  produces  with  the  species  of  fish 
in  the  can,  the  quality,  and  the  location  of  the  cannery  packing.  The  number  of 
different  labels  now  used  on  the  Pacific  coast  is  very  large;  a list  before  me  from 
one  lithographic  company  represents  702.  From  this  it  may  be  inferred  that  even 
an  expert  finds  difficulty  in  telling  the  quality  of  the  goods  covered  by  a label.  It 
was  noticed  in  some  of  the  new  canneries  that,  frequently  a low  grade  of  fish  was 
covered  by  the  most  brilliant  of  labels,  and  in  one.  instance — though  doubtless  there 
are  others — dog  salmon  were  covered  by  “Fresh  Columbia  River  salmon.”  Such 
practices  must  throw  discredit  upon  all  goods,  and  one  would  fancy  that  reputable 
canneries  would  ask  protection  against  it. 

It.  is  my  opinion  that  a section  of  the  law  should  provide  for  a certain  time  when 
fishing  for  redfish  may  commence,  and  prohibit  their  capture  before  that  time.  The 
object  of  this  close  season  is  to  permit  all  the  earliest  arrivals  to  ascend  to  the  lakes, 
where  they  may  spawn  early  and  have  the  eggs  hatched  before  the  cold  weather  sets 
in.  It  is  probable  that  many  of  the  feeders,  used-  as  spawning-beds,  freeze  to  the 
bottom  during  the  winter,  and  the  late  eggs  must  necessarily  be  destroyed.  No  one 
appreciates  the  difficulty  in  framing  such  a law  more  than  the  writer;  but  it  is  not 
impracticable,  and  with  the  data  now  at  hand  it  is  entirely  feasible.  Take,  for 
example,  southeastern  Alaska.  We  know  that  all  redfish  packed  from  the  earliest 
arrivals  to  about  July  4 hardly  pay  cannery  expenses.  This  does  not  take  into  account 
the  small  pack  of  king  salmon,  made  by  a few  canneries,  from  the  Chilkat,  Taku, 
Stikine,  and  Unuk.  A law,  therefore,  prohibiting  the  capture  of  redfish  in  southeast- 
ern Alaska  before  July  4 would  be  an  excellent  provision,  and  other  districts  could 
be  treated  in  a similar  manner.  In  order  to  execute  the  law,  might  it  not  be  well  to 
pay  informers  one-half  of  all  fines  collected? 

With  the  large  accessions  of  canneries  in  Alaska  the  struggle  in  the  fisheries  is  sure 
to  increase,  and  every  means  will  be  emplojmd  for  the  capture  of  fish  regardless  of 
the  law,  unless  the  Government  enforces  it  by  an  efficient  and  intelligent  inspection. 
The  future,  even  more  than  the  past,  requires  efficient  inspection,  which,  however 
can  not  be  realized  under  the  present  conditions. 


312 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION, 


STATISTICS. 


Comparison  table  of  the  salmon  packing  industry  of  the  Pacific  coast,  from  its  first,  inception  in  1866  to  1900. 


[Compiled  from  various  sources.] 


Year. 


1866  . 

1867  . 

1868  . 

1869  . 

1870  . 

1871  . 

1872  . 

1873  . 

1874  . 
1875. 
1876  . 
1S77  . 

1878  . 

1879  . 

1880  . 
1881  . 
1882  . 

1883  . 

1884  . 
1885. 
1886  . 

1887  . 

1888  . 

1889  . 

1890  . 

1891  . 

1892  . 

1893  . 

1894  . 

1895  . 

1896  . 

1897  . 

1898  . 

1899  . 

1900  . 


Total. 


Alaska. 


British 

Columbia. 


Puget 

Sound. 


Outside 

rivers. 


8, 159 
12, 530 
6, 539 
8, 977 
21,745 
48, 337 
63, 886 
83, 415 
142, 065 
206, 677 
412, 115 
719, 196 
682, 591 
801,400 
474, 717 
643, 654 
686,  440 
626, 530 
966, 707 
909, 078 
965, 097 
1,078,146 
1,  .548, 139 

11, 116, 140 


9, 

67, 

113, 

57, 

61, 

175, 

255, 

243, 

138, 

106, 

163, 

201, 

135, 

414, 

409, 

314, 

236, 

637, 

562, 

564, 

598, 

1,015, 

454, 

711, 

527, 

7,176,869  2,439,642 


248, 200 

423. 500 
417,700 

871.500 
478,  742 


25,  600 
24, 800 
30, 000 

30. 000 
37, 200 
48, 500 
49,  000 

38. 000 
41,350 

, 51,750 
131,100 

195. 400 
154,000 
199,  068 

67, 117 
78,  305 
129,  000 
105, 309 
103,  340 
205,  500 

115. 400 
68,  683 
78, 600 
82,432 

106,  300 


2, 195, 754 


Columbia 

River. 

Sacramento 

River. 

Total . 

4,000 

4,  000 

18, 000 

18, 000 

28, 000 

28, 000 

100, 000 

100, 000 

150, 000 

150,  000 

200,  000 

200, 000 

250, 000 

250, 000 

250,  000 

250,  000 

350, 000 

2,  500 

352, 500 

375,  000 

3,000 

378, 000 

450, 000 

8,300 

493, 747 

460, 000 

21,500 

573,  687 

460, 480 

36, 500 

648,  740 

480, 000 

31,009 

610,  924 

630, 000 

51,000 

786, 039 

551,000 

181, 200 

965, 352 

541, 360 

200, 300 

1 , 067, 466 

629, 400 

160,  000 

1,118,  737 

656, 179 

81,450 

981,810 

524,  530 

48,  500 

815, 060 

454,  943 

39,  300 

930, 412 

373, 800 

36,  500 

1,014,367 

367, 750 

61,  200 

1,130,665 

325, 500 

66, 666 

1 , 724, 830 

433, 500 

25, 065 

1 , 617, 737 

390, 185 

10, 353 

3 , 595, 056 

502, 800 

2,  281 

1,345,795 

375, 700 

23,  336 

1,785, 119 

511, 000 

28, 463 

1,891,614 

627, 500 

25, 185 

2, 049, 592 

463, 621 

13, 387 

2, 405,  615 

552, 721 

38, 543 

3, 008, 002 

473, 230 

29,  731 

2,418,858 

340, 125 

33, 227 

3,117,030 

313,417 

39,  304 

3,013,183 

13,613,741 

1,296,  791 

38, 839, 937 

Note. — Prior  to  1896  the  Puget  Sound  pack  is  included  under 
in  cases  of  48  one-pound  tins. 


Outside  rivers.”  The  pack  is  given 


Table  showing  by  years  the  number  of  salmon  canneries  operated  in  each  district  of  Alaska,  from  1878  to  1900 , 
with  the  annual  per  cent  value  of  total  salmon  pack  ( canned ) for  each  district. 


Y ear. 

Southeast 

Alaska. 

Prince  William 
Sound  and 
Copper  River. 

Cook  Inlet. 

Kadiak  and 
Chignik. 

Bering  Sea. 

Total 

num- 

ber 

of 

can- 

ner- 

ies. 

No.  of 
can- 
neries. 

Annual 

per 

cent  of 
total 
salmon 
pack. 

No.  of 
can- 
neries. 

Annual 

per 

cent  of 
total 
salmon 
pack. 

No.  of 
can- 
neries. 

Annual 

per 

cent  of 
total 
salmon 
pack. 

No.  of 
can- 
neries. 

Annual 

per 

cent  of 
total 
salmon 
pack. 

No.  of 
can- 
neries. 

Annual 

per 

cen  t of 
total 
salmon 
pack. 

1878 

9 

100 

9 

1879 

9 

100 



9 

1880 

1 

100 

1 

1881 

1 

100 

1 

1882 

1 

1 

27.8 

1 

19.  3 

3 

1883 

4 

39 

1 

32 

1 

29 

6 

1884 

4 

31.5 

1 

34.7 

] 

33. 1 

1 

0.  7 

1885 

3 

14 

1 

24.8 

1 

43.2 

1 

18 

6 

1886.. 

4 

12.8 

1 

20. 1 

1 

32.6 

3 

34.5 

9 

1887 

5 

15.2 

1 

14.9 

1 

34.  7 

3 

35.2 

10 

' 1888 

6 

19.7 

2 

10.3 

4 

48.2 

4 

21.8 

16 

1889 

12 

19.1 

4 

3.4 

2 

7.1 

15 

54.2 

4 

16.2 

37 

1890 

12 

20.9 

3 

6.2 

2 

4.2 

14 

51.3 

4 

17.4 

35 

1891 

11 

19.5 

3 

8.5 

3 

7.4 

8 

48 

5 

16.6 

30 

1892 

24.4 

0 

1 

4.3 

5 

57.  9 

9 

13.4 

15 

1893 

8 

21.1 

3 

12 

1 

4.9 

7 

45.2 

3 

16.8 

22 

1894 

7 

20.8 

3 

11.4 

1 

5 

6 

47 

4 

15.8 

21 

1895 

7 

23.7 

3 

9.6 

1 

5.7 

6 

37.1 

6 

23.9 

23 

1896 

9 

27.1 

3 

9.6 

1 

3.  6 

8 

37.1 

8 

22.6 

29 

1897 

9 

29.9 

2 

5.7 

1 

3.6 

10 

32.8 

7 

28 

29 

1898 

9 

26.1 

2 

6.3 

•2 

5.8 

10 

28.7 

7 

33 

30 

1899 

9 

28.8 

2 

5.7 

2 

4.8 

10 

22.  5 

9 

38.2 

32 

1900. 

16 

29.5 

2 

4.5 

3 

4.1 

9 

23.2 

12 

38.7 

42 

Percentage  of  gross 

24.9 

6.2 

6 

37.5 

25.4 

>f  season  of  1900. 


393. 

1894. 

1895. 

1896. 

1897. 

1898. 

1899. 

1900. 

Total. 

JSCS. 

12,595 

Cases. 

14,455 

Cases. 

12, 228 

Cases. 

16, 675 

Cases. 
15, 705 

Cases. 
16, 307 

Cases. 

19,100 

Cases. 

127,752 

Cases. 
267, 523 
8, 612 

11.400 

29,500 
66, 969 

23. 400 

413,505 

17.400 

367, 872 
512, 863 
27, 129 
206, 845 
14,577 

96. 200 

5,000 

24. 200 
23, 900 

101,332 
131,818 
99, 100 
174,910 
36, 840 
27, 256 
1,660 
29,941 
9,458 
16, 7 22 
13,  793 
14,850 

13,668 

38, 781 

35, 373 

47,456 

37,456 

39, 669 

53, 237 

55,  601 

22,  728 
25, 153 

15, 102 

25, 250 
26, 869 
Dismantled. 
12,000 

27, 416 
32, 554 

44,233 

61,467 

45,918 
62,  040 

49, 332 
59,  343 

50, 201 
63,  390 

58, 518 
67, 158 

14,100 

24,100 

22, 300 

15, 174 

25,504 

33, 623 

9, 889 

11,189 

14, 805 

15, 358 

14,070 

12,681 

s Aban- 
doned. 

24,418 
12, 500 

" Dismantled. 
14,000 

12, 000 

Closed;  in 
17,650 
8,000 
27, 442 

reserve. 
15, 490 
24, 500 
34, 388 

11,671 

16,000 

31,208 

12, 322 
37,000 
38,265 
11,200 

17,560 
13,600 
43, 607 
25, 640 
27, 256 
1,560 
29, 941 
9,458 
16, 722 
13, 793 
14,850 

36, 053 

142, 544 

148, 476 

262, 381 

271, 867 

251,385 

310,219 

456, 639 

2, 774, 475 

1 , 600 

16'  740 

15, 270 

15,000 

15,000 

20,672 

84,027 

•doned. 

28, 999 

28, 378 

21,453 

39,873 

23,  301 

32, 158 

31,931 

39,410 

291,492 

32, 729 

35, 285 

120, 089 

{ 23,041 

32, 321 

28,  756 

28, 668 

29, 864 

30, 588 

173; 238 

76, 998 

78, 663 

59, 494 

92, 866 

52,057 

60, 826 

61,795 

69, 998 

687, 186 

42, 003 

31,665 

34, 033 

36, 188 

34,767 

32, 532 

39, 566 

28, 815 

33, 781 

430, 156 

65, 867 

Closed. 

12  D i s m a n - 

55; 077 

tied. 

16,876 

23, 300 

25, 089 

65, 265 

4,905 

4,905 

31, 665 

34, 033 

36, 188 

34, 767 

32,532 

56, 442 

52, 115 

63,  775 

663, 273 

9 Moved  to  Thin  Point,  Alaska  Peninsula. 

111  Machinery  moved  to  Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Kenai. 
11  Transport  vessel  wrecked  and  outfit  lost. 

^Consolidated  with  Arctic  Fishing  Co.,  Kussilof  River. 


Complete  table  of  Alaska  salmon  {canned)  pack , by  canneries  and  districts,  from  its  earliest  inception  in  187 8 to  close  of  season  of  1900. 

[One  ease  contains  48  pounds  of  salmon,  net  weight.] 


Name  of  company  and  location  of  cannery. 

Owned  in  1900  by — 

1878. 

1879. 

1880. 

1881. 

1882. 

1883. 

1884. 

1885. 

1880. 

1887. 

1888. 

1889. 

1890. 

1891. 

1892. 

1893. 

189-1. 

1895. 

1896. 

1897. 

1898. 

1899. 

1900. 

Total. 

Southeast  Alaska. 

Cases. 
5, 402 

<L675 

5,855 

0)539' 

Clo 

8,977* 

ted. 

0 P1 

Cases. 
8, 240 

Cases. 

0,189 

Cases. 

8,428 

Cases. 

7,860 

^9*562 

* 12)325 

ll)370 

^lo)l8H 

' ,tg  9*,' '250 

Cases. 

10, 194 

Cases. 
12, 595 

*14,455 

Cases. 

12,228 

Cases. 

16, 675 

Cases. 

15,705 

% 30" 

S'o.Too 

Cases. 

>27,752 

' 267s,' 623 
8,612 

11.400 

29,500 

66,969 

23.400 

413,505 

17.400 

367, 872 
512, 863 
27, 129 
206, 845 
14,577 

96.200 

5,000 

24.200 
23,900 

101,332 
131,818 
99, 100 
174,910 
36,840 
27,266 
1,660 
29,941 
9,458 
16,722 
13,793 
14,850 

-•°rtll  1 a ^ , , ' ( 1 1 1 ^ i, L*  ' 'r  nn  , f TvUiinff 

^ On  chflrn  „non  Ho  Q„„,trn 

2,000 

3,000 

5,900 

500 

ISold  ; 

moved. 
| 5,500 

8,000 
5.  000j 

Tonga!*  Packing  Co.,  Ketchikan.  Tongass  Narrows 

Chilkat  Packing  Co.,  east  shore.  Chilkut  Inlet 

Northwest  Trading  Co.,  Pyramid  Harbor 

Pvramid  Harbor  Packing  Co..  Pyramid  Harbor 

Aberdeen  Packing  Co..  Lower  Stikine  River 

Glacier  Packing  Co..  Point  Highficld,  Wrnngell  Island 

Alaska  Salmon  Pocking  and  Fur  Co..  Loring 

Cape  Lees  Packing  Co..  Burroughs  Bay 

Boston  Fishing  and  Trading  Co.,  Yes  Bay 

Bitrani'ff  Packing  Co..  Redoubt.  Bnrunot  Island 

Bammifl  Packing  Co..  Redtish  Bay.  Baninof  Island 

Astoria  and  Alaska  Packing  Co..  Freshwater  Bay 

Adoria  and  Alaska  Packing  Co.,  Point  Ellis,  Kuiu  Island  

Bartlett  Bay  Packing  Co..  Bartlett  Bay 

Chilkat  Canning  Co..  Chilkat  Village.  Chilkut  Inlet 

Metlakuhtla  Industrial  Co.,  Metlukahtlu 

ynndni  Packing  Co..  Mink  Arm.  Boca  do  Quadra 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Hunter  Bay 

Thlinkcl  Packing  Co..  Gerard  Point.  Eastern  Passage 

Fulalgo  Island  Panning  Co..  Ketchikan 

Boyer  Warnock  Packing  Co..  Beecher  Pass 

Icy  Strait  Packing  Co..  Petersburg,  Wrangell  Narrows 

Taku  Fishing  Co..  Port  Snettisham 

Taku  Packing  Co.,  Taku  Inlet 

Western  Fisheries  Co.,  Dundas  Bay 

Cbilkoot  Packing  Co.,  Chilkoot  Inlet 

Total  of  annual  packs  in  Southeast  Alaska 



:::::: 

:::::: 

11,000 
Closed. 
Transf.  to 

19, 300’ 
11.000 

"in;™ 

5, 732 

3 13. 000 
13,500 

0.000 

3,800 

7,000 

0,000 

2,400 

Closed. 

1,700 

8,000 

15,000 

13, 309 

Burnt. 

Alaska  Packers  Association.. 
Defunct 

Alaska  Packers  Association  .. 

• 1" 

Defunct 

Same  company 

Defunct 

do 

do 

do 

do 

Alaska  Packers  Association  . 

Same  company 

Icy  Strait  Packing  Co 

Same  company 

do 

do 

do 

do 

do 

do 

do 

do 

<13,400 

12,300 

18,300 

28, 904 

13,068 

38,781 

35, 373 

47, 456 

37,450 

39, 609 

53, 237 

55,601 

3,400 

I moved. 
| 13.800 

28. 802 
10,574 
1 500 
4/454 

5,000 

"4.366 

19,000 

14.000 
23, 024 
10,823 

9,343 
10, 123 

( Moved. 
| 8, 000 

12.000 
17,000 

“500 

15, 870 
22, 780 

17,365 
| Moved. 

\ 7, 9-19 

io/ioo 

7,000 

20,914 

7,000 

Closed. 

21,446 

Closed. 

13, 734 

io,269 

Burnt  May  1 

Close 

20,000 

11,125 

22, 728 
25, 153 

15,102 

25,250 
26. 809 
Dismantled. 
12,000 

27, 416 
32,554 

44,233 

01,407 

45, 918 
62, 010 

49, 332 
59,343 

50,201 

63,390 

58,518 

67,158 

14,100 

24, 100 

22,300 

15, 174 

25,504 

33, 623 

9,889 

11,189 

14,805 

15,358 

14, 070 

12,681 

6 Aban- 
doned. 

i. 

24,418 

12,500 

1 Dismantled. 
14,000 

12,000 

Closed;  it 
17,650 
8,000 
27, 442 

reserve. 
15, 490 
24 , 500 
34, 388 

U.G71 

16.000 

31,208 

12, 322 
37,000 
38. 265 
11.200 

17,560 
13.600 
43,607 
25.640 
27.256 
1.560 
29,941 
9,458 
16.722 
13, 79;$ 
14,850 

12,530 

0. 539 

8.977 

11,501 

20. 040 

22, 189 

10, 728 

18. 060 

31,462 

81,128 

141,700 

142,901 

156,615 

115, 722 

136,053 

142,544 

148, 176 

262, 381 

271,867 

251,385 

310,219 

456,639 

2,774,475 

Prince  William  Sound  and  Copper  River. 

1,000 

2,540 

1,600 

16,740 

84,027 

291,492 
120, 089 
173,238 

14,200 

f Moved. 

1 18,085 

27,209 
22, 797 

Closed. 

Closed. 

Closed. 

15,270 

28,999 
32, 729 

15,000 

28,378 

35,285 

15,000 

21,453 
| Moved. 

\ 23,041 

20,672 

39,873 

Closed. 

23,301 

Aban- 
doned. 
32, 158 

5.004 
15, 000 

13,716 

14,278 

31,931 

39,410 

32,321 

28,756 

28, 608 

29,864 

30,588 

24,204 

42, 194 

68,091 

None. 

70, 998 

78,663 

59, 494 

92,860 

52,057 

60,826 

61,795 

69,998 

687, 186 

Conk  Juki. 

C.  044 

14,818 

21,1411 

Transf.  to 
19,217' 

42,003 

430, 156 
65,867 
55,077 

65,265 

4,905 

28, 433 

30,765 

29, 455 
12, 996 

31,782 

18,712 

"Closed. 
15,905 
12, 760 

19,157 
18, 254 
21,580 

Closed. 

31, 665 

34,033 

32,532 

39,566 

28,815 

33,781 

20,741 

C 

losed. 

12  Di sman  - 
tied. 

16,876 

23,300 

25,089 
4, 905 

0,044 

14,818 

21,141 

19,217 

28, 433 

30, 765 

42, 451 

50, 494 

28, 055 

58, 997 

20, 741 

31,665 

34,033 

36,188 

34,767 

32, 532 

56,442 

52, 116 

63, 775 

663,273 

F.  C.  B.  1901. 


1 Burnt  September  18.  1899;  rebuilt  spring  of  1900  on  new  site. 

- Machinery  moved  to  Arctic  Packing  Co.,  Kussilof  River. 

3 Burnt  in  August,  1889. 

4 Burnt  und  rebuilt  in  spring. 

Faces  page  312 1 [For  remaining  districts  see  next  sheet, 


6 Machinery  moved  to  Egegak  Packing  Co.,  Egegak  River, 

6 Hand  pack;  machinery  installed  in  1890. 

' Machinery  moved  to  Pyrumid  Harbor  Packing  Co.,  Pyramid  Harbor. 
8 Experimental  pack. 

312 2.] 


9 Moved  to  Thin  Point,  Alaska  Peninsula. 

"'Machinery  moved  to  Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Kenai. 
"Transport  vessel  wrecked  and  outfit  lost. 

12 Consolidated  with  Arctic  Fishing  Co.,  Kussilof  River. 


of  1900 — Continued. 


1894. 

1895. 

1896. 

1897. 

1898. 

1899. 

1900. 

Total. 

Cases. 

Cases. 

Cases. 

Cases. 

Cases. 

Cases. 

Cases. 

Cases. 

220 

79, 000 

48, 379 

68, 495 

54, 777 

28, 898 

31,210 

79,415 

984, 165 

138 

Closed;  in 

reserve. 

170,631 

166,898 

959 

79, 000 

47, 500 

70, 320 

49, 633 

24, 398 

18, 987 

Closed. 

426, 030 

160,300 

d. 

26, 338 

id. 

77,  000 

101 '860 

076 

54, 300 

35,  700 

87, 613 

49,  852 

29, 455 

29,  439 

73,115 

532, 248 

777 

27, 720 

15,  331 

23,155 

37,401 

34, 168 

28,  294 

32,342 

303, 515 

dis- 

In  reserve. 

28, 882 

led. 

553 

| 55, 352 

70, 050 

48, 361 

38, 159 

50, 418 

34, 674 

40, 396 

505, 579 

50,487 

Closed;  in  reserve. 

49, 735 

8, 598 

31,768 

d. 

1 1 . 089 

429 

26, 984 

15, 277 

Closed- 

in  reserv 

57, 690 

21 , 005 

2, 113 

11,912 

13, 370 

55, 043 

21, 515 

24,000 

30, 061 

31 , 600 

33, 086 

140, 262 

17, 893 

12' 000 

27'  400 

21,500 

26, 617 

105,410 

17’ 000 

29’ 800 

19,000 

30, 409 

96, 209 

13i  375 

16,'  500 

15, 569 

29, 700 

75, 144 

152 

322, 356 

232, 237 

358, 357 

298,  310 

277, 741 

242, 185 

358, 450 

4,164,881 

S48 

30, 413 

33, 631 

35, 676 

35,  890 

41,011 

45, 383 

63, 935 

493, 070 

188 

30, 038 

34, 632 

39, 115 

37,849 

42, 306 

46, 775 

60, 797 

515, 636 

750 

30, 999 

33, 434 

38,314 

34,117 

39, 962 

43, 566 

62,  597 

514,  622 

Closed;  in 

reserve. 

98, 003 

17 17, 394 

12, 007 

20, 004 

53, 400 

mantled. 

22,  731 

27, 133 

34, 676 

34, 870 

43, 790 

62,334 

225, 534 

13’ 700 

8, 600 

18,000 

28, 000 

31,000 

36, 058 

135'  358 

29, 730 

55, 508 

94’ 053 

116' 651 

101,892 

397, 834 

19’ 764 

38, 272 

38i 501 

44'  984 

54,  682 

196,  203 

18^  228 

43, 387 

61, 615 

21,455 

40, 090 

61,545 

45, 200 

45,  200 

21 , 652 

21,652 

6,  653 

786 

108, 844 

150,135 

218, 336 

254, 312 

318, 703 

411, 832 

599, 277 

2, 826, 325 

053 

142,544 

148,476 

262, 381 

271,807 

251,385 

310, 219 

456, 639 

2, 774, 475 

998 

78,  663 

59,  494 

92, 866 

52, 057 

60, 826 

61, 795 

69, 998 

687, 186 

665 

34, 033 

36, 188 

34, 767 

32,  532 

56, 442 

52,115 

63,  775 

663, 273 

152 

322,  356 

232, 237 

358, 357 

298, 310 

277,  741 

242, 185 

358, 450 

4, 164, 881 

786 

108, 844 

150, 135 

218, 336 

254, 312 

318,703 

411,832 

599, 277 

2, 826, 325 

,654 

686, 440 

626,  530 

966,  707 

909, 078 

965, 097 

1 , 078, 146 

1 , 548, 139 

11,116,140 

ibinery  moved  to  Bering  Sea  Packing  Co.,  Ugashi'k  River, 
ved  to  Arctic  Packing  Co.,  Naknek  River. 

-hinery  moved  to  Point  Roberts  Packing  Co.,  Kviehak  Bay. 

lerimental  pack. 

red  to  new  site  on  same  river. 

dlable  property  moved  to  Ugashik  Fishing  Station,  Ugashik  River. 


Complete  table  of  Alaska  salmon  {canned)  pack , by  canneries  and  districts,  from,  its  earliest  inception  in  1878  to  close 


of  season  of  1900 — Continued. 


Name  of  company  and  location  of  cannery. 


Kadiak  and  Chignik. 

Karlnk  Parking  Co.,  Karluk,  Kadiak  Island 

K«xl:itk  parking  Co..  Karluk,  Kadiak  Island 

\!,-utiitn  Islands  Fishing  and  Mining  <'o.,  Karluk 

ilia  ,< -Aleutian  Pocking  Co.,  Karluk.  Kadiak  Island 

\r  < i Packing  Co.,  Larsen  Cove.  Uyak  Bay,  Kadiak  Island  . . . 

H.,v.il  Packing  Co.,  Afognak  Bay.  Afognak  Island 

!;„■ - a,  Aincm  an  Packing  Co.,  Afognak  Bay,  Afognak 

Hume  Packing  Co.  Karluk,  Kadiak  Island 

\ la>kn  Improvement  Co.,  Karluk.  Kadiak  Island 

\n  tic  Packing  Co.,  Olga  Bay,  Alituk,  Kadiak  Island 

K , . i , 1 k Packing  Co.,  Snug  Harbor,  Alitak,  Kadiak  Island 

Chignik  Bov  Co.,  Chignik  Lagoon,  Alaska  Peninsula 

Shuinogin  Packing  Co..  Chignik  Lagoon 

Chignik  Bav  Packing  Co..  Chignik  taigoon 

Wudcm  Alaska  Packing  Co.,  Ozcrnoi,  Stepovak  Bay 

Thin  Point  Packing  Co., Thin  Point.  Alaska  Peninsula 

Ontnil  Alaska  Co.,  Thin  Point,  Alaska  Peninsula 

Home  Canning  and  Tmding  Co..  Tanglefoot  Bay,  near  Karlnk 

I'gHimk  Fishing  Station.  Uganuk  Bay.  Kadiak  Island 

Pi  ilic  Steam  Whaling  Co..  Anchorage  Bay,  Chignik 

Ilumc  Bros  ,v  Hume,  Anchorage  Bay,  Chignik 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co  . Uyak  Bay,  Kadiak  Island 

HumcBros.it;  Hume,  Uyak  Bay.  Kadiak  Island 

Total  of  annual  packs  in  Kadiak  and  Chignik 

Bristol  Bay,  Bering  Sea. 

Arctic  Packing  Co..  Nushngnk  Bay 

Alaska  Packing  Co.,  Nushngnk  Bay 

Bristol  Bay  Canning  Co.,  Nushngnk  Bay 

Nu-hugnk  Canning  Co..  Nushagak  Bay 

Bering  Sea  Packing  Co.,  Ugashik  River 

Arctic  Packing  Co.,  Naknck  River 

Naknek  Packing  Co.,  Naknck  River 

Point  Roberta  Packing  Co..  Koggiung.  Kviclnik  Bay 

Pgashik  Fishing  Station,  Ugashik  River 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Nushagak  Bay 

Alaska  Fishermen’s  Packing  Co..  Nushagak  Bay 

Kvichak  Packing  Co.,  Kvichak  Bay 

Egegak  Packing  Co.,  Egegak  River 

Bristol  Packing  Co.,  Ugashik  River 

Total  of  annual  packs  in  Bristol  Bay,  Bering  Sea 

Recapitulation.. 

Southeast  Alaska 

Prime  William  Sound  and  Copper  River 

•'•ook  Inlet 

Kadiak  and  Chignik 

Bristol  Buy,  Bering  Sen 

Brand  total  of  annual  packs  in  Alaska 


[One  ease  contains  48  pounds  of  salmon,  net  weight.] 


Owned  in  1900  by— 

1878. 

1879. 

1880. 

1881. 

1882. 

1883. 

188-1. 

1885. 

1880. 

1887. 

1888. 

1889. 

1S90. 

1891. 

1892. 

1893. 

189-1. 

1895. 

1896. 

1897. 

1898. 

1899. 

1900.  j Total. 

Cases 

Cases. 

Cases 

Cases. 

4/200 

13,  479 

Cases 
20, 15(5 

Cases. 
33. 470 





Cases. 
46. 150 

:::::::::: 



ST, 750 

Cases. 
101,30-1 
2(5, 140 
33.  7oo 

37, 500 

(52,057 
30,  287 
53, 551 

•10,300 
43,000 
40, 335 

Cases. 

OG,  483 
41,000 
1 39.  312 

QS  75,410 
Closed. 

59,220 

30,138 

Cases. 

79, 000 

a 48, *379 

^68,495  | 
Closed:  in 

Cases. 

54,777 

reserve. 

49,633 

49,852 
37,  101 

Cases. 

28,898 

•24,’ 398 

'29,-155 
34, 168 

( 31, 210 

79*415 

9.8-1, 1G5 
170, 631 
100,898 
420, 030 
100,300 
20, 338 
77,000 
101,800 
532,248 
303, 515 
28, 882 

505, 579 
50, 4.87 
49, 735 
8, 598 
31,708 
11,0.89 
57, 690 
55, 0-13 
140, 262 
105,410 
90, 209 
75, 144 

do 

Defunct 

Alaska  Packers  Association  . 

Defunct  

Alaska  Packers  Association  . . 

do 

do 

do 

do 

\ 70,233 

59,959 

Clr 

r>  Closed. 

5 Closed. 

70. 320 
Dismantled. 
’Dismantled. 
Abandoned. 

44.200 
16.  112 

25. 500 
28, 000 
25.  (500 

10 13, 850 
12. 535 

21.500 

11.200 

10.500 
0, 400 

25, 161 

37. 000 
9, 926 

26, 500 
37,013 

26. 000 
17,800 
10,347 

14, 455 
>'-'11,455 
>- 11.  155 
2,198 
2, 401 
7,000 

3 41, 000 

17  25, 000 
36, 247 
26. 000 
26, 000 
Ck 

24,730 
1224,832 
72  24, 780 
’■‘Abandoned. 
4,200 
•1,089 

sed. 

Dismantled. 

'29,439 
28, 29-1 

73,  i i-5 
32,342 

52,098 

21,077 

«cd. 

49,93! 

43,070 
25,777 
» Partly  dis- 
mantled. 
57,553 

a. 

54, 300 
27, 720 

\ 55,352 

(Consolidated. 

35, 700 
15, 331 

70,050 
Closed;  in 

87,013 
23. 155 

do 

Defunct 

Alaska  Packers  Association  . . 

Defunct 

do 

do 

Alaska  Packers  Association  . . 

do 

Same  company 

do 

do 

do 

38, 159 

50, 418 

34,674 

40, 396 



26,98-1 

Closed- 

2,113 

24.000 

12.000 
17,000 
13,375 

21,005 

21,515 

17,893 

6, 043 
30,061 
27,400 
29, 800 
10,500 

11,912 

31.000 
21,500 

19. 000 
15, 569 

13, 370 
33, 086 
26,617 
30. 409 
29, 700 



1 2 * * * 6 

4,200 

13, 479 

20, 150 

33,470 

40, 150 

71,750 

198,650 

386, 753 

350, 451 

384,279 

274,755 

291,152 

322, 35C 

232,237 

358, 357 

298,310 

277, 741 

242, 185 

358, 450 

4,164,881 

Alaska  Packers  Association  .. 

,c400 

14,000 

19,000 

24,000 

25, 000 

25,000 

33,000 

30,883 

Closed. 

35, 8-18 

30,413 

33, 631 

35, G76 

35,890 

41,011 

45, 383 

63,935 

493, 070 

do 

16,500 

27,500 

19,000 

30,000 

31 , 000 

31 , 077 

31,859 

37.188 

30, 038 

34,632 

39, 115 

37, 849 

42, 306 

40,775 

60, 797 

515, 636 

do 

13,322 

21 , 200 

30, 000 

33,221 

30, 400 

37, 100 

31 , 0-10 

34.750 

30, 999 

33, 434 

38,314 

34,117 

39, 962 

43, 566 

02,597 

514, 622 

do 

16,880 

27, 7G4 

23.990 

30, 363 

Closed;  it 

9,8,  003 

Defunct 

3. 995 

Close 

a. 

>7 17, 394 

12, 007 

20,00-1 

,8 Sold:  dis- 

53, 400 

mantled. 

Alaska  Packers  Association  . . 

22, 731 

27. 133 

34,070 

34.870 

43, 790 

02,  334 

225, 534 

Same  company 

13,700 

8. 000 

1.8,  (HHI 

28,000 

31.0(H) 

36, 058 

135, 358 

Alaska  Puckers  Association  . 

29. 730 

55, 508 

94,053 

116,651 

101,892 

397, 834 

do 



19,764 

38,272 

38. 501 

44,984 

54.682 

190, 203 

Same  company 

is. 228 

43,  :ts7 

01,615 

do  

21.455 

•10. 090 

61,545 

Alaska  Packers  Association  . . 

45. 200 

do 

21.052 

21,052 

Same  company 

G,  (153 

0,653 

... 

400 

14,000 

48, 822 

72. 700 

89,  KH(i 

115,985 

118,390 

133, 418 

03, 499 

107.780 

108,844 

150, 135 

218, 330 

254,312 

318,703 

411,832 

599,277 

2,  .826, 325 

8,159 

12,530 

0, 539 

8, 977 

11,501 

20, 040 

22,189 

10,728 

IS.  0G0 

31,402 

81,128 

141,700 

142,901 

156,615 

115, 722 

130,053 

142, 644 

148, 476 

262, 381 

271,807 

251,385 

310, 219 

450, 639 

2,774, 475 



24,  201 

42,194 

08, 091 

None. 

70, 998 

78, 663 

59, 494 

92, 860 

52,057 

00, 826 

61 , 795 

69, 998 

687, 186 



15,044 

i -i.  sis 

■ji.iii 

i'j,  217 

28, 433 

30,  705 

42, 451 

50, 494 

28, 055 

58, 997 

20, 741 

31,605 

34, 033 

36,188 

31,707 

32, 532 

56, 442 

52,115 

63,775 

4,200 

13,479 

20, 15(5 

33, 470 

40, 150 

71,750 

198,  050 

380, 753 

350, 451 

38-1,279 

274,755 

291,152 

322, 356 

232, 287 

35.8, 357 

298, 310 

277,741 

242, 185 

358, 450 

4,164,881 

400 

14, 000 

48,822 

72, 700 

89,  880 

115, 985 

118,390 

133, 418 

03, 499 

107. 786 

108,8-14 

160, 135 

218,336 

254,312 

318,703 

411,832 

599, 277 

2, 826, 325 

8, 159 

12, 530 

' 

i,  539 

8,977 

21, 745 

48, 337 

03, 880 

83,415 

142, 005 

200, 077 

412,115 

719, 190 

082, 591 

801,400 

474, 717 

G43.654 

686,440 

626, 530 

960, 707 

909,078 

905, 097 

1 , 078, 146 

1 , 548, 139 

11,116,140 

1 Packed  in  cannery  of  Hume  Packing  Co.,  Karluk. 

2 Con. soli  da  ted  with  Hume  Packing  Co.,  to  form  the  Hume-Aleutian  Packing  Co.,  Karluk. 

; Packed  in  cannery  of  Kodiak  Packing  Co.,  Karluk. 

1 Machinery  moved  to  Uganuk  Fishing  Station,  Uganuk  Bay. 

Rendered  inoperative  by  President’s  proclamation  creating  a Fish  Commission  reservation  on 
Afognak  Island. 

6 Packed  in  cannery  of  Alaska  Improvement  Co.,  Karluk. 


7 Machinery  moved  to  Ugashik  Fishing  Station,  Ugashik  River. 

“ Buildings  moved  to  Uganuk  Fishing  Station,  Uganuk  Bay. 

0 Consolidated  with  Aleutian  Islands  Fishing  and  Mining  Co.,  to  form  Hume-Alcutian  Packing 
Co.,  Karluk. 

10  Moved  to  new  site  on  same  bay. 

11  Part  of  machinery  moved  to  Karluk. 

12 Packed  in  cannery  of  Chignik  Bay  Co.,  Chignik. 


13  Machinery  moved  to  Bering  Sea  Packing  Co.,  Ugashik  River. 

n Moved  to  Arctic  Packing  Co.,  Naknck  River. 

lfl  Machinery  moved  to  Point  Roberts  Packing  Co.,  Kvichak  Bay. 

10  Experimental  pack. 

17  Moved  to  new  site  on  same  river. 

18  Available  property  moved  to  Ugashik  Fishing  Station,  Ugashik  River. 


F.  C.  B.  1901.  Faces  page  312 2 


Salt  packs  of  canning  plants. 


900  barrels  redfish. 

787  barrels  and  362  half  barrels  redfish. 
907  barrels  redfish. 

2,000  barrels  redfish. 

277  barrels  and  496  half  barrels  redfish. 

90  barrels  humpback  bellies. 

90  barrels  and  4 half  barrels  redfish. 

59  barrels  and  71  half  barrels  redfish. 


650  barrels  redfish;  300  half  barrels  bellies  (Hetta). 
110  barrels  cohoes. 

70  tierces  full  king;  12  barrels  white  king  bellies. 


250  cases  clams;  225  cases  clam  juice. 
680  half  barrels  bellies  (Nutqua). 


Packing — 

Total  num- 
ber of  cases 

Salt  packs  of  canning  plants. 

egan. 

Ceased. 

packed. 

Arctic 

Alaska 

Bristol 

me  20 
me  22 
me  23 

June  24 
June  26 
June  24 

45,  383 
46,775 
43,  566 
18, 228 
21, 455 
116,651 

1,095  barrels  and  80  half  barrels  redfish. 

Arctic 

43) 790 
31,000 
44,984 
34, 674 

2,875  barrels  and  1,000  half  barrels  redfish. 
300  barrels  and  1.500  half  barrels  redfish. 

Ugashi 

Chigni 

Pacific 

998  barrels  and  990  half  barrels  redfish. 

31,000 

60  barrels  humpback  bellies. 



21 i 500 

Arctic 

Karluk 

Alaska 

Httme- 

Uganu 

Pacific 

Hume 

Pacific 

Arctic 

Pacific 

Pacific 

Pyram 

Glaciei 

Thlink 

28, 294 

38  barrels  and  75  half  barrels  redfish. 

31,210 

....... 

29, 439 
18,  987 
11,912 







19^  000 
15,  509 

23, 300 

28, 815 



31  i 931 
29, 804 

53'  237 



50 ' 201 

11,200 
03  390 

300  barrels  redfish;  350  half  barrels  bellies  (Hetta). 

Boston 

Quadri 

Metlak 

North 

Pacific 

25’  504 

lly  28 

Aug.  20 

37, 000 
12, 322 

(130  casks  full  king;  12  barrels  white  king  bellies;  200  barrels 
\ full  redfish;  1,500  barrels  clean  herring. 



19, 100 

38, 265 

900  half  barrels  full  humpbacks. 

1 

1,078,146 

Arctic  line  20 
Alaskuline  22 
Bristollme  20 
Point  1 


Packing. 


egan.  Ceased. 


lly  20 


Arctic 
Nakne 
Ugashi 
Chigni 
Pacific 
Hume 
Arctic 
Karluk 
Alaska 
Hume- 

Uganul 

Pacific 

Hume  

Pacific 

Arctic  L 

Pacific 

Pacificl 

Pyrami 

Glaeiet 

Alaska) 

Bostonhly  24 

Quadra 

Metlak) 

Baranc 

North  1 

Pacific 

T 


Total  num- 
ber of  cases 
packed. 


June  29 
June  24 
June  29 


July  26 


Aug.  20 


41,011 

42. 306 
39, 962 
94, 053 
34, 870 
28, 000 

38,  501 
50, 418 
30,061 
27, 400 
34, 168 

28,  898 
29,455 
24, 398 

6,  643 

29,  800 
16, 500 
16, 876 
39, 566 
32, 158 
28,  668 

39,  669 
49,  332 
59, 343 
15, 174 
16,000 
11,671 
12, 681 

16. 307 
31, 208 

965, 097 


Nome  of  company  and  location  of  cnnnery. 


• _ I'flckinE  Co.  (A.  1“.  A.),  Nushagak  Bay.. 

• •« - < A.  P.  A.). Nuslmgak  Bay 
'ifirtnl  Bav  Canning  Co.  (A.  I A.b  ^ 'k vfehufc1  Bay 


Alaska  pack  of  canned  salmon — 1898. 

[Cases  = 48  one-pound  or  96  half-pound  tins.  Tierces  = 400  pounds  net.  Barrels  = 200  pounds  net.  Half-barrels  = 100  pounds  net.  Casks  = 800  pounds  net.] 


gay  Canning  Co.  (A. !’.  A.).  Nushagak  Bay  . 

Sfflrtel'ack}ngCOi(A  P A.J.Kvlchuk  Bay 

arctic  Packing  Co.  (A- 1 A.)  Naknek  River 

s'aknek  I'acking Co.. Nuknek  River — ...... 

Ceasbik  Fishing  Station  (A  P.  A.).  Ugaslnk  River 

Chigoik  Pay  Co.  (A.  P.  A.j.Chigmk  Lagoon . . 

I . ir  sti-am  Whaling  Co..  Anchorage  Bay.Chignik 

Huine  Bn"  & Hume.  Anchorage  Bay.Chignik 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.). Olga  Bay,  Alltak 

Karlok  Packing  Co.  (A.  I'  A.)  Karluk  . 

Alaska  Improvement  Co.  (A.P.A.i,  Karluk 

Hume  Aleutian  Packing  Co.  (A.  P A. ),  Karluk 

I raniik  Fishing  Station  (A.  P.  A.).  Uganuk  Buy 

pacific  Steam  Winding  Co..  Uyuk  Bay 

Ilume  Bros,  k Bnme.  Uyak  Bay 

Pacific  steam  Whaling  Co..  Kenai.  

Antic  Fishing  Co.  (A.  P.  A ),  Kussilof  River 

Pacific  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.I.Odiak 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Orca 

Pyramid  Barltor  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Pyramid  Harbor . . 

Glacier  Packing  Co.  (A.  I'.  A.),  Point  Highfleld 

A lasku  Salmon  Pocking  and  Fur  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Loring 

ftMon  Fishing  und  Trading  Co.,  Yes  Bay 

ijcadre  Packing  Co  . Mink  Arm,  Boca  de  Quadra 

Metlakahtla  Industrial  Co..  Mctlakahtla 

Bara  noli  Packing  Co..  Redfish  Bay 

North  Pacific  Trading  anil  Packing  Co.,  Kluwak 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Hunter  Buy 


Total . 


Redfish. 

Cohoes. 

Humpbacks. 

King. 

Dog. 

Total  num- 
ber of  eases 
packed. 

Daily 
capacity 
in  cases. 

Number 
of  cases 
packed. 

Average 

Packing. 

Number 
of  cases 
packed. 

Average 

Packing. 

Number 
of  cases 
pucked. 

Average 

Packing. 

Number 
of  coses 
packed. 

Average 

Packing, 

Number 
of  eases 
pucked. 

Average 

Packing. 

fish  per 

Began. 

Ceased. 

fish  per 

Began. 

Ceased. 

fish  per 

Began. 

Ceased. 

fish  per 

Began. 

Ceased. 

fish  per 

Began. 

Ceasod. 

1,600 

38,363 

13 

1,132 

18 

July  24 

1,388 

3 

June  16 

June  29 

128 

13 

June  20 

June  29 

41,011 

1,600 

38, 538 

13 

June  21 

July  25 

1,321 

11 

July 

22 

do .. . 

2, 265 

3 

June  i> 

June  30 

182 

13 

June  22 

June 

24 

42,306 

1.6011 

37,  950 

13 

June  20 

752 

21 

Julv  23 

1 , 093 

3 

June  l'.' 

July  1 

167 

13 

June  20 

June  29 

39, 962 

1,800 

93,  963 

12 

June  18 

July  18 

90 

3 

June  18 

July  18 

94,053 

1 1,600 

34,  845 

12.5 

June  14 

25 

5 

do  . . . 

June  29 

3-1,870 

1 , ’SKI 

28,  000 

12 

June  20 

July  23 

28,000 

1,600 

Its,  501 

13 

June  19 

July  21 

38, 501 

1,600 

50,  418 

10.5 

.1  une  9 

50, 418 

900 

29, 897 

10.5 

do... 

Aug.  12 

10 

Aug 

i 

Aug.  15 

10 

July  20 

Julv 

2i 

30, 061 

800 

27,400 

10.5 

J une  4 

Aug.  10 

27,400 

1,000 

34, 168 

13.5 

do ... 

Aug.  20 



3-1,168 

1.800 

28,  898 

13 

June  2 

28, 898 

1 . 800 

27,  734 

13 

June  8 

Sept.  17 

1,721 

8.5 

Sept 

i 

Sept.  17 

29, 455 

1.81  HI 

22, 974 

13 

July  21 

Sept.  9 

1,424 

8.5 

Sept 

7 

Sept.  0 

24,398 

1,000 

6, 643 

11 

June  8 

6, 643 

900 

29, 800 

12.5 

May  25 

Sept  10 

29,  800 

900 

16,500 

12.5 

J une  4 

Sept.  14 

16,500 

800 

11,736 

12.8 

July  1 

Aug.  20 

3.075 

8.5 

July 

21 

Aug.  20 

2, 065 

3 

June  5 

July  1 

16, 876 

1 , 500 

28, 810 

13 

May  26 

Aug.  10 

7, 196 

12 

July 

15 

Aug.  10 

3. 560 

3 

Muy  26 

July  25 

39, 566 

1 , 500 

17,541 

10.5 

Mav  10 

11.433 

Julv  7 

184 

H 

May  10 

June  9 

32, 158 

800 

23,338 

9.5 

May  17 

July  28 

5. 248 

20 

July  23 

July  31 

82 

May  17 

June  16 

28,668 

1,600 

34,851 

11 

July  6 

Sept.  20 

4,799 

7.5 

Aug. 

16 

Sept.  20 

19 

[ 

39, 669 

1,500 

10,888 

11 

June  25 

12,053 

7.5 

July 

5 

Sept.  10 

23. 700 

17 

Julv  1 

2,091 

4 

May  15 

June  20 

19, 332 

: . soo 

16,416 

11.5 

June  22 

Aug.  26 

5, 4 82 

8. 95 

Aug. 

17 

— do  . . . 

37, 445 

18.  58 

July  15 

Aug.  30 

59, 343 

800 

4,919 

8.5 

July  14 

Sept . i. 

160 

7.5 

Aug. 

18 

Sept.  16 

6,473 

15 

Julv  12 

Aug.  31 

4,622 

6 

July  21 

2 

15, 174 

600 

10,  000 

11 

July  15 

Aug.  25 

2,000 

8 

Aug 

12 

Sept.  5 

4,000 

18 

Julv  20 

Aug.  25 

16,000 

1,047 

Aug. 

Sept.  13 

July  27 

g 

1,600 

10, 147 

11.5 

June  22 

Aug.  30 

8,216 

7.6 

July 

18 

Sept.  13 

12,845 

14.5 

July  18 

Aug.  23 

31,208 

54,711 

109, 399 

12, 862 

5,18-1 

' 

Salt  pucks  of  cunning  plants. 


900  barrels  redfish. 

787  barrels  and  302  half  barrels  red  fish. 
907  barrels  redtish, 

2,000  burrels  red  fish. 

277  barrels  and  490  half  barrels  redfish. 

90  barrels  humpback  bellies. 

90  barrels  and  l half  barrels  redfish. 

59  barrels  and  71  half  barrels  redfish. 


050  barrels  redfish;  300  half  barrels  bellies  (Hetta). 
110  barrels  cohoes. 

70  tierces  full  king;  12  barrels  white  king  bellies. 


Alaska  pack  of  canned  salmon,  1899. 


Redfish. 

Cohoes. 

Humpbacks. 

King. 

Dog. 

Daily  ra- 
pacity in 

Number 

Average 
number 
iish  per 

Packing — 

Number 

Average 
number 
fish  per 

Packing — 

Number 

Average 
number 
fish  per 

Packing— 

Number 

Average 
number 
lish  per 

Packing — 

Number 

Average 
number 
fish  per 

Packing — 

Total  num- 

of  cases 
pucked. 

Began. 

Ceased. 

of  eases 
packed. 

Begun. 

Ceased. 

of  eases 
packed. 

Began. 

Ceased. 

of  cases 
packed. 

Began. 

Ceased, 

of  eases 
packed. 

Began. 

Ceased. 

42, 932 
14,044 

July  20 
July  23 

2,229 
2,  097 

1,600 

13 

June  24 

36 

3 

do  ... 

598 

13 

June  22 

June  26 

46, 775 

1.600 

41,662 

13 

June  20 

July  18 

1,893 

3 

— do  .. . 

111 

13 

June  23 

43, 566 

1.600 

15, 978 

13 

June  26 

July  It 

2, 250 

2.8 

June  10 

18,228 

1,600 

1,800 

July  25 
July  23 

July  24 

July  25 

116,385 

12 

June  18 

26C 

3 

June  18 

July  21 

116,651 

1 . 600 

43,744 

12.6 

June  15 

July  19 

40 

3 

June  16 

43. 790 

1 . 500 

31,000 

12 

June  22 

July  24 

31,000 

1 , 600 

44,  98-1 

13 

June  19 

July  24 

44.981 

1,600 

33, 561 

10.5 

June  10 

Aug.  23 

i.iiii 

10.5 

Allg.  9 

Aug.  26 

34,674 

900 

31  600 

10.5 

June  7 

Aug.  12 

31,  GOO 

800 

21,245 

10.5 

June  8 

Aug.  13 

255 

Aug.  12 

Aug.  12 

21.500 

1.000 

28,041 

13.5 

June  15 

Aug.  30 

253 

28, 294 

1 , 800 

31,143 

13 

June  1 

Sept.  2a 

5 

June  17 

June  18 

31,210 

1.800 

27. 786 

13 

June  12 

Sept.  2 

1,444 

8.5 

Aug.  31 

Sept.  2 

209 

5 

June  14 

June  27 

29, 439 

1.800 

1.000 

17,366 

July  24 

Sept.  7 
July  20 
Sept.  10 
Sept.  1 
Aug.  12 
Aug.  11 

8.5 

Aug.  29 

Sept.  7 

18,987 
11,912 
19,000 
15,569 
23. 300 
28,815 

Muy  24 
Mav  31 
Muy  30 
Mav  26 

14,919 
17, 582 
23, 342 

650 

21 

July  30 

Aug.  26 





3,314 
2, 489 

July  27 
July  16 

July  18 
July  24 

1,500 

12 

12 

Allg.  12 

2, 98-1 

3 

May  26 

HI 

11 

May  10 
July  S 
June  25 

Julv  24 
Aug.  31 
Aug.  1 

4,310 

20 

July  10 
July  31 

Aug.  12 
Aug.  7 

May  9 

June  17 
June  8 

31,931 
29,864 
63,237 
50, 201 

48, 495 
10,081 

7.5 

Aug.  24 
July  10 

Aug.  30 
Sept.  3 

3.5 

:::::::::: 

1,600 

12 

6,956 

8 

30, 993 

18 

June  29 

Aug.  17 

2, 171 

May  15 

Julv  25 

800 

2, 750 

11.5 

July  6 

Aug.  1 

4,650 

7.5 

Aug.  1 

Sept.  10 

2, 600 

18 

Julv  20 

Aug.  20 

1 , 200 

3 

— do... 

July  29 

11.200 

Sept.  15 
Sept.  13 
Sept.  20 

July  17 
July  14 
July  16 

Aug.  30 
Sept.  8 
Aug.  30 

7,965 

12,600 

July  14 
July  4 

Sept.  11 
Aug.  25 

7.5 

Aug.  29 
Aug.  25 

15, 993 
21,000 

25,504 

37,000 

600 

11 

2,500 

7.5 

20 

1.000 

7 1 July  28 

Aug.  20 

July  1 

Sept.  2 

997 

Sept.  15 
Sept.  18 
Sept.  13 

4,952 

July  19 
July  24 
July  25 

Aug.  26 
Aug.  20 
Sept.  12 

12,322 
19, 100 
38, 265 

2,000 

1,600 

12, 770 

Sept.  4 

5,795 

9 

Aug.  17 

19,700 

18.9 



:::::::::: 

86-1, 254 

39, 402 

23.400 

1,931 

1,078,146 



Name  of  company  and  location  of  cannery. 


Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Nushagak  Bav 

A!a»U  Packing  Co.  (A.  1’.  A.).  Nushuguk  Bav 

Bnst.,1  Hay  Canning  Co.  (A.  P A ),  Nushagak  Bay 

laciflc Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Nushagak  Bay 

Ala-ka  Fishermen's  Packing  Co.,  Nushagak  Bay 

I "Hit  Roberts  Packing  Co.  ( A.  P.  A.).  K vichak  Bav  . . . 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  I’.  A ),  Naknek  River 

•Naknek  Packing  Co.,  Nuknek  River 

nk  f idling  Station  (A.  P.  A.),  Cgushik  River. . . . 

. ft.'*  B*W  Co.  (A.  1*.  A.),('hig»ik  Lagoon 

im,1  ' atean?  "baling  Co.,  Anchorage  Bay.Chignik  . 

A Hume,  Anchorage  Bay.Chignik 

' ^ ,'iPo'k!ng('"  <A  V A.),<5lga  Bay,  Afituk 

Karl uk  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Karluk 

ttl.U. !"prove“entCo- (A-  »’•  A.).  Karluk 

St1'1,'011  Packing  Co.  ( A.  i’.  A.).  Karluk 

Hllll8lJtion  (A.  P.  A.).  Uganuk  Bay 

!inln  |tean?  "baling  Co.,  Uyak  Bay 

I me  Bros.  A Hume.iryak  Bav 

{SSfflfi?; ' 0:  >'.A> , K,,«.noI  River 


hNm-a,Sl,VV|,ulinS  Co.,  <jrca 

CrPr„mb0r«fl,‘klng  Cn  <A  P-  A.),  Pyramid  Harbor. . 

Thllnw*  i?  k in-K(  1 A *’  A ),  Point  Highfleld 

Ala«b# ^'°  ' Horara  Point  ...  

I’,u;ki,»K  and  Fur  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Ix.ring 

”ashm  «*tog  and  Trading  Co.,  Yes  Bay. 

uaiim  Packing  Co.,  Mink  Arm,  Boca  de  Quadra 

sSSftiSL'SJai!?*1  ^.artlatahtta. 


Nnrtii  n.  >«  “‘uustnai 

fflHS  and  Packing  Co.,  Klawak.! 

"c  stcum  Wlialing  Co.,  Hunter  Bay . 


Salt  packs  of  canning  plants. 


1,895  barrels  and  86  half  barrels  redfish. 


2,875  barrels  and  1.000  half  barrels  redfish. 
300  barrels  and  1.500  half  barrels  redfish. 
998  barrels  and  990  half  barrels  redfish. 


GO  barrels  humpback  bellies. 
38  barrels  and  75  half  barrels  r 


0 barrels  redfish;  350  half  barrels  bellies  (Hetta). 


900  half  barrels  full  humpbacks. 


F.  C.  B.  1901.  Faces  page  312 3 


Arctic 

Alaska 

Bristol 

Pacific 

Alaska 

Point  T 

Kvicha 

Arctic 

Naknel 

Egegak 

Ugashi' 

Bristol 

Chignil 

Pacific 

Home 

Arctic 

Karluk 

Alaska 

Uganul 

Pacific 

Hume ! 

Alaska 


line  19 
do  . . . 
line  23 
one  20 


uly  20 


Pacific 

Arctic 

Pacific 

Pacific 

Westerji 

Pyrami 

Chilkoo 


Takn  P 


Icy  Stra: 
Royer-i 

Glacier 
Th  link! 
Fidalgc 
Alaska 
Boston 
Quadra 
Metlak; 
North  1 
Pacific 

T 


Packing. 


Ceased . 


June  27 
....do  ... 
....do... 
July  1 


Total  nuni 
ber  of  cases 
packed. 


July  28 


flitter  part  of  sea-  \ 
son.  I 


ily  15 

pt.  1(1 


ug.  15 


Taku  Fnly  9 Sept.  24 
lalv  15  Oct.  30 
y 'uttering  during 
August. 


Sept.  20 


Sept.  25 
do  ... 


ug.  1 
ug.  24 


uly  10 
nly  17 
ug.  25 


Sept.  15 
Sept.  8 


Sept.  27 
Aug.  31 
Sept.  10 


•63,935 
(10,  797 
02,  597 
43,  387 
40, 090 
101,892 
45,  200 
02,  334 
30, 058 
21,652 
54, 682 
0, 053 
40,  390 
33, 086 
20,  017 
32,  342 
79,  415 
73,115 
13, 370 

30. 409 
29,  700 

4,  905 
25, 089 
33,781 

39.410 
30, 588 
13,  793 
55, 001 
14,850 

16, 722 


9, 458 
29,  941 
1,500 
58,  518 
25, 640 
27,  250 
07, 158 
33, 623 
13,600 
17, 500 
27, 752 
43,  607 

1,548, 139 


The  following  recapitulation  shows 
the  total  packs  for  1898, 1899,  and  1900, 
and  the  percentage  the  different  species 
contribute  to  each  pack: 


Species. 

Cases. 

Per  cent. 

1898. 

Redfish 

782, 941 
54,711 
109,  399 
12, 862 
5, 184 

81.12 
5. 67 
11.  34 
1.33 
.54 

Humpbacks 

Dog  

Total 

965, 097 

1899. 

Redfish 

864, 254 
39, 402 
149, 159 
23, 400 
1,931 

80. 16 
3.65 
13.81 
2. 17 
. 18 

Cohoes 

King 

Dog' 

1,078, 146 

1900. 

Redfish 

1,197,  406 
50,  984 
232, 022 
37,  715 
30,012 

77.34 
3.  29 
14.99 
2.44 
1.94 

Cohoes 

Humpbacks 

King'.., 

Dog  

Total 

1,548,139 

Alaska  jxivh  of  caznned  salmon , 1900. 

[For  salt  output  of  canning  companies,  see  page  318.1 


Red  fish. 

Colmes. 

Humpbacks. 

King. 

Name  of  company  and  location  of  cannery. 

Daily 

capacity 

Number 

tow; 

Packing. 

Number 

Avernge  Packing. 

Number 

Average 

Packing. 

Number 
of  eases 
packed. 

Average 

Packing. 

packed. 

rt£':T 

Began. 

Censed. 

of  eases 
packed. 

fish  per  | 
case.  Began. 

Ceased. 

packed. 

lish  per 

Began. 

— 

Began. 

Censed. 

Arctic  racking  Co.  (A.  P.  A ).  Nushngak  Buy 

2. 400 

57,230 

13 

June  23 

July  23 

1,254 

10 

July  22 

Julv  23 

3. 530 

3 

June  15 

June  25 

Alaska  Packing  f"  (A.  P.  A.),  Nushngak  Buv  

2,  too 

56. 228 

13 

June  25 

Julv  24 

332 

10 

Julv  21 

July  21 

3 

— do ... 

Bristol  Bav  Cunning  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Nushagak  Bay  

J.  too 

57, 079 

13 

June  20 

July  25 

931 

10 

Julv  23 

July  23 

2, 256 

June  28 

Parilic  Su  nn  Whaling  Co..  Nushagak  Bay 

1.600 

39, 223 

13 

June  22 

July  22 

2, 291 

Julv  22 

\;  Fishermen's  Packing  Co..  Nuslmguk  Bay 

1,600 

38,100 

12.5 

June  25 

1 . 990 

3 

do ... 

point  Roberts  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A ).  Kvicbok  Bay 

Ku.hak  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.).  Kvtchak  Bay 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A. ).  Naknek  River 

4,800 

2. 400 

2. 400 

99, 578 
46, 200 
61,816 

12.5 
12. 5 
12.  5 

June  25 
June  28 
June  18 

July  25 
Aug.  1 

July  2X 

297 

10 

July  20 

July  25 

1,1.76 

July  15 

July  2.i 

341 

449 

20 

July  25 

July  25 

69 

3 

June  18 

June  24 

Naknek  lacking  Co.,  Naknek  River 

1,500 

12 

June  23 

July  25 

352 

22 

July  23 

July  28 

31 

4.8 

1 Sculteri 
| part  of 

g latter  j 

Fgeeok  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.).  Egegak  River 

1,600 

21,652 

12.5 

July  1 

July  28 

June  29 

Ugashik  Fishing  station  ( A.  F.  A 1. 1 gnshik  River 

2,  100 

54, 581 

13 

June  21 

July  29 

BriMol  Packing  Co  , Ugnshik  River 

500 

l 6, 653 

12 

July  9 

do . . . 

(Jhigmk  Buy  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),Chignik  Ijigoon 

1,600 

40,334 

10.5 

June  10 

Aug  12 

62 

in 

Aug.  3 

log  : ' 

Pacific  Steam  W haling  Co..  Anchorage  Bav,  « liigmk. 

900 

32, 966 

10.5 

June  9 

H ime  Bros.  A Hume.  Anchorage  Bav.  Chignik 

XOO 

23, 003 

10.5 

June  G 

Allg.  19 

'3.61 1 

Julv  2 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A ). Olga  Bav,  Alitak 

1 , 000 

32,342 

13.5 

June  X 

Kurluk  lacking  Co.  (A.  P.  A.).  Karlnk 

l.xoo 

77, 558 

13. 6 

Sept.  1 1 

1 . 3X2 

7.2 

Aug.  25 

175 

5 

June  9 

.lime  24 

Alaska  Improvement  Co.  (A.  P.  A.).  Knrluk 

1 . X0O 

69, 712 

13.9 

Sept.  21 

2,791 

...do  .... 

Sept.  21 

612 

4.9 

June  5 

June  28 

I'eanuk  Fishing  Station  (A  P A ),  Ugannk  Bav 

1,000 

13, 370 

12.8 

June  9 

Julv  17 

Pacific  Steam  W haling  Co..  1 vnk  Bav 

900 

29. 384 

12.5 

May  28 

1,025 

21 

July  20 

liiimc  Bros.  A Hume,  1 yak  Bav 

900 

27, 636 

12.5 

June  5 

Sept.  20 

2,064 

21 

July  5 

Sept.  20 

Alaska  Salmon  Association,  Chuitna  River 

500 

3,6-10 

12 

July  1 

Aug.  9 

5 

[batter  part  of  sea- 

! 

; 3.5 

June  10 

July  2 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Kenni 

800 

20, 924 

13 

1,765 

X.  1 

July  1 

2,400 

3.6 

May  29 

July  10 

Arctic  Fishing  Co.  (A.  P.  A . Kussih.f  River 

1,500 

22, 185 

13 

May  27 

Aug.  12 

5, 427 

12 

July  16 

Aug.  12 

6.  169 

3 

May  27 

July  22 

Pacific  Packing  C<-.  A.  1*.  A ). (xliuk  

1 , 500 

35, 019 

11.5 

3.  X.s* 

22  i 

July  6 

473 

l‘ 

May  9 

June  12 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  (*o.,Orc« 

XIX) 

■28,  501 

12 

May  7 

Julv  22 

1,718 

28 

Julv  20 

July  24 

369 

4.2 

May  7 

June  7 

Wotem  Fisheries  C<>..  Dundns  Bay 

30U 

6,130 

12 

June  28 

Aug.  25 

977 

7.5 

July  30 

Sept.  20 

1 , X66 

IS 

July  10 

Aug.  10 

60 

4.5 

Sept.  1 

Sept.  30 

ftnumd  Harbor  PuekmgCo.  (A^.  IV  A ).  Pyramid  Harbor 

1,600 

51,856 

11 

July  9 

Sept.  1 

513 

7.5 

Aug.  20 

Sept.  1 

3.232 

3.5 

May  29 

June  30 

Taku  Packing  Co.,  Taku  Inlet 

July  5 
July  9 

Aug.  12 

July  27 
Aug.  20 
Aug.  10 
....do... 

AUg.  16 

AUg.  1 

Sept.  1 
Aug.  20 
July  25 
July  10 

j -’3,150 

[ 2.7 

May  17 
June  1 

Ion,.  OR 

756 

Sept.  24 
Oct.  10 

July  25 
July  15 

Aug.  16 
Sept.  15 

'771 

! a 

June  20 

9, 911 

_ 

10,000 

20 

1 >97 

f 

Rnyer-Wnrnock  Packing  Co.,  Beecher  Pass. 

July  1 
June  18 
June  28 

7_S 

'Racier  Packing  Co.  (A.  P A.),  Point  Highfield 

Th  inket  Packing  Co..  Gerard  Point 

Fi'lalgo  Island  Canning  Co..  Ketchikan 

Atoka  Salmon  Packing  and  FurCo  (A.  P.  A),  Loring 

B'"lon  Fishing  and  Trading  Co..  Yes  Bav 

'/Nudra  Packing  Co..  Mink  Arm.  Bom  dc  Quadra ...T.': 

M-  dakahtla  Ind.istrinl  Co..  Metlakahtla 

A'Tth  Pacific  Trading  and  Packing  Co..  Klawak 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co..  Hunter  Buy 

1.500 

XOO 

10,8-18 
3, 965 

10.1 

11 

9,401 
2, 349 

7. 4 

7.5 

Sept,  ix 
Sept.  21 

36, 432 
15,540 

15.8 

18 

July  2 
July  12 

AUg.  22 
Aug.  31 

1,837 
2, 049 

3.8 

3 

May  15 
May  11 

July  1 
June  2x 

1,000 

6, 399 

11.5 

July  10 

X3'2 

10 

July  13 

19,685 

19.25 

July  13 

Sept.  X 

1 , XOO 

16.219 

11.6 

Juno  17 

Aug.  29 

3, 825 

9 

47,114 

19 

July  17 

800 

9,825 

8.5 

July  13 

Sept.  7 

2, 306 

7.5 

20, 051 

15 

July  18 

Sept.  IX 

713 

2.5 

June  25 

July  10 

XOO 

6,000 

111.7 

Julv  14 

600 

7.5 

Aug.  25 

6, 000 

20 

July  17 

Aug.  31 

700 

6, 930 

13.7 

June  20 

Sept.  5 

fill) 

X 

July  27 

Sept.  12 

9, 690 

19.9 

Julv  IX 

800 

1,600 

8, 228 
7, 828 

14.3 

12.8 

June  17 
June  18 

Aug.  25 
Aug.  10 

3,973 

4,070 

8 

9 

Aug.  17 
July  31 

Sept.  25 
Sept.  10 

15,551 

31,709 

17 

18.6 

July  17 
do ... 

AUg.  27 
Aug.  28 

Total 

1,197,406 

50, 9X-1 

232, 022 



erngc 
number 
fish  per 


1 , 094 
•2,331 
1,873 


June  19 

flu  ...  . 

June  23  . 
June  20 


1 Total  nnm- 
I her  of  cases 
packed. 


03, 935 
00,  797 
02, 597 
13, 3X7 
10, 090 
101, X92 
45, 200 
02, 334 
30, 058 
21,652 
54, 6X2 
6,653 
40, 390 
33, 0X0 
26,617 
32, 342 
79,415 
73,115 
13, 370 
30,  109 
29,700 


Sept.  20 

Sept.  25 


2, 016 
8, 500 


July  15 

ScpY.'ic 

i Aug.  15 
July 

> July  15 
. ,f Scattering  during 
1 August. 


July  10 
July  17 
Aug.  25 


Sept.  27 
Aug.  31 
Sept.  10 


4,905 
25, 089 
33, 7X1 
39,410 
30.5XX 
13,793 
55, 001 
14,850 

16,722 


9, 458 
29,941 
1,560 
58, 518 
25,  (till 
27, 250 
07, 158 
33, 023 
13,  000 
17, 500 
27,752 
43, 007 


F.  C.  B.  1901.  Faces  page  312- 


1 Humpbacks  and  dog  mixed— under  ••  pink  " label. 


The  following  recapitulation  shows 
the  total  packs  for  1898, 1899,  and  1900, 
and  the  percentage  the  different  species 
contribute  to  each  pack: 


Species. 

Cases. 

Per  cent. 

1898. 

Red  fish 

Cohoes  

Humpbacks 

King 

Hog 

782, 941 
54,711 
109,399 
12, 862 
5, 184 

81.12 

5.67 

11.34 

1.33 

.54 

965,097 

1899. 

Red  fish*. 

Cohoes 

Humpback- 

King 

Dog  

Total 

1900. 

Red  fish 

Cohoes  

Humpbacks 

King 

I)og  

Total 

864,254 
39, 402 
149,159 
23, 400 
1,931 

80. 1G 
3.65 
13.81 
2. 17 
.18 

1,078,146 

1,197,406 
50, 98-1 
232,022 
37, 715 
30, 012 

77.34 
3.29 
14.99 
2. 44 
1.94 

1,548,139  

ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


313 


Salt  salmon  pack  of  Alaska,  1900. 


Name  of  concern  and  location  of  saltery. 

King, 

whole. 

King, 

bellies. 

Redfish 

whole. 

Barrels. 

Barrels. 

Barrels. 

1,420 

415 

Half  bbls. 

698 

465 

105 

536 

7, 186 

Point.  Roberts  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Kvichak  Bay 

92 

1,356 

1,150 

115 

1,141 

22 

852 

1,513 

606 



603 

1,150 

44 

800 

530 

400 

12 

• 900 

210 

8 

850 

220 

200 

200 

19 

100 

25 

179 

Total 

963 

12 

19,041 

4,211 

Name  of  concern  and  location  of  saltery. 

Cohoes,  whole. 

Hump- 

backs, 

whole. 

Humpbacks, 

bellies. 

Dog, 

whole. 

Remarks. 

Ugashik  Fishing  Station  'A.  P.  A.)  Uga- 
shik  River. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Anchorage 
Bay,  Chignik. 

Alaska  Salmon  Association,  Chuitna  River 
Icy  Strait  Packing  Co.,  Bartlett  Bay,  Icy 
Strait. 

Alaska  Oil  and  Guano  Co.,  Killisnoo 

Barrels. 

10 

Half  bbls. 

Barrels. 

Barrels. 

Half  bbls. 

Barrels. 

1 Bellies. 

69 

3 

120 

523 

15 

half  barrels  herring. 

2 500 

Fred.  Brockman,  Sarcar 

225 

cohoes. 

Icy  Strait  Packing  Co.,  hulk  Blanche , 
Wrangell  Narrows. 

Pacific  Coast  and  Norway  Packing  Co., 
Wrangell  Narrows. 

Tom  McCauley,  Whale  Passage 

100 

Also  1,000  barrels  herring. 
Also  250  barrels  herring. 

8 

900 

John  Frey,  Zimovia  Strait 

200 

300 

Great  Northern  Fish  Co.,  Union  Bay 

3 400 

4,500 

3 Includes  some  bright- 
fleshed  dog  salmon 
packed  as  cohoes. 

Robert  Bell,  Thorne  Bay 

140 

280 

500 

Great  Northern  Fish  Co.,  Karta  Bay 

4 1 , 200 

John  E.  Rice,  Karta  Bav '. 

75 

50 

5 1 . 207 

5 Dry  salted. 

Alex.  Miller,  Cholmondeley  Sound 

700 

800 

Z.  Doty,  Mink  Arm,  Boca  de  Quadra 

°150 

0 Dry  salted;  estimated. 

Alaska  Packers  Association,  Hetta  Inlet .. 

61 

84 

Craig  Miller,  Copper  Mountain  Bay 

| 

400 

450 

Banter  & West,  S'ukkwan  Inlet. 

1 

Sold  fresh  to  canneries; 

1 ' 

salted  few  for  local  use. 

Total 

S53 

50 

6, 318 

410 

3, 782 

2, 557 

RECAPITULATION. 


Species. 

Description. 

Barrels. 

Half  barrels. 

King 

963 

12 

Redfish 

Whole  ... 

19,  041 
843 

4,211 

Cohoes 

(Whole 

50 

10 

Humpbacks 

j Whole 

6, 318 

\Bellies 

410 

3,  782 

Dog 

Whole 

2,557 

Total 

Half  barrels  reduced  at  2 for  1 to  barrels 

30, 154 
4,021 

8,043 

Grand  total 

34, 175 

314 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Name  of  company  and  location 
of  cannery. 


Arctic  Packing  Co.  1 (A.  P.  A.), 

Alaska  Packing  Co.  INushagak 

Bristol  Bay  Canning'Co.J  Bay. 

Point  Roberts  Packing  Co.  (A.  P. 
A).,  Kvichak  Bay. 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Nak- 
nek  River. 

Naknek  Packing  Co.,  Naknek  River 

(Jgashik  Fishing  Station  (A.  P.  A. ), 
Ugashik  River. 

Chignik  Bay  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Chig- 
nik  Lagoon. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co. , Anchor- 
age Bay,  Chignik. 

Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Anchorage 
Bay,  Chignik.  ■ 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Olga 
Bay,  Alitak. 

Karluk  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.), 
Karluk. 

Alaska  Improvement  Co.  (A.  P.  A.), 
Karluk. 

Hume-Aleutian  Packing  Co.  (A.  P. 
A. ) , Karluk. 

Uganuk  Fishing  Station  (A.  P.  A.), 
Uganuk  Bay. 

Pacific  Steani  Whaling  Co.,  Uyak 
Bay. 

Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Uyak  Bay 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Kenai. . 

Arctic  Fishing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  lvus- 
silof  River. 

Pacific  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.), 
Odiak. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Orca. . . 

Pyramid  Harbor  Packing  Co.  (A. 
P.  A.),  Pyramid  Harbor. 

Glacier  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.) , 
Point  Highfield. 

Alaska  Salmon  Packing  and  Fur 
Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Loring. 

Boston  Fishing  and  Trading  Co., 
Yes  Bay. 

Quadra  Packing  Co.,  Mink  Arm, 
Boca  de  Quadra. 

Metlakahtla  Industrial  Co.,  Met- 
lakahtla. 

Baranoff  Packing  Co.,  Redfish  Bay. 

North  Pacific  Trading  and  Pack- 
ing Co.,  Klawak. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Hun- 
ter Bay. 


Vessels  employed,  1898. 


Steam  vessels. 

Name. 

Class. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

Ownership. 

I Polar  Bear 

Steamer 

28 

5 

$12, 000 

Owned. 

j Amy  S 

5 

9 

3,000 

Do 

iTyone 

5 

9 

4, 500 

Do 

ICorrinne, 

do 

5 

9 

1,500 

Do 

(President 

Steamer 

238 

9 

40;  000 

Do. 

2 

4,  000 

Do 

* 4 

2 

3, 000 

Do 

(Thistle1 

5 

25, 000 

Do 

2 

4, 500 

Do 

9 

1,200 

Do 

3 

2 

2, 500 

Do 

37 

5 

16, 000 

Do. 

(Baby  Ruth 

10 

4 

4, 500 

Do. 

5 

2 

2,500 

Do. 

(Ethel  and  Marian 

6 

3 

2,800 

Do. 

"(Florence  Hume 

do 

5 

2 

3'  000 

Do. 

42 

5 

17'  000 

Do. 

Kadiak 

58 

9 

20, 000 

Do. 

do 

36 

7 

10' 000 

Do. 

5 

2 

2, 500 

Do 

2 

3, 500 

Do 

Ida 

do 

5 

2 

2,700 

Do. 

Julia  M 

2 

2, 000 

Do. 

8 

25, 000 

Do 

2 

7,000 

Do 

42 

10, 000 

Do. 

5 

2 

3,'  500 

Do. 

28 

6 

i»;  ooo 

Do. 

(Anita2 

5 

2 

l'  000 

Do. 

69 

6 

26, 000 

2 

2, 000 

Do. 

(S.  B.  Matthews 

Stern-wheel 

164 

6 

14| 000 

Do. 

31 

6 

14,000 

Do. 

18 

4 

8,  000 

Do. 

/Wild  Cat 

do 

104 

4 

10,000 

do 

90 

4 

10, 000 

Do. 

37 

4 

16,  000 

Do. 

do 

19 

3 

9,'  000 

Do. 

do 

36 

14,000 

Do. 

"1  Aleut 

do 

19 

5 

10, 000 

Do. 

(Novelty 

do 

33 

5 

12, 000 

Do. 

do 

21 

5 

8, 000 

Do. 

Rosie 

Launch  

8 

2 

2, 000 

Do. 

34 

6 

7,  000 

Do. 

do 

18 

6 

6, 000 

Do. 

(Herald 

do 

17 

5 

7' 000 

Do. 

do  . . . 

12 

5 

4,000 

Do. 

do 

24 

lo, 000 

Do. 

10 

4 

5'  000 

Do. 

(Cora 

9 

1,500 

Do. 

Alice 

Steamer 

19 

5 

io; ooo 

Do. 

1 Also  attended  Ugashik  Station. 


2 Lost,  fall  of  1898. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


315 


Vessels  employed,  1898 — Continued. 


Name  of  company  and  location 
of  cannery. 


Arctic  Packing  Co.  | (A.  P.  A.), 

Alaska  Packing  Co.  xNushagak 

Bristol  Bay  Canning  Co,  I Bay. 


Point  Roberts  Packing  Co.  (A.  P. 
A.),  Kvichak  Bay. 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Nak- 
nek  River. 

Naknek  Packing  Co.,  Naknek  River 

Ugashik  Fishing  Station  (A.  P.  A. ), 
Ugashik  River. 

Chignik  Bay  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  C.hig- 
nik  Lagoon. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Anchor- 
age Bay,  Chignik. 

Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Anchorage 
Bay,  Chignik. 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.P.  A.),  Olga 
Bay,  Alitak. 

Karlnk  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.), 
Karl  ilk. 

Alaska  Improvement  Co.  (A.  P.  A.), 
Karluk. 

Hume-Aleutian  Packing  Co.  (A. 
P.  A.),  Karluk. 

Uganuk  Fishing  Station  (A.  P.  A.), 
Uganuk  Bay. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Uyak 
Bay. 

Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Uyak  Bay 

Pacifie  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Kenai. . 

Arctic  Fishing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),Kus-  t 
silof  River. 

Pacific  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.), 
Odiak. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Orca... 

Pyramid  Harbor  Packing  Co.  (A. 
P.  A.),  Pyramid  Harbor. 

Glacier 1 Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.), 
Point  Highfield. 

Alaska  Salmon'  Packing  and  Fur 
Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Loring. 

Boston  Fishing  and  Trading  Co., 
Yes  Bay. 

Quadra  Packing  Co.,  Mink  Arm, 
Boca  de  Quadra. 

Metlakahtla  Industrial  Co.,  Met- 
lakahtla. 

Baranoff  Packing  Co.,Redfish  Bay. 

North  Pacific  Trading  and  Pack- 
ing Co..  Klawak. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Hun- 
ter Bay. 


Sail  vessels. 


Name. 

Rig. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

Ownership 

Ship 

1,550 

$40,  000 
40, 000 

1,413 

| Willie  R.  Hume 

4-mast  bar  ken- 

tine. 

589 

Fishermen 

25j  000 

Chartered. 

r\Y.  H.  Macy... 

Ship 

2,  038 

50, 000 

Do. 

do 

1,637 

1,528 

Fishermen 

30',  000 

35. 000 

15. 000 

Owned. 

do 

Do. 

[Prosper 

3-mast  schooner . . 

' 229 

Fishermen 

Do. 

Bark  

1, 134 

16,000 
7,000 
16, 000 
12,000 

Do. 

117 

B.  P.  Cheney.. . 

Bark  . 

1,200 

555 

do  

Fishermen 

Do. 

\Will  W Case 

do 

554 

12, 000 

Do. 

Llewellyn  J. Morse... 

Ship 

1/271 

Fishermen 

35, 000 

Do. 

( 

Transports  by  callin 

g vessel 

of  companj 

■ ) 

Ferris  S.  Thompson. . . 

Bark 

480 

11 

9,000 

Owned. 

...do 

733 

10, 000 

40, 000 
35,  000 

Ship 

1,687 

1,453 

Do. 

Santa  Clara  

Fishermen 

Owned. 

(Transports  by  calling  vessel  of  company.) 

Harvester2 | Bark | 716  | 12 

(Transports  by  calling  vessel  of  company.) 


Centennial 

Electra  

America 

Invincible 

George  Skolfield. 

Hecla 


Ship 
Bark  .. 
Ship  . . 

do 

do  . 


1, 138  ] Fishermen 

939  I Fishermen 

1, 908  j Fishermen 
1, 393  j Fishermen 

1 , 275  Fishermen 

1,435  | Fishermen 


9,000 
20, 000 
12, 000 

40. 000 
25,  000 

20. 000 

25, 000 


(Transports  by  regular  line  of  steamers.) 

(Transports  by  regular  line  of  steamers.) 

(Transports  by  regular  line  of  steamers.) 

(Transports  by  regular  line  of  steamers.) 
(Transports  by  special  sail  charter.) 

(Transports  by  calling  vessel  of  company.) 


Owned. 

Do. 

Do. 

Chartered. 

Do. 

Owned. 

( chartered 


1 Lost,  May,  1898. 


2 Also  attended  Chignik. 


RECAPITULATION. 


Num- 

ber. 

Net  ton- 
nage. 

Value. 

Steam 

1,515 

$449, 70U 

24 

2G[ 971 

577 [ 000 

75 

28, 486 

1, 026, 700 

BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION, 


316 


Vessel s employed,  1899. 


Name  of  company  and  location  of 
cannery. 


Arctic  Packing  Co j (A.  P.  A.) , 

Alaska  Packing  Co j-Nushagak 

Bristol  Bay  Canning  Co.  J Bay. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Nush- 
agak  Bay. 

Alaska  Fishermen’s  Packing  Co., 
Nushagak  Bay. 

Point  Roberts  Packing  Co.  (A.P.  A.) , 
Kvichak  Bay. 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Nak- 
nek  River. 

Naknek  Packing  Co.,  Naknek 
River. 

Ugashik  Fishing  Station  (A.P.  A.), 
Ugashik  River. 

Chignik  Bay  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Chig- 
nik  Lagoon. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  An- 
chorage Bay,  Chignik. 

Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Anchorage 
Bay,  Chignik. 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.P.  A.),  Olga 
Bay,  Alitak. 

Karliik  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.), 
Karluk. 

Alaska  Improvement  Co.  (A.P.A.), 
Karluk. 

Hume -Aleutian  Packing  Co. 
(A.  P.  A.),  Karluk. 

Uganuk  Fishing  Station  (A.  P.  A.), 
Uganuk  Bay. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Uyak 
Bay. 

Hume  Bros.  & Hume.,  Uyak  Bay  .. 


Pacific.  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Kenai. 

Arctic  Fishing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),Kussi- 
lof  River. 

Pacific  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.), 
Odiak. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Orca... 

Pyramid  Harbor  Packing  Co. 
(A.P. A.),  Pyramid  Harbor. 

Glacier  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.), 
Point  Highfield. 

Thlinket  Packing  Co.,  Point  Gerard . 

Alaska  Salmon  Packing  and  Fur 
Co.  (A.P.  A.),  Loring. 

Boston  Fishing  and  Trading  Co., 
Yes  Bay. 

Quadra  Packing  Co.,  Mink  Arm, 
Boca  de  Quadra. 

Metlakahtla  Industrial  Co.,  Metla- 
kahtla. 

North  Pacific  Trading  and  Pack- 
ing Co.,  Klawak. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Hunter 
Bay. 


Steam  vessels. 

Name. 

Class. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

(Polar  Bear. . 

28 

23 

3 

(Arny  S 

Launch  

2 

iTyone 

do 

5 

o 

do  

2 

862 

12 

5 

2 

34 

4 

do 

238 

9 

-j  Herbert 

Launch  

5 

2 

| Northern  Light 

4 

2 

/Thistle  i 

Steamer 

56 

5 

(Ralph  1 

5 

9 

2 

2 

do  ... 

3 

2 

/Afognak 

37 

"(Baby  Ruth 

10 

4 

/C.  C.  Cherry 

37 

6 

2 

/Ethel  and  Marian 

do 

6 

3 

(Florence  Hume 

0 

Hattie  Gage 

42 

do 

58 

9 

do 

3G 

7 

8 

2 

do 

5 

2 

do 

2 

Ida 

do 

9 

(Wallowa 

Steamer 

92 

10 

1 Kenai 

Launch  

5 

2 

42 

do 

59 

8 

5 

2 

30 

\Salmo 

Steamer 

28 

6 

do 

69 

6 

/Arthur 

Launch  

5 

2 

S.  B.  Matthews 

Stern-wheel 

164 

6 

•{Pacific 

Steamer 

31 

6 

[Susanna 

Stern-wheel 

18 

4 

/Wild  Cat 

do 

104 

4 

"(Thlinket 

do 

90 

4 

(Elsie 

37 

4 

do 

19 

3 

(Ella  Roh  Iff s 

do 

36 

do 

19 

5 

6 

2 

33 

5 

21 

8 

2 

[Gypsv  Queen 

Stern-wheel 

58 

None. 

Steamer 

34 

6 

[Annie  M.  Nixon 

do 

18 

6 

[Herald 

do 

17 

5 

do 

12 

/Klawack 

do 

10 

4 

(Cora 

Launch  

5 

2 

/Golden  Gate 

Steamer  

59 

9 

do 

19 

5 

Value.  | Ownership. 


$12, 000 

Owned. 

10, 000 

Do. 

4, 000 

Do. 

5, 000 

Do. 

1,500 

Do. 

75, 000 

Do. 

4, 500 

Do. 

15, 000 

Do. 

40, 000 

Do. 

4,  000 

Do. 

3,000 

Do. 

25, 000 

Do. 

4, 500 

Do. 

1,800 

Do. 

7,000 

Do. 

2,  500 

Do. 

17, 000 

Do. 

4,500 

Do. 

15, 000 

Do. 

2,500 

Do. 

2,800 

Do. 

3,000 

Do. 

17, 000 

Do. 

20, 000 

Do. 

11, 000 

Do. 

8,000 

Do. 

2,  500 

Do. 

3,000 

Do. 

2, 700 

Do. 

12, 500 

Chartered 

7,000 

Owned. 

11,000 

Do. 

10, 000 

Do. 

3,500 

Do. 

10, 000 

Do. 

10,000 

Do. 

28, 000 

Do. 

1,800 

Do. 

14,000 

Do. 

14, 000 

Do. 

8,000 

Do. 

10,000 

Do. 

10, 000 

Lo. 

16,000 

Do. 

9, 000 

Do. 

14,000 

Do. 

10, 000 

Do. 

1,  500 

Do. 

12, 000 

Do. 

6, 000 

Do. 

2,000 

Do. 

6, 000 

Do. 

7,000 

Do. 

6,000 

Do. 

8,000 

Do. 

4,000 

Do. 

6, 000 

Do. 

1,500 

Do. 

25, 000 

Do. 

11,000 

Do. 

1 Also  attended  Uganuk. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


317 


Vessels  employed . 1899 — Continued. 


Name  of  company  and  location  of 
cannery. 


Arctic  PackingCo 1(A.  P.  A.), 

Alaska  Packing  Co j-Nushagak 

Bristol  Bay  Canning  Co.J  Bay. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Nush- 
agak  Bay. 

Alaska  Fishermen’s  Packing  Co., 
Nushagak  Bay. 

Point  Roberts  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.), 
Kvichak  Bay. 

Arctic  PackingCo.  (A.P. A.),  Nak- 
nek  River. 

Naknek  Packing  Co.,  Naknek 
River. 

Ugashik  Fishing  Station  (A.  I’.  A.) 
Ugashik  River. 

Chignik  Bay  Co.  (A.P.  A.),  Chig- 
nik Lagooii. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  An- 
chorage Bay.  Chignik. 

Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Anchorage 
Bay,  Chignik. 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Olga 
Bay,  Alitak. 

Karluk  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.), 
Karluk. 

Alaska  Improvement  Co.  (A.P.A.), 
Karluk. 

Hume  - Aleutian  Packing  Co. 
(A.  P.  A),  Karluk. 

Ug  inuk  Fishing  Station  (A.  P.  A.), 
Uganuk  Bay. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  LTyak 
Bay. 

Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Uvak  Bay  ... 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Kenai. . 

Arctic  Fishing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Kussi- 
lof  River. 

Pacific  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.), 
Odiak. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Orca... 

Pyramid  Harbor  Packing  Co. 
(A.P. A.),  Pyramid  Harbor. 

Glacier  Packing  Co.  (A.  1'.  A.), 
Point  Highfield. 

Thlinket  PackingCo.,  Point  Gerard. 

Alaska  Salmon  Packing  and  Fur 
Co.  (A.P.  A.),  Loring. 

Boston  Fishing  and  Trading  Co., 
Yes  Bay. 

Quadra  Packing  Co..  Mink  Arm, 
Boca  de  Quadra. 

Metlakahtla  Industrial  Co  , Metis) - 
kahtla. 

North  Pacific  Trading  and  Pack- 
ing Co.,  Klawak. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Hunter 
Bay. 


/Bohemia 
(Prosper. . 
Merom  . . 


/Coryphene  

(Nicolas  Thayer 

Llewellyn  J.  Morse  . . . 


Sail  vessels. 


/Oriental 

/Indiana1 

j Invincible 

(Willie  R.  Hume. 
R.  W.  Bartlett. . . 


Harry  Morse. 


B.  P. Cheney. 


Rig. 


Ship 


4-mastbarkentine 
3-mast  schooner . . 


Bark 


Ship 

3-mast  schooner . . 
Bark  


.do  . 


do . 

do . 

Ship . . . 


Ferris  S.  Thompson . . . 

Maid  of  Orleans 

Electra ................ 


St.  Nicholas 
Santa  Clara 


Bark 

Schooner . 
Bark 


Shi]  i 


Harvester I Bark 


Centennial 

Charles  B.  Kenney  . . . 


America 

Two  Brothers. 


George  Skolfield. 


Ship . 
Bark 
Ship 


.do 

do 


Tons. 

Crews. 

Value. 

Ownership 

1,550 

Fishermen. 

*50, 000 

Chartered. 

1 , 413 

do.... 

45, 000 

Owned. 

1,393 

do.... 

25,000 

Chartered. 

580 

do.... 

25, 000 

Do. 

473 

do .... 

20, 000 

Ho. 

1,241 

do 

20, 000 

Do. 

1 , 528 

do.... 

45, 000 

Owned. 

229 

do  .... 

15,  000 

Do. 

1,134 

do  .... 

18, 000 

Do. 

1 , 200 

do.... 

18, 000 

Do. 

733 

do  .... 

15,  000 

Chartered. 

555 

do  .... 

12, 000 

Owned. 

1,271 

do  .... 

35, 000 

Do. 

vessel 

of  company 

•) 

480 

11 

10, 000 

Owned. 

171 

8 

7,000 

Do. 

939 

Fishermen. 

12,  000 

Do. 

1,687 

do .... 

40, 000 

Chartered. 

1,453 

do 

35,  000 

Owned. 

vessel 

of  company 

•) 

710 

12 

10, 000 

Owned. 

vessel  of  company. ) 

1,138 

Fishermen. 

25, 000 

Owned. 

1,014 

. . . . .do 

25, 000 

Chartered. 

1,908 

do 

50, 000 

Do. 

1,203 

do 

35, 000 

Owned. 

1,275 

do 

20, 000 

Do. 

ir  line 

>f  steamers. 

)' 

1,495 

Fishermen. 

50, 000 

Chartered. 

(Transports  by  regular  line  of  steamers. ) 

(Blanche i Schooner,  hulk  .. . 107  Fishermen. 

Elliott.- j Barge | 13  i do | 

(Transports  by  regular  line  of  steamers.) 

(Transports  by  special  sail  charter.) 

(Transports  by  calling  vessel  of  company.) 


4, 500 

1,000 


Owned. 

Ho. 


1 Also  called  at  Karluk. 


RECAPITULATION. 


' 

No. 

Net  ton- 
nage. 

Value. 

00 

2, 700 

*618, 600 
667, 500 

26,  998 

87 

29,  698 

1,286,100 

318 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION 


Vessels  employed , 1900. 


Name  of  company  and  location  of  cannery. 


Arctic  Packing  Co, 
Alaska  Packing  Co. 
Bristol  Bay  Canning  Co. 


(A.  P.  A.)  Nusliagak 
Bay. 


Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Nusliagak  Bay  .. 
Alaska  Fishermen’s  Packing  Co.,  Nusliagak 
Bay. 


Point  Roberts  Packing  Co.  f(  A.  P.  A.)  Kvi- 
Kvichak  Packing  Co.  \ chak  Bay. 


Arctic  Packing  Co.  ( A.  P.  A.),  Naknek  River. 

Naknek  Packing  Co.,  Naknek  River 

Egegak  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Egegak  River. 

Ugashik  Fishing  Station  (A.  P.  A.),  Ugashik 
River. 

Bristol  Packing  Co.,  Ugashik  River 

Chignik  Bay  Co.  (A.  P.  A),  Chignik  Lagoon. . 
Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Anchorage  Bay, 
Chignik. 

Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Anchorage  Bay, 
Chignik. 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),01gaBay,  Alitak. 


Karluk  Packing  Co.  (A.P.  A.),  Karluk 

Alaska  Improvement  Co.  (A.  P.  A),  Karluk  .. 
Ugaifuk  Fishing  Station  (A.P. A.),  Uganuk 
Bay. 


Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Uyak  Bay 


Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Uyak  Bay 

Alaska  Salmon  Association,  Chuitna  River  . . 
Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Kenai 


Arctic  Fishing  Co.  ( A.  P.  A.),  Kussilof  River.. 


Pacific  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Odiak 


Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Orea 

Western  Fisheries  Co.,  Dundas  Bay 

Pyramid  Harbor  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.), 
Pyramid  Harbor. 

Chilkoot  Packing  Co.,  Chilkoot  Inlet 

Taku  Packing  Co.,  Takn  Inlet 

Taku  Fishing  Co.,  Port  Snettisham 

Icy  Strait  Packing  Co.,  Petersburg,  Wrangell 
Narrows. 

Royer-Warnock  Packing  Co.,  Beecher  Pass  .. 
Glacier  Packing  Co. (A.P. A.), Point  Highfield. 

Thlinket  Packing  Co.,  Gerard  Point 

Fidalgo  Island  Canning  Co.,  Ketchikan 

Alaska  Salmon  Packing  and  Fur  Co.  (A. 
P.  A.) , Loring. 

Boston  Fishing  and  Trading  Co.,  Yes  Bay  ... 
Quadra  Packing  Co.,  Mink  Arm,  Boca"  de 
Quadra. 

Metlakahtla  Industrial  Co.,  Metlakahtla 

North  Pacific  Trading  and  Packing  Co., 
Klawak. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Hunter  Bay 


Steam  vessels. 

Name. 

Class. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

Ownership. 

28 

5 

.$12,000 

do 

18 

3 

10, 000 

Do. 

j Amy  S 

Launch 

4,  000 

Do. 

(Tvone  

do 

5 

9 

6j  000 

Do. 

Rattler 

do 

9 

4,  500 

Do. 

34 

4 

15, 000 

Do. 

610 

13 

200, 000 

Do. 

JSavak  

90 

4 

8,000 

Do. 

i Lillian 

19 

3 

9’ 000 

Do. 

9 

4,000 

Do. 

238 

9 

40,000 

Do. 

5 

2 

4,500 

Do. 

| Northern  Light. . . 

do 

4 

2 

3,000 

Do. 

12 

3 

8,000 

Do. 

5 

1’  000 

Do. 

5 

2 

2,000 

[Thistle 

56 

25, 000 

Do. 

JCollis 

5 

9 

l '}  000 

Do. 

3 

2 

■ 2’ 500 

Do. 

"Amelia 

Gasoline  launch.. 

5 

2 

2, 000 

Do. 

/Afognak 

37 

18,000 

Do. 

(Baby  Ruth 

10 

4 

5,’  000 

Do. 

37 

6 

15,000 

Do. 

5 

9 

2, 500 

Do. 

(Ethel  and  Marian 

do 

6 

3 

2, 880 

Do. 

do 

2 

3, 200 

Do. 

f Hattie  Gage 

42 

5 

17, 000 

Do. 

5 

2, 500 

Do. 

[Gertie  Story 

36 

12, 000 

Do. 

do 

9 

20!  000 

Do. 

8 

10,  000 

Do. 

1 Uganuk 

do 

8 

9 

10, 000 

■ Do. 

1 Ida 

do 

9 

2,  700 

Do. 

do 

5 

2 

2, 500 

Do. 

fShelikoff 

Steamer 

101 

10 

36, 000 

Do, 

\ Kenai 

Launch 

5 

9 

7,000 

Do. 

[Francis  Cutting.. 

Steamer 

59 

8 

10,  000 

Do. 

do 

42 

12,000 

Do. 

| Herbert  Hume  . . . 

Launch 

5 

2 

3,  500 

Do. 

3 

5,  500 

Do. 

/Duxbury 

Gasoline  vessel . . . 

30 

5 

10, 000 

Do. 

[Sal  mo 

28 

6 

10, 000 

Do. 

do 

69 

6 

30' 000 

Do. 

26 

3 

10, 000 

Do. 

5 

2 

1,  800 

Do. 

(S.  B.  Matthews 

Stern-wheel 

164 

6 

14, 000 

Do. 

31 

6 

15, 000 

Do. 

18 

4 

s',  000 

Do. 

[Wild  Cat 

..  .do 

104 

4 

10, 000 

Do. 

’(Thlinket 

do 

90 

4 

10, 000 

Do. 

19 

5 

5 500 

Do 

7 

3 

2, 000 

Chartered. 

37 

4 

16, 000 

20 

3 

3, 500 

Do. 

9 

9 

3,000 

do 

5 

2 

1, 000 

Owned. 

(N.  &S 

10 

9 

R 800 

Do. 

4 

1 

600 

Do. 

58 

6,000 

Do. 

34 

6 

7,000 

Do. 

do 

18 

6 

e!  000 

Do. 

Ro-Wa 

Gasoline  launch . . 

4 

2 

800 

Do. 

[Ella  Rohlft's 

36 

5 

15,  000 

Do. 

do 

19 

5 

10, 000 

Do. 

10 

5 

5, 000 

Chartered. 

6 

2 

1,50(1 

Owned. 

Delta  * 

59 

6 

6, 000 

Chartered. 

/Novelty 

do 

33 

5 

12, 000 

Owned. 

do 

21 

5 

4, 000 

Do. 

Rosie 

Launch 

8 

2 

2, 500 

Do. 

.Slowly  

. . . do 

5 

2 

1,000 

Chartered. 

[Herald 

17 

5 

9,000 

Owned. 

/Marie  G.  Haaven 

do 

12 

5 

5,000 

Do. 

10 

4 

7, 000 

Do. 

1 Cora 

5 

2 

1,500 

Do. 

59 

9 

25, 000 

Do. 

< Alice 

19 

5 

12, 000 

Do. 

[Alphonso  XIII  . . . 

Gasoline  launch . . 

5 

2 

3;  000 

Do. 

1 Also  attended  Egegak. 


ALASKA  SALMON'  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


319 


Vessels  employed ; WOO — Continued. 


Name  o£  company  and  location 
of  cannery. 


Arctic  Packing  Co.  1 (A.  P.  A. ) 
Alaska  Packing  Co.  [Nushagak 
Bristol  Bay  Canning  Co.J  Bay. 
Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Nush- 
agak  Bay. 

Alaska  Fishermen’s  Packing  Co., 
Nushagak  Bay. 


Point  Roberts  Packing  Co. 
Kvichalc  Packing  Co. 


(A.P.A.) 

-Kvichak 

Bay. 


Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Nak- 
nek  River. 

Naknek  Packing  Co.,  Naknek  River 

Egegak  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.), 
Egegak  River. 

Ugashik  Fishing  Station  (A.  P.  A.), 
Ugashik  River. 

Bristol  Packing  Co.,  Ugashik  River. 

Chignik  Bay  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Chignik 
Lagoon. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Anchor- 
age Bay,  Chignik. 

Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Anchorage 
Bay,  Chignik. 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Olga 
Bay,  Alitak. 

Karluk  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.), 
Karluk. 

Alaska  Improvement  Co.  (A.P.A. }, 
Karluk. 

Uganuk  Fishing  Station  (A.P.A.), 
Uganuk  Bay. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Uvak 
Bay. 

Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Uyak  Bay 

Alaska  Salmon  Association,  Chu- 
itna  River. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Kenai . . 

Arctic  Fishing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Kus- 
silof  River. 

Pacific  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Odiak 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Orca... 

Western  Fisheries  Co.,  DundasBay. 

Pyramid  Harbor  Packing  Co. 
(A.P.A.),  Pyramid  Harbor. 

Chilkoot  Packing  Co.,  Chilkoot 
Inlet. 

Taku  Packing  Co.,  Taku  Inlet 

Taku  Fishing  Co.,  PortSnettisham. 

Icy  Strait  Packing  Co. , Petersburg, 
Wrangell  Narrows. 

Royer  - Warnock  Packing  Co., 
Beecher  Pass. 

Glacier  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.), 
Point  Highfield. 

Thlinket  Packing  Co.,  Gerard  Point 

Fidalgo  Island  Canning  Co.,  Ketch- 
ikan. 

Alaska  Salmon  Packing  and  Fur 
Co.  (A.P.A.),  Loring. 

Boston  Fishing  and  Trading  Co., 
Yes  Bay. 

Quadra  Packing. Co.,  Mink  Arm, 
Boca  de  Quadra. 

Metlakahtla  Industrial  Co.,  Met- 
lakahtla. 

North  Pacific  Trading  and  Packing 
Co.,  Klawak. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Hunter 
Bay. 


Sail  vessels. 


Name. 

Rig. 

Tons. 

Crew. 

Value. 

Ownershi] 

[Oriental 

Ship 

1,550 

Fishermen 

$55, 000 

Chartered 

[Eclipse 

do 

1,469 

Fishermen 

35,  000 

Do. 

[Tacoma 

do 

1,671 

Fishermen 

CO, 000 

Owned . 

Undaunted 

Bark 

1,647 

Fishermen 

35,  000 

Chartered 

Harry  Morse 

do 

1,241 

Fishermen 

20,  000 

Do. 

(Servia  

Ship 

1,736 

1,687 

55. 000 

50. 000 

55. 000 

Do. 

Do. 

Owned. 

1st.  Nicholas 

1 Bohemia 

do '. . . 

L 528 

Fishermen 

( Prosper 

3-masted  schooner 

229 

Fishermen 

15, 000 

Do. 

(Indiana 1 

Ship 

1,413 

Fishermen 

50, 000 

Do. 

1 134 

■ 0, 000 
20, 000 
30, 000 

Do. 

Owned. 

Chartered 

B.  P.  Chenev 

...do  ... 

1,  200 

(Charles  B.  Kenney 

do 

1,014 

Fishermen 

'(Will  W.  Case 

do 

554 

Fishermen 

18,000 

Owned. 

Coryphene  

do 

733 

Fishermen 

15,  000 

Chartered 

[Nicolas  Thayer 

do 

555 

Fishermen 

15, 000 

Owned. 

3-masted  schooner 

292 

Fishermen 

15, 000 

Do. 

Agate 

Bark  

595 

Fishermen 

10, 000 

Do. 

George  Skolfield 

Ship 

1,275 

Fishermen 

20, 000 

Do. 

( 

Transports  by  callii 

g vessel 

of  com  pan  > 

•) 

(Ferris  S.  Thompson. . . 

Bark 

4X0 

H 

12, 000 

Owned. 

| Maid  of  ( )rleans 

171 

S,  1)111) 

15, 000 

Do. 

939 

Do. 

1,  453 

40, 000 

•) 

Do. 

■ ( 

Transports  by  callin 

g vessel 

of  company 

Harvester 

Bark  

716 

12 

12,  000 

Owned. 

Prussia 

do 

1, 131 

Fishermen 

25, 000 

Chartered. 

1 1 1 

(Transports  by  calling  vessel  of  company.) 

1,138 
1, 175 

30. 000 

10. 000 

Owned. 

Chartered 

Kate  Davenport 

Bark 

Fishermen 

America , 

Ship 

1,908 

Fishermen 

55, 000 

Do. 

Transports  by  regular  line  of  steamers. 

Two  Brothers 

Ship 1, 263  | Fishermen 

Transports  by  regular  line  of  steamers. 

35,  000 

Owned. 

(Transports  by  regular  line 

)f  steamers.) 

(Transports  by  regular  line  of  steamers. 

(Blanche 

Schooner  hulk 

107 

Fishermen 

•4,500 

Owned. 

(Elliot 

Barge 

43 

Fishermen 

1 , 000 

Do. 

Transports  by  regular  line 

jf  steamers. 

Llewellyn  .1.  Morse  . . . 

Ship 1 1, 271  j Fishermenl  36,000 

1 1 1 
Transports  bv  regular  line  of  steamers. ) 

Owned. 

(Transports  by  regular  line  of  steamers.) 

Si  n tram 

Ship 

1,495 

Fishermen 

50, 000 

Chartered 

(Transports  by  regular  line  of  steamers.) 


(Transports  by  regular  line  of  steamers.) 
(Transports  by  regular  line  of  steamers.) 

(Transports  by  special  sail  charter.) 
(Transports  by  calling  vessel  of  company.) 


1 Also  called  at  Karluk. 


2 Lost  October  1900,  at  Karluk. 


RECAPITULATION. 


No. 

Net  ton- 
nage. 

Value. 

Steam 

78 

2, 757 

$856, 280 
925, 500 

Sail 

33 

34, 813 

111 

37, 570 

1,781,780 

320 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION.  ' 


Labor  employed,  1898. 


Name  of  company  and  location  of  cannery. 


Fishermen. 


White,  i Native. 


Other  employees. 


White.  Native.  Chinese, 


Total  em- 
ployees. 


Arctic  Packing  Co 1 

Alaska  Packing  Co HA.  P.  A.),  Nushagak  Bay 

Bristol  Bay  Canning  Co.J 

Point  Roberts  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Kvichak  Bay 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Naknek  River 

Naknek  Packing  Co.,  Naknek  River 

Ugashik  Fishing  Station  (A.  P.  A.),  Ugashik  River 

Chignik  Bay  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Chignik  Lagoon 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Anchorage  Bay,  Chignik 

Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Anchorage  Bay,  Chignik 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Olga  Bay,  Alitak 

Karluk  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Karluk 

Alaska  Improvement  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Karluk 

Hume- Aleutian  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Karluk 

Uganuk  Fishing  Station  (A.  P.  A.),  Uganuk  Bay 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Uyak  Bay 

Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Uyak  Bay 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,. Kenai 

Arctic  Fishing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Kussilof  River 

Pacific  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Odiak 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Orca 

Pyramid  Harbor  Packing  Co.  ( A.  P.  A. ),  Pyramid  Harbor 

Glacier  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.) , Point  Highfield 

Alaska  Salmon  Packing  and  Fur  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),Loring 

Boston  Fishing  and  Trading  Co.,  Yes  Bay 

Quadra  Packing  Co.,  Mink  Arm,  Boca  de  Quadra 

Metlakahtla  Industrial  Co.,  Metlakahtla 

Baranoff  Packing  Co.,  Redfish  Bay 

North  Pacific  Trading  and  Packing  Co.,  Klawak 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Hunter  Bay 

Total  employees 


160 


51 


75  306 


592 


76 

10 

56 

50 

70 

60 

52 

29 


25 

25 

36 

30 

11 

8 

18 

30 

23 

10 

4 

10 

6 

9 

15 

300 

102 

95 

100 

100 

60 

60 

59 


426 

208 

170 

198 

193 

134 

128 

112 


171 


34 


57 


393 


655 


52 

13 

50 

6 

32 

10 

40 

10 

60 

6 

60 

88 

2 12 

24 

150 

90 

100 

12 

13 

4 24 

30 

6 

4 

52 

12 

60 

6 

6 

60 

10 

100 

30 

6 

60 

13 

60 

12 

3 15 

86 

7 

4 

86 

15 

25 

130 

4 

13 

31 

5 

5 30 

45 

127 

128 
114 
160 
162 

133 
213 
271 
360 

73 

134 


1,314 


623 

17 

30 


(8) 


454 


400 


162 

6 

7 57 


521 


2, 450 


185 

57 

118 


5,139 


Labor  employed,  1899. 


Arctic  Packing  Co I 

Alaska  Packing  Go HA.  P.  A.),  Nushagak  Bay 

Bristol  Bay  Canning  Co ) 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Nushagak  Bay 

Alaska  Fishermen’s  Packing  Co.,  Nushagak  Bay 

Point  Roberts  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Kvichak  Bay 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Naknek  River 

Naknek  Packing  Co.,  Naknek  River 

Ugashik  Fishing  Station  (A.  P.  A.),  Ugashik  River 

Chignik  Bay  Co.  ( A.  P.  A.),  Chignik  Lagoon 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Anchorage  Bay,  Chignik 

Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Anchorage  Bay,  Chignik 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Olga  Bay,  Alitak 

Karluk  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Karluk 

Alaska  Improvement  Co.  (A.P.A.),  Karluk 

Hume-Aleutian  Packing  Co.  (A.P.A.),  Karluk 

Uganuk  Fishing  Station,  (A.  P.  A.),  Uganuk  Bay 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Uyak  Bay 

Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Uyak  Bay 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Kenai 

Arctic  Fishing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.) , Kussilof  River 

Pacific  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.A.),  Odiak 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Orc.a 

Pyramid  Harbor  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.A.),  Pyramid  Harbor 

Glacier  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Point  Highfield 

Thlinket  Packing  Co.,  Gerard  Point 

Alaska  Salmon  Packing  and  Fur  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Loring 

Boston  Fishing  and  Trading  Co.,  Yes  Bay 

Quadra  Packing  Co.,  Mink  Arm,  Boca  de  Quadra 

Metlakahtla  Industrial  Co.,  Metlakahtla 

North  Pacific  Trading  and  Packing  Co.,  Klawak 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Hunter  Bay 

Total  employees 


> Includes  3 coal  miners. 

2 Purchased  fish  from  192  natives. 
3Klootchmen. 

4 Labor  figures  approximate. 

5 Includes  25  Klootchmen. 

6 Purchased  fish  from  32  natives. 

7 Includes  12  men,  25  women,  20  children. 


160 

51 

75 

336 

622 

38 

14 

15 

50 

117 

34 

5 

35 

63 

137 

91 

25 

25 

300 

441 

48 

42 

30 

102 

222 

62 

13 

10 

95  , 

180 

50 

18 

30 

100 

198 

70 

123 

102 

195 

60 

10 

4 

60 

134 

52 

10 

6 

65 

133 

30 

9 

15 

59 

113 

176 

34 

57 

393 

660 

60 

26 

6 

4 

52 

148 

50 

6 

12 

60 

128 

32 

10 

6 

6 

60 

114 

42 

10 

10 

100 

162 

60 

6 

30 

6 

60 

162 

60 

13 

60 

133 

88 

912 

12 

3 17 

86 

215 

24 

150 

7 

4 

. 86 

271 

12 

19 

1»6 

3 20 

16 

73 

100 

150 

20 

25 

130 

425 

15 

15 

5 

15 

40 

90 

26 

40 

5 

5 29 

45 

145 

11 24 

17 

41 

17 

17 

7257 

20 

in 

18 

(13) 

10 

60 

88 

1,475 

502 

436 

445 

2, 600 

5, 458 

» Purchased  fish  from  50  natives. 

9 Purchased  fish  from  196  natives. 

10  Includes  1 woman,  cooking. 

11  Purchased  fish  from  36  natives. 

12  Includes  12  men,  25  women,  20  children. 

13  Purchased  fish  from  150  natives. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900, 


321 


Labor  employed , 1900. 


Name  of  company  and  location  of  cannery. 


Arctic  Packing  Co 1 

Alaska  Packing  Co M A.  P.  A. ) , Nushagak  Bay 

Bristol  Bay  Canning  Co. J 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Nushagak  Bay 

Alaska  Fishermen’s  Packing  Co.,  Nushagak  Bay 

Point  Roberts  Packing  Co...  1,  A p A , K-vinhnk  Bnv 

Kvichak  Packing  Co j(A' 1 ' A’)’  KvlcAak  Bay 

Arctic  Packing. Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Naknek  River 

Naknek  Packing  Co., Naknek  River 

Egegak  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Egegak  River 

Ugashik  Fishing  Station  (A.  P.  A.),  Ugashik  River 

Bristol  Packing  Co.,  Ugashik  River 

Chignik  Bay  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Chignik  Lagoon 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Anchorage  Bay,  Chignik 

Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Anchorage  Bay,  Chignik 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Olga  Bay,  Alitak 

Karluk  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Karluk 

Alaska  Improvement  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Karluk 

Uganuk  Fishing  Station  (A.  P.  A.),  Uganuk  Bay 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,Uyak  Bay 

Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Uyak  Bay 

Alaska  Salmon  Association,  Chuitna  River 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Kenai 

Arctic  Fishing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Kussilof  River 

Pacific  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Odiak 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Orca 

Western  Fisheries'  Co.,  Dundas  Bay 

Pyramid  Harbor  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Pyramid  Harbor 

Chilkoot  Packing  Co.,  Chilkoot  Inlet ' 

Taku  Packing  Co.,  Taku  Inlet 

Taku  Fishing  Co.,  Port  Snettisham 

Icy  Strait  Packing  Co.,  Petersburg,  Wrangell  Narrows 

Royer-Warnock  Packing  Co.,  Beecher  Pass  

Glacier  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Point  Highfield 

Thlinket  Packing  Co.,  Gerard  Point 

Fidalgo  Island  Canning  Co.,  Ketchikan 

Alaska  Salmon  Packing  and  Fur  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Loring  

Boston  Fishing  and  Trading  Co.,  Yes  Bay 

Quadra  Packing  Co.,  Mink  Arm,  Boca  de  Quadra 

Metlakahtla  Industrial  Co.,  Metlakahtla 

North  Pacific  Trading  and  Packing  Co.,  Klawak 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Hunter  Bay 

Total  employees 


Fishermen. 

Other  employees. 

Total  em- 

White. 

Native. 

White. 

Native. 

Chinese. 

ployees. 

215 

450 

806 

56 

10 

35 

100 

201 

55 

7 

35 

93 

190 

154 

f 25 

1 13 

25 

8 

1 300 
2 147 

672 

58 

54 

20 

140 

272 

60 

12 

11 

131 

214 

39 

16 

10 

80 

145 

64 

24 

20 

140 

248 

27 

6 

10 

48 

91 

63 

3 20 

2 

90 

175 

60 

10 

4 

60 

134 

52 

10 

6 

58 

126 

40 

9 

10 

59 

118 

171 

13" 

43 

8 

263 

498 

) 

64 

26 

6 

4 

56 

156 

52 

9 

12 

56 

129 

39 

16 

51 

106 

40 

10 

6 

6 

60 

122 

45 

10 

10 

100 

165 

60 

6 

30 

6 

60 

162 

60 

13 

2 

60 

135 

9 

26 

5 

4 26 

30 

96 

102 

3 10 

12 

6 16 

86 

226 

24 

78 

9 

17 

28 

86 

30 

14 

7 

2 

19 

72 

16 

20 

4 

25 

65 

26 

28 

7 

842 

50 

153 

(9) 

(9) 

2 

1"  11 

13 

24 

150 

7 

4 

86 

271 

35 

30 

9 

11 7 

49 

130 

34 

i»41 

7 

13  50 

50 

182 

100 

150 

20 

40 

120 

430 

15 

15 

5 

15 

61 

111 

24 

40 

5 

6 25 

43 

137 

H 24 

174 

174 

372 

55 

16 

1813 

46 

130 

21 

(16) 

10 

90 

121 

1,934 

685 

543 

728 

3,570 

7,460 

1 Includes  a few  Japanese. 

2 Chinese  and  Japanese. 

3 Includes  3 coal  miners. 

4 Includes  6 Klootchmen. 

5 Purchased  fish  from  224  natives. 

6 Klootchmen. 

7 Purchased  fish  from  16  natives  in  addition. 

8 Includes  28  Klootchmen. 

F.  C.  B. 


“Purchased  all  fish. 

10 10  Japanese;  1 Chinaman. 

11  Includes  5 Klootchmen. 

12  Includes  3 Japanese. 

13  Includes  40  Klootchmen. 

14  Purchased  fish  from  38  natives  in  addition. 

15  3 Bucks;  10  Klootchmen. 

16  Purchased  fish  from  121  natives. 

L— 21 


322 


bulletin  of  the  united  states  fish  commission. 


Name  of  company  and 
location  of  cannery. 


Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.P. 

A.),  Nushagak. 

Alaska  Packing  Co.  (A.  P. 

A.) , Nushagak. 

Bristol  Bay  Canning  Co. 

( A.  P.  A. ) , N ushagak . 
Point  Roberts  Packing  Co. 
(A.  P.  A.),  KvichakBay. 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.P. 
A.),  Naknek  River. 


Naknek  Packing  Co., 
Naknek  River. 

Ugashik  Fishing  Station 
(A.  P.  A.),  Ugashik  River. 


Chignik  Bay  Co.  (A.P.  A.), 
Chignik  Lagoon. 


Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co., 
Anchorage  Bay, Chignik. 

Hume  Bros.*  Hume,  An- 
chorage Bay,  Chignik. 


Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.P. 
A ),01ga  Bay,  Alitak. 


Karluk  Packing  Co.  (A.  P. 
A.),  Karluk. 

Alaska  Improvement  Co. 

(A.P. A.),  Karluk. 
Hume-Aleutian  Packing 
Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Karluk. 
Uganuk  Fishing  Station 
(A.  P.  A.),  Uganuk  Bay. 


Pacific  Steam  Whaling 
Co.,  Uyak  Bay. 


Hume  Bros.  & Hume, 
Uyak  Bay. 


Pacific  Steam  Whaling 
Co.,  Kenai. 


Arctic  Fishing  Co.  (A.  P. 
A.),  Kussilof  River. 


Pacific  Packing  Co.  (A.  P. 
A.),  Odiak. 

PacificSteam  WhalingCo., 
Orca. 


Pyramid  Harbor  Packing 
Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Pyramid 
Harbor. 


Glacier  Packing  Co.  (A.  P. 
A.),  Point  Highfield. 


Net  equipment,,  1898. 


Gill  nets. 


No. 


10 


Redfish,  75  fms. 

by  24  m by6jin. 
King,  125  fms.  by 
24  m.  by  9j  in. 

Redfish,  75  fms.  by 
20  m.  by  6}  in. 

Redfish,  65  fms.  by 
20  m.  by  6j  in. 


Redfish,  75  fms.  by 
22  m.  by  6j  in. 
Redfish,  85  fms.  by 
26  m.  by  6j  in. 


Redfish,  135  fms. 
by  30  m.  by  6jin 


/Redfish,  260  fms. 
\ by  30  m.  by  6 in. 

Redfish,  150  fms. 
by  26  and  40  m . 
by  6 in. 


Description. 


King,  60  fms.  by  22 
m by  9j  in. 

Redfish,  60  fms.  by 
30  m.  by  6 in. 

Redfish,  60  fms.  by 
28  m.  by  6 j in. 

King,  60  fms.  by 
22  m.  by  9|  in.' 

Redfish,  350  fms. 
by  30  m.  by  6 jin. 

Redfish,  400  fms. 
by  28  m.  by  6 to 
Oj  in. 

Redfish,  300  fms. 
by28  m.  by  6j in. 

King,  180  fms.  by 
30  m.  by  8j  in. 

King,  250  fms.  by 
28  m.  by  8j  in. ' 

Redfish,  250  fms 
by  30  m.  by6j  in. 


Value 

per 

fath- 

om. 


SO.  65 
. 65 


. 65 
. 65 


Seines. 


No. 


Description. 


Drag,  75  to  180  fms. 
by  120  to  180  m. 
by  3 to  3j  in. 

Drag,  300  fms.  by 
22  ft.  by  3 in. 
Drag,  200  fms.  by 
22  ft.  by  3 in. 
Drag,  150  fms.  by 
25  ft.  by  3 in. 


Drag,  average  200 
fms.  by  80  to 
120  m.  by  3 in. 

Purse,  400  fms. 
(not  rigged). 

Drag,  400  fms.  by 
185  m.  by  3 in. 

Drag,  250  to  300 
fms.  by  120  to 
160  m.  by  3 in. 

Drag,  100  fms.  by 
80  m.  by  3 in. 
(hatchery). 

Drag,  700  fms.  by 
180m.  by  Sin. 

Drag,  550  fms.  by 
180  m.  by  3 in. 

Drag,  350  fms.  by 
180  m.  by  3 in. 

(Also  10  spare 
seines  of  various 
sizes  in  reserve.) 

Drag,  150  to  350 
fms.  by  100  to 
160  m.  by  3 in. 

Drag,  150fms.  3 in. 


1 >rag,  250  fms.  by 
120  m.  by  24  in. 
Drag,  120  fms.  by 
140  m.  by  3 in. 


Drag,  120  fms.  by 
200  m.by  3 in. 
Purse,  120  fms. 
by  250  m.  by  3 in. 


Value 

per 

fath- 

om. 


SI.  50 

1.50 

1.50 

1.50 

1.50 


1.50 

1.50 

1.50 


1.50 


1.50 


1.50 

1.50 


1.50 

2.00 


Traps. 


Description. 


Double;  total 
leads  2,700  ft.; 
pots  75  ft.  square. 

Single;  inshore 
leads  300  to  500 
ft.;  pots  40  ft. 
square. 

1 double,  1 single; 
leads  vary;  pots 
40  ft.  square. 

Single;  inshore 
leads  are  775  ft.; 
channel,  1,500 
ft.;  pots  40  ft. 
square. 


Single;  inshore 
leads  are  500 
ft.;  pots  40  ft. 
square. 

Single;  average 
shore  leads 
1,000  ft.;  pots  40 
ft.  square. 

Single;  average 
shore  leads  600 
ft.;  pots  40  ft. 
square. 

5 single,  2 double; 
average  shore 
and  channel 
leads  800  ft. 
each;  pots  40  ft. 
square. 


Floating;  shore 
leads  1,200  and 
1,800  ft.  at  Uga- 
nuk. 


[Single;  leads  600 
ft.;  pots  30  ft. 
square. 

Single;  leads  100 
to  700  ft.;  pots 
30  ft.  square. 


Average 

value. 


£4,000 
1, 200 

1,000 

1,200 


1,000 

1,500 

1,500 

1,500 


1,500 


1,000 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900, 


328 


Net  equipment,  1898 — Continued. 


Name  of  company  and 
location  of  cannery. 


Alaska  Salmon  Packing 
and  Fur  Co.  (A.  P.  A.), 
Loring. 


Boston  Fishing  and  Trad- 
ing Co.,  Yes  Bay. 


Quadra  Packing  Co. , Mink 
Arm,  Boca  de  Quadra. 


Metlakahtla  Industrial 
Co.,  Metlakahtla. 


Baranoff  Packing  Co., 
Redfish  Bay. 

North  Pacific  Trading  and 
Packing  Co.,  Klawak. 
Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co. , 
Hunter  Bay. 


Gill  nets. 

No. 

Description. 

Value 

per 

fath- 

om. 

1 

| 

r" 

i 

/•" 

[36 

■ 36 
36 

r 

Redfish,  50  fms.by 
40  m.  by  5 j to  6 
in. 

Coho,  75  fms.  by 
30  m.  by  7 in. 

King,  50  fms.  by  25 
m.  by  9 in. 

Redfish,  average 
172  fms.  by  4 fms. 
by  5j  in. 

SO.  65 

. 65 
. 65 

| . 65  • 

No. 


Seines. 


Description. 

Value 

per 

fath- 

om. 

Purse,  150  to  200 
fms.  by  7 to  12  m. 
bv  3 in. 

$2.50 

Drag,  150  to  200 
fms.  by  4to6  m. 
by  3 in. 

1.50 

Purse,  230  fms.  by 
20  fms.  by  3 in. 

2.50 

Drag,  175, 150, 120 
fms.  by  10,  8,  6 
fms.  by  3 in. 

1.50 

Purse,  135  to  180 
fms.  by  12  to  15 
fms.  bv  3 in. 

3.00 

Drag,  115  fms.  by 
8 fms.  by  3 in. 

2.00 

Purse,  average 
158  fms.  by  8* 
fms.  by  3 in. 

3.00 

Drag,  average  163 
bv  6 fms.  by  3 in. 

1.50 

Drag,  125  fms.  by 
3 in. 

1.50 

Purse,  175  fms.by 
240  m.  bv  3 in. 

1.  50 

Combination 
purse  and  drag, 
average  195  by 
5 fms.  by  3 in. 
mesh. 

1.50 

Traps. 

No. 

Description. 

Average 

value. 

[Double;  shorelead 
300  ft.;  channel, 
100  ft;  1 pot  30 
ft.  square,  1 pot 
1 28  ft.  square. 

| $1, 000 

Net  equipment,  1899. 


Gill  nets. 

Seines. 

Traps. 

Name  of  company  and 
location  of  cannery. 

No. 

Description. 

Value 

per 

No. 

Description. 

Value 

per 

No. 

Description. 

Value, 

each. 

fath. 

fath. 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P. 

A.),  Nushagak  Bay. 
Alaska  Packing  Co. (A.  P. 

A ),  Nushagak  Bay. 
Bristol  Bay  Canning  Co. 
(A.  P.  A.).  Nushagak 
Bay. 

120 

Redfish,  75  fms. 

by24ru.by6jin. 
King,  125  fms.  by 
24  m.  by  91  in. 

»0.65 

, 

r l 

Double;  total  leads 
2,700  ft.;  pots  75  ft. 
square. 

Single;  inshore  leads 
300  to  500  ft.;  pots 
40  ft.  square. 

$4,000 

60 

30 

.65 

.65 

1 

1 1 

1,200 

Redfish,  75  fms. 
by  24m.  by  61  in. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling 

Co.,  Nushagak. 

30 

King,  125  fms.  by 
24  m.  by  91  in. 

30 

Redfish,  70  fms. 
by  30m.  bv6j  in. 

Alaska  Fishermen’s  Pack- 

ing  Co.,  Nushagak. 

25 

King,  70  fms.  by 
22  m.  bv  1C  in. ' 

Point  Roberts  Packing 
Co.  (A.  P.  A.).  ICoggi- 

60 

Redfish , 75  fms. 
by  20m.  by6j  in. 

. 65 

2 

1 double,  1 single; 
leads  vary;  pots  40 

1,000 

ung.  Kvichak  River. 

ft.  square. 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P. 
A.),  Naknek  River. 

48 

3 

Single;  inshoreleads 
800  ft.;  channel 

1,200 

by  20  m.  by6jin. 

1,600  ft.;  pots 40  ft. 
square. 

Naknek  Packing  Co.,  Nak- 
nek River. 

20 

Redfish,  75  fms.  by 
22  m.  by  61  in. 

Ugashik  Fishing  Station 
(A.  P.  A.),  Ugashik. 

42 

Redfish,  85  fms.  by 
26m.  by 6 jin. 

.65 

3 

Single;  inshoreleads 
average  500  ft. ; 

1,000 

pots  40  ft.  square. 

Chignik  Bay  Co.  (A.P.A. ), 

10 

Redfish,  135  fms. 

. 65 

4 

Drag,  75  to  180  fms. 

SI.  50 

10 

Single;  aver,  shore 

1,500 

Chignik  Lagoon. 

bv30m.  by  6 jin. 

by  120  to  180  m. 

leads  1,000 ft.;  pots 

by3to3jin. 

40  ft.  square. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling 
Co.,  Anchorage  Bay, 
Chignik. 

|l2 

fRedfish,  260  fms. 
\ by  30  m.  by  6 in. 

} .65 

!■ 

Drag,  200  fms.  by 
22  ft.  by  3 in. 
Drag,  300  fms.  by 
22  ft.  by  3 in. 

1.50 

1.50 

)• 

[Single;  aver,  shore 
leads  600  ft.;  pots 
l 40  ft.  square. 

| 1,500 

Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  An- 

11 

Redfish,  150  fms. 

.65 

i 

Drag,  150  fms.  by 

1.50 

7 

5 single;  2 double; 

1, 500 

chorage  Bay,  Chignik. 

by  26  to  40  m.  bv 

25  ft.  by  3 in. 

aver,  shore  and 

6 in. 

channel  leads  800 
ft.  each;  pots  40  ft. 
square. 

324 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION, 


Name  of  company  and 
location  of  cannery. 


Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.P. 
A.),  Olga  Bay,  Alitak. 


Karluk  Packing  Co.  (A. 

P.  A.),  Karluk. 

Alaska  Improvement  Co. 

(A. P.  A.),  Karluk. 
Hume-Aleutian  Packing 
Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Karluk. 
Uganuk  Fishing  Station 
(A.  P.  A.) , Uganuk  Bay. 


Pacific  Steam  Whaling 
Co.,  Uyak  Bay. 


Hume  Bros.  & Hume, 
Uyak  Bay. 


Pacific  Steam  Whaling 
Co.,  Kenai. 


Arctic  Fishing  Co.  (A.P. 
A.),  Kussiiof  River. 

Pacific  Packing  Co.  (A.  P. 
A.),  Odiak. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling 
Co.,  Orca. 


Pyramid  Harbor  Packing 
Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Pyramid 
Harbor. 

Glacier  Packing  Co.  (A. 
P.  A.),  Wrangell,  Point 
Highfield. 

Thlinket  Packing  Co., 
Gerard  Point. 


Alaska  Salmon  Packing 
and  Fur  Co.,  (A.P.  A.). 
Loring. 


Boston  Fishing  and  Trad- 
ing Co.,  Yes  Bay. 


Quadra  Packing  Co., 
Mink  Arm,  Boca  de 
Quadra. 


Metlakahtla  Industrial 
Co.,  Metlakahtla. 


N orth  Pacifi  c Trading  an  d 
Packing  Co.,  Klawak. 
Pacific  Steam  Whaling 
Co.,  Hunter  Bay. 


Net  equipment,  1899 — Continued. 


Gill  nets. 


Seines. 


Traps. 


No. 


Description. 


Value 
I per 
fath. 


No. 


Redfish,  60  fms.  by 
30  m.  by  6 in. 

King,  60  fms.  by 
22  m.  by  91  in. 

Redfish,  60  fms.  by 
28  m.  by  6} in. 

King,  60'  fms.  by 
22  m.  by  9}  in. 

Redfish,  350  fms. 
by  30m.  by6jin. 

Redfish,  400  fms. 
by  28m.  by  6 to 
6jin. 

Redfish,  300  fms. 
by  28  m.  by  6 jin. 

King,  180  fms.  by 
30  m.  by  81  in. 

Redfish,  250  fms. 
by30m.  Dy6f  in. 

King,  250  fms.  by 
28m.  by  8jin. 

Redfish,  200  fms. 
by  22m.  by  6 jin. 

King,  200  fms.  by 
22  m.  by  9j  in. 


*0. 65 
.65 
.65 
. 65 
.65 
.65 

.65 
.65 
.65 
.65 
. 65 
. 65 


Redfish,  50  fms.  by 
40  m.  by  5£  to 
6 in. 

Coho,  75  fms.  by 
30  m.  by  7 in. 

King,  50  fms.  by 
25  m.  by  9 in. 

Redfish,  average 
172  by  4 fms.  by 
5s  in. 


.65 
. 65 
.65 

.65 


Description. 


Drag,  average  200 
fms.  by  100  to 
130m.  by3in. 

Purse,  400  fms. 
(not  rigged). 

Drag,  400  fms.  by 
185  m.  by  3 in.  ' 

Drag,  250  to  300 
fms.  by  120  to 
160  m.  by  3 in. 

Drag,  100  fms.  by 
80  m.  by  3 in. 
(Hatchery.) 

Drag,  700  fms.  by 
180  m.  by  3 in. 

Drag,  550  fms.  by 
180  m.  by  3 in. 

Drag,  350  fms.  by 
180  m.  by  3 in. 

Drag,  150  to  350 
fms.  by  100  to 
160  m.  by  3 in. 

/Drag,  150  fms.  by 

I 3 in. 


Drag,  250  fms.  by 
120m.  by  2/ in. 
Drag,  120  fms.  by 
140  m.  by  3 in.  ' 


Purse,  120  fms.  by 
250m.  by3in.  ' 

Drag,  120  fms.  by 
200  m.  by  3 in.  ‘ 

Drag,  90  fms.  by 
190m.  by  3 in. 

Drag,  65  fms.  by 
140  m.  by  3 in. 

Purse,  150  to  200 
fms.  by  7 to  12 
fms.  by  3 in. 

Drag,  150  to  200 
fms.  by  4 to  6 
fms.  by  3 in. 

Purse,  230  fms.  by 
20  fms.  by  3 in. 

Drag,  175  fms.  by 
10  fms.  by  3 in. 

Drag,  150  fms.  by 
8 fms.  by  3 in. 

Drag,  120  fms.  by 
6 fms.  by  3 in.  ' 

Purse,  135  to  200 
fms.  by  12  to  15 
fms.  by  3 in. 

Purse,  180  fms.  by 
15  fms.  by  2 in. 
(herring). 

Drag,  115  fms.  by 
8 fms.  by  3 in. 

Purse,  average 
158  fms.  by  8j 
fms.  by  3 in. 

Drag,  average  163 
fms.  by  6 fms.  by 
3 in. 

Purse,  175  fms.  by 
240m.  by  3 in.  ’ 

Combination 
purse  and  drag; 
average  195  fms. 
by  5 fms.  by  3 in. 


Value 

per 

fath. 


II.  50 

3.00 
1.50 
1. 50 

1.50 

1.50 

1.50 

1.50 

1.50 


No. 


1.50 
1. 50 


2.00 

1.50 

1.50 

1.50 

2.50 

1.50 

2.50 

1.50 
1.50 

1. 50 

3.00 

2.50 

2.00 

3. 00 

1.50 

1.50 
1. 50 


Description. 


Floating;  lead  100 
ms.;  pot  40  by  f90 
ft. 


Floating;  shore  leads 
1,200  and  1,800  ft. 
at  Uganuk. 


(Also  10  spare  seines 
of  various  sizes,  in 
reserve.) 


Single;  leads  aver- 
age 1,000  ft.;  pots 
30  ft.  square. 

Single;  leads  100  to 
700  ft.;  pots  30  ft. 
square. 


Double;  shore  lead 
300  ft.;  channel  100 
ft.;  1 pot  30  ft. 
square;  1 pot  28 
ft.  square. 


Value 

per 

fath. 


$2, 500 


1, 500 


1,000 


1,000 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900, 


325 


Net  equipment,  1900. 


Gill  nets. 


No. 


Name  of  company  and 
location  of  cannery. 


Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.l 
A.),  Nushagak  Bay. 
Alaska  Packing  Co.  ( A.  P.  | 
A.),  Nushagak  Bay.  f 
Bristol  Bay  Canning  Co. 
(A.  P.  A. ), Nushagak  Bay J 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling) 
Co.,  Nushagak  Bay. 


Alaska  Fishermen’s  Pack- 
ing Co.,  Nushagak  Bay.' 

Point  Roberts  Packing  Co.' 

(A.  P.  A.),  Kvichak  Bay. 
Kvichak  Packing  Co.  (A. 

P.  A. ) , Kvichak  Bay. 
Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P. 
A.) , Naknek  River. 


Naknek  Packing  Co., 
Naknek  River. 

Egegak  Packing  Co.  (A.  P. 
A.),  Egegak  River. 

Ugashik  Fishing  Station 
(A.  P.  A.),  Ugashik 
River. 

Bristol  Packing  Co.,  Uga- 
shik  River. 


ChignikBayCo.(A.  P.  A.),\41n 
Chignik  Lagoon.  Jl 


Pacific  Steam  Whaling] 
Co.,  Anchorage  Bay,  > 
Chignik. 


Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  An-1 
chorage  Bay,  Chignik.  / 


.retie  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.l 
A.),  Olga  Bay,  Alitak.  J 


Karluk  Packing  Co.  (A.  P. 
A.),  Karluk. 

Alaska  Improvement  Co. 

(A.  P.  A.),  Karluk. 
Uganuk  Fishing  Station, 
(A.  P.  A.),  Uganuk  Bay.J 


Pacific  Steam  Whaling] 
Co.,  Uyak  Bay.  / 


Hume  Bros.  & Hume, 
Uyak  Bay. 


Alaska  Salmon  Associa- 
tion, Chuitna  River. 


Pacific  Steam  Whaling 
Co.,  Kenai. 


15 


Description. 


Value 
per 
fath . 


$0.05 

.65 


.65 

.65 

.75 


Redfish,  75  fms. 
by  24  m.  by  61  in. 

King,  125  fms.  by 
24  m.  by  91  in. 

Redfish,  75  fms. 
by  24  m.  by  61  in. 

King,  125  fms.  by 
24  m.  by  91  in. 

Redfish,  70  fms. 
by  30  m.  by  61  in. 

King,  70  fms.  by 
22  m.  by  10  in.' 

/Redfish,  75  fms. 

\ by20m.by6j-in. 

Redfish,  75  fms. 
by  22  m.  by  6f  in. 


Redfish,  75  fms. 

by  22  m.  by  61  in. 
Redfish,  80  fms. 
by  26  m.  by  61  in. 

Redfish,  85  fms. 
by  26  m.  by  61  in. 

Redfish,  75  fms. 
by  23  m.  by  6jin. 


/Redfish,  135  fms.  I 
I by  30m.  by6jin.  i|  ■0D 


/Redfish,  260  fms. 
1 by  30  m.  by  6 in. 


Redfish,  150  fms. 
by  26  to  40  m.  by 
6 in. 


Redfish,  65  fms. 
by  30  m.  by  51  in. 

Redfish  and  co- 
hoes, 65  fms.  by 
30  m.  by  61  in. 

King,  65  fms.  by 
30  m.  by  9 in. 

Redfish,  00  fms. 
by  30  m.  by  6 in. 

King,  60  fms.  by 
22  m.  by  91  in. 


. 65 


. 65 
.65 

.65 

.65 

.65 


Seines. 


No.  Description. 


Drag,  75  to  180  fms. 
by  120  to  180  m. 
by  3 and  31  in. 

Drag,  200  fms.  by 
22  ft.  deep  by  3 
in. 

Drag,  300  fms.  by 
22  ft.  deep  by  3 
in. 


{Drag,  150  fms.  by 
25  ft.  deep  by  3 
in. 

Purse,  400  fms. 

(not  rigged). 
Drag,  average  200 
fms.  by  100  to 
130  m.  by  3 in. 
Drag,  400  fms.  by 
185  m.  by  3 in. 
Drag,  250  to  300 
fms.  by  120  to 
160  m.  by  3 in. 
Drag,  100  fms.  by 
80  m.  by  3 in. 
(hatchery). 
Drag,  700  fms.  by 
180  m.  by  3 in. 
Drag,  550  fms.  by 
180  m.  by  3 in. 
Drag,  350  fms.  by 
180  m.  by  3 in. 
Drag,  150  to  350 
fms.  by  160  m. 
by  3 in. 


(Drag,  150  fms.  by 
I 5 fms.  by  3 in.' 


/Drag,  150  fms.,  3 
/ in. 


Value 

per 

fath. 


-$1.50 

1.50 

1.50 

1.50 

3.00 

1.50 

1.50 

1.50 

1.50 

1.50 


I1' 


65 


} 1.5C 


Traps. 


Description. 


Aver. 

value. 


Double;  total  leads,  j$4,000 
2,700  ft,.;  pots,  75  ft.  j 
square. 

Single;  inshore  leads,  1,200 
300  to  500  ft.;  pots, 

40  ft.  square. 


(Double;  inshore  leads, 
60  ft.;  channel 
leads,  300  ft.;  pots, 

[ 40  ft.  square. 

Single;  inshore  leads, 
750  ft.;  channel 
leads,  1,400ft.;  pots, 
40  ft.  square. 


Single;  inshoreleads, 
200  and  250  f t. ; pots, 
40  ft.  square. 
Single;  inshoreleads, 
500  ft.,  average; 
pots,  40  ft.  square. 


(Aver,  inshore 
Sine-  leads,  1,000  ft.; 
5L ,?/  i aver,  channel 
1Joul3'  leads,  900  ft.; 
{ pots, 40  ft.  sq. 


Sing. 

Doub. 


(Aver,  inshore 
and  channel 
leads,  each 
800  ft.;  pots, 
( 40  ft.  square. 

I Aver,  inshore 
and  channel 
leads,  each 
800  ft.;  pots, 
40  ft.  square. 

Floating;  inshore 
lead,  100  fms.;  pot, 
40  by  90  ft. 


{Floating;  inshore 
leads,  1,200  and 
1,800  ft.;  at  Uga- 
nuk. 


((Also  10  spare  seines 
of  various  sizes,  in 
reserve.) 


Single;  inshoreleads, 
600  ft,;  pots,  40  ft. 
square. 


Single;  inshore  leads 
average  1,000  ft.; 
pots,  30  ft.  square. 


1,000 


1,200 


1,000 

1,000 


1, 500 


1,500 


1, 500 


2,500 


1,500 


1,500 


500 


1 47  of  these  nets  not  in  use;  reserve.  3 Traps  on  hand  but  not  in  use;  rese  rve.  5 1 seine  not  used;  reserve. 

21  of  these  traps  not  equipped  with  web;  reserve.  4 Only  1 gill  net  in  use;  9 in  reserve. 


326 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Net  equipment,  1900 — Continued. 


Name  of  company  and 
location  of  cannery. 


Arctic  Fishing  Co.  (A.  P, 
A.),  Kussilof  River. 

Pacific  Packing  Co.  (A.  P. 
A.),  Odiak 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling 
Co.,  Orea. 

Western  Fisheries  Co.,1 
Dundas  Bay.  f 

Pyramid  Harbor  Packing 
Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Pyramid^ 
Harbor. 

Chilkoot  Packing  Co., 
Chilkoot  Inlet. 

Taku  Packing  Co.,  Takul 
Inlet. 

Taku  Fishing  Co.,  Port. 
Snettisham. 


Gill  nets. 


No. 


Royer-Warnock  Packing 
Co.,  Beecher  Pass. 

Glacier  Packing  Co.  ( A.  P. 
A.), Point  Highfield. 


Thlinket  Packing  Co., 
Point  Gerard. 


Fidalgo  Island  Canning! 
Co. "Ketchikan.  / 


Alaska  Salmon  Packing! 
and  Fur  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),S- 


Loring. 


Boston  Fishing  and  Trad- 
ing Co.,  Yes  Bay. 


Qu adra  Packing  Co .,  Min k\ 
Bay,  Boca  de  Quadra,  f ' 


Metlakahtla  Industrial! 
Co.,  Metlakahtla. 


North  Pacific  Trading  and 
Packing  Co.,  Klawak. 
Pacific  Steam  Whaling 
Co.,  Hunter  Bay. 


Description. 


Icy  Strait  Packing  Co.,) 
Petersburg,  Wrangell  1120 
Narrows. 


Redfish,  60  fms. 

by  28  m.  by  6 jin. 
King,  60  fms.  by 
22  m.  by  9j  in. 
Redfish,  350  fms. 

by  30m.by6jin 
Redfish,  400  fms. 
by  28  m.  by  6!  in. 


150  fms.  long  . 


Redfish,  300  fms. 
by 28m  by 6 jin. 

King,  180  fms.  by 
30  m.  by  8j  in. 

Redfish,  270  fms. 
by25m.by  6jin. 

Redfish,  150  fms. 
by35m.by6jin. 

King,  150  fms.  by 
22  m.  by  9j  in. 

Redfish,  150  fms. 
by  30  m.  by  6 jin. 

King,  150  fms.  by 
20  m.  by  9j  in. 

[Redfish,  50  fms. 
by  40m.  by5fin. 

I Cohoes,  75  fms.  by 

I 30  m.  by  7 in. 

King,  50  fms.  by 

I 25  m.  by  9 in. 

Cohoes,  ioo  fms. 
by  30  m.  by  7 in. 

Redfish,  250  fms. 
by30  m.  bv6j  in. 

King,  250  fms.  by 
28  m.  by  8j  in. 

Redfish,  200  fms. 
by24m.by6jin. 

King,  200  fms.  by 
22  m.  by  9j  in. 


Redfish,  100  fms. 

by  35  m.  by  6j  in. 
King,  100  fms.  by 
32  m.  by  104  in. 


[(Average)  172  fms. 
■{  bv  4 fms.  by  5j 
l in. 


Value 

per 

fath. 


$0. 65 
.65 
.65 
.65 

.65 

.65 


.65 


.65 


Seines. 


No. 


5 


16 


Description. 


Drag,  250  fms.  by 
120  m.  by  2j  in. 
Drag,  120  fms.  by 
40  m.  by  3 in. 
Purse,  150  fms. 
long. 

Drag,  average  100 
fms.  in  length. 


Value 

per 

fath. 


$1. 50 

1.50 

3.00 

1.50 


Purse,  160  fms.  by 
20  fms.  by  3$  in. 


Purse,  165  fms.  by 
300  m.  by  3j  in. 
Drag,  100  fms.  by 

5 fms.  by  3j  in. 
Purse,  120  fms.  bv 

10  fms.  by  3 in. 
Drag,  120  fms.  by 

6 fms.  by  3 in. ' 
Combination,  180 

by  15  fms.  by  2 
in.  (herring)'. 
Drag,  100  fms.  by 

5 fms.  by  3 in. 
Purse,  120  fms.  by 

250  m.  by  3 in.' 
Drag,  120  fms.  by 
200  m.  by  3 in. 
Purse,  185  fms.  by 
220  m.  by  3 in.' 
Purse,  100  fms.  by 
160  m.  by  3 in. 
Drag,  100  fms.  by 
178  m.  by  3 in.' 
Purse,  175  fms.  by 
10  to  12  fms.  by 
3 in. 

Drag,  160  fms.  by 

6 fms.  by  3j  in. 
Purse,  150  to  200 

fms.  by  7 to  12 
fms.  by  3 in. 
Drag,  150  to  200 
fms.  by  4 to  6 
fms.  by  3 in. 
Purse,  230  fms.  by 
20  fms.  by  3 in. 
[Drag,  175  fms.  by 
10  fms.  by  3 in. 
Drag,  150  fms.  by 
8 fms.  by  3 in. 
Drag,  120  fms.  by 
. 6 fms.  by  3 in. 
Purse,  180  fms.  by 
15  fms.  by  3 in., 
average. 

Drag,  115  fms.  by 
8 fms.  by  3 in. 
Purse  (average), 
158  fms.  by  8j 
fms.  by  3 in. 
Drag  (average), 
163  fms.  by  6 
fms.  by  3 in. 
Purse,  175  fms.  by 
240  m.  by  3 in. 
Combination  (av- 
erage), 195  fms. 
bv5fms.  bv3in. 


0) 


(2) 

1.50 
3. 00 
1.50 

3.00 

1.50 

2.00 
1.50 

(3) 

1.50 
3. 00 

1.75 

2.50 

1.50 
2.  50 

1.50 

3.00 

2.  00 

3.00 


(4) 

1.50 


Traps. 


No, 


Description. 


single;  leads  from  100 
to  700  ft.;  pots,  30 
ft.  square. 


Aver. 

value. 


$1,000 


Single;  inshore  leads 
average  7 50  ft.; 
pots,  36  ft.  square. 


Double;  inshore  lead, 
300  ft.;  channel 
lead,  100  ft.;  1 pot, 
30  ft,,  square,  1 pot, 
28  ft.  square. 


11 


1 , 37 


1,000 


4 Whole  cost,  $1,400. 


2 Whole  cost,  $400. 


3 $500  each. 


4 $300  each. 


I 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900.  327 

Boat  equipment,  1898. 


Name  of  company  and  location  of  cannery. 


Arctic  Packing  Co L.  P A i Nn 

Alaska  Packing  Co ( shagak ' 

Bristol  Bay  Canning  Co. . | snaS‘llk- 

Point  Roberts  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Kog- 
giung,  Kvichak  River. 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Naknek 
River. 

Naknek  Packing  Co.,  Naknek  River 

Ugashik  Fishing  Station  (A.  P.  A.),  Uga- 
shik. 

Chignik  Bay  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Chignik  La- 
goon. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Anchorage 
Bay,  Chignik. 

Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Anchorage  Bay, 
Chignik. 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Olga  Bay, 
Alitak. 

Karluk  Packing  Co L»  P * Kar_ 

Alaska  Improvement  Co..  ( Pga. 

Hume-Aleutian  Pkg.  Co. . 

Uganuk  Fishing  Station.  ,J  nuK 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  II yak  Bay 

Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Uyak  Bay 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Kenai 

Arctic  Fishing  Co.(A.  P.  A.),  Kussilof  River. 
Pacific  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Odiak 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Orca 

Pyramid  Harbor  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.), 
Pyramid  Harbor. 

Glacier  Packing  Co.  ( A.  P.  A.),  Point  High- 
field. 

Alaska  Salmon  Packing  and  Fur  Co. 
(A.  P.  A.),  Loring. 

Boston  Fishing  and  Trading  Co.,  Yes  Bay.. 
Quadra  Packing  Co.,  Boca  de  Quadra 

Metlakahtla  Industrial  Co.,Metlakahtla... 

Baranoff  Packing  Co.,  Red  fish  Bay 
North  Pacific  Trading  and  Packing  Co. 
Klawak. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Hunter  Bay. . . 


Unrigged  vessels. 


No. 

Description. 

Value 

each. 

18 

Lighters 

*600 

2 

Pile-drivers 

1,200 

6 

Lighters 

800 

6 

Trap  scows 

100 

2 

Pile-drivers 

1, 500 

5 

Lighters 

500 

1 

Pile-driver 

1,200 

7 

Lighters 

600 

9 

do 

800 

1 

Pile-driver 

1,500 

2 

Sail  lighters 

1,500 

1 

10 

Trap  scows 

250 

3 

Pile-drivers 

750 

4 

Lighters 

400 

1 

Sail  scow 

200 

10 

Trap  scows 

60 

3 

Pile-drivers 

1,000 

13 

Lighters 

140 

i 

Sail  scow 

600 

i 

do 

300 

2 

Pile-drivers 

1,050 

1 

Cargo  lighter 

500 

2 

Fish  lighters 

250 

2 

Pish  scows 

100 

1 

Hand  pile-driver 

100 

7 

Lighters 

500 

12 

Fish  scows 

150 

1 

Hatchery  scow 

150 

4 

Lighters 

450 

1 

Pile-driver 

1 , 000 

3 

Lighters 

400 

1 

Pile-driver 

1,000 

5 

Lighters 

400 

1 

Pile-driver 

1,500 

3 

Sail  lighters 

450 

4 

Trap  scows 

50 

1 

Pile-driver 

1,  500 

2 

Lighters 

400 

3 

Scows 

400 

4 

House  scows 

400 

1 

Pile-driver 

200 

3 

Lighters 

700 

1 

Pile-driver 

1,000 

2 

Lighters 

600 

2 

Cargo  lighters 

150 

20 

Fish  lighters 

75 

5 

Lighters 

50 

2 

House  scows 

75 

1 

Fish  raft 

25 

1 

Pile-driver 

500 

2 

Lighters 

100 

1 

Scow 

100 

4 

Lighters 

100 

2 

Fish  scows 

50 

1 

Pile-driver 

800 

Boats,  etc. 


No. 

Description. 

Value 

each. 

I 60 

Columbia  River  gill-net 

*200 

boats. 

25 

Skiffs 

30 

1 20 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 1 

100 

1 10 

Skiffs 

30 

19 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

85 

10 

Skiffs 

40 

f 23 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

100 

I 5 

Skiffs . . . 

25 

24 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

10 

Skiffs 

25 

3 

Seine  boats,  F.  B 

100 

7 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

8 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

100 

12 

Skiffs 

25 

3 

Seine  boats 

75 

9 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

3 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

100 

10 

Skiffs 

25 

2 

Seine  boats 

70 

8 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

10 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

100 

14 

Skiffs 

25 

6 

Seine  boats,  F.  B 

60 

1 

Otter  boat 

100 

18 

Dories 

30 

3 

15 

f 

Seine  boats,  F.  B 

150 

1 33 

Dories 

25 

| 3 

Launch  tenders 

90 

6 

Hatchery  cars 

30 

1 ” 

Seine  boats,  F.  B 

70 

3 

Sail  boots 

90 

1 10 

Dories 

30 

1 9 

Seine  boats 

120 

1 1 

Whitehall  boat 

75 

1 17 

Dories 

20 

2 

Skiffs 

25 

i 

Seine  boat 

100 

10 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

40 

1 3 

Skiffs . . . 

25 

( 15 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

40 

4 

Skiffs  

30 

1 2 

Seine  boats 

200 

33 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

1 6 

Skiffs 

25 

1 2 

Seine  boats 

200 

30 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

t 8 

Skiffs 

25 

50 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

3 

Skiffs 

25 

1 7 

Seine  boats 

60 

1 H 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

8 

Old  River  boats 

25 

5 

Skiffs 

25 

f 17 

Seine  boats 

50 

1 

Whitehall  boat 

50 

12 

Skiffs 

20 

r 4 

Seine  boats 

50 

6 

Skiffs 

25 

r 12 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

50 

12 

Seine  boats 

100 

12 

Seine-boat  tenders 

30 

1 4 

Skiffs  

20 

6 

Seine  boats 

50 

7 

Sailboats  

100 

1 8 

Dories 

25 

4 

Seine  boats 

75 

1 4 

Seine  boats 

25 

5 

Skiffs 

25 

15 

Seine  boats 

50 

I 3 

Skiffs 

25 

1F.  B.=flat  bottom. 


328 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION, 


Boat  equipment,  1899. 


Name  of  company  and  location  of  cannery. 


Arctic  Packing  Co 

Alaska  Packing  Co 

Bristol  Bay  Canning  Co.. 


(A.  P.  A.)  Nu- 
shagak  Bay. 


Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  NushagakBay. 


Alaska  Fishermen’s  Packing  Co.,  Nusha- 
gak  Bay. 


Point  Roberts  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Kvi- 
chak  Bay. 


Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Naknek 
River. 


Naknek  Packing  Co.,  Naknek  River 

Ugashik  Fishing  Station  (A.P. A.),  Uga- 
shik  River. 


Chignik  Bay  Co.  ( A.  P.  A. ) , Chignik  Lagoon . 


Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Anchorage  Bay, 
Chignik. 


Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Anchorage  Bay, 
Chignik. 


Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Olga  Bay, 
Alitak. 

Karluk  Packing  Co 1 

Alaska  Improvement  Co. . (A.  P.  A.)  Kar- 
Hume-Aleutian  Packings  luk  and  Uga- 
Co.  nuk  Bay. 

Uganuk  Fishing  Station . . J 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Uyak  Bay 


Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Uyak  Bay, 


Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Company,  Kenai . . . 


Arctic  Fishing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Kussilof  River 


Pacific  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.) , Odiak 


Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Orca 

Pyramid  Harbor  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.), 
Pyramid  Harbor. 

Glacier  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Point  High- 
field. 


Thlinket  Packing  Co.,  Gerard  Point, 


Alaska  Salmon  Packing  and  Fur  Co. 
(A.  P.  A.) , Loring. 

Boston  Fishing  and  Trading  Co.,  Yes  Bay.. 


Quadra  Packing  Co.,  Mink  Arm,  Boca  de 
Quadra. 


Metlakahtla  Industrial  Co.,  Metlakahtla... 

North  Pacific  Trading  and  Packing  Co., 
Klawak. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Hunter  Bay 


Unrigged  vessels. 

No. 

Description. 

Value 

each. 

1 18 

Lighters 

$600 

! 2 

Pile-drivers 

1,200 

4 

Lighters 

300 

I 3 

do 

700 

r 7 

do 

800 

I 6 

Trap  scows 

100 

1 2 

' Pile-drivers 

1,500 

1 7 

[fighters 

800 

1 1 

Pile-driver 

1,200 

8 

Lighters 

600 

\ 9 

do 

800 

{ i 

Pile-driver 

1 , 500 

r 2 

Sail  lighters 

1,500 

i 

do 

750 

12 

Trap  scows 

250 

1 3 

Pile-drivers 

750 

r 4 

Lighters 

400 

i 

Sail  scow 

800 

l i 

do 

200 

i ™ 

Trap  scows 

60 

l 3 

Pile-drivers 

1,000 

( 13 

Lighters 

140 

1 1 

Sail  scow 

600 

1 1 

do 

300 

2 

Pile-drivers 

1,050 

| 1 

Cargo  lighter 

500 

1 2 

Fish  lighters 

250 

] 2 

Fish  scows 

100 

Hand  pile-driver 

100 

f 9 

Lighters 

500 

1 13 

Fish  scows 

150 

I 1 

Hatchery  scow 

150 

t 5 

Lighters 

450 

l 1 

Pile-driver 

1,000 

J 4 

Lighters 

400 

l 1 

Pile-driver 

1,000 

f 7 

Lighters 

350 

1 2 

Pile-drivers 

1,500 

f 3 

Sail  lighters 

450 

5 

Trap  scows 

50 

l 2 

Pile-drivers 

1,500 

i 2 

Lighters 

400 

l 3 

Scows 

400 

I 4 

House  scows 

400 

\ 1 

Pile-driver 

200 

f 3 

Lighters 

1.100 

i 1 

Pile-driver 

1,000 

} 2 

Lighters 

600 

I 2 

Cargo  lighters 

160 

\ 20 

Fish  lighters 

75 

5 

Lighters 

50 

f 2 

House  scows 

75 

1 

Fish  raft 

25 

1 1 

Pile-driver 

500 

2 

Lighters 

100 

} 1 

Scow 

100 

[ 4 

Lighters 

100 

i 2 

Fish  scows 

50 

1 

Pile-driver 

800 

Boats,  etc. 

No. 

Description. 

Value 

each. 

60 

Columbia  River,  gill-net 

$200 

boats. 

Skiffs . 

30 

15 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

4 

Skiffs 

30 

17 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

3 

Skiffs 

30 

30 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

100 

10 

Skiffs 

30 

24 

Gill-nets  boats,  F.  B 

85 

10 

Skiffs 

40 

25 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

100 

5 

Skiffs 

25 

24 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

10 

Skiffs 

25 

3 

Seine  boats,  F.  B 

100 

7 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

8 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

100 

15 

Skiffs 

25 

3 

Seine  boats 

75 

10 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

3 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

100 

10 

Skiffs 

25 

2 

Seine  boats 

70 

8 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

10 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

100 

14 

Skiffs 

25 

6 

Seine  boats 

60 

1 

Otter  boat 

100 

18 

Dories 

30 

3 

Skiffs 

15 

20 

Seine  boats,  F.  B 

150 

33 

Dories 

25 

3 

Launch  tenders 

90 

6 

Hatchery  cars 

30 

12 

Seine  boats,  F.  B 

70 

3 

Sailboats 

90 

10 

Dories 

30 

10 

Seine  boats 

120 

1 

Whitehall  boat 

75 

17 

Dories 

20 

2 

Skiffs 

25 

i 

Seine  boat 

100 

20 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

40 

3 

Skiffs 

25 

15 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

40 

4 

Skiffs 

30 

2 

Seine  boats 

200 

33 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

6 

Skiffs 

25 

2 

Seine  boats 

200 

30 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

8 

Skiffs 

25 

50 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

3 

Skiffs 

25 

7 

Seine  boats 

60 

14 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

8 

Old  river  association 

25 

5 

Skiffs 

25 

10 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

65 

3 

Seine  boats 

50 

3 

Skiffs 

20 

25 

Seine  boats 

50 

1 

Whitehall  boat 

50 

12 

20 

4 

Seine  boats 

50 

6 

Skiffs 

25 

12 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

50 

12 

Seine  boats 

100 

12 

Seine-boat  tenders 

30 

4 

Skiffs 

20 

6 

Seine  boats 

50 

6 

Sailboats 

100 

9 

Dories 

25 

4 

Seine  boats 

25 

5 

Skiffs 

25 

15 

Seine  boats 

50 

3 

Skiffs 

25 

ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900, 


329 


Boat  equipment,  1900. 


Name  of  company  and  location  of 
cannery. 


Arctic  Packing  Co 

Alaska  Packing  Co 

Bristol  Bay  Canning  Co. 


(A.  P.  A.),Nuslia- 
gak  Bay. 


Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Nushagak  Bay  . 


Alaska  Fishermen’s  Packing  Co. , Nushagak 
Bay. 

Point  Roberts  Packing  Co. 1(  A.  P.  A.) , Kvi- 
Kvichak  Packing  Co / chak  Bay. 


Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Naknek  River. 
Naknek  Packing  Co.,  Naknek  River 

Egegak  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Egegak 
River. 

Ugashik  Fishing  Station  (A.  P.  A.),Ugashik 
River. 

Bristol  Packing  Co.,  Ugashik  River 


Chignik  Bay  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Chignik  Lagoon. 


PacificSteam  WhalingCo.,  Anchorage  Bay, 
Chignik. 


Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Anchorage  Bay, 
Chignik. 


Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Olga  Bay, 
Alitak. 


Karluk  Packing  Co |(A.  P.  A.)  Kar- 

Alaska  Improvement  Co.  > luk  and  Uga- 
Uganuk  Fishing  Station . j nuk  Bay. 


Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Uyak  Bay, 


Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  Uyak  Bay 


Alaska  Salmon  Association,  Chuitna  River. 


Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Kenai 


Arctic  FishingCo.(A.  P.  A.),  Kussilof  River. 


Pacific  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Odiak 


Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Orca 


Western  Fisheries  Co.,  Dundas  Bay 


Pyramid  Harbor  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.), 
Pyramid  Harbor. 

Chilkoot  Packing  Co.,  Chilkoot  Inlet 

Taku  Packing  Co.,Taku  Inlet 

Taku  Fishing  Co.,PortSnettisham 


Icy  Strait  Packing  Co.,  Petersburg,  Wran- 
gell Narrows. 


Unrigged  vessels. 


No. 

Description. 

Value, 

each. 

18 

Lighters 

6600 

2 

Pile-drivers 

1,200 

6 

Lighters 

300 

4 

700 

800 

6 

Trap  scows 

100 

2 

Pile-drivers 

1,200 

8 

Lighters 

800 

1 

Pile-driver 

1,200 

7 

Lighters 

600 

5 

.do 

200 

i 

Pile-driver 

1,500 

9 

Lighters 

800 

1 

Pile-driver 

1,500 

1 

Lighter 

250 

2 

Schooner  lighters  . . . 

1,500 

i 

Sloop  lighter 

750 

12 

Trap  scows 

250 

3 

Pile-drivers 

750 

4 

Liehters 

400 

1 

Sail  scow 

800 

1 

do 

200 

10 

Trap  scows 

60 

3 

Pile-drivers 

1,000 

13 

Lighters 

140 

1 

Sail  scow 

600 

1 

do  ... 

300 

2 

Pile-drivers 

1,050 

1 

Cargo  lighter 

500 

2 

Fish  lighters 

250 

2 

Fish  scows 

100 

1 

Hand  pile-driver 

100 

9 

Lighters 

500 

17 

Fish  scows 

150 

1 

Hatchery  scow 

150 

5 

Lighters 

450 

i 

Pile-driver 

1,000 

4 

Lighters 

400 

1 

Pile-driver 

1,000 

2 

Lighters 

150 

4 

Scows 

250 

1 

Lighter 

50 

1 

Pile-driver 

1,150 

7 

Lighters 

350 

2 

Pile-drivers 

1,  500 

3 

Sail  lighters 

450 

7 

Trap  scows 

50 

2 

Pile-drivers 

1, 500 

2 

Lighters 

400 

3 

House  scows 

400 

5 

House  scows 

400 

i 

Pile-driver 

200 

i 

Lighter 

250 

3 

Lighters 

400 

1 

Pile-driver 

1,000 

2 

Lighters 

225 

1 

Fish  scow 

150 

1 

Lighter 

500 

1 

Cargo  lighter 

850 

1 

Pile-driver 

500 

1 

Scow 

30 

Boats,  etc. 


No. 

Description. 

V alue, 
each. 

80 

Columbia  River  gill-net 

6200 

boats. 

25 

Skiffs . 

30 

25 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

4 

Skiffs 

30 

17 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

3 

Skiffs . . . 

30 

50 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

100 

10 

Skiffs 

30 

34 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

100 

10 

Skiffs 

40 

28 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

100 

5 

Skiffs  

25 

19 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

100 

7 

Skiffs 

30 

30 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

10 

Skiffs 

25 

7 

Gill-net  boats 

100 

1 

Skiff 

25 

3 

Seine  boats,  F.  B 

too 

7 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

8 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

100 

15 

Skiffs 

25 

3 

Seine  boats 

75 

9 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

3 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

100 

10 

25 

2 

Seine  boats 

70 

8 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

10 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

100 

14 

Skiffs 

25 

0 

Seine  boats,  F.  B 

GO 

1 

Otter  boat 

100 

18 

Dories 

30 

3 

Skiffs... 

15 

20 

Seine  boats,  F.  B 

150 

33 

Dories 

25 

3 

Launch  tenders 

90 

0 

Hatchery  ears 

30 

15 

Seine  boats,  F.  B 

70 

3 

Sail  boats 

90 

13 

Dories 

30 

12 

Seine  boats 

120 

1 

Whitehall  boat 

75 

20 

Dories  and  skiffs 

20 

20 

Gill-net.  boats,  F.  B 

40 

' 5 

Skiffs 

30 

i 

Yawl 

40 

i 

Seine  boat 

100 

20 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

40 

3 

Skiffs 

25 

*2 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

20 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

40 

6 

Skiffs.  . 

30 

2 

Seine  boats 

200 

33 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

6 

Skiffs . . . 

25 

2 

Seine  boats 

200 

30 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

8 

Skiffs . . . 

25 

5 

Seine  boats 

75 

2 

Columbia  River  boats 

100 

4 

Gill-net  boats 

50 

2 

Dories  and  skiffs 

50 

56 

Columbia  Ri  ver  boats 

200 

3 

Skiffs . . . 

25 

2 

Columbia  River  boats 

90 

T 

Skiff 

25 

15 

Gill-net  boats 

60 

2 

Dories 

25 

3 

Seine  boats 

50 

3 

Columbia  River  boats 

150 

9 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

50 

12 

Seine  boats 

ICO 

12 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

50 

12 

Seine-boat  tenders 

35 

4 

Skiffs 

20 

1 

Seine  boat 

30 

1 

Dory 

10 

Royer-Warnock  Packing  Co.,  Beecher  Pass. 


330 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITE1>  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION, 


Boat  equipment,  1900 — Continued. 


Name  of  company  and  location  of 
cannery. 


Glacier  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.),  Point  High  - 
field. 


Thlinket  Packing  Co., Gerard  Point. 


Fidalgo  Island  Canning  Co.,  Ketchikan 

Alaska  Salmon  Packing  and  Fur  Co.  (A.  P. 
A.),  Loring. 

Boston  Fishing  and  Trading  Co.,  Yes  Bay. . 
Quadra  Packing  Co.,  Mink  Arm,  Boca  de 
Quadra. 

Metlakahtla  Industrial  Co.,Metlakahtla... 

North  Pacific  Trading  and  Packing  Co., 
Klawak. 

Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co.,  Hunter  Bay 


Unrigged  vessels. 


^0. 

Description. 

Value 

each. 

2 

Lighters 

SHOO 

1 

House  scow 

100 

1 

Fish  scow 

100 

2 

Lighters 

225 

3 

do 

75 

3 

Scows 

20 

2 

Cargo  lighters 

150 

20 

Fish  lighters 

75 

5 

Lighters 

50 

i 

House  scow 

75 

2 

Lighters 

100 

i 

Scow 

100 

2 

Lighters 

100 

2 

Fish  scows 

50 

1 

Pile-driver 

800 

Boats,  etc. 


No. 

Description. 

Value, 

each. 

7 

Seine  boats 

$60 

14 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

8 

Old  river  boats 

25 

5 

Skiffs 

25 

6 

Seine  boats 

60 

10 

Columbia  River  boats 

200 

6 

Gill-net  boats,  F.  B 

00 

2 

Whitehall  boats 

85 

3 

Skiffs 

20 

12 

Seine  boats 

70 

8 

Dories  and  skiffs 

30 

42 

Seine  boats 

50 

1 

Whitehall  boat 

50 

12 

Skiffs 

20 

4 

Seine  boats 

50 

6 

Skiffs 

25 

8 

Seine  boats 

100 

9 

SKiffs 

30 

7 

Seine  boats 

50 

6 

Sailboats 

100 

10 

Dories 

25 

11 

80 

5 

Skiffs 

25 

22 

Seine  boats 

50 

3 

Skiffs 

25 

Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  330.) 


Plate  XXX. 


MOUTH  OF  KARLUK  RIVER  WHERE  IT  EMPTIES  INTO  KARLUK  LAGOON. 


CALLBREATH’S  HATCHERY,  McHENRY  INLET,  ETOLIN  ISLAND. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


331 


THE  KARLUK  HATCHERY. 


By  Harry  Clifford  Fassett, 
U.  S.  Fish,  Commission. 


The  following  notes  concerning  the  salmon  hatchery  maintained  by  the  Alaska 
Packers  Association  near  Karluk,  Kadiak  Island,  Alaska,  are  based  upon  an  inspec- 
tion made  in  accordance  with  instructions  of  Captain  Moser  August  8,  1900. 

The  plant  is  a model  one.  It  is  located  on  the  southern  shore,  at  the  eastern  end 
of  the  Karluk  Lagoon,  near  the  outlet  of  Karluk  River,  where  a streamlet,  called  by 
the  hatchery  people  Shasta  Creek,  enters  the  lagoon  from  the  hills  to  the  southward. 
From  the  rising  ground  immediately  back  of  the  hatchery  Karluk  Head,  3 miles  west 
(magnetic),  may  be  seen  over  the  intervening  low  points,  with  the  cannery  buildings 
of  Karluk  Spit  showing  to  the  right  of  it.  Here  ground  was  broken  for  the  hatchery 
May  28, 1896,  and  on  August  29,  the  same  year,  construction  work  was  so  far  advanced 
that  stripping  was  begun.  The  actual  cost  of  the  present  plant  is  said  to  be  fully 
$20,000,  and  the  annual  expenditure  about$10, 000  for  maintenance,  repairs,  and  labor. 
Considering  the  extent  of  the  establishment,  the  rate  of  wages  necessarily  demanded 
from  its  isolation,  the  long  period  of  incubation,  and  expensive  methods  of  securing 
stock  tish,  this  hardly  seems  excessive. 

In  1897  a party  from  this  vessel  visited  this  hatchery,  the  results  of  whose  obser- 
vations are  contained  in  Captain  Moser’s  report  upon  “Alaska  Salmon  and  Salmon 
Fisheries,  1897,”  pages  155-157,  to  which  attention  is  invited. 

Since  then  the  establishment  has  been  considerably  improved,  without,  however, 
increasing  the  egg  capacity  of  the  hatching-house;  in  fact,  this  has  been  reduced  by 
one  trough,  which  was  removed  to  make  room  for  the  hot-water  drum  of  the  heating 
system.  A number  of  new  ripening  ponds  have  been  made,  the  rearing  or  nursery 
pond  enlarged,  and  the  original  ponds  remodeled.  In  the  main  building  the  dining 
room  and  kitchen  have  been  moved  upstairs,  an  additional  room  built  out  in  front', 
the  basement  enlarged  and  partly  cemented,  heating  system  enlarged  and  improved, 
and  an  electric-light  plant  installed.  The.  latter  has  a capacity  of  about  10  lights, 
with  25  outlets  at  present,  and  the  power  is  generated  by  a small  Pelton  wheel  fed 
by  a 6 -inch  pipe  under  a head  of  about  60  feet. 

The  main  building,  32  feet  by  100  feet,  faces  to  the  northward  (see  sketch).  Imme- 
diately west  of  it  are  a tramway  and  line  of  ponds,  the  latter  extending  down  the 
slope  along  the  original  bed  of  Shasta  Creek  northward  to  the  beach.  Abutting  the 
eastern  end  of  the  hatching-house  is  a covered  pond  known  as  the  “reservoir,”  and 
beyond,  in  the  same  direction,  a narrow  ditch  leads  to  the  nursery  pond.  A plank 
walk  extends  from  the  hatchery  steps  across  the  narrow  beach  flat  to  a short  wooden 
pier  which  ends  at  a condemned  lighter  weighted  with  stones,  forming  the  landing 
place.  Immediately  westward  of  the  landing  are  the  corrals.  On  either  flank  of 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


332 

the  main  building  are  small  outhouses,  sheds,  etc.,  and  close  to  the  rear  entrance  is  a 
small  shed  where  the  thermometers  are  kept.  South  of  the  hatching-house,  at  the 
head  of  a small  ravine  and  on  the  edge  of  a narrow  undulating  terrace  in  the  hills, 
the  present  sources  of  the  water  supply  are  brought  together. 

Shasta  Creek  is  a tiny  rill  draining  the  low  hills  to  the  southward  and  west- 
ward, and  has  an  average  volume  of  about  10  miner’s  inches  of  clear  water  of 
excellent  quality;  it  is  about  a mile  in  length  from  its  source  to  the  lagoon.  “The 
Ditch”  comes  in  from  the  eastward,  and  carries  the  waters  of  a small  creek  flowing 
down  the  side  of  a mountain,  about  a mile  distant,  which  is  locally  known  as  Sugar- 
loaf  Peak.  The  bed  of  the  ditch  is  now  well  settled  and  ballasted,  smooth,  free  from 
sudden  drops,  falls,  or  riffles,  of  a very  gradual  pitch,  and  carries  an  average  of 
between  25  and  30  miner’s  inches  of  clear,  colorless  water  of  excellent  quality;  it  is 
about  H miles  long.  At  the  end  of  the  ditch  its  waters  are  received  by  a shed- 
covered  tank  (the  “tank  house”),  in  the  bottom  of  which  is  the  connection  to  a line  of 
6-inch  piping  leading  to  the  hatchery  below;  a branch  of  this  system  supplies  the 
Pelton  wheel.  The  escape  or  waste  from  the  tank-house  finds  its  way  into  Shasta 
Creek,  close  by.  From  this  point  to  the  lagoon  beach  is  about  200  yards  in  a straight 
line. 

The  waters  of  Shasta  Creek  are  first  tapped  by  a line  of  iron  pipe  a short  distance 
above  the  tank-house;  this  pipe  is  used  for  filling  a car  at  the  upper  end  of  the  gravity 
tramway,  which  is  close  to  the  tank-house.  The  creek  passes  to  northward  and  west- 
ward of  the  tank-house  and  plunges  down  the  small  ravine  previously  mentioned, 
and  about  one-fourth  the  distance  to  the  beach  ends  in  the  highest  pond.  From  this 
pond,  called  No.  10,  or  the  “settling”  pond,  a wooden  flume  carries  part  of  the  water 
into  the  upper  part  of  the  hatching-house,  while  the  overflow  escapes  via  the  old  creek 
bed  to  the  next  pond  below.  The  settling-pond  also  receives,  in  its  northeastern 
corner,  the  waters  of  a small  spring  running  the  year  round;  this  corner  of  the  pond 
never  freezes.  The  escape  of  pond  No.  10  is  tapped  to  supply  another  short  line  of 
piping  which  leads  northward  to  the  next  pond,  where  it  is  used  in  connection  with  the 
tramway.  This  pond,  No.  9,  is  the  upper  ripening  pond  and  located  about  midway 
between  the  tank-house  and  the  beach.  In  close  order,  terraced  northward  down  the 
gentle  slope,  are  ripening-ponds  No.  8,  No.  7,  and  No.  6,  the  latter  housed  in.  From 
No.  6 the  waste  water  escapes  through  open  ponds  No.  12  and  No.  11  into  No.  1,  and, 
by  another  outlet,  to  pond  No.  13  and  thence  to  No.  1.  From  pond  No.  1 the  water 
passes  in  turn  through  No.  2,  No.  3,  and  No.  1,  and  thence  into  the  East  Corral.- 
Pond  No.  5 is  out  of  the  direct  line  of  the  system,  and  was  not  in  use  in  1900.  No.  13 
was  built  this  season,  but  had  not  been  placed  in  use  at  the  time  of  my  visit.  None 
of  the  water  used  in  the  ripening-ponds  goes  into  the  hatching-house. 

The  supply  for  the  hatching-house  is  first  by  the  pipe-line  which  leads  from  the 
ditch  (via  the  tank-house),  and  next  by  flume  from  the  settling-pond.  The  settling- 
pond  is  quite  deep,  much  more  so  than  any  other,  and  receives  its  feed  so  gently  as 
not  to  stir  the  sediment  from  the  bottom  and  roil  the  water.  As  its  name  implies, 
its  function  is  to  allow  the  small  debris  carried  by  the  creek  to  settle  before  passing- 
on  into  the  flume  or  to  the  lower  ponds.  The  discharge,  whether  from  the  pipe  line 
or  the  flume  passes  into  a filter  in  the  upper  stoiy  of  the  hatching-house,  thence  into 
a tank,  from  which  it  is  piped  to  the  troughs.  The  waste  water  discharges  into  the 


Bull.  U,  S.  F,  C.  1! 


w00s»mmii 


Plate  XXXI. 


Oa*A-  Houses 


SKETCH  PLAN  OF  SALMON-HATCHING  PLANT,  OPERATED  BY  ALASKA  PACKERS  ASSOCIATION  AT  SHASTA  CREEK,  KARLUK  LAGOON,  KADIAK  ISLAND. 

Scale  and  dimensions  arbitrary. 


' 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


333 


reservoir,  and  from  it  escapes  through  the  narrow  ditch  already  mentioned  into  the 
nursery,  or  rearing-pond,  whence  it  passes  through  a short  Hume  into  the  lagoon. 

As  far  as  the  circumstances  have  permitted,  the  ripening-ponds  have  been  dug 
rectangular  in  shape,  and  as  opportunity  affords  they  are  walled  up  with  rubble  and 
cement.  The  doors  are  of  broken  rock  and  gravel,  but  it  is  the  intention  to  cover 
these  with  cement  also  as  soon  as  time  permits.  The  fish  do  not  ripen  well  in  dirty 
water,  and  their  frequent  violent  movements  stir  up  any  mud  which  may  be  on  the 
bottom  or  in  the  interstices  of  the  sides.  The  same  movements  of  the  fish  tend  to 
keep  in  suspension  any  slime  or  other  foreign  material,  which  thus  passes  out 
through  the  wasteway,  and  this  is  so  slight  where  the  ponds  are  walled  solidly  that 
no  deleterious  effects  are  apparent,  even  after  the  water  has  passed  through  several 
ponds  full  of  ripening  fish. 

All  the  upper  ponds  have  sufficient  fall  between  one  and  another  for  excellent 
aeration,  a most  important  consideration  where  many  fish  are  impounded.  Covered 
pond  No.  6 has  the  best  arrangement  for  aeration,  which  may  be  described  as  follows: 
The  feed  water  passes  through  a wooden  trough  suspended  horizontally  over  the  pond 
and  extending  longitudinally  toward  the  center.  The  bottom  of  the  trough  is  about 
4 feet  above  the  surface  of  the  pond,  and  is  pierced  by  numerous  auger  holes,  through 
which  the  water  falls  in  tiny  streams.  Besides  giving  perfect  aeration  this  method 
distributes  the  supply  over  such  a large  area  that  the  impounded  fish  are  less  excited 
than  is  the  case  where  the  same  volume  enters  in  a single  stream;  they  keep  more 
quiet,  ripen  more  quickly,  and  if  they  do  leap  do  not  strike  against  anything  ivhich 
will  bruise  them,  but  merely  fall  back  into  the  pond  again.  This  arrangement  will 
be  extended  to  the  other  ponds  whose  relative  elevations  will  admit  of  it,  as  oppor- 
tunity offers.  The  low  ponds,  No.  3,  No.  4,  and  No.  5,  have  not  given  satisfaction, 
and  this  is  due  probably  to  lack  of  adequate  aeration.  No.  2,  however,  though  on 
practically  the  same  level  as  No.  3,  is  an  excellent  pond,  but  its  superiority  is  thought 
to  be  due  to  being  tightly  walled,  and  consequently  cleaner  than  its  mate.  No.  5 is 
expected  to  prove  satisfactory  after  it  has  been  cemented. 

When  a pond  is  to  be  gone  over  for  ripe  fish  the  water  is  lowered  to  a depth  of 
about  24  inches,  or  knee-deep,  the  waste  gates  being  arranged  to  let  it  fall  to  that 
depth,  but  no  less,  for  fear  of  smothering  the  fish.  A panel  of  slat  fencing  is  then 
lowered  into  the  water  at  one  end  and  pushed  slowly  toward  the  opposite  side  of  the 
pond,  the  spawn-takers  wading  behind  it.  The  fish  are  carefully  dipped  up, 
examined,  and  if  found  ripe  for  spawning  placed  in  a floating  car,  made  of  slats,  for 
future  attention;  if  still  green  they  are  freed  in  the  pond  behind  the  fence.  This 
method  of  handling  the  impounded  fish  has  proven  the  best  with  the  delicately 
organized  red  salmon,  and  explains  the  importance  of  having  the  ponds  of  a regular 
shape;  thus  every  fish  can  be  handled  and  every  ripe  one  secured  with  the  least 
injury.  After  the  operation  has  been  completed  the  fence  is  removed  and  the  live- 
car  of  ripe  fish  towed  gently  alongside  the  stripping  platform,  of  which  there  is  one 
at  each  ripening-pond. 

Stock  fish  for  the  natchery  are  secured  oy  seining  crews  working  under  the 
orders  of  the  superintendent  of  the  association’s  canneries  at  Karluk  Spit.  These 
, crews  are  composed  of  natives  who  are  borne  on  the  cannery  rolls.  The  principal 
seining-ground  is  on  the  northern  shore  of  the  lagoon,  opposite  the  hatchery,  from 


334 


BULLETIN  OE  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


the  mouth  of  the  river  downstream  to  a rocky  point  three-quarters  of  a mile 
westward.  After  a seine  haul  is  made  the  live  fish  are  bailed  into  two  live-cars, 
composed  of  old  dories  and  skiffs  with  square  ports  cut  between  each  frame,  over 
which  galvanized  wire  netting  of  H-inch  mesh  is  stretched.  Two  men  in  another 
boat  then  tow  the  live-cars  across  to  the  corrals,  where  the  fish  are  tallied  out.  It 
has  been  observed  that  it  is  much  better  to  impound  the  stock  fish,  especially  early 
in  the  season,  in  a large  inclosure.  When  first  taken  they  are  exceedingly  restless, 
chafing  under  restraint,  and  if  closely  confined  soon  become  scarred  and  bruised, 
causing  fungoid  growths  to  appear  quickly.  The  nearer  the  adult  fish  approaches 
maturity  the  more  quiet  it  becomes. 

The  corrals  are  two  in  number,  and  cover  an  area  of  about  3 acres,  the  East 
Corral  being  about  twice  as  large  as  the  West.  At  high  high  water  there  are  about 
10  feet  of  water  at  the  outer  edge  of  the  corrals  and  at  the  inshore  edge  about  2 or  3 
feet;  the  rise  and  fall  here,  extreme  range,  is  about  5 feet.  The  corral  fences  are 
composed  of  wire  and  cotton  netting,  the  latter  above,  stretched  between  piles  and 
stands  of  old  iron  pipe.  Everything  but  the  piling  is  removed  after  spawn-taking 
ceases  for  the  season;  the  piles  are  secured  after  the  ice  loosens  them  in  the  winter 
and  are  then  hauled  ashore. 

The  mortality  of  the  fish  seined  is  greatest  in  the  corrals,  as  they  receive  the 
roughest  treatment  in  the  process  of  first  capture.  In  discharging  the  live-cars  into 
the  East  Corral  the  cars  are  brought  bodily  inside  the  inclosure  through  a movable 
panel,  after  which  the  fish  are  dumped  out.  At  the  West  Corral  the  cars  are  towed 
alongside  an  opening  above  the  water  line  and  the  fish  dipped  over  from  the  outside. 

In  taking  fish  from  the  corrals  for  the  ripening  ponds  the  seine  is  again  employed, 
the  one  used  being  about  12  fathoms  in  length.  This  is  hauled  into  the  shoal  water 
off  the  lower  end  of  the  tramway;  four  large  floating  cribs  of  slats  are  then  secured 
to  the  cork  line  outside,  two  being  for  bucks  and  two  for  females.  The  fish  are 
then  picked  out  of  the  net  as  tenderly  as  possible  and  examined;  if  too  green  they 
are  passed  back  into  the  corral.  When  the  cribs  have  been  filled  with  a sufficient 
number  they  are  hauled  alongside  the  tramway  and  the  fish  dipped  out  into  a car, 
previously  filled  with  fresh  water,  in  which  they  are  transported  to  the  pond  pre- 
pared for  them  and  there  left  to  ripen.  When  fish  which  are  quite  or  nearly  ripe 
are  secured  they  are  taken  care  of  separately.  A number  of  fish  nearly  ripe  are 
often  taken  with  the  incoming  tide  from  the  No.  4 pond,  finding  their  way  through 
the  wasteway  as  the  water  rises. 

The  tramway  is  about  200  yards  long  and  leads  from  the  hill  near  the  tank- 
house  in  a straight  line,  crossing  several  ponds  en  route,  to  the  lagoon  beach  near 
the  eastern  end  of  the  East  Corral.  It  is  a gravity  road,  built  of  plank,  and  its  chief 
purpose  is  the  hauling  of  stock  fish  to  the  upper  ripening-ponds.  Two  strongly 
built  cars,  connected  by  a manila  cable,  are  used,  one  at  each  end  of  the  line.  After 
the  lower  car.  which  is  much  smaller,  has  been  filled  with  water  and  live  fish  the 
larger  one  at  the  upper  end  is  loaded,  also  with  water,  its  greater  weight  hauling 
the  lower  car  to  the  upper  ripening-pond,  No.  9,  midway  of  the  tramway,  where  the 
two  cars  meet.  Intermediate  stops,  as  required,  are  made  at  the  lower  ponds.  After 
discharging  the  fish  from  the  lower  car  enough  water  is  drawn  from  the  larger  one 
to  change  the  preponderance  of  weight,  and  the  cars  then  resume  their  original 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


335 


positions  at  either  end  of  the  line.  This  method  of  transportation  is  an  old  one, 
much  used  by  mining  men. 

As  already  indicated,  there  is  a spawning  platform  adjacent  to  each  ripening 
pond,  and  as  but  one  of  these  is  covered  the  spawn-taking  is  conducted  almost  wholly 
in  the  open  air.  In  1900  no  spawning  was  done  at  one  of  the  ponds,  it  being  used 
for  the  bucks  alone.  The  methods  employed  on  the  spawning  platform  and  in  the 
hatching-house  were  originally  those  followed  at  the  salmon  stations  of  the  United 
States  Fish  Commission,  and  more  especially  at  the  quinnat  hatchery  at  Baird,  Cal., 
the  changes  inaugurated  being  the  result  of  subsequent  experience  in  the  handling 
of  the  more  delicate  red  salmon. 

Spawning  is  done  by  hand  exclusively;  strait-jackets  are  not  necessary  with 
these  small  fish.  One  hundred  and  fifty  is  counted  a big  day’s  stripping,  though  as 
high  as  224  have  been  handled.  The  spawn  pans  are  circular,  9 inches  in  diameter  at 
the  top,  beveled  to  T inches  across  the  bottom,  and  inches  deep;  a thin  coat  of 
asphaltum  lacquer  prevents  their  rusting  and  renders  them  easily  cleansed.  Two 
methods  are  employed  in  the  taking  of  spawn;  the  first  method,  which  is  considered 
the  better,  is  the  “dry,”  the  mixing  of  eggs  and  milt  being  done  with  the  fingers. 
The  eggs  are  not  washed,  but  are  placed  directly  in  the  baskets  within  two  or  three 
minutes  after  stripping.  The  second  method  is  similar,  except  that  after  the  two  or 
three  minutes  have  elapsed  a little  water  is  added;  they  are  then  allowed  to  stand 
until  adhesion  ceases  and  basketed  without  washing.  When  circumstances  permit, 
tlie  milt  of  two  bucks  is  used  to  fecundate  the  eggs  of  one  female. 

Twenty -five  females  are  reckoned  to  a full  basket,  which,  at  the  estimated  average 
of  3,000  good  eggs  per  fish,  gives  a total  capacity  of  75,000  eggs  per  basket.  The 
diameter  of  the  redfish  egg  ranges  between  0.10  and  0.31  inch,  with  an  average  of 
about  0.22  inch.  It  is  much  lighter  in  color  than  the  egg  of  the  quinnat  salmon,  and 
has  a very  delicate  appearance.  At  Karluk  it  has  been  found  that  redfish  run  from 
2,500  to  4,500  eggs,  in  rare  instances  5,000,  and  that  a fair  average  will  be  about 
3,700;  but  there  is,  of  course,  a certain  unavoidable  loss  in  the  spawning  operation, 
and  frequently  a large  number  of  eggs  come  from  the  fish  dead;  3,000,  therefore,  is  a 
fair  average. 

A glance  at  the  sketch  plan  of  the  hatching-house  will  give  a fair  idea  of  its 
interior  floor  arrangement.  There  are  12  sets,  or  sections,  of  4 troughs  each,  and  f 
set  of  3,  making  a total  of  51  hatching-troughs.  These  troughs  all  measure  14  feet 
in  length,  16  inches  in  width,  and  7 inches  in  depth  inside.  They  are  built  of  clean- 
grained redwood,  all  sides  surfaced,  and  all  2 inches  thick.  In  making  the  joints  a 
thick  coating  of  asphaltum  tar  is  spread  over  the  parts  to  be  joined,  with  an  even 
layer  of  cotton  wadding  as  calking  material.  The  completed  trough  receives  a coat 
of  refined  tar  and  two  coats  of  asphaltum  varnish.  Built  in  this  manner  and  properly 
supported  the  troughs  will  not  warp  or  spring,  and  there  has  never  been  the  slightest 
difficulty  from  leaks.  This  is  an  important  consideration  in  the  hatching-house.  Not 
only  do  leaky  troughs  add  greatly  to  the  waste  of  water  and  keep  the  employees  uneasy 
concerning  the  amount  of  water  getting  to  the  eggs,  but  the  unavoidable  jarring  and 
other  shocks  connected  with  the  necessary  repairs  are  frequently  fatal  to  a large  num- 
ber of  eggs.  A dry  trough  makes  a dry  hatching-house,  and  in  a dry  house  only  will 
the  best  efficiency  of  the  egg-picking  crew  obtain.  Where  one  has  to  stand  on  a wet 


336 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


cold  floor  all  day  in  a chilly,  drafty  room,  at  work  requiring  deftness  of  touch  and 
close  attention,  considerable  endurance  is  needed  physically,  and  it  is  by  no  means 
unusual  at  hatcheries  to  have  to  call  in  new  help  while  the  regular  hatching-house 
force  are  suffering  from  colds,  rheumatic  attacks,  etc.  In  a dry,  well-lighted  hatchery 
the  interest  of  the  fish-culturist  does  not  wane  from  physical  causes,  and  the  eggs  and 
fry  consequently  receive  the  benefit  of  these  comforting  features.  Nearly  anyone 
will  hurry  through  with  his  allotted  number  of  baskets  in  a sloppy,  cheerless,  and 
chilly  barn,  slighting  the  work  in  spite  of  himself,  and  yet  the  same  person  would 
almost  always  give  intelligent  attention  to  a task  which  he  finds  extremely  interesting 
under  physically  comfortable  conditions. 

Besides  the  superintendent  the  permanent  force  of  the  station  numbers  6, 
including  a cook.  All  the  regular  work  of  fish-culture  is  done  by  this  force,  and  a 
large  part  of  the  building  and  permanent  improvements  is  executed  by  the  same 
persons.  When  additional  labor  is  necessary  a request  is  made  upon  the  superin- 
tendent of  the  association’s  canneries  at  Karluk  Spit. 

A furnace  in  the  basement  of  the  main  building,  directly  under  the  hatching- 
house,  heats  the  water  for  a system  of  piping  used  solely  for  artificial  heating.  A 
set  of  coils  is  arranged  directly  under  each  section  of  troughs,  and  there  is  also  a 
system  of  piping  on  the  bottom  of  the  reservoir  pond.  When  artificial  heat  is 
employed  in  forcing  the  hatching  of  the  eggs  the  steam  boiler  is  placed  in  use  to 
drive  the  pumps.  The  latter  draw  the  water  from  the  reservoir  pond,  where  it  has 
been  warmed,  discharging  it  into  the  filter  upstairs.  It  will  be  remembered  that  the 
waste  of  the  hatching-house  troughs  escapes  to  the  reservoir  pond,  but  before  using 
this  warm  water  again  filtering  and  aerating  are  necessary.  Just  enough  new  water 
is  added  to  freshen  the  supply  without  much  reducing  the  temperature,  and  very 
little  is  needed.  If  the  water  were  not  used  over  and  over  again  in  this  manner  it 
would  be  almost  impossible  and  entirely  impracticable  to  heat  it  sufficiently  during 
the  cold  winter  months,  but  the  system  of  aerating  and  freshening  is  so  well  con- 
trolled that  the  feed  water  remains  perfectly  good  after  repeated  use. 

The  feed  water  of  the  hatching-house,  whether  received  from  the  flume  or  pipe 
line,  is  thoroughly  filtered  before  passing  into  the  troughs.  Much  of  the  coarser 
debris,  such  as  straws,  twigs,  leaves,  etc.,  is  cleared  from  the  water  at  the  settling- 
pond  and  tank-house,  and  coarse-mesh  wire  screens  in  the  lower  end  of  the  flume  are 
also  employed.  Referring  to  the  sketch  it  will  be  seen  that  the  filter  is  simply  a set 
of  screens  of  varying  degrees  of  fineness,  arranged  in  a long  wooden  trough.  The 
water  falls  from  the  flume  or  pipe  upon  the  upper  end  of  the  top  screen,  which  is  a 
long  board  pierced  with  numerous  auger  holes.  These  holes  increase  in  diameter  as 
the  farther  end  is  approached,  and  the  board  is  given  sufficient  pitch  to  cause  the  water 
to  run  down  and  cover  it  all,  the  function  of  the  board  being  primarily  to  distribute 
and  incidentally  to  aerate. 

Falling  next  through  a fine-mesh  screen  of  wire  netting  the  water  is  received 
in  very  fine  spray-like  condition  by  the  last  and  lowest  tra}^  or  screen.  This  is  made 
of  burlap,  tightly  stretched  over  a strong,  light  wooden  frame,  and  has  proven  a 
most  excellent  filtering  material.  After  it  has  become  thoroughly  soaked  the  jute 
or  hemp  of  which  it  is  composed  swells  closely  and  tightly,  efficient^  cleansing  the 


Bull.  U S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  336.; 


Plate  XXXII. 


KARLUK  HATCHERY,  SHOWING  CORRALS,  AND  IN  DISTANCE  EEL-GRASS  BED. 


A RIPENING  POND,  KARLUK  HATCHERY. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


337 


water  of  very  line  particles.  With  the  more  than  usually  excellent  quality  of  water 
here,  and  its  lack  of  foreign  material,  the  above  arrangement  is  found  to  meet  the 
requirements  of  filtering.  Where  a refinement  of  this  feature  is  necessary,  however, 
it  will  readily  be  seen  that  there  is  no  limit  to  the  extension  of  the  number  or  fineness 
of  the  screens. 

The  burlap  used  is  of  a slightly  superior  quality  to  the  ordinary  bagging,  and  in 
addition  to  its  efficiency  has  its  cheapness  to  recommend  it.  When  stretched  on 
frames  it  should  be  evenly  secured,  as  its  shrinking  tendencies  cause  it  to  tear  where 
the  strains  are  unequal.  The  frames  should  be  small  and  in  sufficient  number  to 
allow  of  at  least  two  changes  in  addition  to  the  set  in  the  filter  trough.  This  is  neces- 
sary, as  the  burlap  will  rot  if  left  continuously  in  water,  but  if  removed  and  thor- 
oughly dried  every  ten  days  or  two  weeks  the  screens  will  last  a long  time.  Four 
or  5 feet  is  a good  length  for  the  frames.  When  using  more  than  one  set  of  bur- 
lap or  cloth  screens  care  should  lie  observed  that  the  joints  between  the  ends  of  the 
frames  do  not  occur  directly  below  each  other;  they  should  be  staggered — that  is, 
designed  to  occur  at  different  intervals— the  reason  for  which  is  plain. 


While  there  is  as  yet  but  one  filter  trough  in  the  hatchery  at  Karluk,  the  super- 
intendent, Mr.  James  A.  Richardson,  is  a strong  advocate  of  three,  arranged  some- 
what as  shown  in  the  sketch.  This  will  allow  one  to  be  in  use,  one  in  reserve,  and 
the  third  under  whatever  repairs  it  may  require.  With  a long  hatching  season  and  a 
long  nursing  period  little  opportunity  is  offered  to  overhaul  so  important  an  adjunct 
as  the  filter  if  to  do  so  requires  that  it  be  placed  temporarily  out  of  commission.  As 
the  expense  is  slight,  such  an  arrangement  has  much  to  recommend  it. 

It  is  stated  that  fungus  has  never  caused  trouble  at  the  Karluk  hatchery  under 
the  present  management;  at  the  old  station,  less  than  a mile  westward  on  the  same 
side  of  the  lagoon,  much  difficulty  was  experienced  from  this  cause.  It  is  due  to 
dirty  water,  unclean  troughs  and  baskets,  and  careless  and  insufficient  picking  of  the 


F.  C.  B.  1901—22 


338 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


eggs;  it  is  likewise  sometimes  caused  bjr  too  sluggish  a current  in  the  troughs,  too 
small  a supply  of  feed  water,  lack  of  aeration,  or  from  using  the  water  over  too 
many  times.  In  many  cases  fungus  will  not  occur  if  troughs  and  baskets  are  kept 
clean  and  the  water  is  properly  filtered. 

The  troughs  are  designed  to  hold  five  baskets  each,  allowing  for  the  necessary 
space  between  each  for  division  plates,  as  well  as  the  compartments  at  each  end  for 
receiving  and  aerating  and  discharging  the  flow  of  water.  The  aerators  are  of  tin 
of  the  usual  pattern  and  distribute  the  water  well;  at  the  opposite  end  of  the  trough 
is  the  usual  arrangement  of  drainage  plugs.  The  division  plates  are  arranged  accord- 
ing to  the  so-called  Williamson  system;  that  is,  the  first  plate  rests  on  the  bottom  of 
the  trough  with  the  water  flowing  over  it,  and,  a short  distance  beyond,  the  second 
plate  comes  flush  with  the  surface,  but  allows  the  flow  to  pass  under  it,  the  most 


approved  method  of  conducting  feed  water  through  salmon  eggs.  Instead  of  rigid 
plates  sliding  in  grooves  at  set  intervals,  division  plates  of  light  galvanized  sheet 
iron,  thickly  asphalted,  are  used;  these  are  half  an  inch  longer  than  the  width  of  the 
trough  and  are  snapped  or  sprung  in  at  any  point  desired.  A drop  of  about  1 V 
inches  is  given  each  trough,  and  the  water  is  used  four  times  before  discharging  into 
the  waste  trough. 

The  waste  trough  is  a continuous  wooden  box,  built  of  heavy  redwood  boards, 
which  passes  under  the  lower,  or  fourth,  trough  of  each  set  and  carries  off  the  entire 
waste  of  the  hatching-house;  it  passes  around  the  south  wall  and  part  of  the  east  wall 
and  thence  into  the  reservoir,  where  it  discharges. 

The  baskets  are  21  inches  long,  15  inches  wide,  and  6£  inches  deep,  inside  meas- 
urement., made  of  galvanized-wire  netting  secured  to  a single  wooden  frame.  The 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


339 


frames  are  of'clear  sugar  pine  and  redwood,  Id  inches  wide  by  five-eighths  inch  thick. 
The  netting  is  five-eighths  inch  in  the  length  of  the  mesh  and  6 meshes  to  the  inch, 
which  is  found  the  best  size  for  redfish  eggs;  netting  with  meshes  per  inch  has 
been  used,  but  this  is  a tritie  large.  Baskets  with  a single  wooden  frame  around  the 
top  are  found  quite  rigid  enough  and  have  a great  advantage  in  the  small  space 
occupied  by  a large  number  when  stored  away,  the  absence  of  the  lower  frame 
admitting  of  very  snug  nesting. 

While  the  capacity  of  each  trough  is  5 baskets,  it  is  preferred  to  use  not  more 
than  4 per  trough,  reserving  the  fifth  space  for  “fleeting’’  in  cleaning.  It  has  been 
found  that  redfish  eggs  require  the  cleanest  of  troughs  and  baskets,  as  well  as  the 
most  careful  handling.  The  troughs  are  therefore  cleaned  as  frequently  as  circum- 
stances will  admit,  never  less  than  once  a week,  and  as  often  as  every  other  day 
when  possible.  Thus,  by  having  the  fifth  space  unoccupied  the  entire  trough  can 
be  thoroughly  scrubbed  without  lifting  a single  basket  of  eggs;  all  the  baskets  are 
moved  one  space  toward  the  lower  end  of  the  trough  and  returned  to  their  original 
positions  one  at  a time  as  their  respective  spaces  are  cleaned.  By  fleeting  in  this 
manner  jars  are  avoided  and  the  eggs  remain  water-borne  at  all  times — an  especially 
essential  desideratum  during  the  tender  period. 

As  previously  mentioned,  a full  basket  of  redfish  eggs  is  reckoned  as  containing 
75,000.  Thus,  with  51  troughs  equipped  with  4 baskets  each,  or  204  baskets,  the 
hatching-house  capacity  may  be  conservatively  given  as  15,300,000  eggs;  and  by 
crowding  in  5 baskets  to  a trough,  making  a total  of  255  for  the  house,  the  capacity 
can  be  increased  to  more  than  19,000,000.  These  figures  merely  show  the  number 
of  eggs  which  may  be  placed  in  the  baskets  at  one  time,  or  what  the  hatching- house 
will  hold  without  using  the  baskets  over  again.  Generally  it  does  not  follow  that 
this  is  the  capacity  for  the  season,  but  unfortunately  it  does  at  Karluk.  Here  the 
period  of  incubation  is  so  long  that  eggs  taken  at  the  very  opening  of  the  salmon 
run,  saj'  the  latter  part  of  May,  will  not  be  hatched  out  until  the  close  of  the  season, 
late  in  September,  after  which  but  a trifling  percentage  of  the  spawn  is  taken.  The 
number  of  egg's  basketed  prior  to  July  1 is  also  quite  small,  and  the  gain  in  capacity 
is  therefore  too  trifling  to  be  taken  into  consideration.  Hence  these  figures  may  be 
accounted  correct  as  the}''  stand. 

It  is  unfortunate  that  a full  series  of  data  is  not  available  for  an  analysis  of  the 
period  of  incubation  under  the  various  prevailing  conditions.  Until  this  season  ( 1900) 
the  superintendent  has  been  unable  to  keep  complete  records  of  anything  beyond  the 
merest  outline  of  the  season’s  work.  A detailed  record  of  temperatures  and  the 
duration  of  the  various  stages  of  incubation,  representative  of  baskets  of  normal 
eggs  taken  at  regular  intervals  during  the  stripping  season,  is  being  kept  now,  and  it 
is  believed  this  material  will  be  available  for  study  later.  These  observations  will 
be  carried  on  until  the  last  of  the  fry  shall  have  been  planted.  Such  data,  however, 
as  could  be  obtained  is  herewith  submitted,  believing  that  much  of  it  will  be  of 
interest  and  that  possibly  some  of  it  may  prove  of  value  in  the  future. 

In  1896  spawn-taking  commenced  on  August  29  and  was  continued  at  intervals 
of  two  or  three  days  until  November  28,  3,200,000  eggs,  in  fair  condition,  being 
basketed  during  this  time.  Considering  the  diseased  state  of  most  of  the  stock  fish 
secured,  that  this  was  the  first  season  of  operation,  and  that  the  plant  was  still  in 


340 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


a partially  unfinished  state,  the  l'esult  was  deemed  good,  impregnation  by  the 
methods  at  first  employed  was  not  always  assured,  and  the  losses  were  in  consequence 
somewhat  augmented. 

After  stripping  began  daily  temperature  observations  of  the  hatchery  water 
were  recorded,  from  which  the  table  below  has  been  condensed.  The  highest 
temperature  recorded  during  the  summer  (1896)  was  48°  F.,  and  the  lowest,  during 
the  following  winter,  33°  F. 


Month  and  year. 

Temperature  of  hatchery 
water. 

Month  and  year. 

Temperature  of  hatchery 
water. 

Max. 

Min. 

Mean. 

Max. 

Min. 

Mean. 

O 

O 

O 

o 

o 

o 

36 

42.5 

35 

33 

+34 

Oct,,  1896  

40 

35 

39 

Feb.,  1897  

35 

33 

+34 

Nov.,  1896 

86 

33 

35.2 

Mar..  1897 

34 

33 

33.8 

Dec.,  1896  

35 

33 

+ 34 

These  figures  represent  the  temperature  of  the  feed  water  as  it  came  from  the 
creek  under  natural  conditions.  During  part  of  the  time  the  water  in  the  hatching- 
troughs  was  warmed  artificially  and  the  temperature  there  was  somewhat  higher. 
Unfortunately  no  exact  data  of  thermal  conditions  during  the  forcing  or  hastening 
process  were  kept,  but  it  is  stated  that  the  temperature  was  slowly  raised  10°  or  12° 
above  that  then  prevailing,  and  then  kept  at  that  point,  about  46°  to  48°  F. 

The  temperature  of  the  air  outside  of  the  hatchery  for  November  and  December, 
1896,  and  January,  February,  and  March,  1897,  is  summarized  as  follows: 


Temperature. 

Period. 

Days.  hrs. 
2 15 

5 21 

Between  10°  and  20°  above 

Between  20°  and  30°  above 

21  7 

41  11 

71  4 

8 14 

The  eggs  taken  August  29,  1896,  eyed  in  60  days,  with  the  water  in  the  troughs 
ranging  between  45°  and  35°  and  the  mean  40.5°  F.  These  eggs  hatched  out  in  165 
days.  The  eggs  taken  September  16  eyed  in  100  days,  with  the  temperature  ranging 
between  44°  and  33°  and  the  mean  36. 2°  F.  These  also  hatched  in  165  days,  but  during 
the  last  42  days  of  the  incubating  period  artificial  heat  was  used.  The  eggs  taken 
September  23  were  eyed  in  111  days,  temperature  ranging  between  -13°  and  33°  and 
mean  34.5°  F.  Artificial  heat  was  employed  to  hasten  development  during  a period 
of  about  six  weeks  at  the  latter  end  of  this  period. 

In  1897  spawn-taking  was  carried  on  from  August  19  to  December  9,  and  2,285 
females  were  stripped.  Less  than  1 per  cent  of  them  were  spawned  in  August,  about 
85  per  cent  in  September,  and  14  per  cent  in  October,  November,  and  December. 
From  September  6 to  20,  only  15  da\+s,  65.5  per  cent  of  the  salmon  were  spawned. 
The  greatest  number  spawned  in  one  day  was  224,  on  September  25. 

Concerning  the  relative  proportion  of  males  to  females  taken  and  their  mortality 
in  the  stock  ponds,  or  corrals,  the  following  note  is  of  interest:  Of  6,640  salmon 


II.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  340.) 


Plate  XXXIII. 


TRANSFERRING  STOCK  FISH  TO  CORRALS  AT  KARLUK  HATCHERY,  KADIAK  ISLAND. 


METHOD  OF  DRAWING  OFF  FRY  FROM  NURSERY  POND,  KARLUK  HATCHERY,  KADIAK  ISLAND. 


1 


K 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


341 


impounded  in  the  river  corral,  4,170  were  males  and  2,470  females.  Of  3,292  dead 
salmon  removed  from  the  corral,  representing  the  loss  in  the  inclosure  for  the  season, 
1,998  were  males  and  1,294  females. 

The  amount  of  spawn  placed  in  baskets  during  the  1897  season  was  not  learned, 
but  the  superintendent  stated  that  “fully  6,000,000  fry  were  ‘turned  out’  from  the 
eggs  taken  in  1897.”  To  this  should  be  added  the  amount  of  eggs  lost  in  the  hatchery 
troughs,  say  20  per  cent,  and  the  loss  from  malformations,  etc.,  say  6 to  10  per  cent. 
It  is  estimated  that  about  5,000,000  fry  were  planted. 

The  facilities  of  the  establishment  had  been  much  improved  since  the  preceding 
year,  spawn-taking  was  conducted  under  much  better  circumstances,  and  the  expe- 
rience gained  may  also  be  considered  a material  factor  in  this  season’s  hatching-house 
results.  It  was  observed  that  the  fry  hatched  were  more  vigorous  and  healthy  in 
appearance,  though  hatching  more  slowly.  The  eggs  taken  August  19  were  hatched  in 
210  days;  those  taken  October  7 and  November  2 were  123  and  138  days,  respectively, 
in  simply  eyeing  out!  No  artificial  heat  was  used  in  hastening  the  development  of 
the  ova  that  luiar — season  1897.  Beyond  the  foregoing  there  are  no  data  available 
concerning  the  hatching  period,  etc. 

Preparations  were  being  made  at  the  time  of  my  visit  to  increase  the  hatching- 
house  capacity  by  13  more  troughs,  to  bring  the  total  up  to  64;  to  extend  Sugarloaf 
Ditch  so  as  to  tap  the  waters  of  another  stream  farther  to  the  eastward,  a mile  or 
more;  to  extend  the  nursery  system,  and  to  improve  the  present  retaining  or  ripening 
ponds  in  the  manner  previously  outlined. 

The  following  shows  the  temperature  recorded  in  the  hatching-house  feed  water: 


Month  and 

High. 

Low. 

Mean. 

Month  and 

High. 

Low. 

Mean. 

year. 

Max. 

Mean. 

Min. 

Mean. 

year. 

Max. 

Mean. 

Min. 

Mean. 

Apr.,  1897... 

O 

37 

O 

-37 

O 

33 

O 

34.7 

O 

35.8  ' 

Nov.,  1897 

O 

39 

O 

+30 

O 

33 

o 

35.1 

O 

35. 5 

May,  1897  ... 

47 

43 

34 

37.7 

40.3 

Dec.,  1897 .... 

39 

30 

33 

35.3 

35.6 

■June,  1897. . . 

50 

47.  7 

40 

42.5 

45.1 

Jan. , 1898  .... 

36 

34.8 

33 

34.3 

34.5 

Sept.,  1897  .. 

52 

46.3 

37 

42.8 

44.5 

Feb.,  1898 .... 

30 

34.6 

33 

34.2 

34.4 

Oct.,  1897  ... 

45 

39.1 

33 

37.7 

38.9 

Mar.,  1898.... 

39 

36 

33 

34.6 

35.3 

The  temperature  of  the  air,  dry  bulb,  outside  the  hatchery  during  the  winter  is 
summarized  as  follows,  for  November  and  December,  1897,  and  January,  February, 
and  March,  1898: 


Temperature. 

Period. 

Between  10°  below  and  zero 

Dai/s.  hrs. 
0 2 

Between  zero  and  10°  above 

12  13 

Between  10°  and  20°  above 

11  19 

Between  20°  and  30°  above 

31  22 

Between  30°  and  40°  above 

83  20 

Between  40°  and  50°  above 

10  20 

The  records  for  the  spawning  season  of  1898  are  again  woefully  incomplete. 
Some  fish  are  reported  as  spawned  in  June,  and  from  July  5 to  November  30,  5,000,000 
eggs  were  placed  in  baskets.  Of  the  latter  80  per  cent  were  taken  prior  to  October  4: 
the  remainder  were  obtained  in  gradually  diminishing  numbers  until  November  30. 


342 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


No  temperature  records  whatever  are  available,  but  the  hatching  periods  were 
noted  as  per  table  below.  The  lack  of  thermal  data  is  deplored,  but  is  accounted  for 
1>3t  the  unavoidable  absence  of  the  regular  superintendent  the  greater  part  of  the  time. 


Eggs 
taken  in 
1898. 

Hatched  first. 

Hatched  last. 

Mean  hatching  pe- 
riod. 

Range  in  hatching. 

Eggs 
taken  in 
1898. 

Date. 

Days. 

Date. 

Days. 

Oct.  19,1898 

106 

Sept.  9. 

July  8.. 

Oct.  20, 1898 

104 

Nov.  20,1898 

135 

120 

31 

Sept.  10. 

July  11 . . 

Oct.  21, 1898 

102 

Sept.  12. 

114 

Sept.  14. 

July  17.. 

Nov.  1898 

113 

Dec.  6, 1898 

148 

132 

35 

Sept.  15. 

July  19.. 

113 

Sept.  16. 

July  21. 

Nov.  12, 189K 

114 

J uly  23. . 

Nov.  26,1898 

116 

Sept.  22. 

July  25.. 

Nov.  27,1898 

125 

Jan.  10,1899 

169 

147 

44 

Sept.  27. 

July  29. . 

Nov.  30, 1893 

124 

Sept.  28. 

Dec.  28,1898 

147 

Aug.14.. 

Dec.  27, 1898 

135 

Jan.  20,1899 

159 

147 

24 

Oct.  4.. 

Aug. 26. . 

Jan.  6, 1899 

133 

Apr.  11,1899 

228 

182 

95 

Oct.  7.. 

Aug. 30. . 

Jan.  6, 1899 

129 

Apr.  11,1899 

224 

177 

95 

Oct.  10.. 

Sept.  5. . 

Jan.  15,1899 

132 

Apr.  18,1899 

225 

179 

93 

Oct.  13.. 

Sept.  6.. 

Jan.  30,1899 

146 

Mav  3, 1899 

239 

193 

93 

Oct.  20.. 

Hatched  first. 


Date. 

Days. 

Feb. 

14,1899 

158 

Feb. 

18, 1899 

161 

Feb.  19-20,  '99 

160 

Feb. 

26, 1899 

165 

Feb. 

22, 1899 

160 

Feb. 

21 , 1899 

158 

Feb. 

26, 1899 

160 

Feb. 

23, 1899 

154 

Mar. 

3, 1899 

157 

Apr. 

11,1899 

195 

Apr. 

10, 1899 

192 

May 

1 , 1899 

209 

Mav 

3, 1899 

208 

May 

5,1899 

197 

Mav 

8, 1899 

207 

May 

6, 1899 

198 

Hatched  last. 

Mean  hatching  pe- 
riod. 

Range  in  hatching. 

Date. 

Days. 

May  15,1899 
May  15,1899 
May  22, 1899 

247 

245 

250 

204 

203 

208 

86 

85 

85 

May  23,1899 

246  203 

86 

1 

From  this  record  the  following  summary  has  been  prepared: 


Eggs  taken  in  1898. 

Hatch  first 
(in  days). 

Hatch  last 
(in  days). 

Average 

hatching 

period. 

Average 
range  in 
hatching. 

July 

113 

151 

133 

37 

August 

136 

204 

169 

71 

September 

161 

242 

198 

88 

October  

204 

(?) 

(?) 

(?) 

In  1899  there  were  spawned  2,837  red  salmon,  as  follows: 


Spring  run. 

Fall  run. 

Date. 

No. 

Date. 

No. 

June  27-30  

14 

Aug.  28-31 

23 

July  1-31 

1,357 

Sept.  1-30 

1, 178 

Aug.  1-10 

60 

Oct.  1-31 

195 

10 

1,431 

Total 

1,406 

1,431 

Grand  total  for  season, 

899  



2,837 

Of  the  season’s  take  the  spring  run  therefore  amounted  to  50.1  per  cent  as 
against  19.6  per  cent  for  the  fall  run.  Considering  the  season  as  a unit,  the  monthly 
percentages  of  fish  spawned  are  as  follows:  June,  0.5  per  cent;  July,  17.9  per  cent; 
August,  2.9  per  cent;  September,  11.5  per  cent:  October,  0.8  per  .cent;  November, 
0.1  per  cent. 

Taken  at  the  usual  hatchery  count  of  3,000  eggs  per  average  spawn  fish,  there 
should  have  been  basketed  more  than  8,500,000  eggs,  but  the  superintendent  has  only 
credited  the  hatching-house  with  6,000,000,  “owing  to  shrinkage  in  various  ways.” 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


343 


The  first  eggs  were  taken  June  27  from  a few  fish,  but  were  not  basketed;  the 
milt  curdled  when  it  came  in  contact  with  the  eggs,  and  it  was  not  thought  impregna- 
tion would  take  place.  Spawning  was  again  carried  on  June  30,  when  the  milt  once 
more  curdled  upon  contact  with  the  eggs,  and  none  of  the  latter  were  basketed. 
July  3 the  first  eggs  were  placed  in  the  troughs,  although  the  same  condition  of  milt 
was  met  with.  This  curdling  tendency  continued  in  a diminishing  degree  for  about  a 
week  longer,  when  it  ceased;  strange  to  say  it  did  not  affect  the  vitality  of  the  sperm 
as  far  as  could  be  judged.  Spawning  was  carried  on  about  every  other  day  in  July, 
the  run  slacking  up  toward  the  latter  part  of  the  month;  in  August  eggs  were  taken 
three  times  up  to  the  10th,  from  which  time  until  the  28th  none  were  taken.  With 
the  beginning  of  the  fall  run  work  went  on  once  more  every  other  day  until  the  end 
of  September;  during  October  spawn  was  taken  on  an  average  of  about  once  a week, 
and  the  last  stripping  of  10  fish  was  done  November  3.  On  the  last-mentioned  date 
about  40  adult  salmon,  still  unripe,  were  released  from  the  reservoir  and  turned  into 
the  river. 

The  period  of  incubation  varies  with  the  temperature  of  the  water,  of  course,  but 
it  is  also  believed  to  be  of  less  duration  with  eggs  taken  from  the  spring  run  than  is 
the  case  with  those  of  the  later  or  fall  run.  That  is,  the  eggs  of  the  spring  run  of 
redfish  seem  to  have  a more  vigorous  vitality,  hatching  more  rapidly  under  similar 
thermal  conditions;  but  this  is  still  a matter  of  opinion  and  must  remain  so  until  the 
collection  of  sufficient  data  from  which  to  draw  careful  conclusions. 

From  the  meager  figures  at  hand  for  the  1899-1900  season  the  following  table 
has  been  prepared: 


Eggs  taken  in  1899. 

Eyed. 

Hatching  period. 

Hatch- 

ing 

range. 

Prema- 

ture 

births. 

First. 

Last. 

Mean. 

Julv  3 

30 

74 

109 

92 

35 

23 

July  13 

40 

125 

109 

132 

121 

23 

July  31 

93 

185 

139 

92 

62 

Aug.  3 

90 

127 

202 

165 

83 

75 

Aug.  28 

65 

126 

199 

163 

73 

74 

Sept.  7 

64 

161 

206 

184 

62 

158 

214 

186 

56 

75 

154 

218 

1S6 

Sept.  20 

81 

162 

223 

193 

61 

89 

207 

237 

222 

30 

Oct.  14 

110 

199 

230 

215 

31 

Oet.  21... 

125 

186 

Summary. 

35 

91 

122 

107 

31 

July  31-Aug.  10  ... 

110 

193 

151 

83 

69 

152 

212 

182 

60 

Sept.  30-Oct.  27 

108 

197 

233 

215 

36 

Remarks 


Delicate  period, 
Sept.  1-Oct.  15. 


Delicate  period, 
Oct.  20-  ? 


Spring-  run. 
Fall  run. 


Eggs  taken  in  1899. 


Spring  run 
Fall  run . . 
Season 


Eyed. 


Hatching  period. 


First. 


100 

174 

137 


Last. 


158 

222 

190 


129 

198 

163 


Hatch- 

ing 

range. 

58 

48 

53 


Note.— In  the  above  table  a day  of  24  hours  is  the  unit. 


344 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


It  would  appear  from  the  above  that  the  eggs  eye  very  much  faster  with  the 
spring  run,  and  that  the  hatching  range  covers  a much  longer  period.  It  is  also 
apparent  that  in  considering  the  hatching  of  redfish  at  Karluk  the  two  runs  must 
be  treated  separately — the  runs  are  so  marked  and  the  prevailing  conditions  so 
radically  different.  For  example,  eye-spots  have  appeared  in  30  days  in  spring-run 
eggs,  and  have  with  fall-run  eggs  been  as  long  as  138  days  before  being  visible. 
With  the  early  run  eye-spots  are  looked  for  between  35  and  40  days,  the  interval 
advancing  with  the  season;  with  fall  eggs  the  eye-spots  are  not  expected  until  more 
than  two  months  have  passed,  the  time  again  increasing  with  the  advancement  of 
the  season.  The  “tender  stage”  is  a variable  quantity,  difficult  to  calculate;  it  is 
carefully  looked  for  within  about  three  weeks  from  the  stripping,  but  may  not  occur 
for  as  many  months.  Its  duration  is  also  variable,  anywhere  from  one  to  five  or  six 
weeks,  depending  upon  the  temperature,  and  it  is  thought,  other  conditions  not  yet 
known.  This  season,  1900,  no  tender  condition  had  made  its  appearance  up  to 
August  8. 

The  period  of  incubation  ranged  in  1899  from  74  days  to  237  days,  and  there  is 
a maximum  record  for  some  prior  season  of  244  days.  The  early  run  in  1899,  under 
natural  conditions  of  temperature,  hatched  in  an  average  of  129  days,  whereas  the 
fall  run  required  198  days.  Seven  months  is  supposed  to  be  the  period  of  incubation 
under  natural  conditions,  with  the  temperature  at  a mean  minimum  during  the  cold- 
est months  of  between  33°  and  35°  F.,  and  this  seems  to  be  a fairly  correct  approxi- 
mation, judging  from  the  record  of  the  October  eggs  of  1899  and  the  following 
temperature  record: 

Temperatures  in  hatching  troughs,  winter  1899-1900. 


Month. 

Mean 

maximum. 

Mean 

minimum. 

Mean. 

o 

o 

o 

October,  1899  

42 

40 

41 

November,  1899 

40 

38 

39 

December,  1899 

+3/ 

36 

-37 

January,  1900 

-37 

+ 35 

36 

February,  1900 

37 

35 

36 

March,  1900  

38 

36 

37 

April,  1900 

39 

36 

+37 

In  1900  the  seining  crew  delivered  into  the  river  corrals  79,753  adult  salmon. 
Of  this  number  13,123  escaped  from  time  to  time  through  the  water  gate  when 
opened  to  admit  live-cars,  and  through  breaks  in  the  corral  fences  during  the  time  the 
corrals  were  in  use.  114  days;  there  were  also  lost  7,334  stock-fish  at  a time  when  the 
fencing  of  one  of  the  corrals  blew  down.  The  proportion  of  males  to  females 
among  these  20,457  fish  which  escaped  alive  is,  of  course,  unknown.  The  remaining 
59,296  comprised  33,523  males  and  25,773  females,  which  are  accounted  for  as  follows: 


Males. 

Females. 

Total. 

14, 324 
19, 199 

19,498 

6,275 

33, 822 
25, 474 

33, 523 

25, 773 

59, 296 

ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1900. 


345 


Of  these  fish  7,270  males  and  15,579  females,  or  a total  of  22,849,  were  trans- 
ferred to  the  ripening-ponds  during  the  season,  as  follows: 


Month. 

Males. 

Females. 

Total. 

June 

1,931  . 

3,974 

5, 905 

July 

2, 296 

5, 574 

7, 870 

August 

2,  225 

3, 658 

5, 883 

September 

818 

2,373 

3,191 

Total 

7,270 

15,  579 

22, 849 

No  report  of  the  egg-take  for  the  season  has  been  received,  but  5,524  females 
were  spawned  in  all.  Applying  the  usual  Karluk  hatchery  factor  of  3,000  per  average 
fish,  the  take  would  appear  to  have  been  16,582,000  eggs.  Allowing,  however,  for 
“other  shrinkage  in  various  ways,”  and  judging  from  the  hatchery  capacity, 
15,000,000  eggs  would  appear  to  be  a fair  estimate. 

According  to  a report  from  the  hatchery,  under  date  of  November  3,  1900,  all 
the  June  eggs  and  part  of  the  July  eggs  had  hatched  out,  producing  an  excellent  lot 
of  healthy  fry.  It  was  found  (1900)  that  the  earlier  eggs  and  the  September  eggs 
were  the  best,  while  a portion  of  those  taken  during  the  middle  of  the  season  were 
of  indifferent  quality. 

The  following  temperatures  of  the  water  in  the  hatching-troughs  are  recorded: 


Month. 

High. 

Low. 

M can . 

Remarks. 

Max. 

Mean. 

Min. 

Mean. 

o 

o 

O 

O 

O 

Mav,  1900 

48 

43 

36 

38.7 

40.9 

June,  1900 

57 

49.3 

39 

41  7 

45. 5 

57°  June  28. 

July,  1900 

57 

51 

43 

45 

48 

57°  July  9. 

August,  1900  

56 

50.2 

42 

46.3 

48.2 

September,  1900. . 

48 

46.1 

39 

43.1 

44.6 

October,  1900 

46 

41 

34 

40 

40.5 

November,  1900. . 

39 

36.6 

34 

36.1 

36.3 

December,  1900.. 

38 

35.3 

33 

34.7 

35 

33°  Dec.  22  and  31. 

January,  1901 

36 

34.4 

34 

34.3 

34.3 

The  eggs  of  the  redtish  readily  admit  of  forcing,  but  to  what  extent  is  not 
known.  Judging  from  the  fact  that  “freaks”  or  malformations  and  prematures 
occur  anywhere  from  20  to  80  days,  90  days  would  seem  the  limit  of  safety,  but  at 
what  temperature  the  limit  is  reached  is  not  yet  known.  At  Karluk  fall-run  eggs 
have  been  successfully  forced  to  hatch  in  165  days,  or  say  45  days  sooner  than  would 
have  been  the  case  under  natural  conditions.  To  do  this  the  temperature  during  the 
last  42  to  45  days — that  is,  after  the  one  hundred  and  twentieth  day — was  artificially 
raised  to  46°  and  48°,  or  10°  to  12°  higher  than  otherwise  would  have  obtained.  It 
has  been  observed  that  during  warm  misty  or  rainy  weather  eggs  which  are  nearly 
ready  to  hatch  will  be  hastened  by  several  days. 

After  a basket  of  eggs  has  been  placed  in  a trough  at  the  Karluk  hatchery  it 
receives  the  most  tender  care.  For  the  first  two  or  three  days  the  basket  is  not 
touched,  but  remains  “buried”  under  the  canvas  tarpaulin;  it  is  then  handled  once  a day 
for  the  next  four  or  five  days  by  the  superintendent  himself,  who  merely  floats  the  eggs 
once,  very  gently,  and  picks  off  the  dead  eggs  and  “empties”  showing  on  top;  after 


346 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


this,  and  until  the  “ unctuous”  stage  has  passed,  an  expert  egg-picker  removes  the  bad 
eggs,  the  superintendent  having  previously'  floated  them  on  top.  When  the  unctuous 
stage,  lasting  from  eight  to  twenty  days,  during  which  the  eggs  are  verv  delicate  and 
have  a certain  indescribable  oily  appearance,  lias  passed,  the  basket  is  henceforth  in 
the  hands  of  one  of  the  hatching-house  force,  who  is  responsible  for  it  until  the  end. 

Ordinary  tin  forceps  are  employed  in  picking,  but  they  are  critically  examined 
by  the  superintendent  before  they  are  used,  to  see  that  there  are  no  sharp  edges  or 
corners  to  cut  the  tender  skin  of  an  egg.  Frequent  inspection  of  the  forceps  con- 
tinues throughout  the  season.  The  eggs  are  picked  very  thoroughly  until  the  second 
tender  period  begins,  usually  a short  time  before  eyeing  takes  place;  after  this  stage 
has  passed  the  eggs  may  be  handled  with  greater  freedom,  but  vigilance  and  tender 
care  are  observed  throughout  the  season.  Jars,  sudden  knocks,  rapid  changes  in 
temperature,  or  other  shocks  are  particularly  guarded  against,  and  a basket  of  eggs 
is  never  lifted  from  a trough  when  it  can  be  avoided.  In  affixing  to  the  trough  the 
small  pasteboard  tag  describing  the  basket,  no  hammer  is  used,  but  the  broad-headed 
and  short,  sharp-pointed  tack  is  forced  home  with  the  thumb.  Great  care  is  taken 
to  keep  the  troughs  and  baskets  clean,  and  to  have  the  feed  water  well  filtered.  As 
yet  there  has  not  been  the  least  trouble  from  fungus.  There  is  a slimy  vegetable 
growth  which  forms  on  the  sides  of  the  troughs  under  certain  conditions,  which  must 
be  removed,  but  which  does  not  spread  to  the  eggs  like  fungus;  it  is  probably  some 
species  of  fresh-water  algae. 

After  the  fry  are  hatched  out  they  escape  to  the  bottom  of  the  trough,  there 
being  one-half  inch  clear  space  on  either  side  of  the  basket,  somewhat  more  than 
that  under  it,  and  in  addition  there  is  the  large  area  at  the  end  of  each  trough 
created  by  the  removal  of  the  fifth  basket;  this  gives  the  fry  plenty  of  room,  and 
they  do  very  well  in  the  troughs.  As  they  age  they  require  more  space,  but  they 
are  usually  held  in  the  parent  trough  until  the  egg — or  umbilical— sac  is  absorbed,  a 
period  of  about  ten  weeks,  depending  upon  the  temperature  of  the  water. 

The  fry  must  then  be  fed,  which  is  sometimes  done  in  the  trough  and  sometimes 
in  the  reservoir  pond.  The  only  food  ever  used  at  Karluk  has  been  tinned  salmon 
flesh,  “ do-overs,”. furnished  from  the  canneries  at  Karluk  Spit.  This  is  removed 
from  the  can,  thoroughly  desiccated,  and  then  ground  up  in  a fine-cutting  sausage 
mill.  For  some  reason  the  fry  do  not  seem  to  thrive  on  this  diet,  refusing  to  take 
it  after  ten  days  or  two  weeks,  and  it  is  therefore  the  endeavor  to  plant  them  as  soon 
after  becoming  free  feeders  as  is  possible;  it  makes  a wonderful  difference  in  the 
quick  growth  and  development  of  the  fry  if  they  can  obtain  natural  food.  The  fry 
appear  to  be  of  a generally  dormant  temperament  during  the  time  the  sac  is  being- 
absorbed,  and  there  has  been  very  little  loss  at  Karluk  during  this  period;  the 
greatest  losses  to  fry  occur  at  the  time  of  first  feeding. 

As  they  become  free  feeders  they  are  allowed  to  escape  from  the  troughs  via  the 
wasteway  into  the  reservoir  pond,  and  thence  through  the  ditch  into  the  rearing  or 
nursery  pond — a large,  irregular-shaped  excavation,  with  an  area  of  about  three-fourths 
of  an  acre.  Owing  to  the  cannibalistic  tendencies  of  the  larger  fry,  the  young  with  the 
egg  sac  still  attached  are  kept  by  themselves.  The  tiny  free  feeders,  however,  seem 
pretty  well  able  to  take  care  of  themselves.  As  opportunity  offers,  the  fry  are  taken 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  TN  1900. 


347 


from  the  large  nursery  pond  and  planted;  or,  if  the  nursery  he  frozen  over,  they  are 
taken  from  the  reservoir  and  parent  troughs,  where  they  have  been  held  on  this 
account.  After  the  fry  are  three  or  four  months  old  it  lias  been  observed  that  they 
seem  to  deteriorate  in  the  nursery  ponds,  and  they  are  never  held  beyond  this  time. 

When  the  ponds  and  upper  part  of  the  lagoon  are  frozen  over,  the  fry  are  placed 
in  tanks  prepared  for  them,  transported  on  sleds  to  the  open  water,  and  planted. 
These  tanks  are  made  of  clean,  strong,  salt-salmon  barrels  thickly  coated  with 
asphaltum  varnish  and  rigged  with  handles,  or  beckets,  of  rope.  Three  of  these 
are  a sled  load,  and  comprise  a “plant,”  which  usually  numbers  about  100,000  by  this 
method.  When  the  ponds  and  lagoon  are  open  and  free  from  ice,  the  fry  are  driven 
out  of  the  rearing-pond  at  high  water,  through  a short  flume,  into  a live-car  made  of 
an  old  skiff.  This  skiff,  which  has  a number  of  square  ports  cut  in  its  sides,  covered 
with  tine  mesh  wire  netting,  is  brought  directly  under  the  short  flume,  which  leads 
from  one  corner  of  the  pond  to  the  lagoon  beach.  It  has  a capacity  of  over  200,000 
fry.  When  the  live-car  is  loaded  the  wire-screen  gates  are  let  down  across  the  inner 
end  of  the  flume  and  the  further  exit  of  fry  stopped. 

Planting  is  done  at  high  water  along  the  shores  of  the  lagoon  between  the  mouth 
of  the  river  and  the  upper  end  of  the  village  at  Karluk.  The  location  selected 
depends  upon  the  existing  conditions,  ice,  waves,  and  the  movements  of  predatory 
species  being  considered.  As  far  as  possible  a rocky  shore  whose  crevices  afford  safe 
retreats,  away  from  the  entrance  of  fresh  water  where  trout  are  attracted,  is  chosen, 
and  the  fry  released  without  further  preliminaries.  It  is  claimed  that  no  salmon  fry 
has  ever  been  planted  at  Karluk  with  the  egg  sac  not  entirely  absorbed. 

The  superintendent  firmly  believes  that  the  strong  free-feeding  fry  early  crave 
.salt  water,  and  he  usually  has  a barrel  containing  a small  quantity  of  salt  submerged 
in  the  large  nursery  pond.  It  has  been  observed  that  the  fry  collect  about  this  like 
flies  after  sweets,  and  the  salt  appears  to  act  upon  them  like  a tonic,  making  them 
more  sprightly  and  vigorous  in  their  movements. 

After  being  set  free  the  fry  have  been  observed  to  work  downstream  alongshore 
toward  the  salter  portions  of  the  lagoon,  which  is  fairly  brackish  except  at  the  higher 
tides,  when  it  is  cpiite  salt,  or  at  the  lowest  tides  when  the  river  is  full,  when  the 
lagoon  is  practically  fresh.  Later  the  fry  are  seen  along  the  outside  beaches  in  the 
vicinity  of  the  shaded  rocky  points,  but  return  to  the  lagoon  at  frequent  intervals, 
working  in  and  out  with  the  tides  for  a long  time,  or  until  late  in  the  fall  following 
their  birth.  Some  fry  are  much  stronger  and  larger  than  others  and  grow  very 
rapidly.  Two  or  three  were  seen  in  the  nursery  pond  August  8,  1900,  which  were 
from  2 to  3 inches  in  length  and  very  timid.  In  April,  1897,  fry  from  If  to  If  inches 
long  were  seen  in  small  schools  passing  seaward  from  Karluk  River,  and  the  fry 
hatched  in  the  spring  of  1898  were  from  If  to  If  inches,  some  2 inches,  in  length  in 
the  nursery  pond  in  August. 

Trout  are  believed  to  be  the  most  destructive  natural  enemies  the  fry  have  to 
contend  with.  An  individual  ( Salvelinus  malma ) only  2f  inches  in  length  which 
once  found  its  way  into  the  nursery  pond  had  12  tiny  fry  in  its  maw  when  captured. 
The  trout  are  not  such  active  feeders  in  the  winter,  and  are  more  sluggish  in  move- 
ment, and  it  is  therefore  deemed  advisable  at  Karluk  to  plant  fry  at  this  season. 
Other  natural  dangers  are  also  believed  to  be  lessened  at  this  time. 


348 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


After  the  trout  the  greatest  enemies  to  fry  are  perhaps  the  sea  birds.  Flounders 
and  sculpins  are  too  sluggish  in  their  movements,  besides  being  bottom  fish,  to  be 
very  destructive.  Sudden  storms,  raising  a heavy  sea  on  the  shore  along  which  the 
fry  are  schooling,  are  also  dangerous. 

The  loss  of  the  hatchery  in  the  ratio  of  fry  planted  to  the  number  of  healthy 
eggs  basketed  it  is  believed  at  present  will  not  amount  to  25  per  cent  from  all  causes, 
although  during  the  first  season  it  was  figured  at  not  far  from  40  per  cent.  The 
greatest  present  loss  is  from  dead  eggs  and  “empties,”  or  unfecundated  eggs.  This  is 
not  now  as  much  as  15  per  cent,  and  gradually  diminishing  as  experience  is  gained.  The 
loss  from  freaks  and  abortions  and  premature  births,  all  combined,  is  nominal,  but  is 
greatest  in  the  eggs  of  the  spring  run.  It  is  not  of  itself  considered  a factor,  but  is 
lumped  with  the  losses  from  other  causes.  Deaths  due  to  smothering  of  the  tiny  fry 
during  the  period  of  absorption  of  egg  sac,  through  injuries  received  in  various  ways 
while  in  the  troughs  and  reservoir,  with  the  other  losses  just  mentioned,  will  make  up 
a conservative  total  loss  of  25  per  cent.  The  superintendent  believes  his  1900  loss 
should  not  be  much  in  excess  of  20  percent  unless  from  some  unlooked-for  calamity. 

The  superintendent  believes  in  the  parent  region  theory,  and  thinks  that  the 
Karluk  fishery  has  already  this  year  (1900)  felt  the  value  and  effects  of  artificial 
propagation.  He  thinks  that  the  largest  and  strongest  of  the  fry  planted  in  the  winter 
of  1896-97  and  spring  of  1897  have  become  matured,  that  this  year  they  returned  as 
breeders,  and  that  their  numbers  were  sufficient  to  make  an  appreciable  increase  in 
the  runs  of  salmon  schooling  off  Karluk  Head,  and  possibly  Ayakulik  River.  He 
believes  they  first  put  in  an  appearance  as  grilse,  invariably  males,  which  are 
thoroughly  matured,  and  that  these  grilse  are  2 years  old,  that  is,  from  birth.  Part 
of  the  breeders,  he  thinks,  return  in  three  years,  while  others  of  slower  development 
return  in  four  or  five  years,  and  it  is  not  beyond  the  bounds  of  reason  to  presume 
that  some  may  be  delayed  for  an  even  longer  period  before  reaching  full  maturity. 

In  1897  the  adipose  fin  was  cut  from  513  fry,  part  of  which  were  liberated  in 
Karluk  River  and  part  in  the  lagoon. 

The  approximate  output  of  the  Alaska  Packers  Association’s  redfish  hatchery  at 
Karluk  is  estimated  as  follows: 

Fry  liberated. 


Season  1896-97  2, 000, 000 

1897- 98  5, 000, 000 

1898- 99  5, 000, 000 

1899- 1900 6,000,000 

1900- 1901 12,000,000 


Total  output 30,000,000 


Bui!.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  348.) 


Plate  XXXIV. 


Sectiaw  of  5« 

“a 

A.  Su-oc 

5-6S-B  Rs.eeVci.tvi 

C C-  c-  C-  Bvfcc 


V\a.t<ttvv.vvo^  V\  oov.se. 

V2  Bet. a.  of  4-  l Bet:  of  2>. 

Totov-V  51. 

of  -trou.cj-t\,a  r 

' 4-  £>ov.aVCe.ta  eacVv  avdUwa.nl'^  . 
5 " * vf  s-v.veee.SS  (Vcu 

204-  to  2 55  eoviKu-ts; 
of  to  a.s  VCo/t  * • 

'2?  femaA.es  a.t  a,v/ t\-a.«e 

3,000  C^aj-3,  or  ^5,000 
of-  KoutcKervi  v 

' UwOLer  oroLcrvd,r \i  Corvct^-, 

lS\2>oo,ooo, 
t\£oef> a aw*  vj  j i <5,  v 2 S , o o o. 


j S.  c.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  348.) 


Plate  XXXIV. 


S-VCeXclv-  P’V.anrv  Re.d. - t>aV-m.ow  HoktcHe/c^ 
'O'j  JWasVcou  ?a,c\cnvs  J\  ss‘  w , cut 
SWasta.  CrutK,  K<lv*Vvx.Vc  Lo-o^oow.  VCcudAO/Vt  ) sLa-wct 

State.  Ks"  = 


R.CStrvov.r  ^oyvA 
DiscKo-'-c^e.  afcca.^c 
R.tc,«.vJ\.r>.c|^  bascw. 


w Set  4-  Ha.VC-(r\.\.-rv.a^-_T\'^Aj.c^f\t> 

fe>  Sv>^^.V.vj  - ^«*om  fitter  - taw,Vc. 

B- B O’ B Rtc-e-vf  Ci\or  awL  Ouuva.fi. a ar  c.om^a*tm*.*vt 6. 
D<«>cka/c d£tt\.o£  Co-vw^cwt  mints. 
Wo.5te.'trou.q-Vv  "to  '1‘tstrfoiv- 
X-  £cr<x  ba.sVCe.ts. 

'^Lee-tcno^'. 

S Co.lt  -^4."  = \' . 


HautcfcvLVLq^  Hovx.se.. 

Q'.vs  - V2.  Sets  of  4-,  \ set:  of  2>. 

*•  Tot  a.1/  5 l . 

Ca^o-eLt^  of  trou-c^ks  ? 

' 4-  ^a.svc«ts  ea-cV%,  ordw.n.a.ri.luj  . 


Co-o<^cxt\i  of  ba.svco.tv 
'ZS  females 
5,Ooo  « 

CcL^>a.Mlt\j  of-  tvaAcjb-e-r  m \ 
■'  VJwKf  ov*ft.C 


204  to  2.5S  ©averts. 


2.  S'  femaA.es  at  a,Veca.a?e 

i.Ooo  ft^s,  or  ^s.ooo 


?.  .<Tik5i  JL 


®T 

J 

.?. . i>afevA  v-ssUflfctv  .’bil'iv.--.-?.-.  ^thL  i : 

B. 

E 

.inar  \»  Corvd.  - , 

IS, 2*00,000. 

^ tvec xtssoux*^  , 1 2.S,ooo. 


- TJ-  - 


1^-;  -TilfL 


?:  353SJ£3KS31KS3KS^i!S3 : S3TK.-S' 


. 


?)srat  -UtJif  -I litlf  "ii 

■ 

*.1  }*/.  '-r*-';  ’ .vSjfe <swo.nl- ->><3 

~ f oJ 

•••  <J  '■*■  ' 'X  >.  : >.  X X 

-vrtj?  rt  o*h  B S..S  ,JT  .S 

/ = Si*- j>te3t} 


: 


SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  OF  THE  STEAMER  ALBATROSS  IN  THE 

SUMMER  OF  1901. 


By  JEFFERSON  F.  MOSER, 
Commander , United  States  Navy , Commanding. 


After  refitting  during  the  winter  of  1900-01,  at  Sausalito,  Cal.,  the  Albatross 
left  that  point,  April  23,  for  Puget  Sound,  under  instructions  to  dredge  along  the 
coast  in  depths,  greater  than  1,000  fathoms.  Upon  the  completion  of  this  work  a 
special  report  relating  to  it  was  made,  and  the  records  are  printed  in  the  report  of 
the  United  States  Commissioner  of  Fish  and  Fisheries  for  1901. 

Owing  to  the  strikes  and  the  disturbed  condition  of  labor  on  the  coast  at  this 
time,  the  vessel  was  detained  for  docking  and  painting  until  May  22,  when  departure 
was  taken  from  Seattle.  After  coaling  at  Union  Bay,  British  Columbia,  the  vessel 
arrived,  May  29,  at  Hunter  Bay,  Prince  of  Wales  Island,  Southeast  Alaska,  and  the 
same  day  field  operations  were  commenced.  The  work  for  the  season,  under  the 
Commissioner’s  instructions,  consisted  in  a continuation  of  the  explorations  of  the 
salmon  streams  and  lake  systems  of  Alaska  on  the  lines  carried  out  during  previous 
years,  and  an  examination  of  the  canneries  and  hatcheries  along  the  route. 

During  the  progress  of  the  work  in  Prince  William  Sound  a case  of  small-pox 
appeared  among  the  crew,  causing  an  earlier  return  to  Puget  Sound,  for  quarantine 
and  fumigation,  than  was  contemplated.  The  stream  and  lake  work  had  been  practi- 
cally completed,  but  the  early  return  did  not  permit  an  examination  of  all  the  new 
canneries.  After  obtaining  pratique  at  the  quarantine  station  at  Port  Discovery  the 
season  was  too  far  advanced  to  return  to  Alaska,  and  the  vessel  was  accordingly 
detailed  for  special  work  extending  from  Puget  Sound  to  Monterey. 

Owing  to  my  early  detachment  from  the  command  of  the  Albatross  and  the  lack 
of  facilities  for  making  a complete  report  consequent  thereto,  many  of  the  details 
previously  referred  to  have  been  omitted,  and  this  paper  will  be  largely  confined  to 
descriptions  of  the  streams  and  lake  systems  explored  by  the  party  during  the  season. 

It  is  desired  in  this  connection  to  express  my  appreciation  of  the  work  performed 
by  the  officers  of  the  Albatross , and  of  the  courtesies  extended  by  those  interested  in 
the  canneries.  Lieut.  Hugh  Rodman,  U.  S.  N. , Ensign  A.  J.  Hepburn,  U.  S.  N., 
Ensign  C.  R.  Miller,  U.  S.  N.,  and  Ensign  C.  S.  Kempff,  U.  S.  N. , in  addition  to 
their  duties  on  board  the  vessel,  conducted  the  stream  and  lake  examinations.  Mr. 
A.  B.  Alexander  collected  statistics,  Mr.  F.  M.  Chamberlain  made  the  photographic 
plates,  and  Mr.  H.  C.  Fassett  assisted  me  and,  under  my  direction,  made  special 
investigations.  My  thanks  are  due  to  the  different  companies  operating  canneries  in 
Alaska  for  courtesies  extended  during  our  investigations,  particularly  to  the  Alaska 
Packers’  Association,  which  has,  through  the  president,  Mr.  Henry  F.  Fortmann, 

349 


350 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


placed  at  our  disposition  the  facilities  of  its  various  plants  and  rendered  most  efficient 
assistance. 

The  following  is  the  itinerary  of  the  Alaska  cruise: 


Southeast  Alaska: 

Hunter  Bay,  Prince  of  Wales  Island May  29-31. 

Niblack  Anchorage,  Prince  of  Wales 

Island  May31-Junel. 

Moira  Sound,  Prince  of  Wales  Island June  1. 

Tamgas  Harbor,  Annette  Island June  1-3. 

Metlakahtla,  Annette  Island June  3. 

Ketchikan,  Tongass  Narrows,  Revilla- 

gigedo  Island June  3-5. 

George  Inlet,  Revillagigedo  Island June  5. 

Mary  Island  Anchorage June  5-6. 

Kah-Shakes  Cove,  entrance  to  Boca  de 

Quadra June  6. 

Smeaton  Bay,  Behm  Canal June  6-7. 

Checats  Cove,  Behm  Canal June  7. 

Yes  Bay,  Cleveland  Peninsula June  7-8. 

Loring,  Naha  Bay June  8-10. 

Ketchikan,  Tongass  Narrows,  Kevilla- 

gigedo  Is. and June  10. 

Steamer  Bay,  Etolin  Island ....June  10-11. 

Kunk  Creek,  Etolin  Island Tune  11. 

Wrangell,  Wrangell  Island June  11-13. 

Salmon  Bay,  Prince  of  Wales  Island June  13. 

Conclusion  Island  (off  Kuiu  Island) June  13-14. 

Point  Barrie,  Kupreanof  Island June  14. 

Port  Protection,  Prince  of  Wales  Island..  June  14-15. 

Shakan  Bay,  Kosciusko  Island Tune  15-17. 

Kell  Bay,  Kuiu  Island June  17-18. 

Killisnoo  Harbor,  Kenasnow  Island June  18-19. 


Southeast  Alaska — Continued. 

Kook  (Basket)  Bay,  Chichagof  Island... June  19. 


Pablof  Harbor,  Freshwater  Bay June  19-21. 

Juneau lune  21-24. 

Hunter  Bay,  Admiralty  Island June  24-25. 

Bartlett  Bay,  Icy  Strait June  25-27. 

Dundas  Bay,  Icy  Strait June  27-29. 

Yakutat June  30-July  7. 

Prince  William  Sound: 

Orea July  8-10. 

Port  Gravina July  10-11. 

Naked  Island  Anchorage July  II. 

Herring  Bay,  Knight  Island July  11-15. 

Naked  Island  Anchorage July  15-18. 

Port  Valdez July  18-21. 

Southeast  Alaska: 

Sitka Tuly  23-25. 

Nakwashina  Bay,  Baranof  Island July  25-Aug.  3. 

Schultze  Cove,  Baranof  Island Aug.  3-4. 

Ilanus  Bay,  Baranof  Island Aug.  4-5. 

Sitkoh  Bay,  Chichagof  Island Aug.  5-6. 

Hoggatt  Bay,  Baranof  Island Aug.  6-7. 

Baht  Harbor,  Zarembo  Island Aug.  7-8. 

Steamer  Bay,  Etolin  Island Aug.  8-11. 

Ward  Cove,  Tongass  Narrows,  Revilla- 
gigedo Island Aug.  11-12. 

Washington: 

Port  Discovery,  Quarantine  Station Aug.  17. 


Before  the  opening  of  the  season  it  was  believed  that  there  would  be  a very 
large  number  of  new  canneries  operating  during  the  summer,  but  the  drop  in  the 
price  of  salmon  made  it  difficult  for  some  prospective  canners  to  raise  sufficient  funds 
on  futures  to  place  them  on  a working  basis,  while  others  feared  that  overproduction 
beyond  the  world’s  demand  would  bear  market  prices  below  cost;  nevertheless,  there 
was  a large  addition,  which  will  be  referred  to  later.  It  had  been  the  intention  early 
this  year  to  form  a trust  of  the  Pacific  salmon  canneries,  but  failing  to  make  terms 
with  the  largest  operating  company,  the  scheme  resulted  simply  in  a consolidation  of 
a portion  of  the  canneries. 

An  organization  under  the  title  of  the  Pacific  Packing  and  Navigation  Company, 
incorporated  under  the  laws  of  New  Jersey  and  backed  by  eastern  capitalists,  was 
formed  during  the  spring  of  1901.  Its  object  is  given  in  a “statement,”  under  date 
of  March  12,  1901,  in  which  it  is  said: 

It  is  proposed  to  consolidate  into  one  corporation  the  properties  and  privileges  of  these  companies 
and  firms,  thereby  controlling  about  four-fifths  of  the  canned-salmon  product  of  the  world.  * * * 
It  is  proposed  to  capitalize  the  new  corporation  as  follows:  6 per  cent  debentures,  $7,000,000;  7 per  cent 
cumulative  preferred  stock,  $12,500,000;  common  stock,  $12,500,000. 


The  Alaska  Packers  Association,  whose  output  in  past  years  has  been  about  70 
per  cent  of  the  Alaska  salmon  pack,  demanded  of  the  trust  a cash  payment  for  their 
business  at  their  own  valuation.  The  trust  offered  the  amount,  but  payment  to  be 
made  partly  from  the  sale  of  this  season’s  product  and  the  remainder  in  mortgages 
on  their  own  property  and  stock  in  the  new  company,  which  offer  was  declined. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


351 


The  Pacific  Packing  and  Navigation  Company  acquired  the  following  properties, 
and  they  are  now  operated  by  that  organization: 

Alaska. 

Canneries  of  Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Company  at  Nushagak,  Bristol  Bay;  Chignik,  Alaska  Peninsula; 
Uyak,  Kadiak  Island;  Kenai,  Cook  Inlet;  Orca,  Prince  William  Sound;  Hunter  Bay,  Southeast 
Alaska. 

Hume  Bros.  & Hume,  with  canneries  at  Chignik,  Alaska  Peninsula,  and  Uyak,  Kadiak  Island. 
Thlinket  Packing  Company,  canneries  at  Gerard  Point  and  Santa  Anna  Bay,  Southeast  Alaska. 
Western  Fisheries  Company,  with  a cannery  at  Dundas  Bay,  Icy  Strait. 

Chilkoot  Packing  Company,  with  a cannery  at  Chilkoot  Inlet. 

Taku  Packing  Company,  with  a cannery  at  Taku  Inlet. 

Taku  Fishing  Company,  with  a cannery  at  the  entrance  to  Port  Snettisham. 

Boston  Fishing  & Trading  Company,  with  a cannery  at  Yes  Bay. 

Chatham  Straits  Packing  Company,  with  a cannery  at  Sitkoh  Bay. 

Icy  Strait  Packing  Company,  with  a cannery  at  Petersburg,  Wrangell  Narrows. 

Quadra  Packing  Company,  with  a cannery  at  Mink  Bay,  Boca  de  Quadra. 

Puget  Sound  Region,  Washington. 

Pacific-American  Fisheries  Company,  with  canneries  at  Fairhaven  and  one  at  Friday  Harbor. 
Ainsworth  & Dunn,  with  canneries  at  Seattle  and  Friday  Harbor. 

Fairhaven  Canning  Company,  with  a cannery  at  Fairhaven. 

The  new  concern  also  acquired  a hatchery  near  the  entrance  to  Freshwater  Bay 
and  one  in  the  Boca  de  Quadra,  Alaska. 

As  the  histories  of  the  Alaska  canneries  have  been  given  in  my  former  reports, 
reference  will  be  made  here  to  the  canneries  located  in  Washington  and  absorbed  by 
the  new  company. 

The  Pacific  American  Fisheries  Company  was  incorporated  in  1899  under  the 
laws  of  New  Jersey.  This  company  purchased  at  the  time  of  its  organization  the 
cannery  and  trap  properties  of  the  Island  Packing  Company,  San  Juan  Island,  and 
the  cannery  of  the  Franco- American  North  Pacific  Packing  Company  at  Fairhaven, 
the  latter  concern  having  been  promoted  the  year  previous.  The  “P.  A.  F. as  it 
was  locally  known,  also  acquired  about  thirty  independent  trap  locations  in  the 
adjacent  waters  of  Washington. 

Ainsworth  & Dunn  had  one  cannery  at  Blaine  and  one  at  Seattle,  and  a number 
of  trap  locations.  This  business  had  grown  up  gradually,  during  a period  of  seven 
or  eight  years,  from  a small  beginning  in  the  fresh-fish  trade  to  a prominent  position 
in  the  Puget  Sound  salmon  industry. 

The  Fairhaven  Canning  Company  was  a Washington  State  corporation,  owning- 
one  cannery  at  Fairhaven  and  several  trap  locations. 

The  Pacific  Packing  and  Navigation  Company  therefore  represents  a combine  of 
twenty-three  canneries  with  their  equipage.  The  company  claims  an  Alaska  pack 
for  1901  of  about  700,000  cases,  and  expects  to  increase  its  output  so  as  to  have  a 
total  capacity  of  1,000,000  per  season. 

Returning  to  the  cannery  conditions  in  Alaska,  there  are  now  two  large  corpora- 
tions and  sixteen  independent  canneries.  The  Alaska  Packers’  Association  easily 
leads  in  this  enterprise,  with  a pack  this  year  of  50  per  cent  of  the  total.  The  Pacific 
Packing  and  Navigation  Company  follows  with  about  30  per  cent.  The  remaining  20 
per  cent  are  distributed  among  the  following  independent  concerns:  Alaska  Salmon 
Company,  Columbia  River  Packers’ Association,  Portland- Alaska  Packers’  Association , 


352 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


iuul  Alaska  Fishermen’s  Packing  Company,  all  on  the  Nushagak;  North  Alaska  Salmon 
Company,  on  the  Kvichak;  Naknek  Packing  Company,  on  the  Naknek;  Bristol 
Packing  Company  and  Red  Salmon  Packing  Company,  on  the  Ugashik;  Alaska 
Salmon  Association,  on  Cook  Inlet;  Fidalgo  Island  Canning  Company,  Ketchikan; 
Metlakahtla  Industrial  Company,  Metlakahtla;  North  Pacific  Trading  and  Packing 
Company,  Klawak;  Pacific  Coast  and  Norway  Packing  Company,  Blunt  Point, 
Wrangell  Narrows;  Union  Packing  Company,  Kell  Bay;  San  Juan  Fish  and  Packing 
Company,  Taku  Harbor;  and  F.  C.  Barnes  & Co.,  Lake  Bay,  Prince  of  Wales 
Island. 

NEW  CANNERIES  IN  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA  IN  1901. 

In  southeastern  Alaska  six  new  canneries  were  built  and  operated  and  two  were 
rebuilt  during  the  season,  as  follows:  Thlinket  Packing  Company,  in  addition  to  their 
cannery  at  Gerard  Point,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Stikine  River,  erected  and  operated  a 
plant  called  No.  2 in  Santa  Ana  Bay,  Seward  Passage.  The  Pacific  Coast  and  Norway 
Packing  Company,  which  during  1900  operated  a salting  plant  in  Wrangell  Narrows, 
erected  and  operated  a cannery  in  the  Narrows  at  Blunt  Point.  The  Chatham  Straits 
Packing  Company,  a branch  of,  or  promoted  by,  the  Icy  Strait  Packing  Company, 
operated  a cannery  on  the  southern  shore  of  Sitkoh  Bay,  about  4 miles  from  Point 
Craven.  The  Union  Packing  Company  built  and  operated  a cannery  in  Kell  Bay,  Ivuiu 
Island.  Canneries  were  also  built  and  operated  at  Lake  Bay,  Prince  of  Wales  Island, 
by  F.  C.  Barnes  & Co.,  and  in  Taku  Harbor,  by  the  San  Juan  Fish  and  Packing 
Company.  The  Alaska  Packers  Association  rebuilt  their  canneries  at  Loring  and 
Wrangell  and  installed  modern  plants  at  both  places.  Three  new  canneries  only  were 
visited  in  southeastern  Alaska,  as  time  did  not  permit  our  calling  at  all  the  points. 

Union  Packing  Company. — This  company,  with  home  address  at  Tacoma,  was 
organized  under  the  laws  of  the  State  of  Washington,  and  built  a cannery  during  the 
spring  of  the  year  on  Kell  Bay,  an  arm  of  Affleck  Canal,  on  the  southern  end  of 
Kuiu  Island.  The  buildings  are  located  on  the  southern  arm  of  the  bay  inside  a 
cluster  of  islands.  The  capacity  of  the  cannery  is  placed  at  600  cases  per  day.  The 
outfit  was  for  25,000  cases,  with  a Chinese  guaranty  of  20,000  cases.  The  Chinese 
contract  was  44  cents  per  case,  with  the  usual  conditions.  The  fishermen  contracted 
for  their  transportation  and  board,  $35  per  month,  and  for  each  crew  of  7 men, 
collectively,  a bonus  of  1 cent  for  each  redfish  and  coho,  $4  per  thousand  for  dog- 
salmon,  and  $2  per  thousand  for  humpbacks.  Transportation  1 >y  calling  freight 
steamers  of  a regular  line.  If  the  conditions  should  hold  good,  it  was  the  intention 
to  fish  for  halibut  after  the  close  of  the  salmon-packing  season. 

Alaska  Salmon  Packing  and  Fur  Company  (A.  P.  A.),  Loring. — During  the 
spring  of  1901  the  old  cannery  buildings  were  pulled  down,  new  buildings  were  erected, 
and  new  machinery  installed  on  the  old  site  for  a first-class  three-filler  plant.  The  main 
cannery  building  is  240  feet  by  50  feet,  of  which  70  feet  is  two-story;  parallel  to  it 
and  connected  by  a broad  platform  is  a two-story  warehouse,  170  feet  by  60  feet, 
with  an  ell  120  feet  b}T  40  feet.  Part  of  the  old  building,  60  feet  by  35  feet,  has  been 
retained  for  a box-house.  There  are  two  wharves — the  upper  one  having  sufficient 
depth  alongside  for  vessels  to  lie  while  loading,  the  lower  one  is  used  for  berths  for 
the  cannery  tenders.  The  Y slip  for  discharging  fish  from  the  tenders,  referred  to 
in  my  1900  report  has  been  extended. 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  lace  page  352.) 


Plate  XXXV. 


CHENIGA  STREAM,  PRINCE  WILLIAM  SOUND,  ALASKA. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


353 


The  following  canning  machinery  is  installed:  2 cutters,  3 tillers,  3 toppers, 
3 solderers,  10  retorts,  2 sets  of  canmakers  (complete  with  2 toppers  and  2 solderers), 
and  2 fish -cleaning  machines.  The  cannery  has  a capacity  of  2,400  cases  a day,  and 
was  ready  for  operation  for  the  first  run  of  fish  this  season.  All  the  tins  were  made 
at  the  cannery,  of  100-pound  domestic  plate.  The  canning  machines  were  run  at 
the  rate  of  55  per  minute  for  each  set. 

Glacier  Packing  Company  (A.  P.  A .),  Point  .Uighfield , Wrangell. — As  the  old 
cannery  was  no  longer  suitable  for  the  purpose,  it  was  pulled  down  during  the  season 
and  a new  enlarged  cannery  with  the  latest  machinery  was  constructed  on  the  site  of 
the  old  plant.  The  cannery  building  proper,  a structure  238  feet  by  50  feet,  of  which 
138  feet  is  two-story,  was  ready  for  the  season’s  pack,  and  the  warehouses  and  other 
buildings  were  erected  during  the  season  and  after  the  runs  were  over.  All  cans 
were  made  by  hand  at  the  cannery,  except  1,200  cases  of  fiats  which  were  carried 
from  San  Francisco.  T'he  tin  plate  was  of  domestic  manufacture,  100-pound  weight. 

Several  of  the  older  canneries  were  visited  in  southeastern  Alaska,  but  no  marked 
changes  were  noted  from  conditions  existing  in  1900,  except  a general  tendency  to 
improve  methods,  better  machinery,  and  increased  facilities  for  making  a larger  pack. 

It  may  be  of  interest  here  to  note  that  during  our  visit  in  the  vicinity  of 
Burroughs  Bay  it  was  learned  that  the  Indians  during  the  past  two  years  have  taken 
quite  a number  of  shad. 

NEW  CANNERIES,  WESTERN  ALASKA,  1901. 

From  Cross  Sound  to  Bering  Sea  there  were  no  additions  to  the  canneries,  but 
the  latter  district  received  six  new  ones  and  enlargements  to  several  old  plants. 

The  Portland-Alaska  Packers’  Association  built  a cannery  at  Snag  Point,  on  the 
Upper  Nushagak  Bay.  The  location  is  in  front  of  the  village,  a short  distance  above 
the  A.  P.  A.  cannery  known  as  the  Alaska  Packing  Company,  or  the  Johnson  plant. 

The  Columbia  River  Packers’  Association  constructed  a cannery  at  the  mouth  of 
Clark  Creek,  above  the  Nushagak  Canning  Company’s  reserve  plant  (A.  P.  A.). 

The  Alaska  Salmon  Company  erected  a canning  plant  on  the  right  bank  of  Wood 
River,  about  2 miles  from  the  mouth,  and  abreast  of  the  lower  point  of  the  first  island 
in  the  river. 

The  Red  Salmon  Packing  Company  built  and  operated  a cannery  on  the  Ugashik 
River,  about  half  a mile  above  the  site  of  the  old  Bering  Sea  Packing  Company. 

The  Alaska  Packers’  Association  built  an  additional  three-filler  cannery  on  the 
Ugashik,  on  the  site  of  the  old  Bering  Sea  Packing  Company,  and  have  retained  the 
latter  name  for  the  new  cannery. 

Under  the  name  of  the  Guardian  Packing  Company  the  A.  P.  A.  built  a four-filler 
cannery  on  the  Naknek,  about  2 miles  below  their  old  cannery,  which  is  operated 
under  the  name  of  the  Arctic  Packing  Company. 

The  Alaska  Packers’  Association  has  also  laid  the  foundation  for  a large  addition 
to  their  plant  below  Koggiung,  which  was  constructed  and  operated  in  1900.  In  my 
last  report  this  was  called  the  Kvichak  Packing  Company,  but  since  then  the  name 
has  been  changed  to  the  Horsehoe  Fishing  and  Mining  Company.  This  addition  is 
to  have  four  fillers  and  to  be  ready  for  operation  during  the  season  of  1902. 

The  Alaska  Packers  Association  have  erected  a large  salmon  hatchery  on  the 
Naha  Lake  System,  at  the  head  of  the  Third  Lake,  within  the  mouth  of  the  stream 


F.  C.  B.  1901—23 


354 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


which  forms  the  outlet  to  the  Fourth  Lake.  This  hatchery  was  located  during  the 
season  and  obtained  12,000,000  redfish  eggs. 

The  association  also  operated  the  Callbreath  hatchery,  on  Etolin  Island,  obtaining 
about  6,000,000  redfish  eggs.  At  Karluk  hatchery,  where  the  run  of  redfish  this 
season  was  very  large,  32,800,000  eggs  were  obtained,  making  the  total  number  of 
redfish  eggs  placed  in  the  hatcheries  of  the  Alaska  Packers’  Association  50,800,000. 
Counting  upon  a loss  of  20  per  cent,  this  corporation  expects  to  liberate  over  40,000,000 
fry  in  the  waters  of  Alaska. 

The  following  is  an  account  of  the  streams  and  lakes  examined  during  the  season, 
together  with  a few  remarks  on  special  features  of  the  salmon  fisheries. 


Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Company’s  hatchery  Hetta  Lake. 


SOUTHEAST  ALASKA. 

PACIFIC  STEAM  WHALINU  COMPANY’S  HATCHERY,  HETTA  LAKE. 

Hetta  Stream  and  Lake  were  described  in  my  report  for  1897  (p.  73-75),  and  the 
hatchery  was  referred  to  in  my  report  for  1900,  but  not  visited  until  June  5,  1901, 
when  it  was  examined  by  Ensign  Kempff  and  Mr.  Chamberlain.  For  a description 
of  the  locality  reference  is  made  to  former  reports. 

The  hatchery,  consisting  of  hatchery  house,  dwelling,  and  boathouse,  is  located 
on  low,  rolling,  and  heavily  wooded  land  on  the  southeast  shore  of  the  lake,  on  the 
left  bank  of  a feeder,  from  which  the  hatchery  receives  its  supply  of  water.  The 
hatchery  site  is  reached  from  the  mouth  of  Hetta  Stream  by  trail  to  the  lake  and  by 
boat  across  the  latter.  This  feeder  is  about  10  feet  wide,  6 inches  deep,  and  flows 
with  a strong  current  in  a general  west-northwest  direction,  emptying  into  the  lake 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


355 


about  100  feet  to  the  northward  of  the  main  building.  The  bottom  is  gravelly,  with 
rocky  outcrops  in  places.  There  is  a cascade  of  two  falls  of  5 feet  each  about  200 
yards  from  the  mouth,  and  about  100  feet  beyond  this  point  the  stream  receives  a 
small  tributary  from  the  eastward,  the  bottom  of  which  is  gravelly.  Temperature 
of  feeder  43°  F. ; temperature  of  lake  water  43'  F.,  of  lake  outlet  50°  F. 

The  hatchery  supply  is  carried  from  a point  just  above  the  cascade  for  a distance 
of  325  feet  in  a Hume,  the  drop  of  the  flume  being  12  feet  in  its  length.  Outside  the 
hatchery  the  water  is  received  in  a settling  tank,  2 feet  by  4 feet  by  1 foot,  partially 
filled  with  gravel.  A spout  2?  inches  by  3 inches  leads  from  the  tank  into  the 
building,  dropping  2\  feet  to  the  head  trough. 

In  the  feeder  near  the  hatchery  are  two  nursery  pools  (A  and  B),  formed  by 


double  barricades,  and  covered  with  boughs  to  shade  the  fry  and  protect  them  from 
birds. 

The  hatchery  building  is  50  feet  by  26  feet,  with  side  walls  10  feet  high,  of  plank. 
There  are  10  troughs,  each  20  feet  long,  the  bottom  12  inches  wide,  being  set  in  the 
sides,  which  are  8 inches  deep.  They  are  arranged  in  4 batteries,  3 of  two  troughs 
each  and  1 of  four  troughs,  that  is,  a double  run.  They  extend  lengthwise  of  the 
building  and  are  equally  distant  from  each  other  and  from  the  sides  of  the  building. 

The  basket  divisions  are  2^  feet  in  length,  and  the  division  plates,  4 inches  apart, 
are  made  of  light-weight  iron,  asphalted.  The  head  trough  is  of  the  same  material 


356 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


as  the  hatching-troughs.  It  is  of  12-inch  stuff  and  the  sides  and  bottoms  are  of  the 
same  dimensions.  The  gates  are  made  by  cutting  out  and  resetting  the  block,  leaving 
a space  at  the  bottom  of  three-fourths  inch  by  1 inches.  The  outflow  is  controlled 
by  a sheet-iron  drop  gate.  A short  tin  spout  carries  water  into  the  troughs,  falling 
about  1 inches.  In  the  double-run  battery  a similar  spout  carries  the  water  into  the 
second  section  with  a fall  of  2 inches.  The  troughs  drop  about  6 inches  in  their 
length.  The  baskets  are  21  inches  by  11  inches  by  5 inches,  of  the  usual  material,  two- 
tenths- inch  by  three-fourths-inch  mesh.  Wooden  battens  are  secured  to  the  two  long 
sides  and  the  ends  protected  by  a fold  of  tin  nailed  to  the  battens.  The  corners  are 
interlaced.  The  baskets  are  supported  in  the  troughs  either  by  the  wooden  battens 
or  upon  four  small  blocks  one-half  inch  high,  nailed  to  the  bottom  of  the  trough. 
There  were  70  baskets  in  the  house,  each  having  a capacity  of  50,000  eggs. 

The  stock  fish  are  seined  in  the  lake  and  kept  in  a retaining  pond  until  fully  ripe. 
The  seine  used  is  30  fathoms  by  2 fathoms  by  2^-inch  mesh.  The  fish  are  spawned 
by  the  wet  process.  The  spawning  pans  are  tin  saucepans,  8 inches  in  diameter, 
asphalted.  The  period  of  incubation  is  90  to  120  days. 


I f*  'k  1*  a I t 

Sci.  .( 

Sketch  of  Hetta  Lake  and  Stream,  Prince  of  Wales  Island,  Alaska, 

The  data  from  this  hatchery  is  exceedingly  meager,  and  not  reliable  enough  for 
record.  It  is  said  that  in  1899,  2,800,000  eggs  gave  2,600,000  fry  (a  loss  of  7.11  per 
cent),  but  this  can  hardly  be  correct;  in  1900,  1,800,000  eggs  were  placed  in  baskets. 
Very  cold  weather  during  the  winter  of  1900-1901  froze  many  of  the  eggs.  The 
output  is  not  definitely  known. 

PETER  JOHNSON  STREAM  AND  LAKE. 

This  stream  is  known  to  cannery  people  as  one  of  the  Moira  Sound  streams.  In 
conducting  the  examination  of  that  locality  in  1897  it  was  missed,  but  it  was  visited 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


357 


this  season  by  a party  from  the  Albatross,  under  Lieutenant  Rodman,  on  June  L.  It 
is  referred  to  on  page  83  of  the  1897  report. 

On  the  eastern  side  of  Prince  of  Wales  Island,  between  the  Wedge  Islands  and 
Adams  Point,  is  the  approach  to  a narrow  arm,  about  2 miles  in  length,  running  east 
and  west  (true),  and  now  known  as  Johnson  Arm  or  Inlet.  On  the  northern  shore, 
midway  of  its  length,  is  a narrow  inlet,  making  to  the  northward  for  a distance  of  about 
three-eighths  of  a mile,  around  which  is  the  new  mining  camp  and  post-oftice  called 
Dolomi,  with  weekly  mail  from  Ketchikan.  The  head  of  this  small  inlet  receives  the 
waters  of  Peter  Johnson  Stream,  which  is  the  outlet  for  several  small  lakes. 


Sc.-V,  m'vln 


Sketch  of  Peter  Johnson  Stream  and  Lake,  Johnson  Arm,  Prince  of  Wales  Island. 

The  main  stream  flows  in  a general  southeasterly  direction  from  the  main  lake 
for  a distance  of  rather  less  than  a mile,  over  a bottom  which  is  generally  rocky. 
About  one-third  mile  from  the  mouth,  at  a point  called  The  Forks,  it  receives  a small 
tributary  from  the  northward  which  itself  is  the  outlet  to  three  small  lakes.  At  the 
forks  a small  basin  is  formed  about  75  feet  wide  and  1-1  inches  deep,  the  lower  end  of 
which  is  reached  by  high-water  spring  tides.  The  main  stream  is  from  10  to  12  feet 
wide,  and  15  to  20  inches  deep;  from  its  source  to  near  the  forks  it  is  full  of  ripples, 
flowing  with  a strong  current  to  a broken  fall  of  4 feet  drop  about  50  yards  above 


358 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


the  forks;  thence  to  the  mouth  it  flows  over  a series  of  small  rapids.  At  no  point, 
however,  are  there  any  natural  obstructions  to  the  ascent  of  salmon.  Near  the  lake  a 
dam  has  been  constructed  across  the  stream  to  raise  the  lake  level.  It  has  a board  face, 
sloping-  at  an  angle  of  about  45°,  and  is  arranged  to  contract  the  usual  flow  of  water 
to  a width  of  about  6 feet,  which  forms  a runway.  With  a full  stream  it  probably 
is  not  an  obstruction  to  the  ascent  of  salmon. 

About  30  yards  above  the  forks  are  the  remains  of  an  old  barricade  and  a runway 
formerly  used  in  connection  with  the  funnel-shaped  baskets  or  traps  employed  by  the 
natives  of  this  vicinity.  At  the  forks  are  the  remains  of  an  abutment  probably  used 
formerly  in  some  sort  of  barricade. 

The  larger  lake,  from  which  the  main  stream  has  its  source,  is  known  as  Paul 
Lake;  it  is  about  2 miles  long  and  one-fourth  mile  wide,  with  the  major  axis  in  a 
WSW.  and  ENE.  direction.  It  is  quite  deep,  one  point,  it  is  said,  reaching  a depth 
of  120  fathoms.  It  is  75  feet  above  sea  level  and  on  June  1 the  water,  which 
appeared  clear  and  pure,  had  a surface  temperature  of  52°  F.  Its  range  in  water 
level  is  about  4 feet.  High  hills  and  mountains  border  the  northern  and  southern 
sides.  Along  the  shore  the  bottom  is  of  gravel  with  occasional  sections  of  rock  and 
some  mud.  At  the  western  end  the  lake  receives  a feeder  in  which  are  spawning- 
beds  for  a distance  of  about  one-fourth  of  a mile.  A number  of  salmon  fry  were 
seen  in  the  lake  and  there  were  a few  small  trout  above  the  dam. 

The  small  tributary,  previously  referred  to  as  joining  the  main  stream  at  the  forks, 
is  about  half  a mile  long,  6 to  25  feet  in  width  and  2 to  10  inches  in  depth,  and  flows 
but  a small  amount  of  water.  It  drains  three  shallow  ponds  known  as  John,  William, 
and  James  lakes,  surrounded  by  low  banks,  and  full  of  pond  lilies  which  grow  from 
a muddy  bottom. 

Lake  J ohn  is  one-half  mile  from  the  forks  and  is  300  yards  long  and  100  yards  wide, 
with  its  major  axis  in  a NNW.  and  SSE.  direction;  it  is  reported  to  have  a depth  of 
about  12  feet.  The  elevation  is  25  feet  above  high-water  mark  and  the  temperature 
of  the  surface  water,  June  1,  was  53°  F. 

A shallow  streamlet  one-half  mile  in  length  and  with  a few  unimportant  rapids, 
connects  Lake  John  with  Lake  James.  The  latter  is  about  four-tenths  mile  long,  by 
175  yards  wide,  and  lies  in  a general  W.  by  N.  and  E.  by  S.  direction.  It  is  shallow, 
and  has  an  elevation  of  55  feet.  Temperature  of  surface  water,  June  1,  52°  F. 

Lake  William  is  a shallow  pond,  250  yards  long  by  90  yards  wide;  it  has  a short 
outlet,  2-4  feet  wide  by  8 inches  deep,  flowing  through  the  left  bank  of  the  streamlet 
connecting  Lake  John  with  Lake  James  and  very  near  the  former.  It  has  an  eleva- 
tion of  28  feet,  and  the  temperature  of  the  surface  water  on  June  1 was  52°  F. 

The  country  surrounding  the  Peter  Johnson  stream  and  lake  system  is  well 
wooded  and  covered  with  the  usual  growth  of  the  region.  This  stream  is  claimed  by 
a native,  from  whom  if  derives  its  name,  and  furnishes  fish  to  the  canneries  at  Met- 
lakahtla  and  Loring,  although  prior  to  1896  all  of  these  fish  were  purchased  at 
Metlakahtla.  It  is  remarkable  for  the  small  redfish  which  it  carries,  and  it  is  said 
there  is  no  deviation,  from  one  year  to  another,  in  their  average  weight,  which  is 
from  34  to  4 pounds  each.  The  redfish  from  this  stream  are  frequentty  quoted  by 
those  who  propound  the  parent-stream  theory  in  support  of  the  argument. 


SKETCH  OF  TAMGAS  LAKE  AND  STREAM  SYSTEM,  EAST  SIDE  OF  TAMGAS  HARBOR,  ANNETTE  ISLAND,  ALASKA. 


Bull.  U.S.  F.  C.  1901. 


(To  face  page  358.) 


Plate  XXXVI. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


359 


The  following  is  the  record  of  the  fish  taken  from  this  stream  so  far  as  any  data 
are  available: 


Year. 

Redfish. 

Cohoes. 

Humpbacks. 

Dates. 

No. 

Dates. 

No. 

Dates. 

No. 

1892.. .. 

1893.. .. 

1894.. .. 

1895.. .. 

Julv  8-Aug.  18 
July  10-Aug.  29 
July  18- Aug.  23 
July  ti-Aug.  1(1 

8, 434 

Aug.  6-Aug.  18 

1, 310 

17,154 
15, 525 

Aug.  5-Aug.  15 

1,754 

July  25-Aug.  23 
July  26- Aug.  30 

2, 329 

17. 874 

lj  979 

July  24-Aug.  2 

1,465 

1890.... 

July  8-Aug.  2 

21,700 

-Sept.  10 

1,900 

Aug.  3-Aug.  21 

8,000 

1897.... 

July  8-Sept.  2 

26,310 

July  19-Sept.  9 

2, 957 

Julv  20-Aug.  21 

10,016 

1898.... 

July  13-Sept.  27 

14,  279 

July  16-Sept.  29 

4,324 

July  26-Aug.  29 

15, 596 

1899 

July  6-Sept.  1 

25, 018 

.1  uly  19-Sept.  1 

399 

July  19- Aug.  25 

11,223 

1900.... 

July  7-Sept.  1 

19, 036 

J uly  28-Sept.  1 

343 

July  23-Sept.  1 

11,758 

TAMGAS  STREAM  AND  LAKE. 

Annette  Island  on  its  southern  side  has  a deep  bay,  5 miles  in  length,  which 
affords  good  anchorage  in  its  upper  part  and  is  known  as  Tamgas  Harbor.  On  the 
eastern  side,  midway  the  length  of  the  bay,  at  Creek  Point,  is  the  mouth  of  a stream, 
a lake  outlet,  carrying  redfish  which  are  supplied  to  the  cannery  at  Metlakahtla. 
Ensign  Miller  and  Mr.  Chamberlain  examined  this  system  on  June  2. 

The  stream  is  over  half  a mile  in  length  and  at  its  head  is  30  feet  wide,  1 foot 
deep,  and  flows  with  a current  of  2 to  3 knots,  over  a rocky  and  bowlderous  bed,  be- 
tween moderately  high  banks  covered  with  the  usual  growth  of  the  country.  About 
200  yards  from  the  lake  the  bed  narrows,  the  stream  flowing  400  yards  through 
a ravine,  at  the  end  of  which,  and  about  400  yards  from  the  beach,  is  a barricade 
partially  dismantled  but  appearing  as  if  recently  used.  Tide  water  ascends  about 
200  yards  from  the  beach.  Temperature  of  water,  June  2,  51°  F. 

The  first  lake  is  irregular  in  form,  lies  in  a basin  in  a general  NE.  and  SW. 
direction,  and  is  surrounded  by  high  snow-covered  peaks,  from  which  it  receives 
numerous  streamlets,  carrying  surface  drainage  and  melting  snow.  It,  is  about  2 
miles  long,  from  three-fourths  to  one-eighth  mile  in  width,  is  apparently  shallow, 
and  elevated  75  feet  above  tide  water.  There  are  a few  gravel  beaches  and  the 
immediate  shore  is  well  wooded.  At  the  head  of  the  lake,  in  the  northern  corner,  is 
the  mouth  of  a stream  which  enters  through  a delta  200  yards  long,  and  which  is  the 
outlet  to  a second  lake.  This  stream  is  600  yards  long,  and  at  the  head  of  the  delta 
is  10  feet  wide,  1 foot  deep,  with  a current  of  3 to  4 knots.  For  the  greater  part 
of  its  length  it  flows  over  a bowlderous  bed  through  a rocky  ravine,  though  near  the 
mouth  it  broadens  over  gravelly  beds  suitable  for  spawning. 

The  second  lake  is  600  yards  long,  400  feet  wide,  and  elevated  90  feet  above  the 
first  lake.  At  its  head  is  a feeder  that  may  lead  to  a third  lake,  but  want  of  facilities 
prevented  a further  examination.  It  is  probable  that  salmon  ascend  to  the  second 
lake.  The  color  of  the  water  throughout  the  system  is  clear  and  of  brownish  tinge. 
The  shores  are  wooded. 

A hatchery  site  could  probably  be  found  at  the  head  of  the  first  lake,  near  the 
mouth  of  the  connecting  stream. 

The  redfish  from  this  stream  are  very  small  and  average  in  weight  about  the 
same  as  the  Peter  Johnson  stream,  viz,  3^  to  4 pounds.  The  stream  may  be  rated  as 
having  a value  of  10,000  redfish  under  average  conditions. 


360 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The  following  table  shows  the  catch  from  this  stream  since  1892: 


Year. 

Redfish. 

Cohoes. 

Humpbacks. 

Dates. 

No. 

Dates. 

No. 

Dates. 

No. 

1892 

6, 114 

1893 

July  8-28  . ~ 

2, 328 

July  19-30 

3,543 

1894 

12, 032 

Aug.  6-11 

2,686 

1895 

12' 357 

.1  uly  17-Aug.  9 

5, 449 

1896 

8j  795 

July  24-Aug.  18 

2, 982 

1897 

13, 430 

40 

.]  ulv  21- Aug.  26 

21,918 

1898 

22, 678 

Aug.  9-17  

4, 151 

1899 

July  8-Aug.  29 

11,026 

Aug.  24-29  

282 

July  21- Aug.  26 

29,115 

1900 

9,517 

300 

July  24-Sept.  1 

17,  743 

GEOROE  INLET  STREAM  AND  LAKE. 

The  southern  side  of  Revillagigedo  Island  is  penetrated  by  three  deep  inlets,  the 
western  one  of  which  is  known  as  George  Inlet.  At  its  head  a small  cove,  making  to 
the  northward  immediately  west  of  Bat  Point,  receives  the  waters  of  a stream,  a lake 
outlet,  which  carries  redfish. 

This  stream  was  examined,  by  a party  in  charge  of  Ensign  Kemptf,  on  June  5. 
It  Hows  in  a tortuous  channel  in  a general  easterly  direction,  at  first,  upon  leaving 
the  lake,  through  low  grassy  flats,  while  nearer  the  mouth  it  passes  between  rugged 
hills  carrying  in  the  lower  half  of  its  course  numerous  rapids.  It  is  about  4 miles 
long,  50  feet  wide,  and  14  feet  deep,  with  a current  of  3 to  4 knots.  The  bed 
throughout  the  rugged  hills  is  of  rock,  slate,  and  gravel,  while  that  portion  through 
the  flats  is  largely  of  mud.  The  water  is  clear,  of  brownish  tinge,  and  on  June  5 
had  a temperature  of  59°  F. 

There  is  an  island  half  a mile  from  the  mouth  and  another  the  same  distance 
from  the  lake.  About  one-fourth  of  a mile  above  the  lower  island  a small  trib- 
utary, 31  feet  wide  and  4 inches  deep,  enters  from  the  SW.  About  one-fourth  of 
a mile  above  the  mouth  are  the  remains  of  a barricade.  The  log  was  in  place,  but 
most  of  the  rails  that  had  supported  a lath  fencing  had  been  swept  away.  Some  of 
the  fencing,  interwoven  with  wire,  was  near  at  hand. 

The  first  lake  is  about  one  mile  in  length  with  an  extreme  width  of  two-thirds  of 
a mile,  the  main  axis  lying  in  a general  north-and-south  direction.  It  lies  in  a low 
basin  and  has  a shallow  appearance,  pond  lilies  in  places  extending  200  yards  from 
the  shore  line.  The  beaches  consist  of  rock,  gravel,  and  mud.  A conical  hill,  about 
250  feet  high,  rises  over  a prominent  point  on  the  eastern  shore.  The  lake  has  an 
elevation  of  240  feet  above  tide  water,  and  the  temperature  of  the  surface  water  was 
59°  F.  on  June  5. 

On  the  eastern  side,  one- half  mile  from  the  extreme  southern  end,  is  a stream 
connecting  Lake  No.  1 with  No.  2.  It  is  one-half  mile  long,  30  feet  wide,  from  2 to 
6 feet  deep,  and  runs  with  a strong  current  over  a gravel  and  mud  bottom.  The 
water  has  a brownish  tinge,  and  on  June  5 had  a temperature  of  59°  F.  The  lakes 
are  also  connected  by  a slough,  which  enters  the  first  lake  at  its  southern  end. 

Lake  No.  2 is  of  irregular  form  and  has  an  extreme  length  of  II  miles  by  an 
extreme  width  of  one-half  mile.  It  has  a rather  shallow  appearance,  but  is  deeper 
apparently  than  the  first  lake.  Tim  beaches  are  of  rock,  gravel,  and  mud;  elevation 
above  tide  water,  245  feet;  temperature,  June  5,  59°  F. 


SKETCH  OF  GEORGE  INLET,  LAKES  AND  STREAM,  R EV I LLAG I GEDO  ISLAND,  ALASKA- 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  360.) 


Plate  XXXVlI. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


361 


At  the  eastern  end  this  lake  receives  from  the  southward  the  waters  of  a feeder, 
which  was  examined  for  a distance  of  II  miles  to  a deep  pool,  which  had  an  elevation 
of  265  feet  above  tide  water.  This  feeder  is  12  feet  wide,  12  inches  deep,  and  flows 
with  a strong  current  through  a tortuous  channel,  over  a gravelly  bottom.  It  has  a 
number  of  deep  pools.  The  water  has  a brownish  tinge,  and  on  June  5 the 
temperature  was  19°  F. 

A dead  king  salmon  was  found  on  the  banks  of  the  main  stream,  2 miles  from 
the  mouth.  It  was  probably  a straggling  fish. 

George  Inlet  stream  was  fished  for  the  Metlakahtla  cannery  from  1892  to  1896, 
and  in  1900  by  the  Fidalgo  Island  Canning  Co.  For  a number  of  years  it  was  also 
fished  by  Clark  & Martin.  Under  average  conditions  it  may  yield  6,000  redfish. 
The  following-  are  the  only  statistics  obtainable: 


Y ear. 

Redfish. 

Cohoes. 

Humpbacks. 

Dates. 

No. 

Dates. 

No. 

Dates. 

No. 

1892 

9, 061 
3, 191 

3,787 

2,142 

225 

6,949 

4, 875 
9,518 
11,247 
7,905 
1,576 

1893 

1894  

1895  

1S96. . . 

July  9-Aug.  15 

July  3-Aug.  0 

July  1-Aug.  1 

July  11-Aug.  15 

July  17-Aug.  6 

1,426 

854 

531 

July  24-Aug.  17 

July  17-Aug.  6 

July  21-Aug.  1 

1898 . . . 

July  20. . . 7 

1900 

July  8-Aug.  1 

July  25-Sept.  6 

2, 358 

July  20-Sept.  4 

39, 085 

KAH-SHAKES  STREAM  AND  LAKE. 

About  2 miles  south  from  the  entrance  to  the  Boca  de  Quadra,  and  opening  upon 
the  Revillagigedo  Channel,  is  a cove  named  after  Kah-Shakes,  a chief  living  in  the 
vicinity.  From  the  northeast  end  of  this  cove  a shallow  tidal  lagoon  extends  in  an 
easterly  direction  for  a distance  of  11  miles.  It  has  a width  of  25  yards  to  75  yards, 
and  receives  at  its  head  the  waters  of  a redfish  stream,  having  a lake  source  which  was 
examined  by  a party  in  charge  of  Lieutenant  Rodman  on  June  6.  The  banks  of  the 
lagoon  are  rocky,  well  wooded,  and  the  bottom  generally  muddy.  Spring  tides  reach 
the  head  of  the  lagoon,  which  point  may  properly  be  called  the  mouth  of  the  stream. 

The  stream  proper  is  one-fourth  mile  long,  12  to  15  feet  wide,  12  inches  deep, 
and  flows  over  a rough,  rocky  bottom  with  a slack  current,  forming  here  and  there 
a pool.  There  are  no  decided  rapids.  There  are  many  fallen  trees,  but  no  obstacle 
to  the  movement  of  fish  in  ascending.  Halfway  up  the  stream  are  the  remains  of  a 
barricade  built  in  the  usual  form  of  a braced  log  and  split  rails. 

The  lake  is  pipe-shaped,  about  II  miles  long  in  a northeasterly  and  southwesterly 
direction,  expanding  at  its  upper  end  into  a broad  basin,  and  receives  at  its  eastern 
end,  through  a low,  grassy  flat,  the  main  feeder.  This  stream  is  8 feet  wide,  from  6 
to  8 inches  deep,  and  flows  with  a slack  current  over  a gravelly  bottom,  which  probably 
forms  the  main  spawning-ground.  In  it  and  in  the  lake  numerous  small  fry  were 
noticed.  The  shores  of  the  lake  are  low  and  wooded,  grassy  around  the  edges,  with 
beaches  of  rock,  gravel,  and  sand.  The  vegetation  common  to  the  country  surrounds 
the  system.  Elevation  of  lake,  10  feet.  Temperature  of  lake  water,  61°  F. ; tem- 
perature of  water  of  feeder,  50°  F. ; temperature  of  water  in  lagoon,  65°  F. 

This  stream  has  been  fished  by  the  canneries  at  Quadra,  Metlakahtla,  Loring, 
and  Ketchikan.  Its  value,  under  average  conditions,  may  be  placed  at  12,000  redfish. 


362 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The  following,  collected  from  all  available  sources,  will  furnish  a fair  idea  of  the 
capacity  of  Kah-shakes  stream.  There  are  no  data  available  for  1896: 


Year. 

Number 
of  redfish. 

Dates. 

Year. 

Number 
of  redfish. 

Dates. 

1892  . 

9,218 

14,399 

10,579 

16,181 

July  12-Aug.  17 
July  8- Aug.  28 
July  12-Aug.  16 
July  13-Aug.  15 

1897 

8, 000 
14,100 
15, 000 
16, 600 

July  9-Aug.  16 
July  10-Aug.  22 
July  9-Aug.  26 
July  10-Aug.  15 

1893 

1898 

1894. . . 

1899 

1895. .. 

1900 

CHECATS  STREAM  AND  LAKE. 


Checats  Stream  empties  into  the  southeast  corner  of  Checats  Cove,  a small  inden- 
tation on  the  eastern  shore  of  Behm  Caual,  about  12  miles  north  of  Smeaton  Inlet, 
and  was  examined  by  a party  in  charge  of  Ensign  Hepburn,  on  June  7.  It  is  the 
outlet  of  a lake  lying  about  three-fourths  mile  in  a SSE.  (mag.)  direction  from  the 
mouth  of  the  stream.  The  course  of  the  stream  is  fairly  straight  from  tide  water  to 
the  lake.  About  one-fourth  mile  from  the  mouth  of  the  stream  is  a small  island 
or  cluster  of  islands  around  which  the  water  flows,  the  larger  volume  going  to  the 
westward  of  the  island.  Abreast  the  head  of  this  island,  on  the  left  bank,  was  found 
a panel  of  rails,  evidently  used  as  a barricade  when  fish  are  running.  A fallen  tree 
spanning  the  stream  at  this  point  probably  furnishes  the  support  for  it.  Aside  from 
this  artificial  obstruction  the  stream  was  found  clear  and  clean  until  the  lake  is 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1 901 . (To  face  page  362.)  PLATE  XXX  V 1 1 1. 


KAH-SHAKES  LAGOON,  R EV I LLAG  IG  EDO  CHANNEL,  MAINLAND,  SOUTHEAST  ALASKA. 


CHECATS  STREAM,  BEHM  CANAL.  SITE  OF  BARRICADE,  MAINLAND,  SOUTHEAST  ALASKA. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


363 


reached.  There  are  no  falls,  cascades,  or  heavy  rapids,  although  half  the  length  of 
the  stream,  from  the  mouth  up,  might  be  called  a continuous  rapid.  The  water  is  of 
good  depth  and  the  current  not  strong  enough  to  prevent  the  ascent  of  salmon.  The 
bottom  is  stony,  with  bowlders  in  the  rapid  parts;  near  the  lake,  where  the  current 


is  sluggish,  there  are  some  pebbly  parts,  but  generally  it  is  of  mud  or  sand,  with  much 
water-logged  timber  and  bark.  The  water  has  a brownish  tinge,  and  on  June  Id  had 
a temperature  of  55 0 F.  The  banks  are  steep  and  thickly  wooded  with  spruce,  pine, 
devil’s  club,  and  berry  bushes,  with  an  unusual  number  of  large  trees.  Tide  water 


364 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


extends  150  yards  upstream  from  the  low-water  mouth.  The  average  width  of  the 
outlet  is  40  feet,  depth  18  inches,  and  current  3 knots. 

The  lake  is  of  an  irregular,  hour-glass  shape,  about  1^  miles  long,  and  from  one- 
fourth  to  one-half  mile  broad.  It  has  four  well-defined  feeders.  The  shores, 
except  for  a short  stretch  near  the  middle  of  the  eastern  side  and  at  the  southern 
end,  are  very  steep  and  thickly  wooded,  and  drop  off  into  deep  water  a few  feet  from 
the  beach,  except  at  the  mouths  of  the  feeders  and  on  the  northwestern  end,  where 
there  are  sandy  shoals.  Across  the  outlet  is  a large  drift  of  big  trees,  but  the  water 
here  is  several  feet  deep  and  fish  can  readily  pass  underneath.  The  bottom,  where  it 
can  be  seen,  is  generally  of  sand,  sometimes  of  pebbles  or  rock,  and  at.  t lie  southern 
end,  where  a small  feeder  enters,  of  mud  with  water-logged  bark.  The  temperature 
of  the  water  was  52°  F.  The  lake  has  an  elevation  above  sea  level  of  60  feet. 

The  principal  feeder  enters  on  the  northeastern  side  about  one-fourth  mile 
from  the  outlet.  It  is  a stream  30  feet  wide,  12  inches  deep,  with  a current  of  4£ 
knots,  and  flows  over  a stony  and  pebbly  bottom  in  a general  southwesterly  direction. 
The  water  is  dark  and  clear,  a little  lighter  in  shade  than  the  lake  water,  and  has  a 
temperature  of  49°  F.  About  200  yards  from  the  mouth  of  this  feeder  there  are 
heavy  falls,  which,  it  is  believed,  the  salmon  can  not  pass. 

The  next  feeder  in  point  of  size  enters  the  lake  at  a point  about  400  yards  south 
of  the  mouth  of  the  stream  just  described,  near  the  narrowest  part  of  the  lake.  This 
stream  has  two  mouths,  forming  a delta  of  considerable  extent.  The  division  of  the 
main  stream  occurs  about  300  yards  from  the  lake  shore.  It  flows  in  a tortuous 
channel  through  a rather  low  country  in  a general  westerly  direction.  Half  a mile 
from  the  lake  the  ground  rises  sharply,  and  here  is  a series  of  cascades  and  falls 
insurmountable  for  any  fish,  the  water  in  places  spreading  out  and  rushing  over 
huge,  smooth,  sloping  rocks  with  great  velocity  and  a depth  of  only  one  or  two  inches 
for  many  feet.  The  water  is  very  clear  and  cold,  temperature  39°  F.,  and  apparently 
comes  from  the  melting  snows  on  the  mountains.  The  average  width  of  this  stream 
is  25  feet,  depth  10  inches,  and  current.  4 knots;  bottom  stony  and  gravelly.  In  late 
summer  this  volume  must  be  very  much  reduced. 

A small  feeder  enters  the  lake  on  the  southeastern  side.  It  is  inconsiderable  in 
size  and  is  apparently  formed  by  seepage  from  the  hills. 

Another  small  feeder  enters  at  the  head  of  the  lake  in  its  extreme  southern 
part.  It,  is  a small  stream  flowing  through  a narrow  valley,  low  and  flat  near  the  lake 
but  rising  to  an  altitude  of  250  feet  within  1 mile.  Temperature  of  the  water,  52°. 

A few  trout  or,  possibly,  young  salmon,  about  4 inches  long,  were  seen  near  the 
drift  of  logs  around  the  outlet. 

A good  site  for  a hatchery  could  be  found  at  the  mouth  of  either  of  the  two 
feeders  first  mentioned.  The  ground  around  the  mouth  of  the  second  stream  is 
better  adapted  for  building  purposes,  and  the  supply  of  water  there  is  at  present 
ample,  but  this  supply  must  be  greatly  reduced  at  times  if,  as  is  supposed,  the  stream 
is  only  the  result  of  melting  snow.  The  volume  of  the  first  feeder  is  greater,  and 
the  water  in  it  has  the  appearance  of  being  that  of  a lake  outlet. 

Checats  Stream  was  referred  to  in  my  report  for  1897,  page  100,  and  was  then 
fished  by  canneries  at  Loring  and  Yes  Bay.  Since  1897  it  has  been  fished  by  Loring 
only.  Under  average  conditions,  it  may  yield  12,000  to  15,000  redfish  per  season. 


Bull.  U.  S,  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  364.) 


Plate  XXXIX. 


CANNERY  OF  ALASKA  PACKERS  ASSOCIATION,  POINT  HIGHFIELD,  WRANGELL  ISLAND,  SOUTHEAST  ALASKA. 


KUNK  LAKE,  LOOKING  UP,  ETOLIN  ISLAND,  SOUTHEAST  ALASKA. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


365 


The  following  are  the  only  statistics  that  can  be  obtained  of  Checats  Stream: 


1895. 

1896. 

1897. 


Species. 

Total 

number. 

Average 
number 
per  case. 

Season  of  run. 

Canneries  to  which 
consigned. 

9,680 
10, 712 
15, 229 
489 
20, 682 
821 

Yes  Bay. 

Yes  Bay  and  Loring. 
Do. 

Yes  Bay. 

Yes  Bay  and  Loring. 
Yes  Bay. 

Redfish 

Cohoes  

Humpbacks 

Dog  salmon  

9 

6 

15 

o 

July  10-Aug.  28 

Aug.  26-Sept.  1 

July  21-Aug,  15 

July  23-Aug.  2 

Year. 

Redfish  dates. 

No. 

Coho  dates. 

No. 

1898 

. . J uly  13-Aug.  17 

19, 821 

Sept.  6-Sept.  10 

..  2,157  ! 

1899. . . 

..  July  18-Sept.  2 

11,816 

Aug.  9-Sept,  2 

..  6,071 

I960 

..  July  13-Aiig.  15 

4, 165 

July  26-Sept.  7 

. . 3, 991 

Humpback  dates.  : No. 


July  13-Aug.  26 24, 168 

July  17-Aug.  20 1 32,382 

July  15-Aug.  16 1 13,591 


KUNK  (KONKE)  STREAM  AND  LAKE. 


On  the  east  side  of  Etolin  Island,  about  midway  between  Chichagof  Pass  and 
Anita  Bay  and  opposite  a point  projecting  from  Wrangell  Island,  is  a small  stream 
which  carries  redfish  and  discharges  its  waters  into  Zimovia  Strait.  It  was  examined 
by  a party  in  charge  of  Ensign  Miller  on  June  11. 

This  stream  is  the  outlet  to  a lake  lying  about  14  miles  WSW.  from  the  mouth. 
It  is  20  feet  wide  and  12  inches  deep,  with  a strong  current  and  a temperature,  June  11, 
of  52°  E.  It  Hows  over  a rooky  and  bowlderous  bed  having  at  intervals  small  areas  of 
gravel  and  sand.  About  150  yards  from  tide  water  are  the  remains  of  a barricade 
and  three-fourths  of  a mile  from  the  same  point,  on  the  left  bank,  a tributary  enters; 
this  is  about  one-third  the  size  of  the  main  stream  and  has  an  elevation  at  the 
junction  of  110  feet  above  tide  water  and  a temperature,  on  dune  11,  of  45°  F. 
From  this  point  to  the  lower  arm  of  the  lake,  a distance  of  three-fourths  of  a mile, 
the  main  stream  flows  through  a deep  ravine  in  which  there  is  a series  of  rapids; 
the  greatest  fall  is  about  T feet,  but  is  much  broken  and  presents  no  serious  obstacle 
to  the  ascent  of  salmon.  As  the  head  is  reached  the  stream  widens  into  the  lower  arm 
of  the  lake,  which  is  1^  miles  long  and  300  yards  wide,  with  an  elevation  above  tide 
water  of  270  feet  and  a temperature  of  58c  F. ; this  arm  narrows  at  the  head  and 
then  opens  upon  the  main  body  of  water. 

The  main  lake  is  heart-shaped,  1 7 miles  long  by  about  the  same  width.  At  the 
head  of  the  lake,  the  western  end,  is  the  main  feeder,  which  flows  through  a narrow 
valley  and  is  about  18  feet  wide,  5 inches  deep,  and  has  a 3 to  4 knot  current;  the 
temperature,  June  11,  was  45°  F. 

On  the  southern  side  are  four  small  streams  together  carrying  a volume  of  water 
into  the  lake  equal  to  that  of  the  main  feeder  and  draining  the  melting  snow  from 
the  high  mountains  on  that  side.  The  vegetation  around  the  streams  and  lake  is 
dense  and  consists  of  large  trees  and  the  usual  scrub  growth.  At  a few  points  on  the 
upper  end  of  the  lake  there  are  small  grassy  flats.  A few  pond  lilies  were  noticed 
near  the  shore  and  numerous  small  fry  were  seen,  probably  salmon.  The  level  of 
the  lake  seemed  to  be  at  its  highest  point,  and,  from  the  appearance  of  the  shore  line, 
it  probably  falls  several  feet  during  a dry  season.  Near  the  mouth  of  the  large  feeder 
a site  for  a small  hatchery  might  be  found. 


366 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


There  are  no  records  available  for  Kunk  stream.  It  is  one  of  the  small  redlish 
streams  and  }Tields  2,000  to  5,000  of  that  species  during  a season.  It  has  been  fished 
by  the  Wrangell  cannery  and  on  their  books  is  classed  as  transient. 

SAT, MON  BAY  STREAM  AND  LAKE 


Salmon  Bay  is  on  the  northeastern  end  of  Prince  of  Wales  Island  near  the 
junction  of  Clarence  and  Sumner  straits  and  about  7 miles  to  the  eastward  of  Red 


Bay,  and  receives  at  its  head  the  waters  of  a redfish  stream,  which  is  a lake  outlet. 
This  stream  was  examined  during  the  season  of  1900  for  a distance  of  3i  miles,  but 
unfavorable  conditions  prevented  the  continuation  of  the  work  at  that  time,  and  it 
was  again  visited  this  year.  A description  of  the  lower  part  of  this  stream  is  con- 
tained in  my  report  for  1900,  and  from  that  point  is  continued  here. 

It  was  examined  by  a party  in  charge  of  Ensign  Kempff,  who  found  that  at  the 
point  “F”  the  stream  forked,  the  eastern  branch  being  the  outlet  to  the  lake.  It 


Plate  XL. 


RACKS  USED  TO  BARRICADE  KUSHNEAHIN  STREAM,  KUPREANOF  ISLAND,  SOUTHEAST  ALASKA. 


Tf-rr 


CANNERY  OF  ALASKA  PACKERS  ASSOCIATION,  LORING,  NAHA  BAY,  REVI LLAG IGEDO  ISLAND,  SOUTHEAST  ALASKA. 


■Spit  ®fei  itOj 

Stal 

HnSHI 

ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


367 


Hows  in  a general  northerly  direction  over  a muddy  bottom  between  low  grassy  banks 
which  become  wooded  and  rocky  as  the  forks  are  approached.  Three-fourths  of  a 
mile  above  the  forks  the  stream  widens  to  about  50  yards  and  seems  deep-tlowing,  with 
little  current.  The  water  has  a brownish  tinge,  and  on  June  14  had  a temperature  of 
61°  F.  There  are  no  obstructions  of  any  kind  in  the  upper  part  of  the  stream. 

Near  the  source  it  widens  into  a shallow  lake  with  a mud  bottom  and  covered 


Sketch  of  Salmon  Bay,  Lake,  and  Stream,  Prince  of  Wales  Island,  Alaska. 

with  pond  lilies.  This  small  lake  lies  in  a general  NNE.  and  SSW.  direction,  and  is 
about  1 mile  long  with  an  arm,  rather  less  than  one-half  mile  in  length,  extending  to 
the  NW.  Near  the  center  is  a large  grassy  islet.  The  banks,  which  are  low  and 
grassy,  have  wooded  flats  extending  back  from  them.  The  elevation  is  145  feet; 
temperature  of  the  water,  61°  F. 


368 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


To  the  southward,  and  connected  with  the  small  mud  lake  by  a short  passage,  is 
the  main  lake,  which  lies  in  a general  north-and-south  direction  and  is  about  3 miles 
long  with  an  extreme  width  of  three-fourths  of  a mile.  The  banks  slope  from  the 
wooded  hills  to  the  rocky  beaches,  and  the  lake  is  apparently  quite  deep. 

For  want  of  facilities  the  lake  could  not  be  examined  in  its  entire  length,  but  no 
feeders  were  observed  in  its  northern  half.  An  Indian  who  hunts  the  region  during 
the  winter  stated  that  several  feeders  of  considerable  size  entered  the  lake  near  the 
southern  end,  and  it  is  probable  that  these  feeders  form  the  redfish  spawning-ground. 

The  available  statistics  to  1900  are  given  in  my  1900  report,  page  267. 

KUSHNEAHIN  STREAM  AND  LAKE. 

On  the  southwestern  end  of  Kupreanof  Island  and  a mile  NNW.  from  Point 
Barrie  is  a small  rocky  indentation  which  receives  the  waters  of  a redfish  stream. 
The  mouth  lies  opposite  a small  wooded  islet  which  is  joined  to  the  main  shore  on  its 
northern  side  by  a line  of  kelp-covered  sunken  reefs.  This  stream,  known  as  Kush- 
neahin,  is  referred  to  in  my  1897  report,  p.  108.  As  it  is  in  an  exposed  and  dangerous 
locality  the  conditions  did  not  at  that  time,  nor  last  year,  permit  an  examination,  but 
it  was  examined  on  June  11  by  a party  in  charge  of  Lieutenant  Rodman. 

Kushneabin  Stream  is  a lake  outlet  and  along  its  bed  is  8 miles  in  length,  though 
in  a straight  line  the  distance  to  the  lake  is  25  per  cent  less;  the  general  direction  of 
the  How  is  southwest.  At  the  mouth,  where  it  is  spread  out  and  the  current  sluggish, 
the  stream  is  about  10  feet  wide,  from  1 to  12  inches  in  depth,  and  temperature 
of  water  53°  F.  Two  miles  above,  where  it  is  contracted  in  a narrow  channel  of 
uniform  depth,  it  is  11  feet  wide  and  3 inches  deep. 

About  1 miles  from  the  mouth  is  a broken  fall  8 to  10  feet  high,  which,  however, 
forms  no  serious  obstacle  to  the  ascent  of  fish.  From  the  sea  to  this  point,  which  is 
215  feet  above  tide  water,  the  bed  rises  gradually  and  is  rocky  and  stony,  with  a 
little  gravel  along  the  banks.  The  latter  are  generally  low  with  occasional  bluffs 
rising  from  10  to  100  feet.  One  mile  below  the  falls  the  stream  Hows  through  a cut 
about  150  yards  long  and  30  to  10  feet  wide,  the  water  lying  in  deep  pools  between 
the  bluff's,  which  are  from  20  to  70  feet  high.  Except  the  falls  there  are  no  strong- 
rapids  in  the  stream.  In  the  upper  half  the  stream  flows  through  a low’  flat  country 
with  a sluggish  current  over  a gravelly  bottom.  The  hills  in  this  section  recede  fully 
a mile.  Half  a mile  above  the  falls  it  receives  from  the  northward  the  main  tributary 
which  rises  in  the  hills  forming  the  northern  part  of  a valley.  At  the  mouth  it  is  6 
feet  wide,  3 inches  deep,  and  so  far  as  examined  it  flows  over  a rocky  and  gravelly 
bed.  The  water  is  clear,  and  on  June  11  had  a temperature  of  16°  F.  The  water 
in  the  main  stream  above  the  principal  tributary  is  tinged  dark  brown. 

All  other  tributaries  are  insignificant,  though  two  on  the  left  bank  may  afford 
spawning-beds  for  humpback  salmon.  The  channel  of  the  main  stream  below7  the 
falls  follows  gentle  curves,  while  above  it  is  more  tortuous  and  meandering,  winding 
through  low,  extensive  flats  or  tundra.  Except  over  the  open  flats  and  tundra,  the 
vegetation  is  of  the  usual  type,  heavy  woodland  and  dense  undergrowth. 

On  the  bank  and  100  yards  above  tide  water,  which  ascends  200  to  300  yards 
from  the  mouth,  there  were  21  frames,  71  feet  by  1 feet,  in  good  condition,  neath7 
piled,  with  some  old  webbing  near  by,  evidently  to  be  used  in  barricading  the  stream 


KUSHNEAHIN  LAKE  AND  STREAM,  KUPREANOF  ISLAND,  ALASKA. 


Bull.  U.  S F.  C.  1 901 . /To  face  page  368. 


Plate  XLI. 


co 

c 


to 

— I 

> 


59^\»u  jo 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


369 


as  soon  as  the  run  set  in;  50  yards  above  this,  in  the  stream,  is  a log  crib,  ballasted 
with  stone  and  probably  used  in  the  barricade.  The  frames  were  burned. 

Numerous  small  fry  were  seen  in  the  pools. 

The  lake  is  about  three-fourths  of  a mile  long  by  one-eighth  to  one-fourth  of  a 
mile  wide  and  lies  with  the  major  axis  in  a north-and-soutk  direction.  The  western 
shore  is  low  with  scattering  trees,  while  the  eastern  shore  is  high  and  densely 
wooded.  The  lake  appears  shallow,  an  abundance  of  pond  lilies  cropping  out, 
especially  around  the  lower  end.  The  beaches,  and  bottom  where  it  could  be  seen, 
are  stony,  with  gravel  and  some  mud.  The  elevation  is  315  feet.  Temperature  of 
water  June  14,  64°  F.  A small  sluggish  stream  apparently  enters  the  upper  end, 
but  for  lack  of  facilities  a proper  examination  could  not  be  made.  It  is  believed  the 
locality  would  not  afford  a good  hatchery  site. 

There  are  no  stream  data  available  for  Kushneahin.  Formerly  it  was  fished 
at  times  by  the  cannery  at  Redfish  Bay.  It  is  believed  the  stream  is  good  for  10,000 
redfish  under  average  conditions. 

POINT  BARRIE  SALTERT. 

About  one-fourth  of  a mile  below  the  mouth  of  the  stream  (Kushneahin)  is  the 
Point  Barrie  saltery,  formerly  operated  by  Mr.  Cyrus  Orr.  It  is  located  on  a small 
indentation  and  consists  of  the  saltery  building,  store,  dwelling,  and  wharf.  The 
place  was  closed  at  the  time  of  our  visit.  In  the  saltery  proper  were  15  tanks  of  20 
barrels  capacity  each,  all  clean  and  in  good  condition,  a quantity,  of  salt,  a number  of 
casks,  barrels,  tubs,  and  an  outfit  of  nets,  webbing,  etc. 

SAR-KAR  STREAM  AND  LAKE. 

On  the  eastern  side  of  Klawak  Passage,  western  side  of  Prince  of  Wales  Island, 
and  about  20  miles  from  Shakan  village,  is  a small  inlet  one  mile  long  and  about 
three-eighths  mile  wide,  with  a general  east  and  west  (mag.)  direction.  On  the 
northern  side  of  this  inlet,  near  the  eastern  end,  are  located  the  Brockman  saltery 
and  a small  Indian  village.  A narrow,  crooked,  salt-water  strait,  the  outlet  of  a 
brackish  lagoon,  enters  the  inlet  at  the  southeastern  end.  From  its  mouth  this  outlet 
extends  ESE.  (mag.)  for  three-eighths  mile,  turns  sharply  to  the  northward  one-fourth 
mile,  and  then,  with  another  turn  to  the  eastward,  enters  the  brackish  lagoon.  The 
southern  shore,  as  far  as  the  lagoon  and  a little  inside,  is  bluff,  the  northern  shore  low. 
In  the  stretch  from  the  lagoon  entrance  to  the  second  turn  are  large  rocks. 

About  three- fourths  of  the  distance  from  the  entrance  to  the  first  turn  is  the 
piling  for  a trap  which  extends  entirely  across  the  strait.  The  saltery  owner  stated 
that  this  trap  had  not  been  used  for  four  years.  From  the  surrounding  conditions 
it  is  believed  that  fishing  by  any  other  means  would  be  very  expensive. 

The  brackish  lagoon  extends  in  a north  (mag.)  direction  about  3 miles  from  the 
strait  and  three-fourths  of  a mile  south  from  it.  The  shores  are  low  and  fiat  except 
for  two  small  hills  on  the  east  and  a part  of  the  southern  shore.  The  western  shore 
was  followed  from  the  strait  northward  to  the  mouth  of  the  stream  and  the  sketch 
shows  its  general  outline,  but  the  lagoon  is  so  filled  with  islands  and  the  channels 
between  are  so  narrow  that  the  view  is  restricted  in  every  direction,  and  what  is 
sketched  as  the  eastern  shore  of  the  lagoon  may  be  additional  islands.  The  shores 
are  rocky,  apparently  limestone,  low  and  fiat,  covered  with  spruce  and  hemlock,  and 

F.  C.  B.  1901—24 


370 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION 


in  almost  every  cove  are  grassy  flats.  Temperature  of  water,  66°  F.  The  lagoon  is 
2 to  4 feet  in  depth  except  near  the  middle  channels,  where  it  appears  quite  deep. 
At  its  northern  end  a small  fresh -water  stream  enters,  which  is  the  outlet  of  a 
chain  of  lakes  lying  to  the  northward.  From  its  mouth  it  extends  in  a general 
northerly  direction  for  a distance  of  about  1 mile,  with  a gentl}r  winding  course. 
Two  hundred  yards  from  the  lagoon  is  a small  cascade.  The  banks  are  generally 
low  and  flat  near  the  mouth,  rising  gradually  toward  the  lake,  where  the  stream 


Sketch  of  Sar-kar  Lake  and  Stream,  Klawak  Passage,  Prince  of  Wales  Island. 


flows  between  low  bluff's.  The  bottom  is  stomr  and  pebbly,  gravelly  sometimes  in 
the  deeper  pools,  and  the  water  dark  brown  and  not  very  clear. 

From  the  head  of  the  stream  the  first  lake  extends  to  the  ENE.,  apparently 
for  about  one  mile,  with  a width  of  from  one-fourth  to  one-half  mile.  The  bottom 
is  gravelly,  the  shores  low  and  well  wooded  with  spruce,  hemlock,  and  berry  bushes. 
Elevation,  40  feet;  temperature,  60°  F.  The  Indians  state  that  there  is  a system  of 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901 


371 


lakes  and  sloughs  extending  a very  long  distance,  and  that  there  is  another  outlet  to 
this  system  on  the  other  side  of  the  island.  It  is  said  that  the  salmon  do  not  spawn 
in  the  lower  but  ascend  to  the  upper  series  of  lakes.  Redfish  were  just  beginning  to 
run  and  a few  were  seen  jumping  in  the  lagoon  outlet. 

Sar-Kar  stream  is  fished  by  Mr.  Fred  Brockman,  who  has  liv  ed  here  many  years. 
All  the  fish  that  are  called  for  are  sold  fresh  to  the  cannery  at  Klawak,  and  the 
remainder  are  salted.  This  stream  was  referred  to  in  my  report  of  1897,  p.  116,  to 
which  further  reference  is  made,  but  it  was  not  visited  at  that  time.  The  examination 
was  made  by  Ensign  Hepburn  on  June  15  and  16. 

The  value  of  this  stream,  under  average  conditions,  is  from  18,000  to  20,000 
redfish  per  season.  The  following  is  the  available  stream  record  of  fish  taken: 


Year. 

Redfish. 

Cohoes. 

Dates. 

Number. 

Dates. 

Number. 

1887  

1888  

July  3 to  Aug.  4 

June  28  to  July  11 

6, 476 
6,834 

Aug.  7 to  Sept.  8 

14,528 

1889  

1890 

July  3 to  Aug.  30 

11,555 
16, 267 

15,  331 
9,033 
4.700 

1891. 

Julie  23  to  Aug.  21 

35i 033 
24,024 

Aug.  19  to  Sept.  10 

1892 

June  24  to  Aug.  19 

July  27  to  August  23 

1893  

1894  

1895 

June  24  to  July  30 

July  7 to  Aug.  2 

9,  797 
12, 678 
11,636 

July  21  to  Sept.  4 

3, 830 

1896 

20| 480 
21, 667 
24, 974 

Aug.  2 to  Sept.  2 

9,643 

1897 

8’  207 

1898 

June  20  to  Aug.  18 

Aug.  16  to  Sept.  6 

10,423 

1899 

36,000 
26,  021 

Aug.  l.j  to  Sept.  8 

7,  000 

1900. . 

Aug.  14  to  Sept.  16 

12, 000 

Average  weight  of  redfish,  51  pounds;  of  cohoes,  9 pounds;  of  humpbacks,  31  pounds. 
FRED  BROCKMAN  SALTERY. 


This  saltery  is  located  on  the  northern  side  of  Sar-Kar  Inlet  and  consists  of  two 
small  buildings  on  piling,  each  25  feet  by  40  feet,  and  a cooper  shop.  There  are  14 
tanks  of  20  barrels  capacity  each.  All  the  redfish  and  most  of  the  cohoes  are  sold 
fresh  to  the  Klawak  cannery,  which  calls  on  alternate  days,  so  that  all  the  salting 
done  here  in  recent  years  has  been  in  cohoes  and  humpbacks.  It  is  estimated  that 
the  saltery  has  a capacity  of  200  half-barrels  of  redfish,  360  half-barrels  of  cohoes, 
and  120  half-barrels  of  humpbacks,  but  this  total  has  never  been  reached  here. 
Transportation  is  through  the  Klawak  cannery.  The  salting  from  1889  to  1898  has 
averaged  less  than  100  barrels  a year.  Salted  50  half-barrels  of  whole  humpbacks'and 
150  half-barrels  of  humpback  bellies  in  1898;  250  half-barrels  of  humpback  bellies 
in  1899,  and  250  half-barrels  of  humpback  bellies  in  1900. 

Most  of  the  humpbacks  used  at  the  saltery  are  taken  at  a stream  about  7 miles 
to  the  northward  of  Sar-Kar,  on  Kosciusko  Island,  known  as  Tok-Hene,  which  has 
a capacity  of  about  80,000  humpbacks.  A few  cohoes  are  obtained  from  a stream 
known  as  Sar-Hene,  on  Klawak  Passage,  about  8 miles  below  the  saltery. 

KOOK  (basket)  BAY,  STREAM,  AND  LAKE. 

Kook,  or  Basket,  Bay  is  a narrow  indentation  or  inlet  about  1 mile  in  length, 
extending  into  the  eastern  side  of  Chichagof  Island  and  opening  upon  Chatham  Strait 
about  11  miles  to  the  northward  of  Point  Hayes.  At  the  head  of  the  bay  is  the  mouth 
of  a stream,  the  outlet  to  a lake,  which  carries  a few  redfish.  It  was  examined  by 
Ensign  Miller  on  June  19.  This  stream  Hows  from  the  lake  in  a general  ENE.  direc- 


872 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


tion  through  a heavily  wooded  country,  and  is  about  a mile  long,  with  a width  at  the 
head  of  30  feet,  depth  1 foot,  and  a very  strong  current.  Commencing  at  the  lake, 
from  which  the  head  of  the  stream  is  screened  by  a small  wooded  islet,  it  flows  over 
a bowlder  bed  through  a deep  ravine  for  one-half  mile,  when  the  water  disappears  in 
the  face  of  a rock  mass  about  60  feet  high,  which  appears  to  be  thrown  across  the 
gulch.  Three  hundred  yards  beyond  the  water  reappears  and  flows  through  a chasm 
for  an  equal  distance,  after  which  it  is  again  lost  in  a subterranean  channel  for  another 
300  yards.  At  the  point  where  it  again  emerges  the  channel  is  choked  by  massive 
bowlders,  and  on  the  adjoining  bank  were  found  a number  of  the  slat  frames  commonly 
used  for  barricading.  From  here  the  stream  flows  with  a sluggish  current  for  100 


yards  through  a deep  cut  having  nearly  perpendicular  rock  walls,  and  then  for  50 
yards  under  a tine  arch  rock,  the  top  of  which  is  about  4 feet  above  the  highest  tides; 
50  yards  beyond  it  enters  the  bay.  Temperature  of  water  June  19,  17°  F. 

The  lake  is  35  feet  above  tide  water.  It  is  round  in  shape,  about  1^  miles  long 
by  1 mile  wide,  and  lying  in  a heavily  wooded  basin,  having  at  the  western  end  a 
wide  depression  through  which  the  main  feeder  probably  flows. 

Around  the  flats  at  the  mouth  of  the  stream  the  Indians  had  planted  some  heav}r 
wooden  posts,  though  for  what  purpose  could  not  be  learned.  As  they  were  removed 
upon  the  approach  of  the  boat,  it  is  possible  that  a trap  was  in  course  of  construction. 

The  only  record  available  for  this  stream  is  from  the  books  of  the  Baranof 
Packing  Company,  namely:  In  1896,  21,175  redfish  were  taken  July  12  to  July  27. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


373 


FRESHWATER  RAT,  STREAM,  AND  LAKE. 


On  the  eastern  side  of  Chichagof  Island,  about  12  miles  below  Point  Augusta,  a 
deep  inlet  makes  in  to  the  westward  known  as  Freshwater  Bay.  On  the  southern 
side  of  this  bay,  1 miles  within  the  southern  entrance  point  (East  Point),  is  a cove 
known  as  Pablof  Harbor,  which  affords  a good  anchorage,  and  receives  at  its  head  the 
waters  of  a stream  carrying  redfish,  and  known  among  fishermen  as  the  Freshwater 
Bay  stream.  It  was  examined  by  a party  in  charge  of  Ensign  Kempff  on  June  20. 

Near  the  mouth  on  the  southern  side  is  the  old  site  of  the  cannery  of  the  Astoria 
and  Alaska  Packing  Company,  which  made  a pack  in  1889  and  then  moved  to  the 
South  Bay  of  Pillars,  where  it  was  destroyed  by  fire  in  1892. 


Sketch  of  Stream,  Lake,  and  Feeder,  Pablof  Harbor,  Chichagof  Island,  Alaska. 


Freshwater  Bay  stream,  the  outlet  to  a lake,  is  less  than  one-fourth  mile  long-,  100 
feet  wide,  9 inches  deep,  and  flows  with  a strong  current  over  a rocky  and  gravelly 
bottom,  between  rocky,  well-wooded  banks.  Just  without  the  lake  the  water  flows 
over  a broken  fall,  10  feet  high,  but  so  stepped  that  fish  may  easily  ascend  at  high 
water.  There  are  no  barricades.  Temperature  of  water,  13°  F. 

The  lake  is  three-fourths  of  a mile  long  and  one-half  of  a mile  wide,  with  the  major 
axis  NE.  by  E.  and  SW.  by  W.  The  shores  are  low,  grassy  in  places,  with  heavily 
wooded  areas  in  the  background;  the  beaches  are  muddy,  and  the  body  of  water  seems 
moderately  deep.  Temperature  of  water  near  the  shore,  45°  F.  Elevation,  20  feet. 


374 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


A large  feeder,  which  enters  the  lake  at  the  southern  end,  around  an  islet  in  its 
mouth,  was  examined  for  a distance  of  5^  miles. 

It  flows  in  a winding  channel,  through  a gradually  rising  country,  in  two  general 
directions  from  the  highest  point  reached,  first  to  the  SE.  and  then  to  the  NNE.  At 
a point  measured  it  was  100  feet  wide,  9 inches  deep,  with  a strong  current.  In  the 
lower  course  are  numerous  wooded  islands,  and  about  4 miles  from  the  mouth  is  an 
extensive  flat,  the  stream  at  this  point  flowing  around  a low  island,  nearly  one-half 
mile  long.  The  banks  here  are  grassy,  with  much  elder,  while  in  other  places  they  are 
heavily  wooded.  Except  through  the  flats  the  stream  bed  is  rocky,  with  intervals 
of  gravel  patches.  The  water  has  the  brownish  tinge  usual  to  lake  water  in  South- 
east Alaska,  and  had  a temperature  of  40°  F.  Elevation  of  highest  point  reached, 
180  feet.  At  this  point  there  were  no  signs  of  a second  lake;  later,  however,  some 
Indians  stated  that  there  was  a second  lake  beyond,  to  which  salmon  ascended.  Inac- 
cessibility would  make  the  second  lake  unsuitable  as  a hatchery  site,  while  on  the 
first  lake  difficulty  would  probably  be  encountered  in  securing  mature  fish  and  pure 
water  for  hatchery  purposes. 

There  is  no  record  available  for  this  stream,  but  from  the  best  authorities  it  is 
stated  that  it  will  produce  50,000  redfish  per  season  under  good  conditions. 

BARTLETT  BAY,  STREAM,  AND  LAKE. 

Bartlett  Bay  or  Cove  is  on  the  eastern  side  of  Glacier  Bay,  about  4 miles  to  the 
northward  of  Point  Adolphus,  and  is  formed  by  the  southernmost  of  the  Beardslee 
Islands  and  a projection  from  the  mainland.  The  head  of  the  bay  receives  the  main 
body  of  water  flowing  from  a redfish  stream,  a portion  of  which,  however,  empties  into 
Glacier  Bay  to  the  northward  of  the  Beardslee  Islands.  The  stream  was  examined 
by  a party  in  charge  of  Lieutenant  Rodman  on  June  26. 

The  main  supply  of  water  in  the  stream  comes  from  two  branches  which  flow 
from  glaciers  in  the  mountain  ranges  to  the  eastward,  the  water  received  from 
streams  having  a lake  source  forming  only  a small  portion.  The  stream  is  about  9 
miles  long  from  its  mouth  to  the  upper  lake,  the  width  varying  from  15  yards  in  the 
upper  reaches  to  150  yards  in  the  lower,  and  the  depth  from  a few  inches  to  several 
feet;  the  general  direction  of  the  flow  is  south.  The  stream  bed  is  gravel,  sand, 
mud,  and  bowlders.  As  far  as  the  wooded  bluff,  which  is  reached  by  high-water 
tides,  and  where  the  first  rapids  begin,  the  stream  flows  through  low  grass-covered 
flats  with  the  tree  line  receding  for  one-fourth  mile.  In  this  section  there  are  numerous 
sand  bars,  mud  flats,  islands,  and  pools.  From  the  bluff  to  the  lake  the  rapids  are 
frequent,  but  not  very  strong,  and  the  stream  meanders  through  low  flats  covered 
with  pussy  willow  and  cottonwood,  with  scattering  spruce,  hemlock,  alders,  and  elders. 
Over  the  flats  are  great  areas  of  strawberries,  which  are  sought  by  the  Indians  during 
the  latter  part  of  July  and  August. 

Three-fourths  of  a mile  above  the  bluff  is  an  island  about  one-fourth  mile  long, 
and  in  the  first  bend  below  is  a V-shaped  runway  in  which  traps  were  formerly  used. 
There  is  no  evidence  of  barricading,  though  the  stream  could  easily  be  closed  by  nets 
at  the  head  of  tide  water. 

Immediately  above  the  wooded  bluff  a small  tributary  enters  from  the  westward, 
2 feet  wide,  4 inches  deep,  temperature  56°  F.,  which  is  said  to  drain  a small  lake 
about  half  a mile  long.  One-half  mile  above  the  large  island  is  another  tributary, 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


375 


flowing  from  the  eastward,  which  is  6 feet  wide,  8 inches  deep,  temperature  56°  F., 
and  also  said  to  drain  a lake.  The  sources  of  both  these  tributaries  are  reported  to 
furnish  a moderate  area  of  spawning-ground  for  redfish. 


Sketch  of  Bartlett  Bay,  Lake,  and  Stream,  Glacier  Bay,  Alaska. 

The  water  of  the  main  stream  is  glacial  in  appearance,  and  at  a point  measured 
was  48  feet  wide,  20  inches  deep,  current  strong.  Temperature  of  the  water  at  the 
mouth,  461-'  F. ; 5 miles  above,  40°  F. ; and  below  the  lake  outlet,  39°  F. 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


376 

The  main  lake  sought  by  redfish  lies  a short  distance  to  the  northward  of  the 
mouth  of  the  glacial  streams  which  furnish  the  main  body  of  water.  The  lake  lies 
in  a low  basin  at  the  foot  of  a high  mountain  system,  at  an  elevation  of  95  feet  above 
tide  water.  The  temperature  of  the  surface  water  was  56°  F.  It  is  an  irregularly 
shaped  body  of  water,  less  than  a mile  in  length,  lying  in  a general  north-and-south 
direction.  The  bottom  is  sand  and  gravel.  The  banks  are  heavily  wooded  with  the 
usual  growth,  and  on  the  water  near  the  shore  are  large  areas  of  a mossy  scum.  It  is 
said  the  lake  receives  two  small  feeders,  the  outlets  to  two  small  lakes,  but  there  are 
no  large  feeders.  A number  of  small  fry  were  seen  in  the  lake. 

Immediately  below  the  main  lake,  and  between  the  mouths  of  the  glacial  streams, 
is  a small  lake  or  pond  in  which  it  is  probable  that  some  fish  spawn. 

There  are  no  available  data  from  which  the  value  of  this  stream  can  be  estimated; 
it  is  said  to  vary  considerably.  During  a good  season  it  may  yield  50,000  redfish. 

BARTLETT  BAY  SALTERY  AND  CANNERY. 

On  the  northern  side  of  Bartlett  Bay,  about  half  a mile  from  the  mouth  of 
the  stream,  is  a saltery  which  was  owned  by  the  Icy  Strait  Packing  Company  and 
operated  by  that  organization  in  1900.  As  a branch  of  their  Petersburg  cannery, 
which  was  acquired  by  the  Pacific  Packing  and  Navigation  Company  this  spring,  it 
is  understood  that  the  Bartlett  Bay  property  was  included  in  the  transfer.  At  the 
date  of  our  visit,  June  25,  it  was  stated  that  the  saltery  would  not  be  operated  during 
the  season,  but  that  all  fish  taken  would  be  transported  by  steam  tenders  to  the  new 
cannery  of  the  Chatham  Straits  Packing  Company  at  Sitkoh  Bay.  The  saltery  has 
12  tanks  of  12  barrels  capacity  each.  A crew  of  8 men,  with  2 boats,  arrived  on  the 
ground  June  20,  .and  to  the  25th  had  taken  80  redfish. 

During  the  season  of  1900  the  Icy  Strait  Packing  Company  erected  a cannery 
building  on  the  southeastern  shore  of  Bartlett  Bay,  opposite  the  saltery,  expecting 
to  install  machinery  in  time  to  operate  it  during  1901.  At  the  time  of  our  visit  the 
plant  consisted  of  a simple  cannery  building,  150  feet  long,  projecting  on  piles  over 
the  water.  No  machinery  had  been  installed,  and  it  was  stated  that  no  additions 
would  be  made  during  the  season.  Like  the  saltery,  it  is  believed  to  have  been 
acquired  by  the  new  combine. 

DUNDAS  BAY  STREAM. 

The  Western  Fisheries  Company,  located  at  Dundas  Bay,  obtains  some  redfish 
from  around  the  mouth  of  a stream  at  the  northern  end  of  Dundas  Bay,  the  value  of 
which  is  unknown.  An  examination  of  the  lower  course  of  this  stream  was  made 
by  Ensign  Hepburn  on  June  28. 

A broad,  fiat  valley  makes  to  the  northward  of  Dundas  Bay  which  is  drained 
by  two  streams,  one  a glacial  stream  with  a width  varying  between  60  and  100  yards, 
an  average  depth  of  2 feet,  and  a strong  current  flowing  in  a general  ESE.  direction; 
the  other  is  a much  smaller  stream,  the  outlet  of  a lake  lying  about  10  miles  NNW. 
from  the  center  of  the  mouth  of  the  valley.  Three  miles  from  the  northern  shore 
of  Dundas  Bay  these  streams  join  at  a point  where  the  two  parts  of  the  glacial  stream 
unite  again  after  flowing  around  a large  island.  From  this  point  of  junction  the  two 
streams  flow  SSE.  (mag.)  for  about  a mile  between  well-defined  banks  and  then  spread 
out  over  a large  triangular  gravel  flat  about  2 miles  long  and  extending  across  the 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


377 


valley.  Through  this  loose  gravel  the  stream  is  continually  cutting  new  channels, 
making  islands  and  sweeping  them  away.  For  this  reason  it  is  very  difficult  to  carry 
a boat  upstream.  Even  when  the  depth  continues  sufficient  the  current  is  too  strong 
to  pull  against,  and  tracking  becomes  necessary,  which  is  very  trying  in  the  icy 
glacial  waters.  Above  the  gravel  flats  the  banks  are  steep,  from  G to  12  feet  high, 
muddy,  covered  with  a dense  growth  of  scrub  alder  and  berry  bushes,  and  the 
current  in  places  runs  fully  6 knots.  As  far  as  could  be  seen,  the  valley  continued 
broad  and  flat  for  a distance  of  at  least  8 miles.  The  mountains  on  each  side  appear 
moderately  well  wooded  with  spruce  and  hemlock,  while  throughout  the  center  of  the 
valley,  except  near  the  streams,  are  many  sandy  and  grassy  flats.  No  fish  were  seen, 


nor  were  there  any  obstructions.  Tide  water  extends  about  a mile  upstream  from 
the  bay  shore. 

WESTERN  FISHERIES  COMPANY,  DUNDAS  RAY. 

The  cannery  of  this  company,  referred  to  in  my  report  of  1900,  is  on  the  western 
side  of  Dundas  Bay,  about  1 miles  within  the  entrance.  With  the  machinery  installed 
this  year  it  was  claimed  to  have  a capacity  of  500  cases  per  diem.  Fish  are  pewed  from 
boats  to  hand  carts  and  wheeled  up  an  inclined  plane  to  the  fish-house  at  the  seaward 
end  of  the  cannery.  The  transportation  is  by  regular  line  of  freight  steamers.  The 
localities  fished  for  redfish  in  1900  and  1901  were  Bartlett  Bay,  Dundas  Bay,  Taylor 
Bay,  Glacier  Bay,  Surge  Bay,  Dry  Bay  (Alsek  River  Delta),  Excursion  Inlet,  Cape 
Spencer,  Hocktaheine,  and  Takanis;  humpbacks  were  obtained  in  Mud  Bay  and 


378 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Port  Althorp.  The  redfish  value  of  these  localities  is  unknown,  but,  excepting 
the  Alsek,  is  not  believed  to  be  large.  In  1900  this  cannery  took  from  the  various 
localities  67,000  redfish,  but  as  fishing  was  to  be  carried  on  more  vigorously  in  1901 
better  results  were  expected. 

HANUS  BAY,  STREAM,  AND  LAKE. 

In  the  eastern  part  of  Peril  Straits,  opposite  Lindenburg  Head,  on  the  Baranof 
Island  shore,  is  a wide  bight,  known  as  Han  us  Bay,  which  receives,  in  its  shallow 
southwestern  arm,  the  waters  of  a stream,  a lake  outlet,  carrying  a few  redfish. 
This  system  was  examined  by  a party  in  charge  of  Lieutenant  Rodman,  on  August  5. 


Sketch  of  Hanus  Bay,  Lake,  and  Stream,  Baranof  Island,  Alaska. 

From  the  lake  to  tide  water  the  stream  is  about  three-fourths  mile  long,  and  at  a 
point  measured  was  15  feet  wide,  12  inches  deep,  flowing  in  a general  northeasterly 
direction,  with  a strong  current.  In  the  upper  reaches  the  stream  bed  is  solid  rock, 
and  in  the  lower  portion  is  of  rock,  sand,  and  gravel.  The  stream  proper  empties 
into  a small  tidal  basin,  about  350  yards  by  100  yards,  which  leads  by  a narrow 
passage  to  Harms  Bay.  Spring  tides  ascend  to  the  rapids  about  200  yards  above  the 
tidal  basin.  At  this  point  are  the  remains  of  a barricade;  the  framework  is  standing, 
but  the  slats  have  been  removed.  About  one-third  mile  above  the  barricade  is  a 
series  of  rapids,  or  cascades,  having  a drop  of  about  10  feet,  which,  however,  offer  no 
serious  obstruction  to  the  ascent  of  salmon.  Above  this  the  stream  makes  a double 
bend  and  one-fourth  mile  beyond  emerges  from  the  lake.  Between  the  rapids  the 
stream  varies  from  50  to  150  feet  in  width,  from  1 inches  to  3 feet  in  depth,  and 
flows  with  a slack  current  over  a sandy  bottom.  The  water  is  clear,  rather  lighter  in 
color  than  most  lake  outlets,  and  had  a temperature  of  53°  F. 


a 0 S y VH  'S-5S3B  N3QNH 


Bull.  U.  S.  F.  C.  1901.  (To  face  page  378  ) 


Plate  XLM. 


SITKOH  B4V 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


379 


Between  the  barricade  and  the  cascade  the  banks  of  the  stream  are  low  and 
marshy;  in  other  places  they  are  high.  The  vegetation  is  that  usual  in  the  forests  of 
Southeast  Alaska  and  is  very  dense.  Back  from  the  stream  on  both  sides  are  high 
hills;  those  on  the  eastern  side  come  closer  to  the  stream  and  continue  to  the  head  of 
the  lake.  On  the  western  side,  between  the  lake  and  tide  water,  is  quite  an  extensive 
flat.  The  lake  is  about  15  feet  above  high  water,  is  slightly  crescent-shaped,  extending- 
in  a general  northeast  and  southwest  direction  for  about  If  miles,  and  has  in  no  place 
a greater  width  than  one-fourth  mile.  It  is  apparently  deep,  except  near  the  outlet, 
and  the  water  is  clear.  The  main  feeder  is  at  the  head  and  appears  to  carry  a large 
body  of  water,  much  of  which  is  probably  received  from  the  melting  snows  of  the 
surrounding  mountains.  A good  hatchery  site  might  be  obtained  on  this  feeder. 

The  run  of  redfish  was  evidently  over,  humpbacks  were  very  abundant,  and 
there  were  many  Dolly  Varden  and  cut-throat  trout,  with  a few  of  the  rainbow 
species.  It  is  stated  that  on  duly  4,  1895,  redfish  were  running  in  the  stream,  that 
many  were  seen  on  that  date  in  the  lake,  and  that  the  Indians  were  using  their 
funnel-shaped  traps  in  the  stream  below  the  barricade. 

There  is  no  available  record  of  this  stream,  but  it  may  be  said  to  have  a value  of 
10,000  redfish  during  the  season. 

SITKOII  BAY,  STREAM,  AND  LAKE. 

At  the  eastern  entrance  to  Peril  Straits,  on  the  northern  side,  between  Point 
Craven  and  Point  Hayes,  a deep  indentation  makes  to  the  northwest,  which  is  known 
as  Sitkoh  Bay.  Within  the  bay,  and  41  miles  from  Point  Craven,  on  the  southern 
side,  is  a stream  carrying  redfish,  which  was  examined  on  August  5 by  a party  in 
charge  of  Ensign  Miller.  This  stream  is  a lake  outlet,  is  about  4 miles  long  with  a 
width  at  the  mouth  of  about  30  feet  and  a depth  of  6 inches;  temperature  of  water 
57°  F.  It  flows  with  a strong  current,  in  a general  northeasterly  direction,  through 
a wide  valley,  over  a rocky  bed  having  at  intervals  areas  of  sand  and  gravel.  There 
are  no  strong  rapids  or  falls,  and  tide  water  ascends  about  700  yards  within  the 
mouth.  There  are  two  small  tributaries  which  enter  from  the  southeastward,  one 
near  the  lake  having  a temperature  of  50°  F.,  and  the  other,  about  midway  of  its 
length,  a temperature  of  55°  F.  The  remains  of  three  barricades  were  seen,  located 
respective^  100  yards,  500  yards,  and  1,000  yards  within  the  mouth,  none  of  which, 
however,  had  any  indication  of  recent  use. 

The  lake  lies  in  a general  northeast  and  southwest  direction,  is  about  2 miles 
long,  and  from  one-fourth  to  one-half  mile  wide.  It  has  an  elevation  of  190  feet; 
temperature  55°  F.  at  time  of  visit.  The  surrounding  country  is  heavily  wooded  and 
near  the  upper  part  of  the  stream  the  borders  are  level  with  large  flats  at  different 
points  around  the  lake.  The  beaches  are  usually  of  sand  and  gravel. 

The  only  records  of  this  stream  available  are  from  the  books  of  the  old  Baranof 
Packing  Company,  as  follows: 


Year. 

Species. 

Date. 

Number. 

1890 

4, 902 

1895 

do 

4, 260 

1896 

do 

15, 794 

1897 

566 

1890 

Sept.  2-Sept.  17... 

2,354 

1895 

do ... 

1,252 

380 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


GUT  BAY,  STREAM,  AND  LAKE. 

On  the  eastern  side  of  Baranof  Island,  31  miles  north  from  Cape  Ommaney,  a 
long,  narrow  bay  makes  to  the  westward  for  a distance  of  4 miles.  It  opens  on 
Chatham  Strait  and  at  its  entrance  is  less  than  half  a cable  in  width.  At  the  head  of 
the  bay,  on  the  southwest  side,  is  the  mouth  of  a small  redfish  stream,  a lake  outlet, 
which  was  examined  by  a party  in  charge  of  Ensign  Kemp  if  on  August  6. 

The  stream  flows  from  the  lake  in  a general  northerly  direction  for  about  2 
miles,  in  a channel  marked  by  easy  curves,  over  a bowlderous  bottom,  having  in  the 
lower  reaches  intervals  of  sand  and  gravel  patches.  At  its  mouth  it  broadens  into  a 
tidewater  pool,  largely  bare  at  low  water,  and  then  widens  to  a narrow  inlet  which 
leads  to  Gut  Bay.  The  stream  is  about  25  feet  wide,  G inches  deep,  and  flows  with  a 
strong  current,  though  there  are  no  marked  rapids  or  falls.  The  water  is  clear  and 


Sketch  of  Got  Bay,  Lake,  and  Stream,  Baranof  Island,  Alaska. 

had  a temperature  of  51°  E.  There  are  two  small  wooded  islands  in  the  upper  reaches, 
one  near  the  head  and  the  other  one-half  mile  below.  One-fourth  mile  above  the 
tidewater  pool  referred  to  at  the  mouth,  the  stream  widens  into  a pool  200  feet  in 
diameter,  with  an  average  depth  of  6 inches.  Below  this  pool,  on  the  western  bank, 
were  all  the  materials  for  a barricade,  but  the  stream  when  visited  was  free  from 
obstructions  that  would  prevent  the  ascent  of  salmon.  The  wooded  valley  through 
which  the  stream  flows  is  strewn  with  large  bowlders.  The  mountains  rise  abruptly 
from  the  eastern  side,  while  on  the  western  side  a wooded  and  bushy  flat,  about  one- 
fourth  mile  in  width,  intervenes  between  the  stream  and  the  mountains. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


381 


The  lake  is  elevated  100  feet  above  sea  level,  and,  as  far  as  could  be  examined, 
extends  in  a southerly  direction  for  a distance  of  H miles,  with  a width  not  exceeding 
one-half  mile.  The  shores  are  in  the  main  steep  and  rocky , though  at  the  lower  end  there 
are  generally  mud  beaches.  A small  feeder  enters  the  lake  from  the  eastward  near 
the  outlet,  but  it  is  probable  that  the  main  supply  enters  near  the  head,  which  point 
could  not  be  reached.  The  temperature  of  the  water  was  55°  F.  No  site  suitable 
for  a hatchery  was  noticed,  but  it  is  probable  upon  special  examination  that  a location 
could  be  found.  A large  number  of  humpbacks  were  seen  throughout  the  system. 

The  stream  has  never  been  regularly  fished  for  cannery  purposes,  a seining  crew 
simply  calling  from  some  cannery  during  the  fishing  season,  and  its  value  in  redfish 
is  therefore  unknown,  but  it  may  be  classed  as  one  of  the  numerous  small  streams 
that  may  yield  anywhere  from  2,000  to  8,000  redfish  a season.  The  only  records 
available  are  the  following,  from  the  books  of  the  old  Baranof  Packing  Company: 


Year. 

Species. 

Dates. 

No. 

1892 

[Redfish  

i Cohoes 

[Redfish 

June  14-June  26 

Aug.  27-Sept.  8 

July  3-Aug.  19 

Aur-.  30 

1,673 
970 
2, 766 
293 
630 
6, 716 
2,326 

1893 

1894 

Redfish 

July  30 

1895 

1896 

July  1-July  20 

PRINCE  WILLIAM  SOUND. 

FROM  CROSS  SOUND  TO  PRINCE  WILLIAM  SOUND. 

After  leaving  Dundas  Bay,  in  Cross  Sound,  there  are  no  canneries  until  Prince 
William  Sound  is  reached.  There  are,  however,  a number  of  streams,  for  the  most 
part  small  (though  the  Alsek  and  several  adjoining  rivers  are  of  considerable  size), 
which  carry  commercial  salmon.  These  streams,  as  a rule,  empty  directly  into  the 
sea  and  are  inaccessible  for  commercial  fisheries,  though  cannery  experts  have  been 
in  the  field,  and  it  is  believed  by  next  season  fisheries  in  the  Alsek  region  will  be 
attempted. 

Rounding  Cape  Spencer  to  the  northward,  about  -f  miles,  is  an  indentation  which 
at  its  head  is  said  by  the  Indians  to  receive  the  waters  of  a stream  called  Nook-hook- 
keen;  this  is  the  outlet  to  a system  of  three  lakes,  and  is  said  to  carry  a few  redfish. 
It  is  probably  the  stream  which  supplies  a few  redfish  to  the  Dundas  Bay  cannery, 
and  known  to  them  as  Cape  Spencer. 

About  3 miles  to  the  northward  of  the  stream  just  mentioned  the  Indians  report 
a small  stream  with  lake  source,  carrying  a few  redfish,  and  known  as  An-nock-seck. 

Continuing  to  the  northward,  the  Indians  report  a small  redfish  stream  having  a 
lake  source  midway  between  Icy  Point  and  Harbor  Point,  and  know  n as  Ghow-nar-har, 
and  about  6 miles  above  Harbor  Point  another  outlet  to  a lake  known  as  Hawg-heen, 
which  is  also  said  to  carry  a few  redfish.  These  streams  are  for  the  most  part 
inaccessible,  and  from  all  reports  can  hardly  be  classed  as  having  any  commercial 
importance,  even  if  the  fisheries  could  be  properly  conducted. 

The  next  region  to  the  northward  carrying  salmon  is  the  Alsek  which,  with  the 
streams  between  it  and  Yakutat,  will  be  treated  under  one  head. 


382 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


ALSEK  REGION. 

About  60  miles  southeast  from  Ocean  Cape,  which  forms  the  southern  entrance 
point  to  Yakutat  Bay,  the  high  mountain  range  of  the  Fairweather  system  recedes 
from  the  present  coast  line  for  a distance  ranging  from  6 to  Id  miles,  forming 
wooded  plains,  with  gentle  slopes  ascending  to  the  base  of  the  mountain  system.  It 
is  probable  that  the  sea,  during  an  earlier  geological  period,  lapped  the  foot  of  the 
mountains  and  that  the  numerous  glaciers,  now  visible  on  every  hand,  discharged 
directly  into  the  ocean.  The  plain  now  fringing  the  mountain  system  is  formed 
from  the  glacial  debris,  by  moraine  deposit  and  by  stream  detritus  brought  from  the 
glaciers  and  thrown  back  by  the  sea.  Through  this  action  the  coast  lind  is  undoubt- 
edly extending  seaward  constantly,  for  the  streams  which  drain  the  glaciers  debouch 
directly  upon  the  ocean  and  bring  down  a large  amount  of  sediment  to  be  deposited 
and  cast  up.  The  plains  are  traversed  by  numerous  streams  having  their  sources 
frequently  in  lakes  and  ponds,  which  receive  the  glacial  drains,  though  there  are  some 
tributaries  which  drain  the  glaciers  direct.  These  streams  ramify  in  all  directions, 
even  to  the  extent  of  occasionally  forming  connecting  passages  with  each  other. 

The  Alsek,  which  is  at  the  eastern  end  of  these  plains  and  debouches  at  Dry 
Bay,  is  independent,  though  it  possibly  receives  some  slight  drainage  water  from  the 
plains  in  its  lower  course  before  it  forms  the  delta.  This  river  drains  the  great  ice 
fields  north  of  the  St.  Elias  and  Fairweather  ranges,  one  branch  dipping  around  to 
the  westward  and  tapping  the  St.  Elias  region,  and  another  branch  extending  more 
to  the  northward  into  the  Chilkat  country.  It  breaks  through  the  range  back  from 
Dry  Bay,  and,  after  cutting  a large  glacier  lying  near  the  northern  end  of  the  bay, 
forms  its  delta,  which  is  really  Dry  Bay. 

The  Alsek  and  adjacent  rivers  to  Yakutat  all  have  runs  of  salmon,  and  in  some 
all  species  are  represented.  According  to  the  Indian  reports  and  the  statements  of 
some  fishermen  who  have,  visited  the  locality,  salmon  are  very  plentiful. 

In  order  to  have  a better  understanding  of  the  region,  Lieutenant  Rodman  and 
Mr.  Chamberlain,  with  Indian  guides  and  canoes,  from  July  1 to  6,  made  a trip  from 
Yakutat  Bay  to  the  Alsek,  and  Ensign  Miller,  from  the  head  of  Disenchantment  Bay, 
made  a portage  with  Indian  guides  to  the  headwaters  of  the  See-Tuck,  and  descending 
that  stream  returned  to  Yakutat  through  the  chain  of  lakes  and  lagoons  to  Monti  Bay. 
From  the  notes  of  these  officers  and  from  other  sources  the  following  is  obtained: 

It  has  been  reported  that  by  means  of  the  lagoons,  lakes,  and  intersecting  streams 
an  inside  waterway  exists  from  Yakutat  Bay  to  Dry  Bay , but  such  is  not  the  case. 
It  is  true,  however,  that  by  waiting  for  the  top  of  high  water  and  making  long 
detours,  a canoe  can  be  carried  through  by  making  several  portages,  but  the  route  is 
impracticable  for  a boat  of  any  size. 

On  the  southern  shore  of  Monti  Bay,  2?  miles  from  the  village  of  Yakutat,  and 
a mile  from  Point  Carrew,  Cape  Phipps  Peninsula  is  penetrated  by  a shallow  inlet, 
about  2^  miles  in  length,  and  on  the  charts  misnamed  Ankau  Creek.  From  Monti  Bay, 
it  first  tends  to  the  southward,  then  to  the  eastward,  and  terminates  in  a T-shaped 
head,  which  lies  in  a general  northeast-and-southwest  direction.  This  inlet  is  very 
irregular  in  shape,  and  broken  by  islands  and  shoals,  having  narrow  shallow  channels 
between  them.  In  entering,  about  3 feet  of  water  can  be  carried  at  half  tide  to  the 
first  turn  to  the  eastward,  when  up  to  three-fourths  tide  there  is  a rapid. 


MONTI  BAT  to  black  sand  island. 


U.  S.  COMMISSION  OfFiSH  AND  FlSHERJES 
Steamer  ALBATROSS 

Commander  Jeff’n  E Moser  .U.S  Navy. 
Commanding. 


Sketch  of  the 

ALSEK  RIVER  DELTA 

AND 

ADJACENT  STREAMS  TO  YAKUTAT. 

July  1901. 


AUTHORITIES: 

(Base  map  - - U SC  IcQ  S cha-t  N“8500). 

AlseK  River  and  Adjacent  Streams,  Lieut  Huyh  Rodman,  U S ■ N 
See -tuch.  River Enei^rn  Cyru6  R.  Miller,  U.  S N. 


Approved 

C ■?.  TT'-JW'- 

^ V ^Commander,  U.S.Navy. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


383 


At  the  head  of  the  northeast  arm  the  inlet  receives  the  waters  of  a small  stream 
called  Ta-wah,  which  drains  to  the  westward  a system  of  shallow  ponds  and  lakes,  the 
latter  having  also  an  eastern  drainage  along  the  coast  in  the  An-kau  (On-cow)  River. 

Spring  tides  ascend  the  Ta-wah  to  a pond  with  which  it  is  directly  connected. 
This  stream  is  less  than  half  a mile  in  length  and  at  low  water  is  only  about  6 feet, 
wide  and  3 inches  deep.  The  rocks  and  bowlders  have  been  removed  from  the  bed 
and  piled  along  the  side,  forming  a shallow  channel  up  which  canoes  are  tracked  at 
low  water,  but  may  be  poled  at  high  water.  The  bed  is  stony,  with  some  sand  and 
gravel,  and  the  current  sluggish.  Temperature  of  the  water  July  1,  56  F. 

The  pond  with  which  the  Ta-wah  is  directly  connected  is  a shallow  pool  300 
yards  long,  from  a few  inches  to  2 feet  deep,  bottom  rocky,  with  sand  and  gravel, 
over  which  there  is  a growth  of  grass  and  moss;  a loaded  canoe  may  be  pulled  and 
poled  across.  At  the  head  of  this  pond  are  the  remains  of  a slat  barricade.  The 
eastern  end  receives  the  waters  of  a small  stream  several  hundred  yards  long,  which 
connects  the  pond  with  what  is  known  as  the  first  lake.  This  connecting  stream  just 
permits  a canoe  to  be  hauled  through,  and  is  tortuous,  with  a sluggish  current. 

The  first  lake  has  its  major  axis  east  and  west,  and  is  about  a mile  long,  with  a 
width  varying  from  several  hundred  yards  at  the  western  end  to  one-third  of  a mile 
at  the  eastern  end;  the  depth  varies  from  a few  inches  to  4 or  5 feet.  The  bottom  is 
composed  of  sand  and  gravel,  over  which  a few  logs  were  noticed  and  much  grass;  a 
canoe  may  be  pulled  across.  The  first  lake  is  connected  with  the  second  by  a small 
stream  or  brook  one-third  to  one-half  mile  in  length.  6 feet  wide,  and  4 inches  to  2 
feet  deep,  which  meanders  through  a low,  fiat  country,  and  carries  just  sufficient 
water  for  a loaded  canoe  to  be  hauled  through.  Temperature  of  water,  54  F. 

The  second  lake  is  slightly  crescent-shaped,  with  the  cusps  to  the  southward, 
and  lies  in  a general  east-and-west  direction.  It  is  about  Li  miles  long,  with  a 
width  varying  from  100  yards  to  one-third  of  a mile,  and  has  a depth  of  from  1 inch 
to  24  inches.  The  bottom  is  sand  and  gravel,  with  an  abundance  of  grass  and  pond 
lilies  growing  over  it.  A canoe  may  be  pulled  across.  The  main  feeder  of  this 
lake  enters  on  the  northern  shore  near  the  western  end.  It  is  said  to  rise  back  of 
Yakutat  village  and  to  be  3 or  4 miles  long,  10  feet  wide,  and  8 inches  deep,  flowing 
with  a sluggish  current,  through  a winding  channel,  over  a sand  and  gravel  bottom. 
The  water  is  clear  and  the  stream  bed  is  said  to  afford  the  main  spawning-ground 
for  this  system.  On  July  6 it  was  full  of  redfish.  This  second  lake  forms  the 
dividing  line  in  this  system,  and  drains  both  to  the  westward,  as  previously  described, 
and  to  the  eastward  through  the  An-kau  and  connecting  waters. 

At  the  eastern  end  of  the  second  lake  is  a small  stream  draining  the  system  to 
the  eastward.  It  Hows  in  a general  easterly  direction  through  a narrow,  tortuous 
channel  for  about  a mile,  when  the  so-called  third  lake  is  reached.  A loaded  canoe 
may  be  tracked  through  this  connecting  stream.  The  remains  of  a slat  barricade  are 
visible.  This  third  lake  consists  of  a series  of  small  pools  and  swamps  ramifying  for 
a distance  of  1 4 to  2 miles  in  a general  easterly  direction,  varying  in  width  from  20 
yards  to  one-third  of  a mile.  It  is  full  of  small,  low  marshy  islands  and  has  a large 
growth  of  weeds,  grass,  and  water  plants.  The  bottom  is  muddy  and  there  is  a 
slight  current.  A loaded  canoe  may  be  poled  through. 

The  eastern  end  of  the  third  lake  narrows  into  the  An-kau  River,  which  is  a 


384 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


fair-sized  stream  about  3 miles  long,  from  15  feet  to  30  or  40  feet  wide,  and  from  6 
inches  to  4 feet  deep,  flowing  with  a moderate  current  in  a general  SE.  direction  to 
the  sea,  into  which  it  empties  about  9 miles  east  from  Ocean  Cape.  The  channel  is 
tortuous  and  the  bottom  is  of  sand  and  gravel.  Tide  water  extends  about  2 miles 
upstream,  above  a point  where  three  houses  and  some  drying  frames  are  located  on 
the  southern  bank  and  where  the  natives  cure  fish  during  the  season. 

About  a mile  above  its  mouth  the  An-kau  receives  a tributary,  the  Tha-ghe-an, 
about  one-third  the  size  of  the  main  stream.  It  is  said  to  drain  a small  lake  6 miles 
to  the  northward,  which  has  redfish  and  coho  spawning-grounds. 

The  mouth  of  the  An-kau  expands  into  a tide-water  basin  fully  one-half  mile  in 
length  at  high  water  and  formed  by  the  action  of  the  sea.  At  high  water  a canoe  can 
be  pulled  from  the  mouth  to  a point  near  the  third  lake,  and  at  anjr  stage  of  the  tide 
above  the  houses,  beyond  which  point  poling  must  be  resorted  to  with  some  tracking. 

Throughout  this  system  from  Monti  Bay  to  the  mouth  of  the  An-kau  many  salmon 
were  seen  jumping.  In  the  lower  part  of  the  An-kau  redfish  were  very  abundant  on 
July  1,  though  the  natives  say  there  are  more  cohoes,  which  species  they  prefer  for 
drying.  With  the  spear  the  native  is  usually  able  to  obtain  all  the  fish  he  wants. 

See-tuck  River. — The  next  river  to  the  eastward  is  the  See-tuck,  which  has  its 
origin  in  two  connecting  lakes,  and  receives  in  its  course  tributaries  having  lake 
sources.  The  upper  lake  of  the  main  stream  lies  near  the  head  of  Disenchantment 
Bay  and  about  1 mile  from  it,  opposite  the  fourth  glacier  and  across  the  mountain 
range  bordering  the  western  side  of  the  bay.  It  is  190  feet  above  the  sea  and  lies 
in  a basin  whose  walls  rise  from  500  to  2,000  feet.  It  is  1%  miles  in  length  in  a SE. 
direction,  200  yards  to  700  yards  wide,  and  had  water  of  a greenish  color,  with  a 
temperature  of  45.5°  F.  on  July  3.  At  the  head  is  the  main  feeder,  about  20  feet 
wide  and  1 foot  deep,  flowing  with  a strong  current  a clay-colored  water  from  the 
melting  snow.  The  lake  also  receives  the  waters  from  numerous  rivulets  around  the 
border.  At  the  southern  end  is  an  outlet  connecting  it  with  the  lower  lake.  This 
stream  is  20  feet  wide,  2 feet  deep,  and  flows  with  a very  swift  current  over  a rocky 
and  bowlderous  bed  having  in  places  small  areas  of  sand  and  gravel.  The  water  has 
a milky  tinge,  and  on  July  3 had  a temperature  of  45°  F.  It  has  but  one  rapid,  with 
a drop  of  about  4 feet.  It  retains  its  narrow  bed,  except  at  a few  points,  where  it 
broadens  out  into  shallows.  After  meandering  westerly  for  about  4 miles  the  stream 
enters  the  lower  or  main  lake. 

This  lake  is  circular,  about  2 miles  in  diameter,  and  is  110  feet  above  the  sea,  and 
has  clear  water;  temperature,  July  3,  60°  F.  On  the  northern  shore  is  a mountain 
about  2,500  feet  high,  and  the  eastern  and  western  shores  are  covered  with  dead  spruce 
and  hemlock,  caused,  it  is  said,  by  a subsidence  due  to  an  earthquake  in  September, 
1899.  The  outlet  is  on  the  southern  side,  and  is  the  See-tuck  River,  which  at  the 
head  is  50  feet  wide,  2 feet  deep,  with  a strong  current.  It  flows  through  a winding 
channel  to  the  sea,  distant  in  a direct  line  about  13  miles.  The  water  is  clear  and 
has  a temperature  of  60°  to  62°  F.  The  bottom  at  first  is  rocky  and  bowlderous, 
quickly  changing  to  gravel  and  finally  to  sand  and  mud,  as  the  sea  is  reached.  The 
banks  are  low  and  covered  with  brush,  giving  ample  evidence  of  a much  larger  stream 
during  periods  of  freshets.  About  one-third  its  length  from  the  lake  the  river  receives 
from  the  westward  the  On-klat,  a small  tributary  said  to  have  a lake  source.  Two 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


385 


more  tributaries  are  received  from  the  westward  and  two  from  the  eastward,  along 
the  middle  third  of  its  length,  draining  ponds  and  marshes.  It  is  said  that  salmon 
spawn  in  these  tributaries  and  their  sources.  About  2 miles  from  the  sea  the  Ku-na- 
yosh,  about  half  the  size  of  the  See-tuck,  joins  the  latter  from  the  eastward.  It  is 
said  to  cany  many  redfish.  There  are  several  small  islands  in  the  See-tuck,  but  no 
natural  or  artificial  obstructions  to  prevent  the  free  ascent  of  fish. 

Numerous  king  salmon  and  redfish  and  a few  of  the  other  species  were  seen  in 
the  river  and  a few  redfish  and  one  king  salmon  were  seen  jumping  in  the  lakes. 

A hatchery  site  might  possibly  be  found  in  the  locality,  but  inaccessibility  would 
probably  be  a bar  to  its  successful  operation. 

The  mouth  of  the  See-tuck  is  about  120  feet  wide  and  14  inches  deep.  It  widens 
into  a broad,  sandy,  tidal  basin,  full  of  bars,  which  connects  with  the  sea  by  a channel 
having  strong  currents,  in  which  it  is  said  6 feet  can  be  carried  at  low  water.  This 
basin  is  connected,  by  a slough  inside  the  coast  line,  with  another  tidal  basin  formed 
at  the  mouth  of  the  Ahrn-klin,  the  next  large  stream  to  the  eastward,  and  together 
they  form  an  island  called  Black  Sand  Island.  This  slough  is  about  3 miles  in  length, 
60  to  200  yards  in  width,  and  12  to  15  inches  deep  at  low  water,  with  a tidal  current 
which  enters  at  either  end.  It  forms  a connecting  canoe  passage  along  the  coast. 
At  high  water  a canoe  can  be  tracked  from  the  An-kau  basin  into  the  See-tuck  basin, 
but  at  any  other  time  of  tide  it  is  quicker  to  make  a portage  from  one-half  to  three- 
fourths  mile  across  the  fiat  from  the  An-kau  basin  to  the  See-tuck  River  proper, 
aiming  to  strike  a point  on  the  river  where  it  leaves  the  tree  line.  No  difficulty  is 
experienced  in  passing  from  the  See-tuck  to  the  Ahrn-klin  by  the  slough  referred  to. 

The  Ahrn-klin  is  said  to  receive  the  main  body  of  water  from  three  sources. 
First  from  a lake  on  the  western  foot  of  Yakutat  Glacier,  which  is  grayish  in  color, 
cold,  and  deep,  and  receives  part  of  the  drainage  from  the  glacier.  The  outlet,  after 
flowing  to  the  southwest  about  4 miles,  is  joined  by  a stream  from  the  northward,  of 
equal  length,  draining  Moser  Glacier;  they  flow  together  about  4 miles  and  form  a 
junction  with  a stream  flowing  from  the  northwest,  which  is  the  outlet  to  a clear  lake, 
about  3 miles  southeast  from  Disenchantment  Bay,  which  is  said  to  be  about  1 mile 
long,  three-fourths  mile  wide,  and  to  form  a favorite  spawning-ground. 

There  are  several  other  small  tributaries,  some  of  which  have  clear  water  and 
drain  ponds  and  small  lakes,  but  none  of  importance. 

The  general  course  of  the  Ahrn-klin  system  is  a little  to  the  westward  of  south 
until  within  a mile  of  the  coast,  when  it  turns  abruptly  to  the  westward  and  follows 
the  coast  just  inside  a sand  bar,  where  it  forms  a tidal  basin.  This  basin  is  full  of 
bars  and  strong  currents,  from  which  a channel,  in  which  it  is  said  6 feet  may  be 
carried  at  low  water,  leads  to  the  sea  at  the  eastern  end  of  Black  Sand  Island. 

The  Ahrn-klin  is  slightly  larger  than  the  See-tuck  and  is  similar  in  its  general 
characteristics,  except  that  the  water  is  glacial  in  color.  Temperature,  51°  F. 

The  mouths  of  the  See-tuck  and  Ahrn-klin,  as  well  as  the  connecting  slough, 
were  full  of  jumping  salmon.  It  is  said  that  king  salmon,  redfish,  and  cohoes  ascend 
the  Ahrn-klin,  but  that  the  See-tuck  carries  more  redfish.  The  natives  say  they  have 
taken  10,000  redfish  from  the  See-tuck;  if  this  is  true,  the  stream  must  have  a large 
fish  value,  as  the  natives  have  only  very  primitive  appliances  and  take  only  sufficient 
for  their  wants.  The  fact  is  that  the  value  of  these  streams  is  entirely  unknown,  as 
the  natives  obtain  all  the  fish  they  want  from  the  streams  near  their  villages;  and  as 

F.  C.  B.  1901—25 


386 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


there  are  none  of  the  latter  between  Dry  Bay  and  Yakutat,  the  stream  values  for 
commercial  purposes  must  yet  be  ascertained. 

Dangerous  Diver  is  the  next  to  the  eastward  and  is  well  named  from  the  fact  that 
it  is  full  of  quicksands,  has  numerous  bars  and  islands,  strong-  currents,  and  is  ever 
changing  its  bed.  It  is  considered  a very  treacherous  stream  and  is  feared  by  the 
natives.  From  an  account  given  by  the  latter,  it  has  its  source  in  a lake  about 
miles  long  by  1 mile  wide,  lying  about  li  miles  from  Yakutat  Glacier.  It  flows  with 
a strong  current,  in  a general  SSW.  direction,  carrying  a large  volume  of  water,  and 
has  a width  in  places  of  150  yards  and  a depth  ranging  from  a few  inches  to  1 feet. 
The  water  is  very  muddy  and  heavily  charged  with  glacial  detritus.  Temperature, 
47°  F.  It  has  several  small  feeders.  The  natives  state  that  this  river  carries  no 
redfish,  but  a few  cohoes.  It  is  doubted,  however,  if  anything  is  known  of  its 
fishing  value,  as  aside  from  the  difficulty  in  operating  a fishery  there  are  no  natives 
in  the  vicinity.  It  empties  into  a tidal  basin  which  discharges  into  the  sea  in  a 
manner  similar  to  the  other  rivers.  It  can  not  be  navigated  above  the  basin  except 
by  a very  small  canoe,  and  even  this  is  considered  hazardous. 

The  canoe  passage  from  the  mouth  of  the  Ahrn-klin  is  made  by  ascending  that 
river  and  taking  the  first  big  slough  on  the  eastern  side  to  its  head.  Here  a portage 
must  be  made  across  a small  plain  to  Dangerous  River,  which  can  be  done  in  from  45 
minutes  to  60  minutes,  and  thence  by  canoe  across  the  river. 

The  Italic  River , the  next  to  the  eastward,  has  its  source  in  a lake,  about  14 
miles  long  by  1 mile  wide,  which  lies  about  4 miles  southeast  from  Yakutat  Glacier. 
From  the  lake  it.  flows  in  a southerly  direction  to  a point  where  it  is  joined  by  a 
stream  draining  a pond,  or  small  mud  lake,  lying  more  to  the  eastward.  From  this 
point  of  junction,  which  is  about  7 miles  from  the  mouth,  it  flows  to  the  southwest; 
when  near  the  coast  it  is  deflected  more  to  the  westward  and  parallel  to  the  ocean 
beach,  from  which  it  is  separated  by  a low  sandspit,  about  one-eighth  of  a mile  wide, 
for  a distance  of  3 miles,  when  its  channel  leads  into  the  sea.  At  the  seaward  end  is 
a tidal  basin,  and  it  is  probable  that  at  high  water  with  much  surf  on  the  outer  beach 
the  sea  may  break  into  the  lower  reach.  It  is  said  that  the  channel  leading  to  the  sea 
is  working  to  the  westward.  There  seems  to  be  no  reason  why  the  river  should  not 
break  through  at  any  point  along  the  low  sandspit  under  conditions  favorable  for  it. 
At  the  time  visited  the  river  miles  above  the  seaward  channel  appeared  more  like 
a lagoon,  one-eighth  of  a mile  wide,  8 inches  deep,  with  sandy  bottom  and  feeble  cur- 
rent, and  was  free  from  mud  and  plants.  The  volume  of  water  is  said  to  be  about 
the  same  as  in  the  See-tuck.  It  has  the  appearance  of  being  a fine  stream,  clean  and 
clear,  and  is  said  to  carry  about  as  many  redfish  as  the  See-tuck,  man}7  cohoes,  and  a 
few  king  salmon.  The  redfish  are  said  to  spawn  in  the  lake  and  feeders  lying  toward 
Yakutat  Glacier.  Temperature  of  water,  50°  F. 

The  canoe  route  from  Dangerous  River  is  to  drop  to  the  mouth  of  that  stream 
and  pass  to  the  eastern  end  of  the  tidal  basin;  here  a long  portage  must  be  made  to 
the  tidal  basin  of  the  Italio.  The  quickest  and  safest  way  is  to  cache  the  canoe  at 
Dangerous  River  and  pack  across  the  sand  plain  to  the  Italio,  skirting  the  tree  line 
and  fording  the  river;  the  depth  is  less  than  2 feet. 

The  Ah-quay  River  is  the  next  eastward  and  has  its  source  in  a lake,  about  li 
miles  long  by  1 mile  wide,  lying  about  1 mile  south  from  Chamberlain  Glacier; 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


387 


from  the  lake  it  flows  with  many  bends  and  curves  over  a generally  gravel  bottom 
until  within  one  mile  of  the  coast  line,  where  it  is  joined  from  the  eastward  by  the 
Us-tay  and  is  deflected  around  a high  wooded  point  through  180°;  it  then  follows 
the  coast  to  the  westward  for  31  miles,  when  it  breaks  into  the  sea. 

The  Us-tay  has  its  source  in  a lake  about  a mile  in  diameter,  which  lies  under 
Fassett  Glacier,  and  6 miles  below  it  gives  off  a branch  called  the  Ko-kon-hee-ni 
(Stickleback),  which  flows  SSE.  The  main  stream  continues  to  the  southwest  for  a 
mile^  when  it  gives  off  another  branch  called  the  Stu-hee-nook,  which  flows  SSE.  and 
unites  with  the  first  branch  near  the  village  near  the  western  side  of  Dry  Bay,  and 
together  they  flow  to  the  westward  about  a mile  and  empty  into  the  sea.  The 
combination  of  the  three  rivers  forms  an  island  with  the  village  on  the  southeast  side. 

The  Us-tay,  after  giving  out  the  branches  just  mentioned,  receives  a tributary 
from  the  northwest  which  flows  from  the  Rodman  Glacier  and  immediately  below  it 
divides,  flowing  as  two  streams  and  uniting  a short  distance  above  its  junction  with 
the  Ah-quay,  thus  forming  an  island  about  4 miles  in  length. 

All  these  streams  are  glacial.  Below  the  junction  of  the  Us-tay  with  the 
Ah-quay  the  stream  is  from  75  yards  to  one-fifth  mile  in  width,  from  -1  inches  to  4 
feet  in  depth,  and  of  a character  similar  to  Dangerous  River.  The  Ah-quay  above 
the  junction  is  about  the  size  of  the  Italic.  Its  mouth,  around  which  were  many 
seals,  narrows  to  75  yards  and  is  moving  to  the  westward.  The  Ah-quay  and  the 
Us-tay  are  said  to  carry  large  numbers  of  king  salmon,  redfish,  and  cohoes,  and  the 
former  has  a run  of  eulachon  in  the  early  spring.  In  the  lower  Ah-quay  gill  nets 
could  be  used,  and  higher  up  seines,  but  navigation  is  hazardous  on  account  of 
numerous  bars  and  quicksands,  which  have  but  slight  surface  indications. 

The  Stu-hee-nook  is  a small  stream  about  15  yards  wide,  a few  inches  deep,  and 
flows  with  a sluggish  current,  while  the  Ko-kon-hee-ni  is  probably  three  times  as 
large.  Both  carry  redfish  and  cohoes  in  large  numbers,  and  at  their  junction,  on 
July  4,  several  canoes  were  employed  spearing  redfish.  This  whole  system,  called 
the  Ah-quay,  is  said  to  carry  a very  large  number  of  king  salmon,  redfish,  and  cohoes. 

The  canoe  route  from  the  mouth  of  the  Italio  River  is  to  ascend  that  river, 
keeping  in  the  tributary  that  flows  from  the  ENE.  to  the  small  mud  lake.  Here  a 
hard  portage  through  the  timber  to  a small  tributary  of  the  Ah-quay  is  necessary; 
thence  the  route  is  down  that  stream  to  its  junction  with  the  Us-tay,  up  the  latter  to 
the  Ko-kon-hee-ni,  and  down  this  stream  to  the  village. 

If,  however,  it  is  concluded  to  pack  from  Dangerous  River,  then,  after  crossing 
the  Italio  at  the  point  previously  described,  take  the  outside  beach  to  the  Ah-quay, 
following  the  right  bank  of  that  river  for  about  3 miles  from  the  mouth,  or  until  the 
first  wooded  belt,  a broad,  treeless,  sand  plain,  and  then  the  second  wooded  belt  are 
passed,  where  there  is  a low,  grassy  plain,  and  where  the  river  can  be  forded  when 
it  is  under  normal  conditions.  Caution,  however,  must  be  used,  as  there  is  considerable 
quicksand,  but  by  using  a pole  and  sounding  ahead  a passage  can  be  made.  A canoe 
is  usually  kept  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  Ah-quay,  near  its  junction  with  the.  Us-tay, 
for  feriying.  Having  passed  the  Ah-quay,  the  sea  beach  affords  an  excellent  high- 
way, particularly  at  low  water,  and  can  be  followed  to  the  mouth  of  the  Ivo-kou-hee-ni, 
whence  a well-defined  trail  leads  to  the  village. 

Dry  Bay,  which  is  the  delta  of  the  Alsek  River,  covers  from  80  to  100  square 
miles,  the  river  flowing  into  the  sea  by  three  separate  channels.  After  passing  the 


388 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


glacier  previously  referred  to,  the  main  body  of  water  is  deflected  to  the  westward 
after  giving  one  branch  to  the  southward.  A few  miles  beyond  another  part  breaks 
to  the  southward,  while  the  remaining  portion  continues  yet  a few  miles  when  it,  too, 
turns  to  the  southward  and  enters  the  sea.  From  the  point  of  departure  from  the 
main  stream  the  branches  form  very  large  basins  which  close  in  toward  the  sea 
and  empty  through  narrow  channels.  These  basins  are  tilled  with  bars  and  small 
islands  with  ramifying  channels,  all  changing  from  day  to  day,  and  even  from  hour 
to  hour.  The  only  permanent  feature  in  the  delta  appears  to  be  a large,  rocky, 
wooded  island  between  the  western  and  middle  basins,  which,  on  range  with  the 
Alsek  Glacier,  leads  close  to  the  western  mouth.  On  July  d,  1901,  the  western 
channel  was  the  largest,  about  100  yards  across,  and  on  June  8 had  the  best  water — 
6 feet  on  the  bar  at  mean  low  water.  The  middle  channel,  5 miles  distant,  was  about 
200  yards  wide,  and  the  eastern  channel,  3 miles  beyond,  was  350  yards  wide. 
Neither  the  width,  depth,  nor  position,  can  be  depended  upon,  as  a week  later  the 
best  water  may  have  been  in  one  of  the  other  channels.  The  natives  state  that  the 
current  usually  flows  out  and  that  an  anchorage  maybe  made  by  small  craft  in  from 
8 to  9 feet  inside  the  western  bar. 

The  bed  of  the  river  above  the  glacier  is  rocky  and  bowlderous,  with  areas  of 
sand  and  gravel.  The  current  is  very  strong,  but  a good  boat  can  be  hauled  and 
poled  upstream  a considerable  distance.  The  water  temperature  July  1 was  51°  F. 
The  Alsek  is  highest  in  the  spring  and  lowest  in  September.  It  is  said  that  salmon 
ascend  the  Alsek  for  50  miles  and  that  there  is  a large,  clear  lake  in  the  interior. 

The  natives  fish  the  Alsek  but  little,  as  the  smaller  streams,  which  furnish  them 
with  all  the  fish  they  can  use,  are  more  accessible,  but  they  all  agree  that  king  salmon, 
redfish,  and  cohoes,  ascend  the  Alsek  in  countless  thousands.  The  idea  of  abundance 
as  expressed  by  a native,  however,  must  be  received  with  caution,  as  he  usually  has 
no  idea  of  the  great  capacity  of  a large  cannery. 

In  the  Alsek  the  natives  report  the  king  salmon  as  commencing  to  run  about  the 
last  of  April,  and  with  them  are  found  a few  redfish,  which  species,  however,  does 
not  run  strong  until  July  1;  the  cohoes  follow  during  the  early  part  of  August. 

In  a cursory  examination  of  this  kind  it  is  impossible  to  state  anything  definite 
in  regard  to  hatchery  sites.  It  is  probable  that  upon  thorough  investigation  such 
sites  could  be  located,  but  much  difficulty  would  be  encountered  in  obtaining  pure 
water,  as  all  of  these  streams  are  more  or  less  glacial  in  origin.  Outside  of  these 
facts,  however,  is  the  question  of  accessibility.  There  are  no  villages  or  permanent 
habitations  between  Yakutat  and  Dry  Bay,  and  the  journey,  even  in  summer,  with  a 
light  two-man  canoe,  is  not  an  easy  one,  and  is  accompanied  by  some  risk. 

The  plain  between  Yakutat  and  the  Alsek,  and  bordering  the  mountain  system  to 
the  sea,  is  for  the  most  part  wooded  with  spruce,  hemlock,  alder,  and  cottonwood, 
with  a smaller  growth  of  willows  and  elder,  accompanied  by  the  usual  berry  bushes, 
devil  club,  etc.  From  Black  Sand  Island  to  the  mouth  of  the  Italio  there  is  an 
extensive  treeless  sand  plain  reaching  several  miles  back  from  the  coast  line.  This 
plain  is  cut  up  by  small,  shallow,  spreading  streams,  having  little  or  no  current,  with 
some  shallow  ponds,  and  a portion  of  it  has  a scant  growth  of  grass  and  weeds.  In 
very  dry  weather  sand  storms  occur,  and  it  is  said  they  are  at  times  dangerous. 

The  coast  seaward  appears  to  have  no  outlying  dangers. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


389 


Since  the  apparent  decline  of  the  salmon  fisheries  on  the  western  coast  of  the 
United  States  attention  has  been  called  to  Alaska,  and  the  Alsek  region  has  not 
escaped  the  eye  of  the  canner.  The  locality  has  been  visited  during  the  past  two 
years  by  several  individuals  with  the  idea  of  obtaining  the  salmon  in  the  streams, 
but  as  yet  no  steps  have  been  taken  to  even  prospect  the  region.  It  is  reported  that 
canner}7  sites  have  been  selected  in  Monti  Bay  with  the  idea  of  conveying  the  catch 
from  the  Alsek  and  adjacent  streams  to  that  point,  while  other  sites  have  been  selected 
in  the  vicinity  of  the  Alsek.  Either  proposition  presents  conditions  difficult  to  over- 
come, and  some  very  wild  schemes  are  spoken  of — one  to  build  a railway  from 
Monti  Bay  to  the  Alsek;  another  to  transport  the  fish  by  trolley,  and  another,  and 
the  only  feasible  plan,  to  build  light-draft  surf  tugs  to  cross  the  different  bars. 
There  is  no  feasible  inside  water  route  nor  can  one  be  made  and  maintained  at  a sum 
which  the  fisheries  would  warrant. 

It  is  believed,  through  the  reports  made  by  the  Indians  and  from  the  number  of 
fish  seen  jumping  by  those  who  have  visited  the  section,  that  there  are  a great  many 
salmon  of  all  species  in  the  Alsek  and  adjacent  streams  to  Yakutat,  but  nothing  is 
definitely  known  of  the  abundance.  Yet  it  may  be  conceded  that  there  are  sufficient 
salmon  in  these  streams  to  supply  several  large  canneries.  To  catch  them  legally, 
to  collect  them  at  certain  centers  for  transportation,  and  to  transport  them  are 
propositions  that  will  tax  the  resources  of  the  canner  to  the  utmost. 

A cannery  is  generally  located  at  a point  accessible  to  the  home  transporting 
vessels  in  preference  to  a locality  at  the  fisheries  and  inaccessible  to  the  transports; 
so  that  Monti  Bay  would  probably  be  the  most  feasible  point  for  a cannery  location. 

All  these  streams  have  tidal  basins,  greater  or  less  in  extent,  into  which  they 
discharge  and  from  which  a channel  leads  into  the  open  sea,  usually  over  a bar  over 
which  about  6 feet  maybe  carried  at  low  water.  The  gill-netter  will  find  the  waters 
here  shallow  and  the  channels  obstructed  by  bars  and  quicksands;  the  trap-man  will 
find  that  his  piling  will  not  stand,  and  the  drag-seine  man  will  find  the  banks  giving 
away  under  his  feet.  To  find  better  conditions  the  higher  reaches  will  be  resorted  to. 
The  weather  in  summer  along  the  coast  is  usually  good  and  the  surf  on  the  bars  is  not 
heavy,  but  as  fishing  for  king  salmon  would  commence  the  last  of  April  or  early  in 
May  gales  may  be  expected  that  would  interfere  with  transportation.  In  fact,  even 
under  fair  conditions  it  would  be  a question  whether  many  fish  would  reach  the  can- 
nery in  Monti  Bay  in  good  condition.  Experience  in  the  locality  may  solve  many  of 
the  questions  now  presented,  but  at  best  the  pack  will  be  an  expensive  one. 

The  small  steamer  Beaver  and  a large  naphtha  launch  belonging  to  the  Western 
Fisheries  Company,  at  Dundas  Bay,  both  crossed  the  Alsek  bar  during  June  and 
carried  a few  king  salmon  to  their  cannery.  The  Beaver  made  one  trip  and  the 
naphtha  launch  at  least  two.  The  last  time  the  latter  crossed  she  rolled  over  and  filled, 
but  was  floated,  with  the  loss  of  her  upper  works.  This  cannery  expects  next  year 
to  fish  the  Alsek,  making  a sea  run  from  the  cannery  of  from  90  to  100  miles. 

YAKUTAT.  - 

There  do  not  appear  to  be  any  streams  in  Yakutat  or  Disenchantment  Bay  that 
carry  salmon  in  sufficient  quantities  for  cannery  purposes,  but  the  prospects  of  the 
Alsek  and  the  adjacent  streams  have  been  an  inducement  for  the  location  of  several 


390 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


salteries  in  Monti  Bay  each  with  a cannery  as  an  objective  if  the  fisheries  should 
prove  of  sufficient  value. 

Saltery  of  F.  A.  Fredericks  Company. — This  company  hails  from  Seattle,  Wash., 
and  during  the  fall  and  winter  of  1900,  in  the  schooner  Martha  W.  Tuft , salted  1,285 
barrels  of  herring  in  the  vicinity  of  Yakutat.  In  the  spring  of  1901  this  company 
built  a large  saltery  on  the  northern  side  of  the  head  on  which  the  village  of  Yakutat 
is  now  located.  The  intention  was  to  salt  herring,  and  if  salmon  could  be  obtained 
to  extend  their  operations  to  that  species. 

Saltery  of  See  & Flenner. — Messrs.  A.  L.  See  and  A.  Flenner,  at  the  time  of 
our  visit  (July  3),  had  in  course  of  construction  a saltery  on  the  western  point  of  the 
entrance  to  An-kau  Creek,  about  2 miles  from  Yakutat  post-office.  One  building, 
20  feet  by  JO  feet,  had  been  erected  in  a bight  within  the  entrance  to  the  creek,  and 
another  was  in  course  of  construction  on  the  point,  which  was  to  be  connected  with 
the  first  by  a tramway  1,700  feet  long.  It  was  the  intention  to  salt  herring,  and 
salmon  also  if  they  could  be  obtained;  for  the  latter,  2 salting  tanks  had  been 
provided.  No  salting  had  been  done  at  the  date  of  our  visit. 

Cannery  and  railroad  proposition , Yakutat  Bay  to  Alsek  River  Delta. — In  the 
fall  of  1900  and  spring  of  1901  a gentleman  from  San  Diego,  Cal.,  prospected  this 
region  with  a view  of  establishing  a cannery.  He  visited  the  Alsek  and  adjacent 
streams,  and  concluded  that  there  was  an  abundance  of  fish,  but  that  it  is  impracti- 
cable to  transport  them  by  water  if  the  cannery  were  located  in  Monti  Bay;  also, 
that  it  is  impracticable  to  handle  the  cannery  equipment  and  the  pack  over  the  Alsek 
Bar  if  the  cannery  were  located  in  that  vicinity. 

At  Yakutat  it  was  reported  that  a party  in  Seattle  was  interested  in  and  intended 
raising  money  for  the  purpose  of  building  a railroad  from  Monti  Bay  to  the  Alsek, 
a distance  of  about  60  miles,  to  carry  the  fish  from  the  Alsek  district.  At  a location 
on  the  southern  side  of  Monti  Ba}q  in  a bend  about  one-half  mile  from  the  mission,  a 
wharf  300  feet  long,  to  accommodate  steamers,  is  to  be  built,  and  whenever  the  railroad 
is  completed  a cannery  plant  is  to  be  erected.  This  is  mentioned  simply  to  indicate 
the  wild  schemes  spoken  of  in  Alaska.  At  the  time  of  our  visit  all  there  was  in  the 
locality  to  give  the  project  any  credence  was  a small  bunk-house  and  a wharf  about 
100  feet  long  built  from  the  bank  to  the  high-water  mark. 

South  Alaska  Packing  Company. — During  the  season  of  1900  a fisherman  by 
the  name  of  Flemming  examined  the  stream  conditions  from  Yakutat  to  the  Alsek. 
Upon  his  report  a Mr.  Shaw  went  over  the  ground  during  the  spring  of  1901,  on 
the  part,  it  is  said,  of  an  organization  called  the  South  Alaska  Packing  Company. 
Mr.  Shaw  had  returned  south  before  our  arrival,  but  it  was  reported  in  Yakutat  that, 
several  sites  for  canneries  had  been  located.  Inquiry  in  San  Francisco  elicited  the 
information  that  the  company  no  longer  existed. 

PRINCE  WILLIAM  SOUND  STREAMS. 

The  streams  and  fisheries  of  this  district  were  referred  to  in  my  report  of  1897, 
pages  137-139,  and  as  there  has  been  no  material  development  or  change,  the  general 
conditions  need  not  be  repeated  here.  At  the  time  of  our  former  visit  we  were 
unable  to  make  an  examination  of  the  streams  and  lake  systems  on  account  of  the 
lateness  of  the  season,  and  therefore  accepted  this  work  as  a part  of  the  examination 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


391 


to  be  conducted  this  year.  The  streams  are  similar  to  those  of  Southeast  Alaska, 
but  in  proportion  to  the  territory  covered  are  far  less  prolific  in  choice  commercial 
salmon.  If  all  the  streams  in  the  sound  proper,  at  least  so  far  as  known,  were  fished 
legally  throughout  the  season,  it  is  doubted  if  100,000  redtish  and  50,000  cohoes 
could  be  taken  under  average  conditions.  The  humpbacks  are  more  plentiful  and, 
as  far  as  our  personal  observation  goes,  they  seemed  quite  abundant. 

The  time  of  runs  in  Copper  River  is  early,  and  that  in  Prince  William  Sound 
corresponds  with-  Southeast  Alaska,  so  that  when  the  redtish  have  stopped  running 
in  the  first-named  locality  they  commence  running  in  the  second,  and  the  canneries 
then  pick  up  a few  redtish  in  connection  with  the  humpbacks,  which  are  packed  as 
soon  as  fishing  on  Copper  River  ceases.  Were  it  not  for  this  difference  in  time  of 
runs  it  is  doubted  if  any  redtish  would  be  taken  from  the  sound,  particularly  as  the 
redtish  streams  are  from  60  to  100  miles  from  the  canneries. 

All  these  streams  have  been  barricaded,  the  evidences  of  which  still  exist,  and 
it  is  possible  that  this  practice  is  still  resorted  to  during  the  fishing  season. 

The  stream  at  Cheniga,  which  produces  more  redtish  than  the  combined  output 
of  all  the  other  streams,  it  is  said,  was  tightly  dammed  for  many  years,  and  it  is  fre- 
quently referred  to  as  an  example  by  those  who  argue  against  the  parent-stream  and 
four-year  theories. 

CHENIGA  STREAM  AND  LAKE. 

In  the  western  end  of  Prince  William  Sound,  opposite  Herring  Bay,  on  Knight 
Island,  a point  projects  from  the  mainland  known  as  Point  Nowell.  Rounding  this 
point  to  the  northward  is  an  indentation  in  two  parts.  The  outer  is  a round  bay, 
about  C miles  in  diameter,  connected  by  a narrow  passage  with  a tidal  lagoon  of 
irregular  form,  about  3 miles  long,  which  receives  at  its  head  the  waters  of  Cheniga 
stream,  the  most  productive  redtish  stream  in  Prince  William  Sound.  It  is  a lake 
outlet,  and  was  examined  by  Ensign  Hepburn  on  July  12. 

The  stream  is  about  one-half  mile  long,  30  feet  wide,  10  inches  deep,  and  Hows 
with  a strong  current  over  a stony  bottom  in  a NE.  direction,  which  is  the  line  of  bay 
and  stream  system.  The  water  is  clear  and  had  a temperature  of  55 1 F.  The  upper 
half  of  the  stream  is  quite  straight,  and  the  lower  half  gently  curving,  and,  as  there 
is  a fall  of  110  feet  from  the  lake  to  the  mouth,  its  course  is  almost  one  continuous 
rapid,  but  there  are  no  serious  obstructions  to  the  free  ascent  of  fish. 

The  mountains  forming  the  valley  through  which  the  stream  runs  lie  well  back  on 
each  side  with  occasional  projecting  spurs  through  which  the  stream  has  cut  its  way 
so  that  the  banks  are  alternately  low  and  flat,  and  steep  but  not  very  high.  The 
vegetation  is  that  common  to  Southeast  Alaska,  although  the  forest  trees  are  nearly 
all  small  spruce,  with  a heavy  undergrowth  of  berry  bushes,  devil’s  club,  and  coarse 
grass.  At  the  head  of  tide  water,  and  ranging  across  the  stream,  are  three  triangular 
log  cribs,  substantially  built  and  filled  with  rocks,  and  on  the  left  bank  is  a pile  of 
poles  that  may  be  used  for  the  barricade.  This  stream  was  tightly  barricaded  for 
many  years,  and  it  is  probable  when  the  fishing  gangs  arrive  that  the  stream  is 
closed  during  the  season.  There  is  a log-  jam  near  the  lake,  but  it  forms  no  serious 
obstruction  to  the  passage  of  fish. 

The  lake  is  an  irregular,  triangular-shaped  body  of  water,  about  a mile  m length 
on  each  side.  The  water  is  clear  and  the  bottom,  wherever  it  could  be  seen,  is  sandy. 


392 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The  lake  is  walled  in  by  high  mountains,  and  from  the  general  features  it  is  likely 
that  there  is  no  other  lake  in  the  system,  nor  any  feeders  that  may  be  used  for 
spawning,  as  the  shores  descend  very  abruptly.  Temperature  of  water,  55°  F. ; 
elevation,  110  feet.  A few  small  fish  were  seen  in  the  lake  and  redfish  were  seen 
jumping  around  the  mouth  of  the  stream.  The  streams  in  Prince  William  Sound 
give  such  poor  returns  that  they  are  only  resorted  to  by  the  canneries  when  the  catch 
at  Copper  River  runs  short  or  the  season  there  is  over.  No  accurate  values  therefore 
can  be  given. 

The  Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Company’s  cannery  keeps  no  record  of  catches  by 
streams  and  has  rarely  fished  in  Cheniga.  It  is  believed  if  Cheniga  were  fished 
legally  throughout  the  season  it  might  yield,  under  average  conditions,  40,000  red- 
fish.  The  catch  for  1896  was  an  exceptional  one.  The  following  data  are  from  the 
books  of  the  Alaska  Packers’  Association  cannery: 


Year. 

Dates. 

No.  of 
redfish. 

1896 

77,866 

1897 

July  1-Aug.  10 

23, 363 

1898 

2, 893 

1899' 

7, 396 

1900 

July  11-27  

18; 587 

Sketch  of  Rubber  Boot  and  Cheniga  Lakes,  Prince  William  Sound,  Alaska. 

RUBBER  BOOT  STREAM  AND  LAKE. 

This  stream,  a lake  outlet,  discharges  into  the  northwestern  side  of  the  outer  bay 
described  under  Cheniga,  and  was  examined  July  12  by  a party  in  charge  of  Ensign 
Hepburn.  It  is  a small  stream,  about  250  yards  long  in  a direct  line,  12  feet  wide  and 
6 inches  deep,  and  flows  with  a very  strong  current  over  a rocky  bottom  on  a fairly 
straight  SE.  course.  The  fall  from  the  lake  is  about  50  feet  and  the  stream  is  one 
continuous  rapid,  which  salmon  can  probably  ascend,  but  with  some  difficulty.  The 
banks  are  heavily  wooded  with  a scrub  growth,  bordered  near  the  stream  by  a grassy 


HUBBARD  GLACIER,  YAKUTAT  BAY  AND  VICINITY,  ALASKA. 


Plate  XLIV. 


FOURTH  LAKE,  JACK  POT  SYSTEM,  PRINCE  WILLIAM  SOUND,  ALASKA. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


393 


flat.  The  water  is  clear,  slightly  tinged,  and  has  a temperature  of  58°  F.  Tide  water 
extends  about  20  yards  within  the  mouth  to  a point  where  the  remains  of  a barricade, 
consisting  of  the  usual  felled  trees  and  split  poles,  were  found. 

The  lake  is  an  irregular-shaped  body  of  water,  enlarging  near  the  source  of  the 
outlet  to  about  one-half  mile  in  diameter,  from  which  a curving  arm,  walled  in  by 
high  mountains,  extends  over  a mile  to  the  westward.  The  bottom  is  muddy  and 
stony  and  the  banks  are  steep.  There  is  a small  wooded  islet  near  the  center  of  the 
eastern  part  of  the  lake.  For  want  of  facilities  the  lake  could  not  be  examined  in  all 
parts,  but  a number  of  very  small  feeders  were  noticed  flowing  in  on  the  western 
side;  from  the  configuration  of  the  country  it  is  not  believed  there  is  any  feeder  of 
considerable  size  or  other  lake  connection.  No  fish  were  seen  in  the  stream  or  lake, 
but  a few  redfish  were  jumping  around  the  mouth  of  the  outlet.  This  stream,  if 
regularly  fished,  might  yield  under  average  conditions  from  3,000  to  5,000  redfish 
during  a season.  The  following  are  the  only  stream  records  available: 


Year. 

Dates. 

No.  of 
redfish. 

1896 

July  24 

1,759 

1897 

July  15-Aug.  10 

3, 625 

1898 

July  5-July  31 

2, 338 

1899 

July  5-July  18 

881 

1900 

July  11  

142 

JACK-POT  STREAM  AND  LAKE. 

On  the  mainland,  in  the  southwest  end  of  Prince  William  Sound,  opposite  the 
lower  end  of  Cheniga  Island,  is  a deep  bay  making  to  the  northwest  for  several 
miles,  and  then,  by  a narrow  passage,  connecting  with  a large  bay  extending  some 
distance  to  the  southward.  Beyond  the  connecting  passage,  on  the  northern  shore, 
is  the  outlet  to  a system  of  lakes  and  ponds,  carrying  a few  redfish;  this  was 
examined  by  a party  in  charge  of  Ensign  Miller  on  July  15.  The  series  consists  of 
9 lakes,  lying  in  a narrow  valley  in  a general  north- and-south  direction,  7 connected 
on  line,  and  2 sublakes  connected  with  No.  5.  Nos.  5 and  6 are  quite  large;  the  rest 
are  small.  Very  little  current  was  noticed  in  the  lakes,  but  the  connecting  streams 
have  rapids,  though  the  fall  is  not  great,  as  No.  7 has  an  elevation  of  only  60  feet. 
Temperature  of  No.  7,  57°  F.  No.  9 is  elevated  about  50  feet  above  No.  5. 

Lake  No.  1 is  small  and  is  reached  by  tide  water:  It  is  about  200  yards  from 

the  bay,  and  at  high  water  4 or  5 feet  can  be  carried  in,  while  at  low  water  there  is  a 
fall  of  from  10  to  12  feet.  The  outlet  is  about  50  feet  wide,  18  inches  deep,  and  had 
a temperature  of  46°  F.  Fishing  operations  are  carried  on  in  Lake  No.  1,  and  in  the 
passage  connecting  No.  1 with  No.  2 the  remains  of  a barricade  were  found. 

The  system  is  bordered  by  hills,  about  300  feet  high,  behind  which  lie  high 
mountains.  Occasional  flats  border  the  hills.  The  banks  are  rocky  where  observed, 
and  the  bottom  is  of  the  same  nature,  though  doubtless  there  are  areas  of  sand  and 
gravel.  The  vegetation  is  of  the  usual  Southeast  Alaskan  type.  There  are  no 
obstructions  to  prevent  the  ascent  of  fish.  Humpbacks  were  seen  spawning  in  the 
middle  lakes.  No  feeders  of  any  importance  were  noticed,  though  it  is  probable 
that  there  is  a large  stream  at  the  head  of  No.  7.  The  system  was  visited  after 
prolonged  rains,  and  it  was  with  the  greatest  difficulty  that  the  party  was  able  to 
traverse  the  western  side,  and  it  was  impossible  to  cross  to  the  other  side. 


394 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


It  is  estimated  that  by  fishing  throughout  the  season  7,000  redfish  might  be 
obtained  under  average  conditions.  The  following  are  the  only  data  available: 


Year. 


1896 

1899 

1900 


Dates. 

No.  of 
redfish. 

July  22  and  21 

July  11  and  1ft 

July  11  

3,332 

307 

142 

MINERS  STREAM  AND  LAKE. 

On  the  northern  side  of  Prince  William  Sound,  west  from  Glacier  Island,  is  a 
wide,  deep  inlet  known  as  Salmo  Sound.  About  10  miles  from  the  entrance  to  this 
sound,  on  the  eastern  side,  is  an  indentation  marked  on  the  southern  side  by  a steep, 
bare  hill  of  brownish  rock  behind  two  wooded  islands,  which  receives  the  waters  of 
a stream  carrying  a few  redfish.  This  stream  was  examined  by  a party  in  charge  of 
Ensign  Kempff  on  July  16,  and  is  the  outlet  to  two  lakes  lying  in  a north-and-south 
direction  in  a broadening  valley. 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


395 


The  upper  lake  has  an  elevation  of  25  feet,  and  is  about  Lv>  miles  long,  with  an 
extreme  width  of  i mile.  The  shores,  except  at  the  northern  and  southern  ends,  are 
steep  and  rocky,  and  bordered  by  hills  from  300  to  400  feet  high,  back  of  which  the 
land  rises  to  the  higher  snow-covered  mountains.  At  the  northern  end  is  a series  of 
ponds,  lying  in  the  lowlands  and  connected  with  each  other  and  the  lake.  The  water 
is  glacial,  and  had  a temperature  of  44°  F. , which  was  that  of  the  whole  system. 

The  upper  lake  is  connected  with  the  lower  one  at  the  southern  end  by  a stream, 
which  is  75  yards  long,  35  feet  wide,  about  9 inches  deep,  and  Hows  with  a strong 
current  over  a bowlderous  bed  in  a general  south  direction.  The  lower  lake,  about 


* 

one- fourth  mile  in  diameter,  is  shallow,  and  surrounded  bjr  wooded  and  grassy  flats. 
The  beaches  are  of  mud  and  rock;  the  water  is  glacial.  This  lower  lake  empties  into 
the  inlet  through  a stream  one-fourth  mile  long,  50  feet  wide,  and  about  0 inches 
deep,  flowing  in  a southwest  direction  with  a very  strong  current  over  a bowlderous 
bed.  There  are  two  rapids  a short  distance  below  the  lake.  A few  redfish  were  seen 
jumping  near  the  mouth  of  the  stream,  but  none  were  seen  in  the  stream  or  lakes. 
The  spawning-beds  are  in  the  streams  and  ponds  at  the  head  of  the  upper  lake. 

There  is  no  stream  record  available.  It  is  estimated  by  those  acquainted  with 
the  locality  that  it  should  yield,  under  average  conditions,  10,000  redfish  by  fishing 
throughout  the  season. 


396 


BULLETIN  OP  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Sketch  of  Billy’s  Hole  and  Outlet  (Lake),  Prince  William  Sound,  Alaska. 

narrow  strait  runs  about  due  west  for  400  yards  and  connects  with  a small  salt-water 
lagoon  which  receives  the  discharge  from  a lake  and  carries  redfish.  It  was  examined 
July  17  by  Ensign  Hepburn. 


BILLYS  HOLE  LAKE  AND  OUTLET. 


On  the  northern  shore  of  Prince  William  Sound,  northwest  from  Glacier  Island, 
is  a large  bay.  It  is  the  second  indentation  west  from  Point  Fremantle,  the  western 
entrance  point  to  Port  Valdes  and  about  8 miles  from  it.  At  the  head  of  the  bay  a 


ALASKA  SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  1901. 


397 


There  is  no  stream  of  well-defined  limits  which  forms  the  outlet,  the  waters  of 
the  lake  falling  directly  into  the  western  end  of  the  lagoon  with  a drop  of  about 
6 feet  at  high  water.  In  the  middle  of  the  outlet,  surmounting  the  brink  of  the  fall, 
is  an  island  that  divides  the  discharge  into  two  equal  parts.  That  part  south  of  the 
island  has  a sheer  fall  and  is  not  passable  to  salmon.  The  western  portion  is  a cascade 
up  which  salmon  can  run  when  it  is  not  barricaded.  Some  logs,  evidently  the  remains 
of  a barricade,  were  found  across  the  top  of  the  cascade  and  some  wire  netting  lay  on 
the  bank  near  by,  but  when  visited  there  was  no  obstruction  to  the  passage  of  fish. 
The  lake  is  in  two  parts,  or  it  may  be  said  there  are  two  lakes  connected  by  a short 
broad  stream.  The  smaller  and  lower  lake  is  irregular  in  form,  one-fourth  of  a mile 
in  length  by  half  that  width,  with  gently  sloping  banks  except  on  the  western  shore, 
where  there  are  precipitous  cliffs.  In  the  center  it  appears  rather  deep.  The  bottom 
consists  principally  of  smooth,  sloping  rocks  with  sandy  and  gravelly  spaces  between. 
The  larger  lake,  lying  just  north  of  the  smaller,  extends  in  a WSW.  and  ESF.  (mag.) 
direction  for  about  three-fourths  mile,  with  a greatest  breadth  of  one-half  mile.  The 
eastern  and  about  half  of  the  northern  shores  are  steep  and  densely  wooded  with  a 
tangled  undergrowth.  Around  the  western  end  there  are  flats  extending  from 
one-eighth  to  one-half  mile  back  to  the  foot  of  the  mountains  and  hills  forming  the 
lake  basin.  These  flats  are  covered  with  g-rass  and  bushes  and  dense  thickets  of  scrub 
alder.  Two  feeders  enter  the  lake  on  the  northwestern  side.  They  both  flow  through 
a large  valley  extending  almost  north  and  south  (mag.)  and  are  formed  from  the 
melting  snows.  The  stream  flowing  down  the  eastern  side  of  the  valley  is  the  larger. 
It  flows  over  a stony  bed  with  a strong  current,  has  a width  of  15  feet  and  an 
average  depth  of  5 inches.  It  had  a temperature  of  16°  F.  The  other  stream  in 
this  valley  is  much  smaller.  It  has  a width  of  from  3 to  20  feet,  depth  from  2 inches 
to  1 foot,  and  a moderate  current.  A third,  formed  largely  by  draining  the  melting 
snows,  enters  the  lake  on  the  southern  shore.  It  flows  through  a deep  and  very 
narrow  valley  extending  to  the  southward,  has  an  average  breadth  of  20  feet,  depth 
•1  inches,  and  a strong  current;  temperature,  13°  F.  The  lake  water  had  a tempera- 
ture of  50°  F.  and  is  very  clear.  The  bottom  appears  to  be  mainly  of  rock,  with  some 
sand  and  mud  patches.  The  bones  of  fish  were  seen  scattered  all  along  the  shores  of 
the  lake,  but  no  live  fish  were  seen,  except  a few  red  salmon  jumping  in  the  lagoon. 

A hatchery  might  be  located  at  the  mouth  of  the  feeder  on  the  southern  shore, 
though  the  question  of  a sufficient  supply  of  water  during  a diy  season  might  need 
further  investigation. 

There  is  no  record  of  this  stream  available.  It  is  usually  fished  by  the  cannery 
located  at  Orca.  It  is  believed  by  those  competent  to.  judge  that  the  stream,  under 
average  conditions,  should  yield  20,000  redfish  during  the  run. 

PRINCE  WILLIAM  SOUND  CANNERIES. 

The  two  canneries  operating  in  this  locality — the  one  by  the  Alaska  Packers 
Association  (Pacific  Packing  Company)  at  Odiak  and  the  other  by  the  Pacific  Steam 
Wnaling  Company  at  Orca — are  each  in  about  the  same  working  condition  as  noted 
in  former  reports,  to  which  reference  is  made.  In  the  Alaska  Packers  Association 
cannery  fish-cleaning  machines  have  been  introduced,  but  it  is  understood  they 
are  still  in  the  experimental  stage  and  require  some  changes  before  they  can  be 


398 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


pronounced  a success.  One  set  of  can-makers  was  in  operation  in  this  cannery  this 
year,  which  averaged  over  40,000  cans  per  diem.  All  the  cans  were  made  on  the 
ground  except  10,000  cases  which  were  carried  from  San  Francisco:  100-pound 
domestic  plate  was  used  throughout.  The  Chinese  and  fishermen  contracted  on 
practically  the  same  terms  as  given  in  my  previous  reports. 

Halibut  and  cod  are  common  around  the  canneries  and  trout  are  abundant  in 
the  streams  of  Prince  William  Sound.  Early  in  the  spring  a few  steelheads  are 
taken  in  the  delta  of  the  Copper  River. 

The  following  averages  per  case  of  fish  taken  in  the  Copper  River  delta  during 
different  years  may  be  of  interest  as  indicating  the  possible  variations  from  year  to 
year:  King  salmon,  3 j,  4k,  4,  4k;  redfish,  9f,  Ilk,  10k,  Hi,  Ilf. 

COPPER  RIVER  DELTA. 

The  conditions  in  this  locality  were  fully  described  in  my  report  for  1897,  pages 
129-139,  and  reference  here  will  only  be  made  to  changes  and  additional  information 
noted.  The  United  States  Coast  and  Geodetic  Survey  has  extended  its  work  over 
the  delta  as  far  as  Cottonwood  Point,  and  the  location  of  sloughs  with  their  distance 
from  the  canneries  can  now  be  indicated  with  accuracy.  The  mining  excitement 
throughout  this  section  has  caused  quite  an  influx  of  people,  and  communication  is 
therefore  much  better  and  more  reliable. 

The  cannery  of  the  Peninsula  Trading  and  Fishing  Company  at  Coquenhena, 
referred  to  in  my  former  reports,  has  been  dismantled  and  the  available  machinery 
utilized  in  the  Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Company’s  cannery  at  Kenai,  Cook  Inlet. 

The  fishing  localities  in  the  delta  are  unchanged,  except  that  the  Chilkat  River 
east  of  the  delta  is  now  more  vigorously  fished.  Cannery  steamers  capable  of  going 
to  sea  carry  the  fish  from  the  mouth  of  the  river  to  the  delta,  and  transfer  them  to 
stern-wheel  steamers,  which  carry  them  to  the  canneries. 

The  value  of  the  Chilkat  River  is  unknown,  but  the  following  data,  from  the 
books  of  the  Alaska  Packers  Association,  may  be  of  interest  : 


Year. 

Dates. 

Redfish. 

1896 

June  27  to  July  15 

23, 980 

1897 

June  15  to  June  29 

39, 269 

1898 

June  20  to  June  29 

39, 383 

1899 

June  16  to  July  4 

27,072 

1900 

June  19  to  July  6 

106, 167 

U.  s.  (Wrission  of  Pj&h  and  Fisheries 
Geo.  M.  Bowers,  Commissioner. 

SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS 

COAST  Of  ALASKA 

DIXON  ENTRANCE  TO  HEAD  OF  LYNN  CAN, VI, 

SHOWING  LOCATIONS  OF 

SALMON  CANNERIES  AND  SALTERIES 

AND  THE 

PRINCIPAL  SALMON  STREAMS 


By  Lieut. Com'di'  Jeffii  F Moser,  U.  S.N, 
CorQmatrdingU.S.FC.  Six.  AUiatruss. 

I9QD 


Settle  eotyboo 

Base  map  US.Caastand  Geodetic  Surrey  chart  No.S050. 


® CANNERIES  OPERATED,  1800. 

S Tlilinkot  Pocking  Go' 

Hi  Boston  fishing \A  T»tUng  Co. 

11.  Alaska  Salmon  Packing  dr  Fa::; 

12.  FMafgb:  Island  Cai tiling  C;>. 

13.  Me.thtkabila  Industrial  Co. 

11  Quadra  Packing. Co 
15.  Pactfio  Stsuj'.  •■Whaling  Co. 

. , ■■•  V.  'Tv, -I i ■ i ,■  ,v  P 


1.  Chiisoot  Packing  Co. 

2.  Pyramid  Harbor  Packing  Co.  (A  P,  A.) 

3.  Western  Fishing  Co. 

4.  Toko  Packing  Co. 

5.  Taka  Fishing  Co. 

6.  Icy  Strait  Packing  Co. 

7.  Royer-Warnock  Packing  Co. 

8.  Glacier  Packing.  Co  (A.  P.  A ; 


Hi.  Ners.h  Pacific  Trading  & Packing  Co, 


Q CANNERIES  IN  RESERVE,  1900. 


22.  Icy  Strait  Packing  Co  Building* 'erected,  i 


21.  Chilkat  Canning  Co.  (A.  !’.  A.) 


(-ape  Cross. 


® CANNERIES  DEFUNCT. 

36.  Baninoff  Packing  Co 

37.  Astoria  A Alaska  Packing  Co. 

38.  Aberdeen  Packing  Co. 

39.  Cape  Lees  Packing  Co. 

40.  Tongass  Packing  Co. 

41.  Capo  Fox  Packing  Co. 

■ SALTERIES  OPERATED,  1900. 

64.  North  Pacific  & Norway  Packing  Co. 

65.  ley  Strait  Packing  Co.,  hulk  ' BLAKcSe.' 

66.  John  Frey. 

67.  Torn  McCauley, 

68.  Groat  Northern  Fish  Co. 

69.  Robert  Bell. 

70.  John  E.  Rice. 

71.  Great  Northern  Fish  Co 

72.  Alex.  Miller. 

73.  Z.  Doty. 

74.  Craig  Miller. 

75.  Banter  & West. 

76.  Alaska  Packers’  Association. 


Abandoned. 

Burnt. 

Sold  and  moved. 

Dismantled 

Burnt, 

Sold  and  moved. 


30.  Northwest  Trading  Co.  Absorbed. 

31.  Chilkat  Packing  Co.  Burnt. 

32.  Bartlett  Bay.  Packing  Co!  Dismantled. 

33.  Astoria  & Alaska  Packing  Co.  Moved. 

34.  Cutting  Packing  Co.  Abandoned. 

36.  Barauoff  Packing  Co  Moved. 


50.  Icy  Strait  Packing  Co. 

51.  Perry  Hinkle. 

62.  Perry  Hinkle. 

53.  Icy  Strait  Packing  Co. 

54.  Perry  Hinkle. 

56.  Perry  Hinkle.  . 

56  Alaska  Oil  & Guano  Co. 

57.  Great  Northern  Fish  Co. 

58.  Jack  Mahtle, 

59.  Jack  Mantle. 

60.  Zip  Moon. 

61.  Finn  & Young. 

62.  Icy  Strait  Pooking  Co. 

63.  Fred  Brookman. 


• Killisroo 


^Wcfwr 


a SALTERIES  IN  RESERVE,  1900 

77,  Miller  & Co. 

78.  Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co. 

ffi  SALTERIES  DEFUNCT. 

Abandoned. 

Abandoned. 

Abandoned. 

Abandoned. 

Moved. 


79.  D Blaauw. 

80.  James  Turk 


fap*  Fanshaw 


86-  Indians.  Abandoned. 

87.  Martin  & McKinnon  (Clark  * Abandoned. 

Martin.) 

88.  Clark  & Martin. 

89.  Miller  & Co. 

90.  Alaska  Packers’  Association. 


81.  Morriasey. 

82.  Tom  McCauley. 
83  Tom  McCauley. 

84.  Tom  McCauley. 

85.  Robert  Bell. 


ilTKA  P.0. 


Cape  Be. ode  1 1 


Sboa.'i 


Abandoned. 

Abandoned. 

Moved 


Cornwulllg  Pt 


HATCHERIES,  1900. 


▲ 95.  North  Pacific  Trading  & Parking  Co.  Operated. 
A 96.  Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co. 

A 97.  Capt.  J.  C.  Callbreath's. 

A 98.  Banmoff  Packing  Co.'s. 

A 99.  Capt.  John  C.  Callbreath’f 


Abandoned. 


Ku*hn«*hfn  ! 


ihaHan 


;wSifn\  ' 
■MCtUK*. 


•Tuxecurt: 


'•^KlayvaK  : 


Cape  Chacoi 


Bulletin  u.S.rC.  1301 


Chart  B. 


Bulletin  U.S.FC.  1901  . 


IT.  S . Commission  of  Fish  aud  Fisheries 

Geo,  M.  Bowers,  Commissioner. 

SALMON  INVESTIGATIONS 

COAST  OF  ALASKA 

FROM  CAPE  SUCKLING  TO  UNIMAK  PASS 

SHOWING  LOCATIONS  OF 

SALMON  CANNERIES  AND  SALTERIES 

I AND  THE 

I PRINCIPAL  SALMON  STREAMS 


p»  MacKenio 


Billy!*  Hole. 


CaMWh'* 


By  Lieut.  Cora'd’r  Jeffn  E Moser,  TJ.  S.N., 
iVmnmmdia^U&F.C,  SlkiUbaiross. 

1900 

Scale ; iMfioo  A 


Anchor  ftj 


Cape  tlixr  t 


maps: 


,Cap»  Doiglas 


tey  charts.  Nos. 8500  f 8800, 


Point  B<  r 


iHagemi 


kululak 


c Chichagof 


® DEFUNCT  CANNERIES. 

41.  Boring  Sea  Packing  Co. 

42.  Bering  Sea  Packing  Co. 

43.  Thin  Point  Packing  Co. 

44.  Central  Alaska  Co. 

45.  Western  Alaska  Packing  Co. 

46.  Shumagin  Packing  Co. 

47.  Arctic  Packing  Co. 

48.  Aleutian  Islands  Fishing  and 

Mining  Co. 

49.  Hume  Packing  Co. 

50.  Arctic  Packing  Co. 

51.  Royal  Packing  Co. 

52.  Russian-Aiuerican  Packing  Co 

53.  Alaska  Packing  Co. 

54.  George  W.  Hume. 

55.  Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co. 

56.  Peninsula  Trading  & Fishing 

Company. 

57.  Central  Alaska  Co. 

58.  Peninsula  Trading  & Fishing 

Company. 


Moved. 

Abandoned. 

Abandoned. 

Abandoned. 

Abandoned. 

Consolidated. 

Moved. 

Consol  i dated. 


G»p«  Ujpt 


Consolidated. 

Distquntled. 

Dismantled. 

Abandoned. 

Absorbed. 

Dismantled. 

Moved . 

Abandoned. 


Cape  Orah 


PocKs; 


Moved. 
Moved . 


ffl  DEFUNCT  SALTERIES. 

71.  Togiak  Fishing  Station  (A.  P.  A.) 

72.  Bristol  Bay  Canning  Co. 

73.  Bristol  Bay  Canning  Co. 

74.  Prosper  Fishing  & Trading  Co. 

76.  Naknek  Packing  Co. 

76.  L.  A.  Pedersen. 

77.  Arctic  Packing  Co. 

78.  Egegak  Fishing  Station  (A.  P.  A.) 

79.  C.  A.  Johnson. 

80.  Charles  Nolson. 

81.  Alaska  Packers’  Association. 

82.  C.  A.  Johnson. 

83.  Alaska  Packers’  Association. 

84.  Alaska  Coast  Fishing  Co. 

85.  Oliver  Smith  (A.  P.  A.) 

86.  C.  D.  Ladd. 


Abandoned. 

Moved. 

Sold  and  moved. 

Absorbed. 

Abandoned. 

Absorbed. 

Absorbed. 

Abandoned. 

Absorbed. 

Abandoned. 

Abandoned. 

Absorbed. 

Abandoned. 

Abandoned. 

Abandoned. 

Absorbed. 


'HtyaroK 


\Pcrt  Haiden 


Rocky 


Chignik  Bay 


iTuliutnnit1 


SE-MIDl 

ISLANDS 


£>Gh«nMu 


• CANNERIES  OPERATED,  1900. 

L Alaska  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A,) 

2.  Bristol  Bay  Canning  Co  (A,  P.  A.) 

3.  Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.) 

4.  Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co. 

•5.  Alaska  Fishermen’s  Packing  Co. 

6.  Point  Roberts  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.) 

7.  Kvichak  Packing  Co.  (A.  P A.) 

8.  Naknek  Packing  Co 

Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.) 

10.  Egegak  Packing  Co,.  (A.  P.  A.) 

11.  -Ugashik  Fishing  Station  (A.  P.  A.) 

12.  Bristol  Packing  Co. 

13.  Chignik  Bay  Co.  (A.  P.  A.) 

14.  Hume  Bros.  & Hume. 

15.  Pacific  Steam  Wrha!ing  Co. 

16.  Arctic  Packing  Co.  (A,  P A.) 

17.  Alaska  Improvement  Co.  (A.  P.  A.) 

18.  Karluk  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.) 

19.  Hume  Bros.  & Hume. 

20.  Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co. 

21.  Uganuk  Fishing  Station.  (A.  P.  A.) 

22.  Arctic  Fishing  Co.  (A,  P.  A.) 

23.  Pacific  .Steam  Whaling  Co. 

24.  Alaska  Salmon  Association, 

25.  Pacific  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.) 

26.  Pacific  Steam  Whaling  Co. 


Ichovjjet 


sPORT  mOLLtR 


jluitPt 


Chernov 


>»nof  Ft  HATCHERIES,  19i 

A 91.  Alaska  Packers’  Association. 

A 96.  Karluk  River  Fisheries  Association. 


Operated. 

Abandoned. 


Cnernc 


Q CANNERIES  IN  RESERVE,  1900. 

31.  Nushagak  Canning  Co.  (A.  P.  A.) 

32.  North  Alaska  Salmon  Association.  (New.) 

83.  Chignik  Bay  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.) 

34.  Kodiak  Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.) 

35.  Hume  Canning  A Trading  Co.  (A.,  P.  A.) 

36.  Hume-Aleufcian.  Packing  Co,  (A,  P.  A.) 

37.  Kodiak  Packing  Co.  (A,  P.  A.) 

38.  Northern  .Packing  Co.  (A.  P.  A.) 

M SALTERIES  OPERATED,  1800. 

61.  (1  F.  Whitney  k Co. 

62.  Eagle  Harbor  Packing  Go. 


C la  vrr«ff 


rmak  6 ay 


Pfctr  iff 


jjCatoa 


/Yore: 

Th/s  sect/ on  of  the  ntap 
represents  the  fres tern  continu- 
ation of  the  upper  section. 

The  Scale  in  both  sections  is 
identical . 


Statute  Miles. 


30  40  50 

Kaurical  lYliles^ 


— — 

■ . " r''  1 


v 


. 


. 


' 

, 


. 


. 


NOTES 

ON 

A SPECIES  OF  BARNACLE  (DICHELASPIS)  PARASITIC 
ON  THE  GILLS  OF  EDIBLE  CRABS. 

BY 

ROBERT  E.  COKER. 


399 


NOTES  ON  A SPECIES  OF  BARNACEE  (DICH ELASPIS)  PARASITIC  ON  THE 

GILLS  OE  EDIBLE  CRABS. 


By  ROBERT  E.  COKER. 


Iii  the  summer  of  1900  Prof.  H.  V.  Wilson,  at  that  time  director  of  the  Beaufort 
Laboratory,  suggested  that,  in  view  of  the  economic  importance  of  the  edible  crabs, 
a fuller  knowledge  of  the  life  histories  of  the  ectoparasites  of  these  forms  was 
desirable.  The  following  notes  on  one  of  the  most  interesting  of  such  parasites 
are  the  outcome  of  an  investigation  carried  on  during  parts  of  that  and  the  following 
summer. 


It  is  a pleasure  to  express  my  thanks  to  Professor  Wilson  for  many  helpful 


OCCURRENCE  AND  HABIT  OF  ADULT. 

A large  number  of  the  common  edible  crabs,  or  blue  crabs  ( Callinectes  sapidus 
[Ordway]  Rathbun),  of  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  are  found  to  be  infested  with  a small  lepadide 
barnacle,  ectoparasitic  on  the  gills  (tig.  1).  This  form  was  first  observed  at  Beaufort 
by  Mr.  T.  G.  Pearson.  To  ascertain  somewhat  definitely  the  proportion  of  crabs 
containing  this  parasite,  record  was  made  of  180  mature  crabs  examined  during 
August  and  the  first  half  of  September,  and  barnacles  were  found  in  128,  or  in  71  per 
cent.  These  crabs  were  taken  just  as  they  were  brought  into  the  laboratory,  no 
selection  being  made  except  that  soft  crabs  and  evidently  young-  crabs  were  disre- 
garded. The  barnacles  were  much  more  abundant  later  than  earlier  in  the  summer. 

The  sexes  were  found  to  be  unequally  burdened;  the  percentage  for  males 
infested  was  only  56,  while  for  females  it  reached  89  per  cent.  It  was  also  easily  seen 
that  the  average  number  of  barnacles  in  infested  females  was  considerably  above  the 
corresponding  average  for  males.  A possible  explanation  of  this  difference  is  that 


F.  C.  B.  1901—26 


401 


402 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


females  when  with  eggs  must  be  much  less  vigorous  in  their  movements,  because  of 
the  burden,  but  especially  because  of  the  necessity  of  having  some  care  for  the  eggs. 
The  consequently  slower  respiratory  current  would  then  afford  better  opportunity 
for  barnacles  in  the  free-swimming  cypris  stage  to  attach,  as  they  are  by  chance 
sucked  in  and  driven  through  the  branchial  chamber,  or,  if  the  cypris  seeks  out  its  host, 
the  less  active  crabs  will,  again,  be  the  easiest  to  find  and  to  obtain  attachment  in. 

The  females  also  bore  more  of  the  Balanus  barnacles  on  their  shells;  and  it  was 
further  found  that  about  four-fifths  of  those  crabs  on  which  the  Balanus  was  seen 
would  also  contain  Dichelaspis.  It  was  rare  to  find  a female  crab  with  Balanus 
that  had  not  also  Dlclidaspis.  This  fact  is  quite  useful  to  one  who  is  in  search  of 
the  latter;  promising  crabs  can  be  selected  at  a glance,  even  before  capture.  After 
ascertaining  the  above  percentages,  the  collectors  were  asked  to  bring  in  only  such 
crabs  as  carried  Balanus  barnacles. 

It  is  to  be  presumed  that  these  gill  parasites  are  thrown  off  with  the  cuticle  of 
the  gill  in  the  molt  of  the  crab,  and  that  the  frequent  molts  of  young  crabs  would 
prevent  the  barnacles  on  their  gills  from  becoming  conspicuous  either  in  size  or  in 
numbers.  It  would  then  be  expected,  as  indeed  it  is  observed,  that  this  Dichelaspis 
is  not  found  in  young  or  in  soft  crabs. 

While  one  usually  finds  in  an  infested  individual  from  two  or  three  to  eight  or 
ten  Dichelaspis , the  number  varies  from  one  to  as  many  as  can  be  crowded  into  the 
branchial  chambers — 500  to  1,000,  or  perhaps  more.  In  one  instance  observed  the 
gill  chambers  had  been  filled  to  overflowing,  and  one  or  two  barnacles  were  found 
attached  without  to  a maxilliped. 

This  species  of  Dichelaspis  is  not  peculiar  'to  CaZlinectes  as  a host;  both  the 
edible  stone  crab  [Menippe  mercenaria  Stimson)  and  the  spider  crab  ( Libinia  canali- 
culata  Say)  contain  it,  but  with  less  frequency.  It  is  probably  present  in  other  large 
Crustacea,  lobsters  as  well  as  crabs,  of  other  regions  of  the  coast. 

No  organic  connection  between  the  barnacle  and  its  host  is  found;  and,  while 
histological  study  of  the  parasite  has  not  been  made,  no  signs  of  degeneration  are 
noted,  except  as  to  the  extent  of  the  calcified  area  of  the  valves  of  the  capitulum;  as 
will  be  seen  later,  too,  the  mouth  parts  are  well  developed.  The  barnacle  is,  therefore, 
to  be  regarded  as  a space  parasite,  which  has  become  adapted  to  this  habitat  because 
of  the  peculiar  advantages  it  offers — protection,  frequent  transportation,  and  the 
supply  of  a continual  current  of  water,  from  which  small  organisms  can  be  gathered 
for  food.  The  branchial  chamber  of  the  crab  is,  indeed,  a particularly  favorable 
place  for  life,  and  is  made  use  of  by  various  forms.  Vorticellid  colonies  and  ac.inetid 
protozoa,  polyzoa — ectoproctous  and  endoproctous — nemerteans,  etc.,  are  found  with 
greater  or  less  frequency.  The  considerable  variation  in  the  size  and  shape  of  the 
calcified  plates  to  be  noted  later  (see  tigs.  4 and  5)  has  probably  no  other  significance 
than  that  it  accompanies  the  degeneration  of  the  plates,  resulting  from  the  fact 
that  their  function  of  protection  is  now  performed  by  the  carapace  of  the  host.  The 
relation  of  the  calcified  areas  {t.  sc.  c.)  to  the  whole  valves  ( T S.  C.)  is  shown  by  the 
somewhat  diagrammatic  sketch  (tig.  3)  in  which  the  outlines  of  the  valves  and  the 
lines  of  growth  are  added,  though  in  nature  they  are  seen  only  under  the  microscope. 

A barnacle  removed  from  its  host,  with  no  piece  of  gill  left  attached  will  live  for 
a considerable  time  with  rather  infrequent  changes  of  water.  One  thus  kept  for  23 


NOTES  ON  A SPECIES  OF  BARNACLE. 


403 


days  in  a flat  dish  molted  twice  and  at  the  end  seemed  quite  healthy.  The  water 
was  changed  six  times. 

Those  crabs  whose  gills  are  heavily  burdened  with  Dichelaspis  have  less  vitality; 
their  movements  are  sluggish  and  they  are  the  lirst  to  die  when  brought  into  the 
laboratory.  This  reduction  of  vitality  is  not  an  evidence  of  real  parasitism,  but  may 
be  explained  by  the  fact  that  when  the  cirripeds  are  present  in  large  numbers  much 
of  the  gill  surface  is  occupied,  gill  lamellae  are  fastened  together,  and  the  respiratory 
current  retarded  by  them,  and  the  barnacles  have  the  first  chance  at  the  water.  The 
health  of  the  host  being  thus  impaired,  much  harm  results  indirectly  to  it,  in  that  it 
is  rendered  less  able  to  contend  with  its  enemies  or  to  escape  their  attacks. 

The  following  is  an  explanation  of  terms  used  in  the  description: 

The  capitulum  incloses  the  body,  and  is  supported  upon  the  stalk  or  'peduncle. 

The  juncture  of  the  capitulum  with  the  peduncle  is  regarded  as  the  base  of  the  capitulum;  the 
angle  opposite  this  juncture  is  the  apex. 

Upper  means  away  from;  lower  toward  the  base. 

The  rostral  angle  or  umbone  is  indicated  by  the  point  of  union  of  the  two  segments  of  the  scutum. 

The  occludent  margin  of  the  capitulum  extends  from  the  rostral  angle  to  the  apex. 

All  of  the  carina,  except  its  basal  portion,  takes  part  in  the  carinal  margin,  which  is  thus  approxi- 
mately at  right  angles  to  the  base.  A tergum,  therefore,  has,  roughly,  four  sides — upper,  carinal, 
lower,  and  occludent. 

The  term  plates  or  valves  ( terga , scuta,  carina)  applies  to  the  calcified  portions  of  the  valves. 

DESCRIPTION. 

Darwin  (1851-1854)  gives  this  diagnosis  of  the  genus  Dichelaspis  : 

Valves  5,  generally  appearing  like  7,  from  each  scutum,  being  divided  into  two  distinct  segments, 
united  at  the  rostral  angle;  carina  generally  extending  up  between  the  terga,  terminating  downward 
in  an  embedded  disk  or  fork  or  cup.  Mandible,  with  three  or  four  teeth;  maxillae  notched,  with  the 
lower  part  of  the  edge  generally  not  prominent;  anterior  ramus  of  the  second  cirrus  not  thicker  than 
the  posterior  ramus,  nor  very  thickly  clothed  with  spines;  caudal  appendages  uniarticulate,  spinose. 

As  will  be  seen  from  the  description  given  below,  the  cirriped  under  considera- 
tion belongs  to  this  genus.  While  the  carina,  which  terminates  downward  in  a fork, 
usually  reaches  only  to  or  barely  beyond  the  lower  edges  of  the  terga,  there  is  con 
siderable  variation  in  the  size  and  shape  of  the  plates.  To  this  barnacle  I have  given 
the  name  Dichelaspis  mutter i.  * After  a description  of  the  species  there  will  follow 
a comparison  of  D.  mulleri  with  other  species  of  the  same  genus. 

Dichelaspis  mulleri. 

Capitulum  barely  longer  than  broad;  basal  segment  of  scutum  parallel  to  lower  margin  of 
capitulum,  narrower  than  occludent  segment  and  about  five-sixths  as  long;  tergum  divided  very 
unequally  by  a notch;  lower  part  of  tergum  about  twice  as  wide  as  occludent  segment  of  scutum; 
carina  terminating  downward  in  a fork;  mandible  with  four  teeth. 

The  capitulum  is  less  than  1 j>  times  as  long  as  broad  (fig.  2),  generally  about  half  as  thick  as  long, 
sometimes  more  compressed.  In  two  of  the  largest  specimens  the  capitula  were  3mm  in  width  by 

in  length.  Others  of  a much  more  usual  shape  were  3nmi  by  3$mm.  These  were  unusually  large. 

The  peduncle  is  1 f to  3 times  as  long  as  the  capitulum,  but  one  specimen  was  found  with  a capit- 
ulum 4mm  in  length  and  peduncle  40mm  in  length.  The  peduncle  is  translucent,  except  when  colored 
by  the  ova,  which,  when  present,  give  to  a greater  or  less  portion  of  the  peduncle  a pink  color. 

* Named  after  Fritz  Muller,  who  says  in  his  “ Facts  and  Arguments  for  Darwin  ” (English  translation,  1869,  p.  137)  that 
he  has  met  with  a species  of  Dichelaspis  m the  branchial  cavity  of  Lupa  dicantha  ( Callinecles  hastatus  formerly  included 
under  this  name)  He  does  not  describe  the  form,  which  may  well  be  identical  with  the  Beaufort  species. 


404 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The  plates  are  small  and  well  removed  from  one  another.  Each  scutum  (fig.  2)  is  composed  of 
two  segments  united  at  the  umbone  by  an  uncalcified  flexible  portion;  the  occludent  segment  extends 
parallel  and  close  to  the  occludent  margin  of  the  capitulum;  is  widest  in  the  middle,  where  it  is  about 
half  as  wide  as  the  lower  part  of  the  tergum;  is  narrower  near  the  umbone,  and  at  its  upper  end  is 
always  more  or  less  pointed.  The  point  is  directed  toward  the  notch  in  the  tergum  and  reaches  to  or 
a little  beyond  the  lower  edge  of  that  plate.  Between  this  segment  and  the  basal  segment,  which  lies 
parallel  to  the  base  of  the  capitulum,  is  an  angle  varying  from  70°  to  nearly  90°.  The  basal  part  is 
narrower  and  about  five-sixths  as  long  as  occludent  portion,  is  of  a more  uniform  width,  and,  though 
often  ending  rather  bluntly,  is  usually  pointed.  It  may  not  reach  quite  to  the  points  of  the  prongs 
of  carina,  or  may  overlap  them  as  much  as  two-thirds  their  length.  One  scutum  was  found  with  a 
third  narrower  segment  between  the  other  two  and  directed  toward  the  upper  end  of  the  carina. 

Each  tergum  bears  a notch  on  the  occludent  margin  (figs.  2,  4,  and  5).  If  the  notch  is  measured 
from  its  apex  to  the  tip  of  the  smaller,  occludent  portion  of  the  plate,  its  depth  is  generally  about 
one-sixth  (though  itmay  be  one-third)  the  length  of  the  tergum  or  less.  The  lower  end  of  the  tergum 
is  in  width  usually  one-half  (one-third  to  three-fourths)  the  length  of  the  plate;  generally  it  has  a 
smooth  outline,  though  sometimes  a little  jagged  or  with  a notch.  The  carinal  margin  is  usually  slightly 
concave;  this  side,  too,  sometimes  bears  more  or  less  of  a notch.  The  upper  end  is  blunt  and  rounded. 
Length  of  tergum  two-thirds  that  of  scutum,  or  one-third  that  of  capitulum.  That  the  two  terga  of 
the  same  individual  are  not  necessarily  just  alike  is  shown  by  figs.  4 and  5;  in  each  figure  the  dotted 
line  represents  the  tergum  of  one  side,  the  continuous  line  that  of  the  other  side,  of  one  barnacle. 


Fig.  3. — Diagrammatic  Fig.  4. — Outlines  of  the  two  terga  Fig.  5. — Same  of  another 
sketch  of  valves.  of  an  individual,  x 30.  individual,  x 30. 


Fig.  6.— Lower  part  of  a 
carina.  x 30. 


The  carina  (figs.  2 and  6),  terminating  downward 'in  a fork,  is  much  widened  at  the  base  of  the 
widely  separated  and  pointed  prongs.  Above  the  fork  the  carina  is  of  very  nearly  uniform  width. 
It  ends  bluntly,  reaching  to  or  barely  beyond  the  lower  edges  of  the  terga;  in  a few  cases  it  extends 
up  between  the  terga  as  much  as  halfway.  Within  it  is  convex. 

The  mouth-parts  are  well  developed.  On  the  labrurn  are  two  rows  of  short  teeth,  set  closely 
together  in  the  middle;  the  palpi  are  about  equal  in  size  to  the  first  maxillte,  and  are  clothed  on  and 
near  the  inner  edge  with  bristles.  The  mandibles  (fig.  7)  have  four  teeth — the  lower  angle  appears 
as  a fifth  tooth — the  second  being  farther  removed  from  the  first  than  from  the  fourth;  the  lower 
three  teeth  are  a little  less  sharp  than  the  first;  on  the  inferior  angle  are  two  or  three  very  short  teeth 
and  as  many  stout  spines;  below  it  are  a number  of  closely  crowded  slender  spines;  the  mandible  is 
hairy  near  the  end  and  bears  little  tufts  of  hairs  on  its  outer  margin.  The  second  maxilla  has  four 
spines  above  the  notch  (one  is  small),  two  slender  spines  in  the  notch,  and  nine  or  ten  below  (fig.  8). 

The  cirri  of  the  first  pair  are  removed  from  those  of  the  second  pair  and  are  about  half  as  long. 
Their  rami  are  equal  in  length  and  are  thickly  clothed  with  spines.  The  rami  of  the  second  cirrus 
are  of  equal  thickness  and  little  shorter  than  those  of  the  sixth.  The  caudal  appendages,  which  are 
nearly  as  long  as  the  pedicels  of  the  sixth  cirrus,  are  narrow  and  of  very  nearly  uniform  width 
throughout.  They  taper  a very  little  at  the  end  where  is  borne  a tuft  of  15  or  20  bristles,  the  longest 
of  which  are  a little  longer  than  the  appendages.  Sometimes  other  spines  are  found  near  the  end. 

As  seems  to  be  the  case  in  most  species  of  the  genus,  the  penis  is  very  large,  reaching  in  D. 
mulleri  to  or  beyond  the  second  cirrus.  It  tapers  to  a point  and  has  a tuft  of  short  bristles  on  the 
end.  On  each  side  are  scattered  bristles  in  three  rows. 


NOTES  ON  A SPECIES  OF  BARNACLE. 


405 


COMPARISON  WITH  OTHER  SPECIES  OF  DICIIELASPIS. 

Darwin  (1851-54)  gives  five  species  under  this  genus,  and  says  of  their  dis- 
tribution : 

Eastern  and  western  warmer  oceans  in  the  Northern  Hemisphere,  attached  to  Crustacea,  sea- 
snakes,  etc.;  attached  to  crabs  at  Madeira  and  off  Borneo;  to  sea-snakes  in  the  Indian  Ocean.  The 
individuals  of  all  the  species  appear  to  be  rare. 

Since  Darwin  four  species  have  been  added  to  the  genus:  I).  darwinii  de  Filippi 
(’61  and  ’61a),  very  abundant  on  the  gills  of  Palinurus  vulgaris  in  the  Mediterranean; 
D.  neptuni  (MacDonald)  Hoek  (MacD.  ’69  and  Hoek  ’83),  on  the  gills  and  respiratory 
appendages  of  “ Neptunus pelagicus,  one  of  the  swimming  crabs  occurring  in  great 
plenty  at  Moreton  Bay,  Australia”;*  I).  aymonini  Lessona  and  Tapparone-Canefri 
(’74),  found  on  the  gills  of  Machrochira  haemferi  sent  from  Japan  by  Cav.  Aymonin, 


then  living  at  Yokohama;  finally,  I).  sessilis  Hoek  (’83),  collected  by  the  Challenge r 
expedition  in  the  Atlantic  near  the  Azores,  attached  to  a spine  of  an  Echinid  from 
1,000  fathoms. 

I reproduce  in  part  a table  for  the  identification  of  species,  given  by  Dr.  P.  P.  C. 
Hoek  (’83,  p.  48): 

1.  Carina  terminating  in  a disk D.  warwickii , D.  grayii,  D.  peUucida 

2.  Carina  terminating  in  a fork D.  neptuni,  D.  aymonini,  I).  darwinii,  D.  lowei 

3.  Carina  terminating  in  a cup D.  orthogonia,  D.  sessilis 

(2)  is  further  subdivided: 

I.  Basal  segment  of  scutum  directed  toward  centrum  of  capitulum D.  neptuni 

II.  Basal  segment  of  scutum  parallel  to  lower  margin  of  capitulum. 

(a)  Capitulum  almost  as  long  as  broad  [intended  for  almost  as  broad  as  long?]. 


a.  Tergum  triangular D.  aymonini 

(3.  Tergum  divided  by  a deep  notch D.  darwinii 

( b ) Capitulum  more  than  R-  times  as  long  as  broad D.  lowei 


Thus  the  form  of  the  carina,  the  direction  of  the  basal  segment  of  the  scutum, 
and  the  shape  of  the  tergum,  with  other  points  of  difference,  exclude  this  barnacle  from 


* MacDonald  describes  this  form  as  somewhat  between  Lepas  and  Dichelaspis  and  gives  it  the  name  Paradolepas 
neptuni;  but  Hoek  refers  it  to  the  genus  Dichelaspis. 


406 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


all  of  the  above  species  except  I).  darwinii and  D.  lowei While  I),  mulleri  resembles 
I),  lowei  in  many  points,  it  differs  from  it  chiefly  in  these  important  respects: 

(1)  In  shape:  The  capital nm  of  I).  lowei  is  times  as  long  as  wide,  while  in 
D.  mulleri  the  length  barely  exceeds  the  width.  Darwin  describes  the  capita lum  as 
“much  compressed.  1 In  I).  mulleri  it  is  one-half  as  thick  as  long;  little  compressed 
as  compared. with  lepas. 

(2)  The  segments  of  the  posterior  cirri  have  in  D.  lowei  eight  pairs  of  main 
spines;  in  I),  mulleri  six  pairs. 

(3)  In  size  of  plates:  The  plates  of  our  species  are  much  smaller  and  farther 
removed  from  one  another. 

(4)  The  segments  of  the  scuta  are  separated  by  an  angle  of  °70  to  80°,  instead 
of  by  an  angle  of  50°. 

(5)  The  carina  of  T).  mulleri  does  not  “extend  up  between  three-fourths  of 
the  length  of  the  terga”  (or  very  rarely,  at  most),  and  the  prongs,  instead  of  being 
separated  by  an  angle,  as  in  D.  darwinii , are  united  by  an  even  curve  (tig.  6).  This 
latter  point,  however,  may  be  subject  to  variability. 

D.  darwinii  is  described  by  de  Filippi  (’61,  p.  76)  as  extremely  common  as  a 
parasite  in  the  branchial  chamber  of  Palinurus  vulgaris , and  is  found  in  or  near  the 
Bay  of  Naples.  The  external  resemblance  to  D.  mulleri  is  very  close,  but  striking 
differences  exist  between  the  nauplii  of  U.  mulleri  and  those  of  D.  darwinii  as  figured 
by  de  Filippi  (’61a,  tav.  xm,  fig-s.  10  and  11).  I need  mention  onty  that  in  his  figure 
of  the  older  nauplius  (ibid.,  fig.  11)  the  frontal  horns  are  still  bent  backward  parallel 
to  the  body,  and  the  spines  on  the  appendages  are  no  longer  than  those  of  the  just- 
hatched  nauplius  (cf.  figs.  10  and  11  of  I).  mulleri).  Other  differences  in  the  life  of 
the  nauplii  are  referred  to  later. 

Those  species  of  Dichelaspis  having  similar  habitats  to  that  of  I),  mulleri , and 
apparently  occurring  in  considerable  numbers,  are  D.  darwinii  on  lobsters  of  the 
Mediterranean,  I>.  nejptuni  on  crabs  of  the  Southern  Pacific,  and  I),  aymonini  on 
spider-crabs  of  Japanese  water's. 

SOME  OBSERVATIONS  ON  THE  DEVELOPMENT.  \ 

The  peduncle  of  mature  individuals  is  generally  found  to  be  entirely,  or  in 
part,  of  a pink  color,  this  color  being  due  to  the  ova  seen  through  the  translucent 
integument.  After  the  eggs  have  passed  into  the  branchial  chamber,  where  they 
are  cemented  together  into  a somewhat  saddle-shaped  lamella,  the  external  pink 
appearance  extends  to  the  capitulum.  Some  idea  of  the  condition  of  the  eggs  can 
thus  be  gained  from  a glance  at  the  barnacle. 

Eggs  found  in  the  ovary,  which  is  contained  in  the  peduncle,  are  roughly 
spherical  in  shape.  Before  passing  out  of  the  ovary  they  attain  a diameter  of 
about  0.1  mm.;  under  a high  power  such  an  egg  is  faintly  pink  in  color,  appearing 
light  yellow  near  the  circumference. 

When  laid  the  eggs  are  kept  in  the  branchial  chamber,  where  the  first  segmenta- 
tion stages  are  found.  The  cleavage  begins  as  total  and  unequal.  Eggs  were  observed 

* D.  lowei  Darwin.  Madeira;  attached  to  a rare  braehyurous  crab;  very  rare  (Darwin,  1851-54). 

fin  the  terminology  of  the  following  description  of  developmental  stages,  Korsheldt  A Heider’s  text-book  (’99,  pp. 
209-219)  and  Hoek’s  report  (’84)  have  been  followed.  The  figures  and  descriptions  in  the  former  are  of  Balcinus  and  of 
different  species  of  Lepas,  in  the  latter  of  a species  of  Lepas. 


NOTES  ON  A SPECIES  OF  BARNACLE. 


407 


that  had  undergone  only  the  first  cleavage;  as  compared  with  the  ovarian  egg  they 
were  elongate,  narrowed  somewhat,  and  not  much  pointed  at  the  future  posterior  end. 
As  the  embyro  nauplius  within  is  developed  the  egg  becomes  more  pointed  at  this 
end  and  more  square-shouldered  at  the  other. 

To  understand  the  arrangement  of  the  nauplial  appendages  in  the  egg,  tig.  10 
of  the  nauplius  as  just  hatched  should  be  compared  with  the  egg-nauplius  of  fig.  9. 
The  latter  figure  is  a ventral  view  of  an  egg  nearly  ready  for  hatching.  The  entire 
second  appendage  with  its  two  rami  is  seen  (tigs.  9 and  10,  II,  II«,  IK),  but  the 
third  appendage  (see  tig.  10,  III,  etc.)  is  completely  hidden  in  this  view  by  the 
overlapping  second.  The  first  appendage,  too,  is  folded  behind  the  second  so  that 
only  its  proximal  portion  is  seen  (fig.  9,  I).  The  oesophagus  apparently  arches 


over  ventralward,  so  as  to  open  somewhat  on  the  ventral  surface  of  the  large  “upper 
lip”  (ti.l.),  the  oesophagus  being  seen  in  optical  cross-section  at  oes.  The  large 
nauplius  eye  ( ic.e .)  is  closely  approximated  to  the  brain  (cer.).  At  the  posterior  end 
the  point  of  the  dorso-caudal  spine  (d.  c.  sp.)  is  seen  just  dorsal  to  the  caudal  fork 
(cdl.  f),  which  terminates  the  thoraco-abdominal  region  of  the  body. 

By  selecting  barnacles  whose  capitula  are  tolerably  well  filled  with  eggs,  and 
teasing  them  on  a slide,  eggs  are  frequently  found  from  which  the  nauplius  is  in  the 
act  of  hatching.  In  several  cases  observed  under  the  microscope  the  process  was  as 
follows:  The  appendages  are  pressed  out  against  the  shell,  while  the  caudal  end  of  the 
body  is  bent  ventrally  and  anteriorly  against  the  shell.  Then  while  the  appendages 
and  body  are  pushed  anteriorly  as  much  as  possible,  the  caudal  fork  slips  posteriorly 
along  the  shell.  These  alternate  movements,  bracing  first  with  the  appendages,  then 


408 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


with  the  caudal  part,  bring  pressure  to  bear  on  the  anterior  end  of  the  shell  and 
on  other  parts.  Rupture  was  never  observed  to  take  place  elsewhere  than  at  the 
anterior  end.  When  the  shell  has  ruptured,  with  the  leverage  afforded  on  all  sides, 
the  larva  is  half  out  in  a second  or  two;  then  with  a single  effort  the  shell  is  slipped 
off  from  the  ends  of  the  appendages  and  the  nauplius  swims  freely  about. 

The  nauplius  in  this  stage  (tig.  10)  measures  0.213”*“  in  length.  Of  the  three 
pairs  of  swimming  appendages  the  two  posterior  are  biramous,  the  rami  of  the  third 
being  very  short.  The  first  appendage  bears  6 spines;  the  second,  5 and  6 on  the 
anterior  and  posterior  rami,  respectively,  besides  the  rudiment  of  the  “masticatory 
blade”  ( rnasc . 1)1.)  on  the  protopodite;  the  third  bears  2 on  the  anterior  ramus,  3 on 
the  posterior,  and  2 or  3 short  spines  on  the  protopodite  and  posterior  ramus.  The 
spines  are  straight  and  without  branches  that  could  be  seen  with  the  power  used. 

In  addition  to  the  other  parts  referred  to  in  the  description  of  the  egg-nauplius, 
the  alimentary  canal  (al.  can.)  can  here  be  traced  for  the  greater  part  of  its  course. 
Alongside  of  it  are  seen  two  stout  muscles  (ms.  th.  ab.)  attached  anteriorly  and 
dorsally  to  the  carapace  in  the  region  of  the  third  appendage;  posteriorly  they  seem 
to  be  inserted  on  the  ventral  side  of  the  thoraco-abdominal  part,  and  I assume  them 
to  be  the  means  of  the  antero- ventral  flexures  of  that  section  of  the  body  observed 
in  the  act  of  hatching,  and  when  the  nauplius  is  kept  from  swimming  by  light 
pressure  on  the,  cover-glass.  The  parts  indicated  by  x are  perhaps  muscles  to  the 
mouth  region,  but  they  were  not  so  clear  that  muscular  structure  was  evident.  The 
position  of  the  long  frontal  horns  (fr.  A.)  bent  posteriorly  subparallel  to  the  sides  of 
the  body  is  characteristic  of  this  stage  of  the  nauplius. 

To  obtain  nauplii  for  study  or  preservation,  ripe-looking  barnacles  may  be 
selected  and  teased  as  described  above.  It  was  found  better,  however,  to  keep  one 
or  two  dishes  of  water,  each  containing  thirty  or  forty  barnacles;  the  water  need  be 
changed  only  every  two  or  three  days.  The  nauplii  aggregate  at  the  surface  and 
toward  the  brightest  light,  and  can  be  obtained  at  almost  any  time,  but,  as  the  first 
molt  occurs  very  soon,  they  are  almost  all  in  the  second  stage.  De  Filippi  states 
that  the  nauplii  of  D.  darwinii  remain  near  the  ovisacs  for  a long  time,  undergoing 
further  development  there  (’01,  p.  75,  and  ’61  a,  p.  203).  The  first  nauplii  of  D.  mulleri 
often  at  least,  probably  as  a rule,  leave  the  branchial  chamber  early,  undergoing  the 
first  molt  outside.  Washing  out  the  gill  chamber  of  the  crab  has  never  yielded 
more  than  a very  few  nauplii;  when  they  pass  from  the  capitulum  of  the  parent  they 
must  be  carried  at  once  out  of  the  crab’s  gill  chamber. 

The  length  of  time  between  the  hatching  and  the  first  molt  was  not  definitely 
determined,  but  it  was  evidently  very  short — probably  usually  within  an  hour.  In 
one  case,  when  a barnacle  was  teased  on  a slide  and  nauplii  in  the  act  of  hatching 
were  found  in  the  drop  on  the  slide  and  others  already  free,  two  or  three  vigorous 
larvae  of  the  first  stage  (fig.  10)  were  transferred  to  a watch  glass  of  water.  Fifteen 
minutes  later  a nauplius  was  observed  to  have  the  frontal  horns  projecting  forward, 
to  have  the  appendages  placed  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  body,  and  to  be  evidently 
longer  than  when  first  observed.  The  appendages  were  pressed  more  and  more 
closely  against  the  sides,  and  slight  twitching  motions  of  the  body  and  appendages — 
apparently  shrugging  first  one  shoulder,  then  the  other — were  accompanied  by  a 
gradual  lengthening  of  the  body  to  0.387"’"',  by  which  time  it  could  be  seen  that  the 


NOTES  ON  A SPECIES  OF  BARNACLE. 


409 


nauplius  was  in  the  act  of  molting.  The  dorso-caudal  spine  and  the  thoraco-abdominai 
process  could  be  seen  to  evaginate  as  they  were  drawn  out  from  the  old  cuticle.  In 
a short  time  the  appendages  and  body  were  out  except  for  the  long  spines;  more 
pronounced  movements  soon  freeing  these,  the  molt  was  completed.  The  nauplius  in 
this  stage,  represented  by  fig.  11,  measures,  from  the  anterior  profile  of  the  body  to 

jtX 


S.a. 


the  end  of  the  dorso-caudal  spine,  82mm,  or  about  four  times  its  length  in  the  preceding- 
stage.  Occasionally  a nauplius  is  found  with  the  evagination  of  the  dorso-caudal  spine 
incomplete,  so  that  the  latter  appears  to  become  abruptly  smaller  at  some  point. 

In  tig.  11  the  position  of  the  “frontal  horns”  should  be  noted,  as  well  as  the 
presence  of  the  sensory  appendages  (s.  a.)  projecting  from  underneath  the  head 
between  the  frontal  horns.  Most  of  the  spines  are  branched;  the  dorso-caudal  spine 


410 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


(d,  c.  sp.)  and  the  thoraco-abdominal  process  (th.  ab.gpr.)  are  barbed.  The  alimentary- 
canal  can  be  traced.  At  gl  is  seen  the  gland  cell  produced  into  the  frontal  horn. 

Fig-.  12  is  a more  enlarged  drawing  of  the  under  surface  of  the  body.  The  large 
“upper  lip”  bears  a row  of  seta?  on  each  side  of  its  distal  portion.  At  the  distal 
end  of  this  row  there  is  a group  of  seta?  about  twice  as  long  as  the  others.  Along 

the  axis  of  the  lip  there  is  a band 
(muscle?  or  gland?)  which  loses  itself 
in  the  horseshoe-shaped  dark  area 
about  the  mouth  region.  The  stout 
masticatory  blade  (masc.  hi.)  on  the 
protopodite  of  the  second  appendage 
is  to  be  observed. 

Fig.  13  gives  a lateral  view  of 
the  anal  region.  The  alimentary 
canal  is  very  much  reduced  in  its 
most  posterior  part.  The  dorso- 
caudal  spine  arises  just  dorsal  to  the 
anus  (a)  and  the  thoraco-abdominal 
process  immediately  ventral.  The 
point  of  insertion  of  the  large  muscle 
previously  referred  to  (ms.  th.  ah.) 
can  be  seen,  and  just  at  that  place 
there  seems  to  be  an  articulation, 
but  no  observations  as  to  the  actual 
place  of  flexure  were  made  on  the 
living  nauplius. 

Several  methods  were  tried  to  raise  or  obtain  older  stages  of  the  nauplius,  but 
with  scant  success.  It  was  found  that  the  nauplii  of  the  smooth  JB olanus  barnacle 
growing  on  the  carapace  of  the  crab  could  be  raised  to  the  cypris  stage  by  keeping 
them  in  an  aquarium  jar  of  water,  to  which  was  added  every  day  or  two  some 
sediment  from  another  jar  containing  a culture  of  diatoms,  a method  suggested  by 
Dr.  Caswell  Grave.  The  interval  between  the 
first  and  second  molts  and  that  between  the 
second  and  third  molts  were,  with  Balanus. 
one  to  two  days  each.  This  and  other  aqua- 
rium methods  were  used  with  Dichelaspis,  but 
only  once  was  a third  stage  reached.  In  this 
case  the  aquarium  was  started  August  22;  on 
August  29  the  nauplii  were  found  to  have 
undergone  at  least  a second  molt;  they  dif- 
fered from  the  nauplii  of  the  second  stage  little,  except  in  size,  the  length  having 
increased  to  1.13mm  with  the  other  proportions  likewise  larger.  " 


Fig.  13. — Same  as  fig.  11.  Lateral  view  of  posterior 
part  of  alimentary  canal,  etc.  x 280.' 


* Professor  de  Filippi  states  that  he  failed  to  get  the  nauplii  of  D.  darwinii  further  than  the  second  stage  of  their 
development,  and  he  argues  from  this  and  from  other  facts  (form  of  the  larva,  means  of  locomotion,  etc.)  that  the  nauplial 
life  is  very  long  (’01,  p.  75,  and  ’61a,  p.  205).  But  it  is  quite  possible  that  further  effort  with  Grave’s  method  will  show 
that  the  metamorphosis  does  not.  take  an  exceptional  length  of  time. 


NOTES  ON  A SPECIES  OF  BARNACLE. 


411 


In  two  or  three  crabs  having-  a large  number  of  barnacles  of  all  sizes,  minute 
white  specks  on  the  gills,  when  examined  with  a lens,  proved  to  be  attached  cypris  or 
stages  between  the  attached  cypris  and  the  typical  lepadide  form. 

Fig.  14  is  a sketch  made  from  an  attached  cypris  that  had  been  mounted  in 
balsam;  the  gill  had  been  torn  from  the  adhering  antennas  (ant.).  The  valves  of 
the  very  convex  and  bilaterally  compressed  shell  are  continuous  dorsal ly  (.$•/*.);  their 
ventral  edges  are  connected  by  the  adductor  muscle  (ms.  ad.)  and  are  apposed  except 
where  the  adhering  antennae  are  protruded  in  front,  and  posteriorly  where  the 
branchial  opening,  through  which  the  thoracic  feet  (th.  1.  /,  17)  are  protruded, 
admits  the  passage  of  water  into  and  out  of  the  branchial  chamber.  The  shell  is  lined 
by  the  mantle  (ml.)-  anteriorly,  between  the  mantle  and  the  shell  is  seen  a thick  layer 
of  loose  tissue  (y),  which  is  perhaps  a thickening  of  the  mantle,  or  possibly  is  due  to 
imperfect  preservation;  while  it  is  not  figured  by  Hoek  or  Claus  (in  Korsheldt  & 
Heider)  it  is  in  all  of  my  specimens.  The  dorsal  infolding  (inv.  d.),  separating  the 
part  that  is  to  be  the  capitulum  from  the  portion  from  which  the  peduncle  is  derived, 


Pig.  14. — Attached  cypris.  Optical  section,  with  some  projections  xlfi3.  (Drawing  from  mounted  specimen.) 


is  well  developed.  Just  anterior  to  this  is  the  ventral  invagination  (inv.  v.),  causing 
the  peduncular  portion  to  be  bent  upon  itself.  In  this  infold  are  the  large  paired 
eyes  (p.  e.)  left  behind  by  the  withdrawal  of  the  stalk  integument,  but  still  attached 
to  the  cuticle,  and  later  to  be  thrown  off  (Korsheldt  & Heider  ’99,  p.  218).  The 
unpaired  nauplius  eye  (u.  e.)  is  seen  near  the  ventral  end  of  the  dorsal  invagination, 
instead  of  anterior  to  the  caeca  as  in  Lepas  (Claus’s  figure  of  the  cypris  of  Lepas 
pectinata  in  K.  & II.  ’99,  p.  210).  The  mouth  sit,  the  top  of  the  “oral  cone”  leads 
by  the  oesophagus  (ces.)  into  the  enlarged  stomach  (st.)  from  which  the  intestine  (int.) 
proceeds.  Opening  into  the  oesophagus  are  a pair  of  caeca,  cc,  (Iloek);  in  Claus’s 
figure  a similarly  placed  cavity  is  called  the  liver.  Ventral  to  the  alimentary  canal 
is  seen  the  chain  of  thoracic  ganglia  (g.  /to  g.  VI)  without  commissures;  the  first  is 
much  the  largest.  Just  above  the  oesophagus  from  this  one  is  the  supracesophageal 
ganglion  (g.  s.). 

Specimens  in  all  stages  of  the  metamorphosis  from  the  attached  cypris  to  the 
perfect  lepadide  adult  can  be  found  on  the  crab  gill. 


*i- 


int. 


412 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


ABBREVIATIONS  USED  WITH  FIGURES. 


a anus. 

al.  can alimentary  canal. 

ant adhering  antennse. 

c carina. 

cc caecum. 

c. ap caudal  appendage. 

cap capitulum. 

cdl.f caudal  fork. 

cer brain. 

d. c.sp dorso-caudal  spine. 

fr.li frontal  horn. 

g.  I,  g.  VI  .ventral  ganglia. 

gl  gland  cell. 

g.s supracesophageal  ganglion. 

int intestine. 


inv.d dorsal  invagination. 

inv.v ventral  invagination. 

m mouth. 

masc.  hi . .masticatory  blade. 
ml mantle. 

ms.  th.  a&.thoraco-abdominal  muscle. (?) 
ms.  ad  . . .adductor  muscle. 

ces oesophagus. 

ov ovary. 

ped peduncle. 

p.e paired  (cypris)  eye. 

s.a sensory  appendage. 

sc scutum. 

sh shell. 

st stomach. 


t tergum. 

th.ab.pr  . .thoraco-abdominal  process. 
th.  I , I-  VI . thoracic  limbs. 

u.  e unpaired  (nauplius)  eye. 

u.  I upper  lip. 

T,  .S',  C uncalcified  valves  (terga, 

scuta,  carina). 

■r,  y (see  pages 408 and  411,  respec- 

tively.) 


/,  II,  III.. first,  second,  and  third  nau- 
plial  appendages. 

Ila,  lib.  ..anterior  and  posterior  rami 
of  second  appendage. 

Ilia,  Illb. anterior  and  posterior  rami 
of  third  appendage. 


LITERATURE  CITED. 

1851-54.  Darwin,  0.  “A  monograph  on  the  subclass  Cirripedia.”  London.  Ray  Society. 

’61.  De  Filippi.  “Sul  genere  Dichelaspis  e su  di  uno  nuova  specie  de. ess  proprio  del  Mediterraneo.” 
Archivio  per  la  Zoologia,  L’Anatomia  e La  Fisiologia.  Genova.  1861.  Pp.  71-73. 

’61a.  De  Filippi.  “ Seconda  Nota  sulla  Dichelaspis  darwinii.” 

’83.  Hoek,  P.  P.  C.  “Report  on  the  Cirripedia,”  etc.  (Systematic  Part. ) Challenger  Reports,  vm. 
’84.  Hoek,  P.  P.  C.  “Report  on  the  Cirripedia,”  etc.  (Anatomical  Part.)  Challenger  Reports,  x. 
’99.  Korsheldt  & Heider.  “ Text-hook  of  the  embryology  of  invertebrates.”  Part  ir. 

’74.  Lesson  a and  Tapparone-Canefri.  “Nota  sulla  Machrochira  Kaemferi  Sieb,  e sopra  una  nuova 
specie  del  genere  Dichelaspis.”  Atti  Acad.  Torino,  ix. 

’69.  MacDonald,  J.  D.  “On  an  apparently  new  genus  of  minute  parasitic  Cirripeds,  between  Lepas 
and  Dichelaspis.”  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  London.  P.  440ff. 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


BY 

GARY  N.  CALKINS. 


413 


Contributions  from  the  Biological  Laboratory  of  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission, 
Woods  Hole,  Massachusetts. 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


By  GARY  N.  CALKINS, 
Department  of  Zoology.,  Columbia  University. 


Comparatively  little  has  been  done  in  this  country  upon  marine  Protozoa.  A 
few  observations  have  been  made  by7  Kellicott,  Stokes,  and  Peck,  but  these  have  not 
been  at  all  complete.  With  the  exception  of  Miss  Stevens’s  excellent  description  of 
species  of  Liclmophora  I am  aware  of  no  single  papers  on  individual  forms.  Peck 
(’93  and  ’95)  clearly  stated  the  economic  position  of  marine  Protozoa  as  sources  of 
food,  and  1 need  not  add  to  his  arguments.  It  is  of  interest  to  know  the  actual 
species  of  various  groups  in  any7  locality  and  to  compare  them  with  European  forms. 
The  present  contribution  is  only  the  beginning  of  a series  upon  the  marine  Protozoa 
at  Woods  Hole,  and  the  species  here  enumerated  are  those  which  were  found  with  the 
algae  along  the  edge  of  the  floating  wharf  in  front  of  the  Fish  Commission  building 
and  within  a space  of  about  20  feet.  Many  of  them  were  observed  in  the  water  and 
algae  taken  fresh  from  the  sea;  others  were  found  only  after  the  water  had  been 
allowed  to  stand  for  a few  days  in  the  laboratory.  The  tow-net  was  not  used,  the 
free  surface  Protozoa  were  not  studied,  nor  was  the  dredge  called  into  play.  Both 
of  these  means  of  collecting  promise  excellent  results,  and  at  some  future  time  I hope 
to  take  advantage  of  them. 

My  observations  cover  a period  of  two  months,  from  the  1st  of  July  to  the  1st 
of  September.  During  that  time  1 was  able  to  study  and  describe  72  species  repre- 
senting 55  genera,  all  from  the  limited  space  mentioned  above.  In  addition  to  these 
there  are  a few  genera  and  species  upon  which  I have  insufficient  notes,  and  these 
I shall  reserve  until  opportunity  comes  to  study  them  further. 

I take  this  opportunity  to  express  my  thanks  to  Dr.  Hugh  M.  Smith  for  many 
favors  shown  me  while  at  Woods  Hole. 

In  dealing  with  these  marine  forms  from  the  systematic  standpoint,  two  courses 
are  open  to  the  investigator.  He  may  make  numerous  new  species  based  upon  minor 
differences  in  structure,  or  he  may  extend  previous  descriptions  until  they  are  elastic 
enough  to  cover  the  variations.  The  great  majority  of  marine  Protozoa  have  been 
described  from  European  waters,  and  the  descriptions  are  usually  not  elastic  enough 
to  embrace  the  forms  found  at  Woods  Hole.  I have  chosen,  however,  to  hold  to 
the  conservative  plan  of  systematic  work,  and  to  make  as  few  new  species  as  possible, 
extending  the  older  descriptions  to  include  the  new  forms. 


415 


416 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


The  different  classes  of  Protozoa,  and  orders  within  the  classes,  are  distributed 
more  or  less  in  zones.  Thus  the  Infusoria,  including  the  Ciliata  and  the  Suctoria,  are 
usually  littoral  in  their  habitat,  living  upon  the  shore-dwelling,  or  attached,  water 
plants  and  upon  the  animals  frequenting  them.  It  is  to  be  expected,  therefore,  that 
in  forms  here  considered  there  should  be  a preponderance  of  Infusoria.  Flagellated 
forms  are  also  found  in  similar  localities,  but  on  the  surface  of  the  sea  as  well;  hence 
the  number  described  in  these  pages  is  probably  only  a small  proportion  of  the  total 
number  of  Mastigophora  in  this  region.  The  Sarcodina,  including  the  Foraminifera 
and  the  Radiolaria,  are  typically  deep-sea  forms  and  would  not  be  represented  by 
many  types  in  the  restricted  locality  examined  at  Woods  Hole.  Two  species,  Gromia 
lagenoides  and  Trun catulina  lobatula , alone  represent  the  great  order  of  Foraminifera, 
while  the  still  larger  group  of  Radiolaria  is  not  represented  at  all. 

The  Protozoa  described  are  distributed  among  the  different  orders  as  follows:* 


Class  Sarcodina. 

Subclass  Rhizopoda. 

Order  Amcebida.  Page. 

1.  Amoeba  guttula  Duj 417 

2.  Amoeba  sp 417 

3.  Trichosphxrium  sieboldi  Schn 418 

Order  Reticulariida. 

Suborder  Imperforina. 

4.  Gromia  lagenoides  Gruber 419 

Suborder  Perforina. 

5.  Truncatulina  lobatula  Walker  & Jacob 420 

Subclass  Heliozoa. 

Order  Aphrothoracida. 

6.  Actinopkrys  sol  Ehr 420 

Order  Chlamydophorida. 

7.  Heterophrys  myriapoda  Archer 421 

Class  Mastigophora. 

Subclass  Flagellidia. 

Order  Monadida. 

8.  Mastigdmoeba  simplex , n.  sp 422 

9.  Codonosca  gracilis,  n.  sp 423 

10.  Monas  sp 423 

Order  Choanoflagellida. 

11.  Monosiga  ovata  S.  Kent 424 

12.  Monosiga  fusiforrnis  S.  Kent 424 

13.  Codonosiga  botrytis  (Ehr.)  J.  Cl 424 

Order  Heteromastigida. 

14.  Bodo  globosus  Stein 425 

15.  Bodo  caudatus  (Duj . ) Stein 425 

16.  Oxyrrhis  marina  Duj 425 

Order  Euglenida. 

17.  Astasia  contorta  Duj 426 

18.  Anisonema  vitrea  Duj 426 

Order  Sii.icoflagellida. 

19.  Disteplianus  speculum  Stohr 427 

Subclass  Dinoflagellidia. 

Order  Adinida. 

20.  Exuvixlla  lima  Cienk 428 

21.  Exuvixlla  marina  Cienk 429 

Order  Diniferida. 

22.  Gymnodimium  gracite  Bergh 429 

23.  Glcnodinium  cinctum  Ehr, j 430 

24.  Glcnodinium  compressa,  n.  sp 430 

25.  Peridinium  digitate  Pouchet 431 

26.  Peridinium  diver  gens  Ehr 431 

27.  Ceratium  tripos  Nitsch 432 

28.  Ceratium  fusus  Ehr 432 

29.  Amplii&iniiim  operculatum  Clap.  & Lach 432 


Class  Infusoria. 

Subclass  Ciliata. 

Order  Holotrichida. 

Family  Enchelinida;.  Page. 

30.  Lacrymaria  lagenula  Cl.  & Lach 433 

31.  Lacrymaria  coronata  Cl.  & Lach 434 

32.  Trachelocerca  phcenicopterus  Cohn 435 

33.  Tiarina  f usus  Cl.  & Lach 437 

34.  Mesodinium  cinctum , n.  sp 436 

Family  Trachylinide. 

35.  Lionotus fasciola  Ehr 438 

36.  Loxophyllum  setigerum  Quenn 438 

Family  Chlamydodontidie. 

37.  Nassula  microstoma  Cohn 440 

38.  Chilodon  cucullulus  Mull 441 

39.  Hysteria  lanceolata  Cl.  & Lach 441 

Family  Chiliferid^e. 

40.  Frontonia  leucas  Ehr 442 

41.  Colpidium  colpoda  Ehr 443 

42.  Uronema  marina  Duj 444 

Family  Pleuronemidjs. 

43.  Pleuronema  chrysalis  Ehr 444 

44.  Pleuronema  setigera,  n.  sp 445 

45.  Lembus  infusionum,  n.  sp 446 

46.  Lembus  pusillus  Quenn 446 

Family  Opalinidas. 

47.  Anoploplirya  branchiarum  Stein 447 

Order  Heterotrichida. 

Family  Bursaridie. 

48.  Condylostoma  patens  Miill  449 

Family  Halteriidie. 

49.  Strombidium  caudatum  From 450 

Family  Tintinnidie. 

50.  Tintinnopsis  beroidea  Stein 451 

51.  Tintinnopsis  davidoffi  Daday 451 

Order  Hypotrichida. 

Family  Peritromid^e. 

52.  Peritromus  emmx  Stein 452 

Family  Oxytrichidie. 

53.  Epiclintes  radiosa  Quenn 453 

54.  Amphisia  kessleri  Wrzes 454 

Family  Euplotidie. 

55.  Euplotes  charon  Ehr 455 

56.  Euplotes  harpa  Stein 455 

57.  Diophrys  appendiculatus  Stein 456 

58.  Crony  chid  setigera,  n . sp 457 

59.  Aspidisca  hexeris  Quenn 458 

60.  Aspidisca  polystyla  Stein 458 


*This  classification  includes  only  the  orders  and  families  represented  at  Woods  Hole. 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  PROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


417 


Class  Infusoria — Continued.  Page. 

Subclass  Ciliata— Continued. 

Order  Peritrichida. 

Family  Lichnophorida!. 

61.  Liclmophora  macfarlandi  Stevens -159 

Family  Vorticellid.'E. 

62.  VorticeUa  marina  Greeff 461 

63.  Vorticella patcllina  Muller 461 

64.  Zoothamnium  elegans  D’Udek 461 

65.  Cothurnia  crystaUina  Ehr 462 

66.  Cothurnia  nodosa  Cl.  & Laeh 463 

67.  Cothurnia  imberbis  Ehr 462 


Class  Infusoria — Continued.  Page. 

Subclass  Suctoria. 

Family  Podophrvidai. 

68.  Podophrya  gracilis,  n.  sp 463 

69.  Ephelnta  coronata  Wright  464 

Family  AcinetidjE. 

70.  A cincta  divisa  Fraip 465 

71.  Acineta  tuberosa  Ehr 465 

Family  Dendrosomid.e. 

72.  Trichophrya  salparum  Entz  466 


Genus  AMCEBA  Auct. 

The  pseudopodia  are  lobose,  sometimes  absent,  the  body  then  progressing  by  a flowing  move- 
ment; the  body  consists  of  ectoplasm  and  endoplasm,  the  latter  being  granular  and  internal,  the 
former  hyaline  and  external.  There  is  always  one  nucleus  and  one  vacuole,  but  both  may  be  more 
numerous.  Reproduction  takes  place  by  division  or  by  spore-formation.  Fresh-water  and  marine. 


Fig.  1. — Amoeba  guttula. 


Fig.  2. — Amoeba  sp. 


Amceba  guttula  Duj.  Fig.  1. 

A minute  form  without  pseudopodial  processes,  extremely  hyaline  in  appearance,  and  character- 
ized by  rapid  flowing  in  one  direction.  The  body  is  club-shape  and  moves  with  the  swollen  end  in 
advance.  A comparatively  small  number  of  large  granules  are  found  in  the  swollen  portion,  while 
the  smaller  posterior  end  is  quite  hyaline.  Contractile  vacuole  absent,  and  a nucleus  was  not  seen. 
Frequent  in  decomposing  vegetable  matter.  Length  37 fi.  Traverses  a distance  of  160/<  in  one  minute. 

The  fresh-water  form  of  A.  guttula  has  a vacuole,  otherwise  Dujardin’s  description  agrees  perfectly 
with  the  Woods  Hole  forms. 


Amceba?  Fig.  2. 

A more  sluggish  form  than  the  preceding,  distinguished  by  its  larger  size,  its  dense  granulation, 
and  by  short,  rounded  pseudopodia,  which,  as  in  Arnosba  proieus,  may  come  from  any  part  of  the  body. 
A delicate  layer  of  ectoplasm  surrounds  the  granular  endoplasm,  and  pseudopodia  formation  is  eruptive, 
beginning  with  the  accumulation  of  ectoplasm.  Movement  rapid,  usually  in  one  direction,  but  may 
be  backwards  or  sideways,  etc.  Contractile  vacuoie  absent;  the  nucleus  is  spherical  and  contains 
many  large  chromatin  granules.  Length  80/i;  diameter  5 6/t. 

F.  C.  B.  1901—27 


418 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Genus  TRICHOSPH.ERIUM  Schneider  ’78. 

Synonym:  Pachymyxa  hystrix  Gruber. 

Marine  rhizopods,  globular  or  irregular  in  form,  and  slow  to  change  shape.  Dimorphic.  Both 
forms  multinucleate  during  vegetative  life.  Pseudopodia  are  long,  thin,  and  thread-form,  with  rounded 
ends.  Their  function  is  neither  food-getting  nor  locomotion,  but  probably  tasting.  The  plasm  of  both 
forms  is  inclosed  in  a soft  gelatinous  membrane.  In  one  form  the  jelly  is  impregnated  with  needles 
of  magnesium  carbonate  (Schaudinn),  but  these  are  absent  in  the  other  form.  The  membrane  is 
perforated  by  clearly  defined  and  permanent  holes  for  the  exit  of  the  pseudopodia.  Reproduction 
occurs  by  division,  by  budding  or  by  fragmentation,  but  the  parts  are  invariably  multinucleate.  At 
the  end  of  vegetative  life  the  needle-bearing  form  fragments  into  numerous  mononucleate  parts;  these 
develop  into  adults  similar  to  the  parent,  but  without  the  spines.  At  the  end  of  its  vegetative  life  this 
new  individual  fragments  into  biflagellated  swarm-spores  which  may  conjugate,  reproducing  the  form 
with  needles.  Size  up  to  2 mm. 


Trichosphserium  sieboldi  Schneider.  Fig.  3. 

With  the  characters  of  the  genus.  A form  which  1 have  taken  to  be  a young  stage  of  this 
interesting  rhizopod  is  described  as  follows: 

A minute,  almost  quiescent,  form  which  changes  its  contour  very  slowly.  The  membrane  is  cap- 
like and  extends  over  the  dome-shaped  body,  fitting  the  latter  closely.  The  endoplasm  is  granular  and 
contains  foreign  food-bodies.  Nucleus  single,  spherical,  and  centrally  located.  Pseudopodia  short 
and  finger-form,  emerging  from  the  edge  of  the  mantle-opening  and  swaying  slowly,  from  side  to  side  or 
quiescent.  The  most  characteristic  feature  is  the  presence  of  a broad,  creeping  sole,  membranous  in 
nature  and  hyaline  in  appearance.  This  membrane  is  the  only  evidence  of  ectoplasm,  and  it  frequently 
shows  folds  and  wrinkles,  while  its  contour  slowly  changes  with  movements  of  body.  The  pseudo- 
podia emerge  from  the  body  between  this  membrane  and  the  shell  margin.  Contractile  vacuole 
absent.  Length  42 ju,  width  35// . In  decomposing  seaweeds,  etc. 

Only  one  specimen  of  this  interesting  form  was  seen,  and  I hesitate  somewhat  in  placing  it  on 
such  a meager  basis.  It  is  so  peculiar,  however,  that  attention  should  be  called  to  it  in  the  hope 
of  getting  further  light  upon  its  structure  and  mode  of  life.  Its  membranous  disk  recalls  the  genus 
Plakopus;  its  mononucleate  condition,  its  membranous  disk,  and  the  short,  sometimes  branohed, 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


419 


pseudopodia  make  it  difficult  to  identify  with  any  phase  in  the  life-history  of  Trichosphserium.  I shall 
leave  it  here  provisionally,  with  the  hope  that  it  may  be  found  more  abundantly  another  time. 

Genus  GROMIA  Dujardin  ’35. 

(Dujardin  1835;  M.  Sehultze  ’62;  F.  E.  Sehultze  ’74;  Leidy  ’77;  Biitschli  '83;  Gruber  ’84.) 

The  form  is  ovoid  or  globular,  and  the  body  is  covered  by  a tightly  fitting,  plastic,  chitin  shell, 
which,  in  turn,  is  covered  by  a fine  layer  of  protoplasm.  The  flexibility  of  the  shell  makes  the  form 
variable  as  in  the  amoeboid  types.  The  thickness  of  the  shell  is  quite  variable.  The  pseudopodial 
opening  is  single  and  terminal.  The  pseudopodia  are  very  fine,  reticulate,  granular,  and  sharply 
pointed,  and  form  a loose  network  outside  of  the  shell  opening.  Nucleus  single  or  multiple.  Con- 
tractile vacuole  is  usually  absent.  Fresh  and  salt  water. 

Gromia  lagenoides  Gruber  ’84.  Fig.  4. 

This  species  is  not  uncommon  about  Woods  Hole,  where  it  is  found  upon  the  branches  of  various 
types  of  algpe.  The  body  is  pyriform,  with  the  shell  opening  at  the  larger  end.  The  chitinous  shell 


is  hyaline  and  plastic  to  a slight  extent,  so  that  the  body  is  capable  of  some  change  in  shape.  The 
shell  is  thin  and  turned  inwards  at  the  mouth-opening,  forming  a tube  (seen  in  optical  section  in  fig.  4) 
through  which  the  protoplasm  passes  to  the  outside.  The  walls  of  this  tube  are  thicker  than  the 
rest  of  the  shell,  and  in  optical  section  the  effect  is  that  of  two  hyaline  bars  extending  into  the  body 
protoplasm.  A thin  layer  of  protoplasm  surrounds  the  shell  and  fine,  branching,  pseudopodia  are 
given  off  in  every  direction.  The  protoplasm  becomes  massed  outside  of  the  mouth-opening  and  from 
here  a dense  network  of  pseudopodia  forms  a trap  for  diatoms  and  smaller  Protozoa.  The  nucleus  is 
spherical  and  contains  one  or  two  large  karyosomes.  The  protoplasm  is  densely  and  evenly  granular, 
without  regional  differentiation.  1 have  never  observed  an  external  layer  of  foreign  particles,  such  as 
Gruber  described  in  the  original  species. 

Length  of  shell  245/<;  largest  diameter  1 25/< . 

Genas  TRUNCATULINA  D’Orbigny 

A group  of  extremely  variable  foraminifera  in  which  the  shell  is  rotaline;  i.  e.,  involute  on  the 
lower  side  and  revolute  on  the  upper  (Brady  ).  The  shell  is  calcareous  and  coarsely  porous  in  older 


420 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


forms.  The  characters  are  very  inconstant,  and  Brady  gives  up  the  attempt  to  distinguish  the  group 
by  precise  and  constant  characters. 

Truncatulina  lobatula  Walker  & Jacob. 

Synonyms:  See  Brady  '84  for  a long  list. 

“It  is  impossible  to  define  by  any  precise  characters  the  morphological  range  of  the  present  species. 
Its  variations  are  infinite.”  (Brady,  p.  660.) 

This  very  common  form,  which  occurs  in  all  latitudes,  was  found  frequently  among  the  algse  at 
Woods  Hole.  Its  characters  are  so  difficult  to  define  that  for  the  present  I shall  limit  my  record  to 
this  brief  notice.  Size  of  shell  230/<  by  270//. 

Genus  ACTINOPHRYS  Ehr. 

The  body  is  spherical  and  differentiated  into  granular  endoplasm  and  vacuolated  ectoplasm,  but 
the  zones  are  not  definitely  separated.  There  is  one  central  nucleus  and  usually  one  contractile 


vacuole.  The  pseudopodia  have  axial  filaments  that  can  be  traced  to  the  periphery  of  the  nucleus. 
Fresh  and  salt  water. 

Actinophrys  sol  Ehr.,  variety.  Fig.  5. 

Synonyms:  See  Schaudinn  ’95. 

The  diameter  is  about  50//;  the  vacuolated  ectoplasm  passes  gradually  into  the  granular  endo- 
plasm. This  is  the  characterization  given  A.  sol  by  Schaudinn,  and  it  applies  perfectly  to  the  fresh- 
water forms.  If  1 am  correct,  however,  in  placing  an  Actinophrys- like  form  found  at  Woods  Hole  in 
this  species,  the  description  will  have  to  he  somewhat  modified.  In  this  form  (fig.  5)  there  is  no  dis- 
tinction between  ectoplasm  and  endoplasm,  and  there  is  an  entire  absence  of  vacuoles.  The  nucleus 
is  central,  and  axial  filaments  were  not  seen.  The  single  specimen  that  1 found  looked  much  like  a 
Suctorian  of  the  genus  Sphserop'hrya,  but  the  absence  of  a firm  cuticle  and  the  presence  of  food-taking 
pseudopodia  with  granule-streaming  makes  it  a very  questionable  Suctorian,  and  1 place  it  here  until 
further  study  throws  more  light  upon  it. 

Diameter  of  body  40//;  length  of  pseudopodia  120  to  140// . 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


421 


Genus  HETEROPHRYS  Archer. 

The  body  is  globular  with  but  slight  differentiation  into  ectoplasm  and  endoplasm;  one  nucleus  in 
the  latter;  contractile  vacuoles  one  or  many;  pseudopodia  on  all  sides,  thin,  and  with  peripheral 
granule-streaming;  surrounded  by  a globular,  rather  thick  coat  of  jelly,  which  is  hyaline  inside  and 
granular  on  the  periphery.  Fresh  and  salt  water. 

Heterophrys  myriapoda  Archer.  Fig.  6. 

Synonym:  II.  marina  Hert.  & Less.  ’74. 

Diameter  25  to  80//;  pseudopodia  twice  as  long  as  the  body  diameter;  the  plasm  often  contains 
chlorophyl  bodies  (Zoochlorella).  The  granular  part  of  the  gelatinous  layer  is  thick  (up  to  10//). 
The  spine-like  processes  are  very  thin  and  short.  (Schaudinn  ’95. ) The  marine  form  found  at 
Woods  Hole  probably  belongs  to  this  species,  as  described  by  Schaudinn.  The  short  pseudopodia 
which  give  to  the  periphery  a fringed  appearance  are  quite  regularly  placed  in  connection  with  the 
pseudopodia.  The  latter  are  not  so  long  as  twice  the  body  diameter,  the  longest  being  not  more  than 
equal  to  the  diameter  of  the  sphere.  The  body  inside  of  the  gelatinous  covering  is  thickly  coated 
with  bright  yellow  cells  similar  to  those  on  Radiolaria.  The  animal  moves  slowly  along  with  a rolling 
motion  similar  to  that  described  by  Penard  ’90,  in  the  case  of  Acantlioeystis.  Diameter  of  entire  globe 
35//;  of  the  body  without  the  jelly  18//.  The  extremely  tine  granular  pseudopodia  are  8 to  35//  long. 
Common  among  algae. 

This  form  was  probably  meant  by  Peck  ’95,  when  he  figured  “a  lieliozoon.” 

Key  to  orders  of  Flagellidia. 

Small,  body  usually  amoeboid;  1 or  more  flagella;  no  mouth Order  Monadida. 

Small;  plasmie  collar  around  the  flagellum Order  Choanoflagellida 

With  2 or  more  flagella;  one  trails  behind Order  Heteromastigida 

With  3 or  more  flagella,  none  of  which  trails Order  Polymastigida. 

Large;  firm  body  wall;  1 or  2 flagella;  mouth  or  pharynx,  or  both Order  Eugi.enida 

Medium  size;  with  chlorophyl,  no  mouth,  usually  colonial Order  Ph  ytoflagelljda. 

Small;  silieious  skeleton;  parasitic  on  Radiolaria  or  free Order  Silicoflagellida 

(One  genus,  Disteplianus  Stohr),  p.  427 

Key  to  the  families  of  Monadida. 


No  mouth;  1 or  2 flagella;  amoeboid  with  lobose  or  ray-like  pseudopodia Family  Rhizomastigidx 

Mouth  at  base  of  single  flagellum;  plastic;  no  pseudopodia Family  Cercomonadidx 

One  flagellum;  inclosed  in  gelatinous  or  membranous  cups Family  Codonceeidie 

One  flagellum;  tentacle-like  process  at  base  of  flagellum;  inclosed  in  cup Family  Bikoecidx 

One  main  flagellum  and  1 or  2 accessory  flagella Family  Hetercmonadidx 


Key  to  marine  genera  of  Monadida A 

Family  Rhizomasligidx : 

1.  Flagellum  repeatedly  thrown  off  and  reassumed 

2.  Flagellum  never  thrown  off . 

3.  a.  Pseudopodia  lobose ._ 

b.  Pseudopodia  ray-like 

Family  Codonxeidx: 

1.  Goblet-shaped  cups  adherent  by  stalk 

Family  Ileteromonadidx: 

1.  The  long  flagellum  vibratory 

2.  The  long  flagellum  rigid;  shorter  one  vibrates 


Genus  *Masligameeba  in  part,  p.  422 

3 

. Genus  Mastigamxba 

Genus  Mastigophrys 

Genus  * Codonceca,  p.  423 

Genus  * Monas,  p.  423 

Genus  Sterromonas 


Key  to  marine  genera  of  Choanoflagellida. 

1.  Without  gelatinous  or  membranous  test 

2.  With  gelatinous  or  membranous  test  

3.  a.  Attached  forms: 

1.  Without  a stalk,  or  with  a very  short  one 

2.  With  a long,  simple,  stalk 

3.  With  a long,  branched,  stalk 

b.  Free-swimming 

4.  Colonial,  and  with  a gelatinous  covering 


3 

4 

..Genus  * Monosiga,  p,  423 
Genus  * Codonosi.ga,  p.  424 

Genus  Codonocladium 

Genus  Desmarella 

Genus  Proterospongia 


Presence  at  Woods  Hole  indicated  by  asterisk. 


422 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Key  to  families  and  marine  genera  of  Heteromasligida. 


1.  Two  flagella  nearly  equal  in  size Family  Bodonidse 

One  main  and  2 accessory  flagella Family  Trimastigidse 

Family  Bodonidse: 

1.  Body  very  plastic,  almost  amoeboid Genus  *Bodo , p.  424 

Body  not  plastic;  with  large  anterior  cavity,  holding  flagella Genus  * Oxyrrhis,  p.  425 

Family  Trimastigidse: 

1.  With  an  undulatory  membrane  between  accessory  flagella Genus  Trimastix 

Without  such  membrane;  flagella  contained  in  a ventral  groove  while  at  rest Genus  Costia 


Key  to  marine  genera  of  Polymastigida. 

1.  Body  flattened;  ends  rounded;  sides  hollowed;  often  with  wing-like  processes;  cross  section 


S-shaped Genus  Trepomonas 

2.  Body  pyriform;  one  large  asymmetrical  groove;  4 flagella Genus  Tetramitus 

3.  Body  spherical;  many  flagella  equally  distributed Genus  Multicilia 


Key  to  families  and  marine  genera  of  Euglenida. 

1.  With  deeply-insunk  pharynx;  no  mouth 2 

With  pharynx  and  distinct  mouth Family  Peranemidse 

2.  Body  plastic;  usually  with  chromatopliores  and  eye-spot Family  Euglenida: 

Body  plastic;  no  chromatophores;  no  eye-spot Family  Astasiidse 

Family  Euglenidse: 

Body  Euglena-Uke,  inclosed  in  shell  with  round  opening  for  exit  of  flagellum Genus  Trachelomonas 

Family  Astasiida :: 

Body  with  one  flagellum Genus  *Astasia,  p.  425 

Family  Peranemidse : 

1.  Body  striped;  plastic;  two  diverse  flagella Genus  Heteronema 

2.  Body  striped;  not  plastic;  posterior  flagellum  longer  than  the  other Genus  * Anisonema,  p.  426 

3.  Body  striped;  not  plastic;  with  rod-like  organ  in  pharynx Genus  Entosiphon 


Genus  MASTIGAMCEBA  F.  E.  Schultze  ’75. 

(Kent  '81;  Biitschli  ’86;  Klebs  '92;  Senn  1900.) 

In  general  the  form  is  oval  and  either  regular  in  outline  or  irregular  through  the  presence  of  many 
pseudopodia.  One  flagellum  usually  quite  large  and  distinct.  Differentiation  of  ectoplasm  and 
endoplasm  distinct  or  wanting.  One  to  several  contractile  vacuoles.  The  pseudopodia  are  occasionally 
withdrawn,  and  the  flagellum  is  the  sole  means  of  locomotion.  In  some  cases  the  flagellum  turns  into 
a pseudopodium,  and,  conversely,  the  pseudopodium  at  one  end  may  become  a flagellum  (see  below). 
In  some  rare  cases  the  ectoplasm  secretes  a gelatinous  mantle.  Reproduction  not  observed. 

Fresh  and  salt  water. 

Mastigamceba  simplex,  n.  sp.  Fig.  7. 

A very  small  form,  first  seen  in  the  flagellated  stage,  aroused  my  interest  bv  reason  of  the  fact 
that  its  flagellum  lost  its  regular  outline  and  became  amoeboid,  turning  to  a pseudopodium,  while  at 
the  same  time  other  pseudopodia  were  protruded  from  different  parts  of  the  periphery.  In  this  con- 
dition ectoplasm  and  endoplasm  could  be  made  out  with  the  clearest  definition.  After  the  pseudopodia 
were  well  formed,  the  body  became  flat  and  closely  attached  to  the  glass  slide.  In  a short  time  one 
of  the  pseudopodia  became  longer  than  the  rest;  the  body  became  more  swollen;  the  pseudopodia  were 
gradually  drawn  in,  with  the  exception  of  the  more  elongate  one;  this  became  active  in  movement 
and  finer  in  diameter,  until  ultimately  it  formed  a single  flagellum  at  the  anterior  of  a small  monadi- 
form  flagellate.  The  process  was  repeated  two  or  three  times  under  my  observation,  so  that  I am 
convinced  that  it  was  not  a developmental  form  of  some  rhizopod.  Several  of  them  were  seen  at 
different  times  during  the  summer,  and  they  were  always  of  the  same  size  and  form  in  the  flagellated 
or  amoeboid  condition.  I did  not  make  out  their  reproduction,  and  I shall  not  be  satisfied  that  this  is 
a good  species  until  their  life  history  is  known. 

In  decaying  algae.  Length  10/<. 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


423 


Genus  CODONCECA  James  Clark  ’66. 

(Kent  ’81.) 

Small  forms  inclosed  in  cup  or  “house”  of  ovoid  or  goblet  shape,  colorless  and  probably 
gelatinous  (chitin?)  in  texture,  and  borne  upon  a stalk.  The  monad  does  not  completely  fill  the  test. 
Contractile  vacuole  single,  posterior. 

Codonoeca  gracilis,  n.  sp.  Fig.  8. 

The  cup  is  urn-shaped  with  a well-defined  neck  or  collar  borne  upon  a shoulder-like  end  of  the  body. 
It  is  hyaline,  colorless,  and  carried  upon  a stalk  equal  in  length  to  the  cup  or  shorter  than  this.  The 
animal  does  not  fill  the  cup,  nor  is  it  attached  by  a filament  to  the  latter.  There  is  a single  flagellum. 
The  nucleus  is  minute  and  lateral  in  position;  the  contractile  vacuole  is  in  the  posterior  end  of  the 
body.  Total  length  of  cup  and  stalk  21//;  of  cup  alone  12//.  This  minute  form  looked  so  much  like  a 
choanoflagellate  that  I supposed  it  to  be  one  until  I discovered  an  empty  case  (Fig.  8). 


Genus  MONAS  (Ehr.)  Stein ’78. 

(Kent '81;  Butschli  ’86;  Klebs  ’97;  Sennl900.) 

The  body  is  small,  globular  or  oval  and  either  free-swimming  or  fastened  by  one  of  the  two 
flagella.  The  body  is  sometimes  a little  amoeboid,  with  short  pseudopodial  processes.  In  addition  to 
the  main  flagellum,  there  are  usually  one  or  two  small  flagella  at  the  basis  of  the  larger  one.  The 
nucleus  is  usually  anterior,  and  one  or  two  contractile  vacuoles  are  present. 

Monas  sp.  Fig.  9. 

An  extremely  small  form  (3//)  attached  by  a thread  of  protoplasm — perhaps  a flagellum,  to  algse. 
The  body  is  ovoid  and  the  main  flagellum  is  about  four  times  the  length  of  the  body.  The  contractile 
vacuole  is  posterior.  Only  one  specimen  was  seen  and  upon  this  I shall  not  attempt  to  name  the 
species. 

Genus  MONOSIGA  Kent  '81. 

(Biitschli  ’86;  Franc6  ’97;  Senn  1900.) 

Small  colorless  forms  of  Choanoflagellida,  always  naked  and  solitary.  The  posterior  end  is  attached 
directly  to  the  substratum,  or  there  is  a short  stalk  not  exceeding  the  body  in  length.  Kent  ’81 
distinguished  nine  species,  but  Butschli  questioned  the  accuracy  of  many  of  these,  and  in  this  he  was 


424 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


followed  by  France  ’97,  who  recognized  three  species — Monosiga  ovata,  M.  fusiformis,  and  M.  augustata. 
Fresh  and  salt  water. 

Mcmosiga  ovata  S.  Kent  ’81.  Fig.  10. 

Synonyms:  M.  brevipes  S.  K.;  M.  consociata  S.  K.;  M.  limnobia  Stokes. 

The  individuals  are  nnstalked  or  provided  with  a very  short  stalk  less  than  the  body  in  length. 
The  form  is  spherical  or  ovate,  broadest  at  the  base  and  tapering  to  the  extremity.  The  collar  is 
somewhat  variable  in  size.  In  the  Woods  Hole  forms  it  was  about  the  length  of  the  body.  Oil  parti- 
cles present.  Contractile  vacuole  posterior,  nucleus  anterior. 

Fresh  and  salt  water.  Length  of  body  without  the  collar  5 /<. 

Monosiga  fusiformis  S.  K.  Fig.  11. 

Synonyms:  M.  steinii  S.  K.;  M.  longicollis?  S.  K. 

The  individuals  are  unstalked,  minute,  and  of  a general  flask-shape.  The  body  is  swollen 
centrally  and  tapers  slightly  at  each  end.  There  is  no  stalk,  the  body  being  fixed  by  the  attenuate 
posterior  end.  There  are  two  contractile  vacuoles  and  one  nucleus,  which  is  situated  a little  above 
the  body  center.  Fresh  and  salt  water.  Length  without  collar  9//;  length  of  collar  3/i. 


Genus  C0D0N0SIGA  (Jas.  Clark  ’67). 

(Biitschli  ’78;  Kent  '81;  France  '97;  Senn  1900.) 

This  genus,  as  modified  by  Francd,  is  distinguished  from  the  preceding  by  the  possession  of  an 
unbranched  stalk  much  longer  than  the  body  length.  The  body  is  naked  and  of  various  shapes,  and 
the  individuals  are  solitary  or  colonial  upon  a single  stalk.  Kent  ’81  enumerates  no  less  than  10 
species,  which  were  cut  down  by  Biitschli  to  1.  F railed  admits  4 — C.  botrytis  Jas.  Clark;  C.  grossu- 
laria;  C.  pyriformis,  and  C.  furcata,  all  S.  Kent — but  regards  the  second  and  third  as  merely  form 
varieties  of  the  first. 

Codonosiga  botrytis  (Ehr.  sp. ) Jas.  Clark  ’67.  Fig.  12. 

Franc<§  gives  the  following  synonyms:  Epistylis  botrytis  Ehr.;  E.  digitalis 1 Stein:  Zoothamnium  parasitica?  Stein,  Antho- 
physa  solitaria  Fresenius;  Codonosiga  pulcherrima  Jas.  Clark;  Monosiga  gracilis  S.  Kent;  M.  globulosa  S.  Kent;  Codonosiga 
pyriformis  Kent;  C.  grossularia  Kent;  (Franc6). 

The  individuals  are  small  and  provided  with  a long  unbranched,  or  terminal,  simply  split  stalk. 
The  individuals  are  single  or  colonial.  The  Woods  Hole  form  measured  22 p over  all;  the  body  was 
5/(,  the  collar  3//,  and  the  stalk  14/t.  No  colonies  were  seen,  and  only  a few  individuals  upon  red  algpe. 


Genus  BODO  (Ehr.)  Stein. 

(Stein  '59,  Biitschli  S3,  Klebs  '92;  Senn  1900.) 

The  body  is  naked,  usually  amoeboid  in  its  changes,  and  provided  with  two  flagella,  one  of  which 
is  usually  trailed  along  under  and  behind  the  animal.  The  anterior  end  is  usually  pointed,  with  the 
flagella  arising  from  a minute  depression;  the  posterior  end  is  rounded.  Specific  characters  very 
difficult  to  analyze.  Fresh  and  salt  water. 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


425 


Bodo  globosus  Stein.  Fig.  13. 

The  body  during  movement  is  globular  or  ovoid,  without  any  anterior  process.  The  trailing 
flagellum  is  invariably  much  longer  than  the  vibratory  one.  The  contractile  vacuole  lies  in  the  ante- 
rior half  of  the  body.  Solid  food  particles  are  taken  in  near  base  of  flagella. 

Length  of  body  9 to  12//;  diameter  8 to  11  //.  Common. 

Bodo  eaudatus  (Duj.)  Stein.  Fig.  14. 

Synonyms:  Amphimonas  eaudatus  Duj.;  Diplomastix  caudata  Kent. 

The  body  is  variable  in  shape,  but  usually  flattened  and  pointed  posteriorly.  An  anterior  process 
is  almost  always  present,  and  below  this  the  flagella  are  inserted  in  a minute  depression.  The  con- 
tractile vacuole  is  close  to  the  base  of  the  flagella.  The  flagella  are  about  the  same  size,  the  anterior 
one  usually  somewhat  longer.  Common.  Length  12  to  18//. 

This  species  was  seen  by  Peck  ’95  and  described  as  a small  flagellate. 


Fig.  13. — Bodo  globosus. 


Genus  OXYRRHIS  Duj. 

(Kent ’81;  Biltschli '86;  Klebs '92;  Sennl900.) 

Medium-sized  forms,  somewhat  oval  in  shape,  with  a rounded  posterior  end.  The  anterior  end 
is  continued  dorsally  in  a somewhat  attenuate  pointed  process.  At  the  base  of  this  process  is  a large 
cavity  or  funnel,  on  the  dorsal  wall  of  which,  or  on  a projection  from  this  wall,  are  two  equal-size 
flagella.  When  at  rest,  the  flagella  are  directed  backwards.  The  nucleus  is  central.  In  moving,  the 
posterior  end  is  invariably  in  advance.  This  genus  is  exceptional  among  Mastigophora  in  that  division 
is  transverse  instead  of  longitudinal. 

Oxyrrhis  marina  Duj.  Fig.  15. 

With  the  characters  of  the  genus.  Contractile  vacuole  not  seen.  Length  28  to  40//. 

Genus  ASTASIA  Ehr. 

Flagellates  with  one  flagellum,  a spindle-form  body  and  a high  degree  of  plasticity,  the  contour 
constantly  changing.  A distinct,  usually  striped  cuticle  is  invariably  present.  “Eve-spots”  are 
absent.  Fresh  and  salt  water. 


426 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Astasia  contorta  Duj.  Fig.  16. 

Astasia  inflata  Duj.  ’41. 

The  body  is  colorless,  transparent,  and  flexible.  It  is  largest  in  the  center,  thence  tapering  at  the 
two  extremities.  The  surface  of  the  cuticle  is  obliquely  striated,  giving  to  the  animal  a distinctly 
twisted  appearance.  The  contractile  vacuole  is  in  the  anterior  neck-like  portion  of  the  body.  The 
flagellum  is  inserted  in  a distinct  oesophageal  tube,  into  which  the  contractile  vacuole  empties.  This 
tube  is  continued  into  a deeper  pharyngeal  apparatus  of  unknown  function. 

Common  in  decaying  algse.  Length  60//;  greatest  diameter  30//. 


Genus  ANISONEMA  Biitschli. 

Flagellates  with  two  flagella,  of  which  one  is  directed  forwards  and  is  concerned  with  the  loco- 
motion of  the  animal,  while  the  other  is  directed  backwards  and  drags  after  the  animal  when  in  motion. 
Body  slightly  compressed  dorso-ventrally  (fig.  17,  section).  An  oral  furrow  is  present  on  the  ventral 
side  and  the  two  flagella  originate  in  it  (fig.  17,  at  left).  The  vacuole  is  on  the  left  side.  Food 
vacuoles  are  present  in  the  posterior  part.  The  nucleus  is  central.  Movement  creeping. 

Fresh  and  salt  water. 


Anisonema  vitrea  (Duj.).  Fig.  17. 

Synonyms:  Tropidoscyphus  odoeostatus  Stein  ’83:  Sphenomonas  Kent  ’81:  Plcentia  vitrea  Senn  1900. 

With  the  characteristics  of  the  genus.  It  differs  from  fresh-water  forms  in  having  eight  furrowed 
surfaces  running  somewhat  spirally  from  the  posterior  to  the  oral  end.  Length  50//;  width  23//. 
This  attractive  flagellate  was  quite  common  in  decaying  algse  at  Woods  Hole;  its  shaking  movement, 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


427 


its  peculiar  furrowed  surfaces,  and,  above  all,  its  perfectly  transparent,  vitreous  appearance,  were  well 
described  by  Dujardin.  Stein’s  Tropidoscyphus  octocostatus  is  a fresh-water  form  which  may  possibly 
be  a distinct  species,  especially  as  it  is  described  with  both  flagella  directed  forwards. 

Genus  DISTEPHANIJS  Stohr. 

An  aberrant  flagellate  bearing  a single  flagellum  and  a silicious  skeleton  resembling  those  of  the 
Radiolaria.  The  skeleton  consists  of  two  rings  of  different  diameter  parallel  with  one  another  and 
connected  by  silicious  bars.  From  the  wider  ring  half  a dozen  liars  radiate  outwards  and  a similar 
number  of  short  thorn-like  bars  point  inwards  obliquely.  The  color  is  yellow,  and  except  for  the 
flagellum  the  form  might  easily  be  mistaken  for  a Radiolarian,  as  has  been  the  case  repeatedly. 

Distephanus  speculum  Stohr. 

Dictyocha  speculum  Stohr;  Dictyocha  Auc. 

With  the  characters  of  the  genus. 

A single  specimen  only  of  this  very  interesting  form  was  seen  at  Woods  Hole.  It  occurred  in  a 
collection  of  tow  made  near  the  end  of  the  wharf  during  the  evening. 


Key  to  families  of  Dinqflagellidia. 


1.  No  cross-furrow;  two  free  flagella  .4 Family  Prorocentridx 

2.  One  or  more  cross-furrows 3 

3.  Cross-furrow  nearly  central  (cf.  Oxytnxum) Family  Peridinidse 

Cross-furrow  close  to  anterior  end  Family  Dinophysidse 

Several  cross-furrows  and  flagella Family  Polydmidse 


(One  genus,  Polykrikos.) 

Key  to  marine  genera  of  Prorocentridse. 

Diagnostic  characters:  The  transverse  furrow  is  absent  and  the  two  flagella  arise  from  the  anterior  end  of  the  body.  The 
shell  may  be  bivalved. 

1.  No  tooth-like  process  dorsal  to  the  flagellum Genus  * Exuvisella,  p.  428 

2.  With  tooth-like  process  dorsal  to  the  flagellum Genus  Prorocentrum 


Key  to  marine  genera  of  Peridinidse. 


Diagnostic  characters:  The  cross-furrow  is  nearly  central  (see,  however,  Oxytoxu.m)\  the  body  may  or  may  not  have  a 
shell;  the  shell  may  or  may  not  be  composed  of  distinct  plates;  the  plates  are  distinguished  as  equatorial  ( i . e.,  bordering 
the  cross-furrow),  apical,  and  antapieal,  while  still  another,  the  “rhombic  plate,”  may  be  present,  extending  from  the 
cross-furrow  to  the  apex. 


1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 


9. 

10. 

11. 


Without  distinct  shell 

With  a distinct  shell 

Shell  not  composed  of  definite  plates 

Shell  composed  of  definite  plates 

Cross-furrow  replaced  by  thin-skinned  band 

Cross- furrow  well  defined;  reticulate  markings  raised  on  shell-surface 

Cross-furrow  well  defined;  no  markings 

Two  parts  of  shell  equal  or  nearly  equal 

Two  parts  of  shell  very  unequal 

With  transverse  flagellum  in  a distinct  furrow 

Transverse  flagellum  not  in  a furrow 

With  horns,  or  with  wing-like  processes 

Without  processes  of  any  kind 

Processes  small,  wing-like,  around  flagellum-fissure 

Processes  horn-like 

Anterior  part  with  7 equatorial  and  1 rhombic  plates 

Anterior  part  with  5 equatorial  and  no  rhombic  plates 

Anterior  part  with  3 equatorial  and  no  rhombic  plates 

Anterior  part  with  14  equatorial  and  1 rhombic  plates 

Anterior  part  with  7 equatorial  plates 

Anterior  part  with  4 equatorial  plates 

Apical  extremity  drawn  out  into  a tube 

Apical  extremity  not  drawn  out  into  a tube 

Cross-furrow  deep,  with  great  ledge-like  walls 

Cross-furroW  wide,  no  ledge-like  walls 


Genus  * Gymnodinium,  p.  429 


3 

4 

Genus  Ptychodiscus 

Genus  Protoceratium 

Genus  * Glenodinium,  p.  429 

5 

11 

. 6 

- 10 

7 

9 

Genus  Diplopsalis 

8 

. .Genus  * Peridinium,  p.  430 

Genus  Gonyaulax 

Genus  * Ceratium,  p.  431 

Genus  Pyrophacus 

Genus  Goniodoma 

Genus  Amphidoma 

, Genus  Podolampas 

Genus  Blepharocysta 

Genus  Ceratocorys 

Genus  Oxytoxum 


428 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Key  to  marine  genera  of  Dinophysidse. 


Diagnostic  characters:  The  cross-furrow  is  above  the  center  of  the  body,  and  its  edges,  as  well  as  the  left  edge  of  the 
longitudinal  furrow,  are  usually  produced  into  characteristic  ledges;  those  of  the  cross-furrow  usually  form  great  funnel- 
like anterior  processes,  while  those  of  the  longitudinal  furrow  usually  form  great,  lateral,  wing-like  processes  ornamented 
by  ribs  and  other  markings. 


Without  shell;  longitudinal  furrow  may  open  and  close Genus  *Amphidinium,  p.  432 

With  shell;  longitudinal  furrow  unchangeable 3 

With  distinct  apical  funnel 4 

No  apical  funnel Genus  Phalacroma 

With  great  wing-like  ledge 5 

Ledges  very  small;  body  long,  needle-like Genus  Amphisolenia 

Ledge  of  longitudinal  furrow  extends  to  posterior  end 6 

Ledge  of  longitudinal  furrow  does  not  extend  to  posterior  end  Genus  Dinophysis 

(Recorded  by  Peck  (’93-’95).  as  very  abundant  at  Wood's  Hole  and  in  Buzzards  Bay.) 

Ledge  is  continued  dorsally  to  the  cross-furrow Genus  Ornithocercus 

Ledge  is  not  continued  dorsally 7 

With  deep  dorsal  cavity;  secondary  funnel  not  notched Genus  Citharistes 

No  dorsal  cavity;  secondary  funnel  deeply  notched Genus  Histioneis 


Genus  EXUVI.2ELLA  Cienkowsky  ’82. 

(Klebs  ’81;  Pouchet ’83, ’85.) 

The  form  varies  from  globular  to  ovoid,  with  occasionally  a sharp  posterior  end.  Shells  are  usually 
somewhat  compressed,  and  consist  of  two  valves,  which  frequently  slide  one  over  the  other  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  show  the  structure  with  great  clearness.  The  right  shell  may  have  a distinct  indentation 
in  the  anterior  edge.  There  are  two  lateral,  discoid,  brown  chromatophores,  each  of  which  possesses  a 
central  amylum  granule.  The  nucleus  is  posterior.  Salt  water. 

Exuvisella  lima  Ehr.  Fig.  18. 

Synonyms  Pyxidicula  Ehr. ; Cryptomonas  Ehr.;  Prorocentrum  lima  Kent;  Amphidinium  Pouchet. 

The  shell  is  ovate,  rounded  and  swollen  posteriorly.  The  anterior  border  of  both  shells  is  slightly 
indented.  The  shell  is  quite  thick.  The  animal  moves  through  the  water  very  slowly.  Dark  brown 
in  color.  Length  48/; ; width  44/.; . 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE 


429 


Exuvieella  marina  Cienkowsky.  Fig.  19. 

A smaller  form  than  the  preceding,  more  elliptical  in  outline,  with  a thinner  shell  and  with  large 
granules  throughout  the  endoplasm.  The  nucleus  is  spherical  and  subcentral  in  position  and  possesses 
a distinct  central  granule.  This  may  be  a small  variety  of  E.  lima. 


Genus  GYMNODINIUM  Stein  ’78. 

(Bergh  ’81;  Kent  ’81;  Pouchet  ’83,  '85;  Entz  ’84;  Schtitt  ’95.) 

The  general  structure  of  thes& forms  is  similar  to  that 
of  Glenodinium;  the  most  striking  and  positive  difference 
is  the  absence  of  a shell.  The  animals  are,  as  a rule> 
spherical,  yet  they  may  be  pointed  at  the  two  ends  or  at 
one  of  them.  They  are  also  frequently  flattened  dorso- 
ventrally.  The  transverse  furrow  may  be  either  circular 
and  straight  around  the  body  or  may  describe  a spiral 
course,  passing  even  twice  around  the  body.  The  flagella 
arise  near  cross-furrow  or,  in  some  cases,  in  longitudinal 
furrow.  Chromatophores  may  or  may  not  be  present 
and  food-taking  is  holozoic,  in  many  cases  at  least.  In 
some  cases  ectoplasm  and  endoplasm  can  be  distin- 
guished. Fresh  and  salt  water. 

Gymnodinium  gracile  Bergh  ’82,  var.  sphaerica,  n. 

The  body  is  divided  by  the  transverse  furrow  into  a 
shorter  anterior  and  a longer  posterior  part.  The  longi- 
tudinal furrow  is  broader  at  the  posterior  extremity  than 
at  the  cross-furrow.  The  structural  feature  upon  which  this  new  variety  is  made  is  the  unvarying 
plumpness  of  the  body,  making  it  almost  spherical,  except  for  a slight  flattening  dorso-ventrally.  The 
nucleus  is  large  and  ellipsoidal,  with  characteristic  longitudinal  markings  of  chromatin.  The  endo- 
plasm is  evenly  granular,  with  a number  of  large  ingested  food  bodies.  The  color  is  brown,  not  rose-red 
as  in  Bergh’s  species,  nor  is  the  Woods  Hole  form  as  large  as  the  latter. 

Length  of  body  68// ; width  55//.  Common. 


Fig.  20. — Gymnodinium  gracile,  var.  sphserica. 


Genus  GLENODINIUM  (Ehr.),  Stein  ’83. 

(Bergli ’82;  Biitschli  ’86;  Pouchet '85;  Daday’86.) 

Small  globular  forms  with  two  distinct  furrows,  one  transverse  around  the  body,  the  other  longi- 
tudinal upon  the  face  only.  The  shell  is  soft  and  structureless  with  a distinct  aperture  near  the  meeting- 
point  of  the  two  furrows.  The  endoplasm  usually,  but  not  always,  contains  a bright  red  “eye-spot.” 
Fresh  and  salt  water. 


430 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Glenodinium  compressa,  n.  sp.  Fig.  21,  a,  b,  c. 

This  species  resembles  G.  acuminata  of  Ehrenberg  except  that  it  is  strongly  compressed  laterally. 
The  longitudinal  furrow  extends  nearly  to  the  extremity  of  the  animal.  It  begins  as  a narrow  slit  and 
widens  as  it  progresses  upon  the  left  side;  it  also  becomes 
much  deeper  on  this  side  and  at  the  bottom  of  the  depres- 
sion the  longitudinal  flagellum  is  inserted.  The  transverse 
furrow  runs  evenly  around  the  body  near  the  upper  pole, 
giving  to  the  shell  almost  the  aspect  of  an  Amphidinium. 

Brown  chromatophores  may  or  may  not  be  arranged  radi- 
ally about  a central  amylum  granule.  One  striking  char- 
acteristic is  the  depth  of  the  two  furrows.  The  nucleus 
is  elongate  and  somewhat  curved;  it  lies  against  the 
posterior  wall  of  the  rather  thick  shell.  Not  uncommon. 

Length  40, w;  breadth  32//;  width  18//. 

The  posterior  end  of  the  animal  is  often  somewhat 
pointed  and  this  point  frequently  becomes  attached,  so 
that  the  animal  whirls  around  upon  it  as  upon  a pivot. 

Glenodinium  cinctum  Ehr.  Fig.  22. 

The  body  is  globular,  smooth,  and  homogeneous. 

Brown  chromatophores  arranged  radially,  each  in  the  form 
of  a cone,  the  base  of  which  rests  against  the  shell  while 
the  points  turn  inward.  A bright-red  eye-spot  may  or  may 
not  be  present;  when  present  it  is  placed  near  the  junction 
of  the  two  furrows.  The  longitudinal  furrow  is  small. 

Fresh  water  and  salt. 

Length  and  diameter  the  same,  21//. 

This  species  was  observed  by  Peck  ’93. 


Fig.  21.— Ventral  anti  dorsal  aspects  of  Pcridinium  divergcns. 

Genus  PERIDINIUM  Ehr.  ’32,  Stein  ’83. 

(Claparede  & Lachmann  ’58;  Bergh  '81:  Pouchet  '83;  '85;  Gourret  ’88;  Biitschli  ’86.) 

The  form  is  globular,  ovoid  or  elongate,  the  apex  frequently  drawn  out  into  a long  tube.  The 
transverse  and  longitudinal  furrows  are  quite  distinct,  the  former  having  often  a spiral  course  about 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


481 

the  body.  The  two  halves  of  the  body  are  similar,  the  posterior  being  somewhat  shorter;  the  anterior 
half  has  seven  equatorial  plates,  an  oral  plate,  two  lateral  apical  plates,  and  one  or  two  dorsal  plates. 
The  two  antapical  plates  frequently  have  atooth-like  process.  The  bodies  are  colorless,  green  or  brown. 
Fresh  and  salt  water. 

Peridinium  digitale  Pouchet.  Fig.  23. 

Synonyms:  Protoperidinium  digitate  Pouchet;  Protoperidinium  Bergh  p.p.:  P.  divergens  Peck. 

The  shell  is  covered  with  pits  of  large  size.  The  posterior  part  is  hemispherical  and  surmounted 
by  a single  horn  or  spine.  The  transverse  furrow  is  very  oblique,  and  its  two  extremities  are  united 
by  a sigmoid  longitudinal  furrow.  The  anterior  half  bears  two  spines  or  horns  of  different  size,  and 
variable.  The  nucleus  is  spherical  or  ellipsoidal  and  placed  in  the  posterior  half  of  the  shell. 

Length  68a;  diameter  54a . Common. 

Although  the  description  of  Pouchet’ s P.  digitale  differs  in  some  respects  from  a careful  description 
of  the  Woods  Hole  form,  I think  the  species  are  the  same.  The  chief  difference  is  in  the  single  horn 
of  the  posterior  half;  in  Pouchet’s  form  this  is  furrowed  by  a narrow  groove  which  runs  to  the 
S-sliaped  longitudinal  furrow.  In  the  Woods  Hole  form  I was  unable  to  make  out  such  a furrow. 
The  flagella,  also,  were  not  seen.  This  same  form  was  pictured  by  Peck  ’95  as  P.  divergens. 

Peridinium  divergens  Ehr.  Fig.  24. 

Synonym:  Ceratium  divergens  Kent. 

The  shell  is  spheroidal,  widest  centrally,  attenuate  and  pointed  posteriorly;  the  anterior  portion 
is  armed  with  two  short,  pointed  horns,  each  of  them  having  a toothed  process  at  the  basal  portion  of 
the  inner  margin.  They  are  frequently  colorless  and  beautifully  transparent,  the  body  being  free 
from  large  opaque  granules;  again  they  are  colored  brown  or  yellow.  The  nucleus  is  large  and 
elongate  and  finely  granular.  75 a long  and  68a  in  diameter.  Common. 


Genus  CERATIUM  (Schrank). 

(Stein  ’78;  Perty ’52;  Clap.  & Lach.  ’58;  Bergh  ’82;  Pouchet  ’83;  Gourret  & Roeser  ’88;  Btitschli  '85; 

Kent  ’81;  Senn  1900;  Schutt’98.) 

The  general  shape  is  a flattened  sphere  with  three  long  processes  or  horns.  The  cross-furrow  is 
either  spiral  or  circular;  the  longitudinal  furrow  is  usually  wide  and  occupies  the  greater  part  of  the 


432 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


anterior  half  of  the  shell.  The  shell  is  thick,  reticulate  or  striped,  and  sometimes  provided  with  short 
spines;  often  distinctly  porous.  The  anterior  half  is  composed  of  3 equatorial  and  3 apical  plates,  the 
latter  being  continued  into  the  horn-like  process.  The  posterior  half  is  composed  of  3 equatorial  and 
one  apical  plate  continued  into  the  posterior  horn.  The  right  posterior  plate  is  continued  into  a 
similar  horn  which  may  remain  rudimentary  or  be  continued  into  a considerable  process.  Similarly 
the  left  posterior  horn  is  usually  developed,  but  remains  small.  There  may  be  from  2 to  3,  4,  and  5 
horns.  Chromatophores  usually  present,  green  to  yellow  brown. 

Fresh  and  salt  water. 

Ceratium  tripos  Ehr.  Fig.  25. 

The  body  is  somewhat  triangular  and  bears  three  horns,  two  of  which  are  shorter  than  the  other 
one  and  slightly  curved  upward. 

Length,  including  the  horns,  290/*. 


Fig.  26. — Ceratium  fusus. 

Ceratium  fusus  Ehr.  Fig.  26. 

Synonym:  Peridinium  fusus  Ehr. 

The  animal  is  very  elongate,  due  to  the  presence  of  two  long  horns  at  the  extremities  of  the  body. 
Color,  yellow  with  chromatophores.  Length  285/*;  width  23/*. 

Both  of  these  species  are  common  in  the  tow 
and  in  the  alga^  at  the  edge  of  the  wharf.  Both 
of  them  are  mentioned  by  Peck  in  '93  and  ’95. 

Genus  AMPHIDINITJM  Clap.  & Lach. 

The  body  is  ovoid  to  globular  and  usually 
much  flattened  dorso-ventrally.  The  anterior 
portion  is  very  much  reduced  and  is  somewhat 
head-like  or  cap-like.  The  longitudinal  furrow 
extends  through  the  entire  posterior  body 
length  and  is  apparently  capable  of  widening 
and  narrowing.  It  is  probably  naked  (see  here 
Klebs,  Pouchet,  Biitschli) , although  Stein  main- 
tained that  there  is  a delicate  cuticle-like  shell. 

Chromatophores  of  brown  or  green  colors  pres- 
ent and  usually  grouped  radially  about  a central 
amylum  granule.  The  nucleus  is  posterior. 

Fresh  and  salt  water. 

Amphidinium  operculatum  Clap.  & Lach. 

The  body  is  oval  and  flattened.  The  trans- 
verse furrow  is  at  the  extremity  (posterior)  of 
the  body  and  the  small  portion,  which  is  thus 
apparently  cut  off,  is  the  cap-like  or  operculum- 
like structure  which  gives  the  name  to  the  species.  Klebs  maintains  that  the  two  furrows  are  not 
connected,  but  in  this  he  is  certainly  mistaken,  provided  we  have  the  same  species  under  consideration. 
Very  common  about  Woods  Hole. 

Length  from  40  to  50//;  width  30//;  thickness  15//. 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


433 


Key  to  Infusoria. 


1.  With  cilia Subclass  Oiliala.  3 

2.  Without  cilia  (in  adult  state)  tentacles Subclass  Suctoria 

3.  a.  Without  a specialized  fringe  of  large  cilia  (ad.  zone) -. Order  Holotrichida 

b.  With  general  covering  of  cilia  + adoral  zone Order  Ileterotrichida 

c.  With  cilia  on  ventral  side  + adoral  zone Order  Hypotrichida 

d.  With  cilia  in  region  of  adoral  zone,  and  about  mouth  only . Order  Pcritrichida 


Key  to  families  of  the  Holotrichida, 


A.  Mouth  closed  except  during  food  ingestion;  no  undulating  membrane 1 

Mouth  always  open;  with  undulating  membrane  . , 2 

1.  Gymnostomina. 

a. .  Mouth  terminal  or  subterminal.  Food  is  swallowed  and  not  introduced  by  currents Family  Enchelinidx 

b.  Mouth  terminal  or  subterminal;  body  frequently  drawn  out  into  long  process;  mouth  may  have 

specialized  framework Family  Trachelinidse 

c.  Mouth  central  or  posterior;  pharynx  with  supporting  framework Family  Chlamydodontidx 

2.  Trichostomina. 

a.  Mouth  anterior  or  central;  pharynx  short  or  absent;  peristomial  depression  faint  or  absent. . . Family  Chiliferidx 

b.  Mouth  central;  pharynx  long,  tubular;  cilia  in  two  broad  zones Family  Urocenlndx 

c.  Mouth  posterior;  form  asymmetrical;  cilia  dispersed  or  limited  to  oral  region Family  Microtlioracidx 

d.  Mouth  anterior  or  central.  Peristomial  depression  clearly  marked.  (One  genus,  Pararruxcium.) Paramacidx 

e.  Mouth  at  end  of  long  peristome  running  along  ventral  side;  body  dorso-ventrally  or  laterally  compressed; 

left  edge  of  peristome  with  great,  sail-like  undulating  membrane Family  Plcuronemidx 

f.  Mouth  and  pharynx  distinct,  posterior;  cilia  uniform.  Parasites  in  ruminants Family  Isotrichidx 

g.  Mouth  absent;  body  vermiform,  cilia  uniform.  Usually  parasites , Family  Opalinidx 


Key  to  marine  genera  of  Enchelinidx. 


Diagnostic  characters:  Form  ellipsoid  or  ovoid;  the  mouth  is  invariably  terminal  and  is  usually  round — more  rarely 
slit-formed;  it  is  closed  except  when  food  is  taken.  An  oesophagus  when  present  is  a short,  invariably  non-ciliated  tube 
which  is  usually  surrounded  by  a more  or  less  clearly  defined  buccal  armature.  The  anus  is  usually  terminal.  Large 
food  particles  are  swallowed,  never  introduced  by  currents. 


1.  Body  naked 

2.  Body  inclosed  in  a shell  or  coat 

3.  a.  Cilia  uniform  about  the  entire  body,  body  symmetrical 

b.  Cilia  in  the  mouth  region  longer  than  the  others;  body  symmetrical 

c.  Bristles,  or  tentacles,  in  addition  to  cilia 

4.  Mouth  terminal;  body  ellipsoidal  to  ovoid 

5.  a.  Mouth  terminal;  body  elongate,  flexible,  and  elastic 

b.  Mouth  terminal;  “neck”  highly  elastic;  entire  body  flexible;  conical  “head” 

c.  Mouth  terminal;  “neck”  highly  elastic;  entire  body  flexible;  “head”  square. 

d.  Mouth  terminal;  “ neck  n highly  elastic;  no  separate  mouth-bearing  portion  . . 

6.  a.  Body  asymmetrical;  bristles  in  addition  to  cilia 

b.  Body  symmetrical;  4 small  tentacles  from  mouth;  cilia  and  cirri  in  girdles 

7.  Shell  composed  of  small  sculptured  pieces;  cilia  long,  uniform 


3 

7 

4 

5 

6 

Genus  Holophrya 

Genus  Chxuia 

..Genus  * Lacrymaria,  p.  433 
.Genus  * Trachelocerca,  p.  435 

Genus  Lagynus 

Genus  Stephanopogon 

. .Genus  * Mesodinium,  p.  435 
Genus  * Tiarina,  p.  436 


Genus  LACRYMARIA  Ehr.  ’30. 


(Ehrenberg,  C.  G.,  1838;  Perty  ’52;  Clapar&deA  Lachmann  ’58;  Stein  59-83;  Quennerstedt  '65,  ’67;  Fromentel  '74; 

Kent  ’81;  Gruber  ’84;  Gourret  & Roeser  ’86;  Biitschli  ’88;  Schewiakoff  ’89.) 

Body  short  to  very  long  flask-shape;  for  the  most  part  contractile,  especially  in  the  neck  region. 
The  posterior  end  is  rounded  or  pointed.  The  main  character  is  the  mouth-bearing  apex,  which  “ sets 
like  a cork  in  the  neck  of  the  flask.”  One  or  more  circles  of  long  cilia  at  the  base  of  the  mouth 
portion  or  upon  it.  The  body  is  spirally  striped.  Contractile  vacuole  terminal,  with  sometimes  one 
or  two  further  forward.  Macronucleus  central,  globular  to  elongate,  sometimes  double.  Food  mainly 
bacteria.  Fresh  and  salt  water. 

Lacrymaria  lagenula  Clap.  & Lach.  Fig.  28,  a,  b. 

Synonym:  A.  tenvicula  Fromentel  ’74. 

Body  more  or  less  flask-shape,  two  or  three  times  as  long  as  broad,  with  conical  apex,  which  is 
slightly  elastic  and  protrusible;  surface  obliquely  striate,  with  well-defined  lines,  14  to  16  in  number; 
cilia  uniform  on  the  body,  with  a crown  of  longer  ones  at  the  base  of  the  conical  proboscis.  The 

F.  C.  B.  1901—28 


434 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


body  cilia  are  not  thickly  placed  except  around  the  proboscis.  The  endoplasm  is  thickly  packed  with 
large  granules  (food  particles)  in  the  anterior  half  and  with  finely  granular  particles  in  the  posterior 
half.  The  elongate  macronucleus  lies  a little  above  the  center  among  the  larger  granules;  the  con- 
tractile vacuole  is  double,  one  on  each  side  of  the  median  line  and  at  the  posterior  end  of  the  body 
among  the  finer  granules.  The  anus  is  posterior.  Length  90//  to  160/<;  greatest  width  assumed  65#. 
When  fully  expanded  the  posterior  end  assumes  a curious  polyhedral  form.  (Fig.  28  b.) 

This  form  differs  slightly  from  others  of  the  same  species  as  described  by  different  observers,  the 
most  striking  difference  being  the  presence  of  two  contractile  vacuoles  in  place  of  the  usual  one. 
These  are  very  slow  to  fill  and  grow  to  a large  size  before  diastole.  The  membrane  is  very  tough 
and  retains  its  form  easily  under  pressure  of  the  cover  glass.  Another  characteristic  feature  is  the 
flattening  of  the  surfaces  between  the  stride.  Decaying  algre. 


a 

Fig.  28. — Lacrymaria  lagenula. 


Lacrymaria  coronata  Cl.  & Lach.  ’58.  Fig.  29. _ 

Synonyms:  L.  lagenula  Cohn  ’66;  Mobius  ’88;  L.  cohnii?  Kent  ’81;  L.  versalilis  Quen.  ’67. 

Form  flask-like  and  similar  to  L.  lagenula,  contractile  but  tough.  The  contractile  vacuole  is  ter- 
minal, the  proboscis  is  short,  slightly  raised  and  separated  from  the  body  by  a deep  cleft;  the  buccal 
cilia  are  inserted  part  way  up  on  the  proboscis.  Form  changeable,  from  short,  sac-like  to  elongate 
and  vermiform.  Length  85/e 

This  species  is  not  very  different  from  L.  lagenula,  but  I noted  that  in  addition  to  the  elongate 
nucleus,  the  body  stripe  are  much  more  apparent  here  and  seem  to  sink  into  the  cuticle,  giving  the 
periphery,  especially  at  the  collar  region,  a curious  crenulated  effect.  The  endoplasm  is  very  densely 
granular  and  colored  a blue-green,  probably  from  food  particles.  The  number  of  strige  is  much  larger 
than  in  the  preceding  species.  The  membrane  is  very  tough  and  retains  the  shape  of  the  body,  even 
with  the  full  pressure  of  the  cover  glass.  - Micronucleus  and  trichocysts  were  not  observed. 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


435 


Genus  TRACHELOCERCA  (Ehr.  ’83)  Cohn  ’66. 

(Quennerstedt  ’67;  Gruber ’87;  Entz  ’84;  Kent ’81;  Gourret  & Roeser  ’88;  Biitschli ’88;  Schewiakoff ’89;  Shevyakov  ’96.) 

Tlie  only  well-known  representative  is  very  elongate,  large  (up  to  3 mm.  Van  Beneden) , and  very 
contractile.  The  main  feature  of  importance  in  distinguishing  it  is  the  4- part  structure  of  the  mouth 
region,  which,  however,  may  not  be  obvious.  Pharynx  faint  and  smooth.  Contractile  vacuole 
terminal.  Macronucleus  in  one  central  body  or  in  numerous  pieces  scattered  throughout  the  cell. 
Salt  water. 

Tracheloeerca  phoenicopterus  Cohn  ’66.  Fig.  30. 

Synonyms:  T.  sagitta  Ehr.  ’40,  Stein ’59;  T.  tenuicottis  Quennerstedt  ’67,  Kent  ’81;  T.  minor  Gruber  ’87,  Shevyakov  ’96. 

The  body  is  extremely  elongate  and  ribbon-like,  and  this,  combined  with  its  wonderful  power  of 
extension  and  retraction,  makes  it  one  of  the  most  curious  and  interesting  of  microscopic  forms.  The 
anterior  end  is  square  or  cylindrical;  the  type  species  has  a four-sided  mouth,  but  many  specimens 
may  be  found  which  have  a plain  cylindrical  mouth  region.  One  reason  for  this  may  be  the  fact 
that  the  extremity  gets  broken  off.  In  one  instance  I noticed  a very  large  form  with  the  anterior  end 
under  some  debris,  which  evidently  held  it  tight,  for  the  body  of  the  ciliate  was  thrashing  back  and 
forth  and  twisting  itself  into  knots,  etc.,  like  a nematode  worm.  Finally,  the  anterior  end  broke  off 
with  about  one-tenth  of  the  body;  the  remainder,  in  an  hour,  had  regenerated  a new  anterior  end 
with  long  cilia,  but  with  no  indication  of  four  sides.  The  small  anterior  piece  was  also  very  lively, 


moving  about  and  eating  like  the  normal  animal;  its  history,  however,  was  not  followed.  This  species 
appears  to  be  variable  in  other  ways  as  well;  thus,  in  some  cases  the  posterior  end  is  rounded  (cf. 
Entz  ’84);  in  others  it  is  pointed  (cf.  Kent  ’81,  Cohn  ’66,  et  al.) . 

Again,  the  macronucleus  may  be  a single  round  body  (Entz  ’84,  Biitschli  ’88)  or  in  two  parts 
(Kent  ’81),  or  in  many  parts  scattered  about  the  body  (Gruber).  In  the  Woods  Hole  forms  the  tail 
is  distinctly  pointed  and  turned  back  sharply,  forming  an  angle  at  the  extremity.  The  cilia  on  this 
angular  part  are  distinctly  longer  than  the  rest.  The  function  of  this  posterior  part  is  apparently  to 
anchor  the  animal  while  it  darts  here  and  there  upon  the  tail  as  a pivot,  contracting  and  expanding 
the  while.  The  body  is  finely  striated  with  longitudinal  markings;  when  contracted  there  are  no 
transverse  markings  nor  annulations.  The  nucleus  is  in  the  form  of  many  fragments  scattered 
throughout.  Length  of  large  specimen  1.7  mm. 

Genus  MESODINIUM  Stein  ’62. 

(Maupas  ’82,  ’84;  Entz  ’84;  Shevyakov  ’96.) 

The  main  part  of  the  body  is  globular  or  conical,  with  a short,  platform-like  oral  region,  and  a 
deep  annular  groove  about  the  middle  of  the  body.  The  (esophagus  is  rather  long,  and  smooth  or 
longitudinally  striped.  One  or  more  rings  of  cirri  rise  in  the  groove.  If  more  than  one  ring  of  cirri 
are  present,  the  anterior  set  usually  point  forward  and  lie  close  to  the  anterior  part  of  the  body.  The 
posterior  set,  on  the  other  hand,  cling  close  to  the  posterior  region  of  the  body  and  give  to  it  a peculiar 
encapsuled  appearance.  The  most  characteristic  feature  is  the  presence  of  four  short  tentacle-like 
processes  which  can  be  protracted  and  retracted  from  the  oral  region.  (Mereschowsky  says  that 
the  entire  anterior  half  is  more  or  less  contractile. ) The  macronucleus  is  horseshoe-shaped  or  ovoid 
and  is  situated  in  the  posterior  half  of  the  body.  The  contractile  vacuole  is  also  posterior. 


436 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Movement  consists  in  rapid  swimming,  with  rotation  on  its  axis,  or  in  creeping  by  means  of  its 
anterior  cirri,  or  in  sudden  jumping,  by  which  it  apparently  clears  a distance  of  20  times  its  diameter 
in  one  bound.  Mouth  parts  may  also  be  used  for  attachment  to  foreign  bodies.  The  moving  periods 
alternate  with  quiescent  periods,  during  which  the  organisms  with  their  outstretched  and  radiating 
cirri  resemble  the  lieliozoon  Aclinophrys. 

Mesodinium  cinctum,  n.  sp.  Fig.  31. 

Body  spherical  to  pyriform,  constricted  near  the  middle,  the  constriction  dividing  the  body  into 
dissimilar  parts.  The  anterior  part  is  broadly  pyriform,  somewhat  plastic  and  hyaline,  with  an  oral 
extremity  which  is  sometimes  hollow,  sometimes  evaginated  and  convex.  Upon  this  flexible  anterior 
part  there  are  four  short  but  distensible  tentacles.  The  posterior  part  is  granular  and  usually  filled 
with  food  particles;  it  is  well  rounded  and  holds  the  nucleus  and  contractile  vacuole.  The  entire 
body  is  surrounded  by  a fine  cuticle.  The  nucleus  is  elongate  and  extends  through  the  greater  part  of 
the  posterior  half.  The  contractile  vacuole  lies  on  one  side,  near  the  girdle.  The  mqutli  is  on  the 
anterior  pole  in  the  tentacle  region.  The  motile  organs  are  cirri  and  cilia,  all  inserted  in  the  constriction. 
There  are  two  sets  of  cirri  and  one  of  cilia;  the  latter  stand  out  radially  from  the  girdle  and  are  usually 
in  motion.  The  cirri  of  one  set,  the  anterior,  extend  forward  about  twice  the  length  of  the  anterior 
half;  those  of  the  posterior  set  closely  engirdle  the  lower  half,  reaching  not  quite  to  the  posterior 
extremity.  These  are  somewhat  hyaline  and  are  closely  approximated,  giving  the  impression  of  a 
tight-fitting  crenulate  casing  about  the  lower  half.  The  cirri  are  sharply  pointed,  much  broader  at 


Fig.  31. — Side  and  top  views  of  Mesodinium  cinctum. 

the  base,  and  the  two  sets  are  so  placed  that,  looked  at  from  above,  they  have  the  appearance  of  a 
twisted  cord.  (Fig.  31  b.)  Movement  erratic;  sometimes  the  animal  swims  steadily  forward  with 
mouth  in  front;  again  it  shoots  across  the  field  of  the  microscope,  either  backward  or  forward  or 
sideways,  through  the  action  of  its  powerful  cirri.  It  is  often  quiet,  usually  mouth  downward,  and  is 
held  in  place  by  adhesion  of  the  tentacles.  In  this  position  it  looks  strikingly  like  a heliozoon. 

Length  35// ; greatest  width  30/o  Uot  uncommon. 

The  chief  features  by  which  this  species  is  distinguished  from  the  frequently  described  M.  pulex 
of  Europe  are  the  number  of  anterior  cirri  and  the  ring  of  true  cilia  in  place  of  the  central  girdle  of 
cirri.  The  European  form  is  described  with  four  anterior  bristles;  the  present  form  has  from  28  to  32. 
The  radial  cilia  differ  decidedly  from  the  more  powerful  cirri  and  they  are  not  in  one  plane,  so  that 
counting  is  difficult;  they  are  not  closely  set.  The  presence  of  tentacles  makes  these  forms  of  especial 
theoretical  interest,  especially  in  the  light  of  the  origin  of  Sudor ia. 

Genus  TIARINA  R S Bergh  ’79. 

(Claparede  & Lachmann  ’58.) 

Body  subcylindrical,  pointed  posteriorly,  two  and  one-half  times  as  long  as  broad;  encased  in 
covering  composed  of  separate  pieces  arranged  in  five  girdles.  The  pieces  bear  processes  which  rest 
against  neighboring  pieces  of  the  girdle.  Mouth  large,  anus  terminal  near  contractile  vacuole.  The 
macronucleus  is  simple  and  round.  Salt  water. 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


437 


Tiarina  fusus  (Cl.  & Lach. ) emend  R.  S.  Bergh. 

Synonyms:  Coleps  fusus  Cl.  & Lach.  '58;  Daday  ’86;  .Mobius  ’88,  Lanterborn  ’94;  Shevyakov  '86. 

This  form,  which  resembles  C'olejxs  rather  closely,  was  placed  as  a separate  genus  by  R.  S.  Bergh. 
The  skeletal  parts  consist  of  five  zones  of  needles  composed  of  an  organized  substance  and  embedded 
in  the  cortical  plasm,  the  last  zone  coming  to  a point  at  the  posterior  end.  The  needles  have  lateral 
processes,  which  give  a latticed  appearance  to  the  casing.  The  cilia  are  long,  with  a specialized  crown 
of  still  longer  ones  at  the  oral  end;  they  arise  outside  of  the  skeletal  elements  and  do  not  pass  between 
them,  as  in  Coleps. 

Key  to  marine  genera  of  Trachelinidse. 

Diagnostic  characters : Body  bilateral,  or  asymmetrical  by  local  prolongations;  usually  compressed  or  flattened  later- 
ally, the  left  side  more  convex  than  the  right.  The  essential  feature  is  the  position  and  character  of  the  mouth.  This  is 
either  a long  slit  extending  from  the  anterior  end  well  down  the  ventral  surface,  or  the  posterior  part  only  of  a ventral 
furrow  remains  open  as  a round  or  elongate  month  some  distance  from  the  anterior  end.  The  entire  mouth  region  of  the 
body  is  usually  drawn  out  into  an  elongate  tapering  proboscis  which  is  generally  curved  dorsally  at  the  extremity.  An 
oesophagus  is  short  or  absent  altogether;  when  present  it  is  supported  by  a stiff  buccal  armature.  Cilia  are  uniform  about 
entire  body  or  limited  to  the  flat  right  side.  Food  is  swallowed. 

1.  a.  Proboscis  easily  distinguished  from  the  main  body 2 

b.  Proboscis  not  marked  off  from  main  body;  body  flat;  both  surfaces  striated Genus  * Loxophyllum,  p.  437 

2.  a.  Mouth  runs  the  entire  length  of  proboscis;  entire  body  uniformly  ciliated Genus  Amphileptus 

b.  Mouth  runs  the  entire  length  of  proboscis;  body  flat;  right  side  only  is  ciliated Genus  * Lionotus,  p.  438 

c.  Proboscis  much  drawn  out,  flexible;  mouth  at  its  base Genus  Dileptus 


Fig.  32. — Loxophyllum  setigerum , var.  armatum.  a b,  c,  ventral,  dorsal,  and  lateral  aspects 


Genus  LOXOPHYLLUM  Duj.  ’41. 

(Duj.  ’41;  Wrzesniowski ’69;  Quennerstedt ’65;  ’67,  Cohn '66;  Entz  :84;  Gourret  & Roeser '88;  Butschli  ’88;  Shevyakov ’96. ) 

The  body  is  flat  and  somewhat  leaf-shape,  flexible,  and  elastic.  The  anterior  end  is  somewhat 
proboscis-like  and  flexible,  but  is  not  sharply  demarcated  as  in  Lionolus.  The  central  portion  of  the 
body  is  developed  into  a more  or  less  arched  dorsal  mass,  which  usually  contains  the  nuclei  and  con- 
tractile vacuoles.  As  a result  of  this  local  thickening,  the  body  is  surrounded  by  a thin  hyaline  margin. 
This,  however,  may  be  absent  on  the  right  side  in  some  species.  The  mouth  reaches  from  the  anterior 


438 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


extremity  to  a short  distance  from  the  end,  and  usually  approaches  the  left  edge.  An  anus  is  present 
near  the  posterior  end  of  the  dorsal  swelling.  Trichocysts  are  numerous  on  the  ventral  surface,  and 
often  on  the  dorsal  surface,  where  they  are  inclosed  in  minute  papilla-like  swellings.  Cilia-distribution 
controverted.  Maupas  and  Biitschli  hold  that  ventral  surface  alone  is  ciliated;  others  (Kent  and  Dujar- 
din)  that  cilia  are  uniformly  distributed.  The  entire  body,  dorsal  and  ventral  surfaces  alike,  are 
uniformly  striated.  The  contractile  vacuole  lies  posteriorly,  on  the  right  side  and  in  the  dorsal  swell- 
ing. In  the  fresh-water  form  L.  mdeagris,  it  is  connected  with  a long  canal  whose  swellings  are 
frequently  taken  for  additional  contractile  vesicles  (Biitschli);  in  the  marine  form  described  below 
the  canal  is  not  developed  and  a series  of  vacuoles  takes  its  place;  these  are  all  contractile.  The 
macronucleus  may  be  single,  double,  quadruple,  band-formed,  or  rosette-formed,  Movement  is  steadily 
progressive  and  peculiarly  gliding.  Fresh  and  salt  water. 

Loxophyllum  setigerum  Quenn.  ’67. 

Synonyms:  Litosolenus  armatus  Stokes  ’93;  Litosolenus  verrucosa  Stokes  ’93. 

The  body  is  flattened,  irregular  in  outline,  obtusely  pointed  anteriorly,  the  point  being  turned  to 
the  right;  rounded  posteriorly.  The  left  edge  is  nearly  straight,  the  right  considerably  arched  with  a 
few  setas  on  the  posterior  half.  Contractile  vacuoles  are  numerous,  dorsal  in  position  and  on  the  right 
side.  The  macronucleus  is  beaded,  the  several  spheres  connected. 

Variety  armatum  (Cl.  & Lach.).  (Fig.  32.) 

Under  the  name  Litosolenus  armatus,  Stokes  described  a form  from  brackish  water  near  New  York, 
which  should  unquestionably  be  referred  to  the  genus  Loxophyllum,  and  I believe  to  Quennerstedt’s 
species  setigerum.  While  the  latter  possesses  only  a few  setse,  the  former  has  a number  of  them,  and 
Stokes  described  his  species  as  having  a variable  number.  For  this  reason  I include  the  Woods  Hole 
form  under  the  tentative  name  armatum,  as  a variety  of  Quennerstedt’s  X.  setigerum.  The  flat  margins 
are  distinctly  striated  longitudinally,  and  faintly  marked  radially,  on  the  dorsal  surface.  Longitudinal 
elevated  strire  also  run  the  length  of  the  dorsal  hump  and  upon  the  entire  ventral  surface.  The  ventral 
surface  is  alone  ciliated.  Upon  the  edges  of  the  flat  border  are  sharp-pointed,  colorless,  spine-like 
processes,  situated  at  equal  distances  around  the  entire  periphery  except  at  the  anterior  end.  Each 
spine  is  thick  at  the  base  and  tapers  to  a full  point  which  is  curved  upward — i.  e. , dorsally  ( fig.  32, 
a,  h).  The  entire  body  is  plastic  and  contractile,  turning  its  leaf-like  edge  readily  over  objects  upon 
which  it  creeps.  The  cilia  are  fine  and  uniform,  with  a tendency  to  lengthen  in  the  oral  region. 

Length  100// ; greatest  width  assumed  on  contraction  85// ; when  normal  about  50 p. 

Genus  LIONOTUS  Wrzesniowski  ’70. 

(Incorrectly  called  Litonotus  by  many.  Entz '84;  Gruber ’84;  Biitschli  ’88;  Kent '81;  Schewiakoff ’89;  Shevyakov ’96.) 

The  body  is  elongate  and  somewhat  lance-shaped,  widest  at  the  central  part  and  tapering  to  a 
point  at  the  anterior  end.  The  posterior  end  may  be  similarly  tapered  or  rounded.  The  anterior  end 
frequently  proboscis-like,  flat,  and  flexible,  while  the  entire  body  is  more  or  less  elastic  and  contractile. 
The  right  side  is  flattened  and  alone  provided  with  cilia,  while  the  left  side  of  the  body  proper  is 
arched;  on  the  left  side  of  the  proboscis  is  a row  of  coarse  cilia  resembling  an  adoral  zone,  and  a row 
of  trichocysts.  A long  peristome  stretches  down  the  thin,  ventral  side  of  the  proboscis,  and  the  mouth 
proper  is  situated  at  the  junction  of  the  proboscis  and  body;  the  mouth,  as  a rule,  is  invisible.  The 
ciliated  right  side  alone  is  striated  in  the  majority  of  species.  The  contractile  vacuole  may  be  single 
or  multiple,  usually  in  the  posterior  region  of  the  body  and  dorsal  in  position.  The  macronucleus  is 
usually  double,  rarely  single  or  quadruple,  but  may  occasionally  break  into  numerous  smaller  pieces. 
Movement,  free-swimming  or  gliding,  with  especial  tendency  to  get  under  clumps  of  foreign  matter. 

Fresh  and  salt  water. 

Lionotus  fasciola  Ehr.  Fig.  33. 

Synonyms.  Amphileptus  fasciola  Ehr.  ’38;  Dujardin  ’41;  Lachmann  ’56;  Cohn  '66,  Diesing  '65. 

Loxophyllum  fasciola  Claparede  & Lachmann  ’58;  Balbiani  61 
Loxophyllum  duplostnatum  Maupas  83;  Shevyakov  ’96 

Body  frequently  brown  or  brilliant  yellow  in  color,  somewhat  sigmoid  in  form  with  tapering 
anterior  end,  the  extremity  of  which  is  turned  dorsally.  The  proboscis  is  about  half  the  entire  length 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


439 


and  is  not  sharply  marked  from  the  rest  of  the  body  hut  tapers  gradually,  its  base  being  equal  to  the 
diameter  of  the  body  at  its  middle  point.  The  body  is  slightly  contractile  and  the  posterior  end  is 
carried  to  a rounded  point,  but  not  into  a distinct  tail.  Unlike  the  fresh-water  variety,  this  one  has 
no  hyaline  margin  nor  hyaline  caudal  region,  and  the  contractile  vacuole  is  double  or  multiple  on  the 
dorsal  side  near  the  posterior  end.  Cilia  are  present  only  on  the  under  (right)  side,  with,  however, 
a row  of  large  cilia  marking  the  course  of  the  elongate  mouth,  upon  its  left  side.  The  right  side  is 
striated,  the  left  arched  and  without  markings.  The  endoplasm  is  finely  granular  with,  however, 
larger  food  particles  in  the  process  of  digestion,  while  specimens  are  occasionally  seen  with  the  natural 
form  completely  lost  through  distortion  caused  by  over-large  captures  (Cf.  also  Wrzesniowski  ’70, 
p.  xxin,  lig.  32).  Movement  continuous,  slow,  and  gliding;  very  little  tendency  to  jerking  movements. 
Macronucleus  double,  both  parts  spherical,  and  placed  in  about  the  center  of  the  larger  part  of  the 
body;  closely  approximated  but  not,  as  Schewiakoff  described,  connected.  In  conjugation,  a large 
form  unites  with  a smaller  one,  the  mouth  parts  being  connected.  Details  of  conjugation  and  macro- 
nuclei not  made  out.  Length  200//  to  600//. 


Key  to  marine  genera  of  Chlamydodontidse. 

Diagnostic  characters:  Form  usually  ellipsoid,  never  very  elongate.  Transverse  section  of  body  circular  or  elliptical. 
The  mouth  is  usually  some  distance  from  the  anterior  end  and  may  be  in  the  posterior  part.  Sometimes  it  is  in  the  center 
of  the  ventral  surface,  again  on  the  right  side.  The  oesophagus  invariably  has  a well-developed  buccal  armature,  or  a 


smooth  peculiarly  built  oesophageal  tube.  Food  particles  of  large  size. 

1.  Body  cylindrical.  Cilia  about  entire  body Genus  * Nassula  p.  440 

Body  flat 2 

2.  a.  Without  a caudal  process 3 

b.  With  a caudal  process 5 

3.  a.  Anterior  end  angular  on  leftside 4 

b.  Anterior  end  rounded Genus  Chlamydodon 

4.  a.  Dorsal  strise  and  cilia  present,  ventral  cilia  longer Genus  Orthodon 

b.  Dorsal  strise  and  cilia  absent;  posterior  end  not  pointed Genus  * Chilodon,  p 440 

c.  Dorsal  strise  and  cilia  absent;  posterior  end  pointed Genus  Scaphidiodon 

5.  a.  Caudal  spine  with  posterior  bristle-like  cilia 6 

b.  Caudal  spine  without  posterior  bristle-like  cilia,  ventral  cilia  reduced Genus  TrocliUia 

6.  a.  With  pigment  spot  on  anterior  angle  Genus  JEgyria 

b.  Without  such  pigment  spot Genus  Onychodactylus 

c.  Cilia  on  right  edge  only  of  greatly  reduced  ventral  surface Genus  * Dysteria,  p.  441 


440 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Genus  NASSTJLA  Ehr.  ’33. 

(Dujardin  ’41;  Stein  ’67;  Cienkowsky  ’55;  Cohn  ’66;  Clap,  et  Lach.  ’58;  Kent  ’81;  Maupas  ’83;  Entz  ’84; 

Fabre-Domergue  ’88;  Biitschli  ’8S:  Shevyakov  ’96.) 

The  body  is  ovoid  or  cylindrical,  with  well-rounded'  ends,  and  in  some  cases  slightly  flattened. 
The  mouth  is  ventral  and  placed  some  distance  from  anterior  end  (\  to  J total  length).  A slight 
depression  on  the  ventral  surface  marks  the  mouth  region,  which  is  further  indicated  by  larger  and 
more  powerful  cilia.  The  rest  of  the  body  is  uniformly  ciliated.  The  entire  body  is  marked  by  clearly 
defined  spiral  stripes.  The  mouth  is  circular  and  the  oesophagus  is  supported  by  a considerable 
armature,  which  usually  extends  dorsally  and  to  the  left,  rarely  to  the  right.  In  some  cases  the 
structure  of  this  armature  is  indistinct;  again  it  can  be  clearly  seen  to  consist  of  definite  rods  (Stabchen) . 
The  anus  is  probably  always  terminal.  Contractile  vacuoles  are  variable  in  different  species.  In  some 
cases  there  is  but  one,  which  is  placed  at  the  posterior  end  or  centrally  on  the  ventral  side;  in  others 
there  may  be  four — two  dorsal  and  two  ventral.  In  many  cases  trichoeysts  are  uniformly  distributed. 
Sometimes  the  body  is  colorless;  again,  and  more  often,  it  is  brightly  colored  with  red,  blue,  brown, 
or  black  pigment.  The  macronucleus  is 
globular  and  central,  occasionally  band- 
form  and  with  numerous  attached  micro- 
nuclei. Food  substance  varied,  usually 
vegetable  matter,  see,  however,  below. 

Cysts  are  globular.  Movement  is  a steady 
progression,  combined  with  rolling. 

NassulamicrostomaCohn’66.  Fig.  34. 

Synonyms:  Paramcecium  microstomum  Cl.  et 
Lach.  ’58,  Gourret  et  Roeser  '88;  Isotricha  micrn- 
stomum  Kent  ’81. 

Body  subcylindrical,  rounded  at  each 
extremity,  not  quite  twice  as  long  as 
broad.  A slight  depression  on  one  surface 
marks  the  position  of  the  mouth,  this 
depression  being  indicated  by  a row  of 
longer  cilia.  The  mouth  is  extremely 
small  and  is  surrounded  by  a curious  buc- 
cal armature.  This  is  not  made  up  of 
bars  or  rods,  as  in  most  species  of  Nassula, 
but  appears  perfectly  smooth  and  uniform 
except  for  the  considerable  swelling  at  the  inner  end.  The  cuticle  is  firm  and  unyielding  and  marked 
by  longitudinal  and  somewhat  spiral  rows  of  cilia  and  trichoeysts.  Under  the  microscope  this  is  one 
of  the  most  pleasing  forms  found  at  Woods  Hole.  Its  color  is  yellowish  brown  from  the  presence  of 
brilliant  particles  of  coloring  matter  held  in  the  cortical  plasm,  and,  as  it  slowly  rolls  along,  these 
particles  and  the  black  trichoeysts  give  to  the  organism  a peculiar  sparkling  effect.  The  macronucleus 
is  almost  central;  the  contractile  vacuole  posterior.  The  endoplasm  appears  well  filled  with  food 
bodies,  some  of  which  could  be  distinguished  as  Arnphidinium  and  Glenodinium. 

Length  55 /< ; greatest  diameter  30/« . 

' Genus  CHILODON  Ehr. 

(Dujardin ’41;  Engelmann ’78;  Stein ’54, 58;  Kent ’81;  Biitschli  '88;  Gruber ’83;  Cienkowsky ’55;  Mobius  ’88; 

Clap,  et  Lach ’58;  Wrzesniowski  ’65;  Shevyakov ’96.) 

Small  forms,  greatly  flattened  dorso-ventrally  and  almost  egg-form  in  outline.  The  anterior  end 
is  bent  distinctly  to  the  left  and  forms  a characteristic  process,  which,  together  with  the  entire  margin 
of  the  body,  is  soft  and  flexible.  The  posterior  end  is,  as  a rule,  broadly  rounded.  The  ventral  surface 
is  finely  striate,  and  this  surface  alone  is  ciliated.  The  lines  of  cilia  converge  at.  the  mouth,  and  at  this 
region  the  cilia  are  somewhat  larger  and  more  distinct,  thus  forming  a functional  adoral  zone.  The 
mouth  is  median  and  is  situated  in  the  anterior  half  of  the  body.  It  is  surrounded  by  a well-defined 
armature,  composed  usually  of  from  10  to  16  rods.  The  contractile  vacuoles  are  quite  varied  and  from 
one  to  many  iu  number,  the  number  increasing  with  the  size  of  the  individual.  The  macronucleus  is 


' /'VTT TT 

Fig.  34. — Nassula  microstoma. 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


441 


usually  single,  elliptical  in  form,  and  centrally  placed;  one  micronucleus.  Reddish  granular  pigment 
and  trichocysts  are  occasionally  present. 

Chilodon  cucullulus  Mull.,  sp.  Fig.  35. 

Synonyms:  Colpodci  cucullus  O.  F.  Muller;  Loxodes  cucullulus?  Chilodon  uncmatus  Ehr.  ’58,  Perty  ’52,  Dujardin  *41; 
L.  dentcitus  Duj.,  etc. 

This  extremely  variable  form  has  received  so  many  different  names  that  it  hardly  pays  to  enum- 
erate them.  It  is  one  of  the  commonest  and  most  widely  spread  eiliates  known,  although  at  Woods 
Hole  I was  surprised  to  see  it  so  rarely.  It  is  the  type  species  of  the  genus  and  needs  no  further 
description.  The  specimens  observed  at  Woods  Hole  had  numerous  contractile  vacuoles  and  were 
42  to  45//  long  and  from  28  to  32//  wide. 

Genus  DYSTERIA  Huxley ’57. 

(Cl.  et  Lach.  ’58;  Entz  '84;  Mobius  ’88;  Shevyakov  ’90.) 

Small  forms,  firm  in  outline,  and  colorless  or  slightly  colored.  The  body  is  somewhat  clam-shaped, 
flattened,  slightly  curved  or  straight  on  the  right  side,  the  other  more  convex.  The  true  ventral  side 
is  only  a narrow  strip  along  the  right  and  anterior  edge  of  the  body,  the  apparent  ventral  side  being 
a fold  of  the  very  large  dorsal  surface  which  comes  around  ventrally,  forming  a valved  structure  some- 
what analogous  to  a clam  shell.  Cilia  are  limited  to  the  outer  edge  of  the  small  ventral  surface,  which 
also  bears  a peculiar  spine  at  the  posterior  end.  Behind  this  spine  are  larger  cilia.  The  mouth 


opening  lies  in  the  anterior  widened  portion  of  the  ventral  surface  and  is  connected  with  a smooth 
tubular  pharynx.  The  right  half  of  the  dorsal  side,  i.  e.,  the  apparent  dorsal  side,  is  arched  and  bears 
longitudinal  ridges.  Two  to  four  contractile  vacuoles  are  placed  on  the  ventral  side.  The  macro- 
nucleus is  usually  dorsal,  elliptical,  and  cleft.,  with  one  micronucleus  attached.  Fresh  and  salt  water. 

Dysteria  lanceolata  Cl.  et  Lach.  Fig.  36. 

Synonym:  Cypridium  lanceolatum  Kent  ’81. 

Outline  of  the  flattened  body  ovoid;  body  consists  of  two  valve-like  portions;  the  edge  of  the 
right  valve  is  nearly  straight,  that  of  the  left  valve  more  or  less  sinuous;  anteriorly  it  is  cut  away, 
obliquely  and  posteriorly  it  has  a deep  indentation  in  which  the  seizing  spine  rests.  The  cilia  are 
confined  to  the  ventral  surface,  here  reaching,  however,  from  the  anterior  dorsal  extremity  to  below 
the  posterior  indentation.  Posteriorly  the  cilia  become  larger,  corresponding  to  the  larger  cirri  of 
D.  armata,  which  are  posterior  to  the  spine.  The  mouth  lies  between  the  two  valves  and  is  surrounded 
by  a long  and  smooth  buccal  armature  which  passes  downward  and  backward  to  the  left  a distance 
equal  to  about  half  the  entire  body  length.  The  macronucleus  is  situated  in  the  dorsal  region  in  the 
central  part  of  the  body.  There  are  two  contractile  vacuoles,  one  behind  the  center  of  the  buccal 
armature,  the  other  near  the  inner  end  of  this  organ.  Movement  is  in  circles,  the  animal  moving 
around  quite  rapidly  when  not  attached  by  its  posterior  process.  It  is  colorless  and  measures  45//  in 
length  by  27//  in  width.  Claparede  & Lachmann  and  Shevyakov  describe  it  as  70//  long. 


442 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Key  to  marine  genera  of  Chiliferidse. 

Diagnostic  characters:  Mouth  never  lies  behind  the  middle  of  the  body;  the  oesophagus  is  but  slightly  developed.  The 
undulating  membranes  are  placed  either  on  the  edge  of  the  mouth  or  in  the  oesophagus.  A peristomial  depression  leading 
to  the  mouth  is  absent  or  very  slightly  indicated. 

1.  Mouth  in  the  anterior  half,  undulating  membrane  on  left  edge  only;  right  edge  continued  in  a long 

ventral  furrow Genus  * Frontonia,  p.  442 

2.  Two  undulating  membranes;  mouth  central;  no  caudal  bristles Genus  * Colpidium,  p.  443 

3.  Two  undulating  membranes;  caudal  bristle Genus  * Uronema , p.  443 

Genus  FRONTONIA  Ehr.  (Cl.  & Lach.  ’581). 


(Ehrenberg,  subgenus  of  liter saria  ’38;  Claparede  & Lachmann  ’58;  Biitschli  ’88;  Shevyakov  ’96.) 


Form  elongate  and  cylindrical,  or  often  flattened  dorso-ventrally,  with  round  or  pointed  ends.  It 
is  usually  plastic  and  contractile.  Cilia  are  evenly  distributed  about  the  body  and  are  similar  in  length. 
The  large,  open  mouth  lies  on  the  anterior  half  of  the  ventral  surface,  and  is  elongate  and  oval  in  out- 
line. On  its  left  edge  is  a well-defined  membrane  which  stretches  across  to  the  right  side  of  the  mouth. 
On  the  right  edge  is  a small,  longitudinally  striped  tract  which  is  free  from  trichocysts  and  smooth  in 
appearance.  This  tract  is  continued  posteriorly  in  a long  furrow,  which  in  some  cases  reaches  the  pos- 


Fig.  39. — Uronema  marina. 


terior  end  of  the  animal.  A few  rows  of  cilia  in  this  furrow  vibrate  differently  from  the  others  and 
give  the  effect  of  a membrane  (Biitschli).  The  oesophagus  is  extremely  short  and  hard  to  make  out. 
The  body  is  usually  covered  uniformly  with  trichocysts,  often  of  considerable  size.  There  are  1 or  2 
vacuoles  with  long  canals  radiating  throughout  the  endoplasm.  The  macronucleus  is  oval  and  cen- 
trally placed.  Micronuclei  vary  from  one  to  many.  An  anal  opening  is  placed  at  the  end  of  the  long 
ventral  furrow.  The  plasm  is  colorless  or  green  by  the  presence  of  Zooehlorella,  or  colored  brown  or 
black  by  pigments.  In  these  cases  there  is  a considerable  pigment  mass  on  the  anterior  end.  Move- 
ment is  regular,  forward,  and  combined  with  rotation.  Food  consists  of  foreign  objects,  diatoms, 
other  protozoa  and  the  like.  Fresh  and  salt  water. 

Frontonia  leucas  Ehr.  Fig.  37. 

Synonyms:  Frontonia  vernalis  Ehr.  ’38;  Bursaria  leucas  Allman  ’55,  Carter  ’56;  Panophrys  leucas  Duj.  ’41,  Stein  ’67; 
Panophrys  vernalis  Dujardin  ’41,  Stein  ’67;  P.  chrysalis  Duj.  ’41,  Fromentel  ’74;  Cyrtostomum  leucas  Stein  ’67,  Kent  ’81. 

Form  ovoid,  elongate,  occasionally  a little  flattened  dorso-ventrally.  Mouth  in  the  anterior  third 
of  the  body.  The  left  edge  of  the  mouth  carries  a distinct  undulating  membrane;  the  right  edge  is 
plain,  longitudinally  striated  and  bears  cilia.  It  is  slightly  depressed  and  the  depression  is  carried 
posteriorly  in  the  form  of  a shallow  furrow  which  reaches  to  the  posterior  end.  The  contractile 
vacuole  is  on  the  left  side,  the  spheroidal  nucleus  on  the  right  side  of  the  furrow.  The  body  is  uniformly 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


443 


covered  with  fine  cilia,  and  the  periphery  is  uniformly  studded  with  large  trichocysts,  except  along 
the  furrow.  Food  consists  of  dinoflagellates  and  other  small  forms.  Color  dark  brown  to  black. 

Length  330// ; width  200/c 

This  form  differs  considerably  from  the  fresh -water  Frontonia  leucas  as  described  by  Schewiakoff  ’89, 
especially  in  the  extreme  length  of  the  peristomial  furrow,  in  the  position  of  the  nucleus  and  contractile 
vacuole,  and  in  the  nature  of  the  water  canals.  These  in  the  Woods  Hole  form  are  very  irregular  in 
size  and  very  much  branched,  not  uniform  as  in  Lieberktihn’s  (see  Biitschli)  figure  of  Frontonia  leucas , 
nor  radiating  as  in  Schewiakoff’ s description.  This  may  be  the  same  species  as  Frontonia  marina , of 
Fabre-Domergue  ’91,  whose  description  and  figure  I have  not  seen. 

Genus  COLPIDIUM  Stein  ’60. 

(Biitschli ’88;  Maupas’83.) 

The  general  form  is  oval,  slightly  compressed  laterally  with  the  dorsal  side  strongly  arched.  The 
ventral  side  is  slightly  incurved.  The  anterior  end  is  somewhat  smaller  than  the  posterior  end, 
which  is  broadly  rounded.  The  mouth  is  placed  some  distance  from  the  anterior  end  in  an  oral 
depression  and  opens  into  a tubular  oesophagus.  There  are  usually  two  undulating  membranes 
which  do  not  extend  beyond  the  mouth  borders.  The  right  undulating  membrane  extends  down 
into  the  oesophagus  and  appears  to  be  attached  to  the  walls  of  the  latter.  The  body  stripes  in  front 
of  the  mouth  are  twisted  to  the  left.  The  anus  is  terminal  and  the  contractile  vacuole  may  be  termi- 
nal or  situated  forwards  in  the  dorsal  region.  The  macronucleus  is  spherical  and  has  one  micronucleus 
attached.  Food  consists  mainly  of  bacteria.  Movement  rapid,  but  interrupted. 

Fresh  and  salt  water,  common  in  infusions. 

Colpidium  colpoda  Ehr.,  sp.  Fig.  38. 

Synonyms:  Colpidium  cucuUus  Kent  ’81;  C'.  striatus  Stokes  ’85;  Kolpoda cucullus  Duj.  ’41;  Paramoecium  colpoda  Ehr.  ’38, 
Quennerstedt  ’67;  Plagiopyla  nasuta  Kent  ’81,  G.  & R.  ’86;  Glaucoma pyriformis  G.  & E.  ’86;  Tillina  campyla  Stokes  ’85,  ’88. 

The  body  is  oval,  somewhat  larger  posteriorly,  and  a little  compressed  dorso-ventrally.  The 
anterior  end  is  twisted  a little  from  the  right  to  the  left  (more  evident  in  fresh-water  forms),  and  leans 
somewhat  toward  the  ventral  side.  Under  this  portion,  on  the  ventral  side,  lies  the  mouth  in  a large 
depression  just  above  the  middle  of  the  body.  The  entire  body  is  covered  with  uniform  and  delicate 
cilia,  which  are  placed  in  longitudinal  rows.  These  rows  are  almost  straight  on  the  dorsal  side,  but 
bend  on  the  ventral  surface,  following  the  contour  of  the  twisted  anterior  portion.  The  endoplasm  is 
finely  granular;  the  oesophagus  leading  into  it  is  very  distinct.  Schewiakoff  (’89)  describes  two 
membranes,  an  inner  and  an  outer;  Maupas  (’83)  describes  them  as  right  and  left.  In  the  present 
species  I was  able  to  make  out  only  one.  The  macronucleus  is  central,  spherical  in  form,  and  bears  a 
single  minute  micronucleus.  The  contractile  vacuole  is  posterior  and  dorsal  to  the  long  axis  of  the  body. 
The  anus  is  ventral  to  this  axis  and  also  posterior.  Length  45/<;  width  20/4.  Common. 

This  marine  variety  is  much  smaller  than  the  fresh-water  form  and  the  form  differs  in  a number 
of  respects,  viz,  in  the  anterior  torsion  and  in  the  structure  of  the  mouth.  These  may  be,  however, 
only  individual  variations  of  a widely  spread  species,  and  I believe  it  is  perfectly  safe  to  describe  this 
as  Colpidium  colpoda. 

Genus  URONEMA  Duj.  ’41. 

(Quennerstedt ’69;  Cohn ’66;  Kent '81;  Biitschli  ’81;  Schewiakoff ’89;  Shevyakov  ’96.) 

Minute  forms;  colorless  and  constant  in  body  form.  The  form  is  oval,  slightly  compressed  on  the 
ventral  side,  while  the  dorsal  side  is  distinctly  arched.  The  membrane  is  distinctly  marked  by  rather 
widely  separated  strise.  These  occasionally  have  a spiral  course  about  the  body;  in  all  cases  they 
can  be  easily  counted.  The  mouth  is  large  and  placed  near  the  center  of  the  ventral  surface.  It  is 
sometimes  approached  by  a very  shallow  depression  or  peristome  from  the  anterior  end,  and  marked 
by  two  rows  of  cilia.  An  undulating  membrane  extends  down  the  mouth.  (Esophagus  absent.  A 
long,  stiff  bristle  extends  outwards  from  the  posterior  end.  The  contractile  vacuole  is  terminal  or 
subterminal  and  near  the  anal  opening.  The  macronucleus  is  spherical,  centrally  placed,  and  with 
one  micronucleus  closely  applied.  Movement  is  rapid  and  usual  forwards  in  a straight  line,  often 
found  resting,  however,  with  outstretched  cilia  in  contact  with  some  foreign  body.  Food  mainly 
bacteria.  Fresh  and  salt  water,  usually  in  decomposing  vegetable  substances. 


444 


BULLETIN  OE  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Uronema  marina  Duj.  Fig.  39. 

Synonyms:  Enchelys  triquetra  Dujardin;  E.  corrugata  Duj.;  Cryptochilum  griseolwrn  Maupas  ’83;  Philaster  digitiformis 
Fabre-Domergue  ’85. 

Small  animals  with  ellipsoidal  form  and  about  twice  as  long  as  broad.  The  moutli  lies  in  the  upper 
half  of  the  body  and  bears  a well-developed  undulating  membrane  upon  its  left  edge.  The  membrane 
is  longitudinally  striped  and  covered  with  long  and  vibratile  cilia.  The  right  edge  of  the  mouth  bears 
cilia  which  are  about  the  same  in  size  as  the  body  cilia,  but  are  more  closely  inserted  (Schewiakoff) . 
The  most  characteristic  feature  is  the  long  caudal  bristle,  which  is  extremely  delicate  and  about 
two-thirds  the  length  of  the  body.  Schewiakoff  thinks  this  bristle  has  a sensory  function.  I could 
not  make  this  out,  for  although  other  protozoa  ran  against  this  bristle,  often  bending  it  well  over  to 
one  side,  the  animal  shjwed  no  sign  of  irritability  but  lay  quiescent.  A spherical  macronucleus  with 
attached  micronucleus  lies  in  the  center  of  the  body.  The  contractile  vacuole  is  posterior  in  front  of 
the  bristle.  The  macronucleus  was  found  to  be  double,  as  though  just  divided,  in  a large  percentage 
of  cases.  This  may  be  a precocious  division  of  the  nucleus  long  before  signs  of  the  body  division  are 
evident.  Such  a phenomenon,  however,  is  rare,  the  macronucleus  usually  dividing  at  a late  stage  of 
cell  division.  Length  30  to  50 ju;  width  15  to  20 /<.  Common  in  decomposing  algse. 

Key  to  marine  genera  of  Pleuronemidx. 

Diagnostic  characters:  The  mouth  is  at  the  end  o£  a long  peristome  running  along  the  ventral  side;  the  body  is  dorso- 
ventrally  or  laterally  compressed.  The  entire  left  edge  of  the  peristome  is  provided  with  an  undulating  membrane  which 
occasionally  runs  around  the  posterior  end  of  the  peristome  to  form  a “pocket”  leading  to  the  mouth.  The  right  edge 
of  the  peristome  is  provided  with  a less-developed  membrane.  There  may  or  may  not  be  a well-developed  pharynx. 

Body  small;  not  produced  into  neck-like  elongation Genus  * Pleuronema,  p.  444 

Body  medium-sized;  anterior  end  produced  into  neck-like  elongation Genus  *Lembus,  p.  445 

Genus  PLEURONEMA  Dujardin  ’41. 

(Perty ’52;  Clap.  & Lach. ’58;  Stein  '59,  vol.  1;  Quennerstedt ’67;  Kent ’81;  Biitschli ’88;  Schewiakoff ’89;  Shevyakov  ’96.) 

Small  to  medium-sized  ciliates,  with  an  unchanging  form.  They  are  somewhat  lens-shape  and 
laterally  compressed,  the  two  surfaces  about  equally  arched.  The  ventral  surface  is  nearly  straight 
or  but  slightly  arched;  the  dorsal  is  quite 
convex.  The  anterior  and  posterior  ex- 
tremities are  equally  rounded.  The  per- 
istome begins  as  a small  depression,  but 
becomes  larger  until  it  takes  in  nearly 
all  of  the  ventral  surface.  The  depres- 
sion becomes  much  deeper  at  about  the 
center  of  the  body,  and  is  especially 
marked  on  the  left  side  of  the  peristome. 

In  this  deeper  portion  is  the  mouth, 
with  an  almost  imperceptible  oesophagus. 

Upon  the  left  edge  of  the  peristome  is  a 
high,  undulating  membrane,  sail-like  in 
appearance  when  extended.  This  may 
stretch  around  the  posterior  edge  of  the 
peristome  and  upon  the  right  side,  thus 
forming  a pocket  by  means  of  which  the 
food  particles  are  directed  into  the  mouth.  The  rest  of  the  right  edge  of  the  peristome  is  occupied  by 
closely  approximated  powerful  cilia  (Biitschli)  or  a second  undulating  membrane  (Stein).  The  body 
cilia  are  relatively  long.  Trichocysts  and  caudal  bristles  may  be  present.  The  contractile  vacuole  is 
subterminal  and  dorsal;  it  is  questionable  whether  there  are  canals  leading  to  it.  A round  macro- 
nucleus with  one  micronucleus  is  in  the  anterior  half  of  the  body.  The  anus  is  terminal.  Food  is 
chiefly  bacteria.  Movement  combines  springing  with  swimming  and  rotation.  Fresh  and  salt  water. 

Pleuronema  chrysalis  Ehr.,  sp.  Fig.  40. 

Synonyms:  Pleuronema  crassa  Dujardin  ’41;  P.  marina  Duj.  ’41;  Fabre-Domergue ’85;  P.coronata  Kent ’81;  Paramcccium 
chrysalis  Ehr.  ’38,  Lembadion  ovale  G.  & R.  '88;  Histiobalantium  agile  Stokes  ’85,  '88. 

The  body  is  ovoid,  slightly  flattened,  rounded  at  both  ends,  the  anterior  end  sharper  than  the 
posterior.  The  ventral  surface  is  almost  entirely  taken  up  by  a peristome  which  extends  from  the 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


445 


anterior  end  posteriorly  three-quarters  of  the  body  length.  The  posterior  end  of  the  peristome  is 
straight,  the  left  curved,  following  the  depressed  portion.  The  body  is  covered  with  fine  cilia  in 
longitudinal  lines,  except  on  the  peristome.  The  mouth  is  small  and  situated  in  the  hollow  of  the 
peristome  near  the  left  border.  On  the  left  peristome  edge  is  a large  undulating  membrane.  It  begins 
near  the  anterior  end  of  the  body  and  increases  in  height  posteriorly  following  the  peristome  edge 
around  on  the  right  side.  This  posterior  bend  of  the  membrane  causes  the  appearance  of  a full  sail, 
so  often  seen.  It  can  be  entirely  withdrawn  and  folded  together  in  the  peristome.  On  the  right  edge 
of  the  peristome  are  large,  powerful  cilia.  The  contractile  vacuole  is  central  and  dorsal;  the  macro- 
nucleus is  in  the  anterior  half  of  the  body,  with  one  attached  micronucleus.  Food  consists  of  bacteria. 
Not  very  common.  Fresh  and  salt  water.  It  often  remains  quiet,  with  membrane  and  cilia  out- 
stretched, as  though  dead,  but  suddenly  gives  a spring  and  is  gone. 

Pleuronema  setigera,  n.  sp.  Fig.  41. 

Body  colorless,  elongate,  and  with  the  general  form  of  a cucumber,  the  posterior  end  being  some- 
what pointed.  The  mouth  and  relatively  small  peristome  are  situated  in  the  lower  third  of  the  body. 
The  peristome  begins  as  a shallow  furrow  at  the  center  of  the  ventral  surface  and  dips  sharply  into  the 
buccal  depression,  which  is  deep  and  turned  toward  the  posterior  end.  The  left  edge  of  the  peristome 
bears  a high  undulating  membrane,  which  extends  anteriorly  only  as  far  as  the  center  of  the  body; 
posteriorly  it  passes  around  to  the  right  edge  of  the  peristome,  thus  forming  the  characteristic  mem- 
branous pocket.  Inside  the  oral  depression  is  a second  undulating  membrane,  running  down  to  the 


mouth.  This  is  small  and  without  an  oesophagus.  The  body  is  clothed  with  long  setose  cilia  which 
are  frequently  fully  outstretched  when  the  animal  is  resting,  a slight  tremor  . of  the  large  membrane 
alone  indicating  vitality.  Posteriorly  these  appendages  are  drawn  out  into  long  filiform  setse,  the 
number  varying  in  different  individuals  from  three  to  nine  or  ten.  These  are  extremely  fine  and 
difficult  to  see  without  a high  power  (e.  g.  T\-  oil)  and  careful  focussing  of  the  substage  condensor. 
Like  P.  chrysalis,  the  resting  periods  are  terminated  by  sudden  springs,  otherwise  the  movements  are 
steady  and  forward.  The  macronucleus  is  central,  and  the  contractile  vacuole  posterior  and  terminal. 
Length  45/r  to  50 /«;  greatest  diameter  .17//.  In  decaying  algse. 

It  was  this  form,  I believe,  that  Peck  ’95  described  as  a “eiliate.” 

Genus  LEMBUS  Cohn  ’66. 

(Cohn ’66;  Quennerstedt ’69;  Kent ’81;  Fabre-Domergue ’85;  Gourret  & Roeser ’88;  Biitschli ’88;  Shevyakov ’96.) 

Free-swimming  animals  of  elongate  form,  more  or  less  elastic  and  flexible,  bending  readily  to 
avoid  obstacles,  etc.  The  anterior  half  is  usually  drawn  out  into  a slightly  curved  neck-like  portion. 
The  peristome  is  a small  groove  leading  from  the  anterior  end  to  the  mouth  about  midway  down  the 
ventral  side  of  the  body.  Biitschli,  following  Quennerstedt,  describes  an  undulating  membrane  on 
each  side  of  the  peristome  groove.  Other  observers,  however,  usually  describe  but  one,  the  left, 
which  is  clearly  defined  and  stretches  out  some  distance  from  the  body,  while  the  right  border  is 
described  as  having  smaller  but  very  active  cilia.  The  general  body  surface  is  clothed  with  fine, 
uniform  cilia,  and  body  strise  are  usually  absent.  One  or  more  caudal  bristles  may  be  present.  The 


446 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


contractile  vacuole  is  posterior  and  terminal,  and  may  be  multiple.  The  macronucleus  is  spherical 
and  perhaps  double  (Kent).  Food  is  chiefly  bacteria,  and  the  animals  are  frequently  found  with  the 
anterior  end  embedded  in  zoogloea  masses.  Salt  water,  usually  in  infusions. 

Lembus  infusionum,  n.  sp.  Fig.  42. 

The  body  is  elongate,  lancet-shaped,  with  a tapering  anterior  extremity.  The  dorsal  outline  is 
concave  through  the  bending  of  the  anterior  end,  while  the  ventral  outline  presents  an  even,  convex 
curve.  The  mouth  lies  slightly  above  the  center  of  the  body  and  marks  the  posterior  limit  of  the 
ventral  peristomial  groove,  which  curves  slightly  from  the  anterior  extremity.  Each  side  of  this 
groove  bears  an  undulating  membrane,  the  left  being  much  larger  and  conspicuously  striated.  The 
general  form  of  this  left  membrane  is  triangular,  the  widest  part  is  anterior,  the  narrowest  at  the 
mouth.  The  right  membrane  is  similar  in  form,  but  smaller  and  more  active.  The  endoplasm  is 
colorless  and  finely  granular,  not  regionally  differentiated.  The  ectoplasm  consists  of  a relatively 
thick  cortical  plasm  specially  noticeable  in  the  posterior  half  of  the  body  and  a delicate  cuticle  which 
bears  almost  imperceptible  longitudinal  markings — the  insertion  points  of  the  fine  cilia.  The  body  is 
covered  with  uniform  cilia  except  at  the  anterior  extremity.  Here  they  are  much  larger  and  bristle- 
like. I was  unable  to  find  any  cilia  in  the  peristome.  One  long  caudal  bristle,  one-quarter  of  the 
length  of  the  body,  trails  out  behind.  The  macronucleus  is  spheroidal  and  placed  near  the  center  of 
the  body;  a conspicuous  micronucleus  lies  near  it.  A row  of  contractile  vacuoles  extends  from  the 
posterior  end.  I have  seen  as  many  as  six  of  nearly  equal  size  and  one  or  two  smaller  ones.  The 
intervals  of  contraction  are  quite  long.  Length  70  to  75//;  greatest  diameter  10  to  12 ju. 


L.  infusionum  resembles  L.  elongatus  in  its  general  form  and  in  its  mode  of  life,  for  it  excavates  a 
retreat  in  zoogloea  masses  and  lies  there  for  considerable  periods  perfectly  quiet.  It  differs  from 
L.  elongatus  and  from  L.  velifer  (probably  the  same  as  L.  elongatus  of  Claparede  & Laclnnann)  in  the 
presence  of  the  caudal  bristle,  in  the  absence  of  annular  markings,  number  of  contractile  vacuoles,  and 
in  the  slightly  smaller  size.  It  resembles  Lembus  verminus  (Muller)  as  described  by  Kent  ( Proboscella 
vermina ),  and  L.  intermedius  as  described  by  Gourret  & Roeser  ( Lembus  verminus  syn. ) in  the  absence 
of  annular  markings  and  in  the  presence  of  a caudal  bristle.  It  differs  from  the  former,  however, 
in  the  absence  of  a tentacle-like  process,  and  from  both  in  the  absence  of  a double  nucleus  and  in  the 
presence  of  many  vacuoles.  These  features  are  so  characteristic  of  all  the  specimens  examined  that  I 
have  concluded,  somewhat  reluctantly,  to  give  it  a specific  name.  It  is  common  in  old  infusions  of 
alga;,  especially  after  decomposition  is  well  advanced.  Its  food  consists  of  bacteria. 

Lembus  pusillus  Quennerstedt  ’69.  Fig.  43. 

Synonym:  L.  subulatus  Kent  ’81. 

This  species  is  much  smaller  than  the  preceding,  and  might  easily  be  mistaken  for  Uronema  marina. 
It  is  subcylindrical  in  form,  the  anterior  end  bluntly  pointed,  the  posterior  end  rounded.  The  oral 
apparatus  is  quite  different  from  Uronema.  The  mouth,  as  in  the  preceding  species,  is  at  the  end  of  a 
long  peristomial  groove  extending  from  the  anterior  end  to  the  middle  of  the  body.  The  edges  of  the 
peristome  bear  undulating  membranes  as  in  L.  infusionum.  Like  the  latter,  there  is  one  caudal  bristle, 
but  unlike  it  there  is  only  one  posterior  contractile  vacuole,  while  the  endoplasm  is  filled  with  large 
granules  or  food  balls.  The  cuticle  is  distinctly  striated  with  longitudinal  markings,  and  the  cilia  are 
uniform  in  length. 

Habitat  similar  to  that  of  L.  infusionum , in  zoogloea  masses.  Length  26  to  30/z ; diameter  7 to  8ju. 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


447 


Although  Quennerstedt’s  description  of  L.  pusillus  makes  no  mention  of  a caudal  bristle,  the  size 
and  other  characters  are  so  closely  similar  that  I hesitate  to  make  a new  species.  The  bristle  is 
extremely  delicate,  scarcely  thicker  than  a cilium,  and  easily  overlooked,  yet  with  proper  focussing 
of  the  condenser  I found  it  on  every  specimen  examined. 


Key  to  marine  genera  of  Opalinidee. 

Diagnostic  characters:  The  form  is  oval,  and  the  body  maybe  short  or  drawn  out  to  resemble  a worm.  They  are  char- 
acterized mainly  by  the  absence  of  mouth  and  pharynx. 

Anterior  end  not  pointed;  body  cylindrical;  tapering 

Anterior  end  pointed;  body  elongate;  cylindrical;  tapering 

Genus  ANOPLOPHRYA  Stein ’60. 

(Stein  ’60;  ClaparOde  ’60;  Leidy  ’77;  Vejdovsky  ’79;  Kent  ’81;  Balbiani  ’85  ; Biitschli  ’88;  Shevyakov  ’96.) 

The  general  form  is  elongate,  cylindrical  or  slightly  flattened,  with  rounded  ends,  the  posterior 
end  tapering.  The  body  is  striated  with  clearly  defined,  often  depressed  lines,  which  run  longitudi- 
nally and  sometimes  spirally.  The  contractile  vacuoles  are  usually  placed  in  rows  upon  the  edges.  The 
macronucleus  is  almost  always  long  and  band-formed,  rarely  oval,  and  generally  extending  through 
the  entire  length  of  the  body.  Micronuclei  have  been  made  out  in  one  case.  Reproduction  is  effected 
by  simple  cross  division  or  by  budding  at  the  posterior  end,  and  is  frequently  combined  with  chain 
formation.  The  main  characteristic  is  the  entire  absence  of  mouth  and  oesophagus,  the  animals  being 
parasitic  in  the  digestive  tract  of  various  annelids.  Parasites,  salt-water  forms. 


Anoplophrya  branchiarum  Stein  ’52.  Fig.  44. 

A.  circulans  Balbiani. 

The  body  is  cylindrical  to  pyriform,  in  the  latter  case  broadened  anteriorly.  Cuticle  distinctly 
marked  by  longitudinal  striations  which  take  the  form  of  depressions  and  give  to  the  body  a charac- 
teristic melon  shape.  The  endoplasm  contains  a number  of  large  refringent  granules — probably 
body  products.  The  nucleus  is  elongate,  somewhat  curved,  and  coarsely  granular.  A micronucleus 
lies  m the  concavity.  The  cilia  are  long,  inserted  rather  widely  apart  along  the  longitudinal  mark- 
ings. The  contractile  vacuole  is  single  and  is  located  at  the  pointed  end,  which  is  directed  backwards 
during  locomotion.  One  specimen  found  free  swimming  among  some  algse. 

Length  104/u;  greatest  diameter  3 6/c 


Genus  * Anoplophrya,  j>.  447 
Genus  Opalinopsis 


448 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


I was  much  surprised  to  find  this  form  swimming  about  freely  in  the  water;  its  mouthless 
condition  showed  it  to  belong  to  the  family  of  parasites,  the  Opaliniclie.  As  the  name  indicates,  how- 
ever, this  species  is  an  ectoparasite  upon  the  gills,  and  Stein  gave  the  name  branchiarurn  to  a fresh- 
water form  parasitic  upon  Gannmcirus  pulex.  The  Woods  Hole  form  is  so  strikingly  similar  to  the  figure 
of  G.  branchiarurn  that,  although  the  name  was  given  to  a fresh- water  form,  it  obviously  applies  to  this 
marine  variety.  One  important  difference  is  the  presence  of  only  one  contractile  vacuole  in  the 
marine  form. 

Key  to  families  of  Heterotrichida. 

Cilia  cover  the  body 1 

Cilia  reduced  to  certain  localized  areas 2 

1.  Polytrichina. 

a.  The  mouth  terminates  a long  peristomial  furrow  having  an  adoral  zone  along  the  entire  left 

edge Family  Plagiotomiclx 

b.  Peristomial  area  a broad  triangular  area  ending  in  mouth Family  Bursaridx 

c.  Peristomial  depression  short;  limited  to  the  anterior  end;  its  plane  at  right  angles  to  the  long  axis 

of  body;  surface  of  peristome  striated  and  ciliated;  no  undulating  membranes Family  Stentoridx 

2.  Oligotrichina. 

а.  Peristome  without  cilia;  cilia  limited  to  one  or  more  girdles  about  body .Family  Halteriidx 

One  marine  genus * Slrombidmm,  p.  449 

б.  Thecate  forms;  the  body  is  attached  by  a stalk  to  the  cup;  within  the  adoral  zone  is  a ring  of 

cilia Family  Tinlinnidx 

c.  The  peristomial  depression  is  deep  and  funnel-like;  cuticle  thick,  with  posterior  spine-like  proc- 
esses   Family  Ophryoscolecidse 


Key  to  the  marine  genera  of  Plagiotomidx. 

Diagnostic  characters:  The  peristome  is  a narrow  furrow  which  begins,  as  a rule,  close  to  the  anterior  end  and  runs 
backward  along  the  ventral  side,  to  the  mouth,  which  is  usually  placed  between  the  middle  of  the  body  and  the  posterior 
end.  A well-developed  adoral  zone  stretches  along  the  left  side  of  the  peristome,  and  is  usually  straight. 


1.  Body  cylindrical;  size  medium;  peristome  long  and  turns  sharply  to  the  left  at  the  extremity Genus  Metopus 

2.  No  torsion  in  the  peristome;  undulating  membrane  is  confined  to  the  posterior  part  of  peristome Genus  Blepharisma 

3.  No  peristomial  torsion;  body  highly  contractile;  no  undulating  membrane Genus  Spiroslomum 


Key  to  the  mar  ine  genera  of  Bursaridx. 

Diagnostic  characters:  The  body  is  usually  short  and  pocket-like,  but  may  be  elongate.  The  chief  characteristic  is  the 
peristome,  which  is  not  a furrow,  but  a broad  triangular  area  deeply  insunk  and  ending  in  a point  at  the  mouth.  The 
adoral  zone  is  usually  confined  to  the  left  peristome  edge,  or  it  may  cross  over  to  the  right  anterior  edge. 

1.  The  anterior  half  of  the  body  tapers  to  nearly  a point  in  front;  the  peristome  is  narrowest  at  the  apex; 

the  mouth  is  the  entire  peristome  base Genus  Balantidium 

2.  The  anterior  end  does  not  taper;  the  peristome  is  widest  at  the  end  of  the  body;  the  mouth  is  clearly 

defined Genus*  Condylostoma,  p.  448 

Genus  CONDYLOSTOMA  ( KONDYLOSTOMA  Bory  de  St.  Vincent  1824)  Dujardin  ’41. 

(Dujardin  ’41;  Claparede  & Lachmann  ’58;  Stein  ’59,  ’67;  Cohn  ’66;  Quennerstedt  ’67;  Wrzesniowski  ’70; 

Btitschli  ’76,  ’88;  Kent  ’81;  Maupas  ’83;  Shevyakov  ’96.) 

Colorless  and  more  or  less  flexible  animals  of  medium  size.  The  general  form  is  elongate  and 
cylindrical  or  somewhat  smaller  anteriorly.  The  posterior  end  is  broadly  rounded,  the  anterior  end 
somewhat  truncate  and  oblique.  The  peristome  is  broad  and  triangular,  the  base  of  the  triangle  being 
the  entire  anterior  end  of  the  body.  The  entire  length  of  the  peristome  is  one-fourth  or  less  of  the 
body  length.  The  mouth  is  large  and  placed  at  the  apex  of  the  peristomial  triangle  and  opens  into 
a comparatively  small  oesophagus.  The  right  edge  of  the  peristome  is  lamellate  and  bears  a clearly 
defined  undulating  membrane.  The  adoral  zone  is  well  developed  upon  the  left  edge  of  the  peristome, 
from  which  it  passes  around  anteriorly  to  the  right  edge.  The  surface  of  the  peristome  is  free  from 
cilia,  but  the  rest  of  the  body  is  uniformly  coated  with  small  active  cilia.  Contractile  vacuoles  are 
not  safely  determined.  Btitschli  thinks  there  is  probably  one  terminal  vacuole,  but  some  observers 
deny  this  (e.  g.  Maupas).  Others  describe  them  on  the  dorsal  side  of  the  posterior  end  (Quennerstedt). 
The  macronucleus  is  long  and  beaded  and  placed  upon  the  right  side.  Micronuclei  are  numerous  and 
scattered  along  the  macronucleus.  The  anus  is  terminal  and  dorsal.  Food  consists  of  large  and  small 
particles.  Movement  rapid,  free  swimming,  alternating  with  resting  periods;  in  some  cases  an  undu- 
lating or  wriggling  movement  is  seen,  showing  clearly  the  flexibility  of  the  body.  Fresh  and  salt  water. 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


449 


Condylostoma  patens  Muller.  (Fig.  45.) 

The  body  is  elongate,  somewhat  sac-like,  five  or  six  times  as  long  as  broad,  plastic,  and  frequently 
contains  brightly  colored  food  granules.  The  triangular  peristome  takes  up  the  greater  part  of  the 
anterior  end,  and  the  mouth  is  situated  at  the  sharper  angle  of  the  triangle,  about  one-fourth  of  the 
total  length  from  the  anterior  end.  The  cuticle  is  longitudinally  striated,  the  lines  having  a slightly 
spiral  course.  They  are  not  closely  set,  and  fine  cilia  are  thickly  inserted  along  their  edges.  The 
endoplasm  is  granular  and  viscous.  The  motile  organs  consist  of  an  adoral  zone  of  membranelles, 


Which  stretch  along  the  left  edge  of  the  peristome  and  the  front  edge  of  the  body.  The  right  edge  of 
the  peristome  supports  an  undulating  membrane.  The  nucleus  is  moniliform  and  extends  the  full 
length  of  the  leftside;  a number  of  micronuclei  are  distributed  along  its  course  (Maupas). 

Length  400/;;  diameter  at  widest  part  105/;.  Maupas  gives  the  length  from  .305/;  to  495/;;  and 
Stein  376/;  to  564/;.  Very  common. 

For  a more  extended  account  of  the  structures,  see  the  excellent  description  by  Maupas  ’83. 

Key  to  the  marine  genera  of  Stentoridx. 

Diagnostic  characters:  The  peristome  is  relatively  short  and  limited  to  the  front  end  of  the  animal,  so  that  its  plane  is 
nearly  at  right  angles  to  that  of  the  longitudinal  axis  of  the  body.  The  adoral  zone  of  cilia  either  passes  entirely  around 
the  peristome  edge  or  ends  at  the  right-hand  edge.  The  surface  of  the  peristome  is  spirally  striated  and  provided  with 
cilia.  Undulating  membranes  are  absent. 

1.  Peristome  circular  in  outline;  limited  to  the  anterior  end -. Genus  Stentor 

2.  The  peristome  is  drawn  out  into  two  wing-like  processes;  tube-dwelling Genus  Folticulina 

Genus  STROMBIDIUM  Cl.  & Lach.  ’58. 

(Stein ’67;  Biitschli ’73;  Fromentel  ’74;  Kent ’81;  Gruber ’84;  Entz ’84;  Maupas ’83,  Biitschli  '88. ) 

Small,  colorless  (except  for  ingested  food)  animals  with  characteristic  springing  movements.  The 
form  is  usually  constant,  but  in  some  cases  may  be  plastic  like  Astasia;  it  is  usually  globular  or  conical, 
the  posterior  end  being  more  or  less  pointed,  the  anterior  end  broadest.  The  latter  is  surrounded  by  a 
complete  circle  of  the  adoral  zone,  the  oral  end  of  which  passes  into  a peristomial  depression  which 
extends  deep  into  the  middle  of  the  body.  The  mouth,  with  a very  small  oesophagus,  lies  at  the  bottom 
of  the  inturned  peristome.  The  region  surrounded  by  the  adoral  zone  is  frequently  drawn  out  into  an 
anterior  process,  occasionally  bearing  a pigment  mass.  The  ventral  surface  in  some  cases  bears  cilia, 
which  may  be  distributed  or  restricted  to  a row  of  large  cilia.  Trichocysts  are  usually  present  and 

F.  C.  B.  1901—29 


450 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


may  be  widely  spread,  limited  to  the  posterior  region,  or  arranged  in  a girdle  about  the  middle.  The 
contractile  vacuole  is  simple,  and  posterior  in  position.  The  macronucleus  is  spherical  and  usually 
central  in  position.  Movement  is  rapid  swimming,  combined  with  resting  and  floating  periods,  the 
latter  usually  terminated  by  a sudden  leap. 

Fresh  and  salt  water;  more  common  in  the  latter. 

PStrombidium  caudatum  Fromentel  ’74.  Fig.  46,  a,  b,  c. 

Fromentel  described  a fresh-water  form  of  this  genus  with  a caudal  appendage.  The  body  is 
pyriform,  broadly  truncate  on  the  anterior  end,  in  the  middle  of  which  rises  a papilliform  process 
{Schnabel) . On  this  process  is  a heap  of  pigment  granules,  which,  however,  are  not  constant.  A ring 
of  long  cirri  surround  the  anterior  end  and  pass  into  the  peristome,  and  from  the  left  edge  of  this  line 
of  cirri  a large  adoral  zone  continues  down  to  the  mouth.  The  peristome  is  elongate  and  sac-form, 
and  the  mouth  lies  at  the  posterior  extremity.  With  the  exception  of  a caudal  filament  there  are 
no  other  motile  organs;  this  is  about  half  as  long  as  the  body,  structureless,  hyaline,  and  sharply 


pointed.  It  splits  up  into  a bundle  of  tine  fibers  upon  treatment  with  caustic  potash  (c).  The  cirri 
emerge  from  minute  hollows  in  the  edge  of  the  anterior  border.  The  cortical  plasm  contains  peculiar 
rod-like  bodies,  which  look  more  like  lines  or  markings  than  like  rods  or  trichocysts.  The  nucleus  is 
large,  spherical,  and  placed  in  the  center  of  the  body.  The  contractile  vacuole  is  posterior. 

Length  without  appendage  is  about  35 ju;  greatest  diameter  15  to  18 /i.  In  decaying  vegetable 
matter.  Common. 

Although  Fromentel’s  species  is  incompletely  described,  it  is  very  evident  that  the  organism  corre- 
sponds fairly  well  with  the  Woods  Hole  variety.  His  was  a fresh-water  type;  this  is  marine,  but  the 
caudal  filament  and  the  contractile  vacuole  are  similar.  Certainly  in  this  case  the  organism  can  not 
be  regarded  as  a Vorticella  broken  off  its  stalk,  as  Kent  ’81  suspected.  The  anterior  process  with  its 
pigment  spot;  the  cirri,  the  spherical  nucleus,  the  position  of  the  vacuole,  etc.,  are  all  opposed  to  such 
an  interpretation  which  Kent  applied  to  the  original  species.  Neither  can  it  be  a Tintinnoid.  I place 
it  provisionally  as  S.  caudatum. 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


451 


Key  to  the,  marine  genera,  of  Tintinnidx. 

Diagnostic  characters:  Body  attached  by  a stalk  to  a cup.  Inside  the  zone  of  membranelles  is  a ring  of  cilia  (par-oral). 

1.  The  test  is  gelatinous  and  more  or  less  covered  by  foreign  particles Genus  Tintinnidium 

2.  The  test  is  ehitinous  and  clear.  No  foreign  particles Genus  Tintinnus 

3.  The  test  is  ehitinous;  covered  by  foreign  particles,  growth  rings  frequent Genus  *Tintinnopsis 

4.  The  test  is  ehitinous,  often  covered  by  foreign  particles.  The  test  is  marked  by  discoid,  circular,  or  hexagonal  spots 

Genus  CodoneUa 

5.  The  test  is  perforated  by  pores  of  circular  or  hexagonal  form Genus  Dictyocysta 


Genus  TINTINNOPSIS  Stein  ’67. 


(Stein  ’67:  Kent  '81;  Daday  '87;  Biitschli  ’88.) 

Medium-sized  ciliates,  inclosed  in  a ehitinous  lorica  with  embedded  sand  crystals.  The  form  of 
the  house,  or  lorica,  varies  greatly.  In  some  cases  the  mouth  opening  is  wide,  giving  the  lorica  a bell 
form;  it  may  be  long  and  tubular,  short  and  spherical,  or  variously  indented.  The  animal  is  attached, 
as  in  the  closely  allied  genus  Tintinnus,  by  a peduncle  to  the  bottom  of  the  lorica.  The  anterior  end 
of  the  animal  is  inclosed  by  two  complete  circles  of  cilia;  one,  the  outer,  forming  the  adoral  zone,  is 
composed  of  thick  tentacle-like  membranelles,  the  other  consists  of  shorter  cilia  within  the  adoral 

zone.  The  mouth  leads  into  a curved  cesophagus  containing  rows 
of  downward-directed  cilia  ( Daday ) . The  entire  body  is  covered 
with  cilia,  but  as  the  lorica  is  always  opaque  these  can  be  made 
out  only  when  the  animal  is  induced  to  leave  the  house.  The 
only  difference  between  this  genus  and  Tintinnus  is  the  covering 
of  foreign  bodies — usually  sand  crystals.  Movement  is  rapid  and 
restless,  and  peculiarly  vibratory,  owing  to  the  apparent  awkward- 
ness in  moving  the  house.  Salt  water. 


Tintinnopsis  beroidea  Stein,  var.  plagiostoma  Daday.  Fig.  47. 

Synonym:  CodoneUa  beroidea  Entz  ’84. 

The  shell  is  colorless,  thimble-shaped,  with  a broadly  rounded  posterior  end.  The  body  is 
cylindrical.  The  internal  organs  were  not  observed.  Membranelles  24  in  number. 

Length  50 /<;  greatest  diameter  40//. 

Var.  compressa  Daday  ’87. 

The  posterior  end  of  the  shell  is  pointed,  the  lower  third  of  the  sheil  is  swollen,  the  upper 
third  is  uniform  in  diameter  and  without  oral  inflation  or  depression.  Nucleus  not  seen. 

Length  70/4 ; greatest  diameter  48//. 

Tintinnopsis  davidoffi  Daday.  Fig.  48. 

The  shell  is  large,  elongated,  and  provided  with  a considerable  spine.  The  chitin  of  the  shell  is 
covered  with  silicious  particles  of  diverse  size.  The  internal  structures  were  not  observed. 

Length  of  shell  and  spine  230/4 ; diameter  of  the  oral  aperture  54//. 

The  variations  of  these  species  are  considerable,  and  as  the  internal  structures,  such  as  the 
nucleus,  are  essential  in  fixing  their  systematic  position,  I place  them  as  above,  provisionally,  and 
until  further  observations  can  be  made. 


452 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Key  to  families  of  Hypotrichida. 


a.  Peristome  indistinct;  cilia  on  ventral  surface  uniform  and  not  differentiated  into  cirri Family  Peritromidx 

One  genus,  *Peritromus  p.  452 

b.  Peristome  more  or  less  indistinct;  cilia  reduced  to  a few  rows  on  the  ventral  surface;  anal  and  frontal  cirri 

present Family  Oxytrichidx 

c.  Cilia  entirely  reduced;  frontal  and  anal  cirri  present  or  reduced;  macronucleus  band-formed  or  spherical 

Family  Euplotidx 

d.  Peristome  reduced  to  left  edge  and  does  not  reach  over  the  anterior  margin Family  Aspidiscidx 

One  genus,  *Aspidisca p.  458 


Genus  PERITROMUS  Stein  ’62. 


(Stein  ’62,  ’67;  Maupas  ’83.) 

The  body  is  flat,  colorless  or  tinged  with  yellow,  and  contractile.  It  is  elliptical  in  outline,  with 
broadly  rounded  ends;  in  some  cases  the  left  edge  is  slightly  incurved,  the  right  edge  convex.  The 
ventral  surface  is  flat,  the  dorsal  surface  is  arched  in  the  middle  region  of  the  body.  The  edges  being 
flat  are  somewhat  more  transparent  than  the  remainder  of  the  body.  The  ventral  surface  is  striated 
by  longitudinal  straight  or  slightly  curved  lines,  the  dorsal  surface  is  smooth  and  without  cilia. 
(Maupas  describes  bristles  on  the  back,  but 
this  is  not  corroborated.)  The  adoral  zone 
is  fairly  well  developed,  but  not  distinctly 
marked  off  from  the  remaining  ventral  surface. 

It  begins  on  the  right  side  and  extends  entirely 
around  the  frontal  margin  and  down  the  left 
side  below  the  middle  of  the  body,  where  it 
turns  suddenly  to  the  right,  entering  the 
slightly  insunk  peristome.  The  mouth  leads 
into  a short,  indistinct  oesophagus.  One 
contractile  vacuole  is  situated  in  the  dorsal 
swelling  at  the  posterior  end  of  the  animal. 

Macronucleus  double,  one  in  each  side  of  the 
dorsal  swelling.  Movement  is  slow  and  creep- 
ing, with  a peculiar  method  of  contracting  the 
more  hyaline  edge,  which  may  turn  upward 
or  around  a foreign  object. 

Fresh  (?)  and  salt  water. 

Peritromus  emmae  Stein.  Fig.  49. 

With  the  characters  of  the  genus.  Fig.  49 .—Peritromus  emmx,  ventral  and  lateral  aspects. 


Key  to  the  marine  genera  of  Oxytrichidx. 

Diagnostic  characters:  The  peristome  is  not  always  marked  off  from  the  frontal  area.  In  the  most  primitive  forms 
the  cilia  on  the  ventral  surface  are  similar  to  those  of  the  preceding  family  ( Peritromidx ).  Usually  some  of  the  anterior 
and  some  of  the  posterior  cilia  are  fused  into  cirri,  distinguished  as  the  frontal  and  anal  cirri,  respectively.  In  the  majority 
of  forms  all  of  the  cilia  are  thus  differentiated;  strong  marginal  cirri  are  formed  in  perfect  rows,  and  ventral  cirri  in 
imperfect  rows.  In  addition  to  the  adoral  zone  there  is  an  undulating  membrane  on  the  right  side  of  the  peristome,  and 
in  some  cases  a row  of  cilia  between  the  membrane  and  the  adoral  zone.  These  are  the  par-oral  cilia  and  they  form  the 


par-oral  zone. 

1.  The  posterior  end  is  pointed  or  tail-like 2 

The  posterior  end  is  rounded;  not  tail-like 5 

2.  The  front  end  is  pointed 3 

The  front  end  is  rounded 4 

3.  Frontal  and  anal  cirri  absent;  often  tube-forming Genus  Stichotricha 

Eight  frontal  and  3 caudal  cirri;  not  tubicolous Genus  Gonostomum 

4.  Anal  cirri  present;  with  or  without  short  lateral  bristles Genus  *Epiclintes,  p.  453 

Anal  cirri  absent;  no  bristles Genus  Uroleptus 

5.  With  frontal  cirri 6 

No  frontal  cirri;  2 to  3 rows  of  ventral  cirri;  anal  cirri  small Genus  Holosticha 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


453 


6.  Right  margin  of  peristome  straight  as  far  as  the  anterior  end;  5 rows  ventral  cirri;  5 anal  cirri Genus  Oxytriclia 

Right  margin  of  peristome  curved I 

7.  Five  rows  or  less  of  ventral  cirri 8 

More  than  5 rows  of  ventral  cirri Genus  Urostyla 

8.  Membranelles  normal;  5 to  10  anal  cirri;  no  caudal  cirri Genus  *Amphisia,  p.453 

Membranelles  normal;  5 to  10  anal  cirri;  3 caudal  cirri Genus  Stylonychia 

Membranelles  very  large  and  powerful;  adoral  zone  not  continued  to  mouth;  5 anal  cirri Genus  Actinotricha 


Genus  EPICLINTES  Stein  ’62. 

(Stein  ’62,  ’64,  ’67;  Mereschowsky  ’79;  Gruber ’87;  Biitschli  ’88.) 

Very  active,  contractile,  colorless  forms  of  rather  small  size.  In  the  fully  expanded  condition  the 
hody  is  oval  and  long,  with  its  greatest  width  in  the  center  or  at  the  front  half  of  the  body.  The  pos- 
terior end  is  always  drawn  out  into  a relatively  long 
tail,  which  is  extremely  elastic.  The  peristome  is 
short  and  stretches  around  the  front  end  of  the  ani-  ' 'SN^ 
mal.  In  the  frontal  region  are  from  one  to  three 
rows  of  cirri.  The  ventral  surface  is  covered  with 
longitudinal  rows  of  cilia,  the  number  of  rows  being 
in  dispute  (6  to  7 according  to  Stein ; 9 according  to 
Mereschowsky  and  Rees).  Some  of  these  cilia  pro- 
ject from  the  lateral  edges  and  from  the  posterior 
end,  where  they  are  slightly  elongated.  The  anus  is 
dorsal  and  placed  at  the  beginning  of  the  posterior 
process.  Macronucleus  probably  double.  Movement 
is  rapid  and  restless,  the  tail  process  contracting  to 
jerk  the  body  backward.  Salt  water. 

Epiclintes  radiosa  Quenn.  Fig.  50. 

Synonym:  Metro,  radiosa  Quenn. 

The  body  is  elongate,  slightly  narrowed  anteri- 
orly, and  drawn  out  posteriorly  into  a long,  retractile, 
tail-like  portion.  Five  large  cirri  extend  outward 
from  the  anterior  extremity.  The  caudal  portion 
may  be  extended  to  a distance  equal  to  twice  the 
length  of  the  body  or  contracted  to  half  the  length. 

The  peculiar  nervousness  of  this  form  made  it  ex- 
tremely difficult  to  study,  and  the  oral  region  was 
imperfectly  made  out.  The  anterior  cirri  appear  to 
line  the  upper  left  border  of  the  peristome,  which  is 
marked  by  a row  of  large  cilia.  The  peristome  begins 
upon  the  right  side  of  the  anterior  end  and  passes 
backward  and  to  the  left,  narrowing  at  this  point. 

The  mouth  is  very  small  and  difficult  to  see.  It  is  apt 
to  stay  in  one  locality  under  zooglcea,  switching  back 
and  forth  with  great  vivacity,  or  hanging  on  by  the  posterior  cilia  while  the  anterior  end  stretches 
out  in  the  surrounding  medium.  Nucleus  and  contractile  vacuole  were  not  observed.  Length  45//. 


Fig.  50. — Epiclintes  radiosa- 


Genus  AMPHISIA  Sterki  ’78. 


(Sterki  ’78;  Kent  ’81;  Biitschli  ’88.) 

The  body  is  plastic  and  soft,  colorless  or  slightly  tinged  with  yellow  or  red.  In  form  it  is  oval  or 
elongate,  the  posterior  end  is  rounded  and  slightly  reduced  in  diameter,  but  does  not  form  a distinct 
tail.  The  anterior  end  is  also  rounded  and  similarly  reduced  in  width.  There  are  two  rows  o-f 
marginal  cirri  ( Randcirren ),  which  may  be  placed  some  distance  front  the  edge,  and  two  or  three  rows 
of  ventral  cirri  between  them.  There  are  from  3 to  5 frontal  cirri  of  larger  size  than  those  of  the  ventral 
rows,  and  from  5 to  10  anal  cirri.  (The  genus  Holosticha  is  similar  in  all  respects  save  the  presence 
of  frontal  cirri.)  The  macronucleus  is  double;  the  contractile  vacuole  is  central  and  on  the  left 


454 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


side.  The  peristome  is  long  and  rather  narrow  and  carries  an  undulating  membrane  on  its  right 
margin.  Fresh  and  salt  water. 

Amphisia  kessleri  Wrzes.  ’77.  Fig.  51. 

Synonyms:  Trichoda  gibba  Muller;  Oxytricha  gibba  Stein  ’59;  O.SoS?  Quen.  ’69;  0.  kessleri  Wrzes.  ’77. 

Body  elongate,  slightly  sigmoid  and  swollen  in  the  center,  about  3J  times  as  long  as  broad;  the 
rounded  anterior  end  is  turned  to  the  left,  the  similarly  rounded  posterior  end  to  the  right;  both  ends 
taper  slightly.  The  peristome  is  long  and  narrow,  with  a distinct  adoral  zone  which  appears  broken 
in  its  course.  To  the  right  of  this  adoral  zone  is  a single  line  of  preoral  cilia.  On  the  right  border 
of  the  peristome  is  an  undulating  membrane.  The  three  frontal  cirri  form  a triangle  and  the  live 
smaller  anal  cirri  form  a continuous  line  with  the  broken  row  of  ventral  cirri.  There  are  two  and 
one-half  rows  of  ventral  cirri  and  the  marginal  cirri  are  drawn  in  until  they  are  ventral  in  position. 

Length  135/; ; greatest  width  40/;. 

This  variety  differs  from  0.  kessleri  as  described  by  Wrzesniowski  in  having  three  frontal  cirri 
instead  of  four.  Another  difference  is  in  the  structure  of  the  nuclei  and  in  their  position.  These 


differences  are  too  minute  to  warrant  a specific  name.  0.  velox  of  Quennerstedt  is  probably  the  same 
as  0.  kessleri,  but  differs  in  having  three  complete  rows  of  ventral  cirri.  0.  i velox  has  three  frontal  cirri 
in  a line,  thus  differing  from  the  Woods  Hole  form. 

Key  to  the  marine  genera  of  Euplotidx. 

Diagnostic  characters:  Cilia,  as  -well  as  the  frontal,  marginal,  and  ventral  cirri,  very  much  reduced;  the  anal  cirri,  on 
the  other  hand,  are  always  present.  The  macronucleus  is  band-form. 


1.  Frontal  cirri  more  than  8 2 

Frontal  cirri  less  than  8 3 

2.  Eleven  marginal  cirri  on  the  left  side;  11  frontal  cirri Genus  Certesia 

Four  marginal  cirri,  2 on  each  side;  9 to  10  frontal  cirri Genus  *Euplotes , p.454 

3.  Seven  frontal,  5 anal,  3 right  marginal,  and  2 left  marginal  cirri Genus  *Diophrys , p.456 

No  frontal,  5 anal,  3 right,  and  2 left  marginal  cirri Genus  * Uronychia,  p.457 


Genus  EUPLOTES  (Ehr.  1831)  Stein  '59. 

(Ehrenberg ’31,  ’38;  Stein  ’59;  Cl.  & Lach.  ’58;  Quennerstedt  '65,  ’67,  ’69;  Btitschli  ’88;  Kent  ’81;  Gourret  & 

Roeser  ’88;  Mobius  ’88.) 

Small  to  medium-sized  forms.  Rigid  in  form,  colorless,  or  green  by  chlorophyl.  They  are  quite 
flat  on  the  ventral  surface  but  decidedly  arched  dorsally,  and  the  contour  is  usually  oval.  The  anterior 
end  is  broadly  rounded  to  truncate;  the  posterior  end  is  similarly  rounded,  or  may  be  somewhat 
pointed.  The  mouth  is  placed  centrally  or  near  the  left  margin,  and  from  it  the  right  edge  of  the 
peristome  forms  a curved  line  to  the  left,  which  bends  forward,  thus  making  the  greater  part  of  the 
left  edge  the  peristomial  area.  In  front  the  peristome  bends  sharply  to  the  right  and  extends  as  far  as 
the  right  end  of  the  adoral  zone.  Upon  the  frontal  and  median  ventral  surface  are  9 to  10  great  cirri 
( Bauckwimpern  of  Stein).  Posteriorly  five  great  anal  cirri  stretch  out  beyond  the  posterior  body 
margin.  In  addition  to  these  there  are  two  smaller  marginal  cirri  upon  the  left  body  edge,  and  two 
similar  ones  on  the  hinder  part  of  the  body.  The  dorsal  surface  is  rarely  smooth,  but  usually  is 
marked  by  longitudinal  ridges,  and  rows  of  dorsal  bristles  have  been  described.  The  single  contractile 
vacuole  lies  on  the  right  side  in  the  region  of  the  anal  cirri,  sometimes  just  above  them,  sometimes 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


455 


below.  The  anus  is  posterior  and  on  the  right  side.  The  characteristic  macronucleus  is  long  and 
band-form,  its  main  portion  being  usually  on  the  left  side  with  an  anterior  and  a posterior  arm 
toward  the  right.  Movement  is  rapid  swimming,  which,  however,  is  frequently  broken  by  creeping 
periods,  during  which  the  animals  appear  to  he  examining  the  foreign  body  on  which  they  creep. 
Fresh  and  salt  water. 

Euplotes  charon  Ehr.  Fig.  52. 

Synonyms:  Triclioda  charon  Muller;  Plcesconia  charon;  P.  affinis , subrotunda , racliosa , longiremis,  Dujardin  ’41. 

The  body  is  oval,  small,  and  somewhat  variable  in  length.  The  carapace  is  strongly  marked  upon 
the  dorsal  side  by  deep  longitudinal  grooves,  6 to  8 in  number;  the  grooves  may  be  absent,  however. 
The  adoral  zone  extends  to  the  posterior  third  of  the  body,  the  mouth  and  oesophagus  are  directed 
anteriorly.  There  are  10  ventral  cirri,  7 of  which  are  on  or  near  the  frontal  border  and  3 near  the 


right  edge.  There  are  5 posterior  cirri  and  4 anal  cirri,  of  much  smaller  size.  The  cirri  may  or  may 
not  be  fimbriated,  the  latter  condition  indicating  the  approaching  disintegration  of  the  body  and  is 
abnormal.  The  macronucleus  is  long  and  band-formed  or  horseshoe  shape.  The  contractile  vacuole 
lies  on  the  right  side  dorsal  td  the  posterior  cirri. 

Fresh  and  salt  water.  Length  45;/;  diameter  25//. 

Euplotes  harpa  Stein.  Fig.  53. 

The  body  is  elongate,  oval,  somewhat  widened  anteriorly,  and  has  rounded  ends.  The  frontal 
margin  is  three-toothed.  Ten  ventral  cirri.  Dorsal  surface  provided  with  8 longitudinal  markings. 
The  peristome  is  long  and  broad,  with  considerable  variation.  The  adoral  zone  consists  of  powerful 
membranelles  arranged  in  a continuous  curve  from  the  mouth  to  the  extreme  right  frontal  margin. 
Seven  of  the  10  ventral  cirri  are  situated  at  the  anterior  extremity;  the  remainder  are  arranged  in  a 
triangle  on  the  right  edge.  The  anal  cirri,  5 in  number,  are  long  and  stiff;  the  marginal  cirri  smaller 
and  finer.  The  nucleus  and  contractile  vacuole  are  similar  to  those  of  the  preceding  species. 

Length  95//;  width  54//. 


Fig.  52. — Euplotes  charon,  dorsal  and  ventral  aspects. 


456 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Genus  DIOPHRYS  Dujardin  ’41. 

(Biitschli  ’88.) 

Medium  size,  colorless  to  yellow,  rigid  in  form.  The  body  contour  is  oval,  the  anterior  end  being 
rounded  or  slightly  reduced,  the  posterior  end  usually  cut  in  on  the  right-  side.  The  peristome  is 
broad  but  less  extensive  than  in  Euplotes,  and  may  extend  beyond  the  middle  of  the  body.  Its  right 
edge  is  convex  toward  the  right  side,  extends  forward  and  does  not  turn  again  to  the  right.  The 
anterior  ventral  surface  has  7 to  8 scattered  cirri  and  just  behind  the  mouth  is  a transverse  row  of 
large  anal  cirri.  In  the  sharp  in-cut  of  the  posterior  end  are  three  great  angular  cirri.  Two  lateral 


cirri  are  placed  on  the  left  of  the  median  line  between  the  mouth  and  the  anal  cirri,  and  usually  in 
a slight  hollow.  The  contractile  vacuole  is  on  the  right  side  in  the  vicinity  of  the  anal  cirri.  The 
macronueleus  is  in  two  parts,  each  band-form,  one  anterior,  the  other  posterior  in  position.  Movement 
is  rapid  and  steady.  Salt  water. 

Diophrys  (Styloplotes)  appendiculatus  Stein  ’59.  Fig.  54. 

Synonyms:  Styloplotes  appendiculatus  Stein ’59;  Kent '81;  Quennerstedt  ’67,  etc. 

The  general  form  resembles  Euplotes.  Its  outline  is  oval  and  regular  except  at  the  posterior  end 
on  the  right  side,  where  there  is  a considerable  indentation.  The  frontal  margin  is  characterized  by 
a row  of  powerful  membranelles,  which  become  smaller  at  the  peristome  and  at  the  mouth  they  are 
of  characteristically  small  size.  The  ventral  cirri  are  7 in  number.  Five  of  them  are  in  one  row  from 
the  anterior  end  down  the  right  side  nearly  to  the  anal  cirri;  1 is  on  the  frontal  border  between  the 
first  two;  1 lies  just  anterior  to  the  second  anal  cirrus  from  the  right  side.  The  5 anal  cirri  are  large 
and  powerful  and  extend  some  distance  beyond  the  posterior  end  of  the  body.  In  all  specimens 
observed  these  cirri  curve  to  the  left.  Dorsal  to  the  anal  cirri  and  placed  deep  into  the  dorsal  pit 
are  3 large,  sharply  curved  cirri,  which  in  most  cases  are  fimbriated,  but  when  the  specimens  are 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


457 


normal  these  are  pointed  and  curve  abruptly  to  the  right.  Two  smaller  cirri  lie  to  the  left  of  the 
group  of  anal  cirri.  The  peristome  is  well-marked  by  the  adoral  zone,  and  upon  its  right  border  there 
is  a row  of  cilia,  and  a similar  row  of  cilia  runs  along  the  base  of  the  oral  membranelle.  The  macro- 
nucleus is  double  and  consists  of  two  elongate  cylindrical  masses  lying  parallel  with  one  another. 
One  of  these  is  in  the  anterior  region;  the  other  is  posterior.  The  contractile  vacuole  lies  dorsal  to 
the  anal  cirri  and  anterior  to  the  three  dorsal  cirri.  The  movement  and  general  activities  resemble 
those  of  Euplotes. 

Length  50/; ; diameter  25/;. 

Genus  URONYCHIA  Stein  ’52. 

(Stein  ’59,  ’07;  Quennerstedt  ’67;  Kent  ’81;  Bi'itschli  ’88.) 

Medium-sized  colorless  ciliates  of  usually  constant  body  form.  The  body  is  somewhat  short  and 
oval  in  outline.  The  anterior  end  is  broadly  truncate,  the  posterior  end  rounded  or  slightly  pointed. 
The  ventral  and  dorsal  surfaces  are  considerably  arched  and  the  latter  usually  has  a number  of  rows 
of  longitudinal  stripes.  The  open  peristome  is  broad  and 
reaches  back  to  the  middle  of  the  ventral  surface  and 
beyond.  According  to  Stein,  the  two  edges  can  approach 
each  other,  thus  opening  and  closing  the  peristomial  area. 

Its  right  edge  forms  a greater  angle  with  the  front  edge 
than  in  the  genus  Euplotes,  and  the  left  edge  forms  a greater 
angle  with  the  front  edge  than  in  that  genus.  The  left 
edge  also  appears  to  cover  over  the  adoral  zone  slightly. 

There  are  no  ventral  cirri  in  front,  but  on  the  posterior 
ventral  surface  are  7 great  springing  cirri.  Five  of  these 
are  inserted  on  the  right  side  in  a deep  in-sinking,  and  the 
other  2 in  a similar  depression  on  the  left  ventral  surface. 

Above  the  5 right-side  cirri,  i.  e.,  dorsal  to  them,  but  in 
the  same  depression,  are  3 angular  cirri.  A few  edge  cirri 
are  found  to  the  left  of  them  and  another  to  the  right  of 
the  5 cirri.  The  contractile  vacuole  is  on  the  left  side 
between  the  main  groups  of  cirri.  The  macronucleus  is 
band-form  or  spherical,  and  is  situated  in  the  middle  region 
of  the  body.  Movement  consists  in  forward  swimming 
with  sudden  springs. 

Salt  water. 

Uronychia  setigera,  n.  sp.  Fig.  55. 

This  species  is  very  common  in  the  Woods  Hole 
waters.  It  is  small,  colorless,  and  very  active.  The  most 
characteristic  feature  is  the  posterior  end  with  its  relatively 
enormous  cirri,  which  are  apparently  large  enough  for  an  animal  four  times  its  size.  The  form  is 
ovoid,  widened  posteriorly. 

The  ventral  surface  is  flat  and  has  two  excavations  in  the  posterior  end.  The  right  hollow  is  larger 
and  contains  5 great  cirri  of  unequal  size,  the  extreme  right  one  being  the  largest.  The  left  hollow 
contains  2 cirri,  also  of  dissimilar  size.  Dorsal  to  the  5 right  cirri  are  3 sickle-formed  cirri,  which  are 
usually  fimbriated.  These  are  pointed  and  curve  regularly  to  the  left.  The  peristome  is  wide  and 
open,  and  a small  pocket, -like  hollow  on  its  left  border  indicates  the  region  of  the  mouth.  The  adoral 
zone  runs  into  this  pocket  and  the  mouth  is  located  in  its  lower  right-hand  corner.  In  U.  transfuga 
the  right  border  is  generally  described  as  having  a membrane  of  extreme  delicacy.  I was  unable  to 
see  such  a membrane  in  this  form,  but  in  its  place  there  are  2 flagella-like  cirri  extending  from  the 
margin  of  the  mouth  opening  into  the  peristome,  and  these  vibrate  slowly.  I do  not  believe  these 
could  be  the  moving  edge  of  an  undulating  membrane,  for  they  are  quite  distinct.  The  macronucleus 
is  spherical  instead  of  band-form,  and  a single  micronucleus  is  closely  attached.  This  is  unlike  the 
European  species  U.  transfuga,  in  which  the  nucleus  is  elongate.  The  contractile  vacuole  lies  between 
the  two  sets  of  posterior  cirri.  There  are  no  marginal  folds  like  those  of  the  European  species. 

Length  40//;  width  25//.  Common. 


Fig.  55. — Uronychia  setigera. 


458 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Genus  ASPIDISCA  Ehr.  1830. 


(Perty  ’52;  C1.&  Lacli.  ’58;  Stein  ’59;  Quennerstedt  ’65,  ’67,  ’69;  Mereschowsky  '79;  Kent  ’81;  Biitschli  ’88.) 


Small,  colorless,  and  rigid  forms,  with  nearly  circular  to  oval  contour.  The  left  side  is  usually 
straight,  or  at  least  but  slightly  convex.  The  right  side  is  much  more  convex,  and  the  right  margin  is 
considerably  thickened.  The  ventral  side  is  flat,  the  dorsal  surface  convex,  with  from  one  to  several 
longitudinal  ridges  which  run  more  or  less  parallel  with  the  right  edge.  The  peristome  is  limited  to 
the  left  edge,  where  it  forms  a small  depression  which  may  or  may  not  reach  the  anterior  border,  but 
which  in  no  case  runs  around  the  anterior  margin.  The  left  peristome  margin  in  some  cases  grows 
over  the  peristome  depression  toward  the  right,  thus  making  a sort  of  cover  for  the  peristome.  In  the 
posterior  region  is  a deep  depression,  from  which  5 to  12  cirri  take  their  origin.  Seven  or  8 cirri 
are  placed  in  the  anterior  half  of  the  ventral  surface  and  are  arranged  more  or  less  in  rows.  The 
anus  is  on  the  right  side  in  the  region  of  the  anal  cirri  (Stein).  The  contractile  vacuole  is  generally 
on  the  right  side  and  similarly  located.  The  macronucleus  is  a horseshoe-shaped  body.  Movement 
rapid,  somewhat  in  circles,  and 


rather  uniform. 

Fresh  and  salt  water. 

Aspidisca  hexeris  Quenner- 
stedt ’67.  Fig.  56. 

The  carapace  is  elliptical, 
about  1 1 times  as  long  as  broad, 
roundedatthe extremities.  The 
left  border  of  the  carapace  bears 
a spur-like  projection.  The  ven- 
tral cirri  are  short  and  thick, 
and  are  very  characteristic  of 
the  species.  When  moving 
slowly  they  look  much  like 
nicely-pointed  paint  brushes, 
but  when  the  animal  is  com- 
pressed they  quickly  become 
fibrillated,  and  then  look  like  ex- 
tremely old  and  worn  brushes. 

These  cirri  are  placed  in  depres- 
sions in  the  ventral  surface  and 
each  one  appears  to  come  from 
a specific  shoulder.  At  the 
posterior  end  an  oblique  hollow 

bears  6 unequal  cirri  placed  side  by  side.  The  extreme  right  cirrus  is  the  largest,  and  they  become  pro- 
gressively smaller  to  the  opposite  end.  Dorsal  to  these  lies  the  contractile  vacuole.  The  peristome  is 
in  the  posterior  half  of  the  body  and  an  undulating  membrane  extends  from  it  into  the  oesophagus. 
The  dorsal  surface  is  longitudinally  striated  by  5 or  6 lines,  which  are  usually  curved.  The  nucleus 
is  horseshoe-shaped  and  lies  in  the  posterior  half  of  the  body.  Length  68//;  diameter  48//. 

This  form  was  incorrectly  mentioned  as  Mesodinium  sp.  hy  Peck  ’95. 

In  the  figure  given  by  Quennerstedt  there  are  only  7 ventral  cirri.  In  the  Woods  Hole  form  there 
are  8,  7 of  which  are  anterior,  6 of  them  about  1 central  one.  Tire  eighth  cirrus  is  by  itself,  near  the 
base  of  the  largest  posterior  cirrus.  These  cirri,  in  spite  of  their  size,  are  easily  overlooked  and  more 
easily  confused,  but  by  using  methylene  blue  they  can  be  seen  and  counted. 


Aspidisca  polystyla  Stein.  Fig.  57. 

This  species  is  similar  to  A.  liexeris,  but  is  smaller,  very  transparent,  and  without  the  spur-like 
process  on  the  left  edge  of  the  carapace.  The  chief  difference,  however,  lies  in  the  number  of  anal 
cirri.  These  are  10  in  number  and  they  are  arranged  obliquely  as  in  the  preceding  species,  with  the 
largest  one  on  the  right  and  the  smallest  on  the  left.  The  ventral  cirri  are  8 in  number,  and  are 
arranged  in  two  rows,  one  of  which,  the  right,  has  4 cirri  closely  arranged,  the  other  having  3 cirri 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


459 


close  together  and  1 at  some  distance,  near  the  largest  anal  cirrus.  The  peristome,  contractile  vacuole, 
and  nucleus  are  similar  to  the  preceding.  Length  36//;  width  22//. 

Stein  assigns  only  7 ventral  cirri  to  this  species,  but  he  also  describes  2 very  line  bristle-like  cilia 
(p.  125)  and  pictures  them  in  tigs.  18,  19,  20,  and  21  of  his  Taf.  iii  in  the  same  relative  position  as  my 
eighth  cirrus.  I am  positive  that  cilia  do  not  occur  on  the  ventral  face  of  this  form,  and  that  the 
characteristic  cirri  are  the  sole  locomotor  organs. 

Key  to  families  of  Peritrichida. 

a.  Peristome  drawn  out  into  fumjel-like  process;  parasitic Family  Spirochonidss 

b.  Adoral  zone  and  circlet  of  cilia  at  opposite  end.  Adoral  zone  left-wound.  Parasitic  (one  genus,  * Lichnophora) . 

Family  Lichnophoridi e 

c.  Adoral  zone  a left-wound  spiral.  Attached  or  unattached  forms Family  Vorticettidx 


Genus  LICHNOPHORA  Claparede  '67. 

(Gruber ’84;  Fabre-Domergue ’88;  Biitschli ’88;  Wallengren '94;  Stevens  1901. ) 

Small  or  medium-sized  colorless  animals,  extremely  elastic  and  flexible.  The  anterior  part,  bear- 
ing the  adoral  zone,  is  round  or  oval  in  ventral  view,  and  has  a flat  ventral  and  a highly  arched  dorsal 
surface.  The  posterior  end  of  the  animal  is  reduced  to  a stalk-like  structure  which  is  broadened  at 
the  extremity  to  form  a sucking  disk.  The  surface  of  this  disk  and  the  surface  of  the  peristome  may 
be  brought  into  the  same  plane  by  the  characteristic  bending  of  the  stalk  portion.  A ciliated  girdle  is 
placed  at  the  edge  of  the  sucking  disk.  A well-developed  adoral  zone  incloses  the  peristome;  it  begins 


Fig.  57. — Aspidisca  polystyla. 


Fig.  58. — Lichnophora  macfarlandi. 


at  the  mouth  on  the  left  side  and  includes  nearly  all  of  the  peristome  in  its  left-wound  spiral,  the 
extremity  approaching  closely  the  end  near  the  mouth.  The  macronucleus  is  a long-beaded  structure, 
or  it  may  be  in  several  parts  connected  by  strands  (Gruber).  The  contractile  vacuole  is  on  the  left 
side  in  the  region  of  the  mouth.  Salt  water. 

Lichnophora  macfarlandi  Stevens.  Fig.  58. 

The  body  is  elongate;  oral  disk  variable  in  form,  attachment  disk  clearly  defined  and  constant. 
The  stalk  is  very  contractile  and  elastic,  constantly  changing  in  shape.  When  detached  from  the 
host  the  animal  moves  with  a very  irregular  and  indefinite  motion.  When  attached  it  moves  freely 
over  the  surface  on  its  pedal  disk.  The  latter  is  bordered  by  four  membranes  composed  of  cilia.  A 
distinct  axial  fiber  extends  from  the  pedal  disc  to  the  peristome  and  gives  off  a number  of  branches. 
This  fiber  is  analogous  to  the  myonemes  in  Vorticella.  An  indistinct  longitudinal  furrow  can  be  made 
out  occcasionally.  The  nucleus  is  in  5 or  6 separate  pieces,  of  which  1 is  found  in  the  pedal  disk  and 
1 or  2 in  the  neck. 

On  the  egg  capsules  of  Orepidula  plana;  also  reported  upon  annelids  at  Woods  Hole. 

Length  60//  from  disk  to  extremity  of  the  peristomial  disk. 

This  form  does  not  agree  in  all  respects  with  Stevens’s  species,  but  the  agreement  is  so  close  in 
other  respects  that  I believe  it  can  be  safely  identified  as  L.  macfarlandi.  The  mode  of  life  is  different, 
and  the  macronucleus  is  different,  there  being  from  25  to  30  fragments  in  Stevens’s  form  and  only  5 or 
6 in  the  present  one.  There  is,  however,  the  same  evidence  of  chain  formation  in  both  of  them.  The 
length  of  the  oral  cilia  in  Stevens’s  form  is  18//  in  fixed  and  30//  in  living  forms.  In  the  Woods  Hole 
form  the  cilia  are  not  more  than  half  that  length. 


460 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION, 


Key  to  the  marine  genera  of  Vorticellidie. 


Diagnostic  characters:  Attached  or  unattached  forms  of  peritrichous  ciliates  in  which  the  adoral  zone  seen  from  above 
forms  a right-wound  spiral.  A secondary  circlet  of  cilia  around  the  posterior  end  may  he  present  either  permanently  or 
periodically. 


1.  Posterior  ciliated  girdle  permanent  around  an  attaching  disk 

2.  Posterior  ciliated  girdle,  temporary  during  motile  stage 

3.  Body  cylindrical: 

(а)  With  ring  of  stiff  bristles  above  the  ciliated  girdle 

(б)  Without  accessory  ring  of  bristles;  with  velum 

Body  conical;  general  surface  ciliated 

4.  No  test  and  no  stalk 

6.  No  test;  with  stalk  containing  contractile  thread 

6.  No  test;  with  stalk  but  without  contractile  thread 

7.  With  a test;  with  or  without  a stalk 

8.  Individuals  solitary 

Individuals  colonial;  entire  colony  contractile 

Individuals  colonial;  parts  only  of  the  colony  contractile 


3 

4 

Genus  Cyclocliseta 

Genus  Trichodina 

Genus  Trichodinopsis 

Genus  Scyphidia 

8 

Genus  Epistylis 

Genus  * Cothurnia,  p.  461 

Genus  *Vorticclla,  p.  460 

Genus  * Zoothamnium,  p.  461 
Genus  Carchesium 


Genus  VORTICELLA  (Linnaeus  1767)  Ehr.  ’38 

(Bell  Animalcule  Leeuwenhoek  1675;  Ehrenberg  ’38;  Dujardin  ’41;  Stein  ’51;  Cl.  & Lach.  58;  Greet!  ’70; 

Biitschli ’88;  Kent ’81;  Stokes ’88;  etc.) 

Medium-sized  ciliates  of  general  bell -like  form.  They  may  be  colorless,  or  yellow  and  green 
through  the  presence  of  Zoochlorella.  When  not  contracted,  the  peristome  end  is  widespread,  rarely 
narrowed.  The  adoral  zone  and  peristome  agree  with  the  details  given  in  the  family  characteristics. 
The  chief  character  is  the  attachment  of  the  posterior  end  by  means  of  a single,  longer  or  shorter, 
stalk,  which  contains  a highly  contractile  thread  easily  distinguished  in  the  living  animal.  Another 
character  is  the  absence  of  colony  formation.  Contractile  vacuole,  single  or  double,  usually  connected 
with  a sac-like  reservoir.  The  macronucleus  is  invariably  long  and  band-formed,  with  attached  micro- 
nucleus. Fresh  and  salt  water. 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


461 


So  many  species  of  Vorticella  have  been  described  that  the  task  of  collecting  data  and  of  arranging 
the  synonyms  is  extremely  irksome  and  difficult.  Stokes  enumerates  66  species,  inhabiting  fresh  and 
salt  water,  and  several  other  new  species  have  been  added  since  his  work.  I am  impressed  with  the 
fact  that  new  species  have  been  created  without  proper  regard  for  the  manifold  variations  which 
nearly  all  of  the  Ciliata  show,  and  I believe  the  66  species  might  be  safely  reduced  to  12  or  15. 

Vorticella  patellina  Muller.  Fig.  59. 

Body  campanulate,  widest  at  anterior  border,  from  which  it  tapers  directly  to  the  pedicle.  The 
diameter  of  the  peristome  is  a little  larger  than  the  length  of  the  body.  The  ciliary  disk  is  but  little 
elevated.  The  cuticle  is  not  striated  and  the  body  plasm  is  quite  transparent.  Length  52//. 

Vorticella  marina  Greeff.  Fig.  60. 

The  body  is  conical  but  variable,  and  may  be  short  or  elongate,  so  that  relative  length  and  breadth 
offer  no  chance  of  identification.  In  general  the  body  is  campanulate.  The  distinguishing  feature 
is  the  transverse  annulation  of  the  bell. 

Small,  but  common,  and  grows  in  small  social  groups.  Length  35/*. 


Fig.  62. — Cotliurnia  crystalllna. 


Genus  ZOOTHAMNIUM  (Bory  de  St.  Vincent  1824)  Stein  ’38,  ’54* 

Colorless  and  highly  contractile  forms  growing  in  small  or  large  colonies.  The  form  and  structure 
of  the  individuals  is  not  different  from  Vorticella.  The  colonies  are  usually  richly  branched  upon  the 
dichotomous  plan  and  the  entire  colony  is  contractile.  The  main  character  is  that  with  each  division 
of  the  individual  the  stalk  also  divides,  each  daughter  cell  getting  one-half  of  the  parent  stem.  The 
stems  therefore  remain  in  communication,  so  that  a simultaneous  contraction  results,  and  the  colony 
as  a whole  is  withdrawn.  In  some  species  so-called  macrogonidia,  or  larger  sexual  individuals,  are 
developed  alongside  the  usual  ones.  Fresh  and  salt  water. 

Zoothamnium  elegans  D’Udekem  ’64?.  Fig.  61. 

The  bodies  are  variable — peristomial  border  widely  dilated,  tapering  and  attenuate  posteriorly. 
The  pedicle  is  slender,  smooth,  and  transparent,  and  branches  sparsely  at  its  distal  extremity.  There 
are  but  few  zooids  (3  to  4) . , The  ciliary  disk  projects  conspicuously  beyond  the  peristomial  border. 
The  pharyngeal  cleft  is  very  distinct  and  extends  beyond  center  of  body.  Length  of  body  80// . 

Genus  COTHURNIA  (Ehr. ’31)  Clap.  & Lach. ’58. 

Colorless  forms  of  medium  size — in  some  cases  they  may  lie  green  by  Zoochlorella.  The  general 
structure  is  similar  to  that  of  Vorticella,  but  the  individuals  are  elongate  and  occupy  houses.  The 
macronucleus  is  invariably  long  and  band-form.  The  distinguishing  character  is  the  colorless  or 


i 


462 


BULLETIN  OE  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


brownish  lorica  of  quite  variable  form  but  always  attached.  These  houses  may  be  finger-formed,  with 
widened  center,  or  widened  mouth,  or  constricted  mouth,  and  the  like.  Ring-formed  swellings  are 
frequently  developed.  Sometimes  the  mouth  becomes  twisted  and  the  lorica  is  therefore  bilateral. 
The  houses  are  attached  either  directly  to  some  foreign  object  or  by  means  of  a short  stalk.  The 
animals  are  similarly  fastened  to  the  lorica,  sometimes  directly,  sometimes  by  means  of  a short  stalk. 
When  they  contract  they  draw  back  to  the  bottom  of  the  lorica;  when  expanded  they  usually  stretch 
out  of  the  mouth  opening.  In  some  forms  there  is  an  operculum,  by  means  of  which  the  opening  of 
the  shell  can  be  closed  when  the  animal  is  retracted.  Fresh  and  salt  water. 

The  number  of  species  of  Cothurnia  has  become  so  great  that  the  difficulty  in  placing  forms  is 
almost  sufficient  to  discourage  the  systematist;  as  Biitschli  well  remarks,  the  variations  in  the  theca 
have  been  made  the  basis  of  new  species  so  many  times  that  the  genus  is  almost  as  confused  as  Difflugia 
among  the  rhizopods  or  Campanularia  among  the  hydroids.  The  length  of  cup,  of  stalk,  the  presence 
of  annulations  on  stalk  or  cup,  etc.,  have  given  rise  to  many  specific  names,  the  majority  of  which  I 
believe  can  be  discarded.  According  to  such  differentials  the  same  branch  of  an  alga  holding  a 
hundred  specimens  of  Cothurnia  crystallina  yield  10  or  12  species,  whereas  they  are  merely  growth  stages 
of  one  and  the  same  form. 


Cothurnia  crystallina  Ehr.  Fig.  62. 

Synonyms:  Vaginicolla  crystallina  Ehr.,  Perty,  Eichwald;  V.  grandis  Perty;  V.  pedunculata  Eichwald;  Cothurnia 
crystallina  Clapar&de  & Lachmann,  D’Udek.;  C.  gigantea  D’Udek;  C.  maritima,  C.  crystallina  Cohn;  C.  grandis  Meresch. 

The  form  of  the  cup  shows  the  greatest  differences;  sometimes  it  is  cylindrical,  sometimes  elongate 
thimble-shape,  sometimes  pouch-shape,  corrugated  or  smooth  on  the  sides,  and  wavy  or  smooth  on 
border.  F requentl  v the  basal  part  be- 
comes stalk-like,  but  this  is  very'  short. 

When  present,  the  stalk  may  or  may 
not  have  a knob-like  swelling.  The 
animal  within  the  cup  may  or  may  not 
be  borne  on  a stalk,  and  this  stalk  may 
or  may  not  be  knobbed.  The  cups  are 
colorless  or  brown.  The  animal  is  very 
contractile  and  may  stretch  half  its 
length  out  of  the  cup  or  retract  well 
into  it.  There  is  no  operculum.  The 
length  of  the  cup  varies  from  70/4  to 
200/4  (C.  gigantea;  Vag.  grandis,  etc.). 

From  Entz. 

There  is  nothing  to  add  to  Entz’ s 
characterization  of  this  species,  which 
is  found  both  in  fresh  and  salt  water. 

The  variability  of  the  cup  and  stalk  is 
quite  noticeable  in  the  Woods  Hole 
forms. 

Cothurnia  imberbis  Ehrenberg,  var. 

curvula  Entz.  Fig.  63.  , 

Synonyms:  C.  imberbis  Kent  et  al.;  C. 
curvula  Entz;  C.  socialis  Gruber? 

The  lorica  is  swollen  posteriorly, 
narrowest  at  the  oral  margin,  bent  on 
its  axis  and  is  supported  ou  a short 
stalk.  It  is  perfectly  smooth  and  with- 
out annulations.  The  animal  itself  has  no  definite  stalk.  When  fully  expanded  the  animal  emerges' 
but  slightly  from  the  margin  of  the  cup.  Fresh  and  salt  water.  On  red  algae.  Dimensions  of  Woods 
Hole  form:  Cup  50  to  55/4  long;  greatest  diameter  22/4;  length  of  stalk  4 to  5/4. 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


463 


Cothurnia  nodosa  Claparede  & Lachmann.  Fig.  64. 

A.  Smooth  cup. — Colhwrnia  marltima  Ehr.,  Eichwald,  Stein,  Kent. 

B.  Cross-ringed  cup. — C.  pupa  Eichwald,  Stein,  Cohn;  C.  nodosa  Cl.  & L.;  V.  crystallina  Entz  ’78;  C.  pontica  Meresch., 

Kent;  C.  cohnii  and  pupa  Kent;  C.  longipes  Kellicott  ’94. 

The  cup  is  elongated,  swollen  centrally,  tapering  at  oral  end  and  conical  at  base  or  rounded. 
Oral  opening  either  circular  or  elliptical.  Cross  rings  may  or  may  not  be  present,  and  the  cup  is  either 
smooth  or  annulate.  Length  of  cup  70 //  to  80//.  The  stalk  which  supports  the  cup  is  extremely 
variable  in  length.  The  animal  is  borne  upon  a stalk  of  variable  length  within  the  cup. 

Entz  states  that  the  many  variations  which  this  species  exhibits  run  into  each  other  so  gradually 
that  he  does  not  believe  it  wise  to  separate  them.  The  Woods  Hole  forms  which  I found  on  algte  of 
various  kinds  were  nearly  of  a size,  and  did  not  vary  much  from  the  one  figured.  Kellicott  ’94 
described  a Cothurnia  from  Woods  Hole  under  the  name  of  C.  longipes,  which  I believe  is  only  a long- 
stemmed variety  of  C.  nodosa.  My  form  has  the  following  dimensions:  Cup  75//;  cup  stalk  38//; 
animal  stalk  14//. 

Keg  to  families  of  Sucforia. 

a.  Unattached  forms;  ventral  cilia  present;  one  suctorial  tentacle Hypocomidx 

b.  Attached  forms;  thecate  and  athecate  tentacles  simple,  one  or  two  in  number Urnulidx 

c.  Thecate;  posterior  end  of  cup  drawn  out  into  stalk;  walls  perforated  for  exit  of  tentacles Metacinetidie 

d.  Stalked  or  unstalked;  globular;  tentacles  of  different  kinds,  some  knobbed,  others  pointed  (2  gen- 

era * Ephelota  * Podophrya) Podophryidss 

e.  Naked  or  thecate;  stalked  or  not;  tentacles  numerous,  usually  knobbed  and  all  alike Acinetidx 

f.  Naked;  athecate;  tentacles  numerous,  all  alike,  knobbed  and  grouped  in  tufts.  They  may  be  simple  or 

branched Dendrosomidse 

g.  Sessile  forms  resting  on  basal  surface  or  on  a portion  raised  like  a stalk;  tentacles  many;  short  and 

knobbed;  distributed  on  apical  surface  or  localized  on  branched  arms Dendrocometidas 

li.  Stalked  or  sessile;  tentacles  long,  rarely  knobbed,  supported  on  proboscis-like  processes Ophryodendridae 

Genus  PODOPHRYA  Ehr.  '33. 

(Biitschli  '88;  Stein  ’59;  Perty  ’52;  Oienkowsky  ’55;  Quenn.  ’69;  Hertwig  ’77;  Maupas  ’81.) 

The  body  is  globular,  with  tentacles  radiating  in  all  directions.  The  tentacles  may  be  very  short 
or  very  long.  The  stalk  also  is  either  short  or  long,  and  some  species  form  stalks  but  rarely  ( P.  libera). 
The  macronucleus  is  centrally  placed  and  globular  to  ovoid  in  form.  The  contractile  vacuole  is  usually 
single.  Reproduction  takes  place  by  division;  the  distal  half  developing  cilia  and  becoming  a swarm- 
spore.  Fresh  and  salt  water. 

Podophrya  gracilis,  n.  sp.  Fig.  65. 

Of  all  the  Podophrya.  that  have  been  described  not  one  approaches  this  minute  form  in  the  relative 
length  of  the  stalk.  The  body  is  spherical  and  is  covered  with  short  capitate  tentacles.  The  stalk  is 
extremely  slender,  bent,  and  without  obvious  structure.  There  are  one  or  two  contractile  vacuoles  in 
the  distal  half  of  the  body.  The  nucleus  is  small  and  is  situated  near  the  insertion-point  of  the  stalk. 
Reproduction  not  observed.  Diameter  of  body  8//;  length  of  stalk  40//.  Only  one  specimen  seen. 

Genus  EPHELOTA  Str.  Wright  ’78. 

(Biitschli  '88;  Ishikawa ’96;  Sand  ’98.) 

Small  to  medium-sized  and  large  forms;  colorless  to  brown.  The  body  is  globular  or  oval  or  wedge- 
shape,  sometimes  quadrangular.  The  stalk  is  variable,  sometimes  1 mm.  in  length.  The  diameter 
of  the  stalk  increases  from  the  point  of  attachment  to  the  body  of  the  animal;  it  is  usually  striated 
either  longitudinally  or  transversely,  or  both.  The  tentacles  are  of. two  kinds  and  are  usually  confined 
to  the  anterior  half'  of  the  body.  Some  are  long  and  sharp-pointed  and  adapted  for  piercing;  others 
are  short,  cylindrical,  usually  retracted  and  capitate,  adapted  for  sucking.  Contractile  vacuoles  vary 
from  one  to  many.  The  macronucleus  is  nearly  central  in  position  and  usually  of  horseshoe  shape, 


464 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


but  is  frequently  branched  and  irregular.  Reproduction  is  accomplished  by  external  multiple  budding, 
usually  from  the  anterior  half  of  the  body.  Salt  water. 

Ephelota  coronata  Str.  Wright.  Fig.  66. 

Synonyms;  Hemiophrya  gemmipara  S.  K.;  Podophrya  gemmipara  Hertwig. 

The  body  is  spheroidal,  ovate,  or  pyriform,  with  numerous  sharp-pointed  tentacles  and  a few 
straight,  uniform  tentacles.  The  stalk  is  about  three  times  the  length  of  the  body  and  tapers  from  its 


widest  part  at  the  insertion  in  the  body  to  the  narrowest  part  at  the  point  of  attachment.  It  may  or 
may  not  be  longitudinally  striated.  This  is  one  of  the  commonest  of  the  Suclor ia  found  at  Woods  Hole. 
It  is  usually  present  on  Campanularian  hydroids,  but  may  be  found  on  algae  and  Bryozoa. 

Length  of  body  90/;  to  200/;. 

Genus  ACINETA  Ehr.  ’33,  Biitschli  ’88. 

(Stein ’54, ’59;  Claparede  & Lachman  '58;  Quennerstedt ’67;  Hertwig ’76;  Mereschowsky ’79;  Eutz '84; 

Kent  ’81;  Maupas  ’83;  Gruber  '84;  Gourret  & Roeser  '86,  and  others.) 

Small  to  medium-sized  forms.  The  distinguishing  feature  is  that  the  stalk  is  swollen  at  the  distal 
extremity  to  form  a cup  or  basin  in  which  the  animal  rests.  The  cup  may  be  developed  until  the  body 
is  nearly  inclosed.  The  macronucleus  is  spherical  or  band  form.  The  contractile  vacuole  is  usually 
single.  Budding,  so  far  as  known,  is  endogenous.  Fresh  and  salt  water. 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


465 


Acmeta  divisa  Fraipont  79.  Pig.  67. 

This  extremely  graceful  form  is  common  on  Bryozoa  at  Woods  Hole.  The  cup  is  shaped  like  a 
wine  glass  and  is  specifically  characterized  by  a cup-formed  membrane  upon  which  the  animal  rests. 
The  animal  thus  has  the  appearance  of  being  suspended  on  the  edge  of  the  cup.  The  stalk  is  slender 
and  about  4 times  the  length  of  the  body.  The  tentacles  are  all  capitate  and  distributed,  and  about 
2 j times  the  body  length.  They  sway  back  and  forth  very  slowly.  The  nucleus  is  spherical  and 


central  in  position.  The  contractile  vacuole 
lies  near  the  periphery. 

Length  of  body  27//;  of  stalk  100//;  of 
extended  tentacle  65//. 

Acineta  tuberosa  Ehr.  Fig.  68: 

Large  forms  of  Suctorin  with  tentacles  ar- 
ranged in  fascicles.  The  stalk  is  variable  in 
length  and  the  cup  is  frequently  so  delicate 
that  it  can  barely  be  made  out.  A specific 
characteristic  is  the  break  in  continuity  of 
the  cup  at  different  points,  and  through  these 


places  the  tentacles  emerge  in  bundles.  The  tentacles  are  capitate  and  in  the  Woods  Hole  form,  15 
in  number  in  each  of  the  two  bundles.  The  endoplasm  is  granular  and  yellowish  in  color.  The  col- 
oring matter  is  frequently  arranged  in  patterns.  The  nucleus  is  spheroidal.  The  contractile  vacuole 
is  in  the  anterior  third  of  the  body  about  midway  between  the  bundles  of  tentacles.  Reproduction 
not  observed. 

Length  of  body  330 n. 


F.  C.  B.  1901—30 


466 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Genus  TRICHOPHRYA  Clap.  & Lach.  ’58. 

(See  Kent  ’81;  Entz’84;  Butschli  ’88;  Sand  1901.) 


The  body  is  spherical  to  elongate,  usually,  how- 
The  tentacles  are  in  fascicles  which  are  usually 


Small  forms  to  medium  size;  no  cups  or  stalks, 
ever,  more  or  less  irregularly  lobed  and  changeable, 
borne  upon  lobed  or  swollen  places. 

The  body  is  always  more  or  less  spread 
out.  Contractile  vacuoles  variable. 

The  macronucleus  is  spherical,  elon- 
gate, band-formed  or  horseshoe-shaped. 
Reproduction  takes  place  by  endoge- 
nous budding,  and  the  swarm  spores 
are  flat,  or  lenticular  with  a distinct 
ciliary  girdle.  They  are  frequently 
parasitic.  Fresh  and  salt  water. 

Trichophrya  salparum  Entz  ’84. 

Butschli  '88;  Schewiakoff  '93;  Trichophrya 
ascidiarum  Lachmann  ’59;  Rene  Sand  1901. 


The  body  is  somewhat  cup-form, 
with  a large,  flat  base.  The  anterior  bor- 
der is  rounded,  each  of  the  ends  being 
somewhat  truncate  and  carrying  a bun- 
dle of  tentacles  all  capitate  and  similar. 

These  may  be  continued  internally  as  far  as  the  nucleus  (Sand).  The  cytoplasm  is  uncolored,  but  may 
contain  some  brilliant  granules.  The  nucleus  is  granular  and  spherical,  band  or  horseshoe  formed. 

This  species  was  found  by  Dr.  G.  Hunter  on  the  branchial  bars  of  the  Ascidian  Molgulci  manhat- 
tensis,  where  great  numbers  of  them  are  often  parasitic. 


LIST  OF  REFERENCES. 

Auerbach,  L.  ’54.  Ueber  Encystierung  von  Oxytricha  pellionella.  Zeit.  wiss.  Zool.,  v,  1854. 

’55.  Ueber  die  Einzelligkeit  der  Amoeben.  Zeit.  wiss.  Zool.,  vn,  1855. 

Balbiani,  E.  G.  ’61.  Recherches  sur  les  phenomenes  sexuelles  des  Infusoires.  Jour,  de  la  physiol., 
iv,  1861. 

’85.  Sur  un  Infusoire  parasite  du  sang  de  l’Aselle  aquatique.  Rec.  zool.  Suisse,  ii,  1885. 

Bekgh,  R.  S.  ’79.  Tiamnafusus  Cl.  & Lach.  Vid.  Med.  f.  d.  Nat.  Foren.  Kjobenhavn. 

’82.  Der  Organismus  der  Cilioflagellaten.  Morph.  Jahr.,  vii,  p.  177. 

Brady,  Id.  B.  ’79.  Report  on  the  Foraminifera  dredged  by  II.  M.  S.  Challenger  during  the  years 
1873-1876.  Challenger  Reports,  Zoology,  ix. 

Brandt,  K.  ’96.  Die  Tintinnodeen.  Bibliot.  Zoolog.,  xx,  1896. 

Butschli,  0.  ’76.  Studien  fiber  die  ersten  Entwickelungsvorg.  der  Eizelle,  die  Zelltheilung,  und  die 

Conjugation  der  Infusorien.  Abhand.  der  Senck.  naturf.  Ges.  Freiburg,  x,  1876. 

’83-’88.  Die  Protozoen.  Bronn’s  Klassen  u.  Ord.  des  Tierreichs. 

Carpenter,  W.  B.  ’56.  Researches  on  the  Foraminifera.  Phil.  Trans.  (2),  p.  547. 

Carter,  H.  J.  ’56.  Notes  on  the  fresh-water  Infusoria  of  the  island  of  Bombay.  Ann.  Mag.  Nat. 
Hist.  (2),  xviii. 

’63.  On  the  coloring  matter  of  the  Red  Sea.  Id.  (3),  xi. 

’63a.  On  Amoeba princeps  and  its  reproductive  cells.  Id.  (3),  xii. 

’64.  On  fresh-water  Rhizopods  of  England  and  India.  Id.  (3),  xm,  p.  13. 

’65.  On  the  fresh-  and  salt-water  Rhizopods  of  England  and  India.  Id.  (3),  xv,  p.  277. 

Cienkowsky,  L.  ’55.  Bemerkungen  fiber  Stein’s  Acinetenlehre.  Bull.  Pliys.  Math.  Acad.,  St.  Peters- 
burg, xm,  p.  297  (also  in  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (3),  xm). 

’55.  Ueber  Cystenbildung  bei  Infusorien.  Zeit.  wiss.  Zool.,  vi,  p.  301. 

’61.  Beitrage  zur  Kenntniss  der  Monaden.  Arch.  f.  mik.  Anat.,  i,  1865,  p.  203. 

Claparede,  E.  ’54.  On  Actinophrys  sol.  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (2),  xv,  1854. 

’60.  Recherches  sur  les  annelides,  etc.,  observes  dans  les  Hebrides.  Mem.  Soc.  phys.  d’hist. 

nat.,  Geneve,  xvi,  1860. 

’67.  Miscellanees  zoologiques.,  Ann.  d.  sc.  nat.  zool.  (5),  vm,  1867. 

Claparede  et  Lachmann.  ’58-’ 60.  Etudes  sur  les  Infusoires  et  les  Rhizopodes.  Mem.  Inst,  gene- 
voise,  v vi,  vii. 


MARINE  PROTOZOA  FROM  WOODS  HOLE. 


467 


Cohn,  F.  ’51.  Beitriige  z.  Entwicklungsges.  der  Infusorien.  Zeit,  wiss.  Zool.,  hi,  1851;  iv,  1853, 

’57.  Ueber  Fortpflanzung  von  Nassula  etegans  Ehr.  Zeit.  wiss.  Zool.,  ix,  1857,  p.  143. 

Cost  15,  M.  ’64.  Developpement  des  Infusoires  eilies  dans  une  maceration  de  foin.  Ann.  d.  sc.  nat. 
zool.  (5),  n. 

Daday,  E.  v.  ’86.  Ein  kleiner  Beitrag  der  Infusorien-Fauna  des  Golfes  v.  Neapel.  Mitt.  Zool.  St. 
Neap.,  vi,  p.  481. 

’88.  Monographic  der  Familie  der  Tintinnodeen.  Mitt.  Zool.  St.  Neap.,  vm,  p.  473. 

Davis,  J.  ’79.  On  a new  species  of  Cothnrnia,  Jour.  Roy.  Mic.  Soc.,  ii,  1879. 

Du.iardin,  F.  ’35.  Recherches  sur  les  organismes  inferieures.  Ann.  d.  sc.  nat.  zool.  (2),  iv,  p.  343. 
’41.  Histoire  naturelle  des  Zoophytes  infusoires.  Paris,  1841. 

Ehrenbeug,  C.  G.  ’31.  Ueber  die  Entwickelung  und  Lebensdauer  d.  Infusionsthiere.  Abhand.  d. 
Berlin  Ak.,  1831,  p.  1. 

’38.  Die  Infusionsthierchen  als  vollkommne  Organismen.  Leipzig,  1838. 

Engelmann,  Th.  W.  ’78.  Zur  Phvsiologie  der  Contractilen  Vacuolen  der  Infusionsthiere.  Zool. 
Anz.,  i,  p.  121. 

Entz,  G.  ’84.  Ueber  Infusorien  d.  Golfes  v.  Neapel.  Mitt.  Zool.  St.  Neap.,  v,  p.  289. 

’85.  Zur  naheren  Kenntniss  der  Tintinnodeen.  Mitt.  Zool.  St.  Neap.,  vi,  p.  185. 

Fabre-Domergue,  P.  ’85.  Note  sur  les  Infusoires  eilies  de  la  baie  de  Concarneau.  Jour.  d.  l’anat.  et 
de  la  phys.,  xxi,  p.  554. 

’91.  Materiaux  pour  servir  a l’histoire  des  Infusoires  eilies.  Ann.  d.  mic.,  m,  1890-91,  p.  49. 

Fol,  II.  ’83.  Further  contribution  to  the  knowledge  of  the  Tintinnodea.  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (5), 

xii,  p.  73. 

France,  R.  H.  ’97.  Der  Organismus  der  Craspedomonaden.  Budapest. 

Fromentel,  E.  de.  ’74.  Etudes  sur  les  microzoaires,  etc.  Paris,  1874. 

Gourret  et  Roeseii.  ’88.  Contributions  a l’etude  des  Protozoaires  de  la  Corse.  Arch.  d.  biol.,  vm, 
p.  139. 

Greeff,  R.  ’66.  Ueber  einige  in  der  Erde  lebende  Amoeben  und  andere  Rhizopoden.  Arch.  f.  mik. 
Anat.,  ii,  p.  299. 

’70.  Untersuch ungen  ueber  den  Ban  u.  d.  Naturgeschichte  d.  Vorticellen.  Arch.  f.  Naturges., 

XXXVI,  XXXVII. 

’71.  Ueber  die  Actinophryens  oder  Sonnenthierchen  des  Siissenwassers  als  echte  Radiolarien. 

Sitz.  Ber.  d.  Niederrh.  Ges.  i.  Bonn,  xxvm,  p.  4. 

’75.  Ueber  Radiolarien  u.  Radiolarienartige  Rhizopoden  des  Siissenwassers  2.  Arch.  f.  mik. 

Anat.,  xi. 

’88.  Studien  fiber  Protozoen.  Sitz.  Ber.  Ges.  z.  Bef.  d.  ges.  Nat.,  Marburg,  1888,  p.  91. 

Grenacher,  II.  ’68.  Ueber  Actinophrys  sol  Ehr.  Verh.  phys.-med.  Ges.  Freiburg  (n.  F. ),  I. 
Gruber,  A.  ’83.  Beobachtungen  an  Chilodon  curvidenlis  n.  sp.  Festschr.  56.  Vers.  Deutsch.  Naturf. 
gewid.  v.  d.  Naturf.  Ges.  Freiburg,  ii,  p.  1. 

• ’84.  Die  Protozoen  des  Hafens  v.  Genua.  Nova  Act.  d.  Iv.  Leop.-Car.  Deutsch.  Akad.  d. 

Naturf.,  xlvi,  p.  475. 

’87.  Ueber  der  Bedeutung  der  Conjugation  bei  den  Infusorien.  Ber.  d.  Naturf.  Ges. 

Freiburg,  ii,  p.  31. 

H/£ckel,  E.  ’73.  Zur  Morphologie  der  Infusorien.  Jena  Zeit.,  vii,  p.  516. 

Hertwig,  R.  ’76.  Ueber  Podophrya  gemmipara,  nebst  Bemerkungen  zum  Ban  u.  d.  systemat. 
Stellung  d.  Acineten.  Morph.  Jahr.,  iv,  p.  20. 

Hertwig  u.  Lesser.  Ueber  Rhizopoden  u.  denselben  *Tiah e stehende  Organismen.  Arch.  f.  mik. 
Anat.,  x,  Suppl.,  p.  35. 

Huxley,  T.  II.  ’57.  On  Hysteria,  a new  genus  of  Infusoria.  Jour.  Mic.  Sci.,  v,  p.  78. 

Ishikawa,  C.  Ueber  eine  in  Misaki  vorkommende  Art  v.  Ephelota,  etc.  Journ.  Coll.  Sci.  Imp. 
Univ.  Tokyo,  Japan,  x,  pt,.  2. 

James-Clark,  II.  ’66.  On  the  Spongue  ciliahe  as  Infusoria  flagellata,  etc.  Mem.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat. 
Hist.  (3),  i,  p.  1. 

Kent,  W.  Saville.  ’81.  Manual  of  the  Infusoria.  London,  1881. 

Klebs,  G.  ’84.  Ein  kleiner  Beitrag  z.  Kenntniss  d.  Peridineen.  Bot.  Zeit.,  xlii,  p.  721. 

’92.  Flagellaten  Studien  1.  Zeit.  wiss.  Zool.,  lv. 

Labbe,  A.  ’95.  Sur  les  Protozoaires  marins  de  Roscoff.  Arch.  d.  zool.  exper.  (3),  N.  et  R.,  p.  xiv. 
Lauterbgrn,  R.  ’94.  Beitriige  z.  Siisswasserfauna  der  Insel  Helgoland.  Wiss.  Meeresunt.  Ivornm. 
wiss.  Unt.  d.  Meere  Kiel  (2),  i,  p.  215. 

Leidy,J.  ’77.  Remarksupon  Rhizopods  and  notice  of  a new  form.  Proc.  Ac.  Sci.  Phila.,  1877,  p.  293. 
’79.  Fresh  water  Rhizopods  of  North  America.  Washington,  1879. 

Lieberkuiin,  N.  ’56.  Ueber  Protozoen.  Notes  from  a letter  to  C.  Th.  v.  Siebold.  Zeit.  wiss.  Zool., 
vm,  p.  307. 

Maupas,  E.  ’81.  Contributions  a l’etude  des  Acinetiens.  Arch.  d.  zool.  exper.  (1),  ix,  p.  299. 

’83.  Contributions  a l’etude  morphologique  et  anatomique  des  Infusoires  eilies.  Id.  (2),  i. 

’83a.  Les  sucto-cilies  de  M.  Mereschowsky.  Comp.  Ren.,  xcv,  p.  1381. 

’88.  Recherches  experimentales  sur  la  multiplication  des  Infusoires  eilies.  Arch.  d.  zool. 

exper.  (2),  vi,  p.  165. 

Mereskowsky,  C.  ’78.  Studien  fiber  Protozoen  des  nordlichen  Russland.  Arch.  f.  mik.  Anat.,  xvi, 
p.  163. 


468 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Mereskowsky,  C.  ’81.  On  some  new  or  little-known  Infusoria.  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (5),  vn,  1881. 
Moebius,  K.  ’88.  Bruchstticke  einer  Infusorienfauna  tier  Kieler  Bucht.  Arch.  f.  Naturg.,  1888. 
Peck,J.  I.  ’S3.  On  the  food  of  the  menhaden.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Com.,  1893,  p.  113. 

’95.  The  sources  of  marine  food.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Com.,  1895,  p.  351. 

Perty,  M.  ’49.  Mikrosk.  Organ,  der  Alpen  u.  d.  Italien.  Schweiz.  Mitt.  d.  Naturf.  Ges.  in  Bern, 
164-165. 

’52.  Zur  Kenntniss  kleinster  Lebensformen,  etc.,  Bern. 

Pouchet,  G.  ’83;  ’85.  Contributions  a l’histoire  des  Peridiniens  marins.  Jour,  de  l’anat.  et  de  la 
phys.,  xix,  xxi.  o 

Quennerstedt,  A.  ’65;  ’67;  ’69.  Bidrag  till  Sveriges  Intusorie-fauna.  Lunds  Univ.  Arsskrift,  n, 
IV,  vi. . 

Sand,  R.  1901.  Etude  monographique  sur  le  groupe  des  Infusoires  tentaculiferes.  Ann.  d.  la  Soc. 

beige  de  microscopie,  xxiv,  xxv,  xxvi. 

Schaudinn,  F.  ’95.  Die  Heliozoen.  Das  Tierreich,  1895. 

Schewiakoff,  W.  ’89.  Beitrage  z.  Kenntniss  der  Holotrichen  Ciliaten.  Bib.  Zook,  v,  p.  1. 

’93.  Ueber  einige  ecto-u.  ento-parasitische  Protozoen  der  Cyclopiden.  Bull.  Soc.  nat.  Moscou, 

1893,  i. 

Schuett,  F.  ’95.  Die  Peridineen  d.  Plankton-Expedition,  1.  Kiel  u.  Leipzig. 

Schultze,  F.  E.  ’74;  75.  Rhizopodenstudien.  Arch.  f.  mik.  Anat.,  x,  xi,  xm. 

Schultze,  M.  ’62.  Ueber  d.  Organismus  d.  Polythalamien.  Leipzig,  1862. 

Shev yakov  ?.  ’96.  Monograph  on  Holotrichous  dilates.  (In  Russian. ) Mem.  of  the  St.  Petersburg 

Acad.,  vii. 

Stein,  F.  ’59;  78;  ’83.  Der  Organismus  der  infusionsthiere.  I.  Infusoria, ’59;  II.  Infusoria, ’78;  III. 
Flagellata,  ’83. 

’49.  Untersuchung  liber  die  Entwicklungs  d.  Infusorien.  Arch.  f.  Natur. , I,  p.  92. 

’54.  Die  Infusionsthiere  auf  ihre  Entwicklungsgeschichte  untersucht.  Leipzig,  1854. 

’60.  Ueber  Leucophrys  patula  u.  fiber  2 neue  Infusoriengattungen  Gyrocoris  u.  Lophomonas. 

Sitz.  Ber.  d.  K.-bohm.  Ges.  d.  Wiss.  d.  Prag,  1860,  p.  4. 

— ’64.  Ueber  die  neue  Ga ttung  Epiclintes.  IcL,  1864,  i. 

Sterki,  V.  ’78.  Beitrage  z.  Morphologie  der  Oxytrichinen.  Zeit.  wiss.  Zook,  xxxr,  p.  29. 

’98.  On  the  classification  of  ciliate  Infusoria.  Amer.  Natur.,  xxxii,  p.  425.  • 

Stevens,  N.  M.  1901.  Studies  on  ciliate  Infusoria.  Proc.  Calif.  Acad.  Sciences,  hi,  1. 

Stokes,  A.  C.  ’84.  Notices  of  some  new  parasitic  Infusoria.  Amer.  Nat.,  xvm,  p.  1081. 

’85.  Some  apparently  undescribed  Infusoria  from  fresh  water.  Ick,  xix,  p.  18. 

— ’87.  Some  new  hvpotrichous  Infusoria  from  American  fresh  waters.  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist, 

(5),  20. 

Tatem,  T.  G.  ’67.  New  species  of  microscopic  animals.  Q.  J.  M.  S.  (n.  s. ),  vii,  p.  251. 

Vejdowsky,  F.  ’79.  Monographic  der  Enehytraeiden.  Prag,  1869. 

Wallengren,  H.  ’94.  Studier  ofver  ciliata  Infusorier,  1.  Slagtet  Lichnophora.  Lund,  1894. 
Wallich,  G.  C.  ’63.  Observations  on  an  undescribed  indigenous  Amoeba.  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist. 
(3),  xi,  xii. 

Weston,  J.  ’56.  On  the  Aclinophrys  sol.  Q.  .7.  M.  S.,  iv,  p.  116. 

Wrzesniowski,  A.  ’61.  Observations  sur  quelques  Infusoires.  Ann.  d.  sc.,  nat.  zool.  (6),  xvi. 

’69.  Ein  Beitrag  zur  Anatoinie  der  Infusorien.  Arch.  f.  mik.  Anat.,  v,  p.  25. 

’70.  Beobachtungen  fiber  Infusorien  a.  d.  Umgebung  v.  Warschau.  Zeit.  wiss.  Zook,  xx, 

p.  467. 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Aclneta  divisa -465 

tuberosa • 465 

Acorn  Peak 195 

Actinophrys  sol 420 

adspersus,  Tautogolabrus 30 

aftinis,  Heros  157 

Afognak 239,240,243,244,245 

Afognak  Bay  Sailing  Directions 242 

Agosia  chrysogaster 148 

Ah-quay  River 386 

Ahrn-klm  River 385 

Ainsworth  & Dunn 351 

Alaska  Fishermen’s  Packing  Company 204,352 

Oil  and  Guano  Company 258 

Packers  Association 351, 353 

Packers’  Association  Saltery 210 

Packing  Company 201 

Salmon  Association 249,352 

Company 353 

Packing  and  Fur  Company 293 

Statistics 312-330 

Salt  Salmon,  Total  Pack 189 

Alaskan  Labor  in  Salmon  Canning 185 

Albatross  Itinerary  in  1900 176 

1901 350 

Aleck  Lake  and  Stream 278 

Alexander,  A . B , 349 

Alitak  Bay 221 

Sailing  Directions 223 

Alsek  Region 382 

altus,  Pseudopriacanthus 33 

American  Bait  for  French  Sardine  Fisheries 24 

Sardines  compared  with  French 23 

americanus,  P.seudopleuronectes 31 

Arnceba  guttula 417 

Amphidinium  operculatum 432 

Amphisia  kessleri 454 

Anabas  scandens 170 

Anableps  dovii 150 

analis,  Neomaenis 33 

Anchorage  Bay 220 

Anisonema  vitrea 426 

An-kau  River 383 

Annette  Island 359 

Anoplophrya  branchiarum 447 

Aplodinotus  grunniens 137, 154 

apodus.Neomsenis 33 

appendiculatus,  Diophrys 456 

Arctic  Fishing  Company 250 

. Packing  Company 201,210,224 

Aspidisca  hexeris 458 

polystyla 458 

Astasia  eontorta 426 

atlantitfus,  Tarpon 27 

Ayakulik  River 234 


Page. 

Babbling  Brook 228 

Back  Bay , . 241 

Bagre 140 

bahianus,  Teuthis 33 

Bait  used  in  Sardine  Fishery 7 

Balao 152 

Baranof  Island 380 

Packing  Company 253,271,274 

Barber,  C.  M 139 

Barnacle  Parasitic  on  Gills  of  Edible  Crabs 401-412 

Barnes  & Co.,  F.  C 352 

Barricading  Salmon  Streams 310 

Bartlett  Bay 374 

Saltery 262,376 

bartoni,  Chirostoma 152 

Basket  Bay 371 

Batraehoides  goldmani : 159 

Bay  of  Pillars 272 

Bean,  Barton  A 137 

Belonesox  belizanus 150 

Bering  Sea  Packing  Company 216 

beroidea,  Tintinnopsis 451 

Biliary  Calculi  in  Squeteague 131-135 

Billys  Hole  Lake 396 

Biological  Notes  No.  2 27-33 

Blaauw,  D 295 

Black  Cod 285 

blackfordi , N eomeenis 33 

Blenny,  Description  of  New  Species  from  Japan 93, 94 

Blue-fish 28 

Boake,  Bancroft 142,143 

Boat  Equipment  for  Salmon  Fishing 327-330 

Boats  in  Sardine  Fishery 5 

Boca  de  Quadra 295 

Bodo  caudatus 425 

globosus 425 

bonaci,  Mycteroperca 33 

Bonito 28 

Bopyrus  resupinatus 55 

Boston  Fishing  and  Trading  Company 294 

botrytis,  Codonosiga 424 

branchiarum,  Anoplophrya 447 

Branding  Salmon 192 

brasiliensis,  Hemiramphus 152 

Brevoortia  tyrannus 27 

Bristol  Bay  Canning  Company 201 

District,  Salmon  Canning 177-217 

Early  Records  of  Salmon  Fisheries 179 

Salmon  Rivers  179 

Bristol  Packing  Company 217,352 

Brockman,  Fred 371 

Brotherhood  of  Afognak  Pioneers 248 

Buhi  Lake,  Notes  on  Food-fishes  from 167-171 

Bumpus,  H.  C 45 

Bursaridse,  Key  to  Marine  Genera  of 448 


469 


470 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Page. 

butleri,  Poecilia 151 

Butterfly-fisli 33 

Calkins,  Gary  N.,  on  Marine  Protozoa  from  Woods 

Hole 413-468 

callarias,  Gadus 30 

Callbreath  Hatchery 302,308,354 

Callbreath,  John  C 273,301 

Callinectes  sapidus 401 

Campostoma  ornatum 14(1 

Can-making  Machines 184-191 

Cannery  Fillers 225 

Operations  in  Bristol  Bay  District 184 

Waste  in  Bristol  Bay  District 187 

Canning'Sardines 4 17-22 

Cans  in  Bristol  Bay  District 184 

Caranx  crysos 153 

hippos 152 

caudatum,  Strombidium 450 

caudatus,  Bodo 425 

Centropomus  mexicanus 153 

Centropristes  striatus 28 

eepedianum  exile,  Dorosoma 149 

Ceratium  fusus 432 

tripos 432 

Chaetodon  ocellatus 33 

Chamberlain,  F.  M 349 

charon,  Euplotes 455 

Checats  Stream 3G2 

Cheniga  Stream 391 

Chignik  Bay  Company 219 

District 218-248 

Chiliferidte,  Key  to  Marine  Genera  of 442 

Chilkat  River 398 

Chilkoot  Inlet 255 

Packing  Company 255 

River  and  Lake 256 

Chilodon  cucullulus 441 

Chinese  Labor  in  Salmon  Canning 185 

Chirostoma  bartoni 152 

humboldtianum 152 

lucius 152 

promelas 152 

Chlamydodontida;,  Key  to  Marine  Genera  of 439 

Choanoflagellida,  Key  to  Marine  Genera  of 421 

Cholmondeley  Sound 300 

chrysalis,  Pleuronema 444 

chrysogaster,  Agosia 148 

chrysops,  Stenotomus 28 

chrysopterus,  Orthopristis 153  | 

chrysurus,  Oeyurus 32 

Cichlasoma 137 

melanurus 157 

parma 156 

teapre 156 

cimbrius,  Rhinonemus 31 

cinctum,  Glenodinium 430 

Mesodinium 436 

cinereum,  Xystaema 153 

Clark,  John  W 206 

Clark  & Martin  Saltery 295 

Cleveland  Peninsula 283 

Close  Season  for  Redfisli  Fishing 311 

Clupanodon  pseudohispanicus 32 

Clupea  harengus 3 

pilchardus 2 

Coal  Bay 287 

Cod 30 


Page. 

Codonceca  gracilis ■. 423 

Codonosiga  botrytis 424 

cceruleus,  Teuthis 33 

Coho  Salmon 198,233,243 

Coker,  Robert  E.,  Notes  on  a Species  of  Barnacle  ( Di- 
chelaspis)  Parasitic  on  the  Gills  of  Edible  Crabs..  401-412 

Colpidium  colpoda 443 

Columbia  River  Boats 180 

River  Packers’  Association 351,353 

compressa,  Glenodinium 430 

Coney 153 

Conger  Eel,  Egg  and  Development  of 37-44 

Conorhynchos 137 

nelsoni 140 

Constantine  Cape 195 

contorta,  Astasia 426 

Cook  Inlet 249-252 

Copepods,  Reactions  to  Various  Stimuli  and  the  Bear- 
ing of  this  on  Daily  Depth  Migrations 103-123 

Copper  Mountain  Bay 300 

Copper  River 251 

Delta 398 

Coquenliena 398 

coronata,  Ephelota 404 

Laerymaria 434 

Cothurnia  erystallina  462 

imberbis 462 

nodosa 463 

cotnog,  Hemirhamphus 170 

Cow-fish 33 

Cragin,  Francis  W 141 

croicensis,  Scarus 32 

cruentatus,  Petrometopon 153 

crysos,  Caranx 153 

erystallina,  Cothurnia 462 

cucullulus,  Chilodon 441 

Gunner 30 

Cutlas-fish 28 

Cut-throat  Trout 200, 229 

cyanoguttatus,  Heros 157 

Cynoscion  regalis 29,45 

Biliary  Calculi  in 131-135 

Cyprinodon  eximius 149 

Danger  Reef 241 

Dangerous  River  386 

davidoffi,  Tintinnopsis 451 

Deam,  Charles  C 139 

Depth  Migrations  of  Copepods 103-123 

Dichelaspis  mulleri 401-412 

digitale,  Peridinium 431 

Dinoflagellidia,  Key  to  Families  of 427 

Dinophysidse,  Key  to  Marine  Genera  of 428 

Diophrys  appendiculatus 456 

Disenchantment  Bay 389 

Distephanus  speculum 427 

divergens,  Peridinium 431 

divisa,  Acineta  465 

Dog  Salmon 198'  233, 243 

Salted 286 

Dolly  Varden  Trout 200, 218, 229, 232, 243 

Do-overs 188 

Dormitator  inaculatus 159 

dormitor,  Philypnus 158 

Dorosoma  eepedianum  exile 149 

Dot  Island 241 

dovii,  Anableps 150 

Drake  Head 221 


INDEX. 


471 


Page. 

Dry  Bay 387 

Dry-salted  Salmon 189 

Duke  Island  Stream 298 

Dnndas  Bay  Stream 376 

Dysteria  lanceolata 441 

Edwards,  Vinal  N 27,35 

edwardsii,  Psenes 35 

Eeke  Inlet 300 

Eel,  Conger,  Egg  and  Development  of 37-44 

Leptocephalus  of 81-92 

Egashak  River 194,196 

Egegak  Fishing  Station 212 

Packing  Company 213 

River 194,195-212 

Eigenmann,  Carl  H.,  Description  of  a new  Oceanic 

Fish 25-36 

Egg  and  Development  of  the 

Conger  Eel 37-44 

Investigations  into  History  of 

Young  Squetague 45-51 

Leptocephalus  of  the  American 

Eel 81-92 

Ekuk  Village 195 

elegar.s,  Zoothamnium 461 

emmte,  Peritromus 452 

Enchelinidte,  Key  to  Marine  Genera  of 433 

Ephelota  coronata 464 

Epiclintes  radiosa 453 

Epinephelus  morio 32 

niveatus 32 

Escribano 152 

Eskimo  Dwellings 178 

Labor 186-246 

Eskimos,  Food  of , 178 

Eslopsarum  jordani 152 

Etolin  Point 196 

Euglenida,  Key  to  Families  and  Marine  Genera  of 422 

Eulophias  tanneri 93 

Euplotes  charon 455 

harpa 455 

Euplotidse,  Key  to  the  Marine  Genera  of 454 

Evermann,  B.  W.,  Fishes  collected  in  Mexico  and  Cen- 
tral America 137-159 

List  of  Fishes  known  to  occur  in  the 

Great  Lakes 95-96 

eximius,  Cyprinodon 149 

Exocoetus  rondeletii 32 

Exuviaella  lima 428 

marina 429 

Fairhaven  Canning  Company 351 

fasciola,  Lionotus 438 

Fassett,  H.  C 175,349 

Report  on  Karluk  Hatchery 331-348 

Felichthys  marinus 139 

felis,  Galeichthys 139 

Fidalgo  Island  Canning  Company 230, 352 

Fish-cleaning  Machines 191 

Fishermen  in  Bristol  Bay  District 183 

Fishes,  Dependence  on  Plant  Life 58 

from  Mexico  and  Central  America 137-159 

Fishing  Methods  and  Fishermen  of  Alaska 180 

Fish  Scales,  Organic  Constituents  of 97-102 

Trap  in  Wood  River 200 

Traps  used  in  Taking  Salmon 180 

Flagellidia,  Key  to  Orders  of 421 

Flasher 28 

Flat-fish  ...J 31 


Page. 

flavescens,  Sparisoma 32 

Floating  Trap  in  Salmon  Fishing 226 

Flying-fish 32 

Food-fishes  from  Philippine  Islands 167-171 

Fortmann,  Henry  F 349 

Four-bearded  Rockling 31 

Four-eyed  Fish 150 

Fredericks  Sal  tery 390 

French  Sardine  Industry 1-26 

Freshwater  Bay 373 

Fresh-water  Drum 154 

frigidus,  Notropis 148 

Frontonia  leucas 442 

Fundulus  grandis 149 

fusiformis,  Monosiga 424 

fusus,  Ceratium 432 

Tiarina 437 

Gadus  callarias 30 

Gaff-topsail 139 

Galeichthys  felis 139 

Gas  in  the  Swim-bladder  of  Fishes 125-130 

Gaspergou 154 

George  Inlet 360 

Gerres  mexicanus 154 

Gill-net  Boats  on  the  Nushagak  River  180 

Gill  Nets  used  in  taking  Salmon 180 

Girardinichthys  innominatus 149 

Glacier  Packing  Company  279,353 

glaucus,  Trachinotus 153 

Glenodinium  cinctum 430 

compressa 430 

globosus,  Bodo 425 

Gobius  sternbergi 169 

Goldman,  E.  A 137 

goldmani,  Batrachoides 159 

Goldsborough,  E.  L.,  on  Fishes  collected  in  Mexico 

and  Central  America 137-159 

Goose-fish 31 

gracile,  Gymnodinium  429 

gracilis,  Codonoeca  423 

Podophrya 463 

grandis,  Fundulus 119 

Grave,  Caswell 410 

Gray  Snapper 33,153 

Great  Lakes,  List  of  Fishes  known  to  occur  in 95-96 

Great  Northern  Fish  Company 284 

Green,  E.  H.,  Organic  Constituents  of  Scales  of  Fish. . 97-102 

Greenleaf , R.  P 165 

grlseus,  Lutianus 153 

Neomsenis  33 

Gromia  lagenoides 419 

Grouse  Island  Saltery 295 

grunniens,  Aplodinotus 154 

Guardian  Packing  Company 353 

Guavina 158 

Guitarro 139 

Gunther,  Albert 142 

Gut  Bay 380 

guttula,  Amoeba 417 

Gymnodinium  gracile 429 

Hremulon  parra 153 

Halibut 31 

Fisheries  of  Southeastern  Alaska 309 

Hanus  Bay 378 

Hard-tail 153 

harpa,  Euplotes 455 

Hatchery  at  Karluk, Report  on  331-348 


472 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION, 


Page. 

Hatchery  at  Klawak  299 

McHenry  Inlet 302 

Site 278 

Hemiramphus  brasiliensis 152 

cotnog 170 

hepatus,  Teuthis 33 

Hepburn,  A.  J ^175, 349 

Hermit  Crab,  a New  Isopod  Parasitic  on 53-56 

Heros  affinis 157 

cyanoguttatus 157 

urophthalmus  157 

Herrick,  Francis  H.,  on  the  Reproductive  Period  in 

the  Lobster 161-166 

Hessa  Inlet 300 

Heteromastigida,  Key  to  Families  and  Marine  Genera 

of 422 

Heterophrys  myriapoda 421 

Heterotrichida,  Key  to  Families  of 448 

Hetta  Lake 354 

Stream 300 

hexeris,  Aspidisca 458 

Hippocampus  hudsonius 27 

Hippoglossus  hippoglossus 31 

hippos,  Caranx  152 

Holocentrus 32 

Holotrichida,  Key  to  Family  of 433 

Hootznahoo  Inlet 258 

Horse  Cravalla  152 

Horse  Marine  Lagoon 231 

Stream 227 

hudsonius,  Hippocampus 27 

humboldtianum,  Chirostoma 152 

Hume-Aleutian  Cannery _ 235 

Hume  Brothers  & Hume 220, 239 

huracralis,  Sardinella 149 

Humpback  Salmon 233,243,282,290 

Hunter  Bay 299,300 

Hypotrichida,  Key  to  Families  of 452 

Ichthylepidin  , 97 

Icy  Strait  Packing  Company . 261, 271, 296, 376 

imberbis,  Cothurnia 462 

Indian  Labor  in  Salmon  Canning 298 

infusionum,  Lembus 446 

Infusoria,  Key  to 433 

innominatus,  Girardinichthys. . 149 

Inspection  of  Canned  Salmon 311 

Isopod  Parasitic  on  the  Hermit  Crab 53-56 

Italio  River 386 

Itinerary  of  Albatross  in  1900 176 

1901 350 

Jackpot  Stream 393 

James  Lake 358 

Jansen,  H.  C 207 

John  Lake 358 

Johnson,  P.  H 194 

Johnson  Saltery 215 

jordani,  Eslopsarum 152 

Kagahine 298 

Kah-Shakes  Stream 361 

Kamchatka  River 194 

Karluk 235-238 

Hatchery 331-348,354 

Karta  Bay 1 286,  300 

Stream 298 

Kasaan  Bay 287  | 

Ivegan 298 

Kempff,  Clarence  S 175,349  | 


Page. 

Kempff  Bay 222 

Kenai 250 

Kennedy,  C.  H.,  Leptocephalus  of  American  Eel 81-92 

kessleri,  Amphisia 454 

Ketchikan 290 

Killisnoo 258 

Kina  Stream 287 

King  Salmon 233 

in  Alaska 188 

Kithraum 298 

Klakas  Inlet 300 

Klawak 298,300 

Klootchmen 261,294 

Kodiak  Packing  Company 224,226 

Koggiung 206 

ICokon-hee-ni  River 387 

Kook  Bay,  Stream,  and  Lake 371 

1 Kosmikoff,  Walter 269 

Kunk  Stream 365 

Kushneahin  Stream 368 

Kuskokwim  River 193 

ICussilof  Cannery  Company 250 

Kutlakoo 272 

Kuiu  Island 272 

Kvichak  Bay  and  River 205 

Packing  Company 207 

River 194 

Labeling  Canned  Salmon 311 

Labidocera  festiva 122 

Labor  employed  in  Salmon  Fishing  and  Canning.. . 320-321 

Laery maria  coronata 434 

lagenula 433 

Lactophrys  tricorn  is 33 

Ladd  Saltery 249 

lsevigatus,  Lagocephalus 30 

lagenoides,  Gromia 419 

lagenula,  Lacrymaria  433 

Lagocephalus  lsevigatus 30 

Lake  Erie,  Plants  of 57-79 

lanceolata,  Dysteria 441 

latipinna,  Mollienisia 151 

Laws  concerning  Alaska  Salmon  Fisheries 310,311 

Lazy  Bay  Sailing  Directions 223 

Lembus  infusionum 446 

pusillus 446 

Lemesurier  Point 283 

lentiginosus,  Rhinobatus 139 

Lcpisosteus  tropicus 139 

Leptocephalus  amphioxus 86 

caudomaeulatus 87 

conger 44,89 

diptychus 84 

discus 91 

gilberti 92 

gillii 88 

grassii 84 

humilis 92 

latus , 87 

morri.sii 89 

mucronatus 90 

rex 86 

strommani 89 

lepturus,  Trjchiurus 28 

lermEe,  Notropis -. 147 

leucas,  Frontonia 442 

Leueiscus  nigrescens 116 

Libinia  canalieulata 402 


INDEX, 


473 


Page. 

Lichnophora  macfarlandi 459 

lima,  Exuviaella 428 

lineatus,  Roccus 29 

Lionotus  fasciola 438 

Litnik  Bay 240 

littoralis,  Mentieirrhus 154 

Lizzie  Williams,  bark 226 

lobatula,  Truncatulina 420 

Lobotes  surinamensis 28 

Lobster,  Reproductive  Period  of 161-166 

Lockenuck  River 194 

Long-jaws 151 

Lophius  piscatorius 31 

Loring 293 

Loxophyllum  setigerum 438 

lucius,  Chirostoma 152 

Lutianus  griseus 153 

luzonensis,  Mistichthys 167 

macfarlandi,  Lichnophora 459 

Mackerel 27 

Macklau  River 198 

maculatus,  Bormitator 159 

Scomberomorus 28 

Malinof  Stream 247 

Mallard  Pucks  in  Alaska 229 

Mantle,  Jack 272 

Mantle  Salteries 276 

Mapiro 159 

Marbled  Rock-fish 33 

marina,  Exuviaella 429 

Oxyrrhis 425 

Uronema 444 

Vorticella 461 

Marine  Protozoa  from  Woods  Hole  . . . 413-468 

marinus,  Felichthys 139 

marmoratus,  Spheroides 158 

Symbranehus 148 

Marsh,  M.  C 150 

Mastigamceba  simplex 422 

McCauley,  Tom 267 

McHenry  Inlet 301 

melanurus,  Cichlasoma 157 

Menhaden 27 

Menippe  mercenaria 402 

Mentieirrhus  littoralis 154 

Mesodinium  cinctum 436 

Methods  of  Salmon  Canneries - 190-191 

Metlakahtla  Industrial  Company 297,352 

Mexican  Mojarra 154 

Mexican  Robalo 153 

mexicanus,  Centropomus 153 

Gerres 154 

Meyers  Stream,  Cleveland  Peninsula 283 

Microgadus  tomcod 30 

Middle  Reef 223 

Migrations  of  Copepods 103-123 

Miller,  C.  R 175,349 

Miners  River 394 

Mistichthys  luzonensis 167 

Moira  Sound 300 

Mojarra  Blanca 153 

Mollienisia  latipinna 151 

Monadida,  Key  to  the  Families  of 421 

Monas 423 

Monosiga  fusiformis 424 

ovata 424 

morio,  Epinephelus 32 

F.  C.  B. 


Page. 

Moser  Bay 225 

Moser,  Jefferson  F.,  on  Salmon  Investigations  of  the 


Steamer  Albatross  in  1900 173-348 

Moser,  Jefferson  F.,  on  Salmon  Investigations  of 

1901  349-398 

Movements  of  Salmon,  Influence  of  Winds  on 189 

Mud  Parrot-fish 32 

Munn,  William 225 

Mutton-fish 33 

Mycteroperca  bonaci 33 

venenosa 33 

myriapoda,  Heterophrys 421 

Naha  Stream  and  Lake 291-293 

Naknek  Packing  Company 211,217,352 

River 194,206,209 

Narrows 224 

Nassula  microstoma 440 

Navigation  Notes 194-197 

Needle-fish 151 

Nelson,  Charles , 216 

Nelson,  E.W 137 

nelsoni,  Conorhynchos 140 

Nelson  Saltery 216 

N eomtenis  analis 33 

apodus 33 

blackfordi 33 

griseus 33 

Net  Equipment  for  Salmon  Fishing 322-326 

Nets,  Dyeing 6 

used  in  Sardine  Fishery 6 

Nichols  Bay 300 

Hills 195 

Uigrescens,  Leuciscus 146 

niveatus,  Epinephelus 32 

nodosa,  Cothurnia 463 

North  Alaska  Salmon  Company 209,352 

Bay  of  Pillars 275 

Olga  Stream 227 

Pacific  Trading  and  Packing  Company 298,352 

notatus,  Tylosurus 151 

Notropis  frigidus 148 

lermte 147 

santamarite 147 

Nowis-kay * 298 

Nushagak  Canneries 201,203 

Navigation  Notes  on 196 

River 193,194,197 

Nutqua  Inlet 300 

ocellatus,  Chtetodon 33 

Ocyurus  chrysurus  32 

Odiak 251 

Oil  used  in  Canning  Sardines 19, 20 

Old  Johnson  Stream 298 

Old-wife 153 

Olga  Bay 223, 224 

Cannery 225 

Stream 227 

Oliver  Smith  Cannery 226 

Ondaatje,  William 143 

onitis,  Tautoga 30 

Opalinidse,  Key  to  Marine  Genera  of 447 

operculatum,  Amphidinium 432 

Ophiocephalus  striatus 171 

Orca 252 

Organic  Constituents  of  Scales  of  Fish 97-102 

ornatum,  Campostoma 146 

Orr,  Cyrus 369 

1901—31 


474 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION. 


Page. 

Orthopristis  chrysopterus . 153 

ovata,  Monosiga : 424 

Owen.R 142 

Oxyrrhis  marina 425 

Oxytrichid®,  Key  to  the  Marine  Genera  of 452 

Pacific-American  Fisheries  Company 351 

Pacific  Coast  and  Norway  Packing  Company 263,352 

Packing  Company 251 

and  Navigation  Company,  Properties 

acquired 351 

Steam  Whaling  Company. . 238, 250, 252, 299 

Pagurus  longicarpus 53 

Pantosteus  plebeius 146 

I'aramanof  Stream 247 

Parent  Stream  Theory 247, 308 

Parker,  G.  H.,  on  the  Reactions  of  Copepods  to  Vari- 
ous Stimuli  and  the  Bearing  of  this  on  Daily  Depth 

Migrations 103-123 

parma,  Cichlasoma 166 

parra,  Hsemulon 153 

Parrot-fish 32 

patellina,  Vorticella 461 

Pearson,  T.  G 401 

Pedersen,  L.  A 211 

Peixe  Agulha 152 

pellucidus,  Psenes 36 

Peninsula  Fishing  and  Trading  Company 398 

Peridinid®,  Key  to  Marine  Genera  of 427 

Peridinium  digitale 431 

divergens 431 

Peritrichida,  Key  to  Families  of 459 

Peritrorhus  emmee 452 

Pescado  Blanco  de  Chalso 152 

Petenia  splendida 155 

Peter  Johnson  Stream 298, 300, 356 

Petrometopon  cruentatus 153 

Philippine  Islands,  Notes  on  Food-fishes  from 167-171 

Philypnus  dormitor 158 

phcenicopterus,  Trachelocerca 435 

Phryxus  resupinatus 53 

Pieters,  A.  J.,  on  the  Plants  of  Western  Lake  Erie 57-79 

Pig-fish 153 

Pillar  Bay.  = 272 

Streams 275,276 

piscatorius,  Lophius 31 

Plagiotomid®,  Key  to  the  Marine  Genera  of 448 

Plants  of  Western  Lake  Erie 57-79 

plebeius,  Pantosteus 146 

Pleuronema  chrysalis 444 

setigera 445 

Pleuronemid®,  Key  to  Marine  Genera  of : . . 444 

plumieri,  Scorp®na 33 

Podophrya  gracilis 463 

Pcecilia  butleri 151 

Point  Barrie  Saltery 369 

Point  Ellis  Stream 272 

Point  Highfield 279 

Point  Roberts  Packing  Company 207 

Pollachius  virens 30 

Pollock 30 

Polymastigida,  Key  to  Marine  Genera  of 422 

polystyla,  Aspidisca 458 

Pomadasis  ramosus 153 

Pomatomus  saltatrix 28 

Portland- Alaska  Packers’  Association 351,353 

Premier,  schooner 216 

Prince  William  Sound 251, 381 


Page. 

Prince  William  Sound  Canneries 397 

Streams 390 

promelas,  Chirostoma 152 

Prorocentrid®,  Key  to  Marine  Genera  of 427 

Prosper  Fishing  and  Trading  Company 217 

Protection  Point 195,197 

Psenes  edwardsii 35 

pellucidus  36 

pseudohispanicus,  Clupanodon 32 

Pseudopleuronectes  americanus 31 

Pseudopriacanthus  altus 33 

Puffer ns 

Purse  Seines  in  Salmon  Fisheries 310 

pusillus,  Lembus 446 

Pyramid  Harbor  Packing  Company 253 

Quadra 295,298 

Quadra  Packing  Company 295,296 

Quarto  Ojos 150 

radiosa,  Epiclintes 453 

Railroad  in  Alaska 390 

ramosus,  Pomadasis 153 

Raspberry  Island 239 

Red  Bay  Stream 267 

Redfish,  Small 233 

Statistics  of  Karluk  Canneries 237 

Red  Grouper 32 

Red  Hind 153 

Red  Salmon  Packing  Company 352, 353 

Red  Snapper 33 

regalis,  Cynoscion 29,45 

Revilla 288 

Rhamdia  wagneri 146 

Rhinobatus  lentiginosus 139 

Rhinonemus  cimbrius 31 

Rice’s  Saltery,  Karta  Bay 286 

Richardson  Filter 337 

Richardson,  F.  W 167 

Roccus  lineatus 29 

Rodman,  Hugh 175,349 

Rodman  Reach 224 

rondeletii,  Exoccetus , 32 

Rose,  J.  N 152 

Royal  Packing  Company 241 

Royer- Warnock  Packing  Company : . . . 264 

Runner 153 

Runs  of  Salmon 183 

Russian-American  Packing  Company 241 

Russian  Seal  Skin  Company 191 

Sailing  Directions 223-224 

Al'ognak  Bay 242 

McHenry  Inlet 301 

Salmon  Bay  Saltery 267 

Stream 266,366 

Branding 192- 

Canneries  and  their  Methods 190-191 

Cured  by  Eskimos 187 

Eggs,  Size  of ...  306 

Fishing  on  the  Nushagak 197 

Number  of  Pounds  in  the  Case 188 

Traps 218, 281 

salparum,  Trichophrya 466 

saltatrix,  Pomatomus 28 

Saltery  of  F.  A.  Fredericks 390 

See  & Flenner 390 

C.  E.  Whitney 205 

Salting  Salmon 189 

Sal  Salmon  Pack  of  Alaska  313 


INDEX, 


475 


Page 

San  Juan  Fish  and  Packing  Company 352 

santamariee,  Notropis 147 

Sarda  sarda 28 

Sardina  Escamuda 149 

Sardine  Canning 17-22 

Industry  of  France 1-26 

Sardinella  humeralis 149 

Sargent,  Porter  E 37 

Sar-kar  Stream 369 

Scales  of  Fish,  Organic  Constituents  of 97-102 

scandens,  Anabas 170 

Scarus  croicensis 32 

Schanz,  A.  B 206 

Schoolmaster 33 

Scomberomorus  maculatus , 28 

Scomber  scombrus 27 

Scorpeena  plumieri 33 

Scorpion-fish 33 

Soup 28 

Sea  Bass 28 

Cat-fish 139 

Sea-horse 27 

Seetuck  River 384 

setigera,  Pleuronema 445 

Uronyehia 457 

setigerum,  Loxophyllum 438 

Sherwood,  George  H 27 

Shipley  Bay  and  Stream 269, 270, 271 

Saltery 262 

Short  Big-eye 33 

sieboldi,  Trichosphaerium 418 

simplex,  Mastigamceba 422 

Sitkoh  Bay  379 

Size  of  Salmon  Eggs 306 

Skookum  Chuck 300 

Smith,  Hugh  M 32,415 

Description  of  a New  Species  of  Blenny 

from  Japan 93,94 

Food-fishes  of  Lake  Buhi,  Philippine 

Islands 167-171 

French  Sardine  Industry 1-26 

Smooth  Puffer 30 

Snettisham  Port 260 

Snowy  Grouper 32 

Snug  Harbor 223 

Cannery 226 

Sockeye  Salmon 254 

sol,  Actinophrys 420 

Soldering  Machine 191 

South  Alaska  Packing  Company 390 

Southeastern  Alaska 253-309 

South  End  Cannery 225 

Southern  Hickory  Shad 149 

South  Olga  Stream 230 

Spanish  Mackerel 28 

Sardine 32 

Sparisoma  flaveseens 32 

speculum,  Distephanus 427 

Spheroides  marmoratus 158 

testudineus _ 158 

splendida,  Petenia 155 

Squeteague 29 

Biliary  Calculi  in 131-135 

Investigations  into  the  Young 45-51 

Squirrel-fish 32 

Statistics  of  Alaska  Salmon  Fisheries 312-330 

Steelhead  Salmon 243 


Page. 

Stegophryxus  hyptius 53 

Stenotomus  ehrysops 28 

Stentoridae,  Key  to  the  Marine  Genera  of 449 

Sterling,  ship 196, 208 

sternbergi,  Gobius 169 

striatus,  Centropristes 28 

Ophiocephalus 171 

Striped  Bass 29 

Strombidium  eaudatum 450 

Stu-hee-nook  River 387 

Suctoria,  Key  to  Families  of 463 

Sukkwan  Inlet 300 

Surf  Whiting 154 

surinamensis,  Lobotes 28 

Swell-fish 158 

Symbranchus  marmoratus 148 

Tahlekuk 197 

Taku  Fishing  Company 260 

Inlet 259 

Inlet  Saltery 262 

Packing  Company 259 

Tumgas 298 

Stream 359 

Tang 33 

tanneri,  Eulophias 93 

Tarpon  atlanticus 27 

Tautog 30 

Tautoga  onitis 30 

Tautogolabrus  adspersus 30 

Ta-wah  Stream 383 

teapse,  Cichlasoma 156 

Tebenkof  Bay 277 

testudineus,  Spheroides 158 

Teuthis  bahianus 33 

coeruleus 33 

hepatus 33 

Tha-ghe-an  Stream 384 

Thlinket  Packing  Company 280 

Thompson,  Millett  T.,  on  a New  Isopod  Parasitic  on 

the  Hermit  Crab 53-56 

Thoms  Stream 282 

Tiarina  fusus 437 

timucu,  Tylosurus 152 

Tintinnidse,  Key  to  the  Marine  Genera  of 451 

Tintinnopsis  beroidea 451 

davidoffi 451 

Togiak  River 193 

Tomeod 30 

tomcod,  Microgadus 30 

Tongass  Narrows 288 

Tower,  R.  W.,  Biliary  Calculi  in  the  Squeteague 131-135 

Gas  in  Swim-Bladder  of  Fishes 125-130 

Organic  Constituents  of  Scales  of  Fish . . 97-102 

Trac-helinidae,  Key  to  the  Marine  Genera  of 437 

Trachelocerea  phcenicopterus 435 

Trachinotus  glaucus 153 

Trichiurus  lepturus 28 

Trichophrya  salparum 466 

Trichosphaerium  sieboldi 418 

tricornis,  Lactophrys 33 

Triple-tail 28 

Tropical  Gar  Pike 139 

tropicus,  Lepisosteus 139 

tripos,  Ceratium 432 

Truncatulina  loeatula 420 

tuberosa,  Acineta 465 

Turner,  William 143 


476 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  UNTTED  STATES  FISH  COMMISSION 


Page. 

Twelvemile  Arm 287 

Tylosurus  notatus 151 

timucu 152 

tyrannus,  Brevoortia 27 

Ugashik  Fishing  Station 216 

River 195,214' 

Union  Bay 284 

Packing  Company 352 

Uronema  marina 444 

Uronychia  setigera 457 

urophthalmus,  Heros 157 

Us-tay  River 387 

Uyak 238 

venenosa,  Mycteroperca 33 

Vessels  employed  in  Salmon  Fishing 314-319 

virens,  Pollachius 30 

vitrea,  Anisonema 426 

Vorticella  marina 461 

patellina 461 

Vorticellid®,  Key  to  the  Marine  Genera  of 460 

wagneri,  Rhamdia 146 

Ward  Cove 288 


Page. 

Waste  in  Salmon  Fishing 182 

Western  Fisheries  Company 253,376 

White-meated  Salmon 259 

Wildwood  Bark 196 

William  Lake 358 

Wilson,  H.  V 401 

Winter  Island 241 

Wood  River 194,198 

Wrangell 279 

Narrows 261 

Narrows  Stream 261 

Wyman,  Jeffries 140 

Xystfema  cinereum  153 

Yakutat 389 

Yellow-finned  Grouper 33 

Yellow-tail 32 

Yes  Bay 294 

Yukon  River 193 

Zapors 244 

Zeller,  George  A 167 

Zimovia  Strait 282 

Zoothamnium  elegans 461 


o 


W m o '>W  “ 0 v/^v^x  r: ' o 

z - - 2. 

is  saiavuan  librar ies^smithsonian^institution ^NoiiniiiSNi^NViNOSHiiws^sa lava 


^INSTITUTION^  NOlinillSNl^NVINOSHllWS^SH  I HVH  9 ll^LI  BRAR  I ES ^SMITHSONIAN^INSTITUl 


ms  saiavaan 

00 


> 'w'*'  ^ 2 55  — 

LIBRARIES  SMITHSONIAN  INSTITUTION  NOIlfUllSNI  NVIN0SH1SIAIS  S3iawa 

00  ^ ^ „-v , 10 


AN”*  INSTITUTION  ^ N0lini!lSNI|_NVINQSHlllNS^S3  ! aVH  H B RAR  1 ES^SMITHSONIANJNSTiTU' 

O — /foaTS'v  O m /<TT2?Q 

03 


oo 


m 
co 

«s  S3 1 a va  a n 

OO 


30 

> Ip,**,  -to-.,  r- 

K'asv'X'  rn 
co 


BR  ARIES  SMITHSONIAN  INSTITUTION  NOIJLfUIlSNI  NVINOSHIIWS  S3  I a Vi 
oo  z --  co  2 <2 


O X O rj« 

£ 8 ^#0?  x k* 

, »w  i if  //  i 

3>  ^ "w&*  .J&'  ^ C/5  

^INSTITUTION  WWO!iniIISNI_NVINOSHillA!S  S3  I HVH  8 I1_LI  B RAR  I ES  SMITHSONIAN  JNSTITU 


O X^osv^> 

WSZ  S3  iavaan"JL!BRARI  ES_  SMITHSONIAN  ^INSTITUTION  NOlinillSNl^NVINOSHlIINS^SS  I HV 


5y  iT  \-w 
m 

z • ■ - — - ^ - CO  ± CO 

AN  ~ I NSTITUTION  NO  II  (1X1  IS  Ml  NVINOSHIHAIS^S  3 1 H Va  9 I l^L  I B R A R I E S ^SMITHSONIAN  I NSTITI 

,<  ^ — 

^5  h ../  X/.  * ^ hi 

■ ^ s i&f  i %%;■  § If  .1#)  § 


S i'  2 CD 

WSC/)S3  I ava  a n2U  B RAR  I ES^SMITHSONIAN  JNST!TUTION%OlinillSm__NVINOSHiliAIS  S3 1 av 

CO  ' - CO  z „ 2 .XX  . 1,1  ^ 


IAN-*  I NSTITUTION  2 NQlXnilXSNI~JNVINQSHXI!NS  S3  I HVH  8 II  LI  B RAR  f ES  SMITHSONIAN^  IN  ST  IT 
r-  z t-  > z 


00  *o 


CO 


5 ^W*  “ 5 xS®/  “''  5 o 

Z _J  2 _j  2 _J  2 

RARiES  SMITHSONIAN  INSTITUTION  NOlinillSNI  NWIN0SH11WS  S3IHVH8n  LIBRARIES  SMI 

z *“  ^ Z r=  z ___  *z  g 

O y<WO/V>v  O ““  O /TTkVa>\  v^TvASOa7>v  O 


inillSNI  NVINOSHISINS  S3IHVHai1  LIBRARIES  SMITHSONIAN  INSTITUTION  NOlinillSNI  NVI 


C O Z CO 

J RARIES  SMITHSONIAN  INSTITUTION  NOlinillSNI  NVINOSHifWS  S3IUVH0 

CO  X CO  — . CO 


LIBRARIES  SM! 

CO 

^vIso^Tx  fUJ 


linillSNI  NVINQSHIIINS  S3IHVJJ0I1  LIBRARIES  SMITHSONIAN  INSTITUTION  NOlinillSNI  NVI 
r-  v z r-  z r=  z _ «”  \ 


! RARIES  SMITHSONIAN  INSTITUTION  NOlinillSNI  NVIN0SH11INS  S3IUVUSI1  LIBRARIES  SM 


z « 

s X^T.lr<oX  < N- 

— - />Lffi®v;QX  — 

-h  r/5^>\  z 

iSjJSSi  CO  I8SI&.  CO 


CO 


iniiisNi_NViNosHims  saiHvaan  libraries  Smithsonian  institution  NoiinniSNi_Nvi 


" 3 

,J?^c 

/ ' H vw 
O “ ’ O x^osv^i' 

-I  Z _}  Z 

3 RARIES  SMITHSONIAN  INSTITUTION  NOlinillSNI  NVINOSHiltNS  S3IHVH8I1  LIBRARIES  SM 
z ^ z i-  . z ^ z 


rn  m '«#s  NiOmstjx  m 

— to  £ co  X S co 

llinillSNI  NVIN0SH1IIAIS  SBIHVHail  LIBRARIES  SMITHSONIAN  INSTITUTION  NOlinillSNI  NV 

~ “ Z (O  z v*  CO  z 

- 5 , , A,.  S sgvgy  < JS-  S < 

z /^mwK^  -t  /X  z h z -i  . y z 


■/W  ° 

co 
X 

r t 

5 > XiOmsJX  2»  ^ > 

CO  2 CO  *2  C/5  k.  Z CO 

BRARIES  SMITHSONIAN  INSTITUTION  NOlinillSNI  NVINOSHilWS  SBIdVUail  LIBRARIES  SM 

■ f ...  CO  ~ co  — co  — CO 

UJ  /n  xTv^OfyX.  uj  yj  X\tsv/h\  „ XvisovTx  cu 


tuuiism  MViNosmiws  saiavaan  libraries  Smithsonian  institution  NouniiiSNi^NV